Digital Ricoeur - JStor

Search Term: logic

Book Results: 4984

Journal Results: 1986

2 Competing Metaphors of Insurance and Investment from: Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: Privatization promised a policy revolution born in the legitimating discourses of Social Security. In this spirit, advocates of privatization, who made their case through multiple congressional hearings beginning in earnest in the mid-1990s, pressed the logic of the rights claims asserted by the original supporters of Social Security. They, too, saw Social Security benefits as a right secured by a worker’s contributions, but advocates rebuked government control of these contributions as usurping the title to an individual’s property. Since rights rested properly with their bearers, any break in this connection by another party without the full consent of the rights

More than a Bag of Bones: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) COLLIER IVY D.
Abstract: Animal burials have been found throughout the archaeological record dating back to the Neolithic period. The question is, how do we know if those burials are the result of a human–animal bond or if the animals buried are what zooarchaeologists call articulated or associated animal bone groups?

Mourning the Sacrifice: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) MORRIS JAMES
Abstract: The remains of animals, fragments of bone and horn, are often the most common finds recovered from archaeological excavations. The potential of using this material to examine questions of past economics and environment has long been recognized and is viewed by many archaeologists as the primary purpose of animal remains. In part this is due to the paradigm in which zooarchaeology developed and a consequence of practitioners’ concentration on taphonomy and quantification.¹ But the complex intertwined relationships between humans and animals have long been recognized, a good example being Lévi-Strauss’s oft quoted “natural species are chosen, not because they are

Horses, Mourning: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) ARGENT GALA
Abstract: Some 2400 years ago, people belonging to the Iron Age Pazyryk archaeological culture gathered together to lay their dead to rest in burial mounds in the remote Inner Asian Altai Mountains. At these funerals, they sacrificed elaborately costumed riding horses and carefully buried them alongside the deceased (figure 1). While typical burials of this age present only metal and bone for analysis, here the graves subsequently froze in permafrost, preserving wood, leather, fabric, and often the entire bodies of the humans and horses. These unusual burials thus provide an excellent opportunity for exploring the particular connections between these people and

All the World and a Little Bit More: from: Mourning Animals
Author(s) PRĘGOWSKI MICHAŁ PIOTR
Abstract: Burying companion animals had been practiced by humans as early as 16,500 years BP, as recent archeological findings from the Epipaleolithic cemetery of Uyun al-Hammam suggest.¹ During the Early Neolithic (ca. 8000 BP) the burials of dogs who accompanied hunter-gatherers were already common.² Despite having a significant history, mortuary practices related to companion animals gained social significance not so long ago—in the nineteenth century, following industrialization, urbanization, as well as the rise of the middle class. At that time, purebred dogs ceased to dwell mostly in upper-class estates and became a fixture in the confined spaces of European and

Decorum and Rhetorical Interpretation: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I want to begin with an unlikely text, Jonathan Valin’s novel Day of Wrath, a crime novel, in fact a work belonging to that unrefined subgenre known as the “hard-boiled” detective story. The novel’s protagonist and narrator is named Harry Stoner, and the name aptly suggests the qualities of a detective-hero. Stoner, of course, has a hard and tough exterior, but more than that, his name defines a set of psychological traits which set him apart from his environment. He is self-contained, independent, resistant to the corruption that surrounds him, and impervious to social pressure. A rugged individualist and an

Lincoln at Cooper Union: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Author(s) Mohrmann G. P.
Abstract: When Abraham Lincoln spoke at the Cooper Union on the evening of February 27, 1860, his audience responded enthusiastically, and the speech has continued to elicit praise throughout the intervening years. Biographers, historians, and literary scholars agree that it was “one of his most significant speeches,”¹ one that illustrated “his abilities as a reasoner,”² and one to which posterity has ascribed his “subsequent nomination and election to the presidency.”³ Ironically, however, this model of “logical analysis and construction”⁴ has failed to generate a critical response in kind. Most of what has been written treats of the background, and, too often,

Lincoln at Cooper Union: from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Author(s) Mohrmann G. P.
Abstract: The last issue of this journal included our critique of Lincoln’s Cooper Union Address, and we assume that the neo-classical origins of the analysis were apparent, even though methodological concerns were slighted. A more elaborate statement on methodology appeared in an earlier version, but the editors cautioned that the single article did not offer sufficient scope for both an explication of the rationale and its application. Accepting their advice, we deleted most of the theoretical material, but having offered the critique, we want to explore further its theoretical bases.

What Is Rhetoric? from: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I need to begin on two rather different notes—conventionally but sincerely with some words of gratitude and then somewhat unconventionally (and perhaps a bit less sincerely) with an apology. First, I want to express thanks to Tony Blair and his colleagues for their invitation to visit here and their kind hospitality over the past several days. It is real pleasure to meet and talk with members of the Centre for Research in Reasoning, Argumentation and Rhetoric and to make another pilgrimage to this mecca for the study of informal logic. The apology concerns the subject of the lecture and

Neither Dawkins nor Durkheim: from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: The greatest disservice that could be done to Girard would be to claim that he invented his theory from scratch. Girard belongs to the great Franco-German-British tradition of religious anthropology that was brought to a premature halt in 1939 by decades of structuralism and poststructuralism: in particular, the French sociological school, with the works of Numa Denis Fustel de Coulanges, Émile Durkheim, and Marcel Mauss; the British anthropological school, with James Frazer, William Robertson-Smith, and the Belgo-British anthropologist Arthur Hocart; not to forget Friedrich Nietzsche and Sigmund Freud who gave these traditions a new momentum. If Girard’s theory is right,

Sacrifice as a Contested Concept between R. Schwager and R. Girard and Its Significance for lnterreligious Dialogue from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Wandinger Nikolaus
Abstract: The purpose of this article is to sketch the development of the concept of sacrifice in René Girard’s thinking, as it developed especially in discussion with Innsbruck systematic theologian and founder of the School of Dramatic Theology there, Raymund Schwager, to briefly reflect on this development in the light of Bernard Lonergan’s theological method (this will show that we are dealing with “religious conversion” understood in a certain sense), and to make some suggestions as to how this can ground interreligious dialogue and provide it with additional significance.

Girard and Hindu Sacrifice, from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Sheth Noel
Abstract: In his book SacrificeGirard pays special attention to sacrifice in the Brāhmaṇas. Although he deals with it later in his book, let me start, in chronological order, with the Puruṣa-Sūkta (Hymn of the [Cosmic] Person) (RV 10.90), in which creation or emanation takes place through the sacrifi ce, and even dismemberment, of the Cosmic Person.ṣ Girard points out that in the last verse the Cosmic

Religious Sacrifice, Social Scapegoating, and Self-Justification from: Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Peters Ted
Abstract: When the term sacrificeis used to designate practices common to various world religions and used to designate a historical scapegoat at the founding of a social order, are we referring to the same thing? Perhaps not. Th e sacrifi ce of which the Girard school speaks applies to any social order—whether a political order, an ideological organization, a social movement, or such—not merely to an established religious tradition.¹ So, let us pose the question: What is the value of Girardian theory? Is it to illuminate the religious concept of sacrifice or to illuminate human nature in general?

Girard’s Ontological Argument for the Existence of God from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: My main aim in this essay is to show that Girard’s argument for Christ’s divinity hides a variation of the classic ontological argument for the existence of God.¹ In order to do so, it is first important to distinguish three distinct hermeneutical approaches to Girard’s mimetic theory: internal and literal, internal nonliteral,andcritical. If we take an internal and literal approach, we find that Girard writes nothing about the ontological proof. If we take an internal and nonliteral approach to Girard, we can try to deduce what he might have thought about the ontological proof on the basis of

The Self in Crisis from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution

Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from: Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least

Book Title: Intimate Domain-Desire, Trauma, and Mimetic Theory
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Reineke Martha J.
Abstract: For René Girard, human life revolves around mimetic desire, which regularly manifests itself in acquisitive rivalry when we find ourselves wanting an object because another wants it also. Noting that mimetic desire is driven by our sense of inadequacy or insufficiency, Girard arrives at a profound insight: our desire is not fundamentally directed toward the other's object but toward the other's being. We perceive the other to possess a fullness of being we lack. Mimetic desire devolves into violence when our quest after the being of the other remains unfulfilled. So pervasive is mimetic desire that Girard describes it as an ontological illness. In Intimate Domain,Reineke argues that it is necessary to augment Girard's mimetic theory if we are to give a full account of the sickness he describes. Attending to familial dynamics Girard has overlooked and reclaiming aspects of his early theorizing on sensory experience, Reineke utilizes psychoanalytic theory to place Girard's mimetic theory on firmer ground. Drawing on three exemplary narratives-Proust'sIn Search of Lost Time,Sophocles'sAntigone,and Julia Kristeva'sThe Old Man and the Wolves-the author explores familial relationships. Together, these narratives demonstrate that a corporeal hermeneutics founded in psychoanalytic theory can usefully augment Girard's insights, thereby ensuring that mimetic theory remains a definitive resource for all who seek to understand humanity's ontological illness and identify a potential cure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt4qt

CHAPTER 1 The Eyes of a Parricide from: Intimate Domain
Abstract: According to Girard, an exploration of Proust’s In Search of Lost Timeshould not begin with the novel; rather, it should commence with reflection on a newspaper essay by Proust titled “Filial Sentiments of a Parricide.”¹ Girard argues that this essay constitutes a transformative moment for Proust, providing an occasion for him to break through the strictures of metaphysical desire that have mired him in ontological illness. Girard contends that, in the aftermath of writing this essay, Proust is newly able to identify with others in a nonrivalrous way. Further, Girard submits that insights Proust attains from the essay provide

Realism Masking Fear: from: Post-Realism
Author(s) L.Ivie Robert
Abstract: Fear is a feature of human nature that political realists typically factor into their pessimistic view of international affairs. The world as it actually “is,” they assume, consists of nation-states inherently conflicted over competing interests and limited resources, arbitrating their differences and seeking security through the elusive agency of power. Humankind is motivated less by morality and law than by fear and greed, motives which must be managed through the intelligent application of power—not just military power, but economic and ideological might as well. Providing for national security and fulfilling national interests are constant aspirations and tenuous achievements in

CHAPTER 1 Psychological Movement from: The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: To be able to reflect on desire, I propose to give it a definition that seems to me both appropriate and sufficiently broad to allow investigators from a variety of fields to think about it together: desire is psychological movement. In psychology, there is no movement that is not desire, and there is no desire that is not movement.

CHAPTER 2 The Creation and the Fall from: The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: I would like to propose the hypothesis that the text of Genesis and the idea of “original sin” interpret through metaphor the birth of psychological man, that is, of humanity, of the couple, and of desire. In connection with this, I also propose to show that this birth of psychological man, like that of social man, is brought about by purely mimetic mechanisms.

6 The Essential Palestinian from: Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: In chapter 4, we described the movement of the Palestinian people from a symbol system based to varying degrees on Arab, Islamic, and nationalist impulses toward a Palestinian Arab identity and movement rooted in myth. By 1937, the Palestinians had developed a symbol system that was based on ideological and mythic foundations that collapsed the scene (Palestine) and the agent (the Palestinian Arabs) into a consubstantiation. In this chapter, we examine the trajectory of Palestinian symbol use from the 1940s to 1960s.

9 Symbolic Stagnation and Ideological Calcification in Israel from: Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: The roughly fifteen-year period from Begin’s resignation as prime minister to the election of Benjamin Netanyahu can best be understood as a period of symbolic stagnation. The symbolic equation that had been established in the late 1970s and early 1980s remained firmly in place. Labor’s perspective, especially as enunciated by Shimon Peres, reduced itself to ungrounded pragmatism, what might be called a “Let’s Make a Deal” approach, in which there was no firm ideological principle to guide action. The absence of a grounded perspective on security created a symbolic weakness that became especially obvious in the aftermath of terrorist incidents.

2 Praising Technology: from: Christianity and the Mass Media in America
Abstract: In 1995 Americans witnessed a remarkable technological feat as the Hubble space telescope captured images of the planet Mars and broadcast them via satellites and cable to viewers around the world. As the photographs were shown on television and printed in newspapers, journalists began reporting that Americans saw meaningful images in them—like the interpretations of inkblot designs. ʺPictures taken by the … telescope have created a phenomenon of sorts,ʺ said CNN television news anchor Lou Waters, ʺwith folks calling in, saying that they see something in these pictures that perhaps others of us do not see. Maybe itʹs becoming

Book Title: For René Girard-Essays in Friendship and in Truth
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Williams James G.
Abstract: In his explorations of the relations between the sacred and violence, René Girard has hit upon the origin of culture-the way culture began, the way it continues to organize itself. The way communities of human beings structure themselves in a manner that is different from that of other species on the planet.Like Albert Einstein, Sigmund Freud, Émile Durkheim, Martin Buber, or others who have changed the way we think in the humanities or in the human sciences, Girard has put forth a set of ideas that have altered our perceptions of the world in which we function. We will never be able to think the same way again about mimetic desire, about the scapegoat mechanism, and about the role of Jewish and Christian scripture in explaining sacrifice, violence, and the crises from which our culture has been born.The contributions fall into roughly four areas of interpretive work: religion and religious study; literary study; the philosophy of social science; and psychological studies.The essays presented here are offered as "essays" in the older French sense of attempts (essayer) or trials of ideas, as indeed Girard has tried out ideas with us. With a conscious echo of Montaigne, then, this hommage volume is titled Essays in Friendship and in Truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt8fr

A Phenomenology of Redemption? from: For René Girard
Author(s) Daly Robert J.
Abstract: Not unlike many of the colleagues I meet at the annual meetings of the Colloquium on Violence and Religion, I came late to the study of René Girard and mimetic theory. For me it began in the late 1970s, during my first sabbatical away from Boston College. I was settling in with my Jesuit colleagues at Sankt Georgen, the Jesuit theological seminary and research institute in Frankfurt, Germany. The two books on Christian sacrifice that were based on my Würzburg dissertation and established my scholarly reputation were about to appear.¹ I had been awarded tenure and had already served the

Girard, Buddhism, and the Psychology of Desire from: For René Girard
Author(s) Webb Eugene
Abstract: I have been asked to contribute a brief discussion of René Girard’s psychological thought, with some reference to the ways it has contributed to my work in my own areas of interest. My last published volume was a study of French psychological thought that focused extensively on Girard and tried to place him in the context of the Freudian influence in France from the time of Jacques Lacan.¹ Since then I have continued to be interested in the ways in which psychological development may influence or be influenced by patterns of religious thinking. My academic career has spanned several fields,

Book Title: Nosotros-A Study of Everyday Meanings in Hispano New Mexico
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): KORTE ALVIN O.
Abstract: Much knowledge and understanding can be generated from the experiences of everyday life. In this engaging study, Alvin O. Korte examines how this concept applies to Spanish-speaking peoples adapted to a particular locale, specifically the Hispanos and Hispanas of northern New Mexico. Drawing on social philosopher Alfred Schutz's theory of typification, Korte looks at how meaning and identity are crafted by quotidian activities. Incorporating phenomenological and ethnomethodological strategies, the author investigates several aspects of local Hispano culture, including the oral tradition, leave-taking, death and remembrances of the dead, spirituality, and the circle of life. Although avoiding a social-problems approach, the book devotes necessary attention to mortificación(the death of the self),desmadre(chaos and disorder), andmancornando(cuckoldry).Nosotrosis a vivid and insightful exploration with applications in numerous fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7ztb3t

CHAPTER 2 The Oral Tradition: from: Nosotros
Abstract: Language is the major means by which people express their everyday needs or explicate significant thoughts and feelings about the world of social relations. Naturally no study of Hispanos would be complete without considering their oral tradition. Although this chapter covers components of a phenomenological or ethnomethodological stance, strictly speaking some of the material here does not rise to either a phenomenological or ethnomethodological study. The oral tradition of Hispanos is about the use of language and creating meaning, and in this respect the oral tradition contributes significantly.

CHAPTER 8 Curse and Disorder: from: Nosotros
Abstract: This chapter takes the word desmadreas used in everyday life and subjects it to a descriptive analysis. To conduct a phenomenological analysis is to bracket what we think we know about an experience. More important, it is to “study . . . the structures that govern the instances of particular manifestations of the essence of that phenomenon. Phenomenology is the systematic attempt to uncover and describe the structures, the internal meaning structures of lived experience” (van Manen 1990, 10). In a book on the argot of the California prisons, Patricia Gutiérrez (n.d.) calleddesmadre“disorder.” This chapter is concerned

CHAPTER 13 Final Thoughts: from: Nosotros
Abstract: There are several goals in this chapter. One goal is to cover some of the main findings by linking them back to some basic ideas from phenomenology. Another goal is to connect some of what has been uncovered in the previous chapters to the work of others. In the latter part of the chapter some consideration is given to applications in mental health. For example, it is noted that bracketing from phenomenological philosophy finds applications in mental health work, particularly in the study of empathy. Specifically we note that empathy is used by Husserl to understand the consciousness of another

TWO Thalassology alla Turca: from: The Red Sea
Abstract: AS A MODERN FIELD OF study, Ottoman historiography is unusual, primarily because of its ambivalent relation to that hegemon of hyper-reality, Europe—finding and placing itself both within and without. For much of its existence, the Ottoman Empire was dominated (demographically, economically, politically, ideologically) by its provinces in regions considered now geographically as part of Europe. This is something Ottoman authors oft en remarked upon when discussing the divisions of European geography, which the Well-Protected Domains straddled.

FOUR The Scientific Invention of the Red Sea from: The Red Sea
Abstract: THE RED SEA WAS CAPTURED textually before any of its shores were subjected to enduring colonial control, though this was executed in the context of a rapidly expanding British dominance over the region in particular, and the globe more largely. Just as the Crown’s navy was gaining greater and greater control of the Indian Ocean, so too did it seek to reinforce its position in the Mediterranean.¹ It was only logical for the connecting Red Sea to be appropriated as well.

FIVE Thalassomania: from: The Red Sea
Abstract: FROM THE POINT OF VIEW of modern geography, the world appears clear and simple. This is somewhat paradoxical, since one of the special qualities of modernity is deemed to be complexity (complex societies, complex personality, complex logic, and so forth). But with the advent of modern geography, every schoolchild should know that the world is divided into a set number of landmasses and seas: there are seven continents, just as there are five oceans, and a set number of seas, all made up of salt water, some completely bounded, others almost so.

SEVEN The Newer Musicology? from: The Thought of Music
Abstract: The vicissitudes of authorship revisited in chapter 6 point to a larger issue. Since around 2000 there has been a lot of musicological effort lavished on the “workconcept” and the competing claims of the fixed, authoritative musical work and the creative act of performance, mostly to the detriment of the work. Like most such binary quarrels, this one reveals a little and obscures a lot. It certainly oversimplifies the historical situation, which is full of complex instances in which the roles of the work—as inscription, conception, or instruction—and of performance—as animation, interpretation, or reproduction—meet, mix, and

Paideuma from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FROBENIUS LEO
Abstract: One of the first Westerners to recognize the actual achievement of traditional African art, Frobenius (1873–1938) spent many years in Africa, gathered and translated African oral traditions, and founded the Institute for Cultural Morphology in Frankfurt as a repository for (largely facsimiles of) prehistoric and African paintings and engravings. He was, in anthropological terms, a leading German diffusionist who advocated a complex, multifactorial approach to the analysis of cultural transmission, but in British and American anthropology, for example, his reputation is by now minimal. At the same time, he has profoundly influenced at least two major and largely unrelated

The Meaning of Meaningless Words and the Coefficient of Weirdness from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MALINOWSKI BRONISLAW
Abstract: Malinowski lays down one major line of British functionalism, as A. R. Radcliffe-Brown lays down the other (structural-functionalism). But if Radcliffe-Brownʹs version has the greater theoretical carry-over at present, Malinowski has set a model for anthropological fieldwork and its attendant theory and has had an extraordinary impact as a teacher of later anthropologists and on a range of Western and Third World thought outside of anthropology itself. His principal writings in this regard come out of his extended work in the Trobriands and other islands off the southeast tip of New Guinea (1912–1916), and include such books as Argonauts

Some North Pacific Coast Poems: from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HYMES DELL
Abstract: As a major anthropological linguist, Hymesʹs early and ongoing contribution to an ethnopoetics has been a practical ʺstructuralismʺ that attempts to examine and represent ʺways in which narratives [or, as here, songs] are organizations of linguistic meansʺ—a work he has pursued not by ʺleaping to universalsʺ but by ʺthe development of theories adequate and specific to each tradition.ʺ Beginning with the present essay—a criticism and virtual ʺdeconstructionʺ of earlier translation work—Hymes later focused on the performative side of traditional oral poetry (i.e., on its ʺrealization in performanceʺ) in ways akin to the proposals and practice of Dennis

The Birth of Loba from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DI PRIMA DIANE
Abstract: The work of Diane di Prima—poetry, theater, autobiography—relates not only to European but to non-Western folklore and mythology: her anthology, Various Fables from Various Places;her projected worldwide gathering on ʺthe goddessʺ; her early staging of new ritual performances; and her long-running auto-mythological poem, Loba,to which the present lecture excerpt refers. The selection given here can be read in relation to the two preceding sections on Coyote, or to the Ainu version of the wolf goddess (see above, p. 156), or to the various discussions herein on the suppression and reemergence of the goddess figure (p. 36,

The Death of Sedna from: Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) CARPENTER EDMUND
Abstract: Edmund Carpenterʹs field studies and media experiments range from the Canadian Arctic and Siberia to Southeast Asia, Borneo, and New Guinea. His early collaboration with Marshall McLuhan gave the latter his principal link to areas of anthropological concern. A significant part of Carpenterʹs own work involves the impact of the new technology and its resultant monoculture on the worldʹs surviving software cultures. Principal works:Eskimo Realities, They Became What They Beheld, Explorations in Communication(ed., with Marhsall McLuhan), andOh, What a Blow that Phantom Gave Me!

Introduction: from: The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: A concern with time is intrinsic to the internal logic of modernity. “More than anything else,” Zygmunt Bauman writes, modernity is the “history of time: the time when time has history” (“Time and Space Reunited,” 172). Radically breaking with the authority and legitimacy of the past, modernity offers a totalizing vision of progress toward an illimitable future.¹ Its universal narrative of irrepressible global development presupposes a uniform scale of spatial and temporal measurement. In this context the legislative creation of world standard time at the International Prime Meridian Conference of 1884 stands as a signal moment in the history of

CHAPTER 4 “The Shortcomings of Timetables”: from: The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: In chapter 3 I described how Bram Stoker’s Draculaenlisted global standard time both at the level of plot, with Mina Harker’s and the Count’s competing mastery of timetables, and also as a principle of narrative structure, with discrepant time lines from various media synchronized into a uniform typewritten narrative. For Stoker standard time served a double function: it preserved England’s ontological purity by excising the temporally untranslatable, and it provided a model for a total narrative, able to assimilate various classes, nations, and dialects (spoken by the multinational vampire hunters) as well as various media. Modernist texts attack standard

Book Title: Postcolonial Disorders- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Good Byron J.
Abstract: The essays in this volume reflect on the nature of subjectivity in the diverse places where anthropologists work at the beginning of the twenty-first century. Contributors explore everyday modes of social and psychological experience, the constitution of the subject, and forms of subjection that shape the lives of Basque youth, Indonesian artists, members of nongovernmental HIV/AIDS programs in China and the Republic of Congo, psychiatrists and the mentally ill in Morocco and Ireland, and persons who have suffered trauma or been displaced by violence in the Middle East and in South and Southeast Asia. Painting on book jacket by Entang Wiharso
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn9nx

POSTCOLONIAL DISORDERS: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pinto Sarah
Abstract: This book is a collection of essays reflecting on the nature of subjectivity—on everyday modes of experience, the social and psychological dimensions of individual lives, the psychological qualities of social life, the constitution of the subject, and forms of subjection found in the diverse places where anthropologists work at the beginning of the twenty-first century. The essays are a conscious effort to find new ways to link the social and the psychological, to examine how lives of individuals, families and communities are affected by large-scale political and economic forces associated with globalization, and to theorize subjectivity within this larger

5 LABORATORY OF INTERVENTION: from: Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pandolfi Mariella
Abstract: Since the end of the colonial era, many of the territories where anthropologists have worked have been witness to an increasingly visible “humanitarian presence.” The massive army of volunteer workers, international experts, local staff, and soldiers associated with humanitarian intervention has had a remarkable impact on local cultural landscapes. Despite the increasing proliferation of these zones of humanitarian and military intervention, anthropologists are only beginning to examine the theoretical and practical consequences of these new forms of intervention. Intervention studies present a perilous but necessary challenge to the anthropological community. They force us to consider both new sites of intervention

6 History from: Interpreting Music
Abstract: This chapter proposes that music, asmusic, is a source of historical knowledge. The tautological “as,” discussed in chapter 4, serves here in italics as the mark of a necessary alterity and exteriority: musicasmusic is music as historically mediated, musicin its immediacyas a repository (archive, legacy, ruin, simulacrum) of historical experience. As such, musicasmusic should be a means of understanding, not just an object of it. It should cease to be a silent (a silenced) partner in humanistic studies.

[PART TWO Introduction] from: Reason to Believe
Abstract: The question of whether people can decide to believe not only affects our understanding of Evangelicalism and empowerment in Latin America; it runs through the center of contemporary sociological research on culture and religion. In the past twenty-five years approaches that portray people as strategic actors who consciously choose their meanings have reinvigorated the sociology of culture and religion after the decline of the modernization and secularization theories of the 1950s and 1960s. However, these approaches are increasingly being criticized as reductionist, incoherent, or incomplete by scholars who recommend a return to emphases on religion and culture as autonomous symbolic

Book Title: Between One and One Another- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Jackson Michael
Abstract: Michael Jackson extends his path-breaking work in existential anthropology by focusing on the interplay between two modes of human existence: that of participating in other peoples’ lives and that of turning inward to one’s self. Grounding his discussion in the subtle shifts between being acted upon and taking action, Jackson shows how the historical complexities and particularities found in human interactions reveal the dilemmas, conflicts, cares, and concerns that shape all of our lives. Through portraits of individuals encountered in the course of his travels, including friends and family, and anthropological fieldwork pursued over many years in such places as Sierra Leone and Australia, Jackson explores variations on this theme. As he describes the ways we address and negotiate the vexed relationships between “I” and “we”—the one and the many—he is also led to consider the place of thought in human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnphx

CHAPTER 5 How Much Home Does a Person Need? from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: At the heart of contemporary anthropology lies a dilemma: How can we do justice to what is at stake for people in their “local moral worlds”¹ and at the same timestrive to broaden our analytical horizons to encompass the general and global conditions of human life on earth? This dilemma is at once methodological and empirical. As Michael Herzfeld has shown,² the discursive tension between a localizing ethnographic gaze and a generalizing theoretical perspective echoes the social and political tensions between societies at the margins of the modern nation-state and the centralized, bureaucratized structures of the state. Moreover, there

CHAPTER 13 On the Work and Writing of Ethnography from: Between One and One Another
Abstract: Having explored several variations on the theme of human existence as a continual interplay between the hypothetical poles of being-in-oneself and being-with-others, it is only appropriate that I should consider in this closing chapter the methodological ramifications of this theme in the work and writing of ethnography.

4 Anthropological Observation and Self-Formation from: Subjectivity
Author(s) RABINOW PAUL
Abstract: The recent past has seen a number of relatively new forms of anthropological practice emerging; others most certainly will be invented in the near future. Among the current approaches is one that I have been experimenting with, an approach that privileges extensive interviewing with a distinctive group of actors, within a restricted field setting. The challenge of this undertaking is to determine what form to give the material that results. As a form of inquiry that is site restricted and dependent on directed interviews and problematized narratives, the approach can be contrasted to the more traditional ethnographic practice of broad-ranging

[PART II Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: In ″Hamlet in Purgatory,″ literary scholar Stephen Greenblatt challenges Freud′s privileging of Oedipus as the modern representative of psychological interiority. Greenblatt maintains that Shakespeare′s Hamlet is the one who does this work (chapter 5 in this volume). ″Remember me″ is the haunting demand of the dead father to Prince Hamlet. Following Goethe′s lead in seeing the prince as more of a neurotic than a hero, Greenblatt tests Jacques Lacan′s idea that the subject is the doing of the phantasm (1979) by actually traversing Hamlet′s ghost in history, so to speak. ″Something have you heard of Hamlet′s transformation: so I call

7 Violence and the Politics of Remorse: from: Subjectivity
Author(s) SCHEPER-HUGHES NANCY
Abstract: This chapter does not pretend to offer an anthropological theory of remorse, a field that does not exist and that I have no intention of inventing here.¹ Anthropologists′ lack of attention to remorse either suggests an appalling oversight or alerts us to the Western and modernist nature of concepts. Although anthropological references to vengeance, blood feuds, countersorcery, and witch hunts are many, ethnographic descriptions of individual or collective rituals of remorse and reparation are few indeed.

[PART III Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: Madness or psychotic illness fundamentally challenges local understandings of human nature, as well as the theorization of subjectivity. Societies and individuals understand madness in various ways: as possession by haunting spirits, a flight from reason, a regression to childlike or primitive states, an essential mode of being in the world and a distinctive form of human subjectivity, the entry into an alternative world, or a mode of deeply disturbed and pathological subjectivity reflecting disordered brain chemistry. Whatever the interpretation, the chaotic and disturbing qualities of psychosis are deeply threatening to those undergoing the experience as well as to their families

[PART IV Introduction] from: Subjectivity
Abstract: Science and technology are integral to the definition of reality and to the restructuring of power relations and bodily experience. In The Human Condition, Hannah Arendt argues that in the course of the twentieth century, political action has increasingly focused on the control of natural life and on the fabrication of automatons.¹ Thehomo fabergave way to thehomo laborans—that is, people became ever more involved in mass production and were most concerned with physiological existence. Scientific practices have been central to this transformation. Arendt argues that the experimental process that came to define the natural sciences—″the

Book Title: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men-Sanskrit, Culture, and Power in Premodern India
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Pollock Sheldon
Abstract: In this work of impressive scholarship, Sheldon Pollock explores the remarkable rise and fall of Sanskrit, India's ancient language, as a vehicle of poetry and polity. He traces the two great moments of its transformation: the first around the beginning of the Common Era, when Sanskrit, long a sacred language, was reinvented as a code for literary and political expression, the start of an amazing career that saw Sanskrit literary culture spread from Afghanistan to Java. The second moment occurred around the beginning of the second millennium, when local speech forms challenged and eventually replaced Sanskrit in both the literary and political arenas. Drawing striking parallels, chronologically as well as structurally, with the rise of Latin literature and the Roman empire, and with the new vernacular literatures and nation-states of late-medieval Europe, The Language of the Gods in the World of Menasks whether these very different histories challenge current theories of culture and power and suggest new possibilities for practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnqs7

CHAPTER FOUR Sanskrit Culture as Courtly Practice from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: The spread of a widely shared, largely uniform cosmopolitan style of Sanskrit inscriptional discourse would have been impossible without an equally vast circulation of the great kāvyaexemplars of that style, accompanied by the philological instruments without which the very existence of such texts was unthinkable. The magnitude of the space through which Sanskritkāvyacirculated can be suggested by a few simple observations. The two great foundational texts of cosmopolitan Sanskrit culture, theMahābhārataandRāmāyaṇa, came to represent the basic common property of literary culture across southern Asia. The role of theMahābhārataspecifically in shaping the image

CHAPTER SIX Political Formations and Cultural Ethos from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Our exploration of the complex relationship between literature and space began with a legendary account of the origin of Sanskrit literature and a literary-theoretical discourse on Sanskrit styles and their regional dimensions. Both perspectives are conditioned by a conceptual matrix fundamental to Sanskrit thought for ordering and explaining the diverse phenomena of culture and society as elements in a transregional network closely related to Sanskrit’s own nonlocalized mode of existence. But there are other, literary linkages between literature and space. Narrative has an internal spatial logic, a “semiotic domain around which a plot coalesces and self-organizes,” as one scholar puts

CHAPTER NINE Creating a Regional World: from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Few local literary cultures of premodernity anywhere permit us to follow the history and reconstruct the meanings of vernacularization with quite the same precision as is possible for Kannada, the language of what is now the southern union state of Karnataka. We can chart the shifts in cosmopolitan and vernacular cultural production without interruption from about the fifth century on, based on texts that are for the most part securely datable—an almost unparalleled antiquity and chronological transparency. Much of the data is the hard evidence of epigraphs, and their quantity is breathtaking. The region must be one of the

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Actually Existing Theory and Its Discontents from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: If the passing of the so-called master narratives that have shaped modern ways of knowing the world—accounts based on belief in the progress of scientific reason, for example, or human emancipation—is partly a result of discontent with their apparent claims to a monopoly on truth or their rigid laws of developmentalism, there is no little irony in the fact that they are being replaced, in some instances, by what might be called cultural naturalism as the explanatory model of change in the history of culture and power. To be sure, theories linking cultural change and biological evolution have

Epilogue. from: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Few things seem as natural as the multiplicity of vernacular languages used for making sense of life through texts—that is, for making literature. And few things seem as unnatural as their gradual disappearance in the present, especially from the pressures exerted by globalizing English. Literary-language loss is in fact often viewed as part of a more general reduction of diversity in a cultural ecosystem, a loss considered as dangerous as the reduction of biological diversity, to which—in another instance of cultural naturalization—it is often compared. Today’s homogenization of culture, of which language loss is one aspect, seems

Book Title: Imagining Karma-Ethical Transformation in Amerindian, Buddhist, and Greek Rebirth
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): OBEYESEKERE GANANATH
Abstract: With Imagining Karma,Gananath Obeyesekere embarks on the very first comparison of rebirth concepts across a wide range of cultures. Exploring in rich detail the beliefs of small-scale societies of West Africa, Melanesia, traditional Siberia, Canada, and the northwest coast of North America, Obeyesekere compares their ideas with those of the ancient and modern Indic civilizations and with the Greek rebirth theories of Pythagoras, Empedocles, Pindar, and Plato. His groundbreaking and authoritative discussion decenters the popular notion that India was the origin and locus of ideas of rebirth. As Obeyesekere compares responses to the most fundamental questions of human existence, he challenges readers to reexamine accepted ideas about death, cosmology, morality, and eschatology. Obeyesekere's comprehensive inquiry shows that diverse societies have come through independent invention or borrowing to believe in reincarnation as an integral part of their larger cosmological systems. The author brings together into a coherent methodological framework the thought of such diverse thinkers as Weber, Wittgenstein, and Nietzsche. In a contemporary intellectual context that celebrates difference and cultural relativism, this book makes a case for disciplined comparison, a humane view of human nature, and a theoretical understanding of "family resemblances" and differences across great cultural divides.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pns1h

Book Title: Carnal Thoughts-Embodiment and Moving Image Culture
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Sobchack Vivian
Abstract: In these innovative essays, Vivian Sobchack considers the key role our bodies play in making sense of today's image-saturated culture. Emphasizing our corporeal rather than our intellectual engagements with film and other media, Carnal Thoughtsshows how our experience always emerges through our senses and how our bodies are not just visible objects but also sense-making, visual subjects. Sobchack draws on both phenomenological philosophy and a broad range of popular sources to explore bodily experience in contemporary, moving-image culture. She examines how, through the conflation of cinema and surgery, we've all "had our eyes done"; why we are "moved" by the movies; and the different ways in which we inhabit photographic, cinematic, and electronic space.Carnal Thoughtsprovides a lively and engaging challenge to the mind/body split by demonstrating that the process of "making sense" requires an irreducible collaboration between our thoughts and our senses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnx76

1 Breadcrumbs in the Forest: from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: When I was a child, I always thought north was the way I was facing. Sure then in my purposeful direction, there was a compelling logic to this phenomenological assumption. Bringing into convergence flesh and sign, north conflated in my child’s consciousness the design of my body

5 “Susie Scribbles”: from: Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: The following phenomenological meditations on the carnal activity of writing were provoked by an electronic doll. A contemporary version of eighteenth-century anthropomorphic writing automata, “Susie Scribbles” appeared on the shelves of Toys R Us quite a number of Christmases ago and sold for $119. Unable to resist, I bought her. Susie and the peculiarities of her existence raised significant questions about writing bodies and writing technologies—not only because her automaton’s instrumentalism interrogated what writing is and how it is accomplished but also because the form in which this instrumentalism was embodied interrogated what is—or is not—“human” about

Book Title: After the Massacre-Commemoration and Consolation in Ha My and My Lai
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Faust Drew
Abstract: Though a generation has passed since the massacre of civilians at My Lai, the legacy of this tragedy continues to reverberate throughout Vietnam and the rest of the world. This engrossing study considers how Vietnamese villagers in My Lai and Ha My-a village where South Korean troops committed an equally appalling, though less well-known, massacre of unarmed civilians-assimilate the catastrophe of these mass deaths into their everyday ritual life. Based on a detailed study of local history and moral practices, After the Massacrefocuses on the particular context of domestic life in which the Vietnamese villagers interact with their ancestors on one hand and the ghosts of tragic death on the other. Heonik Kwon explains what intimate ritual actions can tell us about the history of mass violence and the global bipolar politics that caused it. He highlights the aesthetics of Vietnamese commemorative rituals and the morality of their practical actions to liberate the spirits from their grievous history of death. The author brings these important practices into a critical dialogue with dominant sociological theories of death and symbolic transformation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnztv

CHAPTER 1 The Bipolarity of Death from: After the Massacre
Abstract: Dead people, in popular Vietnamese culture, can be powerfully sentient and salient beings who entertain emotions, intentions, and historical awareness. The ethnological literature about their mortuary customs and religious imaginations confirms this. Remembering ancestors means, in Vietnam, according to Le Van Dinh, relating to them “as if they were alive.”¹ A French Jesuit missionary to Vietnam and author of classical studies on Vietnamese popular religions, Léopold Cadière, wrote that the Vietnamese perception of the world incorporates the awareness that the life of the dead is intertwined with that of the living, and that the Vietnamese idealize a harmonious relationship between

CHAPTER 5 Heroes and Ancestors from: After the Massacre
Abstract: Ancestors and ghosts are not the only categories of death found in Vietnamese domestic ritual space. In traditional times, these two categories might have been sufficient for conceptually organizing the cosmological mirror of the living world. The rise of the modern nation-state, however, has added a novel category of death to the traditional cosmology of death. Called liet siin Vietnamese, it refers to the heroic death of fallen soldiers who sacrificed their lives for the sacred purpose of protecting the nation. Historians suggest that the institutionalized commemoration of this category constitutes the core of “modern national memory.”¹ In western

Chapter 1 “Trifles of Jewish Music” from: Jewish Identities
Abstract: In a 1924 article Russian Soviet musicologist Leonid Sabaneyev (1881–1968) announced that through the work of a group of Jewish composers Jewish music was approaching the phase Sabaneyev called “its artistic expansion.”¹ Sabaneyev’s account of the birth of Jewish art music reflected art publicist Vladimir Stasov’s version of the development of Russian musical nationalism. Lest there be any doubt about this connection, the prophecy with which Sabaneyev closed his article demonstrated the strong effect of Russian national music on Jewish aspirations. Stasov shaped and propagated most effectively the Russian national ideals as the ideological basis for the moguchaya kuchka

2 Changing Assumptions in Later Renaissance Culture from: A Usable Past
Abstract: The familiar notion of a “later” Renaissance immediately presents itself as an innocent effort at chronological arrangement, as a convenience for determining relationships in time. But of course it is much more. It calls upon us to distinguish the differing characteristics of successive moments, to trace a process of development from inception to maturity and possibly on to decline; and it introduces the complicated problem of the relations between Italy and the Northern Renaissance.¹ It is thus closely connected with one of the most fruitful tendencies in all aspects of modern Renaissance scholarship: the effort to distinguish stages in a

INTRODUCTION from: The Maternal Factor
Abstract: I will not argue that an ethic of care evolves in a blindly biological way. Thinking, experimenting, reflecting, analyzing, and conceptualizing are all involved in developing an ethic. As Virginia Held has argued, when we consider naturalizing morality, we

FIVE The Obligation to Receive: from: Being There
Author(s) Coleman Leo
Abstract: From this basis we anthropologists speak of deep, participatory, long-term collaborations with our research interlocutors as both an epistemological and ethical warrant for our work (the choice of “interlocutor” itself, over “informant,”

Book Title: Gatekeepers of the Arab Past-Historians and History Writing in Twentieth-Century Egypt
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Di-Capua Yoav
Abstract: This groundbreaking study illuminates the Egyptian experience of modernity by critically analyzing the foremost medium through which it was articulated: history. The first comprehensive analysis of a Middle Eastern intellectual tradition, Gatekeepers of the Pastexamines a system of knowledge that replaced the intellectual and methodological conventions of Islamic historiography only at the very end of the nineteenth century. Covering more than one hundred years of mostly unexamined historucal literature in Arabic, Yoav Di-Capua explores Egyptian historical thought, examines the careers of numerous critical historians, and traces this tradition's uneasy relationship with colonial forms of knowledge as well as with the post-colonial state.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppj3r

CHAPTER 1 Creole Island or Little India? from: Little India
Abstract: Reflecting on the spread of nationalism in the colonial world, Partha Chatterjee, in The Nation and Its Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories, asks whether the worldwide spread of the nation form has condemned postcolonial societies to follow “derivative” models of political organization and identification. Engaging with Benedict Anderson’s thesis of the modularity of nationalism (Anderson 1991, 4, 87), Chatterjee suggests that postcolonial nationhood does indeed stand in a quasi-dialogic relationship with European models of nationality, yet it nevertheless exhibits irreducible difference from them, since it is crucially shaped by the conditions of the colonial encounter (Chatterjee 1993). Since ethnolinguistic nationalism

Conclusion: from: Little India
Abstract: In this book I have sought to account for the emergence of diaspora in practical, phenomenological, and ideological terms by analyzing how a sense of being in diaspora is produced by language and its uses among Hindus in Mauritius. In this, I have focused on the indexical and iconic values of linguistic practices whose deployment in everyday social interaction and metapragmatic discourse results in ethnolinguistic forms of belonging pointing to a diasporic homeland. To be meaningful, these practices depend on a whole range of other linguistic practices and valuations among Hindu Mauritians that are not immediately concerned with issues of

Book Title: Tales of the Neighborhood-Jewish Narrative Dialogues in Late Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Hasan-Rokem Galit
Abstract: In this lively and intellectually engaging book, Galit Hasan-Rokem shows that religion is shaped not only in the halls of theological disputation and institutions of divine study, but also in ordinary events of everyday life. Common aspects of human relations offer a major source for the symbols of religious texts and rituals of late antique Judaism as well as its partner in narrative dialogues, early Christianity, Hasan-Rokem argues. Focusing on the "neighborhood" of the Galilee that is the birthplace of many major religious and cultural developments, this book brings to life the riddles, parables, and folktales passed down in Rabbinic stories from the first half of the first millennium of the Common Era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pppfc

Book Title: Reconfiguring Modernity-Concepts of Nature in Japanese Political Ideology
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Thomas Julia Adeney
Abstract: Julia Adeney Thomas turns the concept of nature into a powerful analytical lens through which to view Japanese modernity, bringing the study of both Japanese history and political modernity to a new level of clarity. She shows that nature necessarily functions as a political concept and that changing ideas of nature's political authority were central during Japan's transformation from a semifeudal world to an industrializing colonial empire. In political documents from the nineteenth to the early twentieth century, nature was redefined, moving from the universal, spatial concept of the Tokugawa period, through temporal, social Darwinian ideas of inevitable progress and competitive struggle, to a celebration of Japan as a nation uniquely in harmony with nature. The so-called traditional "Japanese love of nature" masks modern state power. Thomas's theoretically sophisticated study rejects the supposition that modernity is the ideological antithesis of nature, overcoming the determinism of the physical environment through technology and liberating denatured subjects from the chains of biology and tradition. In making "nature" available as a critical term for political analysis, this book yields new insights into prewar Japan's failure to achieve liberal democracy, as well as an alternative means of understanding modernity and the position of non-Western nations within it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppt3b

CHAPTER 9 Conclusion: from: Reconfiguring Modernity
Abstract: In the first chapter, I posed two possible relationships between nature and modernity: one antithetical, the other cosmopological. It is now time to review these models and to ask how foregrounding the concept of nature has provided an alternative perspective on Japan’s place in what Maruyama, Weber, and so many others recognized as the problematic universal history of modernity.¹

Book Title: Studying Global Pentecostalism-Theories and Methods
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): van der Laan Cornelis
Abstract: With its remarkable ability to adapt to many different cultures, Pentecostalism has become the world’s fastest growing religious movement. More than five hundred million adherents worldwide have reshaped Christianity itself. Yet some fundamental questions in the study of global Pentecostalism, and even in what we call “Pentecostalism,” remain largely unaddressed. Bringing together leading scholars in the social sciences, history, and theology, this unique volume explores these questions for this rapidly growing, multidisciplinary field of study. A valuable resource for anyone studying new forms of Christianity, it offers insights and guidance on both theoretical and methodological issues. The first section of the book examines such topics as definitions, essentialism, postcolonialism, gender, conversion, and globalization. The second section features contributions from those working in psychology, anthropology, sociology, and history. The third section traces the boundaries of theology from the perspectives of pneumatology, ecumenical studies, inter-religious relations, and empirical theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppt8r

3 The Cultural Turn from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Bergunder Michael
Abstract: “Cultural studies” and similar designations mark a diverse field of related theoretical approaches, sometimes labeled “cultural turn,” that have deeply influenced the humanities and social sciences in the past three decades.¹ In general, studies on Pentecostal and Charismatic movements have not taken up these approaches in their research design, despite notable exceptions² and occasional reference in anthropological studies,³ as well as in reflections by Pentecostal and Charismatic theologians themselves.⁴ Nevertheless, it is worth taking a closer look at these approaches, because some of the pressing issues in the current research on Pentecostalism are reflected therein.

5 Conversion Narratives from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Gooren Henri
Abstract: The emphasis in this chapter is on howpeople tell the story of their conversion. I follow a historical and phenomenological approach to the conversion narrative, analyzing it as a social construction and not necessarily as a factual description of the main events in an individual’s life. A comprehensive conversion experience changes one’s self-image. This transformation, which is a process taking longer than just one day or one week, is gradually reflected in the most important indicator of conversion:biographical reconstruction.¹ People who undergo a conversion experience literally reconstruct their lives, giving new meanings to old events and putting different

6 Pentecostalism and Globalization from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Meyer Birgit
Abstract: The title of this chapter couples two big terms around each of which a huge scholarly field has evolved over the past two decades. In brief, the concept of globalization signals a departure from the metanarrative of modernization, according to which ‘development’ would eventually render the second (socialist) and third worlds more or less similar to the first world, the modern West.¹ Globalization, with its vocabulary of flux and mix, diversity, fragmentation, multiple identities, postmodernity, and hybridity, registers a growing skepticism vis-á-vis such teleological narratives. Pertaining to the intensified encroachment of capitalism on the everyday lives of people all over

7 Psychology of Religion from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Huber Odilo W.
Abstract: The psychology of religion investigates religious beliefs, experiences, and behavior in relation to psychological concepts and theories. It analyzes the psychological representation and functioning of religious content in the individual. This perspective is useful for revealing and describing aspects of religion that may not be captured otherwise, but obviously it is only one of a universe of perspectives that may be taken with respect to religion, each contributing in a different way to the investigation of the field—but, concurrently, each perspective submitted to specific restrictions.

9 Sociology of Religion from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Hunt Stephen
Abstract: In the mid-1960s David Martin furthered the view that the prevailing sociological concept of secularization regrettably carried a strong ideological dimension—that religion was inevitably on the decline and, moreover, that this was to be welcomed. Put succinctly, humanity would eventually be liberated from the shackles of religion.¹

12 Missiology and the Interreligious Encounter from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Richie Tony
Abstract: Pentecostals have always been heavily involved in missions and hold missionaries in high esteem as extraordinary heroes of the faith.¹ But they have traditionally not given as much thought to the topic of theology of religions, or interreligious dialogue and encounter, as to other theological loci.² Why this is the case may be related in part to the fact that academic Pentecostalism is but a recent arrival to the theological scene, with its first generation of professionally trained theologians—as opposed to historians or biblical scholars—emerging only since the early 1990s.³ Yet Pentecostal scholars can no longer avoid giving

13 Practical Theology from: Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Cartledge Mark J.
Abstract: The discipline of practical theology is one that appears to be in constant redefinition in recent times, although there might at last be some consensus emerging. It was once regarded as the crown of theological study, placed toward the end of theological education for the ordained ministry. At this point in the process all the necessary “tips and hints” were added under the rubric pastoralia.In this context it was closely aligned with education for ministry and by extension church education in a broader sense. Thus would-be clergy learned how to preach, lead worship, conduct pastoral conversations with the insights

7 Justifiable Force and Holy War in Zoroastrianism from: Fighting Words
Author(s) Choksy Jamsheed K.
Abstract: There are numerous past and present scholarly debates over interpretations of theological, ritual, and philological issues in the Zoroastrian Avesta, or scriptures, and its Zand, or priestly commentaries. However, unlike for example the raging discussions over the Muslim pillar of faith known asjihād, scholars of the ancient Iranian religion named Zoroastrianism, after its founder Zarathushtra, have rarely broached the issues of just and unjust violence and of holy and sacrilegious war. Combat when examined both by the faith’s practitioners and by scholars is largely understood in terms of theodicy and eschatology linked to the human condition.

Book Title: Rifle Reports-A Story of Indonesian Independence
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Steedly Mary Margaret
Abstract: On August 17, 1945, Indonesia proclaimed its independence from Dutch colonial rule. Five years later, the Republic of Indonesia was recognized as a unified, sovereign state. The period in between was a time of aspiration, mobilization, and violence, in which nationalists fought to expel the Dutch while also trying to come to grips with the meaning of "independence." Rifle Reportsis an ethnographic history of this extraordinary time as it was experienced on the outskirts of the nation among Karo Batak villagers in the rural highlands of North Sumatra. Based on extensive interviews and conversations with Karo veterans,Rifle Reportsinterweaves personal and family memories, songs and stories, memoirs and local histories, photographs and monuments, to trace the variously tangled and perhaps incompletely understood ways that Karo women and men contributed to the founding of the Indonesian nation. The routes they followed are divergent, difficult, sometimes wavering, and rarely obvious, but they are clearly marked with the signs of gender. This innovative historical study of nationalism and decolonization is an anthropological exploration of the gendering of wartime experience, as well as an inquiry into the work of storytelling as memory practice and ethnographic genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbst

Book Title: The Fate of Place-A Philosophical History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Casey Edward S.
Abstract: In this imaginative and comprehensive study, Edward Casey, one of the most incisive interpreters of the Continental philosophical tradition, offers a philosophical history of the evolving conceptualizations of place and space in Western thought. Not merely a presentation of the ideas of other philosophers, The Fate of Placeis acutely sensitive to silences, absences, and missed opportunities in the complex history of philosophical approaches to space and place. A central theme is the increasing neglect of place in favor of space from the seventh century A.D. onward, amounting to the virtual exclusion of place by the end of the eighteenth century. Casey begins with mythological and religious creation stories and the theories of Plato and Aristotle and then explores the heritage of Neoplatonic, medieval, and Renaissance speculations about space. He presents an impressive history of the birth of modern spatial conceptions in the writings of Newton, Descartes, Leibniz, and Kant and delineates the evolution of twentieth-century phenomenological approaches in the work of Husserl, Merleau-Ponty, Bachelard, and Heidegger. In the book's final section, Casey explores the postmodern theories of Foucault, Derrida, Tschumi, Deleuze and Guattari, and Irigaray.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbw8

Interim from: The Fate of Place
Abstract: Descending from its position as a supreme term within Aristotle’s protophenomenological physics, place barely survived discussion by the end of seventeenth century. By the end of the eighteenth century, it vanished altogether from serious theoretical discourse in physics and philosophy. At moment, we can say of place what Aristotle believes has to be said of time: “It either is not at all or [only] scarcely and dimly” ( Physics217b34). How this radical dissolution and disappearance of place occurred—how place ceded place fully to space in the course of just two centuries—is the subject of the next four chapters,

Book Title: Controlling Contested Places-Late Antique Antioch and the Spatial Politics of Religious Controversy
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Shepardson Christine
Abstract: From constructing new buildings to describing rival-controlled areas as morally and physically dangerous, leaders in late antiquity fundamentally shaped their physical environment and thus the events that unfolded within it. Controlling Contested Placesmaps the city of Antioch (Antakya, Turkey) through the topographically sensitive vocabulary of cultural geography, demonstrating the critical role played by physical and rhetorical spatial contests during the tumultuous fourth century. Paying close attention to the manipulation of physical places, Christine Shepardson exposes some of the powerful forces that structured the development of religious orthodoxy and orthopraxy in the late Roman Empire.Theological claims and political support were not the only significant factors in determining which Christian communities gained authority around the Empire. Rather, Antioch's urban and rural places, far from being an inert backdrop against which events transpired, were ever-shifting sites of, and tools for, the negotiation of power, authority, and religious identity. This book traces the ways in which leaders like John Chrysostom, Theodoret, and Libanius encouraged their audiences to modify their daily behaviors and transform their interpretation of the world (and landscape) around them. Shepardson argues that examples from Antioch were echoed around the Mediterranean world, and similar types of physical and rhetorical manipulations continue to shape the politics of identity and perceptions of religious orthodoxy to this day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt5vjzxb

Introduction: from: Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: From constructing new buildings to describing places controlled by their rivals as morally and physically dangerous, early Christian leaders fundamentally shaped their physical environment and thus the events that unfolded within it. Historical narratives that overlook the manipulation of physical places have obscured of the powerful forces that structured the development of early Christianity. the city of Antioch (present-day Antakya, Turkey) through some of the sensitive vocabulary of cultural geographers will demonstrate critical role of physical and rhetorical spatial contests in this city during the tumultuous fourth and fifth centuries C.E. The strength of theological claims and political support were

4 Transformative Transgressions: from: Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: John Chrysostom strongly tied religious identity to Antioch’s physical places, and this is true also of the distinction that he made between the rural space around the city and the urban space within its walls. Although scholars have demonstrated that geographical boundaries are often more permeable than rhetorical descriptions of them allow,¹ boundaries nevertheless ideologically separate places from one another, distinguishing one side from the other in ways that accumulate cultural significance.² It should, therefore, come as no surprise when rhetorical descriptions of mass boundary crossings depict them as transforming the places on either side, as those who are seen

5 Pain as Natural Evil from: Women and Evil
Abstract: The main topic of this chapter is pain and suffering. Since the psychic pain of separation and helplessness often accompanies physical pain, all the fundamental evils will necessarily enter into the discussion. Even though we have already covered quite a bit of the topic in the criticism of theodicy and in the attempt to identify various evils phenomenologically, we have not yet explored the implications of a feminist analysis. If suffering itself has no purpose and if we see separation and helplessness as states that increase suffering, what recommendations can we make about the social management of pain?

9 Educating for a Morality of Evil from: Women and Evil
Abstract: The purpose of this last chapter is to bring together the recommendations of the preceding chapters and to direct them toward education. The main task of the book has been to examine evil from women’s perspective. To do so it has been necessary to analyze traditional views of evil, to consider our culture’s expectations for women and for men, and to explore what we might call the logic of women’s experience. What have we learned in our long history as the second sex? What positions are logically compatible with the view from our experiential standpoint?

Book Title: The Wherewithal of Life-Ethics, Migration, and the Question of Well-Being
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Ouédraogo Ibrahim
Abstract: The Wherewithal of Lifeengages with current developments in the anthropology of ethics and migration studies to explore in empirical depth and detail the life experiences of three young men - a Ugandan migrant in Copenhagen, a Burkina Faso migrant in Amsterdam, and a Mexican migrant in Boston - in ways that significantly broaden our understanding of the existential situations and ethical dilemmas of those migrating from the global south. Michael Jackson offers the first biographically based phenomenological account of migration and mobility, providing new insights into the various motives, tactics, dilemmas, dreams, and disappointments that characterize contemporary migration. It is argued that the quandaries of African or Mexican migrants are not unique to people moving between 'traditional' and 'modern' worlds. While more intensely felt by the young, seeking to find a way out of a world of limited opportunity and circumscribed values, the experiences of transition are familiar to us all, whatever our age, gender, ethnicity or social status - namely, the impossibility of calculating what one may lose in leaving a settled life or home place; what one may gain by risking oneself in an alien environment; the difficulty of striking a balance between personal fulfillment and the moral claims of kinship; and the struggle to know the difference between 'concrete' and 'abstract' utopias (the first reasonable and worth pursuing; the second hopelessly unattainable).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt7zw54w

2 Colonial vision: from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Starbuck Nicole
Abstract: Charles-Alexandre Lesueur and Nicolas-Martin Petit arrived at Sydney Town in mid-winter 1802, the first French artists to visit Britain's colony at Port Jackson.¹ Two seasons lay ahead of them, providing respite after a gruelling exploration of Australia's south coast, and, more importantly, providing the young men with an invaluable opportunity. Lesueur and Petit were members of the Baudin expedition, which — prepared by the Institut National and sponsored by the First Consul at the close of the French Revolution — was the first scientific expedition to carry official anthropological instructions. It was thus with the varied advice of philosophers, humanists

13 Art and origin: from: Framing French Culture
Author(s) Poiana Peter
Abstract: Georges Bataille and Maurice Blanchot's mutual interest in the Lascaux cave paintings signals their common concern to construct a discourse of origin in relation to art. Both writers consider origin in terms of the anxiety-filled questioning surrounding the ontological and historical aporias that have plagued Western thought, including those that appear under the banner of the Modern and the Postmodern. Both ask: what kind of discourse presides over the disconcerting doubling of reality performed by the first artists? For Bataille, origin is bound up with the ritual significance of eroticism and death as these underpin all forms of artistic endeavour;

1.4 The Best Story of the World: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Richter Virginia
Abstract: In the first half of the nineteenth century, philological readings of the Scriptures and new approaches in geology – set down, most importantly, in Charles Lyell’s Principles of Geology(1830-1833) – uncovered the various strata of the Book of Books and the Book of Nature, respectively. The result of applying the historical-critical method to the Scriptures was precisely the discovery of its historicity: as philologists and – mainly Protestant – theologians such as Friedrich Schleiermacher and David Friedrich Strauss – whoseThe Life of Jesus, Critically Examined(1835-1836) was disseminated in Britain in George Eliot’s influential translation (1849) – could

3.3 The Professionalization of the Historical Discipline: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ottner Christine
Abstract: Scholarly periodicals are important pacemakers and trendsetters in the process of academic professionalization and institutionalization: they not only reflect developments within scientific disciplines or their relationship to other scientific fields, they also influence such developments decisively by way of an active editorial policy.¹ Already in the course of the eighteenth century many journals dealing with ‘historical’ issues had been founded, i.e., treating genealogical, numismatic, and statistical contents.² Most of them were media of education which intended to spread and discuss established ideas within a circle of educated readers.³ At that time and also during the early years of the nineteenth

3.4 Manuals on Historical Method: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Paul Herman
Abstract: Manuals on historical method from around 1900 are like neoscholastic philosophy textbooks: books that are supposed to be so dull and dreary that only few scholars dare venture into them. Although methodology manuals were once a flourishing genre, especially in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, when such emerging academic disciplines as history, art history, and church history were in need of methodological signposts and boundary markers, the hundreds of pages that these manuals typically devote to the minutiae of internal and external source criticism now read like neoscholastic meditations on the analogia entis. At least, that is the

5.1 Furio Jesi and the Culture of the Right from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Rowland Ingrid D.
Abstract: On the night of June 16, 1980, Furio Jesi, Italian scholar, critic, poet, novelist, actor and political activist, died in his home, suffocated by an accidental gas leak from the water heater.¹ He had turned thirty-nine only a month before, but his curriculum vitae was already long enough for several people twice his age: he had written nearly twenty monographs on subjects including Egyptology, mythology, German literature, and Hebrew mysticism, as well as newspaper articles, novels, translations, poetry, and a spate of unpublished manuscripts. In 1979, typically, he had produced two books, Materiali mitologici(Mythological Materials:Myth and Anthropology in

5.3 Theater Studies from the Early Twentieth Century to Contemporary Debates: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Buglioni Chiara Maria
Abstract: No other discipline within the humanities has had to struggle with its own interdisciplinary character as much as theater research in Europe. The fathers of the new-born scholarship Theaterwissenschaftwere mainly concerned with distinguishing theater from other forms of art and with asserting its right as an independent field of enquiry. The need to define a specific methodological approach, however, was not taken into account. This initial lack in the creation of the scientific discipline has influenced the controversial development of theater studies and has caused frequent identity crises.

6.1 Embracing World Art: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Mersmann Birgit
Abstract: Within the realm of modernizing the humanities, the aspiration of art history to transform into a universal discipline and modern science manifests itself as a cultural, anthropological, and spatial orientation toward world art and universal history. The ground for this modern shift was prepared by the universalization of art as based on the concept of mutual cultural influences and historical transfers. At the turn from the nineteenth to the twentieth century, art history joined forces with subbranches of history such as universal history and cultural history. Through these interdisciplinary linkages, it also opened to a new self-definition and revaluation as

6.2 Generic Classification and Habitual Subject Matter from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Efal Adi
Abstract: One of the operations included in philological inquiries is the restoration of etymologies, built up of linguistic units enduring through ages, languages, meanings, usages and contexts.² The following essay attempts a possible deployment of an etymology of the lingual unit ‘genre’. Our trail will be guided by two stations in the long and extended history of this etymon: First, the Aristotelian origins of the etymon ‘genre’ are reconsidered; second, attention is given to the presence of the same etymon in the vocabulary of modern art criticism. Working within a comparative framework, this essay tries to create a trail between literary

9.5 The Humanities’ New Methods: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Romeijn Jan-Willem
Abstract: In comparison to the natural and social sciences, the humanities have received comparatively little attention from the analytic philosophy of science. This discipline has been concerned primarily with the sciences narrowly construed. In particular confirmation theory, the systematic study of theory evaluation, shows remarkable lacunas when it comes to the methodology of the humanities. But developments in the humanities and in conformation theory invite us to reconsider this situation. First, due to the fast uptake of empirical and computational methods in several humanities disciplines, the humanities are presently very much in flux, and much more amenable to methodological elucidation. Second,

12.1 The Making and Persisting of Modern German Humanities: from: The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Hamann Julian
Abstract: The history of the humanities shows a constant struggle for constituting and maintaining their particular logic in relative autonomy from social influences. Understanding their emergence in the nineteenth century requires a sociological examination of how the humanities managed to maintain academic autonomy while at the same time demonstrating social relevance.

Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm

1 Reading Scripture and Developing Doctrine from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: For Christian believers, no one captivates the attention, moves the affections, or stirs the imagination like Jesus of Nazareth. He is the visible display—the perfect icon—of the inexhaustible love and power of an invisible God (Col. 1:15). What we know of this Jesus we have read in the writings of the New Testament. These first-century texts are the gateway to Christ, the “primary sources” on which we base our historical, theological, and practical beliefs about him. Through the theologically flavored biographies, ecclesial missives, and dreamlike visions contained within, we can get to know him and get a glimpse

2 Historical Consciousness, Development, and Hermeneutics from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Doctrinal development may be an inevitable, even essential element of the theological task as it has been practiced for nearly two millennia, but explicit theoretical reflection on the nature of this phenomenon is a relatively recent feature in Christian thought. The history of evangelical attention to the problem of development is much shorter, because, as we shall see, Roman Catholic theologians began addressing the issue much earlier than their Protestant and evangelical counterparts. The study of general hermeneutics or hermeneutical theory, a discipline concerned with understanding the relationship between interpreters and texts (i.e., written texts or any other complex aggregate

3 Doctrinal Development in the Descriptive Theological Hermeneutics of Anthony Thiselton from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The previous chapter highlighted some of the shared themes and influences between hermeneutical theory and the problem of doctrinal development throughout their respective histories. The present chapter begins to build a more constructive case, utilizing the insights of evangelical scholars engaged in conversation with contemporary hermeneutical theory for constructing a hermeneutical model of doctrinal development. Here, we will explore the theological hermeneutics of Anglican New Testament scholar and theologian Anthony C. Thiselton, whose descriptive approach to theological hermeneutics has remarkable explanatory power for the phenomenon of growing doctrinal traditions.

4 Doctrinal Development in the Normative Theological Hermeneutics of Kevin J. Vanhoozer from: In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Kevin J. Vanhoozer, one of the most creative and constructive evangelical theologians currently working, is best known for his work in theological prolegomena and the theological interpretation of Scripture.¹ Questions about the relationship between the Bible and systematic theology initially directed his work to hermeneutics, and interdisciplinary engagement with hermeneutical and literary theory has been a staple in his research ever since.² Much like Thiselton before him, Vanhoozer has endeavored to utilize the insights of non-theological resources like contemporary hermeneutical theory in biblical interpretation and Christian theology. However, in contrast to Thiselton’s descriptive approach, Vanhoozer’s approach to theological hermeneutics is

Book Title: The Mission of Demythologizing-Rudolf Bultmann's Dialectical Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Congdon David W.
Abstract: Since 1941, Rudolf Bultmann’s program of demythologizing has been the subject of constant debate, widely held to indicate Bultmann’s departure from the dialectical theology he once shared with Karl Barth. In the 1950s, Barth referred to their relationship as that of a whale and an elephant: incapable of meaningful communication. This study proposes a contrary reading of demythologizing as the hermeneutical fulfillment of dialectical theology on the basis of a reinterpretation of Barth’s theological project. As such, the volume argues that dialectical theology is fundamentally governed by a missionary logic. Bultmann’s hermeneutical theology extends this dialectical, missionary theology into the field of interpretation. Contrary to many critics, the message of God’s saving work in Christ, and not modern science, funds Bultmann’s hermeneutical program. Like Barth’s own revolution, Bultmann’s program addresses a false relation between gospel and culture. Negatively, demythologizing is a program of deconstantinizing, opposing the objectifying conflation of kerygma and culture that he calls “myth.” Positively, demythologizing is a form of intercultural hermeneutics, composed of preunderstanding and self-understanding. Demythologizing is therefore a missionary hermeneutic of intercultural translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878n5

1 The Problem: from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: On March 2, 1964, Karl Barth met a group of theology students from Tubingen at the Bruderholz Restaurant for a lengthy conversation. The group consisted of forty Protestants and five Catholics. Their recorded conversation ranged across a wide spectrum of theological topics, including the meaning of Christ’s resurrection, the doctrine of analogy, the distinction between “noetic” and “ontic,” recent developments in Roman Catholicism, and the history of dialectical theology and the Confessing Church. At one point an unknown student raised the topic of Eberhard Jungel’s recent interpretation of Barth’s analogia fidei.³ The student wished to know whether Jungel’s understanding accorded

7 The Problem of Myth and the Program of Deconstantinizing from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: We come now to the climax of our study: the constructive reinterpretation of Bultmann’s program of demythologizing as the hermeneutic that fulfills the missionary origins of dialectical theology. This chapter will initiate the reinterpretation by looking at Bultmann’s criticism of myth. The final chapter will complete our analysis by examining the eschatological essence of existentialist interpretation.

8 Eschatological Existence and Existentialist Translation from: The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: We noted in the previous chapter Bultmann’s claim that radical demythologizing is “the consistent application [of the doctrine of justification by faith alone] to the field of knowledge.”² This application has both a negative and a positive dimension. Negatively it is criticism of objectifying thinking within the Weltbildof mythology, which I suggest we can restate ascriticism of constantinianism. Demythologizing is a critical epistemology in the sense that it subverts every attempt to interpret the kerygma in the form of aWeltanschauung. It is thus an antimythological and antimetaphysical—i.e., deconstantinizing—hermeneutic.

Book Title: Writing Theologically- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: Of course, by writing we refer to the kinds of reflections, essays, and exams students will have to complete in the seminary classroom. But writing also encompasses the many modes of communication and self-discovery that creative expression can unlock. Writing Theologically introduces writing not just as an academic exercise but as a way for students to communicate the good news in rapidly changing contexts, as well as to discover and craft their own sense of vocation and identity. Most important will be guiding students to how they might begin to claim and hone a distinctive theological voice that is particularly attuned to the contexts of writer and audience alike. In a collection of brief, readable essays, this volume, edited by Eric D. Barreto, emphasizes the vital skills, practices, and values involved in writing theologically. That is, how might students prepare themselves to communicate effectively and creatively, clearly and beautifully, the insights they gather during their time in seminary? Each contribution includes practical advice about best practices in writing theologically; however, the book also stresses why writing is vital in the self-understanding of the minister, as well as her or his public communication of the good news.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878rq

1 Writing Basically from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Newton Richard
Abstract: Writing has played a pivotal role in the formation and spread of the Christian witness. In the prologue to the Gospel of John, we find an illuminating image of this relationship. “In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God.”¹ The evangelist likens Christ to “the Word” (Greek ho logos, think “logic”), the very expression of reason, present since before creation and enlightening the world ever since. The apostle Paul tells the Corinthians that Jesus’ passion and resurrection happened “in accordance with the scriptures.”² These “scriptures” (Greektas graphas, imagine “graphics”) or,

3 Writing for the Ear from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Wiseman Karyn L.
Abstract: Some of us write for a living. Some of us write for fun. Many of us write for school or continuing education. Still others write as a hobby. In theological education, writing is a regular—even ubiquitous—part of your life. Whether that means writing an academic paper, a personal theological statement, ordination paperwork, sermons, or

8 Writing Purposefully from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Sharp Melinda A. McGarrah
Abstract: Seminaries host communities of writers in conversation. Diverse theological commitments that may or may not align with yours coexist within and across seminaries. It is therefore easy to slip into dehumanizing speech that opposes positions and people in uncharitable

10 Writing Spiritually from: Writing Theologically
Author(s) Myers Jacob D.
Abstract: Now, I know what you’re thinking. You just finished reading a dozen or so essays en route to learning how to write theologically, and here you find this essay on writing spiritually—tacked on at the end, little more than

1 The Fragile Soul and Spiritual Duct Tape from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Why, you may ask, is the author of this book talking about a Heidelberg landlord? I thought this was a book about justification-by-faith and bold sinning! Well, it is. One of the traditional problems with the doctrine of justification-by-faith is that is has been tucked away for centuries in a theological

13 The Joint Declaration on the Doctrine of Justification from: Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Luther’s insight and conviction led to a theological eruption that resulted in a religious lava flow. For five centuries, it flowed down the medieval mountainside, increasing in speed until it crashed into the ecclesial hierarchy and hardened into the Protestant Reformation of the sixteenth century. The medieval edifice underwent a torrent of change as new rivulets divided the mountain; these divisions came to include the Lutherans, the Reformed, the Anglicans, and the radicals (or Anabaptists). Eventually these groups fractured further, giving rise to the Quakers, Methodists, deists, and revivalists. To change metaphors, like Humpty Dumpty falling to pieces, Western Christendom

Introduction: from: Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events
Abstract: “What happens now?” in modern parlance often means “What happens next?” This is not so much an error as it is a recognition of the centrality of a conception of the future, even an apocalyptic one, for any notion of the present.¹ We are accustomed to the notion that the present is always fleeting into the past or yearning for a better tomorrow, a nodal point defined via negation and ungraspable as such. This intuitive, geometric model of temporality is precisely what Milton and Marvell seek to unseat with their lyric presentations of an immanent apocalypse. To treat an eschatological

CHAPTER 4 Ethics of Reading I: from: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: That is the philosopher Stanley Cavell writing about the philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein. Cavell will himself be shepherded back in Chapters 4 and 5; philosopherreader Emmanuel Levinas, however, is this chapter’s explicit focus. Previous chapters have staged sonorities between Levinas and Said, Henry Darger and Pascal, Sebald and Michael Arad. The dialogism on display in this chapter, by contrast, depends on the way a given text solicits on its own or dialogically affiliates with, another—a proximate shepherding, let us call it.

EPILOGUE: from: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: This book, fittingly, concludes with “the book.” The voice immediately preceding belongs to Levinas, excerpted from “Signification and Sense” (also translated as “Meaning and Sense”). In the first section of this rather difficult essay from 1964, Levinas wants to think through receptivity as the means by which he have access to meaning, and also the role of metaphor (as that which “carries something away”) in describing, but therefore also seeming to falsify or “overload” the date empirically given to our senses. Aslant Husserlian theories of intuition, and other intellectualist models of consciousness from Plato through Hume to the logical positivists,

FOUR Metonymy, Metaphor, and Perception: from: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: In Allegories of Reading, Paul de Man examines Nietzsche’s method of submitting “the epistemological authority of perception,” language, and logic to a radically skeptical critique. Although Nietzsche was not the first to propose “that the paradigmatic structure of language is rhetorical rather than representational,” he affirmed more categorically than his predecessors that “the misrepresentation of reality … [that he finds] systematically repeated throughout the tradition is … rooted in the rhetorical structure of language”: “The trope is not a derived, marginal, or aberrant form of language but the linguistic paradigm par excellence. The figurative structure is not one linguistic mode

NINE Metaphor and Metonymy in the Middle Ages: from: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: (The letter teaches deeds; the allegory, what you should believe; the moral [or tropological level] what you should

“Et Iterum de Deo”: from: The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) DE VRIES HENT
Abstract: Neither traditional philosophical theism nor modern secular humanism nor, for that matter, theoretical or practical humanism and atheism seem adequate designations to capture the simultaneous generalization and trivialization, intensification, and exaggeration to which Derrida subjects the religious and theological—indeed, theologico-political—categories, drawn from the vastest and deepest of archives.¹

Book Title: Ostension-Word Learning and the Embodied Mind
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Engelland Chad
Abstract: Ostension is bodily movement that manifests our engagement with things, whether we wish it to or not. Gestures, glances, facial expressions: all betray our interest in something. Ostension enables our first word learning, providing infants with a prelinguistic way to grasp the meaning of words. Ostension is philosophically puzzling; it cuts across domains seemingly unbridgeable -- public--private, inner--outer, mind--body. In this book, Chad Engelland offers a philosophical investigation of ostension and its role in word learning by infants. Engelland discusses ostension (distinguishing it from ostensive definition) in contemporary philosophy, examining accounts by Quine, Davidson, and Gadamer, and he explores relevant empirical findings in psychology, evolutionary anthropology, and neuroscience. He offers original studies of four representative historical thinkers whose work enriches the understanding of ostension: Wittgenstein, Merleau-Ponty, Augustine, and Aristotle. And, building on these philosophical and empirical foundations, Engelland offers a meticulous analysis of the philosophical issues raised by ostension. He examines the phenomenological problem of whether embodied intentions are manifest or inferred; the problem of what concept of mind allows ostensive cues to be intersubjectively available; the epistemological problem of how ostensive cues, notoriously ambiguous, can be correctly understood; and the metaphysical problem of the ultimate status of the key terms in his argument: animate movement, language, and mind. Finally, he argues for the centrality of manifestation in philosophy. Taking ostension seriously, he proposes, has far-reaching implications for thinking about language and the practice of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287hgz

2 The Science of Prelinguistic Joint Attention from: Ostension
Abstract: How children learn their first words is a burning issue in contemporary psychology, a topic whose interest is not only ontogenetic but phylogenetic: how children learn their first words might shed light on how humans long ago instituted their first words. This book likewise takes as its point of departure the question of how children learn their first words, but it asks the question in the philosophical, not the psychological voice. That is, it seeks to disclose the prelinguistic resources logically presupposed by first word acquisition, and one of the things logically presupposed is the availability of another’s attention through

4 Merleau-Ponty: from: Ostension
Abstract: Edmund Husserl, the founder of the phenomenological movement, focused his research primarily on the origin of mathematics, logic, and science. Yet the phenomenological method of investigation bore fruit in other areas as well. His Ideas II, which circulated in manuscript form to Heidegger and later to Merleau-Ponty, proved revolutionary for its inquiry into the living body and the surrounding world.² Heidegger finds attractive Husserl’s new emphasis on the “experiential context as such.”³ Indeed, Merleau-Ponty avers that Heidegger’sBeing and Time“springs from an indication given by Husserl and amounts to no more than an explicit account of the ‘natürlicher weltbegriff’

10 Metaphysics: from: Ostension
Abstract: In the phenomenological account of chapter 7, I

“Myth” in the Old Testament from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Rogerson J. W.
Abstract: For the sake of clarity, I begin with an attempt to define the main terms that I shall use in this lecture. I wish to distinguish between the terms myths, mythological elements, andmyth. The easiest term to define ismyths. Myths are literary phenomena. They can be transmitted either orally or in writing, and can be recognized as myths on account of their content. They are often stories about gods or narratives about the origin of the world and the human race, or attempts to explain the fate of humanity, attempts that are placed in the context either of

Myth and Scripture: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Callender Dexter E.
Abstract: The terms mythandScripturehave often been galvanizing terms when applied to the Bible. In biblical studies, serious interest in myth typically falls under the domain of the secular academy, whereas serious interest in “Scripture” has typically been the concern for communities of faith and the academic institutions they support. This has been most clearly articulated in Robert Oden’sThe Bible without Theology, subtitledThe Theological Tradition and Alternatives to It, in which Oden eschews questions of theology in his treatment of myth, in support of what he refers to as “the process by which biblical study is moving

Myth and Social Realia in Ancient Israel: from: Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Page Hugh R.
Abstract: In this paper I will assess the strengths, weaknesses, and implications of the use of early Hebrew poems as a control group for the testing of single theories and methodological paradigms aimed at the reconstruction of myth, folklore, and social reality in ancient Israel. Here I build on the work done within the Albright-Cross-Freedman tradition on Gen 49; Exod 15; Num 23–24; Deut 32, 33; Judg 5; 1 Sam 2; 2 Sam 1, 22, 23; and Pss 18, 29, 68, 72, and 78 (see, e.g., Cross and Freedman 1952, 1997; Geller 1979; Cross 1973; Freedman 1980). Holding in abeyance

The Dispositive Does Not Exist! from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Tortajada Maria
Abstract: Five ways to approach the dispositive emerge from the texts that appear in this volume; none is exclusive of the others, some are conjoined or articulated, some are separate. In French, the term “dispositif” refers to a plurality of meanings, from the simple mechanism of a device, instrument or machine, to the epistemological construction liable to produce effects of power and knowledge – the disciplinary dispositifor thedispositifof sexuality. From its most concrete to its most abstract definition, the “dispositif” involves the common signification ofarrangement.Still, the different meanings of the notion subject it – and its users – to

The Moment of the “Dispositif” from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Hachemi Omar
Abstract: If the “dispositif” constitutes a “moment,” it is not so much in accordance with its theoretical unity as with its scattered persistence in film theory. This persistence of the word necessarily brings up the question of its provenance: of which theoretical formation is this notion the standard? The word appeared in the 1970s at the intersection of key concepts – the unconscious, ideology, the signifier – which found the topological model of their functioning in cinematographic technique. Through the primacy given to arrangements, the notion of the “dispositif” fostered a spatial distribution of concepts: the topology of the “scenographic cube” revealed by

Archaeology and Spectacle from: Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: To examine the notion of the dispositiveand identify its place in contemporary practices at the intersection of two institutions, Cinema and the Museum, this text proposes a progression through a few individual cases, with the outlines of a study. This may appear as lacking indisciplinewith regard to the call for papers for the conference “Dispositifs de vision et d’audition” (Université de Lausanne, May 29-31, 2008), which was the first step in the present work. The call underlined how the study of a series of isolated cases would risk “perpetuating the ambiguity of encounters in which epistemological questioning

4 Metropolitan Dreams: from: New Strangers in Paradise
Abstract: The American drive for empire that functions as the ideological and geopolitical backdrop of much Chicano fiction also serves as a postcolonial motif in contemporary novels and short stories exploring Latino emigration from the Caribbean to the United States. Numerous writers—Julia Alvarez, Oscar Hijuelos, Christina Garcia, and Judith Ortiz Cofer among them—share a vision of migration to American shores that is rooted in the imperial history of the hemisphere—the tradition of conquest and colonization experienced by the islands of the Caribbean. The postwar arrival of these Hispanic voyagers from the Caribbean at the metropolitan centers of America,

1 Something of Graver Import from: The Unfolding God of Jung and Milton
Abstract: Paradise Lostis rich above all other epics in the graver import of the universal or the archetypal. Critics, however, have left unexcavated some of the richest veins of its graver import. Bringing them to light requires two fundamental changes. First, we must give archetypal elements priority over historical influences and Milton’s conscious designs, those surface veins of meaning critics commonly pursue. Second, we must supplement standard critical methods with philosophical and psychological methods designed to probe the archetypal. Implementing these changes, this chapter will utilize the combined methods of modern philosophy and Jungian psychology to explore the graver import

Book Title: The Shriek of Silence-A Phenomenology of the Holocaust Novel
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): PATTERSON DAVID
Abstract: The Shriek of Silenceis a first in several respects: the first to examine the Holocaust novels in their original languages, the first to articulate a theoretical basis for its approach, and the first phenomenological investigation -- one that attempts to penetrate the process of creation for these novelists. Organized along conceptual lines, the book examines "the word in exile," the themes of death of the father and the child, transformations of the self, and the implications of the reader. Its philosophical foundations are Rosenzweig, Buber, Neher, and Levinas. Its critical approach is shaped by Bakhtin.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130j86j

7 The Implication of the Reader from: The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: In The Dialogic ImaginationMikhail Bakhtin argues that the novel “and the world represented in it enter the real world and enirch it, and the real world enters the work and its world as part of the process of its creation, as well as part of its subsequent life, in a continual renewing of the work through the creative perception of listeners and readers” (254). This statement describes what we have called a phenomenological approach to the novel as an event. Examining what occurs in the process of the novel’s creation, we deal not only with author and character but

Book Title: God--The World's Future-Systematic Theology for a New Era
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Peters Ted
Abstract: God—The World’s Future has been a proven and comprehensive textbook in systematic theology for over twenty years. Explicitly crafted to address our postmodern context, Peters explains the whole body of Christian historical doctrine from within a “proleptic” framework, “whereby the gospel is understood as announcing the pre-actualization of the future consummation of all things in Jesus Christ.” Peters skillfully deploys this concept not only to organize the various theological areas or loci but also to rethink doctrines in light of key postmodern challenges from ecumenism, critical historical thinking, contemporary science, and gender and sexuality issues. The Third Edition is thoroughly revised with updated chapters, additional chapters, updated annotations and bibliographies, and further elaborations in light of recent developments in method and theological reflection. This classic text opens up systematic theology in new dimensions, retrieving traditional categories and topics for a new generation of students and learners to give a fresh reading of Christian theology and articulation of the liberating message of the gospel of God’s grace for the future of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwwrr

Introduction to Part Two from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: The Apostles’ and Nicene Creeds divide and order confessional commitments into three articles: first, the Father and creation; second, the Son and redemption; and third, the Spirit identified with sanctification and consummation. The systematic theology presented in this book follows this trinitarian pattern. Each of the three articles may be subdivided, and each subdivision becomes a topic, or locus, for theological explication.

5 Becoming Human and Unbecoming Evil from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: The whole of creation history includes, among other things, human history. Perhaps the emerging field of Big History is the closest secular counterpart to the theologian’s creation history. Within the cosmic hsitory of creation, systematic theologians commonly include an anthropology—an explication of what is human—in their explication of Christian doctrine. Sometimes the anthropology appears between expositions of the First and Second Articles of the creeds—that is, between explications of God as Father and God as Son. The sorry state of the human condition explains why the good creation is in need of redemption. So theological anthropology fits

8 The Gift of Justification from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: In the previous chapter on soteriology, we noted how the doctrine of justification is the result of theological reflection on the significance of the symbol of Christ as the lamb of God. The innocence of the scapegoated lamb of God is transferred to us. Our own deeds of justice, our own good works, our own holiness, do not make us just in the sight of God. Our justice is rather an alien justice, one that comes to us from without but one that becomes our own through an act of God’s grace. Our justification is a gift.

9 The Holy Spirit from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Air is a source of power. As I pointed out in the chapter on becoming human, this identification of spirit with air was widespread in the ancient world. Perhaps the phenomenological origin of such thinking is the observation that breath and life belong together. Just as the invisible wind

Introduction to Part Five from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: Theology is an ongoing task with which Christians are never finished because something new is always placed on its agenda. Although it is the thinking discipline whereby faith seeks to understand itself, it is also a part of the church’s ministry. Its peculiar ministry is to provide intellectual leadership. The present work in systematic theology has sought to explicate the significance of the gospel so that what Christians say is intelligible within the context of modern and emerging postmodern consciousness. Thus, a methodological foundation was laid, scriptural symbols explicated, doctrinal content clarified, and hypothetical reconstruction begun. In turning now to

12 Ecumenic Pluralism from: God--The World's Future
Abstract: The holism so precious to the postmodern mind is by no means intended to eliminate particularity and individuality. Holistic postmodernity seeks a dynamic whole, a cooperative whole, a synthetic whole. The dynamism of the whole contributes to the vitality of the parts just as the parts constitute the substance of the whole. Instead of union, we think of communion. I have argued that the universality and comprehensiveness of the kingdom of God lend some theological support for employing such holistic and communal categories.

Foreword from: The Creative Word
Author(s) Erickson Amy
Abstract: In August of 1997, I was actively second-guessing my decision to leave Vail, Colorado, to start the Master of Divinity program at Columbia Theological Seminary. My sister-in-law, Denise, a pastor in the Presbyterian Church (USA), trying to be encouraging, predicted that because I loved literature, I would surely love the Old Testament. Perhaps I was in a particularly skeptical mood, but her analogy struck me as untenable. It made as much sense as if she had said, “You love Colorado, and so surely you will love Georgia.” I couldn’t see the connection. I loved medieval tales of Arthur, Beowulf, eighteenth-century

Heliodorus smiles from: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Whitmarsh Tim
Abstract: The beginning of Heliodorus’ novel is justly famous. The lavish visuality, which has invited numerous comparisons with cinematic technique,³ inaugurates a narrative that makes sustained and creative use of the spectacular.⁴ The deployment of the bandits as aporetic focalisers for the scene they behold is a stroke of narratological brilliance, artfully retarding the reader’s cognition of events with a drip-drip release of information.⁵ Heliodorus, the latest of antiquity’s extant novelists, announces with a bang his arrival in a crowded, and to some extent overly regularised, marketplace: while the title of the papyrus or codex (τά περὶ Θεαγένην καὶ Χαρίκλειαν Αἰθιοπικά)

Book Title: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Every other is truly other, but no other is wholly other.This is the claim that Aspects of Alterity defends. Taking up the question of otherness that so fascinates contemporary continental philosophy, this book asks what it means for something or someone to be other than the self. Levinas and those influenced by him point out that the philosophical tradition of the West has generally favored the self at the expense of the other. Such a self-centered perspective never encounters the other qua other, however. In response, postmodern thought insists on the absolute otherness of the other, epitomized by the deconstructive claim every other is wholly other.But absolute otherness generates problems and aporias of its own. This has led some thinkers to reevaluate the notion of relative otherness in light of the postmodern critique, arguing for a chiastic account that does justice to both the alterity and the similitude of the other. These latter two positions-absolute otherness and a rehabilitated account of relative otherness-are the main contenders in the contemporary debate.The philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel provide the point of embarkation for coming to understand the two positions on this question. Levinas and Marcel were contemporaries whose philosophies exhibit remarkably similar concern for the other but nevertheless remain fundamentally incompatible. Thus, these two thinkers provide a striking illustration of both the proximity of and the unbridgeable gap between two accounts of otherness.Aspects of Alterity delves into this debate, first in order understand the issues at stake in these two positions and second to determine which description better accounts for the experience of encountering the other.After a thorough assessment and critique of otherness in Levinas's and Marcel's work, including a discussion of the relationship of ethical alterity to theological assumptions, Aspects of Alterity traces the transmission and development of these two conceptions of otherness. Levinas's version of otherness can be seen in the work of Jacques Derrida and John D. Caputo, while Marcel's understanding of otherness influences the work of Paul Ricoeur and Richard Kearney.Ultimately, Aspects of Alterity makes a case for a hermeneutic account of otherness. Otherness itself is not absolute, but is a chiasm of alterity and similitude. Properly articulated, such an account is capable of addressing the legitimate ethical and epistemological concerns that lead thinkers to construe otherness in absolute terms, but without the absolute aporiasthat accompany such a characterization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvd0

2 Emmanuel Levinas from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: These passages, both alluded to by Levinas in various places, underscore the impetus of his thought, which argues that ethical responsibility is more fundamental than ontology, inverting twenty-five hundred years of philosophy by showing that “man’s relation to the other is prior to his ontological relation to himself (egology) or to the totality of things that we call the world (cosmology).”¹ Although his work is exceptionally focused in its concern for the other, Levinas’s philosophy is extensive enough that a complete treatment of it is beyond the scope of this project, which demands that we summarize Levinas’s philosophy and focus

7 The Nature of Otherness from: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which

Book Title: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS MICHELLE VOSS
Abstract: The intensity and meaningfulness of aesthetic experience have often been described in theological terms. By designating basic human emotions as rasa, a word that connotes taste, flavor, or essence, Indian aesthetic theory conceptualizes emotional states as something to be savored. At their core, emotions can be tastes of the divine. In this book, the methods of the emerging discipline of comparative theology enable the author's appreciation of Hindu texts and practices to illuminate her Christian reflections on aesthetics and emotion. Three emotions vie for prominence in the religious sphere: peace, love, and fury. Whereas Indian theorists following Abhinavagupta claim that the aesthetic emotion of peace best approximates the goal of religious experience, devotees of Krishna and medieval Christian readings of the Song of Songs argue that love communicates most powerfully with divinity. In response to the transcendence emphasized in both approaches, the book turns to fury at injustice to attend to emotion's foundations in the material realm. The implications of this constructive theology of emotion for Christian liturgy, pastoral care, and social engagement are manifold.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvhj

6 Dalit Arts and the Failure of Aesthetics from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The Rural Education for Development Society (REDS) in Karnataka, South India, produces the piece of street theatre just described. The organization works for the promotion of Dalits, the current preferred name for the group formerly known as Untouchables or Harijans. REDS works in over one thousand villages, with pro-Dalit projects ranging from the organization of democratic community councils (Panchayats) to the construction and distribution of solar-powered lamps to families without electricity. There are seventy-seven Dalit groups in the South Indian state of Tamilnadu alone, and these groups include a variety of professions, religions, and ideological approaches to Dalit liberation. In

8 Toward a Holistic Theology of the Emotions from: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: There is no inherent reason that European philosophical traditions must govern Christian theology across the globe. The cultures of Asia, Africa, and South America, where the majority of Christians now live, offer categories for imagining the life of faith, not only for local or indigenous theologies but for the theological “mainstream” as well. As an aesthetic perspective that relates contextual and bodily aspects of emotion to religious experience, rasasheds light on human flourishing and has much to offer a holistic theology of the emotions.

The Angel and the Storm: from: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) COHEN TOM
Abstract: It is bad timingfor the global economic system to enter a self-feeding black hole—at least from the perspective of “climate change.” The economic implosions of the credit collapse have, essentially, foreclosed any geopolitical will to address the gathering indicators of ecocatastrophic logics, had that ever been plausible. The interplay between the economic and ecological, the “eco-eco” disaster, tends to occlude the exponential curves of issues that lie outside the screen—collapsing marine life, mass extinction events, “peak” everything (oil, humans, water …), projections of “population culling,” and so on. The Ponzi scheme of hypermodernity extending the depletion of

Introduction: from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: Margaret McGuinness was a graduate student at Union Theological Seminary (New York) when Father James J. Hennesey’s A History of the Roman Catholic Community in the United Stateswas published in 1981, even as James Fisher was studying American cultural history down the New Jersey Turnpike at Rutgers. Although other scholars, including Notre Dame’s Philip Gleason and Jay Dolan, were also writing about American Catholicism at this time, McGuinness’s church history classes were paying very little attention to their work, focusing primarily on the U.S. Protestant experience. Hennesey’s book convinced her that American Catholicism was a vital part of the

7 Method and Conversion in Catholic Studies from: The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) LIDDY RICHARD M.
Abstract: A former editor of the prestigious theological journal Theological Studiesis reported to have remarked that Bernard Lonergan’s work was the most frequently cited in that journal. Whether accurate or not, as Lonergan’s former student in Rome in the 1960s, and as someone who owes him an immense debt of gratitude, I can testify to the great explanatory power of his work. It is no wonder that the University of Toronto Press is now publishing the many volumes of hisCollected Works. In this essay I employ Lonergan’s work to delineate the methodological issues emerging in the relatively new field

Foreword from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Lane Dermot A.
Abstract: It is a pleasure for me as President of Mater Dei Institute to welcome the publication of this collection of essays celebrating the work of Jean-Luc Marion. Most of the papers were first delivered in the Mater Dei Institute, a college of Dublin City University, in January 2003, at a conference attended by Marion. It was Marion’s first visit to Ireland, and it was most appropriate that a college specializing in religious education should host the occasion: after all, Marion has not only been central in the “turn toward the theological” in recent French phenomenology, but has also generated massive

Introduction from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Cassidy Eoin
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion’s body of work has already secured his place among the top rank of twentieth-century philosophers; it seems inconceivable that his reputation will not grow even further in the twenty-first century and beyond. Though equally renowned for his scholarly work on early modern philosophy and on Husserl and Heidegger, Marion is perhaps best known for his renewal of phenomenology, for his remarkable, ongoing inquiry into the question of God, and for work bridging all of these areas. The oeuvre resulting from this fertile constellation places Marion’s writings at the center of the “theological turn” in recent French phenomenology; as

1 The Conceptual Idolatry of Descartes’s Gray Ontology: from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Morrow Derek J.
Abstract: As even a cursory glance at the current literature will confirm, the task of investigating the many philosophical and theological questions raised by Jean-Luc Marion’s explorations into the phenomenology of the gift and of givenness ( donation) has only begun. Not least of these questions, of course, is the purely formal one of methodology. For although Marion’s phenomenology ofdonationhas generated significant criticism from several quarters—both from scholars who regard it as insufficiently phenomenological and thus as a betrayal of phenomenology (Janicaud¹), and from scholars who consider it to have unduly compromised the theological prerogatives of the Christian faith

8 Phenomenality in the Middle: from: Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Mackinlay Shane
Abstract: “The Reason of the Gift”¹ is part of Jean-Luc Marion’s broader phenomenological project, which begins from his critique of the traces of a constituting subject retained by Husserl and Heidegger. While Marion’s phenomenology of givenness ( donation) eliminates these traces, it does so only by reducing the subject to a passive recipient on whom phenomena impose themselves. In contrast, Claude Romano (another contemporary French phenomenologist) responds to the same concerns aboutDasein’s subjective character without limiting the subject to pure receptivity.² By comparing these two responses to the issue of a constituting subject, I will draw attention to some of the

Book Title: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SABINE MAUREEN
Abstract: A provocative, interdisciplinary study of nuns on the big screen, from The Bells of St. Mary's (1945) to Doubt (2008), that shines fresh light on the cinematic nun as a woman and a religious in the twentieth century. Ingrid Bergman's engaging screen performance as Sister Mary Benedict in The Bells of St. Mary's made the film nun a star and her character a shining standard of comparison. She represented the religious life as the happy and rewarding choice of a modern woman who had a "complete understanding" of both erotic and spiritual desire. How did this vibrant and mature nun figure come to be viewed as girlish and naive? Why have she and her cinematic sisters in postwar popular film so often been stereotyped or selectively analyzed, so seldom been seen as women and religious? In Veiled Desires--a unique full-length, in-depth study of nuns in film--Maureen Sabine explores these questions in a groundbreaking interdisciplinary study covering more than sixty years of cinema. She looks at an impressive breadth of films in which the nun features as an ardent lead character, including The Bells of St. Mary's (1945), Black Narcissus (1947), Heaven Knows, Mr. Allison (1957), Sea Wife (1957), The Nun's Story (1959), The Sound of Music (1965), Change of Habit (1969), In This House of Brede (1975), Agnes of God (1985), Dead Man Walking (1995), and Doubt (2008). Veiled Desires considers how the beautiful and charismatic stars who play chaste nuns, from Ingrid Bergman and Audrey Hepburn to Susan Sarandon and Meryl Streep, call attention to desires that the veil concealed and the habit was thought to stifle. In a theologically and psychoanalytically informed argument, Sabine responds to the critics who have pigeonholed the film nun as the obedient daughter and religious handmaiden of a patriarchal church, and the respectful audience who revered her as an icon of spiritual perfection. She provides a framework for a more complex and holistic picture of nuns on screen by showing how the films dramatize these women's Christian call to serve, sacrifice, and dedicate themselves to God, and their erotic desire for intimacy, agency, achievement, and fulfillment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzx0r

Book Title: The Phenomenology of Prayer- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WIRZBA NORMAN
Abstract: This collection of ground-breaking essays considers the many dimensions of prayer: how prayer relates us to the divine; prayer's ability to reveal what is essential about our humanity; the power of prayer to transform human desire and action; and the relation of prayer to cognition. It takes up the meaning of prayer from within a uniquely phenomenological point of view, demonstrating that the phenomenology of prayer is as much about the character and boundaries of phenomenological analysis as it is about the heart of religious life.The contributors: Michael F. Andrews, Bruce Ellis Benson, Mark Cauchi, Benjamin Crowe, Mark Gedney, Philip Goodchild, Christina M. Gschwandtner, Lissa McCullough, Cleo McNelly Kearns, Edward F. Mooney, B. Keith Putt, Jill Robbins, Brian Treanor, Merold Westphal, Norman Wirzba, Terence Wright and Terence and James R. Mensch. Bruce Ellis Benson is Associate Professor of Philosophy at Wheaton College. He is the author of Graven Ideologies: Nietzsche, Derrida, and Marion on Modern Idolatry and The Improvisation of Musical Dialogue: A Phenomenology of Music. Norman Wirzba is Associate Professor and Chair of the Philosophy Department at Georgetown College, Kentucky. He is the author of The Paradise of God and editor of The Essential Agrarian Reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzzs4

10 “Too Deep for Words”: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: Those who interpret deconstruction as another species of nihilism believe that Jacques Derrida preys—specifically, that he preys upon texts like some hermeneutical savage, some rough beast slouching toward the arid desert of relativism, dragging behind him the Holy, the Beautiful, and the Good, in order to drop them rudely into the abyss of epistemological meaninglessness and ontological simulacra.¹ Such interpreters of Derrida would certainly never assume that he would have any sensitivity for religion, or theology, or piety; consequently, they would most definitely never hear “Derrida preys” as “Derrida prays.” Yet such a nihilistic misinterpretation of deconstruction egregiously misreads

11 Plus de Secret: from: The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: St. Augustine begins his Confessionswith a prayer, a prayer that questions how and why we pray: “How shall I call upon my God, my God and Lord?”¹ Much has been said about the epistemological issues raised by prayer, which questions what can be known of God, and of the implications of confessing to an omniscient God who knows of our guilt and our remorse before the confession is given voice.² However, in addition to these individual questions of knowledge, guilt, expiation, and forgiveness, Augustine also questions the collective significance of his confession-cum-prayer and asks, near the end of the

The Benefit of the Doubt: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In recent years, several scholars in the United States have exploited the implications of Continental philosophy for developing new and innovative approaches to religious and theological studies. These thinkers—including but not limited to Carl Raschke, Mark Taylor, Charles Winquist, Edith Wyschogrod, and John Caputoi—have embraced various expressions of European philosophy, not in order to offer simple commentaries on those expressions but to utilize them as raw material for developing a uniquely American species of philosophical theology. These new American philosophical voices speak critically and constructively to the biblical paradigms lying behind Western theory, to the traditional religious and

Appropriating Westphal Appropriating Nietzsche: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) BENSON BRUCE ELLIS
Abstract: In pointing out that Friedrich Nietzsche can be rightly read as a “theological resource,”¹ Merold Westphal has done people of faith a great service: that is, he has read Nietzsche carefully and helped them truly hear Nietzsche’s critique. The result is that Westphal has shown how useful Nietzsche can be for believers (Christians, of course, but not them alone) in thinking about their faith and theology.² Although not uncritical of Nietzsche, Westphal has teased out the implications of Nietzsche’s criticism of Christianity and made a forceful case for Nietzsche being all too often right. It is Nietzsche’s conception of suspicion

Between the Prophetic and the Sacramental from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Merold Westphal has been one of the most significant voices in Continental philosophy of religion in recent years. He, along with Paul Ricoeur, has contributed what might be called a specifically Protestant inflection to the ongoing “theological turn in phenomenology,” a movement that otherwise bears the largely Catholic accent of thinkers such as Marion, Henry, and Chrétien. Yet another contributor to this debate, the theologian David Tracy, has made a useful distinction between what he calls the “sacramental” character of the Catholic vision and the “prophetic” character of the Protestant. He sees both as complementary, the former emphasizing the more

Talking to Balaam’s Ass: from: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: Merold Westphal: I guess there are two ways. First, I haven’t felt the need to think that truth would only be found exclusively in theological contexts. “All truth is God’s truth” means that one may discover truth in contexts that aren’t overtly religious, in subject matter that

Toward a Mutual Hospitality from: The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) IRIGARAY LUCE
Abstract: But cultures of masculine origin have imposed other codes and perspectives, another logic with respect to a natural economy, a living economy. Human children have become separated by artificial boundaries that all, men and women, did not share, did not even understand. Women, the guardians of the ancient laws of hospitality, have been

Book Title: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Custance Gloria
Abstract: Bruno Latour stirs things up. Latour began as a lover of science and technology, co-founder of actor-network theory, and philosopher of a modernity that had "never been modern." In the meantime he is regarded not just as one of the most intelligent and also popular exponents of science studies but also as a major innovator of the social sciences, an exemplary wanderer who walks the line between the sciences and the humanities. This book provides the first comprehensive overview of the Latourian oeuvre, from his early anthropological studies in Abidjan (Ivory Coast), to influential books like Laboratory Life and Science in Action, and his most recent reflections on an empirical metaphysics of "modes of existence." In the course of this enquiry it becomes clear that the basic problem to which Latour's work responds is that of social tradition, the transmission of experience and knowledge. What this empirical philosopher constantly grapples with is the complex relationship of knowledge, time, and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00jv

TWO A Philosopher in the Laboratory from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Latour’s next stop was the Salk Institute for Biological Studies in La Jolla, California. From October 1975 to August 1977, as a participating observer he collected the data on which Laboratory Life, the book he wrote with Steve Woolgar, was based—a pioneering study in the anthropology of science.

FIVE Of Actants, Forces, and Things from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Latour’s conviction that Pasteur and his allies had “redefined the social link” was clearly the result of his focused analysis of late nineteenth-century biological and medical journals. Yet one can also read this statement as the consequence of a conscious decision with political undertones. Or at least this has been suggested by the British science historian Simon Schaffer in a review essay of The Pasteurization of France.

EIGHT The Coming Parliament from: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: The last project that the American architect Louis Kahn worked on was a parliament building complex. It had been in planning since the early 1960s. While he was building the institute in La Jolla, California, for Jonas Salk, where a few years later Latour would conduct his ethnological studies for Laboratory Life, Kahn was already working on the plans for the National Assembly in Dhaka, the capital of today’s Bangladesh. Together with his student Muzharul Islam the architect advanced this mammoth project until his unexpected death from a heart attack in 1974. The Jatiyo Sangsad Bhaban, the National Assembly Building,

Book Title: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Van Stichel Ellen
Abstract: Theological anthropology is being put to the test: in the face of contemporary developments in the spheres of culture, politics, and science, traditional perspectives on the human person are no longer adequate. Yet can theological anthropology move beyond its previously established categories and renew itself in relation to contemporary insights? The present collection of essays sets out to answer this question. Uniting Roman Catholic theologians from across the globe, it tackles from a theological perspective challenges related to the classical natural law tradition (part 1), to the modern conception of the subject (part 2), and to the postmodern awareness of diversity in a globalizing context (part 3). Its contributors share a fundamental methodological choice of a critical-constructive dialogue with contemporary culture, science, and philosophy. This collection integrates a wider range of approaches than one usually finds in theological volumes, bringing together experts in systematic theology and in theological ethics. Authors come from different American contexts, including Black and Latino, and from a European context that include both French and German. Moreover, the interdisciplinary insights upon which the different contributions draw stem from both the natural sciences (such as neuroscience, evolutionary biology, and ethology) and the humanities (such as cultural studies, philosophy, and hermeneutics). This volume will be essential reading for anyone seeking a state-of-the-art account of theological anthropology, of the uncertainties it is facing, and of the responses it is in the process of formulating. The shared Roman Catholic background of the authors of this collection makes this volume a helpful complement to recent publications that predominantly represent views from other theological traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00kc

CHAPTER 4 In God’s Image and Likeness: from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Deane-Drummond Celia
Abstract: One of the most heavily discussed topics in theological anthropology focuses on different interpretations of the meaning of imago Dei, humanity made in the image of God. A deeper knowledge of the common evolutionary heritage of human beings and other creatures has prompted some discussion about whether such a position of seemingly absolute human distinctiveness can still be maintained. Furthermore, mounting ecological awareness, and sensitivity to the shameless exploitation of other animals, points to the potential ethical ambiguity in maintaining a strong sense of human superiority. The divine command in Genesis to exercise human dominion has, at least in some

CHAPTER 8 Difference, Body, and Race from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gonzalez Michelle A.
Abstract: The nature of humanity, our relationship with each other, and our relationship with the sacred is the starting point for reflections on theological anthropology. For centuries Christians have wrestled with defining what makes us particular in light of our humanity yet at the same time interconnected with God’s creation. Musings on this subject range from abstract philosophical speculation, to dialogue with the natural sciences, to a serious consideration of the diversity and complexity of the embodied human condition. Within systematic theology, the study of what it means to be human, created in the image and likeness of God, falls under

CHAPTER 10 Desire, Mimetic Theory, and Original Sin from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Guggenberger Wilhelm
Abstract: Today it is unusual to offer a comprehensive philosophical theory about the nature of human beings, or a theory about the origins of religion, or a theory of human culture in general. The French historian, literary critic, and philosopher René Girard (born 1923) has tried to do all of this with his mimetic theory. Though not a theologian, Girard has dealt in great detail with the biblical tradition—unusual for a secular social scientist. I will present one adoption of his theory into theological research: the “dramatic theology” that originated with the Swiss systematic theologian Raymund Schwager, S.J. (1935–2004),

Turtles All The Way Down?: from: Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Kirchhoffer David G.
Abstract: In this book various scholars explore the new challenges for theological anthropology. They make clear that the developments of the past fifty years in various fields of endeavor should be seen as an invitation, if not indeed as an urgent injunction, “to open our eyes to new ways of being human” (Julie Clague).¹ At the same time, we need to heed the postmodern warning regarding the dangers of engaging in what Henri-Jérôme Gagey called a “giant discourse,” whereby, in our attempt to unite languages into a single coherent understanding of the human person, we end up building a tower of

Book Title: Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Machosky Brenda
Abstract: Taking a phenomenological approach to allegory, Structures of Appearing seeks to revise the history of aesthetics, identifying it as an ideology that has long subjugated art to philosophical criteria of judgment. Rather than being a mere signifying device, allegory is the structure by which something appears that cannot otherwise appear. It thus supports the appearance and necessary experience of philosophical ideas that are otherwise impossible to present or represent. Allegory is as central to philosophy as it is to literature. Following suggestions by Walter Benjamin, Machosky argues that allegory itself must appear allegorically and thus cannot be forced into a logos-centric metaphysical system. She builds on the work of Maurice Blanchot and Emmanuel Levinas to argue that the allegorical image is not a likeness to anything, not a subjective reflection, but an absolute otherness that becomes accessible by virtue of its unique structure. Allegory thus makes possible not merely the textual work of literature but the work that literature is. Machosky develops this insight in readings of Prudentius, Dante, Spenser, Hegel, Goethe, and Kafka.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00w1

INTRODUCTION from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Some of the best philosophers whom I count among my friends are postmodernists. But they do not share my faith. Others of the best philosophers whom I count among my friends share my faith. But they are not postmodernists. Decidedly not. At varying degrees along a spectrum that runs from mildly allergic to wildly apoplectic, they are inclined to see postmodernism as nothing but warmed-over Nietzschean atheism, frequently on the short list of the most dangerous anti-Christian currents of thought as an epistemological relativism that leads ineluctably to moral nihilism. Anything goes. When it comes to postmodern philosophy and Christian

11 Derrida As Natural Law Theorist from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Postmodern philosophy in general and Derridian deconstruction in particular are rightly perceived as the most sustained critique of metaphysics since logical positivism. Since it is within the natural law traditions, ancient, medieval, and modern, that ethics is most unabashedly metaphysical, the title of this essay will appear to many as simply oxymoronic.

14 Nietzsche As a Theological Resource from: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Heidegger himself suggests that there might be theological motives for such an interruption. Speaking ian Pascalian tone of voice about the

Book Title: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: This long-awaited, magisterial study-an unparalleled blend of philosophy, poetry, and philology-draws on theories of sexuality, phenomenology, comparative religion, philological writings on Kabbalah, Russian formalism, Wittgenstein, Rosenzweig, William Blake, and the very physics of the time-space continuum to establish what will surely be a highwater mark in work on Kabbalah. Not only a study of texts, Language, Eros, Being is perhaps the fullest confrontation of the body in Jewish studies, if not in religious studies as a whole.Elliot R. Wolfson explores the complex gender symbolism that permeates Kabbalistic literature. Focusing on the nexus of asceticism and eroticism, he seeks to define the role of symbolic and poetically charged language in the erotically configured visionary imagination of the medieval Kabbalists. He demonstrates that the traditional Kabbalistic view of gender was a monolithic and androcentric one, in which the feminine was conceived as being derived from the masculine. He does not shrink from the negative implications of this doctrine, but seeks to make an honest acknowledgment of it as the first step toward the redemption of an ancient wisdom.Comparisons with other mystical traditions-including those in Christianity, Buddhism, and Islam-are a remarkable feature throughout the book. They will make it important well beyond Jewish studies, indeed, a must for historians of comparative religion, in particular of comparative mysticism.Praise for Elliot R. Wolfson:Through a Speculum That Shines is an important and provocative contribution to the study of Jewish mysticism by one of the major scholars now working in this field.-Speculum
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01nw

CHAPTER TWO Differentiating (In)Difference: from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: To the extent that thinking poetically is embodied thinking, and it does not seem possible to conceive of human embodiment that is not gendered—even the construct of an immaterial body that has figured prominently in many theological mythologems is engendered—it is necessary to delve into the matter of gender construction in kabbalistic lore before we proceed to an exposition of the erotic nature of poiesis through the prism of the poetic nature of eros. The preliminary discussion will span two chapters, the first on the larger question of gender and the study of kabbalah, itself cast into something

CHAPTER THREE Phallomorphic Exposure: from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: As I intimated in the preceding chapter, the project of reshaping the feminine in contemporary liturgical discourse—and thereby destabilizing the male-centered symbolic that has dominated Judaism—can proceed without relying on philological and historical research, but the re/envisioning is proportionately impoverished to the degree that it neglects or obfuscates the tradition it purports to reflect. I am not so naïve as to ignore the fact that shared existential circumstances impact the reader’s interpretative stance. On the contrary, I readily acknowledge that the reader is prejudiced by hermeneutical assumptions that mirror a complex web of factors ranging from the socioeconomic

CHAPTER FOUR Male Androgyne: from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: As a number of biblicists and historians of religion have noted, the monotheistic ideal that evolved in ancient Israel was inextricably bound to the patriarchal rejection of the female element within the divine. Raphael Pattai observed in the introduction to his monographic study on the Hebrew Goddess, “In view of the general human, psychologically determined predisposition to believe in and worship goddesses, it would be strange if the Hebrew-Jewish religion, which flourished for centuries in a region of intensive goddess cults, had remained immune to them. Yet this precisely is the picture one gets when one views Hebrew religion through

CHAPTER FIVE Flesh Become Word: from: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: For kabbalists in the late Middle Ages, in consonance with contemporaneous patterns of Christian and Islamic piety but especially the former, the body was a site of tension, the locus of sensual and erotic pleasure on the one hand, and the earthly pattern of God’s image, the representation of what lies beyond representation, the mirror that renders visible the invisible, on the other. Given the intractable state of human consciousness as embodied—not to be understood, as I will elaborate below, along the lines of Cartesian dualism of mind/body but rather in Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenological sense of the embodied mind/mindful body—

CHAPTER 9 Derrida’s Ethics of Irresponsibilization; or, How to Get Irresponsible, in Two Easy Lessons from: For Derrida
Abstract: What in the world does Derrida mean by saying “the ethical can therefore end up making us irresponsible [ L’ethique peut donc être destinée à irresponsabiliser]” (GD, 61; DM, 89)? That is my central question in this chapter. It was first prepared for a conference on “irresponsibility” held at Nanyang Technological University from September 28 to September 30, 2006, though only the few first sentences plus the second half were presented there. My goal is to show how one gets irresponsible, how one irresponsibilizes oneself. I shall get help from Derrida, especially hisThe Gift of Death. I need all the

Book Title: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Vatter Miguel
Abstract: Tocqueville suggested that the people reign in the American political world like God over the universe.This intuition anticipates the crisis in the secularization paradigm that has brought theology back as a fundamental part of sociological and political analysis. It has become more difficult to believe that humanity's progress necessarily leads to atheism, or that it is possible to translate all that is good about religion into reasonable terms acceptable in principle by all, believers as well as nonbelievers. And yet, the spread of Enlightenment values, of an independent public sphere, and of alternative projects of modernitycontinues unabated and is by no means the antithesis of the renewed vigor of religious beliefs.The essays in this book shed interdisciplinary and multicultural light on a hypothesis that helps to account for such an unexpected convergence of enlightenment and religion in our times: Religion has reentered the public sphere because it puts into question the relation between God and the concept of political sovereignty.In the first part, Religion and Polity-Building,new perspectives are brought to bear on the tension-ridden connection between theophany and state-building from the perspective of world religions. Globalized, neo-liberal capitalism has been another crucial factor in loosening the bond between God and the state, as the essays in the second part, The End of the Saeculum and Global Capitalism,show.The essays in the third part, Questioning Sovereignty: Law and Justice,are dedicated to a critique of the premises of political theology, starting from the possibility of a prior, perhaps deeper relation between democracy and theocracy. The book concludes with three innovative essays dedicated to examining Tocqueville in order to think the Religion of Democracybeyond the idea of civil religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x026n

CHAPTER 3 A Republic Whose Sovereign Is the Creator: from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Trigano Shmuel
Abstract: There are many ideological and epistemological obstacles to understanding the politics of Judaism. Its foundational text, the Torah, both in regard to its biblical-Talmudic meaning and in regard to the historical condition of the Jews, has long been prone to misunderstanding. In order to approach the question of politics in Judaism, one must abandon the perception that this politics is theocratic. Since Flavius Josephus positively defined Israel’s political specificity in comparison with monarchic and oligarchic regimes in his book Against Apion, theocracy has become equivalent to the very negation of the political. Spinoza’sTheological-Political Treatisehas established this negative understanding

CHAPTER 5 Religion and the Public Sphere in Senegal: from: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Diagne Souleymane Bachir
Abstract: Those who led Senegal to independence and established the institutions of the new state, notably Léopold Sédar Senghor and Mamadou Dia, intended it to be based on the philosophical foundation of a socialism that would be both African and spiritualist. And they also meant it to be secular. African socialism, spirituality, secularism, those were the concepts that were to guide the state toward modernity and development. Socialism had transformed Russia into a world power; it was at work in China and elsewhere to bring progress to the lives of the “damned of the earth.” It was logical to think that

Book Title: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Horner Robyn
Abstract: Rethinking God as Gift is situated at the intersection of philosophy, critical theory and theology. The first sustained study of the work of Jean-Luc Marion in English, it offers a unique perspective on contemporary questions and their theological relevance. Taking its point of departure from the problem of the gift as articulated by Jacques Derrida, who argues that the conditions of possibility of the gift are also its conditions of impossibility, Horner pursues a series of questions concerning the nature of thought, the viability of phenomenology, and, most urgently, the possibility of grace. For Marion, phenomenology, as the thought of the given, offers a path for philosophy to proceed without being implicated in metaphysics. His retrieval of several important insights of Edmund Husserl, along with his reading of Martin Heidegger and Emmanuel Lvinas, enables him to work out a phenomenology where even impossiblephenomena such as revelation and the gift might be examined. In this important confrontation between Marion and Derrida issues vital to the negotiation of postmodern concerns in philosophy and theology emerge with vigour. The careful elucidation of those issues in an interdisciplinary context, and the snapshot it provides of the state of contemporary debate, make Rethinking God as Gift an important contribution to theological and philosophical discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02dr

2 Husserl and Heidegger from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: A concise way of defining phenomenology is to say that it is characterized by two questions: What is given (to consciousness)? and How (or according to what horizon) is it given? While what is given may not necessarily be a gift, it is already evident from the framing of this definition that the question of the gift will not be irrelevant in this context. Just how that is so will become clearer in later chapters. For the moment, however, it is sufficient to note that the reading of the gift that Marion propounds aims to be a strictly phenomenological one,

3 Levinas from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: The work of Emmanuel Levinas is important in this context for three reasons: first, because it is a dialogue with and a departure from the thinking of both Husserl and Heidegger; second, because it marks a further application and development of the phenomenological method; and third, because in each of the aforementioned respects it has had enormous influence on Jean-Luc Marion.¹ In my examination of Levinas I will order my comments according to these aspects of his relevance.

4 Refiguring Givenness from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: Phenomenology has been broadly characterized as the study of phenomena as they give themselves to consciousness, but clearly there are many interpretations of what such a study might entail. For Husserl, it seems phenomenology aims to observe what is given in presence to consciousness; for Heidegger, phenomenology has as its object the uncovering of what gives itself in “presencing”; for Levinas, phenomenology, in its failure, alerts us to what gives by exceeding conscious thematization. Paying heed to each of these three styles as well as others, Marion develops his phenomenological approach. In doing so, he maintains that what he achieves

7 Rethinking the Gift I from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: In accordance with both Christian tradition and his vision of phenomenology, Marion answers the question of how God might enter into human thought in terms of the gift. For Marion there is an essential coherence, if not a correlation, between what takes place at the outer limits of thought and what theology identifies as the inbreaking of God in human life. Derrida, on the other hand, is less convinced of the capacity of phenomenology to work at these outer limits, and is suspicious of what a theological hermeneutics promises to deliver. Nevertheless, as we find Marion more and more insistent

EPILOGUE: from: Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: The question with which I have been occupied throughout this study is a theological one: how is it possible to speak of God as gift? And the path that has been traveled in response to that question perhaps seems to have had little to do with theology as such. Yet if Anselm’s famous definition of theology as “faith seeking understanding” is in any way valid, then this book has not been far from theology at all, at least in the sense that it is an attempt to understand what it might mean for God to give Godself. That the resources

CHAPTER 1 Developments in Character: from: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: “Reading” is a term that, through overuse, can easily become confused with interpretation. In fact, there is a crucial difference: Reading involves the undoing of interpretative figures; because it is not an operation opposed to the understanding but rather a precondition for it, it allows us to question whether the synthetic moves of the understanding can close off a text. It leads away from meaning to such problems as the text’s constitution and meaning generation. Unlike interpretation, which implies a development over the course of a narrative toward a single figure reconciling all its diverse moments, reading states the logic

Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j

Book Title: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: Exploring the risks, ambiguities, and unstable conceptual worlds of contemporary thought, Crossover Queries brings together the wide-ranging writings, across twenty years, of one of our most important philosophers.Ranging from twentieth-century European philosophy-the thought of Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida, Levinas, Janicaud, and others-to novels and artworks, music and dance, from traditional Jewish thought to Jain andBuddhist metaphysics, Wyschogrod's work opens radically new vistas while remaining mindful that the philosopher stands within and is responsible to a philosophical legacy conditioned by the negative.Rather than point to a Hegelian dialectic of overcoming negation or to a postmetaphysical exhaustion, Wyschogrod treats negative moments as opening novel spaces for thought. She probes both the desire for God and an ethics grounded in the interests of the other person, seeing these as moments both of crossing over and of negation. Alert to the catastrophes that have marked our times, she exposes the underlying logical structures of nihilatory forces that have been exerted to exterminate whole peoples. Analyzing the negationsof biological research and cultural images of mechanized and robotic bodies, she shows how they contest the body as lived in ordinary experience.Crossover Queries brings together important essays on a remarkable range of topics by one of our most insightful cultural critics. Commenting on philosophical and theological issues that have shaped the recent past as well as scientific and technological questions that will preoccupy us in the near future, Wyschogrod consistently alerts us to the urgency of problems whose importance few recognize. To avoid the challenge these essays pose is to avoid responsibility for a future that appears to be increasingly fragile.-Mark C. Taylor, Columbia University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0385

1 Intending Transcendence: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: In what may seem a paradoxical claim, Edmund Husserl maintains that the “rich use of fancy” in art and poetry can contribute significantly to phenomenological philosophy conceived as a rigorous science. Phenomenology “can draw extraordinary profit” from the gifts of these arts, which “in the abundance of detailed features … greatly excel the performances of our own fancy,‭” as Husserl declares ( Ideas, 184). In consonance with this claim, it may be useful to turn (briefly) to contemporary Italian artist Francesco Clemente’sInside/Outside, an artwork that mimes the apophatic discourse of negative theology in its attempt to render visually that which

2 Corporeality and the Glory of the Infinite in the Philosophy of Levinas from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: In the opening line of Arnold Schoenberg’s opera Moses and Aron, Moses stammers, “Only one, eternal, thou omnipresent one, invisible and inconceivable,” thereby invoking a God who cannot appear, be pictured or mediated through images. The suspicion of theophany echoes a significant strand in Western theological thinking. Yet the lure of theophany, the appearing of God or a god to a human being, persists, as the protest of the Israelites in Schoenberg’s opera attests: “To worship whom? Where is he? I see him not” (MaA, 61).

3 Postmodern Saintliness: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: What must saintliness be if we are to think of it as postmodern? Does the term postmodernismnot refer to a dizzying array of ever-shifting significations attributable to aesthetic styles and cultural practices? I shall focus upon postmodernism as a revolt against modes of rationality that make foundational claims, that is, as an attack upon what Jean-François Lyotard calls “grand narratives,” by which he means comprehensive epistemological schema, as well as all-encompassing theories of emancipation. In preference to the logics of modernity in their idealist and empiricist expressions, postmodern thinkers embrace what I should like to call an epistemic erotics,

5 Recontextualizing the Ontological Argument: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: I read Lacan. I ask myself: What is this good for? It is good for nothing. If so, can this be proved? I will try. I will not know, you will not know, if I am successful. In Lacanian terms, if I have succeeded, I have failed; if I fail, I have succeeded. Doch, I shall apply Lacanian techniques to one of Western theology’s most frequently and strenuously examined texts, Anselm’s ontological argument. By remapping the proof, I hope, with Lacanian audacity, to bring forth unforeseen significations and a new approach to the psychoanalytic interpretation of religious texts.

6 Asceticism as Willed Corporeality: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Heidegger and Foucault can be envisioned as thinkers of emancipatory askeses, disciplines of liberation in which each may be seen as engaged in freeing knowledge and truth from embedding contexts of repressive epistemological constraints and their ancillary ethical implications, a freeing through which a certain release is attained.¹ Techniques in which historical accretions are not merely jettisoned but reenvisioned are deployed by Heidegger to deliver the relation of Being and beings in what he calls a concealing-revealing and by Foucault to uncover the disguises truth wears by bringing to light the strategic power relations that generate the practices of knowledge,

8 The Howl of Oedipus, the Cry of Héloïse: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Asceticism is a complex of widely varying practices, beliefs, and motives that have appeared in particular historical and cultural contexts. It is, to use the language of art criticism, site-specific. If the historical and phenomenological integrity of asceticism’s many manifestations is to be preserved, it is beyond dispute that ascetic phenomena must be allowed to emerge in discrete material and psychosocial meaning constellations.¹

14 The Warring Logics of Genocide from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: The very mention of genocide usually elicits a shudder, a frissonof horror, of psychological revulsion and moral outrage. Images of mass annihilation, of the dead and dying that the term evokes are especially troubling, since genocidal killing, now endemic to the world of postmodernity, is envisioned as a slaughter of innocents. It is understood that those earmarked for destruction are selected on the basis of criteria that lie outside the standard rules of conduct in war, even if genocidal events occur in the context of what is designated conventionally as war. Genocidal killing is often justified by its perpetrators

17 Exemplary Individuals: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Efforts to develop a phenomenological ethics have until now begun from two altogether different starting points. The first, a tack taken by Max Scheler, Nicolai Hartmann, and others, assumes that values are instantiated in the world and have properties that open them to intuitive grasp. Values are independent in being and accessible to us without being attached to things.¹ The second starts with the embodied existent’s actual encounters with other persons and finds in these transactions an empirical locus for what is prescribed or forbidden in the moral realm. Levinas turns to the experience of the other to develop a

20 Heterological History: from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Author(s) RASCHKE CARL
Abstract: In The Ethics of Remembering, Edith Wyschogrod applies the familiar postmodernist concept of “heterology”—the study of Otherness or “alterity”—to the philosophy of history. The following conversation with Carl Raschke explores the notion of “heterological history,” as Wyschogrod delineates it, in relationship to a variety of contemporary philosophical and theological themes.

28 Time and Nonbeing in Derrida and Quine from: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Contemporary philosophers may be divided into two classes: those who believe in normative epistemological discourse governed by canons of objectivity and rationality continuous with those of science, and those who think of cognitive discourse as one among many claimants to meaning. Richard Rorty argues that, if there is “no common commensurating ground between them, all we can do is be hermeneutic about the opposition.”¹ In this interpretation, it is futile to try to breach the distinctive discursive modes and ontological claims separating the work of Quine and Derrida. Quine belongs in the systematic cognitive camp, since he thinks the criteria

Book Title: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Interstices of the Sublime represents a powerful theological engagement with psychoanalytic theory in Freud, Lacan, Kristeva and Zizek, as well as major expressions of contemporary Continental philosophy, including Deleuze, Derrida, Marion, and Badiou. Through creative and constructive psycho-theological readings of topics such as sublimation, schizophrenia, God, and creation ex nihilo, this book contributes to a new form of radical theological thinking that is deeply involved in the world. Here the idea of the Kantian sublime is read into Freud and Lacan, and compared with sublimation. The sublime refers to a conflict of the Kantian faculties of reason and imagination, and involves the attempt to represent what is intrinsically unrepresentable. Sublimation, by contrast, involves the expression and partial satisfaction of primal desires in culturally acceptable terms. The sublime is negatively expressed in sublimation, because it is both the sourceof sublimation as well as that which resists being sublimated. That is, the Freudian sublime is related to the process of sublimation, but it also distorts or disrupts sublimation, and invokes what Lacan calls the Real. The effects of the sublime are not just psychoanalytic but, importantly, theological, because the sublime is the main form that Godtakes in the modern world. A radical postmodern theology attends to the workings of the sublime in our thinking and living, and provides resources to understand the complexity of reality. This book is one of the first sustained theological readings of Lacan in English.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x03fr

Introduction from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In this book I conduct an investigation of important religious, theological, and psychoanalytic concepts, primarily through a reading of sublimation. Sublimation is a privileged term that is closely connected with the notion of the sublime, a Kantian term that also has psychoanalytic and theological connotations. Investigating sublimation and the sublime as important terms for theological discourse brings together psychoanalytic theory from Freud to Lacan, Kristeva, and Žižek along with more conventional philosophical discourses, including contemporary continental philosophy. To orient ourselves toward considering the significance of psychoanalysis for thinking about religious and theological topics, I will begin with a concrete example

1 On Sublimation from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Amid the multitudinous variety of historical, ethnographic, and cultural studies taking place within the academy, one can detect a certain crisis or at least confusion regarding theoretical discourse about religion. This confusion refers to the felt discord among heterogeneous languages and incommensurable modes of description and questioning. Such languages include traditional theology, analytic philosophy of religion, hermeneutics and other symbolic-semiotic languages, methodological approaches to the history of religions, and various forms of postmodernism. This confusion is felt at the same time as religion is being taken up by many philosophers and theorists as an important topic for understanding, in part

2 We Are All Mad from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Schizophrenia usually refers to the most representative case of psychoanalytic or psychiatric pathology or psychosis. Taken as a problem, however, schizophrenia concerns not simply a medical diagnosis but a condition that implicates all of human culture and signification.¹ In this chapter I do not want to settle the question of schizophrenia by locating it or attributing it to a particular and determinate region of discourse, be it political, cosmological, or psychological. I want rather to write schizophrenia large as a profound problem that is ultimately a theological problem. In this effort I want to resist any simple assimilation of theological

4 Foreclosing God from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Despite his explicit separation of the concepts of God and Being, Martin Heidegger, in his later philosophy, treats them with a certain structural similarity.¹ That is, both God and Being lie beyond the calculating attempts to possess and wield them by a technological society bent on mastery. At the same time, however, this very technological epoch is a determination of Being, or in the Beiträge zur Philosophie, a result of the “flight of the last God.”² TheBeiträge, unpublished until 1989, lays out a foundation for Heidegger’s later thought, and provides the connection upon which the “turning” (Kehre) fromDasein

5 Anxiety and the S(ub)lime Body of God from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In his early career, Freud understood anxiety as a response to repression, but in a later work he reversed himself, arguing that anxiety is primary. In this chapter I argue that anxiety is fundamentally related to the body as well as to jouissance, which refers to a fascination with the process of expelling body to create a subject orcogito. This bodily remainder, which sometimes takes the form of slime, generates enormous anxiety, at the individual, social, and theological levels. Following Lacan’s formulas of sexuation distinguishing between the exception (man) and the not-all (woman), Slavoj Žižek applies this distinction to

8 God Without Being (God) from: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: With the publication and translation of God Without Being, Jean-Luc Marion has emerged as one of the significant voices in postmodern theology. In response to Heidegger, Marion provides a thinking of God that exceeds ontological difference or the distinction between being and

Saints and the Heterological Historian from: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) OCHS PETER
Abstract: In An Ethics of Remembering,¹ Edith Wyschogrod draws from out of the sensibilities of postmodernism a means for the historian to attend, after all, to the voice of the suffering other in history. Her remarkable argument may leave one question unanswered: how, in the end, do we learn from what she calls “the heterological historian” how to respond to the needs of this otherwise forgotten voice? I believe this apparent omission may be more adequately identified as a sign of modesty, of two sorts. I will suggest that, if we press the logic of her argument in ways she does

Book Title: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: What does theology have to say about the place of eroticism in the salvific transformation of men and women, even of the cosmos itself? How, in turn, does eros infuse theological practice and transfigure doctrinal tropes? Avoiding the well-worn path of sexual moralizing while also departing decisively from Anders Nygren's influential insistence that Christian agape must have nothing to do with worldly eros, this book explores what is still largely uncharted territory in the realm of theological erotics. The ascetic, the mystical, the seductive, the ecstatic-these are the places where the divine and the erotic may be seen to converge and love and desire to commingle.Inviting and performing a mutual seduction of disciplines, the volume brings philosophers, historians, biblical scholars, and theologians into a spirited conversation that traverses the limits of conventional orthodoxies, whether doctrinal or disciplinary. It seeks new openings for the emergence of desire, love, and pleasure, while challenging common understandings of these terms. It engages risk at the point where the hope for salvation paradoxically endangers the safety of subjects-in particular, of theological subjects-by opening them to those transgressions of eros in which boundaries, once exceeded, become places of emerging possibility.The eighteen chapters, arranged in thematic clusters, move fluidly among and between premodern and postmodern textual traditions-from Plato to Emerson, Augustine to Kristeva, Mechthild to Mattoso, the Shulammite to Molly Bloom, the Zohar to the Da Vinci Code. In so doing, they link the sublime reaches of theory with the gritty realities of politics, the boundless transcendence of God with the poignant transience of materiality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x040h

Introduction: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BURRUS VIRGINIA
Abstract: What does theology have to say about the place of eroticism in the salvific transformation of human subjects, even of the cosmos itself? How, in turn, does eros infuse theological practice and transfigure doctrinal tropes? Veering off the well-worn path of sexual moralizing, this volume explores what is still largely uncharted territory in the realm of theological erotics even as it also deliberately disrupts the disciplinary boundaries of theology. Indeed, it invites and performs a mutual seduction of disciplines—theology, philosophy, scripture, history—at multiple sites charged by desires at once bodily, spiritual, intellectual, and political. It seeks new openings

For the Love of God: from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) COSTA MARIO
Abstract: First, the tendency to theorize desire or erotic love overwhelmingly in terms of lack and death is conditioned by, because it coincides with, the death of God and the abandonment of metaphysics. If metaphysical or ontotheological construals of desire

American Transcendentalism’s Erotic Aquatecture from: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) CORRINGTON ROBERT S.
Abstract: There are two high-water marks in the self-unfolding of the depths of nature within Euro-American thought. The earlier occurred in the neo-Plotinian transfiguration of our experience of infinitizing nature in the metaphorical undulations concresced in the writings of RalphWaldo Emerson. The latter emerged in the dazzling architectonic of the creator of pragmaticism and the greater triadic tradition of semiotics, Charles Sanders Peirce—overpowering the subsequent dyadic semiological trajectory inspired by Saussure. For Emerson, the astonishing and fecund power of nature naturing held forth the fitful and often explosive power of the great One, while for Peirce sheer firstness, the predyadic

1 Martin Heidegger and Onto-theo-logy from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: There has been much speculation about the religious influences on Heidegger’s thought and on the religious potential of his work. Several theologians, such as Rudolf Bultmann, Karl Rahner, and Paul Tillich, were inspired by his philosophy and used it extensively in their own writings. Janicaud himself makes Heidegger to some extent responsible for the religious turn, while drawing on other aspects of Heidegger’s thought for his desire to keep philosophy pure and safe from theological contamination.¹ Heidegger’s corpus is vast indeed and I will make no attempt to treat it in its entirety here. Rather, I will focus on the

5 Jean-Luc Marion: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion (born in 1946) is emerging as an important contemporary French philosopher. Deeply influenced by the philosophies of Husserl, Heidegger, and Lévinas, he has formulated a radical phenomenological project that focuses on the questions of God, religious experience, and the relation between self and other (in terms of a new version of the self and in terms of love). Marion studied at the École Normale Superieur and the Sorbonne and worked closely with both Lévinas and Henry. He is presently teaching at the Institut catholique in Paris, is John Nuveen Professor at the divinity school of the University of

8 Jean-Yves Lacoste: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste is a French philosopher and theologian, currently affiliated with the University of Cambridge in England. He is chief editor of the Critical Dictionary of Theology(2004). Lacoste is strongly influenced by Heidegger, although at times also quite critical of him. His phenomenological interest is focused on liturgy and beauty, although his style of presentation is rather different from that of Chrétien who writes on some similar topics. His books includeExperience and the Absolute: Disputed Questions on the Humanity of Man, a book on art (Le Monde et l’absence de l’oeuvre), and two collections that include many articles

9 Emmanuel Falque: from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Emmanuel Falque (born in 1963), along with Jean-Louis Chrétien, belongs to the next generation of French thinkers. He was a student of Jean-Luc Marion and Jean Greisch and is presently dean of the faculty of philosophy at the Institut catholique in Paris. He has degrees in both philosophy and theology and merges the two disciplines far more fully than any of the other thinkers, occasionally even challenging the boundaries between these subject matters as unnecessary and superficial.¹ Falque’s work is especially characterized by a phenomenological reading of theological doctrines and thinkers. His dissertation was a phenomenological reading of Bonaventure ( Saint

10 Postmodern Apologetics? from: Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Each of the chapters in this part of the book has identified apologetic elements in the work of the thinkers discussed. Before examining some of their appropriations in the North American context in more detail, it might be worthwhile to consider this apologetic or quasi-apologetic character more fully. Are these projects apologetic ones? Do they “defend” the divine and argue on behalf of faith? Certainly their arguments for God are not arguments in the traditional (modern) sense. They are primarily phenomenological depictions of religious experience in a variety of registers. Their depictions do not always agree, although there are indeed

CHAPTER 3 Layering: from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Mugerauer Robert
Abstract: Among the most challenging issues facing environmental hermeneutics is how to think about person-world relationships in an integrated manner—not by way of conceptually separated natural environments and social spheres—as if there were either some “pure nature” untouched by our interpretations and actions or any human life apart from environmental dynamics. Rather, the interactions of the physiochemical and biological, the individuating and communal dimensions—at all scales—provide our subject matter. For instance, it makes little sense to carry on studying “sense of place” and “identity” as we have been, assuming that these phenomena are stable and that the

CHAPTER 8 Bodily Moods and Unhomely Environments: from: Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Trigg Dylan
Abstract: Shortly after his coach was nearly thrown into the Seine while crossing the Neuilly-sur- SeineBridge in 1654, the French philosopher Blaise Pascal became convinced that an abyss had formed on his left-hand side. Quite apart from the logical improbability that such an abyss was real, this near miss of the Seine had set in a place a reality of Pascal’s own, and one that was entirely independent of the objective properties of the world. Such was the extent of his anxiety that for a while Pascal would require a chair beside him to feel reassurance that he was not on

Book Title: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stagaman David
Abstract: Three of the most influential Catholic theologians of the twentieth century-Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner-were all born in 1904, at the height of the Church's most militant rhetoric against all things modern. In this culture of suspicion, Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner grew in faith to join the Society of Jesus and struggled with the burden of antimodernist policies in their formation. By the time of their mature work in the 1950s and 1960s, they had helped to redefine the critical dialogue between modern thought and contemporary Catholic theology. After the dtente of the Second Vatican Council, they brought Catholic tradition into closer relationship to modern philosophy, history, and politics. Written by leading scholars, friends, and family members, these original essays celebrate the legacies of Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner after a century of theological development. Offering a broad range of perspectives on their lives and works, the essays blend personal and anecdotal accounts with incisive critical appraisals. Together, they offer an accessible introduction to the distinctive character of three great thinkers and how their work shapes the way Catholics think and talk about God, Church, and State.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04wz

3. The Passionateness of Being: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Byrne Patrick H.
Abstract: It is daunting to be asked to communicate why Bernard Lonergan is such an important thinker. The magnitude of his achievement is great, and I owe a great personal debt for all that I have learned from him. Over the course of his life, Lonergan wrote extensively and profoundly about an amazing range of topics—painting and music; economics and politics; epistemology, metaphysics, and ethics; quantum mechanics and relativity theory; statistics and evolution; sexuality and marriage; logic, ordinary language, and symbolic meaning; religion and feelings; common sense; the theory of history; sin, grace, and the theology of the Christian doctrines

6. John Courtney Murray’s American Stories from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Schuck Michael J.
Abstract: John Courtney Murray died well before this academic interest in narrative and story effervesced. His scholarly imagination was animated by the philosophia perennisand by Roman Catholic philosophical, theological, and historical debates adjoining the Second

9. Murray: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Hughson Thomas
Abstract: Catholics and other Christians most likely know John Courtney Murray as a protagonist in the production of the Declaration on Religious Freedom at the Second Vatican Council, published almost forty years ago. Its significance for the public life of Catholicism in religiously pluralist societies remains hard to overestimate. Social ethics, fundamental theology, practical theology, public theology, and communications are theological specialties that also have found substance in his writings.

13. Rahner, von Balthasar and the Question of Theological Aesthetics: from: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Voiss James
Abstract: Following the Second Vatican Council, Karl Rahner dominated the Roman Catholic theological landscape. His ideas on grace and human freedom opened horizons for theological inquiry at which preconciliar theologies only hinted. The generation of theologians following Rahner drew heavily on his insights. More recently, another figure has achieved ascendancy. With his massive, The Glory of the Lord,¹ Hans Urs von Balthasar has attempted to redraw the map of the theological landscape. What Rahnerians found to be oases of hope, Balthasar has recast as “mirage” and desolation. Many who felt ill at ease with aspects of Rahner’s thought have embraced Balthasar’s

Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5

Book Title: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: This important book brings together in one volume a collection of illuminating encounters with some of the most important philosophers of our age-by one of its most incisive and innovative critics.For more than twenty years, Richard Kearney has been in conversation with leading philosophers, literary theorists, anthropologists, and religious scholars. His gift is eliciting memorably clear statements about their work from thinkers whose writings can often be challenging in their complexity. Here, he brings together twenty-one originally published extraordinary conversations-his 1984 collection Dialogues: The Phenomenological Heritage, his 1992 Visions of Europe: Conversations on the Legacy and Future of Europe, and his 1995 States of Mind: Dialogues with Contemporary Thinkers. Featured interviewees include Stanislas Breton, Umberto Eco, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Herbert Marcus, George Steiner, Julia Kristeva, Emmanuel Levinas, and Jean-Fran?ois Lyotard. To this classic core, he adds recent interviews, previously unpublished, with Paul Ricoeur, Jean-Luc Marion, Jacques Derrida, and George DumZzil, as well as six colloquies about his own work.Wide-ranging and accessible, these interviews provide a fascinating guide to the ideas, concerns, and personalities of thinkers who have shaped modern intellec-tual life. This book will be an essential point of entry for students, teachers, scholars, and anyone seeking to understand contemporary culture.ContentsPrefacePart One: Recent DebatesJacques Derrida: Terror, Religion, and the New PoliticsJean-Luc Marion: The Hermeneutics of RevelationPaul Ricour: (a) On Life Stories (b) On The Crisis of Authority (c) The Power of the Possible (d) Imagination, Testimony, and TrustGeorges Dumzil: Myth, Ideology, SovereigntyPart Two: From Dialogues: The Phenomenological Heritage, 1984Emmanuel Levinas: Ethics of the InfiniteHerbert Marcuse: The Philosophy of Art and PoliticsPaul Ricour: (a) The Creativity of Language (b) Myth as the Bearer of Possible WorldsStanislas Breton: Being, God, and the Poetics of RelationJacques Derrida: Deconstruction and the OtherPart Three: From States of Mind, 1995Julia Kristeva: Strangers to Ourselves: The Hope of the SingularHans Georg Gadamer: Text MattersJean-Franois Lyotard: What Is Just?George Steiner: Culture-The Price You PayPaul Ricour: Universality and the Power of DifferenceUmberto Eco: Chaosmos: The Return to the Middle AgesPart Four: Colloquies with Richard KearneyVillanova Colloquy: Against OmnipotenceAthens Colloquy: Between Selves and OthersHalifax Colloquy: Between Being and God Stony Brook Colloquy: Confronting ImaginationBoston Colloquy: Theorizing the GiftDublin Colloquy: Thinking Is DangerousAppendix: Philosophy as Dialogue
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05cp

Myth, Ideology, Sovereignty from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Dumézil Georges
Abstract: Gd: My work is primarily linguistic, or, to be more precise, philological. That is, the classification and interpretation of ancient myths in terms of

The Poetics of Language and Myth from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Pr: In La Métaphore vive, I tried to show how language could extend itself to its very limits, forever discovering new resonances within itself. The termvive(living) in the title of this work is all-important, for it was my purpose to demonstrate that there is not just an epistemological and political imagination, but also, and perhaps more fundamentally, aLinguisticimagination which generates

Being, God, and the Poetics of Relation from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Breton Stanislas
Abstract: Rk: Your philosophical journey has been wide-ranging. You have published works on such diverse topics as Neoplatonism, Thomism, Marxism, phenomenology, logic, and poetics. What would you consider to be the unifying threads in this tapestry of intellectual interests?

Theorizing the Gift from: Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) MANOLOPOULOS MARK
Abstract: Rk: They did avoid the question. In Derrida’s case, that is logical, because he will always—reasonably for a deconstructionist—try to avoid tying the messianicity of the gift to any messianism as such, be it Christian, Jewish, Islamic, or any other kind. So it makes sense for him not

Book Title: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garfitt Toby
Abstract: Gathering in one place a cohesive selection of articles that deepen our sense of the vitality and controversy within the Catholic renewal of the mid-twentieth century, God's Mirror offers historical analysis of French Catholic intellectuals. This volume highlights the work of writers, thinkers and creative artists who have not always drawn the attention given to such luminaries as Maritain, Mounier, and Marcel. Organized around the typologies of renewal and engagement, editors Katherine Davies and Toby Garfitt provide a revisionist and interdisciplinary reading of the narrative of twentieth-century French Catholicism. Renewal and engagement are both manifestations of how the Catholic intellectual reflects and takes position on the relationship between the Church, personal faith and the world, and on the increasingly problematic relationship between intellectuals and the Magisterium. A majority of the writings are based on extensive research into published texts, with some occasional archival references, and they give critical insights into the tensions that characterized the theological and political concerns of their subjects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05fq

Introduction from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Garfitt Toby
Abstract: Balthasar’s theological aesthetics represented a blow struck at the intellectualization and conceptualization of faith—neo-scholasticism

3 A Strange Christian: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) de Lussy Florence
Abstract: Her strangeness stemmed largely from a combination of her family and cultural background, as well as her own psychological and personal qualities, but her education also played a determining role. She was a born militant, and

6 From Mystique to Théologique: from: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Consult any concert program, review, or advertising for the music of Olivier Messiaen: very likely some variation of the word “mystic” will appear as an identifier or modifier. Partly, this is simply modernity’s lack of an appropriate category. One of the most recent examples is a book review that appeared in 2010 in the Journal of the British Institute of Organ Studies: “The title [Messiaen the Theologian] is perhaps (deliberately?) provocative: as the contributors demonstrate, Messiaen was profoundly influenced by certain theological traditions. Yet it is slightly implausible to ascribe to a composer the didactic, essentially word-based role of ‘theologian’;

Book Title: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stahlberg Lesleigh Cushing
Abstract: Scrolls of Love is a book of unions. Edited by a Jew and a Christian who are united by a shared passion for the Bible and a common literary hermeneutic, it joins two biblical scrolls and gathers around them a diverse community of interpreters. It brings together Ruth and the Song of Songs, two seemingly disparate texts of the Hebrew Bible, and reads them through a number of the methodological and theological perspectives. Respectful of traditional biblical scholarship, the collection of essays moves beyond it; alert to contemporary trends, the volume returns venerable interpretive tradition to center stage. Most significantly, it is interfaith. Despite the fact that Jews and Christians share a common text in the Hebrew Scripture, the two communities have read their Bibles in isolation from one another, in ignorance of the richness of the other's traditions of reading. Scrolls of Love brings the two traditions into dialogue, enriching established modes of interpretation with unconventional ones. The result is a volume that sets rabbinic, patristic, and medieval readings alongside feminist, psychoanalytic, and autobiographical ones, combining historical, literary, and textual criticism with a variety of artistic reinterpretations-wood cuts and paper cuts, poetry and fiction. Some of the works are scholarly, with the requisite footnotes to draw readers to further inquiry: others are more reflective than analytic, allowing readers to see what it means to live intimately with Scripture. As a unity, the collection presents Ruth and Song of Songs not only as ancient texts that deserve to be treasured but as old worlds capable of begetting the new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0610

INTRODUCTION from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Stahlberg Lesleigh Cushing
Abstract: Scrolls of Loveis a book of unions. Edited by a Christian and a Jew who are united by a shared passion for the Bible and a common literary hermeneutic,Scrolls of Lovejoins two biblical scrolls (megillot) and gathers around them a diverse community of interpreters. It brings together the book of Ruth and the Song of Songs, two seemingly disparate texts of the Hebrew Bible, and reads them through a diversity of methodological and theological perspectives. Respectful of traditional biblical scholarship, the collection of essays moves beyond it; alert to contemporary trends, the volume returns venerable interpretive tradition

THE FEMALE VOICE: from: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Fassler Margot
Abstract: Hildegard of Bingen was deeply engaged with Scripture, and one of the ways to understand her thought is by tracing her treatment of particular figures from the Bible or especially important passages from favored sections of the text. How did she organize her commentaries—written, visual, and sonic? How did she take the common coin of theological understanding and turn it into a practiced, embodied knowing within communal action? These are the questions addressed here, and they are grappled with by focusing primarily upon this theologian/composer/poet’s treatment of the Song of Songs.¹ Hildegard knew the book as a source of

11 Faith Seeking Understanding: from: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) ANDREWS MICHAEL F.
Abstract: Similar to many contemporary postmodern philosophers, the phenomenologist Edith Stein rejected certain “modernist assumptions” concerning the human self and the self’s experience of God. Although she did not live to participate in contemporary discussions on modernism,¹ I submit that Stein would, in fact, be quite sympathetic to several postmodern philosophical trends. In this essay, I shall describe how Edith Stein rejects an Enlightenment view of the self in a manner similar to that of Jean-Luc Marion. I will also show how Stein, like Marion, remains genuinely committed to the apophatic tradition, drawing effortlessly on the negative theological imagery of Dionysius

Introduction: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: What has happened to “religion” in its present and increasingly public manifestation, propelled by global media, economic markets, and foreign policies as much as by resistance to them? How should we understand the worldwide tendencies toward the simultaneous homogenization andpluralization of our social and cultural practices, that is to say, of our individual and shared forms and ways of life? To answer these questions, we must interrogate a complex and shifting semantic, axiological, and imaginative archive, whose historical origins and modern disseminations have pragmatic ramifications for burning contemporary issues of the political (le politique) and politics (la politique), of

Automatic Theologies: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Khatib Kate
Abstract: To write about surrealism and theology seems an almost heretical act, on both sides of the equation. Like other Romantic and post-Romantic artistic movements of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, surrealism owes a debt to mysticism and the occult that is already widely acknowledged, as is the occurrence of religious symbolism throughout its corpus. Were these works of art equal to the sum total of the surrealist interventions in the theological realm, there would be little more to discuss. A less cursory inspection reveals, however, that the presentation of surrealism as a fleeting moment in the artistic history

The Right Not to Use Rights: from: Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Hamacher Werner
Abstract: The claim that human rights are rightsand that they are the rights ofhuman beingsmeans two things. First, it means that they apply neither to the empirical totality of a bio- or zoological species nor to any individuals as the privileged (because exemplary) instances of such a species but rather to the human “as such” or “in truth.” Human rights do not define man in his historically contingent appearance, but rather provide an explication of human essence as it presents itself in and of itself after all external attributes have been subtracted. Only human rights present man in

Book Title: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BIGGER CHARLES P.
Abstract: Plato's chora as developed in the Timaeus is a creative matrix in which things arise and stand out in response to the lure of the Good. Chora is paired with the Good, its polar opposite; both are beyond beingand the metaphors hitherto thought to disclose the transcendent. They underlie Plato's distinction of a procreative gap between being and becoming. The chiasmus between the Good and chora makes possible their mutual participation in one another. This gap makes possible both phenomenological and cosmological interpretations of Plato. Metaphor is restricted to beings as they appear in this gap through the crossing of metaphor's terms, terms that dwell with, rather than subulate, one another. Hermeneutically, through its iswe can see something being engendered or determined by that crossing.Bigger's larger goal is to align the primacy of the Good in Plato and Christian Neoplatonism with the creator God of Genesis and the God of love in the New Testament.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06ms

2 The Matrix from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: E. V. Walters’s Placewayschronicles his journey along the sacred path to Plato’s Academy and the matrix. He calls attention to Ptolemy’s distinction betweentopos,the space of geography—and Descartes’s extension or Aristotle’s innermost container—andchora,a qualitative, phenomenological place that organizes and evokes images, memories, feelings, meanings, and the work of the imagination.¹ Like the Rome of Freud’sCivilization and Its Discontents“in which nothing once constructed ever disappears,” the matrix seems to hold in storage the entire contents of past experience. We have known this archival and creative or threatening power of place in Delphi, Chartres,

3 Plato’s Idea Theory from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Since we are in for a heavy dose of my idiosyncratic Plato, some preliminaries are in order. Even among Platonists, the theory of ideas,whatever that means, is often suspect; others find it bizarre. This is especially true of those who work within my Continental tradition but who often take Nietzsche far too seriously; oddly, Platonic realism continues to be appreciated among logicians, mathematicians, and even many analytic philosophers. Can we make it appealing to our peers?

6 Truth and Metaphor from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: The movement away from predication toward an apprehensive of “the thing itself,” metaphor’s phenomenological task, was begun by Plato in the Seventh Epistle and as Leibniz saw, is the point of dialectic. This deictic movement was nipped in the bud by Aristotle’s De Categoria(1a 16–1b 9),

11 Time’s Arrow from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In 1910s and early 1920s Whitehead provided a phenomenological basis for the principles of natural knowledge and an alternative to Einstein;¹ but in his cosmology, process is being and the phenomenological concern seemingly disappeared. What appears for the first time in the later work, however, is an assimilation of force and affectivity that was based on an interpretation of the Platonic matrix as diversified by vectors, which can be read as both physical forces and phenomenological affects. Derrida used the same interpretative freedom to gain an important insight into choraas loci ofdifférancein the general text. It also

13 Otherwise than Metaphor from: Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Thanks to the gifts of the instant that is beyond beings, beings can enter into the rubrics of metaphor, hermeneutics, and participation, all of which share a reflexive structure. In perception, the paradigm case of participation, a form is engendered when the “subject” crosses over and interprets what is actively received. This resembles both the crossings of hermeneutics and metaphor.¹ We must now go beyond these in approaching the Good, though the beyond is always under an ontological pall.

A Spiritual Crossroads of Europe: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Abstract: I stand before you today with a mixture of gratitude and apprehension. Gratitude, because the organizers of this conference saw fit to include the Taizé Community in their program, ostensibly as a “model that retain[s] religious traditions in non-reductive ways while at the same time bridging in an open and dialogical way the ever-increasing religious pluralism of the contemporary world.” It is quite something to be considered, even remotely, such a model. So on behalf of my community I thank the organizers for this show of confidence in the life we have been attempting to live for the past sixty-plus

Religious Identity and Belonging Amidst Diversity And Pluralism: from: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Phan Peter C.
Abstract: The four realities referred to in the title of my essay—namely, identity, belonging, diversity, and pluralism in religious matters—when combined together and placed in the North American context, present both challenges and opportunities for the Christian church and its theology. To understand how religious, and more specifically, Christian identity and belonging are shaped in this context, I begin by briefly describing the four realities mentioned and then outline the main challenges as well as the opportunities they present to the process of forming Christian identity. Next I elaborate a series of theological insights that I hope will help

7 Repentance: from: Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Our contemporary conception of repentance is inherited from a broad and multifaceted lineage, both theological and philosophical. It is Jewish, Christian, and Islamic and thus Hebrew, Greek, and Arabic, with, as Derrida emphasizes, a strong Christian Latin imprint.¹ The multiplicities of histories and their marks on language can be read from the translations of the word repentanceitself. The Hebrew word for repentance,teshuva, means “to return” and has its Greek cognates instrepheinandepistrephein. The Greek term that is most commonly used in ancient philosophy and in the New Testament to designate repentance, however, ismetanoia, which means

CHAPTER 3 “There Are, Thank God, Natural, Inherent and Inseparable Rights as Men …”: from: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: The previous chapter has tracked the alterations in the conceptual architecture of rights across the eighteenth century in English: In the early decades of the century, rights understood in the most general sense were conjugated through an early modern juristic conception of “right,” where that concept was hinged to a claim and tied to an ethico-theological description of society. The purpose of a right (and of rights, therefore) was to uphold and protect both civic and religious institutions within which the subject appeared as a coherent and cohesive social entity. Although such entities could only, also, be political, it was

Introduction from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: All the texts in this volume share, in one way or another, the adverbial ambiguity of after. The God they seek—the God they are after—is a God who can be seen ‘‘only from behind,’’ that is, without being seen, in the blindness of vision, at the limits of the phenomenological horizon. This is a God who, for several of our contributors, can be known only through the dark cloud of not-knowing. A God who can be named only through the paradox of a name that refers back to itself, without

Toward a Fourth Reduction? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek

Hermeneutics and the God of Promise from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: In The God Who May Be, Richard Kearney has given us a gift whose power to provoke thought is out of proportion to its small size. Its opening sentences read as follows: “God neither is nor is not but may be. That is my thesis in this volume. What I mean by this is that God, who is traditionally thought of as act or actuality, might better be rethought as possibility. To this end I am proposing here a new hermeneutics of religion which explores and evaluates two rival ways of interpreting the divine—theeschatologicaland theonto-theological.”¹

Kearney’s Wager from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,

The God Who May Be and the God Who Was from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) NICHOLS CRAIG
Abstract: In the context of the reductive paradigm inspired by Husserl’s phenomenological method, Richard Kearney proposes a return ( reducere) to the face-to-face encounter withexistencethrough, after, and indeed even in the preceding reductive stages that have highlighted a return to essence (Husserl), being (Heidegger), and the pure gift (Marion et al.). This “fourth reduction” advocates a new vision of transcendence (quaeschaton) in ordinary experience—but not simply a generic form of transcendence that cares not which finite forms it assumes. Rather, it makes an ethical claim through the face (prosopon) of the other revealed in every encounter with finite

The Maker Mind and Its Shade from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: Richard Kearney and I have a common interest in Heidegger’s existential and ontological understanding of the “possible,” which moves far beyond the classical and modern logic of modalities and Nicolai Hartmann’s modal ontology. Heidegger’s statement that “the possible is more real than the real” ( Being and Time, §31) could be augmented by Paul Celan’s beautiful verse, “Alles ist weniger als es ist, alles ist mehr” (Everything is less than it is, everything is more). If I understand Kearney correctly, this statement must not be restricted toDasein’s being-in-the-world and its finite self-understanding, but is also true of God’s divinity.

Is God Diminished If We Abscond? from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) HEDERMAN MARK PATRICK
Abstract: Throughout his trilogy Philosophy at the Limit, Richard Kearney leads us “on the sinuous paths through postmodernity and beyond.” Calling on the messenger god, Hermes, he pioneers a new way of interpreting three of the defining contours of our third-millennial profile: strangers, gods, and monsters, three different names for our experience of alterity and otherness. The three volumes, if you take them not in chronological order but in order of accessibility, could be said to follow a technique similar to that used by Kierkegaard. The latter’s Journal of a Seducerwas a best-selling page-turner available even in railway stations. It

Kearney’s Endless Morning from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: In at least two registers—one of genre and one of doctrine—Richard Kearney’s philosophical theology appears suddenly and luminously at the forefront of theology itself. In other words, it invokes a “possible God,” and thus a possible theology. Theology has wanted the fully actual, active God, however, not a possible one—and so has generated an impossible one. The possible God suggests a third space, indeed a certain kind of posseof theology itself, a “paradox of future anteriority” (Kearney’s Levinas) for a freshly Christian sense of eschatological possibility. Responding to his work mainly by way of his Villanova

Reflecting God from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) McFAGUE SALLIE
Abstract: Kearney’s hermeneutics of religion might be called a “covenantal process view without the metaphysics” or, perhaps more accurately, with only intimations of metaphysics. The ontological claim is there—God is coming, will come, can come—but only if we help God come, only if we do our part by witnessing to love and justice in the world. The relations between God and human beings are built on invitation and response, on the possibilities the divine offers us and our acceptance of these possibilities as our life vocation. “If we are waiting for God, God is waiting for us” (“Re-Imagining God,”

In Place of a Response from: After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) Manolopoulos Mark
Abstract: Kearney: They did avoid the question. In Derrida’s case that is logical because he will always—reasonably, for a deconstructionist— try to avoid tying the messianicity of the gift to any specific messianism as such, be it Christian, Jewish, Islamic, or any other kind. So it makes sense for

THREE GOODBYE, IDEALIST CONSENSUS; HELLO, NEW REALISM! from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Tunstall Dwayne
Abstract: During the last few decades of the nineteenth century and the first decade of the twentieth century, there was what we could call an idealist consensus among most US philosophers. This idealist consensus emerged in the late 1870s as American postsecondary education underwent a profound transformation. As research universities emerged from 1875 until 1910,¹ philosophy transitioned from being a subject studied primarily in the senior seminar in moral philosophy, and often taught by the president of a college, to being an autonomous discipline which trained professionals who were qualified to teach the main areas of philosophy (e.g., logic, metaphysics, and

SIX COMPLEX NEGATION, NECESSITY, AND LOGICAL MAGIC from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Auxier Randall E.
Abstract: For Royce the problem of individuals took on pointed significance after his “Conception of God Debate” with George Holmes Howison and others in 1895.¹ Howison argued that Royce’s absolutism left inadequate metaphysical space for genuine individuals, and Howison, as a radical pluralist, would have sooner given up on the unity of God than to sacrifice even a smidgen of individuality. Obviously the connection between metaphysical and logical individuality has generally been thought to be a strong relation, and for some philosophers it has been the ground of the concept of identity; namely, there can be no difference between logical and

SEVEN RACE, CULTURE, AND PLURALISM: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Pratt Scott L.
Abstract: In The Wretched of the Earth, Frantz Fanon describes the state of oppression in a colonized land as one “obedient to the rules of pure Aristotelian logic.” Here the natives—the original people of the land—and the settlers—the colonizers who now control the land—“follow the principle of reciprocal exclusivity. No conciliation is possible” because the exclusion affirms the settlers and rejects the natives (Fanon,Wretched, 38–39). “At times,” he says, “this Manichaeism goes to its logical conclusion and dehumanizes the native, or to speak plainly, it turns him into an animal” (42). In this land, “The

TEN ENLIGHTENED PROVINCIALISM, OPEN-ENDED COMMUNITIES, AND LOYALTY-LOVING INDIVIDUALS: from: The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Green Judith M.
Abstract: An important aspect of the relevance of Royce’s philosophical vision for the twenty-first century grows from the great potential of his three-part progressive prescription for democratic cultural transformation—enlightened provincialism, open-ended communities, and loyalty-loving individuals—if all three parts are developed together and interactively. This will not be easy: Many forces and habits within American society and other nations and cultures to which we are closely linked by economy, communications media, productive and transportive technologies, and ways of living have profoundly antidemocratic implications.¹ Nonetheless, with some critical modifications to reflect subsequent social and technological developments, Royce’s three-part prescription is both

Book Title: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: Theology usually appears to us to be dogmatic, judgmental, condescending, maybe therapeutic, or perhaps downright fantastical-but seldom enticing. Divine Enticement takes as its starting point that the meanings of theological concepts are not so much logical, truth-valued propositions-affirmative or negative-as they are provocations and evocations. Thus it argues for the seductiveness of both theology and its subject-for, in fact, infinite seduction and enticement as the very sense of theological query. The divine name is one by which we are drawn toward the limits of thought, language, and flesh. The use of language in such conceptualization calls more than it designates. This is not a flaw or a result of vagueness or imprecision in theological language but rather marks the correspondence of such language to its subject: that which, outside of or at the limit of our thought, draws us as an enticement to desire, not least to intellectual desire. Central to the text is the strange semiotics of divine naming, as a call on that for which there cannot be a standard referent. The entanglement of sign and body, not least in interpretations of the Christian incarnation, both grounds and complicates the theological abstractions. A number of traditional notions in Christian theology are reconceived here as enticements, modes of drawing the desires of both body and mind: faith as "thinking with assent"; sacraments as "visible words" read in community; ethics as responsiveness to beauty; prayer as the language of address; scripture as the story of meaning-making. All of these culminate in a sense of a call to and from the purely possible, the open space into which we can be enticed, within which we can be divinely enticing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x08ps

Introduction: from: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: Theology seduced me. I wanted to resist being drawn into its constant uncertainty and intellectual discomfort, but was enticed by its history of gorgeous writing (whether poetically extravagant or mathematically precise) and by the willingness of theological thinkers to take up thought at the limits of thinking, to say at the limits of language, to experience at the limits of the subject. My response has been to try to theorize that seduction—not as a defense, but as a response, as every seduction requires. Theology reaches for our limits, and it opens in our midst, not least in the middle

TWO Artificial Insemination: from: Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: In an age when a child could have as few as one or as many as three genetic parents, maternity and paternity have become tricky business. For example, only one “parent” is necessary for cloning, while current experiments make it possible to combine nuclear DNA from one woman, mitochondrial DNA from another woman, and DNA from a man’s sperm, which makes three genetic parents. Add the contributions from a gestational carrier, who could be a third woman, and the child has four parents to whom he or she is biologically indebted, if not also genetically related; and then add still

SEVEN Death Penalties: from: Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: Insofar as Western philosophy, like Christianity, begins with a scene of capital punishment—that of Socrates being sentenced and put to death—doesn’t it also have its beginnings in the death penalty? Derrida answers that philosophers from Kant to Levinas justify the death penalty and “just” wars on the basis of lex talionis, which takes us back not only to its theological roots but also to the basis of sovereignty (2004, 146).¹ For the sake of protection by the state, citizens subject themselves to state sovereignty and grant to the state, and only to the state, the power to kill.

Book Title: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Lee Kyoo
Abstract: Focusing on the first four images of the Other mobilized in Descartes' Meditations--namely, the blind, the mad, the dreamy, and the bad--Reading Descartes Otherwise casts light on what have heretofore been the phenomenological shadows of "Cartesian rationality." In doing so, it discovers dynamic signs of spectral alterity lodged both at the core and on the edges of modern Cartesian subjectivity. Calling for a Copernican reorientation of the very notion "Cartesianism," the book's series of close, creatively critical readings of Descartes' signature images brings the dramatic forces, moments, and scenes of the cogito into our own contemporary moment. The author patiently unravels the knotted skeins of ambiguity that have been spun within philosophical modernity out of such cliches as "Descartes, the abstract modern subject" and "Descartes, the father of modern philosophy"--a figure who is at once everywhere and nowhere. In the process, she revitalizes and reframes the legacy of Cartesian modernity, in a way more mindful of its proto-phenomenological traces.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0b2f

PREAMBLE I If Descartes Remains Overread and Underexplored … from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: Reading, or otherwise sitting on, the work of René Descartes (March 31, 1596–February 11, 1650) with the quiet plea sure I see in a g(r)azing cow, I have been savoring, and saving somewhere, this nagging thought: His philosophy—his “Cartesianism,” his “rationalism,” his “methodological” doubt, his theoretical “self-centeredness,” his historicized him-ness—seems to remain overread and underexplored. I have been sensing that something else is going on, too, in those usual pages, in that familiar picture. And here, I am inviting you, my readers, to read with

A STAGE SETUP: from: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: “Descartes, a French national icon,”² once an epochal wunderkindand now nearly indistinguishable from the history of reading him, is for many scholars today a poster boy or a whipping boy, a hero or a villain: a “solipsist,” “narcissist,” “rationalist,” “idealist,” “reductionist,” “deductivist,” “dualist,” “closeted skeptic/atheist/materialist,” and so on. Biographically, compositionally, geographically, historically, politically, psychoanalytically, scientifically, theologically (etc., etc., etc.), he remains a fascinatingly troubling source for and a manifold index to modern philosophy and beyond. Everyone, thinker or not, as long as he or she is thinking, readily

FIVE IMAGINING NATURE from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: In the spring of 1887, having been unceremoniously discharged from his post at Johns Hopkins University, Peirce developed a correspondence course on logic and critical thinking.¹ The course, on the fundamentals of Peircean logic, was aptly titled “The Art of Reasoning.” During this period, Peirce wrote a series of letters that began to explain the imaginative-abductive basis of logic and cognition, and his early observation that “poets see a common nature” came to fruition. Peirce continued his attempt to describe reasoning as a form of art over the next years. By the turn of the century, the topic moved to

SIX ONTOLOGY AND IMAGINATION: from: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: During the 1880s, Peirce employed the triadic nature of thought to ground his budding cosmology. As Karl-Otto Apel suggests, it was during this time (particularly in 1885) that Peirce developed a “metaphysics of evolution.”¹ Peirce’s attempt to expose a continuous relation among the three aspects of human thought becomes a desire to unify three realms of being. He comes to reassert the necessary connection between epistemology and ontology. Just as Kant’s discussion of imagination and reflective judgment in 1792 leads him to speculate on the topics of time and purposive nature, Peirce’s examination of the triadic character of logic and

Book Title: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy
Abstract: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics presents a decade of thought about the origins and possibilities of political theory from one of contemporary Italy's most prolific and engaging political theorists, Roberto Esposito. He has coined a number of critical concepts in current debates about the past, present, and future of biopolitics-from his work on the implications of the etymological and philosophical kinship of community (communitas) and immunity (immunitas) to his theorizations of the impolitical and the impersonal. Taking on interlocutors from throughout the Western philosophical tradition, from Aristotle and Augustine to Weil, Arendt, Nancy, Foucault, and Agamben, Esposito announces the eclipse of a modern political lexicon-"freedom," "democracy," "sovereignty," and "law"-that, in its attempt to protect human life, has so often produced its opposite (violence, melancholy, and death). Terms of the Political calls for the opening of political thought toward a resignification of these and other operative terms-such as "community," "immunity," "biopolitics," and "the impersonal"-in ways that affirm rather than negate life. An invaluable introduction to the breadth and rigor of Esposito's thought, the book will also welcome readers already familiar with Esposito's characteristic skill in overturning and breaking open the language of politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bdm

INTRODUCTION: from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Author(s) LEMM VANESSA
Abstract: Foucault once said that political theory had still not reckoned with the end of sovereign power. In like fashion, one can say that political theory is only just now starting to confront itself and its languages with the consequences caused by the entrance of biology and biological considerations into questions of government. Roberto Esposito is perhaps the contemporary thinker who has gone furthest in questioning the traditional categories of political thought in light of the emergence of biopolitics. In this accessible collection of essays, he presents his own philosophical enterprise in terms of bridging deconstruction with biopolitics. Esposito is perhaps

THE LAW OF COMMUNITY from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: I’d like to reflect on community beginning with the word’s original Latin root. The meaning that all etymological dictionaries suggest as most probable is the one that combines cumwithmunus(ormunia). Such a derivation is important insofar as it designates precisely what holds the members of a community together. These members are not bound by just any relationship, but precisely by amunus—a “task,” “duty,” or “law.” According to the other meaning of the term (which is closer to the first than it might seem), they are bound by a “gift,” but a gift that is to

MELANCHOLY AND COMMUNITY from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: What kind of relationship exists between these two terms? Is there something essentially “common” in melancholy, and does melancholy have something to do with the very form of community? The answer that the literature on melancholy has offered has often been negative. Within both its pathological interpretation as a sickness of the body and spirit and its positive one as genial exceptionality, melancholy has generally been situated as not only different from community but actually in opposition to it. Indeed, we might say that for much of the interpretative tradition, and most markedly within sociological inquiry, melancholic man has been

IMMUNIZATION AND VIOLENCE from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: In an essay dedicated to Kant as an interpreter of the Enlightenment, Michel Foucault identifies the task of contemporary philosophy in a certain kind of attitude. It has to do with our strained relationship to the present that he calls the “ontology of actuality.” What does he mean? What does it mean to place philosophy at the point, or on the line, in which actuality reveals itself in all the richness of its historicity? What exactly does ontology of actualitymean? First of all, the expression implies a shift of the gaze inward, toward ourselves. Situating ourselves ontologically within the

POLITICS AND HUMAN NATURE from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: The “Letter on Humanism” that Martin Heidegger published in 1946 at the culmination of an historical and biographic defeat seems to spell the end of the secular event of humanism. Despite the attempts to restore humanism to a spiritualist, Marxist, or existentialist form, the great humanist tradition could not withstand the dual trauma of Auschwitz and Hiroshima, in which the opposite of humanity laid waste to the very idea of humanity.¹ Regardless of the direct and even instrumental conditions that underpin the drafting of the “Letter,” the need of such an epistemological break is central to Heidegger’s text: a culture

TOWARD A PHILOSOPHY OF THE IMPERSONAL from: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: Never before has the notion of the person constituted such an indispensable point of reference for all philosophical, political, and juridical discourses that lay claim to the value of human life as such. Setting aside ideological and theoretical differences, not one of them casts doubt on the importance of the category of the person, which is the indisputable (and undisputed) premise of each perspective. This tacit convergence is especially evident in the contentious field of bioethics. Actually, though, the clash (however bitter) between secularists and Catholics hinges upon the precise moment in which a living being can be considered a

Book Title: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Waldmeir John C.
Abstract: The metaphor of the Church as a bodyhas shaped Catholic thinking since the Second Vatican Council. Its influence on theological inquiries into Catholic nature and practice is well-known; less obvious is the way it has shaped a generation of Catholic imaginative writers. Cathedrals of Bone is the first full-length study of a cohort of Catholic authors whose art takes seriously the themes of the Council: from novelists such as Mary Gordon, Ron Hansen, Louise Erdrich, and J. F. Powers, to poets such as Annie Dillard, Mary Karr, Lucia Perillo, and Anne Carson, to the Pulitzer Prize-winning playwright John Patrick Shanley. Motivated by the inspirational yet thoroughly incarnational rhetoric of Vatican II, each of these writers encourages readers to think about the human body as a site-perhaps the most important site-of interaction between God and human beings. Although they represent the body in different ways, these late-twentieth-century Catholic artists share a sense of its inherent value. Moreover, they use ideas and terminology from the rich tradition of Catholic sacramentality, especially as it was articulated in the documents of Vatican II, to describe that value. In this way they challenge the Church to take its own tradition seriously and to reconsider its relationship to a relatively recent apologetics that has emphasized a narrow view of human reason and a rigid sense of orthodoxy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bn7

Book Title: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: What is strange? Or better, who is strange? When do we encounter the strange? We encounter strangers when we are not at home: when we are in a foreign land or a foreign part of our own land. From Freud to Lacan to Kristeva to Heidegger, the feeling of strangeness-das Unheimlichkeit-has marked our encounter with the other, even the other within our self. Most philosophical attempts to understand the role of the Stranger, human or transcendent, have been limited to standard epistemological problems of other minds, metaphysical substances, body/soul dualism and related issues of consciousness and cognition. This volume endeavors to take the question of hosting the stranger to the deeper level of embodied imagination and the senses (in the Greek sense of aisthesis). This volume plays host to a number of encounters with the strange. It asks such questions as: How does the embodied imagination relate to the Stranger in terms of hospitality or hostility (given the common root of hostis as both host and enemy)? How do we distinguish between projections of fear or fascination, leading to either violence or welcome? How do humans sensethe dimension of the strange and alien in different religions, arts, and cultures? How do the five physical senses relate to the spiritual senses, especially the famous sixthsense, as portals to an encounter with the Other? Is there a carnal perception of alterity, which would operate at an affective, prereflective, preconscious level? What exactly do embodied imaginariesof hospitality and hostility entail, and how do they operate in language, psychology, and social interrelations (including racism, xenophobia, and scapegoating)? And what, finally, are the topical implications of these questions for an ethics and practice of tolerance and peace?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0brs

6 Incarnate Experience from: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) STEINBOCK ANTHONY J.
Abstract: This essay concerns different kinds of experiences that pertain to corporeality. In particular, I appeal to descriptions that suggest and illuminate a unique mode of corporeal experience that is distinct from what we usually understand as embodiment. This distinction is governed phenomenologically, and not asserted speculatively or on the basis of traditionally held belief systems. It is discerned by being attentive to different ways in which corporeal experience is given. Thus, what guide this investigation are modes of givenness.

Book Title: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): ALEXANDER THOMAS M.
Abstract: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence explores themes in classical American philosophy, primarily that of John Dewey, but also in the thought of Ralph Waldo Emerson, George Santayana, and Native American traditions. The primary claim is that human beings exist with a need for the experience of meaning and value, a "Human Eros." Our various cultures are symbolic environments or "spiritual ecologies" within which the Human Eros can thrive. This is how we inhabit the earth. Encircling and sustaining our cultural existence is nature. Western philosophy has not generally provided adequate conceptual models for thinking ecologically. Thus the idea of "eco-ontology" undertakes to explore ways in which this might be done beginning with the primacy of Nature over Being, but also including the recognition of possibility and potentiality as inherent aspects of existence. I argue for the centrality of Dewey for an effective ecological philosophy. Both "pragmatism" and "naturalism" need to be contextualized within an emergentist, relational, non-reductive view of nature and an aesthetic, imaginative, non-reductive view of intelligence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0c0w

INTRODUCTION from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: The essays gathered here, spanning over two decades, represent my own attempts to explore what may be called an “aesthetics of human existence” in terms of an ecological, humanistic naturalism.¹ They include extensions of my earlier interpretation of the philosophy of John Dewey as well as studies of the thought of Ralph Waldo Emerson and George Santayana. I have also tried to establish connections with Asian philosophy, especially Buddhism, and with Native American wisdom traditions. The overall trajectory of these writings is to contextualize the ideas of “pragmatism” and “naturalism,” as popularly understood, within a broader and deeper philosophy of

FIFTEEN THE SPIRITUALITY OF THE POSSIBLE IN JOHN DEWEYʹS A COMMON FAITH from: The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: It is more than an understatement to say that philosophy today is not associated with “spirituality.” Professional philosophers disdain the topic. Some may try to approach it with a philosophical method, analytic or phenomenological, that is not itself inherently spiritual but cognitive. Those philosophers writing within a spiritual tradition—for example, people like Søren Kierkegaard, Gabriel Marcel, Martin Buber, or D. T. Suzuki—are segregated as “religious thinkers” or, like Emmanuel Levinas, seen as leading double lives. Otherwise the term “spirituality” suggests the range of New Age nostrums seeking to fill the void left by abandoned faiths and vapid materialism.

CHAPTER FOUR Igniting Anger: from: Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: Heimito von Doderer’s 1962 novel The Merowingians or The Total Family (Die Merowinger oder die totale Familie)begins with a scene in the clinical practice of the psychiatrist Professor Dr. Horn. The patient, Dr. Bachmeyer, describes his ailment: “Rage, Professor. I suffer heavy attacks of rage that are terribly strenuous for me and extremely exhaust me.”¹ Dr. Bachmeyer experiences rage as an exhausting disease that disrupts his psychological as well as physiological health and for this reason seeks treatment in Dr. Horn’s “Neurological and Psychiatrical Clinic” (13). Rage constitutes a pathological deviance from the norm that requires clinical treatment, since

3 Suffering Faith in Philosophy from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Buckner S. Clark
Abstract: Since the publication of Heidegger’s Being and Time, with its appeal to explicitly religious categories, phenomenology and post-phenomenological thought has repeatedly demonstrated a distinctly religious dimension. In the United States, this religious dimension to phenomenology recently has been celebrated by leading scholars such as John Caputo and Edith Wyschogrod, while, in Germany, it has been recognized by defenders and critics of phenomenology alike since the 1920s. And in France virtually every leading post-phenomenological thinker, from Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Marion to Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida, has taken up and explored this dimension to phenomenology. In the work of these

6 How Does Philosophy Become What It Is? from: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Statler Matthew
Abstract: According to Aristotle’s Metaphysics, the most distinctly unfunny thing about philosophy is the principle of noncontradiction. Indeed, we are encouraged as philosophers to respect this most serious and fundamental principle, namely, that “the same thing cannot at the same time and in the same respect both belong and not belong to the same object.”¹ Aristotle certainly refuses to take the matter lightly, providing eight different proofs and maintaining that the principle holds as a law with absolute psychological as well as ontological governance. With regard to the psychological application of the law, Aristotle insists that our thought and our actions

TWO TRANSCENDING PHILOSOPHY BY TELEOLOGICALLY SUSPENDING PHILOSOPHY from: Doing Philosophy Personally: Thinking about Metaphysics, Theism, and Antiblack Racism
Abstract: In this chapter I will examine how Marcel refines his reflective method, especially the dialectical relation between primary reflection and secondary reflection, over the course of his career. To perform this task, I will assess how Gabriel Marcel refines his reflective method, especially the dialectical relation between primary reflection and secondary reflection, over the course of his career. First, I trace briefly how he refines his reflective method from his January 21, 1933, address to the Philosophical Society of Marseilles, “Concrete Approaches to Investigating the Ontological Mystery,” to his 1968 conversations with Paul Ricoeur published in Tragic Wisdom and Beyond.

THREE LIVING IN A BROKEN WORLD from: Doing Philosophy Personally: Thinking about Metaphysics, Theism, and Antiblack Racism
Abstract: One could interpret Gabriel Marcel’s religious existentialism, or what I prefer to calls his reflective method, as being founded upon at least two extraphilosophical commitments. First, Marcel’s reflective method is founded upon a commitment to an ethicoreligious insight where the highest ontological exigency for human persons is to participate in being.¹ Second, his reflective method is an outgrowth of his struggle against the ever-present specter of dehumanization in late Western modernity, as embodied in our current technocratic socio-historical milieu. Chapter 2 has already explored the first extraphilosophical commitments mentioned above. This chapter explores Marcel’s second extraphilosophical commitment.

FOUR LEWIS GORDON ON ANTIBLACK RACISM from: Doing Philosophy Personally: Thinking about Metaphysics, Theism, and Antiblack Racism
Abstract: To understand why I criticize Marcel’s religious existentialism for neglecting one of the most prominent forms of depersonalization in the twentieth century, antiblack racism, I should summarize Gordon’s existential phenomenological account of antiblack racism. However, it is not within the purview of this chapter to examine Gordon’s Africana existential phenomenological account of anitblack racism in detail, because doing so would require more than a chapter. Rather, what I will do is explicate some of the central phenomenological concepts used in his account of antiblack racism—namely, antiblack racism,bad faith, andblackness. Furthermore, I shall limit my examination to how

CONCLUSION: from: Doing Philosophy Personally: Thinking about Metaphysics, Theism, and Antiblack Racism
Abstract: I think that we are now in a position to outline, in very broad strokes, a Marcellian reflective method that takes seriously Gordon’s existential phenomenological account of antiblack racism. Such a modified Marcellian reflective method is still a phenomenological metaphysics. What I mean by phenomenological metaphysicsis a metaphysics in which one refuses to investigate the essential structures of a mind-independent reality and concentrates, instead, on examining those ethical and religious values (for example, hope and faith) that enable persons to be closer to one another in a spiritual sense. Yet, metaphysics in this sense transcends philosophy proper; it involves

Book Title: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): LORENZ PHILIP
Abstract: A comparative study of the representation of sovereignty in paradigmatic plays of early modernity, The Tears of Sovereignty argues that the great playwrights of the period--William Shakespeare, Lope de Vega, and Calderon de la Barca--reconstitute the metaphors through which contemporary theorists continue to conceive the problems of sovereignty. The book focuses in particular on the ways the logics of these metaphors inform sovereignty's conceptualization as a "body of power." Each chapter is organized around a key tropological operation performed on that "body," from the analogical relations invoked in Richard II, through the metaphorical transfers staged in Measure for Measure to the autoimmune resistances they produce in Lope's Fuenteovejuna, and, finally, the allegorical returns of Calderon's Life is a Dream and Shakespeare's The Winter's Tale. The "tears" of sovereignty are the exegetical tropes produced and performed on the English stages and Spanish corrales of the seventeenth century through which we continue to view sovereignty today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0cvt

CHAPTER 3 Resistance: from: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: How to make politics sweet? Natural? Nourishing? Not only for the “good life,” but for alllife? “How is it possible to ‘politicize’ [what Aristotle refers to as] the ‘natural sweetness’ ofzoē?”² These are among the questions Giorgio Agamben asks in his philosophical critique of sovereignty,Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life.The following chapter explores one, baroque, response to Agamben’s questions, as well as to the question of sovereignty itself, as it has been posed for us so far by the analogy and metaphor logics ofRichard IIandMeasure for Measure. Turning from thetearsand

CHAPTER 4 Transformation: from: The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: Calderón de la Barca’s Life Is a Dream(La vida es Sueño) (1635) has been described as the “ultimate work of theatrical theology.”¹ Considered one of the most philosophically complex works of the early modern period,Life Is a Dreamnot only raises theological and political questions of power, but it also poses epistemological and ontological challenges to thought, particularly in relation to the increasingly sophisticated representational capacities of baroque theater. Like Suárez, in Jean-François Courtine’s account, and against a long-standing tradition that views the Jesuit playwright as a bastion of Spanish conservatism, Calderón, too, could be viewed as a

FIVE Ideology, Obviously from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: What Paul Ricoeur called the “hermeneutics of suspicion” has become the sine qua non of literary and cultural studies. Whether one thinks in terms of an unconscious, a superstructure, or a subtext, the analysis of intellectual and social phenomena begins from the assumption that things may not be what they seem, even where our most tangible intuitions and deeply held beliefs are concerned. From a methodological perspective, this has led to the emergence of what we might call “an archaeology of the presupposition.” An argument demonstrates its rigor by rendering its own aims and procedures as explicit and transparent as

Conclusion from: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: In this book, I have argued that reading the texts of classical political economy together with post-Kantian literature offers us important insights into some of the central controversies of contemporary cultural theory. Ideological debates in the humanities will benefit immeasurably once we recognize that philosophical inquiry is not a hindrance to but an essential ally of empirical history. As Adorno frequently reminded us, the attempt to renounce all pretensions to subjective expression and surrender oneself to the objective authority of what exists (or has existed) is no less likely to lapse into idealism than the most detailed elaboration of self-reflexive

2. What Comes After Chaucer’s But in The Faerie Queene from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: The bearing of an article by Talbot Donaldson called “Adventures with the Adversative Conjunction in The General ProloguetoThe Canterbury Tales; or, What’s Before theBut?” on the Proem to Book VI ofThe Faerie Queeneis unlikely, indirect, and illuminating. Donaldson’s article examines how the illogical use ofbutin Chaucer’sPrologueindicates the pressures of a mind “made nervous by the complexities of its own discourse, worried by subtle implications dimly perceived but not openly recognized, or harassed by emotional responses to the material it is trying to order.” Familiar examples of such subjective usage occur in

16. Beyond Binarism: from: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Shakespeare’s Antony and Cleopatra, like his earlierVenus and Adonis, is known to be generically mixed and even anomalous in the extent and degree to which it combines tragedy, comedy, and romance with lyric, allegory, myth, and history.¹ This is the first of several analogies I would draw between Shakespeare’s play and Spenser’sFaerie Queene, that hobgoblin’s garland of epic, romance, lyric, allegory, myth, history, and more. The breaking of formal conventions beyond their generic variousness also connects these works. In Ania Loomba’s view, for example, the nonteleological form ofAntony and Cleopatraresists closure, and in Margot Heinemann’s, this

5 When the Monkey King Travels across the Pacific and Back: from: Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Liu Kuilan
Abstract: Transformation is the key element adding thematic as well as structural unity to Gene Luen Yang’s award-winning coming-of-age graphic novel American Born Chinese. The book artfully weaves together stories of three characters. The realistic character Jin Wang, of Taiwanese parentage, moves from Chinatown to a predominantly non-Chinese suburb, falls in love with a white American girl, and wrestles throughout the novel with his identity as a Chinese American among non-Chinese American peers. The mythological Monkey King, banished from heaven because of his lowly status yet trained to be a deity, finally comes to terms with his simian, not deitic, identity.

Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: The book begins with a methodological chapter that sets out the assumptions and procedures of the approach. This is followed by analyses of Poe's major works, exploring such special problems as Poe's treatment of the material world, including technology; the interrelation of body and consciousness; poetic voice; attitudes toward women; and the will to affirmation, plenitude, and unity. The center of interest is neither Poe's biography nor environment but always the meaning of Poe's words. Because these works are shaped by a single imagination and because they are experienced in time, as a process, each work has its own "way of going." The aim of the interpretation is to find this way and go along with it; to live each work dynamically, as it "happens," while tracing its interaction with other works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373

1 FOREWORD from: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The reader will have gathered, from the epigraphs that head this study, that its orientation is mainly European and phenomenological. The study derives, however, from American and traditional sources as well, and is therefore, in another sense, a work of synthesis. Each point deserves to be amplified, and the best way to do this, it seems to me, is to take them up one at a time. I have accordingly divided the preliminary section of the book into two parts: a methodological introduction, which clarifies phenomenological assumptions and procedures, and this foreword, which will attempt to explain the background of

2 METHODOLOGICAL INTRODUCTION: from: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: This book is, I believe, the first general interpretation of an American author from a phenomenological point of view.

4 TALES from: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The foreword endeavored, as the reader will recall, to place the present study in the framework of existing scholarship, and to explain its principal sources and debts. The methodological introduction then sought to clarify the assumptions and procedures of phenomenological interpretation in general, while outlining

chapter one Introduction: from: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: Heirs to the tradition deriving from Locke and his enlightened followers tend to be antipathetic to the varieties of philosophy that have appeared on the Continent—whether idealistic, materialistic, or existentialistic. Ideologically the English Channel is, as it were, wider than the Atlantic Ocean, and one might even say that the same climate of opinion that unites the Americans with the English alienates both from the turbulent atmosphere of Continental thought. British and American followers of Wittgenstein and Austin, for instance, who are sufficiently ethnocentric to find it natural, as one English writer does, to identify “modern philosophy” with “that

chapter five Communication from: Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: Jaspers shares with the Hegelians a tendency to stress the dependence of the self upon social and linguistic intercourse between human beings. And he shares with the logical empiricists and linguistic analysts an abiding concern with words, signs, and symbols. But in other respects he is at loggerheads with both groups. Unlike the organicists, he reserves to each individual the final freedom to reject the communications of his fellows in favor of promptings from an inner source. Unlike the positivists he insists that the communication of universally valid and intrinsically intelligible scientific truth is so vastly different from that of

Book Title: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wilson David Henry
Abstract: Presented here are selected critical essays from five volumes of the Poetik und Hermeneutikseries published in Germany by the Wilhelm Fink Verlag of Munich. These essays represent some of the newest and most advanced thinking of fifteen leading scholars in the German-American interdisciplinary school of literary criticism. Until now no single volume has provided such an extensive contemporary treatment of literatures, problems, and methodologies representative of European criticism. The book's significance rests in the potential this new interdisciplinary criticism has for increasing the interplay between the two major critical movements of our day, namely, the objective, pragmatic Anglo-American criticism and the more subjective, phenomenological Continental criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x18wb

History of Art and Pragmatic History from: New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) JAUSS HANS ROBERT
Abstract: At first sight, history in the realm of the arts presents two con tradictory views. With the first, it would appear that the history of architecture, music, or poetry is more consistent and more coherent than that of society. The chronological sequence of works of art is more closely connected than a chain of political events, and the more gradual transformations of style are easier to follow than the transformations of social history. Valery once said that the difference between art history and social history was that in the former the products were “filles visibles Ies unes des autres,” whereas

CHAPTER 4 The Economics of Want from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Josiah Royce suggests a strategy for breaking away from vistas that are narrow, limiting, and fragmenting. With his aid we can come to a position which gives a clear overview of America, that territory whose mapped extent—geographical and psychological—is crucial to the question of how far we may succeed or by how much we are lacking. When we say that the sun rises and sets, Royce observes in The Conception of God, this is because we are captives of a cramped perspective. “A wider experience, say an experience defined from an extra-terrestrial point of view,” would correct this

CHAPTER 27 The Making of a Good Story from: Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: What initiates our destiny? A good God, the power of evil, a wicked God, a world-soul, matter, fate or chance, Zeus or Whirl, environment, the biology of inherited genes and direct physiological impulses, male or female psychic principles? All these forces have been named the cause

1 The Mosaic and the Jigsaw Puzzle: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Kasulis Thomas P.
Abstract: To understand and suitably engage our world—both natural and human—we need an effective strategy for knowing. That may seem obvious, but to forget it is to risk epistemic disaster. A Chinese proverb says a journey of a thousand libegins with one step, but that assumes the step must be in the right direction. For example, the tools we use to analyze political justice, economic equity, or ecological stability are all the legacy of the Enlightenment, what I will call theWissenschaftparadigm of problem solving. That paradigm relies on fundamental, no longer consciously examined assumptions about the

7 Filial Piety and the Traditional Chinese Rural Community: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Di Xu
Abstract: Developments in science, medicine, technology, and national economies have rapidly resulted in aging societies in both developed and developing countries around the world. The increasingly large number of elderly people has caused various problems to the political and economic systems of societies, including family structure, ethical relationships, lifestyles, and values, as well as to the emotional state of their members. Neither the spontaneous capitalistic market nor a state welfare system can easily resolve these issues. In a modern market economy ruled by the logic of capital and profit, elderly people, who, usually unemployed, are considered mere consumers, thus present a

14 Swaraj and Swadeshi: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Garfield Jay L.
Abstract: Gandhi introduced the terms swarajandswadeshito colonial Indian discourse, and while many academics and activists adopted these terms in their framings of the Indian independence struggle, consensus on their interpretation was hard to come by. The debate between Tagore and Gandhi is often taken as crucial in the contest over the meanings of these terms, but the interpretation of that debate is itself contested. We would like to reexamine that well-known debate as it is refracted through the lens of an epistemological predicament articulated by K. C. Bhattacharyya. This will allow us to see more clearly points of

20 Three-Level Eco-Humanism in Japanese Confucianism: from: Value and Values
Author(s) Yamauchi T.
Abstract: The scholars quoted here are referring to Edo-period Japan (1603–1867), a time when people valued and enriched the natural environment, and, thereby, a green, sustainable society nourished about 30 million people in small island communities. In today’s Japan a so-called scientific technologic culture has become bloated and the cause of deterioration of the natural environment. The secret of Edo Japan’s success in achieving and maintaining sustainability for more than three hundred years is, I think, in its environmental policies. Those policies were based on an eco-holistic environmental ethics,which had its source in Japanese Confucianism. There have been attempts

CHAPTER 2 The Mythos of Masculinization: from: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: Amid the modernization of Japan from the late nineteenth century, hero worship became an important ideological tool for molding adolescent boys into men who could serve the Japanese empire. In history, the figure of the hero is a cultural construct of idealized masculinity that arises within the context of a struggle over the gendered order. Since the meaning of gender is, as Judith Butler argues, always deferred as a kind of imitation for which there is no original, the maintenance of masculine values requires the relentless production of ideologies of gender to reinforce the subordination of women and the dominant

Conclusion from: Building a Heaven on Earth
Abstract: Lasting a little over a decade (1925–1937), the YMCA, Presbyterian, and Ch’nŏdogyo rural movements were collectively one of the largest rural movements in colonial Korea that furnished Koreans with an alternative vision of modernity that featured religion, agriculture, and pastoral living. As this book has shown, these three movements carried out reconstruction campaigns with the purpose of building a heavenly kingdom on earth where Korean peasants could find relief from the ideological and material upheavals caused by modernization. The movements pursued a path of reform centered on the reclamation of Korea’s agrarian heritage. That is, by incorporating contemporary ideas,

7. Playing with bits and bytes: from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Frissen Valerie
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the relation between play and the practices of technological modification and innovation.¹ Playing with technologies has always been an important driving force behind technological transformation. This is even more the case in the digital era, which has given rise to a lively Do-It-Yourself (DIY) culture, in which amateurs and ordinary users have become prominent players in the technological game. It is argued that play offers an interesting angle to understand the characteristics of this DIY culture. In the digital DIY culture technology is used and tinkered with in an open-ended way. In the process of playing

16. New media, play, and social identities from: Playful Identities
Author(s) Fortunati Leopoldina
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the motivations behind the current relationship between new media, play, and social identities in a framework of general, sociological categories. In particular, I intend to situate my analysis at the juncture between ludic culture, social control, and the social construction of the “ir-responsible” identity. The reason for this choice is that contemporary ludic culture can be quite well understood in light of the current imposition of social control and the mass resistance that is building against it. I am interested in answering the following research question: what is the meaning and the social function

Book Title: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Wurth Kiene Brillenburg
Abstract: Musically Sublime rewrites musically the history and philosophy of the sublime. Music enables us to reconsider the traditional course of sublime feeling on a track from pain to pleasure. Resisting the notion that there is a single format for sublime feeling, Wurth shows how, from the mid eighteenth century onward, sublime feeling is, instead, constantly rearticulated in a complex interaction with musicality. Wurth takes as her point of departure Immanuel Kant's Critique of Judgment and Jean-Francois Lyotard's aesthetic writings of the 1980s and 1990s. Kant framed the sublime narratively as an epic of self-transcendence. By contrast, Lyotard sought to substitute open immanence for Kantian transcendence, yet he failed to deconstruct the Kantian epic. The book performs this deconstruction by juxtaposing eighteenth- and nineteenth-century conceptions of the infinite, Sehnsucht, the divided self, and unconscious drives with contemporary readings of instrumental music. Critically assessing Edmund Burke, James Usher, E.T.A. Hoffmann, Novalis, Friedrich Holderlin, Arthur Schopenhauer, Richard Wagner, and Friedrich Nietzsche, this book re-presents the sublime as a feeling that defers resolution and hangs suspended between pain and pleasure. Musically Sublime rewrites the mathematical sublime as differance, while it redresses the dynamical sublime as trauma: unending, undetermined, unresolved. Whereas most musicological studies in this area have focused on traces of the Kantian sublime in Handel, Haydn, and Beethoven, this book calls on the nineteenth-century theorist Arthur Seidl to analyze the sublime of, rather than in, music. It does so by invoking Seidl's concept of formwidrigkeit ("form-contrariness") in juxtaposition with Romantic piano music, (post)modernist musical minimalisms, and Lyotard's postmodern sublime. It presents a sublime of matter, rather than form-performative rather than representational. In doing so, Musically Sublime shows that the binary distinction Lyotard posits between the postmodern and romantic sublime is finally untenable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzjk

1. Empty Signs and the Burkean Sublime from: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: The empty sign would have to be the sign of a paradox: a sign that is not quite a sign, yet as suchmarking the process of signifying itself. It is not quite a sign (at least in the Saussurean sense), because it constantly suspends a signified. Empty signs are “pure” signifiers resisting the Saussurean logic that signifiers and signifieds invoke each other and thus cannot function without each other: wherever there is a signifier, a signified is presupposed. Yet what if the associative bond between the two is all too slippery; what if cultural conventions do not (yet) allow

3. Balthasar and the Religion of Music from: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The connection between Messiaen and the Swiss theologian Hans Urs von Balthasar is barely noticeable. Yet it is much stronger than can be inferred from the occasional reference to the latter (in comparison, Saint Thomas Aquinas figures much more prominently in the composer’s writings and scores).¹ When he does refer to Balthasar, it is without exception in admiring terms; he calls him “the greatest contemporary theologian” and claims to have read Balthasar’s theological magnum opus, The Glory of the Lord(Herrlichkeit), in its entirety.²

Book Title: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This book is a profound and eagerly anticipated investigation into what is left of a monotheistic religious spirit-notably, a minimalist faith that is neither confessional nor credulous. Articulating this faith as works and as an objectless hope, Nancy deconstructs Christianity in search of the historical and reflective conditions that provided its initial energy. Working through Blanchot and Nietzsche, re-reading Heidegger and Derrida, Nancy turns to the Epistle of Saint James rather than those of Saint Paul, discerning in it the primitive essence of Christianity as hope. The religion that provided the exit from religion,as he terms Christianity, consists in the announcement of an end. It is the announcement that counts, however, rather than any finality. In this announcement there is a proximity to others and to what was once called parousia. But parousia is no longer presence; it is no longer the return of the Messiah. Rather, it is what is near us and does not cease to open and to close, a presence deferred yet imminent.In a demystified age where we are left with a vision of a self-enclosed world-in which humans are no longer mortals facing an immortal being, but entities whose lives are accompanied by the time of their own decline-parousia stands as a question. Can we venture the risk of a decentered perspective, such that the meaning of the world can be found both inside and outside, within and without our so-immanent world?The deconstruction of Christianity that Nancy proposes is neither a game nor a strategy. It is an invitation to imagine a strange faith that enacts the inadequation of life to itself. Our lives overflow the self-contained boundaries of their biological and sociological interpretations. Out of this excess, wells up a fragile, overlooked meaning that is beyond both confessionalism and humanism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs028

The Deconstruction of Christianity from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: My question will be very simple, naïve even, as is perhaps fitting at the beginning of a phenomenological procedure: How and to what degree do we holdto Christianity? How, exactly, are we, in our whole tradition, held by it? I am well aware that this is a question that may appear superfluous, because it

Dis-Enclosure from: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: Space is not the name of a thing, but of that outside of things thanks to which their distinctness is granted them. Things could not be distinct in nature if they did not also occupy distinct places. If I am taking the tree’s place (and not just “replacing it”), there is neither tree nor human being, but something else: a sylvan divinity, for example. When the distinction of place is hindered or rejected, a crushing, a constriction, and a suffocation is produced. That is what we can see in those geological folds and contractions out of which come igneous fusions,

12 The Evolution of Literature from: Missing Link
Abstract: In our tracking of the metaphoric initiative, we have seen how processes of natural evolution unfold via a logic of replication, genetic causes and effects, governed by the principle of natural selection. We asked the following questions. Is this same unconscious process at work in culture? If it is, how are we to understand ourselves as free and self-determining? If it is not, that is, if the terms and conditions of evolutionary change have themselves changed in the cultural domain, what power of agency or self-determination, if any, do we gain? Can we understand those mechanisms of change better, control

7 Contextualizing ʺRessentimentsʺ from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Three decades before the TRC in South Africa initiated its proceedings, Jean Améry struggled to gainsay contemporary assumptions that victims opposing forgiveness and pleas to forget or “move on” had to be possessed by hatred, the lust for revenge, or a subjective and pathological inability to get on with life. Yet, differences between postapartheid South Africa and postwar Germany abound, and leaping from one context to the other can be a precarious exercise. World War II and the crimes of the Holocaust cannot be equated with the human rights violations of the apartheid regime.¹ Neither can the situation of a

9 Facing the Irreversible from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: [I]t did not escape me that ressentimentis not only an unnatural but also a logically inconsistent condition [Zustand]. It nails every one of us onto the cross of his ruined past. Absurdly, it demands that the irreversible be turned around, that the event be undone.Ressentimentblocks the exit to

14 Epilogue: from: Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: After working extensively with the problems facing postwar countries and with victims in particular, Eric Stover, in a 1999 interview, expressed fatigue with reconciliation talk.² His comments came after the interviewer characterized Stover’s work with forensic investigations and postwar reconstruction as part of a process of reconciliation. I wrote this book because I felt a similar fatigue with the rhetoric of forgiveness, closure, and reconciliation, and I wanted to challenge a certain cluster of unquestioned assumptions and implied inferences. This book offers examples from various contexts, but the rhetoric and logic against which it objects are part of a global

2 The Authority of the Text from: Intention Interpretation
Author(s) BEARDSLEY MONROE C.
Abstract: The first thing required to make criticism possible is an object to be criticized—something for the critic to interpret and to judge. with its own properties against which interpretations and judgments can be checked. The Principle of Independence. as it might be called. is that literary works exist as individuals and can be distinguished from other things. though it is another question whether they enjoy some special mode of existence. as has been held. I think everyone must agree on this first postulate—here rather roughly stated. But there is another postulate that is logically complementary to the first:

6 Globalizing American Hegemony from: Hegemony
Abstract: “Globalization” is one of the premier buzz words of the early twenty-first century. In its most general usage it refers to the idea of a world increasingly stretched, shrunk, connected, interwoven, integrated, interdependent, or less territorially divided economically and culturally among national states. It is most frequently seen as an economic-technological process of time-space compression, as a social modernization of increased cultural homogeneity previously national in character scaled up to the world as a whole, or as shorthand for the practices of economic liberalism spontaneously adopted by governments the world over.¹ I do not want to deny the truth in

Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1

2 The Hermeneutics of Tool-Making: from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Early hominid tool-making originated and developed on the basis of concepts that were at once corporeal and topological. The concepts were full-blooded concepts, not pre-concepts (or pre-operational concepts) in the now popular Piagetian sense of that term among evolutionary anthropologists and archaeologists.¹ That this is so will be shown by a sensory–kinetic analysis of the concepts foundational to the act of making a tool, and by a corresponding critique of Piagetian accounts.

4 Hominid Bipedality and Primate Sexuality: from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: The purpose of this case study is to launch an examination of a posturally significant and behaviorally critical aspect of hominid bipedality that is consistently overlooked in assessments of its evolutionary impact. Hominid bipedality eventuated in a radically different primate bodily appearance: male sexual characters relatively hidden in quadrupedal primates are visibly exposed in bipedal ones. Conversely, female sexual characters normally visible in quadrupedal primates are relatively hidden in bipedal ones. Loss of estrus—physiological and behavioral—can be explained in the light of continuous and direct male genital exposure. Typical primate estrus cycling was replaced not by year-round female

7 Hominid Bipedality and Sexual Selection Theory from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Eberhard’s evidence for sexual selection through female choice of male genitalia¹ accords closely with Darwin’s original and preeminent concern with morphological aspects of sexual selection. Given the ambient Victorian culture of his time, it is not surprising that Darwin himself did not remark openly and directly upon male primate genitalia.² His cryptic and oblique references to “naked parts … oddly situated,” to “a part confined to the male sex,” or to “large surfaces at the posterior end of the body,”³ all belie his usual descriptive precision and clarity. Eberhard’s thesis that male genitalia function as “ ’internal Courtship’ devices,”⁴ that

13 Methodology: from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: The paleoanthropological case studies in Part II demonstrate a fullscale hermeneutical methodology in action. It is apposite in this chapter only to illustrate in greater detail the method’s central role in elucidating the roots of human thinking through corporeal analyses, and to examine in greater detail its central role in the science of paleoanthropology itself. An abbreviated look at interpretations of stone tool-making, and then of upright posture, will first demonstrate how a full-scale hermeneutics of the body is called for.

14 Methodology: from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Rather than begin with a summary presentation of genetic phenomenology in its role as methodological science, a summary that would require prior detailed considerations of epistemological matters as well as comparisons with static phenomenology, it is more useful to attend directly to the core methodological problem inherent in the attempt to describe experienced meanings in creatures other than one’s own immediate kind, and this for two reasons. First, the concern here is precisely not that of contemporary human thinking, that is, presentday human meanings, but the thinking of ancestral hominids; and second, given this paleoanthropological concern, the core methodological problem

15 The Case for Tactile–Kinesthetic Invariants from: The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Epistemological justification of sufficient similarity answers the second question posed in the last chapter, namely, How do we know what the point of view of ancestral hominids was in the first place? The justification rests ultimately on the body. If present-day humans can approximate to the point of view of their hominid ancestors, then explicit corporeal grounds exist for affirming that approximation. Tactile–kinesthetic invariants obviously provide the strongest and most direct way of demonstrating those grounds. Rather than taking up these invariants straightaway, however, a more circuitous epistemological route will be followed, and this in order to demonstrate how

1 On Writing a Philosophical Novel from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lipman Matthew
Abstract: IN 1969, having taught introductory logic to college students for some years, I was beginning to have serious concerns about its value. I had entertained similar doubts while I was a graduate student, for I hadn’t found the subject a congenial one. But when one has taught a course for several years, one comes to think of it as useful and meaningful, whatever one’s earlier reservations. Yet, I found myself wondering what possible benefit my students were obtaining from studying the rules for determining the validity of syllogisms or from learning how to construct contrapositives. Did they actually reason any

3 Integrating Cognitive Skills and Conceptual Contents in Teaching the Philosophy for Children Curriculum from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lipman Matthew
Abstract: THE PROJECT of connecting philosophical concepts in the Philosophy for Children curriculum with the concepts in academic philosophy from which they were derived (or that they resemble) can be of considerable value for teachers and scholars wishing to ascertain the grounds of the curriculum in the philosophical tradition. We should not, however, restrict such an inquiry to philosophical concepts and the history of philosophy. A parallel enterprise might seek to show how the skills of logic have been employed at key points in any history (whether of philosophy, of science, of technology, or of the humanities) so as to provide

12 A Guided Tour of the Logic in Harry Stottlemeier’s Discovery from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Splitter Laurance J.
Abstract: LOGIC FORMS the backbone of the Harrysyllabus, although it is by no means the only philosophical theme that arises there. However, the logical discoveries—exemplified by the persistence and single-mindedness of the central character, Harry—constitute a recurring theme that weaves its way through the overall story, and thereby into the thought and talk of the classroom community of inquiry. For it is logic that holds our thinking together—the rules and principles of logic provide criteria for distinguishing better thinking from worse. It is logic in language that makes reasoning possible.

15 Countering Prejudice with Counterexamples from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Guin Philip C.
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER I intend to accomplish three major objectives. I will show that sensitivity to the rule of contradiction can be useful in the lives of children, especially in combating prejudice and discrimination. Sensitivity to the rule encourages children to seek counterexamples to universal judgments. Second, I will argue that sociological models that attempt to delineate the roots of prejudice can be complemented by an understanding of the rule of contradiction. Here I am concerned with the phenomenon, cited by such models, of assimilating relative differences among groups, which in fact may be true, to overgeneralizations that allege natural

19 A Critical Look at Harry Stottlemeier’s Discovery from: Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Oscanyan Frederick S.
Abstract: SINCE ITS RECENT introduction as an elementary-school philosophy text, Professor Matthew Lipman’s Harry Stottlemeier's Discoveryhas enjoyed a string of successes.¹ First employed in an experimental class in Montclair, New Jersey, in 1970, it is now being used in Newark, New Haven, Omaha, San Antonio, Milwaukee, Pasadena, and Cleveland, and it is moving overseas in Danish, French, and Spanish translations. Its use is associated with astounding increases in reading scores, as well as strong improvements in logic and verbal abilities.² It has helped spawn the Institute for the Advancement of Philosophy for Children³ and has encouraged the founding of a

Book Title: The Strange Music of Social Life-A Dialogue on Dialogic Sociology
Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Goetting Ann
Abstract: The Strange Music of Social Lifepresents a dialogue on dialogic sociology, explored through the medium of music. Sociologist and composer Michael Mayerfeld Bell presents an argument that both sociology and classical music remain largely in the grip of a nineteenth-century totalizing ambition of prediction and control. He provides the refreshing approach of "strangency" to explain a sociology that tries to understand not only the regularities of social life but also the social conditions in which people do what we do not expect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14btb53

1 Strange Music: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) BELL MICHAEL M.
Abstract: Call me a sentimentalist, but I love Tchaikovsky’s The Nutcracker.One of my favorite moments in it is the harp solo that immediately precedes the “Waltz of the Flowers.” Here, a waterfall of lush arpeggios holds the ear back for a moment, building anticipation for the great tune that follows, which I am listening to as I write these lines. This wash of notes is one of the best-known passages of the harp literature. But nevertheless it must be regarded as a musical curiosity—and, as I will come to, a sociological one as well. As everyone knows, the first

2 Sociologizing the Strange: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) LESCHZINER VANINA
Abstract: In his essay “Strange Music: Notes toward a Dialogic Sociology,” Michael Bell (this volume) echoes a concern about the epistemological foundation of sociology that has been developing over the past few years. Along the lines of Andrew Abbott’s (2007) call for a “lyrical sociology,” Bell proposes a sociology with two attributes: (1) an appreciation of the dimension of social life that is unpredictable and (in his view) therefore unexplainable and (2) an eradication of the detachment between researcher and object of study. Critical of the discipline’s penchant for “total explanation,” Bell suggests a sociology that views its task less as

3 Stranger Danger: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) MARTIN JOHN LEVI
Abstract: Michael Bell proposes that modern composition, like modern sociological theory, has low tolerance for being surprised. He argues that making a space for such contrary action—strangency—is related to a more dialogic conception of music and theory. Although his critiques of composition and theory seem justified, it is far from clear (1) that the “actor” in theory is analogous to the “performer” in music or that the theorist is thus parallel to a composer, (2) that allowing performers more freedom in playing does what Bell seems to want, and (3) that sociology can do much with an attention to

4 A Sisyphean Process? from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) STEINBERG MARC W.
Abstract: It is a great pleasure to respond to “Strange Music.” I almost never get to engage a fellow sociologist in a discussion of dialogics and certainly none more astute to the writings of the Bakhtin Circle than Michael Bell. “Strange Music” is vital not only because it raises the profile of dialogics within the field but also because it highlights current critical debates of epistemology and practice (to which other of the respondents to the essay have been quite central).

7 Response to Michael Bell: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) CRANE DIANA
Abstract: Michael Bell’s proposal for a “dialogic sociology” (this volume) is a response to what he perceives to be an obsession in the discipline with “total explanation,” which means that the sociological researcher attempts to develop a comprehensive understanding of a phenomenon using a conceptual apparatus that emphasizes causality, predictability, objectivity, and neutrality. He argues that sociologists are so preoccupied with discovering whether their preconceptions about social life are correct that they do not attempt to understand the social conditions in which people behave in ways that sociologists do not expect.

10 Re-creating Music in the Moment: from: The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) STOWE JOHN CHAPPELL
Abstract: I appreciate the opportunity to respond to Michael Bell’s essay “Strange Music: Notes toward a Dialogic Sociology.” I write from a limited perspective but can offer a few observations on Bell’s essay based upon my experience as the harpsichordist of L’Ensemble Portique that presented the premiere performance of Bell’s composition Assumptions. I would also like to include a few comments about the subjects of agency and the creative process, admitting that I am neither a sociologist nor a musicologist.

5 1916 and Irish Republicanism: from: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) McGarry Fearghal
Abstract: By exploring the question of what republicanism meant to the rebels of 1916, before the Rising became burdened by the weight of its own myth, this chapter seeks to identify some connections between the history of an event and its commemoration. It emphasises how unpredictable the Rising’s success in creating popular support for republicanism was, and argues that this contingent outcome was largely a product of its wartime context. Although the Rising is now synonymous with republicanism, its ideological significance was less apparent at the time: many rebels fought for Irish freedom rather than a republic. The implications of this

Book Title: Joy and Human Flourishing-Essays on Theology, Culture, and the Good Life
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Volf Miroslav
Abstract: Joy is crucial to human life and central to God’s relationship to the world, yet it is remarkably absent from contemporary theology and, increasingly, from our own lives! This collection, the result of a series of consultations hosted by the Yale Center of Faith and Culture, remedies this situation by considering the import of joy on human flourishing. These essays—written by experts in systematic and pastoral theology, Christian ethics, and biblical studies—demonstrate the promise of joy to throw open new theological possibilities and cast fresh light on all dimensions of human life. With contributions from Jurgen Moltmann, N. T. Wright, Marianne Meye Thompson, Mary Clark Moschella, Charles Mathewes, and Miroslav Volf, this volume puts joy at the heart of Christian faith and life, exploring joy’s biblical, dogmatic, ecclesiological, and ethical dimensions in concert with close attention to the shifting tides of culture. Convinced of the need to offer to the world a compelling Christian vision of the good life, the authors treat the connections between joy and themes of creation, theodicy, politics, suffering, pastoral practice, eschatology, and more, driven by the conviction that vital relationship with the living God is integral to our fullest flourishing as human creatures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2mp

2 Reflections on Joy in the Bible from: Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Thompson Marianne Meye
Abstract: In studying the topic of joy in the Scriptures, several methodological challenges immediately present themselves. Perhaps the most pressing of them concerns the proper entry point for such a study. The most direct way into the topic would seem to be through a word or words for “joy.” But which word or words? Should the net be cast broadly to include any and all passages in which one finds the ideas of joy, gladness, blessedness, celebration, and the like, or somewhat more narrowly, focusing perhaps on passages that include particular words?¹ Should we identify key words in the Hebrew or

5 Calling and Compassion: from: Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Moschella Mary Clark
Abstract: The field of pastoral theology and care has been conceptualized as a form of religious response to human suffering. It is said that our research begins “at the point where human suffering evokes or calls for a religious response and sometimes at the point where a religious response is given and/or experienced.”¹ In light of this widely shared understanding, it is not surprising that, with a few important exceptions,² joy is as understudied in this field as it is in the other theological disciplines represented in this volume. Given the power and pull of experiences of suffering that call forth

Book Title: Foundational Theology-A New Approach to Catholic Fundamental Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Jacobs-Vandegeer Christiaan
Abstract: Fundamental theology is traditionally viewed as the starting point for the various disciplines within Catholic theology; it is the place where solid foundations are established for the further research and engagement with the vast terrain of historical, systematic, philosophical, and sacramental/liturgical theology. In Foundational Theology, a landmark new study, Neil Ormerod and Christiaan Jacobs-Vandegeer seek to ground foundational theology in the normative drive toward meaning, truth, goodness, and beauty, appropriated by the theologian through religious, moral, intellectual, and psychic conversions. In doing so, the work maps out the implications of those fundamental orientations to the specific questions and topics of the Catholic theological tradition: God, Trinity, revelation, and an array of doctrinal points of investigation. The authors in this work provide a comprehensive approach to theological foundations for theologians while employing a new, groundbreaking approach to the discipline through the application of the insights of Bernard Lonergan, one of the foremost Catholic theologians of the modern era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2pq

1 Why Theological Foundations? from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: This book endeavors to develop sound foundations for undertaking theological study and research. More precisely, we seek foundations for the doctrinal, systematic, and communicative work of theology—its normative phase, wherein the theologian is seeking to hand on the tradition in all its revealed authority and depth. This phase differs from theology’s historical or positive phase, wherein the theologian is seeking to recover from the past just what it is that has been revealed within that tradition. The book’s final chapter (chapter 10) explains how these two phases fit together in a comprehensive theological method. Prior to the emergence of

2 Religious Conversion from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: The guiding idea of this book contends that a theologian’s personal (and communal) growth in religious, moral, intellectual, and psychic conversion marks the foundational reality of theology, and that constructing explicit theological foundations requires attention to the normative features of these conversions. This chapter focuses on religious conversion. It addresses that which strikes at the heart of who and what we are, at how we live, and toward what ends or goals our living tends. The approach to theology in this book asks that we maintain a keen awareness of the social and cultural contexts within which religious conversion takes

4 Intellectual Conversion and Meaning, Truth, and Reality from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: In the second century ce, Tertullian asked the question, “What indeed has Athens to do with Jerusalem?”¹ It is a question that has continued to echo through the learned books and journals, the lecture halls and classrooms of theological institutions in the ensuing centuries. What is the relationship, if any, between philosophical reason, captured by the symbol of Athens, the home of Greek philosophy, and Christian faith, captured in the symbol of Jerusalem? Whatever one might think of the question and its theoretical answers, historically there has been a strong tendency for philosophical questions and issues to arise within the

5 Psychic Conversion and the Question of Beauty from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: Thus far, we have considered religious, moral, and intellectual conversions and their foundational role in the life of the theologian seeking to be an authentic subject engaged in theological work. The question can arise as to whether this is an exhaustive account of the foundational theological subject. What other types of conversion might we consider? Previously we have mentioned our fundamental orientation to meaning, truth, and goodness. Goodness and values relate to moral conversion, while questions of meaning and truth relate to intellectual conversion. We have already seen how the presence and absence of these conversions may impact on the

6 God from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: This chapter discusses theological foundations for knowledge of God. Our approach emphasizes the conversion of the theologian and builds on previous chapters by illustrating how a theologian’s fourfold conversion determines the horizon within which discourse about God becomes meaningful. The chapter begins by identifying the main lines or themes of several major conversations about knowledge of God in the history of philosophy and theology. In this way, the reader may gain a sense of how our discussion of foundations allows us to revisit classic themes or questions about God.

10 Theological Method from: Foundational Theology
Abstract: The overall aim of this book has been the development of theological foundations, a task conceived as a specialization or stage within a functionally differentiated and collaborative theological method. However, to this point, we have said little to explain the nature of that theological method, though it has functioned throughout this book. Elements of this method appear in (later) chapters where we distinguish the task of foundations from doctrines and systematics. Now it is time to make that method more explicit. Our method distinguishes eight interrelated theological tasks, each of which makes a distinct contribution to the theological project. Following

Book Title: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus-Methods and Interpretations
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Zimmermann Ruben
Abstract: Modern scholarship on the parables has long been preoccupied with asking what Jesus himself said and what he intended to accomplish with his parables. Ruben Zimmermann moves beyond that agenda to explore the dynamics of parabolic speech in all its rich complexity. Introductory chapters address the history of research and distinguish historical from literary and reader-oriented approaches, then set out a postmodern hermeneutic that analyzes narrative elements and context, maps the sociohistorical background, explores stock metaphors and symbols, and opens up contemporary horizons of interpretation. Subsequent chapters then focus on one parable from early Christian sources (Q, Mark, Matthew, Luke, John, and the Gospel of Thomas) to explore how parables function in each literary context. Over all reigns the principle that the meaning or theological “message" of a parable cannot be extracted from the parabolic form; thus the parables continue to invite hearers' and readers' involvement to the present day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2q7

3 Historical Approaches: from: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: Jesus spoke in parables. This fundamental statement garners wide consensus in Jesus scholarship. However, in contrast, there is no consensus concerning the way in which scholarship reaches this conclusion, upon what it is based, how it is safeguarded, or which historical or theological conclusions are connected to it.

6 Reading and Analyzing Parables from: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: In the second part of this book, I provide some examples of parable interpretation. In doing so I take up the historical, literary, and reader-oriented aspects that have been explored in the first part of this monograph. The different perspectives on how one is to approach the parables will be brought together to form an integrative method of parable analysis. Accordingly, the first chapter within this section offers a methodological guideline for how to do parable interpretation, which can be applied to every parable in early Christianity and beyond. I provide one example of parable exegesis in each main source

Book Title: The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus-Lord, Liar, Lunatic…Or Awesome?
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): FULLER TRIPP
Abstract: Christology is crazy. It’s rather absurd to identify a first-century homeless Jew as God revealed, but a bunch of us do anyway. In this book, Tripp Fuller examines the historical Jesus, the development of the doctrine of Christ, the questions that drove christological innovations through church history, contemporary constructive proposals, and the predicament of belief for the church today. Recognizing that the battle over Jesus is no longer a public debate between the skeptic and believer but an internal struggle in the heart of many disciples, he argues that we continue to make christological claims about more than an “event" or simply the “Jesus of history." On the other hand, C. S. Lewis’s infamous “liar, lunatic, and Lord" scheme is no longer intellectually tenable. This may be a guide to Jesus, but for Christians, Fuller is guiding us toward a deeper understanding of God. He thinks it’s good news—good news about a God who is so invested in the world that God refuses to be God without us.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j380

1 Lord, Liar, Lunatic … or Just Freaking Awesome from: The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: I have discovered a secret way of solving the most perplexing theological questions. My college roommate and I invented it in our dorm room as a way of finding answers to some of our most contentious debates. We were religion and philosophy majors, which means we argued about religion and politics as a kind of recreational sport. When we arrived at an intractable difference of opinions, we settled it like any nineteen-year-old scholar should—by playing a video game. We settled our disputes over a game of Madden 2001, to be exact. We decided that the best way for the

5 Anselm, Luther, and the Cootie Collector from: The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: I have a confession to make: I used to be a Calvinist. For some, that label means absolutely nothing. For others, it provokes an intense response—Calvinism tends to have that effect. Where I went to college, at a small Baptist school in the South, whether you were a Calvinist really mattered, for it determined which of the fifteen campus Bible studies you could attend. By the prevenient grace of God, I was eventually lured beyond the imaginative cage of John Calvin, and I finally moved out of the Baptist enclave that rivaled Geneva for its lack of theological imagination.¹

6 Getting High with Jesus from: The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: At the bottom of my first theology paper in college, the professor wrote, “This was an excellent essay. Your confusion around methodological demarcations, categorizing tools for assessment, and some ambiguity around the nature of historical thematization in terms of revelation will not permit a higher grade—but it is clear you will get there. Get a theological dictionary.”

4 The Foundations of Ethics in the Doctrine of Reconciliation in Church Dogmatics IV from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: Barth’s doctrine of reconciliation in CDIV highlights the contingent event of reconciliation as the “centre of all Christian knowledge.” Barth announces that no other topic is of such crucial importance; all theology stands or falls with the fundamental decisions made at this point: “To fail here is to fail everywhere. To be on the right track here makes it impossible to be completely mistaken in the whole.”¹ This implies that Barth’s theological interpretation of the reconciliation in Christ is fundamental also for his ethics. It will turn out, however, that matters are not as simple as Barth suggests when

5 Perspectives: from: Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The historico-genealogical and systematic reconstruction of Barth’s concept of gospel and law has been a continuing theme in this discussion. Referencing “GL” and CDII/2, chapter 8, Barth himself called it “the basic substance” ofCD.¹ An important question pursued in the current interpretation was if this subordination of the law is authoritarian,

Book Title: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God-First Corinthians 1-2 in Theological Exploration
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Askani Hans-Christoph
Abstract: The first two chapters of Paul’s first epistle to the Christians of Corinth, written in the fifth decade of the first century, have played a significant role in the history of Christian theology. Interpreting the central event in Christianity, namely the crucifixion of Jesus, Paul reflects on the wisdom and foolishness of God, which he opposes to the world’s wisdom. According to Paul, the “word of the cross," which is “foolishness" to some and “scandal" to others, leads to an upheaval in one’s way of thinking. For two millenia, theology has often turned to these passages in order to sustain its reflection. Many central questions emerge from Paul’s text on the meaning of a crucified Messiah, on God’s omnipotence, weakness, and suffering. This volume hopes to achieve two things by seeking to place exegetes, historians, philosophers, and theologians in conversation: to better understand Paul’s text and its reception and also to examine the ways in which it can nourish our theological reflection today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j3m5

Introduction from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Askani Hans-Christoph
Abstract: The present volume gathers most of the papers presented at an international theological conference held May 23–25, 2013, at the University of Geneva and organized by the Faculté de théologie protestanteand theInstitut romand de systématique et d’éthique(IRSE) of that University. The conference’s main purposes were to examine the first two chapters of Paul’s First Epistle to the Corinthians, (aspects of) the reception of these chapters in the history of theology, and, in a constructive approach, their potential meaning today. The fact that two systematic theologians (the co-editors of this book) and a historian of early Christianity

5 Paul’s Refusal of Wisdom in Aquinas’s Commentary on 1 Corinthians: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Eitel Adam
Abstract: Thomas Aquinas wrote on conventional topics in conventional genres in medieval faculties of theology. Well over half of his corpus comprises commentaries on Scripture, a commentary on Peter Lombard’s Sentences, and two pedagogically motivated revisions of its topics known as theSumma Against the Gentilesand theSumma of Theology(hereafterSumma).¹ Much else in his corpus consists in disputed questions on theological topics, sermons and liturgical works, and commentaries on books by Boethius and Dionysius.² Thomas also exposited many of the Aristotelian texts that were available in the thirteenth-century Latin West.³ Can he for that reason be called a

6 Election and Providence in the Theology of Thomas Aquinas: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Dempsey Michael T.
Abstract: If we wish to understand Thomas as a Dominican friar and biblical theologian, we must move beyond conventional portraits of him as the perennial philosopher and see how Thomas’s great Summaattempts to build a new theological science that is grounded in Scripture and expressed with the aid of natural reason. As Thomas himself says with Paul in 2 Cor. 10:5, all thought and understanding is to be taken captive in obedience to Christ in his battle of spiritual warfare against the powers and principalities of this world.

7 Luther’s Theologica Paradoxa in Erasmus and Cusanus from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Bader Günter
Abstract: Wisdom and foolishness intertwined—the theology of the cross—and consequently speeches in the form of theologica paradoxa, of paradoxical theology: these are all widely known as characteristics of Reformation theology, especially of the Lutheran style. Indeed, it was Luther who furnished this connection and put it under the rubric oftheologica paradoxa. But why look fortheologica paradoxain Erasmus and Cusanus if this rubric is distinctive to Luther? Despite the somewhat strange juxtaposition of these two authors with Luther, it is likely that neither of them would have put their work under a Lutheran heading. Therefore, this discussion

8 The Cross of Wisdom: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Feneuil Anthony
Abstract: There is more than one fool in the Bible, and I would like to start with another fool than Paul’s, but whose legacy in the history of theology (and philosophy) has been equally significant. I want to talk about the fool from Psalms 14 and 53, who dares to say in his heart: “There is no God.” How is the foolishness of this fool ( nabal), called in Latininsipiens, and in Greek ἄφρων, related to the foolishness of God (μωρία, in Latistultitia) in Paul’s epistle? It would certainly be interesting to compare philologically μωρία and ἄφρων, and to determine

10 The Word of the Cross in the Conflict of Interpretive Power: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Stoellger Philipp
Abstract: To begin: whenever “Paul” is mentioned hereafter, a distinction is being made between the historicalPaul, who can be reconstructed by historians, thebiblicalPaul of the canonical texts of the New Testament, and theimaginaryPaul, who is being constituted in interpretations as well as in religious and institutional use, as the saint, cult figure, official and theologicalnorma normans. Therefore, the differentiation of Paul is threefold, and it is impossible to ascribe a unity of being to these three figures. What follows is thusnotconcerned with the presentation of results derived from the textual sources, but merely

11 On Justification and Beyond—An Attempt from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Wüthrich Matthias D.
Abstract: It is hardly surprising that Walser’s clarion call has fallen on sympathetic ears among theologians.⁴ I want to take Walser’s literary intuition as a starting point for thinking about “justification.” My thinking is guided by a question that does not concern Walser much but that is crucial in theological terms: the question regarding the status of justification’s doctrinal articulation

14 The Cross of Christ and God’s Power from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Vial Marc
Abstract: In 1 Cor. 1:23–24, Paul writes: “we proclaim Christ nailed to the cross; … he is the power of God and the wisdom of God,” before adding, in v. 25, that “the weakness of God is stronger than human strength” (reb). The link between the cross of Christ and the power of God is thus explicitly made by Paul. Consequently, one must ask whether it is possible, in a Christian theological perspective, to think about something we may call God’s “almightiness” from the event of the cross and, first, from the “word of the cross” around which the second

17 “To Know Nothing Except Jesus Christ, and Him Crucified”: from: The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) van Driel Edwin Chr.
Abstract: “Supralapsarian Christology” is an account of the divine motives for the incarnation on which the incarnation is not contingent upon sin. Proponents of supralapsarian Christology do not deny that God deals with the sin problem through the incarnate Christ, but they hold that there are deeper and more important reasons for the incarnation than reconciliation and redemption. In this christological model the goal of creation is a love relationship with human beings, and in this relationship God comes as close to God’s creatures as God can—in becoming human. Hence, the name “supra-lapsarian”—in the ordering of divine intentions, even

Book Title: Resisting history-Religious transcendence and the invention of the unconscious
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Hayward Rhodri
Abstract: How can historians make sense of visions, hauntings and demonic possession? Do miraculous events have any place in a world governed by cause and effect? In Resisting history, Rhodri Hayward examines the cumulative attempts of theologians, historians and psychologists to create a consistent and rational narrative capable of containing the inexplicable. This lucid and provocative account argues that the psychological theories we routinely use to make sense of supernatural experience were born out of struggles between popular mystics and conservative authorities. Hayward’s lively analysis of the Victorian disciplines of Christology, psychology and psychical research reveals how our modern concept of the subconscious was developed as a tool for policing religious inspiration. He concludes his argument with a vivid study of the Welsh Revival of 1904-5, in which the attempt of thousands of converts to cast off their everyday identity was diffused and defeated using the language of the new psychology. By revealing the politics inherent in such language, Hayward raises questions about its deployment in the work of today’s historians. Written in a clear and accessible style, Resisting history provides a fresh and entertaining perspective for anyone interested in questioning the concepts that underlie historical writing and psychological thought today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j66d

1 ‘Acceptable words’ from: Acceptable words
Abstract: The first wonder of poetry lies in the immediate effects of language. How words are drawn from the myriad, their particular sounds heard and then associated by rhythm, and sometimes their visual appearance, constitutes the primary pleasure and amazement of verse. However great the repayments of re-reading and research might be, the experience of sensing the extraordinary in this dimension of language persists. It is the quality which led Milton in his pamphlet Of Educationto identify poetry as ‘more simple sensuous and passionate’ than logic and rhetoric, not to exalt it above the philosophical arts but to insist upon

3 ‘I am not a target market’: from: Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Douglas Coupland is captivated by rubbish, its possible uses and its plural connotations. Motifs of household garbage, environmental pollution and technological junk are everywhere in his fiction and visual art – the substance of his work is frequently constructed from broken things, forgotten concepts, obsolete inventions and the many ‘time-expired’, disposable items that we routinely ditch. In his ‘Canada House’ exhibition (2003; 2004–5), for example, a number of sculptures incorporate salvaged odds and ends – discarded tin cans, plastic bottles, food packaging, shreds of clothing, broken buoys and the assorted, shop-worn treasures of the tenacious beachcomber – all of which are redeployed

4 Theoretical perspectives and the Irish context from: "Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: The concept of the ‘Other’ or Otherness has been explored through a diverse array of discourses including the historical, the socio-cultural, the anthropological, the psychoanalytic (see Freud, 1938, 1950a, 1950b, 1957, for example), the linguistic and the philosophical (see Lévinas, 1996; Volf, 1996). While the question of the ‘Other’ or Otherness may have not have been a term which carried much significance in Irish academic circles during the 1950s and 1960s when folklorists such as Seán McGrath were writing, it can be said with little fear of contradiction that it was the search for Otherness, albeit Irish and Gaelic and

INTRODUCTION: from: The subject of love
Abstract: To a considerable extent Western cultures now live with and through the knowledge that there is no ‘outside’ or ‘beyond’, no ontological site of absolute certainty, no absolute authority at all that can be the basis of an appeal to a permanent, or even a stable truth. In other words we live with, if not the knowledge per se, then perhaps the effects of the ‘death of God’. Yet, for all that the institutions of religions have supposedly been revealed as being founded upon illusory ideologies, little more than the exercise of Nietzsche’s will-to-power, there is nonetheless an apparent revivification

CHAPTER 5 Divine Promethean love from: The subject of love
Abstract: Through the engagement with the work of Heinrich von Kleist and Clarice Lispector, in the analysis of Cixous’ ‘Grace and Innocence’ in the previous chapter, we can see how she can be understood to be reorienting the epistemological concerns of the Biblical story of the Fall through which the text is framed. In so doing, she reframes the way we might think about the notions of both grace and innocence particularly as they bear on the issue of the relationship between subjectivity and knowledge. The Fall, as such, is no longer simply meaningful in the brute dichotomy of knowledge versus

4 Schelling: from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: One of the great issues which divides thinkers in modernity is the status of ‘nature’. If nature can no longer be said to have a theological basis, what determines how we are to understand what nature is? Kant’s ambivalence with regard to ‘nature’ suggest why this issue creates so much controversy. On the one hand, nature ‘in the formal sense’ is simply that which functions in terms of necessary laws, and is therefore the object of natural science; on the other, in the form of organisms and as an object of beauty, nature appears to have purposes which cannot be

6 Schleiermacher: from: Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The recent growth of interest in German Idealist and Romantic philosophy has tended to focus on Fichte and Hegel, and, to a lesser extent, on Schelling. However, given the philosophical motivation for the new attention to the thought of this period, it is actually rather strange that its main focus has not been the work of F.D.E. Schleiermacher (1768–1834). The contingent reasons for the neglect of Schleiermacher are, admittedly, quite simple. Schleiermacher’s theological work, as the major Protestant theologian of the nineteenth century, has largely determined his reputation, and he did not produce de fi nitive versions of his

Beyond Binarism: from: Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: Shakespeare’s Antony and Cleopatra, like his earlierVenus and Adonis, is known to be generically mixed and even anomalous in the extent and degree to which it combines tragedy, comedy, and romance with lyric, allegory, myth, and history.¹ This is the first of several analogies I would draw between Shakespeare’s play and Spenser’sFaerie Queene, that hobgoblin’s garland of epic, romance, lyric, allegory, myth, history, and more. The breaking of formal conventions beyond their generic variousness also connects these works. In Ania Loomba’s view, for example, the non-teleological form ofAntony and Cleopatraresists closure, and in Margot Heinemann’s, this

1 Introduction to the question of world-political time from: Time and world politics
Abstract: IN The Critique of Pure Reason, Kant argued that our grasp of the world is inescapably structured through space and time. In other words, whether we like it or not, our experience of any object is always located in a spatial field and temporal duration, conceived in Newtonian terms. The novelty of Kant’s argument was that he effectively bracketed the question of the ontological status of space and time, thus evading long-standing philosophical problems, such as those inherent in Zeno’s paradox of the arrow.¹ Instead Kant focused on demonstrating that they (space and time) are transcendental conditions of sensible experience

3 Motherhood and history from: Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: Jean Howard and Phyllis Rackin, who have worked so extensively on Shakespeare’s history plays, note that they contain ‘relatively few and often sketchy’ images of women and their comment is applicable to Elizabethan history plays in general.² Those who are represented in such plays, and, indeed, their sources, referred to by A. P. Rossiter as ‘that long line of women broken in the course of great events’, are mostly mothers.³ The typological link between mother and state discussed in previous chapters meant that motherhood developed importance as a trope by which the dramatisation of political conflict acquired validity and complexity.

8 Conclusion from: Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: The critic Jean Howard has warned against the assumption ‘ that theatrical representations have an ideological significance which is fixed and unchanging or which is unaffected by the conditions in which the representations are produced and consumed’.² This book has argued for the importance of motherhood in the drama of early modern England and has attested to the mother’s value both as a signifier of unchanging values and as a figure whose representation readily responds to the demands of ideological and political change. The approach has been thematic: to discover how far genre and convention influence representation; and teleological: to

Book Title: Contemporary Violence-Postmodern war in Kosovo and Chechnya
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Moore Cerwyn
Abstract: Contemporary Violence: Postmodern War in Kosovo and Chechnya draws on several years of field research, as well as interpretive IR theory and analysis of empirical source material so as to shed light on contemporary violence. Drawing on interpretive approaches to International Relations, the book argues that founding events and multiple contexts informed the narratives deployed by different members of each movement, illustrating why elements within the Kosovo Liberation Army and the armed forces of the Chechen republic of Ichkeria favoured regional and local strategies of war in the Balkans and the North Caucasus. The book draws on post-positivist analysis and empirical research so as unravel the relationship between narratives, stories and hermeneutic accounts of International Relations; regional politics and trans-local identity; globalisation and visual aspects of contemporary security; criminality and emotionality; which together illustrate the dynamics within the armed resistance movements in Kosovo and the North Caucasus and the road to war in 1999. The book is a major addition to a small field of genuinely readable studies of IR theory. The book will be of interest to academics, researchers, students, area studies experts and policy-makers seeking to understand the formation of the armed resistance movements in Kosovo and Chechnya. Amongst other things, the book will be of interest to students and scholars of International Relations, Political Studies, Area Studies, as well as those within Cultural and Historical and Sociological Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jfxn

1 Narrative identity and the challenge of literary global politics: from: Contemporary Violence
Abstract: Some – if not all – contemporary wars are conducted for a multiplicity of reasons by an increasingly diverse set of actors. One corollary of this may be a reading of a broader spectrum of political violence which is neither exclusively political nor military, but is in part shaped by cultural and social forces captured in narrative. Even if narrative approaches have a long provenance in other disciplines, they have only recently touched the shores of IR. And yet, an approach which addresses accounts of narrative identity does much to capture the social, cultural and ontological assumptions which inform our

Introduction from: The arc and the machine
Abstract: Once, even recently, narrative was widely accepted as a dominant cultural logic and it did not seem controversial to suggest that lives, histories and cultures could be understood within its grounds. These days, in the first decade of the twenty-first century, global information systems of all kinds have come to pervade every aspect of life in the North and to redefine the terms of its inequality with the South, so that information systems cast a shadow there too, even as they are held out of the reach of many. And these days narrative’s centrality seems less certain.

2 ‘Beautiful patterns of bits’: from: The arc and the machine
Abstract: Technologies transform cultures and those who live in them. But they themselves are not simply formed by, but are integral elements of, cultures at particular moments in their history. To argue this is not to cheat, to suck the puissance out of the technological no sooner than it has been admitted and revert to culture and discourse. Nor is it to argue that the social stands in advanceof the technological – this would amount to claiming technological transformation is at root only social transformation. Rather the two engines of transformation are inextricably linked. The world in which we live

5 ‘Just because’ stories: from: The arc and the machine
Abstract: With some trepidation, this chapter explores a film called Elephant.² This is Gus Van Sant’s 2003 account of the shootings at Columbine High School and is at once an experiment with non-linear narrative and an exploration of interactivity as a cultural logic, one emerging within specific historical horizons: those of the United States at war with itself and with the world.

Book Title: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Kempshall Matthew
Abstract: This book provides an analytical overview of the vast range of historiography which was produced in western Europe over a thousand-year period between c.400 and c.1500. Concentrating on the general principles of classical rhetoric central to the language of this writing, alongside the more familiar traditions of ancient history, biblical exegesis and patristic theology, this survey introduces the conceptual sophistication and semantic rigour with which medieval authors could approach their narratives of past and present events, and the diversity of ends to which this history could then be put. By providing a close reading of some of the historians who put these linguistic principles and strategies into practice (from Augustine and Orosius through Otto of Freising and William of Malmesbury to Machiavelli and Guicciardini), it traces and questions some of the key methodological changes that characterise the function and purpose of the western historiographical tradition in this formative period of its development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jhjx

CONCLUSION from: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: Medieval historiography was neither crude nor credulous nor conceptually unsophisticated. Such characterisations would be no more, and no less, applicable to the writing of history in the early modern and modern periods and, if only on this basis, medieval historians deserve better than to suffer the methodological condescension of posterity. The present study has been designed accordingly as an introduction to a set of interpretative criteria on which works of medieval historiography might be assessed, primarily through examining principles of classical rhetoric which would have been second-nature to writers who had been brought up, directly or indirectly, on the precepts

1 Louise L. Lambrichs: from: Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) BEST VICTORIA
Abstract: The novels of Louise Lambrichs are brilliant but troubling psychological dramas focusing on the traumas that inhabit the family romance: incest, sterility, the death of those we love and the terrible legacy of mourning. Bringing together themes of loss and recompense, Lambrichs’s novels trace with in fi nite delicacy the reactions of those who suffer and seek obsessively for comfort and understanding. But equally they perform a subtle and often chilling evocation of the secrets, lies and crimes that bind a family together and create a pattern of behaviour that can motivate or cripple subsequent generations. Louise Lambrichs’s oeuvre comprises

Book Title: Christian Theologies of Scripture-A Comparative Introduction
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Holcomb Justin S.
Abstract: Christian Theologies of Scripturetraces what the theological giants have said about scripture from the early days of Christianity until today. It incorporates diverse discussions about the nature of scripture, its authority, and its interpretation, providing a guide to the variety of views about the Bible throughout the Christian tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jk6q

2 Origen from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Reno R. R.
Abstract: Origen of Alexandria (c. 185–c. 254) lived through a turbulent period for the Christian Church, when persecution was widespread and little or no doctrinal consensus existed among the various regional churches. In this environment Gnosticism flourished, and Origen was the first not only to refute Gnosticism, but also to offer an alternative Christian system that was more rigorous and philosophically respectable than the mythological speculations of the various Gnostic sects. Although Origen was also an astute critic of the pagan philosophy of his era, he also learned much from it and adapted its most useful and edifying teachings to

11 Karl Barth from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Cunningham Mary Kathleen
Abstract: Karl Barth (1886–1968) is considered one of the greatest Protestant theologians of the twentieth century. Born in Basel, Switzerland, he began his theological studies at Berne and then continued his education under the direction of many of the prominent liberal theologians of the period, including Adolf von Harnack and Wilhelm Herrmann, at universities in Berlin, Tübingen, and Marburg. In the years before and during World War I Barth held several Swiss pastorates. While serving as a pastor in the industrial town of Safenwil, he composed his Römerbrief(1919), a commentary on Romans, in which he challenged the liberal theology

12 Hans Urs von Balthasar from: Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Dickens W. T.
Abstract: Hans Urs von Balthasar (1905–1988) was born in Lucerne, Switzerland. He was a man of remarkable energy, discipline, and talent, and the breadth and profundity of his publications place him at the forefront of twentieth-century Catholic theologians. He never held an academic post, and he adhered to none of the reigning theological movements of his day. Although he studied philosophy and theology as a Jesuit novitiate, his doctoral education was in German studies, a blend of philosophical and literary analysis. His theology was forged in critical debate with the biblical authors, Greco-Roman philosophy, ancient and medieval theology, and modern

1 The Gospel as Retrospective from: Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: But this ostensible chronology is defeated by an internal logic whereby the end is the beginning and the beginning is really the end. As a matter of fact, the evangelists wrote their pieces a posteriori, that is, after realizing that

Book Title: Abiding Words-The Use of Scripture in the Gospel of John
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Schuchard Bruce G.
Abstract: Introduces and updates readers on the question of John's employment of ScriptureShowcases useful approaches to more general studies on the New Testament's use of Scripture, sociological and rhetorical analyses, and memory theoryExplores the possible implications surrounding Scripture usage for the Gospel audiences both ancient and contemporary
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jm87

Patriarchs and Prophets Remembered: from: Abiding Words
Author(s) Williams Catrin H.
Abstract: Over the past few decades the study of “John and Scripture” has been approached from a variety of perspectives and with a wide range of methodological tools. The textual form and function of the explicit quotations in John’s Gospel have, inevitably, received most attention to date, but a number of scholars are now venturing beyond the relative comfort zone of direct—and largely identifiable—quotations to explore the interpretative mechanisms at work within a narrative also saturated with a rich deposit of scriptural concepts and motifs. There is also a growing recognition that discussion of John’s engagement with the Scriptures

Conclusion from: Abiding Words
Author(s) Schuchard Bruce G.
Abstract: This collection of essays provides an overview of past and present research on the use of Scripture in the Gospel of John, making it useful for those who have an interest in this kind of study as well as for those whose focus is more generally the use of Scripture in the entire New Testament. It will also be of use to those whose interest is in sociological, rhetorical, and memory theory studies and the New Testament. Though not intended primarily for the latter, this volume has the potential to be used in classes exploring any of these areas of

1 The Duvaliers and Apocalyptic Memory from: Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: Noirisme was a form of political and cultural ideology that grew out of indigenism, which in turn was a reaction to the American occupation of 1915–34.¹ During the occupation, Haitian intellectual culture was reenergized in diverse and often contradictory ways, constructing a discourse of resistance that would finally imprison the nation in a rigid idea of cultural and racial authenticity that served also as the ideological justification for the worst excesses of the Duvalier regime.

15 Fatal Attraction from: Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van der Laarse Rob
Abstract: Landscape and heritage form a strong couple in European culture. Since the Renaissance landscapes have been perceived as ‘art’ and valuated by scenic qualities, represented in painting and reproduced through design and architecture. This connoisseurship is still a basic assumption of heritage conservation and tourism, working under the fetish of authenticity by singling out aesthetic styles and iconic periods. Although recent biographical approaches to historical landscapes have opposed this reductionism by stressing long-term development, the landscape/mindscape nexus can – in my view – not be grasped by the prevailing metaphor of an archaeological layering of time. Alternatively, a more dynamic

Book Title: Narrative Criminology-Understanding Stories of Crime
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Sandberg Sveinung
Abstract: The contributors uncover the narratives at the center of their essays through qualitative interviews, ethnographic fieldwork, and written archives, and they scrutinize narrative structure and meaning by analyzing genres, plots, metaphors, and other components of storytelling. In doing so, they reveal the cognitive, ideological, and institutional mechanisms by which narratives promote harmful action. Finally, they consider how offenders' narratives are linked to and emerge from those of conventional society or specific subcultures. Each chapter reveals important insights and elements for the development of a framework of narrative criminology as an important approach for understanding crime and criminal justice. An unprecedented and landmark collection, Narrative Criminologyopens the door for an exciting new field of study on the role of stories in motivating and legitimizing harm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3xt2

3 Gendered Narratives of Self, Addiction, and Recovery among Women Methamphetamine Users from: Narrative Criminology
Author(s) GUNDERMAN MIKH V.
Abstract: Narrative criminology, with its ethnomethodological influences, has much in common with feminist theoretical frameworks that concern themselves with uncovering the constitutive nature of gendered practices, including speech (Butler 1990; Connell 2002; Stokoe 2006; West and Zimmerman 1987). If narratives provide us, as analysts, a window into how individuals “organize views of themselves, of others, and of their social worlds” (Orbuch 1997, 455), then a critical facet of narrative analysis involves investigating how “women are constructed or construct themselves” within them (Daly and Maher 1998, 4). Narratives impart essential messages about gender, with the structure, content, and usage of language emerging

CHAPTER 5 A Christian Intellectual and the Moral Life from: A Godly Humanism
Abstract: It is commonplace to note that, since the years of the Second Vatican Council, our world has changed culturally, morally, politically, ecclesiastically. At the close of the Council, there was not a single country outside the totalitarian world in which abortion on demand was licit. The great ideological battles of the time took place between the still vigorous Communist world and the Western democracies. Soviet premier Khrushchev threatened in 1956 that the economic machine of the Soviet Union would “bury” the West—and many Western intellectuals continued to believe that the Marxist-Leninist organization of the state offered the best hope

1 In the Books of Joshua and Judges from: Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: The terms ‘righteous’ and ‘righteousness’ do not occur in the book of Joshua and, after reading its stories of the conquest, one could be forgiven for concluding ‘with good reason’. To a modern reader the divine command to utterly destroy another nation smacks of ‘ ethnic cleansing’ or genocide. Nevertheless, if one takes the literary and theological context of the larger Hebrew Bible/Old Testament into account, as well as its ANE context, some appreciation can be gained of the presence of such stories and their contribution to the theology of divine righteousness.

Book Title: The Church in China- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times, and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8f4

Introduction from: The Church in China
Author(s) Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.

Introduction from: From North to South
Abstract: This collection, From North to South: Southern Scholars engage with Edward Schillebeeckx,arose from an often articulated sense of gratitude inspired by the theology of Edward Schillebeeckx. For three members of the Catholic Institute of Theology in Aotearoa New Zealand, Neil Darragh, John Dunn and Helen Bergin, Schillebeeckx’s theology has over the years provided nourishment and challenge. Consequently, towards the end of 2009, we decided to invite scholars from the southern region of the world to consider participating in a project to highlight Schillebeeckx’s ongoing theological contribution—even to the ends of the earth! Little did we know that a

St Mary MacKillop as a Fifth Gospel: from: From North to South
Author(s) Rush Ormond
Abstract: I will focus on two central categories of Edward Schillebeeckx’s theological project, namely ‘interpretative experience’ and ‘negative contrast experiences’, as being particularly relevant for this task.

Schillebeeckx’s Theological Method and Religious Pluralism in Asia from: From North to South
Author(s) Chia Edmund Kee-Fook
Abstract: My focus in this chapter will be on the theological method of Edward Schillebeeckx. I will examine Schillebeeckx’s method in order to discover how it may assist in appreciating Asian theologies of religious pluralism. I am exploring the latter on account of my Asian origins as well as my involvement in the ministry of interreligious dialogue. I state this at the outset not so much to establish my credentials but in order to take seriously Schillebeeckx’s assertion that theology needs to begin with experience. For him, theology must evolve from the concrete, personal and contemporary experience of the theologian. To

Theology and Culture: from: From North to South
Author(s) Rochford Dennis
Abstract: Because of the wide range of themes and various methodological approaches present in the writings of Edward Schillebeeckx, it is difficult to find the core concern or unifying theological thread that characterises his life’s work. Does one identify particular texts as seminal to this task?¹ If so, what texts might one choose? What subjects stand out as commanding his attention?

Bonhoeffer and Biblical Interpretation: from: The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Winter Sean F
Abstract: This article surveys Bonhoeffer’s early education in biblical studies, with a focus on his different encounters with Adolf Schlatter and Karl Barth. I propose that Bonhoeffer’s understanding of the tools of the historical-critical method in relation to a theologically focussed form of biblical interpretation was formed in this initial period, and that the relationship between history and revelation that he landed upon was not antithetical but complementary. Historical criticism was the servant of interpreting the Bible as revealed Scripture, but it was nevertheless an essential aspect of the interpretative process. The idea that ‘Bonhoeffer’s use of the Bible is the

Book Title: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): RANSON DAVID
Abstract: Between the Politics of Mysticism and the Mysticism of Politics traces the dialectic of ‘the mystical’ and the political’ from both a theological and an historical perspective. It presents the dialectic as a hermeneutic for the rise of the new ecclesial communities within the Roman Catholic Tradition and suggests it as the framework by which a trajectory for Christian holiness might emerge in the 21st century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8s9

Introduction: from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: The twentieth century dawned with the expectation of social and political emancipation. The growth of both industrialization and urbanisation throughout the nineteenth century, the rise of the masses against political exclusion, and the threatening fragmentation of the imperial order brought the world to a new threshold in 1900. There was every sense of the dawn of a new era.¹ The threshold, however, was turbulent and violent, as it was fragile. Imperialism unravelled in the First World War. Unresolved tension from this bloody conflict, bitter ideological divisions between the subsequent rise of communism and fascism, the emergence of mass nationalism, uneven

Chapter Three ‘The Mystical’ as Social Experience and Social Critique: from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: Though it is a relatively recent allusion in theological discourse the mutual intimation at the heart of the proposed tensive relationship between ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ is not without its evidence in the tradition of Christian spirituality. That ‘the mystical’ implies ‘the political,’ and that it stands in a specific relation to ‘the political,’ can be traced through a number of key studies in the history of Christian spirituality.

Conclusion from: Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: This has been a study of the mystical-political dialectic as it has emerged in theological reflection and through historical practice within the modern Roman Catholic period. I have suggested that such a reflection is necessitated by the universal call to holiness articulated at the Second Vatican Council. This proposes the secularity as a significant locus for the pursuit of the spiritual life. In this context a negotiation between ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ and the attempt to live a particular integration between them will only increasingly become apparent. It is, perhaps, the spiritual challenge of the legacy of Vatican II.

3 Scripture and Tradition in the Patristic Age from: God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Minns Denis P
Abstract: In October 1960 the Preparatory Theological Commission that began the process that would ultimately issue in the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation presented a working paper bearing the significant title: A Compendious Schema for the Constitution on the Sources of Revelation.¹ Famously, the Dogmatic Constitution itself would reject the (traditional) notion of Scripture and Tradition as two separate sources (fontes) of Revelation and assert that ‘Sacred Tradition and Sacred Scripture are tightly connected and linked with one another. For both flow forth from the same divine, bubbling spring, somehow or other coalesce as one thing, and extend toward the same

7 Dei Verbum and the Witness of Creation: from: God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Turner Marie
Abstract: In recent times, biblical interpreters have drawn on a range of interpretive approaches in order to ensure that the biblical text ‘may not simply be a word from the past, but a living and timely word’.¹ Among the more recent approaches have been ecological readings, which have arisen as a response to the ecological crisis and as a result of a growing sense of responsibility among biblical scholars and theologians towards God’s creation. The Old Testament book of Ecclesiastes (or Qoheleth) has evoked many conflicting responses over the centuries, mainly because of its recurring refrain of ‘vanity of vanities’ or

Book Title: In-Between God-Theology, Community, and Discipleship
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Pickard Stephen
Abstract: In-Between God' explores three important areas for contemporary Christianity: theology, community and discipleship. Part One inquires into the rhythms of faith as it interacts with themes of uncertainty and doubt, the nature of theological discourse, the task of systematic theology, evangelism and the various ways in which theology is done. Part Two discusses the importance of place in relation to the church, and themes of innovation, undecideability and new forms of monastic community. Part Three addresses themes in discipleship: simplicity, mysticism, the passions and pilgrimage. A red thread connecting these essays is the character of the triune God who is the energy and life in between all things.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t981

Chapter One Seeding Communities of the In-Between God from: In-Between God
Abstract: I recall a comment of Stanley Hauerwas that the appropriate location for Christian ethics was always ‘in the middle’ of things. His point was that we did not have the luxury of beginning outside or at the periphery of life. This resonated with my own instincts in relation to the theological enterprise. We begin and proceed encompassed by the God who is our beginning and end and who is the holy presence in and through all things. The work of theology ought not take place at some remove from the circumstances of our life nor ought it presume to deliver

Chapter Five The Ways of Theology: from: In-Between God
Abstract: What place does theology occupy in Australian Anglicanism? Australian pragmatism and impatience with matters of the intellect has had little enthusiasm for or apparent need of theologians in the Church. Some kinds of theological activity—overly academic, elitist and irrelevant—might only confirm such prejudice! If theology occupies a somewhat marginal place then perhaps this is as it should be. After all, in a management and market driven world what is the value of theology in the life of the Church? It is a question once addressed by that famous ex-Anglican John Henry Newman. In his preface to the re-publication

Book Title: Water-A Matter of Life and Death
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Trudinger Peter
Abstract: This volume of essays deals with the critical issue of water and a lack of it. It deals with the scientific, theological, biblical and social issues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9p7

Towards a Theology of the Child from: Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Cadwallader Alan
Abstract: In the all-too-brief outline following there are two halves: a) issues of prolegomena and b) contributions to the construction of a theology of the child.¹ The first section, I believe, is particularly necessary so that we might be circumspect and accountable for our heritage which has sadly lacked an awareness of and sensitivity to the child in christian theology. The second section can be no more than distinct items of contribution and demands a more profound analysis. These contributions cover a range of traditional categories, pastoral theology, theological anthropology, theological ethics, christology and theology and await a more thorough integration.

Where Did Satan Come From? from: Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Skeggs Andrew
Abstract: This is a particularly enlightening topic for study because it illustrates the development of theological ideas during the biblical

Book Title: Opening the Bible-Selected Writings of Antony Campbell SJ
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Campbell Antony
Abstract: "When Tony Campbell, aged 75, asked the Council of Jesuit Theological College for Emeritus status and retirement from JTC, both were granted most graciously, along with a testimonial document which said in part: ‘His teaching has combined evocation and provocation in the best sense of those terms. He has mentored research students with scholarly exactitude and personal care. He has published books of the highest scholarly quality, of engaging readability, and of passionate conviction.’ When we at ATF were considering asking him for a volume of Collected Works or Selected Writings, we were well aware that ‘published books of the highest scholarly quality’ were likely to be found on the shelves of libraries and of specialised academics, but not with students and others generally interested. There may be a dozen or more of Tony’s books on the list from Amazon.com booksellers, along with another two or three that are not listed there. But most are heavy-duty specialist works, not easily accessible even to the educated public. We were equally well aware that there was a surprising number of essays and articles scattered in journals and proceedings of conferences that were, because of the scattering, often just as inaccessible. We thought that a collection of these in a single volume would be of great value to those interested. In the Introduction to this volume, Father Campbell has gone into some detail about the contents. Suffice for us to say that Job and the issues associated with suffering concern us all, that the interplay of history and narrative is a constant in the understanding of much biblical text, and that the nature of the Bible and its role in our lives is a major concern for most thinking Christians. While Father Campbell’s focus is on the Older Testament, pondering what he looks at throws light on much of the Newer Testament as well. The writings Tony Campbell has pulled together in this single volume address significant issues within the readable length of an article or a talk. Addressed originally to thinking people, we at ATF believe they are likely to be of interest to a wide audience."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9t9

Who Dares Wins: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: This paper really begins where an article of mine in this year’s Australian Biblical Reviewended. The article discusses the story of David and Goliath in the books of Samuel, and in its last footnote refers to the two theological positions latent in interpretations of this story. In one understanding, God’s role is to empower David to use his human talents and prowess in a courageous and daring act. But, in the more common interpretation, when the emphasis is shifted toward David as the little shepherd boy, God is no longer portrayed enabling full human potential to be realised, but

2 Samuel 21–24: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The collection constituted by these four chapters (2 Samuel 21–24) offers a particular contribution to our understanding of the conference theme: Story or History in the book of Samuel. The issue of story or history, of story or report, is form-critically extremely challenging and theologically extremely important. As any reader of Mark O’Brien and my recent Rethinking the Pentateuchwill know, it is an issue that extends well beyond Israel’s ‘Former Prophets’¹. The enigma of this ‘special collection’ (chapters 21–24) and the enigma of its components both have considerable bearing on the understanding of the Davidic traditions in

Structure Analysis and the Art of Exegesis (1 Samuel 16:14–18:30) from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: The Holy Grail of biblical interpretation should be the meaning of a text: the best insight the interpreter can offer, after all the acumen of scholarship has been brought to bear, as to what the text is doing or saying.¹ Like the Grail itself, meaning proves elusive to those who engage in its quest. It is easy to make archaeological, geographical, and historical comments or to note critical and linguistic issues. It is quite another question to lay bare one’s conviction as to a text’s meaning. The process tends to lay bare the interpreter’s being.²

The Reported Story: from: Opening the Bible
Abstract: This paper emerges from a combination of three factors: intuition, commonsense logic, and everyday observation. The intuition is simply a storyteller’s conviction, after working with the text of 1–2 Samuel for a while, that no storytellers worth their salt would be able to tell some of the stories the way they are in the text.¹ In exciting areas, they are too bare, too bald; they cry out for embellishment. Commonsense logic says that as well as the simple telling of a story and the skilled fashioning of a story as a work of literary art, there is also the

CHRISTIANITY AND RATIONAL, UNIVERSAL MORALS from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: That the “ten words” are originally and always the major criteria of religious morals does not mean that the rational, moral conscience (or the “natural” conscience that is, in a limited sense, non revealed) may be incapable of truth. The vicissitudes of the late Middle Ages (especially with the rediscovery of Aristotle and the work of Thomas Aquinas) and then of modernity have shown the importance of the rational, moral conscience—its autonomous ability to construct an ethical form. Theological thought, likewise, has been able to recognize that revelation does not substitute for but rather conserves moral autonomy, which, thus recognized,

HOMO NECANS from: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: Scholars from various disciplines currently hold the opinion that homicide is an anthropological constant, a distinctive trait of the universally understood human spirit, a bloody trademark of the species. It appears we must say much the same for war as a permanent factor in the history of man and for the transcultural presence of vendetta in archaic societies. Tribal avenger or warrior—and founder of community—the masculine figure resides in the stories of the origin in many versions, with a certain documentable persistence. And when research like this takes up the evolutionary model and turns to looking into the

5 Literature, Song, and the Colonies (1900–1920) from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: Colonial writing both could have and should have been the ancestor of the current trend of “surprising traveler” novels. However, it is not. Today, colonial literature has been all but forgotten, and even when it is evoked, it is to reaffirm its negative status. In terms of its literary qualities, the genre rarely produced texts rich enough to leave a mark on French literature. Never mind a masterpiece. There was never a French Kipling—at least not according to traditional doxa on the subject. The theme of colonization all too often produced literary works of a didactic and ideologically heavy-handed

11 To Civilize: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or

21 Manipulation: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Lemaire Sandrine
Abstract: On the occasion of the International Colonial Exposition of 1931, Lambert-Ribot, a spokesperson for the colonial lobby, stated, “Production is one thing, but we must also make known what has been created: there are raw materials in our colonies, and yet we look for them abroad. The primary reason for this error is our ignorance of our riches overseas. [ . . . ] Informing an elite interested in self-edification is well and good, however we must also inform the buying masses. This is why publicity for colonial products has become necessary.”¹ Following this logic, propaganda committees were created for

26 Decolonizing France: from: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Hémery Daniel
Abstract: Understanding the role of the Indochina War in the history of French society from the second half of the twentieth century, and the fracture it caused to the cultural universe of what we used to call the “metropole,” is not a simple task. Research has typically focused on the political choices taken, the economic implications of such choices, the military history of the conflict, the ideological and political response in the metropole, and the implied social and cultural spaces.¹ A view of the whole has been largely neglected. My thinking here must therefore necessarily be interrogative in nature and organized

1 Is Continental Philosophy of Religion Dead? from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida is dead. Now they are all dead—all the soixant-huitaires.¹ So, is it over? Is Continental philosophy—and by extension, Continental philosophy of religion—as we know it dead? For a younger generation of philosophers, the so-called theological turn is the last straw. If the religious turn is where Continental philosophy ends up, supplying a final place for religion to hide before the “singularity” arrives,² then Continental philosophy is dead. If it is not, the first order of business is to kill it off. What good is Nietzsche’s death of God, if we still have to deal with

8 Monetized Philosophy and Theological Money: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Singh Devin
Abstract: Claims about the future involve perceptions of the present and discourses about the past. This is especially so in the case of money. As a peculiar social technology that indexes value and regulates relations of credit and debt, it reflects and shapes expectations and, hence, projects a future. In consideration of the course this monetary future might take in the West, theology and the philosophy of religion are necessary resources with which to engage. As genealogies of modernity and capitalism have laid bare, theological and religiously inflected philosophical discourses have been determinative for the Western sociopolitical imaginary.¹ Money has likewise

10 Verbis Indisciplinatis from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Ballan Joseph
Abstract: Whichever continent, real or imagined, it is aligned with, philosophy of religion in the United States occupies a somewhat uneasy position alongside other disciplines and institutional arrangements. Scholars who work on or within Asian philosophical traditions find themselves facing much the same predicament as those who locate themselves somewhere within the vaguely post-phenomenological landscape called “Continental philosophy of religion.” To what disciplinary genus does this species of scholarship—which has also become a recognizable styleof scholarship—belong? To philosophy? To religious studies? To theology? Perhaps to none of these options? In what follows, I would like to think about

11 Overwhelming Abundance and Everyday Liturgical Practices: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Gschwandtner Christina M.
Abstract: A logic of superabundance describing experience at the limit. Excessively saturated phenomena to which we are devoted with total and kenotic abandon. Absolute and utter immediacy—the very Life of God in our self-affecting passion. Limitless desire for the undeconstructible impossible. Abnegation. Liminality. The Immemorial. The Unhoped for. Contemporary phenomenology of religion exalts in the absolute, the excessive, the radical, and the extreme. The experiences it depicts always balance on the very edge of the abyss, on the very line of liminality, on the razor blade of the most extreme paradox.

12 Countercurrents: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Vahanian Noëlle
Abstract: The general theme of this current volume is that of the future of Continental philosophy of religion. One could focus on established or more recently introduced authorial paradigms—for instance and to name but a few, Derrida, Deleuze, Caputo, Malabou, Goodchild, Westphal, Laruelle, and so on—and assess their legacy, debate their future, or perhaps even establish a vanguard. But in the vanguard or not, these contemporary thinkers and their followers attest to the recent so-called return to religion of Continental phenomenological thought. Cast in this way, the volume’s theme could suggest not merely that faith and religious thought have

14 On Reading—Catherine Malabou from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Johnson Randall
Abstract: For the most part, it seems that we approach reading as if it were neutral in all valences of any consequence: language or other sign indicators on the screen or page are touched, usually by vision, and then processed by the synaptic workings of the brain for the purpose of transfer of information. And often all of this happens without awareness, even at times the very choice of what we read. Here, there is pure—and isn’t thistheideological word par excellence that slips its way into speculative idealisms, scientific empiricisms, and even materialisms of the real—form of

17 From Cosmology to the First Ethical Gesture: from: The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Škof Lenart
Abstract: In this essay I want to explore Schelling’s cosmological philosophy by comparing it to early Indian philosophy on one hand and the philosophy of Luce Irigaray on the other hand. In the first section I begin with a comparison of Schelling’s cosmogonical question from Ages of the Worldand the Indian Vedic cosmogonic hymn “Nasadasiya.” The basic question of this section on the “philosophy of beginning” is whence comes the creation of the world. There is no direct textual evidence in Schelling’s writings that he read this particular Vedic hymn, but there are striking similarities between Schelling’s cosmogonical concepts and

11 Afterword: from: Encountering Morocco
Author(s) DWYER KEVIN
Abstract: The essays in this volume address topics that, for a long time, were present only at the margins of academic anthropological discourse, if they appeared at all. Issues like the anthropologist’s “identity”—the implications of the anthropologist’s origins and how anthropologists construct themselves in the field; the attractions and perils of friendship; the impact of the anthropologist’s family on fieldwork; suspicion of and hostility toward the anthropologist and competition between the anthropologist and others in the field; the tensions among the many aspects of an anthropologist’s humanity, and between the roles of researcher and judge, between “scientific” observation and judgmental

FIVE Gift and Sacrifice from: Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion is maybe most well-known as a philosopher of the gift. Already in a widely read article, titled “Sketch of a Phenomenological Concept of the Gift,” he attempted to illuminate the topic of the gift.¹ His major phenomenological work, Being Given,explores phenomenology as fundamentally about “givenness” and includes an entire section titled “The Gift” (part 2). He engaged in extensive debates with Jacques Derrida on the gift and economy, especially in the highly publicized debate of the 1997 conference “ Religion and Postmodernism I: God, the Gift, and Postmodernism.”² In the English-speaking world, this debate (somewhat unfortunately) dominated the

4 A Difficult Place in Political Thought from: Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: The comprehension of political mechanisms in Africa—the cost, exercise, transmission and control of power—must be the object of a second anthropological reading of symbolic systems structuring the collective and the subjective, the institutional uses of rhetoric, and the specific conflicts they engender. where does palabrefit in here?

1. Knights and Knaves of the Living Dead: from: Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Connell George
Abstract: Among the endlessly repeated motifs of the horror genre, none more reliably evokes a shudder than the idea of the undead, of humans doomed to wander between life and death. This response has a variety of deep psychological sources. Our anxiety in the face of our own mortality plays a part, as does a physiological revulsion to decaying bodies. Further, the sense of the living dead as ontologically other evokes in us a sense of numinous dread. Following Mary Douglas, the way such beings transgress the boundary separating life and death renders them both dangerous and impure.¹

Book Title: Phenomenology in Anthropology-A Sense of Perspective
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): JACKSON MICHAEL
Abstract: This volume explores what phenomenology adds to the enterprise of anthropology, drawing on and contributing to a burgeoning field of social science research inspired by the phenomenological tradition in philosophy. Essays by leading scholars ground their discussions of theory and method in richly detailed ethnographic case studies. The contributors broaden the application of phenomenology in anthropology beyond the areas in which it has been most influential-studies of sensory perception, emotion, bodiliness, and intersubjectivity-into new areas of inquiry such as martial arts, sports, dance, music, and political discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz7f0

Introduction: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Houston Christopher
Abstract: What is phenomenology? And why should anthropologists, as well as students of history, psychology, education, or political economy be interested in it? Within philosophy, phenomenology is as diverse as its practitioners. Indeed, Moran (2000: 3) in an introduction to philosophical traditions of phenomenology finds it important to warn readers not to overstate the degree to which phenomenology “coheres into an agreed method, or accepts one theoretical outlook, or one set of philosophical theses about consciousness, knowledge, and the world.” Some of this diversity continues to be a feature of anthropological uses of phenomenology, as we show here. Yet we also

1 Moods and Method: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Ram Kalpana
Abstract: My claims for phenomenology in this essay are limited to the work of two key exponents of the philosophical method, Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty. There are specific reasons why these two philosophers recommend themselves out of the wide range of philosophers who can claim to represent phenomenological methods. Both Heidegger and

2 Toward a Cultural Phenomenology of Body-World Relations from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Csordas Thomas J.
Abstract: For years in my seminar on embodiment I have begun by juxtaposing the work of Merleau-Ponty, Bourdieu, and Foucault, based on the intuition that the work of these three thinkers taken together established the intellectual topology of embodiment as an “indeterminate methodological field defined by perceptual experience and mode of presence and engagement in the world” (Csordas 1994: 12). Writing against the grain of the occasional antipathy toward phenomenology articu lated by both Bourdieu and Foucault, I suggest that taken together their work helps to outline the structure of this methodological field for cultural phenomenology by defining complementary aspects of

5 Beneath the Horizon: from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.

10 Writing Affect, Love, and Desire into Ethnography from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Wynn L. L.
Abstract: The matter-of-fact irritation that Hammond expresses toward talking about “the sexual problem” is an apt analogy for contemporary anthropology’s approach to love. Sex, of course, has figured in anthropology’s public image ever since the earliest years of the discipline, with Margaret Mead’s Coming of Age in Samoa(1928), or Malinowski’s more explicitThe Sexual Life of Savages(1929), replete with descriptions of exotic sexual positions. And in recent years, “desire” has become an increasingly popular catchphrase in anthropological writing (e.g., Rofel 2007). Yet for all the attention anthropologists pay to sex and desire,lovewas, until quite recently, curiously rare

Afterword from: Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,

Book Title: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity-Toward a Wider Suffrage
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): LLEWELYN JOHN
Abstract: Focusing on the idea of universal suffrage, John Llewelyn accepts the challenge of Derrida's later thought to renew his focus on the ethical, political, and religious dimensions of what makes us uniquely human. Llewelyn builds this concern on issues of representation, language, meaning, and logic with reflections on the phenomenological figures who informed Derrida's concept of deconstruction. By entering into dialogue with these philosophical traditions, Llewelyn demonstrates the range and depth of his own original thinking. The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity is a rich and passionate, playful and perceptive work of philosophical analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gz7jj

Introduction from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: How wide is our usual conception of what we call universal suffrage? The aim of this book is to show that that usual conception is not wide enough and that it is not wide enough because it does not do justice to what the book’s title and one of its epigraphs calls “inhumanity.” The envisaged widening of that common conception referred to in the book’s subtitle is simultaneously a widening of our conceptions of the ethical and the political toward the ecological. The eco-logical. The envisaged progression starts in logic and the philosophy of logic—unless it is prevented from

ONE Ideologies from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Order may be conferred upon the following unchronologically arranged reminders of the history of thinking about linguistic representation if they are prefaced by the reminder that the word Gegenstand, so frequently used by Wittgenstein in theTractatus Logico-Philosophicus, and that word’s Latinate predecessor “object” bring with them the notion of something that is over against or cast in front and so stands in the way. A further complexity arises for us today from the fact that when the Scholastics, followed by Descartes and others, speak of the objective reality of an idea as distinct from its formal reality, objective means

FIVE Pure Grammar from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: What is the idea of pure grammar to which the title of Husserl’s fourth Investigation refers? What is the idea of a grammar of pure logic to which §14 of that Investigation refers? What is the logic of this grammar? What is the grammar of this logic? And what is the philosophical significance of his idea of pure logical grammar? I shall begin to try to answer these questions by way of the answer Husserl himself gives from a historical point of view to the last of them, explaining what part he sees this answer contributing to philosophy. I shall

NINE Who or What or Whot from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Kierkegaard’s statement “The metaphysical, the ontological, is [ er], but it does not exist [er ikke til]” draws the line that separates him from Hegel and both of them from Levinas.¹ His Danish does this distinctly. On the one hand, the preposition “til,” “to,” indicates a relation between subjectivity and otherness that, Kierkegaard maintains, cannot be subsumed within the sphere of being or essence. On the other hand, while agreeing with Kierkegaard’s denial, Levinas argues against Kierkegaard (and Heidegger) that the ec-static, ex-sistent to-ness and toward-ness of the relation indicated by Kierkegaard’s preposition presupposes an inward-ness without which there can be

ELEVEN Barbarism, Humanism, and Democratic Ecology from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: In the final sentence of his book The New Ecological OrderLuc Ferry writes: “Between barbarism and humanism, it is now up to democratic ecology to decide.”¹ He means by this that democratic ecology, as that has been described in his book, must decide between barbarism and humanism, and from what has been said in his book it follows, he maintains, that it is for humanism that democratic ecology must opt. Ecology would not be democratic unless it were an ecology centered on thedēmos. Bydēmoshe means humankind, the third of the three things mentioned in the subtitle

TWELVE Where to Cut: from: The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Referring in The Animal That Therefore I Am to The Middle Voice of Ecological Conscience, Derrida says that he wishes to recommend the latter book especially because, sharing the author’s concern, he will perhaps proceed a little differently.¹ My concern in that book and particularly in chapter 8 of this one is to raise consciousness. It is to raise consciousness, where it seems to me to need raising, to conscience, and to raise conscience, where it seems to me to need raising, to responsibility. By responsibility I mean ethical responsibility in a sense I take to be the sense proposed

THREE Acknowledging God from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Having presented Cavell’s openness toward the problem of religion, I now proceed to more theologically charged territory in order to explore some possibilities offered by Cavell’s philosophy. In doing so, I focus on one of Cavell’s signature concepts, namely acknowledgment. Although acknowledgment has a wide application in Cavell’s thinking—including our relation to the world, others, different modernist artistic media, and our own conditions as speaking animals—it was initially developed in response to the skeptical problem of other minds. Since the problem of other minds has remained at the center of Cavell’s concerns, and since this problem highlights features

SIX The Other and Violence from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Whereas the previous chapter elaborated what might be thought of as a destiny to which we must be answerable, I now turn to another, more active face of skepticism or sin, namely violence. What is the connection between violence and my relation to the other? How can the motives behind violence be understood, and how is it entangled with religion? Levinas’s understanding of how violence is bound up with the face of the other provides a rich phenomenological account, one that I believe can be supplemented with Cavell’s subtle understanding of its motivation.

CONCLUSION: from: Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In this book I have tried to elaborate the analogies and overlappings between Cavell’s philosophy and his religious perspective, either expressed philosophically or theologically. If such an undertaking might be deemed risky, it is because of Cavell’s own repeated resistance toward certain Christian depictions of the human state as helpless, fixed, awaiting supernatural aid, pursuing untimely theologizing, and the like. This resistance has been emphasized by his commentators and has often been taken as Cavell’s prevalent attitude. Especially in chapter 1 but also in the subsequent chapters, I have tried to oppose such interpretations—not because they are wrong (indeed,

7 The Enigma of Socrates: from: Gadamer
Abstract: It is impossible to imagine philosophical hermeneutics without Greek philosophy. Nonetheless, hermeneutics is not a retreat from the questions of contemporary philosophy to the historical-philological study of Greek texts, nor should Gadamer’s project be reduced to a mere “application” of Greek ideas. Greek philosophy plays a decisive role for hermeneutics, which has not yet been sufficiently recognized.

8 The Horizon of Dialogue from: Gadamer
Abstract: When Gadamer wrote the last part of Truth and Method,language had not yet reached the leading role on the philosophical stage that it would later come to have. The “linguistic turn” of the twentieth century, the point at which the most varied of philosophical currents run together, had not yet occurred. These currents go from logical positivism to Wittgenstein, from american pragmatism to structuralism and psychoanalysis, from heidegger to the transcendental pragmatism of apel and habermas, from merleau-Ponty to derrida’s deconstruction. Philosophical hermeneutics contributes as well. But at that time even Gadamer could not imagine that his “turn”—the

Book Title: Nietzsche and Phenomenology-Power, Life, Subjectivity
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Daigle Christine
Abstract: What are the challenges that Nietzsche's philosophy poses for contemporary phenomenology? Elodie Boublil, Christine Daigle, and an international group of scholars take Nietzsche in new directions and shed light on the sources of phenomenological method in Nietzsche, echoes and influences of Nietzsche within modern phenomenology, and connections between Nietzsche, phenomenology, and ethics. Nietzsche and Phenomenology offers a historical and systematic reconsideration of the scope of Nietzsche's thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzcrk

Introduction from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Daigle Christine
Abstract: Putting Nietzscheandphenomenologytogether in the same sentence might be startling to some, even unpalatable to others. Nietzsche’s writing style along with his rejection of theSpirit of Gravity¹ would seem to oppose the very goal of the phenomenological project as well as its foundational and scientific ambition. To Nietzsche scholars, his philosophy would be irreducible to any kind of philosophical school or movement and would need to be treated on its own if one wants to respect the claim for singularity conveyed by his philosophy. To would-be phenomenologists, the socalled nihilistic enterprise led by Nietzsche should not be

10 Originary Dehiscence: from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Chouraqui Frank
Abstract: One of the most prominent connections between Nietzsche’s thought and the entire phenomenological enterprise lies in Husserl’s founding postulate that the thing-in-itself is an invalid concept. Although Husserl never formulates it explicitly, the development of phenomenology demonstrates the root of this invalidity: the thing-in-itself is a contradiction insofar as a thing is, by definition and by essence, always an object of perception. This is also, of course, one of Nietzsche’s most explicit, best established, and most consistently repeated claims, and perhaps one that has the greater consequence within the overall economy of his thought. Indeed this connection suggests a kinship

15 Beyond Phenomenology from: Nietzsche and Phenomenology
Author(s) Franck Didier
Abstract: “Beyond phenomenology”—what should this expression mean? To begin with, what is phenomenology or what should we understand by the name, whose formation occurred so late? Through what movement, according to what logic, by virtue of what necessity should phenomenology be carried beyond itself? Moreover, what indeed could be the end or destination of such a movement, when phenomenology asserts and maintains that there is nothing to seek beyond the phenomena?

TWO Feminism, Socialism, and Christianity Revisited from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) MAHOWALD MARY B.
Abstract: Nearly three decades ago, I wrote an article in which I identified myself as ideologically committed to feminism, socialism, and Christianity.¹ The invitation to contribute to this book provides me with an opportunity to review those commitments and what they mean to me now. As then, I acknowledge the gap between my theory and my practice.

FOUR Three Aspects of Identity from: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) MORKOVSKY MARY CHRISTINE
Abstract: A believer who came to feminism through philosophy—that is how I would characterize myself. Chronologically, I was born into a Roman Catholic family and baptized as an infant; after becoming a religious Sister, I was trained in philosophy; and in the 1980s I became aware of and content with the fact that I am a feminist. Some autobiographical details will explain how this unfolded. Then I will discuss the tensions and rewards that ensued.

4 Zombie Media from: The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) BOHMAN ERIK
Abstract: Taken as a whole, George A. Romero’s body of work has most often been thought to mark shifts in cultural anxieties—anxieties around the Vietnam War and the civil rights era, the rise of a consumer economy, the relation of science and the military during the Cold War, the war in Iraq, and the irruptive spectacle of terrorism—anxieties that his films not only embody but also critically respond to, and all of which have been well documented. Yet, by regarding these films as markers of cultural anxieties or repressions, such readings either implicitly or explicitly tend to use psychological

1 DARWIN AND FEMINISM: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Grosz Elizabeth
Abstract: There has traditionally been a strong resistance on the part of feminists to any recourse to the question of nature. Within feminist scholarship and politics, nature has been regarded primarily as a kind of obstacle against which we need to struggle, as that which remains inert, given, unchanging, and resistant to historical, social, and cultural transformations.¹ The suspicion with which biological accounts of human and social life are treated by feminists, especially feminists not trained in the biological sciences, is to some extent understandable. “Biology” not only designates the studyof life but also refers to the body, to organic

9 LANDSCAPE, MEMORY, AND FORGETTING: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Mortimer-Sandilands Catriona
Abstract: In a recent exchange in the journal Environmental Ethics, David Abram and Ted Toadvine engage in a spirited debate about questions of sensuousness, perception, reflection, writing, memory, and landscape. Focused on their conflicting interpretations of Abram’s popular bookThe Spell of the Sensuous(1996), and eventually resting on their divergent readings of Merleau-Ponty’sPhenomenology of Perception(1962),¹ Toadvine and Abram each attempt to address a set of ontological questions that are, I think, foundational for environmental philosophy: How can we understand the human body as a particular site of perceptions of, and interactions with, the more-than-human world? How can we

13 ORGANIC EMPATHY: from: Material Feminisms
Author(s) Wilson Elizabeth A.
Abstract: I recently attended an interdisciplinary feminist meeting that assumed a consensus about social constructionism and criticized scholarly work that was perceived as “essentialist,” because it implied a biological basis for gender attributes. During meals and breaks, however, I heard a different story. Several women were taking Prozac or similar drugs for depression. Some of their children, who had been difficult, “underachieving,” or disruptive in school, were also being medicated. These informal discussions centered on

NINE AS IF I WERE DEAD: from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: I object to the blackmail, to the bad choice—theism or atheism!—and to the violence of double genitive in the odium theologiae—the total contempt for religion on the part of secularists, the demonization of atheism by the theologians, which leads to outright violence by religious extremists. The whole thing is a perfect recipe for war. The current form this blackmail has taken in recent years is a new wave of “materialism,” “realism,” and “atheism” that has arisen in reaction to the so-called theological turn. These terms are used more or less interchangeably, as if theology is allergic to

TEN FACTS, FICTIONS, AND FAITH: from: The Insistence of God
Abstract: Having thus redescribed “objectivity” as a way to think about the world in which we live as if we were dead or never born, let us now take a careful look at the words that have sparked the current critique of continental philosophy—Meillassoux’s critique of “correlation” and “fideism,” in that order. This criticism has been set in motion by the theological turn, or the return of religion, which is taken to be a regrettable consequence of continental antirealism. I think there is something to this critique of fideism but it should be put to better purpose. It should be

THIRTEEN Reanimating the Author from: What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: In the background of proclamations, by late twentieth-century literary theorists-cum-cultural critics, of “the death of the author,” and in the last analysis motivating them, stand the two traditional doctrines of Marxism mentioned briefly in section 2 of chapter 1. The first is the doctrine that culture per se is causally ineffective – a mere reflection, or epiphenomenon, of the underlying realities of exploitation and class conflict that actually govern historical change. The second is the connected, though not wholly consistent doctrine that the primary functions of the institutions of culture are ideologicalin the Marxist sense of that term. That is,

2 Existence and Dependency: from: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: As we have just seen, at the heart of Leopoldo Zea’s thought appears Western philosophy as a creative force that results in the domination of other peoples and cultures who have not likewise developed their reflexive rationality. Two major Latin American philosophers who engage directly with the kind of existence that results from experiencing such domination are the Venezuelan Ernesto Mayz Vallenilla and the Peruvian Augusto Salazar Bondy. The first offers a deep phenomenological analysis of the abyssal existence Simón Bolívar introduces in his “Jamaica Letter” when he articulates the difficulty of Latin American existence. Salazar Bondy takes on domination

1 From Ecological Postmodernism to Material Ecocriticism: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Oppermann Serpil
Abstract: The conception of physical reality within the framework of ecological postmodern thought and the nature of the material world described by quantum theory have recently been given new life by the emergence of the new materialist paradigm. The radical revisions of our ideas about the description of physical entities, chemical and biological processes, and their ethical, political, and cultural implications represented in recent discourses of feminist science studies, posthumanism, and the environmental humanities have also occasioned considerable interest among ecocritics, leading to the emergence of material ecocriticism. Proposing that we can read the world as matter endowed with stories, material

4 Natural Play, Natural Metaphor, and Natural Stories: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Wheeler Wendy
Abstract: As philosopher Thomas Nagel writes in his 2012 book, Mind and Cosmos: Why the Materialist NeoDarwinian Conception of Nature Is Almost Certainly False,the three-hundred-year grip of materialism and reductionism in evolutionary biology seems to be weakening. Not only is this—Nagel calls it “physico-chemical reductionism in biology” (5)—because the ability of such a widely held position convincingly to explain the evolution of mind from physico-chemical nature has failed, but it is also because the difference between “ontological dependence upon” and “reduction to” has in recent years been addressed by the concept of emergence, or emergent features in complex

7 When It Rains: from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Duckert Lowell
Abstract: Responding to his country’s record rainfalls in the beginning of the twenty-first century, British journalist Brian Cathcart seems to bring more of it. Rainmakes a dreary forecast: “It is only when things go wrong that our dim consciousness of scientific meteorology rises to the surface” (66). French sociologist of science Bruno Latour would diagnose this tendency as “blackboxing.” Focusing only on the success of a scientific or technological apparatus paradoxically renders “the joint production of actors and artifacts entirely opaque” (Hope 183).¹ When a meteorology machine runs smoothly, it produces factual climates that we can reasonably predict and accurately

8 Painful Material Realities, Tragedy, Ecophobia from: Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Estok Simon C.
Abstract: The biological, chemical, and material bases of human ontology constitute central sites of investigation and theoretical comment for material ecocriticisms. If we understand pain as a fundamental part of human ontology, then we must also understand that theorizing matterprofits from understanding the importance of relationships among cultural representations of pain, matter, and environment. Building on “a field that defines itself by a neologism (ecocriticism), based on another neologism (ecology)” (7), as Middlebury Shakespearean ecocritic Dan Brayton has recently described ecocriticism, material ecocriticisms seek both to further complicate and to further define what it is that ecocriticism pursues and how.

Book Title: Ideas to Live For-Toward a Global Ethics
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): GUNN GILES
Abstract: Over the course of his distinguished interdisciplinary career, Giles Gunn has sustained his focus on the continuing threats to our collective sense of the human that seem to result from the link between the collision of fundamental values and the increase of systemic violence. He asks whether such threats can be at least mitigated, even if not removed, by understanding as opposed to force and what resources a more pragmatic cosmopolitanism might provide for doing so. How, in other words, might our sense of the human be reconstructed, not around suspicion or antipathy toward others, but around an epistemological and moral need of them?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16kdw0h

NINE The Transcivilizational, the Intercivilizational, and the Human: from: Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In a world where traditional international rules have sometimes proved inadequate, recent interest in the notion of “legitimacy” as a complementary source of legal authority has raised a number of issues—legal, moral, and what some would call “ontological.”⁴ These issues came to the fore most dramatically, though not for the first time, during the Kosovo War of 1999, when in the face of grave and intolerable human rights abuses it became necessary to override legal protections against intervention into the activities of sovereign states. These questions were soon to become still more urgent and vexed when “legitimacy” was employed

5 Motherhood Refigured: from: The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: To his critics, Bourdieu’s understanding of human agency (upon which I have relied to loosely structure my explanation of the abandonment) amounts to nothing more than a sophisticated version of social determinism.¹ Although Bourdieu’s intention had been to articulate a way of thinking about why people do what they do that transcended the reductive binaries of domination and resistance, his critics have consistently accused him of proposing a model of agency that condemns human actors to the reproduction of their own histories. And it is easy to see upon what logical grounds such accusations rest. For Bourdieu, after all, social

2 Parmenides from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Parmenides is traditionally approached in terms of his basic distinction between the “Way of Truth” and the “Way of Seeming.” We prefer to begin with a distinction implicated in the very first line, a distinction little attended to by interpreters of Parmenides, but a distinction of pivotal importance both for the understanding of our relation to Being and for a rapprochement between Eastern and Western thought: “The steeds that carry me took me as far as my heart could desire?”¹ Heart and the limits of its desire initiate Western metaphysics. Not thought, not logic or reason, but “the heart” with

9 The Self and the Other: from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In the De Veritate,¹ Thomas Aquinas attempts a logical division of the transcendental properties of being according to the distinction between a being considered absolutely and considered in relation to another. Each division, in turn, is further divided into positive and negative properties. The positive relative properties, goodness and truth, have received extended treatment by the Scholastics, as has the negative absolute property, unity. However, the positive absolute propertyres(thing) and especially the negative relative propertyaliquid(other, i.e.,alium quid) are generally given scant treatment.

10 Kant’s “Antinomic” Aesthetics from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Even a cursory glance at Kant’s thought indicates that it revolves around “antinomies,” literally “contrary laws” or the clash of different modes of legislation. In the Critique of Pure Reason, we find the famouscosmological antinomiessetting the empirical against the rational: the limited or unlimited character of time, the divisible or indivisible character of the basic constituents of things, freedom or the laws of nature, and necessity or contingency as the basis of things.¹ In theCritique of Practical Reason, the rational nature, governed by duty, is set over against the animal nature of inclination, duty against happiness, deontology

12 Hegel on the Heart from: The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In a polemic typically aimed at Hegelians and in the name of religious piety, Kierkegaard complained that philosophers construct magnificent thought-castles and dwell in miserable shacks nearby. Dwelling is a matter of deepest individuality, of subjectivity, passion, and inwardness.¹ It is a matter of the heart, of which Pascal says that reason knows nothing.² And everyone knows that the individual with his precious heart is swallowed up in Hegelian panlogicism and ground under in the march of the Absolute through history.

Book Title: The Incarnate Lord- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): WHITE THOMAS JOSEPH
Abstract: The Incarnate Lord, then, considers central themes in Christology from a metaphysical perspective. Particular attention is given to the hypostatic union, the two natures of Christ, the knowledge and obedience of Jesus, the passion and death of Christ, his descent into hell, and resurrection. A central concern of the book is to argue for the perennial importance of ontological principles of Christology inherited from patristic and scholastic authors. However, the book also seeks to advance an interpretation of Thomistic Christology in a modern context. The teaching Aquinas, then, is central to the study, but it is placed in conversation with various modern theologians, such as Karl Barth, Karl Rahner and Hans Urs von Balthasar. Ultimately the goal of the work is to suggest how traditional Catholic theology might thrive under modern conditions, and also develop fruitfully from engaging in contemporary controversies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16ptn5b

1 The Ontology of the Hypostatic Union from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: The first part of this book is concerned with the mystery of the incarnation. What does it mean, from a Thomistic point of view, to hold that God the Word, the second person of the Trinity, became man and lived a true, human life in a historical place and time? To ask this question is to touch upon a significant theological topic: the ontology of the hypostatic union. What is the union of God and man that takes place in the very personof the Word? What does it mean to say that God the Word subsists personally as a

3 The Likeness of the Human and Divine Natures from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: I have argued in the previous chapter that there exists a profound correspondence between our philosophical knowledge of human nature and our theological knowledge of the humanity of Christ. This notion alludes in an indirect but real way to the controversies surrounding the analogia entis, the famous twentieth-century debate between Karl Barth and Erich Przywara. Why? Because that controversy centered on the relationship between philosophical reason and theological science. Consider three acute questions at the heart of that debate. First, what does it mean to say that our philosophical knowledge is capable of cooperating with and of being assimilated into

4 Why Christology Presupposes Natural Theology from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: In the last chapter I sought to show how a correct use of an analogical metaphysics of being could serve to uphold the doctrine of the incarnation. In this chapter I would like to turn the argument around and suggest that the mystery of the incarnation invites us to uphold an analogical metaphysics of being. An ecumenical version of this argument was developed in mid-twentieth-century Catholic theology. A string of authors such as Erich Przywara, Gottlieb Söhngen, Hans Urs von Balthasar, and Henri Bouillard emphasized the role that grace plays in the concrete historical formulation of all intellectual truths about

7 Did God Abandon Jesus? from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: Modern theology has focused upon the last words of Christ in Mark 15:34—“My God, my God, why have you abandoned me?”—as a key locus of Christological dispute and interpretation.¹ Revisionist Enlightenment historians such as Reimarus have perceived in this verse an “authentic saying” of Jesus that predates the redaction of the Gospels. For him it is the indication of the Nazarene’s disillusioned apocalypticism.² Protestant theologians, meanwhile, have found warrant in this Scriptural text for a theology of Christ’s “god-forsakenness” experienced for us as a dimension of redemption. For Calvin it indicates Christ’s state of abandonment as an “experience

9 Did Christ Descend into Hell? from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: Is it an irony of modern theology that in the age in which Rudolph Bultmann should raise the question of the fundamentally mythological character of many New Testament ideas, Hans Urs von Balthasar should seek to reinvigorate the theological meaning of the descent of Christ into hell on Holy Saturday? Perhaps not. By offering a distinctive and in many ways innovative reading of this teaching of the Apostles’ Creed, Balthasar sought to challenge an age of overly reductive scientistic rationality, underscoring in Catholic theology the permanently valid interplay of literary symbolism, metaphysics, dramatic beauty, and Trinitarian mystery. In the words

10 The Ontology of the Resurrection from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: Our study of the being of Christ would be incomplete without a consideration of his resurrection. What can we say about the glorification of his human nature that took place after his death? This depends in part upon what we take human nature to be. I have argued in the prolegomenon to this book that modern theology is often bifurcated. On the one side there is the tendency to reduce Christology to a form of idealized anthropology. Schleiermacher and Rahner provide models of this form of reflection. On the other side there is the theological assimilation of all natural forms

CONCLUSION: from: The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: In the wake of the Second Vatican Council, Catholic theology embraced a primarily historical model of theological exploration. Topics such as Christology, the eucharist, and grace were treated by way of a chronological investigation: from the New Testament to the fathers, from the scholastic age to the early modern debates, terminating in a consideration of the status quaestionisof the subject within modern and contemporary theology. This approach represents the still standard model one encounters in virtually any theology textbook in our time. Chronology determines content.

Book Title: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2-Aspects of Historicity in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Thatcher Tom
Abstract: This groundbreaking volume draws together an international group of leading biblical scholars to consider one of the most controversial religious topics in the modern era: Is the Gospel of John-the most theological and distinctive among the four canonical Gospels-historical or not? If not, why does John alone among the Gospels claim eyewitness connections to Jesus? If so, why is so much of John's material unique to John? Using various methodologies and addressing key historical issues in John, these essays advance the critical inquiry into Gospel historiography and John's place within it, leading to an impressive consensus and convergences along the way. The contributors are Paul N. Anderson; Mark Appold; Richard Bauckham; Helen K. Bond; Richard A. Burridge; James H. Charlesworth; Jaime Clark-Soles; Mary Coloe; R. Alan Culpepper; Craig A. Evans; Sean Freyne; Jeffrey Paul Garcia; Brian D. Johnson; Peter J. Judge; Felix Just, S.J.; Craig S. Keener; Edward W. Klink III; Craig R. Koester; Michael Labahn; Mark A. Matson; James F. McGrath; Susan Miller; Gail R. O'Day; Bas van Os; Tom Thatcher; Derek M. H. Tovey; Urban C. von Wahlde; and Ben Witherington III.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16ptndz

“We Beheld His Glory!” (John 1:14) from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Keener Craig S.
Abstract: Most scholars today concur that the Fourth Gospel includes both history and theology. Even many patristic interpreters, who often harmonized John with the Synoptics (hence apparently stressing history), recognized John as a “spiritual” Gospel, emphasizing its interpretive aspects. The Gospel clearly interprets theologically the eyewitness claim that apparently stands behind it (cf. 21:24); perhaps most conspicuously, in the Fourth Gospel as a whole the eyewitness claim of water and blood from Jesus’ side (19:34–35) is made to climax a motif of water running through the narrative (1:26, 33; 2:7 – 9; 3:5, 23; 4:10, 13 – 14; 5:2; 7:37 – 39; 9:7;

The Symbology of the Serpent in the Gospel of John from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Charlesworth James H.
Abstract: Over the past two decades, specialists on the Gospel of John have customarily focused on the translation, composition-history, and exegesis of this masterpiece. Less attention is addressed to the symbolic world of the Evangelist. That dimension of Johannine studies is now much clearer, thanks to archaeological research and the study of symbolism (see Charlesworth 2006 and 2008), otherwise known as symbology. The present work will illustrate this emerging clarity by exploring the deeper and fuller meaning of an incredibly rich and well-known section of the Fourth Gospel: John 3:13–17.

Jesus and the Galilean ‘Am Ha’arets: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Freyne Sean
Abstract: In discussing the historical plausibility or otherwise of episodes or speeches in the Fourth Gospel, a number of important interpretative decisions have to be taken. These methodological issues cannot be discussed in detail in this essay. My own opinion, as stated in my study of Galilee and the Gospels, is as follows: “The fact that Galilee enters the ironic patterns that the author (John) seeks to develop, shows just how important the memories associated with the region were to Christian self-understanding, even when there is no concern to develop a realistic narrative of that setting” (Freyne 1988, 131–32). In

Aspects of Historicity in John 5–12: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: In responding to the eight essays in part 2 of this volume, I am impressed at the variety of approaches to aspects of historicity in the Gospel of John. Employing religious-anthropological, archaeological, contextual, and historical-critical studies, these essays cover the middle section of the Fourth Gospel, which includes three of Jesus’ four trips to Jerusalem and rising opposition from the Judean religious leaders. The one miracle narrated in all four canonical Gospels—the feeding of the five thousand—and its attending features makes John 6 the premier locus of Gospel-comparison analysis, yet the Lazarus story of John 11 has captured

John 13: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Clark-Soles Jaime
Abstract: Prodigious are the questions generated by this passage (John 13:1–20), and only slightly less prodigious are the publications devoted to it. Textual, anthropological, theological, literary, and exegetical analyses abound; only the historical remains largely untouched. When the historical is mentioned, however, treatments most often refer to the history of the Johannine situation, notto the historical Jesus or the historicity of the underlying Johannine tradition. Of all the questions one could ask, we shall attend most closely in this essay to these two. (1) Is it historically plausible that Jesus washed the feet of his disciples? Why or why

Imitating Jesus: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Burridge Richard A.
Abstract: From earliest days, John has been viewed as the “spiritual gospel” (πνευματικὸν εὐαγγέλιον), while the “external facts” (actually, “the bodily things” (τὰ σωματικὰ) were preserved in the Synoptics (a saying originally attributed to Clement of Alexandria by Eusebius, Hist. eccl.6.14.7). Thus John has been seen as relatively late and Hellenistic, and primarily theological, while the Synoptics were seen as earlier and more Jewish, and therefore, according to this argument, more historical. Not surprisingly, then, John has been neglected in the various quests for the historical Jesus. Nowhere is this contrast more obvious than with regard to the ethical teaching

Book Title: Speak Thus-Christian Language in Church and World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hovey Craig R.
Abstract: In its various forms, speech is absolutely integral to the Christian mission. The gospel is a message, news that must be passed on if it is to be known by others. Nevertheless, the reality of God cannot be exhausted by Christian knowledge and Christian knowledge cannot be exhausted by our words. All the while, the philosophy of modernity has left Christianity an impoverished inheritance within which to think these things. In Speak Thus, Craig Hovey explores the possibilities and limits of Christian speaking. At times ethical, epistemological, and metaphysical, these essays go to the heart of what it means to be the church today. In practice, the Christian life often has a linguistic shape that surprisingly implicates and reveals the commitments of people like those who care for the sick or those who respond as peacemakers in the face of violence. Because learning to speak one way as opposed to another is a skill that must be learned, Christian speakers are also guides who bear witness to the importance of churches for passing on a felicity with Christian ways of speaking. Through constructive engagements with interlocutors like Ludwig Wittgenstein, George Lindbeck, Jeffrey Stout, Stanley Hauerwas, John Howard Yoder, Thomas Aquinas, and the theology of Radical Orthodoxy, Hovey offers a challenging vision of the church'able to speak with a confidence that only comes from a deep attentiveness to its own limitations while able to speak prophetically in a world weary of words.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16wdm5z

Book Title: The Renaissance of emotion-Understanding affect in Shakespeare and his contemporaries
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Sullivan Erin
Abstract: This collection of essays offers a major reassessment of the meaning and significance of emotional experience in the work of Shakespeare and his contemporaries. Recent scholarship on early modern emotion has relied on a medical-historical approach, resulting in a picture of emotional experience that stresses the dominance of the material, humoral body. The Renaissance of emotion seeks to redress this balance by examining the ways in which early modern texts explore emotional experience from perspectives other than humoral medicine. The chapters in the book seek to demonstrate how open, creative and agency-ridden the experience and interpretation of emotion could be. Taken individually, the chapters offer much-needed investigations into previously overlooked areas of emotional experience and signification; taken together, they offer a thorough re-evaluation of the cultural priorities and phenomenological principles that shaped the understanding of the emotive self in the early modern period. The Renaissance of emotion will be of particular interest to students and scholars of Shakespeare and Renaissance literature, the history of emotion, theatre and cultural history, and the history of ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1729w4d

11 Discrepant emotional awareness in Shakespeare from: The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Rawnsley Ciara
Abstract: Emotions-based commentary on early modern literature, and Shakespeare in particular, may suffer from a reductiveness due to reluctance to reflect multiple emotional states present simultaneously, either within an individual as ‘mixed emotions’, or between different characters often listening ‘at cross purposes’, or between characters and the audience (‘dramatic irony’). This perceived deficiency arguably stems from three basic assumptions that can be challenged. First, there has been recently an emphasis on the physiological approach to emotions, which suggests that early modern theory analysed feelings as primarily stemming from the body.¹ In general terms this approach is clearly justifiable in the light

A Theological Reading of the Lithuanian Church during the Soviet Period: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Šimkunas Vidmantas
Abstract: One way to understand the Roman Catholic Church in Lithuania during the period of Soviet oppression is through a historical-theological lens. This approach begins with the position, restated in the Second Vatican Council document Lumen Gentium, that the Church is not just a social institution but also “a kind of sacrament or sign of intimate union with God, and of the unity of all humankind.” Because the Church lives this sacramentality in history, a full interpretation of that life must be sensitive to both the historical and the theological dimensions of its existence.

Christianity and Politics in Post-Soviet Lithuania: from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Putinaitė Nerija
Abstract: Stereotypes about Christianity and attitudes of Christians toward public action were engrained into the minds of Lithuanian people during the Soviet regime and are evident in contemporary Lithuania. As clearly outlined in the chapters by Streikus and Šimkunas, the Soviet ideological apparatus sought to annihilate the influence of Christianity from the lives of people. From the beginning of the Soviet occupation of Lithuania in 1940–1941, and especially from 1944 until Stalin’s death in 1953, the Christian churches in Lithuania were brutally attacked as “the biggest obstacle to the smooth sovietisation of the occupied country.”¹ Many priests were deported, parishioners

The Relationship of Patronage and Legitimacy between the Catholic Church and the Peruvian State from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Beltrán María Soledad Escalante
Abstract: Before the Second Vatican Council, it was a common theological and philosophical approach in Roman Catholicism to refer to the Church as

[Introduction] from: Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: What greatly marks the relationships between democracy, culture, and Catholicism in the United States are the particular political and theological contexts from which the identity of US citizens emerged. The republic was established on the principles of democracy, and its culture was greatly affected and influenced by the prominent place enjoyed by Protestant Christianity among the people. Catholicism was an “outsider” religion that was not to be trusted and, worse, appeared to be completely incompatible with the political and cultural milieu of the nation. What the authors in this section seek to illustrate is the positive role Catholicism has played

Book Title: Keeping the Feast-Metaphors of Sacrifice in 1 Corinthians and Philippians
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Patterson Jane Lancaster
Abstract: Clarification of the strategic function of metaphors as a means of establishing an imaginative framework for ethical deliberationEvidence of Paul's active processes of theological reflectionExploration of the intertwining of Jewish cultic practice with the rhetoric of moral commitment within early Christian churches
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk6wx

3 Sacrifice as a Greco-Roman and Jewish Practice from: Keeping the Feast
Abstract: While it makes sense logically that Paul might develop a language of temple and sacrifice that would be as valid for the Greco-Roman cults as for the Jewish cult, in fact part of what will become clear in chapter 6 is how Paul’s metaphors of temple and sacrifice in 1 Corinthians seem to have as their principal referent the Jewish cult in particular, and not a more generalized reference to ancient cults of all kinds.¹ It is the Jewish system of texts and practices in which Paul is a learned specialist. His expertise and authority are based in his experience

CANADA from: Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Guay Louis-Martin
Abstract: To understand the development and importance of video games in Canada, a few geographical and sociological facts must first be pointed out. Canada occupies the northern part of North America and is surrounded by three oceans and its only neighbor, the United States. While Canada is the second-largest country in the world by total area (9,984,670 square kilometers, which is approximately 5% larger than the United States’ 9,526,468 square kilometers), it has a relatively small population of approximately 34 million (Statistics Canada 2012). When compared to the United States’ 2010 population of 308 million (US Census Bureau 2010), it is

Book Title: Mind in Architecture-Neuroscience, Embodiment, and the Future of Design
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: Although we spend more than ninety percent of our lives inside buildings, we understand very little about how the built environment affects our behavior, thoughts, emotions, and well-being. We are biological beings whose senses and neural systems have developed over millions of years; it stands to reason that research in the life sciences, particularly neuroscience, can offer compelling insights into the ways our buildings shape our interactions with the world. This expanded understanding can help architects design buildings that support both mind and body. In Mind in Architecture, leading thinkers from architecture and other disciplines, including neuroscience, cognitive science, psychiatry, and philosophy, explore what architecture and neuroscience can learn from each other. They offer historical context, examine the implications for current architectural practice and education, and imagine a neuroscientifically informed architecture of the future. Architecture is late in discovering the richness of neuroscientific research. As scientists were finding evidence for the bodily basis of mind and meaning, architecture was caught up in convoluted cerebral games that denied emotional and bodily reality altogether. This volume maps the extraordinary opportunity that engagement with cutting-edge neuroscience offers present-day architects.ContributorsThomas D. Albright, Michael Arbib, John Paul Eberhard, Melissa Farling, Vittorio Gallese, Alessandro Gattara, Mark L. Johnson, Harry Francis Mallgrave, Iain McGilchrist, Juhani Pallasmaa, Alberto Pérez-Gómez, Sarah Robinson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk8bm

3 BODY, MIND, AND IMAGINATION: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: Instead of stepping on the specialized ground of neuroscience, I wish to elaborate on the specific mental essence of architecture—a realm that is deeply biologically and culturally grounded, although poorly understood in both education and practice. It is my hope that the exciting doors that the biological and neurosciences are now opening will valorize the interaction of architecture and the human mind, and reveal hidden complexities that have thus far escaped measurement and rational analyses. In our postmodern society, dominated by shallow rationality and reliance on the empirical, measurable, and demonstrable, the embodied and mental dimensions of human existence

8 EMBODIED SIMULATION, AESTHETICS, AND ARCHITECTURE: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Gattara Alessandro
Abstract: Cognitive neuroscience today offers a novel approach to the study of human social cognition and culture. Such an approach can be viewed as a sort of “cognitive archaeology,” as it enables the empirical investigation of the neurophysiological brain mechanisms that make our interactions with the world possible, thereby allowing us to detect the possible functional antecedents of our cognitive skills and to measure the sociocultural influence exerted through human cultural evolution on that very same cognitive repertoire. Thanks to cognitive neuroscience we can deconstruct some of the concepts we normally use when referring to intersubjectivity or to aesthetics, art, and

9 FROM INTUITION TO IMMERSION: from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Farling Melissa
Abstract: Eberhard’s description of experiencing Amiens Cathedral explains all that a person takes in with her senses, and allows us to understand not only the psychological, but also the neurological and physiological aspects of that experience. This rich, multidimensional understanding was exactly what I was hoping to explore twenty-seven years ago in architecture school.

10 NEUROSCIENCE FOR ARCHITECTURE from: Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Albright Thomas D.
Abstract: Buildings serve many purposes. One might argue that their primary function is to provide shelter for the inhabitants and their possessions—a place to stay warm and dry, and to sleep without fear of predators or pathogens. Buildings also provide spaces to safely contain and facilitate social groups focused on learning, work, or play. And they provide for privacy, a space for solace and retreat from the social demands of human existence. These primary physical requirements, and their many subsidiaries, simply reflect the fact that we are biological creatures. In addition to building constraints dictated by site, materials, and budget,

Epilogue: from: Reconfiguring Myth and Narrative in Contemporary Opera
Abstract: Interpreting operatic narrative is a deeply personal activity in the sense that it is shaped by the viewer’s prior knowledge of the source material, the cultural values s/he brings to the table, as well as the extent of her/his immersion into the given opera’s production history. The lengthy proportion of the second act of Doctor Atomicseems entirely appropriate if s/he understands the operatic narrative as a Faustian parable, characterized by a slippage into a mythological realm where past, present, and future meld together. Similarly, the viewer’s engagement with the irony in Ha Jin and Tan Dun’s rendering ofThe

Book Title: Luther and Liberation-A Latin American Perspective
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Altmann Walter
Abstract: With the approach of the 500th anniversary of Martin Luther’s inauguration of the Protestant Reformation and the burgeoning dialogue between Catholics and Lutherans opened under Pope Francis, this new edition of Walter Altmann’s Luther and Liberation is timely and relevant. Luther and Liberation recovers the liberating and revolutionary impact of Luther’s theology, read afresh from the perspective of the Latin American context. Altmann provides a much-needed reassessment of Luther’s significance today through a direct engagement of Luther’s historical situation with an eye keenly situated on the deeply contextual situation of the contemporary reader, giving a localized reading from the author’s own experience in Latin America. The work examines with fresh vigor Luther’s central theological commitments, such as his doctrine of God, Christology, justification, hermeneutics, and ecclesiology, and his forays into economics, politics, education, violence, and war. This new edition greatly expands the original text with fresh scholarship and updated sources, footnotes, and bibliography, and contains several additional new chapters on Luther’s doctrine of God, theology of the sacraments, his controversial perspective on the Jews, and a new comparative account with the Latin American liberation theology tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17mcsdm

2 The God of Life Against All Falsehood of the Idols of Death from: Luther and Liberation
Abstract: First, society itself is organized without taking into account God’s existence, or at least, God’s interference. This is largely the result of modernity and its rationalism, including most notably its achievements in the scientific, industrial, and technological fields. which seem to suggest that God is a totally disposable entity or,

4 Poetics and Archives from: Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In this chapter, my approach turns to a more integrated, formal analysis. The need for this move comes from a comparative interest. Across considerable time, distance, and much cultural difference in southern Africa, a remarkable family of resemblances prevails in classic wisdom divination, in its poetry and its imaginative interpretation by diviners. What is very broadly shared is a common framework, similar standards of significance, like stereotypes, archetypes and imagery, roughly the same sociologic of patriarchy and male dominance.

FOREWORD from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) PARKIN DAVID
Abstract: The comparative study of moral systems is fundamental to anthropological thinking. This collection of nineteen chapters and the editors’ introduction present rich ethnographic cases from sub-Saharan Africa on a topic bearing on the definition of morality that has been at the forefront of anthropological findings drawn from research in the continent. Yet, as the editors point out, anthropologists have been hesitant to use a concept of “evil” to refer to acts and beliefs indigenously regarded as moral inversions or perversions of humanity. The term, evil, is indeed an ethnographic imposition drawn from the English and cognate languages and therefore part

6 AMBIVALENCE AND THE WORK OF THE NEGATIVE AMONG THE YAKA from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) DEVISCH RENÉ
Abstract: Intercorporeality and the ethic of desire and evildoing, stripped of their Western modernist thought patterns and view of the person, are among the foci of anthropological and psychoanalytical efforts¹ that I have been undertaking for the last decade.² These were led by the following research questions: How may desire, which unknowingly takes hold of interrelated subjects, make someone either compassionate or madly envious and even maleficent? How much does desire inhabit intercorporeality and inspire close family members to either intensely share life and a communal mode of inhabiting the life world or deflate and undermine the physical and communal life

12 REFLECTIONS REGARDING GOOD AND EVIL: from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) LARSEN KJERSTI
Abstract: This essay addresses the moral category of evil from an anthropological perspective. For that reason I shall explore “evil” from a particular ontology rather than as a universal concept. This is the only approach that could disclose understandings that may challenge the dominant emic Judeo-Christian theological or philosophical framework. Investigating the manner in which evil is embedded in cosmologies of the everyday, I shall pay attention to practice including discourse as, within this domain, it would only rarely be elaborated in any abstract mode. Furthermore, being attentive to how evil is perceived and identified through its practice renders possible a

15 NEOCANNIBALISM, MILITARY BIOPOLITICS, AND THE PROBLEM OF HUMAN EVIL from: Evil in Africa
Author(s) SCHEPER-HUGHES NANCY
Abstract: In this chapter I address a controversial topic in contemporary biopolitics/necropolitics (Mbembe 2003): the biomedical abuse and plunder of dead bodies, among these, the bodies of enemies, with the complicity and collaboration of militarized states. Although biopiracy of human biomaterials is not new, the technological capacity to harvest and to distribute these anonymously worldwide through “cannibal markets” in blood, skin, bones, organs, bodies and body parts, dna, and reproductive material to feed the desires of these new commodities for transplant medicine, for science and research, for commercial pharmacology, and for recreation and display is a late-twentieth-century innovation.

4 Apes and Cannibals in Cambria: from: A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) BOHATA KIRSTI
Abstract: The late eighteenth- and nineteenth-century imperial project to define the distinctive ethnological and ‘racial’ features of the peoples of empire (as well as the various types of European) had a profound influence on the way different races, nationalities, cultures and even classes were viewed. Fundamental to this project were the supposedly empirical sciences of physical anthropology, such as physiology, phrenology and craniology. The forms of ‘knowledge’ derived from these studies became part of the popular consciousness and, despite the complex characteristics of cultures and peoples, powerful stereotypes were constructed that often denied realities or, indeed, even worked to alter perceived

Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end, Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0

Introduction: from: Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the

2 Extinction / Adaptation from: Time
Author(s) HEISE URSULA K.
Abstract: Extinction and adaptation are, according to Darwinian theory, normal components of evolutionary processes that have taken place during all of the 3.5 billion years of biological life on Earth. Genetic changes that arise randomly in biological organisms create handicaps or advantages for certain individuals and populations as they interact with a complex

4 Obsolescence / Innovation from: Time
Author(s) BURGES JOEL
Abstract: Although obsolescence is central to capitalist economies from at least the 1940s to the present, it is not peculiar to the post-1945 period. The same is true of its twin, innovation, the precursor of which is invention.¹ Innovation and obsolescence, at their most general, refer to twinned processes of technological change that play out across most periods of human history. We typically think of these twins as a smoothly forward-moving sequence of technical advances that have improved functionality and efficiency (innovation), displacing and depreciating the use-value of that which came before with the improvements that they create (obsolescence). But in

8 Human / Planetary from: Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has

16 Theological / Worldly from: Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another

Book Title: Music, Analysis, Experience-New Perspectives in Musical Semiotics
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Reybrouck Mark
Abstract: Transdisciplinary and intermedial analysis of the experience of music Nowadays musical semiotics no longer ignores the fundamental challenges raised by cognitive sciences, ethology, or linguistics. Creation, action and experience play an increasing role in how we understand music, a sounding structure impinging upon our body, our mind, and the world we live in. Not discarding music as a closed system, an integral experience of music demands a transdisciplinary dialogue with other domains as well. Music, Analysis, Experience brings together contributions by semioticians, performers, and scholars from cognitive sciences, philosophy, and cultural studies, and deals with these fundamental questionings. Transdisciplinary and intermedial approaches to music meet musicologically oriented contributions to classical music, pop music, South American song, opera, narratology, and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt180r0s2

Performativity Through(out) Media: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Corbella Maurizio
Abstract: In this paper I will focus on performance analysis in popular music from the standpoint of intermediality. Furthermore, I will trace some methodological trajectories that, to be truly tested, should be substantiated by a wide selection of case studies. Since there is no room to extensively concentrate on case studies, this contribution should be considered as a methodological introduction to upcoming new chapters. I claim that the study of how ideas of performativity are translated throughout the web of media in the process of the production, circulation and consumption of a musical artifact can contribute to point out common traits

Reading a Work of Music from the Perspective of Integral Interpretation from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Tomaszewski Mieczysław
Abstract: I think one can agree with the idea that the primary task of the theory of music, its foundation and its point of departure irrespective of its methodological orientation consists in interpreting a work of music as a result of its reading. A work of music is thus understood as a human product for humans, its task being to delight, to stir emotions and to convey meanings and senses. In this system, the interpreter functions as a competent mediator who, by reading the work in the entirety of its inimitable features, helps others to open their ears and eyes, awakens

Musical Understanding: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Chagas Paulo C.
Abstract: Ludwig Wittgenstein (1889-1951) is an intellectual myth of the 20 thcentury and certainly one of the most original thinkers that Western culture has ever produced.¹ The philosophy of Wittgenstein reflects on issues of logic, mathematics, language, psychology, ethics, aesthetics, religion, etc. His philosophical method combined the rejection of metaphysics and the scientific spirit with clarity and a simple, colloquial-like language, however pushed to such a level of logical precision that it seems to stretch the limits of thinking. The unorthodoxy of Wittgenstein emerges as much in his life as in his thought. For the reader unfamiliar with him, his writing

[Part Three. Introduction] from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: The next three contributions explore the biological and ethological sources of musical meaning and affect. They deal with aspects of musical experience and interpretation by going beyond a mere acoustic description of the sound. Music-as-heard calls forth expressive interpretations and emotions. This is the case for the recognition of tonality and tonal melodies, which are not merely sequences or successions of pitches. Being rooted in biological evolution, they can be linked to the transmission of meaning by establishing a kind of specific connection between perception of sounds, memory function and emotional assessment. The biological foundation of tonality can be related

The Ability of Tonality Recognition as One of Human-Specific Adaptations from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Podlipniak Piotr
Abstract: Tonality is understood by musicologists and musicians in many different, often mutually exclusive senses. Sometimes it is regarded as a distinctive characteristic of solely Western music (e.g. Dahlhaus, 1988), but sometimes this understanding is applied to the features of non-Western music too (e.g. Krumhansl, 1990). Even as a term restricted to the features of Western music it is assigned a variety of meanings such as an aspect of melodic relations (Thomson, 1999) or an exclusive trait of harmonic organization (Lowinsky, 1990). Also in the psychological sense, tonalityis defined by scholars both as the hierarchical arrangements of pitch phenomena in

Musical Semiotics and Analogical Reference from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Zbikowski Lawrence M.
Abstract: I should like to begin my consideration of the relationship between musical semiotics and analogical reference with a musical example drawn from Joseph Haydn’s oratorio The Creation, which had its premiere in April of 1798. The text for the oratorio comes from one reportedly assembled for but never used by Georg Friedrich Handel, and which was translated and abridged for Haydn’s use by Baron Gottfried van Swieten. The text is a compilation of familiar quotations from the books of Genesis and Psalms with lines reworked from Milton’sParadise Lost, and offers any number of opportunities for pictorial representation. The instance

The Other Semiotic Legacy of Charles Sanders Peirce: from: Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Huron David
Abstract: Charles Sanders Peirce was a remarkable scholar with broad ranging interests in many areas of philosophy, logic, and metaphysics. The influence of Peirce’s ideas in the modern field of semiotics is well known. Less well known is the influence Peirce had on another discipline, the field of ethology (the study of animal behavior). Largely a European undertaking, the founders of ethology—notably Konrad Lorenz and Nico Tinbergen—were influenced by semiotic concepts in their studies of animal displays and calls. This presentation pays tribute to the achievements of ethology by returning insights from animal behavior back to the humanities and

Book Title: Mestizaje and Globalization-Transformations of Identity and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: The Spanish word mestizajedoes not easily translate into English. Its meaning and significance have been debated for centuries since colonization by European powers began. Its simplest definition is "mixing." As long as the term has been employed, norms and ideas about racial and cultural relations in the Americas have been imagined, imposed, questioned, rejected, and given new meaning.Mestizaje and Globalizationpresents perspectives on the underlying transformation of identity and power associated with the term during times of great change in the Americas. The volume offers a comprehensive and empirically diverse collection of insights concerning mestizaje's complex relationship with indigeneity, the politics of ethnic identity, transnational social movements, the aesthetic of cultural production, development policies, and capitalist globalization, with particular attention to cases in Latin America and the United States.Beyond the narrow and often inadequate meaning of mestizaje as biological and racial mixing, the concept deserves an innovative theoretical consideration due to its multidimensional, multifaceted character and its resilience as an ideological construct. The contributors argue that historical analyses of mestizaje do not sufficiently understand contemporary ways that racism, ethnic discrimination, and social injustice intermingle with current discourse and practice of cultural recognition and multiculturalism in the Americas.Mestizaje and Globalizationcontributes to an emerging multidisciplinary effort to explore how identities are imposed, negotiated, and reconstructed. The chapter authors clearly set forth the issues and obstacles that Indigenous peoples and subjugated minorities face, as well as the strategies they have employed to gain empowerment in the face of globalization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gxvs

1 Proto-Anthropology from: A History of Anthropology
Abstract: How long have anthropologists existed? Opinions are divided on this issue. The answer depends on what you mean by an anthropologist. People around the world have always been curious about their neighbours and more remote people. They have gossiped about them, fought them, married them and told stories about them. Some of their stories were written down. Some were later criticised as inaccurate or ethnocentric (or flatly racist). Some stories were compared with others, about other people, leading to general assumptions about ‘people elsewhere’, and what humans everywhere have in common. In this broad sense, we start an anthropological enquiry

3 Fieldwork and Ethnography from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Anthropology distinguishes itself from the other social sciences through the strong emphasis placed on ethnographic fieldwork as the most important source of new knowledge about society and culture. A field study may last for a few months, a year, or even two years or more, and it aims to develop as intimate an understanding as possible of the phenomena investigated. Many anthropologists return to the same field throughout their career, to deepen their understanding further or to record change. Although there are differences in field methods between different anthropological schools, it is generally agreed that the anthropologist ought to stay

5 Local Organisation from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Much of the empirical material necessary for anthropological thinking and research is still obtained through studies of local communities. Most classic anthropological analyses are based on detailed descriptions of culture and social organisation in a delineated system, which could be a village or an urban environment. Anthropology has diversified in recent decades into a variety of new, specialised directions and, given the complexity (and often non-localised nature) of many contemporary fields of study, it has become clear that it may be necessary to consult sources which cannot be obtained through fieldwork (such as historical sources, statistics, mass and social media,

12 Exchange and Consumption from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Just as the anthropological study of politics is markedly different from the discipline of political science, economic anthropology distinguishes itself in important ways from the economic sciences. Anthropologists have always – at least since Boas and Malinowski – wished to call attention to the ways in which the economy is an integrated part of a social and cultural totality, and to reveal that economic systems and actions can only be fully understood if we look into their interrelationships with other aspects of culture and society. Just as politics ought to be seen as part of a wider system which includes

13 Production, Nature and Technology from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The idea that there is an interrelationship between ecological conditions and ways of life can be traced back to the ancient Greeks, and it was also prevalent in Enlightenment thought in the mid eighteenth century (for instance in Montesquieu and in the Marquis de Sade’s non-pornographic writings). Montesquieu, like many others, held that the main cause of Europe’s technological and scientific advances was the harsh climate, which required the inhabitants to be inventive and sharp-witted to survive. Two centuries later, the human geographer Ellsworth Huntington (1945) argued for climatic determinism in an original study where he shows, among other things,

14 Religion and Ritual from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: In a study of the Basseri pastoralists of southern Iran, Barth (1961) expresses some surprise regarding their lack of religious interest (they describe themselves as ‘slack Muslims’). His surprise is caused by the fact that religion seems to loom large in the lives of most of the peoples described in classic anthropological studies. This may be a major reason why religion has always been a central field of inquiry in anthropology, even if, as Evans-Pritchard (1962) once pointed out, social scientists have themselves often been indifferent or even hostile to religion.

17 Ethnicity from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: A systematic search through major anthropological journals and monographs from, say, 1950 to 2015, will quickly reveal a change in the language of the subject. The terminology has generally become more influenced by hermeneutics and

20 Public Anthropology from: Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: To the extent that anthropological texts and lectures have an audience, all anthropology could be considered to be public. However, public anthropology, as the term is generally used, refers to a specific set of practices and positions within the discipline that aim to reach out beyond the confines of the academy. This can be accomplished through writing for different audiences, engaging in advocacy-oriented work in local communities, or by taking part in the transnational conversation about the ills and spoils of the contemporary world and what it means to be human.

Book Title: White Identities-A Critical Sociological Approach
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): GARNER STEVE
Abstract: The study of white ethnicities is becoming increasingly important in the social sciences. This book provides a critical introduction to the topic. Whiteness has traditionally been seen as "ethnically transparent" - the marker against which other ethnicities are measured. This analysis is clearly incorrect, but only recently have many race and ethnicity scholars moved away from focusing on ethnic minorities and instead oriented their studies around the construction of white identities. Simon Clarke and Steve Garner's book is designed to guide students as they explore how white identities are forged using both sociological and psycho-social ideas. Including an excellent survey of the existing literature and original research from the UK, this book will be an invaluable guide for sociology students taking modules in race and ethnicity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p383

1 RESEARCHING ‘WHITENESS’: from: White Identities
Abstract: This book is an exploration of sociological and psycho-social theories of the construction of whiteness vis-à-vis perceptions and imaginings of otherness. It has three main aims. First, to introduce the reader to the history and theoretical unfolding of contemporary studies of whiteness in North America and Europe. Second, to explore the structural facilitating factors of these constructions, through such institutions as the state and the media. Finally, the book synthesises a psycho-social perspective to look at the underlying mechanisms which fuel social exclusion and inclusion in society. Theory is never separated from practice and the book makes full use of

6 PSYCHO-SOCIAL INTERPRETATIONS OF CULTURAL IDENTITY: from: White Identities
Abstract: The social construction of white identity, or indeed identities in general, can offer us a real insight into how we perceive the self and others. In this chapter we argue that a psycho-social dimension goes beyond traditional analysis and allows us to understand the emotional, affective and visceral content of identity construction. Drawing on psychoanalytic ideas and concepts, we unravel the psychological dynamics involved in the construction of the white ‘we’ in relation to the otherness of the Other. Cultural identities are marked by a number of factors – ‘race’, ethnicity, gender and class to name but a few – yet the

7 MEDIA REPRESENTATIONS: from: White Identities
Abstract: In this chapter we address the issue of asylum and asylum seekers in contemporary Britain. In it we argue that there is a worrying trend towards the conflation of asylum issues with terrorism. Using examples from the media and politics we argue that there is a new politics of fear emerging, which more than ever concentrates on difference and the demonisation of the Other. This politics uses emotional and psychological methods to play on our social fears and anxieties around community. This goes hand-in-hand with a mainstreaming of anti-immigration policy as a political value: a process that has drawn Left

9 RESEARCHING WHITENESS: from: White Identities
Abstract: Psycho-social studies is an emerging tradition that very much focuses on emotion and affect to illuminate some of the core issues in the social sciences. Issues such as identity construction, dilemmas in public service sectors and the experience of rapid social change. It recognises that the split between individual and society, sociology and psychology is now unhelpful if we are to understand social and psychological phenomena. It therefore seeks to research beneath the surface using both psychoanalytic and sociological ideas using innovative new methodologies including the use of free association, biographical life history interviews and the development of psychoanalytic fieldwork.

2 The Poverty of Ideas in the Newsroom from: Blaming the Victim
Author(s) Harkins Steven
Abstract: Despite journalistic normative claims that news accounts on poverty are driven by a quest for social justice, the way poverty is articulated today by the global news media is instead a convergent by-product of more down-to-earth organisational dynamics and interests that happen within the newsrooms. First, we can point to the media’s editorial and news policies, which are shaped by a multiplicity of interests and objectives; second, we have the ideological interventions and approaches of journalists and editors in the process of news gathering and dissemination; and, third, the framing provided by news sources and news shapers in the construction

Book Title: Fredrik Barth-An Intellectual Biography
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Garsten Christina
Abstract: Fredrik Barth is one of the towering figures of twentieth-century anthropology. This intellectual history traces the development of Barth’s ideas and explores the substance of his contributions. In an accessible style, Thomas Eriksen’s biographical study reveals the magic of ethnography to professional anthropologists and non-practitioners alike. Exploring his six decade career, it follows Barth from early ecological studies in Pakistan, to political studies in Iran, to groundbreaking fieldwork in Norway, New Guinea, Bali and Bhutan. Eriksen argues that Barth's voracious appetite for fieldwork holds the key to understanding his remarkable intellectual development and the insights it produced. The book raises many of the same questions that emerge from Barth's own work - of unity and diversity, of culture and relativism, of art and science. Thomas Eriksen is himself a major contributor to the study of anthropology, as well as a distinguished educator, and is therefore ideally placed to introduce the life and work of Fredrik Barth. This will surely be the definitive book on its subject for many years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p5d4

5 The Global Theorist from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: The idea for the project on entrepreneurship came to Barth after a Wenner-Gren symposium on economic anthropology, to which Raymond Firth had invited him. The Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research was founded by the Swedish businessman Axel Wenner-Gren (who is, incidentally, often described as an entrepreneur) in 1941, then under the name of the Viking Foundation. Between 1958 and 1980, more than 80 conferences and workshops within all branches of anthropology, including biological anthropology, were organised at Burg Wartenstein castle in Austria. Barth was invited to several of these symposia, and he mentions that it had been suggested, tongue in

8 A New Kind of Complexity from: Fredrik Barth
Abstract: During his twelve years in Bergen, Barth organised four major symposia: on the entrepreneur in Northern Norway, role theory, ethnicity and scale. By far the best known is the symposium on ethnicity, thanks to the subsequent book publication. However, the idea behind the scale conference was equally original, and deserved a better fate. The book Scale and Social Organization,¹ published only in 1978, is not very well known, even in Scandinavia. The anthropological concept of scale remains underused in a systematic way, even in studies where it would clearly have been useful.²

Prologue: from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: In The Trouble with Community: Anthropological Reflections on Collectivity, Movement and Identity(2002), Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport entered into a dialogue that concerned the ideology, the practice and the conceptualization of community at the millennial turn. ‘The trouble with community’ concerned the tension between attempts to fix social and political relations in communal frames and the drives toward individuation and fragmentation that regularly undid these efforts but that also could be constrained by them. This volume assumes the same dialogic form and revisits the themes of the first volume.Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonalitycontinues Amit’s

6 Cosmopolitan Living: from: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: Luftmenschen– ‘People of the Air’, ‘People of Smoke’ – was a slur favoured by the Nazis.Luftmenschenwere those who were without roots, and who would not or could not take root, rootless (see Berg, 2006).Luftmenschenrenounced the blood and honour (Blut und Ehre) of a genealogical attachment to the earth. The ideal types ofLuftmenschenwere the Gypsies and the Jews. In this the Nazis could be said to have followed Hegel, who deemed these people’s situation to be pathological. In leaving the Land of Israel – the ‘Garden of Eden’, the ‘pastures of Abraham’ – the

3 The Ecclesiastical Nucleus from: Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Because this cosmological image must be considered in a political sense, it is greatly complicated and thereby loses much of its orderliness. In the first place, the ecclesiastical nucleus of French Catholicism has no single, unified political behavior pattern. Secondly, political activity seems to increase as one moves

Priestesses and Other Female Cult Leaders at Philippi in the Early Christian Era from: The People beside Paul
Author(s) Abrahamsen Valerie
Abstract: A people’s history of Philippi must, of necessity, include an examination of women. Recent work on Philippi, the region of Macedonia, sociological contexts, and related topics has greatly expanded our knowledge of women in antiquity, their status in the culture, their independence (or lack thereof), their family connections, their contributions, and their limitations. Examination of women at Philippi in the first centuries of the Roman Empire can expand our knowledge of the “people beside Paul.”

Letter from Prison as Hidden Transcript: from: The People beside Paul
Author(s) Standhartinger Angela
Abstract: In recent years, reconstructions of the Christ-community in Philippi have been much improved by research focusing on the letter’s local and sociohistorical context.¹ With the help of archaeological, numismatic, and epigraphic data and studies on the political, cultural, and social impact of Roman imperialism to the provinces of Roman east, we have learned a lot about the local environments of the Colonia Iulia Augusta Philippensis. But not at least because archaeological and historical data remain ambiguous and open to different interpretations, it still remains difficult to identify those everyday Philippians to whom Paul wrote and their specific socialcultural contexts in

Book Title: The Hidden God-Luther, Philosophy, and Political Theology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): MJAALAND MARIUS TIMMANN
Abstract: In this phenomenological reading of Luther, Marius Timmann Mjaaland shows that theological discourse is never philosophically neutral and always politically loaded. Raising questions concerning the conditions of modern philosophy, religion, and political ideas, Marius Timmann Mjaaland follows a dark thread of thought back to its origin in Martin Luther. Thorough analyses of the genealogy of secularization, the political role of the apocalypse, the topology of the self, and the destruction of metaphysics demonstrate the continuous relevance of this highly subtle thinker.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt189ttzv

Introduction from: The Hidden God
Abstract: A philosophical approach to Martin Luther allows a less doctrinal access to some of his controversial but rather original ideas and methodological insights. The challenge is that such an approach has hardly been ventured before, at least not in the English-speaking literature: to analyze the seminal work of the philosopherMartin Luther. Many studies of Luther from a comparative philosophical perspective have been written over the years, for instance, his relation to Plato or Aristotle, Kant or Heidegger; but it is difficult to find contemporary efforts at reading Luther philosophically.¹ The point of such an approach is not to reject

TWO Philosophy: from: The Hidden God
Abstract: The destruction of metaphysics is a favored topic in twentieth-century philosophy, in terms of a positivist critique, an overcoming, an Abbau,a rejection, or a deconstruction of traditional metaphysical notions and concepts. But where and when does this discussion of a general destruction of metaphysics start? I argue that theHeidelberg Disputationplays a key role here.¹ In this short disputation, Luther presents forty theses giving a principal justification of his position, twenty-eight of them theological and the other twelve philosophical. In the explanation to thesis 21, he argues that the cross is a good thing, since itdestructs(destruuntur;

THREE Topology from: The Hidden God
Abstract: In the early 1520s, topics as a philosophical and theological approach was rediscovered by humanist and

TEN Topology of the Self in Luther from: The Hidden God
Abstract: The hidden God is to a certain extent a neglected toposof modernity, either in the form of a passive forgetfulness or an active exclusion of this topic due to its inconvenient, problematic—indeed, ratherunmodern—connotations. In particular Protestant theology seems to be dominated by a rationalistic tendency up to the Enlightenment, which is strictly opposed to this crucial distinction in Luther’s thought and therefore tends to exclude it from the scope of theological inquiry.¹ The major philosophers are more apt to raise the basic questions concerning the conditions for thought, including the limits of reason and the distinction

[Part One: Introduction] from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: The first interview, with Catherine Belsey, clearly conveys the dominant narrative of cultural studies’ historical formations. It paints a very lucid picture of the inception and development of cultural studies. Like Mieke Bal’s contribution, both focus on the problems attendant to the specificity and implications of the methodological orientations of cultural studies, as does Martin McQuillan’s – each, though, in very different

3 From Cultural Studies to Cultural Analysis: from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Bal Mieke
Abstract: In the wake of women’s studies, cultural studies has, in my view, been responsible for the absolutely indispensable opening up of the disciplinary structure of the humanities. By challenging methodological dogma, and elitist prejudice and value judgement, it has been uniquely instrumental in at least making the academic community aware of the conservative nature of its endeavours, if not everywhere forcing it to change. It has, if nothing else, forced the academy to realise its collusion with an elitist white-male politics of exclusion and its subsequent intellectual closure. Everything about cultural studies that makes me not want to say that

4 The Projection of Cultural Studies from: Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: Before I answer your questions, which in some ways are all the same question, let us begin with a question before the question, namely the title. You wish to question the question, ‘interrogating cultural studies’. I am worried by this formulation, particularly in light of some of the answers I will give below. Yes, cultural studies can interrogate, or be interrogating. At least, put another way, cultural studies can do some hard questioning. And equally, hard questions need to be asked of cultural studies. While the question itself might be indicative of an ontological mode of thought this does not

Introduction: from: Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Harte Liam
Abstract: That Irish Studies is a significant discipline within the academy is without question, as attendance at IASIL, ACIS, or EFACIS conferences will indicate. However, what is needed at a meta-level, it seems to me, is a range of enquiry into the grounds of this discipline in terms of its epistemological and ethical status. (O’Brien, 2003: 223)

1 CREATIVE ARGUMENTS OF IMAGES IN CULTURE, AND THE CHARNEL HOUSE OF CONVENTIONALITY from: Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Fernandez James W.
Abstract: I begin with two important modern philosophers, Wittgenstein and Rorty, as a context for more grounded anthropological discussion. These philosophers are both intensely interested in language (and particularly figurative language) and sympathetic to the anthropological project.² I refer to the project dating at least back to Vico which understands culture as something reconstructed, largely out of the building materials of language, from that which is long given.

Book Title: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Maslov Boris
Abstract: Since the mid-1980s, attempts to think history and literature together have produced much exciting work in the humanities. Indeed, some form of historicism can be said to inform most of the current scholarship in literary studies, including work in poetics, yet much of this scholarship remains undertheorized. Envisioning a revitalized and more expansive historicism, this volume builds on the tradition of Historical Poetics, pioneered by Alexander Veselovsky (1838-1906) and developed in various fruitful directions by the Russian Formalists, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Olga Freidenberg. The volume includes previously untranslated texts of some of the major scholars in this critical tradition, as well as original contributions which place that tradition in dialogue with other thinkers who have approached literature in a globally comparatist and evolutionary-historical spirit. The contributors seek to challenge and complement a historicism that stresses proximate sociopolitical contexts through an engagement with the longue duree of literary forms and institutions. In particular, Historical Poetics aims to uncover deep-historical stratifications and asynchronicities, in which formal solutions may display elective affinities with other, chronologically distant solutions to analogous social and political problems. By recovering the traditional nexus of philology and history, Persistent Forms seeks to reinvigorate poetics as a theoretical discipline that would respond to such critical and intellectual developments as Marxism, New Historicism, the study of world literature, practices of distant reading, and a renewed attention to ritual, oral poetics, and genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr6cs

CHAPTER 4 Metapragmatics, Toposforschung, Marxist Stylistics: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MASLOV BORIS
Abstract: Alexander Veselovsky’s versatile body of work is notably hard to synthesize, and the method as well as the conceptual apparatus he refined over the years, yet never fully explicated, does not lend itself easily to either systematic summary or piecemeal extraction. It is in part for this reason that Veselovsky’s legacy proved of no direct use to the totalizing twentieth-century theories of literature, such as Structuralism of the French or Soviet varieties, or to the more recent transnational literarycritical practice, whose volatile methodological eclecticism favors the propagation of isolated conceptual moves and argumentative schemata. For Veselovsky’s is an approach that

CHAPTER 12 From the Prehistory of Russian Novel Theory: from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) HOLLAND KATE
Abstract: Scholarly work on the subject of Alexander Veselovsky rarely, if ever, deals with the fact that the philologist and folklorist was an exact contemporary of the great Russian novelists Dostoevsky, Turgenev, and Tolstoy, and that most of his philological work was done in the period of the generic hegemony of the Russian novel. At first sight this omission seems understandable; in his own scholarly work Veselovsky was more interested in examining archaic drama and medieval legends than the works of his own contemporaries. Yet like his more internationally renowned successor, Mikhail Bakhtin, Veselovsky used the medium of genre as a

CHAPTER 13 Satire (1940), for the Literary Encyclopedia from: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) BAKHTIN MIKHAIL
Abstract: 2) another, less well- defined, mixed (mainly prose), purely dialogical genre that appeared in the Hellenistic epoch in the form of the philosophical diatribe (Bion [of Borysthenes], Teles [of Megala]) was reformed and standardized by the Cynic Menippus (third century B.C.E.), and was named in his honor “Menippean satire.” We find later exemplars of

8 Writing Métissage in New Caledonian Non-Kanak Literatures: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: In the nineteenth-century novels set in New Caledonia, métissage, as the process and outcome of racial mixing, was most particularly associated with women characters, and largely characterized by sexual permissiveness and biological degeneration. The earliest written literature in New Caledonia was, for the most part, produced by Metropolitan French people passing through. Louise Michel, considered in Chapters 1 and 2, spent eight years in the country’s penitentiary system, leaving New Caledonia after the general amnesty to rejoin her ailing mother in France. Jacques and Marie Nervat came to the colony a decade later, where they lived from 1898 to 1902.

9 A Multicultural Future (Destin Commun) for New Caledonia?: from: The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: In a reflection on the manifestations of multiculturalism in postcolonial literature, Sylvie André presents the phenomenon of cultural mixing as a victory over both the colonial will to assimilate and an inevitably unequal separate development. However, as she asks, to what degree must its constitutive elements be fused for a mixed society to consider itself multicultural? Does this require a shared ideological foundation, or is the acceptance of difference or so-called ‘diversity’ sufficient? (2002: 5). English-speaking Canada might consider itself a multicultural country but Quebec, despite thirty years of political coexistence, might well not. Laurence Cros expresses these differences in

Book Title: The Trouble with Community-Anthropological Reflections on Movement, Identity and Collectivity
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: 'Community' is one of social science's longest-standing concepts. The assumption, of much social science, has been that it is in communities -- and to communities -- that human individuals, as social and cultural beings, belong. Communities are said to embody that interactive environment from which individuals' identities and senses of self derive, and in which they continue to dwell. The trouble with 'community' is that this is not necessarily so; the personal social networks of individuals' actual experience crosscut collective categories, situations and institutions. Communities can prove unviable or imprisoning; the reality of community life and identity can often be very different from the ideology and the ideal. In this provocative new book, anthropologists Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport draw on their various ethnographic experiences to reappraise the concept and the reality of 'community', in the light of globalization, religious fundamentalism, identity politics, and renascent localisms. How might anthropology better apprehend social identities which are intrinsically plural, transgressive and ironic? What has anthropology to say about the way in which civil society might hope to accommodate the on-going construction and the rightful expression of such migrant identities? Nigel Rapport and Vered Amit give their own answers to these questions before entering into dialogue to assess each other's positions. Nigel Rapport is Professor of Anthropological and Philosophical Studies at the University of St. Andrews. He is author of Transcendent Individual (1997). Vered Amit is an Associate Professor at Concordia University in Montreal. She is the editor of Realizing Community (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnx3

3 THE TROUBLE WITH COMMUNITY from: The Trouble with Community
Abstract: The most common appearance of community within the social sciences, and especially the anthropological literature, has probably been in its most taken-for-granted and unexamined form as a unit of analysis, the location rather than the object of research. But community has also featured as a long-standing vehicle for a broader scholarly interrogation of the dialectic between historical social transformations and social cohesion, and as such was a focus in scholarship as varied as that of Tönnies, Durkheim and Weber writing at the turn of the twentieth century (Chorney, 1990), the ‘Chicago School’ urbanists of the first half of the twentieth

11 EXISTENTIAL POLITICS from: The Trouble with Community
Abstract: If individual consciousness and agency is seen as responsible for creating and maintaining the diversity of cultural worlds, then anthropologically to ‘decolonize’ the individual human subject also entails the anthropologist proclaiming the value of the former as a prerequisite of the latter. It becomes an anthropological duty to explain that individuals make communities and create traditions, likewise to champion those social environments in which such individuality is recognized and respected, and to declaim against those which bury individual worth under a weight of so-called traditional or revelational or institutional knowledge and practice. Anthropology, in other words, becomes, at least in

CHAPTER 4 Returning to Kabylia from: Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In a footnote to Reproduction, Bourdieu stated that his ‘theory of pedagogic action’ was ‘grounded in a theory of the relations between objective structures, the habitus and practice’, which would ‘be set out more fully in a forthcoming book’ (1970, p. 9n.1 [p. xiii n.1]). The book in question was published two years later and drew on fieldwork Bourdieu had conducted during the Algerian War. EntitledEsquisse d’une théorie de la pratique(1972), it took the form of three anthropological studies of Kabylia followed by a sustained reflection on the political, ethical, and epistemological implications of anthropological study. Five years

26 An Intimate Revelation: from: Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Wolverton Taggert E.
Abstract: In 2009 a pilot project was launched to determine whether adolescent readers could benefit from the process of intercultural Bible reading in ways similar to those reported by adult readers. The focus of the research with the adolescents also attempted to measure whether the reading process would be catalytic to the spiritual growth of the participants. For the purposes of the study, the concept of spiritual growth was originally defined along axes that included a deepened sense of belief, an observable increase in theological knowledge, and an increase in the amount of Christian activities. Due to the small size of

12 “THE ARCHIVE THAT KNEW TOO LITTLE: THE INTERNATIONAL NECRONAUTICAL SOCIETY AND THE AVANT-GARDE” from: The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Morton Seth
Abstract: Over one hundred years after the first Futurist manifesto, the historical avant-garde looks like an oddity that died long ago. Perhaps nothing has served the avant-garde better than its own death. In death, the avant-garde is memorialized and archived. Its antiart position has been absorbed by the art world, and its logics inform mass culture and high art alike. Although the historical avant-garde failed to make good on revolutionary ideals, avant-garde logics continue to evolve and diversify across our entire cultural media landscape, from Dada to Monty Python and Saturday Night Live.This is the odd thing about the avant-garde:

Methodological Considerations from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: The debate over media that was first articulated in the 1960s and continues to flourish today is confusing, multivocal and heterogeneous: there is no consensus in the phenomenal domain, the methodological approach or even the very concept of media. Nevertheless, through the multitude of heterogeneous voices – at least in the cultural studies camp – it is possible to perceive a certain vocal range that could be called the ‘bon ton of the media debate’. This ‘bon ton’

So What Does ‘Transmission’ Mean? from: Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: Up until now I have been dealing with forms of transmission in widely diverse fields. I have also been dealing with forms of transmission that are not obviously subject to the regime of a medium, like radio or television, as this – albeit entirely random – selection of transmission modalities was designed to trace by analogy the functional logic of the messenger precisely where the mediality of this process was not at all obvious. And the discovery of these forms of transmission was bound up with the hope that their subtlety and diversity could assess and also expand the categorical

Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584

3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from: Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways

CONCLUSION: from: Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in

Book Title: Our Bodies Are Selves- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Barreto Susan
Abstract: Our Bodies Are Selves is a look at what it means to be human in a world where medical technology and emerging ethical insight force us to rethink the boundaries of humanity/spirit and man/machine. This book gives us a fresh look at how our expanding biological views of ourselves and our shared evolutionary history shows us a picture that may not always illumine who and where we are as Christians. Offering up Christian theological views of embodiment, the authors give everyday examples of lives of love, faith, and bodily realities that offer the potential to create new definitions of what it means to be a faith community in an increasingly technological age of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt197059n

8 The Human Journey from: Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: Clearly, when we speak of bodies, we are speaking of ourselves, and furthermore our bodies as they are embedded in technology. Rather than thinking of ourselves as abstractions, our selves are a rich mix of dimensions that defy separation—they exist together in ways that our words and concept struggle to understand. The central issue is human identity. It’s about the struggle to arrive at the meaning of being human today, or theological anthropology. The struggle to arrive at human meaning is the grappling with our own human creativity, particularly in its technological expression. This struggle is at the heart

Book Title: Studi su Max Weber-1980-2002
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Bianco Adele
Abstract: Le questioni affrontate nei saggi raccolti in questo volume definiscono il vasto raggio degli interessi teorici di Max Weber e la fitta rete di influenze e rapporti della sua opera con quella di eminenti filosofi quali Rickert, Scheler, Lukács, Heidegger, Gadamer e Ricoeur. Il fulcro comune alle tematiche trattate può considerarsi il processo di razionalizzazione quale caratteristica identitaria, secondo Weber, della cultura occidentale e forza motrice della modernità. Esso trova il suo radicamento nell’antichità, ovvero nel passaggio dalla religiosità magica alla religiosità etica con cui si è avviato il processo di disincanto del mondo. Al tramonto di qualsiasi forma di assolutizzazione e alla parallela relativizzazione della razionalità si riallaccia uno dei primi temi weberiani discussi nel volume: il politeismo dei valori. Accanto ad esso emergono la teoria dei tipi ideali e la riforma dell’ermeneutica. La costruzione idealtipica, centro nevralgico della metodologia di Weber, è la via da lui tentata di contemperare in un’ardua sintesi intuizione e logica, interpretazione e spiegazione causale. L’attribuzione di una base ermeneutica al metodo della ricerca sociale significa inoltre sottrarre il processo di comprensione e il Verstehen al loro ancoraggio, di ispirazione diltheyana, «nell’immedesimazione simpatetica dell’esperienza vissuta» rendendoli strumento di procedimenti conoscitivi non più basati su soggettivismo e individualismo, ma la cui valenza oggettiva è verificata e garantita dall’intersoggettività.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19dzd84

I. Max Weber e l’ermeneutica from: Studi su Max Weber
Abstract: In una celebre pagina di Sein und Zeit¹ destinata ad illustrare il «primato ontologico del problema dell’essere», Martin Heidegger formulava un principio metodico a partire dal quale è forse possibile prendere le mosse per una ricerca che intenda portare l’attenzione su di un problema circoscritto ma non per questo meno rilevante del dibattito epistemologico intervenuto nella filosofia contemporanea. Facendo esplicito riferimento alla questione concernente i rapporti tra teoria e prassi, tra concetto e realtà, tra scienza ed esperienza, Heidegger scriveva che «l’autentico “movimento” delle scienze ha luogo nella revisione, più o meno radicale ed a se stessa trasparente, dei loro

II. Antropologia e sociologia della religione in Max Weber from: Studi su Max Weber
Abstract: Sulla consistenza e il significato dell’antropologia weberiana gli orientamenti della critica sono stati profondamente divergenti. C’è stato infatti chi, come Karl Löwith, ha ritenuto di poter porre a confronto Weber e Marx sulla base di una comune problematica sociologica¹,

Book Title: Chora 7-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: For over twenty years, the Chora series has received international acclaim for its excellence in interdisciplinary research on architecture. The seven volumes of Chora have challenged readers to consider alternatives to conventional aesthetic and technological concepts. The seventy-eight authors and eighty-seven scholarly essays in the series have investigated profound cultural roots of architecture and revealed rich possibilities for architecture and its related disciplines. Chora 7, the final volume in the series, includes fifteen essays on architectural topics from around the world (France, Greece, Iran, Italy, Korea, and the United States) and from diverse cultures (antiquity, Renaissance Italy, early modern France, and the past hundred years). Thematically, they bring original approaches to human experience, theatre, architectural creation, and historical origins. Readers will also gain insights into theoretical and practical work by architects and artists such as Leon Battista Alberti, Peter Brook, Douglas Darden, Filarete, Andy Goldsworthy, Anselm Kiefer, Frederick Kiesler, Claude-Nicolas Ledoux, and Peter Zumthor. Contributors to Chora 7 include Anne Bordeleau (University of Waterloo), Diana Cheng (Montreal), Negin Djavaherian (Montreal), Paul Emmons (Washington-Alexandria Architecture Center of Virginia Tech), Paul Holmquist (McGill University), Ron Jelaco (McGill University), Yoonchun Jung (Kyoto University), Christos Kakalis (Edinburgh School of Architecture and Landscape Architecture), Lisa Landrum (University of Manitoba), Robert Nelson (Monash University), Marc J Neveu (Woodbury University), Alberto Pérez-Gómez (McGill University), Angeliki Sioli (Monterrey Institute of Technology and Higher Education), Nikolaos-Ion Terzoglou (National Technical University of Athens), and Stephen Wischer (North Dakota State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jch8m

15 Chōra before Plato: from: Chora 7
Author(s) Landrum Lisa
Abstract: THIS ESSAY INITIATES a new approach to the architectural interpretation of chōraby considering the pre-philosophical meanings ofchōraas an inhabited “region” or “land,” and by drawing attention to certain situationally transformative scenes from Athenian drama in whichchōraappears in the script. Through this approach, I intend to reveal the relatively ordinary meanings ofchōrafrom the time just before Plato recast it, inTimaeus, as a highly enigmatic entity fundamental to cosmological formation and human making. Unfortunately, Jacques Derrida, whose philosophy of deconstruction influenced architectural theory in the 1980s and 1990s, generally ignored and even dismissed the

7. Illuminating the Rose: from: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Walters Lori
Abstract: MS 101 of the Municipal Library of Tournai is one of the most distinctive fourteenth-century manuscripts of the Roman de la Rose. Bearing the date of 1330, it is devoted to Gui de Mori’s rewriting of the allegorical romance¹ and includes emendations by an anonymous editor. The program of illumination presents variations on well-known iconography of theRosebesides introducing elements not found elsewhere.² In general, the illustrations refer directly to the text and follow the logical sequence of events in the work. It is evident that the person responsible for masterminding the production of the manuscript was responding to

12 At the Crossroads from: Heidegger in France
Abstract: Our story having reached its chronological end, that is to say, the end of the twentieth century, it would be possible and tempting to draw some lessons and already reach some conclusions. It seemed to us, however, that the work would be incomplete and would leave the reader particularly frustrated if we were not able to stop and cast a careful glance at the landscape we have crossed after this long journey. A philosophical accounting? This is indeed what we should attempt, not without being aware of the limits of the word “accounting,” since we will never manage to establish

Book Title: Recognizing the Gift-Toward a Renewed Theology of Nature and Grace
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Rober Daniel A.
Abstract: Recognizing the Gift puts twentieth-century Catholic theological conversations on nature and grace, particularly those of Henri de Lubac and Karl Rahner, into dialogue with Continental philosophy, notably the thought of Jean-Luc Marion and Paul Ricoeur. It argues that a renewed theology of nature and grace must build on the accomplishments of the recent past while acknowledging that an engagement with the political is unavoidable for theology. Ultimately, the aim is to revive and broaden discussion of nature and grace by drawing together the insights of contemporary theologians and Continental philosophers. Too often these areas of inquiry remain quite separate, in part due to differing priorities. This work tries to open that conversation, in part by critically pointing out, in dialogue with Ricoeur, the need in Marion’s work for an acknowledgment of recognition, reciprocity, and the political. It thus argues for a theology of nature and grace in terms of recognition of the gift, drawing out the reciprocal and political nature of gift and givenness in opposition to those, including Marion, who would seek to avoid politics and reciprocity as a proper avenue of inquiry for theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgfxw

Introduction: from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: The question of the relationship between nature³ and grace⁴ has been a classic Christian theological problem dating back to the letters of Paul, and has resurfaced throughout the history of Christianity. Of abiding significance has been the response of Augustine to the Pelagians.⁵ It was a major area of interest to Thomas Aquinas⁶ and became one of the key issues in the Protestant Reformation. Controversies about nature and grace continued in post-Reformation Catholic theology and culture, manifested particularly in the conflicts surrounding Molinism and Jansenism.⁷ The debate about nature and grace has thus served as a catalyst or focal point

1 Mid-Twentieth-Century Debates about Nature and Grace from: Recognizing the Gift
Abstract: The relationship between nature and grace was arguably the most-debated topic in Catholic theology in the early to middle twentieth century, a period that is now largely seen as culminating in the change in ecclesial and theological atmosphere surrounding the Second Vatican Council (1962–1965). These midcentury debates are the inevitable historical and theological backdrop for any contemporary study of nature and grace. This chapter thus explores the development of Catholic thought on nature and grace beginning with the work of Maurice Blondel against the backdrop of the Modernist controversy, continuing with the contributions of Pierre Rousselot, and concluding with

Book Title: Lex Crucis-Soteriology and the Stages of Meaning
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress, Publishers
Author(s): Loewe William P.
Abstract: What is the true story of God and humankind, and how does that story become a saving story? These are pivotal questions that constitute the narratives Christians tell about themselves, their values, and how the Christian life is to be lived. In shaping those stories into a coherent, intelligible framework that provides comprehensive meaning, soteriology—the doctrine of redemption—developed as a keystone to Christian consciousness. This study investigates that development of the soteriological tradition. Employing Bernard Lonergan’s notion of the stages of meaning as a hermeneutic, the volume traces the origins of soteriology in the early Christian tradition represented by Irenaeus to its establishment as a systematic theory in Anselm, Aquinas, and subsequent developments in the Protestant tradition of Luther and Schleiermacher. The author concludes with a constructive exploration of Lonergan’s own work on the question of soteriology that overcomes the modernist distortions that hinder Schleiermacher’s account and offers an articulation of the dynamics of Christian conversion that opens onto the social, cultural, and political mediations of redemption necessary for the contemporary age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg1x

Book Title: Ways of the Word-Learning to Preach for Your Time and Place
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Preaching, and the discipline of preaching, is at a crossroads. The changing realities of church and theological education, the diversity of our classrooms, and our increasingly complex community contexts leave us in search of tools to help train a rising generation of preachers for a future whose contours are far from clear. In Ways of the Word, a dynamic team of master preachers, Sally A. Brown and Luke A. Powery, speaks with one voice their belief that preaching is a witness to the ongoing work of God in the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg2f

1 The Spirit-Animated Event of Preaching from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: Preaching is risky business. It is risky because, frankly, its divine aims are impossible to achieve, humanly speaking. There is no set of rules any of us can follow, no book we can read (this one included), that guarantees that when you step up to a pulpit and open your mouth, the words that reach listeners will be a word that is God’s own. We can speak with consummate rhetorical skill of things theological, but only God’s animating Spirit makes our preaching a life-transforming, world-changing message.

6 Interpreting Scripture for Preaching from: Ways of the Word
Author(s) Brown Sally A.
Abstract: Scripture has been the indispensable, authorizing source of Christian sermons since Christianity’s beginnings. The sermons of Peter, Stephen, and Paul in Acts all draw on Old Testament texts. The book of Hebrews, thought by some to be a collection of early Christian sermons, draws on material across the Old Testament, especially the Psalms. This chapter provides you with a disciplined, prayerful, and scholarly process for engaging Scripture. Exegetical work (close grammatical, historical, and theological study of a text) is supported in this method by meditative Scripture reading using the centuriesold process called lectio divina(“divine reading”).

Book Title: Engaging Bonhoeffer-The Impact and Influence of Bonhoeffer's Life and Thought
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): ZIEGLER PHILIP G.
Abstract: Engaging Bonhoeffer documents the extraordinary impact of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s life and writing on later thought. Despite his lasting legacy, little substantial scholarship has been conducted in this area. In this magisterial collection, leading international scholars fill this striking gap and critically demonstrate the ways in which Bonhoeffer has been one of the most inspirational writers of the twentieth century. In addition to shedding light on the different trajectories that Bonhoeffer’s work may forge, Engaging Bonhoeffer offers a critical window through which to view the ideas of many leading theological voices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg3z

Introduction—Whose Bonhoeffer? from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer was one of the most important thinkers of the twentieth century. His Life TogetherandDiscipleshipare considered to be spiritual classics, and few theological works have made as much of an impact asLetters and Papers from Prisonupon publication. Although far from uncontroversial, it is also clear that Bonhoeffer’s involvement in the German resistance has also been a significant factor in his appreciation.

2 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Death of God Theologians from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) McLaughlin Eleanor
Abstract: In November 1965 the New York Timespublished Edward B. Fiske’s article, “Theology Without God,”¹ outlining the thought of a group of theologians exploring the idea of the “death of God.” The following April,Timefollowed suit, with John T. Elson’s in-depth analysis of new ways of thinking about God that were gaining ground in the United States and elsewhere. William Hamilton, referred to in both articles, considers this period to be that in which the media event of the death of God occurred,² though the theological developments it covered had begun four years before.

3 The Influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Karl Barth from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Greggs Tom
Abstract: It may seem an odd thing to think and speak of the influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Karl Barth. Born in 1886, Barth was a half-generation older than Bonhoeffer (born 1906). Bonhoeffer was only twelve years old when Barth published his theological epoch making Romerbrief. Bonhoeffer studied Barth’s work and was influenced by him as a student, such that hisHabilitationsschrift, Act and Being, was written in large part in dialogue with Karl Barth’s work. Even though this work contains critical elements,¹ this criticism should be seen within a shared discourse—a discourse established by Barth into which Bonhoeffer enters.

4 Reinhold Niebuhr and Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Responsibility from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Lovin Robin W.
Abstract: Reinhold Niebuhr and Dietrich Bonhoeffer were separated both by ideas and experience, but united in their most important convictions. They differed theologically, a difference apparent in their different interpretations of the Sermon on the Mount. They came from different backgrounds, and they saw the events of the twentieth century from different sides of the Atlantic. Yet despite these differences, each wanted to make a place for faithful action that would change the course of the political crisis through which they were living, and both understood the moral risks involved in that kind of action. The idea of responsibility— Verantwortung—bore

7 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Liberation Theologies from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Kirkpatrick Matthew D.
Abstract: Liberation theology is one of the most important and provocative theological developments of the last century. Although it was largely forged in Latin America in distinction from the theologies of Western Europe and North America, Dietrich Bonhoeffer is often cited as a significant inspiration. Julio de Santa Ana and Beatriz Melano, Methodist theologians from Uruguay and Brazil respectively, offer moving first-hand testimony of Bonhoeffer’s impact on the development of Protestant liberation theology from its beginnings in the early 1950s—twenty years before Gustavo Gutiérrez’s seminal work, A Theology of Liberation, brought a systematic overview to the attention of the West.¹

9 “Love of Life”—The Impact and Influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s Life and Thought on Jürgen Moltmann from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Schliesser Christine
Abstract: “My attitude towards life or what is nowadays called spirituality.” This was Jürgen Moltmann’s answer when asked what areas of his own theology he felt were most prominently impacted by Dietrich Bonhoeffer.¹ As the interview continued, Moltmann offered Bonhoeffer the highest of praise, particularly Letters and Papers from Prison, which he called an “eye-opener”² in its ideas of this-worldliness, the polyphony of life, and thecantus firmus. What is strikingly clear, in both has been a steady companion on Moltmann’s theological path.³ Not a companion that he would always agree with. Far from that. But one that he has enjoyed

10 God, Christ, and Church in the DDR—Wolf Krötke as an Interpreter of Bonhoeffer’s Theology from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Ziegler Philip G.
Abstract: Bonhoeffer lived out much of his theological existence in eastern Germany. He was a man of wide international and ecumenical vision. Yet, between his birth in Breslau (now Wroclaw, Poland) in 1906 and his terminal imprisonment in Berlin in 1943–45, the better part of Bonheoffer’s life and work had its centre of gravity in the historic Prussian city of Berlin and the eastern German provinces of Silesia, Brandenburg, and Pomerania. It was at the behest of the Old Prussian Union Council of Brethren that he led the illegal Confessing Church seminary at Zingst/Finkenwalde and subsequent collective pastorates in “the

12 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Gerhard Ebeling: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Frick Peter
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer met Gerhard Ebeling, a fellow Berliner, for the first time at the underground Finkenwalde Seminary of the Confessing Church during the fourth theological course in the winter of 1936–37. It took Bonhoeffer very little time to realize that Ebeling was an exceptionally gifted theological thinker; it is fair to say that Bonhoeffer discovered the theological genius in Ebeling. On his own initiative, Bonhoeffer wrote to Martin Albertz, superintendent of the Confessing Church responsible for theological education, to recommend Ebeling for further theological education, stating: “I consider him to be an extraordinarily gifted and capable scholar and theologian…

14 On the Phenomenology of Creation: from: Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Manoussakis John Panteleimon
Abstract: The importance of Bonhoeffer’s thought for contemporary theology is well attested and does not need to be reiterated here. In the pages to follow, however, our objective will be to map the points of convergence between Bonhoeffer’s theology and Jean-Yves Lacoste’s theological philosophy, with particular emphasis given to their understanding of creation and eschatology. The most fruitful appropriation of Bonhoeffer’s eschatology by Jean-Yves Lacoste is to be found in his Experience and the Absolute.¹ Lacoste expresses his gratefulness to Bonhoeffer by these words from the introduction: “Two names do not appear in this text, those of Dietrich Bonhoeffer and John

Book Title: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): HACKETT W. CHRIS
Abstract: Quiet Powers of the Possible offers an excellent introduction to contemporary French phenomenology through a series of interviews with its most prominent figures. Guided by rigorous questions that push into the most important aspects of the latest phenomenological research, the book gives readers a comprehensive sense of each thinker's intellectual history, motivations, and philosophical commitments. The book introduces readers to debates that have not previously been accessible to the English-speaking world, such as the growing interest in the phenomenological concept of life in its affective and even vital dimensions, the emerging dialogue with the analytic philosophy of mind and language, and reassessments of the so-called theological turn. The diversity of approaches collected here has its origin in a deeper debate about the conceptual and historical foundations of phenomenology itself. In this way the book offers the most accessible and wide-ranging introduction to French phenomenology to have appeared in the English-speaking world to date.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rm9fx

Introduction: from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) HACKETT W. CHRIS
Abstract: The American reception of contemporary French phenomenology, however fecund, has been both selective and cloistered. For many, the “theological turn,” an expression initially coined as an epithet by Dominique Janicaud (and that, like many epithets, has become something of a rallying cry this side of the Atlantic), unquestionably represents what, for better or worse, distinguishes phenomenology from other trends in contemporary philosophy, be they French or Anglo-American. No doubt, French phenomenology has demonstrated a remarkable capacity for describing phenomena hitherto deemed beyond the pale of reason. But according to what (or whose) concept of reason? Whether phenomenology has gone beyond

French Phenomenology in Historical Context from: Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) COURTINE JEAN-FRANÇOIS
Abstract: For over twenty years (1987–2009), you were director of the Archives Husserl de Paris at the École normale supérieure, which has historically been an important center of phenomenological research in France. From this position, you have a unique vantage point on the present state of French phenomenology and its future. Are there certain pertinent moments to the story of phenomenology in France that stand out to you over the course of these last three decades?

PRAGMATIC METHODOLOGY IN THE PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Seibert Christoph
Abstract: The task I would like to work on is a very broad one.¹ It can be looked at from various points of view. For example, it can be dealt with in the way of comparing a pragmatic-oriented philosophy of religion with other philosophical outlooks. It can be illumed in the light of the question which particular version of pragmatic thinking is more appropriate to religion as its subject matter. Finally, it can be approached by regarding some particulars of the methodological question bound to pragmatic thinking as such. In my argument, I will focus on the latter, drawing on the

ONTOLOGICAL FAITH IN DEWEY’S RELIGIOUS IDEALISM from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Kestenbaum Victor
Abstract: For some years now, I have attempted to contest what others see—what they onlysee—in John Dewey. I refer to the naturalistic lines, edges, and boundaries that must be there, because if they are not plainly there, then Dewey is not there. In my efforts, I have been aided by a variety of influences, some in philosophy, some in literature, and some in the arts. I believe that Dewey deeply valued phenomenological accuracy, the kind of accuracy that John Updike noted in his acceptance speech for the 1964 National Book Awards prize: “Reality is—chemically, atomically, biologically—a

“MAN’S HIGHEST DEVELOPMENTS ARE SOCIAL”: from: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Linde Gesche
Abstract: As with all the classical pragmatists, Peirce’s interest in the subject of religion is subordinate to his more central questions. What Peirce has to say about God, creation, the church, faith, and love is systematically derived from a philosophy that, having semiotics at its core, spans a broad range of topics, such as mathematics, logic, epistemology, cosmology, linguistics, and occasionally even bridges design and engineering. It is this subsidiary status that, to my mind, lends methodological soundness as well as modernity to Peirce’s reflections, because the clear implication is that religion is not a primary phenomenon but something that develops

Book Title: Turns of Event-Nineteenth-Century American Literary Studies in Motion
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Blum Hester
Abstract: Taken together, these essays survey the field of American literary studies as it moves beyond new historicism as its primary methodology and evolves in light of ideological, conceptual, and material considerations. There is much at stake in these movements: the consequences and opportunities range from citational and evidentiary practices to canon expansion, resource allocation, and institutional futurity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rmcdc

Chapter 1 Turn It Up: from: Turns of Event
Author(s) SANBORN GEOFFREY
Abstract: In the beginning, if it makes any sense to talk of a beginning, there were differences, in all likelihood chemical differences, variations in compounds, in different geographical and climatological contexts. These chemical differences, under some unknown and perhaps unknowable conditions, were transformed or transformed themselves into simple organic proteins, whose structure provided some means of reproduction. Life “began.”¹

CHAPTER 5 Secret Archives, Secret Societies: from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Solis Yves
Abstract: Historians have used many archival sources to explore the vitriolic relationship between church and state in Mexico during the first few decades of the twentieth century (1910–1940). In 2006 the Vatican opened its Secret Archives (Archivio Segreto Vaticano, or ASV), which shed new light on the pontificate of Pius XI (1922–1939). Researchers were able to learn more about the internal logic of the Holy See, papal diplomacy, and the relationship between the Roman curia, apostolic nuncios, the apostolic delegates, and the Catholic hierarchy of diverse countries, including Mexico. Scholars have even been able to uncover covert conspiracies developing

CHAPTER 7 A “Third Way” in Christ: from: Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Pensado Jaime M.
Abstract: The 1950s saw the rise of a new generation of leftist, conservative, and Catholic students in Latin America that began calling for a unique form of hemispheric solidarity. Their efforts reflected concerns about momentous contemporary events that had a profound impact at their universities, like the anticolonial war in Algeria, the rise of military dictatorships in Guatemala, and the “ iron fist” following the Hungarian insurrection. But these students also harkened back to the “arielista” language that characterized the first two decades of the twentieth century.¹ Asserting their ideological positions during the incipient cold war, they participated throughout the 1950s

Introduction: from: Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: This book is about and in response to Edmund Husserl’s phenomenology and his notion of science. No one would claim that Husserl was a founder of philosophy of technology, although his writings about science are substantial and persistent. Readers may note that my Heidegger’s Technologies: Postphenomenological Perspectives(Fordham, 2010) was a response to Heidegger’s foundational work in precisely philosophy of technology. This book parallels that work by turning to Husserl on technologies despite his ambivalence and lack of focal attention to technologies or even to instruments in science. Husserl remained throughout his life a believer in the primacy of science

Théatron e parrēsia. from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) Esposito Marianna
Abstract: Benché divisi da prospettive concettuali inassimilabili, Hannah Arendt e Michel Foucault condividono una modalità di sguardo in rapporto alla politica che vale la pena di mettere a fuoco proprio nell’intreccio dei linguaggi eterogenei in cui si dispongono i loro due percorsi filosofici. Anzi, l’elemento di interesse del confronto sta proprio nella distanza delle prospettive a partire da cui entrambi pensano il rapporto tra vita e politica. Se, da un lato, per Arendt, la vita biologica e la politica si escludono a vicenda, dal momento che la sfera riproduttiva del biosnon ha connotazione politica, ma governamentale, funzionale alla produttività del

Governance e soggettivazioni: from: Vita, politica, contingenza
Author(s) Luce Sandro
Abstract: L’obiettivo di questo intervento è quello di mettere in evidenza come ciò che viene genericamente definita governancenon rappresenti solo un ulteriore e decisivo slittamento dalle forme classiche digovernmentverso nuove e piùsoftforme di governo dei viventi¹, ma costituisca un dispositivo funzionale ad una politica la cui logica è supportata da giustificazioni e da pratiche di tipo economico². Per sostenere tale tesi, proverò a mostrare come l’oggetto stesso della politica, il vivente, venga rappresentato, in piena continuità con le recenti teorie di area neoliberale, non più in termini oggettivi e passivizzanti, come qualcosa da cui estrarre valore,

Book Title: Horror and Its Aftermath-Reconsidering Theology and Human Experience
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Stamper Sally
Abstract: Theological anthropology often brings psychology to bear on the contingent nature of human existence in relationship to God. In this volume, Sally Stamper articulates one modern trajectory of theological recourse to psychology (comprising Schleiermacher, Nietzsche, and Tillich) as the ground on which she brings clinical psychoanalytic theory and early childhood studies into conversation with fundamental questions about the relationship of God to human suffering and its remediation. She develops her argument from the assertions that human experience evolves within an awareness of human vulnerability to profound suffering and that insight into consequent human anxiety is a powerful resource for soteriology, eschatology, and theological anthropology. Stamper narrates this “normative anxiety" by integrating object relations theories of early childhood development and critical readings of literary texts for young children. She gestures toward a new eschatological vision that poses the radical otherness of a transcendent God as key to divine remediation of human suffering, in the process building on Marilyn McCord Adams’s soteriological response to human horror-participation and on Jonathan Lear’s assertion of radical hope in response to catastrophic collapse of cultural resources for making meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t6sv

1 Camel, Lion, Child: from: Horror and Its Aftermath
Abstract: One of the most haunting theological questions, for believers and theologians alike, asks how we can account for a loving, omniscient, and omnipotent divine creator, given the evil and concomitant suffering that are contingencies of human existence. The broad form of the problem is reflected in a host of specific observations: What kind of God commands a faithful follower to sacrifice his son? How can just people reconcile their proclamation of a just and merciful God with the God who hardens Pharaoh’s heart, ultimately to the point of imposing the death of all firstborns as one of the plagues used

Book Title: Radical Theology-An Essay on Faith and Theology in the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Dalferth Ingolf U.
Abstract: Ingolf U. Dalferth develops a “radical theology" that unfolds the orienting strength of faith for human life from the event of God’s presence to every present. In a concise and clear manner, Dalferth outlines the theological and philosophical approaches to hermeneutics in the modern era, in order to promote a convincing and defensible theology for the twenty-first century, critically carrying on Martin Heidegger and Rudolf Bultmann, without forgetting Karl Barth. The result of his reconstruction is a “radical theology" that neither glorifies premodern theology in an antimodern attitude nor seeks a mystical deepening of the secular, but argues for a radical change in theological perspective of the possible. In doing so, theology unfolds “limit concepts" that restrict the claims of science and philosophy critically, and develops “ideas of orientation" that illumine the ways in which human life is understood and lived in radically new ways in faith. From here, Dalferth unfolds the reality of revelation and the Christian sense of an unconditional hope that fundamentally transcends all beliefs based on mundane realities and orients the world on something beyond its own temporal horizon—its loving Creator.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t6tc

1 Hermeneutical Theology from: Radical Theology
Abstract: Everything has its time. Hermeneutical theology had its time—in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. That is a significant duration. In contrast to some other theological movements, it did not simply remain an announcement and an agenda; it actually has a history that is worth remembering. But does it have a present that is worth mentioning? Or any future at all? Are there reasons to continue that which students of Rudolf Bultmann such as Ernst Fuchs, Gerhard Ebeling, and Eberhard Jüngel—and their own students—began two or three generations ago? And what would there be to continue, if one

4 Theological Hermeneutics and Hermeneutical Theology from: Radical Theology
Abstract: Theological hermeneutics is not the hermeneutics of a particular field (religion) or set of sacred texts (the Bible) such as biblical hermeneutics ( hermeneutica sacra) or the hermeneutics of religion(s)¹ but of everything that we can (or cannot) understand in a theological perspective—the perspective of the creative presence of God.² If the fundamental problem of philosophical hermeneutics is the understanding of understanding, then the fundamental issue of modern theological hermeneutics is theunderstanding of the understanding of God.

5 The Hermeneutical Way of Thinking: from: Radical Theology
Abstract: Bultmann largely remained with Heidegger’s existential-ontological analysis from the 1920s. Later developments in Heidegger’s thought, which took place after his return to Freiburg and the alienation that resulted from their differing responses to the rise of Nazism, were not reflected in Bultmann’s theology.

6 Toward a Critique of Hermeneutical Theology from: Radical Theology
Abstract: The hermeneutical approach outlined emphasized the self-interpretation of being or the self-interpretation of God in language, either of which is to be distinguished in principle from all linguistic self-interpretations of persons and from their interpretation of being or God. This drew massive criticism: it was seen as inherently aporetic, based on a problematic combination of differing hermeneutical models, guided by an inadequate understanding of language, and failing to provide a methodology for reliably identifying such self-interpretations intersubjectively or for distinguishing between “true” and “false” interpretations and theological reconstructions in some verifiable way. Theological teaching and argument within hermeneutical theology were

1 The God of Israel in the Theology of Robert Jenson from: Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: Robert Jenson numbers among the world’s most influential living theologians, and his Systematic Theologymay yet prove to be one of the most learned and stimulating written in English, or any language, in the last fifty years.¹ As Jenson continues to apply his breadth of knowledge to all manner of theological, ecclesial, and cultural concerns, one theme has attracted much of his energy and focus for over a decade. Indeed, the “theology of Israel” that comes to fruition in theSystematic Theologydisplays Jenson’s determination to work through the implications of a “newly demanding” confrontation with the fact of Judaism.²

8 Jenson, the God of Israel, and Non-supersessionist Theology from: Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: This book has attempted to highlight the pervasive significance of the God of Israel in Jenson’s theology. In this final chapter, implications for Jenson’s non-supersessionist proposals are explored in light of the foregoing assessment. In particular, Jenson’s logic for the preservation of the church and the synagogue is extrapolated in order to consider further his significant contribution to self-consciously non-supersessionist dogmatic theology. As has been reiterated regularly, a fundamental premise of Jenson’s theology is the conviction that Christians worship the God of Israel, who is identified by and with exodus and resurrection. Of far-reaching import for Jenson’s Trinitarian theology is

Book Title: The Holy One in Our Midst-An Essay on the Flesh of Christ
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Gordon James R.
Abstract: The Holy One in Our Midst: An Essay on the Flesh of Christ aims to defend the doctrine of the extra Calvinisticum—the doctrine that maintains the Son of God was not restricted to the flesh of Christ during the incarnation—by arguing that it is logically coherent, biblically warranted, catholically orthodox, and theologically useful. It shows that none of the standard objections are devastating to the extra, that the doctrine is rooted in the claims of Christian Scripture and not merely a remnant of perfect being philosophical theology, and that the doctrine plays an important role in contemporary theological discussion. In this way, James R. Gordon revives an important Catholic doctrine that has fallen out of favor in contemporary theology. Secondarily, this project aims to integrate biblical, philosophical, and systematic theology by showing that the tools and methods of each distinct discipline can contribute to the goals and aims of the others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7gp

1 The Flesh of Christ and the Extra Calvinisticum from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: The doctrine known as the extra Calvinisticumstates that the eternal Son of God, during his incarnate life on earth, was not enclosed by or limited to the physical body of Jesus Christ but continued to uphold the universe by virtue of maintaining a form of presence beyond or outside Jesus’ physical body.¹ This counterintuitive area of Christology has received little attention in the history of theological reflection, so much so that Edward Oakes has claimed that “no topic in Christology ... is more arcane than that of theextra Calvinisticum.”² Despite being an “esoteric topic of Christology,”³ there are

2 The Flesh of Christ in Modern Theology: from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: In the first chapter we highlighted the significance of the doctrine known as the extra Calvinisticumand attempted to identify some important areas of discussion that have gone unaddressed. In addition, we offered a preview of the cumulative-case argument to be constructed and identified the major goals of this project. Specifically, we claimed that there have been no extended statements of or responses to the theological objections to theextra Calvinisticum; the question of the doctrine’s overall coherency has largely been ignored by its adherents and is quickly appealed to by its detractors. Because of this confusion, chapters 2 and

3 The Logos and the Flesh of Christ: from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: In the previous chapter we attempted to state clearly the theological objections to the extra Calvinisticumin the theologies of Isaak Dorner, the mature Karl Barth, Bruce McCormack, and Darren Sumner. Taken together, the five objections outlined in chapter 2 cast a large shadow over theextraand lead one to question whether the doctrine has persuasive force, let alone positive doctrinal value—that is, whether the objections are indeed insurmountable. The present chapter will demonstrate that none of the major theological objections to theextraconclusively provides a sufficient reason for abandoning the doctrine. The following two chapters will

4 The Temple of God and the Flesh of Christ: from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: In chapter 2 we outlined the major objections to the extra Calvinisticum, which we subsequently defused in chapter 3. In this chapter, we will proceed by making our own constructive argument for theextra; however, before doing so, we will note the specific modes of argumentation that have often been used to defend theextra. Whereas chapter 5 will attempt to show that theextraserves numerous purposes in theological discourse, the present chapter attempts to illustrate that theologians have arrived at an affirmation of theextrain a variety of different ways and to offer an argument for the

5 (De)Limiting the Flesh of Christ: from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: This chapter offers an account of the proper and improper dogmatic uses of the extra Calvinisticum. In order to do so, we will refute the suggestion that theextraought to function only in a small, christological capacity, examine two of the most significant positive uses of theextrain modern theology, suggest three specific theologicallocitheextrainforms, and propose a way to discern what sorts of dogmatic uses of theextraare illegitimate.

6 Why One Ought to Embrace the Extra Calvinisticum from: The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: The previous chapters have attempted to mount a cumulative-case argument for the extra Calvinisticumby highlighting the doctrine’s significance to groups with various theological interests, surveying uses of and objections to the doctrine throughout the Christian tradition, clearing the ground of logical obstacles to the doctrine, examining the doctrine’s place in Scripture, and offering suggestions for contemporary theological usage of the doctrine. In so doing, we have accomplished the three main goals of this project mentioned in chapter 1: (1) to state and defuse the objections to theextra Calvinisticum, (2) to provide warrant for theextraby showing (a)

Book Title: Into the Far Country-Karl Barth and the Modern Subject
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Long D. Stephen
Abstract: Into the Far Country is an investigation of Karl Barth’s response to modernity as seen through the prism of the subject under judgment. By suggesting that Barth offers a form of theological resistance to the Enlightenment’s construal of human subjectivity as “absolute," this piece offers a way of talking about the formation of human persons as the process of being kenotically laid bare before the cross and resurrection of Christ. It does so by reevaluating the relationship between Barth and modernity, making the case that Barth understands Protestantism to have become the agent of its own demise by capitulating to modernity’s insistence on the axiomatic priority of the isolated Cartesian ego. Conversations are hosted with figures including Fyodor Dostoevsky, Rowan Williams, Gillian Rose and Donald MacKinnon in the service of elucidating an account of the human person liberated from captivity to what Barth names “self-judgment," and freed for creative participation in the super-abundant source of life that is the prayerful movement from the Son to the Father in the Spirit. Therefore, an account of Barth’s theology is offered that is deeply concerned with the triune God’s revelatory presence as that which drives the community into the crucible of difficulty that is the life of kenotic dispossession.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7jq

Introduction: from: Into the Far Country
Abstract: In the preface to the second edition of the Critique of Pure Reason, Kant compares his epistemological revolution to the Copernican revolution in cosmology. By offering a redescription of the solar system in heliocentric terms, Copernicus reimagined planetary motion from the vantage point of the surface of the sun rather than the earth—a change of vantage point was everything. When Kant states that in proceeding through theCritiquewe shall be “proceeding precisely on the lines of Copernicus’ primary hypothesis,” he is suggesting that we invert classical modes of knowing. It has “been assumed that all our knowledge must

2 Particularity Regained: from: Into the Far Country
Abstract: Father Zosima’s discourses, following in the wake of Ivan Karamazov’s tirade against the apparent impotence of Christ, detail a life lived out of a particular set of convictions about the world and its ground. Zosima, approaching immanent death, sits with his most faithful friends and declares he wishes to “pour out his soul” to them once more.¹ His discourses, in the first instance, narrate various encounters, only after which we are privy to talks and homilies reflecting on the shape of human life. The integration of narrative and theological reflection is critical to Dostoevsky’s response to Ivan’s accusations. The only

Postscript: from: Into the Far Country
Abstract: The question I posed at the beginning of this book was whether or not Barth’s construction of subjectivity is Kantian, and what the theological consequence of the answer might be. Bruce McCormack maintains that Barth was attempting to be “orthodox under the conditions of modernity,” meaning Barth arrives at an armistice with Kantian epistemics—indeed, with the turn to the subject—while at the same time finding noetic space for revelatory encounter in a christologically grounded dialectical relation between veiling and unveiling. At this stage my argument with McCormack is over, and I do not wish to cover this ground

Book Title: Theology in the Flesh-How Embodiment and Culture Shape the Way We Think about Truth, Morality, and God
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Sanders John
Abstract: Metaphors and other mental tools are used to reason (not just speak) about God, salvation, truth, and morality. Figurative language structures our theological and moral reasoning in powerful ways. This book uses an approach known as cognitive linguistics to explore the incredibly rich ways our conceptual tools, derived from embodied life and culture, shape the way we understand Christian teachings and practices. The cognitive revolution has generated amazing insights into how human minds make sense of the world. This book applies these insights to the ways Christians think about topics such as God, justice, sin, and salvation. It shows that Christians often share a set of very general ideas but disagree on what the Bible means or the moral stances we should take. It explains why Christians often develop a number of appropriate but sometimes incompatible ways to understand the Bible and various doctrines. It assists Christians in understanding those with whom they disagree. Hopefully, simply better understanding how and why people think the way they do will foster better dialogue and greater humility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7k7

1 Introduction from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: One might wonder what difference it makes whether we think of divine transcendence as God “above” us or as God “ahead of” us. It matters because we use these simple words to construct deep theological meaning. In this case, they are distinctive metaphors that lead us to very different ways of thinking about God’s relationship to us. Those who think of God as above us tend to conclude that our language never “reaches” up to God, and so, God is fundamentally unknowable. However, if one thinks of God as ahead of us on a path, then, though we may never

7 Christian Doctrines from: Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Thinking about theological topics such as sin and salvation makes use of the ordinary embodied cognitive processes we use every day. There is not a particular area of the brain or specific pattern of brain activity associated with religious experiences. Rather, as Brown and Strawn suggest: “there are a multitude of forms of body and brain activity that can mediate and embody religious experiences and the sense of the presence of God, but any particular brain-body event is experienced as religious or not based on the person’s expectations and ways of understanding their subjective experiences.”¹ The way we understand theology

Book Title: Il ritorno dei sentimenti- Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Un “fantasma" sembra aggirarsi nella letteratura francese a partire dagli anni Cinquanta del Novecento e pare destinato a rimanere tale per mezzo secolo, con una latente e, poi, dagli anni Ottanta, con una più riconoscibile capacità di produrre nuove forme o nuovi contesti letterari. Il “fantasma dei sentimenti" da tempo attraversa inquieto le pagine della narrativa, finzionale o autofinzionale, di Francia. Alcuni potrebbero, d’altronde, ipotizzare che questo “spettro" sia stato una presenza attiva, un fermento vitale, seppure dapprima minoritario, sotterraneo e sommesso (ma, forse, neppure troppo clandestino), anche nel periodo più ostile all’espressione in letteratura dei sentimenti. L’inversione di tendenza, nel romanzo francese di questo primo decennio del XXI secolo, appare sempre più netta e riconoscibile e finanche, talvolta, egemonica, se non eccessiva, come spesso succede, quando l’albero è stato troppo piegato, in precedenza, con corde cerebrali e funi ideologiche, nella direzione opposta a quella genetica e costitutiva della scrittura. Quando, come e perché è iniziata questa “riapparizione" dei sentimenti nel romanzo? In quali esperienze significative di scrittura si è espressa e quali sono le varianti narrative che si sono imposte? Quali sono i rischi che il romanzo francese contemporaneo corre quando la ricerca e l’espressione dei sentimenti si fa, come accade oggi, in maniera tumultuosa e incontrollata, con una forte esigenza di originalità che ne temperi i rischi insiti nel sentimentalismo? È possibile una letteratura dell’equilibrio, una letteratura che possa vivere senza l’eccesso, una letteratura senza esasperazione, o per dirla diversamente uno spazio letterario liberato da questa eredità e, dunque, propositivo? Perché il sentimento, anche quello più esacerbato, resta anche un punto di equilibrio tra la leggerezza dell’emozione e la gravità della passione, che porta pure lo stesso nome.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x7mr

Chapter I Love is colder than death from: Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: These remarks – taken from Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit– stand as an adequate synthesis of all that has been imputed to the German philosopher by multiple hegemonic strands in twentieth-century philosophical thought: the philosopher of Absolute Knowledge in its totality, who is nevertheless unable to account for the irreducibility of difference, or of individual aspirations for recognition, through his strategies of conceptual synthesis. In him one finds the most highly refined expression of the philosophical belief that thinking is not possible save through the articulation of strongly hierarchical systems, as well as a subsequent disregard for the ontological dignity of contingency

Chapter IV The coupling of sex and death is not exclusive to decadent romantics from: Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: After our initial look at how certain aspects of Hegel’s account of desire might transform the concept of individuality, we turned to possible repercussions for his theories of juridical ordering and the state. Then, a third textual movement attempted an articulation of subjectivity, history and infinity, the foremost aim of which was to show that the Hegelian subject exceeds all egological reductions, analytics of finitude or anthropological limitations. That is to say, Hegel leaves us with a subject sufficiently inclusive to allow for both reflections on models of institutional association, as well as modes of determination or the process of

Chapter VII Our time unlocks a multiplicity in each desire from: Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: While the foregoing discussion of psychoanalytic drive theory has brought us to a renewed understanding of the problem of negativity, and allowed us to conceive of an individuality no longer subjugated to what we have termed the egological reduction of the subject, we have yet to examine how the restructuring of psychic activity is to be conducted; in particular, how psychic syntheses – understood here as being no longer exclusively dependent on egoderived modes of synthesis – operate.

3 Treacherous Memory: from: Moments of Silence
Author(s) RASTEGAR KAMRAN
Abstract: Questions of ideological dedication are perhaps most fraught within the context of war. Memory discourse, in particular on the memory of war and its traumas, is often a legitimating instrument in the contest to elaborate who serves as hero and who as traitor during the war and afterward. In post-revolutionary Iran, the onset of the Iran-Iraq War allowed for the articulation of new if shifting parameters for ideological commitment and heroism, as well as treachery or cowardice. The evolution of the “sacred defense” concept allowed for the most articulate elaboration of these binaries, and wartime and postwar cultural producers, bureaucrats,

CHAPTER 4 “Something Is Missing”: from: Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: Fredric Jameson’s assertion that utopia’s deepest subject is its own inconceivability—its own failure of imagination, in a sense—baldly contravenes a positivist utopian tradition characterized precisely as the full-fledged blueprint of an alternative, more perfect society. Jameson’s negative utopianism embraces this aspect of failure, but it is important to understand that this failure is not simply the commonplace fatality of a compromised individual or authorial imagination. It is, instead, what Jameson calls “the systemic, cultural, and ideological closure of which we are all in one way or another prisoners.”¹ Despite Thomas More’s inspiration for, and association with, utopianism of

Book Title: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Shank Reuben
Abstract: In France today, philosophy--phenomenology in particular--finds itself in a paradoxical relation to theology. Some debate a "theological turn." Others disavow theological arguments as if such arguments would tarnish their philosophical integrity, while nevertheless carrying out theology in other venues. In Crossing the Rubicon, Emmanuel Falque seeks to end this face-off. Convinced that "the more one theologizes, the better one philosophizes," he proposes a counterblow by theology against phenomenology. Instead of another philosophy of "the threshold" or "the leap"--and through a retrospective and forward-looking examination of his own method--he argues that an encounter between the two disciplines will reveal their mutual fruitfulness and their true distinctive borders. Falque shows that he has made the crossing between philosophy and theology and back again with audacity and perhaps a little recklessness, knowing full well that no one thinks without exposing himself to risk.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzm0r

4 Kerygma and Decision from: Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In Chapter 3, I claimed there is no confessing faith outside of an original philosophical faith. A common ground of believingalways precedes thedecidedact of believing. To recognize oneself as “believing otherwise” is then not to disregard faith or to condemn the so-called unbeliever. This position is neither a kind of ostracism nor a kind of conformism, nor does it aim to relativize. On the contrary, it arises from a real resolution. Believingtheologicallyin God rests on first believingphilosophicallyin the world or in others—whether via a Cartesian act of negation, a Husserlian suspension of

Book Title: Walter Benjamin and Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SYMONS STÉPHANE
Abstract: In the Arcades Project, Walter Benjamin writes that his work is "related to theology as blotting pad is related to ink. It is saturated with it." For a thinker so decisive to critical literary, cultural, political, and aesthetic writings over the past half-century, Benjamin's relationship to theological matters has been less observed than it should, even despite a variety of attempts over the last four decades to illuminate the theological elements latent within his eclectic and occasional writings. Such attempts, though undeniably crucial to comprehending his thought, remain in need of deepened systematic analysis. In bringing together some of the most renowned experts from both sides of the Atlantic, Walter Benjamin and Theology seeks to establish a new site from which to address both the issue of Benjamin's relationship with theology and all the crucial aspects that Benjamin himself grappled with when addressing the field and operations of theological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzm39

Introduction from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) SYMONS STÉPHANE
Abstract: In a famous letter written to Max Horkheimer in March 1937, Walter Benjamin describes his philosophy as “something that forbids us to conceive of history as fundamentally atheological, little as it may be granted to us to try to write it with immediately theological concepts.”¹ In The Arcades Project, he writes: “[My work is] related to theology as blotting pad is related to ink. It is saturated with it. Were one to go by the blotter, however, nothing of what is written would remain.”² For a thinker so decisive to critical literary, cultural, political, and aesthetic writings over the past

Benjamin’s Messianic Metaphysics of Transience from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) THIEM ANNIKA
Abstract: While religious and theological questions have seen a renewed interest within critical theory, metaphysics still remains under suspicion when it is not, as is so often the case in contemporary critical theory, considered a matter of little consequence. Similarly, Walter Benjamin’s drawing upon theological tropes as the conceptual framework for theorizing history and life is no longer met with criticism but rather is widely embraced and harnessed as a theoretical resource for political and ethical thought. However, as obvious as it is that Benjamin’s work is shot through with theological tropes and concepts, it proves more difficult to reflect systematically

Completion Instead of Revelation: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) FENVES PETER
Abstract: This essay is concerned with the act of the Messiah. According to a brief sketch that Walter Benjamin read to Theodor and Gretel Adorno in the winter of 1937–1938 and that has since acquired the title of “Theological-Political Fragment,” there is a single messianic act, the description of which requires three separate terms. Two of these terms can be easily translated into English, for they belong to a long tradition of theological speculation that encompasses a broad group of languages, including German and English. But the word through which Benjamin identifies theact of the messiah—namely,vollenden—cannot

The Will to Apokatastasis: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) JENNINGS MICHAEL W.
Abstract: To begin with the ending: Walter Benjamin’s much discussed and little understood allegory of the Turkish puppet in his last known text, “On the Concept of History,” raises one central question for the entirety of his work: exactly howmight politics take theology into its service, and to what effect?¹ Throughout his career, Benjamin’s use of theological concepts and motifs is invariably bound to the formulation of a politics; but how are we to trace the invisible strings that allow theology to ensure that historical materialism always wins? Benjamin’s deployment of theological motifs and his political commitments are of course

Walter Benjamin—A Modern Marcionite? from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) TAUBES JACOB
Abstract: “The Devil is in the details.” This aperçuof Aby Warburg applies not only to philology and history, but to philosophical and theological reflection as well. Gershom Scholem, a highly speculative mind, invoked Aby Warburg’s words when he made his bold, imposing descent into the deep strata of Jewish history of religion, where he brought dark, dialectically fascinating, albeit profoundly demonic, forms of the Jewish spirit to light. A student once proposed that Scholem’s “historical-rational” apparatus could be the bridge over which searching secular students could enter onto the path to the “nonrational” content of Jewish mysticism and its demonic

One Time Traverses Another: from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) BUTLER JUDITH
Abstract: Benjamin’s “Theological-Political Fragment” opens up several questions about the status of religion in Benjamin’s work. Two questions tend to emerge when I teach this short text. One of them is whether Benjamin understands the divine as a purely immanent feature of the world. The second has to do with the notion of the “rhythm of transience” that appears in the text and, simply put, whether the rhythm of transience is itself transient—that is, it comes and goes but not in a regular or law-like way—or whether that transience comes and goes in a rhythmic way, suggesting that the

Walter Benjamin and Christian Critical Ethics—A Comment from: Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) HAKER HILLE
Abstract: As enigmatic as it is at times, Walter Benjamin’s retrieval of Jewish theological language has perhaps done more for postwar German Christian theology than it could do for itself after the Holocaust, even though, admittedly, only a few theologians marked the Holocaust as a radical rupture of their tradition.¹ My reading of Benjamin engages specifically with two texts: “Critique of Violence” and “Theological-Political Fragment.”² I will demonstrate how an analysis sensitive to theological concepts may further inform a reading of Benjamin’s essays, before turning to Johann Baptist Metz’s reinterpretation of Christian theology as a new political theology. By linking the

Book Title: Moving Images-From Edison to the Webcam
Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: In 1888, Thomas Edison announced that he was experimenting on "an instrument which does for the eye what the phonograph does for the ear, which is the recording and reproduction of things in motion." Just as Edison's investigations were framed in terms of the known technologies of the phonograph and the microscope, the essays in this collection address the contexts of innovation and reception that have framed the development of moving images in the last 100 years. Three concerns are of particular interest: the contexts of innovation and reception for moving image technologies; the role of the observer, whose vision and cognitive processes define some of the limits of inquiry and epistemological insight; and the role of new media, which, engaging with the domestic sphere as cultural interface, are transforming our understanding of public and private spheres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn7v

‘We Partake, as it Were, of His Life’: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Griffiths Alison
Abstract: In her speech as outgoing president of the American Anthropological Association in 1960, pioneering visual anthropologist Margaret Mead urged her colleagues to make greater use of the technologies of the still camera, audio tape recorder and motion picture camera. According to some observers, the reaction among Mead’s professional audience was decidedly mixed. Her appeals were greeted with ‘restless stirrings and angry murmurs … as these notebook-oriented scholars expressed their irritation at this revolutionary suggestion.’¹ In some respects, it is hardly surprising that Mead’s colleagues balked at the idea of using tape recorders and motion picture cameras in the field; beyond

Submerged Landscapes of the Postmodern Body: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Moman Jay
Abstract: In the 1990s it seems that no anthology of cultural theory is complete without a contribution to the increasingly pervasive discourses on the body. Emerging theories attempt to manage Arthur and Marilouise Kroker’s ‘crisis of the body’ by sketching out a map to navigate a world marked by genetic testing, retinal and thumbprint identification, cybersex, and other technological and increasingly digital bodily formations.¹ As I aim to show, this is a map written both aboutanduponthe body in order to regulate the myriad technological systems which dis-/configure it.

Weather Porn and the Battle for Eyeballs: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Boddy William
Abstract: In the form of lavish ad campaigns, front-page news stories, and overheated techno-punditry, the end of the 1990s marked the culmination of a long technological, policy-making and marketing campaign waged by a diverse set of private interests to bring digital television into American and British homes. Charting digital television’s distinct fortunes in the United States and Great Britain can illuminate some of the most persistent and difficult issues in media historiography, including sorting out the determinations of national culture, market structures, and ideological valence in technological innovation. The current transition from analogue to digital standards for electronically stored and transmitted

Video Pleasure and Narrative Cinema: from: Moving Images
Author(s) Buckland Warren
Abstract: Jerome Bruner reminds us that narrative is not a contingent, optional dimension of society, but is an essential, ecologically necessary structure with which individuals make sense of social complexity.² We do not need to subscribe to ontological structuralism – which argues that narrative is a timeless structure that transcends society – to accept this level-headed reminder. In the process of structuring social experience, narrative necessarily reinvents itself in each epoch, offering an historically specific experience. Fredric Jameson’s analysis of the novels of Balzac and Conrad is exemplary in this respect. Jameson identifies in the narrative narrative

Book Title: Early Cinema and the "National"- Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): King Rob
Abstract: While many studies have been written on national cinemas, Early Cinema and the "National" is the first anthology to focus on the concept of national film culture from a wide methodological spectrum of interests, including not only visual and narrative forms, but also international geopolitics, exhibition and marketing practices, and pressing linkages to national imageries. The essays in this richly illustrated, landmark anthology are devoted to reconsidering the nation as a framing category for writing cinema history. Many of the 34 contributors show that concepts of a national identity played a role in establishing the parameters of cinema's early development, from technological change to discourses of stardom, from emerging genres to intertitling practices. Yet, as others attest, national meanings could often become knotty in other contexts, when concepts of nationhood were contested in relation to colonial/imperial histories and regional configurations. Early Cinema and the "National" takes stock of a formative moment in cinema history, tracing the beginnings of the process whereby nations learned to imagine themselves through moving images.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzncx

4 National and racial landscapes and the photographic form from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Bertellini Giorgio
Abstract: Less often is the notion of national difference articulated with racial difference and then included in discussions about cinema’s formal and technological relationship with other media of visual representations– particularly when scholars stress

19 The emergence of nationally specific film cultures in Europe, 1911–1914 from: Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Garncarz Joseph
Abstract: In this essay, I wish to introduce the notion of “national film culture”, trace the process of the emergence of nationally specific film cultures in Europe, and offer an explanation for that emergence, which I hope will be fruitful for the USA and other countries as well.¹ Germany will be my main case study because it has been the focus of my empirical research on early cinema. Through the notion of national film culture I wish to avoid the usual ideological and essentializing connotations implicated in the term “nation”. As a concept, national film culture aims to define popular culture

Book Title: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Straub Jürgen
Abstract: A generally acknowledged characteristic of modern life, namely the temporalization of experience, inextricable from our intensified experience of contingency and difference, has until now remained largely outside psychology's purview. Wherever questions about the development, structure, and function of the concept of time have been posed - for example by Piaget and other founders of genetic structuralism - they have been concerned predominantly with concepts of "physical", chronometrical time, and related concepts (e.g., "velocity"). All the contributions to the present volume attempt to close this gap. A larger number are especially interested in the narration of stories. Overviews of the relevant literature, as well as empirical case studies, appear alongside theoretical and methodological reflections. Most contributions refer to specifically historical phenomena and meaning-constructions. Some touch on the subjects of biographical memory and biographical constructions of reality. Of all the various affinities between the contributions collected here, the most important is their consistent attention to issues of the constitution and representation of temporal experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbw85

CHAPTER 2 Past and Present as Narrative Constructions from: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Bruner Jerome S.
Abstract: The usual answer to this question is a kind of doxology delivered in the name of “the scientific method”: Thou shalt not indulge self-delusion, nor utter unverifiable propositions, nor commit contradiction, nor treat mere history as cause, and so on. Story is not the accepted stuff of science and “logic.” If meaning-making were always dedicated to achieving a “scientific” understanding of the world, that would be one thing. But neither the empiricist’s knowledge through the senses, nor the rationalist’s route through necessary truths suffice: neither alone nor both together capture how ordinary people go about assigning meanings to their experiences—

CHAPTER 4 Narrative, Moral Identity, and Historical Consciousness: from: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Gergen Kenneth J.
Abstract: Two decades ago, inquiry into narrative played but a minor role in scholarly deliberation; the relationship between narrative analysis and historiography was little explored; the term “narrative” had scarcely entered the vocabulary of psychological science. Today, the study of narrative concatenates throughout the humanities and the social sciences, and the problems raised by such analyses for our conception of history, along with the historical consciousness of the individual, are profound. Further, there are now many distinct and well-articulated orientations toward narrative: realist, phenomenological, psychodynamic, cognitive, textual, and rhetorical among them. Each raises different implications for our understanding of history, identity,

CHAPTER 6 The Concept of Time and the Faculty of Judgment in the Ontogenesis of Historical Consciousness from: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Brumlik Micha
Abstract: If we are not simply to ascribe the human ability to articulate narrative, and thus express temporal consciousness, to an a priori kind of anthropological constant, we cannot avoid the empirical study of all the cultural connections where particular forms of narrative were invented,

CHAPTER 8 Empirical Psychological Approaches to the Historical Consciousness of Children from: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Hausen Monika
Abstract: Today, historical consciousness is frequently taken as a “central category of historical didactics.”¹ There is nevertheless a lack of empirical investigations on how historical consciousness looks in different age groups and regions in concrete terms, and above all, on how it develops.² Current developmental and social psychological research includes the topic of historical consciousness mostly with reference to adults, and not, however, to children. Yet we have a comprehensive store of investigations that deal with basis competencies of historical consciousness, such as investigations on cognitive development in general, on moral development, on the development of the ability to change perspectives,

Chapter Three Figurations in Historical Anthropology: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Rebel Hermann
Abstract: The danger of transforming consequences into their own causes dogs any attempted history, but particularly one whose final objects of interest are as overwhelming as the orgies of murder that took place in East-Central Europe during the 1940s, altogether constituting those experiences and memories of insane horrors that we have come to call the Holocaust.¹ This has become a more acute logical problem as the historical field where we are currently “free” to look for the Holocaust’s provenances has steadily narrowed, even as it appears, however coincidentally, that the very global corporate and financial entities on which we all depend

Chapter Six Prefiguring NAFTA: from: Critical Junctions
Author(s) Musante Patricia
Abstract: Eric Wolf ’s emphasis on interconnected, global processes in Europe and the People Without History(1982) provides a model for bringing the concerns of history, geography, and anthropology together to study the political economy of globalization, both past and present. To his list of “thingified” concepts I would add the local or thecommunitywhich have been, and continue to be, reified within anthropological discourse and practice. The boundaries of the local or the community—however broadly they may be defined or imagined—are often taken as a given, and hence naturalized. This tendency continues even as anthropologists increasingly broaden

1 RECONSTRUCTING THE PAST: from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Jenkins Brian
Abstract: For a long time the writing of French history was profoundly influenced by what are now referred to as ‘grand narratives’, which structured our perceptions of the national past. The concern to tell a convincing and coherent story, to make history intelligible and relevant to the present, led historians from a variety of schools and disciplines to focus on the longue durée, to seek out the underlying processes of change, often linked to notions of social progress, and to invest history with an inherent and unfolding logic.

7 HERITAGE AND HISTORY: from: Recollections of France
Author(s) Chappé François
Abstract: If only because of who its authors are, this apparently lighthearted quotation deserves a detailed analysis for several reasons: in fact practically every word in it poses an interesting problem; it ends with a question, the answer to which, while misleadingly tautological, is a stimulating enigma for all those concerned with heritage. The maritime scene will be the focus of our present study, but the difficulties encountered are of the same nature whether we consider rural, industrial or maritime heritage.

Introduction from: Identities
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: The notion ‘identity’ opens towards a variety of questions. Derived from ‘ idem,’ the word’s semantic field ranges from ‘the sameness of a person or thing at all times or in all circumstances; the condition or fact that a person or thing is itself and not something else; individually, personally’ to its use in logic and mathematics and asks the question, how something can remain the same despite time and inevitable change. The word addresses at the same time the ‘condition’ and the ‘fact’ of remaining the same person throughout the various phases of existence. It underlines the ‘continuity of the

Chapter 5 The Praxis of Cognition and the Representation of Difference from: Identities
Author(s) Fuchs Martin
Abstract: Within the field of cultural studies discussions on the relationship between researcher and the subject(s) of research in recent years have mainly been held under the heading of ‘representation.’ The term, as it has generally been applied, is founded on an epistemological assumption: the notion of knowledge as the mirror of reality. This notion itself is based on a concept of objectivity which introduces a categorical separation between reality and its description or analysis, and thus gets into the problem of the adequacy of representation and its correspondence to the object depicted. The theory of knowledge involved in this conception

Chapter 6 Antitotalitarianism Against the Revolutionary Tradition: from: French Intellectuals Against the Left
Abstract: By the end of 1977 antitotalitarianism clearly dominated the politics of the noncommunist intellectual Left. Intellectuals, fearing the worst from the parties of the Left in power, found threats of totalitarianism in all but the most impotent political projects. The political logic of their critique of the PCF and of the Union of the Left favored analyses that were focused on ideology and divorced from the concrete realities of contemporary France or Soviet history. While unconsciously drawing on resources within French republican political culture to combat the supposed totalitarian threat, they asserted that the apparent past blindness of French intellectuals

Chapter 1 Introduction: from: Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Kapferer Bruce
Abstract: Magic, sorcery and witchcraft are at the epistemological centre of anthropology. They embed matters at the heart of the definition of modern anthropology, and the critical issues that they raise are of enduring significance for the discipline. But the questions these phenomena highlight expand beyond mere disciplinary or scholastic interest. They point to matters of deep existential concern in a general quest for an understanding of the human forces engaged in the human construction of lived realities. Anthropology in the embracing Kantian sense is involved. The phenomena that are deemed to be magic and sorcery (including all that which such

Introduction: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Bryceson Deborah Fahy
Abstract: Currently, much of anthropological literature on identity finds itself in unanticipated dialogue with other social science disciplines in a period of deepening global insecurity. The optimism of the last half-century, an era viewed as one of unparalleled economic progress for much of the world, is now being replaced by a profound pessimism in the West about the spread of social intolerance and terrorism in the twenty-first century. Even before the events of 11 September and the London bombings of July 2005, unease was surfacing. American political scientists took the lead in the cultural commentary, drawing attention to the decline in

1 Changing Cultures, Changing Rooms: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Macdonald Sharon
Abstract: Moving across and between cultures is at the heart of anthropology. Ethnography is an inherently mobile enterprise, involving the ethnographer literally moving across space, over time, and between the relatively familiar and unfamiliar. Although the idea of ‘multi-sited fieldwork’ has become fashionable recently, good anthropology has always entailed a degree of multi-sitedness, even if some of those sites might be called ‘home’ and some might be encountered vicariously. Good anthropological training entails learning about many peoples and parts of the world and going to seminars beyond geographical specialisms. The themed seminar and the edited collection, in which scholars are brought

2 Identity at Play: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Hastrup Kirsten
Abstract: Identity categories are at the core of anthropological practice, in terms of both individual identities (or notions of the self ) and collective identities (or notions of ethnicity). In this chapter I shall deal primarily with the interface between the self and the collectivity in order to discuss identity as a response to multiple actualities rather than a fixed frame of subjectivity. This tallies with other attempts at understanding the self as composite and malleable (Cohen 1994; Rapport 1997). It also in its own way reflects the insight of relational identities provided by scholars of gender such as Shirley Ardener

6 Towards an Ethnography of Colleagueship from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Callan Hilary
Abstract: In this short essay I focus on two issues relating to colleagueship and anthropology. First, I look at a case drawn from my own occupational experience and recent analytical work, where it seems to me that colleagueship is germane to an understanding of institution building and the negotiation of identities in a particular environment. Secondly, using the same material, I consider the ‘colleague relationship’ as a context and a tool for ethnography. The designation of this relationship is, inevitably, imprecise, but perhaps no more so than others that have been much discussed as a basis for the production of anthropological

11 Revolting, Revolutionary, and Rebellious Women: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Frankenberg Ronnie
Abstract: This essay uses some of the Ardeners’ seminal/uterine, even vaginal insights to analyse the way that anthropological research can be seen as a cooperative exercise between subjects rather than merely informant and fieldworker – to illuminate such diverse investigations as resistance and struggle in West Africa and images in art and drama. Finally, on the basis of Rhian Loudon’s own field research, they inform analysis of the both vulnerable and powerful, dominant and muted, speech and actions of British Asian women, observed in shared multiple simultaneous realities of home and health-service/social-service workplace. It accepts one challenge posed by Ardener’s discussions

Gendering Oxford: from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Waldren Jacqueline
Abstract: Since the early 1970s, Shirley Ardener has applied her intellect, creativity and enthusiasm to the development of women’s studies at the University of Oxford and further afield. Her contribution to social anthropology and women’s studies is revealed in the chapters of this book and in her innumerable publications. She recognised the similarity between the ‘consciousness-raising’ proposed by Western feminist movements and the social anthropological techniques of ‘isolating from their context statements which though trivial in themselves carry assumptions with wider significance’ (Ardener 1978: 45, n. 9). The category ‘women’ was problematised in different contexts; individual cultural models of women –

Shirley’s Magic from: Identity and Networks
Author(s) Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Let me explain. JASO: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxfordwas founded by Edwin Ardener in 1970 to disseminate new approaches in social anthropology. Little did I realise, when I became its editor in 1979, just what it meant in practice to be associated so closely with the Ardeners, even though I had

22 Dysconscious Racism: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) KING JOYCE E.
Abstract: “Dysconscious racism” is a form of racism that tacitly accepts dominant white norms and privileges. It is not the absenceof consciousness but animpairedconsciousness or distorted way of thinking about race as compared to, for example, critical consciousness. Uncritical ways of thinking about racial inequity accept certain culturally sanctioned assumptions, myths, and beliefs that justify the social and economic advantages white people have as a result of subordinating others. Anything that calls this ideology of racial privilege into question inevitably challenges the self-identity of white people who have internalized these ideological justifications. The reactions of my students to

30 The Genetic Tie from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) ROBERTS DOROTHY E.
Abstract: Scientific racism places great value on the genetic tie, as it understands racial variation as a biological

31 White Law and Lawyers: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) HALEWOOD PETER
Abstract: Much has been written on surrogate motherhood as an application of biotechnology which challenges conventional understandings of equality and the family. Surrogacy also challenges conventional notions of embodiment. Indeed, the law has responded to surrogacy by bracketing off the surrogate mother’s embodiment—her factual experience of pregnancy—from the legal facts relevant to deciding disputes over custody arising from surrogacy arrangements. For example, even where the so-called surrogate is pregnant with her own fertilized ovum, she is defined not as the “biological” mother but as the “surrogate” mother, thus denying the biological and experiential fact that she is the mother.

65 How Did Jews Become White Folks? from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) SACKS KAREN BRODKIN
Abstract: The late nineteenth and early decades of the twentieth centuries saw a steady stream of warnings by scientists, policymakers, and the popular press that “mongrelization” of the Nordic, or Anglo-Saxon, race—the real Americans—by inferior European races (as well as inferior non-European ones) was destroying the fabric of the nation. I continue to be surprised to read that America did not always regard its immigrant European workers as white, that it thought people from different nations were biologically different. My parents, first-generation U.S.-born eastern European Jews, are not surprised. They expect anti-Semitism to be part of the fabric of

80 The Misleading Abstractions of Social Scientists from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) KAGAN JEROME
Abstract: Five-month-old infants who stare at surprising events for a long time, 5-year-old children with large vocabularies, and 50-year-old adults who invent new computer programs are all described as intelligent. The use of the same adjective implies that the same process is operating in all three situations. But we have no good evidence to support the idea that the psychological processes that produce an attentive infant are the same as those that produce a creative computer programmer. Moreover, a small number of psychologists—including J. P. Guilford, Howard Gardner, and Robert Sternberg—have argued persuasively against the usefulness of the notion

85 Race and Parentage from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) ROBERTS DOROTHY E.
Abstract: One of the most striking features of technological efforts to provide parents with genetically related offspring is that they are used almost exclusively by affluent white people. The use of fertility clinics does not correspond to rates of infertility. Indeed, the profile of people most likely to attempt IVF [in vitro fertilization. Ed.] is precisely the opposite of those most likely to be infertile. The people in the United States most likely to be infertile are older, poorer, black, and poorly educated. Most couples who use IVF services are white, highly educated, and affluent. New reproductive technologies are popular not

86 The Sources of The Bell Curve from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) LANE CHARLES
Abstract: By scrutinizing the footnotes and bibliography in The Bell Curve, readers can more easily recognize the project for what it is: a chilly synthesis of the work of disreputable race theorists and eccentric eugenicists. It would be unfair, of course, to ascribe to Murray and Hermstein all the noxious views of their sources. Mere association with dubious thinkers does not discredit the book by itself. But even a superficial examination of the primary sources suggests that some of Murray and Hermstein’s substantive arguments rely on questionable data and hotly contested scholarship, produced by academics whose ideological biases are pronounced. To

108 Dysconscious Racism: from: Critical White Studies
Author(s) KING JOYCE E.
Abstract: One goal of my course, when I was Associate Professor of Teacher Education at Santa Clara University, was to sharpen the ability of students to think critically about educational purposes and practice in relation to social justice and to their own identities as teachers. The course thus illuminates a range of ideological interests which become the focus of students’ critical analysis, evaluation, and choice. For instance, a recurring theme is that of the social purposes of schooling. This is a key concept about which many students report they have never thought seriously. Course readings, lectures, discussions, and other activities are

Book Title: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): VENEMA HENRY ISAAC
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur's entire philosophical project narrates a passion for the possibleexpressed in the hope that in spite of death, closure, and sedimentation, life is opened by superabundance, by how the world gives us much more than is possible. Ricoeur's philosophical anthropology is a phenomenology of human capacity, which gives onto the groundless ground of human being, namely, God. Thus the story of the capable man, beginning with original goodness held captive by a servile will and ending with the possibility of liberation and regeneration of the heart, underpins his passion for the more than possible. The essays in this volume trace the fluid movement between phenomenological and religious descriptions of the capable self that emerges across Ricoeur's oeuvre and establish points of connection for future developments that might draw inspiration from this body of thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chgx

The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who

Narrative Matters among the Mlabri: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) HERDA ELLEN A.
Abstract: The most persuasive moment of Paul Ricoeur’s work for the development anthropologist is his idea of narrative imagination. This concept, applied to the development act of working together with the other who faces marginalization, fear, famine, and isolation, provides a medium for both the anthropologist and the local to emplot history and fiction into a social reality that brings each to a new place. Far from static, this new place is an emerging plot that enables movement from shame and hunger to selfsustainability on the part of the local, and movement from the confinement of Western individualism to an ontological

Refiguring Virtue from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) BLUNDELL BOYD
Abstract: By Paul Ricoeur’s own account, the dynamic of detour and return is the central motif of his philosophy. As he said to Charles Reagan: “Detour/return is the rhythm of my philosophical respiration.”¹ The pattern is so pervasive that it shaped the trajectory of his entire career: a philosophy of the will that detoursthrough analyses of sign, symbol, metaphor, and narrative,returningto a richer account of personal identity in his hermeneutics of the self.² But Ricoeur’s endlessly dialogical mode of thinking not only leads him to take many detours; it also makes his work suitable to be used as

Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from: A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;

Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf

Translating Gods: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Assmann Jan
Abstract: The Babylonians very naturally developed their “theological onomasiology” in the context of their general diglossia. Their constant concern for correlating Sumerian

Nature as Religious Force in Eriugena and Emerson from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Otten Willemien
Abstract: From its earliest beginnings, Christianity has had trouble finding a proper role for nature. While the ancient concept of naturacontained strong overtones of a mythological kind, linking natural generation not only with demiurgic guidance, as in Plato’sTimaeus, but also with sexual desire, as in Plato’sSymposium, in the later Neoplatonism of Proclus and others such mythological aspects were muted as philosophically stratified forms of organic emanation. The cosmos should above all present traits of rational adornment, it seemed, as the order of nature could only survive by repressing its more animal-like instinctual impulses. On a microcosmic scale, human

The Field of Religion and Ecology: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Watling Tony
Abstract: This essay is concerned with “religion and ecology,” or religious environmentalism. It analyzes how religious traditions are used to understand and interact with the environment and environmental issues, suggesting ways of relating to these that are different from and possibly less destructive and ecologically harmful than those of the modern secular worldview. It argues that religious traditions may thereby be gaining new private and public relevance, while perhaps also being changed in the process, becoming more environmentally friendly and ecumenical. The article ethnographically and qualitatively analyzes a “field of religion and ecology” comprising ecologically minded academics and representatives of various

Religious Indifference: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: More often than not, we can read as nonreligious written and visual medieval sources that at first sight seem replete with religion, specifi-cally, Christianity. How can this be so? If we want to avoid the anachronistic opposition between religious and nonreligious, we could rephrase this question: Why does the religious element often manifest itself as intrinsically indifferent?¹ Not only does this “indifference” apply to the obvious cases of logic and semantics, and, more generally, to scholastic sources, it also underlies texts that are thoroughly devout. Whether we are dealing with the logics of Abelard, Ockham, or Buridan, or with Thomas

Religion and the Time of Creation: from: Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Carlson Thomas A.
Abstract: The question of “religion” today often seems most urgent wherever the “human” in its “life” or “nature” appears to grow unstable conceptually and/or to fall under threat existentially. Such instability and threat come into play very notably in the context of recent scientific and technological developments where any number of categories long operative in conceptions of the human—intelligence and agency, birth and death, natural life, and so on—prove increasingly difficult to delimit because open to various forms of manipulation, simulation, or transformation. In reading the daily newspaper in the United States, for example, one quickly gets the sense

Book Title: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): LIMON JOHN
Abstract: Almost all twentieth-century philosophy stresses the immanence of death in human life-as drive (Freud), as the context of Being (Heidegger), as the essence of our defining ethics (Levinas), or as language (de Man, Blanchot). In Death's Following, John Limon makes use of literary analysis (of Sebald, Bernhard, and Stoppard), cultural analysis, and autobiography to argue that death is best conceived as always transcendentally beyond ourselves, neither immanent nor imminent. Adapting Kierkegaard's variations on the theme of Abraham's near-sacrifice of Isaac while refocusing the emphasis onto Isaac, Limon argues that death should be imagined as if hiding at the end of an inexplicable journey to Moriah. The point is not to evade or ignore death but to conceive it more truly, repulsively, and pervasively in its camouflage: for example, in jokes, in logical puzzles, in bowdlerized folk songs. The first of Limon's two key concepts is adulthood: the prolonged anti-ritual for experiencing the full distance on the look of death. His second is dirtiness, as theorized in a Jewish joke, a logical exemplum, and T. S. Eliot's "Ash Wednesday": In each case, unseen dirt on foreheads suggests the invisibility of inferred death. Not recognizing death immediately or admitting its immanence and imminence is for Heidegger the defining characteristic of the "they," humanity in its inauthentic social escapism. But Limon vouches throughout for the mediocrity of the "they" in its dirty and ludicrous adulthood. Mediocrity is the privileged position for previewing death, in Limon's opinion: practice for being forgotten. In refusing the call of twentieth-century philosophy to face death courageously, Limon urges the ethical and aesthetic value of mediocre anti-heroism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chjz

CHAPTER ONE Preliminary Expectoration from: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: As the crisis of Catch-22approaches, just before Yossarian must choose whether to sell out to the Army or flee it, he has a dream while under an anesthetic. The novel, to this point, has been radically antipsychological—what use is the diagnosis of paranoia, for example, if everyone is in fact shooting at you?—and Yossarian, on Heller’s behalf, has delighted in concocting dreams to placate or frustrate psychoanalysts. But he is frightened by his one actual dream, and feels the urgency of plumbing its recesses.

6 Incarnation and the Problem of Touch from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) HENRY MICHEL
Abstract: Incarnation, in the first place, refers to the condition of a being who possesses a body or, more precisely, a flesh. Are the body and the flesh thus the same thing? Like every fundamental question, the question of the body—or of the flesh—points back to a phenomenological foundation on the basis of which it can be elucidated. A phenomenological foundation should be understood as a pure appearing that is presupposed by everything else that appears to us. This pure appearing must appear first in order for anything else to appear and to be shown to us. Phenomenology is

9 Skin Deep: from: Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) CASEY EDWARD S.
Abstract: Some places are hard to bear—to bear bodily. For example, solitary confinement. It has been realized, much too belatedly, how devastating being kept alone in a prison cell continuously—for days, months, even years—can be for human beings. Lisa Guenther opens her recent book Solitary Confinementwith the statement that “there are many ways to destroy a human being, but one of the simplest and most devastating is through prolonged solitary confinement.”¹ The effects studied so far have been mostly about the psychological impact of living in an entirely isolated way: it is known that many prisoners will

Sense, Existence, and Justice; or, How Are We to Live in a Secular World? from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) VANDEPUTTE KATHLEEN
Abstract: From a Christian perspective, the world is a place whose sense lies beyond it: a position Wittgenstein also seems to share in statement 6.41 of his Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus: “The sense of the world must lie outside the world.”¹ If secularization is our perspective, the most logical option seems to lie in a mere immanentization of this otherworldly sense. Were this logic still to inform the thought of Jean-Luc Nancy inDis-enclosure, his stance would be highly repetitive: Have we not been saying this for centuries now?

Winke: from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) de VRIES HENT
Abstract: That Hölderlin’s poetry revolves around certain notions of the divine, of gods, and of the holy is almost a commonplace, though it does so in a manner very different from the discourses on the coming god familiar from the Romantics through the later Heidegger.¹ The notion of the divine is often introduced in Hölderlin in a language that invokes topological images, theophanic heavens, and semigodly rivers, each of which seems to mark a specific manifestation or presence that is at once ineluctable and elusive, inscribed on the face of the earth and the sky but also “immediate” in an utterly

Literary Creation, Creation ex Nihilo from: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) McKeane John
Abstract: In Dis-enclosure, Jean-Luc Nancy suggests that in Western culture “God’s act of creation” has provided “the least bad analogical recourse” for designating the “void-artist-body [corps-vide-artiste]” (D69/99; first trans. modified). Working backward, from this we can posit, still speaking analogically, that God’s act of creation generated the myth or concept of creation that is involved in the process and results of literary writing. Such a myth of creation should be understood in at least two senses: first, myth as an originary tale (récit) of foundation that has come down to us via the Judeo-Christian tradition (Genesis), and second, myth in

Book Title: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Words of Life is the sequel and companion to Phenomenology and the Theological Turn,edited by Dominique Janicaud, Jean-Francois Courtine, Jean-Louis Chrtien, Michel Henry, Jean-Luc Marion, and Paul Ricoeur. In that volume, Janicaud accuses Levinas, Henry, Marion, and Chrtien of veeringfrom phenomenological neutrality to a theologically inflected phenomenology. By contrast, the contributors to this collection interrogate whether phenomenology's proper starting point is agnostic or atheistic. Many hold the view that phenomenology after the theological turn may very well be true both to itself and to the phenomenological things themselves.In one way or another, all of these essays contend with the limits and expectations of phenomenology. As such, they are all concerned with what counts as properphenomenology and even the very structure of phenomenology. None of them, however, is limited to such questions. Indeed, the rich tapestry that they weave tells us much about human experience. Themes such as faith, hope, love, grace, the gift, the sacraments, the words of Christ, suffering, joy, life, the call, touch, listening, wounding, and humility are woven throughout the various meditations in this volume. The contributors use striking examples to illuminate the structure and limits of phenomenology and, in turn, phenomenology serves to clarify those very examples. Thus practice clarifies theory and theory clarifies practice, resulting in new theological turns and new life for phenomenology. The volume showcases the work of both senior and junior scholars, including Jean-Luc Marion, Jean-Yves Lacoste, Kevin Hart, Anthony J. Steinbock, Jeffrey Bloechl, Jeffrey L. Kosky, Clayton Crockett, Brian Treanor, and Christina Gschwandtner-as well as the editors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjph

Introduction from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) BENSON BRUCE ELLIS
Abstract: Many who read this introduction will immediately know that the phrase on which the subtitle of this collection of essays is based—the so-called theological turn in French phenomenology—comes from a text of Dominique Janicaud.¹ Indeed, one can read this volume as a companion to Phenomenology and the “Theological Turn”: The French Debate, which appears in this same series. In his official report to the French government that details the contours of the development of philosophy in France from 1975 to 1990, Janicaud claims that philosophy (in particular phenomenology, the dominant mode of philosophy in France today) has taken

Continuing to Look for God in France: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) SIMMONS J. AARON
Abstract: The relationship between phenomenology and theology is as complex and troubled as is the relationship between faith and reason. Following the publication of a collection of essays entitled God in Francein 2005,¹ the debate concerning the “theological turn” that was primarily inaugurated by Dominique Janicaud in 1991 might itself be viewed as having taken a new “turn.”² What connects the nine essays in this important collection is the supposition that, despite Janicaud’s contention, there has not been a theological turn in recent French phenomenology. Instead, in various ways, all of the authors argue that within “new phenomenology” there has

The Appearing and the Irreducible from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) Gschwandtner Christina M.
Abstract: The “reduction,” or epochê, is officially a latecomer in the phenomenological landscape. Husserl’s first published text to propose the concept is the first book of theIdeas, published in 1913.¹ It certainly would not be difficult to show that the reduction is already present in an inchoate fashion in the 1905–1906 lectures on the theory of consciousness,² and we can suspect that the reduction is presentin nucefrom theLogical Investigationsonward. Yet let us stick with the official version and focus on theIdeas. To begin at the beginning, in the beginning was not phenomenology, that is,

“it / is true” from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: Phenomenology, as properly practiced, is a response to what is given rather than a single procedure that can be perfected. Responses can take various forms—essays, treatises, paintings, conversations, narratives, plays, and poems—each of which has constraints that, whether respected or transgressed, inflect phenomenological observation in different ways. Literature certainly gives us a range of examples for understanding phenomenology. When reading Italo Calvino’s Invisible Cities(1972) we see exactly what “free phantasy” is, and when watchingOthellowe grasp theeidosof jealousy far better than in reading a paper about that obsessive state in a psychology journal.¹ Yet

The Human in Question: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) KOSKY JEFFREY L.
Abstract: Most of the English-speaking audience was introduced to the new French phenomenology, the subject of this volume, through the work of Jean-Luc Marion. In particular, the translation of Marion’s God Without Beingwas the first major work of these authors to achieve widespread attention. Because of this, the new French phenomenology is associated with a “theological turn.” No doubt,God Without Beingjustifies being labeled a theological work. Its project was to give revelation or to think a transcendent God absolutely and unconditionally. The divine transcendence could be given by liberating God from those determinations, which, Marion argued, reduced it

The Poor Phenomenon: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) STEINBOCK ANTHONY J.
Abstract: According to Marion, there are four main modes of saturated givenness, what he calls the event, the idol, the flesh, the icon, and, encompassing all of them, revelation.¹ The phenomenological status of the saturated phenomena is relatively clear in Marion’s work, and it has been the topic of many investigations. What remains extremely ambiguous, however,

The Truth of Life: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) CROCKETT CLAYTON
Abstract: With the translation of I Am the Truth, Michel Henry has emerged in the English-speaking world as one of the Christian phenomenologists associated with the turn to religion on the part of contemporary continental philosophy. Henry’s previous phenomenological books, such asThe Essence of ManifestationandPhilosophy and Phenomenology of the Body, can be read as significant philosophical works in themselves or alternatively as leading toward his later, more explicitly religious writings.¹ Whether in his dense phenomenological reflections or his intense religious meditations, Henry’s language is provocative, and I would like to second Jean-Luc Marion’s initial negative reaction. Referring to

The Call of Grace: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) DAVIS JOSHUA
Abstract: This essay investigates the theological issues associated with the so-called theological turn in French phenomenology.¹ The burden of the inquiry is threefold: to question the terms of the debate as elaborated by Dominique Janicaud; to suggest a possible reason for the stalemate in the debate that has developed in response to those terms; and to present a more theologicallyattentive perspective that can overcome this deadlock from within specifically phenomenological strictures. The claim will be advanced that Christian radical phenomenology tacitly and illicitly deploys the theological categories of grace and the supernatural, leading to unwarranted claims about manifestation that occlude

Between Call and Voice: from: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) BALLAN JOSEPH
Abstract: Although the book itself offers no substantial development of its marvelous title, Paul Claudel’s The Eye Listens¹ is often cited by Jean-Louis Chrétien as a pithy formulation of an important phenomenological principle. In addition to the observation of artworks (the topic of Claudel’s book), itself impossible without the silence of listening, the concept of a listening eye applies more generally to the relations of the individual sense faculties to one another in their common, worldly labor. Seeing and hearing, touch and sight, cannot be separated one from the other but, rather, bespeak a “radical unity of sense,”² a oneness constitutive

SEXUALITY AND SEXUAL SYMBOLISM IN HERMETIC AND GNOSTIC THOUGHT AND PRACTICE (SECOND–FOURTH CENTURIES) from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) van den Broek Roelof
Abstract: The hermetic current claimed to transmit the teachings of the ancient Egyptian sage Hermes Trismegistus.¹ The magical, astrological, and alchemical hermetic writings attributed to Hermes, and usually referred to as the “technical hermetica,” fall beyond the scope of the present chapter, which concentrates on what is known as “philosophical Hermetism.” Its most characteristic

SENSUOUS RELATION WITH SOPHIA IN CHRISTIAN THEOSOPHY from: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Faivre Antoine
Abstract: The biblical texts which mention Sophia, “the Divine Wisdom” (hokmâ in Hebrew, sapientia in Latin),¹ have been the object of many commentaries throughout the history of Christianity.² Her ontological status is one of the most debated issues in the history of sophiology. Two interpretations have been, and still are, particularly prominent. The first one considers her as a “personification,” that is, just an aspect or even a mere metaphor of Christ or of the Holy Spirit (an interpretation fostered by the use of the very term “Divine Wisdom”); whereas, according to the other, she is a “real Person,” alongside the

1 Considering Contemporary Selves: from: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: Bonhoeffer’s account of the ethical self has become even more apropos with the onset of “postmodernity.” While this term is perhaps too disputed to be helpful, it heralds increased skepticism regarding the concept of selfhood. Important for the Christian theologian is the question of how God impacts the self. Two texts of particular relevance to this proposed consideration of theological selfhood stand out. They provide tools for considering the concept of an ethically oriented self. Specifically, these texts present the concept of ethical selfhood not as the fruit of reflection on oneself, but as engagement with an “other” who encounters

3 Bound to the Other: from: Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: Levinas’s persistent return to otherness, as well as the responsibility this return demands, provides a formidable challenge for both theology and philosophy. Yet, I argue that Bonhoeffer meets this challenge by providing a robustly theological account of otherness. Specifically, Bonhoeffer’s construction of Christ as the mediator of personhood retains genuine otherness.

Book Title: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts-New Explorations of Luke's Narrative Hinge
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Pao David W.
Abstract: In comparison with other aspects of Jesus’ life and ministry, his ascent into heaven has often been overlooked within the history of the church. However, considering its placement at the end of the Gospel and the beginning of Acts—the only narrative depictions of the event in the New Testament—the importance of Jesus’ ascent into heaven is undeniable for Luke’s two-volume work. While select studies have focused on particular aspects of these accounts for Luke’s story, the importance of the ascension calls for renewed attention to the narratological and theological significance of these accounts within their historical and literary contexts. In this volume, leading scholars discuss the ascension narratives within the ancient contexts of biblical, Second Temple Jewish, and Greco-Roman literature; the literary contours of Luke-Acts; and questions of historical and theological significance in the wider milieu of New Testament theology and early Christian historiography. The volume sets out new positions and directions for the next generations of interpreters regarding one of the most important and unique elements of the Lukan writings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84g9z

10 The Ascension as a Cultic Experience in Acts from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Strelan Rick
Abstract: In this essay, I propose that the Acts narrative of the ascension of Jesus (1:6–11) derived from, and was shaped by, the cultic and devotional practices of Luke’s audiences. In these practices, they experienced, often in visions, the exalted Jesus as the ascending Lord. Rather than the narrative determining the practices, these visionary experiences determined the narrative. In this, I imitate to a degree the argument of Hurtado that some early Christians experienced Jesus as Lord in a worship setting, and it was from that experience of him that they developed their christological understandings.¹ The priority and significance of

11 What Is This Conversation You Are Holding? from: Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Farrow Douglas
Abstract: When Jesus laid his footsteps alongside those of the two disciples on the road to Emmaus, he enquired of them, “What is this conversation you are holding with each other as you walk?” As one invited to join the present coterie of biblical scholars long enough to offer a brief theological postscript, I want to put the same question.

1 Modernisms—Literary and Otherwise: from: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Complexity. In section 3 ofSein und Zeit(1927), on “The Ontological Priority of the Question of Being,” Martin Heidegger writes:

Introduction: from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Pyle Forest
Abstract: In his theses “On the Concept of History,” the final text he bequeathed to the future, Walter Benjamin proposed a model of historical thought quite different from a historicism that tells “the sequence of events like the beads of a rosary.”¹ More kairological than chronological, Benjamin’s understanding of history postulates that “the past carries with it a temporal index by which it is referred to redemption.” According to Benjamin, any “document of culture” from any historical epoch may be redeemed in the constellations that crystallize between past and present. “There is,” writes Benjamin, “a secret agreement between past generations and

The Pathology of the Future, or the Endless Triumphs of Life from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Edelman Lee
Abstract: Though my title could be read as referring to the emergence of a pathology inthe future, it intends, on the contrary, to mark as pathological our relation to the future as such. Naming, that is, not a pathology to come but the pathology that determines our investment in the promise of something that isalways“to come,” something, to borrow Wordsworth’s phrase, “evermore about to be,” this pathology of the future informs our contemporary versions of romanticism. For our sense of the contemporary as designating what’s happening now, what’s up-to-date (a sense the OED traces only to the middle

Population Aesthetics in Romantic and Post-Romantic Literature from: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Mitchell Robert
Abstract: Though the Romantic-era debate between William Godwin and Thomas Malthus seemed to have concluded in the 1820s in something of a stalemate, this conversation has been recently been revived, though with a rather peculiar twist. The Romantic-era version of this debate pitted Godwin’s principle of perfectibility against Malthus’s principle of population, with Godwin arguing that social relations could be slowly perfected to the extent that legal and political “institutions” were eliminated and Malthus countering that a key determinant of collective behavior was located in the biological register of “population.” Malthus contended that the register of population was inaccessible to human

1. How to Make a Composition: from: Memory
Author(s) Carruthers Mary
Abstract: The so-called “arts of memory,” artes memorandi, which were taught commonly in the curricula of dialectic and rhetoric for roughly two thousand years between the fourth century BCE and the sixteenth century CE, belong to a different psychological country from that of the modern Western, post-Enlightenment “memory” that is the concern of most of the rest of this volume. Of course, there are also complex medieval attitudes and practices regarding history and commemoration of the dead, but it is not with these that theartes memorandiare concerned.¹ Academic redefinitions and reclassifications of the old natural and philosophical sciences, especially

4. Bergson on Memory from: Memory
Author(s) Ansell-Pearson Keith
Abstract: In this chapter on Bergson and memory I shall focus on two key questions that Henri Bergson sought to establish as the foundation for a philosophical treatment of memory. First, what is the relation between past and present? Is it merely a difference in degree, or it possible to locate the difference between them as one of kind? If we can do the latter, what will this reveal about memory? Second, what is the status of the past? Is it something merely psychological, or might it be possible to ascribe an ontological status to it? In other words, what is

15. Physiological Memory Systems from: Memory
Author(s) Caygill Howard
Abstract: The study of cultural memory depends almost without exception upon a prior physiological or psychological account of individual memory. Aby Warburg’s influential studies of cultural memory, including his innovative Mnemosyneproject of the mid-to late 1920s are rooted in his early work on energetic models of the physiology of memory, 1 contemporary with those that provided the point of departure for Freud’s analyses of the pathologies of memory in the 1895Project for a Scientific Psychologyand for Bergson’s 1896Matter and Memory. Charting the relationship between cultural processes of memory and the formation of individual memory remains a challenge

16. Memory-Talk: from: Memory
Author(s) Alexander Sally
Abstract: Marc Bloch’s remark comes halfway through the unfinished final chapter of The Historian’s Craft, on historical causation. For Bloch human consciousness is “the subject matter of history . . . reality itself.” To ask why something happened or how it happened and under what conditions is a “common law of the mind,” Bloch avers, an “instinctive need of understanding.” Historical facts are psychological facts in the sense that however “brutal” are external forces, “their action is weakened or intensified by man and his mind.” Man’s mind is not always conscious, logical, or rational, Bloch continues; it can be explained neither

19. Ritual and Memory from: Memory
Author(s) Feuchtwang Stephan
Abstract: The study of ritual has received its greatest elaboration in the work of anthropologists. This chapter, then, will be a discussion of how anthropologists, including psychological anthropologists, say ritual is related to human memory. Let me begin the discussion with the first question a reader may ask: What is ritual?

23. Machines of Memory from: Memory
Author(s) Parisi Luciana
Abstract: The evolution of capitalism is marked by the technological development of human history. The idea that this evolution will result in homeostatic equilibrium

28. Migration, Food, Memory, and Home-Building from: Memory
Author(s) Hage Ghassan
Abstract: The relation between home and food is an essential one. Its ideological power is constantly exhibited in various items of everyday life such as the status of the “homemade” on the food market. That a quiche, for example, is labeled “homemade” at one’s local delicatessen distinguishes it from the mass-produced. It makes it ooze that specifically homely goodness: intimations of sound nutrition, careful choice of ingredients, and careful labor (of love). That is, it becomes a bit of “mother’s cooking”—which, at an important level, is, of course, a continuation of breast-feeding, the most homely of the homely yearnings and

Book Title: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate-After the French Debate
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Cabral Charles N.
Abstract: This book follows up the developments inphenomenology discussed in Phenomenology andthe Theological Turn: The French Debate, attempting toestablish what potentialities in the phenomenologicalmethod exist at present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999gs

1 From Controversy to Debate from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: On the other hand, this creativity, which claims a phenomenological inspiration with obviously uneven degrees of felicity, extends into greatly divergent directions. The analyses formerly proposed in the “Theological Turn”² and in La philosophie en Europe³ have thus proved to be both

2 An Atheistic Phenomenology? from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: In a text entitled “Pour une philosophie non théologique,”¹ Mikel Dufrenne noted the profound ambiguity in Heideggerian thought with regard to the theological tradition. On the one hand, Heidegger is the pioneer of the “philosophies of absence,” and he separates the “appearing” from any transcendent or ontic principle. On the other hand (even though he denies it), his argumentation has crypto-theological accents to it: being, which conceals itself in its own names, like the unutterable God of negative theology, safeguarding its truth in a meditative and almost religious experience. Now, this remanence of onto-theology, which Derrida denounced, Dufrenne in turn

4 Articulations/Disarticulations from: Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: Having noted and analyzed the main aporias and the non-negligible misunderstandings which flow from the will to institute (or to reinstate) phenomenology as first philosophy, it is now time to adopt a more positive point of view by addressing the inevitable question: “Is the phenomenological project amendable?”

Book Title: The Heart Has Its Reasons-Towards a Theological Anthropology of the Heart
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Tóth Beáta
Abstract: This book explores a hitherto neglected area of theological anthropology: the unity of human emotionality and rationality embodied in the biblical concept of the heart. While the theological contours of human reason have for long been clearly drawn and presented as the exclusive seat of the image of God, affectivity has been relegated to a secondary position. With the reintegration of the body into recent philosophical and theological discourses, a number of questions have arisen: if the image (also) resides in the body, how does this change one’s view of the theological significance of human affectivity? In what way is our likeness to God realized in the whole of what we are? Can one overcome the traditional dissociation between intellect and affectivity by a renewed theory of love? In conversation with patristic and medieval authors (e.g., Irenaeus, Tertullian, Gregory of Nyssa, Maximus, Aquinas) and in dialogue with more recent interlocutors (Pascal, Ricoeur, Marion, Milbank, John Paul II), this work pursues a novel theological vision of the essential unity of our humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999mv

Introduction from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: “[A]s I am being forced to pick my way along some dense and obscure path”—these are the words of Augustine at the beginning of his ambitious project to explore the essential unity and the parallel threefold nature of the Trinity.¹ Although the issue I wish to explore is much less complex than classical problems of trinitarian theology, the path I must take in order to approach it is no less dense or obscure. It is a path not easily discernible on the age-old map of theological reflection; it consists of several faint sidetracks and lines ending in what may

1 Reason, Faith, and the Rediscovery of Sensibility from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: Our anthropological forebears’ premature standing up on their hind legs seems to have not only set back our sensory organs but upset the

2 The Essential Polarity of the Human Condition from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: How can reason and sensibility fit together? What would be an adequate anthropology for capturing the essential unity of our humanity? For a full-fledged philosophical account of the tensile and delicate unity of the primordial human condition, I propose that we turn to Paul Ricoeur’s philosophical anthropology in his unjustly neglected early masterpiece, Fallible Man(1960).¹ The book was written as part of a vaster project that Ricoeur named philosophy of the will and that was initiated with an impressive study of the phenomenological structures of the will, entitledThe Voluntary and the Involuntary(1950), and followed by the two-part

3 Human Likeness to God from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: That there is no seamless continuity between philosophies of man and a theological vision of the human being is a case often made by theologians. What are, then, the distinguishing marks that delineate a truly theological anthropology? Is not the object of the two disciplines the same human being as situated in the world and as being in relation with the material, the natural, and the human sphere to which theological anthropology adds the dimension of relatedness to God in turn? What difference does a religious perspective make in our judgment of the true nature of the human person? Can

4 Human Emotionality and the Imago Dei from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: If, as our survey has clearly shown, a long theological tradition had located God’s image squarely within the human intellect, what place was left for the emotions and human emotionality in conceptions regarding the human constitution? The answer largely depends on the way the role of the emotions is defined within human life, namely, whether they are seen as belonging essentially to the body or whether they are viewed as being rooted in the soul. 1 Whether they are feared as irrational and harmful or whether they are thought to be an indispensable dimension of our rational humanity. The answer

5 The Unity of Love from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: In our analysis of the place of human emotionality in the theological anthropology of the image, the discourse on love has emerged as a special point of reference around which thought on both the bodily passions and the spiritual feelings crystallize. The issue of love governs Christian reflection on apatheiaand gathers various aspects of image theology in one coherent whole, providing an organizing principle for seemingly disparate discourses, such as, creation, the state of original innocence, the fall, human morality, Christian discipleship, redemption, and divine immutability. While love appears as a kind of universal that is present in and

6 Between Embodiment and Spirituality from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: In an essay written in 1994, which, however, remained unpublished until 2002, Marion addresses the issue of the separation of the virtue of charity from the human passion of love, or more precisely, what he sees as the philosophically imposed division between love as a passion of the soul and intellectual love.² His stance towards the issue of love here is more theological cal than philosophical; what he attempts in this essay could be described as a theological prolegomenon to his later phenomenological treatment of love in The Erotic Phenomenon(2003).³ The focus of his attention is the greatest of

7 Gathering the Threads: from: The Heart Has Its Reasons
Abstract: What are the theological contours of human emotionality? This has been the guiding question throughout my inquiry. Does theological reflection furnish any graspable points of orientation concerning the significance of the emotions and affectivity besides the clearly formulated tenets it provides concerning the theological role of the intellect? In order to find an appropriate answer, I first had to delineate the context within which the issue can be adequately treated in a theological manner. The cultural historical claim that there is a rupture, a dissociation, between intellect and sensibility, reason and emotion, seems to articulate a deep-seated experience of our

4 Exercising Judgment: from: Empire of Chance
Abstract: The interest in operational knowledge was not limited to the fields of philosophy, military theory, and literature. As the logical extension of the attempts to delineate its basic features the question arose: How does one acquire operational knowledge, and, conversely, how does one teach it? Practical knowledge entered the curriculum of educational theory. Military pedagogy, however, differed from the contemporary developments in educational theory during the second half of the eighteenth century in that it was specifically tailored to the state of war. This created a fundamental problem, for how does one train a recruit without exposing him to the

Book Title: A Practice of Anthropology-The Thought and Influence of Marshall Sahlins
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins (b. 1930) is an American anthropologist who played a major role in the development of anthropological theory in the second half of the twentieth century. Over a sixty-year career, he and his colleagues synthesized trends in evolutionary, Marxist, and ecological anthropology, moving them into mainstream thought. Sahlins is considered a critic of reductive theories of human nature, an exponent of culture as a key concept in anthropology, and a politically engaged intellectual opposed to militarism and imperialism. This collection brings together some of the world’s most distinguished anthropologists to explore and advance Sahlins’s legacy. All of the essays are based on original research, most dealing with cultural change - a major theme of Sahlins’s research, especially in the contexts of Fijian and Hawaiian societies. Like Sahlins’s practice of anthropology, these essays display a rigorous, humanistic study of cultural forms, refusing to accept comfort over accuracy, not shirking from the moral implications of their analyses. Contributors include the late Greg Dening, one of the most eminent historians of the Pacific, Martha Kaplan, Patrick Kirch, Webb Keane, Jonathan Friedman, and Joel Robbins, with a preface by the late Claude Levi-Strauss. A unique volume that will complement the many books and articles by Sahlins himself, A Practice of Anthropology is an exciting new addition to the history of anthropological study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99c4k

1 How Long Is a Longue Durée? from: A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) ROBBINS JOEL
Abstract: The drawing together of history and anthropology has been one of the major stories in the development of anthropological thought over the last forty years. It is a story in which Marshall Sahlins has played a central role, and the making of a marriage between these two disciplines has clearly been close to his heart: the words “history” or “historical” have appeared in the titles of five of his books since 1981. To the conjunction of history and anthropology he has done so much to effect, Sahlins has brought a robust notion of cultural structures, and he has shown how

Book Title: Freud's Moses- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Yerushalmi Yosef Hayim
Abstract: In Freud's Mosesa distinguished historian of the Jews brings a new perspective to this puzzling work. Yosef Hayim Yerushalmi argues that while attempts to psychoanalyze Freud's text may be potentially fruitful, they must be preceded by a genuine effort to understand what Freud consciously wanted to convey to his readers. Using both historical and philological analysis, Yerushalmi offers new insights into Freud's intentions in writingMoses and Monotheism.He presents the work as Freud's psychoanalytic history of the Jews, Judaism, and the Jewish psyche-his attempt, under the shadow of Nazism, to discover what has made the Jews what they are. In the process Yerushalmi's eloquent and sensitive exploration of Freud's last work provides a reappraisal of Freud's feelings toward anti-Semitism and the gentile world, his ambivalence about psychoanalysis as a "Jewish" science, his relationship to his father, and above all a new appreciation of the depth and intensity of Freud's identity as a "godless Jew."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2kmd

CHAPTER EIGHT The Idea of Wilderness in the Poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder from: The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the idea of wilderness in the poetry of Robinson Jeffers and Gary Snyder, consequently ignoring other writers and poets whose work also reflects that concept. The selection of Jeffers and Snyder delimits an otherwise impossibly large field, and there is some reason to think that the choice is sound since “ecological consciousness seems most vibrant in the poetic mode. The poetic voices of Jeffers and Snyder, so rare in modern poetry but frequently found in primal people’s oral tradition, are a virtual cascade of celebration of Nature/God and being.”¹ We have already argued that Modernism—or,

3 The Psychological Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: In the case of the psychological approach it becomes even more immediately obvious that in fact the title refers not to a single theory but a number of approaches emerging from different psychological theories. Our selections introduce psycho-analytical and gestalt theories.

4 The Sociological Approach from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Any approach to art is sociological which solves the familiar problems of description, interpretation and evaluation by setting the artwork in the context of the society in which it was produced. Nowadays sociological approaches tend either to be committed to or influenced by Marxist views. I use the plural deliberately since there is not a single commonly accepted Marxist approach to a theory of art and art criticism.

6 Existentialism and Phenomenology from: Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Contemporary existentialism is typically a combination of two backgrounds, classical 19th century existentialis1l1 and phenomenological techniques. Though existentialist themes are to be found in Greek thought and in the Bible, the two most influential modem proponents are Kierkegaard (1813-1855) and Nietzsche (1844-1900). In Kierkegaard basic themes include: emphasis on the individual in his concrete particularity as contrasted with the individual conceived as part of a system; general antipathy to systems and rules; emphasis on commitment and choice as essential for real existence: emphasis on freedom as realized in the choices by the individual who in choosing makes himself; despair/dread in

Book Title: Archaeology and Memory- Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): Borić Dušan
Abstract: Memory can be both a horrifying trauma and an empowering resource. From the Ancient Greeks to Nietzsche and Derrida, the dilemma about the relationship between history and memory has filled many pages, with one important question singled out: is the writing of history to memory a remedy or a poison? Recently, a growing interest in and preoccupation with the issue of memory, remembering and forgetting has resulted in a proliferation of published works, in various disciplines, that have memory as their focus. This trend, to which the present volume contributes, has started to occupy the dominant discourses of disciplines such as sociology, philosophy, history, anthropology and archaeology, and has also disseminated into the wider public discourse of society and culture today. Such a condition may perhaps echo the phenomenon of a melancholic experience at the turn of the millennium. Archaeology and Memory seeks to examine the diversity of mnemonic systems and their significance in different past contexts as well as the epistemological and ontological importance of archaeological practice and narratives in constituting the human historical condition. The twelve substantial contributions in this volume cover a diverse set of regional examples and focus on a range of prehistoric and classical case studies in Eurasian regional contexts as well as on the predicaments of memory in examples of the archaeologies of 'contemporary past'. From the Mesolithic and Neolithic burial chambers to the trenches of World War I and the role of materiality in international criminal courts, a number of contributors examine how people in the past have thought about their own pasts, while others reflect on our own present-day sensibilities in dealing with the material testimonies of recent history. Both kinds of papers offer wider theoretical reflections on materiality, archaeological methodologies and the ethical responsibilities of archaeological narration about the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cd0pmc

Book Title: Land and People-Papers in Memory of John G. Evans
Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): O’Connor Terry
Abstract: This volume is derived, in concept, from a conference held in honour of John Evans by the School of History and Archaeology and The Prehistoric Society at Cardiff University in March 2006. It brings together papers that address themes and landscapes on a variety of levels. They cover geographical, methodological and thematic areas that were of interest to, and had been studied by, John Evans. The volume is divided into five sections, which echo themes of importance in British prehistory. They include papers on aspects of environmental archaeology, experiments and philosophy; new research on the nature of woodland on the chalklands of southern England; coasts and islands; people, process and social order, and snails and shells - a strong part of John Evans' career. This volume presents a range of papers examining people's interaction with the landscape in all its forms. The papers provide a diverse but cohesive picture of how archaeological landscapes are viewed within current research frameworks and approaches, while also paying tribute to the innovative and inspirational work of one of the leading protagonists of environmental archaeology and the holistic approach to landscape interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cfr8z1

[Part 1 Introduction] from: Land and People
Abstract: Environmental archaeology as a discipline relies, in many ways, upon data and parallels gained from, or observed in, biology and the real world. In some cases these observations are made on experiments ranging, from the reconstruction of field movements monuments (eg, Overton Down and Wareham earthwork experiments), to the results of dog-gnawing on bones. Where data are not present as analogues for palaeo-ecological interpretation we are often forced to become ecologists ourselves, and to record and map the ecology of species in their present day habitat. Each study of a subfossil biological assemblage, or that of the geographical properties of,

[Part 2 Introduction] from: Land and People
Abstract: The nature of the postglacial history of the chalklands has long been recognised to be of ecological significance – its relevance to people and archaeology is obvious and is emphasised by the mystery and myth imbued in the environment created within ancient woodlands. But at a pragmatic level, the presence of woodland and its proximityto monuments and past activity has clear implications for the nature of that activity.

7 Peopling the Landscape; prehistory of the Wylye Valley, Wiltshire from: Land and People
Author(s) Allen Michael J.
Abstract: The Wylye valley, Wiltshire, downstream from Warminster, has seen remarkably little in the way of modern archaeological intervention. This, in large part, is due to the general lack of substantial development in any of the villages that lie along the river. Apart from work that preceded the construction of the Warminster and Codford bypasses on the main A36 trunk road in the early 1990s, the only major archaeological excavations have resulted from the need by the Army to construct new, permanent, range roads to facilitate the movement of heavy military vehicles within the Salisbury Plain Training Area (SPTA), which lies

15 Mysteries of the Middens; change and continuity across the Mesolithic~Neolithic transition from: Land and People
Author(s) Craig Oliver E.
Abstract: Current debates on the Mesolithic–Neolithic transition in Britain are largely focused around whether change occurred through indigenous acculturation through contact and innovation (eg, Thomas 2007) or whether new practices and material culture were introduced through the movement of people from the continent (eg, Sheridan 2007). These hypotheses are also concerned with the speed of change with views ranging from the idea that there was a rapid adoption of farming (eg, Rowley-Conwy 2004) to the stance that there was a gradual uptake of farming but a rapid ideological change (eg, Thomas 1999). However, it has been noted that these debates

1. The Meaning of Atheism from: Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: Axiological Atheism

Book Title: Principalities and Powers-Revising John Howard Yoder’s Sociological Theology
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Pitts Jamie
Abstract: The present book is an attempt to grapple with Yoder’s critics in order to decide how to move forward with a revised “Yoderian" theology. Pitts suggests how that revision should be accomplished by first providing an overview of the current state of Yoder scholarship and this book’s place within it; then proposing an argument that Yoder’s theology can profitably read as a “sociological theology" that exhibits reductive tendencies, but which can be revised to be non-reductive; and finally offering an outline and justification of the proposed method of revision, which involves putting Yoder’s theology of the principalities and powers into conversation with the reflexive sociology of Pierre Bourdieu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4k49

1 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Creation from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: One of the persistent criticisms of John Howard Yoder is the insufficiency of his doctrine of creation. Both friends and foes of his Anabaptist approach worry that he places so much emphasis on the redemptive and eschatological work of Jesus in overcoming the fall that he denies the present goodness of creation. As Yoder himself put it in an early discussion of the powers, after the fall “we have no access to the good creation of God.”¹ Others indicate that his exclusive interest in the socio-political dimensions of Jesus’ ministry blinds him to personal and spiritual aspects of created humanity.

3 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Violence from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: The social and spiritual context of human beings suggests that the refusal of grace, as much as its acceptance, is not just an inner or individual phenomenon. Yoder’s sociological theology unsurprisingly casts sin in broad structural and cosmic terms. The powers are fallen, meaning, the created social structures are now badly malformed. God’s intended peaceful order has been disrupted and violence is the norm. As a Christian pacifist, Yoder was concerned to expose how violence is implicated in the everyday language and practices of Christians. Some critics argue that he was so focused on violence that he lost sight of

4 Revising Yoderʹs Theological Method from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: The powers’ dynamic autonomization never escapes the grip of providence. The fallen powers are created powers. As neither wholly good, nor wholly evil, the shape of the powers must be discerned. Yoder’s theological method privileges a form of discernment rooted in the practical encounter between specific Christian communities and specific powers. Discernment is ultimately a function of mission. Theologians’ contribution to this mission is limited, according to Yoder, yet indispensable for the discernment process. The theologian’s gifts of linguistic analysis and scriptural and historical memory are useful because they facilitate a comparison of the powers with the way of Jesus.

Conclusion from: Principalities and Powers
Abstract: This book has been a sustained attempt to revise John Howard Yoder’s sociological theology so that it might better avoid charges of reducing theology to sociology, method to ideology, and expansive Christian witness to narrow socio-political perfectionism. Pierre Bourdieu’s relational sociology has been the primary tool of revision, as it enables amendments to Yoder’s social theoretical assumptions that render them more clearly non-reductive. Several of Bourdieu’s key concepts were put into conversation with Yoder’s theology of the principalities and powers, his broader oeuvre, and his critics. This conversation facilitated revisions to Yoder’s thought in several areas: creation, anthropology violence, method,

Book Title: In the Fellowship of His Suffering-A Theological Interpretation of Mental Illness — A Focus on "Schizophrenia"
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Swinton John
Abstract: Schizophrenia is often considered one of the most destructive forms of mental illness. Elahe Hessamfar’s personal experience with her daughter’s illness has led her to ask some pressing and significant questions about the cause and nature of schizophrenia and the Church’s role in its treatment. With a candid and revealing look at the history of mental illness, In the Fellowship of His Suffering describes schizophrenia as a variation of human expression. Hessamfar uses a deeply theological rather than pathological approach to interpret the schizophrenic experience and the effect it has on both the patients and their families. Effectively drawing on the Bible as a source of knowledge for understanding mental illness, she offers a reflective yet innovative view of whether the Church could or should intervene in such encounters and what such an intervention might look like. Hessamfar’s comprehensive work will provoke powerful responses from anyone interested in the prominent social issue of mental illness. Her portrayal of the raging debate between treating “insanity" either pastorally or medically will enthral readers, be they Christians, medical students or those in the field of psychiatry and social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4kgg

Foreword from: In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Author(s) Swinton John
Abstract: The world of mental health and illness is a strange place. It is strange, not because people are strange, but because it is essentially mysterious. What exactly do we mean by mental illness? How can a mind be ill? Indeed, how can something immaterial be either broken or mended? It is clear that whatever mental illness is, it is not the same as measles or influenza. It may be that some claim to have tracked down biological, neurological, or genetic causes for our psychological disturbances. But such explanations, whilst arguably telling us from where such experiences come from, do little

1 A Theological Anthropology from: In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: In this chapter we will lay down our anthropological foundation, which will shape our analysis of mental illness as a human phenomenon. Throughout history man has been an enigma, and a paradox, not only in the pages of Scripture, but also to himself and his fellow human beings. Although there have been many studies on every detail of a human’s life concerning his social, psychological, economical, political, physiological, and cultural status in life, one seemingly trivial question that has puzzled philosophers, scientists, and laymen alike, driving the fundamental answer to all aforementioned categories, is What is a human being?The

4 A Path Forward: from: In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: In the last chapter, I argued that illnesses are not purely meaningless biological phenomena. Particularly, with regards to mental illness (an area where medical science has been severely challenged to offer satisfactory explanations of the experience), the voice of illness ought to be heard in the context of the sufferer’s community. In reference to a psychotic experience Aderhold et al., remind us that, “It is not the psychosis—whatever this might be—that is being treated, but a human being in the midst of an altered experience” who should be “supported and accompanied, realizing that each individual is very different

Book Title: Facing the Fiend-Satan as a Literary Character
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Baillie Eva Marta
Abstract: With the preponderance of visual imagery in our late modern period, why is it the literary Satan keeps emerging? And what can the literary figure of Satan contribute to the understanding of evil? Eva Marta Baillie argues that the literary is the only means by which Satan can survive, and that as a result of the changing literary (and cultural, philosophical, and theological) landscape and our changing perceptions of evil as we move into the twenty-first century, the satanic character must also change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4ks4

Introduction: from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: The character of Satan is problematic; he is the “weak place of the popular religion, the vulnerable belly of the crocodile.”¹ Current popular culture makes Satan a subject of its attention. Films featuring the devil are successful blockbusters, books on the occult sell well, and Satan appears in various music genres, ranging from American folk to heavy metal. Outside popular culture, however, and in particular in the theological discourse, there is little “Sympathy for the Devil.”² The idea of Satan cannot be adequately expressed and discussed in terms of theology. The Christian system of monotheism does not allow a systematic

[Part Two: Introduction] from: Facing the Fiend
Abstract: As we have seen in the discussion of his biography, Satan is a paradoxical figure, showing contradictory characteristics and constantly evading definition. In this section, I explore how different satanic characters in literature represent manifestations of evil, in conjunction with the theological concepts of theodicy and theological discussions of evil. I refer to it as a literary exploration of postmodern or contemporary thoughts on evil in philosophy and theology. We have seen now how Satan is a literary figure and finds his raison d’êtrethrough narrative. But what happens to Satan in late modern fiction? Is there room for talk

Book Title: All Shall be Well-Explorations in Universal Salvation and Christian Theology, from Origen to Moltmann
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Macdonald Gregory
Abstract: Universalism runs like a slender thread through the history of Christian theology. Over the centuries Christian universalism, in one form or another, has been reinvented time and time again. In this book an international team of scholars explore the diverse universalisms of Christian thinkers from the Origen to Moltmann. In the introduction Gregory MacDonald argues that theologies of universal salvation occupy a space between heresy and dogma. The studies in this collection aim, in the first instance, to hear, understand, and explain the eschatological claims of a range of Christians from the third to the twenty-first centuries. They also offer some constructive, critical engagement with those claims.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4m9c

2 Apokatastasis: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Greggs Tom
Abstract: Origen grew up in a Christian family, spending his formative years studying and then teaching in Alexandria, before moving to Caesaria where he continued to teach and also to preach. He lived through a period of persecution: his father was matyred and he himself is thought to have died as the result of injuries sustained through the Decian persecution. Origen is famed for many things: he is arguably the first ever systematic theologian, and his De Principiisis perhaps the first attempt at a thorough-going dogmatics; he was an avid biblical commentator and exegete; he revived the theological school in

3 The Subjection of All Things in Christ: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Harmon Steven R.
Abstract: I first encountered the thought of Gregory of Nyssa, the youngest of the three great “Cappadocian Fathers” of the fourth century and arguably the most enduringly significant constructive theologian among them, in an undergraduate course in Christian doctrine. Like many beginning students in Christian theology, I was introduced to Gregory in connection with atonement theory. In the tradition of Protestant systematic theologies that list five or six major atonement theories chronologically and then evaluate their strengths and weaknesses, my textbook identified Gregory as a major representative of the “classical” or “ransom theory of the atonement.² According to Gregory’s development of

12 The Judgment of Love: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Gavrilyuk Paul L.
Abstract: Bulgakov was preoccupied with eschatological themes throughout his life.³ As a child he was constantly confronted with the sacramental dimension of death:

14 The Totality of Condemnation Fell on Christ: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Goddard Andrew
Abstract: The French Reformed lay theologian Jacques Ellul is probably better known for his original and insightful work in social analysis and critique rather than in theology, and yet his wrestling with issues of hell and universal salvation offer some original insights for contemporary theology. In one sense the focus on his sociological works is not surprising given his area of academic expertise. His original degree was in law and, from the end of the Second World War until his retirement in 1980, he served as the Professor of the History and Sociology of Institutions in the Law Faculty of Bordeaux

15 In the End, God . . . : from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hart Trevor
Abstract: John Robinson is best remembered nowadays as an agent provocateurin ecclesial and theological terms. The self-confessed “radical”¹ became a household name more or less overnight in the early 1960s due to two particular acts of self-conscious provocation. First he appeared at the Old Bailey to defend Penguin Books against charges of obscenity in connection with their publication of an unexpurgated text ofLady Chatterley’s Lover.² Then, just as the dust was settling and the press pack losing interest, Robinson published his own “sensational” paperback,Honest to God—a popular work designed to introduce the “man on the Clapham omnibus”

17 Hell and the God of Love: from: All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hall Lindsey
Abstract: John Hick is probably best known for his work on the relationship between Christianity and the other world religions. He is a philosopher of religion who, over the course of a lifetime spent in academia, has constantly revised and developed his beliefs. Hick has ended up, theologically speaking, a very long way from where he started off. As a young man, he had a conversion experience which he described as an increasing awareness of the presence of God.¹ This was the beginning of a long spiritual journey which quickly moved from the “conservative evangelical” world to more liberal expressions of

Book Title: After Imperialism-Christian Identity in China and the Global Evangelical Movement
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Pao David W.
Abstract: This collection of essays is committed to the belief that evangelicalism continues to have the historical assets and intellectual (hermeneutical and theological) tools able to contribute to the global church.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4mgz

Introduction from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Pao David W.
Abstract: This collection of essays arises from a commitment to the belief that evangelicalism continues to provide the historical assets and intellectual (hermeneutical and theological) tools for the global church. Evangelicalism possesses assets with explanatory power able to address significant theological and cultural issues arising out of the churches in the global south. We believe evangelical approaches to contextualization and biblical studies can produce valuable fruit. One such issue is that of identity. In May 2008 over a dozen evangelical scholars, Chinese and Western, from the United States, Hong Kong, and Taiwan, came together to address issues of Christian and evangelical

12 Forging Evangelical Identity: from: After Imperialism
Author(s) Yu Carver T.
Abstract: In the last fifty years, the world has witnessed some rather drastic changes. From the Christian perspective, the most significant changes may crudely be epitomized by two juxtaposed pictures. One picture is the unrelenting acceleration of secularization disseminating from the West, or, more accurately, from the North. The other is that of Christian expansion in Africa, Latin America, and Asia. Combined, these two pictures pose a serious challenge for theological educators.

Book Title: Dealing with Dictators-The United States, Hungary, and East Central Europe, 1942-1989
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): VINCZ JASON
Abstract: Dealing with Dictators explores America's Cold War efforts to make the dictatorships of Eastern Europe less tyrannical and more responsive to the country's international interests. During this period, US policies were a mix of economic and psychological warfare, subversion, cultural and economic penetration, and coercive diplomacy. Through careful examination of American and Hungarian sources, László Borhi assesses why some policies toward Hungary achieved their goals while others were not successful. When George H. W. Bush exclaimed to Mikhail Gorbachev on the day the Soviet Union collapsed, "Together we liberated Eastern Europe and unified Germany," he was hardly doing justice to the complicated history of the era. The story of the process by which the transition from Soviet satellite to independent state occurred in Hungary sheds light on the dynamics of systemic change in international politics at the end of the Cold War.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4n1q

Book Title: Preaching and the Personal- Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Howell J. Dwayne
Abstract: Preaching and the Personal' is a collection of papers that have been presented at the Society of Biblical Literature in sessions sponsored by the Homiletics and Biblical Studies section. The Homiletics and Biblical Studies section encourages dialogue among scholars in both fields who share an interest in critical exegesis, its various methods, and the unique hermeneutical and theological problems inherent to the relationship between biblical interpretation and proclamation. The concept for this book began with the panel discussion "Preaching and the Personal: Prophecy, Witness and Testimony" at the 2010 meeting in Atlanta. Each paper explores various ways the personal can be found in the biblical text, in the preacher, and in the congregation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdvp1

2 Preaching and the Personal from: Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) FLORENCE ANNA CARTER
Abstract: I teach preaching, which is not something that is easy to tell people who are sitting next to you on airplanes. It is also not an easy thing to explain to one’s colleagues, even in a theological education setting. I will never forget a conversation I once had with a man I like and respect, a

8 Preaching John: from: Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) LEWIS KAROLINE M.
Abstract: Preaching the Fourth Gospel has consistently been a challenge for preachers, especially within the parameters of the Revised common Lectionary in which the Gospel of John appears as supplemental and even subsidiary to the theological and structural concentration on the synoptic Gospels. Preachers do not know quite what to do with this gospel that is at the same time theologically rich and narratively complex. Perhaps one of the most misunderstood aspects of the Fourth Gospel that continues to have a profound effect on its preaching is the portrait of Jesus himself. There is a perceived distance about this Jesus, certainly

3 Justice with Repentance: from: Restorative Christ
Abstract: It was Saint Augustine who first used the Latin phrase incurvatus in se which means to be turned (or, literally “curved”) inward on oneself. It is a theological phrase used by other Christian thinkers like Martin Luther and Karl Barth to describe a life lived inwardfor self rather thanoutwardfor God and others. Wrongdoers, preoccupied with themselves, suffer fromincurvatus in se. Examples abound in the accusations made against wrongdoers. They are selfish, self-centered or perhaps just self-absorbed. Such accusations elicit responses varying from self-defense, self-justification or sometimes self-condemnation. Some strategies that encourage wrongdoers in the art of

3 SERVING THE FOOD OF FULL–GROWN ADULTS from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: If remembered at all, Augustine of Hippo (354–430) is associated with original sin, predestination, and other ideas consigned by many to a theological flea market. I shall not play the apologist for Augustine’s thought, even less attempt his rehabilitation among present-day skeptics.¹ Though astonishingly prolific, he enjoyed no ivory tower. His pivotal masterpieces— Confessions, The Trinity, The City of God, to name but three—were written on his career’s margins, from 396 until his death, as a diligent bishop in Hippo Regius, a scruffy African harbor-town. In those days a bishop was not the diocesan administrator that some modern

9 SEARCHER OF THE ORACLES DIVINE from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: Charles Wesley (1707–1788), John’s younger brother, was Methodism’s unofficial poet laureate. By the most conservative reckoning, Charles penned some 6,500 hymns, perhaps hundreds more sacred poems,¹ many of which propelled Methodist worship and evangelism in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. More controversial is whether Wesley’s hymns² are “theological works” as such.³ Less debated—only for being more neglected—are the character and quality of biblical exegesis in Wesley’s poetry. This chapter attempts some soundings of that subject.

10 AMERICAN SCRIPTURES from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: George Washington’s (1732–1799) farewell address and Abraham Lincoln’s (1809–1865) second inaugural are among the very few specimens of American statecraft now accorded iconic status. This chapter considers them as theologicalstatements. As counter-intuitive as that may seem, the pudding’s proof awaits its tasting.

11 UNTIL LATER from: Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: Generally speaking, several things. Most of them model an aptitude and imagination for those who care about theologically sensitive exegesis that guides the church’s life.¹ Return to Crivelli’s portrait of Thomas Aquinas in chapter 6. The saint’s right hand holds the church; in his left are Scripture’s opened pages. Each is held in balance with the other, although the Bible appears heavier, counterweighting an edifice with heavenly aspiration. A radiant medallion throws sunlight on

Bridge from: Returning to Reality
Abstract: In Part Two I will defend the metaphysical vitality of Christian Platonism from the strident antagonism this reality vision receives from the conceptual reflexes of modern philosophy and theology. The outlooks on truth, meaning, and power that are native to the modern world find it compellingly obvious that Christian Platonism is—thankfully—long obsolete, was always intellectually impossible, and remains theologically corrupting.

2 Self Injury and the Human Condition from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: Behind every psychological theory is a vision of human fulfillment. An image of optimal health is at work when we name something “neurotic,” “sick,” or “pathological.” We cannot speak of a deficit, a fault, or a sense of brokenness without an image of human health. Or as Paul Tillich used to frequently say, every perspective on the human condition conveys a sense of what is wrong with us, how we can find healing, and how we can sustain the reality of a new life.

3 Kohut and the Seven Deadly Sins from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we contrasted Kohut with a broad stream of the Western tradition that has focused on the darker dimensions of the human condition. From this darker perspective, something is inherently wrong with us. Our destructiveness, violence, and capacities for evil emerge from an inherited blueprint that is self-seeking and corrupt. In contrast to this Augustinian/Freudian emphasis on out-of-control drives, we examined the more optimistic view of Kohut. While acknowledging the human capacity for destructiveness, Kohut refused to see that destructiveness as a part of our basic nature. Instead, psychological deprivations and distortions promote the human dilemma. The

4 A New Pastoral Care Orientation for Parishioners from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: We believe that pastors also need to learn to “think psychologically.” More is required than just a

5 Pastoral Care of the Church as a Group Self from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: A minister tells of being dissuaded in seminary from writing a dissertation on “personalities of parishes.” “you can’t apply individual psychology to complex, heterogeneous groups,” warned his sociologically minded teacher. Methodology aside for the moment, just ask any seasoned minister, denominational leader, or pastoral consultant if congregations have distinct “personalities” and you will see faces light up—or grimace—in affirmation.

8 Getting Something from Kohut’s Perspective on Religion from: Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: In this final chapter, we will respond to the previous interviews between Randall and Kohut, as well as offer some additional reflections on Kohut’s value for understanding the psychological functions of religion. While the entire chapter represents our combined and united work, we will respond individually to these issues. We believe this will provide the reader with a broader and more comprehensive analysis of Kohut’s potential as a dialogue partner with religion. Thus, Randall’s reflections will be followed by Cooper’s.

1 Religion and Apocalyptic in Northern Ireland from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: It has been claimed that the scholarly effort to explain the relationship between religion and conflict in Northern Ireland is in danger of becoming “research saturated.”¹ Despite the profusion of articles and monographs, however, genuinely new ideas and original insights into the underlying dynamics of religious convictions in Northern Ireland have been rare. The problem is partly attributable to the dominance of social science approaches, many of which are predicated on the dubious methodological premise that religious convictions and the language in which they assumed textual form can be understood through a proper grasp of the social contexts out of

4 Apocalyptic Hope: from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: “Hope,” according to Richard Landes, “is the key to understanding the apocalyptic mind-set.”¹ Acknowledging the ways in which apocalyptic eschatology can transfigure notions of chaos and crisis into an overarching narrative of directionality, purpose and hope, it is important to consider how apocalyptic-eschatological language shaped the deepest aspirations of evangelicals in Northern Ireland. Just as pervasive as Antichrist, the Whore of Babylon, the False Prophet, and the Great Tribulation in Northern Ireland evangelical discourses were the symbolic representations of apocalyptic-eschatological hope such as the messianic Lamb of God, the New Jerusalem and the new heavens and new earth. Thus the

5 Apocalyptic Dualism: from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: The divergent interpretations of the texts of Northern Ireland apocalyptic eschatology and the semantic oscillations between hope and fear exhibited in evangelical hermeneutics substantiate Montrose’s definition of a text as a site of “convergence of various and potentially contradictory cultural discourses.”¹ This chapter examines the nature of these discourses and how apocalyptic-eschatological language was expressed in the rhetoric of Northern Ireland evangelicalism. More specifically, chapter 5 explores the ways in which apocalyptic-eschatological worldviews corresponded to the political convictions of evangelical interpretive communities. The aim is thus to investigate how the political and social rhetoric emanating from these evangelical communities corresponded

Conclusion from: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: As we approach the final stage of our study, it is appropriate to recapitulate the basic aim of the whole project. The task was to consider the ways in which apocalyptic-eschatological language contributed to the formation of evangelical worldviews during the Troubles. Through its comprehensive exploration of this issue, this study has traversed some of the most salient and pressing issues not only of millennial studies and the historiography of the Troubles but also of contemporary hermeneutics and critical theory. Underlying the various strands of the argument has been a unifying intention to initiate a mutually enriching conversation among a

Book Title: Why Resurrection?-An Introduction to the Belief in the Afterlife in Judaism and Christianity
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Blanco Carlos
Abstract: Few questions exert such a great fascination on human conscience as those related to the meaning of life, history, and death. The belief in the resurrection of the dead constitutes an answer to a real challenge: What is the meaning of life and history in the midst of a world in which evil, injustice, and ultimately death exist? Resurrection is an instrument serving a broader, more encompassing reality: the Kingdom of God. Such a utopian Kingdom gathers the final response to the problem of theodicy and to the enigma of history. This book seeks to understand the idea of resurrection not only as a theological but also as a philosophical category (as expression of the collective aspirations of humanity), combining historical, theological, and philosophical analyses in dialogue with some of the principal streams of contemporary Western thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdxgw

3 The Apocalyptic Conception of History, Evil, and Eschatology from: Why Resurrection?
Abstract: The goal of the sociological analysis of religious ideas is to help clarify the nature of the context in which they emerged, paying special attention to the motivations of the actors involved (individuals and groups with affinities and common interests). This is the way to reach a better understanding of the impact of the conceptions of some social groups and of why these ideas became hegemonic in a certain cultural space.

2 The Origins of Atheism from: The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: The origins of Western atheism lie in classical antiquity, in which first developed a naturalistic and empirical explanation of the world. Already visible in Greece in the philosophy of the Sophists of the second half of the fifth century B.C., this replacement of divine by natural causation became much more pronounced in the later schools of Epicurean Materialism and Scepticism. It is not easy to say precisely why this occurred, and why the old mythological conception of the gods as the sole agents of creation should have declined so rapidly. Various explanations have been offered. Gaskin suggests that the multiple

3 Two Arguments for God’s Existence: from: The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: For the positive atheist’s case to succeed, a range of classic arguments for God’s existence must be refuted.¹ Although sometimes called ‘proofs’, only one of them can lay legitimate claim to that name. This is the so-called ontological argument first presented by Anselm of Canterbury (c.1033-1109). Here Anselm argues that, from the definition of God – that ‘God is something than which nothing greater can be conceived’ – one may conclude, as a matter of logic, that God exists, his existence being a necessary requirement of his unsurpassable greatness. The a prioricharacter of this argument – which involves no

Book Title: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition-A Reader
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Kimbrough S.T.
Abstract: One of the difficulties in studying the theology of Wesleyan hymns and sacred poems is that it is couched in a literary and liturgical art form that does not fit into the usual intellectual paths defined over the last two centuries for the study of theology, which tends to be a prose endeavour. Charles Wesley composed a number of thematic collections of hymns, such as those based on the Christian year, e.g., Hymns for the Nativity of our Lord, Hymns for our Lord’s Resurrection, Hymns for Ascension-Day, Hymns for Whitsunday, but his lyrics on a plethora of theological themes, such as sanctification, perfection, holiness, etc., are scattered throughout his over 9,000 hymns and poems from a writing and publishing career that spanned almost fifty years. One of the primary purposes of this volume is to bring together a collection of hymns and sacred poems representative of Charles Wesley’s theological thinking. The texts are organized within a theological outline in order to make the study of his theological ideas and concepts more readily accessible, though many of them could be placed in diverse theological categories. This is a welcome addition to Wesleyan scholarship and a book that all those who sing Wesley's hymns will be interested in.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdz67

1 Lyrical Theology from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: The term lyrical theologyrequires considerable definition if it is to be used with clarity and integrity. Obviously the nountheologyis itself problematic in terms of what it means to speak of a “God word” or a “word about God.” Nonetheless, its constant usage, though in diverse ways, in the arenas of church and theological science makes it a familiar term used with confidence and regularity. It acquires many adjectival modifiers:systematictheology,pastoraltheology,biblicaltheology, etc. Here we speak, however, of alyricaltheology.

2 Lyrical Theology: from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Some years ago I wrote an article for Theology Todayentitled “Hymns are Theology,”² in which I made the case for a more serious consideration of this genre of sacred literature as theology. In that article I maintained, “The hymns of the churcharetheology. They are theological statements: the church’s lyrical, theological commentaries on Scripture, liturgy, faith, action, and hosts of other subjects which call the reader and singer to faith, life, and Christian practice.”³

3 Charles Wesley’s Lyrical Theology from: Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Having established some of the parameters of lyrical theology and that Charles Wesley may be viewed and interpreted as a lyrical theologian, how are we to read his sacred poetry? This question is not raised in reference to established canons of literary interpretation of poetry, which have been discussed in many works on English literature. The question is posed primarily here in terms of the historical context within which Charles Wesley emerged as a sacred poet and the diverse theological problems facing eighteenth-century Christians in Great Britain. Both the historical and theological contexts are extremely significant in shaping Charles’s poetical

1 George MacDonald: from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: MacDonald is primarily a theological thinker and writer. This seems surprising to many as he is mostly known today for his fiction and fairytales and his influence on the famous Inklings, especially C. S. Lewis and J. R. R. Tolkien. This book explores MacDonald’s theological rationale for writing Christian fiction, arguing that it is precisely in his less overt theological works of fiction that one finds some of his most profound thinking on the lived dimension of Christian faith. When MacDonald has been considered as a serious theologian (as is the case in two of the most recent important works

4 George MacDonald’s Theological Rationale for Story and the “Parabolic” from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: George MacDonald’s theological rationale for story and the “parabolic” is closely connected to his understanding of Scripture, language, creation, and how God reveals himself in and through it. In order to understand MacDonald’s view of Scripture, especially as related to the “parabolic” and the role Scripture plays in his understanding of revelation and spiritual transformation, it is important to locate him in his historical context. Only by outlining the general attitude towards Scripture and closely related questions such as the role of science in Victorian Britain can we properly understand MacDonald’s response to the challenges of his time and the

Conclusion from: Storied Revelations
Abstract: We have suggested in the beginning of this book that George MacDonald is primarily a theological thinker and writer. What sort of a theologian is MacDonald? His pastoral concern was for his audience to come to know God in personal and transformative ways. His focus was on the lived dimension of the Christian faith. The way he sought to minister to his Christian audience was through story. While MacDonald employed a wide range of literary styles, the “parabolic” is a dimension of his writing that has received surprisingly little attention.

1 The Real Third Way from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: A common view about Christianity and politics is that Christians divide up over politics in much the same way as other people. But this is only superficially true and only true of Christians who have thought about politics superficially and in disconnection from their faith. For if one examines the writings of Christian thinkers who have thought long, hard, and theologically about politics, then the consistency of their emphases ever since the dawn of the Industrial Age is extremely striking.

8 Integralism and Gift Exchange in the Anglican Social Tradition, or Avoiding Niebuhr in Ecclesiastical Drag from: The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Hughes John
Abstract: In this chapter I would like to begin by asking what, from an Anglican perspective, is particularly interesting about Caritas in Veritate, before exploring what resonances its key theological ideas of “integral development” and charity as reciprocal gift exchange have within the Anglican Social Tradition(s). My argument will be that, first, Anglicans have been at the forefront of the recovery of Augustinian notions of charity as reciprocal gift exchange and the associationist application of such ideas to the social and economic sphere; and secondly, that, despite some recent evidence to the contrary, Anglicanism has particular ecclesiologicopolitical reasons to be sympathetic

3 The Body in Tradition from: Radical Embodiment
Abstract: Before directly expounding the substance of the body in tradition, I will begin with a more formal consideration of the “radicalness” of radical embodiment. Etymologically, radicalliterally means getting to the roots of something. Our bodies as they orient us in an environment, a world, are the very roots which make possible all our living, knowing, and valuing. As such they limit and define us at the same time they grant us all our potentialities. Constructivist-essentialist debates are parasitic upon (and typically tacitly assume) the range of possibilities our bodies provide. We are normally aware of our ubiquitous rootage in

5 Radical Embodiment in Light of the Science and Religion Dialogue from: Radical Embodiment
Abstract: In creating humankind God sculpted “the earth being,” according to the etymology of “Adam,” the Hebrew word for “humanity” used in Genesis 2. The portrait of humankind painted by the scriptures of Judaism, Christianity, and Islam regards the human person as a psycho-somatic unity. Scientific evidence increasingly points to the truth that human beings are fundamentally embodied in nature, contrary to the Greek-influenced mind-body dualism that has reigned for most of Western theological and philosophical history. In this chapter I will highlight the significance of our embodiment relative to evolutionary biology and to the nature of consciousness in light of

Book Title: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation-The Holy Spirit and the Imagination in Reconciliation
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Dearborn Kerry
Abstract: The Holy Spirit, as God’s abiding presence to draw people to Christ, can cleanse wounds and bring love and hope into our hearts. Kerry Dearborn’s insightful focus on the Holy Spirit transforming our moral imagination and putting us on the path of reconciliation with Jesus Christ is both profound and encouraging. Biblical analysis, historical surveys and references to acclaimed theological authors support Dearborn’s nuanced yet practical application of imagination as a tool for awakening, recovery, and dissolving intellectual or psychological barriers that isolate us from God. She considers effectively how imagination can be connected to reality, and is able to delve deep into this vein of thought with startling clarity. Drinking from the Wells of New Creation provides spiritual guidance for dealing with oppression in society; an issue that affects people both within and outside the Christian faith. The acknowledgement of reconciliation as a creative process provides a fresh outlook and will excite those delving into both theological and psychological studies, as well as those seeking to understand God’s unification of life, regardless of tribe, tongue and nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0kv

7 Signposts and Oases of the New Creation from: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: The central thesis of this book is that the Holy Spirit is God’s abiding presence to draw all people to the renewing waters of Christ’s recreating and reconciling work and life. Because of the Spirit’s universal, life-giving, and particularized presence, these waters are available even in the most turbulent and seemingly desolate places. Furthermore, I have proposed that the channels in which these waters often flow most freely, at least initially, are those of the imagination. It is through the imagination that God’s Spirit carries creativity, hope, and love into our hearts when there may be rational and psychological objections

Introduction: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: We live in an intriguing period of human history. The last century has seen the exponential growth of the human population—from 1.5 billion in 1900, to 2.5 billion in 1950, to over 7 billion today. Yet, with this burgeoning growth in the human population, there is also perhaps a greater awareness than at any stage of human history of our essential interconnectivity and inter-relatedness. The collapse of both ideological and physical barriers erected during the Cold War, and the technological and economic “developments” of the last two decades mean that, notwithstanding the differences and diversity of “human civilizations” spread

3 Levinasian and Derridean Hospitality: from: The Gift of the Other
Abstract: In seeking to offer a theological account of the ethical practice of hospitality we have begun our journey by reflecting on the work of Emmanuel Levinas and his friend and compatriot, Jacques Derrida. The choice of Levinas and Derrida as interlocutors is not arbitrary. As well as the far-reaching influence of Levinasian and Derridean thought, not unimportant is the extent to which their respective philosophies have been shaped by their own life experiences of inhospitality, exclusion and violence. Such experiences have led them to the conclusion that not only is Western thought ill-equipped to respond to the inhospitable and unethical

2 A Spirit-Christology That Works for the Christian Life from: Life in the Spirit
Abstract: In this chapter I intend to lay the theological groundwork for an account of Spirit-Christology to be given in the following chapters that explains the Christian life as life in the Spirit based on the constitutive events in Jesus’ life and death, showing that the Christian life is not only life in the Spirit but that such life in the Spirit is also a cruciform life. to do so, I will examine other Spirit-Christologies and Pneumatologies to see whether they contribute to the kind of Spirit-Christology given here that begins with Jesus’ life and death as the basis for showing

4 God Gives His Spirit by Working Jesus Christ in Others from: Life in the Spirit
Abstract: The basic difficulty in giving the kind of account presented here is the fact that much theological reflection on the Christian life discounts the life of Christ as determinative for the Christian life. As I discussed earlier, yoder took up this problem especially in The Politics of Jesus, in which he argued that the Incarnation implied that Christ’s life must inform the life of the Christian. But yoder’s account does not adequately attend to the question ofhow one is made a discipleof Jesus, what Adolf Köberle called the “energy” question,¹ because he does not adequately account for the

Book Title: An Unexpected Light-Theology and Witness in the Poetry and Thought of Charles Williams, Micheal O'Siadhail and Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Mahan David C.
Abstract: A growing number of professional theologians today seek to push theological inquiry beyond the relative seclusion of academic specialization into a broader marketplace of public ideas, and to recast the theological task as an integrative discipline, wholly engaged with the issues and sensibilities of the age. Accordingly, such scholars seek to draw upon and engage the insights and practices of a variety of cultural resources, including those of the arts, in their theological projects. Arguing that poetry can be a form of theological discourse, Mahan shows how poetry offers rich theological resources and instruction for the Christian church. In drawing attention to the peculiar advantages it affords, this book addresses one of the greatest challenges facing the church today: the difficulty of effectively communicating the Christian gospel with increasingly disaffected late-modern people.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0tg

3 Poetry as Remembrance: from: An Unexpected Light
Abstract: The difference in landscapes we find between the Arthurian poetry of Charles Williams and the “Poems in Witness to the Holocaust”of Micheal O’Siadhail’sThe Gossamer Wallmarks the distinct set of challenges these two poets undertook to address in their verse. Although in each sequence we find a portrayal of history as a “failed landscape,” for Williams that feature of his cycle designated a clear counterpoint within a larger vision of glory, and one which is made to harmonize with that emergent vision by the logic of the Incarnation—as the summing up and reconciling ofall thingsin

Book Title: In the Eyes of God-A Metaphorical Approach to Biblical Anthropomorphic Language
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Howell Brian C.
Abstract: Anthropomorphic language has provided a conundrum for exegetes and theologians for millennia. Attempting to use human language to describe the divine presents ontological and epistemological problems that push our speech to the breaking point. In this new work, Howell shows that instances of divine action should not automatically be reduced simply to theological categories such as omnipotence, omniscience, omnipresence, immutability, etc., nor to criteria such as personhood, life, and approachability. Rather, he introduced readers to two unique approaches to “anthropomorphic expressions".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0wh

1 Approaching Biblical Anthropomorphic Language from: In the Eyes of God
Abstract: According to Brevard Childs, “no modern theological issue which presently challenges the church is in more need of serious theological reflection from both biblical, historical, and dogmatic theology than the identity of God whom we worship.”¹ This issue is also an ancient one, as we find in the Old Testament. For example, Daniel rebukes the king for honoring false, inanimate “gods,” over the God of life. He says, “You have praised the gods of silver and gold, of bronze, iron, wood and stone, which do not see, hear or understand. But the God in whose hand are your life-breath and

10 Conclusion from: In the Eyes of God
Abstract: Anthropomorphic language has provided a conundrum for exegetes and theologians for millennia. Attempting to use human language to describe the divine presents ontological and epistemological problems that push our speech to the breaking point. Initially, we looked at several different modes of speech, the univocal, equivocal, analogical, and metaphorical, looking at their approach to speaking of a transcendent being. The univocal approach treated language for God and for humans as having the same sense. This immediately runs into problems, however, as God is a non-created Being and His attributes are neither contingent nor finite in nature. Process theologians attempt to

Book Title: The Joshua Delusion?-Rethinking Genocide in the Bible
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Moberly R.W.L.
Abstract: Many Christians wrestle with biblical passages in which God commands the slaughter of the Canaanites - men, women, and children. The issue of the morality of the biblical God is one of the major challenges for faith today. How can such texts be Holy Scripture? In this bold and innovative book, Douglas Earl grasps the bull by the horns and guides readers to new and unexpected ways of looking at the book of Joshua. Drawing on insights from the early church and from modern scholarship, Earl argues that we have mistakenly read Joshua as a straightforward historical account and have ended up with a genocidal God. In contrast, Earl offers a theological interpretation in which the mass killing of Canaanites is a deliberate use of myth to make important theological points that are still valid today. Christopher J. H. Wright then offers a thoughtful response to Earl's provocative views. The book closes with Earl's reply to Wright and readers are encouraged to continue the debate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0x1

1. If Jericho was Razed, is our Faith in Vain? from: The Joshua Delusion?
Abstract: In his 1982 book, The Quest for the Historical Israel: Reconstructing Israel’s Early History, G.W. Ramsey devotes a chapter to the question, ‘If Jericho was not Razed, is our Faith in Vain?’¹ The question is a witty allusion to 1 Corinthians 15:14 (if Christ has not been raised, then … your faith has been in vain). Ramsey asks the question in order to consider how the ‘historical truth’ of an Old Testament narrative affects its theological value. In other words, if Jericho was not utterly destroyed as described in Joshua 6, then does the story lack truth and theological value?

2. On Wearing Good Glasses: from: The Joshua Delusion?
Abstract: In chapter 1 we saw that concerns with historical and ethical difficulties might point us to a new (or renewed) way of reading Old Testament texts. The Church Fathers suggest to us that historical and ethical difficulties in a narrative might be indicators to us that we misread an Old Testament text if we read it primarily in terms of historical or ethical description via the ‘plain sense’ of the text. The Fathers mapped out a whole other way of reading the texts in a theologically faithful scheme, but a scheme that is perhaps unconvincing in a number of its

Book Title: Groundless Gods-The Theological Prospects of Post-Metaphysical Thought
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hall Eric E.
Abstract: Groundless Gods: The Theological Prospects of Post-Metaphysical Thought' deals with possible interpretations of an emerging interest in contemporary theology: postmetaphysical theology. This book attempts to openly come to grips, not only with what metaphysics and postmetaphysics imply, but also with what it could mean to do or not do theology from the standpoint of the nonmetaphysician. The book asks, for instance, whether this world has any singular definition, and whether God is some being standing apart from the world or an experience within the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0zj

3 Can Christian Theologians Reason Post-Metaphysically? from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) GOODSON JACOB L.
Abstract: My argument hinges on the distinction between giftednessandpossessionconcerning the three theological virtues.¹ Because the virtues of faith, hope, and charity are notpossessed, properly speaking, by Christians or Christian thinkers, post-metaphysical reasoning provides an opportunity for a confessional yet secular approach

8 Faith and Being: from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) VON SASS HARTMUT
Abstract: The theological situation is not very comfortable: On the one side there are those who think that a non-hermeneutic theology consists only of a contradiction. For them, theology is necessarily hermeneutic.² On the other side, there are those who think that a theology turning toward hermeneutics is the end of the theology. Hence, an alliance between hermeneutics and theology should be strictly avoided.³ It is not difficult to find concrete examples of both parties. One need only elucidate which theological intention is traditionally combined with the attribute that is at stake here. Hermeneutics is the ‘theory’ of understanding; to speak

10 On the Possibility of a Metaphysical Theology after Onto-Theology from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) EIKREM ASLE
Abstract: The adjective “post-metaphysical,” often used in philosophical parlance to describe so-called postmodern construals of God, is ambiguous. It can either be interpreted as an attempt to develop non-metaphysical accounts of God, or it can be understood as an attempt to spell out a post onto-theological God, i.e. a God not construed as a being among beings thought of in a foundationalist manner: as causa suior as a cause that is the cause of itself. It is my impression that many theologians and philosophers of religion have a tendency to identify metaphysical discourse on God with onto-theological discourse on God.

11 Revelation and Resistance: from: Groundless Gods
Author(s) WABEL THOMAS
Abstract: In his categorial semiotics and phenomenology, Charles Sanders Peirce arrives at a fundamental triadic structure that, he claims, shapes all possible experience and reality alike. The subject—seen as the “interpretant” in a triadic semiotic process—becomes an instance in the self-interpretation of the universe of signs. Thus, perception of reality and reality itself coincide. This can be experienced in what Peirce calls the category of “Firstness.” Following Peirce, the contemplation of reality in the immediate experience of its quality (Firstness) is a phenomenological task. In Peirce’s “humble argument” for the reality of God, the experience of Firstness can account

6 A Future for Latin American Liberation Theology? from: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Álvarez Carmelo E.
Abstract: The title of my presentation is an invitation to explore the contributions of liberation theology in Latin America and the Caribbean and the challenges it poses to the twenty-first century. I come as a witness that takes seriously the context in which this theology was developed. As the late Taiwanese theologian Shoki Coe, Director of the Theological Education Fund of the World Council of Churches in the 1970s, used to stress, contextualizing theology as an ongoing process becomes a key hermeneutical principle both in educating for the ministry and promoting a relevant theology.¹

Concluding Reflections from: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Tahaafe-Williams Katalina
Abstract: What has contextual theology to offer the church of the twenty-first century?This is the question with which the conference at United Theological College grappled, and to which this book has proposed some tentative answers. Naturally, the future will answer the question more fully than we ever could here, but we do think that the original conference and these eight essays have pointed very much in the right direction.

Book Title: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference-Intercivilizational Engagement
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Chung Paul S.
Abstract: In response to the religious and spiritual transition experienced in our modern world, Chung creates a postcolonial framework for inter-religious exchange, focussing on issues of interpretation, moral deliberation and ethical praxis. He investigates the relationship between hermeneutical theory and ethics and produces a new theory for intercivilizational dialogue, studying theological-philosophical theory of interpretation, ethics, the experience of cultural hybridity and inter-civilisational alliance, set within multiple horizons and diverse contexts
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf16n

3. Phemenology and Hermeneutics from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Dilthey in his later years came to appreciate Husserl’s (1859–1938) teachings, which avoid psychological reasoning and articulate the importance of the idea of evidence and a methodological procedure in cognitive analyses. Husserl’s Logical Investigations, published in two volumes in 1900 /1901, created phenomenology, including a new insight into hermeneutical theory. Husserl takes issue with Dilthey’s notion of worldview associated with historicism, because he believes that Dilthey depends on knowledge of historical relativity, causing the absolute validity of any particular life-interpretation, religion, or philosophy to disappear. The formation of a historical consciousness destroys “the belief in the universal validity” undertaken

5. Mediation: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Immanuel Kant (1724–1804) saw morality in light of human reason. Practical reason itself becomes the criteria for right and wrong, stimulating moral action. Practical reason enables the human being to grasp innate moral law. The moral law is deontological in the sense that moral action has little to do with the consequences. For Kant, the categorical imperative is grounded solely in the notion of duty. There is one domain of value, the domain of moral value which is immune to human fragility and vulnerability. The very notion of a moral precept, for instance “Don’t kill”, can never conflict with

8. Thomas Aquinas: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the previous chapter we examined Confucian ethics of the mean, appropriateness, and its hermeneutical implications for sincerity and selfcare, in view of Aristotle’s notion of the mean, the Greek notion of ethos, and care of self. A study of Thomas’s theological virtue ethics in this chapter is to be undertaken in view of Aristotle. The concluding reflection is a critical appreciation of Thomas’s perspective on the relationship between God and human being in a hierarchical and analogical manner. Analogy as theological language is imbued with Thomist virtue ethics in a spiritualistic and hierarchical manner. Thomas’s theology and virtue ethics

10. Interpretation in Long Route and Social Location from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: The first, literal, patent meaning analogically intends a second meaning which is not given otherwise

11. Discourse Ethics and Communicative Rationality from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: “The end of ideologies” has changed into the end of history,¹ according to Fukuyama: liberal democracy constitutes the end point of humankind’s ideological evolution and the final form of human government; and, finally, liberal democracy forms the end of history.² In the phase of late capitalism embedded within the empire and the end of ideologies, a lifeworld is violated, reified, and colonized by political power, capital dominion, and mass media. In taking issue with this process of colonizing the lifeworld, Habermas’s notion of communicative moral practice becomes a counter proposal to “the end of ideologies” and can be endorsed as

12. Neo-Aristotelian Ethics and Neo-Kantian Framework from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the work of Aristotle, the central question is: “How should I live? or “How should one live?” Practical questions are invested with teleological significance. The question “what ought I to do?” or “what is right for me?” is subordinate to the question “what is the good life?” Aristotle speaks of the good and happy life in this regard. He views the ethos of the individual as embedded in the poliscomprising the citizen body. Practical reason assumes the role of judgment illuminating the historical life-horizon of an ethos.¹ In the turn toward an ethics of the good, practical reason

13. Aesthetics of Existence and Ethics of Alterity from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: We have seen the gamut of interaction between Aristotelian virtue ethics and Kant’s deontological rigor. In this interaction Habermas’s discourse ethics occupies a significant place, while Neo-Aristotelian ethics plays a counterpart to Neo-Kantian deontological orientation. However, in postmodernity’s ethical emphasis on the Other, an ethical-hermeneutical model assumes an aesthetic dimension and prophetic witness. Foucault’s concept of care of self and Levinas’s unprecedented concern for the Other are to be understood as a new mode of interpretation in prioritizing care for others.

16. Interpretation as Conflict and Creativity: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Zhu Xi’s hermeneutics of investigation (“pilgrimatics of self-cultivation”)¹ demonstrates a hermeneutical theory in a dialectical revealing of the Heavenly Principle, Dao, in connection with human methodological, empirical investigation of things in the world. Zhu Xi’s greatness can be seen in his remarkable ability to

Epilogue: from: The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In this Epilogue, I shall present a postcolonial hermeneutics in terms of proposing archeology and social biography as a postcolonial epistemology. This new perspective articulates the important task of archeological endeavor in rewriting and re-reading the history of the innocent victim as excluded and silenced. History is not deconstructed in the name of binary oppositions, but to remember, in our current socio-biographical solidarity, those who are fragile and vulnerable, existing in the interstitial zone. To begin with archeological hermeneutics, it is important to consider a hermeneutics of analogical imagination and its dimension of suspicion and living discourse in an intercivilizational

Book Title: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism-A Critical Evaluation of John Hick
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Nah David S.
Abstract: The question of religious pluralism is the most significant yet thorniest of issues in theology today, and John Hick (1922–2012) has long been recognized as its most important scholar. However, while much has been written analyzing the philosophical basis of Hick’s pluralism, very little attention has been devoted to the theological foundations of his argument. Filling this gap, this book examines Hick’s theological attempts to systematically deconstruct the church’s traditional incarnational Christology. Special attention is given to evaluating Hick’s foundational theses “that Jesus himself did not teach what was to become the orthodox Christian understanding of him" and “that the dogma of Jesus’ two natures . . . has proved to be incapable of being explicated in any satisfactory way." By elucidating the ways in which Hick’s arguments fail, David Nah demonstrates that Hick was unwarranted in breaking away from the church’s incarnational Christology that has been at the core of Christianity for almost two thousand years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf1qd

3 Hick’s Theology of Religious Pluralism from: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: Having considered hick’s philosophy of pluralism in the last chapter, I am now ready to examine Hick’s theology of pluralism, concentrating especially on his Christology for a pluralistic age. as one of the leading philosophers of religion of our time, hick has not only been active in the contemporary theological scene, his contributions, particularly in the area of Christology, have been very significant. Specifically, hick has attempted to advance the limits of the traditional boundaries of Christology beyond the understanding of Christ and Christianity to the world of religions. Traditionally, Christianity has always confessed Jesus of Nazareth as god incarnate,

Book Title: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger-Onto-theology, Sacraments, and the Mother's Smile
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Sweeney Conor
Abstract: "Theology after Heidegger must take into account history and language as elements in the pursuit of meaning. Quite often, this prompts a hurried flight from metaphysics to an embrace of an absence at the center of Christian narrativity. Conor Sweeney here explores the “postmodern" critique of presence in the context of sacramental theology, engaging the thought of Louis-Marie Chauvet and Lieven Boeve. Chauvet is an influential postmodern theologian whose critique of the perceived onto-theological constitution of presence in traditional sacramental theology has made big waves, while Boeve is part of a more recent generation of theologians who even more wholeheartedly embrace postmodern consequences for theology. Sweeney considers the extent to which postmodernism à la Heidegger upsets the hermeneutics of sacramentality, asking whether this requires us to renounce the search for a presence that by definition transcends us. Against both the fetishization of presence and absence, Sweeney argues that metaphysics has a properly sacramental basis, and that it is only through this reality that the dialectic of presence and absence can be transcended. The case is made for the full but restless signification of the mother’s smile as the paradigm for genuine sacramental presence."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf1rx

2 Sacramental Presence in Louis-Marie Chauvet from: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: The theology of Louis-Marie Chauvet is a sustained example of how Heidegger can be made productive in the theology of sacramental presence, and also theology in general. Chauvet moves his theological statements completely outside of the realm of metaphysics understood as a privileged discursive conceptualism; such statements may only be made via a phenomenology and hermeneutics of the ritual dynamic proper to Christian liturgy. In this symbolic mode, as we will see, theological statements, no longer mediated by traditional metaphysics, will be weighted more towards history than ontology, and therefore more towards absence than presence. Vincent J. Miller asserts that

3 Sacramental Presence in Lieven Boeve from: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: While Boeve believes Chauvet’s hermeneutical-theological project “offers a plausible and relevant relectureof Christian existence today,” he suggests that the project nevertheless remains a child of the early shift to hermeneutics and linguistics.¹ In this, he draws attention to new questions of particularism, narrativism, relativism, and false universalism that must push the hermeneutical project still further. Concerned that the paths pointed to by these questions will lead many back to the safety and security of an onto-theological approach, Boeve asserts that, notwithstanding the risks, we must follow where this methodology leads. Specifically, in relation to a furtherrelectureof Chauvet’s

Conclusion: from: Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: The occlusion of the mother’s smile is the death of sacramental presence. The mother’s smile is the kiss of Being, the sign or symbol of all that is gratuitous, all that is gift, and therefore all that is non-calculative, nonmechanical, and non-violent. Its erasure therefore erodes the sacramental foundation of grace. A sacramental “sign,” it is also a phenomenological and metaphysical sign, a “real,” existent form from which breaks forth the splendor of the depths of Being. It signifies the permanence of the truth, goodness, and beauty of the created order. As form, it also refers to infinity, for “it

2 Divine Action and the Contingent Cross from: Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: In philosophy, some things are understood to be because they could not be otherwise; whereas other things could have been otherwise but just so happen to be. These vague intuitions are of course codified into more technical terms: it is necessarythat some things are so, merelycontingentthat other things are so. A key metaphysical question for philosophers then, is to ask what things are necessary and what things are contingent.² From a theological perspective this question is often framed in terms of the distinction between God and the created realm. In classical theism at least, only God is

4 The Meaning of Jesus’ Death from: Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: In the previous chapter I argued for the viability of a theological engagement with history for the purpose of informing our theology of the atonement with the historical intention of Jesus of Nazareth. The task now is to discuss what can be known of the world of meaning that Jesus constituted for his death and then, in the next chapter, to bring these results to bear on our understanding of Christian atonement. Easy enough perhaps to state, a rather more difficult task in practice. Indeed, the endeavor threatens to become all-consuming; John Meier’s four-volume work is ample evidence of the

Book Title: Justification in a Post-Christian Society- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Gunner Göran
Abstract: Since the Reformation in the sixteenth century, Lutheran traditions have impacted culture and politics in many societies. At the same time, Lutheran belief has had an effect on personal faith, morality, and ethics. Modern society, however, is quite different from that at the time of the Reformation. How should we evaluate Lutheran tradition in today’s Western multicultural and post-Christian society? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran theological position that can be regarded as reasonable in a society that evidences a considerable weakening of the role of Christianity? What are the challenges raised by cultural diversity for a Lutheran theology and ethics? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran identity in a multicultural society, and is there any fruitful Lutheran contribution to the coexistence of diff erent religious and non-religious traditions in the future?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf32j

1 Introduction: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) GUNNER GÖRAN
Abstract: Lutheran tradition has been of immense importance not just within the churches in quite a lot of countries worldwide but also for society and culture in general. Ideas within Reformation theology have in various ways influenced education, health care, attitudes to work, economy, and politics. This impact of Lutheran tradition has been based on particular theological positions that have been developed in different ways. Some of these positions are the doctrine of justification by grace alone, the idea that the Bible has a particular role as a source for theological reflection, the doctrine of original sin, the idea of a

4 Atonement in Theology and a Post-Einsteinian Notion of Time from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) JACKELÉN ANTJE
Abstract: There are a number of obstacles for a consistent presentation of the doctrine of atonement today. How can the suffering and self-sacrifice of the One be salvific in our global context? Does the atoning activity of God in Christ presuppose total passivity on the human side? Is not atonement terminology remote from the realities of human life in contemporary Western societies? In this chapter I argue that post-Einsteinian notions of time may contribute to theological attempts to cope with some of these obstacles. Albert Einstein’s theories of relativity mean that the previous Newtonian concept of time is inadequate. A reception

7 Outside Paradise: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) GRANTÉN EVA-LOTTA
Abstract: The study is part of a larger research project, which seeks to clarify and critically analyze the content of several central ideas in Lutheran theology and ethics. One aim is to analyze some important theological

12 Contra Philosophos: from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) ALFSVÅG KNUT
Abstract: A number of scholars have noted the continuity between the late medieval movement called via modernaand typically modern philosophical emphases.¹ Until the fourteenth century, it was commonly accepted in European thought that human beings’ position as a part of the universe made it impossible for them to get to know reality in its totality. This necessitated the use of a variety of rhetorical strategies in exploring the world, conceptual analysis being but one of them, and not necessarily the most appropriate one. Thevia modernaestablishment of univocity as the epistemological ideal changed this. The understanding of the knowing

14 Luther’s Interpretation of the Magnificat and Latin American Liberation Theology from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) VUOLA ELINA
Abstract: In most Lutheran churches today, the Mother of God is absent—in prayers, liturgy, theology, and spirituality. At the same time, there are ecumenical grass-roots movements such as the Taizé movement, in which the Virgin Mary is more present. There is a noteworthy theological silence about Mary in the Lutheran tradition, even though the first two Marian dogmas of the early church and Luther’s thought provide much more common ground for an ecumenical Mariology than we might think.

15 “Satis est” (CA 7): from: Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) THEIßEN HENNING
Abstract: This chapter provides a rereading of the ecclesiological key article of the Augsburg Confession, preceded by some reflections on why present-day theologians still consider the confessional writings from the Reformation period to be meaningful for their work in the early twenty-first century. In doing so, they seem to subscribe to a historicalview of the Reformation as a model for interpreting the present. This is what may at first sight seem odd in thedoctrinalapproach I will be following in these pages, since that view is somewhat in danger of overestimating the normative role of the confessional writings (norma

Book Title: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hebbard Aaron B.
Abstract: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics sets out to read the book of Daniel as a narrative textbook in the field of theological hermeneutics. Employing such disciplines as historical criticism, literary criticism, narrative theology, and hermeneutics, this work seeks to maintain an interdisciplinary outlook on the book of Daniel. Two inherently linked perspectives are utilized in this reading of Daniel. First is the perception that the character of Daniel is the paradigm of the good theological hermeneut; theology and hermeneutics are inseparable and converge in the character of Daniel. Readers must recognize in Daniel certain qualities, attitudes, abilities, and convictions well worth emulating. Essentially, readers must aspire to become a Daniel. Second is the standpoint that the book of Daniel on the whole should be read as a hermeneutics textbook. Readers are led through a series of theories and exercises meant to be instilled into their theological, intellectual, and practical lives. Attention to readers is a constant endeavor throughout this thesis. The concern is fundamentally upon contemporary readers and their communities, yet with sensible consideration given to the historical readerly community with which contemporary readers find continuity. Greater concentration is placed on what the book of Daniel means for contemporary readers than on what the book of Daniel meant in its historical setting. In the end, readers are left with difficult challenges, a sobering awareness of the volatility of the business of hermeneutics, and serious implications for readers to implement both theologically and hermeneutically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf34k

Book Title: Grasping Truth and Reality-Lesslie Newbigin's Theology of Mission to the Western World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Le Roy Stults Donald
Abstract: When Lesslie Newbigin returned to Britain in 1974 after years of missionary service, he observed that his homeland was as much a mission field as India, where he had spent the majority of his missionary career. He concluded that the Western world needed a missionary confrontation. Instead of the traditional approach to missions, however, Newbigin realized that the Western world needed to be confronted theologically. From his earliest days at Cambridge University, Newbigin developed the theological convictions that shaped his understanding of the Christian faith, and he used these theological convictions as criteria to evaluate the belief system of Western culture and to provide an answer to its dilemma. The Enlightenment reintroduced humanism and dualism into Western culture, which resulted on the loss of purpose and the rise of skepticism. This book discusses Newbigin's theological convictions and how they factored into both his critique of and his solution to Western culture's spiritual and worldview problems. Donald Le Roy cleverly explains Newbigin's solution to reintroduce the Christian belief system into Western culture in order to restore purpose and truth to Westerners and put them back in contact with true reality through Jesus Christ.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf353

1 A Brief Sketch of Newbigin’s Life and Work from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Before we address his theological and missiological thinking, we need to take a brief look at his life in order to get a clear understanding of the context that

3 Grasping Truth and Reality: from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: A survey of Newbigin’s thought makes it obvious that at the most basic levels the major concerns to which he tended to give theological attention and the major insights which lie at the heart of his reflections were to a remarkable degree formed during his early years, particularly those spent as an undergraduate at Cambridge, as a staff worker for the SCM in Scotland, and at Cambridge again

5 Newbigin’s Critique of Western Culture from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Newbigin utilizes the theological convictions he developed over the years as a standard of evaluation when confronting contemporary Western culture. “The gospel,” he writes, “provides the stance from which all culture is to be evaluated.”¹ What emerges in Newbigin’s engagement with Western culture is a theology of mission that meshes his theological convictions with the post-critical assumptions of Charles Cochrane and Michael Polanyi.

6 Newbigin’s Response to Western Culture’s Crisis from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Newbigin’s answer to Western culture’s dilemma is essentially a theological response based on the theological convictions presented earlier in this book. In this case, he turns his attention toward Western culture which he believes to be in need of a radical conversion of both spirit and mind.

8 Putting Newbigin in Perspective from: Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Accolades praising Newbigin’s contribution to the church have already been mentioned. There are, however, some further contributions that become apparent as one does an exposition of his theological and missiological thinking. There are also some challenges to his thinking that need to be addressed. Newbigin is not the first to confront Western culture as a missionary in the Twentieth Century. Francis Schaeffer, for example, began to discern the real issues of Western culture in the middle of the last century. While he believed them to be theological in origin, he saw them manifested in philosophy, art, and literature. Schaeffer’s attitude

Book Title: Our Only Hope-More than We can Ask or Imagine
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Adam Margaret B.
Abstract: Our Only Hope' encourages theologians to continue critical and creative examinations of the hope they teach, promote, and presuppose. Margaret B. Adam advocates that those examinations include a reconsideration of dismissed traditional doctrine and a readiness to consider current discourses not traditionally consulted for input on theological hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf36m

1 Moltmann’s Hope and Moltmannian Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: The Patron Of Theological hope in the United States for the past fifty years has been Jürgen Moltmann. His celebrated book of 1964, Theology of Hope: On the Ground and the Implications of a Christian Eschatology,reinvigorated theological scholarship about hope and still inspires academic and congregational engagements with hope. His account of hope emphasizes God’s experience of crucified godforsakenness, Jesus Christ’s promise of resurrection, the future coming of God’s new creation, and the work of hope in this life, now. Moltmann’s theology inspires a body of writing and belief—Moltmannian hope—that approximately reflects his work and functions as

2 The Costs of a Moltmannian Theological Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: The Legacy Of Moltmann’s theological hope abides as a contemporary doctrine, loosely articulated and broadly accepted. The broad outlines of his eschatological hope shape the presuppositions and imaginations of many theologians, clergy, and lay Christians, including some who have never engaged with his work directly. I have identified the legacy of Moltmann’s theology of hope as Moltmannian, because it reflects his work, at least indirectly, even though it does not attend to all of the particulars of his theological scholarship. When this Moltmannian hope constitutes the exclusive resource for eschatological hope, the costs are great.

3 A Thomistic Grammar of Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: Chapter 1 Described The distinctive characteristics of Moltmann’s theology of hope and the subsequent construction of Moltmannian hope. Chapter 2 examined some of the costs of an exclusive reliance on a Moltmannian theology of hope. This chapter considers the theology of hope presented by Aquinas that Moltmannian hope misunderstands and dismisses,¹ in order to recover some resources for contemporary theological hope. Chapter 4 will investigate resources from discourses not often considered in conversations about theological hope.

4 Provocative Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: Resources For A contemporary Christian theology of hope extend far beyond the narratives discussed in the previous three chapters. This chapter considers five discourses that are not conventionally consulted for input on theological hope: nihilism, lament, disability, feminist theory, and feminist theology. The philosophical and critical theory conversation of nihilism and its relative, indeterminism or undecidability, suggests a kind of hope without over-confident claims of knowable hopes for the future. Scriptural and extra-scriptural lament demonstrates a persistent and apparently futile hope that continues into and through death with no sign of God’s response or rescue. Disability theology challenges hopes about

5 Our Only Hope from: Our Only Hope
Abstract: Chapter 1 described Jürgen Moltmann’s future-determined, creationfocused, ideologically-modern, hope in the passible God who has been brought to suffer with humanity by Jesus Christ’s suffering and death. I followed the sketch of Moltmann’s theological hope with examples of Moltmannian hope and its humanist, this-worldly hope in the changes that responsible, hopeful actions can make. In chapter 2, I noted what an exclusive reliance on Moltmannian hope loses: non-modern imagination, divine impassibility, Christ’s two natures, heaven, transcendent human flourishing, and apparently irresponsible discipleship. Chapter 3 considered patristic and Thomistic presentations of theological hope and twenty-first-century treatments of hope from theologians appreciative

Book Title: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Longman Tremper
Abstract: Cephas Tushima provides a thorough analysis of the fate of Saul's heirs, focussing on whether their tragedies were due to continuing divine retribution, coincidence, or Davidic orchestration. He concludes that David was unjust and calculating in his dealings with the Saulides and, like other Near Eastern usurpers, perpetrated heinous injustices against the vanquished house of Saul. Traditionally readers saw Saul as evil and David as a hero; but more recently scholars have written about Saul as a tragic character and David as a villain, turning the book of Samuel into deeply contested interpretive territory. Tushima provides analysis of the critical literature surrounding this contentious issue and contributes his own study that will prove important to the continuing debate. He assesses David's character by analysing how he treats the surviving children of his predecessor, drawing upon the provisions for justice in the covenant community in the book of Deuteronomy. He demonstrates a connection between Samuel and the Torah through themes and motifs, and develops theological conclusions from them on such issues as the impact of human conduct on the environment, marriage, monarchy and Zion theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf3qc

3 Narrative Criticism from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: The present chapter discusses the methodological approach of the present work—narrative criticism. It explores both the rise of narrative criticism, its elements, how the method

4 The Contest for the Succession to the Throne of Saul (2 Samuel 2–4) from: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: In chapter 3, I outlined the methodology of the present study, namely, narrative criticism. In discussing the narrative critical method, I pointed out the centrality of the final form of the text in its analysis, not the text’s prehistory. Additionally, I noted the historary¹ nature of biblical narrative, which ontologically arises from the ground of history, existentially inhabits a literary sphere, and teleologically drives towards a theological goal; and I also noted how all of these trajectories have to be kept in tension for a proper explication of the world of the biblical narrative text. I also explored the various

Book Title: Onslaught against Innocence- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: While in Genesis 2-11 the Yahwist confronts the issue of evil through a sequence of stories on the progressive deterioration of the divine-human relationship, in Genesis 4 he describes the initial slaughter of one human being by another as fratricidal. This book provides a close reading of J's story by using literary criticism and psychological criticism, and shows that the biblical author has more than an "archaeological" design. His characters - including God, Adam, Eve, Cain, and Abel, plus minor character - are paradigmatic, as they allow J to proceed with a fine analytical feel for the nature of evil as performed by "homo" as "homini lupus." No imaginative "mimesis" of evil has ever been recounted with such an economy of means and such depth of psychological insight.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf49n

Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from: Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” ( dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a

Book Title: The Philokalia and the Inner Life-On Passions and Prayer
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Cook Christopher C.H.
Abstract: The Philokalia was published in Venice in 1782. It is an anthology of patristic writings from the Eastern Church, spanning the 4th to the 15th Centuries, which has been the subsequent focus of a significant revival in Orthodox spirituality. It presents an understanding of psychopathology and mental life which is significantly different to that usually encountered in western Christianity. It also presents accounts of both mental well-being and the pathologies of the mind or soul that are radically different to contemporary secular accounts and yet also find remarkable points of similarity with contemporary psychotherapeutic approaches, such as cognitive therapy. The book provides an introduction to the history of the Philokalia and the philosophical, anthropological and theological influences that contributed to its information. It presents a critical account of the pathologies of the soul, the remedies for these pathologies, and the therapeutic goals as portrayed by the authors of the Philokalia. It then offers a critical engagement of this material with a contemporary understanding of psychotherapy. Finally, it raises important questions about the relationship between thoughts and prayer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf4m9

1 Influences and Foundations from: The Philokalia and the Inner Life
Abstract: Explorations of the inner world of human beings might reasonably be expected to be dependent upon the outer world in which they live: its culture, its history, traditions, assumptions, language and beliefs. Such things influence the way in which we perceive ourselves and thus, at least potentially, the way in which we think. If we are to understand properly what the authors and compilers of the Philokaliahad to say about the inner life it would therefore seem to be important to consider the nature of their outer world, and especially its anthropological assumptions and beliefs. However, this immediately presents

5 Psychotherapy from: The Philokalia and the Inner Life
Abstract: If the Philokaliaoffers a diagnosis of the pathology of the human soul, a pharmacopoeia of remedies for the passions, and a vision of what a healthy and flourishing human-being (soul and body) can aspire to, then it begins to sound as though thePhilokaliais really all about the health and therapy of the soul or psyche (ѱυχή). Furthermore, some of the subjects tackled by thePhilokaliasound very similar to the concerns of psychological medicine: Evagrios seems to be very aware of unconscious processes, acedia bears a marked apparent resemblance to depression, the ensnaring hostile pleasures of the

8 Desire and the Absolute Original from: Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: In parts 1 and 2, we tried to see how desire might pass beyond dialectical self-mediation to the metaxological community of being. I now want to develop the possibilities afforded by the metaxological view to provide some further picture of that limiting otherness, especially as it is disclosed through the sublime as aesthetic infinitude and through agapeic otherness. I will draw on many of the key notions discussed previously—for instance, the contrast between desire as lacking and agapeic goodwill, the sense of overdetermined being of original selfhood, the coexistence in human desire of an exigence for immanent wholeness and

1 Surveying Chinese Indigenous Theological Approaches from: A Double Vision Hermeneutic
Abstract: The story told in the introduction shows an indigenous Christian experience that invites further theological reflection. It involves a self, the subject, within which the Chinese culture and tradition and biblical teachings both form their respective effects. In terms of my double identity, as a Chinese Christian who has inherited Chinese tradition as well as Judaic-Christian tradition, I have many predecessors who have reflected on the dialog and integration of two traditions and two texts. This chapter intends to provide a context within which my own double vision hermeneutics will be compared. The earliest and most remarkable attempts in this

Book Title: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond-Essays in Old and New Testament
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Lundbom Jack R.
Abstract: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond' places before a broad audience of students and general readers theological essays on both the Old and New Testaments. Theology is seen to derive from a number of sources: the biblical language, biblical rhetoric and composition, academic disciplines other than philosophy, and above all a careful exegesis of the biblical text. The essay on Psalm 23 makes use of anthropology and human-development theory; the essay on Deuteronomy incorporates Wisdom themes; the essay called "Jeremiah and the Created Order" looks at ideas not only about God and creation but also about the seldom-considered idea of God and a return to chaos; and the essay on the "Confessions of Jeremiah" examines, not the words that this extraordinary prophet was given by God to preach, but what he himself felt and experienced in the office to which he was called. One essay on "Biblical and theological themes" includes a translation into the African language of Lingala, which weaves together the story of early Christianity with the more recent founding of churches in Africa and Asia. Jack R. Lundbom argues eloquently through these essays that theology is rooted in biblical words, in themselves, in rhetoric and their different contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf54j

12 All Great Works of God Begin in Secret from: Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: The great New Testament scholar Johannes Weiss, in commenting on the dearth of information we possess about the beginnings of the Christian church, said, “it lies in the nature of things that the first beginnings of a religious movement are obscure, and hid from the eyes of contemporaries.”² Put into theological terms, I would say that it lies in the very nature of God to begin all great works in secret. That is what I want to speak to you about this evening. Throughout the Bible, and also in our own day, we see that great works of God begin

Book Title: Hope and the Longing for Utopia-Futures and Illusions in Theology and Narrative
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: At present the battle over who defines our future is being waged most publicly by secular and religious fundamentalists. 'Hope and the Longing for Utopia' offers an alternative position, disclosing a conceptual path toward potential worlds that resist a limited view of human potential and the gift of religion. In addition to outlining the value of embracing unknown potentialities, these twelve interdisciplinary essays explore why it has become crucial that we commit to hoping for values that resist traditional ideological commitments. Contextualized by contemporary writing on utopia, and drawing from a wealth of times and cultures ranging from Calvin’s Geneva to early twentieth-century Japanese children’s stories to Hollywood cinema, these essays cumulatively disclose the fundamental importance of resisting tantalizing certainties while considering the importance of the unknown and unknowable. Beginning with a set of four essays outlining the importance of hope and utopia as diagnostic concepts, and following with four concrete examples, the collection ends with a set of essays that provide theological speculations on the need to embrace finitude and limitations in a world increasingly enframed by secularizing impulses. Overall, this book discloses how hope and utopia illuminate ways to think past simplified wishes for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5h7

12 No-Places for Sacred Communities: from: Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: In David fincher’s 1998 cult classic Fight Club,based on Chuck palahniuk’s 2005 novel, edward norton plays an anonymous protagonist lured away from a corporate life of khakis and power points by the charismatic proclamations of Brad pitt’s tyler durden. durden’s message responds to social conditions in the late twentieth and early twenty-first century, unmasking the twinned ideological frameworks supporting America: consumerism and religion. I base this assessment on paul ricoeur’s discussion of the conservative nature of ideology, which “conserves, in the sense of making firm the human order that could be shattered by natural or historical forces, by external

Book Title: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology-Theological Reflections on Rationality and Agency with Special Reference to Paul Ricoeur and G.W.F. Hegel
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Ille George
Abstract: The present study seeks to respond theologically to current discussions about ideas of self from the perspective of God’s action in and towards the world. Its aim is to trace a view of rationality that follows the drama of God’s engagement with the world, thus involving dying and resurrection, ascesis and abundance, suffering witness and Eucharistic communion. Since, as Calvin notes, knowledge of God and knowledge of self are intimately bound together, this exercise of discerning the shape of a theological rationality in the present arena of competing promises of meaning and truth is carried out on two levels: the theological and the anthropological.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5zz

Introduction from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The present study seeks to respond theologically to such a situation from the perspective of God’s action in and towards the world. Its aim is to

1 The Search for Foundation: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: As a beginning philosopher, Ricoeur found himself at the juncture of three major philosophical orientations: the French reflexive philosophy, the philosophy of existence of Gabriel Marcel and Karl Jaspers, and Husserl’s descriptive phenomenology.¹ French reflexive philosophy appears in Ricoeur’s own description as a way of thinking which can be traced back to the Cartesian cogito, through Kant and the French post-Kantianism, having Jean Nabert as its most prominent figure.² If preoccupation with epistemological issues, translated in the predominance of matters of justification and certitude, has been the overriding concern of such a line of thought, what Ricoeur retains from reflexive

2 The Ontological Horizon: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: In his “Intellectual Autobiography,” with a visible uneasiness, Ricoeur attempts to explain the absence of the promised “Poetics of the Will” from his anthropological project. He goes on to say, however, that

3 Hermeneutics, Creation, and the “Re-enchantment” of the World from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Does Ricoeur’s proposal enable us to experience the world as “Creation”? Can we, following the indication of his thought, not only “think” the truth but know it? With these questions we have reached a turning point. Our investigation so far, while mainly “descriptive,” has already raised a number of theological questions in an effort to ground theologically our experience of the world in general, Ricoeur’s philosophical undertaking in particular. Since, in the Apostle Paul’s words, it is indeed in God that “we live, and move, and have our being” (Acts 17:28), no serious concern for experience and meaning can genuinely

4 Hegel the Philosopher of Revelation from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to set Hegel in context. I shall formally adopt a historical-systematic approach without delving too deeply into the details of Hegel’s conceptual intricacies. Nonetheless, some general clarifications will be attempted about both content and method, the nature of the subject matter, and the nature of the approach itself. By looking at the kind of claims Hegel makes within both the overall perspective of his philosophy and the general intellectual climate of his day, a particular interpretative position will come to view, pleading for the centrality of the theological framework of interpretation, if a holistic

6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,

7 Epiphanies of Presence: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Theological discourse, whether implicitly or explicitly, is in search of some kind of justification. It was because of its contamination by various intellectual heresies, old and new, that often this justificatory practice rather than letting the discourse flow beyond itself, tended to lead it into the fortress of a regulatory concept, practice or institution or a contingent or illusory foundation. But as history so often witnesses, it is precisely when discourse guards itself most securely that it must face the most formidable objection because it loses its ecstatic character, ceasing thus to reflect the overriding feature of its source.

8 Conclusions: from: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: We have seen in the course of our argument that by following the adventures of the modern subject, within the framework created by a mere dispute between the “inside” and the “outside” one cannot adequately speak of the emergence of Truth. That is why neither the expressivist, “constructive” self nor its “receptive” counterpart configured by the “outside” is ultimately able to convey the full dimension of this emergence. I have suggested here that a theological reply to this epistemological decision must question the more general framework of its theological assumptions. My proposal has gradually emerged as a response to what

Book Title: Biblical Knowing-A Scriptural Epistemology of Error
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bartholomew Craig G.
Abstract: The Christian Scriptures could be theologically described as beginning and ending with an epistemological outlook. The first episode of humanity’s activity centers on the knowledge of good and evil. The final stage of humanity is pictured by Jeremiah as a universally prophetic and knowing society: 'And no longer shall each one teach his neighbor and each his brother, saying, 'Know the Lord', for they shall all know me, from the least of them to the greatest, declares the Lord' (Jer 31:34). What happens to knowledge in between? In this work, Dru Johnson reconsiders epistemology with the tool of biblical theology: an approach to knowledge as developed in Genesis 2 and explored throughout the Tanakh (i.e., the Old Testament) and New Testament. By re-examining the neglected idea that Christian Scripture might be developing robust descriptions of knowing that can direct us today, the ambition of this book is to lay the groundwork for a biblical theology of knowledge - how knowledge is broached, described, and how error is rectified within the texts of the Christian canon. Proper knowing as it occurs in the Scriptures means that there are better and worse ways to know. Even more, the epistemology that is found to be advocated in Scripture is not relegated to religious knowing. Johnson argues that scientific epistemology and biblical epistemology make significant points of contact suggesting that they are fundamentally consistent with each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf65j

Introduction from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: The Christian Scriptures could be theologically described as beginning and ending with an epistemological outlook. The first episode of humanity’s activity centers on the knowledge of good and evil. The final stage of humanity is pictured by Jeremiah as a universally prophetic and knowing society: “And no longer shall each one teach his neighbor and each his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord,’ for they shall all know me, from the least of them to the greatest, declares the Lord” (Jer 31: 34). What happens to knowledge in between? We intend to hash out epistemology with the tool of biblical theology:

4 Erroneous Knowing in Exodus and Beyond from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: So far, we have attempted to show that the canon is concerned to portray an epistemological process at the very outset of humanity’s history. What does the Tanakh then do with this view of knowing throughout its texts? Stated otherwise, is the epistemological process of Genesis 2–3 unique or normative? We contend below that Scripture recounts Israel’s errors in terms of Genesis 2–3, where knowing is contingent upon which authority is being heeded, and then whether or not the knower participates in the prescribed route to knowledge (e.g., not eating the fruit of prohibition). Proper knowing happens when

6 Scientific Epistemology, Wisdom, and the Epistles from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: In the next two chapters, we will take a dramatic turn toward recent scholarship in epistemology. We have examined both the historical books of the Tanakh and the Gospel accounts in which an epistemological process is present, relevant, and persistent. Early on, we made the claim that this view should not be reduced to a religious epistemology, but that it covers knowing writ large. In this chapter, we want to argue that there is an extant view of scientific epistemology that provides us with an overlapping model of what we see in the Christian Scriptures. How scientists know, as an

7 Broad Reality and Contemporary Epistemology from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: Thus far, we have argued that the epistemological process found in the Scriptures appears to have monolithic features that span across Scripture: authority, authentication, embodiment, participation, and maximic direction in order to know. Of

9 Implications for Theologians and the Church from: Biblical Knowing
Abstract: For the purpose of this text, it is impossible to describe all of the implications of the epistemological process as proposed here. But, in an effort to show the practical matters that have to do with the lives of theologians, philosophers, teachers, pastors, and more, we will briefly consider some reflections and paint pictures of what knowing looks like as a real life process. Further, we will describe some reverberations from thinking about the church’s normal activities as epistemological processes, seeking to enliven our wisdom together in the church.

Book Title: Spiritual Complaint-The Theology and Practice of Lament
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bulkeley Tim
Abstract: Every life, and every land and people, has reasons for lament and complaint. This collection of essays explores the biblical foundations and the contemporary resonances of lament literature. This new work presents a variety of responses to tragedy and a world out of joint are explored. These responses arise from Scripture, from within the liturgy of the church, and from beyond the church; in contemporary life (the racially conflicted land of Aotearoa- New Zealand, secular music concerts and cyber-space). The book thus reflects upon theological and pastoral handling of such experience, as it bridges these different worlds. It brings together in conversation specialists from different fields of academy and church to provide a resource for integrating faith and scholarship in dark places.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6b4

6 Blurring the Boundaries: from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Boase Elizabeth
Abstract: The affinity between Isa 63:7—64:11 and the psalms of communal lament has long been noted.¹ Similarities with the book of Lamentations, and the penitential prayers of Ezra 9 and Neh 9 have also been identified.² Discussion as to the relationship between these texts has frequently been based within the methodological framework of form and/or tradition criticism,³ however, within this chapter, Isa 63:7—64:11 will be discussed from the perspective of the rhetorical and ideological climate of the exilic and post-exilic period, drawing on the literary framework of Mikhail Bakhtin.⁴ The chapter seeks to argue that Isaiah 63:7—64:11, through

9 Wrestling with Lamentations in Christian Worship from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Parry Robin A.
Abstract: The book of Lamentations was birthed in order to bring a deep and profound grief before the throne of Yhwh in the context of communal worship. It found ongoing relevance for the people of God in the worship of Jewish and Christian communities over the centuries and, if it is to function as Holy Scripturetoday, it must do so by finding a place in the ongoing worshipping life of synagogue and church. This chapter offers some reflections onChristiantheological interpretation of Lamentations in doxological contexts.

10 Liturgy and Lament from: Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Buchanan Colin
Abstract: [Personal: I am an Anglican liturgist from England, and I notified Tim Meadowcroft of Laidlaw that I would be in Auckland in February 2011, simply hoping to meet for a cup of coffee. However, he brought me into the theological seminar on “Lament,” to contribute from my own discipline. I was well aware of the earlier earthquake in Christchurch (I had just been there on my travels), as well as of the more tragic mining disaster on the West Coast; and the raw memories of these events were sobering factors in my preparation and presentation. What none of us could

Book Title: From Faith to Faith-John Wesley’s Covenant Theology and the Way of Salvation
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Noble T. A.
Abstract: The very title of this volume makes a claim and extends an invitation. Simply put, the claim is this: John Wesley was an adherent of covenant theology. Consequently, a proper understanding of his theological thought - and of his soteriology in particular - is impossible apart from accounting for the influence of covenant theology on him. The invitation then, is to investigate Wesley's thought in light of this claim. Having started his research simply as an investigation into a rather curious distinction Wesley made among those to whom he gave spiritual counsel (some people, he said, have "the faith of a servant"; others have "the faith of a son"), Rodes soon realised that covenant theology was an immensely powerful influence on Wesley's thought, and that he was even able to significantly and creatively adapted it to the template of his evangelical Arminianism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6d5

Introduction from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: The very title of this volume makes a claim and extends an invitation. Simply put, the claim is this: John Wesley was an adherent of covenant theology. The invitation is to investigate Wesley’s thought in light of this claim. Accepting this invitation is not without risk, as well-established conclusions regarding Wesley’s thought may need to be revised and their implications for praxis reconsidered. But neither is it without reward: namely, a new and deeper appreciation of the substantial theological underpinnings of his pastoral convictions and counsel.

CHAPTER 3 John Wesley’s Amendment of Covenant Theology from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: What we know of John Wesley’s covenant theology comes by way of the minutes of Conferences, the letters borne of controversy, counsel, and reflection, and the sermons, extracts, and journal entries comprising the Wesley corpus. These chronicle his encounter with the covenant theology instilled in the theological understanding of his companions, converts, and antagonists. One indicator of its status as the common currency of theological discourse is Wesley’s confidence that his use of its technical terminology would be understood by his audience. And yet, as the opening paragraph of his sermon “The Righteousness of Faith” clearly demonstrates, he recognized that

CHAPTER 4 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology and Holy Scripture from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: Despite the evidence of Wesley’s thoughtful distillation of the covenant theology mediated to him, we might yet be tempted to conclude that he appreciated its theological value only as a craftsman prizes and uses each tool in his toolbox. But suppose covenant theology was not just a tool in Wesley’s hands? Suppose it was a core feature of the infrastructure of his theological thought and consequently influenced the way he used each tool in his toolbox?

CHAPTER 5 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology in Context: from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: As the relationship of the servant-son metaphor to covenant theology comes more into view, its value to Wesley as a definitive narrative of his vision of the way of salvation is more clearly apparent. After all, the biblical foundation of the metaphor was indisputable and its capacity for imaging “the two grand manifestations of God, the legal and the evangelical” had established it from pulpit to pew as a familiar and theologically trustworthy summary of God’s saving activity. And yet, the soteriological content of the metaphor is more extensive than its overt relationship to the superstructure of the covenant of

CHAPTER 6 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology in Context: from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: It is increasingly apparent that while there was a strong consensus on many aspects of the theological core of covenant theology and general agreement among Calvinists and Arminians alike on the shape of its superstructure (the covenants of works and of grace), the details were subject to nuancing. And the nuancing was soteriologically critical, as evidenced in the long-running conversations Wesley joined in progress as he sought to stake out the theological foundations of a Methodist morphology of conversion. His regard for the authority of Scripture, his commitment to preserve the Reformation doctrine of justification by faith along with his

CHAPTER 7 The Salvific Sufficiency of the Covenant of Grace from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: The attention given thus far to the context of John Wesley’s use of the servant-son metaphor has been compelled in part by the need to lay the groundwork for understanding the soteriological affirmations he expected it to convey. But it has also been compelled by the need to account for his apparent confidence that the theological repertoire of his audience was such that he could draw upon the metaphor with little or no introduction. This judgment on Wesley’s part suggests that neither the metaphor nor the primary elements of its supporting theology were original to him. Yet, it is hardly

CHAPTER 8 The Holy Spirit and the Salvific Perfection of the Covenant of Grace from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: The salvific sufficiency of the various dispensations of the covenant of grace, though variously conceived, is one of the primary soteriological affirmations of covenant theology. The sufficiency of each dispensation rests on the promise of Genesis 3:15, a promise for which the warranty is “the lamb slain from the foundation of the world.” Wesley’s vision of the way of salvation is profoundly shaped by his understanding that this promise and warranty are extended to all of fallen humanity rather than to the elect only, and by his conceiving the salvific sufficiency of the covenant of grace to be concurrent and

CHAPTER 9 “From Faith to Faith”: from: From Faith to Faith
Abstract: When Wesley spoke of “the whole process of a man reasoning, groaning, striving, and escaping from the legal to the evangelical state,”¹ he was bearing witness that there is “a definite teleology to divine grace.”² The centerpiece of this testimony was that the revelation of Christ was (and is) the salvation-historical event that demarcates the legal from the evangelical (gospel, Christian) dispensation of the covenant of grace. This was more than a theological affirmation, for even as the revelation of Christ in the course of the history of God’s saving deeds ushered all of humanity into the Christian dispensation (historically

Book Title: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul-Reflections on the Work of Douglas Campbell
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Adams Edward
Abstract: In his work 'Deliverance of God' Douglas Campbell presents what Chris Tilling considers a "complete rereading of Paul’s letters that genuinely offers a way beyond problems associated with old and new perspectives. And his resultant picture of Paul’s theology generally, and the Apostle’s soteriology particularly, is beautiful, liberating, consistent, exegetically rigorous, theologically aware and pastorally compelling. It captures, I think, the best of the old perspective, with its concern to speak energetically about the God who saves, and it takes seriously the concerns of the new perspective on Second Temple Judaism. But in remarkable and jarringly elegant ways, it moves beyond them both." This collection of essays is divided into two sections. Part One analyses key aspects of Campbell’s account of the problem confronting readers of Paul. Part Two analyses key aspects of Campbell’s proposed solution to to the current confused state of Pauline interpretation. This book is essential reading for anyone involved in the study of Paul.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6fp

1 A Review of Douglas Campbell’s The Deliverance of God from a Theological Perspective from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Torrance Alan J.
Abstract: I have been invited to assess Douglas Campbell’s door-stopper of a tome from a theological perspective. Given that this is a work in Pauline scholarship by a leading New Testament scholar, what is the justification for involving a theologian? Clearly, it is because the argumentation of this book is driven by a theological critique of certain key methodological, epistemological, and indeed, ontological suppositions that have functioned to sustain what Campbell calls “justification discourse”—an approach to Pauline interpretation that Campbell argues is outmoded, confused, and ultimately incoherent.

3 The Current Crisis: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Campbell Douglas A.
Abstract: It is my contention that Paul, rightly understood, is a clear-sighted and courageous advocate of a revelational gospel—of Athanasianism, so to speak. His advocates in these terms within specialized Pauline circles often denote their approach “apocalyptic” (from the Greek for “revelation”).² But it is also my contention that large parts of Paul’s theological description have been captured by arianism, not

4 Campbell’s Apocalyptic Gospel and Pauline Athanasianism from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Tilling Chris
Abstract: In The Deliverance of GodDouglas campbell seeks to provide a vision of a revelatory, transformational, unconditional, and liberational Pauline theology, one that, he maintains, stands in stark contrast to readings of Paul influenced by contractual foundationalism.¹ in response to the reviews by me and Michael Gorman,² campbell elucidates his understanding of the contrast involved by speaking of it in terms of the debate between Athanasianism and Arianism. The foundationalist reading is Arian in its basic theological dynamics, and cannot stand together with but is necessarily antagonistic towards Paul’s essentially athanasian gospel. in this chapter i will explore the basic

5 “Arian” Foundationalism or “Athanasian” Apocalypticism: from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Smith J. Warren
Abstract: When I am in the company of New Testament colleagues they ask what I, as a patrologist, think of Douglas Campbell’s invocation of Athanasius and Arius to characterize the difference between his and previous readings of Romans. In their voice I detect a hint of skepticism. After all, they think of “Athanasian” and “Arian” as theological categories—markers for competing views of the trinity or Christology. What do Arius and Athanasius have to do with issues of theological method or participatory Soteriology that are at the heart of Campbell’s assessment of Romans? This skepticism is understandable given the way the

7 A Response to Campbell’s “Connecting the Dots” from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Hilborn David
Abstract: Douglas Campbell has produced an ambitious interdisciplinary tour de force in The Deliverance of God.Those who, like me, are not new testament specialists but who seek to ensure that their work in other theological fields is informed by contemporary biblical scholarship, will surely appreciate its rich synthesis of systematics, ethics, social theology, and church history with biblical exegesis and hermeneutics.

13 Reading Paul’s ΔIKAIO-Language. from: Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Hafemann Scott
Abstract: Theologically, we ought to agree with Campbell’s concern to combat all “Western contractualism,” which is so “congenial to modern thought and culture.”¹ Contrary to Paul’s perspective, such a worldview entails “a fundamentally rationalistic and moralistic, and invariably quite individualizing, anthropology” based on “a conception of the human person that primarily governs itself.”² Campbell is right to reject any anthropology in which “an essentially autonomous individual sets off on a quest for salvation driven and governed by her own conceptions.”³

Book Title: The Dialogical Spirit-Christian Reason and Theological Method in the Third Millennium
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Yong Amos
Abstract: Contemporary proposals for Christian theology from post-liberalism to Radical Orthodoxy and beyond have espoused their own methodological paradigms. Those who have ventured into this domain of theological method, however, have usually had to stake their claims vis-à-vis trends in what may be called the contemporary "post-al" age, whether of the post-modern, post-Christendom, post-Enlightenment, post-Western, or post-colonial varieties. This volume is unique among offerings in this arena in suggesting a way forward that engages on each of these fronts, and does so from a particularistic Christian perspective without giving up on Christian theology's traditional claims to universality. This is accomplished through the articulation of a distinctive dialogical methodology informed by both Pentecostalism and Evangelicalism, one rooted in the Christian salvation-history narrative of Incarnation and Pentecost that is yet open to the world in its many and various cultural, ethnic, religious, and disciplinary discourses. Amos Yong here engages with twelve different interlocutors representing different ecumenical, religious, and disciplinary perspectives. 'The Dialogical Spirit' thus not only proffers a model for Christian theological method suitable for the twenty-first century global context but also exemplifies this methodological approach through its interactions across the contemporary scholarly, inter-religious, and theological landscape.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6g6

Introduction from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Soon after completing my PhD thesis I wrote a book on theological method, Spirit-Word-Community: Theological Hermeneutics in Trinitarian Perspective.¹ I was motivated in this direction in part because the theological academy was caught up, around the turn of the millennium, on questions related to method,² and in part because my own graduate training under a philosophical theologian alerted me to the importance of providing methodological argumentation in a time when theological claims were no longer being received merely because they were asserted. Both trends were reactions to the post-Enlightenment world that had been emerging with increasing clarity across the last

CHAPTER 1 The Demise of Foundationalism and the Retention of Truth: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In a recent essay entitled “ The Postpositivist Choice: Tracy or Lindbeck?,” Richard Lints suggests that there are basically two methodological options available to contemporary theology: either the postmodern approach that highlights the public or universal character of theological rationality or the postliberal emphasis on intertextuality, narrative, and the cultural-linguistic framework of all knowledge.¹ Although Lints writes from within the evangelical tradition, a movement well known for taking a stand for the truth, he refrains from offering an answer to the question posed in the title, preferring instead to provide a descriptive survey of the two options.² As part of

CHAPTER 2 Pragmatist and Pragmaticist Trajectories for a Postmodern Theology from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Pragmatism, even if limited to its specifically North American and philosophical trajectories, is quite diverse.¹ Not only are pragmatist philosophers working in various areas—e.g., philosophy of science, linguistics, logic, social theory—but they are also debating issues of validity and legitimacy regarding developments within the tradition itself. It is inevitable that the classical pragmatism of Peirce, Royce, and James would have inspired a wide spectrum of philosophical projects, and that these would have been extended by the legacy of “middle pragmatists” such as Dewey, G. H. Mead, C. I. Lewis, and the Chicago School.² Even so, pragmatism was eclipsed

CHAPTER 4 The “Baptist Vision” of James Wm. McClendon Jr.: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: On 30 October 2000, shortly after completing the final pages of his Systematic Theology, James William McClendon Jr., Distinguished Scholar in Residence at Fuller Theological Seminary, returned home to be with the Lord.¹ The following review, reflection, and response to McClendon’s “baptist vision” is written in recognition of its importance for contemporary Christian theology. At the same time, insofar as it seeks to participate in, complement, and extend the theological conversation to which McClendon had devoted his life’s work, it should also be considered as a tribute to his legacy. Part one of this chapter will summarize some of the

CHAPTER 5 Whither Evangelical Theology? from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It was the appearance of Veli-Matti Kärkkäinen’s most recent book [as of the time of writing], One with God: Salvation as Deification and Justification, that occasioned the invitation to review his larger corpus in the pages of this journal.¹ My long-standing appreciation for Kärkkäinen’s theological work had previously been registered in my collecting, editing, and publishing a set of his essays in book form a few years ago.² In the editor’s introduction to that book, I noted that Kärkkäinen was fast becoming one of the more important theologians to be reckoned with in our time. He had not only already

CHAPTER 6 Radically Orthodox, Reformed, and Pentecostal: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: As “the most heavyweight theological movement twentieth-century Christianity in England has produced” ( Theology), Radical Orthodoxy has gained increasing attention and momentum in the North American theological academy. Its most recent spokesperson, James K. A. Smith, has attempted to extend the Radical Orthodoxy vision in dialogue with the Dutch Reformed tradition.¹ Clearly, the central features of “Reformed” Radical Orthodoxy empower a kind of prophetic engagement with the cultural, political, economic, and ideological domains of modern Western society. At another level, however, the globalizing features of our late modern world context mean that the dominant pagan deities are not just secularism, nihilism,

CHAPTER 11 Observation-Participation-Subjunctivation: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In anticipation of the specifically theological discussion at the end of this chapter, some authorial self-disclosure is warranted. Although I have been trained in

CHAPTER 12 Toward a Relational Apologetics in Global Context: from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Let me say up front that van den Toren’s book takes the discussion of apologetics to a whole new level.¹ In the distant background is a Kampen Theological University (Dutch-language) PhD thesis on Barth and apologetics,² from which the central ideas have been leavened by eight years of living and teaching in the Central African Republic. The work of at least four or five other books later, many of these interfacing with the theme of apologetics as well as with a broad spectrum of approaches to apologetics, informs the present contribution by this current dean of the faculty at Wycliffe

CONCLUSION from: The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It is now time to quickly review where we have come from in order to situate where we have arrived and anticipate next steps. The preceding has attempted to do theology dialogically, with twelve conversation partners, in order to exemplify an effective model of Christian theological inquiry at the beginning of the third millennium. I have also shown that such a dialogical approach is theologically funded by a pneumatological imagination as manifest particularly in the Acts narrative. Further, such a pneumatologically inspired dialogical method may be uniquely suited to enable navigation of our postfoundationalist, post-Christendom, postsecular, postmodern, and pluralistic landscape.

2 Matthew’s Genealogy from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Matthew’s narrative tells the story of Jesus. In terms of genre the narrative is an ancient form of biography¹ and the one undeniable feature of the narrative is that it follows a chronological sequence of Jesus’ life: birth, baptism, ministry in Galilee, the journey to Jerusalem, death, and resurrection. Like all stories, the structure, which arranges the individual parts so that the story is brought to a satisfying conclusion, has a beginning (Matthew 1–2, the prologue), middle (Matthew 3–25, the central section), and an end (Matthew 26–28, the passion and resurrection).²

6 “She of Uriah” from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Matthew’s genealogical reference to the fourth woman of the Old Testament is startling. Whereas the first three women are named, Bathsheba is given no personal name, but only referred to as Uriah’s wife; in this sense she is unnamed.

7 Mary from: Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: The last woman mentioned in the concluding genealogical annotation is the first woman encountered in the narrative—Mary. She appears at the final point of disruption in the genealogy, its end and climax, as mother of the Messiah (Matt 1:16).

Book Title: God's Wounds-Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of the Divine Suffering, Volume 2. Evil and Divine Suffering
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pool Jeff B.
Abstract: This book constitutes the second volume of a three-volume study of Christian testimonies to divine suffering: God's Wounds: Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering, vol. 2, Evil and Divine Suffering. The larger study focuses its inquiry into the testimonies to divine suffering themselves, seeking to allow the voices that attest to divine suffering to speak freely, then to discover and elucidate the internal logic or rationality of this family of testimonies, rather than defending these attestations against the dominant claims of classical Christian theism that have historically sought to eliminate such language altogether from Christian discourse about the nature and life of God. This second volume of studies proceeds on the basis of the presuppositions of this symbol, those implicit attestations that provide the conditions of possibility for divine suffering-that which constitutes divine vulnerability with respect to creation-as identified and examined in the first volume of this project: an understanding of God through the primary metaphor of love (God is love); and an understanding of the human as created in the image of God, with a life (though finite) analogous to the divine life-the imago Dei as love. The second volume then investigates the first two divine wounds or modes of divine suffering to which the larger family of testimonies to divine suffering normally attest: (1) divine grief, suffering because of betrayal by the beloved human or human sin; and (2) divine self-sacrifice, suffering for the beloved human in its bondage to sin or misery, to establish the possibility of redemption and reconciliation. Each divine wound, thus, constitutes a response to a creaturely occasion. The suffering in each divine wound also occurs in two stages: a passive stage and an active stage. In divine grief, God suffers because of human sin, betrayal of the divine lover by the beloved human: divine sorrow as the passive stage of divine grief; and divine anguish as the active stage of divine grief. In divine self-sacrifice, God suffers in response to the misery or bondage of the beloved human's infidelity: divine travail (focused on the divine incarnation in Jesus of Nazareth) as the active stage of divine self-sacrifice; and divine agony (focused on divine suffering in the crucifixion of Jesus of Nazareth) as the passive stage of divine self-sacrifice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf8fn

Introduction to Division Five: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: The verb, “to sacrifice,” originates from the Latin term “ sacrifico,” a word constructed by combining the word “sacra,” from the Latin word “sacer,” meaning “holy” or “sacred,” and “facio,” meaning “to make” or “to do.” Thus,etymologically, “to sacrifice” means to make

Book Title: Martin Luther and Buddhism- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Moltmann Jürgen
Abstract: Martin Luther and Buddhism: Aesthetics of Suffering carefully traces the historical and theological context of Luther's breakthrough in terms of articulating justification and justice in connection to the Word of God and divine suffering. Chung critically and constructively engages in dialogue with Luther and with later interpreters of Luther such as Barth and Moltmann, placing the Reformer in dialogue not only with Asian spirituality and religions but also with an emerging global theology of religions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf98j

Introduction from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: This book is designed to bring the great reformer Martin Luther into dialogue with Asian theology and spirituality, especially that of Mahayana Buddhism. A common basis for interreligious dialogue between Luther and Buddhism lies in the interpretation of dukkha(suffering), in which an attempt is made to construct a theological aesthetics of divine suffering and human suffering. Therefore, it is of special significance to contextualize Luther’s theological insights and their ecumenical repercussions in an encounter with other traditions. In recent ecumenical conversation, Luther is examined in depth as we see him in his theological struggle and project. In this ecumenical

2 The Uniqueness of Luther’s Life and Theology from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: The theology of Martin Luther cannot be fully understood without considering his spiritual and social biography, at the heart of which lies his struggle for and discovery of God’s justification for all. As all the theological structures and ideas of Luther are inspired and extended by his teaching on justification, so his doctrine of justification becomes the driving force of his whole life-struggle and the larger program of the reformation. Martin Luther (1483–1546) is thought to have been born on November 10, 1483, in a middle-class house in Eisleben, and named after the saint of the day, Martin of

4 Luther and Theology of the Cross in Context from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: As we have seen from Luther’s theological development in relation to scholastic theology (in chapter 3), Luther’s understanding of theologia cruciscannot adequately be understood without the background of the late medieval heritage with which Luther struggled. Scholastic thinkers—the “schoolmen” as they were called—are often represented as debating earnestly, if pointlessly, how many angels could dance on the head of a pin, or whether or not God is able to create a stone that God cannot lift up, etc. Scholasticism was regarded by the humanists at the beginning of the sixteenth century as pointless, arid intellectual speculation over

6 Luther and Asian Eucharistic Theology from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: What shapes and characterizes Luther’s ecclesiology is his theology of Word and Sacraments. In this chapter we meet Luther’s eucharistic theology in relation to Roman Catholic teaching. Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper, when seen in a time-related and eschatological dimension, will engage the spirituality of ancestral rites that has been controversial until the present in Asian churches and theologies. Would it be possible to deepen Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper in terms of his keen insight into Jesus’ descent into hell? If we perceive a real presence of Jesus Christ in the Eucharist in relation to Christ’s total

8 Conclusion from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: However, when it comes to God’s appearance in Christ’s life and death, a theological discourse on aesthetics is not sufficient without reference to God’s loving

Afterword: from: Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: Luther’s theological aesthetics of God’s glory in Christ’s suffering love lays a basis for reshaping and redirecting motives of Asian post-confessional theology toward a different understanding and transformation of Luther. When Luther encounters a postmodern context, he can best be understood by challenging and transcending him. His doctrine of justification, theology of the cross, Trinity, law and gospel, eucharistic theology, and two kingdoms theory among others are seen at the point of the death, resurrection and reconciliation of the crucified Christ, the scope and reach of which is of inclusive, universal character allowing and tolerating other ways. If aesthetics are

Book Title: Facing the Other-John Paul II, Levinas, and the Body
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): de Malherbe Brice
Abstract: What is the significance of the body? What might phenomenology contribute to a theological account of the body? And what is gained by prolonging the overlooked dialogue between St. John Paul II and Emmanuel Levinas? Nigel Zimmermann answers these questions through the agreements and the tensions between two of the most important thinkers of the twentieth century. John Paul II, the Polish pope, philosopher, and theologian, and Emmanuel Levinas, the French-Jewish philosopher of Lithuanian heritage, were provocative thinkers who courageously faced and challenged the assumptions of their age. Both held the human person in high regard and did their thinking with constant reference to God and to theological language. Zimmermann does not shirk from the challenges of each thinker and does not hide their differences. However, he shows how they bequeath a legacy regarding the body that we would overlook at significant ethical peril. We are called, Zimmermann argues, to face the other. In this moment God refuses a banal marginalisation and our call to responsibility for the other person is issued in their disarming vulnerability. In the body, philosophy, theology, and ethics converge to call us to glory, even in the paradox of lowly suffering.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf9gn

Introduction from: Facing the Other
Abstract: This book adds to a litany of works in recent years that argue for a theological significance of the body. It shares the sentiment of Matthew’s gospel that the theological meaning of the body exceeds outer apparel, even the language used to describe it or the metaphors with which it is dressed. It is indeed “more than clothes.” However, this book resists the temptation to merely propose a carnivalesque or reductionist postmodern account of the human person in which goodness and truth are tied to the pleasures of the body. Rather, the approaches of two notable twentieth-century thinkers are teased

2 John Paul II’s Theology of the Body from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body in the thought of John Paul II is situated within a prolific literary legacy for philosophy and theology.¹ Here, his original contribution to theological anthropology will be of interest, specifically his development of a theology of the body.² This chapter has three sections. The first is on the formative influences upon the younger Karol Wojtyla, the second outlines his theological framework which accentuated his thought as Bishop of Rome, and the third looks closely at Man and Woman He Created Them. The latter was written while Wojtyla was Archbishop of Krakow, but presented and published

3 Levinas, Alterity, and the Problem of the Body from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body is a problematic feature in the thought of Emmanuel Levinas. Here, it will be considered in light of his Jewish tradition and the ambiguity of the term “God” in his writings, as well as some theological responses. In both his major works, Totality and InfinityandOtherwise Than Being, Levinas refers often to the body. In the former, he offers a concise description of its dual nature: “To be a bodyis on the one handto stand[se tenir], to be master of oneself, and, on the other hand, to stand on the earth,

5 On What is Given: from: Facing the Other
Abstract: The place of the body in John Paul II and Levinas has been studied in detail, as well as major themes that emerge from both, especially erosand sexual desire. It has been seen how the problematic understanding of the body in postmodern thought might be theologically situated. While consideration was given to that which isdesiredin the body, this chapter considers what isgivenin the body. In addition to the dialogue between John Paul and Levinas, the work of Jean-Luc marion will be considered further, whose work explicitly crosses the divide between philosophy and theology. Marion’s “saturated

Conclusion: from: Facing the Other
Abstract: Three concluding judgments can be made based on the study of the place of the body in Karol Wojtyla/John Paul II and Levinas. First, that the fruitful dialogue between John Paul and Levinas has been largely overlooked. Second, John Paul and Levinas’ approaches to the body are discordant (more on this below). Third, John Paul’s account of the body is a positive theological development that is made clearer and enhanced by reading Levinas. In consideration of these three judgments, a way is opened up that indicates how a theological approach to the body can be fruitfully developed. In fact, John

Book Title: Contextual Theology-The Drama of Our Times
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Matheny Paul Duane
Abstract: For centuries, the global understanding of Church has been shaped by Western theological imperatives. Yet today, the decline of institutional religion in the West, and the extraordinary growth of the Church of the global South mean that a radical movement beyond such theologies is required. In this book, Paul Matheny argues that the Church would benefit by becoming more contextualized and less Western. Contextual Theology is an attempt to address that issue and to examine how a reassessment of the relationship of the Gospel to cultural context can advance this critical and necessary development. Through an accessible and critical approach, Matheny considers the historical background to contextual theology. In the same way, he aims to show how to use contextual methods to think theologically and act missiologically in different cultural contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf9rs

Introduction from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: Hopes that the future of theology lies among the new “contextual” theologies of the “new Christianity” abound. Could these theologies replace the theologies of the Atlantic cultures with their roots in ancient theology and doctrine? For some this hope has given carte blanche to any theology from the global South that calls into question traditional “Western” theology. For others the emergence of non-Western Christian thinking is insignificant for it seems to have little to add to the theological debate. I believe these claims to be misleading and disingenuous. The theologies of the “new Christianity” cannot be easily pigeonholed in anti-traditional

2 Contextual Methods within the Theological Processes of Christian Churches from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: Missiologists, such as Lamin Sanneh and Andrew Walls, have made it clear that the migratory nature of Christianity is evident today in a dramatic way. We are facing a new Christianity centered geographically, socially, culturally, economically, and politically in environments unfamiliar to the West, such that our theological work is called upon to think creatively in terms of the ideas and cultural life, the beliefs and practices of the churches of the new center.¹ The reality of a new Christianity in the offing is the stimulus for a commitment to an ecumenical and ecclesial theology and praxis of mission. It

3 The Helpfulness of Theology in the Life of the Church from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: The rise of the “new Christianity” has led Christian theologians to retrieve insights within Christian traditions that are helpful as the faith takes root and forms new and vital communities and practices. According to these traditions, good theology is not a search for universal truths that can be applied in all contexts and times, but rather an engagement with the lives of peoples and communities. The eschatological framework of Christian thinking and the centrality of theological theories of God’s grace ensure the openness of Christian thinking to new contexts. The creation of new Christian communities is a social and cultural

4 Contextual Theology Becomes an Issue from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: As a “new Christianity” began to unhinge from dependency upon the Christian institutions of the Atlantic churches, the awareness that new ways of doing theology would emerge grew gradually and in some circles begrudgingly. In time the search for insights from Christian thinking led to engagement. Theologians such as Karl Barth, Paul Lehmann, and Visser ’T Hooft addressed the theoretical side of problems that had to be faced, such as the form an ecumenical theology can take and the relation between dogma and ethics. The key, it was believed, is found in the deceptively simple principle that faith informs theological

5 Sources and Processes: from: Contextual Theology
Abstract: An argument of this book is that the proper theological use of contextual methods is healthy and promotes and enriches the life of faith among Christians around the globe. As the theological process is enriched by contextual methods, the community is enriched and empowered to greater service of God in Christ. This is a claim that needs to be illustrated and defended. In this chapter, I will attempt to examine this thesis.

CHAPTER ONE Theological Ethics in Transition from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter looks at the conversation between theology and ethics in its historical transition from modernity to postmodernity. The first part of the chapter discusses how the relationship of theology and ethics leads to an inherent tension within the strategies of theological and Christian ethics. The second part provides a general summary of the characteristics of modernity and its affect on modern theological ethics, with particular references to Rene Descartes, Immanuel Kant, and Friedrich Schleiermacher. Two of the most important characteristics of modern theology and ethics are the emphasis on poesisandpraxis, which leads to two important rami-fications, the

CHAPTER TWO Barth’s Early Ethics and the Trinitarian Other from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter looks at the early development of the theological ethics of Karl Barth. Because of his significant wrestling with the problems of modern theology and ethics in the early twentieth century, the early years of Barth’s thinking (1916–31) provides an important point of departure for our study. Barth rejects the anthropocentric “immanent frame” of liberal theology, by shifting theology away from personal religious consciousness toward a genuine search for the divine trinitarian Other; his method is deconstructive and critical before it becomes constructive and positivist. With this in mind, two important points must be stated about Barth’s early

CHAPTER THREE Barth’s Social Ethics: from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In the last chapter, we saw how Barth, in his early writings, responded theologically and practically to the events around him during 1910s and 1920s. Reversing the dominant structure of modern ethics, which attempts to secure human freedom by separating humanity from God, Barth saw clearly that human freedom depends upon God’s freedom to act in relatio. Thus, his task, in these early writings, was not to simply contrast God’s action and our action as the way to preserve human autonomy, but instead attempts to demonstrate how divine agency establishes, rather than negates, human agency. This theme more fully emerges

CHAPTER FIVE From Modern to Postmodern Ethics from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter shifts our focus from social theory to ethical philosophy, showing how it too has been shaped by the transition from modernity to postmodernity. In chapters 1–2, we introduced this theological transition by looking at the shift from Kant and Schleiermacher to Barth. In the last chapter, we discussed characteristics of postmodernity as understood within current social theory, and concluded that social theory, by itself, cannot provide an answer to the problem of moral epistemology in social ethics. Although social theory makes positive contributions to our understanding of the social world we inhabit, it fails to provide a

CHAPTER EIGHT Witness and the Powers from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter explores further Barth’s ethics of reconciliation as a “responsible witness of the Word of God” serving both “God and men” ( CD IV/3: 609). The Yes of responsible moral judgment corresponds, in this chapter, to the No of resistance against the powers. This chapter begins with a theological discussion of the powers and its relation to ethics as it pertains to the subjects of evil, eschatology, and reconciliation. Central to this is a discussion of Christ’s victory over the powers, the triumph ofChristus victor. Following this general discussion is a specific analysis of Barth’s discussion of the “spiritual

CHAPTER NINE Witness and Public Ethics: from: Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter concludes this section exploring themes in Barth’s theological ethics in the context of contemporary Christian ethics. We have mostly been concerned with theoretical rather than practical issues, thereby looking at issues like moral knowledge, agency, and judgment. These various theoretical issues that Barth began struggling with in the early twentieth century still remain with us a century later. After a period of great liberal optimism and growing internationalism came the crisis of World War I. This horrific event challenged Barth and others of his generation to rethink strategies of Christian ethics, both in method and in practice. Central

Foreword from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: Today it would be difficult for any one theologian to write a complete, new Summa. Yet in this wonderful book, Antonio López offers us no less than a short, indicativeSumma theologiaefor our times, which points the way to a new theological and philosophical synthesis.

Introduction from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: The mystery of birth fills our existence with joy, hope, and wonder, but it does more than this as well:it calls us to ponder the mystery of the positivity of being. There are several layers of meaning to the mystery of being born, and these layers, though intrinsically and circularly related, are distinct but not independent. The first meaning, perhaps the most obvious but not the least important, is the biological. Life, the fruit of the loving union between a father and a mother, is given to us with and through a corporeal, organic existence. Our very body continually refers

II. Concrete Singularity from: Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: The engagement of the whole of ourselves with the whole of reality, and with the center of both, who is God, calls us to recognize the positivity of all that is. With all its dramatic tensions, originary experience reveals that being itself is good quagiven, that it is good to exist with others, and that the task for life is given with our destiny. It also reveals how every concrete singular is thus bound together in a complex, manifold unity in which each is fully itself.¹ The preceding chapter’s anthropological reflection now opens up into a path to see

1 (Re)Framing History: from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: As with scholarship on any historical figure, much has changed in how the Venerable Bede has been understood, specifically as an historian and with respect to what he was trying to accomplish in his Historia ecclesiastica gentis anglorum. This chapter will explore historiographical issues beginning with Plummer’s introduction to the 1896 edition of theHistoriaand ending with more recent publications on Bede and his histories. I will show how scholars wrestled with integrating Bede’s theological, exegetical, and historical works into even a quasi-coherent account throughout the twentieth century, while highlighting theoretical obstacles that caused them difficulties. Due to the

3 Interpreting Genesis: from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: The preceding chapter showed that Bede did not figurally exegete events in the English Church’s history, despite frequent opportunities to do so. I will argue in this chapter that Bede’s commentary on Genesis and how he reads the creation of time, history, and the world displays a theological and philosophical ambiguity that factors into how Bede conceives of God’s action or providential caring for history and humanity. Using In genesimas my point of departure, I am following Charles Jones who describes Bede’s commentary as “God’s Word on Nature and Grace.”¹ In order to highlight what I think are Bede’s

5 Bede and Frank Ankersmit: from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: Up to this point, I have tried to show how Bede’s practice of history was deeply theological yet ran into some difficulties that someone like Augustine was able to avoid when he came to the literal sense of Genesis 1. One of these problems revolves around how language refers in its literal and historical usage. Recall that Bede read the days in Genesis 1 as literal 24-hour days, despite Augustine’s unwillingness to affirm such a reading in his literal commentary on Genesis. For Bede the literal and the allegorical were in tension with each other; when one moves to allegory,

Conclusion from: Allegorizing History
Abstract: For the sake of clarification, and since my argument has ventured across disciplines and time periods, I want to reiterate and summarize my argument and what it has accomplished. Chapter 1 set the stage in two ways for my argument. First, by tracing the fault lines in contemporary Bedan scholarship regarding his Ecclesiastical HistoryI put my own argument within a specific contemporary conversation. Second, I teased out implicit historiographical, philosophical, and theological issues within that scholarly conversation germane to my point regarding the ability to understand Bede’s sense of history in light of the differences between modern approaches (e.g.

Book Title: Being Human, Becoming Human-Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Social Thought
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Gregor Brian
Abstract: This book assembles a distinguished and international group of scholars to examine Bonhoeffer's understanding of human sociality. Vital reading for Bonhoeffer scholars as well as for those invested in theological debates regarding the social nature of human being, the essays in this volume examine Bonhoeffer's rich resources for thinking about what it means to be human, to be the church, to be a disciple, and to be ethically responsible in our contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfb5g

Introduction from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Abstract: The essays in this volume demonstrate Bonhoeffer’s significance for reflecting on the social and political dimensions of our contemporary world, which is grappling with questions of social identity and religion. As the title indicates, these essays on Bonhoeffer’s social thought are motivated by an anthropological concern: When we consider the rapid scientific advances of genetics and globally recurring human atrocities, does it not become apparent that human dignity requires a transcendent reference point? Yet as a generation justly suspicious of easy metaphysical assumptions, we also ask how any one concept of human dignity can offer the kind of transcendence and

10 Responding to Human Reality: from: Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Nissen Ulrik Becker
Abstract: A central motif in the ethics of the Danish theologian and philosopher K. E. Løgstrup is the mutual trust between persons encountering each other, giving rise to an ethical demand that is universal. Løgstrup has a phenomenological starting point, describing an ontological structure according to which human beings are delivered over into each other’s hands, thereby raising an ethical demand. In every encounter with another human being there is an ethical demand requiring care for the other.² For Løgstrup this is a universal demand and therefore not something unique to the Christian tradition. Therefore, Løgstrup also argues that there is

Book Title: Reading Scripture to Hear God-Kevin Vanhoozer and Henri de Lubac on God's Use of Scripture in the Economy of Redemption
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Storer Kevin
Abstract: Recent theological discussions between Catholics and Evangelicals have generated a renewed appreciation for God's ongoing use of Scripture for self-mediation to the Church. Noting the significant influence of Henri de Lubac (one of the drafters of 'Dei Verbum' and proponent of a renewal of the Patristic and Medieval emphasis on a spiritual sense of Scripture), and Kevin Vanhoozer (the leading Evangelical proponent of a theological interpretation of Scripture), Kevin Storer seeks to draw Evangelical and Catholic theologians into dialogue about God's ongoing use of Scripture in the economy of redemption. Storer suggests that a number of traditional tensions between Catholics and Evangelicals, such as the literal or spiritual sense of Scripture, a sacramental or a covenantal model of God's self-mediation, and an emphasis on the authority of Scripture or the authority of the Church, can be eased by shifting greater focus upon God's ongoing use of creaturely realities for the building of the Church in union with Christ. This project seeks to enable Evangelicals to appropriate the insights of de Lubac's Catholic Ressourcement project, while also encouraging Catholic theologians to appreciate Vanhoozer's Evangelical emphasis on God's use of the literal sense of Scripture to build the Church.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbb2

Introduction from: Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: In the past several decades, the theological interpretation of Scripture has emerged as an identifiable discipline within systematic theology.¹ The theological interpretation of Scripture emerged as an attempt to bridge the ugly ditch between biblical studies and systematic theology which has been dug since the Enlightenment. In response to this modernist divorce between theological disciplines, the theological interpretation of Scripture attempts to explain how Scripture functions as the “soul of sacred theology,” by articulating how Scripture operates as a locus of God’s ongoing self-communicative action, and why scriptural reading must be primarily an activity performed by the church and for

Conclusion from: Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: The cumulative argument of this book has been that a much greater similarity between Vanhoozer and de Lubac (and hence between much Evangelical and Catholic theological interpretation of Scripture) can be seen when explicit focus is placed upon God’s use of Scripture and church in the economy of redemption. I have argued that Vanhoozer’s development of an economy of communication is very similar to de Lubac’s development of a sacramental ontology, as both insist on God’s ongoing self-mediation through Scripture, both develop an understanding of scriptural meaning which requires participation and which emerges in the whole economy of redemption, and

Book Title: Making Memory-Jewish and Christian Explorations in Monument, Narrative, and Liturgy
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Vincent Alana M.
Abstract: The twentieth century has been called a "century of horror". Proof of that, designation can be found in the vast and ever-increasing volume of scholarly work on violence, trauma, memory, and history across diverse academic disciplines. This book demonstrates not only the ways in which the wars of the twentieth century have altered theological engagement and religious practice, but also the degree to which religious ways of thinking have shaped the way we construct historical narratives. Drawing on diverse sources - from the Hebrew Bible to Commonwealth war graves, from Greek tragedy to post-Holocaust theology - Alana M. Vincent probes the intersections between past and present, memory and identity, religion and nationality. The result is a book that defies categorization and offers no easy answers, but instead pursues an agenda of theological realism, holding out continued hope for the restoration of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbg4

2 A Selective Literature Review from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In this chapter I review selective literature dealing with religiously motivated violence. My choice of authors is based on a desire to listen to a diverse range of representative voices who have written academically in the field from various perspectives: cultural anthropological, philosophical and theological, psychological, and sociological. These authors include René Girard, Charles Taylor, James W. Jones, and Mark Juergensmeyer.

5 A Dialectical Engagement with Cosmic War: from: Religion and Violence
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I argued the importance of a dialectical engagement with the idea of cosmoswithin the symbol of cosmic war. We saw that the designation ofcosmicwar that linked violence, divine will, and warfare within a cosmologically oriented mindset was imprecise, especially when dealing with religious groups who demonstrate that their cultures have achieved, if only partially, an anthropological breakthrough. A better, more nuanced understanding of the religious agent’s horizon would be to categorize it in terms of a grace–sin dialectic but that carries the danger of cosmic dualism, and consequently a lack of appreciation

Book Title: God's Wounds-Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering, Volume 1. Divine Vulnerability and Creation
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pool Jeff B.
Abstract: This book constitutes the first volume of a three-volume study of Christian testimonies to divine suffering: God's Wounds: Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering, Divine Vulnerability and Creation. This study first develops an approach to interpreting the contested claims about the suffering of God. Thus, the larger study focuses its inquiry into the testimonies to divine suffering themselves, seeking to allow the voices that attest to divine suffering to speak freely, to discover and elucidate the internal logic or rationality of this family of testimonies, rather than defending these attestations against the dominant claims of classical Christian theism that have historically sought to eliminate such language altogether from Christian discourse about the nature and life of God. Through this approach, this volume of studies into the Christian symbol of divine suffering then investigates the two major presuppositions that the larger family of testimonies to divine suffering normally hold: an understanding of God through the primary metaphor of love (God is love); and an understanding of the human as created in the image of God, with a life (though finite) analogous to the divine life - the imago Dei as love. When fully elaborated, these presuppositions reveal the conditions of possibility for divine suffering and divine vulnerability with respect to creation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbxv

5 Divine Lover: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: I now shift from considering God’s being and activity, as methodologically abstracted from one another, to discussing divine love’s actualization in God’s creative activity.1 Previously, I have surveyed characteristics and dimensions of God’s being as love through attestations to divine activity in the history of Jesus the Nazarene. The present chapter examines the character of God’s creative activity, as determined by the divine being, in order to disclose the meaning of the first presupposition for the Christian symbol of divine suffering as well as to illumine the basis upon which to analyze this symbol’s second presupposition. Thus, I proceed in

7 Beloved Human: from: God's Wounds
Abstract: So far, my analyses have identified both formally and materially the structural characteristics of human being in this anthropological presupposition of the Christian symbol of divine suffering, characteristics of authentic human being or human being

Introduction: from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: A theological concept of the church’s mission and its ethical responsibility cannot be properly understood and practiced apart from God’s justice for those who suffer in the world. The God who forgives is the One who demands justice. The church is a community of witness to the universality of the gospel, especially in regard to the fragile, the voiceless, and the vulnerable. Economic justice is an indispensable part of the church’s responsibility for society. An integration of theology with the study of economics takes on a new and major significance given the reality of devastation that economic globalization has brought.

2 The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: Max Weber (1864–1920) raised an important yet controversial thesis, arguing that there is a selective affinity between Protestantism and the spirit of capitalism. In his sociological analysis, a Western form of rationality finds its echo in Protestant innerworldly asceticism. Calvin’s theology of predestination is revealed as the ideological seedbed for creating a religious-ethical worldview conducive to the rise of capitalism. Calvin endorsed the charging of interest on loans and the relaxation on commerce. This chapter deals with Weber’s sociological evaluation of Martin Luther and John Calvin and includes Weber’s sociological study of Protestant religious ethics. It is certain that

3 Political Right and Economic Freedom from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: In the previous two chapters we discussed the historical genesis and development of Capitalism within the framework of the world-economy, colonialism, and the rationalization process. Tracing the economic movement of Christian theology and mission, a critical study was undertaken in regard to Christian mission and colonialism in the New World and also Weber’s thesis of the Protestant ethic and capitalist spirit. Along with the capitalist development of world-economy and sociological analysis of religious ideas, it is necessary to examine how closely the philosophical ideas of individual rights, civil society, and freedom have been intertwined with the economic individualism of capitalism.

4 Industrial Capitalism and the Self-Regulating Market from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: Max Weber’s sociological analysis of the affinity between Calvinism and capitalism finds its evidence in Holland and England. The political-economic development in the British context, including enclosure and mill, led to the industrial revolution. Industrial capitalism came into full swing with the self-regulating market. Along with the development of industrial capitalism, colonial trade played an indispensable role in connection with Christian mission. This chapter entails a critical study of the industrial revolution and British colonial economic policy in India and later China, including the opium wars to which Christian mission was linked. This chapter further includes a critical study of

10 Alternatives to Global Capitalism in Ecumenical Context from: Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: The framing of the international landscape has shifted from a confrontation between East and West to the enormous disparity between North and South. Taking issue with the reality of economic globalization, there are several significant attempts to overcome the limitations and setbacks of global capitalism in ecumenical-global contexts. An alternative to global capitalism requires a new theological-ethical endeavor which should present the church’s ethical responsibility for the gospel and the world. A prophetic theology concerning the gospel and economic justice has been framed and undertaken in an ecumenical and global context to break through the limitation, setback, and crisis of

“A Great Historic Day”: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Skira Jaroslav Z.
Abstract: This essay will broadly examine some of the late Metropolitan Maxim Hermaniuk (1911–96) of Winnipeg’s contributions to the preparatory stages and sessions of the Second Vatican Council¹ through his comments on his experiences on the Preparatory Theological Commission, the Secretariat for Christian Unity, and in actual council debates. This research is largely based on selected passages of his unpublished council diaries and his work on two conciliar pastoral letters of the Synod of the Ukrainian Catholic Bishops.² In these diaries the late metropolitan dealt with a number of themes, such as relations with the Orthodox churches, interreligious dialogue, sobornicity

A Canadian Anglican at Vatican II: from: Vatican II
Author(s) Attridge Michael
Abstract: It is difficult to imagine how Eugene Fairweather must have felt when he received the letter from England the week before Christmas in 1963. Signed by Canon John R. Satterthwaite, secretary to the Archbishop of Canterbury, Michael Ramsey, the letter asked Fairweather if he would be “willing to be appointed one of the three Anglican Observers for the next session” of the Vatican Council in Rome.¹ “The Archbishop,” its author wrote, “is keen to send observers who are theologically-minded, and I know he would be grateful if you were able to consider going.”² According to Satterthwaite, this invitation was still

1 Vellum and Vaccinium: from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Masemann Charlotte
Abstract: The systematic study of gardens as loci of food production during the Middle Ages has largely been overlooked by agrarian historians. Economic agrarian history is based epistemologically on the idea that human actions can best be understood through their economic foundations and consequences, and methodologically on the idea that the best and most accurate conclusions can be reached from a base of quantifiable and documented evidence. This strong epistemological and methodological base has resulted in a large body of excellent and rigorous work. Its focus on numbers and documents has, however, largely obscured the economic importance of cultivation carried out

3 Model Behaviour: from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Lamb Susan
Abstract: The anatomical model - a re-creation of normal or pathological anatomy created in various material - is usually regarded as simply a teaching aid for those studying to be physicians, and although the historical discourse surrounding anatomy often testifies to that purpose alone, a diversity in its function emerges if the researcher looks beyond the written text. The artistic choices made by creators of anatomical models reinforce messages about how a society views its own corporality, and by examining the way in which anatomy models are fabricated and decorated, cultural attitudes about the body in a given time period can

13 Reporting the People’s War Ottawa (1914-1918) from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Keshen Jeff
Abstract: It was Canada’s first total war. It defined politics, economics, and the ideological milieu. But until recently, nearly all works on Canada’s home front in the Great War have kept analysis to the macro level, removing the conflict from day-to-day life to focus on matters such as the war’s role in building Canadian nationalism, as well as, conversely, national cleavages. This is now changing as demonstrated by recently published works on World War I Toronto and a comparative study of the Great War experience in Guelph, Medicine Hat and Trois-Rivieres.¹ Still, as historians Jay Winter and Jean-Louis Major wrote in

20 Evidence of What? from: Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Gaffield Chad
Abstract: Surprisingly and in repeatedly unexpected ways, historians have continued to debate in recent decades the central question of their craft: how can the past be described and explained? At each stage of the debate, the answers to this question have reflected and contributed to larger epistemological discussions across the disciplines. The following discussion examines selected aspects of the twists and turns of recent historical debate by using the example of research on census enumerations. From the time of the “new social history” of the 1960s and 1970s to the cultural history of the 1980s and 1990s, scholars have focused on

I The Therapeutic Relationship and Techniques: from: The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Meier Augustine
Abstract: Fascinated by the technological advances in medicine, communication, and outerspace exploration, psychotherapists and psychotherapy researchers ponder whether there are techniques

CHAPTER 2 HERMENEUTIC PHENOMENOLOGY AS FUNDAMENTAL ONTOLOGY from: Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: In Chapter 1 we discussed the history of the phenomenological movement and emphasized the themes and approaches that are particularly significant for an adequate comprehension of Heidegger’s philosophy as it is presented in his main work, Being and Time.¹ We noted that in order to understand Heidegger’s phenomenological methodology, it is particularly important to begin with a basic knowledge of the phenomenology of Edmund Husserl. Without a knowledge of Husserl, it is very easy to confuse Heidegger’s philosophical methodology with a merely “descriptive” approach, a confusion that we will address in the course of the following sections. Of course, the

Nine HUMAN RIGHTS AND THE SURVIVAL IMPERATIVE: from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Lancaster Philip
Abstract: We can understand the enthusiasm of the drafters of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (United Nations General Assembly resolution 217A of 10 December 1948) by considering the historical context of their deliberations. After two cataclysmic global wars, the psychological urge to peace may have overwhelmed philosophical reservations that might have prolonged debate indefinitely.¹ Some may even have been blind to the weakness of the Kantian logic that I believe is clearly evident in the preamble or may have found their own reasons to support it.² The diplomatic bargaining involved in composing a declaration to which all could agree is,

Twelve MACINTYRE OR GEWIRTH? from: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Walters Gregory J.
Abstract: Within the history of Western ethics, we find both the teleological approach, exemplified by Aristotle’s ethics of virtues, and the deontological approach, heralded by Kant’s ethics of duty, rule-utilitarianism, and divine will/command conceptions of morality. Usually, we assume that these two approaches are incompatible and we must follow either the “good” or the “right.”¹ In this essay, I am concerned with what I believe is the most significant contemporary manifestation of the virtue-rights debate. Alasdair Maclntyre’s work in virtue ethics is now well known, but rarely discussed is Maclntyre’s critique of Alan Gewirth’s theory of morality as a theory of

INTRODUCTION from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: The founder of the phenomenological movement, Edmund Husserl (1859-1938), lived through a dynamic time for the sciences.¹ Not only were there major developments in mathematics and physics, but some of the greatest practitioners of these disciplines were pursuing foundational questions with an unprecedented depth and rigour. Although Husserl did not directly contribute to these developments, it is not correct to say that he simply sat on the sidelines. He personally knew and corresponded with several of the finest scientific and mathematical minds of the time. It is, therefore, not surprising that the relationship between Husserl’s philosophy and the sciences is

CHAPTER FOUR HUSSERL AND HILBERT ON GEOMETRY from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Majer Ulrich
Abstract: Anyone who attempts to compare Husserl’s and Hilbert’s approach to geometry faces an almost insurmountable difficulty. Whereas Hilbert, over a period of more than ten years, worked out a systematic and detailed presentation of geometry which was published in his book Grundlagen der Geometric, there is nothing comparable in Husserl’s work.¹ All that we find in Husserl’s Nachlafβ² is a blueprint for a book on geometry, some scattered remarks about the epistemological origin of our knowledge of space, two somewhat longer scripts (one on the history of geometry, the other on topological questions), and last but not least, some shorter

CHAPTER SIX HUSSERL’S LEGACY IN THE PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS: from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Concerning the epistemological side of logic, I agree with the conceptions which underlie Husserl’s Logical Investigations. The reader should also consult the deepened presentation in Husserl’sIdeas Pertaining

CHAPTER SEVEN HUSSERL AND WEYL: from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: At last a mathematician, who, by understanding the necessity of a phenomenological approach to all questions concerning the clarification of foundational concepts, returns to the primary ground of logico-mathematical intuition, the

CHAPTER NINE FROM THE LIFEWORLD TO THE EXACT SCIENCES AND BACK from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Kerszberg Pierre
Abstract: Ever since the rise of the modern exact sciences, it has become more and more clear that the scientific mind is not bound by an exhaustive understanding of its own doings. The fact is that, while discovering the inner structure or the nexus of relations pertaining to an object, science ignores the paths that led to this structure or these relations; but these paths lie precisely at the basis of the ontological ground of the object. Husserl reflected on this legacy of the scientific revolution when he argued that “it is not always natural science that speaks when natural scientists

CHAPTER TEN HUSSERL ON THE COMMUNAL PRAXIS OF SCIENCE from: Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Buckley R. Philip
Abstract: It is well known that for a long period within the phenomenological tradition itself, there was a tendency to view the Crisis-texts of Husserl’s last years as marking a radical shift in his thought. Major figures such as Gadamer and Merleau-Ponty¹ are well-known exponents of this view, and even circumspect and insightful subsequent scholars such as Carr tend to stress the novelty, for example, of the infusion of history into Husserl’s later philosophy² Some treat this ‘novelty’ as a reaction to the historical crisis of the 1930s, and also imply that the proximity and popularity of Heidegger should not be

Book Title: Charting the Future of Translation History- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BANDIA PAUL F.
Abstract: This book aims at claiming such autonomy for the field with a renewed vigour. It seeks to explore issues related to methodology as well as a variety of discourses on history with a view to laying the groundwork for new avenues, new models, new methods. It aspires to challenge existing theoretical and ideological frameworks. It looks toward the future of history. It is an attempt to address shortcomings that have prevented translation history from reaching its full disciplinary potential. From microhistory, archaeology, periodization, to issues of subjectivity and postmodernism, methodological lacunae are being filled.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpfkh

Conceptualizing the Translator as a Historical Subject in Multilingual Environments: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) MEYLAERTS REINE
Abstract: During the past few years, the study of translation from a sociological point of view has come more and more to the fore within the descriptive translation studies (DTS) paradigm. But as usual in research, the discovery of new research areas is more or less erratic. It is the goal of this discussion to indicate a few shortcomings in these important new fields of questioning.

Puritan Translations in Israel: from: Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) BEN-ARI NITSA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to review the history of translation in Israel, with special focus on the ideological norms that permeated it and on the function of (moral) censorship as a tool for shaping and delimiting culture.

Chapter 1 Simultaneity and Delay: from: Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Robinson Jason
Abstract: The nature of time has been an irresistible mystery for philosophers for thousands of years. The same is no less true today, although questions of time have changed dramatically under the influence of physicists such as Newton and Einstein, and the hegemony of the natural sciences. For instance, most no longer think of time in terms of the Ancient Greeks’ cyclical time, modelled on the periodical rhythms of nature, or Christian eschatological time (rectilinear historical time), with its actual though postponed Kingdom in the present age (both fulfilled and fulfilling). While elements of both persist—such as the association of

Chapter 3 Madison and Hermeneutic Intentionality: from: Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Geniusas Saulius
Abstract: The following remarks on the concept of intentionality will follow the path traversed by Gary Madison, the person who introduced me to phenomenology. By inquiring into intentionality I aim to account for at least some of the central features of Madison’s phenomenological hermeneutics. I share Madison’s conviction that the fruitful future of phenomenology and hermeneutics to a large degree depends upon the continuing dialogue between them. My aim here is to explore some reasons that will help in substantiating this claim. My interpretation, besides addressing Madison’s published texts, will also focus on a number of conference presentations, lectures, seminars, and,

Chapter 6 Mediating Play: from: Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Zubcic Stephanie
Abstract: This paper concerns an important and prominent theme in Hegelian study: the power of mediation to unite diverse voices in dark times. I begin with my interpretation of Hegel’s phenomenological subjectivity of “self-consciousness.” According to my reading of his Phenomenology of Spirit, his dialogical project gives significant emphasis to the idea that mediation acts as a dialogical process of representational “interplay.” I briefly discuss the historical and conceptual origin of this idea as it pertains to Hegelian thought. The central aim of this paper is to account for the role of imagination epistemologically as it relates to moral action. Exploring

The Reverend H. Northrop Frye from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sloan Ian
Abstract: Northrop Frye’s original theological concept, the concept of the kerygmatic mode of language, emerged late in his thinking and writing. Before then, Frye is probably best seen as a profoundly able teacher of the liberal arts who, along with many others, transformed the liberal humanism arts curriculum of the late 19 thcentury into a curriculum for his time. His debts as a teacher of literature to a liberal Christian religious tradition were always there to be seen (perhaps nowhere more explicitly than inThe Critical Path[1972]). However, his exposition of the excluded initiative of the kerygmatic in his second

Recovery of the Spiritual Other: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Tóth Sára
Abstract: In the posthumously published Double Vision, the only book in which Northrop Frye explicitly discussed the question of religion and the church as distinguished from literature, he described God as “a spiritual Other” (dv20). Although Frye’s engagement with religious and spiritual questions was certainly evident to careful readers of his work from the beginning, with the ongoing posthumous publication of his diaries and notebooks from 1996 onward, the religious aspect of his work has become that much more obvious. The notebooks contain uninhibited speculations on the nature of God, and they reveal how Frye’s theological vision grounded and guided

An Access of Power: from: Northrop Frye
Author(s) Donaldson Jeffery
Abstract: My subject here, simply put, is the relationship between spirit and the neurological brain. I hope to translate what would normally (and dismissively) be called an “analogous” relationship between a brain’s synapses and an individual’s spirit—in Frye, so closely linked to if not synonymous with powers of the imagination—into a contiguous narrative that shows how one may be related to the other (that is, spirit to brain cell) as a blossom is to its seed, and not as a painting of a flower is to the real flower. In Words With Power, Frye himself comes near to reflecting

Introduction from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Technological changes have had a dramatic impact upon the financing, organization and delivery of health care services in Canada. Professionals and health care decision makers now wrestle with increasingly complex sets of challenges that must involve various types of professionals in programs of care. The result is that administrators, nurses, physicians, social workers and other professionals have had diverse roles to play in programs of care and, consequently, have insisted that their voices be heard in the decision-making process alongside the voices of patients and their families. Needless to say, the ensuing discussions have become difficult because the diverse professional

Chapter 1 Historical Context: from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Doucet Hubert
Abstract: In this search for meaning, methodological issues could not be avoided. On the contrary, they were an

Concluding Reflections from: Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: The changing face of health care has made the task of patient care much more complex than in past decades. This is especially the case in the field of chronic care. Professionals who care for patients, particular young children, face a bewildering array of challenges for which they often feel ill-prepared. These challenges come from the rapid pace of technological change, the diversity of religions and cultures in our society, the collaborative character of decision making, the restructuring of health care funding, the complexities of our diverse institutions of care and the diversity of citizens’ values regarding the end of

Personal and Organizational Change: from: Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Prévost Colette T.
Abstract: Sexual Assault Program Women share thé common expérience of being treated “differently” from men. What many of us do not share is thé expérience of being able to articulate how oppression, inequality, and sexism détermine our “différent” treatment. In général, we are not exposed to environments which can assist us or which encourage us to learn about our unequal status. This is in keeping with a patriarchal culture which dictâtes what is “normal” for us¹. In our view, feminizing means two things. First, particular attention will be paid to thé sociological and political circumstances and context of womens lives. Feminist

Book Title: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): KLIBANSKY Raymond
Abstract: A leading Polish philosopher of the 20th century, Roman Ingarden is principally renowned in Western culture for his work in aesthetics and the theory of literature. Jeff Mitscherling demonstrates, in this extensive work, how Ingarden's thought constitutes a major contribution to the more fundamental fields of ontology and metaphysics. Unparalleled in existing literature, Mitscherling's comprehensive survey of Ingarden's philosophy will give the reader an informed introduction to this major work of phenomenological analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6sd9

FOREWORD from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Author(s) Klibansky Raymond
Abstract: From his early student days at the universities of Gottingen and Freiburg, Ingarden was closely associated with Edmund Husserl and the phenomenological movement. Dr. Mitscherling shows how

INTRODUCTION from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: The basic claim of this book is twofold: (1) that we are not in a position accurately to interpret and evaluate Ingarden’s studies in aesthetics until we place them within the framework provided by his realist ontological position as a whole, and (2) that, conversely, we cannot fully appreciate the force of Ingarden’s arguments in his ‘non-aesthetic’ epistemological and ontological investigations—such as we find in his magnum opus, The Controversy Over the Existence of the World¹—without understanding how Ingarden intended his studies in aesthetics to provide those investigations, and his own position with regard to the idealism/realism debate,

CHAPTER SIX INGARDEN AND CONTEMPORARY AESTHETICS from: Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Abstract: Finally, one important weakness in Ingarden’s phenomenological aesthetics of literature is that it

Book Title: A Theology for the Earth-The Contributions of Thomas Berry and Bernard Lonergan
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): DALTON ANNE MARIE
Abstract: While many feel that something must be done, few perceive the state of the ecological crisis as a "profound religious problem." While Thomas Berry sought to fire the imagination and motivate his listener to action, Bernard Lonergan was absorbed by the growing gulf between traditional Christian theology and its relevance to modern problems. This book brings together the work of these dynamic thinkers and examines their mutual contribution to theology for our time and for our planet.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6smd

FOREWORD from: A Theology for the Earth
Author(s) Berry Thomas
Abstract: I have seldom reflected on the epistemological or critical implications of my writings. Thus it is a special delight to read these pages of Anne Marie Dalton. They give me insights into my own thinking that I have seldom thought about in any conscious manner. It is particularly helpful to have her reflections done in the context of the epistemological and theological work of Bernard Lonergan. She is quite correct in understanding my work in terms of Lonergan’s notion of Descriptive Discourse, for my intent has been simply to present and to leave the reader to respond out of whatever

INTRODUCTION from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Scholars of religion are no strangers to challenges from the modern and post-modern world. In this latter half of the twentieth century, the ecological crisis is perhaps among the more difficult of these challenges. When the very foundations of life itself are threatened, how does one engage in reflection on one’s religious faith? Thomas Berry was one of the first and most creative North American religionists to seriously consider the issue of the role of religion in restructuring human-earth relations.

CHAPTER TWO THE INFLUENCE OF WORLD RELIGIONS from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Berry’s professional career, his teaching and much of his scholarly research and writing, was in world religions, especially the religions of India and Asia. (His writings about North American native religions came later and within the context of the ecological crisis.) Within the field of world religions he remained primarily a cultural historian, interested in the ideas and events that shaped human culture. Later, as his concern turned toward the ecological crisis, his focus became a history of nature and of ideas relevant to the humanearth relationship. Berry commonly referred to himself as a “geologian,” conveying his notion that his

CHAPTER SIX BERNARD LONERGAN AND EMERGENT PROBABILITY from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: The previous chapters have been an attempt to understand Berry’s response to the ecological crisis in the context of the genetic development of his thought and under the horizon that attracted him in the later years of his work. In moving the horizon to Christian theology, we move beyond the question of what Berry himself meant or intended to the further question, What aspects of his work are going forward with respect to a reform of Christian theology in the light of the ecological crisis? Bernard Lonergan’s compelling and inclusive account of emergent probability is especially suited as a framework

CHAPTER SEVEN A THEOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF BERRY’S PROPOSAL from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Introduction If theology is, as Lonergan described it, a mediation “between a cultural matrix and the significance and role of a religion in that matrix”¹ then there are two major questions that arise in considering Berry’s contribution to Christian theology: (1) The methodological question: How is Berry’s “new story” situated in terms of mediating between Christianity and culture? In Lonergan’s terms, this is to ask whether methodologically the “new story” belongs to cosmopolis, sincecosmopolisis the symbolic name for the mediation of authentic meanings and values to aid progress or to meet decline. (2) The content question: If the

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS from: A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: This work originated in a desire to discover the relationship between two urgencies of our times. The first was the ecological crisis and the second, the reform of Christian theology. The preliminary, largely untested insights that moved the project into actuality were that (1) as Thomas Berry had loudly and clearly proclaimed, the ecological crisis was also religious; it had religious roots and it required a religious solution, and (2) a theology that did not serve to increase hope in the possibility of authentically negotiating the major crises of our time had already died. Bernard Lonergan seemed to corroborate this

CHAPTER 4 The Myth of Natural Law from: God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: Natural moral law conceptions, grounded as they traditionally have been on metaphysical or theological principles, are myth-eaten and they ought to be discarded; aseptic, demythologized conceptions of “natural law,” like those set forth by Professor Hart in his The Concept of Law,are essentially sound and are fundamental in displaying the moral foundations of legal systems. Yet we must also come to understand that assent to the fundamental rules of human conduct that Hart notes is compatible with an acceptance of a thorough ethical relativism or conventionalism. I would like here to back up these controversial claims. In the first

“Listen to the Voice”: from: Future Indicative
Author(s) GRACE SHERRILL
Abstract: The importance of Mikhail Bakhtin for literary scholarship does not reside in his often carelessly applied notions of carnival and polyphony. Bakhtin’s primary significance lies in his dialogism, that theory of discourse which enables him to establish, chart, and identify so many of the ways in which literary forms coincide with other diachronic systems of human communication. His theory of discourse is, in fact, an epistemology, even an ontological category (“ To be,” writes Bakhtin, “meansto communicate,” 1984, 287),¹ and it is a vital method for analyzing, not only texts, but concepts of literary canon, language acquisition, social identity, culture

Language and Silence in Richardson and Grove from: Future Indicative
Author(s) TURNER MARGARET E.
Abstract: Settling and writing the New World means coming to terms with its ontological status and constructing its discourse. There is a pause or stillpoint in the migration from the fixed and placed culture of Europe to the new setting, in this case Canada—a moment which is disconnected from the Old World and as yet unconnected to the New. That stillpoint between cultures is charged with questions of structure and meaning, and finds a reflection in literature, in language, in human being itself. Absence and silence accompany the migrant suspension between cultures, and underlie the writing of this continent.¹

History and Theology in the Johannine Presentation of the Causes for the Death of Jesus: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Senior Donald
Abstract: The attempt to find at least “glimpses” of the historical Jesus in the Gospel according to John is a topic of growing interest for biblical scholarship, and this study of a unique Johannine passage is intended to be a modest contribution to that perspective. The Johannine account of the deliberations of the “council” in 11:45–53 is an interesting example of the convergence of historical, literary, ethical, and theological dimensions of the causes and meaning of Jesus’s death in the Fourth Gospel.¹

Points and Stars: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) North Wendy E. S.
Abstract: We may never know who the Fourth Evangelist was, but there is no mistaking the distinctiveness of his contribution to the New Testament witness to the life of Jesus of Nazareth. From the slow-moving, authoritarian Greek style, the cosmic scale of the setting, and the theological self-awareness of the central character, to the layering of irony, the often blistering polemic, and the ever-present parentheses to guide his readers, we know him well enough, do we not? In other words, we are aware that what dominates this account from beginning to end is the powerful and creative mind of its author.

Jesus Sayings in the Johannine Discourses: from: John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Culpepper R. Alan
Abstract: As far as our present knowledge and methodological resources go, the gospel of John is not a source of knowledge of the teaching of Jesus … until we can write a history

INTRODUCTION: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) LAMB MATTHEW L.
Abstract: The studies in this book indicate the influences of human reason throughout Christian theological reflections on the teachings of Christian faith. The universality of this faith—proclaiming salvation to all races and peoples—requires that reflection on it draw upon the universality of the God-given light of human reason. Pope Francis in his first encyclical, Lumen Fidei, has taken up the theme of his predecessors in stating that the light of faith heals and elevates the light of reason.¹ Saint John Paul II and Pope Emeritus Benedict XVI learned from great Catholic minds, like those of Augustine and Aquinas, how

CHAPTER FOUR The Concept of Nature: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) KOTERSKI JOSEPH
Abstract: There are numerous ways in which philosophy can be of service to theological education. There is something invaluable, for instance, in the art of making distinctions, and among the many ways of acquiring such facility, this skill is especially promoted by training in logic, philosophy of nature, and metaphysics. It is not just a matter of avoiding arbitrary distinctions without a basis in real differences but of devising distinctions that make their cuts between diverse natural kinds. Crucial to the theoretical justification for this activity is the notion that things have real natures that can be discovered by human inquiry.

CHAPTER EIGHT Philosophical Starting Points: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) WHITE KEVIN
Abstract: To go by the first article of Aquinas’s Summa theologiae, as well as by the traditional order of seminary courses, the place of philosophy in theological education would seem to be before, or at least at, the beginning. To go by theSummaas a whole, and by the way in which theology is customarily taught, philosophy permeates theological education from beginning to end, although it is changed in doing so. Philosophy in theological education is aprincipiumin two senses: it is both a point of departure and a continuing resource.

CHAPTER NINE Tunc scimus cum causas cognoscimus: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) BELLAMAH TIMOTHY
Abstract: At the outset of the Metaphysics, Aristotle says that “all men suppose what is called wisdom (sophia) to deal with the first causes (aitia) and the principles (archai) of things,” and that it is these causes and principles that he proposes to study in this work.¹ During the thirteenth century the recent recovery of Aristotle’s works of natural philosophy (Physics, Metaphysics, De anima, Meteora), resulted in an evolution of the understanding of causality, which in turn resulted in remarkable developments in biblical interpretation.² Especially at the universities of Paris and Oxford commentators reevaluated conventional anthropological presuppositions and reassessed the human

CHAPTER TEN Ad aliquid: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) EMERY GILLES
Abstract: Relation occupies a position of paramount importance in the thought of St. Thomas Aquinas. Several central themes of his theology are based on his use of the category of relation, such as his theology of the Trinity (the divine person as subsistent relation), creation (the relation of God to the world), and the Incarnation (the relation of the divine and the human natures in Christ). Relation receives attention of a philosophical and a theological order.¹ The philosophical approach is well attested in Aquinas’s commentaries on the Physicsand theMetaphysicsof Aristotle. The theological interest explains why the most developed

CHAPTER TWELVE Christology of Disclosure in Robert Sokolowski from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) MANSINI GUY
Abstract: This chapter seeks to honor the esteemed Ralph McInerny by exploring what Robert Sokolowski has to say about the role of philosophy in theology and theological education. He has addressed this issue many times, in many ways. I begin with some evidently sensible advice that he has given to seminary educators about philosophy. There follows a description of what he calls the “theology of disclosure.” Third, I gather up some of the “disclosures” he has made in Christology. Last, I try to press things just a little further in one or two matters Christological.

CHAPTER THIRTEEN Ego sapientia: from: Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) CESSARIO ROMANUS
Abstract: This chapter aims to illuminate the intercession of the Blessed Virgin Mary. It views what the Church holds about her maternal mediation as an application of Aristotelian efficient instrumental causality within the order of grace. Specifically, the chapter evokes the notion of “physical causality” that the grand Thomist tradition employs when speaking about the sacraments. While the crisis over instrumental causality reaches beyond the theology of the sacraments, one nonetheless recognizes it rather acutely there. This crisis stems from several sources, such as developments in both natural philosophy and theological method. It is wondrous to observe that several approaches to

“SHE LOVES THE BLOOD OF THE YOUNG” from: Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) METZGER SABINE
Abstract: Compared to late nineteenth-century vampire and Gothic fictions, Lafcadio Hearn’s “The Story of Chūgōrō” (from the collection Kottō, 1902) appears at first glance to be a simple, if not mediocre, tale, devoid of any intricate plot and psychological depth: Chūgōrō, a young man, falls prey to a seductive stranger who, during several nightly rendezvous, deprives him of his blood. However, despite its bloodthirsty female protagonist and despite its evoking what Christopher Frayling inVampyrescalls “haemosexuality” (1991, 388), “The Story of Chugoro” is not a vampire tale, nor does it blend Western and Eastern supernaturalism. “The Story of Chūgōrō” is

Book Title: Comparing Faithfully-Insights for Systematic Theological Reflection
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS MICHELLE VOSS
Abstract: Every generation of theologians must respond to its context by rearticulating the central tenets of the faith. Interreligious comparison has been integral to this process from the start of the Christian tradition and is especially salient today. The emerging field of comparative theology, in which close study of another religious tradition yields new questions and categories for theological reflection in the scholar's home tradition, embodies the ecumenical spirit of this moment. This discipline has the potential to enrich systematic theology and, by extension, theological education, at its foundations. This resource for pastors and theology students reconsiders five central doctrines of the Christian faith in light of focused interreligious investigations. The dialogical format of the book builds conversation about the doctrine of God, theodicy, humanity, Christology, and soteriology. Its comparative essays span examples from Hindu, Buddhist, Jewish, Muslim, Jain, and Confucian traditions, indigenous Aztec theology, and contemporary "spiritual but not religious" thought, to offer exciting new perspectives on Christian doctrine. The essays in this volume demonstrate that engagement with religious diversity need not be an afterthought in the study of Christian systematic theology; rather, it can be a way into systematic theological thinking. Each section invites students to test theological categories, to consider Christian doctrine in relation to specific comparisons, and to take up comparative study in their own contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d391px

4 Developing Christian Theodicy in Conversation with Navid Kermani from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) von Stosch Klaus
Abstract: In my understanding of theology, the meaning of religious convictions always depends on a particular language game, i.e. on a certain theological context.¹ Because, for example, the sentence “God is love” can point to different meanings depending on to whom and in what context it is said, one can understand it adequately only if one perceives it as embedded in a particular dialogue or language game. Therefore, comparative theology can never result in a universal theory about religions and truth.² Because the meanings of basic religious beliefs within particular traditions are diverse, comparative theology focuses on select details within particular

10 What Child Is This? from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Bidlack Bede Benjamin
Abstract: Comparative theology begins with reading across religious bound aries until the reader finds a doctrine—or a practice, trope, or work of art—that resonates with his or her own faith. Close study disturbs the theologian’s categories and presuppositions. Usually, such a disturbance results in the expansion of a category, its rediscovery, or simply the growth of the reader. Such is the supposed path of the theological explorer.

11 Who Is the Suffering Servant? from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Moyaert Marianne
Abstract: Isaiah 53 played an important role in Christianity’s self-definition as it parted ways with Judaism, and it continued to have an impact far into the Middle Ages in theological-hermeneutical disputes

12 Response: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: The heart of Christian theology is Christology. Christology can be de-fined as theological reflection on the question of who Jesus was—and is—for Christians. The multiplicity of Christological titles in the New Testament—Messiah, Lord, savior, prophet, high priest, Son of God, and so on—all qualify each other and become reinterpreted in light of the Christ event. Together they express the centrality and sui generis nature—in short, the uniqueness—of Jesus for Christian faith. The New Testament evinces a process by which early Christians drew upon the available concepts and images, whether found in the biblical (Jewish)

15 Salvation in the After-Living: from: Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Rambo Shelly
Abstract: Leafing through introductory textbooks in Christian systematic theology, you will find discussions of salvation located in multiple places—under the topics of Christology (the nature and work of Christ), the “other” religions, and eschatology, the study of last or final things. Insofar as these primers orient elementary readers into knowledge of Christian faith, they set out the major points for theological discussion and debate. Eschatology often becomes the major landing point for discussions of salvation because the question of salvation is often framed in terms of ultimate ends. Under the doctrine of eschatology, soteriological discussions will circle around Jesus’s saying,

4 The Animal That Therefore I Am from: The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: The scripturalfigure of the sacrificial lamb, on the site of the animality in us that is taken on and transformed by God (Chapter 2), leads us now tophilosophicalconsideration of our own metaphysical animality and to our biological roots. The question of the animal origin of humankind is not simply scientific, nor even simply ethical. We can certainly celebrate quite a few anniversaries related to the topic (e.g., publication ofThe Origin of Speciesby Darwin). Heidegger points out, “The animality of man has a deeper metaphysical ground than could ever be inferred biologically and scientifically by reffering

Chapter 6 NOVELTY, ANALOGY, AND GOD from: Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: Our argument thus far has relied on Dupré’s observation that the ontotheological synthesis of the West consists of three elements: the noetic subject as the interpreter of reality; the extra-subjective cosmos; and the transcendent source of both. Dupré affirms that modernity results from mind’s assertion of its creative prerogatives over against a more passive assimilation of the physical world on whose forms mind, in other respects, depends. In meeting the modern problem with a model of nature and grace, chapter 4 argued that Thomas’s instinct of faith, as retrieved by Seckler, accounts for the dynamic release of the human subject’s

4 Maurice Blanchot: from: The Event
Abstract: While Heidegger takes a general ontological perspective, Blanchot deals with the question of the event as an interrogation that mainly concerns the being of literature. Language is no longer the channel through which Being and man come to belong to one another; the fictive essence of language according to Blanchot deprives the subject of self and robs the real of sense. If Heidegger regards poetry as a truthful principle that is the source and foundation of man’s dwelling, Blanchot assigns it an illusory principle that affects both the experience of the writer and the written work itself. Thus the event

5 Jacques Derrida: from: The Event
Abstract: Derrida is evidently a Blanchotian philosopher. While continuing to affirm Heidegger’s influence, he radicalizes, through Levinas, the thought of differencein order to methodologically establish the condition for a “science of the singular.” Here, the thinking of the event and its challenge to modern existence must first of all takes the shape of a concrete and dramaticperformanceof writing: to write in the limits and in the margins of thinking so that the making of the work itself testifies to the subversive powers at play when the grounds of thinking come under question. Indeed, Heidegger and Blanchot can be

6 Gilles Deleuze: from: The Event
Abstract: The return to the ontological questions of philosophy and their renewal is Gilles Deleuze’s most pressing project. It is his philosophical priority to refuse any transcendent ideas or transcendental conditions; instead, he tends to examine the vital forces of an immanent structure. Using the term “plane of immanence,” Deleuze suggests that thinking relates to the surface of a concrete reality that it absolutely does not transcend. Thinking does not merely depend on real experience: like a pre-Socratic sage of nature, Deleuze claims that the force of thinking, its astonishment and creativity, consists of the material movement of Being, as if

Book Title: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation-The Negotiation of Values in Fiction
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Herman David
Abstract: Demonstrating the extent to which ethos attributions, and hence, interpretive acts, play a tacit role in many methods of narratological analysis, Korthals Altes also questions the agenda and epistemological status of various narratologies, both classical and post-classical. Her approach, rooted in a broad understanding of the role and circulation of narrative art in culture, rehabilitates interpretation, both as a tool and as an object of investigation in narrative studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nm18

4 Key Concepts Revised: from: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Should the debunkers of Frey’s “fraud” have done their narratological homework better? Would any of the current branches of narratology, each of which claims to analyze how we make meaning from narrative texts, have helped explain the bewilderment that for some readers, like Oprah, followed from Frey’s exposure? Perhaps, to the extent that narratologies offer heuristic procedures and concepts to tease out stances conveyed in narratives. Not really, or not yet, because narratology, though concentrating on textual features, insufficiently takes into account the conventions through which these features are invested with narrative functionality and meaning.

Book Title: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: These essays examine myriad themes such as the pedagogical context of the anthropologist as a teller of stories about indigenous storytellers; the colonial context of British anthropological theory and its projects outside the nation-state; the legacies of Claude Lévi-Strauss's structuralism regarding culture- specific patterns; cognitive universals reflected in empirical examples of kinship, myth, language, classificatory systems, and supposed universal mental structures; and the career of Marshall Sahlins and his trajectory from neo-evolutionism and structuralism toward an epistemological skepticism of cross- cultural miscommunication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nmkj

1 “China to the Anthropologist”: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) KENDALL LAUREL
Abstract: “I shall place the ethnography and archaeology of this country on an entirely new and solid basis, that I shall conquer China to the anthropologist. China no longer the exclusive domain of travelers and sinologues, both narrow-minded and one-sided in their standpoints and researches, China to all who have anthropological interests” (Laufer to Boas, 12 August 1903, 1903-13, DAA, AMNH). Thus did Berthold Laufer address his mentor, Franz Boas, the founding father of American anthropology, with a euphoric vision of future anthropological researches in China. A century later, Laufer has been eulogized as the premier Sinologist of his generation, best

2 A. M. Hocart: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) LAUGHLIN CHARLES D.
Abstract: Arthur Maurice Hocart (1883–1939), better known as A.M. Hocart, was a British sociocultural anthropologist living and working in the same era as A.R. Radcliffe-Brown and Bronislaw Malinowski. Yet despite his extensive ethnographic fieldwork, scientific sophistication, and prolific writings, his legacy is far less known than his more famous contemporaries. Indeed, Thomas O. Beidelman (1972) referred to Hocart as a “neglected master,” and Meyer Fortes (1967) spoke of him as a “neglected pioneer.” An accomplished master he was, being far more scholarly, experienced, and methodologically and theoretically astute in his explanations than the functionalist accounts of either Malinowski or Radcliffe-Brown.

10 Anthropologists as Perpetrators and Perpetuators of Oral Tradition: from: Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) FLYNN LINDY-LOU
Abstract: The discipline of anthropology is abundant with narratives by and about anthropologists, their unique research projects, their academic philosophies, and their theoretical approaches or contributions. I present here an unpublished 1988 student assignment as a conduit for my ideas on the value of oral tradition in the anthropology classroom, the construction of anthropological kinship networks, and the ways in which both anthropology professors and their students have persisted in telling and retelling the histories of anthropology over time. The 1988 paper incorporates some of my audio recorded lectures of Professors Kenelm O.L. Burridge and Robin Ridington at the University of

9 The Spirit of Synecdoche: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) CASON JACQUELINE
Abstract: The way we read the past shapes our present and future, and the genius of Loren Eiseley’s evolutionary metaphors remains relevant to current cultural and ecological issues. William Zinsser describes the sixties as the “golden era of nonfiction” (56). Eiseley’s books sold well after World War II, when the reading public developed an appetite for works that dealt directly with reality, preferring nonfiction to novels and short stories. W. H. Auden read everything of Eiseley’s he could lay his hands on (15). Yet in spite of a loyal and diverse following, Eiseley has yet to receive critical attention commensurate with

12 Epic Narratives of Evolution: from: Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) MERCIER STEPHEN
Abstract: In 1961 Loren Eiseley was awarded the prestigious John Burroughs Medal for The Firmament of Time, joining the ranks of distinguished authors of natural history such as Ernest Thompson Seton, Rachel Carson, Joseph Wood Krutch, and Roger Tory Peterson. Indeed, both Burroughs (1837–1921) and Eiseley (1907–77) belong to a long list of writers who imaginatively delve into environmental explorations, forging connections to ecological and evolutionary dynamics. Surely, their writings cannot escape influences from a long history of previous nature works, from Gilbert White’s discursive firsthand observations on his beloved Selbourne, to Charles Darwin’s profound theories of evolution, to

4 Hopi Place Value: from: Born in the Blood
Author(s) Whiteley Peter M.
Abstract: In Hopi discourse, important ideas and processes involving cultural and historical order are localized and commemorated in the landscape and are indexed by place-names. Events happened at particular places: in Hopi oral history, knowing wheresomething happened is an important part of knowingthatit happened. As texts, some named places are interconnected, while others are more independent (on related Pueblo geographic sensibilities, see, e.g., Harrington 1916; Ortiz 1969, 1972; Silko 1999). Some texts are sociological, others historical, some mythological, others political, economic, religious, or ecological (cf. Thornton 2008 on Tlingit place-names). Like Hopi personal names, Hopi place-names individuate (see

3 Hauntings as Histories: from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: Another way to frame this question is to ask whether places—physical locations and the multiple human histories embedded in them—have distinct identities and are capable of agency. Can a single place be home to a certain kind of history, persistent and cohesive, even across boundaries of time and cultural regime? Can the nonhuman, in the form of organisms, climate, or other entities, define the shape of a place and even its meaning? Can remnants of past societies—ruins, ecological footprints, artifacts—“speak” in active ways for the histories they represent? And can we include

10 Ancestors, Ethnohistorical Practice, and the Authentication of Native Place and Past from: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) GRADY C. JILL
Abstract: At the turn of the twenty-first century, scholars produced a series of analyses that addressed the literary works written about Native American ghosts (Brogan 1998, Bergland 2000, Richardson 2003). These critics constructed the analyses by relying primarily upon the Euro-Western philosophical and social theories of Freud and Marx, with scant attention given to the extant ethnohistorical and anthropological analyses that pertain to cross-cultural and multicultural studies. Anthropologists and ethnohistorians have long recognized the significant roles played by ghosts in Native American social organizations and belief systems, though they hesitate to apply analytical theories to those roles. It is my intent

Book Title: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit-Essays in Honour of Andrew T. Lincoln
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pietersen Lloyd K.
Abstract: A number of distinguished biblical scholars and theologians come together in this volume to honour the life and work of Andrew T. Lincoln. The title of this volume reflects Andrew Lincoln’s lifelong interests in Christian origins, the reception of biblical texts in believing and scholarly communities, and the embodiment of the gospel in believing communities made possible by the Spirit. These essays cover exegetical matters, theological interpretation, and theology and embodiment. Several essays engage directly with Lincoln’s monographs, Truth on Trial, and Born of a Virgin?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrc1

Introduction from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PIETERSEN LLOYD K.
Abstract: We are delighted to present this Festschriftin honor of our esteemed friend and colleague, Professor Andrew T. Lincoln, on the occasion of his retirement. The title of this volume reflects andrew’s lifelong interests in Christian origins, the reception of biblical texts in believing and scholarly communities, and the embodiment of the gospel in believing communities made possible by the Spirit. Furthermore, his commitment to careful exegesis of biblical texts, combined with a sensitivity to theological interpretation of those texts and a passionate desire to see such theological interpretation worked out in the life and practice of believing communities, result

6 John, Jesus, and “The Ruler of This World”: from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Abstract: One might think that of all the new testament books the least likely to be caught up in debates about anti-imperial politics would be the Gospel of John. The old nineteenth-century prejudices about John linger on. John is a “spiritual” gospel, a “theological” gospel, not like the rough-and-tumble Synoptics, still less like that argumentative fellow paul. John is about the incarnation of the Word, the love of God in sending the Son, and the glory revealed on the cross. at the heart of John we find the Farewell discourses, seen by many as the deepest and richest focus and source

8 A New Translation of Philippians 2:5 and Its Significance for Paul’s Theology and Spirituality from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) GORMAN MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Philippians 2:5 remains an exegetical and translational conundrum, yet it is a “crux interpretum.”¹ The bridge between a key exhortation in the letter (Phil 1:27—2:4) and its poetic, theological foundation (Phil 2:6–11), phil 2:5, needs to be interpreted well in order to understand the nature of the connection between exhortation and foundation. Furthermore, since the great significance of phil 2:6–11—in multiple respects is universally acknowledged, we will gain the highest degree of clarity about it only if we properly explicate 2:5.

10 The Metaphor of the Face in Paul from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) BARTON STEPHEN C.
Abstract: To ask after the meaning and significance of the human face is to engage with a subject of complexity and wonder.² For we are considering more than the front of the head and related matters of an anatomical kind. Rather, we are dealing with the self and the self in relation, that is, matters of a psychological and socio-cultural kind, and ultimately matters of morality and metaphysics. More than any other part of the body, the face is the place, and facing is the action, where the self receives and expresses its identity,

14 Who and What is Theological Interpretation For? from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PADDISON ANGUS
Abstract: In recent years “Theological interpretation” has consolidated itself as a key contributor to the series of conversations that make up contemporary theology.¹ as a movement it has spawned commentary and book series, dedicated journals, countless monographs, and edited volumes. amidst this flurry of activity is the particular contribution made by the edited volume that andrew and i produced whilst we worked together at the University of Gloucestershire, Christology and Scripture: Interdisciplinary Perspectives. The volume arose out of an intensive and memorable weekend spent in a diocesan retreat house in the company of systematic theologians, church historians, and biblical scholars. at

16 ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι: from: Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) WEBSTER JOHN
Abstract: Christian theological teaching about the inspiration of the Bible is one element in a comprehensive account of the nature and ends of holy Scripture. A fully articulated theology of Scripture will treat five topics.

Chapter 2 Meet the Grecanici from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: A prolific number of studies on minorities have shed light on the historical and political genealogies of what is meant by minority status in Europe (see Cowan 2000, 2010). Scholars such as Jennifer Jackson Preece (1997), Mark Mazower (2004), and Jane Cowan (2010) examine the historical predicament of developing a comprehensive UN framework toward the protection of minority populations after 1918. Looking at the issue of the minorities from a top-down perspective, these studies delve deeply into the logics of treaties and the thorny position of minority recognition on a pan-European level. Subsequently, nation-state recognition of minorities was a criterion

Chapter 4 Hegemonic Networks, Kinship Governance from: The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: Kinship, Herzfeld argues, “carried the dead weight of outmoded assumptions” (2007:315). Like Fabian’s (1983) perceptions regarding the subject of anthropology, kinship became the “Other,” perpetually locked in direct association with Africanist structuralist theory. Nevertheless, kinship “has insidiously slipped back everywhere” (Herzfeld 2007:315) and is here to stay. Grecanici kinship is highly politicized and contributes to dense networks of governance and representation. With a strong emphasis on patrilineality, kinship is a political and genealogical order with far-reaching consequences for socioeconomic organization. The coordination of the next generation of relatives is desired by people who know exactly their own lines of relatedness.

3 The Influence of Anxiety from: Useful Fictions
Abstract: In the twenty-fifth of Sigmund Freud’s Introductory Lectures on Psychoanalysis, first delivered in 1917, Freud acknowledges that anxiety is “a riddle.” Though he offers no real definition of the term anxiety, he does flatly reject the value of examining it physiologically. “I know of nothing less important for the psychological comprehension of anxiety,” he writes, “than a knowledge of the nerve paths by which the excitations travel.”¹ In Freud’s updated “New Introductory Lectures on Psychoanalysis,” he still rejects the value of biochemical inquiry, but feels that he is in a much better position to explain the origins of anxiety—at

SIX Translating Law, Translating History, in Australian War Crimes Trials from: Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: Eyewitnesses in the three Australian war crimes cases, both those who were Jewish survivors of the atrocities and non-Jewish Ukrainians, bystanders and perpetrators, had suffered psychologically from the trauma of the events. For some this means that their testimony might be considered to be more reliable than accounts in ordinary criminal cases because events would be fixed more firmly, more definitely, and, so the argument goes, more accurately, in their minds. On the other hand, trauma can adversely affect cognition. Memories can be fixed that do not necessarily coincide with physical reality. This does not mean that eyewitnesses are acting

2 Representing Colonial Violence from: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I posit that the selected works by Michèle Lacrosil, Ken Bugul, and Ousmane Sembène complicate Fanon’s formula for colonial violence by offering a specifically female perspective on the experience and legacy of colonialism’s brutality. This chapter discusses these relationships in two different areas. First, I examine the process of epistemological violence — brainwashing through formal and informal education — as a legacy of colonialism. Second, I study the specificity of women’s experience within the colonial discourse. This involves a close analysis of Ken Bugul’s violent encounter with the West and Lacrosil’s depiction of a severe case of

2 Marcel Lefebvre in Gabon: from: Views from the Margins
Author(s) RICH JEREMY
Abstract: On the fiftieth anniversary of his ordination in 1979, Monsignor Marcel Lefebvre (1905–91) gave a sermon at a Parisian church crowded with supporters of his traditionalist Catholic vision, opposed to the liturgical and theological reforms of the Vatican II council of the 1960s. As a result of the Second Vatican Council, the Roman Catholic Church significantly changed its practices. These innovations included the use of vernacular languages during church services, the full endorsement of democratic institutions, and the abandonment of earlier views deemed as overtly anti-Semitic. Lefebvre was opposed to these changes and became a leading conservative critic of

3. WELCOME TO WESTWORLD from: The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: An expanded critical regionalism like that explored in the previous chapters demonstrates that no region can be static or inward-looking, for it needs to recognize forces beyond the nation, considering how the regional travels and dialogues with other cultures, circulating as it is consumed and re-produced in other forms. As the West is performed and practiced outside its geographical and ideological boundaries (or grids), as in Khaled Hosseini’s Afghanistan-set novel The Kite Runner(quoted above), it undergoes changes akin to the “wandering lines” described by Michel De Certeau—“‘indirect’ or ‘errant’ trajectories obeying their own logic … [creating] unforeseeable sentences,

Book Title: Transatlantic Voices-Interpretations of Native North American Literatures
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): PULITANO ELVIRA
Abstract: Blending western critical approaches-from cultural studies to postcolonialism and trauma theory-with indigenous epistemological perspectives, the contributors to Transatlantic Voicesadvocate "the inescapable hybridity and intermixture of ideas" proposed by Paul Gilroy in his study of black diasporic identity. Native North American writers forcefully suggest that the study of American ethnicities in the twenty-first century can no longer be confined to the borders of the United States. Given the increasing transnational aspect of American studies, a collection such asTransatlantic Voices, presenting scholars from countries as diverse as Germany, France, Bulgaria, Switzerland, Italy, the United Kingdom, and Finland, offers a timely contribution to such border crossing in scholarship and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1djmc5d

INTRODUCTION: from: Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: In 2004, during the rushed archeological work prior to the planned flooding of the Three Gorges region on the Yangzi River, excavators discovered a stele dated 173 ce and dedicated to a local prefect who had otherwise disappeared from history (Figure 1). In language common for such gravestones from the later years of the Han dynasty (202 bce–220 ce), the two-meter-high slab lavishly praised the administration of this minor official, named Jing Yun 景雲 (d. 103 ce). It describes how the local populace wept at his death “as if mourning for a parent” (如喪考妣), how they set aside their

PART II Age as positioning the self from: Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: The physical decrepitude to be suffered by the elderly was indeed a readily acknowledged fact of life in the minds of Han writers and thinkers, even though efforts were made to stave off the biological inevitability. For example, one might endeavor to forestall the decay

Book Title: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose-Reality in Search of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Van Buskirk Emily
Abstract: Based on a decade's work in Ginzburg's archives, the book discusses previously unknown manuscripts and uncovers a wealth of new information about the author's life, focusing on Ginzburg's quest for a new kind of writing adequate to her times. She writes of universal experiences-frustrated love, professional failures, remorse, aging-and explores the modern fragmentation of identity in the context of war, terror, and an oppressive state. Searching for a new concept of the self, and deeming the psychological novel (a beloved academic specialty) inadequate to express this concept, Ginzburg turned to fragmentary narratives that blur the lines between history, autobiography, and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr36q1

Introduction from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: For seven decades, Lydia Ginzburg (1902–90) wrote about the reality of daily life and historical change in Soviet Russia. In fragmentary notes and narratives, she exercised what she saw as the unique possibilities of “in-between” genres (human documents, memoirs, essays, autobiographies) to bring representations of new realms of life and thought into literature. She recorded, with an unmatched degree of insight and lucidity, how her contemporaries shaped their personalities and self-images in response to the Soviet experience. Yet in the English-speaking world, she is still known primarily as a literary scholar (author of the book On Psychological Prose, whose

CHAPTER 4 Passing Characters from: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In her book On Psychological Prose, first published in 1971, Ginzburg articulates the realm in which life and literature dynamically interact as we model our personalities: in daily life, people understand themselves and others through “creative constructs,” carrying out the aesthetic work of “selection, correlation, and symbolic interpretation of psychic elements.” The processes through which we compose and project our self-images resemble the creative acts authors perform when designing literary characters or lyric personae. Not only are these processes similar, they are symbiotic, since a personality “shapes itself, both internally and externally, by means of images, many of which have

Book Title: The Postmodern Bible-The Bible and Culture Collective
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Wuellner Wilhelm
Abstract: The burgeoning use of modern literary theory and cultural criticism in recent biblical studies has led to stimulating-but often bewildering-new readings of the Bible. This book, argued from a perspective shaped by postmodernism, is at once an accessible guide to and an engagement with various methods, theories, and critical practices transforming biblical scholarship today.Written by a collective of cutting-edge scholars-with each page the work of multiple hands- The Postmodern Bibledeliberately breaks with the individualist model of authorship that has traditionally dominated scholarship in the humanities and is itself an illustration of the postmodern transformation of biblical studies for which it argues.The book introduces, illustrates, and critiques seven prominent strategies of reading. Several of these interpretive strategies-rhetorical criticism, structuralism and narratology, reader-response criticism, and feminist criticism-have been instrumental in the transformation of biblical studies up to now. Many-feminist and womanist criticism, ideological criticism, poststructuralism, and psychoanalytic criticism-hold promise for the continued transformation of these studies in the future. Focusing on readings from both the Hebrew Bible and the New Testament, this volume illuminates the current multidisciplinary debates emerging from postmodernism by exposing the still highly contested epistemological, political, and ethical positions in the field of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr3804

2 Structuralist and Narratological Criticism from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: Along with reader-response criticism, structuralist and narratological criticism has offered biblical interpreters a crucial entryway into literary theory and the reading of the Bible. The theoretical models and language associated with structuralism and narratology, however, are quite distinct. Readers unfamiliar with these approaches may find the technical terminology complex and confusing. For this reason we concentrate our discussion on five key terms: structuralism, formalism, semiotics, narratology, andpoetics. Their interrelations will be dealt with along the way. Suffice it to say here, by way of explaining the chapter title, that formalism and semiotics will be taken up in relation to

7 Ideological Criticism from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: Michèle Barrett provides us with a place to begin: “Ideology is a generic term for the processes by which meaning is produced, challenged, reproduced, transformed” (1980:97). Ideological criticism, it follows, is concerned with theorizing and critiquing those processes of meaning

Postscript from: The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: The Postmodern Bibleemerges in a world of competing discourses and global conflicts and connections. Readers of literary and cultural critical theory on the Bible will continue to face a multitude of methodologies and readings that give no promise of a coherent picture. When we first began to imagine writing this book, we thought we could provide a guide to the terrain of contemporary culture and criticism. What we now better understand is that the ideological gesture of providing such a map communicates the notion that somehow we know everything that is going on and can assess and communicate it

4 Allegory as Radical Interpretation from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: “Radical interpretation” means the redescription, in one’s own language, of sentences from an alien system of concepts and beliefs. My thought is that this idea describes, in a rough, preliminary sort of way, the logic of allegorical interpretation, at least in the case of someone like Philo Judaeus, who lived in Alexandria about the time of Christ and produced a number of commentaries on the Septuagint, the (almost legendary) Greek translation of the Hebrew Bible, in order to make sense of it in terms of the concepts and beliefs of Hellenistic culture. In this context making sense does not mean

8 Wordsworth at the Limits of Romantic Hermeneutics from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: In this chapter I want to try to gloss the above passage, with its reference to something that looks very much like the Stanislavsky method of getting into character, where one loses oneself in the construction of someone else. Imagine a theory of poetry as acting, in which the distinction between being and acting loses its ontological force. As it happens, glossing this passage will mean situating Wordsworth within the history of interpretation, by which I mean the history that concerns itself with the question of understanding. What is it that happens when something, or someone, makes sense, or maybe

12 Against Poetry: from: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: The title is meant to take us back to the quarrel between philosophy and poetry that Socrates already regarded as ancient. My sense is that every hermeneutical situation has the structure of this quarrel, which is governed by a logic that is by turns exclusionary and allegorical. Plato’s idea seems to have been that poetry embodies something (we’re not sure what) that interferes with the sort of discourse Socrates is trying to set up and that he seems to be practicing in texts like the Republic, where one statement follows another more or less justifiably or according to some principle

4 A View from the West: from: Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) FAULHABER PRISCILA
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the significance of frontier in the history of social anthropology, especially fieldwork in the Amazon supported by the Institute of Social Science (ISS) of the University of California at Berkeley (UCB). I understand that subventions for scholarly research in the western part of the United States resonate in the scientific field of moving-frontier theories. ISS supported projects on “economic and cultural boundaries,” relocating to the social domain the former biological metaphor of botanical germination. This institute supported projects that went beyond domestic U.S. issues, embracing social problems in other countries such as Mexico and

Book Title: In a Different Place-Pilgrimage, Gender, and Politics at a Greek Island Shrine
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Dubisch Jill
Abstract: In a Different Placeoffers a richly textured account of a modern pilgrimage, combining ethnographic detail, theory, and personal reflection. Visited by thousands of pilgrims yearly, the Church of the Madonna of the Annunciation on the Aegean island of Tinos is a site where different interests--sacred and secular, local and national, personal and official--all come together. Exploring the shrine and its surrounding town, Jill Dubisch shares her insights into the intersection of social, religious, and political life in Greece. Along the way she develops the idea of pilgrimage-journeying away from home in search of the miraculous--as a metaphor for anthropological fieldwork. This highly readable work offers us the opportunity to share one anthropologist's personal and professional journey and to see in a "different place" the inadequacy of such conventional anthropological categories as theory versus data, rationality versus emotion, and the observer versus the observed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8nz

CHAPTER THREE The Anthropological Study of Pilgrimage from: In a Different Place
Abstract: When I first began my research on pilgrimage at the Church of the Annunciation on Tinos in 1986, the phenomenon was not one that had been well studied by anthropologists. Aside from Victor Turner’s works on pilgrimage as ritual and on the place of pilgrimage in the Christian tradition (1974, 1979; Turner and Turner 1978), works that provided much of the initial inspiration for my own research, there existed only a handful of anthropological studies of pilgrimage. Recently, however, anthropological interest in the topic has burgeoned. While there are still no general theoretical works of a scope to rival Turner’s,

II The Interpretation of Religious Healing from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The Anastenaria is concerned with healing in the broadest sense. It is both a religious ritual and a form of psychotherapy. Any attempt to understand the Anastenaria as a system of religious healing must therefore integrate approaches from medical anthropology with those from the anthropological study of religion. It must bring together the concerns of transcultural psychiatry and those of symbolic anthropology. Such a synthesis, which constitutes an interpretive or hermeneutic approach to the study of ritual therapy, provides the theoretical framework for this study of the Anastenaria.

IV From Illness and Suffering to Health and Joy from: Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: In the Anastenaria religious healing is brought about by the transformation of a person’s relationship with Saint Constantine from a negative one involving illness and suffering to a positive one involving health and joy, a transformation that takes place when a person becomes an Anastenaris and acquires the supernatural power of the Saint. A person’s relationship with Saint Constantine can, therefore, be seen as a powerful metaphor for the person’s social, psychological, and physiological condition. The Anastenaria provides people who are in a weak, vulnerable, or subordinate position with a spirit idiom that they can use to gain power over

4 The Fairy-Tale Forest as Memory Site: from: New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) McGonagill Doris
Abstract: TeachIng undergraduate courses In German StudIes I have had the opportunity to prepare several courses and smaller teaching units on the Grimms’ folk and fairy tales, but each time I find myself facing the same question: How should I structure my material? There are some obvious choices—chronological, regional, thematic—each with its own advantages and limitations. Structuring principles based on thematic similarities and related plot elements—the folklorists’ tale types—can provide a basic infrastructure, along with specific character constellations, motifs, and topoi. Thus your groups may include tales about family conflict and gender relationships (“child victims,” “bad dads,”

Sociorhetorical Criticism: from: Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Robbins Vernon K.
Abstract: Sociorhetorical criticism is a textually based method that uses programmatic strategies to invite social, cultural, historical, psychological, aesthetic, ideological and theological information into a context of minute exegetical activity. In a context where historical criticism has been opening its boundaries to social and cultural data and literary criticism has been opening boundaries to ideology, sociorhetorical criticism practices interdisciplinary exegesis that reinvents the traditional steps of analysis and redraws the traditional boundaries of interpretation. Sociorhetorical criticism, then, is an exegetically oriented approach that gathers current practices of interpretation together in an interdisciplinary paradigm.

4 Nihilism: from: Writing of the Formless
Abstract: The theological underpinnings of the Cuban Revolution are often confronted as if it were a nationally circumscribed problematic, even as its analysis reproduces dynamics that are perceptible and operative on a much broader scale.¹ Yet something is erased when the national furnishes the only framework to think through this difficult terrain, and it concerns the specific role of politics. This might seem paradoxical, for how could politics be disregarded when it comes to revolution? Politics becomes invisible when the only viable strategic maneuver to dismiss a political position hinges on the accusation that an authority in power is not legitimate

Book Title: Citizen Subject-Foundations for Philosophical Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Miller Steven
Abstract: What can the universals of political philosophy offer to those who experience the living paradox of an inegalitarian construction of egalitarian citizenship? Citizen Subject is the summation of +ëtienne BalibarGÇÖs career-long project to think the necessary and necessarily antagonistic relation between the categories of citizen and subject. In this magnum opus, the question of modernity is framed anew with special attention to the self-enunciation of the subject (in Descartes, Locke, Rousseau, and Derrida), the constitution of the community as GÇ£weGÇ¥ (in Hegel, Marx, and Tolstoy), and the aporia of the judgment of self and others (in Foucualt, Freud, Kelsen, and Blanchot)._x000D_ After the GÇ£humanist controversyGÇ¥ that preoccupied twentieth-century philosophy, Citizen Subject proposes foundations for philosophical anthropology today, in terms of two contrary movements: the becoming-citizen of the subject and the becoming-subject of the citizen. The citizen-subject who is constituted in the claim to a GÇ£right to have rightsGÇ¥ (Arendt) cannot exist without an underside that contests and defies it. HeGÇöor she, because Balibar is concerned throughout this volume with questions of sexual differenceGÇöfigures not only the social relation but also the discontent or the uneasiness at the heart of this relation. The human can be instituted only if it betrays itself by upholding GÇ£anthropological differencesGÇ¥ that impose normality and identity as conditions of belonging to the community._x000D_ The violence of GÇ£civilGÇ¥ bourgeois universality, Balibar argues, is greater (and less legitimate, therefore less stable) than that of theological or cosmological universality. Right is thus founded on insubordination, and emancipation derives its force from otherness._x000D_ Ultimately, Citizen Subject offers a revolutionary rewriting of the dialectic of universality and differences in the bourgeois epoch, revealing in the relationship between the common and the universal a political gap at the heart of the universal itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89tnz

SIX The Messianic Moment in Marx from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: In the present essay, I would like to reexamine and, if possible, elucidate a question that often recurs in interpretations of Marx: What is the relationship between his concept of politics and religious (or theological) discourse? In view of the comparison that this issue of the Revue Germanique Internationalewould like to draw, but also because of the strategic importance that, I believe, must be conferred upon this comparison, I will focus mainly upon a single text: the article, entitled “Zur Kritik der Hegelschen Rechtsphilosophie. Einleitung,” that Marx published in theDeutsch-Französische Jahrbücherin March 1844. For the first aa

TEN Judging Self and Others: from: Citizen Subject
Abstract: Judgment thus possesses both an anthropological side and an institutional

3 The Future of a Technological Illusion from: Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s critique of a world come of age, scattered across a handful of documents from prison, offers keen insight into the time in which we live and the place where we have been sent to testify to God’s work of judgment and reconciliation in Christ. He brings to light the irony in modernity’s claim to have reached a stage of intellectual and moral maturity, enabling us to see that for all of its knowledge, expertise, and technological success, the age is as godless and without resource as previous generations. But he also draws our attention to the distinctive and

Chapter Three REVEALING AND RECONSTRUCTING LONDON from: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: As we have seen in the previous chapter, in constant tension with the representations of space of London’s orderly West End and tourist attractions are spaces of urban disorder, social ‘dysfunction’, and poverty that continually threaten to depose the institutional and ideological clarity of the figured city. For the French travellers examined in this chapter, spaces of disorder perform in correspondence and contrast with the monumentality of more official sites. Disorder is a trope that provides a key to analysing these travellers’ strategies for making meaning for London during the interwar period – in the case of Jacques Dyssord (1880–

INTRODUCTION from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: Just less than half a century ago, Habermas bemoaned the fact that a gulf had developed between the natural sciences, which are taken to be concerned with the formulation of explanatory laws (‘nomological sciences’), and the human sciences, which

Chapter 1 READING BOURDIEU PHENOMENOLOGICALLY from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: I believe that Pierre Bourdieu is best understood as a phenomenological sociologist and that, equally, responses to his work in the spirit of its production have also to be understood phenomenologically. I first offer a brief justification of that view. I then seek to clarify what I take to be the nature of Bourdieu’s phenomenological orientation before proceeding to an elaboration of its implications both for our understanding of Bourdieu’s work and for an assessment of the range of responses to his work presented in this volume. In the light of these preliminary remarks, I then offer reflections on each

Chapter 3 SOCIOLOGY AT THE SCALE OF THE INDIVIDUAL: from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Vandenberghe Frédéric
Abstract: Since the turn of the century, the international reception of the work of Pierre Bourdieu has steadily gathered pace and taken on such a magnitude that we can say (with some exaggeration) that genetic structuralism now occupies the position of the hegemon within the global field of sociological theory, comparable perhaps to the one of structural functionalism in the post-war period. Nowadays, one can like or detest Bourdieu’s critical sociology; however, one cannot afford to ignore it. He is the main ‘attractor’ in the field of sociology (with Michel Foucault playing a similar role within the rival, anti-disciplinary field of

Chapter 4 BOURDIEU AND INTERNATIONAL SOCIAL SCIENCE from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: ‘“The point of view”, says Ferdinand de Saussure, “creates the object”’. This is the opening sentence of part 2 of Le métier de sociologue: Préalables épistémologiques(The craft of sociology: epistemological preliminaries), which Pierre Bourdieu coproduced with Jean-Claude Chamboredon and Jean-Claude Passeron in 1968 ([1968], 1991, 33). The co-authors proceeded to quote from Karl Marx and Max Weber to suggest that there was an epistemological principle articulated in the Saussurean statement that unified social science practice in spite of ideological differences, one that involves seeing science as ‘an instrument for breaking with naive realism’ ([1968], 1991, 33). The whole text

Chapter 9 BOURDIEU’S USE AND RECEPTION: from: The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Méndez María-Luisa
Abstract: In an article entitled ‘On the Cunning of Imperialist Reason’, Pierre Bourdieu and Loïc Wacquant (1999) refer to theorization as ‘the power to universalize particularisms linked to a singular historical tradition by causing them to be misrecognized as such’ (Bourdieu and Wacquant 1999, 41). In other words, theorization is understood as a form of neutralization of the historical context. In this, as in other pieces, Bourdieu showed reluctance to extract concepts – understood as structured structures – from the contexts of their production, or from their structuring structures (Robbins 1994). This, he thought, was a way of imposing (Western) sociological

7 WRITING THE HISTORY OF AN ANDEAN GHOST from: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Martínez Francisco A. Ortega
Abstract: Garcilaso de la Vega’s The Royal Commentaries(1609) has enjoyed an everwider appeal since the early seventeenth century.¹ Such rising popularity has taken place despite fundamental changes in readers’ criteria of evaluation and appreciation of this work. Up to the late nineteenth century, Garcilaso’s account had been taken as the most accomplished historical depiction of the Inca, but the discovery of new written and archeological sources and the emergence of modern historiography source criticism led historians and anthropologists to challenge its truthfulness. As a result, Garcilaso’shistorylost credibility. At the same time, thenarrativewas hailed as possessing the

5 Heidegger and Kierkegaard: from: Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: It is only slightly hyperbolic to say that Jean Wahl’s “Heidegger and Kierkegaard: An Investigation into the Original Elements of Heidegger’s Philosophy” legitimized Søren Kierkegaard in French academia and inaugurated French existentialism as such.¹ First published in 1932/1933 in Recherches Philosophiques, “perhaps the most significant [journal] of its time,”² it was republished in 1938 as an appendix toÉtudes kierkegaardiennes, which would go on to become the most important book on Kierkegaard in France. Wahl’s article laid the groundwork for the anthropological, humanist reading of Martin Heidegger by showing how Heidegger’s philosophy must be seen as an attempt to ontologize

1 Philosophia from: The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: The relation between philosophy and theology is no longer a hotly debated question among Christians, and yet it is constitutive for the framework in which their thinking develops. Their schools seem to have found a modus vivendifor the coexistence of both disciplines, but as far as I know, this coexistence is not supported by a generally accepted metatheory and “philosophico-theological” methodology. In this chapter I would like to challenge a powerful conception of the way in which philosophy and theology are and should be related and to propose a different conception. I will focus here on these disciplines insofar

2 The Poetics of the Impossible and the Kingdom of God from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: The Kingdom of God abides by a certain logic, but it is a divine logic. From the point of view of the world, which is its antagonist, what goes on in the Kingdom looks mad and even impossible. Still, it can be said in defense of the Kingdom that it is not simply impossible but rather, let us say, theimpossible. We might even speak of the logic of the impossible, on the perfectly logical assumption that with God, all things are possible (Luke 1:37), including the maddest and most impossible. But beyond any possible logic, even a logic of

3 Toward a “Continental” Philosophy of Religion: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Halteman Matthew C.
Abstract: From its inception in Kant’s striving to imagine a “religion within the limits of reason alone,” the Continental tradition has maintained a strict division of labor between theological and philosophical reflection on religion. Many of its most influential thinkers have argued, moreover, that theological inquiry is secondary to the more fundamental philosophical task of elucidating a conceptual logic of "the religious," the universal structure that underlies all particular faith traditions.

9 Speaking Otherwise: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Ward Graham
Abstract: I want to argue for the significance of theology to philosophy and the importance today of philosophical theology rather than philosophy of religion. I want to demonstrate how a new space for analogical thinking has been opened up by certain poststructuralist discourses; how this is a space in which we can think again of an analogical world and a cosmological project; but how, left to poststructural critical thinking alone, this worldview can all too easily endorse a culture of sadomasochism, by enjoying and enjoining its own endless victimage. Only a theological account (not, note, foundation), as the necessary supplement to

10 Apophasis and Askêsis: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Ellsworth Jonathan
Abstract: This much, at least, is clear: we continue to speak of apophasis.Studies on the logic and language of apophatic discourse abound,¹ and more are on the way. But why this concern, today, with apophaticism? More specifically, why is it that apophatic theologies are (still? again?) being studied and discussed in certain segments of contemporary philosophy? And to what end? This essay will first hazard a few answers and offer some remarks on contemporary philosophy’s ongoing interests in-and appropriations of—apophatic theological language. Attention will then be called to an essential feature of these apophatic texts that many studies neglect,

13 Gilles Deleuze and the Sublime Fold of Religion from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: In many ways, the possibilities for contemporary philosophical and theological thinking have been determined by Kant. Whether explicitly or implicitly, religion has been thought consistently either within, along, or beyond the limits legislated by classical modern reason. At the same time, its status has remained problematic, because it was left out of the fundamental sources of human knowledge according to Kant’s critique. Although he essentially appended religion onto morality, since that time, religion has flirted with and been skirted by scientific theoretical knowledge, ethics, and aesthetics. In his Theology of Culture,Paul Tillich has eloquently described this dilemma, and his

15 Politics and Experience: from: Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goodchild Philip
Abstract: This paper assumes a political vision that, not being widely shared, requires explicit statement. The fundamental human relations that determine the shape of ecological, social, and personal worlds are not governed by legal, contractual, or institutional principles, but by constitutive practices. At present, the dominant constitutive practice of contemporary social relations is the global market. Production, distribution, and consumption are constituted for the purposes either of making money or of providing “value for money”—that is, a value subject to public measurement. These economic principles, by giving a public and social representation of diverse needs and impulses, usurp the place

4 Space from: How John Works
Author(s) Luther Susanne
Abstract: Space in the Gospel of John denotes narrative space, which is all the topographical and topological information given in the text that serves to create the setting for the narrative action as well as a narrative world in the reader’s mind.¹ Narrative space can be created through reference to geographical spaces like “Jerusalem” or “Galilee”; through the naming of concrete spaces like “synagogue,” “praetorium,” or “Jacob’s well”; or through descriptive (“inside,” “outside”) or deictic (“here,” “there”) expressions. However, only fragments of the narrated world are provided through the words of the narrator and the characters of the story. The reader

10 Scripture from: How John Works
Author(s) Chennattu Rekha M.
Abstract: This chapter illustrates how the Fourth Evangelist uses and interprets Scripture to develop the Johannine narrative of Jesus in a unique manner in order to make John’s Gospel truly credible and normative. In what follows, we shall first examine the use of Old Testament theological motifs, metaphors, imageries, allusions, festivals, and structural frameworks in John’s Gospel. We shall then explore the use and interpretation of direct and indirect Old Testament citations as well as references to the law in the gospel. An investigation of the understanding of the words as well as commandments of Jesus in the gospel will follow.

Book Title: The Gift of Love-Augustine, Jean-Luc Marion, and the Trinity
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Staron Andrew
Abstract: The Gift of Love builds upon recent scholarship and reads Augustine’s De Trinitate as a rational study of the limits of theological language and the possibility of knowing the Trinity because of those limits. Marion’s description of the gift of love offers to Augustine’s theology a phenomenological texture by which the trinitarian love given might be made incarnate in one’s life. The Gift of Love presents a reason for hope that the signification of “the Trinity that God is," while impossible for human beings is not impossible for God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjhcg

2 Books 1–4: from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: Arising from christological roots and “designed to preserve faith in Christ, the Son of God, and to direct the Christian hope toward full salvation in the divine fellowship,”¹ the doctrine of the Trinity was forged by the blows struck in the heat of contentious intellectual and ecclesiastical negotiations about the language with which we might talk about, and more importantly address, God. Speculation about the nature of the God and the Nicene priority placed on the same substance of the Father, Son, and Spirit has its historical roots in practical and polemical formulations intended to respond to threats against both

3 Books 5–7: from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: Concluding book 4, the bishop writes of the books to follow, “we shall see with the Lord’s help what sort of subtle crafty arguments the heretics bring forward and how they can be demolished.”² With a focus and methodology significantly influenced by the theological controversies with the Homoeans (Arians), these next three books, which according to Hill form “a distinct unit,”³ engage the question of speaking about God as Trinity, of how we might name the one God of Jesus Christ as “Father, Son, and Holy Spirit.” But although we would do well to read these books within their polemical

4 Books 8–15: from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: “Words have force only to the extent that they remind us to look for things,” Augustine instructs his son, “they don’t display them for us to know.”¹ How then can theological language remind us to look for the Trinity—and not simply any trinity but “the Trinity that God is”?² Book 8 marks a transition from the historical accounts of the divine missions and the rules of theological language by which we might speak of God to a more inward path,³ which is, for the Doctor of Grace, also the possibility of a path upward to God. Precisely how we

6 Marking Excess: from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: To have a discourse dealing with the impossible—what can justify this privilege? What can justify Marion’s turn to the unconditioned, away from the as suchby which individual instances appear under a horizon of possibility, conditioned and defined in advance by what we conceptualize their essence to be, by what we understand they can be? By what criteria might we justify impossibility so we might pass judgment on the veracity of discourse—to deem such discourse meaningful amidst the possibility of vanity? Indeed, such questions do not remain obediently restrained in phenomenological circles but reach as well (or perhaps

9 Appraising the Gift of Love from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: If the theologian must obtain forgiveness for every essay in theology—forgiveness for speaking beginning with another, for speaking in another’s words, and also for speaking these groundless words that are always haunted by the impossibility of the very unconditionality the theologian hopes to signify through them—then must Marion also do so? That is, if Marion names the unconditioned and names it God, then surely he too must seek permission for this presumptive attempt at impossible signification. It is thinking the unconditioned, the excess, that drives Marion’s phenomenological work, but theologically considered, he is seeking not the unconditionedas

Conclusion to Part Three from: The Gift of Love
Abstract: To set about making an inexpressible reality inexpressibly seen¹ (or the invisible God visible as invisible, the impossible possibleas impossible) in a work of theology is, itself, an impossible task and one that was never my intention. It was never my desire to try to present the Trinity to my readers, to present Godas such. It is my hope, however, that this work might instead serve as an exercise in phenomenological theology, whereby the reception of the gift of love can be explored in the transformation it effects within us. It was never my intention to put this

Foreword from: Acting for Others
Author(s) Hinlicky Paul R.
Abstract: Michaela Kušnieriková, in this welcome study, takes her place in the rising generation of theologians theorizing Christianity after Christendom. She does this work, fittingly enough, from the religious crossroads of Europe: between East and West, to be sure, but also the battle site of the Wars of Religion between North and South that so devastated and discredited the church. Kušnieriková grew up in the spiritually vacated place where all the subsequent bloody contests between the would-be ideological replacements of religion exchanged totalitarianisms.

2 The Church as a Patriarchal Family in Bonhoeffer from: Acting for Others
Abstract: Bonhoeffer¹ compared the church to a patriarchal family in trying to express the church-community as a distinct sociological type which the empirical church embodies. He applied this familial metaphor for the church in a different way than that of the early Christians that Arendt focused on.

Book Title: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean- Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): PAPADATOS YIANNIS
Abstract: In the long tradition of the archaeology of the eastern Mediterranean bodies have held a prominent role in the form of figurines, frescos, or skeletal remains, and have even been responsible for sparking captivating portrayals of the Mother-Goddess cult, the elegant women of Minoan Crete or the deeds of heroic men. Growing literature on the archaeology and anthropology of the body has raised awareness about the dynamic and multifaceted role of the body in experiencing the world and in the construction, performance and negotiation of social identity. In these 28 thematically arranged papers, specialists in the archaeology of the eastern Mediterranean confront the perceived invisibility of past bodies and ask new research questions. Contributors discuss new and old evidence; they examine how bodies intersect with the material world, and explore the role of body-situated experiences in creating distinct social and other identities. Papers range chronologically from the Palaeolithic to the Early Iron Age and cover the geographical regions of the Aegean, Cyprus and the Near East. They highlight the new possibilities that emerge for the interpretation of the prehistoric eastern Mediterranean through a combined use of body-focused methodological and theoretical perspectives that are nevertheless grounded in the archaeological record.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjkqm

1 Polydactyly in Chalcolithic Figurines from Cyprus from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Fox Sherry C.
Abstract: Mimesisis the imitation of nature and life in art or literature. According to Plato, all art is mimetic of life and therefore a reflection of reality. This theory has spawned an entire philosophy and study of art and the nature of reality and identity (i.e.Potolsky 2006, Halliwell 2009 — for a prehistoric example see Borić 2007). If art does indeed reflect reality, then this could present a window into the past, representing either ideal images for a particular period or specific individuals. In some cases, it is possible to observe the integration of a specific biological phenomenon into artistic

2 Figurines, Paint and the Perception of the Body in the Early Bronze Age Southern Aegean from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Papadatos Yiannis
Abstract: Most studies on anthropomorphic figurines of the Early Bronze Age (hereafter EBA) in the southern Aegean tend to emphasise the strong similarities concerning their type, form and context of findspot (Renfrew 1969; 1991; Branigan 1972; Getz-Preziosi 1987; Doumas 2002). This is largely because Cycladic three-dimensional iconography, particularly the female figurines with folded arms, profoundly influenced the neighbouring areas. Imports from the Cyclades, hybrid types and local imitations of Cycladic-type figurines were found in many sites across the littoral southern Aegean and Crete (Branigan 1972; Sakellarakis 1987; Mina 2008). The typological homogeneity of these figurines was used as evidence for the

6 Handlers and Viewers: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Zeman-Wiśniewska Katarzyna
Abstract: Coroplastic studies concerning figures and figurines have developed as a distinct, very vibrant and dynamic field of archaeological research.¹ Terracotta figures and figurines, especially anthropomorphic ones, are fascinating in the way they bring us face to facewith the past, and have provoked numerous discussions concerning social structures, ancient religions, and even prehistoric models of beauty. Scholars have suggested that artefacts, including figures and figurines, should not be studied, as they are still often presented in museums, standing alone, extracted from their environment, visible only en-face and untouchable (Brumfiel 1996; Hamiltonet al.1996; Bailey 2005; Zonou-Herbst 2009). We can

7 Re-Making the Self: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Bolger Diane
Abstract: In this paper I explore some of the ways that changes in multiple aspects of bodily practice during the Chalcolithic period of Cyprus — human burials, figurative art, personal ornamentation and other forms of material culture — can be linked to one another through the concept of the “fractal self”, a term first used by social anthropologists in the early 1990s but applied more recently in archaeological studies by Lucas (1996), Tilley (1996), Chapman (2000), Fowler (2002; 2004; 2008) and Brück (2006) (see also Borić and Robb 2008). I argue that a fundamental transformation of personal and social identity was brought about

8 Pots and People: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Webb Jennifer M.
Abstract: Archaeologists routinely consider artefacts in relation to other artefacts and use relationships of similarity and difference to create typologies and organise material culture into chronological or geographical entities (Jones 2007, 143). In this paper I propose instead to focus on the relationship between artefacts and people and ask whether different material assemblages reflect differently embodied lives in Early Bronze Age Cyprus (EBA hereafter) (on the existence of embodied individuals in prehistory and a review of the literature, see Knapp and van Dommelen 2008 and Knapp 2010).

10 Placed with Care: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Aulsebrook Stephanie
Abstract: Vessels manufactured from metal appear in a geographically-wide distribution of Late Bronze Age deposits across the southern Greek mainland, c.1700–1200 BC, although they remain relatively rare in the archaeological record. Their decoration required additional crafting time, labour and skill, altering their appearance and changing the interactions between the individual user, the vessel, and other participants within their context of use. Much emphasis has been placed within the discipline of archaeology on the communicative aspects of material culture (cf. Shanks and Tilley 1987, 97, 117; Kenoyer 2000, 91; for a more nuanced approach Meskell 2005, 2), but less attention

18 From Potter’s Mark to the Potter Who Marks from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Christakis Kostis
Abstract: The application of marks on pottery during the manufacture and before the firing of a pot is a widespread practice in both the archaeological and ethnographic records of a range of different cultural milieus. Given that the mark was applied before the firing process, it is generally agreed that it is the potter who was responsible for marking the pot. Discussions so far have focused exclusively on the function and meaning of these marks. Most scholars relate them to potters and/or workshops ( e.g.Bikaki 1984, 9, 22, 42; Papadopoulos 1994; Hirschfeld 1999, 33; Lindblom 2001, 132–3; Ditze 2007, 279

19 Grasping Identity: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Lorentz Kirsi O.
Abstract: Archaeologists have attempted to study identity through several different avenues and varied archaeological remains (see e.g.Insoll 2007), including employing data derived from analyses of human remains. More recently, some bioarchaeologists have begun to attempt social interpretations of the physical anthropological and palaeopathological data they produce (Agarwal and Glencross 2011; Gowland and Knüsel 2006), focusing on identity issues. Grasping for identity through archaeological human remains is a challenging endeavour as, for example, papers in the edited volume by Gowland and Knüsel illustrate (2006, see specifically Le Hurayet al.2006; Montgomery and Evans 2006). Only some differential practices relating to

20 Headshaping and Identity at Tell Nader from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Fox Sherry C.
Abstract: Human skeletal data are presented in this chapter within the context of the archaeological data from the site of Tell Nader in the Kurdistan Region of Iraq to help elucidate long-standing questions of cultural dynamics. In particular, a form of circumferential headshaping has been found in the skeleton of an adult female recovered from the Ubaid site. It is suggested from the integrated results of the study of the human remains in their cultural context that the intentionally produced modification of the cranium recovered from the archaeological site of Tell Nader is linked to group identity in the Ubaid.

21 Constructing Identities by Ageing the Body in the Prehistoric Aegean: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Triantaphyllou Sevi
Abstract: Until recently the perception of age had drawn minimal attention in archaeological research which has been dominated by studies concerning the importance of gender. Work, however, undertaken from the ’90s onwards (Gero and Conkey 1991; Moore and Scott 1997; Montserrat 1998; Hamilakis et al.2001; Díaz-Andreuet al.2005; Joyce 2005; Gowland and Knüsel 2006; Lucy 2005; Sofaer 2006; Insoll 2007; Borić and Robb 2008; Rebay-Salisburyet al.2010; Robbet al.2013) on the archaeology of the body has put forward new arguments as regards the construction of age but also, more lately, the link of gender with age

26 Collective Selves and Funerary Rituals. from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Papadimitriou Nikolas
Abstract: The present paper aims at investigating — both theoretically and in the context of the Early Mycenaean period in mainland Greece (Table 26.1) — the relation of funerary rituals with processes of shaping, negotiating and transmitting collective identities. In particular, I wish to explore the role of specially designated ritual spaces (in this case, the dromoiof Mycenaean tombs) as frameworks for the creation of embodied experiences of shared remembering and identification. In this effort, I will draw extensively on anthropological literature examining rituals as public performances. Anthropologists recognise widely the ability of rituals to instil social values, worldviews and power relations

28 Epilogue: from: An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Kotsakis Kostas
Abstract: In an early paper on embodiment, Lynn Meskell (1996) ended her argument wondering whether the bodywill eventually remain a central analytic subject in archaeology or will dissolve into yet another intellectual fad. True, archaeology has come rather late in this field, which had already dominated the social sciences, anthropology, and feminist studies (Csordas 1994a){Csordas, 1994 #8978}{Csordas, 1994 #9578}{Csordas, 1994 #9578}. Almost two decades later, the proliferation of the relevant archaeological literature shows beyond doubt that the concept is now well-established and directs, one way or another, much of the ongoing archaeological analysis. Indeed, the conference presented in this volume

CHAPTER THREE THE CASE FOR GEORG LUKÁCS from: Marxism and Form
Abstract: For Western readers the idea of Georg Lukács has often seemed more interesting than the reality. It is as though, in some world of Platonic forms and methodological archetypes, a place were waiting for the Marxist literary critic which (after Plekhanov) only Lukács has seriously tried to fill. Yet in the long run even his more sympathetic Western critics turn away from him in varying degrees of disillusionment: they came prepared to contemplate the abstract idea, but in practice they find themselves asked to sacrifice too much. They pay lip service to Lukács as a figure, but the texts themselves

CHAPTER FIVE TOWARDS DIALECTICAL CRITICISM from: Marxism and Form
Abstract: A phenomenological description of dialectical criticism? The contradiction is not so great as it might at first glance appear. The peculiar difficulty of dialectical writing lies indeed in its holistic, “totalizing” character: as though you could not say any one thing until you had first said everything; as though with each new idea you were bound to recapitulate the entire system. So it is that the attempt to do justice to the most random observation of Hegel ends up drawing the whole tangled, dripping mass of the Hegelian sequence of forms out into the light with it. So it is

The Gospel of Bare Life: from: Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Liew Tat-siong Benny
Abstract: Jacques Lacan (2001, 341) has famously declared that “it is not enough to decide on the basis of its effect—Death. it still remains to be decided which death, that which is brought by life or that which brings life.” Of course, for Lacan, whose psychoanalysis has much to do with one’s relations to death and the dead (Luepnitz 2003, 232), there is a difference between biological and psychic death and hence between mortality and vitality. Nevertheless, his statement does highlight, in a delightfully ironic way, how talk about death can—or should—be both specific and ambiguous at the

3 Storytelling in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility: from: The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: “The Work of Art in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility” (1935–39) and “The Storyteller” share much common ground. Both texts seize on the transformed status of art and aesthetic experience as a privileged point of entry for reflecting on the modern condition. Each essay examines the changes wrought by a watershed event in the development of technology—in “The Storyteller,” the propagation of movable print and a book culture that displaces the oral practice of storytelling, marking the dislocation of the collective wisdom of tradition by the putative objectivity of information; in the artwork essay, the advent of

2. The Coy Cult Text: from: Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Bould Mark
Abstract: Many attempts to define cult movies and to describe their appeal are characterized by notions of doubleness, contradiction, and introjection. For example, J. P. Telotte finds in the “etymological underpinnings of ‘cult’” (14) a complex of potential meanings pointing to a dialectical impulse to possess and to be possessed, to express selfhood through surrendering to an external other. Thus, he suggests, the cult movie transgresses norms, enabling the cultist “to fashion a statement of difference” (14), even as it establishes “a stable ground from which to make that assertion, a ground withinthe very boundaries” that are being transgressed (15).

CHAPTER FIVE Being Playful: from: Patrick Modiano
Abstract: We have now seen numerous instances of Modiano at his most subversive. The apparently unremarkable first-person narrator, chronological narrative and realist representation have all turned out to be playful subversions of these familiar narrative tropes. So too has his use of historical facts: far from adding up to a historical novel, they result in an uneasy mixture of fact and fiction which has a morally disturbing effect on the reader. This leads us to a question of classification. Modiano’s novels are not what they seem, so we know what they are not: but what exactly are they? To what subgenre

5 Tales of Rats and Pigs from: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: After arguing that “strange” narrators can be employed as tools for phenomenological investigation, this chapter places this investigation into a broader perspective by looking at the animal narrators of Andrzej Zaniewski’s Rat (1995; originally published in Polish in 1993) and Marie Darrieussecq’s Pig Tales(1997; originally published in French in 1996). My analysis should be read against the background of larger discussions on animal consciousness in fields such as cognitive ethology (Griffin 2001) and animal studies (see, e.g., Wolfe 2009). To what extent are nonhuman animals capable of conscious experience, and how are we to know their conscious states in

Presentazione from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Marino Stefano
Abstract: A partire dagli anni Ottanta del secolo scorso, nel pieno della estenuante diatriba tra analitici e continentali, il pensiero dialettico sembrava per lo più incamminato verso l’oblio o, nel migliore dei casi, destinato a diventare oggetto di studi filologici. Non molto tempo dopo, però, esso è stato oggetto di una ripresa di interesse che è via via cresciuta. Un contributo forse inatteso a questa rinnovata considerazione è venuto dalla cultura angloamericana, grazie agli studi di filosofi contemporanei di grande importanza quali John McDowell e Robert Brandom.¹ Inoltre, la dialettica sembra godere attualmente di una certa fortuna anche in ambiti particolari

The Promise of the Non-Identical: from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Bolaños Paolo A.
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno’s preoccupation with language is gleaned from the context of his theory of knowledge, particularly his critique of identity thinking. He tackles the problem of conceptual reification genealogically, that is, he traces conceptual reification via an analysis of the structure of language. My aim in this paper is to argue that Adorno’s engagement with the nature of language is informed by an implicit attempt at a revaluation of the language of philosophy, a revaluation that has significant consequences for a global understanding of how we conceive the world of objects, in general, and how philosophy’s configurative use of

Dialettica negativa, metafisica e intersoggettività. from: Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Fronzi Giacomo
Abstract: Nella trama di ramificazioni del pensiero filosofico del Novecento, ci sono alcune tendenze che spesso vengono considerate opposte, conflittuali, in via definitiva. Tra queste, vi è quella tra la costellazione speculativa di Theodor Wiesengrund Adorno, da una parte, e l’esistenzialismo, la fenomenologia o qualsiasi filosofia della coscienza e/o dell’essere, dall’altra. A tal riguardo, a partire dagli anni Ottanta è emersa la necessità di ripensare la contrapposizione tra il pensiero dialettico-negativo e quello ontologico, in particolare di matrice heideggeriana.¹ Un’analoga possibilità di “messa in dialogo” di direttrici di pensiero costitutivamente collocantesi su piani epistemologici e metodologici diversi è offerta, a mio

Chapter 1 ALL ALONG THE WATERSHED: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Jones Bryn
Abstract: There is an influential historical consensus that 1960s radicalism in Britain had no significant or lasting impact on the social and political order. In this view, the longer-term effects of the ideas and movements, often associated with the climactic year of 1968, have been confined to popular culture, life-styles and inter-personal relations. It is said that political institutions remained unperturbed and almost unaffected by the intellectual and ideological ferment occurring in the arts, media, universities, street politics and youth cultures. From this historical-empiricist perspective the significance of ’68 in Britain was apolitical and confined to the personal and cultural sphere

Chapter 4 FROM SARTRE TO STEVEDORES: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Lunn Helen
Abstract: Two major discourses of change in the 1960s, student revolt and black consciousness, were introduced to South Africa primarily through, literature, music, and individual agency. The knowledge transfer helped to define and transform resistance to apartheid from liberal expressions and values to ideologically informed New Left activism. The impact of this shift and the forms it took had highly significant long term outcomes for South Africa, but the perception of South Africa as an isolated place disconnected from early forms of globalization has become a self reflective trope and the significance of links with global changes are not recognized.

Chapter 7 STUDENTS, ARTISTS AND THE ICA: from: Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Cranfield Ben
Abstract: As the highpoint of sixties radicalism, 1968 was a year of action. This was certainly true for London’s Institute of Contemporary Arts which moved that year from its small premises in Dover Street to its current grander location on the Mall. However, Roland Barthes comments that, ‘every national shock produces a sudden flowering of written commentary’ (1968, 149) and 1968 was also a year of prolific written documentation. The immediacy of 1968’s historicization not only reveals its importance, but also its compromises and failures, as writers struggled to make sense of its disparate aims and ideological absences. America may have

Chapter 5 THE TRAGIC AND THE ABSURD: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) CAMUS ALBERT
Abstract: A great writer and an outstanding moral figure of the twentieth century was responsible for the next text we are to analyse: Caligulaby Albert Camus. Hannah Arendt, writing to her husband from Paris, described him as ‘the best man in France’. Yet in his lifetime the novelist, a nobel laureate, beloved of thousands of readers, remained, as is well known, at times isolated and unheeded in a period of ideological conflicts, of opposed blocs and themaîtres à penserof the century. Today, however, a revaluation is rightly under way. His moral authority, lucidity, courage and intellectual substance are

Chapter 7 THE ARROGANCE OF REASON AND THE ‘DISAPPEARANCE OF THE FIREFLIES’: from: Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) PASOLINI PIER PAOLO
Abstract: In Pasolini it is not so much philosophical culture as literary (in this case ancient Greek drama) and anthropological culture that constitute the matrix of the work in consideration and provide the basic ideas with which the universal experiences of the limit and necessity are reinterpreted.¹ The tragic action is presented as an arrogant and

Chapter Two BEYOND WEST AND EAST: from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Evolution was once a dividing mark between the “developed us” and the “underdeveloped or primitive them,” but there have been certain foundational transformations in the theory and normative quest of evolution which challenge us to overcome both anthropocentrism and ethnocentrism. Developments in both the discourse and practice of socio-cultural evolution as well as biological and cosmic evolution point to the need for cultivating a new enlightenment and non-duality going beyond the dualism of environment and the organism, ontogenesis and socio-genesis and “us” and “them.” Evolutionary thinking as part of spencerian social darwinsim was used to rank societies in the scale

Chapter Six SOME RECENT RECONSIDERATIONS OF RATIONALITY from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: The concept of rationality has been subjected to numerous critiques in the history of modernity, and all these critiques have been helpful in opening rationality to crosscultural translations and examinations. Despite numerous anthropological critiques of a Eurocentric notion of rationality which looks at other people such as the tribal people having a primitive mind, a modernistic and West-centric view of rationality is still very much on the throne. This situation seems to be slightly altering in the realm of philosophical discourse with some recent foundational interrogations of rationality offered by thinkers such as alasdair macIntyre and Stephen Toulmin, who urge

Chapter Fourteen CIVIL SOCIETY AND THE CALLING OF SELF-DEVELOPMENT from: Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: It is Jürgen Habermas (1981) himself who quite some time ago had challenged us that now we need a new philosophy of science which is not scientistic. It is worth asking Habermas, and all of us sociologists for whom sociological engagement is nothing more than an elaboration of the agenda of modernity, whether we need an understanding of and relationship with modernity which is not modernistic. This inquiry is at the core of understanding paths of civil society and experiments with modernities, not only in India but also in Europe, East Asia, Africa, Latin America and around the world. Both

Introduction from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Giri Ananta Kumar
Abstract: Philosophy and anthropology have long been intellectual companions. In European continental philosophy in particular, the boundaries between the two disciplines have always been very porous. One thinks at once of the largely German project to construct a philosophy of man and of human’s place in nature (a project broadly known as philosophical anthropology), the constant border crossings between anthropology and philosophy of notable individuals such as Paul Cassirer and Martin Heidegger, and the importation into British analytical philosophy by way of Ludwig Wittgenstein of concerns that can only be called anthropological. Although from the other side of the disciplinary boundary

Chapter 3 WHITHER MODERNITY? from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Marquez Ivan
Abstract: Western philosophy has had a long engagement with the philosophicalanthropological issue of the nature of and prospects for humanity. Aristotle, for instance, placed humans within a functional, organic, cosmic totality, where the part–whole relation between humans and the rest of nature ascribed the telosand proper flourishing of humans. Many seventeenth-century philosophers – rationalists like Descartes, materialists like Hobbes and empiricists like Locke – defined humans as rational, self-interested and atomistic. With eighteenthcentury French Enlightenment thought – especially the idea of progress in the work of de Saint-Pierre, Turgot, Voltaire, d’Holbach, Helvetius and Condorcet – and nineteenth-century German idealism, especially Hegel, human nature

Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of

Chapter 9 DILTHEY’S THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE AND ITS POTENTIAL FOR ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Šuber Daniel
Abstract: With some considerable delay, the German philosopher Wilhelm Dilthey (1833–1911) was, in 1986, declared the ‘new anthropological ancestor’ (Bruner 1986, 4). Although he had been acknowledged as having exerted some influence on major figures of anthropology, like Boas and Benedict well before, the recent turn to Dilthey was meant to go far beyond the historical concern. This move contrasts sharply with the result of an examination of the indexes of relevant textbooks on basic anthropological theory, where Dilthey’s name hardly ever appears. What then are the common points of contact between late twentieth-century anthropology and turn-of-the-century German philosophy? In

Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s

Chapter 15 THE PHILOSOPHY OF SLAVOJ ŽIŽEK AND ANTHROPOLOGY: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: […] instead of ideology falsifying reality for the sake of pathological interests (power strategies), we start from the assumption that there is no way to access and conceptualize reality which has not already been stained by discourse. The term ideology thus becomes redundant, Žižek argues, for what counts in critical analysis is that every ideological

Chapter 16 BORDER CROSSINGS BETWEEN ANTHROPOLOGY AND BUDDHIST PHILOSOPHY from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Goonatilake Susantha
Abstract: This chapter attempts to locate anthropology historically as to its epistemological roots, its critique that occurred after decolonization and its future, as once again the centre of gravity of the world’s economic axis shifts to Asia. The position taken in this chapter is that of standpoint theory, namely that all theoretical as well as empirical statements are bound within a social framework and perspective.

Chapter 17 ‘ANTHROPOLOGY OF PHILOSOPHY’ IN AFRICA: from: Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kresse Kai
Abstract: An anthropological investigation into philosophy can provide us with insights and information about traditions of knowledge and intellectual practice elsewhere in the world, in social contexts very different from our own. The project needs to engage with – and first of all be able to identify – philosophy as part of social discourse, and as a social practice, within any given region. Here, I am carving out one particular approach about how this could work, in relation to the Swahili context and against the background of discussions in African philosophy. Philosophy, as socialized discourse and practice, overlaps with other (more established) areas

The Spirit of Luc Boltanski: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: In Chapter 1,¹ Bridget Fowlerprovides a comprehensive and critical introduction to Boltanski’s work. Anyone who is not, or barely, familiar with Boltanski’s key contributions to the contemporary social sciences will find this chapter useful. To start with, Fowler examines Boltanski’s writings in relation toclassical sociological thought. In so doing, she argues that his critical engagement with the concept of domination is firmly situated in the Marxist and Weberian traditions of social analysis, whilst his sustained interest in moral

CHAPTER 5 Is There Such a Thing as a ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’? from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: In the contemporary sociological literature, not only in the Francophone² world but also in Germanophone³ and Anglophone⁴ contexts, the work of Luc Boltanski is widely recognized as a major contribution to the social sciences. The value and influence of Boltanski’s writings manifest themselves in the emergence of a new paradigm: the sociology of critiqueor, as it has been recently characterized not only by sympathetic and unsympathetic critics alike but also by the author himself, thepragmatic sociology of critique.⁵ It is true that the concept of critique plays a pivotal role in most of Boltanski’s writings.⁶ His recent book

CHAPTER 7 A Renewal of Social Theory That Remains Necessary: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: Luc Boltanski and Laurent Thévenot’s De la justification(1991) and the subsequent research programme inspired by it, now known alternatively as ‘pragmatic sociology’ or the ‘sociology of critical capacity’ (Boltanski and Thévenot, 1999), have provided a radically new approach to sociological theory and research. The programme promised to break a deadlock in theoretical debate and open new avenues in key areas of sociological inquiry, not least historical and comparative sociology. Today, in my view, some of the potential has in fact been realized, but the renewal in social theory that should have been expected to follow has not, or hardly,

CHAPTER 8 Enlarging Conceptions of Testing Moments and Critical Theory: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Discussing Luc Boltanski’s research is a particularly delicate task for the person who co-authored works and articles with him that have given rise to a new sociological paradigm and led to the creation of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale. I could have avoided the difficulty by choosing a masterwork of his that is quite different from the works we wrote together, such as the admirable La condition foetale(Boltanski, 2004). Yet, I have chosen instead to confront it in the spirit of the long, friendly, and ongoing conversation between us, renewed this past year. I would like to

CHAPTER 10 Beyond Pragmatic Sociology: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Nachi Mohamed
Abstract: The 1980s witnessed a remarkable change in the social sciences, a significant renewal of sociological theory. In France it was an occasion to discover and appreciate, albeit with significant delay, the contribution of Anglo-Saxon sociological currents which had earlier been dismissed or underestimated, such as symbolic interactionism, ethno-methodology, and phenomenological sociology. Through the 1960s and 1970s, French sociology was limited mainly to four major currents, which Alain Touraine proposed to call ‘the four corners of sociology’, represented by Raymond Boudon, Pierre Bourdieu, Michel Crozier, and Alain Touraine himself. The debates in the social sciences during this period significantly turned around

CHAPTER 11 Towards a Dialogue between Pierre Bourdieu’s ‘Critical Sociology’ and Luc Boltanski’s ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’ from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: One of the most fruitful sources of controversy in the contemporary sociological literature, notably in France, is the debate on the relationship between two prominent paradigmatic programmes, which are often regarded as diametrically opposed: on the one hand, Pierre Bourdieu’s critical sociology, which has been increasingly influential since the 1970s; on the other hand, Luc Boltanski’spragmatic sociology of critique, which has become widely known since the late 1980s. Not only in recent Francophone² intellectual discussions, but also in current Germanophone³ and Anglophone⁴ sociological disputes, the writings of both Bourdieu and Boltanski are commonly considered as major contributions to the

CHAPTER 14 Axel Honneth and Luc Boltanski at the Epicentre of Politics from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Basaure Mauro
Abstract: The moral-sociological-explicative axisrepresents the conceptual effort to provide an explanation for the moral motives of subjective actions at the root of social struggles. In this theory, Honneth begins from a re-reading of Hegel and Mead and focuses on a non-utilitarian moral-sociological explanation of social conflicts, according to which the motivations for initiating, or committing to, social struggles can be

CHAPTER 15 The Civil Sphere and On Justification: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Eulriet Irène
Abstract: Indeed, these works have many affinities. Both draw on Durkheimian thought or concepts. Both display a common lexis from ‘justice’ to ‘pragmatics’ and ‘compromise’, as well as a common inclination to connect philosophical and sociological issues. Both endeavours have been

CHAPTER 18 Arranging the Irreversible: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Hamilton Peter
Abstract: If Luc Boltanski’s La condition foetale:Une sociologie de l’engendrement et de l’avortement(2004)² is a fearsome book, it is definitely not for the reasons one might expect given the subject matter. It is rather because of the simple fact that it restores a broken link: that between abortion and what it has just denied. A sociology of abortion depends on a sociology of procreation. More exactly, it means understanding abortion as a certain position in the problem opened up by procreation, as twofold natural and social processes: production of the living by the living, reproduction in the biological sense,

CHAPTER 19 Luc Boltanski and the Gift: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Silber Ilana F.
Abstract: This chapter revisits Luc Boltanski’s writings in terms of their implications for sociological research on the gift. More specifically, I wish to argue that the potential relevance of Boltanski’s ‘pragmatic sociology’ – or, as it is also called, ‘sociology of critical capacities’ – has remained largely untapped in that regard.

CHAPTER 22 An Introduction to ‘“Whatever Works”: Political Philosophy and Sociology – Luc Boltanski in Conversation with Craig Browne’ from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Browne Craig
Abstract: The discipline of sociology partly originated from a perception of the limitations of political philosophy. The transition to modernity demanded new ways of addressing the questions that political philosophy had typically posed, such as the nature of authority, the conditions of the good life, the definition of justice, the degrees of freedom, and the prerequisites of inclusion in a community. Classical sociological theory reflected the modern appreciation of the independence of ‘the social’ relative to ‘the political’ and the need to understand the internal dynamics of ‘the social’ in their own terms. In a stronger sense, sociological theory suggested that

Luc Boltanski and His Critics: from: The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: This Afterword provides a summary of the key themes, issues, and controversies covered in each of the preceding chapters. Readers who are not, or barely, conversant with Luc Boltanski’s key contributions to the contemporary social sciences will appreciate the clarity with which Bridget Fowler provides a valuable, wide-ranging, and critical introduction to his work in the opening chapter of this volume. As indicated in the title of her piece, ‘Figures of Descent from Classical Sociological Theory: Luc Boltanski’,¹ Fowler examines Boltanski’s writings in relation to classical sociological thought. In so doing, she suggests that his critical engagement with mechanisms of

Book Title: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu-Critical Essays
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: This volume explores the sociological legacy of the late Pierre Bourdieu through an examination of the intellectual division between his reception in the world of French social sciences and his reception in the Anglophone world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxpd95

INTRODUCTION: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: Unsurprisingly, the Second World War had separate and distinctive consequences for different national traditions of sociology. After the War, the dominant and arguably most successful of the Western democracies emerged in North America, and its sociological traditions assumed a celebratory and often triumphalist perspective on modernisation. The defeat of the fascist nations – notably Germany, Italy, and Japan – seemed to demonstrate the superiority of Western liberal democratic systems, and North American sociologists took the lead in developing theories of development and modernisation that were optimistic and forward-looking. The examples are numerous, but we might mention Daniel Lerner’s The Passing

CHAPTER SIX Bourdieu and Nietzsche: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Rahkonen Keijo
Abstract: This chapter makes a comparison, which from a sociological perspective might appear a little surprising: it is between Pierre Bourdieu’s and Friedrich Nietzsche’s respective conceptions of ‘power’ and ‘taste’. The aim is to show that there is an interesting resemblance between the two with regard to these conceptions in general, and to ‘struggle for power’, ‘ressentiment’ and ‘will to power’ in particular, and thus to shed light on some key aspects of Bourdieu’s thinking. The order of the dramatis personaein this analysis is no accident: Bourdieu and Nietzsche. This alludes to the fact that the discussion that follows is

AFTERWORD: from: The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Those who are unfamiliar, or barely familiar, with the writings of Pierre Bourdieu will find a useful and comprehensive introduction to his work in the opening chapter, entitled ‘Between Structuralism and Theory of Practice: The Cultural Sociology of Pierre Bourdieu’. In it, Hans Joas and Wolfgang Knöbl provide us with a clear and accessible overview of some of the main philosophical and sociological themes that run through Bourdieu’s writings. Joas and Knöbl centre their analysis on five interrelated concepts that play a pivotal role in Bourdieu’s work: the concepts of (1) practice, (2)action, (3)the social, (4)cultural sociology,

1 Introduction from: The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: It is generally agreed that it is relatively easy to distinguish Priestly material (P)¹ from non-Priestly material (non-P) in Genesis–Numbers (Joshua).² However, when it comes to identifying the overall theology of the Priestly material, or what it might be primarily about, there is much more contention. A range of views have been proposed, primarily in articles³ and sections in books whose primary concern is mostly with one section of P⁴ or with source/redactional issues or with defining the extent or possible levels within P.⁵ Philip Jenson’s statement that “there have been surprisingly few full-scale theological studies of P in

Book Title: Bible through the Lens of Trauma- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Frechette Christopher G.
Abstract: Implications for how reading the biblical text through the lens of trauma can be fruitful for contemporary appropriation of the biblical text in pastoral and theological pursuitsArticles that integrate hermeneutics of trauma with classical historical-critical methodsEssays that address the relationship between individual and collective trauma
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h1htfd

Reading Biblical Texts through the Lens of Resilience from: Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Schreiter Robert J.
Abstract: Reading scriptural texts through the lens of trauma studies is proving to be an exciting development in biblical studies and the study of other ancient Mediterranean and Near Eastern texts. The first forays into theologicaltexts through the lens of trauma are promising as well, although this lens would seem, at least at this point, not to provide the far-reaching consequences that it may well have in biblical studies.¹ I come to this literature in biblical studies not as an expert in that field but as a systematic theologian who has become interested in trauma studies, especially as it plays

CHAPTER 5 Proportional Thinking in Kepler’s Science of Light from: Light and Death
Abstract: Light is at the center of Kepler’s optics, astronomy, and cosmology. Verbal and mathematical analogy, whether as concept, proportion, or both, is crucial to his methodology and, indeed, to his habits of thought. In addition to these thematic and methodological reasons, Kepler plays an exemplary role in my study because he is an intellectual hybrid who combines ideas about light, deriving especially from Neoplatonist and perspectivist traditions, with mathematical and physical discoveries anticipating those of Descartes and Newton, both of whom number among his debtors. The longstanding debate as to whether Kepler’s work is the culmination of medieval perspectivism or

Book Title: Metaphor, Morality, and the Spirit in Romans 8-1–17
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Robinson William E. W.
Abstract: Sustained argument that sheds new light on how Paul communicates with his audiencesSubstantial contribution to current debates about central theological conceptsConceptual Metaphor Theory and Conceptual Integration Theory applied to the metaphors in Romans 8:1-17
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h4mhzd

Book Title: The Resounding Soul-Reflections on the Metaphysics and Vivacity of the Human Person
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Kimbriel Samuel
Abstract: It is surely not coincidental that the term “soul" should mean not only the centre of a creature’s life and consciousness, but also a thing or action characterized by intense vivacity (“that bike’s got soul!"). It also seems far from coincidental that the same contemporary academic discussions that have largely cast aside the language of “soul" in their quest to define the character of human mental life should themselves be so – how to say it? – bloodless, so lacking in soul. This volume arises from the opposite premise, namely that the task of understanding human nature is bound up with and in important respects dependent upon the more critical task of learning to be fully human, of learning to have soul. The papers collected here are derived from a conference in Oxford sponsored by the Centre of Theology and Philosophy and together explore the often surprising landscape that emerges when human consciousness is approached from this angle. Drawing upon literary, philosophical, theological, historical, and musical modes of analysis, the essays of this volume vividly remind the reader of the power of the ancient language of soul over against contemporary impulses to reduce, fragment, and overly determine human selfhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hd17z7

2 Bernard Stiegler’s Politics of the Soul and His New Otium of the People from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Rossouw Johann
Abstract: For Stiegler, the central crisis of Western modernity is of a theological nature, namely, its loss of faith in its social order

3 Eucharistic Anthropology: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Kaethler Andrew T. J.
Abstract: In a broadcast to the Soviet Union, Alexander Schmemann boldly announced, “Christianity began with a new experience of time, in which time ceases to be bound-up with death. ‘O death, where is thy sting? O hell, where is thy victory?’ (1 Cor 15:55). This new experience is the very heart of Christianity and its fire ….”¹ Yet, throughout Schmemann’s extensive writing on time and the kingdom of God and his heavy emphasis on these themes, he does not explicitly, nor systematically lay out how this new experience of time shapes his theological anthropology. That is not to say that it

4 The Psychology of Cosmopolitics from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: But I would argue that this is a mistaken strategy. Outside a theological or a metaphysical purview, mind is actually indefensible and the human properly evaporates. Instead, the theologian needs to go for broke at the outset: soul is far more arguable than mind,

8 Nous (Energeia) and Kardia (Dynamis) in the Holistic Anthropology of St. Gregory Palamas from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Tănase Nichifor
Abstract: Athonite spirituality of the fourteenth century is situated at the confluence of a theology of divine names already present in the Old Testament and of the ancient practice of monastic traditions, and is also illustrated by the writings of Evagrius and Ps.-Macarius. Hesychasm provides a deep, spiritual theological meaning by grafting the uncreated energies and a single word of prayer onto a theological conception of divine glory. Hesychastic spirituality is “able to assimilate and integrate creatively, as in the case of Evagrius, for whom the mystical tendencies are colored by Neoplatonism and Stoicism.”¹

13 Strategies of the Gift: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Zimmermann Nigel
Abstract: The problem of the body-soul relationship is treated by Emmanuel Levinas and St. John Paul II as one of describing the manifestation of the other person in terms of the gift. The soul, assuming such an objective reality exists, is taken to bear itself in the world only in so far as it is manifested in the body. However, in describing the significance of the body in Levinas and John Paul II, two differing trajectories of the gift emerge, which meet in convergence and departure. Both thinkers draw upon a phenomenologically informed set of intellectual commitments, and both incorporate language

14 Redeeming Duality: from: The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Eikelboom Lexi
Abstract: There have been many recent theological attempts to argue for a more holistic anthropology than that which substance-dualism has traditionally provided.¹ The proponents of holistic anthropology have several motives—an increased recognition of the importance of the body,² a respect for scientific research that points towards physicalism,³ and a desire to reflect biblical anthropology,⁴ for example. However, the desire for a more holistic anthropology, whether of the materialist or non-reductive physicalist variety, is also motivated by a theological suspicion of split-ness itself. If Christians affirm the existence of the soul in some sense, they must also accept that the human

Introduction from: I Am Because We Are
Abstract: In the texts from the caribbean included here, the generative themes of African philosophy find expression in the context of the black diaspora forced by the Atlantic slave trade. The ontological emphasis on a relational con ception of reality plays a particularly important role in helping define the black community as something distinct from the European community of slaveholders. In turn, the Caribbean philosophical tradition presented here devotes much attention to the issues of constructing notions both of identity and self-determination and of culture and ethos within the framework of the black community. Thus the relational humanism so characteristic of

Feminism: from: I Am Because We Are
Author(s) HOOKS BELL
Abstract: We live in a world in crisis—a world governed by politics of domination, one in which the belief in a notion of superior and inferior and its concomitant ideology—that the superior should rule over the inferior—affects the lives of all people everywhere, whether poor or privileged, literate or illiterate. Systematic dehumanization, worldwide famine, ecological devastation, industrial contamination, and the possibility of nuclear destruction are realities which remind us daily that we are in crisis. Contemporary feminist thinkers often cite sexual politics as the origin of this crisis. They point to the insistence on difference as that factor

Anthropocene 1 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: The International Union of Geological Sciences (IUGS) names the current epoch the Holocene (“entirely recent”), which began about 11,700 years ago, after the last major ice age (Stromberg 2013). Many students of the Earth’s climate argue that, in view of human effects on the biosphere, this name is no longer adequate. They suggest that we may have entered a new geological epoch when humanity acts on the planet as a geophysical force: the Anthropocene. The first statement in this regard was made jointly by Paul J. Crutzen, a Nobel Prize–winning chemist from the Max Planck Institute, and Eugene F.

Change from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Buchanan Ian
Abstract: It is simple, really. Our dependency on carbon fuels is jeopardizing our only planet home. To avert DISASTER, we must either switch to a more sustainable fuel source or find technological solutions to the environmental problems we have created. But who is this “we” and how can “they” effect the necessary changes? It cannot be done alone; no individual can pull off this miracle herself. It cannot even be done one country at a time. It will require a coordinated global effort, one that changes our very conception of change. Political science has three main theories of how change of

China 2 from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Zhang Amy
Abstract: In spite of a long history of burning waste, modern incinerators now function as an emblem of progress through technological engineering as they transform and reorient matter

Coal Ash from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hatmaker Susie
Abstract: To live in a coal-fueled culture is to live in the time of ash: a time of irrationality, unpredictability, and unanticipated events that reveal not the work of an angry god, but the limits to human progress and scientific planning. Power generation and electrification emerged in the twentieth century as core elements of modernization and development on a global scale. The failure to account for the corresponding production of waste is neither mistake nor oversight, but inherent to this logic.

Crisis from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Moore Jason W.
Abstract: I do not mean to suggest that questions about the role of ecology in crises of ACCU MULATION have not been posed. But strikingly little movement has occurred in socioecological thinking about capital accumulation and its crises, a quarter-century after James O’Connor’s groundbreaking theory of the second contradiction (1998), which finds in the expanded accumulation of capital an exhaustion of the relations and conditions of (re) production. Radical thought today has settled on a language of crisis that

Ecology from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Morton Timothy
Abstract: When we divide the world into the categories natureandculture, we perform the quintessential gesture of modernity. But modernity is predicated on the ecological emergency that has given rise to a new geological epoch: the A NTHROPOCENE. “Modernity” is how the Anthropocene has appeared to us historically thus far. Dividing the world into NATURE and culture is precisely anti-ecological insofar as it participates in the logistics that enabled humans to act as a geophysical force on a planetary scale. The Anthropocene is the moment when Western philosophy restricted itself to the (human) subject-world correlate (Meillassoux 2008, 5). This self-imposed

Evolution from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Wald Priscilla
Abstract: Debates surrounding biological theories of evolution are evident in the multiple meanings of the word itself, with its etymology haunting its subsequent meanings. The Oxford English Dictionaryoffers its etymology in the “action of unrolling a scroll,” a “lapse of time,” and a “tactical manoeuver to effect a change of formation.”¹ Revelation and deliberation survive in its earliest incarnations. Darwin did not useevolutionin the first edition ofOn the Origin of Species, yet as James T. Costa points out in his introduction, he gave it the last word—literally—when he concluded that edition with a poetic meditation

Exhaust from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Sajecki Anna
Abstract: The world of British science fiction writer J. G. Ballard is one of motorways and cars; highways and automobiles emblematize changing technological landscapes and emergent postmodern geographies, betokening capitalism and Americanization. At the beginning of the 1970s, when the environmental effects of automobiles came under increasing scrutiny, another aspect of the car garnered attention: exhaust. A UTOMOBILE exhaust is a secondarily produced waste resulting from energetic depletion. Think of the car as a system: gasoline in the form of fuel drives the system and is required for it to function, but this energetic imperative and the burning of fuel transforms

Fallout from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Masco Joseph
Abstract: In his 1964 film, Red Desert, Michelangelo Antonioni depicts a terrifying conundrum of late modernity: a world of technological marvels, whose price is local culture and the environment. The film is set in an Italian industrial town, where Monica Vitti plays the increasingly distraught wife of a petrochemical executive. The film veers from an examination of Italian industrial design—the beautiful sculptural forms enabled by PLASTICS, steel, and glass that constitute a radical break with local craft traditions grounded in organic materials—to the natural landscape destroyed by industrial production. The characters inhabit spectacular high modernist living spaces but traverse

Identity from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Takach Geo
Abstract: In the industrialized world, petroleum fuels the INFRASTRUCTURE of our societies and the logistics of our lives. Yet its ubiquity and power transcend gas pumps, foodstuffs, and countless other delights of contemporary existence. Sure, oil fills state and private coffers, builds Brobdingnagian beacons like Dubai, and incites the odd bloodbath. But it can also color the soul of its sites of production by defining expressions of local values and representations of that place to the world. Take my home province of Alberta, Canada—to which many ecologically concerned global citizens would hastily add, “please.” Now playing ball with behemoths like Saudi

Innervation from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Ryder Robert
Abstract: Innervation is nowadays a predominantly neurophysiological concept, generally used to refer to an anatomical detail: “the route of the nerve on its way to a given organ” (Laplanche and Pontalis 1988, 213). But in the field of psychology, the term has a more turbulent history. Often thought in a tandem with kinesthetics, innervation can be found in early psychological studies of the articular, tendinous, and muscular complexes (Baldwin 1960, 549). Since its inception, innervation has generally been regarded as a mode of energy transfer or conversion—and therefore a process of stimulation, in stark distinction to its current neurophysiological definition

Mediashock from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Grusin Richard
Abstract: More than a decade after 9/11, the networked world remains in an acute state of “mediashock.” At the first sign of meteorological turmoil, social unrest, financial turbulence, or natural cataclysm, news media shift into 24–7 crisis mode, generating on-the-ground reports, live updates, multiple commentaries, and breaking news. CNN pioneered this mode in global cable news as far back as the 1980s, but the media’s obsession with remediating disaster and premediating shock has intensified in the twenty-first century, jump-started by the events of 9/11 but escalating since then. With the exception of regularly scheduled events like to the Olympics or

Offshore Rig from: Fueling Culture
Abstract: Despite being linked to the same global circuits of power as the land-based oil and gas industry, the offshore rig poses its own problems of conceptualization. These difficulties are largely attributable to the longstanding figurative history of the sea as “protean” (Raban 1992, 2). In its association with the ocean, the technologically sophisticated rig becomes embroiled in centuries-old discourses.

Petro-violence from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Watts Michael
Abstract: There is something unsettling about the world of Big Oil, not least the overwhelming intellectual vertigo it produces. Secrecy, guardedness, defensiveness, and corporate ventriloquism are hallmarks of the industry. Despite its technical expertise and scientific sophistication—drilling in deep water is like putting someone on the moon, oil mavens like to say—there is a startling degree of inexactitude, empirical disagreement, and lack of (or lack of confidence in) basic data. Why are the simplest facts of the oil world so vague, opaque, and elastic? Epistemological murkiness greets seemingly mundane, banal questions of how much oil there actually is and

Petrorealism from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Bellamy Brent Ryan
Abstract: In ecological thought, thinking big is back in a big way. And why not? The twin problems of global warming and global pollution are intensified by an energy-reliant system of ACCUMULATION and dispossession that operates at a global scale. Thinking big seems to match the scale of solution-seeking to the size of the problem. Announcing the emergence of an interdisciplinary field they call “energy humanities,” Dominic Boyer and Imre Szeman frame this problem as an ecology-energy impasse: “It is not an exaggeration to ask whether human civilization has a future. Neither technology nor policy can offer a silverbullet solution to

Plastics from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hawkins Gay
Abstract: It is difficult to consider plastic as fuel when you confront its ubiquity as urban litter or ocean waste. It seems so passive and inert, the dead stuff of disposability denied even the biological momentum of decay. The eternal persistence of plastic seems to fuel only apocalyptic visions of ecological DISASTER: petrochemical cultures buried in their own DETRITUS.

Rural from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Morton Erin
Abstract: The postwar modernization project rendered “the rural” as a space of technological backwardness oriented toward subsistence (Mardsen 2008; Samson 1994). Even the linguistic root of its concomitant category, “the country” (in French as contréeand in Latin ascontrara), points to the idea of rurality existing in opposition to something, which, more often than not, means modern progress (Muecke 2005). Connected to this historical understanding of rural places is the more recent idea that opposes rurality with the global city, the former typically understood as a terrain of perpetual struggle and the latter as a site of what Saskia Sassen

Solar from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Boetzkes Amanda
Abstract: The history of solar power invites us to consider the difference between a form of ENERGY that shapes cultural exchange and a resource that merely fuels production. In the past century, solar power has been touted as a clean alternative to oil and COAL. It has also inspired visions of new social, ecological, and economic systems it might generate. Solar energy is imagined as fundamentally heterogeneous, characterized by how it precipitates complex transactions and conversions that nonetheless preserve homeostatic LIMITS. Indeed, this aspect of solar energy is often touted by critics of the industrial capitalist model that seeks to accumulate

Sustainability from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Medovoi Leerom
Abstract: In recent decades, the vision of a genuinely ecological economics has focused on the principle of sustainability. Capitalism, we are told, should be refashioned as a “sustainable economy” whose growth, in the words of the United Nation’s Brundtland Commission Report, “meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of FUTURE generations to meet their own needs” (Brundtland 1987). Like other liberal political ideals (e.g., democracy, freedom, tolerance), the ideological work performed by sustainability is complex and multivalent. As Joan Martinez-Alier (2009) notes, ecological economics understands the economy not as a system of exchange but rather as a metabolic

Tallow from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Shannon Laurie
Abstract: Hamlet, performing his self-styled madman’s script, forces his auditors to remember a disturbing truth that is normally repressed: “A man may fish with the worm that hath eat of a king, and eat of the fish that hath fed of that worm” ( Hamlet, 4.3.27–28).¹ This logic of circulation recalls the Pythagorean doctrine of the transmigration of souls, a view often mocked in early modernity as equivalent to insanity. But Hamlet’s line traces no flight by the soul from one body to another. Instead, it joins a traditional Christian perspective on worldly vanities (a fortune’s wheel argument) to an insistence

Texas from: Fueling Culture
Author(s) Worden Daniel
Abstract: Texas looms large in contemporary oil culture. The state’s first major oil well, Spindletop, came in in 1901 and led to the formation of Gulf Oil and Texaco. Since then, Texas has figured in oil culture as a site of extraction and refining, a center for the multinational corporate oil industry, and an anchor for the oil industry’s ideological construction as an innately heroic, individualistic, and deeply American enterprise. This prominence is somewhat odd, considering that Pennsylvania was the site of the modern oil industry’s origin in the United States. Alaska, California, Louisiana, and Oklahoma, not to mention the Dakotas,

TEN The Return of Purpose from: Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: For the dominant trend in medieval thought, man occupied a more significant and determinative place in the universe than the realm of physical nature, while for the main current of modern thought, nature holds a more independent, more determinative, and more permanent place than man … [in the Middle Ages] on the teleological side: an explanation in terms of the relation of things to human purpose was accounted just as real

Book Title: Children of God in the World- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Paul
Abstract: Children of God in the World is a textbook of theological anthropology structured in four parts. The first attempts to clarify the relationship between theology, philosophy and science in their respective approaches to anthropology, and establishes the fundamental principle of the text, stated in Vatican II's Gaudium et spes, n. 22, "Christ manifests man to man." The second part provides a historical overview of the doctrine of grace: in Scripture (especially the teaching of the book of Genesis on humans 'made in the image of God', as well as Paul and John), among the Fathers (in particular the oriental doctrine of 'divinization' and Augustine), during the Middle Ages (especially Thomas Aquinas) and the Reformation period (centered particularly on Luther and the Council of Trent), right up to modern times. The third part of the text, the central one, provides a systematic understanding of Christian grace in terms of the God's life present in human believers by which they become children of God, disciples, friends and brothers of Christ, temples of the Holy Spirit. This section also provides a reflection on the theological virtues (faith, hope and charity), on the relationship between grace and human freedom, on the role of the Church and Christian apostolate in the communication of grace, and on the need humans have for divine grace. After considering the relationship between the natural and the supernatural order, the fourth and last part deals with different philosophical aspects of the human condition, in the light of Christian faith: the union between body and soul, humans as free, historical, social, sexual and working beings. The last chapter concludes with a consideration of the human person, Christianity's greatest and most enduring contribution to human thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hrdn0m

INTRODUCTION from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: This treatise on theological anthropology works off of five presuppositions. The first is that it is based on a search for unity and integrity. As we inquire into human identity, we commonly experience a wearying sense of complexity and incertitude. However, this does not mean that our explanation of human nature and of the human person need be involved or complicated. In fact, anthropology seeks above all a once-off, simple, unitary, integrated explanation of human identity. The search for truth, in fact, is always a search for unity, for simplicity, for harmony, for coherence. In other words, in order to

2 HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON HUMANITY IN SEARCH OF IMMORTALITY from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: In the first chapter we considered anthropology from a phenomenological angle, attempting to answer three questions. What is the human being? Who is the human being? Why do we do anthropology? In this chapter we shall consider human nature from the standpoint of history: what different philosophies and religions have said of the human being. G. K. Chesterton spoke in a vivid way of the “democracy of the dead,” that is, of the contribution that epochs past can and should make to our understanding of the world and of history.⁴ Likewise, the philosopher Wilhelm Dilthey declared that “it is only

11 THE MODERN PERIOD: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: The principal theological issue of the period that immediately followed Luther and Trent involved the relationship between grace and freedom. This is an expression of the tension, already present throughout the Middle Ages, between a transcendent, omnipotent God, on the one hand, and created human beings, who, though fallen, search for their rightful, God-given autonomy, on the other. Three episodes are of particular interest during the period: the de auxiliiscontroversy; the Augustinianism of Michael Baius, a theologian who worked in the years after Trent; and the theology of the seventeenth-century bishop Cornelius O. Jansen. Although in many ways Protestant

13 CHILDREN OF GOD IN THE HOLY SPIRIT: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Grace has God as its origin, as its only source. Grace is simply the life of God in humans. As we saw in the last chapter, grace is present at every stage of human life; it presides over a wide-ranging historical narrative composed of different stages that are, while distinct, inseparable from one another: creation, predestination in Christ, divine call, justification of the person and his gradual purification from sin, and, finally, eschatological communion with the Trinity in glory. We considered them in the previous chapter.

14 DIVINE LIFE IN HUMANS: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: We have considered the life of grace from the perspective of its one and only origin, God: the project or plan of divine love that finds its first expression in the work of creation is expressed in terms of predestination and calling, and culminates in justification and glorification. In the previous chapter we considered the fundamental condition of human beings in grace, that is, adopted divine filiation, with its Christological and pneumatological (and therefore Trinitarian) structure.

15 GRACE AND CHRISTIAN LIFE: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: We have just considered what might be called the “objective-metaphysical” side of grace: humans, through the gift of God, are transformed, ontologically elevated, renewed to the depths of their being and faculties by divine grace. On the basis of this elevation we shall now consider the “psychological-moral” side of the life of grace, that is, the renewal that God brings about within the faculties and actions of the human person. In effect, with grace God infuses truly divine powers into the soul, usually called “infused virtues,” powers with which Christians act as God’s children in a truly Christ-like and pneumatological

17 THE NEED FOR DIVINE GRACE from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Two complementary perspectives lie behind the affirmation that we stand in need of grace. One is of a more ontological

19 THE HUMAN BEING: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: So far we have spoken of the human being as a unity, that is, simply, as a person. However, when it comes to describing human nature, all scientific, philosophical, and theological anthropologies speak in a variety of different ways of the different “components” that go to make up the human being, for the most part using terms such as “soul” (or “spirit”) and “body.” More recently it has become common to speak of the “mind” or the “brain.” Humans, we are told, are composed of two fundamental elements or aspects, more or less linked with one another, the body and

21 THE TEMPORALITY AND HISTORICITY OF THE HUMAN BEING from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: We have spoken frequently in previous chapters of human nature, that is, of those aspects of the human being that are, as it were, stable, fixed, inalterable, what might be called the physical, biological, psychological, and spiritual DNA of humans: their corporeal, intellectual, volitive, social, religious nature, all of which respond to the question “What is the human being?” Common nature is the foundational aspect of human life that makes all sociality and communication possible. In effect, humans are in a position, for better or for worse, to communicate with one another because they share the same nature. And nature

23 HUMANS CREATED IN THE IMAGE OF GOD AS MAN AND WOMAN from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: One of the most obvious distinctions between persons is the sexual one, between man and woman, between male and female. Sexual difference manifests itself not only physiologically, but also psychologically and with differentiating features in the areas of affectivity and cognition.⁴ In this chapter, however, we cannot consider in depth the complex issues that refer to the psychological, sociological, and human differences between men and women and the corresponding myriad social implications, but rather we shall consider the theological statute of the difference, considering it on the basis of the creation of human persons, of their present action, of their

25 THE HUMAN PERSON: from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: In the first place, as we already saw, humans exist and live as beings in relationship, social beings, ens ab alio, or, better,ens(orentia)ab Alio. In effect, humans have been created in the image and likeness of God, constituted in complete ontological dependence on the creator, yet are capable

17 THE NEED FOR DIVINE GRACE from: Children of God in the World
Abstract: Two complementary perspectives lie behind the affirmation that we stand in need of grace. One is of a more ontological

7 Ethnostalgia: from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) VALENTE JOSEPH
Abstract: Trauma theory made its debut in Irish studies during the sesquicentennial commemoration of the Great Famine (1846–49). A critical genealogy of this intervention will help to clarify the potential, the limitations, the dangers, and above all the ideological stakes and motives of this recent addition to the arsenal of nationalist historiography and cultural analysis.

7 ʺNow, just wash and brush up your memoiriasʺ from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) PLATT LEN
Abstract: Joyce scholars have always been interested in situating Joyce in historical context, but only since the late 1980s has the “Joyce and History” formulation become central. In part, this turn toward “history” has been philosophical. Less concerned with Joyce as a historical subject, the American academy in the 1980s and early 1990s produced a Joyce engaged with the subject of history—that is with history as historiography. Such critics as Robert Spoo and James Fairhall, then, constructed a Joyce preoccupied with history as ideological formation, particularly in relation to the orthodoxies of late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century historiography (Fairhall 1993;

Introduction: from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: In an ever-growing list of studies on the work of Seamus Heaney, this book will attempt something different. His poetry will not be the focus of analysis, except where it is relevant to the main theme, which is an outline of Heaney as an aesthetic thinker in the European intellectual tradition. This tradition, generally located in the sphere of Continental philosophy and cultural theory, sees the aesthetic as a valid epistemological mode of thinking. From Plato through Immanuel Kant and Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel to contemporary philosophical and theoretical writers such as Martin Heidegger, Theodor Adorno, Jacques Lacan, Jacques Derrida,

3 The Epistemology of Poetry: from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: In the last chapter, we looked at representations of the frontier or border and at poetry both as an epistemological crossing of that border and also as a way of engaging with, and connecting, both sides of that border, whether these sides are self and other, Irish and English identities, or conscious thought and unconscious. This sense of poetry as a genre wherein the necessity of “either/or” choices can be replaced with the more encompassing “both/and” alternative further rhizomatically connects Heaney’s thought with Derrida’s, and with other contemporary European thinking, where meaning and signification are viewed as relational as opposed

5 The Place of Writing—the Writing of Place from: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: This chapter will look at the ambiguous relationship between place and writing in the thinking of Seamus Heaney. In the last chapter, we looked at how the aesthetic can be used to validate a monological, monofocal, and motivated connection between a people, a language, and a place. In this chapter, we will examine the careful and nuanced manner in which Heaney treats the connections between place and people in his work. Heaney is well aware of the attenuating influence of the “appetites of gravity” as he describes them (Heaney 1975, 43), which fuse a people to a place, and he

8 The Turnaround Year from: A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André was on his way to New York because he had won a scholarship to Union Theological Seminary. He took it, but without great enthusiasm. It was actually a third choice. His first was archeological study in the Near East, but he lost out on that scholarship when

6 Women and the Survival of Archaeological Monuments in Nineteenth-Century Ireland from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CHEALLAIGH MÁIRÍN NÍ
Abstract: In the 1840s, while famine and disease gnawed at the lives of large sections of Ireland’s poor, Irish antiquarians increasingly turned their attention to the study of prehistoric and other archaeological remains. Inspired by the visit of the Danish antiquarian Worsaae and his account of the development of the chronological framework known as the “Three Age System” (Worsaae 1845–7, 312–14), members of learned societies and students of the past visited and described a variety of mounds and megalithic constructions. They may also, consciously or unconsciously, have been mirroring Worsaae’s observation that “It was immediately after great national calamities,

7 Memory, Modernity, and the Sacred from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) SEN MALCOLM
Abstract: The current proliferation of analyses dealing with memory does not signal a temporary fascination or a provisional critical turn. The sustained interest in multiple aspects of memory, remembrance, and various forms of amnesia is the product of the psychological, sociocultural, and historical denominators that have decidedly transformed our lives in the last two or three decades. The advent and global dissemination of the Internet’s ephemeral forms of knowledge and its technologization of memory as the storage capacity of digital media are themselves causes enough to review the spatial and temporal dimensions of cognition, memory, and being. Despite such a transformative

13 Remembering to Forget from: Memory Ireland
Author(s) CREGAN DAVID
Abstract: Mainstream public memory is traditionally understood as an intentional recollection of quantifiable facts of the historical past that then constitute collective identity. Because of its suppressed nature, queer memory is flimsier: while mainstream public memory is solidly supported institutionally by politics and history, queer memory is more symbolic, derived from what is implied by exclusion rather than inclusion. By uncovering previously hidden gay and lesbian experiences, queer historians have initiated a type of cultural rebellion, juxtaposing queer memory with hetero-normative histories. The production of this alternative history has evoked a renewed engagement with memory because more traditional methodological approaches to

XI CONCLUSION from: Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: In conclusion, let me summarize, clarify, and extend my leading contentions, focusing discussion on the interrelation of form and what I am calling the aesthetic center.¹ In so doing, I will rehearse the primary evidences on which I have rested throughout. I have been developing a series of related theses: first, that human nature is culture creating, condemned by its nature to giving form, to shaping by choice, in itself and its offspring, the potential chaos that ontological openness sets on an animal base; second, that the region aesthetics addresses is the heart as the developed center between intellect, will,

Book Title: Prophetic Politics-Emmanuel Levinas and the Sanctification of Suffering
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): HAROLD PHILIP J.
Abstract: In Prophetic Politics,Philip J. Haroldoffers an original interpretation of the political dimension of Emmanuel Levinas's thought. Harold argues that Levinas's mature position inOtherwise Than Beingbreaks radically with the dialogical inclinations of his earlierTotality and Infinityand that transformation manifests itself most clearly in the peculiar nature of Levinas's relationship to politics.Levinas's philosophy is concerned not with the ethical per se, in either its applied or its transcendent forms, but with the source of ethics. Once this source is revealed to be an anarchic interruption of our efforts to think the ethical, Levinas's political claims cannot be read as straightforward ideological positions or principles for political action. They are instead to be understood "prophetically," a position that Harold finds comparable to the communitarian critique of liberalism offered by such writers as Alasdair MacIntyre and Charles Taylor. In developing this interpretation, which runs counter to formative influences from the phenomenological tradition, Harold traces Levinas's debt to phenomenological descriptions of such experiences as empathy and playfulness.Prophetic Politicswill highlight the relevance of the phenomenological tradition to contemporary ethical and political thought-a long-standing goal of the series-while also making a significant and original contribution to Levinas scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x78v

CHAPTER 3 THE PHILOSOPHICAL ETHICS OF TOTALITY AND INFINITY from: Prophetic Politics
Abstract: Throughout my interpretation of Levinas I have been opposing the interpretation that takes his thought to be a moral philosophy. Such a reading is ubiquitous in the literature. The I is a subject, under this view, enjoying itself selfishly until it meets another person, the “other” who breaks into my closed realm, decenters me, but also gives me a new (moral) identity deeper and more fulfilling than before. As Silvia Benso writes, “To renounce one’s own ontological power as an ego means to receive back the ethical power of the Me.”¹ Robert Gibbs puts it: “I become myself—I become

I from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: The term “inculturation” or “enculturation” was originally coined by sociocultural anthropologists to refer to the process by which individuals acquire their culture as members of a human society. Subsequently, “inculturation” was appropriated by mission theologians to refer to the evangelization of culture, the process by which the Gospel illuminates and transforms culture, while culture reexpresses and even—to a certain extent—reinterprets the Gospel. Joseph Masson, SJ, first used the term in this way in 1962, but it came into current usage in the 1970s, after the earlier terms “adaptation” and “incarnation” were deemed missiologically unsatisfactory. The most important influence

P from: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Pacifism is a philosophy whose adherents reject violence, particularly war. The root meaning of the word comes from the Latin pax(peace) andfacere(to make); i.e., to make peace. Pacifism is found from ancient times to the present, among both secular and religious persons, in simple societies as well as in advanced technological states. Pacifism is not to be confused with passivity. Making peace is active—adherents are committed to building a peaceful world.

Introduction: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) SIMMONS FREDERICK V.
Abstract: Love is often extolled as the source, substance, standard, and goal of Christian ethics. Yet a perception that love has seldom been its subject is also prevalent. Anders Nygren began Agape and Erosby juxtaposing love’s centrality and neglect within contemporary Christian ethics, and love’s prominence in Christian moral and theological reflection since he made these claims in 1930 is one indication of his study’s significance.¹ It is hardly the volume’s only opposition. Indeed, although Nygren categorized his inquiry into love as “motif-research” and thus disclaimed any evaluative intent, his assurance that “Agape and Eros are contrasted with one another

5 Kant on Practical and Pathological Love from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) HARE JOHN
Abstract: The possibility of such a command as, “Love God above all and thy neighbor as thyself,” agrees very well with this. For, as a command, it requires esteem for a law which orders love and does not leave it to arbitrary choice to make love the principle. But love to God as inclination (pathological love) is impossible, for He is not an object

10 Agape as Self-Sacrifice: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) SANTURRI EDMUND N.
Abstract: Here I offer a contentious proposal: Christian love is essentially self-sacrifice, however else that love must be described. More particularly, Christian love—agapein the most frequently employed New Testament designation—marks a quality of character, a theological virtue, one incorporating precisely an agent’s disposition to sacrifice the interests of the self for the good of the neighbor, whatever else such love may say about the identity of the neighbor or the nature of the good in question.¹ Note especially that in this account, the relation between agape and self-sacrifice isessentialrather than accidental,necessaryrather than contingent,intrinsic

12 Christian Love as Friendship: from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) POPE STEPHEN J.
Abstract: In recent years, Christian ethics has begun to recover an appreciation for the moral and religious significance of friendship. While much of Christian ethics in the twentieth century tended to regard friendship with a somewhat skeptical eye, important insights in the last twenty years or so have helped us come to a greater appreciation for its positive contribution to the moral life. The recovery of friendship has taken place primarily within Aristotelian and Thomistic circles but also within feminism, Augustinian ethics, Lutheran ethics, narrative theology, phenomenological and personalist ethics, and elsewhere.¹

19 The Double Love Command and the Ethics of Religious Pluralism from: Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) GREGORY ERIC
Abstract: It would be impossible to tell the history of modern Christian ethics without paying attention to the ways in which the realities of diversity have shaped its concerns. In a theological register, responses to these realities have run the gamut from lamenting an existential threat to celebrating a providential gift. Biblical narratives, from Babel to Pentecost, are marshaled for each approach (cf., e.g., Gen. 11; Rom. 12; 1 Cor. 12; Rev. 7). What cannot be denied is the extent to which recognition of diversity has sponsored and determined much of the intellectual agenda of the discipline known as “Christian ethics.”

Book Title: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church-Laws about Life, Death and the Family in So-called Catholic Countries
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): PÉREZ-AGOTE ALFONSO
Abstract: The waning influence of the Catholic church in the ethical and political debate. For centuries the Catholic Church was able to impose her ethical rules in matters related to the intimate, that is, questions concerning life (from its beginning until its end) and the family, in the so-called Catholic countries in Western Europe. When the polity started to introduce legislation that was in opposition to the Catholic ethic, the ecclesiastical authorities and part of the population reacted. The media reported massive manifestations in France against same-sex marriages and in Spain against the de-penalization of abortion. In Italy the Episcopal conference entered the political field in opposition to the relaxation of several restrictive legal rules concerning medically assisted procreation and exhorted the voters to abstain from voting so that the referendum did not obtain the necessary quorum. In Portugal, to the contrary, the Church made a “pact" with the prime minister so that the law on same-sex marriages did not include the possibility of adoption. And in Belgium the Episcopal conference limited its actions to clearly expressing with religious, legal, and anthropological arguments its opposition to such laws, which all other Episcopal conferences did also. In this book, the authors analyse the full spectrum of the issue, including the emergence of such laws; the political discussions; the standpoints defended in the media by professionals, ethicists, and politicians; the votes in the parliaments; the political interventions of the Episcopal conferences; and the attitude of professionals. As a result the reader understands what was at stake and the differences in actions of the various Episcopal conferences. The authors also analyse the pro and con evaluations among the civil population of such actions by the Church. Finally, in a comparative synthesis, they discuss the public positions taken by Pope Francis to evaluate if a change in Church policy might be possible in the near future. Research by GERICR (Groupe européen de recherche interdisciplinaire sur le changement religieux), a European interdisciplinary research group studying religious changes coordinated by Alfonso Pérez-Agote. Contributors Céline Béraud (Université de Caen), Karel Dobbelaere (KU Leuven/University of Antwerp), Annalisa Frisina (Università degli Studi di Padova), Franco Garelli (Università degli Studi di Torino), Antonio Montañés (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Maria João Oliveira (University of Porto), Enzo Pace (Università degli Studi di Padova), Alfonso Pérez-Agote (University Complutense of Madrid), Philippe Portier (École pratique des hautes études, Paris-Sorbonne), Jose Santiago (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Roberto Francesco Scalon (Università degli Studi di Torino), Helena Vilaça (University of Porto), Liliane Voyé (Université Catholique de Louvain)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jkts6b

THE ITALIAN CATHOLIC CHURCH AND THE ARTIFICIAL-INSEMINATION REFERENDUM from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) SCALON ROBERTO
Abstract: The Italian biotechnological sector has become a battlefield between the Catholic Church and the various actors who disagree with its positions. They represent various power and knowledge subsystems in a society which has become complex. The conflict also grows out of the paradox of a society – like the Italian – which is partly secularized but can still portray itself as majority Catholic. From the social point of view, Catholicism continues to be the basso continuoof collective conscience, although among the Italian population many attitudes and behaviours in the field of faith and religious practice have deviated – either discreetly or decisively

THE CATHOLIC CHURCH FACES ETHICAL CHALLENGES IN SPAIN from: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) MONTAÑÉS ANTONIO
Abstract: In the last quarter of the twentieth century, Spain has seen the historical confluence of two social processes which are highly significant for analysing the position of the Spanish Church, and essentially of its hierarchy, when confronted with the ethical challenges which have a ultimately motivated its current resurgence in the public sphere. On the one hand, in various European countries – and also outside Europe – scientific and technological advances in the sphere of human biology have sparked a series of public debates. The regulation of these issues by the national political systems in the countries included in this study – and

LA INTERVENCIÓN SOCIAL CON MENORES from: La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Nieto-Morales Concepción
Abstract: Bien es cierto, que se han experimentado cambios, que favorecen el desarrollo biopsicosociologico y educativo, que han permitido grandes avances, aunque, aún quedan muchas batallas

Book Title: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God-Volumes 1 & 2
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Boyd Gregory A.
Abstract: In an epic constructive investigation, The Crucifixion of the Warrior God addresses the tension between Scripture’s violent depictions of God and the non-violent, self-sacrificial God that was supremely revealed on the cross. Over two volumes, author Gregory A. Boyd develops a theological interpretation of Scripture that he labels a “cruciform hermeneutic," and he argues that this cruciform way of reading Scripture reframes its violent divine portraits in a way that subverts their violence and that discloses how they bear witness to the revelation of God’s non-violent love in the crucified Christ.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqv00

11 Through the Lens of the Cross: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: In this chapter, I will provide an overview of the Cruciform Hermeneutic, which I will further nuance in the following chapter by placing it in the context of the contemporary Theological Interpretation of Scripture (TIS) movement. Since all theological reflection must be done in dialogue with others, past and present, I will first set the stage for my development and defense of the Cruciform Hermeneutic by briefly discussing the views of six scholars whose thinking, to one degree or another, reflects foundational aspects of this hermeneutic.³ I will then proceed to outline three closely related distinctive aspects of the Cruciform

12 Interpreting Scripture as God’s Word: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: In the previous chapter I fleshed out three distinctive aspects of the Cruciform Hermeneutic. Yet, a more nuanced understanding will prove helpful to fully appreciate the manner in which this hermeneutic will interpret the variety of violent divine portraits we find in the OT. Inasmuch as Christian reflections on all things pertaining to God must be done in dialogue with the wider body of Christ, I believe the most faithful and effective way to accomplish this is to place the Cruciform Hermeneutic in dialogue with the contemporary Theological Interpretation of Scripture (TIS) movement, for, as will become clear, my hermeneutical

18 A Question of Divine Culpability: from: The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: Having fleshed out the biblical material that confirms God’s Aikido-like method of judging sin and overcoming evil on the cross, I will in this chapter address four possible objections to the Principal of Redemptive Withdrawal. The first objection is theological in nature, the second and third are philosophical, while the fourth is a pragmatic concern. As will become clear, my responses to these objections will afford me an opportunity to further nuance my understanding of precisely how God does and does not participate in bringing about the violent judgments recounted in the OT. First, a number of theologians, especially in

Introduction from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: IN RECENT YEARS, unnatural narratology has developed into the most exciting new paradigm in narrative theory and the most important new approach since the advent of cognitive narratology. A wide range of scholars have become increasingly interested in the analysis of unnatural texts, that is, texts that feature strikingly impossible or antimimetic elements.¹ Such works have been consistently neglected or marginalized in existing narratological frameworks.

5 Unnatural Minds from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) IVERSEN STEFAN
Abstract: THE GOAL of this essay is twofold. First, in taking certain types of subversive, arresting, strange, and odd minds that one encounters in narratives as my primary target, I aim to propose a definition of such narrative phenomena as unnatural mindsand illustrate how they might be constructed and interpreted in a concrete narrative. Second, in order to situate this definition in the current postnarratological landscape, I want to discuss some of the promising and problematic aspects of the tools developed by cognitive narratology for dealing with presentations of consciousness in narrative. Seen as a whole, the essay thus attempts

7 Realism and the Unnatural from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) MÄKELÄ MARIA
Abstract: How to recover the unnatural essence of the conventionalin narrative fiction? The emergent trend of unnatural narratology has drawn its impetus mostly from the strikingly transgressive, illogical, or antimimetic elements of narrative construction (RichardsonUnnatural Voices; Alber; Alber, Iversen, Nielsen, and Richardson). Consequently, texts that have established the firm ground of literary conventions—such as classical realist novels—have been playing the part of default narratives in their representational design as well as in their experiential parameters. I take this collection of essays to be an opportunity to demonstrate that narratives under the heading of realism may even have

9 Unnatural Narrative in Hypertext Fiction from: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) BELL ALICE
Abstract: This essay argues that hypertext provides a distinctive context for unnaturalness in narrative fiction. It explores the structural attributes of hypertext fiction in general before analyzing two examples of unnatural narrative in Stuart Moulthrop’s Storyspace hypertext fiction Victory Garden. The first analysis shows how the multilinear structure of hypertext facilitates narrative contradiction. The second analysis demonstrates that the fragmented structure of the text allows the unnatural status of a scene to change depending on the reading route through which it is accessed. The study thus analyzes two different types of unnaturalness in hypertext by first focusing on a logical impossibility

Introduction from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: The title of this collection of recent narratological work, Postclassical Narratology: Approaches and Analyses, openly alludes to David Herman’s seminal bimillennial volumeNarratologies: New Perspectives on Narrative Analysis(1999b), in which he introduced the term postclassical narratology¹ and defined it as follows:

4 Mediacy, Mediation, and Focalization: from: Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: The issue to be discussed in this essay concerns narratological terminology, but involves different conceptualizations of theoretical design as well. The essay will be concerned with the relationship between Stanzel’s fundamental defining feature of narrative, its mediacy, on the one hand, and the discussions of narrativemediationortransmission(Chatman) on the other. While Stanzel’smediacyfocuses on the mediateness of narrative, on the fact that the story (histoire) is mediated through the narrative report (Erzählerbericht) of a narrator figure, Chatman’stransmissionand what has recently come to be calledmediationconcern the process of (re) medialization of onehistoire

3 Illuminating Difference from: The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: That prosopopoeic synecdoche for spectral legions of amateur researchers of independent means, the “elderly gentleman of scientific attainments” with whom we concluded the previous chapter, is associated with light and with illumination, in several ways. The first association has to do with literal light. As we have seen, the empirical fact of its appearance is separated from the misinterpretation that arises from it. This separation leads to a moment of epistemological enlightenment, however dubious or risible this may appear to the reader through the focus offered by Boz. This in turn survives beyond the event to become a scientific “paper”

CHAPTER 2 Breaking Bodies: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Murphy Michael P.
Abstract: George Bernanos, the great French writer (or “scribbler,” as he called himself) of the twentieth-century French Catholic literary revival, wrote in the “Sermon from an Agnostic on the Feast of St. Therese of Lisieux” episode from his 1938 work The Great Cemeteries under the Moonthe following: “Because you do not live your faith, your faith has ceased to be a living thing. It has become abstract—bodiless. Perhaps we shall find that the disincarnation of the Word of God is the real cause of all our misfortune.”¹ This propensity—the tendency to idealize experience and “disincarnate” theological phenomena from

CHAPTER 3 Mysterious Heart: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Lewis Stephen E.
Abstract: In his 1925 book Trois réformateurs(Three Reformers: Luther, Descartes, Rousseau), in the section devoted to Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Jacques Maritain denounced the modern fiction writer’s “shameless” claim to provide the reader with knowledge of the secret and innermost interiority of a human being’s “heart,” in the biblical sense of the term. Such knowledge of another’s heart, writes Maritain, is “hidden from the angels, and open only to the priestly knowledge [la science sacerdotale] of Christ.” Maritain continues: “A Freud to-day attempts to violate [these secrets] by psychological tricks. Christ looked into the eyes of the adulterous woman and pierced to

CHAPTER 5 “The Baron Is in Milledgeville”: from: Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Bruner Michael
Abstract: Flannery O’Connor was in the midst of revising her soon-to-be-published second and last novel, The Violent Bear It Away, when she wrote the letter highlighted above to Fannie Cheney in May 1959.³ She was clearly in a less sardonic mood than when she wrote to Betty Hester in 1955, highlighted at the chapter opening. Baron von Hügel’s writings had already proved to be an invaluable companion to, and crucial influence on, O’Connor’s growing storehouse of theological knowledge, and her latest foray into his first book,The Mystical Element of Religion as Studied in Saint Catherine of Genoa and Her Friends,

4. POTENCY, POSSESSION, AND SPEECH from: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: A powerful figure in Java suggests the possibility of protection, wellbeing, and prosperity. He thereby invites voluntary submission. In return for the style and, to some degree, the services indicative of deference, an individual wins some assurance of the powerful person’s material and/or mystical support. However, ideological precepts and practical patterns of avoidance show distrust of the impulse to compromise one’s own sovereignty m dependence upon or submission to a powerful figure. At the same time, such figures may resist people’s attempts to put claims upon them. I have discussed the nature and workings of such ambivalence in relations between

INTRODUCTION from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: Any account of the relation between myth and literature has a responsibility first to define “myth.” And there, with historical stubbornness, lies not merely a problem, but perhaps the entire subject of myth studies. On the one hand, there is a question as to what myths actually refer to, since they have come to mean many things, from primitive and sacred ritual to propaganda and ideological statements. On the other, there is a good deal of confusion and conflicting argument over how to define the significance of myth. Is it primarily a matter of thematics, or form, or function—or

CHAPTER 2 THE STRUCTURAL MODEL: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: Is there a genetic model available to us which fulfills the ontological conditions for myth as discourse which I have just been discussing? For obvious reasons, one hesitates to assert that such a model could possibly exist, but it is valuable nonetheless to turn with some skepticism, but a good deal of admiration, to one of the most influential attempts to prove that myth has some kind of discernible structure. This will give us an opportunity to examine in more detail the relationship of the structural model to mythicity. Claude Lévi-Strauss, in lengthy documentation from totemistic myth drawn mainly from

CHAPTER 3 MYTHIC INVERSION AND ABSTRACTION: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: In the last two chapters, we have seen that there is a progression from the ontological conditions of myth as language to more functional terms for its existence. Mythicity may be revealed in the play of language, but it is also a systematic attempt to grasp the world as fact and metaphor, as a synchronic and diachronic whole. We can see the relevance to a theory of myth of Saussure, Gadamer, and Lacan, on the one hand, and Levi-Strauss and Barthes on the other. The theory of myth and mythicity embodies a necessary link between interpretation theory and Structuralism. But

CHAPTER 4 THE MYTHIC AND THE NUMINOUS from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: We cannot answer the question of what makes mythology so attractive to writers and readers of modern literature if we remain with structure and semiotics alone and ignore myth’s talent for arguing for the numinous signifier and the validity of the supernatural. But, not surprisingly, that has been a much avoided question in modern literary criticism. The safest way of showing the relationship between the sacred and art, for example, has long been to emphasize art’s reference to or use of religious and mythological (meaning archetypal) motifs. Art becomes the transition between the numinous and the everyday. But as I

CHAPTER 5 RECOVERING THE NUMINOUS: from: Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: From opposing ideological positions—familiarly translated as vitalist-theosophical on the one hand and orthodox Anglo-Catholic on the other—D. H. Lawrence and T. S. Eliot have been considered important in our modern tradition for their effort to reinstate some connection between religion and art in a literature aggressively shorn of religious thought. If we think of early twentieth-century writing as occasionally turning to some prescription for spiritual health, then we do think of Lawrence and Eliot. But what prescriptiveness there is—and it is perhaps less pronounced than criticism would have it—is not the affinity between these two writers

INTRODUCTION: from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: From August Wilhelm von Schlegel down to comparatively recent times Senecan tragedy has suffered from comparison with its Greek models.¹ To view Seneca in the shadow of the Greeks, however inevitable, is also to miss the unique qualities of these plays. Instead of the theological concerns and intellectual questioning of Greek drama, Seneca develops the moral conflicts which he took over from the Greek dramatists in ways that owe at least as much to Virgil and Ovid as to Sophocles and Euripides. From his Roman predecessors he inherited a rich vocabulary for exploring morbid states of mind, the dark world

TWO Imagery and the Landscape of Desire from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: In all of Seneca’s plays the psychological atmosphere depends heavily on imagery. In the Phaedra images of fire, enclosure, and heaviness and the contrasting imagery of interior and exterior space depict the stifling emotional world in which the characters seem entrapped. Against this mood of constriction, however, Seneca sets elaborate rhetorical descriptions of sky, forest, or sea. The concentrated energy of such descriptions sets into sharp relief the protagonists’ ineffectiveness or helplessness in the face of the emotional violence within and around them.

SEVEN Character Structure and Symbols of Power: from: Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: In Euripides’ Hippolytusthe protagonist’s cultural and psychological marginality is expressed in his occupation as a hunter in the wild; his social marginality in his status as a bastard; and his religious marginality in his association with a mode of mystical worship which is at one point identified with Orphism (Hipp.952).¹ As a virgin youth, he relinquishes his potential status as the founder of a family and a citizen. Remaining a hunter and athlete, he fixes himself in the role of the perpetual adolescent sportsman, avoiding the civic responsibilities that would follow from the position that his father now

2. L’immagine spazializzata del tempo from: Tempo e racconto nei processi creativi Strategie narrative per l’architettura
Abstract: Questo è avvenuto non senza creare degli equivoci, quando si fa il tentativo di pensare il tempo come materia misurabile e non come durata. Tuttavia la struttura psico-fisiologica del nostro corpo ed i processi intellettuali che ne derivano necessitano di rappresentazioni spaziali per interiorizzare e comunicare il senso del moto o della mobilità in maniera immediata.

11 The humanist grammar of sanctity in the early Lives of Thomas More from: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Larsen Anna Siebach
Abstract: In the dedicatory epistle of his Life of Sir Thomas More, Nicholas Harpsfield refers to his text as ‘a garlande decked and adorned with pretious pearles and stones’, fashioned from the ‘pleasaunt, sweete nosegaye of most sweete and odoriferous flowers’ of William Roper’s own, earlierLyfe of Sir Thomas Moore.¹ Collapsing temporal and technological boundaries, Harpsfield’s description encompasses his subject, his style, and – in its evocation of the verdant borders of the manuscript or the woodcut title page – the potential materiality of his text. It indicates a moment of transition, in which familiar motifs, genres, and symbols can be reappropriated,

CODA: from: Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Evidence for history’s dynamic combination of persistence, adaptation and transformation can be seen everywhere. The mixture is apparent within ourselves: both physically, as living amalgams of carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen and other trace elements, that precede and survive us in other forms; and psychologically, within our personalities and consciousness, which throughout a lifetime cope or strive to cope with existing in time and surviving/changing within it.

Book Title: Contesting Democracy- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MÜLLER JAN-WERNER
Abstract: This book is the first major account of political thought in twentieth-century Europe, both West and East, to appear since the end of the Cold War. Skillfully blending intellectual, political, and cultural history, Jan-Werner Müller elucidates the ideas that shaped the period of ideological extremes before 1945 and the liberalization of West European politics after the Second World War. He also offers vivid portraits of famous as well as unjustly forgotten political thinkers and the movements and institutions they inspired.Müller pays particular attention to ideas advanced to justify fascism and how they relate to the special kind of liberal democracy that was created in postwar Western Europe. He also explains the impact of the 1960s and neoliberalism, ending with a critical assessment of today's self-consciously post-ideological age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np9jh

CHAPTER 3 What is Literature? from: The Event of Literature
Abstract: We can turn now to the moral dimension of literary works. I use the word ‘moral’ to signify the realm of human meanings, values and qualities, rather than in the deontological, anaemically post-Kantian sense of duty, law, obligation and responsibility.¹ It was literary figures in nineteenth-century England, from Arnold and Ruskin to Pater, Wilde and – supremely – Henry James, who helped to shift the meaning of the term ‘morality’ from a matter of codes and norms to a question of values and qualities. It was a project consummated in the twentieth century by some of the age’s most eminent

1. Making the Complex Simplex from: Simplexity
Abstract: Why propose the neologism simplexityto describe the properties of life when the termsimplicityalready exists? It is more than just a play on words. The word connotes the remarkable fact that biological devices, or processes, appeared in the course of evolution to allow animals and people to survive on our planet. Given the complexity of natural processes, the developing and growing brain must find solutions based on simplifying principles. These solutions make it possible to process complex situations very rapidly, elegantly, and efficiently, taking past experience into account and anticipating the future. They also enable us—by means

12. The Spatial Foundations of Rational Thought from: Simplexity
Abstract: Tom Thumb imagined a remarkably simplex solution to the most complex of problems: finding his way back in a forest that was not familiar to him. He stuffed his pockets with pebbles that he tossed along the route. Likewise, Ariadne offered a simplex solution to Theseus when he left to vanquish the Minotaur in the labyrinth: She gave him a ball of string to unroll as he went that showed him the way out. Over the course of evolution, the problem of finding, or refinding, one’s way has given rise to numerous biological solutions. Desert ants use polarized sunlight. Rodents

Epilogue from: Simplexity
Abstract: Examining the concept of simplexity applied to life reveals an exceptional wealth of simplex mechanisms that have appeared over the course of evolution. We have proposed a number of principles as the basis of a theory of simplexity: the fundamental role of inhibition, specialization and modularity, anticipation, detours, cooperation, and redundancy. We suspect there are others. However, it is clear that we have only begun to glimpse the fundamental biological mechanisms that enabled simplexity to emerge in life. Those are for future science to decipher. Our investigation leads to a compelling conclusion. We can understand nothing about life if we

CHAPTER 1 Introduction: from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: The word “theory” has a complicated etymological history that I won’t linger over except to point out what can make its meaning confusing. The way the word has actually been used at certain periods has made it mean something like what we call “practice,” whereas at other periods it has meant something very different from practice: a concept to which practice can appeal. This

CHAPTER 12 Freud and Fiction from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: So far we have reviewed ways of arguing that thought and speech are brought into being by language and are inseparable from their linguistic milieu. Our transition from language-determined ideas about speech, discourse, and literature to the psychological determination of discourse will be a smooth one, though, because Peter Brooks and Jacques Lacan, two of the

CHAPTER 15 The Postmodern Psyche from: Theory of Literature
Abstract: In this lecture, we’re still focused on individual consciousness, even though the authors you read are known for their political engagements. We shall still be considering the psychological genesis of the text or film as the site, or model, for the symbolic patterning of a text, undoubtedly in the case of Žižek, to some extent also in that of Deleuze. This is actually our farewell to the psychological emphasis, and it is so arranged—with the consequence of separating Žižek from Lacan—because today’s authors make sure we understand that there are political stakes in art and interpretation.

“AND ROSE UP TO PLAY”: from: In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: The logic of Paul’s counsel to the Corinthian Christians about “meat offered to idols” has long troubled interpreters. A particularly difficult problem has been the relation of 1 Corinthians 10:1–22 to the rest of chapters 8–10. In these verses Paul appears to adopt an absolute prohibition of contact with pagan cults, but that accords ill with his more lenient stand in chapter 8 and in 10:23–31. Moreover, the sequence of thought in 10:1–22 has not been completely clear, either. How are the scriptural examples connected with the paraenetic warnings? How is the consoling statement about temptation

INTRODUCTION from: Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Two main processes informed most of the speculative hermeneutical corpora in the postbiblical forms of Judaism. The first is the expansion of the relevance of the content of the canonical texts to increasingly more cosmological, theosophical, intellectual, and psychological realms than those ancient texts themselves claimed to engage. This expansion is often related to processes of arcanization, secretive understandings of the canonical texts understood as pointing to these realms in allusive ways: anagrammatic, numerical, allegorical, or symbolic.

2 THE GOD-ABSORBING TEXT: from: Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Ancient Jewish monotheism was generally uncomfortable with the idea of the preexistence of any entity to the creation of the world, a premise that would imperil the uniqueness of God as the single creator. The coexistence of an additional entity would produce a theological dynamics that would question the most singular religious achievement of ancient Judaism. Implicitly, allowing any role to such a founding and formative entity would reintroduce a type of myth that could recall the pagan mythology, where once again the relationship between the preexistent deities as a crucial condition for the cosmogonic process would be thrown into

Book Title: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful-A Neuronal Approach
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Garey Laurence
Abstract: In this fascinating and bold discussion, a renowned neurobiologist serves as guide to the most complex physical object in the living world: the human brain. Taking into account the newest brain research-morphological, physiological, chemical, genetic-and placing these findings in the context of psychology, philosophy, art, and literature, Changeux ventures into the unexplored territories where these diverse disciplines intersect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npn3q

I The Beautiful: from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: The term neuroestheticsis of recent origin. It was coined by Semir Zeki, and the first conference on the theme was held in San Francisco in 2002. It reflected a somewhat older concept, such as that expounded by Alexander Luria in the 1970s, aimed at finding the neural basis for contemplating and creating artworks and studying it scientifically. In the next pages I shall attempt to link some personal aspects of art and esthetics to various biological observations, in the hope that the reader will accept plausible, but not definitive, interrelationships.

III Truth: from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Western philosophy grew from that of the ancient Greeks at the end of the seventh century bce. Among the first were the Milesians: Thales (ca. 624–548 bce), Anaximander (ca. 611–547 bce), and Anaximenes (ca. 570–500 bce). As Geoffrey Lloyd recounted in 1970, this was a time of important technological progress, the end of the Bronze Age and the beginning of the Iron Age. Classification developed from observation and rationalization. These early philosophers discovered nature and distinguished between natural and supernatural, and they then avoided the supernatural. Thales declared that gods were everywhere, but he left them there.

VII Epilogue from: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Recent progress in neuroscience and its integration in dynamic evolutionary processes, which include culture and its history, prompt us to rethink certain central philosophical questions, such as the significance of death. Death is an essential biological phenomenon directly related to the evolution of species. It has taken on a special dimension in the history of humanity. Buff on rightly said that “death is as natural as life.” Many philosophical and religious fundamentals, which emphasize the sacred character of life, maintain the balance by doing the same for its interruption by death. I feel it is opportune today more than ever

Book Title: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink-Beginnings and Ends in Phenomenology, 1928–1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BRUZINA RONALD
Abstract: Eugen Fink was Edmund Husserl's research assistant during the last decade of the renowned phenomenologist's life, a period in which Husserl's philosophical ideas were radically recast. In this landmark book, Ronald Bruzina shows that Fink was actually a collaborator with Husserl, contributing indispensable elements to their common enterprise.Drawing on hundreds of hitherto unknown notes and drafts by Fink, Bruzina highlights the scope and depth of his theories and critiques. He places these philosophical formulations in their historical setting, organizes them around such key themes as the world, time, life, and the concept and methodological place of the "meontic," and demonstrates that they were a pivotal impetus for the renewing of "regress to the origins" in transcendental-constitutive phenomenology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nppmd

3 Orientation II: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: The years 1929 and 1930 saw Fink in an extraordinary philosophical situation. Here was Martin Heidegger, lecturing with stunning originality and insightfulness, the chosen successor of Husserl openly taking issue with his once indispensable patron. And here was Husserl, model of intense, meticulous phenomenological study, shocked into recognition that “his” Heidegger was a man other than he had thought him to be and a figure whose philosophical development was a profound challenge to all that Husserl had thought was the secure foundation of his life’s work. And there stood Eugen Fink, fresh with his doctorate gained while listening to both

4 Fundamental Thematics I: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: That the theme of the worldhad to dominate the framing of the central matters to be investigated in phenomenology was not Heidegger’s discovery, and it was not in Heidegger’s lectures that Fink first saw this principle manifest. Transcendental phenomenologybeganin the recognition that the world had to be taken explicitly precisely as an overwhelmingly comprehensive structure that remained yet to be thematized properly in philosophy. The most famous methodological “devices” in Husserl’s phenomenology, the epoché and phenomenological reduction, are precisely moves by which the questioning of the world is to begin authentically, against the unwitting and unquestioned acceptance

5 Fundamental Thematics II: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: If we would begin the treatment of time and temporality at the level of critical phenomenological consideration sketched out in the previous three chapters, we could simply start with material drawn from Fink’s notes and sketches for the study of time beyond the Bernau texts, that is, from 1933 and 1934 (and later), correlating them with Husserl’s newer work in the C-manuscripts on temporality of 1930 to 1934. For example, the critical insights we considered in chapter 4 are neatly continued in some of the points Fink makes in several outline variants for an “Introduction” to his then projected “time-book.”

8 Corollary Thematics I: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: The import of the meontic in determining the function and import of the speculative dimension did not have to wait until the very last to have an effect upon the reconsideration that the phenomenological findings in Husserl’s vast analytic investigations had to undergo. It was already in play from the earliest work that Fink did with and for Husserl, as the long trajectory of the present study has been showing. However, in our following this effort of reconsideration, this reorienting and recasting of descriptive features already disclosed in the investigative analytic that allowed new aspects to come to the fore

9 Corollary Thematics II: from: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: The signal successes that Husserl experienced in the late winter and spring of 1929 marked a high point in his life, the irony of which began to show already in the summer that followed, to become soon afterward—as chapter 1 recounted—more painful yet as the years proceeded, until his life came to a close in 1938. Nevertheless, what began to unfold in February 1929 was a remarkable renewal and a consummate achievement for phenomenology. In that month Husserl had given his “Introduction to Phenomenological Philosophy” at the Sorbonne in the Amphithéâtre Descartes, the very hall named after the

Seven BEING OVER TIME from: Freedom and Time
Abstract: The ontological objection against popular commitments, it will be recalled, maintains that there is no such thing as a “People,” understood as a collective subject persisting across generations. This chapter, like the last one, will attempt to show: (1) that contrary to what is usually thought, the objection applies to persons as well as to peoples; and (2) that the way we answer the objection in the case of persons further explains the place of time and of commitments in an adequate account of human self-government. In addition, the answer to the ontological objection in the case of persons furnishes

Introduction from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: This volume is a collection of my essays, written in the second half of the 1990s, on the topic of the moving image—the label that I prefer to use for the category comprising film, video, broadcast television, moving computer-generated imagery, and, in short, any mass-produced moving image technologically within our reach now and in times to come.¹ My reasons for speaking of the moving image rather than of film, video, or computer-generated images (CGI) revolve around the fact that those ways of speaking are too wedded to reference to particular media, whereas the moving image, as it has come

Chapter 8 Nonfiction Film and Postmodernist Skepticism from: Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Perhaps no area of film theory invokes philosophy so quickly as does the discussion of nonfiction film. For inasmuch as a great many non-fiction films are meant to convey information about the world, film theorists are almost immediately disposed to reach for their favorite epistemological convictions in order to assess, and—nearly as often—to dispute the knowledge claims of nonfiction films.¹

Book Title: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years-1916-1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MOHANTY J. N.
Abstract: As in his earlier work, Mohanty here offers close readings of Husserl's main texts accompanied by accurate summaries, informative commentaries, and original analyses. This book, along with its companion volume, completes the most up-to-date, well-informed, and comprehensive account ever written on Husserl's phenomenological philosophy and its development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npzng

Introduction from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: This introduction is primarily for those who may not have read my Philosophy of Edmund Husserl: A Historical Development(New Haven: Yale University Press, 2008), of which this present work is a continuation. In that preceding volume I traced the development of Husserl’s thought from his Halle years through the Göttingen period. The story began with the 1886 workPhilosophy of Arithmeticand ended with 1913’sIdeas toward a Pure Phenomenology and Phenomenological Philosophy. Thus the previous volume covered a period of almost thirty years, and in this volume we take up the story from 1916, when Husserl moved to

1 The Freiburg Project from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: 2. In the Logical Investigations, the greatest achievement, no doubt, was the refutation of psychologism in philosophy of logic. To

4 Constitution of Living Beings and Mind from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: The soul (here the word Seeleis used to stand for the layer of subjectivity that belongs to all living organisms, animals and humans) is connected to the material body as an object of scientific research.¹ In dealing with this, Husserl plans to strictly adhere to the phenomenological method of remaining faithful to the lessons of originary experience. As phenomenologists, we need to follow the higher levels of theoretical thinking, but need to attend to its beginning in originary experience. Theory cannot possibly eliminate the sense found in originary intuition, which prescribes the norm by which all subsequent theory must

11 Transcendental Logic I from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Husserl’s researches into transcendental logic, it appears, had their origin in the 1920s, as he came to develop the ideas of passive synthesis and genetic constitution. The lectures of the winter semester of 1920–21 were called “Transzendentale Logik,” now published as a supplementary volume (Hua XXXI) to the Analyzen zur passiven Synthesis. These lectures develop the contrast between activity and passivity (as we saw in the preceding chapter), and then turn toward “active objectification” and to theory of judgment. Eventually, the researches will culminate in the two worksFormale und transzendentale Logik(1929) andErfahrung und Urteil, written about

12 Transcendental Logic II from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In the year 1929, Husserl—in a hurried frenzy of writing—finished his Formale und transzendentale Logik, which may be regarded as his second great systematic work after theIdeas(I deal with it in the next chapter). After finishing this work, Husserl was concerned about writing a more readable introduction to his philosophy of logic, becauseFormale und transzendentale Logikmoved on a much higher plane and was a relatively difficult work. He therefore asked his then assistant Ludwig Landgrebe to collect his manuscripts and lectures on transcendental logic. In 1919–20, Husserl had given a lecture course entitled

13 Transcendental Logic III: from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: The precise relation between the Formale und transzendentale Logik(Formal and Transcendental Logic) and the much later posthumous workErfahrung und Urteil(Experience and Judgment, edited by Landgrebe and published in 1938), is difficult to determine with precision. One would expect that, as many remarks of Landgrebe seem to suggest, the 1929 book should serve as an introduction to the later book. But the later book makes extensive use of manuscripts of much earlier logic lectures, which the 1929 book also made use of, and it appears that the exposition ofFormal and Transcendental Logicremains difficult for readers and

15 The Lectures between 1925 and 1928: from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In the years after the Erste Philosophielectures and preceding theCartesian Meditationsof 1929, Husserl devoted several of his lectures to the theme of a phenomenological psychology,¹ first in the summer semester of 1925, then in the winter semester of 1926–27, and again in the summer of 1928. In addition, in 1927 he was working on his article for theEncyclopedia Britannicawith the cooperation of Heidegger, and in April 1928 he wrote the Amsterdam Lectures—in all of which the idea of a phenomenological, intentional psychology remained at the center of his attention. It is interesting that

19 The End? from: Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: These remarks on existential problems¹ like birth and death by the phenomenologist are from manuscript A VI 14, entitled “Die phänomenologiche Problematik von Geburt, Tod, Unbewusstsein zurückgeleitet zur allgemeinen Theorie der Intentionalität,” from 1929–30. The editors note that parts of this passage may be from an earlier date. Page numbers are to the manuscript in the Nachlass.

2 a burden to be borne from: Sin
Abstract: Setting the stage for the texts I discuss requires a chronological framework. The majority of events recorded in the Old Testament take place within what is known as the First Temple period, which refers to the era in which the temple erected by King Solomon stood in Jerusalem. The temple was built in the mid-tenth century BCE and was destroyed by King Nebuchadnezzar and his Babylonian armies in 587 BCE. That national tragedy led to a period known as the exile, during which many of Israel’s leaders were carried off to Babylon and attempted to refashion Jewish life while bereft

12 why god became man from: Sin
Abstract: No book on the history of sin as debt would be complete without a discussion of St. Anselm of Canterbury, who served as archbishop there from 1093 to 1109 and is perhaps best known among philosophers for his ontological argument in favor of the existence of God. As such, his work has spawned an enormous literature. Among theologians, however, he is best known for his classic work Cur deus homo(Why God Became Man), in which he articulates why it was necessary for the incarnation to take place.¹ In developing his argument, he provides an account of the sin of

Book Title: On Evil- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): EAGLETON TERRY
Abstract: In this witty, accessible study, the prominent Marxist thinker Terry Eagleton launches a surprising defense of the reality of evil, drawing on literary, theological, and psychoanalytic sources to suggest that evil, no mere medieval artifact, is a real phenomenon with palpable force in our contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq3bb

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: Our first topic is marked by an immediate and noticeable split. Does the title refer to discontents generated withinpsychoanalysis or discontent with the psychoanalytic enterprise itself? The section begins oddly—with Frederick Crews’s proleptic rebuttal of the arguments he assumes will follow. Alone among the essayists Crews wants to consider notwhatplace psychoanalysis has in contemporary culture butwhetherit should even have a place. Because his perspective leads him to reject the premises of the volume, he shrewdly uses the essays themselves as examples of the circular reasoning and methodological flaws he considers inherent to psychoanalysis. The

Is Anatomy Destiny? from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Moi Toril
Abstract: This volume invites us to consider the place of psychoanalysis in contemporary culture. In modern feminism debates pitting cultural against biological causation have played an important role. Such debates have also arisen in relation to research in biotechnology, neurobiology, sociobiology, and ethnomethodology. I think it could be shown that Freud thinks of the body in terms that undermine the opposition between natural causation and cultural meanings that have been with us since Kant first distinguished between the realms of necessity and freedom. If this is right, then Freud does have a philosophically original contribution to make to contemporary debates about

Discussion from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: Paul Robinson: I have a question for Kaja Silverman. I was struck, unless I misunderstood, by the fact that she and Judith Butler [see Part I] were saying very similar things about what I would call “denaturalizing” the family. They both suggest that “mother” and “father” are culturally contingent categories and that we should be open to other ways of thinking beside the traditional, biological one that we have in the West, which I find a very attractive idea. I’m wondering whether Professor Silverman thinks Freud himself is open to this kind of culturally relative or culturally contingent way of

Introduction from: Whose Freud?
Abstract: This section continues to emphasize the fruitfulness of psychoanalysis’s methodological displacement, its position betwixt and between other disciplines. All four contributors—coming from a spectrum of different medical and scientific backgrounds—are interested in the potential interaction,across differences,between psychoanalysis and cognitive science. Morton Reiser thus carefully distinguishes between conflating these two disciplines and finding productive parallels, or isomorphisms, between the two.

Can Psychoanalysis and Cognitive-Emotional Neuroscience Collaborate in Remodeling Our Concept of Mind-Brain? from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Reiser Morton F.
Abstract: If, as many of us believe, mental life is dependent upon and most likely originates in the biological functions of brain-body, it should in principlebe possible to reconcile psychologically derived information about mental function with biologically derived information about brain function. Freud understood and believed this. Yet he wisely abandoned his early attempts (1895) to relate his psychoanalytic psychologically based model of mental function to the limited understanding of brain function available in his time. Instead he constructed his hypothetical model of mindwithout taking into accountwhat was then known about the brain and its function. He based

The Changing Psychoanalytic Model of the Mind from: Whose Freud?
Author(s) Cooper Arnold M.
Abstract: A great effort has been made in recent years to achieve some form of integration of mind and brain. If this effort is to succeed, the neurobiologists need as good a model of the mind as is available, and we psychoanalysts, convinced that we possess that most complete and interesting theory of mind, need to begin to frame it in ways that lend themselves to neurobiologic experimentation. We have only just begun to do that.

Book Title: Agitations-Essays on Life and Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Krystal Arthur
Abstract: We disagree. From small questions of taste to large questions concerning the nature of existence, intellectual debate takes up much of our time. In this book the respected literary critic Arthur Krystal examines what most commentators ignore: the role of temperament and taste in the forming of aesthetic and ideological opinions. In provocative essays about reading and writing, about the relation between life and literature, about knowledge and certainty, about God and death, and about his own gradual disaffection with the literary scene, Krystal demonstrates that opposing points of view are based more on innate predilections than on disinterested thought or analysis.Not beholden to any fashionable theory or political agenda, Krystal interrogates the usual suspects in the cultural wars from an independent, though not impartial, vantage point. Clearly personal and unabashedly belletrist, his essays ask important questions. What makes culture one thing and not another? What inspires aesthetic values? What drives us to make comparisons? And how does a bias for one kind of evidence as opposed to another contribute to the form and content of intellectual argument?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq906

14 Just Imagine: from: Agitations
Abstract: Language, an entomological etymologist might say, is a hive of activity, aswarm in competing fictions. Words fly in and out of the mind, and the hum and buzz of implication rises and subsides as the world grows older. New words are coined, old words are lost, others survive only at the expense of their former authority. “Taste” for example, or “temperament”—words that once summoned a complicated set of notions about the world and human nature—retain today only an echo of the intellectual resonance that other centuries took for granted. Another case in point—one that may surprise—is

FOREWORD from: The God of All Flesh
Author(s) Hanson K. C.
Abstract: This is the second volume of collected essays from Walter Brueggemann originally written for Festschriften; the first was The Role of Old Testament Theology in Old Testament Interpretation: And Other Essays(Cascade Books, 2015). These essays demonstrate his discerning analyses of biblical texts. But more than that, they articulate the depth his theological insight, as well as his social analysis.

one THE GOD OF ALL FLESH from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Of all of Terry Fretheim’s remarkable published corpus, I regard his 1991 article, “The Plagues as Ecological Signs of Historical Disaster,” as his most remarkable piece and arguably his most important.¹ In that article, Fretheim argues that Exodus 1–15 is grounded in creation theology. He makes his case by careful attention to the rhetorical usage of the inclusive adjective “all” (לכ) and by translating לכא as “earth,” not merely “land.”

two THE CREATURES KNOW from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: It is by now a truism that “wisdom thinks resolutely within the framework of a theology of creation.”¹ That now common assumption among interpreters, however, has not always been obvious. It is, rather, a hard-won consensus that emerged in a season of scholarship preoccupied with “history,” in which theological interpretation of the Old Testament was dominated by the programmatic slogan “God acts in history.” The connection between wisdom and creation has permitted interpretation to move outside “history” and to challenge the fear of “natural theology” that pertained in Barthian circles of interpretation. Once that consensus judgment was reached about creation

six PSYCHOLOGICAL CRITICISM: from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: From the beginning, the human self has been a compelling enigma for the community that produced the Bible.¹ Ancient Israel regularly asked, in narrative and liturgical texts, “What are human beings?” (Ps 8: 4). Of equal importance, they asked the question with the accompanying phrase, “that you are mindful of them?”² The question—as well as the answer—is a theological one: the community addresses the question of the self by means of the defining reality of God. While they gave many answers to that question, Psalm 139 seems the most appropriate response to the question “What is a human?”

seven PSALM 37: from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: In two decades of energetic activity, wisdom studies have reached something of a plateau.¹ As a result of the work of Professor Whybray, along with Gerhard von Rad, James L. Crenshaw, and Roland E. Murphy (to name the most prominent), we are now able to take as a consensus a great deal concerning Israelite wisdom literature, e. g. its modes of disclosure, its assumptions about authority, its probable social contexts, its general theological intentionality, its tensions with more dominant modes of faith, and its paradoxical relation to broader wisdom traditions in the Near East.² The dominant wisdom literature, which functions

eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from: The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹

6 The Final Academic Battlefield from: Becoming Human Again
Abstract: Gustaf Wingren retired in 1977 after an academic career spanning more than forty years. His position as a tenured professor at Lund University had allowed him to fully engage himself in his work. The basic structure and frame of reference for his theological project were largely complete by the 1950s and were magnificently concluded with the Swedish edition of his book Gospel and Church(1960/1964). In any case, he penned no other books of the same caliber or scale for the rest of the 1960s.

The Wound of Beauty from: The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Strange as it may seem, beauty still needs to be defended. In the history of the West, beauty has played the role of Cinderella to her sisters, goodness and truth. I don’t mean to say that beauty in art or nature hasn’t been appreciated throughout history—though there have been times when beauty has been the subject of frontal assaults—but simply that when we start getting official, when we get theological or philosophical, beauty becomes a hot potato.

Book Title: The Only Mind Worth Having-Thomas Merton and the Child Mind
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Williams Rowan
Abstract: In The Only Mind Worth Having, Fiona Gardner takes Thomas Merton’s belief that the child mind is “the only mind worth having" and explores it in the context of Jesus’ challenging, paradoxical, and enigmatic command to become like small children. She demonstrates how Merton’s belief and Jesus’ command can be understood as part of contemporary spirituality and spiritual practice. To follow Christ’s command requires a great leap of the imagination. Gardner examines what it might mean to make this leap when one is an adult without it becoming sentimental and mawkish, or regressive and pathological. Using both psychological and spiritual insights, and drawing on the experiences of Thomas Merton and others, Gardner suggests that in some mysterious and paradoxical way recovering a sense of childhood spirituality is the path towards spiritual maturity. The move from childhood spirituality to adulthood and on to a spiritual maturity through the child mind is a move from innocence to experience to organised innocence, or from dependence to independence to a state of being in-dependence with God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2w5

9 Finding Spiritual and Psychological Healing from: The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Frequently the person damaged in childhood yearns for some form of healing; though it may not be clear what form that healing could take. The part of the child that needs to be heard and recognized, and so to emerge into the light, is the wounded child part whose feelings have been hidden as a way of self-protection. It could be said that an invitation from the divine child or the true self within each person encourages each person to step out of the constraints of convention and expectation to explore and to be healed both psychologically and spiritually. In

Presentazione from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schlimme Jann E.
Abstract: La scelta del tema al centro di questo volume, il concetto di Weltanschauung, o meglio della molteplicità delleWeltanschauungen, nasce dall’esigenza di confrontarsi con uno dei principali fenomeni del nostro tempo: lo scontro tra diverse e contrastanti visioni del mondo che pretendono una validità oggettiva. LaPsicologia delle visioni del mondo, pubblicata da Karl Jaspers nel 1919, reagiva allo stesso problema. In un momento di crisi dell’Europa, legata alla perdita di un’idea universale e unica di verità e all’emergere di diverse forme di fanatismo, l’opera jaspersiana si proponeva un’analisi fenomenologica delle visioni del mondo, attenta non solo al lato soggettivo,

Wertung und Wertwiderstand. Selbsterfahrung und die antinomische Struktur der Existenz bei Jaspers und Heidegger from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Steinmann Michael
Abstract: The essay discusses Karl Jaspers’ concept of limit situations in his Psychology of Worldviews. In limit situations, individuals experience their finite existence in an essential way. The essay shows that the concept had great influence on Martin Heidegger, who gives two of the situations, death and guilt, a decisive role in the phenomenological analysis of human existence inBeing and Time. For Jaspers’Psychology, the main emphasis lies on the individual’s spiritual counter-reaction to the experience of limit situations, which leaves the overall status of the situations unclear. The essay also shows that for Jaspers limit situations are devastating because

Il “mondo” nella Psychologie der Weltanschauungen from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Achella Stefania
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyse the concept of “world” in Karl Jaspers’ Psychology of Worldviews, to show how the tension between the theoreticalcontemplative and existential approaches finds evident expression in the different roles that the “world” plays in the first and second parts of this work. In the first part, the world is still the object of a subject, although this relationship is neither evaluative (as in theWertphilosophie) nor only gnoseological, but is also the result of an Erlebnis, thus presenting itself as a lived world. In the second part, beginning with the section on the

Wahnsinns-Erzählungen. from: Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schlimme Jann E.
Abstract: Living with ongoing psychotic experiences requires a constant reflective alignment between the parallel psychotic reality (para-actuality, Nebenwirklichkeit) and the socially shared reality (sozial geteilte Wirklichkeit). A fine-grained phenomenological analysis of this manner of living describes the required amount of reflective activity in combination with a loss of certain common-sensical habitualities, the often missing option to communicate one‘s experiences and the necessity to reframe the metaphysical insights as world-view (Weltanschauung), besides the psychotic experiences themselves, as major pitfalls and challenges of ongoing psychotic experiences. In this sense, persons with ongoing psychotic experiences are just like everybody else persons in an adventurous

New Testament Texts, Visual Material Culture, and Earliest Christian Art from: The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Robbins Vernon K.
Abstract: This essay addresses the interpretation of New Testament texts in the context of visual material culture. Especially during the last two decades, interpreters have begun to produce explicit exegesis of New Testament texts in the context of statues, frescoes, archaeological structures, inscriptions, pottery, coins, paintings, and other artifacts that existed in the Mediterranean world during first-century emerging Christianity. A major question is how the presence of a display of visual material culture in the context of interpretation of a text may be legitimately persuasive. is the presence of the visual display simply a tour de force that has no scholarly

2 Expatriate/Traveler from: Faces of Displacement
Abstract: Literary critics have tended to frame Vynnychenko’s stay abroad in terms of two concepts – émigré and exile, which indeed were dominant faces of his displacement. Such critics have also taken for granted Vynnychenko’s orientation towards Ukraine, focusing on hardships of his displacement. They have referred to his time abroad as “difficult” (Doroshkevych, 219), as a “miserable existence” (Richytsky, 11) and, in the Soviet time in a more ideological vein, as part of an “emigrant rubbish heap” (Shabliovsky, 48). Displacement, however, is a complex phenomenon, and I will challenge the established approach to reveal another face of Vynnychenko’s displacement – the face

10 Underlining the Lies Surrounding the “Holy War” and “Infinite Justice” from: Bearing Witness
Author(s) IMBERT PATRICK
Abstract: The only undeniable information one can have access to is that they were living people, and now they are dead. Apart from this information, there is an accumulation of discursive constructions in which the deaths of people are used in media images and political discourses in order to endorse a given logic or strategy in the battle for recognition and power. However, the statement of passage from life to death is more than a referential base. It is a way of reinstating an ethic of recognizing the Other. It traces a path towards self-reflection that demands new and different solutions.

4 “Are We Still in the Game?”: from: Precarious Visualities
Author(s) OCHSNER BEATE
Abstract: Today, technological progress has shown to what extent there is no longer a distinction in the body between what is organic and what isn’t, between inside and outside, normality and monstrosity, identity and alterity. The reorganization of the real body and the reconfiguration of self-image have, today, turned the body into a sort of instrument, a kind of joystick in a virtual game whose name, eXistenZ, promises existence, which is to say, being, presence, and historicity. But eXistenZ isn’t just a game, it’s an opening or interlude for attaining (rising up) to a higher level of fun leading directly to

Introduction from: Precarious Visualities
Abstract: Slavoj Žižek’s chapter confronts Nazi cinema with Hollywood cinema – Veit Harlan’s melodramatic Opfergang (1944) with Ridley Scott’s Hannibal (2001) – to discuss how they both sustain specific ideological political orders. His underlying question, however, is the following: what type of cinematography enables a critical viewer? Defining the filmic image as a site of deployment of the desire to fulfill primordial fantasies, Žižek is attentive to the ways in which censorship is exercised in both regimes to erase or simply veil this deployment. Crucial here is how the staging of hallucination, when the representation of primordial fantasies is left uncensored, can allow

SIX “Only What Does Not Fit into This World Is True” from: The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: To speak, in contemporary society, of art and beauty in the same sentence, much less as realities integrally involved with one another, is to risk becoming the object of smiling condescension. The great philosophers of beauty in the eighteenth century, including Burke, Hume, and Kant, treated beauty as a matter of sensation or taste, as either a physiological experience or a spiritual one, but always a subjective one. The arts of the beautiful were thought “to gentrify” the soul, softening it, making it more sympathetic in itself and sociable as part of a culture.¹ They succeeded in providing to the

4 UNREMARKABLE SUFFERING: from: In/visible War
Author(s) KOZOL WENDY
Abstract: Critics of the U.S. War on Terror have long called for an alternative optic to the relentlessly myopic perspective of American news media. The presumption behind this call to look elsewhere is that doing so will reveal images that are authentic or compelling enough to disabuse American spectators of their ambivalence about the casualties of militarized violence. This logic imagines the grisly “truth” of war to happen somewhere beyond or outside the frame of mainstream representations of combat. What happens, however, when conflict photographers who seek visually graphic and affectively searing images of war find evidence of its banality instead?

Introduction from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Theology, as an academic discipline, has found a comfortable place as a “systematic” endeavor. Responding to the rigors of the academy, historical philosophies, and the Enlightenment and modernity, theology has for the most part produced works systematically, using classic theological doctrinal loci one by one in order to arrive at a coherent, rigorous whole, either through dogmatic theology or systematic theology. Yet in recent years, such a preoccupation hasn’t sustained talk about God as it has in the past. Within theological work, there has always been a constructive element or phase of doing theology; recently, however, a methodological trend has

2 The Workgroup on Constructive Theology from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: The Workgroup on Constructive Theology, founded in 1975 at Vanderbilt University, has served as an organizational center for the development of constructive theology and a place where its key methodological and thematic proposals have been nurtured and propagated. Most basically, the Workgroup is a collection of prominent theologians that, in various configurations, have gathered periodically over the last forty years and collaboratively published four textbooks and one historical theology reader. Throughout its history, the Workgroup on Constructive Theology has variously defined itself, though never in very stark terms. This is partly intentional as one defining feature of constructive theology is

3 Constructive Theology as Interdisciplinary Theology from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: The Workgroup on Constructive Theology gave constructive theology a sense of legitimacy within the theological academy. Yet the conversation for constructive theology doesn’t end within the sphere of theology. Starting with its emphasis on philosophy, social sciences, and culture, constructive theology has been in conversation with other academic disciplines throughout its history. That is to say constructive theology is inherently interdisciplinary. In its effort to be an actionable, relevant form of theology, it has always, from the proto-constructive theologies of Ten Broeke and Meland, through the Workgroup’s textbooks and today, maintained the importance of incorporating insights from other disciplines into

5 Constructive Theology as a Method and a Tradition from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: [Systematic theology] seeks to develop a system, based on philosophical approaches or particular themes or insights, which provides a comprehensive framework for theological topics. Constructive theology, on the

Conclusion from: Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Questions of theological method are always complicated ones. Theology doesn’t invite method in the same way as the sciences, or even the social sciences do. As Kaufman argues, the object of theology, according to Kant and most epistemology after him, is off limits to direct human observation. There is no way to directly prove the veracity of theological claims through observation in the same way as scientific ones, and for that matter, neither can one prove the very existence of the object of study itself. The recognition in the contemporary United States of the magnitude of religious diversity in the

CHAPTER 3 The Ontological Need from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: Over the next three chapters I critically engage with a set of intellectual traditions that present strongly ontological interpretations of the concept of the political. I argue that ontologies of the political often define democracy in a rather one-sided way, reserving authentic democratic action for the disruption of identities, hegemonies, and settled formations. This one-sidedness derives from the splitting of politics into two aspects and then arranging the world into two layers with a clear order of priority. Obvious and routine understandings of politics are contrasted to a more difficult to discern but more fundamental layer—the site and source

CHAPTER 5 The Significance of Conflict from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: The ascendency of ontological interpretations of political life discussed in the previous two chapters is part of a more broadly shared agreement that liberal political thought has a tendency to displace the disruptions of politics in favor of procedures for efficient administration or for reaching binding agreements.¹ In this chapter I develop the argument that the contrast found in political theory, which is in turn echoed in critical ontologies of space and spatiality, between deliberative approaches to democracy apparently oriented to consensus and agonist approaches that are open to the rigors of intractable struggle is better thought of as a

CHAPTER 6 Claims of the Affected from: The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: The chapters in part 2 tracked the way in which strongly ontological interpretations of the political are used to sustain a priori models of proper politics and real democracy. These models underwrite laments about the postpolitical condition as well as excited declarations of the radical potential of dramatic protest events. From within this worldview, properly political events have no determinative content—they exceed given forms of expression and order. Political events occur when singularities that cannot be represented in current formations of political life make their presence felt. Across their variety, whether informed by readings of Spinoza or strands of

CHAPTER 1 Plato on Divination and Nondiscursive Knowing from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: In his most vivid narrative of his hero’s life story, Plato has Socrates center his autobiography on an act of divination. The Apologyshows a man driven by a provocative pronouncement from the Delphic oracle to devote his life to solving its riddle. Pleading his own defense before an Athenian jury, Socrates presents a carefully constructed speech, rich in mythological allusions. He compares himself to Achilles (28c) and likens his life’s work to a Herculean labor (22a).¹ A more subtle and also more powerful point of reference is another figure, the Theban hero Oedipus, whose life was as profoundly shaped

CONCLUSION. from: Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: Though they have different ideas on how exactly it works and how to value it, the Greek philosophers considered here show a consistent understanding of traditional divinatory insight as the result of an ancillary form of cognition that takes place outside our self-conscious, purposive thinking. It enters into our awareness and offers incremental insight into what is around the corner. They construe it as a feature of human nature, as embedded in physiological processes that have to do with our status as embodied organisms situated in a surrounding atmosphere of stimuli. It relies on mechanisms buried deep in our natural

3 “Homer Is My Example”: from: Restless Secularism
Abstract: There are a number of ways to figure the boundaries between religion and secularity in modernism. Stevens juxtaposes the theologically determined Christian with the unencumbered, self-legislating agent who is, in the language of “Sunday Morning,” “unsponsored, free” ( CP, 56). One can also, like Stevens, pit the claims of “nature” against the “supernatural”: “the great poems of heaven and hell have been written and the great poem of the earth remains to be written” (730). Joyce’sPortraitjuxtaposes the dogmatic, ecclesial priest with the “priest of the eternal imagination” who “transmut[es] the daily bread of experience into the radiant body of

4 “The Power to Enchant That Comes from Disillusion”: from: Restless Secularism
Abstract: All the Great Powers assume; it disturbs our rights. The poet, Admired for his earnest habit of calling The sun the sun, his mind Puzzle, is made uneasy By these marble statues which so obviously doubt His antimythological myth . . .¹

INTRODUCTION from: Saints Alive
Abstract: The etymology of the word “text,” like all etymology, reveals buried connotations that haunt the contemporary meaning beneath the level of active memory. For most of us, “text” means the written document, and even in the more nuanced semiological concept, texts are “sign-systems, linguistic or non-linguistic” ( Concise Oxford Dictionary of Literary Terms), the plural “systems” suggesting the disintegration of the unified concept of “text” into texts of different kinds: verbal, visual, aural, gestural, and so on. The etymology of the word, however, seems to resist divisions, indicating integration and unification: the participle of the verb, textus, from which we get

Chapter Two SAINT ANNE from: Saints Alive
Abstract: For a figure with no historical basis, to whom there is no reference in scripture, whose very existence depends on logical deduction, Saint Anne has had a remarkable career. Although her life cannot be verified by any historical source, we are sure she existed, if only because Mary, the mother of Jesus, had to have had a mother herself. Her Hebrew name, Hannah, is probably derived from identification with the prophetess Hannah, and the foundation for the rest of her rich and complex history is found in the Protevangelium of James, a second-century apocryphal Greek document. A Latin text of

Book Title: Stories of the Middle Space-Reading the Ethics in Postmodern Realisms
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Bowen Deborah C.
Abstract: Highlighting the wide variety of ethical concerns considered by writers such as Timothy Findley, Thomas King, Carol Shields, Julian Barnes, A.S. Byatt, and Salman Rushdie, Deborah Bowen makes the case for a new category of "postmodern realism" and shows how contemporary stories about "the real" and "the good" are constructed. Applying theoretical insights from Emmanuel Levinas and Mikhail Bakhtin, Bowen investigates categories of postmodern realism such as magic realism, parody, and metafiction while laying the groundwork for Christian readings of a medium that is often perceived as largely irreligious. An illuminating study of well-known contemporary writers, Stories of the Middle Space is a critically nuanced and methodologically innovative work that reads the postmodern from a faith-based perspectives to create new literary insights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q6073

Aging and the Life Cycle: from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) Callahan Daniel
Abstract: Aging poses a peculiar puzzle for medicine.¹ As a biological reality, aging is an inherent part of organic life, affecting humans no less than animals, plants, and microorganisms. It is in that sense beyond the realm of medicine, a permanent backdrop to all of life. But aging is also ordinarily accompanied by disease, bodily decline, and disability. It is thus well within the realm of medicine, whose historical mission has been the cure of disease and the relief of pain, each much desired by those who grow old.

Life Extension and the Meaning of Life from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) van Tongeren Paul
Abstract: In this essay I will present some philosophical reflections on the desire for life extension, a desire that most gerontological literature as well as public discussion—for example, on resource allocation—seem to take for granted. Although life extension generally is taken as a statistical concept, I will consider it transposed to individual experience.

Solidarity with the Elderly and the Allocation of Resources from: A World Growing Old
Author(s) ter Meulen Ruud H. J.
Abstract: One of the cornerstones of European health care systems is the principle of solidarity. The care of the elderly, including health care and social care, is in many respects based on this principle: the young contribute to the costs of care for the old, who have a greater risk of disease and handicaps. But the increasing demand for care by the elderly—resulting from epidemiological changes as well as various social processes—is putting solidarity between the young and the old under strain. Particularly the medicalization of old age, which is draining away resources from long-term care, is an important

Book Title: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Miller Merrill P.
Abstract: A thorough examination of the relation between structure and event in social and anthropological theory that provides conceptual tools for representing the project of the author of MarkAn exploration of the southern Levant as a plausible provenance of the Gospel, a permanent site of successive imperial regimes and culturally related peoplesA detailed analysis of the construction of Mark as a narrative composed without access to prior narrative sources about Jesus
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zmm

Conjectures on Conjunctures and Other Matters: from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Fieldwork, the distinctive procedural hallmark of the anthropological enterprise, became an unquestioned professional requirement during the decades of sociocultural anthropology’s “classical period,” roughly 1925 to 1960. for our purposes, the major consequence of this is a presentism characteristic of much ethnographic reporting: the society as observed at the time of the fieldworker’s interaction with it. While this presentism raises large conceptual questions,¹ its practical result with respect to theory was a strong bias against the historical in dominant approaches, whether the latter was functionalism or structuralism (to name but two, all but opposite options). in addition to reflecting contemporary practice,

The Markan Site from: Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Among the various Oceanic specialists who have remarked on Marshall Sahlins’s work, Nicholas Thomas, at the Australian National University, is perhaps the most interesting, both in his particular studies, as represented by Entangled Objects: Exchange, Material Culture, and Colonialism in the Pacific, and in his more theoretical work,Out of Time: History and Evolution in Anthropological Discourse.¹ In the latter, Thomas develops the argument that Sahlins’s mechanisms of reproduction/transformation, which stress “the creative dynamics of the indigenous cultural scheme,” entail “a particular power relation which could exist only at a certain phase of colonial history, namely the period between initial

11 Elements of Modernism in The Song of the Lark from: Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) MOSELEY ANN
Abstract: When literary critics think of Willa Cather and modernism, they think first of A Lost LadyandThe Professor’s House, perhaps even ofMy Ántonia, but they hardly ever think ofThe Song of the Lark. However, if we expand our parameters and definitions of modernism beyond the “high modernism” of the 1920s, as Richard Lehan and other literary historians such as Ricardo J. Quinones, Sanford Schwartz, and Michael Levenson have done, we find several elements of modernism in this early novel. Although I am certainly not arguing that The Song of the Lark—a chronological narrative written primarily in

Book Title: Identity and Control-How Social Formations Emerge (Second Edition)
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): White Harrison C.
Abstract: In this completely revised edition of one of the foundational texts of network sociology, Harrison White refines and enlarges his groundbreaking theory of how social structure and culture emerge from the chaos and uncertainty of social life. Incorporating new contributions from a group of young sociologists and many fascinating and novel case studies, Identity and Control is the only major book of social theory that links social structure with the lived experience of individuals, providing a rich perspective on the kinds of social formations that develop in the process. Going beyond traditional sociological dichotomies such as agency/structure, individual/society, or micro/macro, Identity and Controlpresents a toolbox of concepts that will be useful to a wide range of social scientists, as well as those working in public policy, management, or associational life and, beyond, to any reader who is interested in understanding the dynamics of social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1r2fg1

THREE THREE DISCIPLINES from: Identity and Control
Author(s) Steiny Don
Abstract: In chapter 1, we saw that a public was produced jointly as a forum for the fleeting netdoms—that are the phenomenological base of networks—and disciplines can

Book Title: Ciencia y modulación del pensamiento poético-percepción, emoción y metáfora en la escritura de Lorand Gaspar
Publisher: Ediciones Universidad de Salamanca
Author(s): BERMÚDEZ VÍCTOR RAMÓN ESCOBEDO
Abstract: La presente Tesis estudia las relaciones entre la ciencia y la poesía. Nuestro trabajo aborda el modo en que el conocimiento científico modula la creación literaria, así como algunos de los procedimientos del pensamiento literario. Las hipótesis de investigación reposan sobre dos niveles de la escritura de Lorand Gaspar: la dimensión epistemológica del discurso poético y su valor cognitivo. A partir del análisis de un corpus literario se propone una metodología de estudio que atiende a la complejidad epistemológica y cognitiva de la enunciación poética. Tres apartados teóricos organizan la investigación de algunos de los procesos del pensamiento poético: percepción, emoción y metáfora. Lo anterior se enmarca en una argumentación que favorece la transdisciplinariedad mediante estrategias de análisis literario que integran consideraciones de carácter interdisciplinar.This thesis studies the relations between Science and Poetry. The research approaches the way in which the scientific knowledge modulates the literary creation, as well as some of the procedures of the literary thought. The hypotheses of investigation rest on two levels of Lorand Gaspar’s writing: the epistemological dimension and the cognitive value of the poetic discourse. Based on the analysis of a literary corpus this research proposes a methodology of study that attends to the epistemological and cognitive complexity of the lyrical enunciation. Three theoretical chapters organize the investigation of some of the processes of the poetical thought: Perception, Emotion and Metaphor. This research takes place in an argumentation that favors transdisciplinarity by means of literary analysis strategies, which integrate several considerations of interdisciplinary nature.Cette Thèse s’articule autour des relations entre la poésie et la science. Notre travail aborde la manière dont la connaissance scientifique module la création littéraire, ainsi que certaines des procédures de la pensée littéraire. Les hypothèses de cette recherche reposent sur deux niveaux d’étude de l’écriture de Lorand Gaspar : la dimension épistémologique du discours poétique et sa valeur cognitive. Ce travail propose une méthode d’analyse littéraire qui s’attarde à la complexité épistémologique et cognitive de l’énonciation poétique. Trois chapitres organisent l’étude de certains des processus de la pensée poétique : Perception, Émotion et Métaphore. Notre recherche favorise la transdisciplinarité grâce à des stratégies d’analyse littéraire qui intègrent des considérations à caractère interdisciplinaire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rfzxjv

Eking Out a Discursive Space: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) LOEWEN MARY ANN
Abstract: In many ways, my mother was a non-conformist. In the late 1940s in Morden, Manitoba, when most Mennonite women her age were getting married, she was away from home teaching school in remote northern Manitoba communities. When these same women were having babies, she was pursuing a theological degree from Mennonite Brethren Bible College (mbbc) in Winnipeg, Manitoba. She did eventually get married at the ripe old age of twenty-five. And she did have children, a respectable half dozen to be exact. But she never really did follow the gendered conventions of her time. She died in August of 2010

Creative (M)othering: from: Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) LACHMAN BECCA J. R.
Abstract: As a woman in my thirties, I marvel at the mentorships that seem to fall into place for new mothers I know, a lifelong global circle of sisterhood I’ll never enter unless I, too, give birth. Every year, more friends with babies, more nieces and nephews—such joy! And yet, I sense my “otherness” in most social circles as a not-yet-mother. Some days, I carry this difference like a stone. Other days, I’m convinced it’s simply part of my alternative vocation. This essay reflects my inner tug of war about becoming a biological mother. My ongoing story asks to be

SEVEN POST–SOCIALIST REALISM IN CHINESE CINEMA from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) McGrath Jason
Abstract: In the climactic moment of the 1955 film Dong Cunrui董存瑞, a classic war film from Mao-era China, the eponymous hero commits a suicide bombing to destroy an enemy machine gun nest that threatens a wave of attacking Communist troops. The scene brings to the fore two notable aspects of Chinese socialist realist cinema: its melodramatic romanticism and its propensity to indulge in formalist techniques during moments of maximum emotional and ideological impact.¹ In this scene, editing is particularly foregrounded; the seven shots preceding the explosion take approximately sixteen seconds in all, for a quick editing rate of just over

NINE “HUMAN WAVE TACTICS”: from: Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Rodekohr Andy
Abstract: Under the creative direction of master filmmaker Zhang Yimou 张艺谋, the 2008 Beijing Olympic Games Opening Ceremony drew on China’s rich cultural resources and seemingly unlimited assets in capital and manpower to exhibit an unprecedented visual and technological extravaganza. Though it won high praise and commendations for its spectacular achievement, the huge crowd formations that structured the narrative of the exhibition unsettled many observers. Zhang’s use of such “human wave tactics” ( renhai zhanshu人海战术) not only partakes of the global imaginary of masses and multitudes made emblematic during the twentieth century’s “era of crowds” but also evokes the powerful and

2. What, Where? from: Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: A few remarks on textual selection, then. To continue a theme from the preceding discussion of scientism and On Beauty, a central anxiety for academic literary studies in the contemporary era of scientific dominance pertains to the extent to which groupings, taxonomies, and classifications are methodologically derived and how far they help us to understand literary production. How sound are our methods of textual selection? Are there a set of scientific methods that could aid us in the selection of texts? These questions are important because, regardless of the fact that many defences of the humanities resist the language of

2. Channeled, Reformulated, and Controlled: from: Love and its Critics
Abstract: Susan Sontag, in her now-classic essay “Against Interpretation”, protests against a form of criticism which reshapes texts like the Song of Songs into new and ideologically compliant forms:

ONE A philosophical criminology from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: This is a book about philosophy and criminology. There will be criminologists who question the need for closer engagement with philosophy and, likewise, philosophers who do not see a great deal of benefit from associating with criminology. My argument here is that philosophy is essential to criminology as philosophers have for centuries been asking questions concerning how we get on with one another – and what happens when we do not – that have direct bearing on criminological concerns. Philosophers might also gain from engagement with criminology and greater exposure to the messy and dirty ‘real world’. For some the subject of

THREE Morality from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: According to the British criminologist Anthony Bottoms (2002: 24), ‘if they are true to their calling, all criminologists have to be interested in morality’. Moral philosophy, or ethics, is concerned with how we live and how we ought to live with one another. It considers what is good or bad, as well as deontic judgements of rightness, wrongness, obligation, requirement, reason for doing and what oughtto be. Such concerns should be central criminological concerns. Criminologists assert that crime – or harm or deviancy – is a social construction and ask what it is about such actions (or inactions) that makes them

SEVEN Respect from: Philosophical criminology
Abstract: So far this book has considered philosophical ideas of values, morality, aesthetics, order and rules and how they relate to criminological concern. This chapter explores a positive way forward centred on the concept of respect. The meaning of ‘respect’ has been a concern for moral philosophy for some time (for example Darwall, 1977; Dworkin, 1977; Hill, 2000; Bagnoli, 2007; Carter, 2011). Much of this work draws, at least in part, on the writings of Immanuel Kant centred on the categorical imperative (see Chapter Three) and the notion of human dignity, that ‘respect for the moral law entails treating persons (oneself

ONE Introduction from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Hardill Irene
Abstract: Lifecourse research is undertaken by researchers from across the social sciences, often working in a multidisciplinary context, using the lifecourse as an underpinning concept and/or a method of study. In this book we aim to represent the diversity of lifecourse methodologies employed in the social sciences, as well as having a concern for epistemology – how different knowledge claims are connected to our research practices. Moreover, the contributors in this edited book emphasise how different theoretical frameworks and positionality affect the research process – each contributor examines the challenges of their research design and how they worked through methodological issues

THREE Time in mixed methods longitudinal research: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Edwards Rosalind
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to explore the methodological and analytical challenges thrown up by an ongoing study that has been reusing and combining longitudinal qualitative narrative and quantitative survey data to research individual attitudes to voluntarism between 1981 and 2012.¹ This period represents a time of economic and social policy change encompassing recession and cuts to public services; followed by relative prosperity and increase in investment in public services; and then the most recent recession and accompanying austerity measures (Timmins, 2001; Glennerster, 2007; Alcock 2011; Defty, 2011; Driver, 2008).

FIVE A method for collecting lifecourse data: from: Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Del Bianco Ann
Abstract: The lifecourse can be studied using a number of different research designs and methodological approaches – all presenting their own set of challenges and benefits. In recent years there has been increasing use of the lifegrid for both quantitative and qualitative studies. The application of the lifegrid is appealing to many researchers for a variety of reasons. It is especially useful for studies where a longitudinal focus is integral to the research objective(s), and such is the case with lifecourse research. Compared with traditional longitudinal studies, the administration of the lifegrid is a less costly alternative and is relatively easy

Book Title: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Gilleard Chris
Abstract: How do we sustain agency and identity amidst the frailty of advanced old age? What role does care play in this process? Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by age and infirmity. It begins with a theoretical examination of the fourth age, interrogating notions of agency, identity and personhood, as well as the impact of frailty, abjection and ‘othering’. It then applies this analysis to issues of care. Exploring our collective hopes and fears concerning old age and the ends of people’s lives, this is essential reading on one of the biggest social issues of our time.Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by ageing, and the associated problems of mental and physical frailty in later life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89766

NINE Female identities in late modernity from: Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Spanò Antonella
Abstract: The condition of women has undergone impressive changes since the late 1960s. A series of interconnected changes have made possible a new way of being a woman: the new consumer culture, television, the technological transformation of domestic activities, mass schooling, the new youth culture, the political and cultural environment around 1968, and the feminist struggle that brought abortion, contraception and divorce to the forefront of public debate.

NINE Maintaining a sense of individual autonomy under conditions of constraint: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Nagel Ulrike
Abstract: This chapter deals with the biographical situation and coping strategies of highly educated cadres under the authoritarian regime of the former German Democratic Republic (GDR). It draws from a study of work biographies of contemporary East German managers who had previously been economic cadres in the GDR. The second part of the chapter considers methodological difficulties of cross-cultural research, particularly in the arenas of post-socialist transformation research and migration research. The problem of providing an adequate framework of interpretation for the social phenomena of a culture unfamiliar to the researcher will be captured by the notion of lacking the ‘common

TWELVE Ethical aspects of biographical interviewing and analysis from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kaźmierska Kaja
Abstract: It may seem obvious to say that biographical research differs from all other sociological research. The differences apply to research techniques, procedures of analysing biographical material and something that can be called a ‘style of work’, which covers the very time-consuming research stages of material collection and analysis. These and many other specific features of biographical research are grounded in theoretical and methodological assumptions which vary for particular types of biographical work. However, the outstanding characteristic of this kind of work is that the research material is biography.

SIXTEEN ‘It’s in the way that you use it’: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kyllönen Riitta
Abstract: How do social workers use biographies in designing social welfare intervention? How can biographies be useful in analyses of the ideological dimensions of welfare practices? These are questions that I will elucidate in this chapter. My discussion is based on a study that I conducted of how Venetian social welfare services interpret their lone mother recipients’ needs and respond to them¹. First, I locate social welfare services in the feminine subsystem of welfare programmes and discuss how the feminine subtext defines the status of its beneficiaries. I then go on to delineate the analytical framework adopted to examine discursive and

EIGHTEEN In quest of teachers’ professional identity: from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Chanfrault-Duchet Marie-Françoise
Abstract: Applying the methodological tool of the life story, this chapter addresses the issue of the professional identity of teachers of French in secondary schools in France. I will explain this specific choice of issue and method by answering the reader’s usual question, ‘What position does the author speak from?’. This requires some background information on my own professional and intellectual development both as a researcher and academic.

NINETEEN Narratives, community organisations and pedagogy from: Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Mortlock Belinda
Abstract: This chapter engages with three categories of narrative: stories about teaching a social research course; students’ stories about their practice as researchers; and the stories of 42 women and men working for community organisations in a city in New Zealand. These stories emerge from a teaching programme in which final-year sociology students are involved in biographical research. Students write a life-story narrative drawn from multiple interviews with a single narrator, as well as a research journal, in which they offer an autobiographical account of their research process. They also submit an analytical essay; that is, a sociological commentary that locates

FIVE The Construction of the Nation from: Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: The mistrust of didacticism that runs through Zhou’s writing can be read as a commentary on the ideological construction of the modern nation-state. Zhou’s attack on Han Yu and the daotong systemtakes us to the heart of his criticism, for Han Yu was a pivotal figure in the attempt to construct a single foundation for sociopolitical action and individual cultural production in the wake of the An Lushan (d. 757) rebellion.¹ Han Yu’s radical innovations in guwen as a literary form redefined learning in terms of the Confucian “way of the sage,” and he particularly attacked Daoist and Buddhist

Introduction from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: The Analects(Lunryu論語) is one of the most influential texts in human history. As a putative record of Confucius’ (551–479 B.C.) teachings, for the past two thousand years authoritative interpretations of this classic were instrumental in shaping the orientation of an array of intellectual traditions in China and, more generally, East Asia. Together with the other core texts of the classical corpus, theAnalectshas functioned as a key point of reference for inquiry, debate, and conilict within the traditions of classical scholarship and for the political and social institutions that sought ideological grounding in this scholarship. Whether

CHAPTER 2 Innovation As / Through Form from: Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: In this chapter, I argue that the editors of the Collected Explanationssought to present that commentary as a performative expression of Confucius’ claim to have been a transmitter rather than a creator; by ostensibly venturing no interpretation of their own, they exercised a degree of hermeneuticallatitude unknown to previous commentators. I examine their strategies of commentarial control, their unique apologist portrayal of Confucius in response to Zheng Xuan’s depiction of him as human and fallible, their use of the Kong Anguo commentary to challenge Sima Qian’s authority, and their attempts to secure a cosmological grounding for Confucius as sage.

EIGHT Writing and the Ends of History from: A Patterned Past
Abstract: To narrate is to encode an ideology. Fredric Jameson, applying an insight of Levi-Strauss to the study of narrative, has written that “ideology is not something which informs or invests symbolic production; rather the aesthetic act is itself ideological, and the production of aesthetic or narrative form is to be seen as an ideological act in its own right, with the function of inventing imaginary or formal ‘solutions’ to unresolvable social contradictions.”¹ Both in selecting material and in setting the terms of its intelligibility, narrators uphold certain views on the workings of the world while rejecting others as wrong or

Book Title: Divine Simplicity-A Biblical and Trinitarian Account
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): BARRETT JORDAN P.
Abstract: Divine Simplicityengages recent critics and address one of their major concerns: that the doctrine of divine simplicity is not a biblical teaching. By analyzing the use of Scripture by key theologians from the early church to Karl Barth, Barrett finds that divine simplicity developed in order to respond to theological errors (e.g., Eunomianism) and to avoid misreading Scripture. The volume then explains how divine simplicity can be rearticulated by following a formal analogy from the doctrine of the Trinity in which the divine attributes are identical to the divine essence but are not identical to each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7gkh

1. Divine Simplicity in Contemporary Theology from: Divine Simplicity
Abstract: Contemporary theological treatments of the doctrine of God and his perfections often neglect the doctrine of divine simplicity.¹ Discussions of simplicity are more often found in philosophical literature,² and the theologians who do address it usually express concerns instead of its importance. Chapter 2 will detail how the doctrine of divine simplicity has always had critics. However, reactions to the doctrine in the latter half of the twentieth century were of a different kind and greater degree. Although criticisms of divine simplicity are nothing new, modern theology developed a new narrative of the origins and content of divine simplicity that

Book Title: Faith in a Hidden God-Luther, Kierkegaard, and the Binding of Isaac
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): PALMER ELIZABETH
Abstract: The story of the binding of Isaac both challenges and inspires people who seek to live faithfully in relationship with a God who surpasses our understanding. Combinding the history of exegesis with a theological exploration of the meaning of faith in the face of suffering, this book examines Luther‘s and Kierkegaard‘s lively--and very different--interpretations of Genesis 22 to demonstrate how the way we read the Bible is crucial to the life of faith.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7gw5

1. Pedagogy and Anagogy in Twentieth-Century Readings of Genesis 22 from: Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: In the story of Isaac, it is not only God’s intervention at the beginning and the end, but even the factual and psychological elements which come between, that are mysterious, merely touched upon, fraught with background;

2. Luther’s Reading of Genesis 22: from: Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: This chapter explicates Luther’s reading of Genesis 22 in the Lectures on Genesisin his exegetical and historical context, focusing on the theological and exegetical moves by which he simultaneously softens the story and intensifies its problematic elements. In particular, the doctrine of the resurrection of the dead as an example ofcreatio ex nihiloserves as a hermeneutical key to both God and Abraham. It resolves the tension between God’s promise and command and it provides a response to ethical critiques of Abraham’s behavior. But the concept of resurrection fails to solve the underlying theological problems of who God

Introduction from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: Raimundo Alemany Panikkar (1918–2010)—or as he is more widely known today, Raimon Panikkar—lived, wrote, and taught on three continents over an astoundingly long period, stretching from roughly the close of World War I until the first decade of the twenty-first century. During that span, he published over three hundred articles and sixty books on a wide range of scientific, philosophical, cultural, and theological topics as seismic shifts in global cultural life were occurring—a point of which he was keenly aware. This very considerable output dealt with the interface between various aspects of Christianity, Hinduism, Buddhism, and

1. Unknown Jesus or Unknown Christ? from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter exposits and evaluates Panikkar’s Christology of religions from the beginning of his publishing career until the first edition of the Unknown Christ of Hinduismin 1964.¹ Unlike his later thought, which is more consistent on a host of philosophical and theological issues, a close look at his early christological writings reveals tension in terms of how to properly formulate the relationship between Christ and the religions.² More specifically, the broad outlines of two distinct approaches to Christ and the religions are evident during this early period, one of which has immense implications for a retrieval of Panikkar’s work.

2. The “Orthodox” Creativity of Panikkar’s Early Dialogue with Hinduism from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter will explore Panikkar’s little-known comparative theological study of Hindu and Christian worship, Le mystère du culte dans l’hindouisme et le christianisme. The basis of the work was first given as a presentation at the thirty-seventh World Eucharistic Congress in Munich, Germany, in 1960.¹ The theme of the international theological conference which took place concurrently with the Congress was “Worship and Man Today.”² Panikkar’s paper was “conceived as a contribution in the Indian sphere”³ and then re-written and expanded for a book. The first edition was written by Panikkar in German⁴ and later translated into French in 1970. The

3. A Critical Reading of Panikkar’s Cosmotheandric Christology from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter features a systematization of Panikkar’s later Christology, which is characterized by an escalation of the incipient pluralist trends found in the first edition of the Unknown Christ of Hinduism. It is also marked by an utter departure from the conviction that Jesus’s person and work is constitutively key to the relationship between God and the world. The chapter will also evaluate Panikkar’s later christological development based upon priorities and principles earlier drawn from “Meditaciόn sobre Melquisedec” andLe mystère du culte, as well as various systematic theologians. I will also set Panikkar’s later theology within a wider personal

4. A Constructive Protestant Appreciation and Interaction from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Raimon Panikkar presents many non-Catholic readers with a set of challenging theological and inter-religious options. What follows in this chapter intends to affirm, to interact with and, in places, to complement and even expand aspects of Panikkar’s thought.¹ Apart from occasional hints, critical comment is reserved for the next chapter. There are, of course, Protestants who are wholly sympathetic with, for example, the radical pluralism advocated by Panikkar. But, on the whole, even academic Protestants who are concerned about interreligious issues are likely either to be unacquainted with his writings or unappreciative of his thought—despite his very considerable reputation

5. The Great Tradition Ruptured? from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Before further engagement with Panikkar’s thought, it is important to note one problem presented by the reality that Panikkar’s large body of writing spans a period in excess of fifty years: any attempted summary or survey is difficult, given the evolving nature of his thought. The difficulty is compounded by one of the logically prior challenges of making sense of Panikkar: the idiosyncratic relationship between the publishing dates of Panikkar’s books and other writings and the actual genesis of their content. At times, this makes it difficult to understand the development of Panikkar’s thought, even about a single issue. Nonetheless,

6. A Concluding Dialogue about Panikkar between the Authors from: "Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: There were more than several instances in the preceding chapters of recognizing in the style and sensibility of a colleague from the Protestant tradition an echo of my own perspective, although I will save ecumenical insights for the next sections. Bob’s well-formulated summary of the objections against christocentrism as a theological method neatly encapsulates what I, and others, see as a widespread cultural aversion to the living heartof the Great Tradition. It is incumbent upon theologians whose task comes forth from the corporate identity of the church to theologize in such a way as to draw others towards the

Book Title: World Christianity as Public Religion- Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): DA ROSA WANDERLEY P.
Abstract: This volume stresses world Christianity as a form of public religion, identifying areas for intercultural engagement. Divided into five sections, each formed by two chapters, this volume covers themes such as the reimagination of theology, doctrine, and ecumenical dialogue in the context of world Christianity; Global South perspectives on pluralism and intercultural communication; how epistemological shifts promoted by liberation theology and its dialogue with cultural critical studies have impacted discourses on religion, ethics, and politics; conversations on gender and church from Brazilian and German perspectives; and intercultural proposals for a migratory epistemology that recenters the experience of migration as a primary location for meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7hn1

Foreword from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) Kay James F.
Abstract: Princeton Theological Seminary is honored to join with the Faculdade Unida de Vitoria in supporting the launch of this first volume in the Fortress Press series World Christianity and Global Religion. Historically speaking, it is difficult to imagine either the phenomenon or the emerging academic field of world Christianity without the nineteenth-century missionary movement fueled by such student fervor at the colleges, universities, and seminaries of the early American republic, including Princeton. Out of this movement, ecumenical partnerships across Protestant denominations were forged, and the study of world religions arose in order to translate the Christian message into the idioms

5. Theology, Ethics, and Society from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) RIVERA-PAGÁN LUIS N.
Abstract: Latin American liberation theology was the unforeseen enfant terrible in the academic and ecclesial realms of theological production during the last decades of the twentieth century. It brought to the conversation not only a new theme—liberation—but also a new perspective on doing theology and a novel way of referring to God’s being and action in history. Its project to reconfigure the interplay between religious studies, ethics, and politics became a meaningful topic of analysis and dialogue in the general theological discourse. Many scholars perceive in its emergence a drastic epistemological rupture, a radical change in paradigm, a significant

8. Women and Academic Theological Education from: World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) ULRICH CLAUDETE BEISE
Abstract: In this essay, I aim to offer a reflection on women and academic theological education based on the experience of female students from the Faculdade Unida de Vitória, in the state of Espírito Santo, Brazil. Academic theological education is an important step for women to achieve ecclesial agency. My reflection is based on narrative interviews conducted with female students concerning the impact of theological studies in their own life experiences. Academic theological training enhances the self-esteem of women, empowers them, and provides them with tools for reflection-action-reflection in their Christian communities or in other organizational spaces, and it is fundamental

Book Title: Principalities in Particular-A Practical Theology of the Powers That Be
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Berger Rose Marie
Abstract: Activist pastor Bill Wylie-Kellermann gives an urgent specificity to the theology of the powers, relating biblical concepts to contemporary struggles for civil rights, clean air, fair housing, safe affordable water, public education, and more, highlighting throughout the vital importance of a community of struggle connected through time and across space. The book‘s uniqueness lies in its practicality, as biblical and theological analyses arise from, and are addressed to, particular historical moments and given ecclesial and movement struggles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7htm

8 The Machinery of War: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The most prominent public feature of this deathly Gulf War has been the celebrated vindication of the American technological myth. This technological superiority is evinced in the heaviest (and ostensibly most accurate) bombing in the history of the world. People of faith and conscience have felt the spectacle of this “triumph” as

9 Confronting the Drug Powers; Freeing the Captives (1992) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It is thereby all the more remarkable that in the churches’ struggle against drugs there has been such meager theological reflection. Indeed the notorious

11 Spiritual Warfare and Economic Justice (1994) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Among the most important (and most neglected) biblical resources for Christian economic thinking is the theology of principalities and powers. William Stringfellow, who must be credited with the theological and political discernment that awakened much of the recent practical interest in the powers, first began to speak on the topic in the early ‘60s. Slated to give two identical presentations in Boston—one at the Harvard Business School and another at

14 Readers before Profits: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It has struck me more than once how thoroughly our response to the newspaper strike ongoing in Detroit has been shaped by a theological comprehension of the principalities and powers. It proves both illuminating and practical.

15 Labor Unions and the Principalities (1998) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Biblically, theologically, ethically, even pastorally, it is incumbent upon the church to stand with workers, to be with them in the struggle for justice, to join them in holding corporations accountable to human community.

16 Exorcising an American Demon: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It is commonly understood that racism is more than individual attitude. It is prejudice with power behind it. Yet looked upon with a biblical and theological eye, white racism may be recognized to be even more than that: it is itself an active and aggressive principality, a “power” that appears to move, adapt, and grow with a life of its own.¹

17 The Fall in Play: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It is perhaps only a minor distinction to note that Stringfellow viewed the powers theologically as creatures in their own right, each with

18 Global Economy: from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Globalization, broadly, is a moving theological target: a historic configuration of economic, technological, political, corporate, ideological, cultural, even religious powers in processes of competition and collusion, whose outcome

21 Katrina and the Wrath to Come (2005) from: Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The Wrath of God is a difficult, if not problematic theological notion.¹ It would seem to impute to God, some would say project onto God, the very violence we have ourselves embraced as human beings. And yet from another angle it is in effect the consequences of our violence, our folly, and our sin come back round. It names in essence the spiritual cycle of violence to which we have allowed ourselves to be bound as captives.

LA «CIVIL CONVERSAZIONE» NELL’EPOCA DELLE GUERRE DI RELIGIONE: from: L'Antidoto di Mercurio. La «civil conversazione» tra Rinascimento ed età moderna
Author(s) Paganini Gianni
Abstract: Opera dal significato enigmatico, come spesso succede ai dialoghi in cui lo scrittore si rivela, ma anche si cela attraverso i personaggi della conversazione, il Colloquium Heptaplomeres de rerum sublimium arcanis abditisrappresenta il volto nascosto del pensiero religioso di Bodin. Queste ambiguità hanno condotto alcuni studiosi a contestarne l’attribuzione, che peraltro è stata confermata di recente e con solidi argomenti di contenuto e filologici da N. Malcolm,¹ mentre altri interpreti hanno utilizzato ilColloquium(e in particolare la cruda polemica anticristiana che occupa la parte centrale del libro III) per avallare la tesi di un cripto-giudaismo dell’autore.² Comunque sia,

SOGLIE: from: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Fornari Emanuela
Abstract: Il mio contributo reca un titolo impegnativo: Soglie: umano/dis-umano tra linguaggio e rappresentazione. Cercherò, attraverso alcune notazioni e alcuni spunti che fanno parte di una ricerca tutt’ora in corso, di articolare quella che è per me la posta in gioco implicata da questa breve locuzione, che affianca quattro termini le cui relazioni forse domandano di essere approfondite. Dico subito che si tratterà per me di accostare, attraverso un’angolatura insieme teoretica e genealogica, la questione della differenza: della sua semantica concettuale e della sua messa in opera socio-politica. La differenza, dunque, non solo e non tanto come questione logica o ontologica,

Book Title: Filozofia religii- Publisher: John Paul II Catholic University of Lublin, Faculty of Philosophy
Author(s): JANECZEK ks. Stanisław
Abstract: This volume takes up the problem of the human relation with God. Religion, perceived as a lasting and important cultural and social phenomenon, was and still is a research theme in the humanities and social sciences. The contributors examines religion both on the ground of philosophy and the sciences, discussing its nature and status, being concerned about the autonomy of philosophy and related issues. A wide-ranging overview of the multifaceted nature of religious discourse is combined with a discourse on the methodological status of religious studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkj5d

METODOLOGICZNY STATUS NAUK O RELIGII from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) SVD ANDRZEJ BRONK
Abstract: Zakładając szerokie rozumienie nauki ( epistéme, scientia) jako każdego typu uporządkowanej i uprawomocnionej wiedzy, określam możliwe badania nad religią i religiami terminem „nauki o religii”, „nauki religiologiczne” (skrótowo „religiologia”) lub „nauki religioznawcze” („religioznawstwo”). Ponieważ nieadekwatne kategorie mogą utrudniać samookreślenie, przedkładam termin „religiologia” nad „religioznawstwo”, zawężając ten drugi do empirycznych nauk o religii. Użyty w tytule termin „nauka” nie jest nacechowany wartościująco i nie przesądza o naukowym lub innym charakterze nauk o religii. Pojmuję je jednak zbiorczo jako dyscypliny przede wszystkim teoretyczne, bo stawiające sobie za cel poznanie – opis i wyjaśnienie – zjawisk religijnych (religii)¹. Pierwszorzędnym bowiem celem nauki jesttheoria:poznawanie zjawisk

ANTROPOLOGIA RELIGII from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) SVD JACEK J. PAWLIK
Abstract: Słowo „antropologia” jest w modzie, dlatego zdarza się, że jest ono nadużywane. Aby dokonać analizy pojęcia „antropologia religii”, jego zawartości semantycznej i podejść metodologicznych, warto na wstępie wyjaśnić sam termin „antropologia”. Nie chodzi tu o ogólną naukę o człowieku ani o antropologię filozoficzną, spuściznę Kanta, ani też o antropologię fizyczną badającą szczątki ludzkie. Mówiąc o antropologii religii, należałoby sprecyzować, że jest to antropologia (społeczna i kulturowa¹) religii lub dokładniej – są to antropologiczne badania zjawisk religijnych. Na kontynencie europejskim funkcjonowało do niedawna określenie „etnologia religii” jako termin równoznaczny. Jest on jednak systematycznie wypierany, na Zachodzie ze względu na skojarzenie z dziedzictwem

PSYCHOLOGIA RELIGII from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) SZYMOŁON KS. JERZY
Abstract: Religijność jest częstym przedmiotem badań psychologicznych. Stanowi ona główny obiekt zainteresowania psychologii religii, ale także inne dyscypliny psychologiczne włączają problematykę religijności do swoich teoretycznych analiz i empirycznych eksploracji. Należą do nich między innymi psychologia rozwojowa, psychologia osobowości i psychologia kliniczna.

SOCJOLOGIA RELIGII from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) MARIAÑSKI KS. JANUSZ
Abstract: Religia uchodzi za trudny przedmiot badań socjologicznych, zwłaszcza gdy nie pojmujemy jej jako określonej całości, którą można rozłożyć na prostsze elementy, lecz definiujemy ją jako pewien sposób i styl życia wyrażający osobiste relacje człowieka z Bogiem. Wciąż bez odpowiedzi pozostaje pytanie, czy socjolog za pomocą swoich narzędzi badawczych potrafi bezbłędnie rozpoznać to, co religijne, w zjawiskach społecznych, które analizuje i wyjaśnia, oraz określić granice społecznej przestrzeni religii. Socjologia jako dziedzina dostarczająca wiedzy opisowej ma swoje ograniczenia. Nie może rozstrzygać kwestii teologicznych czy ideologicznych ani formułować sądów o dobrej i złej religii, ani też dawać recept na dobre lub złe życie.

PROBLEM DOŚWIADCZENIA RELIGIJNEGO from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) OP JAN A. KŁOCZOWSKI
Abstract: Jaka jest struktura tego fascynującego zjawiska, określanego przez nas w Europie, za Cyceronem i Laktancjuszem, terminem religio?Mówi się, że religia to – odreligare– więź. Ale każda więź jest relacją, czyli czymś, co nie jest martwym przedmiotem, lecz rzeczywistością dynamiczną, która się staje, urzeczywistnia i ulega rozprzężeniu. Jaka jest ontologiczna struktura religii?

RACJONALNOŚĆ WIARY RELIGIJNEJ W DOBIE NOWEGO ATEIZMU from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) WSZOŁEK KS. STANIŁSAW
Abstract: Zanim podejmiemy temat właściwy, zwróćmy uwagę na kluczowe terminy. Chodzi o pojęcia, takie jak: rozum, wiara, nauka, religia, teologia, które w debacie światopoglądowej i dyskursie naukowym używane są w różny sposób, co ma niebagatelne konsekwencje dla ewentualnego rozstrzygnięcia dyskutowanego problemu. Sens kluczowych pojęć najczęściej kryje się w kontekście toczonych debat. Już proste nazewnictwo sugeruje pewne znaczenia pojęciowe. Jeśli na przykład omawianą problematykę określimy mianem „nauka – wiara”, to problem zdaje się mieć naturę duchową i psychologiczną. Można by go zaanonsować pytaniem: jak naukowiec może być człowiekiem wierzącym? Jeśli mówimy o relacji „nauka – teologia”, to rozważamy wzajemny stosunek dwóch dyskursów: naukowego i

RELIGIA A ALTERNATYWNE RUCHY RELIGIJNE from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) PTASZEK ROBERT T.
Abstract: Posługiwanie się określeniami mającymi wartościujący charakter utrudnia bezstronną prezentację analizowanego zjawiska, dlatego na jego określenie używam terminu „alternatywne ruchy religijne”. Jest on nie tylko neutralny aksjologicznie, lecz ponadto wskazuje, że istotę tych ruchów stanowi wykorzystywanie idei występujących w myśli europejskiej (a w wielu wypadkach także w kulturach Indii i Dalekiego

FILOZOFIA RELIGII – SPOSOBY I MOŻLIWOŚCI NAUCZANIA from: Filozofia religii
Author(s) SOCHOÑ KS. JAN
Abstract: Podejmując się nauczania filozofii religii, wychodzę od zarysowania trudności, jakie wiążą się z faktem istnienia religii. Wyznacza ona bowiem zawiły krąg zagadnień natury historycznej, metodologicznej, światopoglądowej i zgoła metafizycznej. Nie ma przecież takiego oglądu religii, który byłby całkowicie autonomiczny, pozbawiony związków z określonym i już ukształtowanym rozpoznaniem dotyczącym świata oraz człowieka. Wypada przyjąć, że każde rozumienie czegokolwiek poprzedzone bywa przez swoiste przedrozumienie, co oznacza, że zanim przystąpimy do filozoficznej refleksji nad religią (religiami?), dysponujemy już własnym rozumieniem świata i poglądami na to, co przychodzi nam interpretować. Po prostu metoda przyjęta w badaniach musi, chcąc nie chcąc, w pewien sposób determinować

Book Title: Antropologia- Publisher: John Paul II Catholic University of Lublin, Faculty of Philosophy
Author(s): JANECZEK Ks. Stanisław
Abstract: Antropologia [Anthropology] is a gateway to the series of volumes devoted to particular disciplines of philosophy, taking into account their relationship with the Christian worldview and recognizing the need to include the philosophical and ideological diversity of contemporary culture. Antropologia covers Thomist tradition, enriching its achievements with other perspectives, especially Karol Wojtyla's personalism. Increasing influence of "third culture thinking", where the humanities are carried out in the context of the natural sciences, justifies the need to take up the difficult task of demonstrating complex problems of philosophical and natural anthropology. Anthropological considerations force us to realize the multifaceted nature of classical discussions on the nature of man, including theirs scientific and ideological facets, and to demonstrate them in a well-balanced manner. In this context, it enables readers to gain guidance in the debate on the philosophy of mind, providing ways of understanding and assessing the problem of the human soul (concerning the mind-body problem).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkj9g

ANTROPOLOGIA FILOZOFICZNA – KONCEPCJA, METODY, PROBLEMATYKA from: Antropologia
Author(s) KOWALCZYK KS. STANISŁAW
Abstract: Człowiek jest jedyną istotą w świecie, która nie tylko istnieje, jak inne jestestwa kosmosu i biokosmosu, ale egzystuje świadomie i stawia sobie pytania: kim jestem, skąd jestem, dlaczego istnieję, jak mam żyć? Zanurzony w otaczającym świecie materialnym wykracza poza i ponad niego swym życiem psychiczno-umysłowym. Jest przedmiotem badań dyscyplin przyrodniczych i humanistycznych, literatury pięknej i sztuki. W kręgu nauk o człowieku szczególne miejsce zajmują antropologie: przyrodnicza, społeczno-kulturowa, filozoficzna i teologiczna. Dwie pierwsze mają profi l głównie deskryptywny, dwie ostatnie podejmują próbę eksplikacji natury człowieka oraz zawierają elementy wartościująco-normatywne.

MIECZYSŁAWA ALBERTA KRĄPCA I KAROLA WOJTYŁY KONCEPCJA ANTROPOLOGII FILOZOFICZNEJ from: Antropologia
Author(s) DEC BP IGNACY
Abstract: Trwa w kulturze europejskiej spór o człowieka. Ścierają się ze sobą przeciwstawne koncepcje osoby ludzkiej. Jan Paweł II w przemówieniu wygłoszonym 8 czerwca 1997 r. w kościele św. Anny w Krakowie, z okazji sześćsetlecia Wydziału Teologicznego Uniwersytetu Jagiellońskiego, powiedział m.in. „Wielki spór człowieka u nas, w Polsce, wcale się nie zakończył wraz z upadkiem ideologii marksistowskiej. Spór o człowieka trwa w dalszym ciągu, a pod pewnym względem nawet się nasilił”¹. Historia ostatniego czasu pokazała, jak bolesne, a nawet tragiczne są konsekwencje „błędu antropologicznego”, czyli skutki jednostronnych, wyimkowych, nieobiektywnych wizji bytu ludzkiego. Stąd też bardzo ważnym zadaniem nauk antropologicznych, zwłaszcza filozofii

ANTROPOGENEZA W UJĘCIU ANTROPOLOGII PRZYRODNICZEJ from: Antropologia
Author(s) TOMCZYK KS. JACEK
Abstract: W ramach toku studiów filozoficzno-teologicznych przewidziane jest wiele ważnych przedmiotów zarówno tych o charakterze teoretycznym, jak i pastoralnym. Choć ze swej defi nicji teologia skoncentrowana jest na „nauce o Bogu”, to w istocie swej zawsze dotyka problemów antropologicznych – wszak człowiek jest odbiorcą prawd teologicznych. Jednak, jak pokazuje doświadczenie, pokaźna część wiedzy dotyczącej człowieka, której depozytariuszami są adepci teologii, bardzo często zostaje zawężona jedynie do zagadnień z antropologii fi lozofi cznej. Pomija się przy tym całkowicie lub w znaczącej części ogranicza wiedzę z zakresu biologicznych początków naszego gatunku. Tymczasem pytania o konfl ikt między naukami przyrodniczymi a biblijnymi w odniesieniu do

JAK WYKŁADAĆ FILOZOFIĘ CZŁOWIEKA? from: Antropologia
Author(s) DAROWSKI ROMAN
Abstract: Filozofię człowieka wykładam od 40 lat. Najpierw wykładałem i wykładam u siebie, a więc klerykom na Wydziale Filozofi cznym jezuitów w Krakowie. Od 1989 r. na tym wydziale studiują także świeccy. Ten właśnie wydział był zalążkiem założonej w 1999 r. Wyższej Szkoły Filozo- fi czno-Pedagogicznej „Ignatianum”, która obecnie prowadzi 5 kierunków: filozofię, politologię, kulturoznawstwo, pedagogikę i pracę socjalną. W „Ignatianum” pracuje 300 profesorów i wykładowców, w tym 40 jezuitów, a studiuje ponad 4 tys. studentów. Dawniej wykładałem również gdzie indziej: dłużej na Papieskim Wydziale Teologicznym w Krakowie, przekształconym później w Papieską Akademię Teologiczną, a w 2009 r. w Uniwersytet Papieski

Book Title: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: The Histories of Anthropology Annual presents diverse perspectives on the discipline's history within a global context, with a goal of increasing awareness and use of historical approaches in teaching, learning, and conducting anthropology. The series includes critical, comparative, analytical, and narrative studies involving all aspects and subfields of anthropology.Volume 11, Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations, examines the work and influence of scholars, including Franz Boas, Ruth Benedict, John Dewey, Randolph Bourne, A. Irving Hallowell, and Edward Westermarck, and anthropological practices and theories in Vietnam and Ukraine as well as the United States. Contributions also focus on the influence of Western thought and practice on anthropological traditions, as well as issues of relativism, physical anthropology, language, epistemology, ethnography, and social synergy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkjsq

4 Boas and the Young Intellectuals: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) DINWOODIE DAVID W.
Abstract: Alongside the study of innovation in so-called primitive societies, Franz Boas began operationalizing the anthropological study of (rather than reiterating the theoretical possibility of) the construction of the social position of newly minted social elites in Anthropology and Modern Life. In this chapter I will explore the American circumstances through which Boas articulated what we might call, following George W. Stocking Jr. (1965),enlightened anthropological presentism.

6 Continuity and Dislocations: from: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) BOWERS EVELYN J.
Abstract: This chapter reviews the contribution A. Irving Hallowell (1892–1974) made to the study of human evolution and biological/physical anthropology (Shapiro 1967:608). Hallowell’s work in human evolution bridges the pre-and postmolecular periods in biological anthropology and the evolutionary and postevolutionary periods in cultural anthropology. Because of this transition, some central elements important to our understanding of human evolution may have been lost, that is, those elements of human evolution that are difficult to quantify or to be “read” directly out of biology. Among these are the more ideational dimensions of culture—precisely the elements of culture that cultural anthropologists have

Book Title: God's Creativity and Human Action-Christian and Muslim Perspectives
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): MARSHALL DAVID
Abstract: A record of the 2015 Building Bridges Seminar for leading Christian and Muslim scholars, this collection of essays explores the nature of divine and human agency through themes of creation's goal, humankind's dignity and task, and notions of sovereignty. Part I sets the context for the book with "Human Action within Divine Creation: A Muslim Perspective" by Mohsen Kadivar of Duke University and "On the Possibility of Holy Living: A Christian Perspective" by Lucy Gardner of Oxford University. The rest of the book includes paired essays-one from a Muslim perspective, one from a Christian perspective-that introduce scriptural material with commentary to aid readers in conducting dialogical study. In her conclusion, coeditor Lucinda Mosher digests the illuminating small-group conversations that lie at the heart of the Building Bridges initiative, conversations that convey a vivid sense of the lively, penetrating but respectful dialogue for which the project is known. This unique volume will be a valuable resource to scholars, students, and professors of Christianity and Islam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkk09

On the Possibility of Holy Living: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) GARDNER LUCY
Abstract: Faced with a task that feels like trying to pack the world into a suitcase, I have deliberately decided not to attempt a hurried historical overview of Christian disagreements about the nature of our existence—and our freedom, in particular. Instead, I offer a brief personal theological guide to negotiating the thematic landscape from one particular Christian point of view. This touches upon Christian beliefs about the person of Christ (the doctrines of the Incarnation and the Trinity, in particular), which cannot be fully explored here. It is, however, my hope that these reflections will demonstrate something of the ways

God’s Creation and Its Goal: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) SIDDIQUI SOHAIRA ZAHID
Abstract: The question of god’s Creation and its purpose is a perennial one that has both stumped exegetes of the Qurʾān and caused theologians to be embroiled in intense debates over the centuries. In offering a reflection on this topic, it is important to connect scriptural reflections on specific verses in the Qurʾān to their theological implications throughout Islamic intellectual history. To this extent, personal reflections on verses of the Qurʾān will be tethered to the more technical theological inquiries they contributed to. More specifically, these inquiries are (1) What does the mere presence of creation reveal about God’s nature? (2)

To Be Khalīfa: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) DAKAKE MARIA MASSI
Abstract: If we ask the question, what is humankind’s purpose or vocation on earth, the clearest Qurʾānic answer is: to be khalīfat Allāh fi’l-arḍ, to be God’s representative or vicegerent on earth. Theologically, this is understood to be the ultimate reason for humankind’s creation, fall, and exile, and the reason human beings are equipped with intrinsic knowledge as well as guidance from God. It explains why they are entrusted with free will and why other creatures are described as subservient to them. Serving as God’s representative to the rest of creation entails a dual responsibility toward both God and creation. But

Human Freedom and Divine Sovereignty: from: God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) HAMZA FERAS Q.
Abstract: In muslim theological discourse, the terms used to discuss the question of free will versus divine predetermination did not directly emerge from the Qurʾānic lexicon, though concepts such as God’s decree and preordainment ( al-qaḍāʾ wa’l-qadar), specifically in conjugated expressions such asqaddara Allāhorqaḍa Allāh, are well-known Qurʾānic refrains. To a large extent, from as early as the mid-second/eighth century, the theological discourse coalesced around a number of technical terms that were simply the obvious Arabic vernacular for the concepts and questions implied by the main topic: terms such asjabr(compulsion),tafwīḍ(delegation),iktisāb(acquisition),ikhtiyār(choice), or

Some Thoughts on the Problems of Literary Change 1750–1800 from: Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Literary change is intertwined with problems of individual change and social change. Human beings undergo physiological as well as cultural changes just as societies undergo institutional, political, religious, and technological changes. Although in our time concern with all types of change has become common because of the increased rapidity of social and technological changes, the desire, even need, to understand change in the Western world has a long philosophical history, as can be seen from the remarks of Heraclitus and Parmenides.

Erasurism from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Paul Ricoeur memorably identified Marx, Nietzsche and Freud as the father-founders of a «school of suspicion» 10which urges readers, critics and artists to unveil the strategies by which art conceals its own constructedness and disguises its ideological complicity with dominant structures of power. Should erasure art be considered as a casualty of the «terminal case of irony» in which the humanities find themselves at the present time, driven as they are by an «uncontrollable urge to put everything in scare quotes»11? Even though erasurism does not necessarily set out to destroy the artwork per se (and thus can be

Ex-humings from: Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Despite the exponential popularity of erasure techniques amongst contemporary experimental artists, the most important and successful avatar of overpainting erasurism to this day remains Tom Phillips’s ongoing A Humument: A Treated Victorian Novel(1966-). By «ex-huming» the corpse of an obscure late 19thcentury novel (W.H. Mallock’s now forgotten three-deckerA Human Document[1892])A Humumenteludes Bloom’s logic of influence and constitutes a singular case of a rewriting whose achievements clearly outdo those of its (non-canonical) predecessor. For Phillips erasure is as much about covering and adding as it is about canceling and subtracting: the book is filled

Introduction: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Tomsky Terri
Abstract: Perhaps no contemporary discourse more fully expresses the character and ideals of cosmopolitanism than that of modern human rights. This essay describes a duality in our conception of the subject of human rights, and the critical opportunity inherent in that duality for recognizing and elaborating a negative cosmopolitanism that is, in Walter Mignolo’s terms, “critical and dialogic, emerging from the various spatial and historical locations of the colonial difference.”¹ In order to do so, it traces the historical development of human rights discourses and instruments, especially in relation to the institution of the United Nations and the decolonizing movements after

1 American Good Life, the Bandung Spirit, and a Human Rights Record from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Parikh Crystal
Abstract: Perhaps no contemporary discourse more fully expresses the character and ideals of cosmopolitanism than that of modern human rights. This essay describes a duality in our conception of the subject of human rights, and the critical opportunity inherent in that duality for recognizing and elaborating a negative cosmopolitanism that is, in Walter Mignolo’s terms, “critical and dialogic, emerging from the various spatial and historical locations of the colonial difference.”¹ In order to do so, it traces the historical development of human rights discourses and instruments, especially in relation to the institution of the United Nations and the decolonizing movements after

5 Disaster Cosmopolitanism: from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) O’Loughlin Liam
Abstract: Mohsin Hamid’s noir novel Moth Smoke(2000), set in Lahore amidst the South Asian nuclear tests of 1998, features a scene in which news of the successful Pakistani tests at the Chagai Hills reaches the novel’s protagonist, Daru. An otherwise disaffected character – recently fired from his a banking job and spiralling into drug addiction and crime – Daru unexpectedly discovers in himself “a strange excitement, the posture-correcting force of pride.”¹ In Daru’s upright stance, evoking a soldier standing at attention, Hamid isolates the intended impact of the Pakistani government’s nuclear tests: the establishment of a militarized ideological formation which scholars and

8 Cosmopolitan Creoles and Neoliberal Mobility in Annalee Davis’s On the Map from: Negative Cosmopolitanism
Abstract: However, since the 1970s, the region has been influenced strongly by the emergence of neoliberalism in the United States, the military and economic hegemon in the hemisphere. With its grounding in the logic of the market, neoliberalism promises an opportunity for the Caribbean to transcend the burdensome legacies of slavery and colonialism. This promise, of equality and mobility and freedom, poses difficulties to artists who perceive that neoliberalism has served only to

Book Title: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta-Ipotesi per il Parco dell’Appia Antica
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Guarini Paola
Abstract: Il recupero e la valorizzazione delle aree estrattive dismesse, ipogee e “a cielo aperto", si fonda sull’obiettivo generale di un’azione rigenerativa di scala vasta, urbana e/o territoriale, che promuova sistemi di riconnessione di valore ambientale, storico, culturale. Si intende superare l’intervento di semplice bonifica o rinaturalizzazione, e interpretare il recupero come un’opportunità di re-immissione in vita di questi luoghi, proponendo la loro “messa in sicurezza", suggerendo l’inserimento di funzioni e servizi urbani, restituendone il godimento alla dimensione pubblica. Si vuole puntare all’individuazione, rilettura, recupero di sistemi estensivi e complessi, attraverso: la creazione di reti di ricucitura territoriale, il ripristino di relazioni ecologiche, culturali, fruitive, l’identificazione di “infrastrutture ambientali" o viarie (linee d’acqua, corridoi ecologici, antichi tracciati), il riconoscimento e/o la proposizione di “figure territoriali", capaci di evidenziare e rappresentare le relazioni spaziali e morfologiche tra singoli luoghi. La Ricerca, di cui il presente volume costituisce presentazione e consuntivo, ha scelto come terreno di sperimentazione il Parco dell’Appia Antica: un contesto unico, nel quale l’azione di valorizzazione si intreccia con un ricco palinsesto di preesistenze, naturalistiche e antropiche, suggerendo articolate dinamiche d’uso congiunto, tra ri-funzionalizzazione e tutela, oltreché percorsi di visita alternativi e inconsueti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w1vnhp

INQUADRAMENTO E SINTESI DELLA RICERCA from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Guarini Paola
Abstract: Nate per l’approvvigionamento delle materie prime da costruzione e concepite secondo una logica prevalentemente economica,

VUOTI A “NON PERDERE”. from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Dell’Aira Paola Veronica
Abstract: Realtà “differite”. Adattività ed elevata suscettività di cambiamento (dimensionale, morfologico-spaziale, di ruolo e significato) sono le caratteristiche che più contraddistinguono i terreni di lavoro che i paesaggi ex-estrattivi offrono al progetto contemporaneo. In primo luogo, ogni cavità rappresenta, nel suo assetto finale, un mondo a sé. Il quadro dei siti di possibile intervento mostra infatti un’articolazione estremamente vasta, ove grandezze, consistenze, strutture e forme tracciano uno scenario tanto affascinante quanto spesso incontornabile e disarmante: una caleidoscopica varietà che vogliamo acclamare, non tanto come sconfinata possibilità di invenzione, quanto piuttosto come la più augurabile e istruttiva condizione per l’intervento di recupero.

LA VALORIZZAZIONE DEI SITI DI CAVA COME STRATEGIA DI SISTEMA PER LA CITTÀ CONTEMPORANEA from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Guarini Paola
Abstract: Per loro stessa origine le cave sono nate in rapporto alla natura geomorfologica di un territorio e, per ottimizzare la coltivazione del materiale e sfruttarne a pieno la ricchezza, si sono sviluppate in modo continuo ed esteso in ambiti territoriali vasti. L’accessibilità delle aree e/o la vicinanza con le zone dove venivano utilizzati i materiali cavati, costituiscono altri rilevanti fattori che incidono sulla localizzazione delle aree estrattive. Linee d’acqua, tracciati viari

IL PARCO DI SOTTO: from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Rossi Alma
Abstract: Il territorio del Parco è parte integrante dell’antica via, sia per la sua formazione storica di Regina Viarum che per la sua storia geologica. Il panorama verso l’Appia e dall’Appia è di eccezionale bellezza perché la

TECNICHE GEOFISICHE NON INVASIVE PER LA MAPPATURA DI CAVITÀ SOTTERRANEE. from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Milana Giuliano
Abstract: Appare quindi chiara l‘esigenza dell’individuazione con tecniche di superficie delle cavità sotterranee in aree ove le caratteristiche geologiche dei terreni superficiali e la presenza di insediamenti umani, anche antichi, ne facciano supporre l’esistenza.

LA STUPEFACENTE STORIA TRA ANTHROPOS E NATURA: from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Aragona Stefano
Abstract: “Mitologico” potrebbe essere il termine più adatto per descrivere il rapporto tra i processi di antropizzazione e la Terra, Terra come amante dell’Uomo. Come in tutti i rapporti, come in tutte le storie d’amore, esso si modifica e cambia continuamente se è fecondo. Così nella contemporaneità, a far data dal 1972, anno della pubblicazione di The Limits of Growth, sta emergendo in modo sempre più evidente la necessità della trasformazione dell’esistente poiché il suolo è una risorsa limitata e non riproducibile. Richiamandosi ai processi di territorializzazzione-deteritorializzazioneriterritorializzazione proposti da Raffenstein, legati al ruolo fondamentale dell’innovazione, ecco che le aree delle cave

NUOVO SENSO E NUOVO USO PER LE CAVE NEL PARCO DELL’APPIA ANTICA from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Guarini Paola
Abstract: Eppure le cave rappresentano un’entità cospicua all’interno del Parco, segnano la morfologia del paesaggio naturale, descrivono l’operosità e la vastità dell’azione antropica, evidenziano l’assetto geologico

1. IL CAMMINO DI PIETRA. from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Author(s) Guarini Paola
Abstract: È accessibile da via del Casale Rotondo, che collega via Appia Antica e via Appia Nuova, in corrispondenza dell’Ippodromo delle Capannelle. Risalente probabilmente all’epoca romana ed attiva fino al 2005, si è rivelata di grandissimo interesse ai fini di una possibile valorizzazione, recupero e ri-funzionalizzazione. Innanzitutto è emerso con evidenza il pregio geomorfologico dell’ambiente di cava che presenta una parete di coltivazione estremamente interessante, in diversi punti ancora ben visibile e ben conservata, che

4. GLI ELEMENTI TOTEM from: Il recupero dei siti di cava: strategie di scala vasta
Abstract: A conclusione dell’esperienza progettuale, si è considerata l’ipotesi di evidenziare gli itinerari/cave, punteggiando il Parco dell’Appia Antica di elementi tridimensionali, telai in cemento o acciaio che intendono porsi come elementi figurativi di riferimento. Lo scopo è quello di orientare il visitatore e evidenziare la presenza delle aree di cava, sia ipogee che a cielo aperto.Queste strutture potrebbero essere poste sulle ampie superfici erbose che sovrastano i reticoli ipogei o segnalare la prossimità di una discenderia o di un ingresso; avere il compito di informare e spiegare al visitatore le caratteristiche geologiche e spaziali degli ambienti di cava; investire il ruolo

Sereni a Lugano from: Il ritmo del pensiero
Abstract: Di fronte alla gradita proposta di tenere un seminario su Vittorio Sereni alla Università della Svizzera Italiana ho subito sentito che il tema doveva essere questo: Sereni a Lugano, per l’indomita fedeltà del poeta alla geografia luinese, al confine, ai paesi di frontiera, alla Svizzera ticinese, e alla stessa Lugano. I testi considerati (la poesia Addio Lugano belladel 1970, e la conversazione su Petrarca tenuta alla Biblioteca cantonale nel 1974) coprono un breve ma intenso arco cronologico¹.

Poesia e polifonia nel Sabato tedesco from: Il ritmo del pensiero
Abstract: Ne Gli strumenti umaniil tema « Europa » s’intreccia al tema della memoria che combatte contro l’oblio. Di questo parlaLa pietà ingiusta(1964), poesia cerniera fra le due parti (L’opzioneeIl sabato tedesco) che compongonoIl sabato tedesco¹. La seconda parte eponima (oggetto del nostro discorso) è strettamente imparentata aStella variabile, sia cronologicamente (la sua uscita nella collana delle Silerchie dal Saggiatore nel luglio 1980 cade fra le due edizioni diStella variabile, del 1979 e del 1981)², sia per la presenza inStella variabiledi molte delle poesie presenti nel Sabato tedesco .

Zanzotto « nevodèt »: from: Il ritmo del pensiero
Abstract: Queste due poesie di Fosfenisono nate, apprendiamo da un bel saggio di Francesco Venturi 1 , in ordine cronologico inverso alla loro posizione nella raccolta.Eurosiainfatti non compare ancora alla fine del 1977, in un elenco di poesie ricopiate in pulito per una raccolta che doveva intitolarsilógos erchómenos,con sigla LE, poi in gran parte confluite sotto il nuovo titoloFosfeni(1983): e vi compare inveceVocabilità, fotonicon le date 13 dicembre (Santa Lucia) 1976, e 15 ottobre 1977. Vocabilità,fotoni, che contiene la formula del lògos veniente, suggerisce Venturi, fa da calamita per quella che

Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also

Writing, trace, image. from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Borutti Silvana
Abstract: The writing of history is a fundamental theme in Michel de Certeau. However, it is not solely a methodological and epistemological issue. Indeed, we cannot understand Certeau’s contribution to the epistemology of history if we do not link it to the most original aspects of his perspective, which are to be found in what I would call the field of historical ontology. I will therefore first deal with his conception of historiography as a writing practice which produces ontological and political effects. I will then consider Certeau’s analysis of some images, which he interprets as traces and, as such, as

Drawn norms: from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Maynard Patrick
Abstract: There seems to be good evidence of a recent rise of “non-logocentric”, yet fully philosophical, interest in images. This would be at least partly due to digitalization. Just as a technological revolution that started two and a half centuries ago greatly expanded our powers to gather, store and use energy, another revolution today rapidly expands our information gathering, storage and processing powers. And though much of that is given over to automatic systems, one of the information revolution’s biggest challenges has been to human user access and manipulation of its fast expanding data sets. Fortunately, digitalization has also provided ways

Valori from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Mulligan Kevin
Abstract: corretto allora non ci sarebbero tragedie, omicidi, sacrifici, ingiustizie, costi, beni, mali, vizi, brutti film, mediocrità, eroi, genî, santi e gesta eroiche. «E sarebbe anche una cosa buona», dice qualcuno. Ma ovviamente non potrebbe dirlo se il nichilismo assiologico fosse corretto. Poiché in tal caso nulla sarebbeuna cosa buona. Il

Norms, representationality, accessibility from: Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of

Ascoltare le emozioni che sono in noi from: Che cosa vale
Author(s) Borgna Eugenio
Abstract: La svolta emozionale della psichiatria come è stata definita da Eugène Minkowski, le ha ridato un’anima che era stata cancellata da ogni sua concezione descrittiva e biologica orientata alla trionfalizzazione dei sintomi, e non delle esperienze vissute, delle esperienze emozionali, dalle quali i sintomi nascono. Il tema, il Leitmotiv, delle emozioni in psichiatria ha un senso solo se non si abbia mai a staccare dalla realtà clinica: dalle sorgenti di vita e di conoscenza che la realtà clinica ha in sé. Le emozioni fanno parte della vita, anche quando la vita si incrina nel suo svolgersi nel tempo, e si

Abbi fede from: Che cosa vale
Author(s) Sini Carlo
Abstract: Che cosa vale, che cosa conta alla fine, nella vita di un essere umano? Sappiamo bene, noi che frequentiamo da molto tempo una cultura “storica” e ci sono note ampie esperienze antropologiche ed etnografiche in giro per il mondo, che le risposte possono essere e sono state innumerevoli: che senso avrebbe aggiungere ora anche la nostra risposta o presunta tale? La nostra poi di chi? Anche tra noi ci sono differenze innumerevoli e se uno aspira al paradiso, un altro mette al primo posto la giustizia sociale, l’amore del prossimo, la salute mentale e così via. Come ne usciamo?

Book Title: Le vertigini della materia-Roger Caillois, la letteratura e il fantastico
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Coglitore Roberta
Abstract: Il fantastico è la chiave di volta dell’esperienza intellettuale di Roger Caillois. Alla teoria generale del fantastico, alle descrizioni di mirabilia della natura e ai fantasmi delle scritture dell’io sono dedicate le tre sezioni del presente volume. Nella prima parte la famosa definizione cailloisiana del fantastico in arte e in letteratura, «l’irruzione dell’inammissibile all’interno della inalterabile regolarità quotidiana», è interpretata come il nucleo fondativo di un’estetica generale che include il mondo degli animali, alla luce delle contemporanee teorie evoluzioniste, e quello dei minerali, interpretato come l’esempio decisivo per illustrare la legge della dissimmetria che regola l’universo. Nella seconda parte le mirabili pagine di Caillois dedicate alle pietre figurate vengono considerate tra gli esempi più alti dell’ékphrasis novecentesca, dove emerge una vocazione letteraria continuamente negata e dissimulata. Nell’ultima parte le passeggiate parigine alla ricerca dei fantasmi del XV arrondissement, oggetto di un saggio sulla logica dell’immaginario, assumono la forma di un racconto autobiografico e di un film per la televisione, dove Caillois recita la parte del narratore e di un personaggio con cappa e maschera, a metà tra Fantômas e Zorro. Caillois ritorna così alla scrittura letteraria e autobiografica, presente sin dalle prime esperienze giovanili, ma abbandonata dopo i contrasti con André Breton e il gruppo dei Surrealisti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w2f2z7

Riappropriazioni from: Le vertigini della materia
Abstract: Nel Novecento si assiste a una riformulazione del genere dei lapidari¹. Gemme, pietre dure e pietre preziose vengono raccolte in elenchi e collezionate con rinnovata passione. Le catalogazioni dei minerali, antiche e medievali, erano destinate agli usi più vari. Potevano avere valore commerciale, utile cioè per fissare il prezzo negli scambi e riconoscere le pietre provenienti da terre lontane; potevano essere ordinate in base alle proprietà curative delle pietre, considerate magiche, terapeutiche, o anche d’auspicio, per le loro qualità divinatorie o per i loro poteri taumaturgici e apotropaici; o, infine, diventare collezioni di simboli perché corrispondenti ai segni astrologici e

Il fantasma e la televisione from: Le vertigini della materia
Abstract: Sono testi appartenenti a generi diversi: un saggio sulla logica dell’immaginario e un racconto fantastico (entrambi con lo stesso titolo, Petit guide du xv e arrondissement à l’usage des fantômes), una nota autobiografica (Résumé d’une

Book Title: Mourning Nature-Hope at the Heart of Ecological Loss and Grief
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): LANDMAN KAREN
Abstract: We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w6t9hg

10 Emotional Solidarity: from: Mourning Nature
Author(s) KRETZ LISA
Abstract: The ecological crisis provides no shortage of evidence for justified mourning. For a non-exhaustive list, consider the following: overpopulation (more than 200,000 people added every day); global warming (global ice cap melting, sea level rise, increasing catastrophic natural disasters); deforestation (32 million acres annually); unsustainable agriculture¹ (the abominable treatment of non-human animals aside, current farming practices are responsible for 70 per cent of the pollution of United States rivers and streams); unsustainable transportation (a single car emits 12,000 pounds of carbon dioxide every year in the form of exhaust; in the United States cars emit roughly the same amount of

Book Title: The History Problem-The Politics of War Commemoration in East Asia
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press
Author(s): Saito Hiro
Abstract: Seventy years have passed since the end of the Asia-Pacific War, yet Japan remains embroiled in controversy with its neighbors over the war’s commemoration. Among the many points of contention between Japan, China, and South Korea are interpretations of the Tokyo War Crimes Trial, apologies and compensation for foreign victims of Japanese aggression, prime ministerial visits to the Yasukuni Shrine, and the war’s portrayal in textbooks. Collectively, these controversies have come to be called the “history problem." But why has the problem become so intractable? Can it ever be resolved, and if so, how? To answer these questions, Hiro Saito mobilizes the sociology of collective memory and social movements, political theories of apology and reconciliation, psychological research on intergroup conflict, and philosophical reflections on memory and history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0r56

CHAPTER 6 The Role of Historians in the History Problem from: The History Problem
Abstract: At first glance, historians may not look like the best candidates for facilitating a resolution of the history problem. This is because historians have traditionally used the nation as a primary unit of analysis, helping to naturalize it as a primordial entity. They have also created professional associations and delimited their membership along national borders, consistent with the nationalist logic of self-determination; for example, when Japanese historians write about the history of Japan, they often talk among themselves without consulting with foreign historians who study Japan. This nationally bounded content focus and membership reinforces the logic of nationalism that divides

Conclusion from: The History Problem
Abstract: Can East Asia’s history problem ever be resolved, and if so, how? This is the question that I set out to answer in this book. In light of the field analysis of the history problem, my answer is cautiously affirmative—yes, it can be resolved if the governments and citizens in Japan, South Korea, and China find a way to unleash the potential of the historians’ debate to promote the cosmopolitan logic of commemoration. My affirmative answer is cautious because nationalist commemorations, focusing on the suffering of conationals without sufficient regard for foreign others, persist in the region, overwhelm historians’

Introduction from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Mäkikalli Aino
Abstract: Narratological concepts, such as focalization, perspective, implied author, the distinction between story and discourse, and even homo- and heterodiegetic narration, today belong to the toolkit of scholars of literature, including those who do not consider themselves narratologists. Since literary analysis almost always also encompasses formal aspects of works, narratological concepts concerning the structure and forms of a narrative are taken by many as a ‘natural’ choice. Narratologists did not originally see their work as ‘a handmaiden to interpretation’; their theoretically-based taxonomic description of narrative was separated from interpretation, which always also has to do with the content of the narrative

Temporality in Aphra Behn’s Oroonoko and Daniel Defoe’s Robinson Crusoe from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Mäkikalli Aino
Abstract: In the Routledge Encyclopedia of Narrative Theory(2005) Monika Fludernik suggests that time in narrative can be viewed from three different perspectives: first, the general,philosophicalaspect of temporality and its significance for the levels of story and discourse; second, the relationship between thestoryanddiscourselevels; and third, thegrammaticalandmorphologicaldevices used (tense markers) and their significance for the levels of discourse and story. She stresses the study of two temporal levels, that of thestoryand that of thediscourse, leading to the analysis of chronological distortions of the surface level of the narrative text

Authorial Narration Reconsidered from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Birke Dorothee
Abstract: From a narratological point of view, one of the most controversial legacies the eighteenth-century novel has bestowed onto its inheritors is the technique of authorial narration. Described by Franz K. Stanzel as one of three typical narrative situations, authorial narration as defined in the Routledge Encyclopedia of Narrative Theoryis ‘characterized by a highly audible and visible narrator’ who ‘sees the story from the ontological position of an outsider, that is, a position of absolute authority which allows her/him to know everything about events and characters, including their thoughts and unconscious motives’ (Jahn, 2005, p. 364). This association of authorial

Immediacy from: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Nitschke Claudia
Abstract: Systematic narratological classification helps identify ‘trans-historical’ phenomena which share defining characteristics, but can still change over time in terms of form or function. In the eighteenth century, seminal, longterm social and political shifts (even before the French Revolution) became widely tangible. With society undergoing massive structural changes, literature formed no exception: writers began taking stock and started rigorously to probe and investigate the semantic potential of emergent genres such as the novel, but also the narrative medium itself.

8 Architectural metaphors: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Collins Lucy
Abstract: Feminist criticism frequently employs metaphors of space to interrogate the position of women within society and their ability to articulate that position to a wider world. The idea of ‘clearing a space’ from which to speak suggests that for women freedom of expression can only be achieved in ‘empty’ space, space that is unmarked by ideological and aesthetic convictions. Yet such emptiness is impossible, since the speaking self must be meaningfully located. Space, both public and private, is closely related to the construction of identity and to its textual representation. This chapter examines the representation of the house by two

11 ‘Tomorrow we will change our names, invent ourselves again’: from: Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Harte Liam
Abstract: It is simply not possible to write purposefully, let alone comprehensively, about the swirling abundance of themes and trends in contemporary Irish fiction and autobiography in the space allotted to me here. Every tour d’horizonmust be hedged about with qualifications and hesitations, every typological gesture thwarted by the fact of thematic and stylistic diversity.² In short, the closer one looks for continuities and correspondences, the more one becomes aware of kaleidoscopic variety. Indeed, the motifs of fragmentation and incompletion are themselves among the most recurrent in recent Irish writing, being especially marked in the contemporary short story, a genre

Introduction from: The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: Our contemporary West’s humanism is colored by intense psychological preoccupations. It is also marked by a certain indifferentism: indifference to—and distrust of—organized religion with its institutional and doctrinal apparatus.¹ Having distanced themselves from long-established church teachings, many non-churchgoers are simply disaffiliated from any particular Jewish or Christian denomination. Some of them nevertheless maintain they are still “religious.” Yet, a fast-growing segment of North Americans reject the label “religious” and prefer to call themselves “spiritual.”²

A Pastoral Conclusion from: The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: “Come then, Lord my God, teach my heart where and how to seek You, where and how to find You.”¹ Thus St. Anselm of Canterbury addresses God in the prayer that launches his celebrated allocution on the existence and the nature of God. In our twenty-first century, can we localize this “where and how” somewhat differently, in accord with cultural situations that are not the same as those that prevailed in the eleventh century? In response to this query, this book has situated the beginnings of Christian faith in the anthropological locus constituted by uncertainties and doubts regarding human hope.

Book Title: The Illiberal Imagination-Class and the Rise of the U.S. Novel
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Shapiro Joe
Abstract: Through close readings of the works of foundational U.S. novelists, including Charles Brockden Brown, Hugh Henry Brackenridge, Catharine Maria Sedgwick, James Fenimore Cooper, and Harriet Beecher Stowe, Joe Shapiro demonstrates that while voices of economic egalitarianism and working-class protest find their ways into a variety of early U.S. novels, these novels are anything but radically dialogic; instead, he argues, they push back against emergent forms of class consciousness by working to naturalize class inequality among whites. The Illiberal Imaginationthus enhances our understanding of both the early U.S. novel and the history of the way that class has been imagined in the United States.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wx93xr

7. Too Many Rights, Too Few Responsibilities from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Etzioni Amitai
Abstract: A sociological prize of sorts ought to be given to the member of the TV audience who, during a show about the savings and loan mess exclaimed, “The tax payers shouldn’t pay for this, the government should!” He reflected quite well a major theme in American civic culture: a strong sense of entitlement, demanding the community to give more services, strongly upholding rights—coupled with a relatively weak sense of obligation, of serving the commons, and without a feeling of responsibility for the country. Hence: Americans recently called for more government services but showed greater opposition to new taxes; they

8. Progressive Politics and Communitarian Culture from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Galston William
Abstract: From a communitarian perspective, a fascinating problematic has been established, which is an empirical question that cannot be resolved philosophically or ideologically. But it is nevertheless a question I have reflected on through the exemplary person of Alexis de Tocqueville,

26. Some Reflections on the New World Order and Disorder from: Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Ossorio Julian Santamaria
Abstract: The breakdown of the Berlin wall and more generally, the failure of communism in the (now former) Soviet Union and eastern Europe has suddenly put an end to half a century of cold war. The division of the world in two opposing blocs is over. The nuclear danger looks much less imposing and real. The existential enemy has vanished and the political, ideological, and military threats that the enemy was supposed to embody have faded within a short period of time. Democracy has become the only legitimate principle of political organization accepted almost worldwide, while the market economy and the

The Birth of Anthropology out of a Pause on Pausanias: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Boon James A.
Abstract: Alas, poor Frazer: deceased since 1941, yet never at rest. Yes, Sir James George Frazer: repeatedly revenant. AfterWorld War II, Theodor Gaster eventually prunedThe New Golden Bough; later Stanley Edgar Hyman gauged Frazer’s legacy, along with Darwin, Marx, and Freud; and John B. Vickery saluted Frazer’s influence among literary modernists: T. S. Eliot, James Joyce, and others.¹ Meanwhile in 1969, I. C. Jarvie had assessed disciplinary “othering” of Frazer’s approach versus Bronislaw Malinowski’s functionalism—by then also “historical.”² Subsequently, I recommended amalgamating anthropological and literary rereadings of FrazerandMalinowski (among others), aiming to avoid reductive polarizations that keep

Anamneses of a Pestilent Infant: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Athanasiou Athena
Abstract: The brash skeptic and the defunct hero, the abandoned infant and the triumphant sovereign, the autonomous and the dispossessed, the Hegelian inaugural philosopher, Nietzsche’s last human, the Freudian emblematic figure. How do the multiple figures of Oedipus enact and inflect the philosophical, anthropological, and psychoanalytic aporias of modern Western episteme? In this essay, I attempt to tackle this question by thinking through the cleavages of heteronomy and autonomy, belonging and errancy, sovereignty and liminality, the body of the sovereign and the future of the body politic. I suggest a (literally) symptomatic reading of Oedipus’s body, one that illustrates a corporeal

Text and Transnational Subjectification: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Schein Louisa
Abstract: In the brief space of this essay, I want to stage three relationships and delve into their implications for anthropological ethnography. The first concerns the paradigm agonisms precipitated by the encounter of anthropology with cultural studies. These “culture wars” have been a source of much heat in recent years, of acrimonious vilifications and reciprocal otherings, and I want here to query where the fires are coming from.

AFTERWORD: from: Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Kakavoulia Maria
Abstract: Since commentary seems to be both a questions-raising and an interpretive practice, I would like to bring into discussion an issue that I think relates in an immediate way to the preceding papers in this volume. We already have an overabundance of theoretical metalanguages informed by powerful interdisciplinary movements (semiotics, linguistics, textual theory, postcolonialism, etc.) that attempt to master issues concerning representational modes. Here, for reasons of terminological economy, I would like to bring into the discussion the verbal-visual distinction and its importance in cross-cultural research. Reminding us of Michel Foucault’s distinction between the seeable and the sayable, this semiotic

Book Title: Questions of Phenomenology-Language, Alterity, Temporality, Finitude
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Through her critical and productive dialogue with multiple phenomenological thinkers, Dastur concisely shows each thinker's debts to and departures from others, as well as each thinker's innovations and limitations. She does this judiciously, without choosing sides because, for her, phenomenology is above all a way of thinking through a problem and practicing a method. The fecundity of the movement is appreciated only by participating in it-phenomenology has always thought of itself as philosophical research undertaken by and through a community of thinkers who share certain fundamental questions and ways of approaching those questions, even if their responses to these questions often differ. In this regard, Dastur is both one of the clearest guides to phenomenology and one of its ablest practitioners.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5sw

8 Conscience: from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Must we say, as Levinas does, that in the Western tradition there is a primacy of ontology that does not allow for taking the alterity of the Other into account? We know Levinas’s argument: the Other is neither “Being” [ être] nor a “being” [étant] easily grasped by a concept, and understanding the Other within the ontological dimension would therefore be to objectify and do violence to the Other. What Levinas calls “the face” is the signification of the Other that does not come from me and that invokes my responsibility to the Other. This ethical address of the Other fundamentally

11 Phenomenology and History (Dilthey, Husserl, Heidegger) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Is it possible to come to an understanding of the historical dimension in its totality without relating it to an anthropological agency [ instance]? This question may seem altogether meaningless at first glance, since it seems perfectly obvious that Karl Marx was right to claim that it is humans who make history.¹ Do we other moderns agree with his fundamental thesis that humans are by definition historical beings? What meaning should be given to the historicity of human beings? Does it mean the decline of the absolute in all its forms and the domination of the most unbridled form of relativism,

12 History and Hermeneutics (Ricoeur and Gadamer) from: Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: A question that the reader of Time and Narrativemight pose is the following: what finally is the philosophical status of narrative? Is it an epistemological principle or is rather, or at

1 The Body of Difference from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Franck Didier
Abstract: Is there a path leading from originary time to the meaning of Being? Is time itself manifest as the horizon of Being?Heidegger poses these two questions at the end of the existential analytic, where they interruptSein und Zeit, announcing the section entitled “Time and Being,” at the threshold of which fundamental ontology breaks off provisionally but also, as it has happened, definitively. Can one, in spite of this solution of continuity and the unachieved status of a universal phenomenological ontology, still engage these questions, describing the movement of thought which bears them and to which they are opened

2 The Phenomenology of Eros: from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Moyaert Paul
Abstract: The existential phenomena that Levinas takes up are not alien to philosophical discourse. However, in his analysis he does show how in these recognizable experiences there is at work an existential logic which escapes the conceptual framework of a certain ontology and which dislocates from

9 Commanded Love and Divine Transcendence in Levinas and Kierkegaard from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Westphal Merold
Abstract: Levinas’s essay “God and Philosophy” is contemporaneous with Otherwise Than Being or Beyond Essenceand develops theological implications of the argument left largely unthematized in what we might call themagnum opusof Levinas II.¹ Levinas sets the God of the Bible over against “the philosophical discourse of the West” and its interpretation of rationality; and he taunts “rational theology” for accepting “vassalage” to philosophy’s claim to be “the amplitude of an all-encompassing structure or of an ultimate comprehension” which “compels every other discourse to justify itself before philosophy” (GP153–54). We are reminded of Heidegger’s critique of onto-theology.

10 The Voice without Name: from: The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Among the many radical innovations that Emmanuel Levinas has introduced into phenomenology, or imposed on it, there is one which seems most important: that of the appeal. In effect, the appeal has achieved the rank of a concept, or more precisely, to speak the language of the early Husserl, it is a founding phenomenological act (and thus is itself not founded). This imposition became virtually inevitable as soon as Levinas had accomplished two prior revolutions. First was a reversal of centrifugal intentionality, which moves from the ego to the object, into a counter-intentionality moving back toward the ego. Next was

Book Title: How to Do Comparative Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): VON STOSCH KLAUS
Abstract: How To Do Comparative Theology therefore contributes to the maturation of method in the field of comparative theological studies, learning across religious borders, by bringing together essays drawing on different Christian traditions of learning, Judaism and Islam, Hinduism and Buddhism, the wisdom of senior scholars, and also insights from a younger generation of scholars who have studied theology and religion in new ways, and are more attuned to the language of the "spiritual but not religious." The essays in this volume show great diversity in method, and also-over and again and from many angles-coherence in intent, a commitment to one learning from the other, and a confidence that one's home tradition benefits from fair and unhampered learning from other and very different spiritual and religious traditions. It therefore shows the diversity and coherence of comparative theology as an emerging discipline today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5zg

1 The Problem of Choice in Comparative Theology from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Cornille Catherine
Abstract: The discipline of comparative theology is steadily growing and diversifying. While it is often seen as originating within Christian, and predominantly Roman Catholic, theological circles, it is increasingly practiced by Christians of other denominations and by other religious traditions. And comparative theologians of any one tradition are presented with a seemingly endless possibility of choice in terms of which tradition, which text, or which aspect of that tradition to engage in comparative work. Once other religions are recognized as possible resources for constructive religious reflection and insight, there is no limit to where such truth or insight might manifest itself

3 The Moment of Truth: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Langenfeld Aaron
Abstract: In European theological discourse, the various projects of comparative theology often are confronted with two reproaches: first, that they are not distinguishable from a pluralistic theology of religions,¹ and second, that they are not distinguishable from some types of religious studies.² The interesting point is that both assertions are traceable to the same fundamental critique, even if they obviously diverge in its specific interpretation. This criticism addresses the apparent relativization of Christology as the dogmatic normative core of all Christian theology. Confronting this objection against the comparative projects, in the first part of the paper I will address comparative and

4 Rhetorics of Theological One-Upsmanship in Christianity and Buddhism: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: The name of our discipline contains a methodologically significant ambiguity. As David Tracy remarked a number of years ago in his encyclopedia article on “Comparative Theology,” “theology” in this designation can refer either to the object or the subject of the activity of comparison.¹ To the extent that theology forms the objectof comparison, Comparative Theology represents a subfield or a specific focus within Comparative Religion or the History of Religions (for my present purposes, I consider these two designations to be roughly equivalent). That is, Comparative Theology in this sense denotes the study of the intellectual or doctrinal dimension

5 “An Interpreter and Not a Judge”: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Takács Axel Marc Oaks
Abstract: The dialogue between Muslims and Christians has a long, rich, and complex history. Long, in that the first extant theologicalencounter between a Christian and a Muslim occurred over 1,200 years ago between Mar Timothy I (728–823), the Catholicos of the Church of the East at the time, and the ruling caliph, al-Mahdi (who ruled from 775–785); this excludes any sort of early exchanges that may have occurred among Muhammad, his companions, and Christian tribes in the Arabian peninsula, possible interreligious engagement among Christian ascetics and proto-ṣūfī’s, and statements in the Qur’ān that explicitly address Christian theology, such

6 On Some Suspicions Regarding Comparative Theology from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Willis Glenn R.
Abstract: If theological comparisons do not connect themselves to the concerns of actual religious communities, it is not clear how comparison can be theological at all, given that theologies must implicate the writer in some community of practice. This essay addresses several quiet but sustained suspicions about theological comparison as a religiously relevant project. There seems little reason to deny that comparisons are often subject to an “ingrained resistance,”¹ particularly among theologians.² In what follows, I first deepen several fundamental critiques of comparison, emphasizing that theologies must offer more than virtuoso interreligious vision, before suggesting some ways in which comparison can

7 Embodiment, Anthropology, and Comparison: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Roberts Michelle Voss
Abstract: Imagine the constructive theologian as a beachcomber. She attentively picks her way through the landscape of the Christian theological heritage, salvaging treasures that sparkle unexpectedly in the sun of the contemporary moment. From this or that angle, a dusty practice or neglected doctrine takes on new beauty. The theologian’s tools of detection sound the alert: There is something relevant here, something useful, something true! The detectors include sensors for scriptural soundness, doctrinal fidelity, rational coherence, and con temporary resonance. Many different tools can be used to look and to dig.

8 Comparative Theology After the Shoah: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Moyaert Marianne
Abstract: The Shoah, insofar as it forms the climax of a longstanding tradition of anti-Jewish discrimination, contains one of the most important inducements for the revolutionary change in the Church’s attitude vis-à-vis Israel. After the Shoah, the Second Vatican Council (1962–65), and in particular the promulgation of the document Nostra Aetate, brought about a turning point in Jewish-Christian relationships. Later such documents as theGuidelines(1974),Notes(1985),We Remember(1998), andThe Jewish People and their Sacred Scriptures in the Christian Bible(2001), together with various dialogical initiatives, affirmed the Church’s determination to break away from the “teaching of

9 Using Comparative Insights in Developing Kalām: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Tatari Muna
Abstract: When I started working on my dissertation in Paderborn in 2010, I was already quite familiar with Islamic theology.¹ I had graduated University with a degree in Islamic studies, a subject quite separate and apart from Islamic theology. I was also a visiting student at an Islamic theological faculty in Jordan for three semesters, and finally studied Islamic theology at a private institute in Hamburg for six semesters. From 1996 to 2010, I worked as a freelance facilitator in the field of inter-religious dialogue. I regularly trained teachers and vicars and co-developed teaching materials with groups of Muslims, Christians, Buddhists,

10 Difficult Remainders: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Clooney Francis X.
Abstract: The Christian comparative theological engagement with other faith traditions is most often driven by attention to select themes, images, and practices already somewhat familiar, even if inexactly, in Christian tradition. This approach makes sense and is fruitful. The preference for the familiar risks an evasion of the more difficult realm of the unfamiliar, and reducing the great texts of other traditions to compendia of ideas available for selective consideration as desired. Comparisons are often asymmetrical, too. Christian comparativists at their best work with a rich sense of the completeness of Christian faith, and of the organic coherence of Christian doctrine

11 Sagi Nahor—Enough Light: from: How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Gordon-Guedalia Shoshana Razel
Abstract: This essay, titled, “ Sagi Nahor¹—Enough Light: Dialectic Tension Between Luminescent Resonance² and Blind Assumption in Comparative Theology,” engages in comparative theological examination of two ritual-legal systems,MīmāṃsakaandRabbinic, which,prima facie, share “measures” of hermeneutic reasoning—tools for culling ritual law from respective Urtext, each expanding into vast commentarial corpora, each yielding distillation into terse legal codes in the medieval period. Proper comparison yields illumination, while sheer conflation blinds. Even as we study test cases, seeking to delineate each system-specific matrix with regards to ritual efficacy and agency, concerns loom: Can one suspend current sensibilities when exploring cosmologies

4 From the Names of God to the Grammar of Hearts from: Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: We now tack east and back in history, from Latin to Arabic, French to Persian, Christian to Islamic. While juxtaposing Gerson’s Moralized Grammarand Qushayrī’sGrammar of Heartscreates a new context for the two texts, they are also linked to their respective times and places of origins. Attending to these original contexts grounds the fresh literary and theological understandings that the present study constructs. To prepare for understandingThe Grammar of Heartsin both its literary form and its religious content, we will examine in this chapter two of Qushayrī’s most famous works and two of his less well-known

4. Theology from: The Rigor of Things
Abstract: Idol and Distance straightaway opens a theological path in your work.¹Besides Bernard-Henri Lévy’s request, how did this book come to be?

10 IMPERIUM from: The Origin of the Political
Abstract: It is precisely because of this ability to split, to be oneselfand one’s contrary simultaneously, that the experience of the Greeks is unrepeatable. This is especially the case in reference to the Romans, who, along with the Jews, constitute their most radical negation precisely for the reasons vindicated by Arendt in the name of their glory. For Weil, thejusappeared to be nothing more than the self-legitimization of force; thetraditiobuilt the violent uprooting of all other cultures; and thereligio, which she understood to be the theological-political glorification of the Roman State, was judged for that

Book Title: Sexual Disorientations-Queer Temporalities, Affects, Theologies
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): MOORE STEPHEN D.
Abstract: Sexual Disorientations brings some of the most recent and significant works of queer theory into conversation with the overlapping fields of biblical, theological and religious studies to explore the deep theological resonances of questions about the social and cultural construction of time, memory, and futurity. Apocalyptic, eschatological and apophatic languages, frameworks, and orientations pervade both queer theorizing and theologizing about time, affect, history and desire. The volume fosters a more explicit engagement between theories of queer temporality and affectivity and religious texts and discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr6tw

Introduction. from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: It’s about time. This book is principally about time—queer time, to be precise. But it’s also about time that a book on queer theologies tackled queer temporalities, together with queer affects.¹ Like the colloquium out of which it emerged, this volume seeks to engage with certain field-reorienting—and field-disorienting—inflections of queer theory whose origins lie in the midto late 1990s but which have been oddly underremarked even by those in the theological disciplines most invested in all matters queer. The literature by biblical scholars, theologians, and church historians that has been assembled incrementally under the patchwork queer banner

How Soon Is (This Apocalypse) Now? from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: These times justify impatience. Is it the end? Or was thatthe end? Well, when exactly do you mean?¹ Has it already taken too long? If so, in which ways and in what directions have these ends or these pauses turned us, even dragged us? Ultimately, why should those of us who want (at least some) things to change care? One way to address such questions, suchfeelings, about time is to attend to a range of strange temporalities bubbling up out of an ancient letter and more recent missives in queer studies. The downright eschatological mood of late in

The Entrepreneur and the Big Drag: from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) TONSTAD LINN MARIE
Abstract: The current socioeconomic order exerts immense pressure to convince us that significant change is impossible: We can practice amelioration—but not desired transformation—as we participate in the forced march toward willing acquiescence to the logic of economic rationality. Not a contradiction—this order is particularly insidious in its ability to orient our desires from the inside, as it were, so that our experiences of risk and futility turn into opportunities for self-realization, as we’ll see.

Remember—When? from: Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: “Surely my memory is where you dwell,” Augustine famously writes in his Confessions, addressing the puzzling, immaterial God for whom “there can be no question of place.” We might hope to resolve the puzzle by replacing the “where” of memory with a “when,” but chronologically, too, God turns out to be not quite placeable. Augustine argues that one way that we can be sure that werememberGod is that we all seek the happiness God brings, even though we have not yet found it in this life: How else could we know about it?¹ It must be that we

2. Piaget’s Theory of Cognitive Development from: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: Although this “empirical” interpretation of Piaget’s theory of psychological development is partially correct-for example, his theory purports to be scientific-it is also misleading in several important respects. This is largely

3. Piaget’s Theory of Knowledge: from: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: In discussing Piaget’s epistemology, a very natural starting point is the question, what is Piaget’s basic epistemological outlook, and how does it differ from traditional philosophical epistemology? Philosophers from the Greeks-to the twentieth century have advanced numerous theories of knowledge—for example, that knowledge comes from the senses and is reducible to a collection of sense impressions, or that knowledge comes from the creative activity of the rational mind. Traditionally they have also discussed questions of a more abstract, reflective kind: What problems should epistemology investigate? What are the limits of our knowledge? What method(s) should one employ in epistemology?

4. Piaget’s Epistemological Constructivism from: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: Piaget’s theory of knowledge is fundamentally concerned with the question, how (developmentally) is a certain epistemic fact or property possible? How is it possible, for example, for the necessary truths contained in logic and mathematics to result from the contingent ones the child first encounters?¹ How is it possible for the epistemic objectivity of adulthood to develop from the subjectivity and egocentrism of childhood? How is it possible for objective social structures, containing properties ofjustice, fairness, and reciprocity, to develop from individual behavior patterns lacking these features? How is it possible for scientific knowledge to have developed from earlier modes

Chapter Eight Ezra Pound’s Hard Currency from: American Poetry
Abstract: Ezra Pound wrote in 1933, “Mr. Eliot and I are in agreement … in so far as we both believe that existing works form a complete order which is changed by the introduction of the ‘really new’ work.” But he offered a qualification that measures the radical “disagreement” between the two poets: “‘Existing monuments form an ideal order among themselves.’ It would be healthier to use a zoological term rather than the word monument. It is much easier to think of the OdysseyorLe Testamentor Catallus’Epithalamiumas something living than as a series of cenotaphs. After all,

CHAPTER 1 Dream Studies and the Fundamental Question of Meaning from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Dream research, both experimental and clinical-phenomenological, has arrived at a point of historical hiatus. Research on the psychophysiology of the REM (Rapid Eye Movement) state, once widely heralded as a means of testing Freudian dream theory and settling mind–brain controversies, now faces skepticism, disillusionment, and lack of funding. True, a great deal has been learned about the unique physiology of the REM state as a periodic, chemically mediated condition of arousal in mammalian sleep, but the anticipation that understanding REM will explain dreaming has been shaken as researchers realize that dreaming involves far more than the specific conditions of

CHAPTER 8 Lucid Dreams and Nightmares: from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Because lucid dreams (and related subtypes) violate all traditional attempts to define an essence of dreaming, their study is especially useful in highlighting the dangers of such a monolithic approach. This in turn helps to explain the defensive hostility with which current research on lucidity has been greeted. Several attempts at a logicophilosophical account of dreaming (Sartre, Boss, Malcolm) have been predicated on the impossibility of what we now term fully lucid dreaming. Indeed, the analytical philosopher Norman Malcolm insists that at best we can only dreamthat we dream; we cannot know it as we know facts when awake.

CHAPTER 10 Freud, Jung, and Culture Pattern Dreams: from: The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: A continuing debate, also reflected within the anthropological literature on culture pattern dreams, revolves

Chapter Five Words and Sounds in Heidegger from: Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: I said at the end of the last chapter that “thinking needs to link itself up with poetry,” but obviously this is a careless way of talking — and misleading in the bargain, especially if we go on to imagine that if language cannot avail itself to us logically, then it must do so preconceptually, intuitively, practically, or by some primordial process of knowing that logic might subsequently come along to verify; but this isn’t what Heidegger is talking about at all. It is not that there are, for example, two categories of mental operation, one primitive and one enlightened, one

Introduction from: Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: A rhetorical culture is an institutional formation in which motives of competing parties are intelligible, audiences available, expressions reciprocal, norms translatable, and silences noticeable. It may seem odd, even confounding, to introduce certain norms or “goods” where the notoriously crafty business of rhetoric is concerned. Today we have spin doctors and image consultants, audience-manipulators of every ideological stripe—hence the much discussed flight of audiences from the public arena. But this is not really so surprising. Rhetoric has always been a practiced imperfection, the worst fear of idealized reason and the best hope for whatever remains of civic life. This

I An Apology for Defenses from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: Jowett’s legendary advice to Oxford students embarking on careers in the British Empire may seem an odd epigraph for a book on defenses of poetry.¹ One of my purposes in writing this book, however, is to question the ideological presuppositions which underlie Jowett’s aphorism. By exploring a general territory of defensive discourse through readings of exemplary Renaissance texts, 1 hope, moreover, to suggest some reasons why Jowett’s rule has historically been honored more in the breach than in the observance, not only by poets and critics, but also by theologians, historians, scientists, and diplomats.

II Joachim du Bellay: from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: The little treatise entitled La Deffence et illustration de la langue françoyse(1549) represents Joachim du Bellay’s first public entrance into the arena of historical struggle Bakhtin describes, the arena located in a border territory where the intersection of many languages, ancient as well as modern, reflected and generated ideological conflict.¹ Throughout his literary career Du Bellay explored this border territory, defining it as a land of Babel, a land of exile, and finally as a textual space occupied—as so many parts of Europe itself were in the sixteenth century—by forces with competing claims to possession.² Modern readers

Conclusion: from: Trials of Desire
Abstract: Tue prospect of ending a piece of work, like the prospect of beginning one, so frequently generates defensive discourse that one is led to speculate, a bit nostalgically, about the medieval convention of the retraction. As a version of the Augustinian confession, with its drama of a conversion from secular words to sacred ones, the retraction served psychological and aesthetic, as well as religious, aims by providing a formal channel for the apologetic impulse that perennially besets authors preparing to take leave of their books.¹ Although the retraction may seem a dead convention today, its ghost lives on in the

CONCLUSION from: The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The last three of these tasks may seem like parts of an outline for an epistemological

Book Title: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil-Exiles, Returnees and Their Impact in the Humanities and Social Sciences in Austria and Central Europe
Publisher: Verlag der österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften
Author(s): PRISCHING MANFRED
Abstract: The tremendous loss to the humanities and social sciences in the 20th century resulting from the expulsion of thousands of scholars and artists from Austria and Central Europe has been well documented. The present collection of articles deals with a related but under-researched aspect – it combines analyses of the complex bureaucratic and the ideological obstacles which exiled scholars from a wide range of disciplines in the humanities and social sciences and creative artists faced when they were willing to return and specific essays documenting the varying opportunities for individual returnees to influence the development of their different disciplines after the end of the Nazi tyranny. The 27 essays highlight the roles of a number of returnees as generous mentors for younger scholars and their encouragement of modernization and internationalization in an atmosphere of stagnation and provincialism in the universities. Eminent experts in history, philosophy or political science who had returned were hampered by the denial of full academic appointments despite their highly stimulating initiatives, while theatre directors had a relatively strong impact on the programs in the theaters and the other media. The volume also illustrates personal factors, including the understandable hesitation of prominent intellectuals such as Oskar Morgenstern or Ernst Krenek to give up the advantages of US American citizenship for academic positions, especially in a country exposed to political threats in the Cold War; but the essays also bring out the fact that quite a few of the émigrés remained exiles on both sides of the Atlantic. A particular strength of the volume is the detailed consideration of the fortunes and the influence of the impressive array of exiled Austrian economists. Many of them returned from Britain, helping to shape economic theory and Austrian economic policy, even though necessarily mainly from outside the universities, while transatlantic exiles largely remained in the USA.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3w37

4 Mind the Gap: from: The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Harrison Rachel V.
Abstract: Fortuitously, perhaps, the injurious effects of “Paris Syndrome” have not been widely reported among the surge of Thai visitors that has graced the French capital in recent years. Nevertheless, the psychological intensity of “culture shock” to which “Paris Syndrome” speaks provides a timely lens through which to observe Siamese/Thai forays into the West, both past and present. This chapter opens with an examination of travellers’ tales through the ages, from the accounts of the first Siamese diplomatic missions to Europe in the seventeenth century, to the novels inspired by visits to the West by Thailand’s twentieth-century novelists. Drawing associations between

8 The Conceptual Allure of the West: from: The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: Any discussion of alleged Western influence in Thailand must start from the premise that the signifiers of globalization neither necessarily originate in the West nor automatically imply acceptance of Western values. Globalization does not always originate in Western countries; the definition of the “West” is itself problematic; and the assumption that adoption of multinational logos and designer goods must mean adoption of their ideological implications simply reproduces the cultural imperialism that these items so often represent.² In this chapter, I explore instead the indeterminacy of cultural influence, arguing that—in matters as apparently discrete as the use of space, dress

Book Title: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann-An Orthodox Reading of Paul Ricoeur
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Louth Andrew
Abstract: The book examines two fundamental questions: 1) what are the implications of the philosopher's oeuvre for liturgical theology at large? And 2)how does the adoption of a Ricoeurian hermeneutic shape the study of a particular rite? Taking the seminal legacy of Orthodox theologian Alexander Schmemann (1921-1983) as its point of departure, Butcher contributes to the renewal of contemporary Eastern Christian thought and ritual practice by engaging a spectrum of current theological and philosophical conversations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xzh13v

CHAPTER 6 Truth as Attestation from: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: As has by now become evident, Ricoeur approaches questions of selfhood via the “long route” of symbols, metaphors, and narratives. There is no a priori grasping of truth—although there is an intuitive guess in its regard—but only the arduous path of the imaginative exploration of, and eventual ontological validation of, possible worlds.¹ This dual sense of description of a world of meaning and subscription to it in the form of a corresponding way of life is conveyed by the notion of truth as “attestation.” In the first part of this chapter, therefore, we further probe Oneself as Another

“We Must Travel Abreast with Nature, if We Want to Understand Her”: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) GERHARDT CHRISTINE
Abstract: Over the past decade, ecocritical approaches have profoundly changed the way we read Dickinson and Whitman. In particular, ecocritical analyses have stressed that for all the symbolic and transcendental orientation of Dickinson’s and Whitman’s poetry, an abiding interest in physical places and people’s relationships to specific geographies constitutes a defining feature of their art that has important ecological implications. However, most of these green rereadings have put special emphasis on Dickinson’s and Whitman’s rendition of local areas and people’s steady ties to their environs. In the case of Dickinson, ecocritics have argued that she challenged patriarchal paradigms through a “located”

“Beginners”: from: Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) CAMBONI MARINA
Abstract: “Beginners” is the theoretical location in Adrienne Rich’s critical work where, taking as her starting point the eponymous poem Walt Whitman first published in the 1860–61 edition of Leaves of Grass, she develops a complex vision of American poetry while also building the genealogical line that would ultimately include her own work.² That location maps the plural logic of the poet who is not only committed to the truth of a “language intensified, intensifying our sense of possible reality,” but whose “poetic imagination” is “radical, meaning root-tangled in the grit of human arrangements and relationships:how we are with

Book Title: The Spirit of God-Short Writings on the Holy Spirit
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Clifford Catherine E.
Abstract: Yves Congar was the most significant voice in Catholic pneumatology in the twentieth century. This new collection of short pieces makes his thought accessible to a broad range of readers - scholars, teachers, ecumenists and laity - and thus helps to ensure that an important theological voice, one that influenced many of the documents of the Second Vatican Council, continues to be heard. The Spirit of Godbrings together for the first time eight of Yves Congar's previously untranslated writings on the Holy Spirit composed after Vatican II (from 1969 to 1985). Two of these selections offer general overviews of Congar's pneumatology, a pneumatology based upon Scripture and the Tradition of the Church, but articulated in conversation with philosophers, ecumenical partners and non-believers. Other articles make clear the historical context of Vatican II's pneumatology and the Holy Spirit's crucial influence upon the unfolding of history and upon the moral life, the efficacy of the sacraments and, especially, upon ecclesial life.The writings inThe Spirit of Godhave been translated and edited by a team of scholars familiar with the work of the French Dominican theologian. An introduction situates each of the writings historically and highlights its theological significance. A bibliography lists Congar's publications on the Holy Spirit, the major articles and books written about his pneumatology, and the major scholarly resources to which Congar made reference in the notes that accompanied these writings. An index of biblical references and of personal names is also included.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zqrmtj

[PART THREE Introduction] from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: Although the three articles that form Part Three were written and published before the works in Parts One and Two, they represent well the biblical, historical, sacramental, and pneumatological character of Congar’s mature thought. All three come from the last period of Congar’s scholarly life, 1969 to 1991, according to the periodday ization of Cornelis Van Vliet.¹ The climax of this part is arguably Congar’s most important article on the Holy Spirit, “Pneumatology or ‘Christomonism’ in the Latin Tradition?” We have included two additional writings, “Theology of the Holy Spirit and Theology of History” and “The Holy Spirit in the

ARTICLE 3 Pneumatology or “Christomonism” in the Latin Tradition? from: The Spirit of God
Abstract: The observers at the Second Vatican Council often made the reproach that the schemas, in particular those of the dogmatic constitutions Lumen GentiumandDei Verbum, lacked a pneumatology.² One of them, Nikos A. Nissiotis, currently [in 1970] director of the Ecumenical Institute in Bossey, voices the same reproach.³ He has returned insistently to what he calls the “Christomonism” of the Latins and an “ecclesiological pneumatology” which the Latins lack and which is said to be the soul of Orthodox ecclesiology. The Latins tend to make the Holy Spirit merely one of Christ’s functions—the function of bringing salvation to

Turgenev’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!..”: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: As we know, even such an appreciative critic of Ivan Turgenev’s writings as Pavel V. Annenkov (1813–1887) placed the Russian writer’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!.. A Study” ( Stuk….. stuk…. Stuk...! Studiia,1871) among his “weak pieces.”² On the contrary, “Knock… Knock… Knock!..” belongs to the strongest works of Turgenev and of Russian literature. Complex in its design and brilliant in artistic execution, it is a work of psychological and philosophical depth.³ Turgenev several times stressed the importance of his story, though not without his usual admixture of apology and self-deprecation where his works were concerned. Although he found it “a

Breaking the Moral Barrier: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: Anna’s night journey to St. Petersburg (part 1, chapter 29) is one of the great transitional moments in her drama. Her experience dramatizes a state of intense moral and psychological conflict in which a powerful passion crashes through a barrier of will and conscience. Tolstoy’s account of this internal experience is remarkable for its representation of Anna’s epic crisis. The battle engages her entire being, physical, psychological, moral, and spiritual, drawing in her immediate surroundings and nature in the broadest sense of the term.

In the Interests of Social Pedagogy: from: Close Encounters
Abstract: Three things may be said about the lifelong polemic of Maxim Gorky (1868–1936) with Dostoevsky. First, it had deep psychological roots in a confrontation with aspects of his own nature; overcoming Dostoevsky, for Gorky, was a process of self-overcoming. Second, this process of self-overcoming became linked with a central effort of Gorky’s literary and cultural writings—the task of overcoming Russian history, the painful legacy of violence and disorder in Russian man and life, all that he once called “our most implacable enemy—our past.”² And third, this overcoming ultimately took on the dimensions of a struggle between worldviews,

Chapter 4 The Evolution of Evolution: from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Many of us know this famous passage from The Gift. Quite aside from its stylistic fireworks it has served as exhibit #1 in the ongoing debate about where Nabokov comes down on the issue of intelligent design (ID) and evolutionary theory. Depending on one’s epistemological point of departure, readers have tried now for some time to “get at” VN’s strategy for mixing and matching scientific and artistic observation. According to this strategy the artist must be able to observe and name the phenomenal world like the naturalist, the naturalist must be able to integrate different planes of reality like the

Chapter 8 Pushkin’s Biography from: The Superstitious Muse
Author(s) Davydov Sergei
Abstract: As one considers any biographical treatment of Alexander Pushkin it is prudent to bear in mind the words of the eminent cultural historian, literary theorist, and biographer of the poet Yury Lotman. In his biography Lotman “wanted to show how, like the mythological King Midas who turned everything he touched to gold, Pushkin turned everything he touched into creativity, art. [But] Midas starved to death — his food became gold.”² This metaphor is strikingly apropos when it comes to the facts of Pushkin’s life. Let us take for an example the seemingly straightforward case of the poet’s hair color. In the

Chapter 19 Joseph Brodsky’s “To My Daughter” (A Reading) from: The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Joseph Brodsky is a bundle of contradictions. This statement might be problematic if he were a philosopher, but his consistent incon sistency makes perfect sense to those studying his primary sta tus — that of poet. Stoic toward the arbitrariness of the world order (or disorder), deeply melancholic (if not corrosively skepti cal) about “human nature,” yet passionately be lieving in language’s ontological priority as the only thing(note this word) in human existence approaching a genuine God-term, Brod sky could be maddening in the sheer outrageousness, the “demanding-the maximum-and-the-hell-with-the-rest” quality, of his metaphorical thinking. But that is what poets, especially

Book Title: Reasoning from Faith-Fundamental Theology in Merold Westphal’s Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SANDS JUSTIN
Abstract: Merold Westphal is considered to be one of the preeminent Continental philosophers of religion. His articulation of faith as the task of a lifetime has become a touchstone in contemporary debates concerning faith's relationship to reason. As Justin Sands explores his philosophy, he illuminates how Westphal's concept of faith reveals the pastoral, theological intent behind his thinking. Sands sees Westphal's philosophy as a powerful articulation of Protestant theology, but one that is in ecumenical dialogue with questions concerning apologetics and faith's relationship to ethics and responsibility, a more Catholic point of view. By bringing out these features in Westphal's philosophy, Sands intends to find core philosophical methodologies as well as a passable bridge for philosophers to cross over into theological discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxxz58

5. RELIGIOUSNESS: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: We begin with the epistemological question proposed at

7. INTERMEDIARY CONCLUSIONS: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: My attempt thus far has been to craft Westphal’s intellectual narrative, and what I have found is that Westphal’s narrative is heavily theological. In fact, Westphal is so theological that I argue he is best read within this discourse, which is perhaps his proper home. The previous chapters have focused on how Westphal shapes his thinking and how it tacitly develops into a theology that appropriates philosophical reasoning to minister and guide the life of faith. Furthermore, his articulation of faith as a task of a lifetime, which compels the believing soul to continually enact the love commandment, has convinced

9. COMPARATIVE ESCHATOLOGY: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we discussed Merold Westphal’s thought in light of his primary debate partner, John Caputo. As I argued, Westphal is almost always discussed alongside his friend Caputo as both represent different, opposing sides of various debates in Continental philosophy of religion in North America. On the one hand, Westphal argues for a ‘thick theology’—a hearty soup—that provides a theistic, religious appropriation of postmodern thought to nourish the believing soul. On the other hand, Caputo analyses theism through a radical critique of religion’s onto-theo-logico-centrism. Caputo’s postmodernism declares that religion must be rethought—even to the point

CONCLUSION: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: As I mentioned in the introduction, when researching this book and speaking at both philosophical and theological conferences (mostly in Europe, but also in North America), I got mainly two reactions to Westphal’s thinking: those who thought his work truly embraced Protestant Christianity and provided a pathway for Christians to seriously consider mostly secular critiques of religion (similar to his opening statements in Overcoming Onto-Theology), and those who found that his work did not pass the standard for rigorous philosophical thinking. Those in the latter camp, especially phenomenologists, charged that his appropriations did not adequately consider the original context and

5. RELIGIOUSNESS: from: Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: We begin with the epistemological question proposed at

4 A WALK THROUGH THE RUINS: from: The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: A dialogical interaction between body and space; an unfolding of the built environment through bodily motion; the body’s becoming like space: These are the visual tropes that have dominated our discussion of the films in the previous two chapters. In their radical portrayals of the body– space relations, Mikhail Kalatozov’s The Unsent LetterandI Am Cubaand Georgii Danelia’sI Walk the Streets of Moscowdisplayed a certain level of utopian imagining, in which participants functioned less as specific, psychologically nuanced characters than as poetic, and in that way abstract, figures. We can remember once more the critique of

CONCLUSION: from: The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: The cinematic scrutiny of space in Soviet culture of the 1950s and 1960s was rooted in an urgency to find new forms of social engagement. It was also propelled by a need to redefine the role of cinema in the wake of Stalin’s death. Rethinking the language of cinema, Soviet filmmakers began to emphasize the production of the environment as a social and filmic problem, creating spatial experiences within theatrical walls that differed significantly from those of established socialist practices. These filmmakers reorganized the spaces of familiar cities, landscapes, and public and private interiors, opening them up to dialogical interactions

2 The Devil’s Insatiable Sex: from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Denike Margaret
Abstract: In part, this chapter takes up a challenge that Michel Foucault (1989) posed in an interview and that he himself had entertained throughout his genealogical histories of madness and sexuality. The challenge, specifically, is “to write a political history of truth,” a history—or histories—that ascertain the kinds of power relations that are implicated in the production and circulation of knowledge, and particularly, in the “official discourses” that are accepted as “true.” Such a genealogical approach, as Foucault defined it in the context of this interview (1989, 137–39), concerns the truth games played with “sex” and “sexuality,” though

12 Naming Terrorism as Evil from: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Jaggar Alison M.
Abstract: Within days of the dramatic attacks that occurred on September 11, 2001, the editors of Hypatiainvited several feminist philosophers to consider whether those attacks, and terrorism more generally, should be described as evil (Schott 2003, 5).¹ In the intervening four years, marked by further terrorist attacks on Western countries, references to terrorism as evil have become commonplace in the political discourse of the United States. The present discussion offers some reasons for resisting this characterization. I do not attempt to justify terrorism, but I suggest that the language of evil, because of its theological and absolutist associations, is distinctly

Book Title: In Praise of Heteronomy-Making Room for Revelation
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Recognizing the essential heteronomy of postmodern philosophy of religion, Merold Westphal argues against the assumption that human reason is universal, neutral, and devoid of presupposition. Instead, Westphal contends that any philosophy is a matter of faith and the philosophical encounter with theology arises from the very act of thinking. Relying on the work of Spinoza, Kant, and Hegel, Westphal discovers that their theologies render them mutually incompatible and their claims to be the voice of autonomous and universal reason look dubious. Westphal grapples with this plural nature of human thought in the philosophy of religion and he forwards the idea that any appeal to the divine must rest on a historical and phenomenological analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz1pf

3 SPINOZA’S HERMENEUTICS from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: When we turn to the Theological-Political Treatisewe find the theological part, primarily the theory and practice of interpreting the Bible, sandwiched between political bookends. At the heart of the theological argument is a plea for the autonomy of philosophy from theology, and, indeed, the hegemony of the former over the latter, relocating religion within the limits of reason alone. At the heart of the political part is a plea for the autonomy of the state from religion (religious authorities), and, indeed, the hegemony over the former over the latter. For Spinoza felt unjustly oppressed by the theocratic form of

7 HEGEL’S THEOLOGY I from: In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: Hegel’s theology begins its development in a series of drafts and fragments from his student and tutor years at Tübingen, Berne, and Frankfurt. They are dated from 1793 to 1800 and thus precede his philosophical appointment at Jena in 1801. Many of these were first published in 1907 by Nohl in Hegel’s theologische Jugendschriften. Most of them are translated by T. M. Knox in G. W. F. Hegel,Early Theological Writings, bearing the titles given them by Nohl.¹ They lay the theological foundations for Hegel’s mature thought that is at once a philosophical and a political theology.

1 Semiotic Anthropology from: Signs and Society
Abstract: The domain of semiotic anthropology is considered to be the results of empirical research carried out by anthropologists (in all subfields) that makes use of concepts and methods associated with the tradition of scholarship labeled “semiotics” or “semiology.” Semiotic anthropology is not a formal subdiscipline of anthropology; it is not a “school” of anthropological thought; and it is not con-fined to researchers affiliated with particular academic institutions or national traditions. To some degree semiotic anthropology emerged as a correction and refinement of symbolic or interpretive anthropology or structural anthropology (Mertz 1985). In addition to the study of linguistic and written

2 Charles S. Peirce from: Signs and Society
Abstract: One of the puzzles of the intellectual history of the “pragmatic” turn in contemporary linguistics is the fact that the American mathematician and philosopher Charles S. Peirce (1839–1914), who developed a graphic formalism for evaluating the logical precision of scientific concepts, continues to be an important inspiration for the development of approaches to language that move beyond the synchronic, descriptive, and generative perspectives characteristic of the mainstream of linguistics scholarship. Many students of language first encountered Peirce’s semiotic ideas in the early 1920s in the ten pages of excerpts printed as an appendix to Ogden and Richards’s The Meaning

4 Peirce and Saussure on Signs and Ideas in Language from: Signs and Society
Abstract: Charles S. Peirce (1839–1914) and Ferdinand de Saussure (1857–1913) spent considerable effort trying to clarify and articulate what they meant by signs and the ideas, or concepts, associated with them. There are many attempts in the scholarly literature to align Peircean and Saussurean terminologies, as well as several valiant efforts to create new synthetic models encompassing their differences. My task here is different: to point out several ways in which Peirce, an American experimental physicist and logician (trained as a chemist), and Saussure, a Swiss linguist (trained as a philologist of Indo-European languages), have fundamentally opposed views stemming

8 The World Has Changed Forever: from: Signs and Society
Abstract: Having spent more than twenty-five years thinking about social change in Oceania, in particular about the historical changes reflected in the mythological narratives of Palau (Belau), I did not anticipate how difficult the challenge would be to consider—prompted by the invitation to participate in today’s panel—sudden, rapid, or traumatic change. Would this mere augmentation of the rate of acceleration necessitate a dramatic reformulation of the almost canonical post-Sahlins model for studying the “anthropology of history” as the transformation of the structures of reproduction? That is, is sudden change (let me use the word “sudden” to stand as a

10 It’s About Time: from: Signs and Society
Abstract: The invitation to comment on this set of papers in linguistic anthropology dealing with temporalities and texts (first presented at the American Anthropological Association’s 2005 meetings in Washington, DC) has prompted a moment of personal reflection, since it was exactly twenty years ago, in 1985, that I published my first application of semiotic categories to the ethnographic analysis of time and history. My paper, “Times of the Signs: Modalities of History and Levels of Social Structure in Belau” (Parmentier 1985b), tried to synthesize Fernand Braudel, Meyer Fortes, and Marshall Sahlins by using Charles S. Peirce’s sign theory to argue that

11 Anthropological Encounters of a Semiotic Kind from: Signs and Society
Abstract: I am honored to be able to contribute the two texts below to this journal’s survey of semiotic approaches within the discipline of anthropology. Delivered originally as “performance” pieces, these two texts reflect on the methodological implications of semiotic analyses from two other fields of inquiry, classics and medieval studies, that continue to have enormous relevance for anthropology. The first was presented as a formal response to Brigitte Bedos-Rezak’s lecture titled “Imprint: Ontology and Christian Theology in the Western Middle Ages,” which was given as the keynote address at the symposium “(Re) constructing Religions: Evidence, Methods, and Disciplines,” held at

2 Israel’s Publications Agency and the 1948 Palestinian Refugees from: The War of 1948
Author(s) Nets-Zehngut Rafi
Abstract: Nations involved in an intractable conflict usually present a biased official memoryof the conflict. To fit their interests, such memory portrays these nations positively and their rivals negatively. As such, it plays an important role in the conflict by affecting the psychological and behavioral reactions of the parties toward their rivals. Therefore, such memory is of importance for scholarly research as attested by the blooming research literature in recent years on memory, especially in the context of conflict, war, and peace.¹

8 America and Cosmopolitan Responsibility: from: Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Edmonds Jeff
Abstract: The question of the nature of cosmopolitanism and its relationship to place is not just a question of how these logical categories might be properly determined and defined. While it would be perhaps convenient for philosophers to share a definition of cosmopolitanism and come to agreement on its limits and possibilities, philosophical convenience or agreement is hardly the reason the question of cosmopolitanism is worth talking about.

5 Meister Eckhart and the Later Heidegger: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Both Eckhart and Heidegger reject any merely “anthropological” account of the essence of man. Neither is content to say that man is one being among others, differentiated by his “rational faculty.” Man must be understood instead in relationship to something which transcends beings altogether. The essential “greatness” of man is nothing human or anthropological, but rests in his being the privileged “place” ( Stätte[Q,

10 On Not Knowing Who We Are: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: In this essay, which I take as the point of departure for the present study, from which indeed the whole has drawn its name, I argue that Michel Foucault’s thought is best construed as a hermeneutics of not knowingwho we are. I construe Foucault’s work to operate according to what Jacques Derrida calls the logic of the sans. That means that we get the best results by proceedingsans voir,sans avoir,sans savoir, without sight, without savvy, and without seizing hold of what we love. This is a bit of a perversity, turning as it does, not on

19 In Search of a Sacred Anarchy: from: The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Like Martin Heidegger, like many of us, Calvin Schrag has had a theological point of departure. His earliest work, Existence and Freedom, published some forty years ago, undertook one of the first important confrontations of Heidegger and Kierkegaard in English. 1 Schrag understood that a great deal of Continental philosophy originated in the decision made by Kierkegaard to expose philosophy to biblical categories, on the premise that if the categories of Greek philosophy are all we have, then the poor existing individual is lost. It was in no small part from that decision that Heidegger’sBeing and Timeemerged, and

Book Title: Feminist Phenomenology Futures- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): OLKOWSKI DOROTHEA E.
Abstract: Distinguished feminist philosophers consider the future of their field and chart its political and ethical course in this forward-looking volume. Engaging with themes such as the historical trajectory of feminist phenomenology, ways of perceiving and making sense of the contemporary world, and the feminist body in health and ethics, these essays affirm the base of the discipline as well as open new theoretical spaces for work that bridges bioethics, social identity, physical ability, and the very nature and boundaries of the female body. Entanglements with thinkers such as Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Beauvoir, and Arendt are evident and reveal new directions for productive philosophical work. Grounded in the richness of the feminist philosophical tradition, this work represents a significant opening to the possible futures of feminist phenomenological research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005vm7

A FEMINIST PHENOMENOLOGY MANIFESTO from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: In this volume we situate the future directions of feminist phenomenology in the here and now. We contend that in this moment feminist phenomenology is well positioned to take a leading role, not simply in terms of consolidating existing feminist methodologies but also in engaging the difficult task of thinking through the actual in the fullness of its relational, agential, ontological, experiential, and fleshly being, thereby opening up future possibilities. We also think there is some urgency to this claim. For many, faith in the rational human subject has been shattered by the events of the twentieth and twenty-first centuries’

1 USING OUR INTUITION: from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) OLKOWSKI DOROTHEA E.
Abstract: What is intuition? Both philosophical and psychological understandings of the idea of intuition may have left feminist philosophy with more questions than answers. Is intuition a sixth sense? Is it cognitive or sensory or something else? Michèle Le Doeuff has pointed out that intuition, in classical philosophical language, designates a mode of immediate apprehension, a direct intellectual graspas opposed to mediated knowledge achieved through reasoning, discussion, internal debate, dialectic, experimentation, deduction, language, or proofs. Given this definition, intuition was once thought to be a valid mode of knowledge. It was thought to cooperate with these various methods of inquiry

8 ADVENTURES IN THE HYPERDIALECTIC from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) SIMMS EVA-MARIA
Abstract: In an early feminist phenomenological paper, Jeffner Allen interpreted Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s “hyperdialectic” or “good dialectic” through the I–other, men–women opposition and criticized Merleau-Ponty for his androcentric, sexist assumptions of a gender-neutral body as the foundation for his ontology.¹ Since then phenomenological feminists have stayed away from Merleau-Ponty’s concept of the hyperdialectic, even though Allen, at the end of her paper, points out possibilities for a new beginning for the “good dialectic” in feminist thinking.

9 THE MURMURATION OF BIRDS: from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) MANNING DOLLEEN TISAWII’ASHII
Abstract: This chapter sketches out precursory notes on the entangled ontology of the North American Algonquian language family, particularly regarding mnidoo(spirit/mystery, “potency, potential”),¹ animacy, and other-than-human persons.² Since this concept mnidoo is difficult to translate linguistically with all of its intricacies intact, I conduct here a phenomenological—that is, an experientially embodied—translation, which, in my view, is more in keeping with everyday lived-indigeneities.³ We begin with a schematic drawing and a perplexing annotation on presence and consciousness to be investigated from a number of approaches throughout. These range from the navigational acuity of flocks of birds, to the poetics

12 THE TRANSHUMAN PARADIGM AND THE MEANING OF LIFE from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) SCHÜES CHRISTINA
Abstract: Reproductive and transplantation medicine, genetics and molecular biology provide the means for intervening in the body and for interchanging living tissues, organs, or other body materials between human beings. Examples include organ or stem cell transplantations, the genetic determination of embryos in reproductive genetics, or receptor-specific psychopharmaceuticals. However, biotechnological interventions not only aim at the materiality and functionality of the human body, but they also transform the familial and social relations among humans. This means that biotechnologies can be profound interventions into human experiences and lives. The paradigmatic profoundness of these technologies of the later twentieth and early twenty-first centuries

13 THE SECOND-PERSON PERSPECTIVE IN NARRATIVE PHENOMENOLOGY from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) SLATMAN JENNY
Abstract: What is it that happens in interviews that aim at exploring people’s lived experiences? In a recently conducted empirical study, we interviewed women just after they were surgically treated for breast cancer.¹ In these interviews we focused on how they gave meaning to bodily changes and to their scars, thus employing a phenomenological approach. Phenomenology is mostly seen as an investigation of the first-person perspective, because it seeks to make explicit the process of world-disclosure.² Because of its sensitivity to the way patients experience their illnesses, phenomenology has been developed as a research method in its own right that is

15 IS DIRECT PERCEPTION ARROGANT PERCEPTION?: from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) APRIL FLAKNE N.
Abstract: Feminist phenomenology promises numerous futures. In this essay, I will consider what emerging interactionist approaches to embodied social cognition might offer to feminist phenomenologists. For the sake of convenience, I will refer to a group of related, phenomenologically inspired approaches to embodied social cognition as “direct perception” (DP).¹ I use this overarching term not to ignore significant differences between the various strands, but to focus on their central, shared claim—namely, that our perception is “smart” enough to perceive “directly” that there are other minds as well as a great deal of what supposedly goes on “in” those other minds.²

17 IDENTITY-IN-DIFFERENCE TO AVOID INDIFFERENCE from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) LEE EMILY S.
Abstract: Sexual and racial differences matter. Indeed, rejecting facile understandings of sameness at the heart of universalism, philosophers of race speculate that racial differences are ontologically relevant. At the same time, absolute difference can slip into indifference. For example, Glen Loury points to disparate statistics among racial groups that occasion no alarm from the majority populations.¹ As Maria Lugones describes such indifference, “The more independent I am, the more independent I am left to be. Their world and their integrity do not require me at all.”² My concern is that although we have yet to fully understand what difference means and

18 WHAT IS FEMINIST PHENOMENOLOGY? from: Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STOLLER SILVIA
Abstract: The question “What is feminist phenomenology?” is not as easily answered as it might first seem. To some extent, this has to do with the term itself, since in the academic field two different terms are regularly used to designate more or less the same area: “feminist phenomenology” and “phenomenological feminism.” Strictly speaking, feminist phenomenology is a feminist-oriented phenomenology, whereas phenomenological feminism can be characterized as a phenomenologically oriented feminism. In her early essay “Sexual Ideology and Phenomenological Description,” Judith Butler speaks of “phenomenological feminism,” whereas in her encyclopedia article Dorothea Olkowski speaks of “phenomenologically-oriented feminists” and of “feminist phenomenologists”

Book Title: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld-Basic Traits of a Phenomenological Hermeneutics
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): RAYMAN JOSHUA
Abstract: What are the foundations of human self-understanding and the value of responsible philosophical questioning? Focusing on Heidegger's early work on facticity, historicity, and the phenomenological hermeneutics of factical-historical life, Hans-Helmuth Gander develops an idea of understanding that reflects our connection with the world and other, and thus invites deep consideration of phenomenology, hermeneutics, and deconstruction. He draws usefully on Husserl's phenomenology and provides grounds for exchange with Descartes, Dilthey, Nietzsche, Gadamer, Ricoeur, and Foucault. On the way to developing a contemporary hermeneutical philosophy, Gander clarifies the human relation to self in and through conversation with Heidegger's early hermeneutics. Questions about reading and writing then follow as these are the very actions that structure human self-understanding and world understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005w6h

TRANSLATORS’ INTRODUCTION from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: In Self-Understanding and Lifeworld: Basic Traits of a Phenomenological Hermeneutics, Hans-Helmuth Gander’s Gadamerian orientation leads him to think seriously about what is typically ignored or neglected in the current state of phenomenology, namely, our hermeneutic experience of reading. Phenomenological inquiry is most often directed to our experience of the world, to sense experiences, to questions of reality and knowledge, and to a lesser extent to thinking and understanding. But when we, as philosophers trained in or engaged with the continental tradition, are steeped so heavily in the reading of texts, this experience of reading demands its own proper explication as

CHAPTER TWO THE EXPERIENTIAL STRUCTURE OF THE SELF: from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: To gain the philosophical attitude that appears necessary from out of the hermeneutical turn of phenomenology for an analysis of determinate human life as facticity means, to begin with, as Pöggeler puts it, “to break away from or shut off the machinery of Husserl’s phenomenological reductions.”¹ Instead of wanting to penetrate into a deep layer of the immutable ideal “I” on the path of reductions, phenomenological hermeneutics forms its approach by recurring to pretheoretical experiences,from which it works on its ontological analysis of structure by means of the interpretation of concrete appearances. In the context of discussions of the

CHAPTER THREE APPLICATION—DESTRUKTION—HISTORY: from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: As a hermeneutical problem of utilization [ Anwendung], the application [Applikation] forms its own ontological sense of contribution of historical hermeneutics. Hans-Georg Gadamer in particular has stressed this with a view to the task of textual interpretation in this sense and he has exemplarily developed it in regard to its function in legal hermeneutics.¹ In the given context, to introduce this application structure in the discussion of the hermeneutics of facticity does not mean simply wanting to interpret Heidegger by way of Gadamer. Rather, as we shall see, a structural comportment is explicated, which, even though it is not made explicit

OPEN END from: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that

Book Title: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard-Time, Ritual, and Sexual Commerce in London
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hausner Sondra L.
Abstract: Every month, a ragtag group of Londoners gather in the site known as Crossbones Graveyard to commemorate the souls of medieval prostitutes believed to be buried there-the "Winchester Geese," women who were under the protection of the Church but denied Christian burial. In the Borough of Southwark, not far from Shakespeare's Globe, is a pilgrimage site for self-identified misfits, nonconformists, and contemporary sex workers who leave memorials to the outcast dead. Ceremonies combining raucous humor and eclectic spirituality are led by a local playwright, John Constable, also known as John Crow. His interpretation of the history of the site has struck a chord with many who feel alienated in present-day London. Sondra L. Hausner offers a nuanced ethnography of Crossbones that tacks between past and present to look at the historical practices of sex work, the relation of the Church to these professions, and their representation in the present. She draws on anthropological approaches to ritual and time to understand the forms of spiritual healing conveyed by the Crossbones rites. She shows that ritual is a way of creating the present by mobilizing the stories of the past for contemporary purposes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wdm

INTRODUCTION from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: Each of the three sections of this book—on persuasion in Aristotle, reflection ( Besinnung) in Martin Heidegger, and judgment in Hannah Arendt—comes with its own introduction. Each section can, thus, be read on its own and without regard for the order in which it is presented. Yet, apart from the fact that the order in which these studies follow one another is chronological, the essays, though they do not explicitly build upon or derive from one another, are interrelated in many ways and, ultimately, pursue one question, one major concern. These prefatory remarks, which I keep to a minimum,

7 THE SPACE OF APPEARANCE from: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: HANNAH ARENDT’S REFLECTIONS on judgment, which she qualifies as the most political of all of the human being’s faculties, are intimately tied to a debate over Kant’s philosophy that spans almost two decades. Central to this debate is the Kantian distinction between determinant (i.e., cognitive) judgment and reflective (i.e., aesthetic or teleological) judgment. Arendt’s own conception of judgment originates largely from her interest in and her commentaries on Kant’s elaboration of the judgment of taste in the Critique of the Power of Judgment.

20 POSTCOLONIAL STUDIES IN FRENCH ACADEMIA from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Coquery-Vidrovitch Catherine
Abstract: Opponents of postcolonial studies claim that the field’s aim is to show the chronological continuity between the colonial and postcolonial periods, asserting, for instance, that, “The my thol ogy of repentance . . . serves to justify a continuum between the colonial period and today.”¹ To get a better understanding of postcolonial thought, let us refer to the remarkable synthesis provided by the book La situation postcoloniale, published in 2008,² which was met with scathing criticism by a team of literary researchers who have a sense of history.³ The postcolonial is not a period; it is a mode of pluralistic

27 CULTURAL ORIENTALIZATION OR POLITICAL OCCIDENTALISM? from: The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Lebourg Nicolas
Abstract: The Front National, which reached new heights in popularity in the first round of regional elections in December 2015, has developed a strategy, since 2010, around exposing Islamization, which it claims is inherent to multicultural society. Meanwhile, Islamophobia cannot be limited to members of the Front National, and it has certainly not replaced antisemitism. Unburdened from ideological partisanship, antisemitism has become a product of cultural consumption. The move to the political right in thinking about such questions has created a fragmented image of a French society in need of an authoritarian response. It has revitalized the fear of otherness in

Book Title: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age-Refugees, Travelers, and Traffickers in Europe and Eurasia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SVOBODNY NICOLE
Abstract: Combining methodological and theoretical approaches to migration and mobility studies with detailed analyses of historical, cultural, or social phenomena, the works collected here provide an interdisciplinary perspective on how migrations and mobility altered identities and affected images of the "other." From walkways to railroads to airports, the history of travel provides a context for considering the people and events that have shaped Central and Eastern Europe and Russia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20060x8

Introduction from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Walke Anika
Abstract: SINCE THE FALL of the Iron Curtain in the late 1980s, the movement of people is a central topic of concern, among the citizenry, among politicians, and among scholars in Central and Eastern Europe (CEE) and the former Soviet Union. The intense debate about people’s ability to move and the transfer of goods and ideas and about ways to deal with unregulated migration reflects a complex web of movements and their assigned meanings. Recent scholarship on the movement of people in this region largely uses and expands on sociological and political science frameworks, focusing on pressing problems of integration and

CHAPTER 10 Technology, the City, and the Body: from: Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Murav Harriet
Abstract: FOR VIKTOR SHKLOVSKY, the Russian-language Formalist writer and critic, and for David Bergelson, the Yiddish prose author, the city of Berlin, the place of their temporary exile in the 1920s, presented a fascinating spectacle of city life and technological sophistication, as well as the horrific traces of World War I. Both refer to the so-called broken men, veterans who had suffered severe and dramatically visible bodily disfigurement. In the “postscript” to Zoo, or Letters Not about Love(written and published in Berlin), Shklovsky notes that the “streets are filled with terribly subdued cripples.”¹ The protagonist of Bergelson’s “Among Refugees,” a

4 Pitch Height from: Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: “Pitch height” refers to the apparent height of musical pitches: for the most part, height is not a perceptible property of sounds, but the sense that melodies ascend and descend, and that some notes are higher or lower than others, is both strongly motivated and logical. It is the sense and logic of fictional and illusory height that is at issue in this chapter.¹

Chapter Thirteen ‘YESTERDAY AND TOMORROW’: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Bílik René
Abstract: The first ideas about how literature and literary life in Slovakia should look after the end of World War II were formulated by their protagonists as early as 1945. In the short period between 1945 and 1948, a part of modern domestic policy and of the ideological and literary traditions was actualized in programme-guided discussions and debates, but also in legally binding documents. The first line of this actualization movement reached back to the depth of the nineteenth century – to the Romantic concept of mighty Slavdom and pan-Slavic reciprocity. This line had a politically and ideologically declarative form, which

Chapter Seventeen BIG BROTHER’S GRAVITY: from: Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Ponomarev Evgeny
Abstract: A literary magazine, or a ‘thick journal’, was a unique element of Soviet literary culture. Modelled on pre-revolutionary literary magazines that published the writings of authors belonging to a certain creative movement, or works of a certain genre, in the Soviet time thick journals turned into a voice of the authorities, promoting the ‘ideologically correct’ literature of the new age. After all the writers’ organizations in the USSR had been disbanded in 1932 and the Soviet Writers’ Congress called shortly thereafter to set the standards of socialist realism, the new function of thick journals became clear: they were to operate

Chapter Four ROMANIA: from: Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Shafir Michael
Abstract: Right after the change of regime in December 1989, Romania displayed some features that were common to most postcommunist East-Central European countries in regard to antisemitism, as well as some specific features of its own. Freed from ideological and censorship constraints, latent antisemitism erupted in the public space, and after a while it became a cross-party phenomenon. This does not mean that political parties had all put antisemitism on their banners; it rather means that regardless of ideology, both antisemitic prejudice and, above all, the perception of Romania’s “dark past”¹ of the interwar period and the Second World War, as

3 The Method of An-Archeology from: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: Levinas’s prominent use of the concept of trauma provokes the question of how responsibility can be thematized at all, given its status as a trace rather than a phenomenon—an experience that can be unproblematically represented by consciousness. Through its rhetorical peculiarities, his philosophical style reflects his claims about the subject’s encounter with what exceeds, frustrates, or otherwise interrupts conceptualization. This chapter will analyze Levinas’s method of “saying and unsaying,” with particular attention to his repudiation of narration in Otherwise than Being. Given that narration is one way to reduce the lapse of time to a unified representation, this methodological

5. Subjects in Abundance from: Numinous Subjects
Abstract: What might it mean, what might it change if female subjects were loved, imagined, thought, known in accordance with the abundant logic of the sacred? How might such an abundant imagining, abundant knowing answer Michel Foucault’s (still)

Book Title: Echoes of the Tambaran-Masculinity, history and the subject in the work of Donald F. Tuzin
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In the Sepik Basin of Papua New Guinea, ritual culture was dominated by the Tambaran —a male tutelary spirit that acted as a social and intellectual guardian or patron to those under its aegis as they made their way through life. To Melanesian scholarship, the cultural and psychological anthropologist, Donald F. Tuzin, was something of a Tambaran, a figure whose brilliant and fine-grained ethnographic project in the Arapesh village of Ilahita was immensely influential within and beyond New Guinea anthropology. Tuzin died in 2007, at the age of 61. In his memory, the editors of this collection commissioned a set of original and thought provoking essays from eminent and accomplished anthropologists who knew and were influenced by his work. They are echoes of the Tambaran. The anthology begins with a biographical sketch of Tuzin's life and scholarship. It is divided into four sections, each of which focuses loosely around one of his preoccupations. The first concerns warfare history, the male cult and changing masculinity, all in Melanesia. The second addresses the relationship between actor and structure. Here, the ethnographic focus momentarily shifts to the Caribbean before turning back to Papua New Guinea in essays that examine uncanny phenomena, narratives about childhood and messianic promises. The third part goes on to offer comparative and psychoanalytic perspectives on the subject in Fiji, Bali, the Amazon as well as Melanesia. Appropriately, the last section concludes with essays on Tuzin's fieldwork style and his distinctive authorial voice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hbjj

Introduction: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In 2007, Donald Francis (Don) Tuzin died at the age of sixty-one. We who knew him as students and colleagues or simply admired his work from afar lost an anthropologistʹs anthropologist—a kind that has gone out of fashion, to say the least. He combined the interests of a generalist with the skills of an experienced field ethnographer. His work drew from and contributed to archaeology as well as reflexive anthropology. Driven by methodological individualism and a strong commitment to comparativism, he focused on social control, dreams, politics and art, cannibalism, food symbolism, the psychodynamics of masculinity, the origins of

5. Signs and Wonders: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Birth Kevin
Abstract: An uncanny event is normally viewed as something unexpected and unexplainable. Even in anthropological thought, uncanniness is a phenomenological concept that serves as a catalyst for cultural meaning but eludes

12. Talking About Sex: from: Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Herdt Gilbert
Abstract: All human societies are concerned with the regulation of sexuality—a truism of anthropology. And all of them, past and present, exert cultural, political, economic and even psychological controls over how people talk about sex: when, where, with whom and why—not why they are motivated, but why they must be stopped from sexual discourse. These barriers to sexual communication are created for a variety of reasons—notably, gender power, the strictures on childhood sexual and gender development, the regulation of the development of pleasure, the social control of adult morality and the inhibition of sexual behaviour that violates norms

THE ETHICS OF NARRATIVE AT TRENT UNIVERSITY from: Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) HENRIQUEZ GREGORY
Abstract: The incomprehensible rate of change of the modern world brings with it the more-than-uneasy feeling that the outcome is unknown, that doom is at hand. The threat once represented by the atomic bomb has been replaced by the ecological crisis and the population explosion. We need somehow to restore faith in the future of the human race, both physically and spiritually. Canada’s multicultural society could be called an excellent example of the homogenization of values and, at the same time, a mosaic of values. As we await the new unified “world order” of trade and tariffs, our country’s cultural values

CHAPTER EIGHT Is Comics a Branch of Contemporary Art? from: Comics and Narration
Abstract: In this final chapter, we are going to leave the domain of semiotic or narratological analysis and move onto the terrain of sociology of art, art history, and cultural history. It would undoubtedly be worth developing the following reflections into a full-length essay. However, it seems appropriate to include them in the present volume, since, as we shall see, they will ultimately lead us back, by another route, to the question of narration.

VIII Pieper, Hope, Imperfection, and Literature from: Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: First, I must offer a word on the twentieth-century theological movement

X Teaching Literature from a Catholic Angle from: Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: The array of American colleges and universities that like to describe themselves, with more or less justification, as Roman Catholic and that are still sponsored by religious orders, dioceses, or other ecclesiastical authorities continues to be impressive, although periodically, and on one issue or the other, their legitimacy finds itself questioned. Their abundance is still superior, at least quantitatively, to the Catholic university instructional range existing in any other country of the world. This system was largely developed in the nineteenth century and its purpose was at first to protect young minds against the ideological agendas of secular state institutions,

3. Social Ethics and Moral Discourse in Late Antiquity from: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Van Nuffelen Peter
Abstract: The term “patristic social ethics” may convey the impression that the Church Fathers—already an immensely varied group of individuals covering at least half a millennium—shared a number of systematic views on social issues. It seems to suggest that they held a set of norms and rules, which can be reconstructed through the careful reading of their sermons, letters, and dogmatic works. On such an understanding, patristic teaching on property, poverty, or usury, takes the form of a coherent, discrete body of doctrines. Such an approach might work well for theological topics, for example, the interpretation of the Trinity

4. Wealth, Poverty, and Eschatology: from: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Rhee Helen
Abstract: Christian eschatology and otherworldliness have been used and misused throughout history. On the one hand, they were used by Christians to justify maintaining the socio-political or religious status quo resulting in either a tragic neglect of social injustice or a passivity toward social reforms in the present age.¹ On the other hand, they were used to justify socio-political and religious radicalism and violence to the point that Christianity may be seen in some quarters as a militant opponent of social process and tolerance.² While it is true that the eschatological orientation and “otherworldliness” of early Christian teachings did not directly

PROPYLAIA from: Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: In a recent book opening on to many of the issues this one will examine, Stephen Halliwell invokes the shade of Goethe, in particular his essay “Über Wahrheit und Wahrscheinlichkeit der Kunstwerke,” as the propylaia for his reexamination of the concept of mimesis.¹ In setting up this propylaia Halliwell follows Goethe, who draws our mind from a simplistic view of mimetic art as “sheer illusionism—like the famous birds reputedly tricked into pecking at Zeuxis’ painted grapes” to the mimetic as having “the psychological power to draw its audience into its world, to offer something that is wholly convincing and

2 Resilience Input for a Virtue-Based Philosophical Anthropology from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In this chapter, I investigate further the research on protective and risk processes.¹ I interpret the insights within a classic anthropological schema (temperament and emotion, cognitional and volitional processes, and familial and social contexts).² At the same time, I employ an overlapping division that differentiates natural characteristics from religious and spiritual ones. This meta-analysis of the resilience findings inductively identifies resources that make some difference in resilience outcomes. It offers elements for a renewed philosophy of nature and philosophical anthropology.

3 Renewing Moral Theology: from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In order to contribute to the renewal of moral theology,¹ I shall critically assess, contrast, and integrate two levels of observation and reflection concerning human agency: a psychosocial resilience perspective, on the one hand, and St. Thomas Aquinas’ virtue theory and theology of character, on the other. Previously, we saw that resilience research offers anthropological insights about extreme cases of adversity, as well as more typical challenges to growth. In this chapter, I widen the focus, by addressing how these studies relate to ethical principles and moral reflection. Aquinas’ virtue anthropology and moral theology offer a qualitative vision of human

4 Resilience and Aquinas’ Virtue of Fortitude from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: If any of our communities, families, or selves were invulnerable, we would need neither emotions such as fear, hope, and daring, nor virtues such as fortitude. Even in the most protected environments, we rightly experience fear when faced with real and potential deformation, destruction, or loss. Fear is based on human vulnerabilities that extend from physical to psychological, from economic to social, and from moral to spiritual levels. Can we prevent fear from causing deeper anxiety? Can we prepare ourselves in order to better control fearful situations? Can we resist fear without forgoing what is good, right, and true? Courage

[PART THREE. Introduction] from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: I have delayed treating explicitly the theological aspect of fortitude until now in order to allow clear terrain for dialogue between resilience research and Aquinas’ virtue anthropology. The previous chapters serve as a foundation concerning his vision of human agency in adversity and the way in which resilience research offer psychosocial insights on human development and resilience in difficulty. By treating the theological aspects of virtue and resilience apart from the philosophical and psychosocial aspects, I do not mean to imply that the subject (person or community) examined philosophically and scientifically differs from the subject examined spiritually and theologically. Rather

8 A Theological Dimension of Resilient Initiative-Taking? from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: Our theological reflections on human initiatives and divine purpose lead us to wonder about the variety of goals that humans pursue and the strength needed to accomplish them. What is the potential theological extension of the virtues and emotions of initiative in relation to constructive resilience, as examined in chapter 5?

9 Theological Dimension of the Virtues of Enduring from: Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: Is there a specifically Christian response to pain, suffering, and sorrow? For Aquinas, the infused virtues of patience and perseverance distinctly offer Christian criteria and models. They involve necessary dispositions for Christian maturity in the face of adversity. These infused virtues should not be confused with the acquired virtues of the same names or resistant resilience (chapter 6), even though they can strengthen already existing acquired virtues. Furthermore, the theological virtue of hope, the gift of knowledge, the fruit of patience, and the beatitude of mourners all constitute a Christian type of patience and perseverance. They are completed by Aquinas’

Book Title: Humanae vitae, a generation later- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Smith Janet E.
Abstract: Janet E. Smith presents a comprehensive review of this issue from a philosophical and theological perspective. Tracing the emergence of the debate from the mid-1960s and reviewing the documents from the Special Papl Commission established to advise Pope Paul VI, Smith also examines the Catholic Church's position on marriage, which provides context for its condemnation of contraception.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284xt0

FIVE Some Theological Considerations from: Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: Humanae Vitae 4 states that the teaching of the Church concerning marriage is a teaching “rooted in natural law, illuminated and made richer by divine revelation.” This chapter takes up a few of the theological considerations of the encyclical. First, it examines briefly the scriptural foundations for Humanae Vitae and shows how these “illuminate and enrich” (HV 4) its natural law foundations. Then follows a theological discussion of a very different sort. The word munus (which means variously, “gift,” “reward,” “duty,” “task,” and “mission,” among other possibilities) and the concept it captures, as shaped in the documents of Vatican II,

3. “PRAISE THE WORLD TO THE ANGEL”: from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Crooks James
Abstract: In the realm of abstract speculation that seems now to encompass all the discursive spaces of the academy—from the university senate to the faculty/student barbecue—one tends to imagine the future of philosophy either as a response to economic, technological, and ideological forces external to it or as the steadfast resistance of those forces.

13. SCHELER ON THE ESSENCE OF CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS CONSCIOUSNESS from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Dahlstrom Daniel O.
Abstract: One of Kenneth Schmitz’s major and undoubtedly lasting accomplishments is his demonstration of the distinctive contribution made by Karol Wojtyla to philosophy. In Schmitz’s masterful expositions, Wojtyla’s philosophical project comes alive as an effort to understand action phenomenologically and realistically, as something that proceeds from and reveals, not consciousness, but the whole person “as a being among other beings.”¹ In this connection, among other things, Schmitz corrects a common misunderstanding of the extent of Wojtyla’s philosophical debt to Scheler’s thought. To be sure, Wojtyla plainly acknowledges the importance to him of both Scheler’s critique of Kant’s ethics and its basis

16. THE UNMASKING OF OBJECTIVITY from: Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Deely John
Abstract: Professor Kenneth Schmitz and I developed a friendship as senior to relatively junior member of the academic world with a common interest in Heidegger, Aquinas, and matters metaphysical and epistemological, which came increasingly to mean for me semiotics.

Book Title: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Beeley Christopher A.
Abstract: This book, the newest volume in the CUA Studies in Early Christianity, presents original works by leading patristics scholars on a wide range of theological, historical, and cultural topics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284zwd

4. Deciphering a Recipe for Biblical Preaching in from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Matz Brian J.
Abstract: Everyone who studies the works of Gregory Nazianzen in this day eventually passes with no little amount of pleasure through the scholarship of Fred Norris. I have worked my way more than once through his helpful commentary on Gregory’s Theological Orations, through his insightful connection between Wittgenstein and Gregory’s own use of language, through his critique of Harnack in appreciating Gregory’s careful use of secular literature, and in many other fields of Gregorian studies that our editor has outlined in his introduction.¹ Meeting Professor Norris for the first time at a meeting of the North American Patristic Society some years

6. Gregory of Nazianzus, Montanism, and the Holy Spirit from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Tabbernee William
Abstract: As is well known, Gregory of Nazianzus (ca. 329–390) arrived in Constantinople in September 379 to commence a theological preaching and teaching mission. His mission had as its aim the advancement of Nicene orthodoxy in the city and the establishment of a viable unity among the members of the then current theological factions, who strongly disagreed about various aspects of the way in which the Trinity should be defined and understood. What is not so well known is that Gregory, as part of his rhetorical strategy, made use of polemical references to Montanus (d. ca. 175) and Montanists.¹ Gregory

10. Bishops Behaving Badly: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Limberis Vasiliki
Abstract: Scholars have generally overlooked the interpersonal exchanges in the lives of Gregory of Nazianzus and Gregory of Nyssa, since they are tangential to the study of theological anthropology and the Trinity. Such are the “Helladius affairs,” the rousing stories of Bishop Helladius’ contentious behavior against Gregory of Nazianzus and Gregory of Nyssa.¹ These mundane events not only give valuable biographical information, they also isolate moments in their individual lives within the context of their social situations as powerful bishops. In the fourth century a bishop’s social status was fraught with the Christian prescriptions of humility, poverty, and retreat from the

11. The Tax Man and the Theologian: from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) McLynn Neil
Abstract: Gregory Nazianzen’s poem “To Hellenius, an Exhortation Concerning the Monks,” one of the small group addressed “to others,” has rarely been examined as a whole.¹ The purpose of this chapter is to attempt such an examination and to suggest that the work casts a sharper light than has been realized on Gregory’s position in local society in the early 370s. I shall also suggest, more controversially, that it bears directly upon Gregory’s involvement in theological controversy and even upon his consecration as bishop of Sasima in 372. The sheer quantity of prosopographical information contained in the poem’s 368 elegiac verses

15. St. Gregory the Theologian and Byzantine Theology from: Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Louth Andrew
Abstract: In the Byzantine tradition, St. Gregory of Nazianzus was “the Theologian”; in later Byzantine tradition he appears together with St. Basil of Caesarea and St. John of Constantinople as one of the “ecumenical teachers,” celebrated together on January 30, each of whom has his epithet: St. Basil the “Great,” St. Gregory the “Theologian” and St. John the “Golden-mouthed” (Chrysostom, Χρυσόστομος). It seems clear that Gregory’s title is derived from the five orations, Orations 27–31, dubbed by modern editors the “theological orations,” a designation that has ancient support (though the list is not entirely stable: Oration 28 seems to have

Foreword from: Spirit's Gift
Author(s) Schmitz Kenneth L.
Abstract: Father Antonio López has given us a comprehensive study of an original thinker whose work is too little known in English language scholarship. He has traced with firmness and clarity both the development and the final expression of his subject’s thought. Claude Bruaire’s originality is not impaired by the wealth of philosophical and theological sources from which he weaves his reflection on being-as-spirit-and-as-gift. As Professor López keeps before the reader’s attention, the horizon within which Bruaire develops his thought is derived above all from Hegel, though not without a fundamental transformation which the present careful study continually makes clear. Central

CHAPTER 1 The Encounter between Philosophy and Theology from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: No question is foreign to metaphysics, Bruaire contends, because metaphysics deals with that most important issue which is presupposed in all the other disciplines.¹ Philosophy addresses the decisive, eternal question: “what is being?”² Yet, according to Bruaire, to ask about “that which is” is to pose the question concerning the nature of the principle that sustains whatever exists, namely, the absolute, which in theological terms is called God.³ This is philosophy’s inevitable prejudice: every philosophy has as its object the absolute, as Schelling stated.⁴ Bruaire considers that the question of the absolute is the question that must be confronted, because

CHAPTER 5 An Ontology of Gift: from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: The outcome of Bruaire’s semantic and eidetic analysis of the concept of spirit is the acknowledgment that if the collection of phenomena of spirit “forces us to use the Word gift to name spirit, it is because gift is, from its very beginning, its own essence.”¹ Gift, then, is neither an ontological category that can be enumerated along with others, nor a name capable of describing only the being of the human spirit. Being is gift, in the strongest sense of the term: “esse spirituale et donum convertuntur.”² To affirm that being-of-spirit is given is to state that it is

CHAPTER 6 Altogether Gift: from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: The ontological examination of being as gift undertaken so far appears to be too anthropologically burdened to allow for a concept of absolute gift. In fact, if being-gift is being-given and being-in-debt, then it does not seem possible to formulate a concept of gift which, while remaining one, is nonetheless able to embrace the similarities and the differences between the being-given proper, on the one hand, to the human spirit and, on the other, to absolute spirit. Nevertheless, only if the latter is gift can Bruaire validly argue that gift is the metaphysical name for being—and not merely its

Conclusion from: Spirit's Gift
Abstract: It is not at all easy to free human awareness from the captivating idea that the human being can account for his own existence without coming to terms with the question of his own origin. The anthropological turn of modernity, for the sake of pursuing more pressing matters or more deceivingly fundamental issues, presumed that severing the question of God from the inquiry into the human being’s own identity would give wings to the quest for knowledge. Instead, as postmodernity witnesses, this too-often rated “successful” revolution has yielded a radical dissolution of any unifying principle and thus, of man himself.

Book Title: Necessity and Possibility-The Logical Strategy of Kant's Critique of Pure Reason
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Mosser Kurt
Abstract: Kurt Mosser argues that reading Kant's Critique of Pure Reason as an argument for such a logic of experience makes more defensible many of Kant's most controversial claims, and makes more accessible Kant's notoriously difficult text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2851gx

CHAPTER ONE Kant’s Critical Model of the Subject from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Kant conceives of general logic as a set of rules—exemplified by the Principle of Non-contradiction—that holds, universally and necessarily, for thought to be possible. For Kant, by reflecting on thought, we are able to identify and articulate those rules that are necessary for thought to be possible, and possible thought itself reveals those rules to be necessary.¹ This is the key to Kant’s transcendental method, whereby rules are revealed as universal and necessary relative to a given domain by reflecting on what must be the case for the judgments within that domain to be possible.

CHAPTER TWO Kant’s Conception of General Logic from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Given his preoccupation with logic in the Critique of Pure Reason, it is an understandable hope that Kant might use the term “logic” in a clear-cut, univocal fashion throughout the text. Unfortunately, such a hope is mere fantasy; Kant uses the term in a bewildering variety of ways, at times making it close to impossible to determine whether he is referring to (among others) general logic, transcendental logic, transcendental analytic, a “special” logic relative to a specific science, a “natural” logic, a logic intended for the “learned” (Gelehrter), some hybrid of these logics, or even some still more abstract notion

CHAPTER THREE The Historical Background of Kant’s General Logic from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: I have tried to show up to this point that Kant conceives of general logic as a set of universal and necessary rules for the possibility of thought, or as a set of minimal necessary conditions for ascribing rationality to an agent (focusing, up to this point, on the principle of non-contradiction). Such a conception contrasts with contemporary notions of formal, mathematical, or symbolic logic: rather as an attempt to identify those conditions that must hold for the possibility of thought, such conditions must hold a fortiori for any specific model of thought, including axiomatic treatments of logic and standard

CHAPTER FOUR The Metaphysical Deduction from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Up to this point, I have tried to clarify Kant’s conception of general logic as a set of universal and necessary rules ranging over the possibility of thought, relative to a generic kind of thinking subject. This subject is able to refer to itself using “I,” employs concepts to make judgments, and can regard itself as free. Relative, again, to this kind of subject, general logic functions to identify a set of conditions that this subject can come to see, reflectively, as necessary for the possibility of its own thought. Furthermore, any agent one takes to satisfy the above criteria—

CHAPTER FIVE Kant and Contemporary Philosophy from: Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: If we construe Kant’s general logic in the way I have urged in previous chapters, we see emerging a conception of logic that functions as a minimal-constraint model of rationality. In short, for an agent to be regarded as an agent—or for ourselves to regard ourselves as agents—we must conform to some set of rules for thought to qualify as thought. In Kantian terms, for a judgment in general to be possible, it must conform to a set of rules, and I have focused here on the principle of noncontradiction as exemplary of such a rule. When we

1 A Cosmopolitan Hermit: from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Miller Michael J.
Abstract: The German philosopher Josef pieper (1904–1997) continues to provoke among his contemporaries constructive, critical, and especially fruitful discussion on anthropological and ethical questions. He does this by formulating a defense of culture, which he contrasts with a pragmatic way of thinking that reduces the person to a specific role and function, to proletarian status. His thought is expressed in a lively style unfettered by any jargon or technical terminology—in contrast with much scholarly writing coming out of today’s universities. Such a use of language accompanied by the originality of his thought earned him the praises of the

5 Josef Pieper and the Ethics of Virtue from: A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Hibbs Thomas S.
Abstract: Perhaps no alteration in the landscape of Anglo-American philosophy in the last thirty years has been more surprising, more sustained, and more fruitful than the resurgence of interest in the ethics of virtue. Most discussions of the history of twentieth-century moral philosophy trace the return of virtue to Elizabeth Anscombe’s essay from the late 1950s, “Modern moral philosophy.”¹ A jeremiad against Kantian and utilitarian ethical theories, Anscombe’s essay urged that, given the present state of philosophical ethics—with its incoherent conceptions of obligation, its lack both of terminological clarity and of an adequate philosophical psychology—we should banish ethics totally

CHAPTER 4 Receiving Jesus Christ in the Spirit from: The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: The production of the bipartite Christian Bible is the result of a process of reception and tradition involving the interpretative organon of the sensus fidei. This organon is at work from the very start of the Jesus tradition till the written expression par excellence of that tradition in the canon of New Testament writings, with its constant theological presupposition—the Jewish Scriptures. With the Gospel written onto their hearts, the believing disciples remembered, retold, and applied their faith in Jesus Christ out of their shared experience of that Gospel. This hermeneutical process involves the understanding, interpretation, and application of Jesus

4 “Past All / Grasp God” from: Reading the Underthought
Abstract: “The Wreck of the Deutschland” (1876) is the earliest Hopkins poem that we discuss, but we have postponed its analysis until we could show the workings of Jewish hermeneutics on poems less fraught with theological content. When Hopkins burned his poems and vowed to write no more before entering the Jesuit order, he could not have foreseen the circumstances that would cause him to repeal his decision. After reading a newspaper account of the shipwreck of the Deutschland and of the loss of five Franciscan nuns who had been expelled from Prussia, Hopkins mentioned to the rector of St. Beuno’s

7 “Ash Wednesday” and Midrash from: Reading the Underthought
Abstract: Our second Eliot chapter examines “Ash Wednesday” (1930), a poem connected both chronologically and thematically with “Journey of the Magi” and “A Song for Simeon.”¹ Although “Ash Wednesday” is more transparently personal than “Journey of the Magi” or “A Song for Simeon,” the experience of (spiritually and physically) journeying toward the new dispensation is parallel. By employing strategies used in traditional rabbinic exegesis (especially Midrash), we can describe the experience of reading “Ash Wednesday” as turning on the need to sustain attention to the words of the text without necessarily achieving an interpretive “end” beyond words. Despite our resistance to

Chapter One INTRODUCTION from: The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: In January 1944 the English Catholic historian Christopher Dawson posed what he called “the basic sociological problem of our time,” the relation of religion and mass culture.³ Writing in the midst of World War II, Dawson saw the choice facing the West as between spiritual renewal, on the one hand, and technocracy and totalitarianism, on the other: “Unless we find a way to restore the contact between the life of society and the life of the spirit our civilization will be destroyed by the forces which it has had the knowledge to create but not wisdom to control.”⁴ Dawson was

Chapter Five THE LOSS OF TRANSCENDENCE from: The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: All religions make cosmological claims, claims about the structure, nature, and purposes of the cosmos, but, like Judaism before it, Christianity from the beginning was of its essence cosmological, seeing human life both as dramatic, centered on a struggle to achieve a proper use of freedom, and as eschatological, receiving its orientation from beyond history. All was viewed against a cosmic background articulated in Scripture and preserved in the liturgy. The previous chapter described the abundant variety of expressions of transcendence, both the transcendence of the philosophers and that of the theologians, found in ancient Christianity and to the eve

CHAPTER 4 Consciousness and Efficacy from: Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The phenomenon of human efficient causality reveals itself most completely in the conscious act of the person.¹ Thus, in The Acting Person, Wojtyła’s analysis of human causality is preceded by his theory of consciousness. Wojtyła’s treatment of human consciousness clearly manifests his methodological and epistemological assumptions that result in his philosophical differences from classic phenomenology and modern idealism, as well as from twentieth-century neo-Thomism. But before giving a detailed account of Wojtyła’s mature theory of human efficacy, it is necessary to present the main principles of his theory of consciousness.

CHAPTER 5 Transcendence and Integration from: Destined for Liberty
Abstract: Etymologically, transcendence means to go beyond a threshold or boundary (transcendere). Wojtyła points out that in the domain of human action, transcendence has two different dimensions, horizontal and vertical. The former refers to a situation in which, in the intentional acts of cognition and volition, the subject steps out of his limits toward an object. The latter kind of transcendence points to the person’s self-determination and freedom.¹

CHAPTER 6 Conclusions from: Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The subject of this book, the human person as the efficient cause of his own action, locates the very center of Wojtyła’s philosophy. One reason for this is the intrinsic unity and constant interrelation of anthropology and ethics in the thought of Wojtyła. In his anthropological publications, he always analyzes the ethical implications of the anthropological theses. Correspondingly, when he writes about ethics, he is always interested in the question: “What concept of man underlies a particular ethical theory?” I have been able, therefore, to explore the fundamental themes of Wojtyła’s anthropology and ethics while at the same time safeguarding

CHAPTER ONE HEIDEGGER AND THE MEDIEVAL THEOLOGICAL PARADIGM from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Like a great oak tree that has colonized a grove by driving roots deep into subterranean springs not reached by lesser trees, Heidegger’s Sein und Zeit has dominated the twentieth century by feeding off traditions that lesser philosophical works cannot access. Not only a forgotten Aristotle, but also Martin Luther, Duns Scotus, medieval mysticism, and early Christianity are connected in numerous hidden ways to this massive monument to modern angst. These roots are buried deep beneath the surface of Sein und Zeit’s transcendental phenomenological discourse, but they are the source of the book’s strength. A central root runs through Heidegger’s

CHAPTER EIGHT THE EFFORT TO OVERCOME SCHOLASTICISM from: The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Heidegger’s later critique of onto-theology is rooted in his earliest efforts to de-Christianize metaphysics. It is no longer disputable that he was directly inspired by Luther’s de-Hellenization of Christianity. Luther attempted to purify Christian theology of Greek metaphysics by dismantling the Aristotelian-Scholastic superstructure that had grown up over it; Heidegger undertook a complementary purification of metaphysics from Christian theology through a Destruktion of ontology down to its original Greek sources. I have argued that Heidegger’s appropriation of a Lutheran paradigm for the Destruktion of the history of ontology is not theologically neutral; on the contrary, it is theologically motivated. Heidegger’s

Chapter 2 ANALYSIS BY PRINCIPLES AND ANALYSIS BY ELEMENTS from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: In the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries widespread distrust of analysis by principles contributed to the acceptance of analysis by elements. More precisely, the challenge to the validity and significance of analysis by ontological¹ principles resulted in the rise of analysis by quantitative elements. The latter was not unknown hitherto, of course, but under new conditions of thought and life it assumed new forms and unprecedented power, leading in modern physics to the search for basic particles and in chemistry to the search for simple elements. The pervasive collapse of ontological analysis took place largely outside of the universities and north

Chapter 7 CREATED RECEPTIVITY AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF THE CONCRETE from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel gave his phenomenological inquiries the name “Philosophy of the Concrete,”¹ and he made no bones about the distance between his philosophy and that of Thomism.² Between these philosophies there can be no question of an approchement of tone, nor even of manner, but at most a convergence of truths shared differently. Moreover, there can be no doubt that the two philosophies differ in their relation to experience. Within the broad sense of “Christian experience,” Thomas drew upon experientia (empiria) in the narrower sense in order to derive by way of conceptual abstraction the principles of his philosophy, including

Chapter 15 GOD, BEING, AND LOVE: from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: In keeping with the theme of Fides et ratio, I am impelled to complete the subtitle: “New Ontological Perspectives Coming from Philosophy,” with the following: “Coming from Philosophy in its Encounter with the Proposals of Faith.” For the strict substance of the argument in the encyclical insists that nothing truly and profoundly new—it speaks of the “radicality and newness of being”—will come to philosophy except through its encounter with faith. On the contrary, it insists that reason acting as though independent from, indifferent to, or hostile to faith is not stimulated to seek ad novitatem et radicalitatem ipsius

Chapter 16 THE DEATH OF GOD AND THE REBIRTH OF MAN from: The Texture of Being
Abstract: Metaphors of language sometimes express a reality that stricter and more modest conceptions do not express so well. Moreover, some striking metaphors, such as the “death of God,” can give expression to real conditions in our culture. The intention of this essay is to sketch a current problematic—the widespread acceptance of the absence of God in the cultures of technologically advanced societies of the so-called Western type¹—and to suggest a strategy for a metaphysical intervention in that problematic. The temporal field within which the paper moves is the process of modernization over the past four hundred years, principally

Book Title: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Gregor Shirley D.
Abstract: This volume contains the papers presented at the second biennial Information Systems Foundations ('Constructing and Criticising') Workshop, held at The Australian National University in Canberra from 16-17 July 2004. The focus of the workshop was, as for the first in the series, the foundations of Information Systems as an academic discipline. The particular emphasis was on the adequacy and completeness of theoretical underpinnings and the research methods employed. At the same time the practical nature of the applications and phenomena with which the discipline deals were kept firmly in view. The papers in this volume range from the unashamedly theoretical ('The Struggle Towards an Understanding of Theory in Information Systems') to the much more practically oriented ('A Procedural Model for Ontological Analyses'). The contents of this volume will be of interest and relevance to academics and advanced students as well as thoughtful and reflective practitioners in the Information Systems field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbj4x

1. The struggle towards an understanding of theory in information systems from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Gregor Shirley
Abstract: This paper is, logically, a precursor to an earlier paper that sets out the different interrelated types of theory that can be employed in information systems research, namely: (i) descriptive theory, (ii) theory for understanding, (iii) theory for predicting, (iv) theory for explanation and prediction, and (v) theory for design and action (Gregor, 2002). What that paper failed to do was show clearly why the distinctive nature of the information systems discipline requires a perspective on theorising all of its own. The aim of this current paper is to show clearly how ideas can be combined from some views of

5. The grounded theory method and case study data in IS research: from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Fernández Walter D.
Abstract: The grounded theory method offers ʹa logically consistent set of data collection and analysis

6. A hermeneutic analysis of the Denver International Airport Baggage Handling System from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Cybulski Jacob
Abstract: Although there are several reports of information systems projects that have applied hermeneutics (Boland, 1991; Klein and Myers, 1999; Myers, 1994a), there are very few publications that explain the actual hermeneutic process taken by IS (and in fact, also non-IS) researchers. What this paper strives to do is close the methodological gap and to present one potential framework for the adoption of hermeneutics in the study of information systems.

7. Information systems technology grounded on institutional facts from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Colomb Robert M.
Abstract: Information systems have, for the most part, been successful in relatively restricted organisational subunits. A large organisation therefore may have hundreds of information systems. Over the past two decades organisations have been trying to develop information systems implemented by logical databases at the scale of the whole, typically by integrating the successful local systems. There are successes,

9. Reflection in self-organised systems from: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Johan Carmen
Abstract: The complexity of information systems and technological changes confronting most organisations today means there is an increased urgency for them to be able to reflect and adapt. The aim of this paper is to explore the importance of reflection for successful problem solving in self-organised social human systems that face this urgency. Organisations are constantly exposed to new market opportunities and competitive dynamics, demanding that they learn quickly when there is new information provided by, and new opportunities caused by, changes in the external environment.

4. A flaw in the nation-building process: from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Brady Veronica
Abstract: In a way our topic is strangely anachronistic: blasphemy is a problematic notion in a professedly secular society like ours. It is true, of course, that laws against it are still on the books in most states and territories. But they are laws inherited from the English legal system, designed to protect the established religion of the Church of England which was ′part and parcel of the laws of England′ and the monarch, ′the defender of the faith′. In that, these laws against blasphemy served to protect the social fabric rather than any particular theological position. Australia, however, has never

10. Sacrilege: from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hunter Ian
Abstract: In this chapter I will be looking at sacrilege in the context of Western European religion and politics in the early modern period. I will be adopting an historical-anthropological approach, with a view to making this discussion of sacrilege comparable with those of people working in other religious and cultural settings. Moreover, there is an important sense in which the societies of early modern Western Europe were themselves multicultural, not just because most contained diverse ethnic ′nations′, but more importantly because they contained mutually hostile religious communities. In fact, ′religious cleansing′ in early modern Europe provided the prototype for later

14. ′We already know what is good and just…′ : from: Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Lamb Winifred Wing Han
Abstract: Suspicion of religion and of religious believers is inherent in western atheism and it is not hard to find this reflected in philosophical thought. However, the ′hermeneutics of suspicion′² has been marginal in mainstream philosophy of religion which has concentrated on epistemological issues, inspired by what Merold Westphal has called ′evidential atheism′.³ This critique of religious faith focuses on the alleged epistemological shortfalls in religious beliefs, pointing to its incoherence, unintelligibility and inadequate evidence.

Chapter 8. From Domains to Rajadom: from: Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Lewis E.D.
Abstract: Two forms of Sikkanese society can be distinguished in contemporary Kabupaten² Sikka of eastern Flores on ethnological grounds. One is that of the Ata Tana ′Ai in the eastern region of the kabupaten. The other is that of central Sikka, which includes the villages of the central hills and mountains and the north and south coasts of the regency. ³ The main difference between the two societies that will concern me here is this: whereas no secular polity ever developed in Tana ′Ai, by the beginning of the 20th century, the society of central Sikka constituted a local state, a

Chapter 9. From the Poetics of Place to the Politics of Space: from: The Poetic Power of Place
Author(s) Pannell Sandra
Abstract: For a number of years, the people of Amaya and Wulur, two villages respectively situated on the western and eastern coast of the island of Damer, have been locked in dispute over the line demarcating their adjoining territorial domains. Soon after my arrival (in 1986) this altercation reached one of the many climaxes in what has become a major struggle over the appropriateness and appropriation of certain forms of knowledge. Redefining the cultural landscape on Damer amounts to more than just shifting the position of boundaries. It shakes the very foundations of social identity, engendering as it does tectonic epistemological

Chapter 3. The Elder and the Younger — Foreign and Autochthonous Origin and Hierarchy in the Cook Islands from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Siikala Jukka
Abstract: For quite some time the Polynesian hierarchical systems seemed to be so simple. They were formed through chiefly lineages, in which a system of primogeniture reigned. Those, who were genealogically closest to the gods were also socially superior, and this divinely derived superiority was inherited from first born to first born (Koskinen 1960; Sahlins 1958). This normative notion of early anthropological literature has found its way to the islands through the literary interpretations of western anthropologists to such a degree that it has been constantly recollected in the field. But the origin of this kind of account cannot be found

Chapter 5. ʺAll Threads Are Whiteʺ: from: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Sather Clifford
Abstract: The characterization of societies as ʺegalitarianʺ — in Borneo as elsewhere in the non-Western world — has come under increasing scrutiny in recent years (Boehm 1993; Flanagan and Rayner 1988; Flanagan 1989; Woodburn 1982). Even so, despite this newfound interest, compared to ʺhierarchyʺ, notions of equality have been far less explored in the anthropological literature. Part of the reason is almost certainly as Flanagan (1989:261) suggests: that equality tends to be ʺnaturalizedʺ in the social sciences and so regarded as the proto-cultural condition out of which structures of inequality are presumed to have developed by evolutionary differentiation (cf. Fried 1967).

4 Embodiment, Transcendence, and Contingency: from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) JUNG MATTHIAS
Abstract: The process most often invoked in describing the hallmark of the Axial Age—or, to circumvent tricky problems of timing and synchronicity, of the Axial cultures—is the “discovery of transcendence.” “Transcendence,” however, covers a wide range of meanings. When applied to the distinction between our cognitive grasp of the world and its internal structure, for example, it denotes an epistemological conviction that is entirely neutral with regard to religious truth claims. The Axial Age debate emphasizes another aspect: it takes the religions and philosophical worldviews developed in the Axial cultures to be focused on a transcendent realm, a divine

18 The Heritage of the Axial Age: from: The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) BELLAH ROBERT N.
Abstract: In this volume the contributors are focusing on the Axial Age and my chapter will do likewise. However, my work on the Axial Age comes out of a larger project concerning religion in human evolution from the Paleolithic to the Axial Age.¹ I will therefore begin with a word about evolution itself as a concept. I assume that none of the contributors to this volume has a problem with the theory of biological evolution, even though we may have some different ways of interpreting it. Problems arise when we speak of social and cultural evolution: Is that even a valid

Book Title: Religion in Human Evolution- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Bellah Robert N.
Abstract: This ambitious book probes our biological past to discover the kinds of lives that human beings have imagined were worth living. Bellah’s theory goes deep into cultural and genetic evolution to identify a range of capacities (communal dancing, storytelling, theorizing) whose emergence made religious development possible in the first millennium BCE.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbstq

1 Religion and Reality from: Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Many scholars ask whether the very word “religion” is too culture-bound to be used in historical and cross-cultural comparison today. I cannot avoid the question, but for practical purposes I will use the term, because for the philosophical and sociological traditions upon which this book draws, the idea of religion has been central. The justification for its use will depend more on the persuasiveness of the argument of the book as a whole than on a definition; nonetheless definitions help to get things started. In the Preface I offered a simplified version of Geertz’s definition; here I will begin again

7 The Axial Age II: from: Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Ancient Greece would seem to be the easy case when it comes to the axial age. Greece gave rise to a form of democracy based on decisions made after rational argument in the assembly; to philosophy, including formal logic (second-order reasoning); to at least the beginnings of science based on evidence and argument; not to mention that it also gave rise to extraordinary artistic and literary achievements. Some have been so overwhelmed by the culture of ancient Greece as to imagine a “Greek miracle” emerging, without forerunners or rivals, full-blown from the head of Zeus so to speak. The Greeks

CHAPTER SIX Magians and Dervishes from: Stranger Magic
Abstract: The Arabian Nightsconjured an enchanted virtual world that could be safely entered and explored, accepted and naturalised by the Enlightenment and modern reader and writer precisely because they often unfold in an elsewhere that is different from the native habitat of Judaeo-Christian demons and eschatological visions. A home-grown practice of, and belief in, magic was set aside to be replaced by foreign magic – stranger magic, much easier to disown, or otherwise hold in intellectual and political quarantine.

3 What Do the Science-Makers Do? from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: Notably underrepresented in the deliberations of the Pareto circle were Harvard’s psychologists. When Henderson’s seminar commenced in 1932, the institutional status of psychology at Harvard was just as uncertain as that of sociology, anthropology, and business administration. Since the 1870s, when William James established in Cambridge the nation’s first psychological laboratory, psychology at Harvard had existed in “forced cohabitation” with philosophy.¹ Very much the junior partner in this alliance, psychology would not attain independent departmental standing until 1934. Yet, marginal figures though they were, Harvard psychologists of the interwar decades—especially Edwin G. Boring, Karl Lashley, B. F. Skinner, and

5 The Levellers: from: Working Knowledge
Abstract: W. V. Quine’s response to logical empiricism was notable for its neglect of the Unity of Science movement. Neither Rudolf Carnap’s program of the Logic of Science nor Otto Neurath’s grandiose attempts to orchestrate a working alliance of the sciences registered strongly at Depression-era Harvard. Nevertheless, as S. S. Stevens’s organization of the Science of Science Discussion Group made clear, members of Harvard’s interstitial academy were deeply concerned with matters of cross-disciplinary communication and coordination. This was evident from Quine’s conviction that logic, natural science, and philosophy had important things to say to one another. The problem of interdisciplinary understanding

CONCLUSION TO PART I from: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: If, as a result of his attempt to draw ontological conclusions from phenomenology, one is tempted to accuse Marcel of philosophical inconsistency, it should be noted that this is not in fact so unusual; phenomenology in general has been criticized for this. Wood explains: ‘Phenomenology could never have had any interest unless its descriptions of the structures of consciousness had a value that went beyond their being an accurate account of subjective phenomena. That value lay in what was always assumed to be the epistemological and ultimately ontological significance of consciousness’ (1989: 324–25).¹ Indeed, in theory, phenomenology was to

CHAPTER 3 Narrative Time from: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Part I suggested the theory of time which underwrites Marcel’s philosophy to be problematic, for although he plainly declares his lack of interest in its ontology, he nevertheless is concerned with human Being. Owing to the temporal character of human existence, time is thus necessarily bound up with Marcel’s ontological investigations. The conclusions he draws from his phenomenological approches concrètes, which make reference to both an experience of finitude and of eternity, therefore (indirectly) reify what Marcel only intended to be a phenomenological distinction between time and eternity. As such, Marcel’s philosophy of time emerges as paradoxically concerned, and unconcerned,

CHAPTER 5 Time and God from: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: If Chapter 3 suggested that a Ricœurian reading of Marcel might be possible, this was also inspired by similarities identified between Marcel and Augustine, whose philosophy of time Ricœur drew upon to support his argument that phenomenological and cosmological time are incommensurable. If Augustine’s concern with time is philosophical,¹ however, it is also linked to his religious outlook — just as, this chapter will suggest, might be argued for Marcel. However, this theological aspect is rather neglected in Ricœur’s interpretation of Augustine. For Ricœur, God’s eternity in Book XI of the Confessionsmerely functions as time’s Other, intensifying and deepening our

Book Title: The Signifying Self-Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Henry Melanie
Abstract: The Signifying Self: Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic offers a comprehensive analysis of all eight of Cervantes's Ocho comedias (published 1615), moving beyond conventional anti-Lope approaches to Cervantine dramatic practise in order to identify what, indeed, his theatre promotes. Considered on its own aesthetic terms, but also taking into account ontological and socio-cultural concerns, this study compels a re-assessment of Cervantes's drama and conflates any monolithic interpretations which do not allow for the textual interplay of contradictory and conflicting discourses which inform it. Cervantes's complex and polyvalent representation of freedom underpins such an approach; a concept which is considered to be a leitmotif of Cervantes's work but which has received scant attention with regards to his theatre. Investigation of this topic reveals not only Cervantes's rejection of established theatrical convention, but his preoccupation with the difficult relationship between the individual and the early modern Spanish world. Cervantes's comedias emerge as a counter-perspective to dominant contemporary Spanish ideologies and more orthodox artistic imaginings. Ultimately, The Signifying Self seeks to recuperate the Ocho comedias as a significant part of the Cervantine, and Golden-Age, canon and will be of interest and benefit to those scholars who work on Cervantes and indeed on early modern Spanish theatre in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc86q

9 It Happened Here: from: Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Political commentary is always replete with exaggerations; it fits the need of the culture industry. Even great thinkers like Karl Marx and Theodor Adorno tended to take the experience of a crucial historical moment and extrapolate its most dramatic implications into the future; it’s a natural inclination. But the victory of George W. Bush in the presidential election of 2004 is pregnant with the most ominous economic, political, and ideological developments. The onus does not simply fall on “capital” in an election that cost nearly $4 billion and in which roughly the same amount of cash was spent on both

Savage Nations: from: The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Moses Michael Valdez
Abstract: It is a commonplace of contemporary film criticism that Native Americans have historically been ill served by the American western, a genre in which they have been misrepresented and demeaned.¹ For those who regard an honest and impartial portrayal of historically oppressed minorities as a moral if not an aesthetic imperative, the American western will offer little in the way of spiritual uplift. But if the American western fails to offer an objective ethnological depiction of indigenous peoples (assuming that such a thing were both possible and desirable), it nonetheless invites a philosophic consideration of the problematics of alterity, an

7. Why the Classics Today? from: In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: We live in a fast-paced age; in fact, the pace of change—at least in the so-called advanced societies—seems to be constantly increasing. Technological innovations that were unheard of just a few decades ago are briskly overturned and rendered obsolete by newer inventions of still more staggering magnitude. Using the parlance of videotapes, some observers have described our age as moving in “fast-forward.” The question that remains to be pondered, however, is whether speed is an adequate gauge for the quality of human life. Clearly, no matter how germane it is to certain technical developments, fastness by itself does

Imagining the Future, Contemplating the Past: from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Palmer R. Barton
Abstract: A defining feature of science fiction is that such works of imaginative realism (a potent stylistic brew of perhaps irreconcilable elements) speculate about some future age or alternative, extraterrestrial world. That imagined place and time is characterized essentially by “advancements” in science that plausibly explore the consequences of what is now known and actively researched (in such areas as artificial intelligence, genetic manipulation, space travel, pharmacology, and so forth). The difference between the reader’s implied present and the postulated alternative results from the technological manipulation of the natural environment and human experience that such acquired knowledge makes possible.

Disenchantment and Rebellion in Alphaville from: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Woolfolk Alan
Abstract: Jean-Luc Godard’s Alphaville, une étrange aventure de Lemmy Caution(1965) appears on first viewing to be a typical variation of a classic science fiction film in which humanity has been invaded and is threatened with complete colonization by an alien force—in this case an alien computer, Alpha 60, which rules in the name of scientific logic. Indeed, Godard’s film even features a deranged scientist-villain, Leonard Von Braun (Howard Vernon), as the chief human agent of this alien colonization who has himself been converted into the apparently perfect scientific-technocratic man without a trace of human emotion. However, the deeper theme

Problems of Memory and Identity in Neo-Noir’s Existentialist Antihero from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Spicer Andrew
Abstract: One of the most arresting traits of film noir is its depiction of male protagonists who lack the qualities (courage, incorruptibility, tenacity, and dynamism) that characterize the archetypal American hero and who therefore function as antiheroes. Typical noir male protagonists are weak, confused, unstable, and ineffectual, damaged men who suffer from a range of psychological neuroses and who are unable to resolve the problems they face. Noir’s depiction of its male protagonists—what Frank Krutnik calls its “pervasive problematising of masculine identity”—is expressive of a fundamentally existentialist view of life.¹ As Robert Porfirio argues, noir’s “nonheroic hero” is such

Justice and Moral Corruption in A Simple Plan from: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Skoble Aeon J.
Abstract: At the start of the neo-noir film A Simple Plan(Sam Raimi, 1998), Hank Mitchell (Bill Paxton) has a good life and is happy and well-adjusted. When he, his brother, Jacob (Billy Bob Thornton), and their friend Lou (Brent Briscoe) find a large bag of cash from what they deduce was a criminal enterprise, they hatch a “simple plan” that will enable them to keep it and enrich themselves, which they think will increase their happiness. The devastation that ensues, not just in terms of body count, but also in terms of moral and psychological decay, follows Plato’s analysis of

9 Common property regimes in Aboriginal Australia: from: The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Rose Deborah Bird
Abstract: In the closing years of the twentieth century, debates in Australia about Indigenous institutions of common property ownership and management are inseparable from the highly political issues of Native Title. In this chapter I intend to move beyond debates about the politics of land tenure and toward an analysis of a dynamic jurisprudence of duty in which responsibilities and rights are considered together. I will examine totemism as a common property institution for long-term ecological management. The purpose is to describe and analyse this Indigenous regime in order to examine some of the principles which inform it. The implications of

CHAPTER 1 Feminist Theological Hermeneutics from: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: Anthropologically, human existence and human knowledge are closely bound to

CHAPTER 8 Arriving at a Christocentric Universe from: In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Delio Ilia
Abstract: From where does a theological vision begin? What gives rise to theological insight and, in particular, to my insight? I ask these questions not only as a matter of self-reflection but out of wondrous surprise that I am a theologian because, truth be told, I never intended to be one. Unlike the typical theology student finely tuned in philosophy, theology, and classical languages, I was a hard-core student of science who took only the necessary courses in theology and philosophy to meet the requirements of my undergraduate institution. As a science major I believed that science held the key to

Epilogue from: In Search of the Whole
Abstract: These twelve essays have several things in common. For one, they are eminently original. The authors have plumbed their inimitable subjectivities in ways that make them accessible to the reader. This volume is a case of the multiplication of the loaves or, to mix metaphors, an instance of what can be produced when a haunting is moved by a hunting that can locate its catch with words. I read these authors through a theological lens and do so unapologetically. So I see their haunted hunting representing twelve unique cuts into the catholicity of the mind and its fecundity when it

Introduction from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: In 1988 pope john paul ii put the following questions to the participants of a conference held in Rome to study the relationships between evolution and religion: “Does an evolutionary perspective bring any light to bear upon theological anthropology, the meaning of the human person as the imago Dei, the problem of Christology—and even upon the development of doctrine itself?” The pope was obviously aware that pursuing these and similar questions raised by the development of evolutionary science could stir the depths of Christian theology and required serious dialogue between theology and science. Engaging in such study, he observed,

CHAPTER TWO Evolution, Altruism, and the Image of God from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: As discussed in the last chapter, Pope John Paul II once asked a series of challenging theological questions regarding evolution: “Does an evolutionary perspective bring any light to bear upon theological anthropology, the meaning of the human person as the imago Dei, the problem of Christology—and even upon the development of doctrine itself?”¹ This chapter aims to answer the question whether an evolutionary perspective can throw any new light on the meaning of the Christian doctrine of the imago Dei, or of the human person as created in the image of God. A major puzzle for many sociobiologists in

CHAPTER THREE The Evolutionary Achievement of Jesus from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: In the previous chapter I offered a response to a question that Pope John Paul II once addressed to evolutionary science, whether an evolutionary perspective would throw any light on Christian beliefs, specifically on the significance of the human person as created in the image of God. In answer, I proposed that human altruism, which puzzles many evolutionary scientists, can provide a theological link between God and his human creature in that altruism originates in the life of the divine Trinity of persons as they interact in self-donation to each other and are operative in the work of creation, and

CHAPTER FIVE Seeking a New Paradigm from: Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: Examining the traditional Christian doctrines of original sin, the fall of humanity, and concupiscence reveals that these beliefs have been heavily influenced by a Jewish culture that was preoccupied in ascribing all human sufferings, including death, to divine punishment for human sins. As the acceptance of evolution and closer theological and historical examination make it unnecessary to continue to subscribe to these traditional beliefs, it becomes apparent that another line of explanation is required to account for human ills and tragedies, and for God’s part in these, and this chapter is devoted to exploring what shape such a change of

Book Title: Building a Better Bridge-Muslims, Christians, and the Common Good
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Ipgrave Michael
Abstract: Building a Better Bridgeis a record of the fourth "Building Bridges" seminar held in Sarajevo in 2005 as part of an annual symposium on Muslim-Christian relations cosponsored by Georgetown University and the Archbishop of Canterbury. This volume presents the texts of the public lectures with regional presentations on issues of citizenship, religious believing and belonging, and the relationship between government and religion-both from the immediate situation in Bosnia-Herzegovina and from three contexts further afield: Britain, Malaysia, and West Africa. Both Christian and Muslim scholars propose key questions to be faced in addressing the issue of the common good. How do we approach the civic sphere as believers in particular faiths and as citizens of mixed societies? What makes us who we are, and how do our religious and secular allegiances relate to one another? How do we accommodate our commitment to religious values with acknowledgment of human disagreement, and how can this be expressed in models of governance and justice? How are we, mandated by scriptures to be caretakers, to respond to the current ecological and economic disorder of our world? Michael Ipgrave and his contributors do not claim to provide definitive answers to these questions, but rather they further a necessary dialogue and show that, while Christian and Islamic understandings of God may differ sharply and perhaps irreducibly, the acknowledgment of one another as people of faith is the surest ground on which to build trust, friendship, and cooperation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt50w

Chapter 3 Caring Together for the World We Share from: Building a Better Bridge
Author(s) Nayed Aref Ali
Abstract: The four essays presented in this chapter all address, in light of the Christian and Muslim faiths, the interaction of human communities with the world all share. While rooted in the distinctive affirmations of their respective religious traditions, all four can be described as being in the broad sense ecumenical in that their field of vision is the whole inhabited world, the oikoumene. Moreover, they focus on two particularly urgent areas of concern that arise from humans’ dwelling together in the shared home, the oikos, which is the world. Thus Rowan Williams and Tim Winter both tackle the theological challenge

Book Title: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): REGAN ETHNA
Abstract: What are human rights? Can theology acknowledge human rights discourse? Is theological engagement with human rights justified? What place should this discourse occupy within ethics? Ethna Regan seeks to answer these questions about human rights, Christian theology, and philosophical ethics. The main purpose of this book is to justify and explore theological engagement with human rights. Regan illustrates how that engagement is both ecumenical and diverse, citing the emerging engagement with human rights discourse by evangelical theologians in response to the War on Terror. The book examines where the themes and concerns of key modern theologians-Karl Rahner, J. B. Metz, Jon Sobrino, and Ignacio Ellacuría-converge with the themes and concerns of those committed to the advancement of human rights. Regan also critically engages with the "disdain" for rights discourse that is found in the postliberal critiques of John Milbank and Stanley Hauerwas. This interdisciplinary volume will be of interest to students and scholars in the fields of systematic theology, theological ethics, human rights, religion and politics, and political theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt5jm

Introduction from: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: The discourse of human rights has emerged as the dominant moral discourse of our time. Reflecting on this often contentious discourse, with both its enthusiasts and detractors, led me to consider the following questions: What constitutes an intelligible definition of human rights? What place should this discourse occupy within ethics? Can theology acknowledge human rights discourse? How is theological engagement with human rights justified? What are the implications of the convergence of what are two potentially universalizable discourses?

Chapter Five Rights-Holders or Beggars? from: Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Defining and locating human rights discourse as a boundary discourse prevents it from eclipsing other forms of ethical, political, or theological discourse. The argument

2 The Remediation of Storytelling: from: Telling Stories
Author(s) BAUMAN RICHARD
Abstract: FROM THE LATE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY and the first scholarly recognition of oral tradition as a cultural process, there has been a concomitant concern among students of language and expressive culture with the transformative effects of new technologies of communication on oral performance. One facet of the problem that has concerned scholars of oral narrative from the Brothers Grimm to the theorists of ethnopoetics and the orality-literacy debates is the process of remediation, specifically, the rendering of face-to-face performance forms through the mediation of another communicative technology.¹ What happens when we render oral stories in writing? What are the epistemological, cognitive,

Book Title: The Sexual Person-Toward a Renewed Catholic Anthropology
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Lawler Michael G.
Abstract: Two principles capture the essence of the official Catholic position on the morality of sexuality: first, that any human genital act must occur within the framework of heterosexual marriage; second, each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life. In this comprehensive overview of Catholicism and sexuality, theologians Todd A. Salzman and Michael G. Lawler examine and challenge these principles. Remaining firmly within the Catholic tradition, they contend that the church is being inconsistent in its teaching by adopting a dynamic, historically conscious anthropology and worldview on social ethics and the interpretation of scripture while adopting a static, classicist anthropology and worldview on sexual ethics. While some documents from Vatican II, like Gaudium et spes("the marital act promotes self-giving by which spouses enrich each other"), gave hope for a renewed understanding of sexuality, the church has not carried out the full implications of this approach. In short, say Salzman and Lawler: emphasize relationships, not acts, and recognize Christianity's historically and culturally conditioned understanding of human sexuality.The Sexual Persondraws historically, methodologically, and anthropologically from the best of Catholic tradition and provides a context for current theological debates between traditionalists and revisionists regarding marriage, cohabitation, homosexuality, reproductive technologies, and what it means to be human. This daring and potentially revolutionary book will be sure to provoke constructive dialogue among theologians, and between theologians and the Magisterium.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt69p

CHAPTER NINE Understanding and Neighborliness from: Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: It should be clear by now that I am practicing a form of intellectual self-restraint in these pages, one with roots in the phenomenological tradition of religious studies.¹ By deferring global judgments of truth or superiority in favor of one or the other figure (although not eschewing specific criticisms and evaluative choices), I have built up detailed accounts of Xunzi’s and Augustine’s views of personal formation, articulated in relation to each other and to some modern ethical theory. The interpretations offered suggest that despite both their broad apparent similarities regarding the ethical dangers of human nature and the need for

CHAPTER VI The “Principle of Insufficient Reason” and the Right to Nonsense from: Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: Ludwig boltzmann, who considered Darwinian theory a decisive triumph of the “mechanical” in the field of the biological sciences, and who was a declared partisan and enthusiast of determinism in general and of mental determinism in particular, wrote that:

CHAPTER 3 Violence from: The Furies
Abstract: Violence is as inseparable from revolution and counterrevolution as these are from each other. Violence has, of course, many faces and purposes. Certainly not all violence in revolution is ideologically driven and, by that token, excessive and boundless. Although violence is inherent to revolution, it is not unique to it. Nor is it as rare as revolution itself. Violence is basic to society and polity, especially to their foundation and consolidation. At the creation there is often recourse to war, which, like revolution, is “inconceivable outside the domain of violence.”¹ The founding myth of nearly every society or state romanticizes

1. Being in the World: from: Being in the World
Abstract: Our age of globalization conjures up a host of challenging problems, mostly of a cultural, economic, and political nature. A steadily expanding literature deals with these problems. What is not often noticed is that globalization also harbors terminological and semantic quandaries. We know at least since Copernicus and Galileo that our Earth is a “globe” and not a flattened landscape. Given this knowledge, what does it mean that our habitat is “globalized” in our time? Surely, its physical “global” shape is not modified. In aggravated form, similar semantic problems beset other terms often used as equivalents: like worldorearth.

Book Title: Faulkner-Masks and Metaphors
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Hönnighausen Lothar
Abstract: Instead, this critical study by one of the most acclaimed international Faulkner scholars takes its cue from Nietzsche's concept of "truth as a mobile army of metaphors" and from Ricoeur's dynamic view of metaphor and treats the wearing of masks not as an ontological issue but as a matter of discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvc5d

INTRODUCTION from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities: An Ethnomusicological Perspectiveexplores the strong existence of a world music ensemble and genre in the American academy. For, ever since Mantle Hood’s introduction of world music ensembles into the ethnomusicology program at the University of California at Los Angeles in the early 1960s, West African drumming and dance have gradually become part of the soundscapes and cultural lives of other institutions. Beginning in 1964 at both UCLA and Columbia University,¹ a good number of North American universities have vigorously and wholeheartedly embraced the teaching, learning, promotion, support, performance, and reception

POSTSCRIPT from: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: This book reverberates a body of phenomenological truths about traditional African music, and these include West African dance drumming (1) is one of Africa’s most compelling expressive art forms, (2) is the most researched subject matter (specifically, its rhythmic structure), (3) was a suppressed genre during the period of slavery in parts of the African diaspora, and (4) is a resurrected genre in the North American academy under the auspices of ethnomusicology and world music. And although the fourth point is the central focus of this book, my awareness and/or partial discussion of the other preceding truths have helped me

Introduction from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Abstract: Like all medieval biblical commentaries, Aquinas’s Commentary on John consists to a significant degree in speculative theological questioning inspired by the biblical text. Proceeding on the assumption that it would not have been possible for St. John to have written what he wrote without the ecclesial light of faith and without engaging speculative questions, Aquinas’s commentary recommends a similar movement in the thought of the biblical interpreter: speculative thinking about divine realities emerges from within biblical exegesis itself. The circular movement from biblical exegesis to speculative theology and back again must be a continual one for the health of both

THREE Biblical Exegesis and the Speculative Doctrine of the Trinity in St. Thomas Aquinas’s from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Emery Gilles
Abstract: The theological exposition of the Gospel of St. John is certainly to be considered the most fully complete and most profound commentary that St. Thomas Aquinas has left us.¹ According to M.-D. Philippe, the Commentary on St. John is “the theological work par excellence of St. Thomas”: this commentary enables us to enter into the theological intelligence of St. Thomas, even better than does the Summa theologiae or the Summa contra gentiles.² This special value of the Commentary on the Gospel of St. John is to be found notably in the importance of the speculative developments of the biblical exposition,

FOUR What Does the Spirit Have to Do? from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Marshall Bruce D.
Abstract: From the West as well as the East, among Roman Catholics as well as Protestants, Christian theologians now regularly suggest that western theology suffers from a “pneumatological deficit.” The Western theological tradition accounts for the temporal actions of the triune God, so these critics worry, without giving the Holy Spirit anything to do. In contrast to the Father and especially the Son, the Spirit has no action of his own, and no property, effect, or relationship to us that is unique to him. As a result, the Spirit himself tends to vanish.¹ Where we should expect traditional theology to speak

FIVE Does the Paschal Mystery Reveal the Trinity? from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Levering Matthew
Abstract: When a biblical scholar such as N. T. Wright, a confessing Christian with a deserved reputation for theological depth, faults Patristic and medieval theology for a distortion of the biblical portrait of God, his argument deserves attention from theologians.¹ This is even more the case when his view corresponds to a movement in Protestant (Barth, Moltmann) and Catholic (Mühlen, Balthasar) Trinitarian theology to employ the Paschal mystery of Jesus Christ as the fundamental datum for speculation into the life of the Trinity.² Anne Hunt, in her study of this theological movement, speaks for many of these theologians in arguing that

SIX The Analogy of Mission and Obedience from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Waldstein Michael
Abstract: Obedientia est maxima virtutum, “Obedience is the greatest of all virtues,” St. Thomas Aquinas says, citing Gregory the Great with approval.¹ At least, as he is careful to point out in another place, it is the greatest of all the moral virtues. Only the theological virtues are greater.² Again citing Gregory he says, Obedientia non tam est virtus quam mater omnium virtutum, “Obedience is not so much a virtue, but the mother of all the virtues.”³ Or in a more sweeping judgment, Omne bonum, quantumcumque bonum est per se, per obedientiam redditur melius, “Every good, however good it is in

SEVEN Creation in St. Thomas Aquinas’s from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Burrell David B.
Abstract: It will hardly seem strange to remind ourselves that appropriating Aquinas for our times may well require deconstructing appropriations effected in other intellectual climes, especially those of the last century. Indeed, an outstanding note of these earlier readings had been their unilateral focus on Aquinas the philosopher, generating a fast distinction between “philosophy” and “theology”—a distinction that hardened into an institutional separation between such faculties in Catholic colleges and universities. There emerged a bridging discipline, to be sure, called “natural theology,” which purported to treat theological issues from “reason alone.” Yet the issues so treated—typically the existence of

FIFTEEN Anti-Docetism in Aquinas’s from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Gondreau Paul
Abstract: Biblical scholars have long noted the anti-docetic overtones of John’s Gospel. These overtones targeted the latent tendencies in the primitive Christian community to deny, in varying degrees, the reality of Christ’s humanity. (From the Greek δoκέω, “to seem,” docetism, which was the first great challenge to Christological faith, alleges that Christ only appeared to have come in the flesh.)¹ What is less known, and what remains one of the most unappreciated elements of his thought, is St. Thomas’s own rather pronounced anti-docetism.² Aquinas’s anti-docetism is borne out of his reading of the New Testament, and in particular of the Gospel

SIXTEEN Aquinas and Christ’s Resurrection from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Valkenberg Pim
Abstract: When I published a revised version of my dissertation on Place and Function of Holy Scripture in the Theology of St. Thomas Aquinas, I realized that the choice of this subject was to a large extent determined by the ecumenical atmosphere of my theological education at the Catholic Theological University of Utrecht, now the home of the Thomas Institute at Utrecht.¹ First, therefore, let me make some preliminary remarks on the theological significance of reading John with Aquinas, issuing from my present theological position at the Catholic University of Nijmegen, in which I am involved in interreligious dialogue and the

SEVENTEEN “That the Faithful Become the Temple of God” from: Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Bauerschmidt Frederick Christian
Abstract: Where did Thomas Aquinas put his ecclesiology? Theologians today generally accept the claim that Thomas has no “ecclesiology” as we would understand that term, by which I mean that he never takes up the Church as a distinct locus for comprehensive theological discussion.¹ Did the famously absent-minded saint simply misplace it? One searches the Summa theologiae in vain for a treatise de ecclesiae.² The situation seems even less promising in his Commentary on the Gospel of St. John, where the commentary genre itself does not tend to the systematic treatment of anything. Yet this does not mean that Thomas’s commentary

2 Insight and the Self-Correcting Process of Learning from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: The previous chapter considered Lonergan’s understanding of the cosmos as a self-transcending, hierarchical order governed by emergent probability. Human beings are part of this cosmos. We have emerged from the creative world process of emergent probability. As a relatively late, higher-level emergence, humanity is a complex entity subject to both classical and statistical laws on multiple levels of being: physical, chemical, biological, and more uniquely human levels. With the advent of humanity two significant new things arrive in creation: (1) a creature’s ability to discover and work with classical and statistical laws, and thus to guide and accelerate emergent probability,

3 Transcendental Method: from: The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: As we learned from the cosmological context of Lonergan’s anthropology, the world is ordered into a dynamic, interdependent hierarchy. Lower levels of recurrent schemes set the conditions for the more or less probable emergence and survival of higher recurrent schemes. Higher levels depend on the lower levels, but they also transcend or go beyond them. And they do so in a way that sublates the lower ones, or lifts them up into a greater, richer context that preserves and fulfills them. Lower levels are more essential to the whole, and higher levels are more excellent.

Muḥammad ʿAbduh (1849–1905) from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) ʿAbduh Muḥammad
Abstract: The europeans believe that there is no difference between the doctrine of destiny and fate ( al-qaḍāʾ wa al-qadar) and the doctrine of the theological school of the Predestinarians (al-Jabrīyya), who say that the human being is compelled absolutely in all of his acts. They imagine that with the doctrine of destiny (al-qaḍāʾ) Muslims see themselves as a feather floating in the air and buffeted by the wind wherever it goes. Indeed, if it were to occur to the minds of people that they have no choice in word or deed or in motion or rest, and that all of this

Muḥammad ʿAbduh: from: Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) CORNELL VINCENT J.
Abstract: Chronologically the earliest of the Muslim reformers to be discussed in this volume, Muḥammad ʿAbduh is the most ambiguous in terms of understanding the full extent of his legacy in the century since his death. With the possible exception of his teacher and political mentor Jamāl al-Dīn al-Afghānī (1838–97), he is arguably the most overinterpreted figure in modern Islamic thought. Indeed, it may be useful to think of ʿAbduh as the “Illustrated Man” of contemporary Sunnī Islam. Much as with the figure that is the frame device for Ray Bradbury’s classic work of science fiction,¹ the stories that are

2 Therapeutic Modernism: from: Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) NGUYEN VINH-KIM
Abstract: I trained under Margaret Lock in the years after she published her seminal work Encounters with Aging(1993). After three years of practising full-time as an emergency and HIV physician, the grind of medical practice had left me longing for an approach that went beyond the clinical or epidemiological sciences. Neither helped me make sense of what I saw in the clinic. As I began working in West Africa as a community organizer with HIV groups, most of the anthropological work I encountered viewed the epidemic through the lens of either culture or political economy. The realities I encountered were

3 The Jelly and the Shot: from: Truth Matters
Author(s) WALHOUT MATTHEW
Abstract: Bertrand Russell is reported to have said that there are two kinds of philosopher: one who sees the world as a bowl of jelly and another who sees it as a bucket of shot. Russell considered himself to have undergone a conversion from the former view to the latter in 1898, when he parted ways with his Hegelian friends and began to focus on quantificational logic.¹ He came to believe that in Hegel’s jelly-like world, philosophical analysis did not stand a chance, because things and facts and language were so holistically interconnected and susceptible to dialectical change that no one

9 Truth, Truthfulness, and the I-Self Relationship from: Truth Matters
Author(s) GLAS GERRIT
Abstract: I feel sympathy for the attempt to bring together the notions of truth and truthfulness, as was done in the introductory text to the Truth Matters conference.¹ It is indeed appealing to try to connect the epistemic concept of truth with moral and psychological concepts like truthfulness and trustworthiness.

14 Truth as “Being Trued”: from: Truth Matters
Author(s) REEVE PAMELA J.
Abstract: Truth is usually considered a topic in epistemology, in a philosophical theory of knowledge. The thirteenth-century theologian Thomas Aquinas recognizes this dimension of truth when he defines it primarily as “the conformity of intellect and thing” (conformitas intellectus et rei).² Moreover, Aquinas held that the intellect is able not only to make true judgments about things, but also to know the conformity of its judgments with things, which is to know their truth. There is also another dimension of truth in Aquinas’s thought, which I will call ontological truth. He considers natural things to be true in relation to the

1 Rhetoric and Hermeneutics from: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Weinsheimer Joel
Abstract: In the context of lectures to the Jungius Society, one could scarcely pick a theme that sounds more inapposite than that of rhetoric and hermeneutics. For what distinguishes Jungius—and not just in the eyes of Leibniz, who entered into genuine partnership with this great pathbreaker of seventeenth-century science—is a decisive departure from dialectical and hermeneutic modes of proceeding and a turn toward empiricism and demonstrative logic (albeit purged of slavish devotion to Aristotle). Jungius was not simply raised in the culture of humanistic pedagogy grounded on dialectic and rhetoric; later he still ascribed it propaedeutic value and viewed

7 Humanism and the Resistance to Theory from: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Kahn Victoria
Abstract: In a seminal 1982 article Paul de Man claimed that the resistance to theory on the part of conservative literary historians and critics is simply the “displaced symptom” of a resistance to theory at the heart of theory itself.¹ Theory in this second sense is defined as metalanguage that takes as its object the rhetorical or tropological dimension of language which inevitably interferes with the cognitive or semantic functions of grammar and logic. Whereas we ordinarily identify theory with a comprehensive system of axioms and principles of deductive reasoning or with a Kantian epistemological critique of the conditions of the

5 Toward a “Materialist” Rhetoric: from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Hill Michael
Abstract: In Walter Benjamin: or, Towards a Revolutionary Criticism, Terry Eagleton identifies two “epistemological options” which circumscribe the nettlesome encounter between antifoundationalist rhetoric and materialist critique. “Either the subject,” he writes, “is wholly on the ‘inside’ of its world of discourse, locked into its philosophico-grammatical forms, its very struggles to distantiate them ‘theoretically’ themselves the mere ruses of power and desire; or it can catapult itself free from this formation to a point of transcendental leverage from which it can discern absolute truth” (131). The termstranscendental, absolute, andfreeare, of course, meant as obvious caveats. Eagleton is trying here

8 Foundational Thuggery and a Rhetoric of Subsumption from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Farmer Frank
Abstract: For some time now, Truth (with a capital T) has acquired a reputation as a fugitive of sorts, a runaway loose on the epistemological mean streets of the old neighborhood. According to a few who claim to have befriended Truth, what makes its capture so difficult is that Truth can assume any number of aliases and disguises, all of which provide it with an uncanny ability to elude those seeking its whereabouts. Occasionally, authorities report that the secret hiding places of Truth have, once and for all, been found out. But such reports, as everybody knows, are forever premature: Truth,

11 History and the Real from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Shepherdson Charles
Abstract: In spite of the difference between English and continental philosophy, there is a link between Michel Foucault and writers like Jonathan Swift, as there was between Nietzsche and Paul Rée: “The first impulse to publish something of my hypotheses concerning the originof morality,” Nietzsche says, “was given to me by a clear, tidy, and shrewd—also precocious—little book in which I encountered for the first time anupside-down and perversespecies of genealogical hypothesis, the genuinely English type …The Origin of the Moral Sensations; its author Dr. Paul Rée” (Nietzsche,Genealogy17–18, emphasis added). Taking this

12 The Subject of Invention: from: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Glejzer Richard R.
Abstract: Over the past decade Medieval Studies has increasingly begun to question overtly the issues surrounding its object—the Middle Ages—in terms of methodology. The studies of Lee Patterson, Paul Zumthor, Norman Cantor, and others begin to consider the ways in which the Middle Ages are constructed as an a priori, where readings of medieval texts are grounded by particular inventionsof the Middle Ages, to borrow Cantor’s title. Questions of medievalism have become central to the medievalist as a way to get outside particular methodological hermeticisms, outside contemporary foundations, whether they be New Critical (which is still very much

Introduction from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: Since its emergence in the seventeenth century, the word hermeneuticshas referred to the science or art of interpretation. Until the end of the nineteenth century, it usually took the form of a theory that promised to lay out the rules governing the discipline of interpretation. Its purpose was predominantly normative, even technical. Hermeneutics limited itself to giving methodological directions to the specifically interpretive sciences, with the end of avoiding arbitrariness in interpretation as far as possible. Virtually unknown to outsiders, it long maintained the status of an “auxiliary discipline” within the established disciplines that concerned themselves with interpreting texts

II Hermeneutics between Grammar and Critique from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: In the introduction I noted that there is good reason not to chart hermeneutic history in a ideological manner. We might better maintain a healthy skepticism toward the widespread idea that hermeneutics came into its own by advancing from a loose collection of interpretive rules to the status of a universal problematic. In reviewing the course of its “prehistory”—called this only because the word hermeneuticswas not yet in use—we have seen that such a teleological view is not borne out. At the same time, the various stages of what came to be called hermeneutics (that is, theory

IV The Problems of Historicism from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: Schleiermacher wanted to limit the theory of the hermeneutic circle to written texts and to the author’s individuality. His purpose was to keep in check the arbitrariness of circle, the power of which, Ast suggested, could no longer be circumscribed. Although the idea of a circle summons up the idea of a fallacy to be avoided, at bottom it rests upon a logical basis: the demand for coherence, that is, for understanding the particular only in the context [Zusammenhang] of the whole to which it belongs. For the nineteenth century, this coherent whole was concretized in the historical context of

VI Gadamer and the Universe of Hermeneutics from: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: In making language the essence of hermeneutics Gadamer clearly follows the later Heidegger’s radicalization of historical thrownness. His aim, however, is to reconcile this radicalization with the young Heidegger’s hermeneutical starting point, namely, understanding. Specifically, given that we are situated in a history articulated in linguistic tradition, what are the consequences for human understanding and self-knowledge? These consequences are elaborated in “The Ontological Shift of Hermeneutics Guided by Language,” the title of the last third of Gadamer’s magnum opus, Truth and Method. To understand what this ontological or universal shift in hermeneutics implies, we need to return to the underlying

Excerpt from ʺArt in New Yorkʺ from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROTHKO MARK
Abstract: “The portrait has always been linked in my mind with a picture of a person. I was therefore surprised to see your paintings of mythological characters with their abstract rendition, in a portrait show, and would therefore be very much interested in your answers to the following— …”

Symbolic Pregnance in Mark Rothko and Clyfford Still from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) KUSPIT DONALD B.
Abstract: Yes, we can continue to ask, for it is the core epistemological question about abstract art, sharply and freshly raised by the works of Rothko and Still, which generate intense sensations and unpredictable meanings and the question of their interrelation. As Michel Conil-Lacoste wrote of the late Rothko, there are “deux lectures de Rothko: non pas seulement celle du technicien de la coleur, mais aussi celle de l’âme éprise de mysticisme.”¹ The technician of color supplies the raw material of sensation, and the mystic communicates ideal meanings. But how much can the two be said to interweave, when the sensory

Arcadian Nightmares: from: Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) MARTER JOAN M.
Abstract: David Smith and Dorothy Dehner and their years together at Bolton Landing rival the dramatic accounts of many artist-couples, given the volatile temperament of Smith, the physicality of his work, Dehner’s determination to survive, and her vital imagery.¹ Marriages far less tumultuous have been fodder for books on the Abstract Expressionists. The De Koonings have been discussed in several publications: their drinking habits and romantic liaisons exposed, while no attempt was made to explore the relevance of their personal lives to their artistic achievements.² In Andrea Gabor’s Einstein’s Wife, Lee Krasner’s physiognomy and Jackson Pollock’s alcoholism and psychological problems are

CHAPTER 3 The Life of a Jewess from: Hannah Arendt
Abstract: In January 1929 Hannah Arendt attended a masquerade ball in Berlin, a bal de Parissponsored for fund-raising by a group of Marxists who were trying to keep a small political magazine afloat. The dance was held at the Museum of Ethnology, and the guests came in suitably ethnological costumes—Hannah Arendt as an Arab harem girl. She spent the evening with the young Jewish philosopher Günther Stern, whom she had not seen since he attended Heidegger’s 1925 Marburg seminar as a postdoctoral student.

Chapter 3 The Emergence of Objectivity from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The lively cosmological speculations of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries discussed in the previous chapter lacked, for the most part, the method and scientific discipline of such late-medieval thinkers as Buridan, Oresme, and Autrecourt. But they may have influenced the scientific movement in a substantial albeit indirect way. Platonic speculation on the sun as symbol of the mind may seem unrelated to the development of a scientific cosmology. Yet as Hans Blumenberg has shown, it removed the principal philosophical obstacle that barred the way toward the acceptance of a heliocentric system. Indeed, such extra-scientific considerations may have spurred Copernicus to

Chapter 8 The Attempted Reunion from: Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In this chapter I will review three major attempts to overcome the theological dualism modern culture inherited from late medieval thought, namely, those of humanist religion, the early Reformation, and Jansenist theology. According to such Christian humanists as Valla, Erasmus, and Ficino, a universal divine attraction sanctifies the natural order and draws it back to its source. Archaic religion, ancient philosophy, Hebrew and Christian revelation—in an order of increasing intensity—all responded to the same divine impulse. Generally speaking, humanism offered more an alternative than an answer to the questions raised by fifteenth-century School theology. Humanists, even when acquainted

5 The Plausibility of the Other Models of Hermeneutic Psychoanalysis from: Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: On the clinical psychoanalysis model, psychoanalysts give interpretations that refer to psychological states, conscious and unconscious, that help explain behavior, and they eschew interpretations that refer to neurophysiological antecedents of behavior. But the interpretations referring to these psychological states are true in

Book Title: Care of the Psyche-A History of Psychological Healing
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): JACKSON STANLEY W.
Abstract: In this book, a distinguished historian of medicine surveys the basic elements that have constituted psychological healing over the centuries. Dr. Stanley W. Jackson shows that healing practices, whether they come from the worlds of medicine, religion, or philosophy, share certain elements that transcend space and time.Drawing on medical writings from classical Greece and Rome to the present, as well as on philosophical and religious writings, Dr. Jackson shows that the basic ingredients of psychological healing-which have survived changes of name, the fall of their theoretical contexts, and the waning of social support in different historical eras-are essential factors in our modern psychotherapies and in healing contexts in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bpqz

1 Introduction from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Several decades of study and teaching in the history of medicine have left me significantly impressed by the recurrent indications of psychological healing endeavors over many centuries. And many years as a practitioner and teacher of psychotherapy have sensitized me to the problems inherent in comparing and contrasting the various approaches to psychotherapy. Why were there such suggestive similarities between thisapproach andthatapproach, and yet why did they still seem so different?

4 The Listening Healer from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Among other things, a healer is commonly a person to whom a sufferer tells things; and, out of his listening, the healer develops the basis for his therapeutic interventions. The psychological healer, in particular, is one who listens in order to learn and to understand; and, from the fruits of this listening, he or she develops the basis for reassuring, advising, consoling, comforting, interpreting, explaining, or otherwise intervening.

5 The Talking Cures from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: In psychological healing, as in much of human interaction in general, talkingis of the essence. It is one of psychological healing’s basic elements, serving the sufferer in conveying vital information about his or her ailments and general state to the healer and playing a crucial role in most of the healer’s therapeutic interactions.

7 Confession and Confiding from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The term confessionis defined as “the disclosing of something the knowledge of which by others is considered humiliating or prejudicial to the person confessing: a making known or acknowledging of one’s fault, wrong, crime, weakness, etc.” Although this definition encompasses matters of special importance in the traditions of both law and religion, it is the religious association that is relevant to the history of psychological healing. In that tradition, it has been considered “a religious act: the acknowledging of sin or sinfulness.” More specifically, it became “auricular confession”: that is, “addressed to the ear; told privately in the ear.”¹

8 Consolation and Comfort from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Consolation—“the act of consoling, cheering, or comforting... alleviation of sorrow or mental distress”¹—would seem to be one of the oldest among the modes of psychological healing. With its verb,to console,defined as “to comfort in mental distress or depression; to alleviate the sorrow of (any one); ‘to free from the sense of misery,’ ” we are discussing a rich tradition of ministering to troubled persons. Distress in response to misfortune has been part of the human story since time immemorial. And one’s fellows’ inclination to respond to that distress with some effort to comfort or console seems

10 The Use of the Imagination from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The imagination served for many centuries as a key element in certain modes of psychological healing of insane and otherwise severely troubled persons. Often enough, this role was extended to a broader range of ailments in a way reminiscent of a modern psychosomatic orientation. Considerable evidence indicates that healing images have been commonly used in shamanistic healing practices across a wide range of cultures¹ and in healing endeavors associated with many religious traditions—in Judaism, Christianity, Islam, and Far Eastern religions.² And as the background to their place in Western psychological therapeutics, the imagination and its images have a long

12 Suggestion from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: As noted in the chapter on mesmerism and hypnotism, the language we associate with healing through suggestion did not emerge until the latter part of the nineteenth century. In the wake of Bernheim’s suggestive therapeuticsin the 1880s, suggestion became a recognized element in psychological healing and has continued as such ever since. To some degree, though, this is misleading, as suggestive influences in healing long antedated the mesmerism and hypnotism out of which suggestion seemed to emerge.

13 Persuasion from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Persuasion is another element in psychological healing that has a long and significant history. With the emergence of the “persuasionists” as significant among the psychotherapeutists of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, it has seemed to some that persuasion was primarily a mode of psychological treatment that had arisen as a challenge to the “suggestionists” of the day. But persuasion as a method long antedated the mesmerists, the hypnotists, and those who practiced suggestive therapeutics. Like suggestion, persuasion was far from a latter-day addition to psychological healing.

18 Overview and Afterthoughts from: Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Much has been made of the culture-bound nature of certain psychological healing practices, on the grounds that they are not easily transferable to another cultural setting, not easily understood by healers in another culture, and not easily compared with its healing practices. The same problems have also been raised in the “cross-cultural” situation of various subcultures within the same larger society; each subculture’s healing practices may well differ in that they cohere around alternative ethnic customs, religious beliefs, or medical views. Similar difficulties can easily arise if one compares psychological healing practices over time. Cultural influences have admittedly shaped practices

Introduction from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: Perhaps not since the Renaissance, when the rhetorical theologies and theological rhetorics of such figures as Thomas More, Desiderius Erasmus, and Philipp Melanchthon drew on the equally rhetorical Saint Augustine, the Church Fathers, and the Bible, have students of rhetoric and religion had so much to say to one another. Since the mid-1980s, primarily in journals but also in an increasing number of books, scholars in one field have been drawing out significant lines of inquiry and posing provocative questions to those in the other: Are rhetoric and religion in some sense “essentially” wedded? In general, what are the rhetorical

7 Erasmus: from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HOFFMANN MANFRED
Abstract: For Erasmus the source of theology is Scripture (and also good literature), and the subject matter of theology is the commonplaces (loci) drawn from the divine wisdom in Scripture (and also from nature). What is more, Christ is the center of Scripture and therefore the central hermeneutical principle of interpretation (even of good literature). But the way Erasmus interpreted Scripture and arranged theology was informed by rhetoric. The present task is, therefore, to explore in detail how interpretation, theology, and rhetoric are intertwined. To begin, it might perhaps help to suggest that Erasmus’s formal principle of interpretation was theological (or

13 Theological Reflections on the Hyperbolic Imagination from: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) WEBB STEPHEN H.
Abstract: The rhetoric of excess conjures up anarchy and deception, but it also shares certain features with religious transcendence and ethical demands and obligations. How do hyperbole, religion, and morality intersect? I shall try to unfold the various layers of rhetorical excess in an attempt to locate the peculiar logic of experiences and claims that suspend the ordinary and expected. The nonconformity of the trope of hyperbole can serve as a model for all discourses that seek the meaningful beyond the grammatical rules that limit the reach of meaning. Yet excess itself must have a context if it is not to

1 Mythistory from: Faces of History
Abstract: “History,” Michel de Certeau writes, “is probably our myth.”¹ According to an old and familiar story, history emerged from myth and purged itself gradually of legendary features until it gained full enlightenment in the age of Machiavelli and Guicciardini—or perhaps Voltaire and Gibbon, or perhaps Mommsen and Ranke, or perhaps the “new” economic, social, and cultural histories of this century, and so on. Or maybe, as Certeau suggests and Hans Blumenberg argues, not. “Sceptical doubt... is a malady which can never be radically cured,” David Hume remarked, and the same can be said (with or without the pathological conceit)

6 Renaissance Retrospection from: Faces of History
Abstract: The Middle Ages, which was itself a terminological creation of Renaissance humanism, had a strong sense of the past, as the work of Dante, torn between pagan and Christian Rome (and wanting to enjoy the best of both worlds), abundantly illustrates. Scholars in the Middle Ages also had an appreciation of classical historiography, including the rhetorical forms and values on which this rested. Yet this historical sense was selective and subordinated to deep religious commitments and inhibitions which frustrated both a discriminating perspective on the ancient world and a clear perception of the differences that separated a remote “antiquity” from

Book Title: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Rosen Stanley
Abstract: In this rich collection of philosophical writings, Stanley Rosen addresses a wide range of topics-from eros, poetry, and freedom to problems like negation and the epistemological status of sense perception. Though diverse in subject, Rosen's essays share two unifying principles: there can be no legitimate separation of textual hermeneutics from philosophical analysis, and philosophical investigation must be oriented in terms of everyday language and experience, although it cannot simply remain within these confines. Ordinary experience provides a minimal criterion for the assessment of extraordinary discourses, Rosen argues, and without such a criterion we would have no basis for evaluating conflicting discourses: philosophy would give way to poetry.Philosophical problems are not so deeply embedded in a specific historical context that they cannot be restated in terms as valid for us today as they were for those who formulated them, the author maintains. Rosen shows that the history of philosophy-a story of conflicting interpretations of human life and the structure of intelligibility-is a story that comes to life only when it is rethought in terms of the philosophical problems of our own personal and historical situation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bsjw

Chapter 5 The Problem of Sense Perception in Platoʹs Philebus from: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: The main part of this essay will consist of a detailed analysis of a short but dense and puzzling passage on sense perception in Plato’s Philebus(38c5 to 39c6 in the Stephanus pagination). As a preface to this analysis, I shall refer briefly to a passage in theTheaetetus. Although I shall give as precise an analysis as I can of the Platonic text, my goal is neither philological nor historical, but theoretical. I want to study the text in question for the light it sheds on the general problem of how to explain our ability to distinguish between true

Chapter 13 Philosophy and Ordinary Experience from: Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: I propose to deal with the question of the relation between philosophy and ordinary experience. This sounds quite straightforward, but I am afraid that it is actually an unusually difficult problem. It is a striking fact of our century that philosophy has become increasingly concerned with ordinary experience, ordinary language, everyday life, or the life-world, to cite four often-used expressions. This concern is evident in both wings of the two major contemporary philosophical movements, which are popularly if inaccurately designated as the analytical and the continental or phenomenological schools. Interest in everyday or ordinary language has clearly been stimulated by

3 Theology, Philosophy, and Christian Self-Description from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: I propose to draw a brief map of modern theology, chiefly Protestant, largely for purposes of locating the spot from which I believe one can most productively explore the relation of hermeneutics—that is, theory of interpretation—not so much to biblical interpretation itself as to the Christian religion. The map I shall draw is not impartial; it is more like the New Yorker’s notorious map of the United States—in which New York City eclipses the Midwest and allows only a glimpse of the West Coast, with China just beyond—than like a segment from the U.S. Geological Survey.

4 Five Types of Theology from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: In the first type that I am proposing, theology as a philosophical disciplinein the academy takes complete priority over Christian self-description within the religious community called the Church, and Christian selfdescription, in its subordinate place, tends to emulate the philosophical character of academic theology by being as general as possible or as little specific about Christianity as it can be, and the distinction between external and internal description is basically unimportant. In Gordon Kaufman’s monograph,An Essay on Theological Method, the task of the theologian is to search out the rules governing the use of the word or concept

5 Some Implications for Biblical Interpretation from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: How does the kind of layout we have prepared for ourselves influence one’s choice or choices in regard to biblical interpretation? A lot depends on what one wishes to do. It is not the case, of course, that one of these types, even if one finds a pure representative for it, will guide us to a right interpretation of the Bible. For let us assume that the notion of a right interpretation of the Bible is itself not meaningless, but it is eschatological. The Christian community is gathered in hope, and that extends to as ordinary a task as that

7 The End of Academic Theology? from: Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: It is necessary to refer again to Karl Barth at this point. He proposed that Christian hermeneutics is a procedure whose taxonomy or phenomenology may be very simply set forth in three logically distinct but in fact united elements: explicatio, meditatio, applicatio. Applicatio, the last of these, is for him the transition from the sense to the use of scriptural texts. In his “rules” for using philosophical schemes or some subjective modality in reading, he was talking aboutmeditatio. The proponents of type 5 may be described as saying thatat best, understanding the Bible—and Christian language more generally

Book Title: On the Nature of Consciousness-Cognitive, Phenomenological, and Transpersonal Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HUNT HARRY T.
Abstract: What is the relation between mystical experience and ordinary consciousness, between the principles of modern physics and the patterns of perception in all moving creatures, between our human self-consciousness and the more primary sentience of protozoa? This book pursues an inquiry into consciousness that ranges from ancient Greece to empirical neuro-psychology to the experiential traditions of introspection and meditation. Harry Hunt begins by reviewing the renewed interest in ordinary consciousness and in altered and transpersonal states of consciousness. He then presents competing views of consciousness in cognition, neurophysiology, and animal psychology, developing a view of perceptual awareness as the core of consciousness potentially shared across species. Hunt next brings together the separate strands of neo-realist approaches to perception and thought, the phenomenology of imagery and synesthesia, and cognitive theories of metaphor. He develops an original cognitive theory of mystical experience that combines Buddhist meditative descriptions of consciousness and Heidegger's sense of Being. In relating both of these to James J. Gibson's views on perception, he avoids the various "new age" supernaturalisms that so often blight the transpersonal literature. Other themes include the relation between consciousness and time; the common perceptual-metaphoric rooting of parallels between consciousness and modern physics; and the communal basis of transpersonal states as reflected in a sociology of mysticism and a reinterpretation of parapsychological research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32btm9

5 Animal Consciousness: from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: If consciousness is always enacted behaviorally in a world and neuronal connectivity instantiates consciousness but does not necessarily explain it, there is every reason to hope that we might come to understand both self-referential consciousness and the primary sentience it reorganizes by studying their likely points of evolutionary emergence. Any attempt, however, to infer forms and levels of consciousness in the activities and sensitive attunements of organisms simpler than ourselves runs immediately into one of the most fundamental debates of modern science. The issue of animal consciousness clearly pits the basic criteria of theoretical parsimony and availability of methodological verification

7 Synesthesia: from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: The idea that synesthesias show the inner side of a cross-modal translation capacity at the base of symbolic cognition offers a solution to one of the oldest disagreements in cognitive psychology — the Würzburg controversy over the underlying nature of thought. The debate is still very much with us in the contrast between those who understand thought as a propositional logic (Pylyshyn, 1984) and those who posit its basis in abstract visual-spatial imagery (Shepard, 1978; Lakoff, 1987; Johnson, 1987).

8 The Multiplicity of Image: from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: Before proceeding further in exploring the varieties of presentational states and their relation to cognitive theory, we must consider the more ordinary forms of visual-spatial imagery and their place in that wider context. After all, it was the initial attempts at empirical laboratory research on visual imagery that were heralded as a “return of the ostracized” (Holt, 1962) — the beginning of modern psychology’s renewed interest in consciousness. Holt, among many others, hoped for a cognitive theory that would include the full range of phenomenological and clinical studies of imagistic states along with a laboratory science of imagery. That is

14 Consciousness as Society from: On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: From the perspective of psychology, the crisis is in our sense of personal meaning and purpose in living. The sociological

Introduction from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: During the first half of the twentieth century, psychoanalysis and its derivatives enjoyed a unique position: they were the only rational psychotherapies supported by a coherent theory of psychological function and psychopathology. This position, combined with the clinical experiences of successful treatments, convinced many people—mental health professionals and nonprofessionals alike—that psychoanalysis was a procedure that could effectively relieve many forms of psychological suffering.

2 What Are the Relevant Measures of Psychoanalytic Outcome? from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Other studies, such as those by Firestein (1978), Pfeffer (1959), and Wallerstein (1986), explore outcomes in terms of multiple aspects of psychological function, such as the ability to love, work, and play, and the development of self-analytic capacities, but the interrelations

3 Predicting the Course and Outcome of Analysis from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Every psychoanalyst of some clinical experience is aware of apparently unpromising analytic situations that turned out well and of analyses that began favorably but ended badly. Often, with benefit of hindsight, it is possible to identify sources of strength or weakness that were not recognized at the outset. Examples of such situations include barely mentioned but psychologically lifesaving relationships in the patient’s early childhood, or disturbances of thinking not manifest in the initial consultation. The analyst’s particular unresolved conflicts that lead to countertransference interferences may impede the ability to work with otherwise promising patients. Sometimes the reasons for unexpected outcomes

5 The Menninger Foundation Psychotherapy Research Project from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Systematic, methodologically informed research about psychoanalytic outcomes began with the Menninger Foundation Psychotherapy Research Project. This project is by far the most comprehensive published systematic study of psychoanalytic outcomes. In addition, it is a landmark in-depth study of the adult lives of disturbed individuals and is one of the most thorough studies of development in any adult population. It began in 1954, under the leadership of Lewis Robbins and Robert Wallerstein, as a naturalistic, longitudinal, prospective study. Its aim was to discover what kinds of changes take place in psychoanalysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy, and how these changes come about. The

[PART III Introduction] from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: In earlier sections of this book we outlined questions about the efficacy, outcomes, and processes of psychoanalysis and summarized the available research data pertinent to these questions. These data show that psychoanalysis is a helpful procedure for many patients. But they do not address a wide range of important issues that we would like to understand better—for example, how the relation of qualities of patients and analysts is reflected in outcome, the relation of psychoanalytic processes and outcome, and the deeper psychological effects of psychoanalysis. Furthermore, each of the systematic investigations we reviewed had technical difficulties. The central problem

15 Information About Patients from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Psychological tests consist of a standardized series of tasks aimed at the reliable and valid assessment of particular psychological

19 Studies of Populations of Patients from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: These questions share a similar logical structure. It is assumed that two (or more) groups can be

20 The Single-Case Method from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: All that we have considered in this volume now brings us to our penultimate point—namely, that single-case methods are the most promising line of approach to exploring the efficacy of psychoanalysis. Case studies differ from case reports in that they employ rigorous and systematic means of collecting, analyzing, and reporting data, with the goal of making the epistemological status of the investigation clear. Case studies explore a single situation in depth and attempt to reach valid conclusions on the basis of such exploration. Because this method is most commonly used to describe complex phenomena, and because many case studies

21 Summary and Overview from: Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: From its founding until the middle of the twentieth century psychoanalysis was unique as a rational system of therapeutics for psychological distress in which intervention was based on a specific understanding of the genesis of the disturbance. The emergence of alternative rational therapeutics in combination with the promise of treatments requiring

Book Title: Paul and Scripture-Extending the Conversation
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Stanley Christopher D.
Abstract: This book, which grew out of the Society of Biblical Literature’s Paul and Scripture Seminar, explores some of the methodological problems that have arisen during the last few decades of scholarly research on the apostle Paul’s engagement with his ancestral Scriptures. Essays explore the historical backgrounds of Paul’s interpretive practices, the question of Paul’s “faithfulness" to the context of his biblical references, the presence of Scripture in letters other than the Hauptbriefe, and the role of Scripture in Paul’s theology. All of the essays look at old questions through new lenses in an effort to break through scholarly impasses and advance the debate in new directions. The contributors are Matthew W. Bates, Linda L. Belleville, Roy E. Ciampa, Bruce N. Fisk, Stephen E. Fowl, Leonard Greenspoon, E. Elizabeth Johnson, Mitchell M. Kim, Steve Moyise, Jeremy Punt, Christopher D. Stanley, and Jerry L. Sumney.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bzfp

Scripture and Other Voices in Paul’s Theology from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Belleville Linda L.
Abstract: This essay will explore “other voices” that shed light on Pauline texts that have commonly been labeled as theologically abstruse or the products of an overactive imagination.¹ Specifically, the voice

What We Learned—and What We Didn’t from: Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Stanley Christopher D.
Abstract: In the introduction to the first volume of essays from the “Paul and Scripture Seminar,”¹ I listed six broad questions that the seminar participants had decided should guide our discussions of the methodological problems associated with research in Paul’s engagement with Scripture.

Book Title: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Gericke Jaco
Abstract: This study pioneers the use of philosophy of religion in the study of the Hebrew Bible. After identifying the need for a legitimate philosophical approach to Israelite religion, the volume traces the history of interdisciplinary relations and shows how descriptive varieties of philosophy of religion can aid the clarification of the Hebrew Bible’s own metaphysical, epistemological, and moral assumptions. Two new interpretative methodologies are developed and subsequently applied through an introduction to what the biblical texts took for granted about the nature of religious language, the concept of deity, the properties of Yhwh, the existence of gods, religious epistemology, and the relation between religion and morality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bzm3

3 Philosophy of Religion and Hebrew Bible Interpretation: from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Many histories of biblical interpretation discuss general philosophical influences on prominent biblical scholars.³ Conspicuously absent from these types of overview, however, is a discussion exclusively devoted to a historical account of the relationship between Hebrew Bible interpretation and philosophy of religion. When present in biblical-theological assessments at all, references to the philosophy of religion are few and far between.⁴ In view of this gap in the research, this chapter seeks to offer a cursory introduction to traces of philosophy of religion within Hebrew Bible interpretation.

5 Descriptive Currents in Philosophy of Religion for Hebrew Bible Studies from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Biblical scholarship is for the most part a historical and descriptive enterprise. Stereotypically, philosophy is thought to be evaluative. However, descriptive varieties of philosophy of religion do exist and some of their methods can be used for the clarification of concepts, beliefs, and practices in ancient nonphilosophical religions. In other words, there are subcurrents on both sides of the analytic-Continental divide that, when adopted and adapted through a shrewd bit of “theological engineering,” offer the biblical scholar hermeneutically legitimate forms of philosophical analysis. In this chapter we take a closer look at those philosophical traditions.

10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: In the Hebrew Bible there is a phenomenon that, for want of a better word, was called an אל. But what is an אל? Interestingly, purely in terms of grammatical form, this question is not only linguistic, historical, literary, sociological, psychological, anthropological or theological in nature. Questions that take the form “What is X?” (where X is a concept, as in “What is knowledge?”/“What is justice?”/“What is a person?”/“What is an אל?”) are also typical of philosophy (conceptual analysis) in general and of philosophy of religionin particular.

13 Epistemologies in Ancient Israelite Religion from: The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Purely descriptive epistemological perspectives on ancient Israelite religion as encountered in the pluralist and dynamic traditions of the Hebrew Bible are rare.² To the extent that epistemology is a concern in biblical scholarship, the focus is on hermeneutics and metacommentary.³ The interest typically lies with the epistemological assumptions of the readers of the Hebrew Bible, rather than with those implicit in the worlds in the texts themselves.⁴ Exceptions exist, of course, particularly with reference to the study of wisdom literature⁵ and with regard to research on the concept of revelation in ancient Israelite religion. In this regard it is noticeable

1 Qohelet’s Heterodox Character: from: The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: What one can call ideational approaches typically explain Qohelet’s heterodox character as a strictly mental accomplishment or natural development of ideas, without much attention to sociohistorical factors. This way of explaining Qohelet’s dissidence has certainly been the dominant one throughout the centuries. It represents the typically theological approach of an older generation of scholars, before the advent of the now popular sociological approach.¹ With the ideational perspective, the book is often depicted as a polemic against traditional wisdom (as represented by Proverbs and the friends of Job) and its unwarranted optimism and dogmatism, without considering the sociological dimensions to these

7 Qohelet’s Irrational Response to the (Over-)Rationalization of Traditional Wisdom from: The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: In this chapter, I treat Qohelet’s polemic against the wisdom tradition, especially his skepticism about the doctrine of retribution, from a sociological perspective. Weber’s notion of rationalization and over-rationalization will be employed to explain Qohelet’s endeavor. This approach will provide a “big picture” perspective that will enable the modern interpreter better to understand the nature of Qohelet’s polemic and to connect it with modern developments. Thus it will provide a helpful hermeneutical perspective, as well as a sociological one.

8 The Positive Power of Qohelet’s Pessimism from: The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to demonstrate how being honest about Qohelet’s pessimism or, more properly, his use of the pessimistic genre does not mean a negative verdict on the book’s relevance either within the canon or for the world today.¹ In other words, this chapter will show that a respect for Qohelet’s pessimism is certainly compatible with a positive assessment of the book’s theological value and potential. Pessimism, certainly a negative emotion, does not necessarily detract from the book’s positive function within the society for which it was created or for later religious communities. In this chapter, the

9 The Sociology of the Book of Qohelet’s Canonicity from: The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: In this chapter, the issue of the canonicity of Qohelet will be examined from a sociological perspective. Specifically, if Qohelet was so heterodox, why was the book allowed to maintain a canonical status or even admitted? This will be answered in several ways. First, it will be shown that Qohelet was not as heterodox as some have maintained. Actually, he represents a return to a more primitive form of the Israelite religion and faith. He utilizes minor elements of traditional wisdom to construct his theological position, which means that he simply reconfigures traditional wisdom. Second, it will be demonstrated that

2 Beyond the “Ordinary Reader” and the “Invisible Intellectual”: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Nadar Sarojini
Abstract: At the World Forum on Liberation and Theology in Belem, Brazil, January 2009, I was asked to respond to a panel of presentations that dealt with the topic of liberation and embodiment.¹ Chung Hyung Kung, the eminent Korean feminist theologian, began her reflections praising liberation theology for saving her from destruction—physical, mental, and spiritual—but lamented at length about the question one of her Korean students at Union Theological Seminary, New York, had posed to her. It seemed that this student earnestly and seriously wanted to know why, after forty-odd years of liberation theology, the world still faced so

9 Liberation in Latin American Biblical Hermeneutics from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Andiñach Pablo R.
Abstract: A combination of social changes, the political climate, and various incipient new winds in the life of the Christian churches supplied the fertile ground in which a new mode of reading the Scriptures began to germinate. Around 1970, the need for other tools with which to understand the Christian mission became evident in Latin America, and what would later come to be called the Theology of Liberation was born, a different way of approaching theological reflection. Alongside this theology, as faithful companion, an alternative way of interpreting the Bible came to be, as well. This is what Juan Luis Segundo

19 Changing the Paradigms: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Fiorenza Elisabeth Schüssler
Abstract: I approach the topic of this volume, The Future of the Biblical Past, from the vantage point of a critical feminist rhetoric and hermeneutics of liberation rather than from a culturally or geographically defined position.¹ This may place my reflections somewhat at odds with this volume’s overall organization, which is structured in area² and cultural studies terms around geographical-continental and national-political identity spaces, rather than in terms of theoretical, methodological, or emancipatory³ struggles. By foregrounding identity in geographical-global terms but not in religious (premodern) or methodological (modern) terms, the volume proposal situates it in the postmodern space of globalization via

21 Signifying on the Fetish: from: The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Wimbush Vincent L.
Abstract: This essay makes the case for a new critical orientation that has as its focus not historical criticism and its ever increasing razzle-dazzle offshoots, but a critical history (Nora 1994, 300) involving engagement and fathoming of forms of representations and expressivity (including artifacts), modes of performativity, structures of social-cultural-psychological dynamics and power relations—in effect, the phenomenon most often referred to with the English shorthand “Scriptures.” In this essay about the future of a discourse about Scriptures that has been complexly oriented to the study of the past, I arrogate to myself the right and privilege to think with that

Introduction from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Abstract: Partly in response to neo-Thomistic criticisms of Augustine, the relationship between Augustine’s thought and Thomas Aquinas’s received a central place in the French Dominican Marie-Dominique Chenu’s research on Aquinas. Thomas Aquinas inherits from Augustine a theological and philosophical patrimony, says Chenu, “outside of which it is impossible to conceive a Saint Thomas.”¹ During the thirteenth century, he notes, “the works of Augustine were being more assiduously read in the original form,” and Augustine’s major writings formed the basis of the new university libraries.² He recognizes that Augustine’s influence on Aquinas is deeper for some theological topics than for others,³ and

3 Theology and Theory of the Word in Aquinas: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Goris Harm
Abstract: In contemporary discussions, Aquinas’s theory of the word plays a role mainly in certain philosophical issues, in particular the semantic and epistemological status of the inner word (verbum interius) or concept and the question whether Aquinas represents some form of direct realism or representationalism.¹ Generally, however, little attention is paid to the fact that Aquinas’s theory of the word evolved over the course of his career. This neglect can have serious consequences for the interpretation of Aquinas’s position.²

5 Imago Dei: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) O’Callaghan John P.
Abstract: The topic of man as the imago Dei is a prominent theme in St. Thomas’s major systematic works, including his Scriptum super libros sententarium Magistri Petri Lombardi (Commentary on the Sentences), the Quaestiones disputatae de veritate (De veritate) and the Summa theologiae (Summa). His theological approach to the theme is deeply informed by St. Augustine, in particular his De Trinitate. Thus, the topic presents a paradigm instance for considering St. Thomas as an Augustinian. In his exhaustive and excellent treatment of St. Thomas on the imago Dei, To the Image of the Trinity: A Study in the Development of St.

6 Augustine and Aquinas on Original Sin: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Johnson Mark
Abstract: My interest in this topic stems from my graduate school days, when I began studying the Fathers and then the moral teaching of Thomas Aquinas. When it came to assessing the reach and influence of Augustine’s teachings in the thirteenth century, our teachers instructed us always to remember that Augustine’s principal conduit was the Libri sententiarum of Peter Lombard, who had gathered together quotations from many theological figures but most especially from Augustine and had placed them into his “book of opinions,” arranging them dogmatically, in order to cover the Christian religion.¹ The success of Lombard’s text, both inside the

9 Augustine and Aquinas on the Good Shepherd: from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Levering Matthew
Abstract: How does the patristic-medieval tradition of biblical interpretation flow from and shape a Christological understanding of ecclesial authority? In seeking to answer this question, this essay will focus upon exegesis of Jesus’ depiction of himself in John’s Gospel as the “good shepherd” (Jn 10:1–18). I will proceed in three steps. First, I will summarize two recent attempts by biblical exegetes, one Catholic and one Protestant, to expose the meaning of John 10:1–18. Second, I will survey Augustine’s reading of this passage in his commentary on John’s Gospel. Third, I will examine in detail Aquinas’s exegesis of this passage,

11 Wisdom Eschatology in Augustine and Aquinas from: Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Lamb Matthew L.
Abstract: The theme “Aquinas the Augustinian” provides an occasion to overcome some contemporary stereotypes that pit a Platonic St. Augustine against an Aristotelian St. Thomas Aquinas. Augustine, in this scenario, is a world-despising rigorist wrapped up in a subject-centered, self-communicative approach to questions, whereas Aquinas is identified with a world-affirming, object-centered metaphysical approach.¹ There are differences between the two theological giants. But the differences are far more complementary than contradictory. The erection of contradictory contrasts has occasioned misreadings by contemporary writers unaware of the Cartesian or Kantian lenses through which they project onto the ancient texts typically modern and postmodern dualisms

Book Title: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations-From the Origins to the Present Day
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This is the first encyclopedic guide to the history of relations between Jews and Muslims around the world from the birth of Islam to today. Richly illustrated and beautifully produced, the book features more than 150 authoritative and accessible articles by an international team of leading experts in history, politics, literature, anthropology, and philosophy. Organized thematically and chronologically, this indispensable reference provides critical facts and balanced context for greater historical understanding and a more informed dialogue between Jews and Muslims.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fgz64

Jews of Yemen from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Tobi Yosef
Abstract: According to their own tradition and according to new archaeological findings, Jews lived in the country later known as Yemen at least since the seventh century B.C.E. It seems that trade was the main incentive of Israelites to immigrate to that country. Their position was so strong that around 370 C.E., the major political power in Yemen, the Kingdom of Himyar, adopted Judaism, until the Ethiopian Christians took control of the country and destroyed the Jewish state. Since 629 the country was governed by Islam and the Jews became subject to Muslim discriminatory rules of dhimmīand were forced to

“The Arabs” as a Category of British Discourse in Palestine from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Picaudou Nadine
Abstract: During the Mandate period, in an attempt to reconcile various interests, the British political discourse commonly had recourse to the category “Arabs” to designate Muslim or Christian Palestinians. Various pseudoethnic or pseudopsychological distinctions, such as the figure of the fellah or the Bedouin, were also pressed into service. These designations, both bearers of colonial categories and heirs to the nomenclature of national minorities of the Ottoman reforms, influenced the fate of relations between Jews and Muslims in the ensuing years. They also furnished ideological material from which the Zionist discourse would make decisive borrowings. In a context no longer consonant

The Diverse Reactions to Nazism by Leaders in the Muslim Countries from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Abitbol Michel
Abstract: Nazi anti-Semitism is alien to Muslim cultures. That said, it would be an offense to history to overlook the fact that during World War II a number of authorities in Islamic territories hoped for the victory of the Axis powers. Apart from a few isolated cases we will discuss, these positions were not reached out of ideological sympathy with Nazism, the substance of which was generally unknown to the population. Rather, these authorities hoped that the defeat of France and England at the hands of Nazi Germany and Fascist Italy would precipitate the end of Western colonialism, which the two

Writing Difference in French-Language Maghrebi Literature from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Chikhi Beïda
Abstract: In French-language Maghrebi literature, the relationship between Jews and Muslims is a question of particular resonance, in that the colonial past weighs heavily on contemporary history. Both Jewish and Muslim writers have achieved fame in the field, weaving, in the same language, connections based on places that, despite antagonisms, have sometimes shaped shared spaces. Since the conflictual alterity of the 1950s, that literature has evolved toward new dialogical expressions imposed by the rise of the different fundamentalisms, by way of the trials of nationalism in the 1960s and the international issues associated with the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. These writers, whether stemming

Looking at the Other: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Munk Yael
Abstract: As a chronological survey of some key feature films in both Israeli and Palestinian cinemas, this article discusses the influence of nationalism on the representation of Jews and Muslims in each of these, and the ways these two national cinemas have attempted to invent in order to acknowledge the religious Other, beyond that of the nationalist labeling. Doing so, they reveal an alternative, and frequently subversive, way of conceiving the Other. Analysis of fi lmic representation offers a very effective way by which to interpret how a nation imagines itself. While early Israeli cinema related to Israelis as Jews, often

Hebrew Translations and Transcriptions of the Qurʾan from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Paudice Aleida
Abstract: The extremely broad subject of the translation of the Qurʾan into Hebrew has not been studied in sufficient detail. Further study would undoubtedly shed valuable light on the relations between the Jews and Islam during the late Middle Ages and the Renaissance. Little is known of the context that produced the Hebrew translations, nor their purpose. One of the reasons is, perhaps, the often ambiguous relationship between the Jews and Islam’s sacred text. This relationship speaks directly to issues of religious identity and ethnic belonging, as expressed in the theological and philosophical debate, and implies the acceptance of another conceptual

Semitism: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Bergounioux Gabriel
Abstract: The term “Semite” gained scientific justification in the nineteenth century, in the opposition between a different family of languages and the one that comparative grammar had brought to light and circumscribed under the name “Indo-European.” This name, developed outside of the people it designated, and after it had been extended to an anthropological characterization in terms of races, was exploited in order to justify colonial domination by the European powers in the Mediterranean region. The exacerbation of nationalism and the biologization of politics led to its application against European Jewish communities at the very moment when the works of Saussure

Rituals: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Firestone Reuven
Abstract: Judaism and Islam are mutually recognized as genuine monotheisms. Despite this general recognition, Muslim and Jewish religious scholars have critiqued each others’ religion over the centuries by calling into question both the authenticity of the other’s scripture and the efficacy of its religious practice. This basic critique is quite similar on both sides, yet despite significant and sometimes severe disapproval, each party recognizes the essential theological and moral- ethical soundness of the other. This basic respect, though sometimes reluctant, does not apply equally to other religions, certainly not to the Oriental traditions, and for the most part, not even Christianity.¹

Jewish and Muslim Charity in the Middle Ages: from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Lev Yaacov
Abstract: Christianity, Judaism, and Islam consider the three “theological virtues” of faith, hope, and charity to be the foundational stones of their value systems. Contrary to what some may think, charity is as essential to Jewish and Islamic life as it is to the Christian worldview. Between pure generosity and social redistribution, it deeply structures traditional societies by defining the respective roles of the rich and the poor, the use of money, and the legitimacy of the institutions that have taken up the task to collect and redistribute it.

The Karaites and Muʾtazilism from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Erder Yoram
Abstract: In the time of the geonim(directors of the Talmudic academies), Karaism was greatly influenced by the Muslim Muʾtazilite theological movement. The Karaites, though largely divided on many questions, adopted all the doctrinal fundaments of Muʾtazilism, both in the area of scriptural exegesis and in discussions of the essential theological themes for which the Muʾtazilites were the standard-bearers within Islam. Beginning in the eleventh century, the Karaites, who belonged to the group known as the Avelei Tsion (Mourners of Zion), having settled in Jerusalem, set out to compose theological texts constituting a genre in their own right. As a result,

Biblical Prophets and Their Illustration in Islamic Art from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Milstein Rachel
Abstract: The Muslims’ interest in the Bible is based on the Qurʾanic message that presents Muhammad as the “seal of the prophets,” that is to say, a natural continuation of the Jewish and Christian monotheism. In accord with this idea, the Qurʾan adopts the biblical historiography with certain of its theological and mythological aspects. Various biblical episodes appear in the Qurʾanic text, either as short references or as detailed stories, serving as archetypes for Muhammad himself.

Aspects of Family Life among Jews in Muslim Societies from: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Kailani Wasfi
Abstract: Family life, among Jews and Muslims, carried forward many cultural features that were widespread in the Middle East since antiquity. The specifics of each society also reflected the impact of the two religions as these evolved over time. The norms and practice of family life entailed ongoing adjustment among taken-for-granted lifestyles, explicit values, and canonized written sources. A systematic comparison between biblical and Qurʾanic prescriptions, or between fiqhandhalakha, would far exceed the boundaries of this article. We will thus limit ourselves to an anthropological outlook on the shared cultural values between Jews and Muslims concerning family life, as

Levinas, Translation, and Ethics from: Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: Many commentators have suggested that translation is central to the ethical philosophy of Emmanuel Levinas. Not, clearly, translation from one language to another, in the sense of translating, say, German into French, nor translation in the sense of introducing intellectual developments from one national tradition into another, although Levinas is widely credited with introducing phenomenological thought into France in 1930. The commentators suggest that Levinas offers translation in a wider sense between what he calls “Hebrew” and “Greek,” where the names for the languages stand in for much wider frameworks or worldviews. However, although this is a constructive approach that

Book Title: Shattered Voices-Language, Violence, and the Work of Truth Commissions
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Phelps Teresa Godwin
Abstract: Following periods of mass atrocity and oppression, states are faced with a question of critical importance in the transition to democracy: how to offer redress to victims of the old regime without perpetuating cycles of revenge. Traditionally, balance has been restored through arrests, trials, and punishment, but in the last three decades, more than twenty countries have opted to have a truth commission investigate the crimes of the prior regime and publish a report about the investigation, often incorporating accounts from victims. Although many praise the work of truth commissions for empowering and healing through words rather than violence, some condemn the practice as a poor substitute for traditional justice, achieved through trials and punishment. There has been until now little analysis of the unarticulated claim that underlies the truth commissions' very existence: that language-in this case narrative stories-can substitute for violence. Acknowledging revenge as a real and deep human need, Shattered Voicesexplores the benefits and problems inherent when a fragile country seeks to heal its victims without risking its own future. In developing a theory about the role of language in retribution, Teresa Godwin Phelps takes an interdisciplinary approach, delving into sources from Greek tragedy toHamlet, from Kant to contemporary theories about retribution, from the Babylonian law codes to the South African Truth and Reconciliation Report. She argues that, given the historical and psychological evidence about revenge, starting afresh by drawing a bright line between past crimes and a new government is both unrealistic and unwise. When grievous harm happens, a rebalancing is bound to occur, whether it is orderly and lawful or disorderly and unlawful.Shattered Voicescontends that language is requisite to any adequate balancing, and that a solution is viable only if it provides an atmosphere in which storytelling and subsequent dialogue can flourish. In the developing culture of ubiquitous truth reports, Phelps argues that we must become attentive to the form these reports take-the narrative structure, the use of victims' stories, and the way a political message is conveyed to the citizens of the emerging democracy. By looking concretely at the work and responsibilities of truth commissions,Shattered Voicesoffers an important and thoughtful analysis of the efficacy of the ways human rights abuses are addressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fh8vr

A Critical Phenomenology from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: Ironically, this strategy calls for a reworking of how most phenomenologically oriented studies proceed. In the opening pages of Speech and Phenomena, Jacques Derrida shows that Edmund Husserl’s

How to Do Things with Feeling from: Shelter Blues
Abstract: In the State Service Center, feeling was ensconced in rhetoric. The shelter was a place for all things psychological. A great deal of talk involved comments on or indications of states of feeling—such as when Carla said, “I just feel wretched. I really do,” at a group meeting. Although I did not keep count, overt references to feelings seemed more numerous in the shelter than in most other contexts. The high frequency of glossings had a lot to do with the fact that shelter life evolved around therapeutic care. Niko Besnier points out that “in probably all speech communities,

The Detective and the Author: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Sorapure Madeleine
Abstract: Readers of detective fiction typically admire the interpretive skill of the detective, who, in the midst of mysterious, misleading, and disparate clues, is able to discern logical and necessary connections leading invariably to the solution of the mystery. Part of the strong appeal of detective fiction, critics have suggested, is that readers can identify with the detective and achieve interpretive victory alongside him, or closely on his heels. Glenn W. Most, for example, comments that the detective serves as “the figure for the reader within the text, the one character whose activities most closely parallel the reader’s own” (348). In

Auster’s Sublime Closure: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Bernstein Stephen
Abstract: In The Locked Room, as in the other novels of Paul Auster’s New York Trilogy, the path the reader follows diverges considerably from what might be expected in conventional detective fiction. This is due to what are, by this stage in the trilogy, predictable recourses to narratorial unreliability, epistemological uncertainty, and existential contingency. As these strategies come into play in the trilogy’s final volume, the trail leads neither toward nor away from a corpse, but instead into postmodern meditations on subjectivity, sexuality, sublimity, and silence. By engaging with the text’s thematization of these concepts, we can begin to understand both

Leviathan: from: Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Saltzman Arthur
Abstract: The detective novel provides some of literature’s most durable endowments. Its sureties constitute a method and a message: mystery condenses then lifts like the day’s weather; seemingly encouraged by the very conventions of his context, the hero patiently debrides whatever wound to propriety summons him; cases wind up tight and smooth as spools. Gordian plots are only, are always, temporary distractions at worst, or prods to appetite, and thanks to logic’s stacked deck, these regularly succumb to investigation. As the detective whittles raw circumstance into habitable sense, he is secure in the conviction that at the core all incidents and

12 Word, Name, Epithet, Sign, and Book in Quiché Epistemology from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: For an exploration of Quiché epistemological boundaries, the Popol Vuh is without rival as a starting place. Its writer takes a good deal of trouble to indicate his epistemic grounds, which until he reaches the sixteenth century at the end of the book lie beyond the limits of anything he himself experienced—or, to put that into Quiché, beyond anything xuuachih, “he faced,” which is the Quiché way of saying “saw with his own eyes.” In the middle of the book, as we shall see, he even sets forth an explicit epistemological theory.

14 The Story of How a Story Was Made from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: What happens when a mythographer is present on the dialogical grounds where oral performances take place might be described, in the case of a tape-recorded tale like “The Girl and the Protector” (see Chapter 2), as a general decontextualizing effect that anticipates the decontextualization involved in playback, transcription, translation, and publication. The response of the native audience is dampened and the performer may be prevented from entangling members of that audience in the story, though in this particular case Walter Sanchez did make an unsuccessful attempt to have Andrew Peynetsa take the part of the heroine's grandfather at prayer. Less

16 The Analogical Tradition and the Emergence of a Dialogical Anthropology from: The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: The words that follow were composed for a Harvey Lecture in Anthropology at the University of New Mexico, delivered on the eve of the first day of spring, 1979. I mention this here (rather than in a footnote) because it is consistent with the theme of the lecture itself that the circumstances of anthropological discourse, whether that discourse comes from the field, the armchair, or the podium, should be kept in open discussion rather than being hidden away in footnotes, appendixes, and unpublished manuscripts.

Chapter One Acts of Deliverance: from: Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: In his study of the European conquest of America, Tzvetan Todorov asks how we are “to account for the fact that Cortés, leading a few hundred men, managed to seize the kingdom of Montezuma, who commanded several hundred thousand.”² According to Todorov, a sizeable European advantage lay in their ability to impose their own versions of truth on people who were epistemologically naive and who thus quickly “lost control of communication” to the invaders (61). Whereas indigenous Americans understood primarily a ritual use of language to maintain the status quo within a cyclic cosmological order, the European invaders were imperialists

3. Words of Possession, Possession of Words: from: Gender on the Market
Abstract: Bargaining is by no means the only genre of marketplace discourse, nor is it even the most dramatic. Other genres that might be called oratory, artful selling, or doom-saying are not delineated in Moroccan terminology except under the heading of l-hadra dyal suq, “marketplace talk,” a form of discourse that embodies many speech genres much as a novel embodies several literary genres (Bakhtin 1986 : 61–62). Whereas bargaining is overtly dialogic, the genre of marketplace oratory edges more towards the performance of monologue by attempting to subdue the other “voices” in the market.

Book Title: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)-With a Translation of the Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Heath Peter
Abstract: Islamic allegory is the product of a cohesive literary tradition to which few contributed as significantly as Ibn Sina (Avicenna), the eleventh-century Muslim philosopher. Peter Heath here offers a detailed examination of Avicenna's contribution, paying special attention to Avicenna's psychology and poetics and to the ways in which they influenced strains of theological, mystical, and literary thought in subsequent Islamic-and Western-intellectual and religious history. Heath begins by showing how Avicenna's writings fit into the context and general history of Islamic allegory and explores the interaction among allegory, allegoresis, and philosophy in Avicenna's thought. He then provides a brief introduction to Avicenna as an historical figure. From there, he examines the ways in which Avicenna's cosmological, psychological, and epistemological theories find parallel, if diverse, expression in the disparate formats of philosophical and allegorical narration. Included in this book is an illustration of Avicenna's allegorical practice. This takes the form of a translation of the Mi'raj Nama (The Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven), a short treatise in Persian generally attributed to Avicenna. The text concludes with an investigation of the literary dimension Avicenna's allegorical theory and practice by examining his use of description metaphor. Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna is an original and important work that breaks new ground by applying the techniques of modern literary criticism to the study of Medieval Islamic philosophy. It will be of interest to scholars and students of medieval Islamic and Western literature and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhz90

3. The Structure and Representation of the Cosmos from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna possessed an extraordinarily systematic vision of the structure of the cosmos—and of how it should be studied. Appreciating this fact is crucial if we are to understand his intellectual accomplishments; but it must also be kept in perspective. His passion for cohesiveness and completion led to the preoccupation with detail and demonstration that characterizes his logos writings: everything must fit, everything must hang together logically.¹ This being the case, it is not surprising that many later students of Avicenna, attracted by these very attributes of system, detail, and logical coherence, tend to view his philosophy through the prism

4. Avicenna’s Theory of the Soul from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Psychology, the study of the soul, held a particular fascination for Avicenna. That the subject clearly lies near the heart of his concern for philosophy is indicated by the fact that he devoted numerous major and minor tracts to the subject and returned repeatedly to its elaboration throughout his life.¹ Avicenna’s psychological doctrines are stable in their general parameters, but his individual presentations of them differ according to considerations of philosophical intent, generic format, and audience of address.² Like any psychology aspiring to comprehensiveness, Avicenna’s theory addresses four considerations:

5. Avicenna’s Theory of Knowledge from: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: For the most part, Avicenna’s psychology is structured according to levels of epistemological apprehension. The vegetable and animal souls manage natural, nonperceptual activities: nutrition, growth, and reproduction in the case of the

PART FOUR PRAXIS, from: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: At this stage of our inquiry, we have opened up the play—the to-and-fro movement—of science, hermeneutics, and praxis. In exploring the new image of science that has been developing in the postempiricist philosophy and history of science, we have witnessed the recovery of the hermeneutical dimension of science in both the natural and the social sciences. In the philosophy of the natural sciences, this development has been characterized as having begun with an obsession with the meaning and reference of single terms (logically proper names and ostensive definition), moved to the search for a rigorous criterion for discriminating

Introduction: from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: Rorty’s work, of course, has considered the logical pitfalls of Western metaphysics,

1 THE SORCERER’S BODY from: Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: In 1957 Claude Lévi-Strauss published his influential essay, “The Sorcerer and His Magic.” Lévi-Strauss’s essay built the foundation of a structuralist approach to the anthropological study of sorcery, healing, and religion. In a remarkable analysis Lévi-Strauss demonstrated that sorcerous ideologies were based on sociological fictions reinforced by magical sleight of hand. In the end the power of the sorcerer, he argued, rested not in an intrinsic power, but in the symbolic power of his or her relationship in the cultural continuum of illness and health.¹ Lévi-Strauss’s argument is based on data gleaned not from his own fieldwork in Brazil but

Chapter 8 ʺA Thousand Other Mysteriesʺ: from: Detecting Texts
Author(s) Ewert Jeanne C.
Abstract: Describing the novel that would become The Third Policeman (1967), Flann O’Brien defines succinctly the postmodernist, or metaphysical, detective story.¹ In this twentieth-century divergence from classic mysteries, apparently orthodox tales of detection are populated by extraordinary detectives subject to unexpected rules of behavior. Metaphysical detection calls into question structures taken for granted after Edgar Allan Poe’s “Murders in the Rue Morgue” (1841): the hermeneutic strategies of rendering meaningful those signs which are unintelligible to others, and of divining the mind of an opponent; the epistemological method of discovering truth by questioning sources of knowledge; and the adept detective’s triumph over

6 From local inter-ethnicities to the dynamics of the world-system: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Bastos Susana
Abstract: The preference for an anthropological reflection upon identity processes as a means to overcome the micro-macro dichotomy that has hampered the development of the social sciences (Calhoun 1996) immediately faces a number of obstacles. A strategy of total subjective and relative social research, reduced to micro-dimensions (limited to the construction of the self and interaction), may impede an analysis of the relationships between socio-historical groups. Similarly, a strategy of conceptual and theoretical babelisation of the concept of identity (and its derivatives) may lead to the loss of its analytical function in understanding historical dynamics.

12 Different children of different gods: from: Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Bastos José
Abstract: The methodological hypotheses supporting our objectives are: 1) that micro-family dynamics are a strategic unit of analysis in the study of the impact of different types of religion in the process of differentiated social insertion (DIS)² – a concept we prefer to integration, as it is free from ideological motivation; 2) that

The Attraction of the Intelligent Eye: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: One of the key elements of the “new film history” which arose in the wake of the Brighton conference in 1978 was that it put forth a model of attractions, one both heuristic and quite real at the same time; the tenets of this model and where it has led us today are the subjects of the present volume. This simultaneously theoretical and archaeological concept has produced another way of thinking about the relationship between viewer and film, taking as its starting point precisely the web of relationships found in early cinema and its connection to the era’s popular entertainments

Discipline through Diegesis: from: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Elsaesser Thomas
Abstract: “Life imitates the movies” is a phrase that nowadays only raises eyebrows because it is so clichéd. But one of the conclusions one can draw from this truism is that if we are in some sense already “in” the cinema with what we can say “about” it, then the cinema needs a theorythat can account for the historical processes that put us “inside,” and ahistorythat takes account of the ontological anxieties to which this interchangeability of inside and outside gives rise.

Book Title: The Making of the Humanities-Volume 1- Early Modern Europe
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Weststeijn Thijs
Abstract: This book is the first step towards the development of a comparative history of the humanities. Specialists in philology, musicology, art history, linguistics, literary theory, and other disciplines highlight the intertwining of the various fields and their impact on the sciences. This first volume in the series The Making of the Humanities focuses on the early modern period. Different perspectives reveal how the humanities developed from the 'liberal arts', via the curriculum of humanistic schools, to modern disciplines. The authors show in particular how discoveries in the humanities contributed to a secular world view, pointing up connections with the scientific revolution. The main themes are: the humanities versus the sciences; the visual arts as liberal arts; humanism and heresy; language and poetics; linguists and logicians; philology and philosophy; the history of history. Contributions come from a selection of internationally renowned European and American scholars, including Floris Cohen, David Cram, and Ingrid Rowland. The book offers a wealth of insights for specialists, students, and those interested in the humanities in a broad sense. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n1vz

Ficino, Diacceto and Michelangelo’s Presentation Drawings from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) van den Doel Marieke
Abstract: The Florentine philosopher Marsilio Ficino (1433-1499) was one of the first scholars who suggested that painting, which was generally regarded as a craft, should be included among the Liberal Arts. His main work, Platonic Theology(1482), compared his own time to a Golden Age that ‘has brought back to light the Liberal Arts which had almost been extinct: Grammar, Poetry, Rhetoric, Painting, Architecture, Music and the ancient art of singing to the Orphic Lyre’.² Ficino not only replaced logic with poetry in thetrivium, but formulated an almost completely newquadrivium, removing geometry, arithmetic and astronomy, in favor of painting

The Artes Sermocinales in Times of Adversity. from: The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Maat Jaap
Abstract: This paper explores some of the developments in grammar, logic and rhetoric that took place in Europe in the seventeenth century. These disciplines were traditionally seen as belonging together, as they each dealt with language in a particular way. For this reason, they were called the ‘artes sermocinales’, or arts of discourse. The seventeenth century was a period of radical changes in intellectual history at large, and this paper investigates how the arts of discourse were affected by these changes. In particular, it was a period in which the prestige of the arts of discourse declined, and in which some

[Part 3. Introduction] from: The Children's Table
Abstract: This section occupies a fissure in childhood studies that the field is working to bridge between social constructionism—a central insight of childhood studies icon Philippe Ariès and a key tenet of humanities scholarship—and social science’s emphasis on biologically determined development. Our first two contributions by Sarah Chinn and Susan Honeyman pick up the theme of educational control ably introduced in section 2 and explore the work of disciplining children’s habits of love and attachment. They do so by focusing on heteronormative control over children’s gender and sexuality or, to be more precise, the social insistence that children cannot

Childhood Studies and Literary Adoption from: The Children's Table
Author(s) Singley Carol
Abstract: Representations of adoption abound in nineteenth-century American fiction and have much to tell us not only about formal aspects of plot but also about the construction of cultural narratives of the child, family, and nation—all important sites of inquiry for the field of childhood studies. This chapter explores the ways that childhood studies can affirm the importance of biological and nonbiological kinship as categories of analysis. It also shows how childhood studies can reveal the historical dimensions and limitations of romantic conceptions of childhood. It is grounded in the understanding, now a given in the field, that the child

Book Title: Poetry as Survival- Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ORR GREGORY
Abstract: Intended for general readers and for students and scholars of poetry, Poetry as Survival is a complex and lucid analysis of the powerful role poetry can play in confronting, surviving, and transcending pain and suffering. Gregory Orr draws from a generous array of sources. He weaves discussions of work by Keats, Dickinson, and Whitman with quotes from three-thousand-year-old Egyptian poems, Inuit songs, and Japanese love poems to show that writing personal lyric has helped poets throughout history to process emotional and experiential turmoil, from individual stress to collective grief. More specifically, he considers how the acts of writing, reading, and listening to lyric bring ordering powers to the chaos that surrounds us. Moving into more contemporary work, Orr looks at the poetry of Sylvia Plath, Stanley Kunitz, and Theodore Roethke, poets who relied on their own work to get through painful psychological experiences. As a poet who has experienced considerable trauma--especially as a child--Orr refers to the damaging experiences of his past and to the role poetry played in his ability to recover and survive. His personal narrative makes all the more poignant and vivid Orr's claims for lyric poetry's power as a tool for healing. Poetry as Survival is a memorable and inspiring introduction to lyric poetry's capacity to help us find safety and comfort in a threatening world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nc68

CHAPTER NINE Convulsive Transformation of the Overculture from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: Sara Hutchinson is a Cherokee Indian woman interviewed in the book Surviving in Two Worlds. The “two worlds” are the worlds of contemporary, white-dominated America and the traditional world of first Americans. In the book, she does not define the term “Overculture” quoted above, and so, in adopting it, I have given it my own definition. In my definition, Overculture refers to the ideological and institutional formations and attitudes that support a given society or culture—established religions and political, social, and economic structures, as well as the values that validate them or emerge from them. The Overculture, then, is

CHAPTER TWELVE Whitman and the Habit of Dazzle from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: It might seem odd to include Walt Whitman (1819–1892) among my hero-poets who have transformed trauma into visions of human possibility, because Whitman is so insistently and ecstatically affirmative. Where is the trauma in his work? Indeed, the philosopher and psychologist William James muttered aloud skeptically that Whitman was almost pathologically “healthy-minded” and optimistic. Can such an exuberant poet actually fit our scheme?

CHAPTER SIXTEEN Constellations and Medicine Pouches from: Poetry as Survival
Abstract: These are the final lines of a grim and lovely poem that Plath’s estranged husband, Ted Hughes, chose to place as the final poem in her posthumously published collection Ariel. It is an image that, to my mind, partakes of a double fatalism. The first fatalism is contained in the astrological rigidity the image proposes: we are ruled by our stars and have no free will. The second image is more subtle and consists of shifting those stars out of the broad and open night sky and placing them at the bottom of a well. The sense of confinement and

The Price of Eternal Honor: from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Creech Joe
Abstract: It is easy to imagine American evangelical Christianity and the ideals of southern manhood in opposition. Nineteenth-century evangelicalism, in the North and the South, has typically been portrayed as women’s domain: women were more in attendance at congregational activities, and pastors bent over backward to accommodate theological ideals to feminine sentimentality even as the culture at large considered women more naturally inclined to spiritual and moral matters than men. Men, in contrast, and especially in the South, were beholden to a code of honor that, among other things, encouraged violence—martial, retributive, or vigilant—gambling, blood sports, sowing wild oats,

A New Kind of Patriarchy: from: Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Dowland Seth
Abstract: In 2003, Southwestern Baptist Theological Seminary President Paige Patterson identified a “war against boys” as “America’s No. 1 problem.” He made this comment at an Arkansas evangelistic meeting on a stage flanked by animal trophies. A noted hunter and gun enthusiast, Patterson began his talk by regaling the all-male throng with tales of African safaris. But he quickly moved to his main point: American culture, said Patterson, pressed parents “to make little girls out of your little boys.” Feminist-inspired developments, including the vilification of superheroes and the eradication of playground games, threatened to eliminate differences between the sexes. Patterson would

Book Title: The Bioregional Imagination-Literature, Ecology, and Place
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ZEITLER EZRA
Abstract: Bioregionalism is an innovative way of thinking about place and planet from an ecological perspective. Although bioregional ideas occur regularly in ecocritical writing, until now no systematic effort has been made to outline the principles of bioregional literary criticism and to use it as a way to read, write, understand, and teach literature. The twenty-four original essays here are written by an outstanding selection of international scholars. The range of bioregions covered is global and includes such diverse places as British Columbia's Meldrum Creek and Italy's Po River Valley, the Arctic and the Outback. There are even forays into cyberspace and outer space. In their comprehensive introduction, the editors map the terrain of the bioregional movement, including its history and potential to inspire and invigorate place-based and environmental literary criticism. Responding to bioregional tenets, this volume is divided into four sections. The essays in the "Reinhabiting" section narrate experiments in living-in-place and restoring damaged environments. The "Rereading" essays practice bioregional literary criticism, both by examining texts with strong ties to bioregional paradigms and by opening other, less-obvious texts to bioregional analysis. In "Reimagining," the essays push bioregionalism to evolve-by expanding its corpus of texts, coupling its perspectives with other approaches, or challenging its core constructs. Essays in the "Renewal" section address bioregional pedagogy, beginning with local habitat studies and concluding with musings about the Internet. In response to the environmental crisis, we must reimagine our relationship to the places we inhabit. This volume shows how literature and literary studies are fundamental tools to such a reimagining.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nnf7

Restoring the Imagination of Place: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) IOVINO SERENELLA
Abstract: When you travel along the countryside of the Po Valley, it is hard not to feel like a stranger.” The speaker of these lines is a native writer, Gianni Celati, who was born in Sondrio, Lombardy, and grew up in Ferrara, near the river’s mouth. In such a rich and culturally specific bioregion, one in which territorial stances based on place identity led an autonomist party in the government coalition called the Northern League, a native feels like a stranger. Why might this be so? Maybe because a profound crisis, both cultural and ecological, is fatally affecting these places, a

The Nature of Region: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) RYDEN KENT C.
Abstract: The line between the idea of cultural region, generally delineated according to human criteria, and ecological region and bioregion, defined by natural factors, would seem to be fairly sharp and clear. Sometimes, though, that line becomes blurred in ways that force closer examination of these spatial concepts and the ways that they relate to each other. For example, northern New England can be seen as a distinct literary subregion distinguished by the differences that writers more or less self-consciously draw between dominant tropes of New England regional identity as a whole and the ways of life that they feel characterize

“Los campos extraños de esta ciudad”/“The strange fields of this city”: from: The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) GATLIN JILL
Abstract: Bioregional practice begins with understanding place and, correspondingly, self. Most bioregionalists emphasize that cultivating sustainable dwelling requires not simply acquiring technical knowledge about the natural possibilities and limitations of one’s geologic, biotic, or climatic region but also reconnecting to place through personal experience and rediscovering, in the words of Gary Snyder, “the ‘where’ of our ‘who are we?’” ( A Place 184). The movement’s most prolific poet and essayist,Snyder posits that although place and personhood are mutually constitutive,many people ignore their interrelations: “There are tens of millions of people in North America who were physically born here but who are not

Book Title: The Archaeology of Class War-The Colorado Coalfield Strike of 1913-1914
Publisher: University Press of Colorado
Author(s): McGuire Randall H.
Abstract: The Archaeology of the Colorado Coalfield War Project has conducted archaeological investigations at the site of the Ludlow Massacre in Ludlow, Colorado, since 1996. With the help of the United Mine Workers of America and funds from the Colorado State Historical Society and the Colorado Endowment for the Humanities, the scholars involved have integrated archaeological finds with archival evidence to show how the everyday experiences of miners and their families shaped the strike and its outcome.The Archaeology of Class War weaves together material culture, documents, oral histories, landscapes, and photographs to reveal aspects of the strike and life in early twentieth-century Colorado coalfields unlike any standard documentary history. Excavations at the site of the massacre and the nearby town of Berwind exposed tent platforms, latrines, trash dumps, and the cellars in which families huddled during the attack. Myriad artifacts—from canning jars to a doll’s head—reveal the details of daily existence and bring the community to life.The Archaeology of Class War will be of interest to archaeologists, historians, and general readers interested in mining and labor history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nv52

4 NEITHER KANT NOR NIETZSCHE from: The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: I briefly explained the concept of “affirmative genealogy” in the introduction to this book. In the following chapter, which presents a number of intermediate methodological reflections, I aim to flesh out this concept and thus the method used in this book. Within the context of contemporary debates in the philosophy and history of human rights, it is vital to explain why we should be attempting to produce a “genealogy” of human rights in the first place, as opposed to a rational justification for their validity claims or a simple history of their ascent and spread. We must also explain why,

5 SOUL AND GIFT from: The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: The key thesis underlying the three historical-sociological discussions presented in this book is that we should understand the rise of human rights and the idea of universal human dignity as a process of the sacralization of the person. Inherent in this thesis is a rejection of all notions that this rise can be regarded as the product of a particular tradition, such as the Christian—a product that was more or less bound to emerge from the seed of tradition at some point in history. Traditions as such, I suggest, generate nothing. What matters is how they are appropriated by

Book Title: Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy-The Case of Nanette Leroux
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GOLDSTEIN JAN
Abstract: Filled with intimate details about Nanette's behavior and extensive quotations of her utterances, the case is noteworthy for the sexual references that contemporaries did not recognize as such; for its focus on the difference between biological and social time; and for Nanette's fascination with the commodities available in the region's nascent marketplace. Goldstein's introduction brilliantly situates the text in its multiple contexts, examines it from the standpoint of early nineteenth-century medicine, and uses the insights of Foucault and Freud to craft a twenty-first-century interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cgcrt

Book Title: Seasons of Misery-Catastrophe and Colonial Settlement in Early America
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): DONEGAN KATHLEEN
Abstract: The stories we tell of American beginnings typically emphasize colonial triumph in the face of adversity. But the early years of English settlement in America were characterized by catastrophe: starvation, disease, extreme violence, ruinous ignorance, and serial abandonment. Seasons of Miseryoffers a provocative reexamination of the British colonies' chaotic and profoundly unstable early days, placing crisis-both experiential and existential-at the center of the story. At the outposts of a fledgling empire and disconnected from the social order of their home society, English settlers were both physically and psychologically estranged from their European identities. They could not control, or often even survive, the world they had intended to possess. According to Kathleen Donegan, it was in this cauldron of uncertainty that colonial identity was formed. Studying the English settlements at Roanoke, Jamestown, Plymouth, and Barbados, Donegan argues that catastrophe marked the threshold between an old European identity and a new colonial identity, a state of instability in which only fragments of Englishness could survive amid the upheavals of the New World. This constant state of crisis also produced the first distinctively colonial literature as settlers attempted to process events that they could neither fully absorb nor understand. Bringing a critical eye to settlers' first-person accounts, Donegan applies a unique combination of narrative history and literary analysis to trace how settlers used a language of catastrophe to describe unprecedented circumstances, witness unrecognizable selves, and report unaccountable events.Seasons of Miseryaddresses both the stories that colonists told about themselves and the stories that we have constructed in hindsight about them. In doing so, it offers a new account of the meaning of settlement history and the creation of colonial identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cggz2

Herder, Folklore, and Romantic Nationalism from: Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: When I studied folklore at Indiana University in the early 1960s, Johann Gottfried Herder did not figure at all in the curriculum on the intellectual history of folklore. Constrained by the ideologies of disciplinarity, my teachers dated the history of the field to the nineteenth-century founders of the systematic, “scientific” folklore (the Brothers Grimm, William John Thoms, Julius and Kaarle Krohn, Sven Grundtvig, Francis James Child, E. B. Tylor), with a predisposition toward the Nordic and German scholars who systematized the philological method or to the British scholars who had the good taste to write in English. Earlier works that

16. Ethical issue determination, normativity and contextual blindness: from: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Flick Catherine
Abstract: The impact of techno-scientific developments on societal evolution and lifestyles no longer needs to be demonstrated. In particular, the last half of the twentieth century has witnessed a considerable acceleration of the integration of technological elements into the means of economic production and social life in general. The profound transformations that have taken place in the last few decades equally involve energy, transportation, construction, telecommunications, administration, medicine, pharmacy and agricultural sectors. These transformations are closely linked to techno-scientific developments and particularly to stunning developments in information and communications technologies (ICTs). The information society emerging in the contemporary period, however, can

Book Title: Moral Evil- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Flescher Andrew Michael
Abstract: The idea of moral evil has always held a special place in philosophy and theology because the existence of evil has implications for the dignity of the human and the limits of human action. Andrew M. Flescher proposes four interpretations of evil, drawing on philosophical and theological sources and using them to trace through history the moral traditions that are associated with them.The first model, evil as the presence of badness, offers a traditional dualistic model represented by Manicheanism. The second, evil leading to goodness through suffering, presents a theological interpretation known as theodicy. Absence of badness-that is, evil as a social construction-is the third model. The fourth, evil as the absence of goodness, describes when evil exists in lieu of the good-the "privation" thesis staked out nearly two millennia ago by Christian theologian St. Augustine. Flescher extends this fourth model-evil as privation-into a fifth, which incorporates a virtue ethic. Drawing original connections between Augustine and Aristotle, Flescher's fifth model emphasizes the formation of altruistic habits that can lead us to better moral choices throughout our lives.Flescher eschews the temptation to think of human agents who commit evil as outside the norm of human experience. Instead, through the honing of moral skills and the practice of attending to the needs of others to a greater degree than we currently do, Flescher offers a plausible and hopeful approach to the reality of moral evil.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hh3bq

CHAPTER ONE Evil versus Goodness: from: Moral Evil
Abstract: The idea of moral evil has always held a special place in philosophical and theological systems of thought because the existence of evil has implications for the dignity with which and the limits within which we act. Moral culpability is made possible by our ability to choose to do terrible things or to refrain from doing good things. Philosophically, the categories of moral praiseworthiness and blameworthiness depend on the prospect of our being able to act or not act one way when we have the capacity to act otherwise. Theologically, the whole point to being humans made in God’s image

Book Title: Philosophy of Communication- Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Butchart Garnet C.
Abstract: To philosophize is to communicate philosophically. From its inception, philosophy has communicated forcefully. Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle talk a lot, and talk ardently. Because philosophy and communication have belonged together from the beginning--and because philosophy comes into its own and solidifies its stance through communication--it is logical that we subject communication to philosophical investigation. This collection of key works of classical, modern, and contemporary philosophers brings communication back into philosophy's orbit. It is the first anthology to gather in a single volume foundational works that address the core questions, concepts, and problems of communication in philosophical terms. The editors have chosen thirty-two selections from the work of Plato, Leibniz, Hegel, Husserl, Heidegger, Wittgenstein, Benjamin, Lacan, Derrida, Sloterdijk, and others. They have organized these texts thematically, rather than historically, in seven sections: consciousness; intersubjective understanding; language; writing and context; difference and subjectivity; gift and exchange; and communicability and community. Taken together, these texts not only lay the foundation for establishing communication as a distinct philosophical topic but also provide an outline of what philosophy of communication might look like.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhcqm

7 Fifth Meditation: from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Husserl Edmund
Abstract: As the point of departure for our new meditations, let us take what may seem to be a grave objection. The objection concerns nothing less than the claim of transcendental phenomenology to be itself transcendental philosophyand therefore its claim that, in the form of a constitutional problematic and theory moving within the limits of the transcendentally reduced ego, it can solve the transcendental problems pertaining to theObjective world. When I, the meditating I, reduce myself to my absolute transcendental ego by phenomenological epoché do I not becomesolus ipse; and do I not remain that, as long as

8 Being-in-the-World as Being-With and Being-Oneʹs-Self. from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Heidegger Martin
Abstract: Our analysis of the worldhood of the world has constantly been bringing the whole phenomenon of Being-in-the-world into view, although its constitutive items have not all stood out with the same phenomenal distinctness as the phenomenon of the world itself. We have Interpreted the world ontologically by going through what is ready-to-hand within-the-world; and this Interpretation has been put first, because Dasein, in its everydayness (with regard to which Dasein remains a constant theme for study), not only is in a world but comports itself towards that world with one predominant kind of Being. Proximally and for the most part

9 Foundations of a Theory of Intersubjective Understanding from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Schutz Alfred
Abstract: As we proceed to our study of the social world, we abandon the strictly phenomenological method. We shall start out by simply accepting the existence of the social world as it is always accepted in the attitude of the natural standpoint, whether in everyday life or in sociological observation. In so doing, we shall avoid any attempt to deal with the problem from the point of view of transcendental phenomenology. We shall, therefore, be bypassing a whole nest of problems whose significance and difficulty were pointed out by Husserl in his Formal and Transcendental Logic, although he did not there

10 Platonic Dialogue from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Serres Michel
Abstract: The logicians’ extended discussion of the notion of symbol is well known.¹ Without entering into the detail of the arguments that separate the Hilbertian realists, the nominalists following Quine, those who subscribe to the Polish school, and so on, I shall take up a fragment of the issue here, while giving it a new twist.

25 The Fetishism of the Commodity and Its Secret | The Process of Exchange from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Marx Karl
Abstract: A commodity appears at first sight an extremely obvious, trivial thing. But its analysis brings out that it is a very strange thing, abounding in metaphysical subtleties and theological niceties. So far as it is a use-value, there is nothing mysterious about it, whether we consider it from the point of view that by its properties it satisfies human needs, or that it first takes on these properties as the product of human labour. It is absolutely clear that, by his activity, man changes the forms of the materials of nature in such a way as to make them useful

29 Of Being Singular Plural from: Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Nancy Jean-Luc
Abstract: We say “people are strange.”¹ This phrase is one of our most constant and rudimentary ontological attestations. In fact, it says a great deal. “People” indicates everyone else, designated as the indeterminate ensemble of populations, lineages, or races [ gentes] from which the speaker removes himself. (Nevertheless, he removes himself in a very particular sort of way, because the designation is so general—and this is exactly the point—that it inevitably turns back around on the speaker. Since I say that “people are strange,” I include myself in a certain way in this strangeness.)

Book Title: The Machine Question-Critical Perspectives on AI, Robots, and Ethics
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Gunkel David J.
Abstract: One of the enduring concerns of moral philosophy is deciding who or what is deserving of ethical consideration. Much recent attention has been devoted to the "animal question" -- consideration of the moral status of nonhuman animals. In this book, David Gunkel takes up the "machine question": whether and to what extent intelligent and autonomous machines of our own making can be considered to have legitimate moral responsibilities and any legitimate claim to moral consideration. The machine question poses a fundamental challenge to moral thinking, questioning the traditional philosophical conceptualization of technology as a tool or instrument to be used by human agents. Gunkel begins by addressing the question of machine moral agency: whether a machine might be considered a legitimate moral agent that could be held responsible for decisions and actions. He then approaches the machine question from the other side, considering whether a machine might be a moral patient due legitimate moral consideration. Finally, Gunkel considers some recent innovations in moral philosophy and critical theory that complicate the machine question, deconstructing the binary agent--patient opposition itself. Technological advances may prompt us to wonder if the science fiction of computers and robots whose actions affect their human companions (think of HAL in 2001: A Space Odyssey) could become science fact. Gunkel's argument promises to influence future considerations of ethics, ourselves, and the other entities who inhabit this world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhks8

Chapter 5 Transculturations from: Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Because parent-teacher conferences offer particularly rich insights into the complexities of child language brokering on social, psychological, cultural, cognitive, and linguistic dimensions, I examine this activity setting in detail. The transactions also reveal adults’ assumptions about children and childhood, learning and development, and suggest how these beliefs influence children’s pathways.¹ They illuminate some challenges that interpreters face when they engage in interactions that would normally involve only two people. Cecilia Wadensjö,² in her extension of Erving Goffman’s concepts of participant frameworks,³ points out that the presence of translators makes dyadic exchanges into multiparty ones, but participants often continue to act

20 Orality, Memory, and Power: from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) OLIVELLE PATRICK
Abstract: Over the past several decades we have seen a shift in the academic study of religion from phenomenological descriptions and analyses of beliefs and rituals to the investigations of the social, political, and economic underpinnings and ramifications of religious practices and institutions. The new Institute for Signifying Scriptures (ISS) at the Claremont Graduate University is directed at investigating precisely such sociopolitical dimensions of “scriptures” cross-culturally. This essay focuses on how social prestige and political power are related to the production, transmission, and preservation of scriptures in India within the priestly class of Brahmins. Although limited in scope, I hope some

Talking Back from: Theorizing Scriptures
Abstract: Yes, yes, the social psychology, the power issues and dynamics—how could these matters not be considered as part of the probing of “scriptures”? These are matters having to do not with the one-time explosive moment in which the originary impulse behind the invention of scriptures is revealed. No, what has been addressed in the foregoing essays are some of the ongoing historical and new and widely varied social-psychological needs and power dynamics and issues that focus on peoples’ situations.

26 Racial and Colonial Politics of the Modern Object of Knowledge: from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) PARKER JOSEPH
Abstract: How might we reconsider the topic of “scriptures” in the midst of what the African historian Steven Feierman has called the “general epistemological crisis affecting all the social sciences and humanities”?¹ We find ourselves at sea in this crisis every time we write, not just when explicitly describing the other, and can only navigate its politics successfully if we recognize the dangers of what Emmanuel Levinas termed an ontological imperialism where otherness vanishes as part of the same of modernity.²

27 Who Needs the Subaltern? from: Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) SAMANTRAI RANU
Abstract: I read the call for an Institute for Signifying Scriptures primarily as a methodological statement, one that resonates well with my own research affiliations and inclinations. Vincent Wimbush proposes an approach to “scriptures” that shifts attention from the correct interpretation of canonical texts to the use of scriptural material in practice. Understood as phenomena, “scriptures” derives their meaning not from authorial intent but from their activation in everyday life in often unintended and surprising uses. Shifting from “ what ‘scriptures’ mean” to “how ‘scriptures’ mean,” Wimbush also directs our attention to the range of scriptural materials evident in the meaning-making, or

5 Nazi Aesthetics in Historical Context from: After Representation?
Author(s) YOUNG JAMES E.
Abstract: As is clear from the abundant literary and historical study of the victims’ diaries and memoirs, it is impossible to separate what might be called these works’ “aesthetic logic” from the victims’ very real historical and practical understanding of events as they unfolded. That is, the victims’ responses to contemporaneous events in the ghettos and camps were often shaped by how they may have literarily cast similar events the day before in letters, diaries, or chronicles. As the best new historical work on the Holocaust also makes clear, we can no longer divorce the Nazi-perpetrators’ representations of their victims from

Book Title: Thinking About Dementia-Culture, Loss, and the Anthropology of Senility
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): COHEN LAWRENCE
Abstract: Taken together, the essays make four important and interrelated contributions to our understanding of the mental status of the elderly. First, cross-cultural data show that the aging process, while biologically influenced, is also culturally constructed. Second, ethnographic reports raise questions about the diagnostic criteria used for defining the elderly as demented. Third, case studies show how a diagnosis affects a patient's treatment in both clinical and familial settings. Finally, the collection highlights the gap that separates current biological understandings of aging from its cultural meanings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjbhp

Introduction: from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) COHEN LAWRENCE
Abstract: Our aims in bringing together the scholars assembled in this volume were threefold. First, we wanted to link a variety of research strategies and disciplinary vantage points in the human and social sciences in order to better understand the remaking—biological and clinical, economic and political, public and phenomenological—of the senile dementias today. Beyond the specificity of Alzheimer’s disease or vascular dementia, many of us have been involved in research on what I have long termed senility. By senility, I mean the perception of deleterious behavioral change in someone understood to be old, with attention to both the biology

3 Negotiating the Moral Status of Trouble: from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) SMITH ANDRÉ P.
Abstract: There is evidence to suggest that individuals who complain of memory problems but have no objective deficits constitute between 12 and 30 percent of the patient population that is seen in memory clinics (Almeida et al. 1993; Berrios, Marková, and Girala 2000). There are conflicting views about the clinical significance of such complaints. Berrios, Markovà, and Girala (2000) remark that because these patients do not fit into any accepted definition of memory disorder, attitudes toward “persistent memory complainers with negative neurological, neuropsychological and neuropsychiatric assessments tend to be harsher, particularly in memory clinics whose objective is to collect patients for

4 Diagnosing Dementia: from: Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) GRAHAM JANICE E.
Abstract: What meanings are hidden in the plaques and tangles of an atrophying brain, in the artifacts of diagnostic clinical history, in the bioinformatic matrices of an epidemiological database? Or in the lived experiences of a still-active mind trying to express a voice, to perform an action, but unable to find the means to do so? How do seemingly disparate bits and pieces of pathology, clinical history, social relationships, and specialist training come together? How do these fractured components form interpretable constellations that help us better understand the science; the sufferers; the relationships between dementia, data, and the diagnostic process?

The Word and the Words: from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Guite Malcolm
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to explore a little of the theological framework that lies behind the effort of translation and also to show the way in which the act of translation itself became a key theological metaphor, a way of understanding and unpacking the truth that the translators believed was at the heart of the words with which they were working. In particular I want to look at what Lancelot Andrewes, whose name headed the list of translators, was thinking and saying about translation in the midst of his work on the KJV, and also at the way

African Americans and the King James Version of the Bible from: The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Sadler Rodney
Abstract: The King James Version of the Bible has been a prominent factor influencing the course of Western history for the past four hundred years. You need look no further than the African American community to find evidence for this claim. As a people, African Americans were not easy converts to Christianity. In fact, it took more than a century, two Great Awakenings, and the typically more egalitarian evangelistic tactics of the Baptists and Methodists for Christianity to begin to make significant inroads into African American communities. But more than these sociological factors, it took the stories from the pages of

Book Title: Fragile Dignity-Intercontextual Conversations on Scriptures, Family, and Violence
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Spronk Klaas
Abstract: Human dignity insists that every human deserves respect and a safe place to live. For many, this is not a reality. The essays collected here analyze the background of this problem in contemporary family life and society at large, with special emphasis on the role of women and on the Bible as a source of inspiration and transformation. The collection is the product of a six-year conversation on family, violence, and human dignity between the Protestant Theological University in Kampen, The Netherlands, and the Faculty of Theology at Stellenbosch University, South Africa, a North-South dialogue that included annual conferences, a series of responsive letters, and additional external responses. The contributors are Cheryl B. Anderson, Hendrik Bosman, Gerrit Brand, Athalya Brenner, L. Juliana Claassens, Dorothea Erbele-Küster, Leo J. Koffeman, Frits de Lange, Monica Jyotsna Melanchthon, Magda Misset-van de Weg, Beverly Eileen Mitchell, Anne-Claire Mulder, Ian Nell, Mary-Anne Plaatjies-van Huffel, Jeremy Punt, Petruschka Schaafsma, D. Xolile Simon, Lee-Ann J. Simon, Gé Speelman, Klaas Spronk, Ciska Stark, Elsa Tamez, Charlene van der Walt, Robert Vosloo, and Yusef Waghid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjgv9

Family and its Discontents: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Anderson Cheryl B.
Abstract: Even at first reading, the articles by Schaafsma and Mulder work well together. Schaafsma’s article acknowledges that the human dignity of individual family members may be compromised in the family itself—a problem that Dan Browning’s work seeks to address. In turn, Mulder’s article develops theological constructs to counter the low self-esteem of battered women. By discussing domestic abuse, Mulder effectively offers one example of how the human dignity of an individual family member can be undermined, just as Schaafsma notes.

“Household” (Dis)loyalties and Violence in Judges 14 and 15: from: Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Koffeman Leo
Abstract: Referring to tragic stories, Exum (1992, 8) argues that “the association of good and evil within the divine provides fertile ground for tragic awareness to grow.” According to Exum, “telling” and “re-telling” a biblical tragic narrative also makes one knowledgeable and “honest about reality.” The process creates openness to “a multivalent, inexhaustible narrative world” of good and evil. In a dialogical theological conversation, it instills a “tragic vision” that contributes to a “fullness of insight into the human condition” (1992, 9). This essay assumes that tensions between loyalties and disloyalties (re)produce the good and the evil, that which upholds and

Foreword from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Author(s) Rhoads David
Abstract: It is difficult to overestimate the significance of the work of Werner Kelber for biblical studies. His groundbreaking 1983 monograph, The Oral and the Written Gospel, challenged the core foundations of biblical scholarship by offering a paradigm shift of sweeping proportions. Over the last three decades he has affirmed, revised, refined, and expanded his work in conversation with others who work in the same field and who are interacting with his scholarchip. The articles and papers arranged in chronological order in this volume chart that pioneering course. Every essay makes an original contribution, even when Kelber is reviewing the work

Introduction from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The essays collected in this volume and arranged in the chronological order of their composition were published between 1985 and 2011, spanning a period of over a quarter of a century. All the pieces have previously been published, and all have been reworked and edited. To enhance readability, to facilitate cross-referencing, and to improve the coherence of the whole, the sixteen chapters have been subdivided into sense units and numbered across the volume. All essays have been written after the publication of my earlier study The Oral and the Written Gospel(1983). They take their starting point from that book

3 Narrative and Disclosure: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Since William Wrede’s classic study on concealment in the Gospels (1901 [1971]), narrative and secrecy are thought to be close allies in the Gospels of Mark and also John. Messiasgeheimniswas the code he had invented to get a significant matter into perspective. To him the term suggested a theological idea that exercised controlling influence on Mark’s narrative, relegating it toDogmengeschichte(1901, 131). Today few will give unqualified assent to the term “messianic secret,” and fewer still subscribe to Wrede’s explanation of its functioning. But the alliance of Mark’s narrative with secrecy is not in doubt, and the debate

5 Jesus and Tradition: from: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: From the perspective of media sensibilities, the academic discipline of biblical scholarship is in no small measure intertwined with typography, the technological invention that mediated both the biblical manuscripts themselves and our interpretations of them. This alliance between print technology and the academic study of the Bible has been a long and close one, although it has largely remained unrecognized by the discipline. For the past five centuries Western history, and particularly the literate elite, has managed verbal communication under the spell of the print medium. The shift from script to print has had a major part in the three

Book Title: Political Creativity-Reconfiguring Institutional Order and Change
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Hattam Victoria
Abstract: Drawing on the rich cache of antidualist theoretical traditions, from poststructuralism and ecological theory to constructivism and pragmatism, a diverse group of scholars probes acts of social innovation in many locations: land boards in Botswana, Russian labor relations, international statistics, global supply chains, Islamic economics in Algeria, Islamic sects and state authority in Senegal, and civil rights reform, colonization, industrial policy, and political consulting in the United States. These political scientists reconceptualize agencyas a relational process that continually reorders the nature and meaning of people and things,orderas an assemblage that necessitates creative tinkering and interpretation, andchangeas the unruly politics of time that confounds the conventional ordering of past, present, and future.Political Creativityoffers analytical tools for reimagining order and change as entangled processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjkqq

Chapter 2 Ecological Explanation from: Political Creativity
Author(s) Ansell Chris
Abstract: If, as this volume suggests, reigning theories of institutions have difficulty in explaining institutional change, then new insights might come from howwe explain things in the social sciences. From that starting point, thisessayexplores a style of explanation only dimly perceived as a distinctive form—ecological explanation. Although ecological explanation has important and long-standing roots in the social sciences—reaching back at least to the work of the Chicago school of sociology—it is presently much better known as a strategy for explaining the natural world.¹ Natural ecologists adopt a variety of specific explanatory techniques, but are broadly

Book Title: How Does Social Science Work?-Reflections on Practice
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): DIESING PAUL
Abstract: At once an analysis, a critique, and a synthesis, this major study begins by surveying philosophical approaches to hermeneutics, to examine the question of how social science ought to work. It illustrates many of its arguments with untraditional examples, such as the reception of the work of the political biographer Robert Caro to show the hermeneutical problems of ethnographers. The major part of the book surveys sociological, political, and psychological studies of social science to get a rounded picture of how social science works,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjpmm

Introduction from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: Traditionally, metaphysics searches for essences, but the post-metaphysical quest leans more toward potentials. Martin Heidegger puts it this way: “Higher than actuality lies possibility.” Metaphysics as a branch of philosophy studies the nature of being and beings, existence, time, space, movement, and causality. It also involves underlying principles and theories that form the basis of a particular field of knowledge. Heidegger conceived the primary task of metaphysics as the clarification ofbeingin his book on phenomenological metaphysics,Being and Time. In the analysis of being, he holds that phenomenology and ontology characterize philosophy itself, and that we can best

2 First Sounds from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: Simone de Beauvoir was the first philosopher to look into the darkness associated with woman and nature in The Second Sex, which stands at the beginning of the second wave of feminism: “One is not born, but rather becomes, a woman.” This most famous sentence from Beauvoir’s book sums up her argument against biological determinism. Beauvoir’s comprehensive and still controversial text also initiated existential feminism, as she developed her themes within the emergence of existentialist philosophy—an open-ended, anti-essentialist, and nonsystematic philosophy that studies life as an undecided project-in-the-making. She did not call herself a feminist at first, but associated

4 Anti-Essentialist Trio from: Dancing Identity
Abstract: Through Simone de Beauvoir, I understand how biology, ontology, and politics are connected, and the biological politics of domination that puts nature and indeed all forms of life in harm’s way. I study Beauvoir’s work here in close proximity to Maurice Merleau-Ponty, a contemporary of hers, and Judith Butler, a contemporary of mine. These three comprise a trio of related but significantly divergent phenomenological critiques of determinism. Through them we can see how the concept of determinism shifts back and forth, how it is performed. Questions of tradition and gender in ballet also shift around essentialist thinking. I provide a

6 TOWARD INVENTIVE COMPOSITION PEDAGOGIES from: A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Most pedagogical discourse in the 1990s revolved around critical pedagogies that generally mirror James Berlin’s image of social-epistemic rhetoric. While much other work was done in the period, it inevitably evoked the social-epistemic question: does this pedagogy seek to produce the proper political subject and corresponding critical text? The emergence of technological contexts in the middle and later 1990s changed the landscape in which this question would arise. The Internet opened the way for completely new social and pedagogical contexts. Much critical pedagogy began to focus on media literacy as decoding the dominant political assumptions and values in films and

Book Title: Dance And Lived Body- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): FRALEIGH SONDRA HORTON
Abstract: In her remarkable book, Sondra Horton Fraleigh examines and describes dance through her consciousness of dance as an art, through the experience of dancing, and through the existential and phenomenological literature on the lived body. She describes, with performance photographs, specific imagery in dance masterworks by Doris Humphrey, Anna Sokolow, Viola Farber, Nina Weiner, and Garth Fagan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjrjj

CHAPTER FIVE Being Playful: from: A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: We have now seen numerous instances of Modiano at his most subversive. The apparently unremarkable first-person narrator, chronological narrative and realist representation have all turned out to be postmodern subversions of these familiar narrative tropes. So too has his use of historical facts: far from adding up to a historical novel, they result in an uneasy mixture of fact and fiction which has a morally disturbing effect on the reader. This leads us to a question of classification. Modiano’s novels are not what they seem, so we know what they are not: but what exactly are they? To what subgenre

CHAPTER THREE The Drive for Reference from: Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: In the 1970s two well-known French philosophers clashed swords. Their querelleconcerned the seemingly arcane issue of metaphoric reference. As we have seen, Paul Ricoeur argues convincingly inLa Métaphore vivethat metaphor is a cognitive tool, that it helps in certain circumstances to articulate our experience of the world. Ricoeur’s analysis is anchored to the established phenomenological precepts of Kant and Husserl, for in order that metaphor may refer, its transgressive character must ultimately be tamed by the master discourse of philosophy. However, according to Jacques Derrida’s deconstructive practice, the philosopher’s discourse is itself shot through with metaphor. It

5 Freedom, Slavery, and the Modern Construction of Rights from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Patterson Orlando
Abstract: The end of the Cold War entailed not simply the political and ideological victory of the West over its Communist adversary, but the triumph of the West’s most central and cherished value, freedom. Today we are living through one of the periodic explosive diffusions of this ideal as well as the related notion of human rights. According to Freedom House, the majority of the world’s 5.4 billion people have declared themselves in favour of freedom. The world seems to be in anything but a festive mood as a result of the triumph of its master value. The former Soviet Union

6 The Value of Introspection from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Flasch Kurt
Abstract: With this striking exhortation, Augustine summed up introspection as a constitutive element of the old European system of merit. At the same time, in an anxious, nothing less than beseeching, peremptory tone, it reminds us that human beings have a tendency to throw themselves outwards, to live amid diversions, to fail to appreciate themselves. It is not only with the emergence of industrial-technological civilization that introspection comes under threat; it faces inherent threats. Before Augustine, Neoplatonic and Stoic philosophers reminded us of the same thing: it is we who forget our inner world, plunge into the external world, and lose

10 The Status of the Enlightenment in German History from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Koselleck Reinhart
Abstract: This statement from Voltaire is readily cited to underline the sovereignty of the human being said to have been unleashed in the eighteenth century, when people broke free of religion and metaphysics. The human being, it is suggested, also determines the position of God and, if needed, for reasons of social control for example, may occupy His position argumentatively. Belief in God is no longer a theologically grounded, self-evident commandment; it is universally useful or, to use more modern language, ideologically fungible.

12 Value Change in Europe from the Perspective of Empirical Social Research from: The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Thome Helmut
Abstract: When studying values empirically, social researchers apply a methodological perspective which differs substantially from that characteristic of philosophers, social anthropologists, or historians of ideas. In empirical research, values are treated as something ‘measurable’, measurable, above all, with the instrument of systematic surveys. This is a persistent source of irritation, and not just among non-sociologists; I shall therefore deal briefly with this methodology by way of introduction. The first thing to bear in mind is that we constantly produce rough-and-ready ‘measurements’ of values in everyday conversation. Referring to a colleague, for example, we say that he values his work more than

13 Revising Jezebel Politics: from: Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Leath Jennifer S.
Abstract: The failure of respectability and the incessant onslaught of cultural attacks against allblack sexualities invite us to “crawl back” (Long, 1999: 9) through the lives of Jezebel, imagining adeviantfuture (Cohen, 2004), a “still unfolding” revolution (Walcott, 2006). A careful review of the mythological, historical, and biblical lives of “Jezebel” unearths the value of reappropriating Jezebel as a model for radical uses of the erotic. The queerness of her faith; the deviance of her sexuality; the bold pluralism of her politics: these are qualities that fill the interstices of hegemonichis-stories of Jezebel. While epistemological archeology will not

CHAPTER TWO Mapping Belfast: from: Ciaran Carson
Abstract: In the discourse of cultural theory it seems that there is considerable confusion, or at least deep ambivalence, concerning the status and function of maps and mapping. In this context it is important to note that mapping tends to be treated by cultural theorists less in terms of its specific histories and methodological principles than as a set of concepts that are often employed in explicitly metaphorical ways – ‘mapping’, then, rather than strict cartography. On the one hand, there is a tendency to equate mapping with the apparatuses of the state and of social control, as a sort of graphic

Leaving the South: from: American Creoles
Author(s) Lane Jeremy F.
Abstract: In his biography of Frantz Fanon, David Macey is somewhat dismissive of the scattered allusions to jazz Fanon makes throughout his work. Thus, according to Macey, the ‘parody of the négritudevision of Louis Armstrong’s music’ inPeau noire, masques blancs(1952) proves that Fanon knew little about the music itself and was interested primarily, if not exclusively, in its sociological significance (Macey, 2000: 124). The promotion of modern jazz, inLes Damnés de la terre(1961), as a model for the ‘national culture’ of a newly independent Algeria, meanwhile, was simply ‘not at all pertinent’ to Algeria (ibid.: 378).

CHAPTER 10 V. Y. Mudimbe’s ‘long nineteenth century’ from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Fraiture Pierre-Philippe
Abstract: The concept of cultural conversion, understood in terms of its multifaceted intellectual significance but also in its concrete manifestations, lies at the heart of Valentin Yves (or Vumbi Yoka) Mudimbe’s oeuvre. Whether as a novelist, a poet, or an essayist (see Coulon, 2003), Mudimbe has dedicated a major part of his creative energy to tracing the emergence of Western modernity in sub-Saharan Africa and to the factors, epistemological and otherwise, responsible for the gradual transformation of the Congo where he was born on 8 December 1941 (in Jadotville, which became Likasi after independence). His critical reflection, conducted in French and

CHAPTER 13 Postcolonial Anthropology in the French-speaking World from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Richards David
Abstract: It is a foolish commentator indeed who would attempt to claim a precise moment in history when anthropology in the French-speaking world becamepostcolonial – that point in time when predominantly French anthropological thought turned on its own history of involvement in the imperial enterprise and began to challenge anthropological theories and practices grounded in the discourses and assumptions of colonialism. That anthropology was one of the handmaidens of colonialism, a science of empire, is indisputable and well documented. For many, the postcolonial turn has yet to occur and anthropology is still irredeemably and fatally tainted by its colonial origins.

CHAPTER 17 Postcolonialism and Deconstruction: from: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Syrotinski Michael
Abstract: One of the most significant recent developments within postcolonial theory has been its belated engagement with the Francophone world, after a decade or more of sustained critical attention to Anglophone texts and contexts. Indeed, one might have expected the dialogues that are now taking place to have begun much earlier, given that so much of the writing of the three figures most associated with the emergence of postcolonial theory – Homi Bhabha, Edward Said and Gayatri Spivak – owes a clear intellectual debt to an earlier generation of French theorists. A number of genealogical lines of influence are now beginning

Translating the Elizabethan Theatre: from: Translating Life
Author(s) BUTLER MARTIN
Abstract: A curious and revealing detail in the Globe theatre sequence which opens Laurence Olivier’s film of Henry Vis the repeated introduction of a stage boy, who holds up placards indicating the title and locations of the play we are about to see. The first placard informs us that this is ‘The Chronicle History of Henry the Fift with his battel fought at Agin Court in France’, and subsequent placards announce locations as an ‘ANTE CHAMBER IN KING HENRY’S PALACE’ and ‘THE BOAR’S HEAD’. Generally speaking, the film’s invention of this boy is in keeping with the archaeological thrust of

Hazlitt’s Liber Amoris; or, the New Pygmalion (1823): from: Translating Life
Author(s) BARNARD JOHN
Abstract: The subtitle of Hazlitt’s Liber Amoris; or, the New Pygmalion, published anonymously in 1823, promises a retelling of Ovid’s Augustan myth of transformation set in Regency England, a translation from classical to modern times. Unlike Ovid’s poetic invention of a distant mythological past, Hazlitt’s prose version takes place in the quotidian world of London’s lodging houses. However, early nineteenth-century London has no pagan Venus who can effect the metamorphosis required by Hazlitt’s narrator. Obviously, like Mary Shelley’sFrankenstein; or, the Modern Prometheus(1818), the subtitle is ironic, and questions the pertinence of classical mythology to the modern world. There is

Aestheticism in Translation: from: Translating Life
Author(s) SALMON RICHARD
Abstract: Schiller’s celebrated defence of the redemptive social value of art as autonomous aesthetic illusion ( Täuschung, translated as ‘fiction’ by Carlyle)¹ offers a suggestive proleptic commentary on the close relationship between late nineteenth-century aestheticism and a certain logic of translatability. Whilst this defence alludes to a familiar mimetic conception of the relationship between art and life—between the ‘copy’ and its ‘original’—it also enacts a striking defamiliarization of this paradigm by claiming for aesthetic illusion a truth which is lacking from its ostensibly reflected source. Art, Schiller would seem to say, offers a truth which is lacking from truth; only

CHAPTER 5 ‘After Auschwitz’: from: Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) BERNSTEIN J.M.
Abstract: The name ‘Auschwitz’ stands for what was without question one of the most traumatic events of the century. Equally, it names an event which emphatically dissolves moral scepticism; we feel morally certain that there evil of an unspeakable kind occurred. Perhaps, then, it is the utter proximity of these two thoughts, the traumatic insistenceof the event of the Holocaust and our moralcertaintyabout its evil character, that lies behind and is the genealogical origin of recent attempts to identify trauma with ethicality as such. For example, in Emmanuel Levinas’Otherwise than Beingwe read:

CHAPTER 10 The Visibility of the Holocaust: from: Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) SALTER MICHAEL
Abstract: Although less well known to social theorists than that of other Frankfurt School members, the work of Franz Neumann has recently become the focus of renewed interest.¹ Within contemporary legal scholarship, that interest has centred largely upon how this ‘junior’ member of the Frankfurt School combined classic liberal constitutional values, particularly a belief in the rule of law, with a distinctive sociological analysis of law.² Several historians have studied the wartime record of Neumann, Kirchheimer and Marcuse,³ but Neumann’s wartime service with US military intelligence has received little attention from legal theorists, in spite of its clear relationship with his

15 Popular Culture, the Final Frontier: from: French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: This chapter is about the place of contemporary popular culture in French Studies.¹ Both ‘ populaire’ and ‘popular’ are of course problematic epithets, but I do not wish to encumber this particular discussion with matters of definition, important as they are at an epistemological level.² I therefore use ‘popular culture’ in its common English sense, referring to contemporary industrialised forms and practices such as pop music, television, commercial cinema, pulp fiction, and so on, which reach a large, sociologically diverse audience. In French, such forms and practices have often been pejoratively referred to asla culture de masse, though this is

Book Title: London Irish Fictions-Narrative, Diaspora and Identity
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): MURRAY TONY
Abstract: This is the first book about the literature of the Irish in London. By examining over 30 novels, short stories and autobiographies set in London since the Second World War, London Irish Fictions investigates the complex psychological landscapes of belonging and cultural allegiance found in these unique and intensely personal perspectives on the Irish experience of migration. As well as bringing new research to bear on the work of established Irish writers such as Edna O’Brien, John McGahern, Emma Donoghue and Joseph O’Connor, this study reveals a fascinating and hitherto unexplored literature, diverse in form and content. By synthesising theories of narrative and diaspora into a new methodological approach to the study of migration, London Irish Fictions sheds new light on the ways in which migrant identities are negotiated, mediated and represented through literature. It also examines the specific role that the metropolis plays in literary portrayals of migrant experience as an arena for the performance of Irishness, as a catalyst in transformations of Irishness and as an intrinsic component of second-generation Irish identities. Furthermore, by analysing the central role of narrative in configuring migrant cultures and identities, it reassesses notions of exile, escape and return in Irish culture more generally. In this regard, it has particular relevance to current debates on migration and multiculturalism in both Britain and Ireland, especially in the wake of an emerging new phase of Irish migration in the post-‘Celtic Tiger’ era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjm19

CHAPTER 1 Republic or Empire? from: Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Henningsen Manfred
Abstract: When in 2000 Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri published their book, Empire, it became an instant best-seller in anti-globalization circles around the world. The major thesis of the authors was that an empire-like regime with no territorial boundaries was presiding over ‘an irresistible and irreversible globalization of economic and cultural exchanges. Along with the global market and global circuits of production has emerged a global order, a new logic and structure of rule – in short, a new form of sovereignty.’ The empire they saw ‘materializing before our eyes’ (Hardt and Negri 2000: ix) reverted to the more familiar imperial

CHAPTER 3 Multiple Modernities or Global Interconnections: from: Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Bhambra Gurminder K.
Abstract: The colonial encounter has been a defining moment in the making of the contemporary world. It has madea particular world and established cognitive patterns forknowingthe world, yet the colonial encounter is missing in most sociological accounts of modernity. In recent times, increasing significance has been given to global phenomena. Acknowledging the complexity brought by globalization and interdependence has led theorists to contend that a new approach to modernity is needed. A shift from the singular trajectory of modernity to multiple modernities has been recommended (Arnason 2000; Delanty 2004; Eisenstadt 2000, 2001, 2004; Eisenstadt and Schluchter 1998; Wittrock

3 ‘The West or the Rest?’ from: V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Anger, hope, Utopia, and radicalism are the four axes of V. Y. Mudimbe’s work in the 1970s. There is in this corpus a marked tendency to exaggerate the West’s supposed oneness and to convey the impression that the world, to use an expression first coined by Chinweizu² and the American anthropologist Marshall Sahlins,³ is made up of the ‘West and the Rest’. This dualistic dimension is all the more surprising given that Mudimbe advocates at the end of both L’Autre FaceandL’Odeuran epistemological ‘insurrection’ that would reject the very dualistic basis upon which colonialismandneo-colonialism are predicated.

4 ‘Changing Places’ from: V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: In 1980, V. Y. Mudimbe, who from the late 1960s onwards had also been known as Valentin Mudimbé, moved permanently to the US. The disappearance of the acute accent from his surname is the mark of a very concrete transformation as he was obliged, as will be examined in this chapter, to switch language and develop new strategies to adapt to the sociological and institutional demands of American academia. The consecration in this context came in 1988 with the publication of The Invention of Africa. This monograph captured the critical mood of the 1980s and resonated with other projects such

CHAPTER FOUR Retouching the past: from: Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: In the first hundred and twenty years following photography’s invention, analysis of the new medium was dominated by discussion of three central issues: its relationship with art and its impact on and implications for painting; the photograph’s status as objective trace and its potential as a means of recording and, indeed, knowing the world; the technological advances that constantly refined the camera’s capacity to replicate reality and democratised access to photographic practice. With the exception of a few sceptical voices, for most commentators, the documentary, indexical status of photography was a given. If Dadaist and Surrealist experimentation – the photomontages,

Book Title: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place-Explorations in the Topology of Being
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Malpas Jeff
Abstract: The idea of place--topos--runs through Martin Heidegger's thinking almost from the very start. It can be seen not only in his attachment to the famous hut in Todtnauberg but in his constant deployment of topological terms and images and in the situated, "placed" character of his thought and of its major themes and motifs. Heidegger's work, argues Jeff Malpas, exemplifies the practice of "philosophical topology." In Heidegger and the Thinking of Place, Malpas examines the topological aspects of Heidegger's thought and offers a broader elaboration of the philosophical significance of place. Doing so, he provides a distinct and productive approach to Heidegger as well as a new reading of other key figures--notably Kant, Aristotle, Gadamer, and Davidson, but also Benjamin, Arendt, and Camus. Malpas, expanding arguments he made in his earlier book Heidegger's Topology (MIT Press, 2007), discusses such topics as the role of place in philosophical thinking, the topological character of the transcendental, the convergence of Heideggerian topology with Davidsonian triangulation, the necessity of mortality in the possibility of human life, the role of materiality in the working of art, the significance of nostalgia, and the nature of philosophy as beginning in wonder. Philosophy, Malpas argues, begins in wonder and begins in place and the experience of place. The place of wonder, of philosophy, of questioning, he writes, is the very topos of thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjp35

Introduction: from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The idea of place—of topos—runs through the thinking of Martin Heidegger almost from the very start. Although not always directly thematized—sometimes apparently obscured, displaced even, by other concepts—and expressed through many different terms (Ort, Ortschaft, Stätte, Gegend, Dasein, Lichtung, Ereignis),¹ it is impossible to think with Heidegger unless one attunes oneself to Heidegger’s own attunement to place. This is something not only to be observed in Heidegger’s attachment to the famous hut at Todtnauberg;² it is also found, more significantly, in his constant deployment of topological terms and images, and in the situated, “placed,” character of

7 Geography, Biology, and Politics from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: To what extent are those forms of contemporary thinking that adopt a holistic or ecological conception of the relation between human being and the environing world associated, even if only implicitly, with a conservative and reactionary politics? That there is such an association is often claimed in relation to a number of thinkers, but most notably perhaps in relation to Heidegger.¹ Sometimes the claim is extended to encompass broader movements in contemporary thought, with environmental thinking being the most common, but by no means the only target here.² Seldom, however, is much consideration given to the way such a claim

10 Topology, Triangulation, and Truth from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: Heidegger’s Being and Timeis not primarily concerned with questions of interpretation or understanding. Its driving interest is instead ontological—an interest in the question of the “meaning of being.” Yet inasmuch as the work adopts a thoroughly hermeneuticized approach to ontology—the very focus on themeaningof being suggests as such—so the inquiry into ontology also involves Heidegger in an inquiry into the “structure” of understanding. Although the explicitly hermeneutic focus disappears from Heidegger’s later work, still the concern with understanding, thought in terms of a broader happening of disclosedness—a happening of world—can be seen

Epilogue: from: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: For the most part, it seems, such sayings are taken to indicate that philosophy has its starting point, understood in terms of its motivational or psychological impetus, in

Book Title: Interested Readers-Essays on the Hebrew Bible in Honor of David J. A. Clines
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Maier Christl M.
Abstract: Readers of the Hebrew Bible are interested readers, bringing their own perspectives to the text. The essays in this volume, written by friends and colleagues who have drawn inspiration from and shown interest in the scholarship of David Clines, engage with his work through examining interpretations of the Hebrew Bible in areas of common exploration: literary/exegetical readings, ideological-critical readings, language and lexicography, and reception history. The contributors are James K. Aitken, Jacques Berlinerblau, Daniel Bodi, Roland Boer, Athalya Brenner, Mark G. Brett, Marc Zvi Brettler, Craig C. Broyles, Philip P. Chia, Jeremy M. S. Clines, Adrian H. W. Curtis, Katharine J. Dell, Susan E. Gillingham, Susanne Gillmayr-Bucher, Edward L. Greenstein, Mayer I. Gruber, Norman C. Habel, Alan J. Hauser, Jan Joosten, Paul J. Kissling, Barbara M. Leung Lai, Diana Lipton, Christl M. Maier, Heather A. McKay, Frank H. Polak, Jeremy Punt, Hugh S. Pyper, Deborah W. Rooke, Eep Talstra, Laurence A. Turner, Stuart Weeks, Gerald O. West, and Ian Young.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjz47

“Moab Is My Washpot” (Ps 60:8 [MT 10]): from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Gillingham Susan E.
Abstract: “I stand to be corrected, but I believe that every interpretation of and commentary on this psalm ever written adopts the viewpoint of the text, and, moreover, assumes that the readers addressed by the scholarly commentator share the ideology of the text and its author.” So writes David Clines in his “Psalm 2 and the MLF (Moab Liberation Front).” ¹ A study of the reception history of this psalm undoubtedly bears this out: David is indeed one of very few to question the ideological stance of the psalmist.² He looks at Ps 2 from the point of view of its

Reading Back and Forth: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Maier Christl M.
Abstract: The scholarly interests of David Clines are varied and cover a wide range of methods, starting from philological and text-critical analyses, source and redaction-critical studies, literary inquiries, to ideological criticism. His two-volume anthology On the Way to the Postmodernimpressively demonstrates David’s exegetical and hermeneutical competence.¹ In order to cover that range of approaches, the editors of this Festschrift sought to classify its contributions under six different rubrics. Interestingly, all colleagues whom we asked to write a “historical” piece either had to decline due to their overcommitment to other tasks or in the end decided to deliver an essay that

Voice and Ideology in Ecclesiastes: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Lai Barbara M. Leung
Abstract: Two notions, rooted in the rubrics of biblical interpretation in general and reading strategy in particular, form the conceptual framework and specific directives for this endeavor. First, the biblical text is an ideological production. This not only means that all texts have ideology, but that interpreters also read the text from their respective ideological formations.² The ideologies of the ancient community of Israel ingrained in the Hebrew Bible are “historically and culturally far removed from the ideologies of our owndays.”³ Engaging in ideological critical reading is, in essence, the merging of the two horizons—the horizon of the ancient text

Possibilities and Prospects of Postcolonial Biblical Interpretation: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Punt Jeremy
Abstract: Biblical scholarship is (generally) self-reflective and self-critical. Scholars investigate and interpret biblical texts while exploring the value as well as the limitations of theories and methodologies in their work.¹ Older, existing theories are adjusted and new models are probed and developed.² Various biblical scholars see in postcolonial biblical interpretation a further development along the lines of ideological criticism—even if not perpetuating it. But what is postcolonial biblical interpretation? And how does it manifest in South(ern) Africa? The answer is of course determined by both inquirer and respondent, constituted as they are withinand constitutive as they areofof

Deploying the Literary Detail of a Biblical Text (2 Samuel 13:1–22) in Search of Redemptive Masculinities from: Interested Readers
Author(s) West Gerald O.
Abstract: Until recently African biblical hermeneutics was characterized as a comparative project.¹ Analysis was done of both the biblical text and the African context, and the two sets of analysis were then “compared,” in a range of different ways.² What has become more evident on closer scrutiny,³ however, is that this “comparison” of text and context is a mediated process, involving a third pole, that of forms of ideological/theological appropriation.⁴

Neologisms: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Aitken James K.
Abstract: What makes a new word? Invention in the material world or technological innovation are common causes in our day for vocabulary innovation: computer, mainframe, mobile (phone), tweet, blog. Such innovations lead to the creation of new words, or as in some of these cases (e.g., mobile), an extended denotation of an already existing word. An invention such as the bicycle not only gave us the new word itself, but led to the semantic extension of the verb “to ride.”¹ No longer did we ride only animals, but now we could also ride bicycles or other vehicles. Less tangible but equally

From London to Amsterdam: from: Interested Readers
Author(s) Rooke Deborah W.
Abstract: G. F. Handel’s oratorios were a development of the later years of his career, being written during the period 1732–1752. Most of the oratorios were “sacred dramas,” that is, operatic versions of Old Testament narratives, and they often had political as well as theological resonances. The oratorios were a chance development, having their origin in a piece written initially by Handel in 1718 or thereabouts for private performance at Cannons, the country seat of James Brydges (later duke of Chandos). The piece in question was Esther, a short, three-act musical drama, which tells a much-truncated version of the story

Chapter 14 Radhakrishnan and the Construction of Philosophical Dialogue across Cultural Traditions from: Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Leighton Denys P.
Abstract: Many humanities and social science scholars today are committed to, or at any rate, pay lip service to ideals of interdisciplinarity and methodological cross-fertilization. In light of this fact, it is remarkable that there should be so little dialogue between historians of philosophy (including those who study political and religious philosophy) and intellectual historians, particularly with respect to study of ‘non-Western’ thought systems or world views. A common tendency among intellectual historians today is to reduce history of philosophy to a minor province of philosophical hermeneutics. The increasingly ahistorical philosophical hermeneuticists, in turn, usually prioritize exposition and internal analysis of

11 ENGENDERING DANCE: from: Researching Dance
Author(s) Desmond Jane C.
Abstract: In its broadest contours, feminist scholarship investigates the historical constitution of gender as a category of social differentiation and analyzes the effects of this epistemological divide in all realms of human endeavor including economics, the arts, public institutions, popular culture, and the daily experiences of individuals and groups. It also investigates how ideologies of gender difference operate to naturalize such concepts and their material effects so that they appear normal and inevitable.

4.1 Explanations of Colors: from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Machamer Peter
Abstract: It is difficult to critically comment upon a paper with which one agrees both about the general goals and about their substantive implementation. Hardin’s paper is informative and well argued, and certainly furthers the work in color perception that he established in Color for Philosophers. Most interestingly, in this paper he took what is thought to be clearly aphilosophicalproblem, the inverted spectrum, and showed how attention to detail, scientific and phenomenological, could be utilized to dissolve the force of the case. It appears that humans could not invert the spectrum without there being noticeable differences—“something got lost

9 Animal Cognition and Animal Minds from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Allen Colin
Abstract: Psychology, according to a standard dictionary definition, is the science of mind and behavior. For a major part of the twentieth century, (nonhuman) animal psychology was on a behavioristic track that explicitly denied the possibility of a science of animal mind. While many comparative psychologists remain wedded to behavioristic methods, they have more recently adopted a cognitive, information-processing approach that does not adhere to the strictures of stimulus-response explanations of animal behavior. Cognitive ethologists are typically willing to go much further than comparative psychologists by adopting folk-psychological terms to explain the behavior of nonhuman animals.

11 Supervenience, Emergence, and Realization in the Philosophy of Mind from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Kim Jaegwon
Abstract: How is the mental related to the physical? Answering this question is the mind-body problem. The three concepts that have often and prominently been invoked in recent discussions of the mind-body problem are those of “supervenience,” “emergence,” and “realization.” Some have claimed that mentality—in particular, consciousness and intentionality, are “emergent properties,” properties that emerge from complex configurations of physical/biological events and yet are irreducible to them. In the heyday of positivism and reductionism, emergentism used to be ridiculed as an example of unsavory pseudo-scientific doctrines, not quite as disreputable as, say, neo-vitalism, with its entelechies or élan vital, but

11.2 Property Physicalism, Reduction and Realization from: Mindscapes
Author(s) Beckermann Ansgar
Abstract: Once, a mind-body theory based upon the idea of supervenience seemed to be a promising alternative to the various kinds of reductionistic physicalism. In recent years, however, Jaegwon Kim has subjected his own brainchild to a very thorough criticism. With most of Kim’s arguments I agree wholeheartedly—not least because they converge with my own thoughts.² In order to explain the few points of divergence with Kim’s views, I shall have to prepare the ground a little. In the course of this paper I will therefore do two things: At the start, I will try to sketch the logical topography

Book Title: Joseph Brodsky-A Literary Life
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Miller Jane Ann
Abstract: In this penetrating biography, Brodsky's life and work are illuminated by his great friend, the late poet and literary scholar Lev Loseff. Drawing on a wide range of source materials, some previously unpublished, and extensive interviews with writers and critics, Loseff carefully reconstructs Brodsky's personal history while offering deft and sensitive commentary on the philosophical, religious, and mythological sources that influenced the poet's work. Published to great acclaim in Russia and now available in English for the first time, this is literary biography of the first order, and sets the groundwork for any books on Brodsky that might follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkrv3

CHAPTER FOUR from: Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: THE FALL AND WINTER of 1963 and the first six weeks of 1964 were extremely hard for Brodsky, but not for the political reasons that those writing about him in hindsight assume. His relationship with Marina Basmanova was coming to a disastrous end; he was thinking of nothing else. But as it happened, at this most vulnerable moment, he became a convenient target for three different interest groups: he fell victim to Nikita Khrushchev’s ideological policy, to the zeal and ambition of the Leningrad police and reactionaries within the Leningrad Writers’ Union, and to the machinations of one Yakov Lerner

Book Title: Captured by Evil-The Idea of Corruption in Law
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): UNDERKUFFLER LAURA S.
Abstract: "Underkuffler challenges the traditional rational and logical characterizations of corruption and defends a highly original and insightul proposal. In her view corruption is an emotional concept grounded in religious ideas defying traditional criminal law doctrines. This book is a fantastic contribution to the study of corruption as well as more generally to the study of law and culture."-Alon Harel, Hebrew University Law School
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm38s

Book Title: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies-Ernst Cassirer’s Theory of Culture
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KROIS JOHN MICHAEL
Abstract: Cassirer thought of culture anthropologically as the entire complex of human modes of meaning and existence: it encompassed science, technology, language, and social life in addition to art, religion, and philosophy. This conception of culture and Cassirer's theory of symbolism anticipated much of later cultural theory. In this collection of essays, eminent Cassirer scholars examine the many different aspects of his thinking on this subject and demonstrate how pioneering and important it is to cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm6hh

Introduction from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) KROIS JOHN MICHAEL
Abstract: The term “cultural studies” and its basic methodological orientation derive from the activities of the Centre of Contemporary Cultural Studies in Birmingham, England. Beginning in the 1960s, the study of literature at that institution was expanded to include nontraditional depositories of culture, such as film

14 The Davos Disputation and Twentieth-Century Philosophy from: Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) FRIEDMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: The Davos disputation between Martin Heidegger and Ernst Cassirer in 1929 is of course well known to all students of Cassirer. What is perhaps not so well known is the way in which the Davos disputation can be seen as a watershed in the development of twentieth-century philosophy more generally and, in particular, in the evolving split between analytic and continental philosophical traditions. For it turns out that Rudolf Carnap (a leading representative of the Vienna Circle of logical empiricists) attended the Davos disputation, took a very serious interest in Heidegger and Being and Timewhen he returned to Vienna,

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Hediger Vinzenz
Abstract: What is media art? Providing a working definition of its object is critical to any emerging new field of study, but particularly to the field of media art. The product of practices that often involve rapidly changing technologies and ephemeral performance elements, media art is difficult for critics, curators, and archivists to pin down in terms of the established taxonomies of art history or film and media studies. Laying the groundwork for the following parts of the book, this part offers four different approaches to the methodological, theoretical, and practical challenges involved in developing a taxonomy of media art that

CHAPTER 3 Media Aesthetics from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: Aesthetics as a philosophical discipline arose in the middle of the 18th century, when art came to be defined as an autonomous field of rules, social practices, and institutions (like museums). For that historical reason, aesthetics is not just “art theory,” as it articulates both more general and more particular issues, for instance: perception through the senses, the definition of beauty, judgment of taste, the truth content of an artwork and its relationship to (physical, psychological, economic etc.) reality, the questions of originality and newness; eventually, the definition and the very possibility of “art” itself, which becomes a serious matter

CHAPTER 4 Media Art and the Digital Archive from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Saba Cosetta G.
Abstract: This chapter aims to introduce an epistemological reflection on the concept of “digital archiving” applied to media art. If the latter appears for many reasons to constitute something “transient and un-archivable” (Ernst, 2004 and 2010), it is because it presents itself ontologically in an exponentially complex form. In other words, the aim is to underline the problems (theoretical and methodological) that media art poses to digital archiving. In order to keep media artworks accessible to contemporary and future users, their inclusion in digital archives is desirable. Digital archives can support the fundamental function of the cultural conservationof these works

CHAPTER 5 The Analysis of the Artwork from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: While the Greek etymology of analysis means “dis-solution,” analysis as a thinking practice (which has been theorized since the ancient times, initially in the realm of geometry¹) involves the related idea of a “breaking up”²: the first experience of it may be considered that of a child breaking a toy to understand its internal structure, and the way it works. Modern thought has reinforced this “decompositional” conception of analysis, which “found its classic statement in the work of Kant at the end of the eighteenth century” and “set the methodological agenda for philosophical approaches and debates in the (late) modern

INTRODUCTION from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Saba Cosetta G.
Abstract: Within a framework of the system of relations between “technology” and “culture,” the third part of this book is dedicated to preservation and restoration theories and practices, and has two sides. On one hand (in chapter 7), the history of research and technological innovation in the media area is highlighted, also in the case of “low cost” examples, emphasizing the deconstruction and reinvention processes produced by artistic practices with respect to the industrial structures of cinema (7.1), television (7.2), and information technology (7.3). On the other hand (in chapter 8), epistemological frameworks are introduced, as well as working methodologies, projects,

CHAPTER 7 Technological Platforms from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: Technological systems are dynamic entities, the stability of which relates to temporary convergencephenomena¹ within a cultural set that establishes the media system, based on industrial and communication standards and protocols. The dynamics of convergence do not only relate to the physical and technical identity of media, they also work in terms of individual and social imagery. In this sense, the aesthetic experiment in the artssub specietechnology has always worked as much on technological innovations as it has on protocols.² The protocols (like standards and recommendations) are the results of an economic and socio-cultural negotiation; they are a

CHAPTER 8 Theories, Techniques, Decision-making Models: from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: First of all, the film materials need to be identified and classified, giving them historic-documentary, formal-aesthetic, and technological identity; in other words, reconstructing the internal and external

CHAPTER 10 On Curating New Media Art from: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Cook Sarah
Abstract: The constant navel-gazing on the part of curators into the terminological black-hole that is ‘contemporary curating’ tends to produce more discussion about its undecidability and fluidity, rather than precipitating any serious theoretical crisis or professional rupture (Charlesworth, 2007: 93).

Chapter One Mediacity: from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Boomkens René
Abstract: Generally, cities, urban culture and the urban public sphere have often been taken to represent the source or centre of modern social and cultural life, which then is said to differ radically from social and cultural life in pre-modern, feudal or medieval times and from life in the countryside. The sociological opposition between the face-to-face culture of pre-modern villages and the abstract, mediated and complex culture of modern cities as an opposition between GemeinschaftandGesellschaft,introduced by Ferdinand Tönnies, has becomethecommonplace of more than hundred years of urban sociology and theory. His sociological contemporary, Georg Simmel, described

Interview with José van Dijck and Robert Zwijnenberg from: Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Instead of carrying a photograph of his wife Patricia in his wallet, the Canadian neurophilosopher Paul Churchland has a scan of her brain. As passionate advocates of eliminative materialism, the couple view psychological phenomena such as belief, hope and love as constructions of the imagination. It is their contention that, in essence, the brain comprises merely the interaction between the neurons contained therein. Believing in a human mind is the same as believing that the earth is flat.

CHAPTER 2 Assimilation in the French sociology of incorporation from a multicultural perspective from: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: Assimilation is a rather unfriendly concept when used in a social context. In French, it generally means an act of the mind that considers (something) as similar (to something else). A relevant secondary meaning is the action of making (something) similar (to something else) by integration or absorption. This meaning has existed in physiology since 1495. Around 1840, the concept was related to social processes for the first time, as the act of assimilating persons and peoples; the process through which these persons, these peoples, assimilate (themselves). This connotation incorporates terms like ‘Americanisation’ and ‘Frenchisation’. The older physiological connotation shines

1 Why Textual Scholarship Matters from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Why does textual scholarship matter? Most students of literature and culture who worked in the twentieth century would have thought that a highly specialized question, and many still do. But a hundred years ago the question would hardly have been posed at all. Until the early decades of the twentieth century what we now call literary and cultural studies was called philology, and all its interpretive procedures were clearly understood to be grounded in textual scholarship. But twentieth-century textual studies shifted their center from philology to hermeneutics, that subset of philological inquiry focused on the specifically literary interpretation of culture.

2 “The Inorganic Organization of Memory” from: A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: An imaginative recovery of philological method means revisiting some salient moments in our recent institutional history. I begin by telling two stories. One

[I Introduction] from: Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Mutual exclusionis the narrative presentation of mutually exclusive sets of events or of mutually exclusive explanations for the same set of events. In logic, the termmutually exclusivedescribes when two events are equally possible but could not have both occurred, or when two propositions cannot logically be true at the same time. As with tossing a coin, only one outcome (heads) can be true; if it is, the other outcome (tails) cannot be true. In that example, the mutual exclusion is collectively exhaustive, meaning that either one or the other must happen. There are other forms—the rolling

Chapter Three Science, Faith, and Reference from: Signs of Science
Abstract: In his 1956 song “(How Little It Matters) How Little We Know,” Frank Sinatra aptly poses the. epistemological verity facing every scientific investigator: scientific knowledge eventually fails to explain certain phenomena. Despite voluminous increases in scientific research and publishing, most scientists couch descriptions of the state of their disciplines (which often frame requests for additional funding) in terms of how much there remains to be discovered. Of course, they never intimate (or could even conceive) that their own particular work matters little. However, the Sinatra tune outlines even more vividly the theme of this chapter, late-nineteenth-century unease about the limits

Chapter Three The Chinese Garden and the Concept of the Vision of Jing from: A Jesuit Garden in Beijing and Early Modern Chinese Culture
Abstract: The vision of Round Brightness, with its cosmological and ethical meanings, was embodied by the multiple scenes of the Yuanming Yuan. The brightness not only diffused along the route of the Forty Scenes (Sishi jing) but also was composed by each scene. One of the principal questions is this: Is the transcendental Round Brightness essentially related to the physical scenes in this garden? To answer the question, a historical analysis of the concept of jingis necessary. Through focusing on multiple scenes in this garden, we can retrieve the vision of Round Brightness. The meaning ofjingas the unity

Testing the Results of Richard Kalmin: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Neusner Jacob
Abstract: 2. We may adduce “differences between the introductory formulae introducing statements by early, later, and middle-generation Amoraim. These differences … support my claim regarding the presence of diverse sources in the Bavli, distinguishable along chronological lines.”³

Once More to the Jabbok: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Knight Henry F.
Abstract: Do midrash.¹ Work dialogically.² Attend to the missing faces.³ These three simple sentences guide my work as a post-Holocaust theologian, educator, and religious professional. Indeed, if by midrash I mean not simply the formal interpretive work of rabbinic tradition but the hermeneutic practice of reading sacred texts and other important documents with an interruptive logic that kindles what the rabbis call the “white fire” of the texts, then these three admonitions describe my understanding of public responsibility in a post-Shoah world.

Hebrew Literature, Academic Politics, and Feminist Criticism: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Fuchs Esther
Abstract: To what extent can we draw on our personal and professional narratives as a valid source of knowledge in order to substantiate a critique of our respective academic fields? How can we possibly crosscut from a subjective to a critical discourse, from emotion to fact and back? The following attempt to account for the unusual relationship between “my self” and “my work,” and between “my work” and “my field” will be partial both epistemologically and chronologically. The possessive pronoun in “my life” suggests ownership and control; yet, it is precisely the relinquishment of this control that I would like to

The Literary Quest for National Revival: from: Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Morahg Gilead
Abstract: From the earliest settlement period, mainstream Zionist writers have expressed concern that the psychological and ideological deformations that shaped Jewish life in the Diaspora will continue to define Israeli identity and pervert the relationship of the people of Israel to the Land of Israel. This concern, which has its canonical literary expression in Haim Hazaz’s story, “The Sermon” (1942), is still very much in evidence in A. B. Yehoshua’s masterful novel, Mr. Mani(1990). The fact that two works separated by half a century of enormous change in Israeli life share this particular concern is intriguing enough to invite critical

Book Title: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences- Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Davis Kimberly Chabot
Abstract: Chabot Davis analyzes contemporary texts that bond together two seemingly antithetical sensibilities: the sentimental and the postmodern. Ranging across multiple media and offering a methodological union of textual analysis and reception study, Chabot Davis presents case studies of audience responses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq429

Book Title: The Jewish Jesus-Revelation, Reflection, Reclamation
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Garber Zev
Abstract: There is a general understanding within religious and academic circles that the incarnate Christ of Christian belief lived and died a faithful Jew. This volume addresses Jesus in the context of Judaism. By emphasizing his Jewishness, the authors challenge today’s Jews to reclaim the Nazarene as a proto-rebel rabbi and invite Christians to discover or rediscover the Church’s Jewish heritage. The essays in this volume cover historical, literary, liturgical, philosophical, religious, theological, and contemporary issues related to the Jewish Jesus. Several of them were originally presented at a three-day symposium on “Jesus in the Context of Judaism and the Challenge to the Church,” hosted by the Samuel Rosenthal Center for Judaic Studies at Case Western Reserve University in 2009. In the context of pluralism, in the temper of growing interreligious dialogue, and in the spirit of reconciliation, encountering Jesus as living history for Christians and Jews is both necessary and proper. This book will be of particular interest to scholars of the New Testament and Early Church who are seeking new ways of understanding Jesus in his religious and cultural milieu, as well Jewish and Christian theologians and thinkers who are concerned with contemporary Jewish and Christian relationships.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq5dk

8 What Was at Stake in the Parting of the Ways between Judaism and Christianity? from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Rubenstein Richard L.
Abstract: In this chapter, I will explore the question of what was at stake culturally, religiously, and psychologically in the parting of the ways between Judaism and early Christianity. Since the issues involved are multifaceted, I have chosen to focus primarily on religious sacrifice. I believe that this issue exhibits simultaneously elements of both continuity and discontinuity between the two traditions.

10 Jewish Responses to Byzantine Polemics from the Ninth through the Eleventh Centuries from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Bowman Steven
Abstract: This essay is primarily concerned with the Christian-Jewish “dialogue” in tenth- to eleventh-century Byzantium or, more accurately, with several Jewish responses to Orthodox polemics and propaganda. It will focus mainly on two literary texts that were internal and integral to the memory of Jewish identity and one midrashic text that provides a clear response to some Byzantine theological

13 How Credible Is Jewish Scholarship on Jesus? from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Cook Michael J.
Abstract: This essay explores the problem of the methodological credibility of Jewish scholarship on Jesus. My prism will be a number of “favorite” Gospel topics toward which Jews most often gravitate:

15 The Historical Jesus as Jewish Prophet: from: The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Mandell Sara
Abstract: Although considering the historical Jesus a Jew is a common, but not universal academic tenet, it is not so perceived by those albeit rather limited segments of the lay public whose anti-Judaism causes them to separate Jesus theMessiah from his Second Temple Jewish background.² For the most part, the great majority of lay Christians, who have no anti-Jewish feelings, do not pay attention or simply give lip service to the historical Jesus’ Jewishness because it is only slightly if at all relevant to their faith and/or theological precepts.

CHAPTER FIVE “Dionysus Versus the Crucified” from: Reinterpreting Modern Culture
Abstract: The third and last domain of Nietzsche’s analysis of culture is religion. We will see that his diagnosis of religion is also dominated by an antithesis, as the title of this chapter expresses with the last words of Nietzsche’s Ecce Homo:“—Have Ibeen understood?—Dionysus versus the Crucified.—” In this chapter we will try to understand Nietzsche along the same lines as we did in the other chapters. We will begin with his critical analysis—a genealogical deconstruction of religious phenomena—and we will end by cautiously searching for an interpretation of certain religious undertones that we perceive

The Objective Sense of History: from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Schmid Ulrich
Abstract: Gustav Shpet is well known for his strong opinions. He relentlessly searches for objective truth—and truth is only acceptable to him if it represents life (Shpet, Istoriia kak problema53). Mere formalistic thinking is highly suspicious to him (Eismann 219). For all his inclination towards rigorous scientific categorization Shpet always ties theory to practice. Even pure logic is in his view not without subject matter: the laws of logic are applicable to logical thinking itself. His philosophy is never autotelic; he unremittingly strives to explain the objective phenomena of the world. In hisOutline of the Development of Russian

Shpet's Aesthetic Fragments and Sartre's Theory of Literature from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Bartram Graham
Abstract: At the very latest by the time of his 1927 Humboldt interpretation, Vnutrenniaia, Shpet's phenomenological descriptions of eidetic structures take on a dialectical dimension derived from Hegel'sPhenomenology of Spirit. Every description that attempts to grasp the essence of the object lying before it proves to be one sided, and points to alternative descriptions that go beyond itself: "The contradiction, which arises between the posited [zadannoiu] fullness of a concrete object and its present [nalichnuiu] incompleteness at any given moment, dissolves in its own process of becoming" (Shpet,Vnutrenniaia39). In relation to "culture as the object of linguistic awareness

Sign and/vs. Essence in Shpet from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Seifrid Thomas
Abstract: What I mean to indicate by my somewhat cryptic title is a certain tension or distance, perhaps introduced by our retrospective gaze but possibly present in Shpet's thought itself, between two different kinds of philosophical projects that unfold within his works: between, on the one hand, Shpet's several insightful theorizations on the nature of semiotic phenomena and their role in human culture; and, on the other, a project that is present throughout but less evident, which I would briefly summarize as an attempt to elaborate a model of selfhood that is grounded in linguistic consciousness and to establish its ontological

Semiotics in Voloshinov and Shpet from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Radunović Dušan
Abstract: The conceptual foundations of Gustav Shpet's general semasiology and Valentin Voloshinov's principle of dialogic speech interaction have rarely been considered from a comparative perspective. This article purports to draw critical attention to the partly convergent, partly divergent trajectories that these two thinkers followed in their approach to language. Whereas the two methodologies and discursive practices may not appear commensurable on the surface, there emerge beneath important philosophical convergences between Shpet and Voloshinov. Notwithstanding the fact that the two thinkers developed their views on language in different directions, coextensive philosophical concerns and common intellectual backgrounds provide a certain justification for a

O granitsakh nauchnogo literaturovedeniia (On the Limits of Scientific Literary Scholarship) from: Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Tihanov Galin
Abstract: 1. The object of literary scholarship does not belong among the objects of the natural sciences; in defining the tasks of literary scholarship, analogies from the natural sciences are methodologically illicit [ nezakonomerny].

Introduction from: Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Vasvári Louise O.
Abstract: The editors of Comparative Central European Holocaust Studiesand the authors of the volume's articles subscribe to the proposition that the study of the Holocaust is of immanent social relevance and responsibility in scholarship and public discourse. In turn, the notion of the social relevance of humanities and social sciences scholarship is a tenet of the theoretical and methodological framework of comparative cultural studies (McClennen and Morello, McClennen and Fitz; Tötösy de Zepetnek,Comparative Literature, "From Comparative Literature," "Comparative Cultural," "The New Humanities"). Thus, work presented in the volume in the humanities and social sciences is based on a number

Arai Hakuseki 新井白石 (1657–1725) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakuseki Arai
Abstract: Arai Hakuseki, a contemporary and rival of Ogyū Sorai*, served the Toku gawa ⌜shogunate⌝ in the capacity of a Confucian scholar for a number of years. During this period he attempted to persuade the shōgun Ienobu to take the title,“King of Japan,” at least in the diplomatic arena, as a reflection of his real political standing in both name and substance. Like so many of Hakuseki’s social, political, and economic proposals, his terminological and ceremonial re-conceptualization of the shogunate had no lasting effect.

Ōnishi Hajime 大西祝 (1864–1900) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hajime Ōnishi
Abstract: Ōnishi Hajime, philosopher, Christian apologist and social critic, studied theology at Dōshisha Eigakkō (present-day Dōshisha University) from 1877 to 1884, and then philosophy at Tokyo Imperial University from 1885 to 1889. He subsequently lectured on philosophy, ethics, aesthetics, and logic at Tōkyō Senmon Gakkō (present-day Waseda University). In 1896 he joined forces with Anesaki Masaharu and Yokoi Tokio to establish the Teiyū Ethics Society. He also assisted in the editing of the Christian socialist journal Cosmos. In 1898, he traveled to Germany to study with Otto Liebmann and Rudolf Eucken at the University of Jena, but his trip was cut

Nishida Kitarō 西田幾多郎 (1870–1945) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kitarō Nishida
Abstract: Nishida Kitarō, generally considered Japan’s greatest academic philosopher, made it his lifelong task to wed the spiritual awareness cultivated through a decade of Zen practice with modern philosophy. From Zen he had come to appreciate the living unity of experience that precedes dichotomies of mind and body, subject and object; in western philosophy he recognized the importance of logical thinking, the critical examination of preconceptions, and a comprehensive vision of the world. Beginning with the experiment of his maiden work, An Inquiry into the Good, to see all of reality as “pure experience,” each step of Nishida’s way posed new

Tanabe Hajime 田辺元 (1885–1962) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hajime Tanabe
Abstract: Tanabe Hajime was first drawn to philosophy through his study of mathematics and the natural sciences. His early work on the philosophy of science brought him into contact with the neo-Kantians, which inspired him to rethink Kant’s transcendental logic in the light of Husserl’s phenomenology, Bergson’s vitalism, and the original philosophy of Nishida Kitaro*. After Nishida invited him to join the faculty at Kyoto University, he was able to fulfill his dream of studying in Europe. Although quickly disillusioned with Husserl, he was befriended by the young Heidegger.

Kōyama Iwao 高山岩男 (1905–1993) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Iwao Kōyama
Abstract: Kōyama Iwao’s broad interests in philosophy—ranging from history, society, and politics to logic, education, and ethics—reflect his education at Kyoto University, where he studied under such illustrious figures as Nishida Kitarō,* Tanabe Hajime*, Watsuji Tetsurō*, and Hatano Seiichi*. Unlike many in the Kyoto School tradition, Iwao wrote in a clear and elegant prose, making his writings accessible to those not familiar with the unusual jargon of his colleagues. Like many of his generation, he was concerned with the question of “overcoming modernity,” a concern than remained with him for over sixty years, from his first book on Nishida

Ōhashi Ryōsuke 大橋良介 (1944– ) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ryōsuke Ōhashi
Abstract: After completing undergraduate studies at Kyoto University in 1969, Ōhashi Ryōsuke traveled to Germany where he entered the graduate program in philosophy at the University of Munich, receiving a doctorate in 1974 with a thesis on Schelling and Heidegger. He returned to take up a university post in Japan and to begin work on a major study of Hegelian logic, which he submitted for Habilitationat the University of Würzburg in 1983. His aim of locating a point of encounter for philosophies East and West was influenced by his study abroad and by the philosophy of Nishida Kitarō*—in particular,

Miyake Gōichi 三宅剛一 (1895–1982) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Gōichi Miyake
Abstract: It was reading Nishida Kitarō’s* An Inquiry into the Goodas a middle-school student that first turned Miyake Gōichi’s attention to philosophy. Already from the time of his undergraduate studies at Kyoto University Miyake was recognized as one of the brightest students in Nishida’s circle. For ten years after graduation he submerged himself in neo-Kantianism and study of the phenomenological method, culminating in a year at Freiburg where he participated in seminars in Husserl’s home and attended Heidegger’s lectures on Hegel’sPhenomenology. While in Germany he collaborated with another Japanese student in Freiburg to prepare a German précis of Nishida’s

Ichikawa Hakugen 市川白弦 (1902–1986) from: Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakugen Ichikawa
Abstract: Ichikawa Hakugen was a Rinzai Zen priest, professor at Hanazono University, and political activist who made his mark as the foremost scholar of “Imperial-Way Zen.” In his writings he chronicled Zen support for Japanese imperialism in the first half of the twentieth century and pushed the issue of Zen’s war responsibility. He analyzed the Zen approach to religious liberation and society, political ramifications of Buddhist metaphysical and logical constructs, limitations of Buddhist ethics, traditional relations between Buddhism and the Japanese government, and the philosophical system of Nishida Kitarō*.

Overview from: Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: As Alexander Gottlieb Baumgarten (1714–1762) indicates at the beginning of his treatise Aesthetica, “Aesthetics (theory of the liberal arts, doctrine of inferior knowledge, art of beautiful thinking, art of analogous reasoning) is the science of sensible knowledge” (1750, 17). This is the opening statement of a work that is considered to be the genealogical moment in the creation of aesthetics as an autonomous philosophical field—a creation prompted by the need to rescue the senses from the primacy of reason. The association of feelings (aisthesis) with the fallacious world of experience has a long history that goes back to

UNDER NEW MANAGEMENT: from: Locating Life Stories
Author(s) SILVA TONY SIMOES DA
Abstract: Alfred J. Lopez begins his introduction to Postcolonial Whiteness: A Critical Reader on Race and Empireby stating “Whiteness is not, yet we continue for many reasons to act as though it is” (1). He is especially interested in “what happens to whiteness after empire,” and proposes that it be understood as a dynamic relation of power. Despite the critical scrutiny it has attracted from whiteness studies, the racial category retains much of its ideological force. “The concept of whiteness as a cultural hegemon,” Lopez argues, is manifest in “its lingering, if somewhat latent, hegemonic influence over much of the

BIOGRAPHY IN THE COURT ROOM? from: Locating Life Stories
Author(s) READ PETER
Abstract: Once again I find myself in search of that happy but elusive equilibrium between telling Joe’s story and “doing” history, mining one man’s past for solutions to methodological puzzles: How do I write the hard stuff? How do I academically distinguish between Joe’s emotions, my emotions and the biography? How do I write over and around my own emotional responses? And on the other hand—on the Maori hand—should I? With its appreciation of subjectivity, does Maori scholarship seek some connection. . . . But then,

Book Title: Great Fool-Zen Master Ryokan--Poems, Letters, and Other Writings
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): HASKEL PETER
Abstract: Taigu Ryokan (1759-1831) remains one of the most popular figures in Japanese Buddhist history. Despite his religious and artistic sophistication, Ryokan referred to himself as "Great Fool" and refused to place himself within the cultural elite of his age. In contrast to the typical Zen master of his time, who presided over a large monastery, trained students, and produced recondite religious treatises, Ryokan followed a life of mendicancy in the countryside. Instead of delivering sermons, he expressed himself through kanshi (poems composed in classical Chinese) and waka and could typically be found playing with the village children in the course of his daily rounds of begging. Great Fool is the first study in a Western language to offer a comprehensive picture of the legendary poet-monk and his oeuvre. It includes not only an extensive collection of the master's kanshi, topically arranged to facilitate an appreciation of Ryokan's colorful world, but selections of his waka, essays, and letters. The volume also presents for the first time in English the Ryokan zenji kiwa (Curious Accounts of the Zen Master Ryokan), a firsthand source composed by a former student less than sixteen years after Ryokan's death. Although it lacks chronological order, the Curious Account is invaluable for showing how Ryokan was understood and remembered by his contemporaries. It consists of colorful anecdotes and episodes, sketches from Ryokan's everyday life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmgc

O MY PAPER! from: On Diary
Abstract: Clearly, this is an imaginary addressee, kept behind closed doors. But when did people start using the pretense of creating a private space by developing or deploying (and for whom?) a dialogic relationship with themselves?

DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from: On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries

CHAPTER 4 Secret Arts, Manifest Wonders from: Making Transcendents
Abstract: In many ancient and medieval cultures of secrecy (along with their modern descendants), knowledge was deemed powerful because access to it was restricted and access to it was restricted because it was deemed powerful. A gulf separates these cultures from those Steven Shapin and Peter Burke have recently argued arose only in early modern times (in Europe at least), wherein truth-telling and the art of civil conversation among gentlemen formed the basis of a new epistemological decorum, and where lying and secrecy came to be seen as violations of a code of honor.¹ Over the past century scholars beginning with

Book Title: The Melodrama of Mobility-Women, Talk, and Class in Contemporary South Korea
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): ABELMANN NANCY
Abstract: How do people make sense of their world in the face of the breakneck speed of contemporary social change? Through the lives and narratives of eight women, The Melodrama of Mobility chronicles South Korea's experience of just such dizzyingly rapid development. Abelmann captures the mood, feeling, and language of a generation and an era while providing a rare window on the personal and social struggles of South Korean modernity. Drawing also from television soap operas and films, she argues that a melodramatic sensibility speaks to South Korea's transformation because it preserves the tension and ambivalence of daily life in unsettled times. The melodramatic mode helps people to wonder: Can individuals be blamed for their social fates? How should we live? Who can say who is good or bad? By combining the ethnographic tools of anthropology, an engagement with prevailing sociological questions, and a literary approach to personal narratives, The Melodrama of Mobility offers a rich portrait of the experience of compressed modernity in the non-West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqt7p

2 In Search of a New Subject from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I contextualize the search for a new subject in post- Mao literature. I approach the task by concentrating on two areas pivotal to the unfolding of the historical project: theory and literary practice. First, I discuss the efforts made on the theoretical front, focusing in greater detail on the aesthetic theory of what China’s well-known literary theorist in the 1980s Liu Zaifu called “subjectivity in literature.” Second, I give an overview of post-Mao representation of the subject in the New Era, examining the literary, cultural, and ideological characteristics of three models of the subject: as a sociopolitical

4 In the Madding Crowd from: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: While Han Shaogong and his fellow xungenwriters dug into the collective, cultural foundations of the subject from a historical perspective, others chose to face the present, lodging the subject in its daily, individual reality. When the Cultural Revolution and previous political movements were openly repudiated in the late 1970s, people had a chance to look honestly into the real conditions of their existence without the officially imposed, and sometimes self-exercised, ideological sanctions. As a result of the candid scrutiny, a new trend in the representation of the subject appeared: “absurdist fiction”(huangdan xiaoshuo),which presents life as irrational, illogical,

NOMADIC SUBJECTS: from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Braidotti Rosi
Abstract: In this paper, I will defend a feminist poststructuralist position as a nonrelativist standpoint. This position rests on the assumption, which I shall outline presently, of the historical decline of the classical view of the human subject. By way of introduction, let me say that I see it as one of the historical tasks of feminism to elaborate an epistemological and ethical position that is suitable to postmodernity in a gendered perspective. I would also want to suggest that this position conveys a posthumanist vision of subjectivity as a de-essentialized and historicized entity—a multilayered (not a fixed) phenomenon, more

THE PHILOSOPHY OF SIGNS AND DEMOCRATIC DISCOURSE: from: Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Möller Hans-Georg
Abstract: My methodological approach is structuralistic. I will talk about premetaphysical, metaphysical, and postmetaphysical structures and, analogously, about corresponding premodern, modern, and postmodern structures. These stages should not be understood as primarily chronological but rather as logical (or as semio-logical). Therefore, the description is general and based on ideal types.

Book Title: Dark Writing-Geography, Performance, Design
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: We do not see empty figures and outlines; we do not move in straight lines. Everywhere we are surrounded by dapple; the geometry of our embodied lives is curviform, meandering, bi-pedal. Our personal worlds are timed, inter-positional, and contingent. But nowhere in the language of cartography and design do these ordinary experiences appear. This, Dark Writing argues, is a serious omission because they are designs on the world: architects and colonizers use their lines to construct the places where we will live. But the rectilinear streets, squares, and public spaces produced in this way leave out people and the entire environmental history of their coming together. How, this book asks, can we explain the omission of bodies from maps and plans? And how can we redraw the lines maps and plans use so that the qualitative world of shadows, footprints, comings and goings, and occasions—all essential qualities of places that incubate sociality—can be registered? In short, Dark Writing asks why we represent the world as static when our experience of it is mobile. It traces this bias in Enlightenment cartography, in inductive logic, and in contemporary place design. This is the negative critique. Its positive argument is that, when we look closely at these designs on the world, we find traces of a repressed movement form. Even the ideal lines of geometrical figures turn out to contain traces of earlier passages; and there are many forms of graphic design that do engage with the dark environment that surrounds the light of reason. How can this "dark writing"—so important to reconfiguring our world as a place of meeting, of co-existence and sustaining diversity—be represented? And how, therefore, can our representations of the world embody more sensuously the mobile histories that have produced it? Dark Writing answers these questions using case studies: the exemplary case of the beginnings of the now world-famous Papunya Tula Painting Movement (Central Australia) and three high-profile public place-making initiatives in which the author was involved as artist and thinker. These case studies are nested inside historical chapters and philosophical discussions of the line and linear thinking that make Dark Writing both a highly personal book and a narrative with wide general appeal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqzx4

CHAPTER 4 The Interpretation of Dreams: from: Dark Writing
Abstract: The art of the Papunya Tula painting movement has stimulated dozens of exhibitions both locally and internationally in the past twenty-five years. It has inspired many catalogue essays and anthropologically inflected studies. TV documentaries and films have been dedicated to it. Thoroughly researched monographs have been devoted to individual artists involved in the movement’s beginnings. The exhibition catalogue Papunya Tula: Genesis and Genius(2000) revealed many aspects of the movement’s complex cultural, social, and political significance.¹ There remains, though, an important gap in our understanding—one the millennial exhibition’s name serves to highlight. Much has been written about the Western

CHAPTER 5 Making Tracks: from: Dark Writing
Abstract: In 1839, surveyor-general William Light laid out the city of Adelaide, capital of South Australia, on either side of the River Torrens. In The Lie of the LandI argued that Light’s plan departed from the conventional colonial grid. His four incomplete and irregular grids showed an awareness of the lie of the land (Figure 20). They also uncannily recalled the character of archaeological sites he had visited and sketched in Italy.¹ The ground plan of Adelaide was not a “self-evident production” in Husserl’s sense—an ideal form created and imposedex nihilo.In its awareness of a heritage of

Book Title: Out of the Margins-The Rise of Chinese Vernacular Fiction
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Ge Liangyan
Abstract: The novel Water Margin (Shuihu zhuan), China's earliest full-length narrative in vernacular prose, first appeared in print in the sixteenth century. The tale of one hundred and eight bandit heroes evolved from a long oral tradition; in its novelized form, it played a pivotal role in the rise of Chinese vernacular fiction, which flourished during the late Ming (1368-1644) and Qing (1644-1911) periods. Liangyan Ge's multidimensional study considers the evolution of Water Margin and the rise of vernacular fiction against the background of the vernacularization of premodern Chinese literature as a whole. This gradual and arduous process, as the book convincingly shows, was driven by sustained contact and interaction between written culture and popular orality. Ge examines the stylistic and linguistic features of the novel against those of other works of early Chinese vernacular literature (stories, in particular), revealing an accretion of features typical of different historical periods and a prolonged and cumulative process of textualization. In addition to providing a meticulous philological study, his work offers a new reading of the novel that interprets some of its salient characteristics in terms of the interplay between audience, storytellers, and men of letters associated with popular orality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr0tj

5 The Engine of Narrative Making: from: Out of the Margins
Abstract: In the foregoing chapter, the results of the philological analyses of the fanbentext demonstrate a continuous deposition of stylistic and linguistic features from different periods. While we remain still ignorant of many things about the evolution of theShuihucomplex, we can now say one thing with a reasonable amount of certainty: Thefanbentext ofShuihu zhuan, which presents full-fledged vernacular prose, was “written” and repeatedly “rewritten” amid constant contacts with orality over a long time historically. Yet while the results of such analyses are obviously historicist in nature, the approach to the study of the stylistic and

Book Title: Christianity in Korea- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Lee Timothy S.
Abstract: The volume begins with an accessibly written overview that traces in broad outline the history and development of Christianity on the peninsula. This is followed by chapters on broad themes, such as the survival of early Korean Catholics in a Neo-Confucian society, relations between Christian churches and colonial authorities during the Japanese occupation, premillennialism, and the theological significance of the division and prospective reunification of Korea. Others look in more detail at individuals and movements, including the story of the female martyr Kollumba Kang Wansuk; the influence of Presbyterianism on the renowned nationalist Ahn Changho; the sociopolitical and theological background of the Minjung Protestant Movement; and the success and challenges of Evangelical Protestantism in Korea. The book concludes with a discussion of how best to encourage a rapprochement between Buddhism and Christianity in Korea.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr2rg

Chapter 14 Modernization and the Explosive Growth and Decline of Korean Protestant Religiosity from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Kim Byong-suh
Abstract: Sociological studies have often found that institutional disorganization and the loss of the social function of religion may occur when society becomes modernized. Peter Berger summed it up thus: “The impact of modernity on religion is commonly seen in terms of the process of secularization, which can be described as one in which religion loses its hold on the level both of institutions and of human consciousness.”¹ Berger’s harsh assessment may well describe the state of the Korean Protestant church today. For the last forty years, a startling wave of modernization accompanied by industrialization, urbanization, and rapid social mobility have

Chapter 17 The Christian-Buddhist Encounter in Korea from: Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Oh Kang-nam
Abstract: Buddhism and Christianity are currently the two dominant religions in South Korea, with approximately one-half of the country’s population of forty-five million as their adherents. Of these adherents, approximately one-half are Buddhists and the other half Christians.¹ Under such circumstances, it seems obvious that a dialogical and cooperative relationship between these two religions in Korea is both a prerequisite and an imperative for the peaceful and harmonious future of Korean society.

Book Title: Cult, Culture and Authority-Princess Lieu Hanh in Vietnamese History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): DROR OLGA
Abstract: Princess Liễu Hạnh, often called the Mother of the Vietnamese people by her followers, is one of the most prominent goddesses in Vietnamese popular religion. First emerging some four centuries ago as a local sect appealing to women, the princess’ cult has since transcended its geographical and gender boundaries and remains vibrant today. Who was this revered deity? Was she a virtuous woman or a prostitute? Why did people begin worshiping her and why have they continued? Cult, Culture, and Authority traces Liễu Hạnh’s cult from its ostensible appearance in the sixteenth century to its present-day prominence in North Vietnam and considers it from a broad range of perspectives, as religion and literature and in the context of politics and society. Over time, Liễu Hạnh’s personality and cult became the subject of numerous literary accounts, and these historical texts are a major source for this book. Author Olga Dror explores the authorship and historical context of each text considered, treating her subject in an interdisciplinary way. Her interest lies in how these accounts reflect the various political agendas of successive generations of intellectuals and officials. The same cult was called into service for a variety of ideological ends: feminism, nationalism, Buddhism, or Daoism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr2wd

Chapter 2 PURA PUCAK PENULISAN: from: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The temple complex is located on a peak that forms the northern part in a wide circular wall of mountains. This enormous crater rim is all that remains of the larger, primordial Mt. Batur that collapsed in the distant geological

Chapter 8 REPRESENTATION BEYOND THE HIGHLANDS: from: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: Processes of mutual representation within the regional status economy of Bali Aga society are based on voluntary association, and status differentiating relationships are perpetually negotiated in the terms of an inherently process-oriented idiom of fluid temporal distinctions in an order of precedence. Moving beyond the highlands, to the larger world in which the Bali Aga engage in a process of mutual representation with more powerful others, this chapter and the following ones explore their place within Balinese society and discourses, and in the Western anthropological literature about this island. This exploration leads back, inevitably, to problems of representation in anthropology

Chapter 10 THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL COPRODUCTION OF THE BALI AGA: from: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The situation of the Bali Aga within changing Balinese representations of their society is part of a contested and emergent knowledge system, drawing on a range of culturally specific metaphors of time and movement and, more recently, on a more “global” and Western-influenced vocabulary of modernity. But how do these local representational models compare and relate to Western portrayals of the Bali Aga, as reflected in an abundant and changing anthropological literature on Balinese society?

Book Title: Traces Of A Stream-Literacy and Social Change Among African American Women
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Royster Jacqueline Jones
Abstract: Traces of a Streamis a showcase for nineteenth-century African American women, and particularly elite women, as a group of writers who are currently underrepresented in rhetorical scholarship. Royster has formulated both an analytical theory and an ideological perspective that are useful in gaining a more generative understanding of literate practices as a whole and the practices of African American women in particular. Royster tells a tale of rhetorical prowess, calling for alternative ways of seeing, reading, and rendering scholarship as she seeks to establish a more suitable place for the contributions and achievements of African American women writers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrb9s

2 The Janus-Faced Messiah from: From Darkness To Light
Abstract: IT IS TIME to move from the discussion of Marxist eschatology as such to an examination of the ways in which Russian revolutionary discourse activated this eschatological potential. The messianic characteristics of Marxism came into sharp relief in Russia, not in Western Europe where Marx did most of his preaching. Was Marxism adapted to Russian conditions, that is, was it “Russified”? Or did the new ideology actually function as a means to modernize Russia and instill post-Reformation values? There might be elements in the religious tradition in Russia (Orthodoxy and sectarianism) and in Bolshevism’s roots in nineteenth-century Russian intellectual tradition

3 The “Intelligentsia”: from: From Darkness To Light
Abstract: THE MEANING of the term “intelligentsia” was far from immutable between the 1890s and the 1920s. Tracing developments in the revolutionary discourse over a span of three decades, I would like, in the present chapter, to sketch a brief history of “the intelligentsia” in Russian Marxism. Such a history, however, is not susceptible to straightforward chronological presentation. Notions do not develop in the same way biographies do. The main events in the history of notions cannot be precisely defined, let alone dated. Thus, new definitions of the intelligentsia did not simply coincide with the familiar milestones in the history of

4 Hermeneutics and Epistemology: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Parrini Paolo
Abstract: Generally, we use the term hermeneuticsto refer to both the art of interpretation and the general theory of understanding and interpretation. In this second meaning, hermeneutics embraces various epistemological, ontological, and, broadly speaking, philosophical problems that stretch well beyond questions of the unity of the scientific method, the contrast betweenunderstandingandexplanation,and the distinction betweenGeistenwissenschaften… andNaturwissenschaften. In Heidegger’s hands, hermeneutics became a general philosophical theory of Being, truth, and objectivity and Hans-Georg Gadamer states that the ontological-hermeneutical approach gives an answer to the question of foundation not only in human sciences but also in

12 Concept Formation via Hebbian Learning: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Churchland Paul M.
Abstract: Training artificial networks to be selectively sensitive to typical kinds of temporal processes has proved to be relatively easy. But in biological creatures, the process of experience-dependent long-term adjustment of the brain’s synaptic connections is definitely not governed by the supervised back-propagation-of-errors technique widely used to train up the computer-modeled artificial networks familiar from the past two decades. That brute-force artificial technique requires that the “correct behavior” for a mature

14 Classifying Dry German Riesling Wines: from: Interpretation
Author(s) Sautter Ulrich
Abstract: Reflection on olfactory and gustatory perceptions and their epistemological status has not been playing a major role in the philosophical tradition. Most classical philosophers deal with the senses of smell and taste rather parenthetically and with a sense of flippancy—if at all.¹ Sometimes philosophical texts cite phenomena of smell and taste where exemplification in factually unrelated, particularly abstract contexts is needed²—as if the difficulties of abstraction might be evened out by choosing examples from an area of life that is surrounded by a sense of light-heartedness and concreteness. But almost no classical text of philosophy has dealt with

Passing Glories and Romantic Retrievals: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) SOPER KATE
Abstract: This essay offers a rather more general argument than do many others in this collection. It arose out of a paper delivered to a conference entitled “Romanticism, Environment, Crisis” organized by the Centre for Romantic Studies at the University of Wales, Aberystwyth, in 2006, and its main aim is to consider the nature and extent of the relevance of Romantic thinking about nature, particularly that associated with the English Romantic poets, to our contemporary ecological “crisis.” In pursuing this theme, it takes issue with simplistic interpretations of the nature philosophy attributed to Romanticism by some environmentalists. But it also resists

From Literary Anthropology to Cultural Ecology: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) MÜLLER TIMO
Abstract: While ecocriticism first emerged in the Anglophone world, the last decade or so has witnessed its rapid spread throughout other countries and academic communities. In many of these communities, new ecocritical theory has drawn on locally predominant traditions of thought, thus diversifying and enriching the ecological approach through specific cultural influences but also transforming these influences with regard to an ecological worldview. In Germany, ecocritical theory, and especially literary theory, has been shaped decisively by the anthropological approach, which reached the peak of its popularity around 1990. In the following, I compare two exemplary ecocritical models that are influenced by

The Social Theory of Norbert Elias and the Question of the Nonhuman World from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WILLIAMS LINDA
Abstract: The ecological damage that has led to an emerging sixth world extinction event may not be derived entirely from Western modernity. It could, however, be argued that in spite of more general causal factors such as the exponential growth in human populations, the androgenic causes of this environmental crisis have many of their sociogenetic roots in the emergence of modernity in Europe. It was, after all, European modernity that gave rise to the Industrial Revolution, and to the heightened instrumentalization of nature that serves the vast engines of a Western capitalist system now global in its reach. Hence, in the

Merleau-Ponty’s Ecophenomenology from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WESTLING LOUISE
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty is the only major European philosopher who embraces the consequences of evolution and sees humans as interdependent members of the ecosystem. His thinking manifests a lifelong engagement with modern science, which he saw in a necessary complementarity with philosophy. Although his untimely death prevented the completion of his ambitious philosophy of nature, enough of the work in progress exists in manuscript to indicate its shape and importance as a radically ecological philosophy.

Gernot Böhme’s Ecological Aesthetics of Atmosphere from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) RIGBY KATE
Abstract: In The Ideology of the Aesthetic, Terry Eagleton acclaims A. G. Baumgarten’s “discourse of the body” as “the first stirrings of a primitive materialism—of the body’s long inarticulate rebellion against the tyranny of the theoretical.”¹ While Baumgarten is widely acknowledged as a founding figure in modern philosophical aesthetics, the counterideological potential that Eagleton locates in his valorization of corporeality failed to be realized, as the emergent discipline of aesthetics fled the flesh, restricting itself instead to a consideration of the formal properties and moral-intellectual significance of the work of art. Gernot Böhme, a leading figure in contemporary German ecological

Coexistence and Coexistents: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) MORTON TIMOTHY
Abstract: Environmental ethics sometimes depends upon ideas of life forms immersed in a surrounding “world.”¹ For Trevor Norris, “world” is the “dynamic relatedness that grounds our identity” (see his essay in this volume). The philosopher Martin Heidegger derives the notion of “world” from his study of Jakob von Uexküll’s biological research, which suggested that different sentient life forms have different experiences of their surroundings, and hence phenomenologically (that is, experientially) different worlds. A “world” in this sense is a zone of things that surround the sentient being, which have various kinds of significance for that being.

Ecocentric Postmodern Theory: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) OPPERMANN SERPIL
Abstract: The ecological turn has not only brought an integral awareness of the natural world into the field of literary studies, reorienting the humanities toward a more biocentric worldview, but has also drawn attention to the role of literature in influencing our knowledge of the world. According to Norman N. Holland: “Literature has power over us. At least it certainly feelsthat way when we are, as we say, ‘absorbed’ in a story or drama or poem.”¹ The cognitive function accorded to literature is of fundamental importance for ecocritics, who expect of writers that they inscribe ecological viewpoints in their work.

The Biosemiotic Turn: from: Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WHEELER WENDY
Abstract: In this essay I explore an ecocritical theory of cultural, and thus also literary, creativity from a biosemiotic point of view. While what follows might be thought broadly to fall within what is sometimes called the “post” humanities, in fact biosemiotics is a thoroughly interdisciplinary proto-discipline; it seeks not only to change how humanists think about culture, the arts, and the biological sciences but also to change how scientists and social scientists think about biological science and the arts and humanities.

Book Title: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue-Psychoanalysis, Mysticism, and the Culture of Modern Spirituality
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PARSONS WILLIAM B.
Abstract: Parsons develops a new psychological hermeneutic to account for Augustine's mysticism that will capture the imagination of contemporary readers who are both psychologically informed and interested in spirituality. The author intends this interpretive model not only to engage modern introspective concerns about developmental conflict and the power of the unconscious but also to reach a more nuanced level of insight into the origins and the nature of the self.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm01

one RHETORIC from: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: A central and often unchallenged assumption of psychoanalytic studies of the Confessionsis that the subject of the psychological inquiry is none other than the historical Augustine. It is certainly possible to uncover the various complexes, fixations, and neurotic tendencies that animate the flow of Augustine’s narrative, just as one can do with analysands’ narratives

two VISION from: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: The discussion in the previous chapter prompts two interrelated lines of inquiry. First, we have concluded that Augustine’s inclusion of Monica in the ascent at Ostia speaks to the rhetorical complexity of the text. If this is the case, then it is of interest to know the extent to which such rhetorical complexity is also linked to a sophisticated teaching about the nature of mystical ascents—one that can be used to mount an epistemological challenge to the psychoanalytic view that all mysticism be reduced to the developmental cycle. In order to ascertain this a full textual and theological reconstruction

CONCLUSION from: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: The discussion to this point has been directed toward establishing a new chapter in the ongoing psychoanalytic reception history of Augustine’s Confessions. In laying out the argument, I have had occasion to touch on multiple issues germane to the broader academic study of mysticism, the place of psychoanalysis in it, and what seems to be the widespread emergence of a psychologically informed culture invested in mysticism and spirituality. It is this latter, wider and socially relevant fact that, in this concluding chapter, I take up in greater depth. The discussion proceeds by way of something assumed throughout this book, namely,

Book Title: Doing Justice to Mercy-Religion, Law, and Criminal Justice
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Jung Kevin
Abstract: Contributors:Marc Mauer, The Sentencing Project * Lois Gehr Livezey, McCormick Theological Seminary * Ernie Lewis, Public Advocate, Commonwealth of Kentucky * Jonathan Rothchild, Loyola Marymount University * Albert W. Alschuler, Northwestern University School of Law * David Scheffer, Northwestern University School of Law * David Little, Harvard Divinity School * Matthew Myer Boulton, Andover Newton Theological School * Mark Lewis Taylor, Princeton Theological Seminary * Sarah Coakley, Cambridge University * William Schweiker, University of Chicago Divinity School * Kevin Jung, College of William and Mary * Peter J. Paris, Princeton Theological Seminary * W. Clark Gilpin, University of Chicago Divinity School * William C. Placher, Wabash College
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm3g

6 Upper and Lower Stories: from: Locating the Destitute
Abstract: In Raphaël Confiant’s L’Hôtel du Bon Plaisir(2009), the spatial approach to multiple (post) colonial histories, both personal and cultural, shapes the way we interpret the intersecting destinies of his protagonists. As a matter of fact the titular hotel turns out to be the most important protagonist of all, showing that shared space creates community and shelters its evolving history. Although Confiant’s novel shares with Chamoiseau’sTexacoa profound thematic and methodological kinship centered on exploring through the category of space the nonhierarchical multiplicity of Créolité, the intertwined narratives inL’Hôtel du Bon Plaisiremerge as part of a vertical

Book Title: Essays from the Edge-Parerga and Paralipomena
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): JAY MARTIN
Abstract: Over his distinguished career as a European intellectual historian and cultural critic, Martin Jay has explored a variety of major themes: the Frankfurt School, the exile of German intellectuals in America during the Nazi era, Western Marxism, the denigration of vision in twentieth-century French thought, the discourse of experience in modern Europe and America, and lying in politics. Essays from the Edgeassembles Jay's writings from the intersections of this intellectual journey. Several essays focus on methodological debates in the humanities and social sciences: the limits of interdisciplinarity, the issue of national or universal philosophy, cultural relativism and visuality, and the implications of periodization in historical narrative. Others examine the concept of "scopic regime" and the metaphors of revolution and the gardening impulse. Among the theorists treated at length are Theodor Adorno, Hannah Arendt, Jacques Derrida, and Michel Foucault. The essays also include several of Jay'sSalmagundicolumns, dealing with subjects as varied as the new Museum of Modern Art in New York, the impact of Colin Wilson's The Outsider, and the demise of thePartisan Review.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrp5b

Is Experience Still in Crisis? from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Let me begin with two quotations: (1) “The identity of experience in the form of a life that is articulated and possesses internal continuity—and that life was the only thing that made the narrator’s stance possible—has disintegrated. One need only note how impossible it would be for someone who participated in the war to tell stories about it the way people used to tell stories about their adventures.”¹ (2) The war is “as totally divorced from experience as is the functioning of a machine from the movement of the body, which only begins to resemble it in pathological

Scopic Regimes of Modernity Revisited from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: “What are scopic regimes?” recently asked a curious, unnamed Internet questioner on Photherel,an official European e-learning website dedicated to the “conservation and dissemination of photographic heritage.”¹ Although noting that the now widely adopted term was first coined by the French film theorist Christian Metz, the no less anonymous site respondent ducked answering the question head-on. He nonetheless could claim that “the advantage of the concept of ‘scopic regime’ is that it supersedes the traditional distinction between technological determinism . . . and social construction. . . . In the case of scopic regimes, culture and technology interact.” And then,

Phenomenology and Lived Experience from: Essays from the Edge
Abstract: In the struggle to define itself in opposition to its predecessor, the generation in France that fashioned itself as postphenomenological took special pleasure in deriding the concept of “lived experience.” Jacques Derrida, to take a salient example, charged in Of Grammatologythat experience is an “unwieldy” concept that “belongs to the history of metaphysics and we can only use it under erasure [sous rature]. ‘Experience’ has always designated the relationship with a presence, whether that relationship had the form of consciousness or not.”¹ The phenomenological attempt to raise it to a transcendental level, above the vagaries of historical and cultural

CHAPTER 1 Eranos and the “History of Religions” from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: The crucial context for understanding Scholem’s concept of mysticism in general and the position of Jewish mysticism within the wider framework of the humanities, as well as his methodological approach to the study of the subject, is that of his long-standing, though submerged and, to a very large extent, hidden confrontation with the Jung-Eliade school of thought, which culminated in the 1950s and 1960s. This chapter in Scholem’s life is also meaningful for the understanding of his

CHAPTER 12 Psychoanalysis in Reverse from: Religion after Religion
Abstract: Given the long-term participation by the Historians of Religion in the meetings inspired by Carl Jung, it seems virtually unavoidable that any study of their theories of religion must carefully assess their respective positions in relation to psychology. This, however, is a particularly vexatious area of research, inasmuch as each explicitly opposed the reduction of religious realities to psychological forces. On the other hand, each scholar, at the same time, was accustomed to employing psychological categories—of which archetypes are only the best known—to interpret religious materials.¹

Book Title: Liberal Languages-Ideological Imaginations and Twentieth-Century Progressive Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Freeden Michael
Abstract: He employs the complex theory of ideological analysis that he developed in previous works to explore in considerable detail the experimental interfaces created between liberalism and neighboring ideologies on the left and the right. The nature of liberal thought allows us to gain a better perspective on the ways ideologies present themselves, Freeden argues, not necessarily as dogmatic and alienated structures, but as that which emanates from the continuous creativity that open societies display.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rh6k

CHAPTER TWO Liberal Community: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: The liberal/communitarian debate, that intellectual companion and topological vade mecum of Anglo-American political philosophers in the 1980s and early 1990s, has left a residue that is still difficult to expunge. At its worst, it has created a new generation of students unable to think about liberalism in a manner that escapes the contrast in which the terms are presented, and a contingent of politicians who have eagerly assimilated communitarianism or anticommunitarianism to their shortlist of sound bites. At best, it has encouraged professional philosophers to reengage with issues of social responsibility, respect for individuals, and the quasianthropology of human nature.

CHAPTER THREE The Concept of Poverty and Progressive Liberalism from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: Though this sweeping opinion, expressed in a book on poverty in Britain published in 1930, has not proved correct in the longer run, there was nevertheless more than a grain of truth in it.¹ The reasons for the elevation of poverty to a central concern of state and society lie in social and economic developments that began almost a century before 1918. But they were reinforced and further precipitated by new theoretical and ideological insights, especially in the generation before the First World War.

CHAPTER FIVE J. A. Hobson as a Political Theorist from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: J. A. Hobson was one of the half-dozen most influential political thinkers in late-nineteenth—early-twentieth-century Britain, a fact that even the partial revival of his fortunes has infrequently brought to light. The main reason for this oversight has two complementary facets: Hobson’s contribution lay chiefly in his formulation of a liberal version of British welfare thought, an ideological genre that until recently was accorded insufficient recognition; and, conversely, recourse to conventional modes of political theorising, utilising existing traditions, or referring to the constructs of leading individuals, was not paramount in his work. It is symptomatic that in the various reading

CHAPTER SEVEN Eugenics and Progressive Thought: from: Liberal Languages
Abstract: The issues raised by eugenics are of more than passing interest for the student of political thought. In itself a minor offshoot of turn-of-the-century sociobiological thought that never achieved ideological “takeoff” in terms of influence or circulation, there was certainly more in eugenics than nowadays meets the eye. The following pages propose to depart from the oversimplistic identification of eugenics, as political theory, with racism or ultraconservatism and to offer instead two alternative modes of interpretation.¹ On the one hand, eugenics will be portrayed as an exploratory avenue of the social reformist tendencies of early-twentieth-century British political thought. On the

7 MOONSTONES AND MEN THAT GLOW: from: Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: Proclus was born in Constantinople, where his family was located temporarily on business, on February 8, in 410 or 412 c.e., two years after Alaric sacked Rome.¹ We know the day and month of his birth with relative precision because of his interests in the astrological arts. He received a thorough classical training in Lycia, Alexandria, and Constantinople before assuming the mantle of “successor” to the Platonic Academy in Athens.² He took his place in a two-centuries-old tradition of Neoplatonic thinkers, including Plotinus, Porphyry, Iamblichus, Syrianus, and others, who styled themselves as Plato’s true heirs.

Book Title: Available Light-Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, one of the most influential thinkers of our time, here discusses some of the most urgent issues facing intellectuals today. In this collection of personal and revealing essays, he explores the nature of his anthropological work in relation to a broader public, serving as the foremost spokesperson of his generation of scholars, those who came of age after World War II. His reflections are written in a style that both entertains and disconcerts, as they engage us in topics ranging from moral relativism to the relationship between cultural and psychological differences, from the diversity and tension among activist faiths to "ethnic conflict" in today's politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rkn7

X Culture, Mind, Brain / Brain, Mind, Culture from: Available Light
Abstract: Between them, anthropology and psychology have chosen two of the more improbable objects around which to try to build a positive science: Culture and Mind, Kultur und Geist, Culture et Esprit. Both are inheritances of defunct philosophies, both have checkered histories of ideological inflation and rhetorical abuse, both have broad and multiple everyday usages that interfere with any effort to stabilize their meaning or turn them into natural kinds. They have been repeatedly condemned as mystical or metaphysical, repeatedly banished from the disciplined precincts of serious inquiry, repeatedly refused to go away.

1 BETWEEN MAGIC AND MAGNETISM: from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: In 1960, robert mcnulty discovered and published in Renaissance Newsthe bitterly satirical page on Giordano Bruno’s lectures at Oxford of 1583 that he had found in the book by George Abbott of 1604,The Reasons Which Doctour Hill Hath Brought, for the Upholding of Papistry.¹ It was an important discovery, but it also created an interpretative crux for scholars concerned with the development of Bruno’s post-Copernican cosmology. This chapter will take as its subject the technical problem of the precise stage that Bruno’s cosmological speculation might have reached when he spoke at Oxford in the summer of 1583—“might

4 THE MULTIPLE LANGUAGES OF THE NEW SCIENCE from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: The new science that begins to emerge at the end of the sixteenth century can be seen as a search for the order that underlies the vicissitudes of the natural world. This immediately raises the problem of the language, or languages, most appropriate for grasping and following the logic of that order. The great scientific names of the end of the sixteenth century, Galileo, Kepler, Tycho Brahe, had no doubts about the answer to that question: God wrote the universe in the language of mathematics, and the new science must learn that language in order to discover the order that

14 SCIENCE AND MAGIC: from: Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: This chapter attempts to make a contribution to a discussion that has been developing for some decades, but that seems far from being exhausted. It becomes particularly relevent in the light of the recent book by this author that reproposes Bruno’s thought as concerned, in many of its most central moments, with properly scientific and even technological subjects, in a modern sense of those words.¹ Such a reading of Bruno’s thought creates a problem with respect to an approach such as that of Frances Yates, which claims not only to find in his works a radical culmination of the magical,

Chapter Three Mimesis and the Best Life: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: In uncovering the psychological infrastructure of Plato’s engagement with mimesis I suggest in chapter 2 that his unease over the transformative power of mimetic art—its capacity to shape the minds of its audiences by absorbing them imaginatively in the possibility of “other lives”—culminates in an acute anxiety over one particular kind of art, tragedy. It is above all to tragic poetry, a category that Plato, on grounds that will soon emerge, does not limit to Attic drama but treats as embracing the work of Homer (“first of the tragedians”) too,¹ that “the greatest charge” of Republic10.605c6 relates: the

Chapter Six The Rewards of Mimesis: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: It emerged in the preceding chapter that for Aristotle, just as much as for Plato, a mature philosophical theory of artistic mimesis involves integral consideration of the kinds of experience that mimetic artworks offer to and invite from their audiences. The purpose of the present chapter is to explore further this psychological dimension of Aristotle’s mimeticism, and more particularly to argue that his concept of mimesis, in the Poeticsand elsewhere, entails the interlocking functioning of three elements—pleasure, understanding, and emotion—that have too often been separately discussed by students of this area of his thinking. The product of

Chapter Seven Tragic Pity: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: For Aristotle as for Plato, the deepest, most significant and most philosophically interesting of all mimetic artforms was tragic poetry.² That tragedy should attract such attention from both philosophers was a reflection not only of the genre’s cultural prestige in classical Athens, but also, and more fundamentally, of the scope of its ethical and psychological engagement with extremes of human experience and suffering. Plato, as I argued in chapter 3, counted tragedy as a kind of embryonic (though profoundly mistaken) philosophy: the vehicle of a set of attitudes and values capable of being translated into a worldview that, if taken

Chapter Eight Music and the Limits of Mimesis: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The nature of music is perhaps the most intractable, as well as one of the most fascinating, of all problems in aesthetics. It has been debated voluminously and often polemically since antiquity, and far from becoming worn out the subject has in recent years seen a spate of publications from contemporary philosophers, especially in the English-speaking world.¹ However intellectualized the questions that cluster around the topic may have become, their roots are unmistakably “anthropological.” Every known human culture not only possesses music but develops ways of using it that consistently manifest both an association with special categories of events and

Chapter Twelve An Inheritance Contested: from: The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: Despite, or perhaps in part because of, its importance and influence within the history of aesthetics, the current status of mimesis as a concept (or family of concepts) in the theory of art is contentious and unstable. In an age when talk of representation has become increasingly subject to both ideological and epistemological suspicion, mimesis is, for many philosophers and critics, little more than a broken column surviving from a long-dilapidated classical edifice, a sadly obsolete relic of former certainties. According to such convictions, even the Renaissance and neoclassical revival of mimeticism was a phase of thought whose structure of

V The Trial’s Most Basic Features and Some Observed Consequences from: A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: We have seen that the Received View is beset with anomalies which cast doubt on its understanding of the trial. I have reviewed the practices and constitutive rules that make the trial what it is. I have interpreted a relatively simple trial performance and found it to put into play levels of questions well beyond the “issues of fact” envisioned by the Received View. In this chapter, I begin the task of constructing a more adequate understanding of the contemporary trial, one that both is more accurate and can hold its ground normatively. I begin in a phenomenological or descriptive

Chapter Four The Paradox of Freedom from: Freud, the Reluctant Philosopher
Abstract: Freud’s disavowals about philosophy do not absolve him from complex philosophical debts: Indeed, Freud (and later commentators) have failed to explain how the origins of psychoanalytical theory began with a positivistic investment without recognizing a dual epistemological commitment. Simply, Freud engaged positivism because he believed it generally equated with empiricism, which he valued, and he rejected “philosophy,” and, more specifically, Kantianism, because of the associated “transcendental” qualities of its epistemology. But the relationship between Freud and Kant is not so simple.

CHAPTER FOUR The Profits and Perils of Figurative Exegesis from: Reading Renunciation
Abstract: The traditional categories through which early Christian exegesis is often described—“literal,” “typological,” “allegorical”—are less helpful for analyzing “ascetic exegesis” than some scholars might imagine. Contrary to my own expectation, I have discovered that typology and allegory, however much they may dominate other types of patristic interpretation, were underutilized interpretive tools in the church fathers’ production of ascetic meaning from Biblical texts. Other interpretive strategies, to be detailed in chapter 5, particularly intertextual exegesis, proved on the whole far more useful. In some cases figurative interpretation of any sort seemed unnecessary to ascetically inclined exegetes because the unadorned—but

5 GENRE AND STRUCTURE from: The Sense of Music
Abstract: A world in which the moments of present time are transposed into the past or the future; in which all love and romance seem beyond the subject’s grasp, lost in the personal or historical past, where passages of terrible sweetness are always touched with nostalgia and regret—this was the temporal dynamic of the nineteenth century, and it was reflected in music. A temporal dialectic now joins hands with a dialectic that is ontological and sentimental. Time-in-a-moment and progressive time respectively evoke lostness and struggle; the extended present of lyric time becomes a space where the remembered and imagined past

9 NEW BEGINNINGS from: The Sense of Music
Abstract: A musician, more than anyone else, ought to be aware of the need for faithfulness to one’s material. The philosophical mind seeks logi cal sequence and noncontradiction; but the best composers override logic in a desire to let their material work itself out unhindered. For this reason, Jacques Barzun identified Romanticism with realism, as I recorded above in Chapter 5. The process of stylization in Romantic art was aimed “not in the direction of a common norm, but in the direction of complete expressiveness. This is the desire to make each object disclose itself as fully as possible under the

Book Title: The Undivine Comedy-Detheologizing Dante
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): BAROLINI TEODOLINDA
Abstract: Accepting Dante's prophetic truth claims on their own terms, Teodolinda Barolini proposes a "detheologized" reading as a global new approach to the Divine Comedy. Not aimed at excising theological concerns from Dante, this approach instead attempts to break out of the hermeneutic guidelines that Dante structured into his poem and that have resulted in theologized readings whose outcomes have been overdetermined by the poet. By detheologizing, the reader can emerge from this poet's hall of mirrors and discover the narrative techniques that enabled Dante to forge a true fiction. Foregrounding the formal exigencies that Dante masked as ideology, Barolini moves from the problems of beginning to those of closure, focusing always on the narrative journey. Her investigation--which treats such topics as the visionary and the poet, the One and the many, narrative and time--reveals some of the transgressive paths trodden by a master of mimesis, some of the ways in which Dante's poetic adventuring is indeed, according to his own lights, Ulyssean.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rvnj

The Brahms Symphonies (1887) from: Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Brahms, who emerged from the circles of the Romantics, embodies the enduring principle of the Romantic tendency: the principle of mixed moods and rapid movement in the life of the emotions. But Brahms surpasses all previous representatives of musical Romanticism in the versatility of his spirit, acquired in the course of a wonderfully purposeful and energetic development, and in the objectivity, stringency, and diversity of his style. Among all the symphonic composers of our century, Brahms is the only one who equals Beethoven in the logic and economy of his structure, the unbroken expansiveness of his material and creations, and

CHAPTER ONE Music: from: Performing Africa
Abstract: Upon mere mention of the phrase “African music,” a list of features readily comes to the fore. A sampling of comments: “African music is all drumming”; “It’s rhythm”; “It is the heartbeat that just makes you want to get up”; “It is noise and not music”; “African music is so primal.” This brief list of common refrains in no way gives one a sense that informants agree about the value of African music. Yet attentiveness to the ideas behind some of these statements helps illuminate the sedimented logics that hold in place Europe and one of its Others, Africa. Ideas

3 Autobiographical Voices with an Accent from: Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: In Migrancy, Culture, Identity, Iain Chambers presents a well-orchestrated medley of personal memory, philosophical reflection, anthropological and literary theory, cultural criticism, social commentary, well-positioned quotations, and photographs to communicate how notions of identity and geography shift and shape as they travel through myriad languages and cultures, across borders and histories. At one level, this book can be read as the long version of Chambers’s curriculum vitae, his ownBildungsroman. Evocative of early German romanticism’sBildungsromanthat recounts the protagonist’sBildungthrough different stations of his journey in prose, poetry, song, anecdote, letter, philosophical reflection, and free associations of dream and

CHAPTER THREE Revenants, Remnants, and Counterrevolution in “The Fire and the Hearth” from: William Faulkner
Abstract: THE Agricultural Adjustment Act (AAA) of 1933 initiated the transformation of southern labor and its place, prompting a labor revolution, driven by federal funds, and effectively exorcising black from white. To read sociological commentators in the early 1930s, addressing southern agriculture, is to hear black tenants described as “virtual slaves,” held “in thrall,” subjected to “almost complete dependence” and “incapable of ever achieving but a modicum of self direction.”¹ Although the Civil War had freed the slave, it had done so only for southern landowners to bind him again in an alternative form of “dependency”: for chattel slavery read debt

CHAPTER THREE The Planetary Dead: from: Through Other Continents
Abstract: Do the dead remain “human”? Does their membership in the species persist beyond their biological end? Or does that membership cease the moment their breath ceases? What is the principle that aggregates them, that makes us speak of them as one, a collective unit, “the dead”? And how does this oneness of the dead reflect on humans in general, currently not one but perhaps needing to be? What does it mean to belong to a species made up of two populations: those who are physically present and those who are not, no longer full-fledged members but also not quite nonmembers?

Chapter One THE SELF IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCES from: Modernity's Wager
Abstract: One of the more intractable problems in the social sciences is the problem of explaining human agency, or what is often termed the structure/action debate. The problem seems to crop up anew with each generation of practitioners, who have generated a small library on this problem alone. The very triumph of sociology, anthropology, and political science as disciplinary specialties has, however, been marked by a loss of certain categories of thought and by an ever increasing difficulty in expressing human existence in the world in terms of words and concepts that had, in a presociological era, stood at the core

7 CRUSHED GLASS: from: Charred Lullabies
Abstract: What is human Being? I cannot think of anything more effective in urgently provoking one to ask this question than violence. This question has served as an undertone in all the chapters so far, but more noticeably in the last three chapters, with some conspicuous help from Peirce and Heidegger. But in our search for human Being in the world, we keep encountering human beings: the result of the pull of an anthropological attitude against that of a purely philosophical one. Anthropology has had an answer to the question, What is a human being? An answer that has, on the

CHAPTER ELEVEN The Politics of Presence from: Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: The election of a representative rests on a double logic of distinction and identification. Voters want the person for whom they vote to have the ability to govern. When their choice is guided by recognition of the candidate’s leadership skills and technical competence, it is the logic of distinction that governs. The election is seen as a means of “choosing the best,” and voters implicitly concede that the candidates possess abilities that they do not. But voters also expect their representatives to be close to them, to be familiar with their problems and concerns, and to share their worries and

Introduction from: The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: As far back as we know, people have been tormented by memories that filled them with feelings of sadness and remorse, the sense of irreparable loss, and sensations of fright and horror. During the nineteenth century, a new kind of painful memory emerged. It was unlike the memories of earlier times in that it originated in a previously unidentified psychological state, called “traumatic,” and was linked to previously unknown kinds of forgetting, called “repression” and “dissociation.”

One Making Traumatic Memory from: The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: A century ago, a new kind of memory was born, at the intersection of two streams of scientific inquiry: somatic and psychological. The somatic stream dates from the 1860s and the discovery of a previously unidentified kind of assault, called “nervous shock.” The psychological stream begins earlier, in the 1790s, and leads to the discovery of a previously unidentified kind of forgetting, called “repression” and “dissociation.” By the 1890s, nervous shock and repression/dissociation have been conjoined to produce the traumatic memory, the subject of the present study.

Two World War I from: The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: The “Rivers” who is mentioned in this passage is W.H.R. Rivers, a temporary captain in the Royal Army Medical Corps (RAMC) serving as a psychiatrist at the Craiglockhart Military Hospital, near Edinburgh. Over the preceding two decades, Rivers had established an international reputation as an ethnographer and a pioneer researcher on nerve regeneration. It is Rivers the anthropologist who is best remembered today—Rivers the member of the Cambridge Expedition to the Torres Straits (1898), the originator of the “genealogical method” of investigating kin relations and terminologies (1900), and the author of a classic ethnography of South Asia, The Todas

Chapter 2 Method from: Anthropos Today
Abstract: Max Weber’s classic essay “Objectivity in Social Science and Social Policy” has received much critical attention in the Weber literature, as it is one of his few sustained statements about conceptual and methodological issues. It was drafted as Weber was writing the first version of The Protestant Ethic, after recovering, in the winter of 1902, from one of his severe breakdowns, which had lasted four years. The critical literature generally ignores the fact that the essay was in part collectively written and was intended as a broad policy statement. In the summer of 1903, Werner Sombart, Edgar Jaffé, and Max

Book Title: Forbidden Fruit-Counterfactuals and International Relations
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Lebow Richard Ned
Abstract: Could World War I have been averted if Franz Ferdinand and his wife hadn't been murdered by Serbian nationalists in 1914? What if Ronald Reagan had been killed by Hinckley's bullet? Would the Cold War have ended as it did? In Forbidden Fruit, Richard Ned Lebow develops protocols for conducting robust counterfactual thought experiments and uses them to probe the causes and contingency of transformative international developments like World War I and the end of the Cold War. He uses experiments, surveys, and a short story to explore why policymakers, historians, and international relations scholars are so resistant to the contingency and indeterminism inherent in open-ended, nonlinear systems. Most controversially, Lebow argues that the difference between counterfactual and so-called factual arguments is misleading, as both can be evidence-rich and logically persuasive. A must-read for social scientists,Forbidden Fruitalso examines the binary between fact and fiction and the use of counterfactuals in fictional works like Philip Roth'sThe Plot Against Americato understand complex causation and its implications for who we are and what we think makes the social world work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t05p

CHAPTER SEVEN If Mozart Had Died at Your Age: from: Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: The following tale has three parts: a short story, a review by an imaginary critic, and a reply by the heroine of my story. The tale takes place in an imaginary world in which neither World War I or II nor the Shoah occurred because Mozart lived to the age of sixty-five. It seeks to dramatize the tensions between “psycho-logic”—exploited by the story—and the laws of statistical inference, which guide the imaginary critique. Psychologic describes the various cognitive and motivational biases that make estimates of probability and attributions of responsibility different from the expectations of so-called rational models.

Book Title: Christian Political Ethics- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Coleman John A.
Abstract: Christian Political Ethicsbrings together leading Christian scholars of diverse theological and ethical perspectives--Catholic, Lutheran, Calvinist, and Anabaptist--to address fundamental questions of state and civil society, international law and relations, the role of the nation, and issues of violence and its containment. Representing a unique fusion of faith-centered ethics and social science, the contributors bring into dialogue their own varying Christian understandings with a range of both secular ethical thought and other religious viewpoints from Judaism, Islam, and Confucianism. They explore divergent Christian views of state and society--and the limits of each. They grapple with the tensions that can arise within Christianity over questions of patriotism, civic duty, and loyalty to one's nation, and they examine Christian responses to pluralism and relativism, globalization, and war and peace. Revealing the striking pluralism inherent to Christianity itself, this pioneering volume recasts the meanings of Christian citizenship and civic responsibility, and raises compelling new questions about civil disobedience, global justice, and Christian justifications for waging war as well as spreading world peace. It brings Christian political ethics out of the churches and seminaries to engage with today's most vexing and complex social issues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t1pt

2 A Limited State and a Vibrant Society: from: Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) COLEMAN JOHN A.
Abstract: It would be foolhardy indeed, and risk a superficial mere ʺskimming view,ʺ to attempt, in the small compass of one essay, any comprehensive or encyclopedic overview on the topic of Christianityʹs position on the state and civil society. The competing Staatslehren(where there even is one!) of different Christian theological ʺfamilies,ʺ such as Catholics, Calvinists, Lutherans, Anabaptists, and the Orthodox, do not fully agree or even always converge on their doctrines of the state and society.¹ To avoid this trap of even trying to achieve a fully rounded summary of the varying positions, I will focus primarily on the tradition

CHAPTER 8 Making History: from: Mappings
Abstract: My reflections begin with the contradictory desires within contemporary American feminism revolving around the question of history, particularly what is involved when feminists write histories of feminism. On the one hand, a pressing urgency to reclaim and hold on to a newly reconstituted history of women has fueled the development of the field of women’s history as well as the archaeological, archival, and oral history activities of feminists in other areas of women’s studies outside the discipline of history, inside and outside the academy. On the other hand, there has been a palpable anxiety within the feminist movement about the

CHAPTER 3 Deductive Narrative and the Epistemological Function of Belief in Mathematics: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) LA NAVE FEDERICA
Abstract: The story of a mathematical discovery is often presented as a linear succession of events corresponding to a series of logical steps leading up to the moment of discovery by proof. The discovery itself takes on the character of a “truth revelation.” Such an accounting is cathartic. It makes us feel good about ourselves; it gives us confidence in the power of our mind. But is a sequence of logical steps all there is behind proving something in mathematics? When telling a story, one naturally lapses into a linear mode. But when trying to locate the history of a discovery,

CHAPTER 6 Visions, Dreams, and Mathematics from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MAZUR BARRY
Abstract: If someone asks us What is X?, whereXis some mathematical concept, we boldly answer, for we have been well trained in the art of definition. All the fine articulations of logical structure are at our fingertips. If, however, someone

CHAPTER 12 Adventures of the Diagonal: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) PLOTNITSKY ARKADY
Abstract: Mathematics has been and still is commonly viewed as independent, at least essentially or constitutively independent, of narrative or other purportedly literary or rhetorical elements, such as metaphor.¹ Indeed, this independence has been deemed to be especially characteristic of mathematics as against other sciences or philosophy, which also aspire and claim to be able, sometimes on the model of mathematics, to dispense with the constitutive role of such elements. Their auxiliary, such as pedagogical, role has always been acknowledged and, more recently, investigated in historical and sociological studies of mathematics and science, for example, in considering how narrative is used

CHAPTER 14 Mathematics and Narrative: from: Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MARGOLIN URI
Abstract: The systematic study of the manifold relations between narrative (especially fictional) and mathematics (including formal logic) is in its infancy. From my point of view as a student of literary fictional narrative, it would be most useful to map out for further work the areas of interrelations between these two kinds of symbolic discourse. Needless to say, the list of areas I discuss is neither exclusive nor exhaustive but rather a tentative staking out of the terrain, to be modified and improved by further work. I should also mention that my command of literature and literary theory is far superior

Joseph de Maistre’s Catholic Philosophy of Authority from: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Pranchère Jean-Yves
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre wanted his books to bring philosophical reinforcements to a Catholicism shaken by the revolutionary crisis. In 1819, in the preliminary discourse to Du Pape,he presented himself as a man of the world whose advocacy was justified only by the state of the Church, almost destroyed by the French Revolution. At the moment when the “Church was beginning again,” in the “kind of interstice” that preceded resumption of theological studies, Maistre intended simply to take the of those “faithful allies” who, without substituting themselves for theologians, can defend the Church by means of their own profane arguments.²

Book Title: Buried Astrolabe-Canadian Dramatic Imagination and Western Tradition
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): WALKER CRAIG STEWART
Abstract: Craig Walker devotes the main body of his work to critical readings of James Reaney, Michael Cook, Sharon Pollock, Michel Tremblay, George F. Walker, and Judith Thompson, respecting the distinctive elements of the writer's voice while helping the reader appreciate the cultural context that informs each play. He analyses the poetics or mythological underpinning of the works and investigates the cultural significance of the tropes that typify their works. The Buried Astrolabe stakes the claim of Canadian playwrights to be considered among the most important in the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zpzs

Book Title: Gift and Communion- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Pawlak Orest
Abstract: Gift and Communion offers a critical presentation of John Paul II's theology of the body, understood in the light of Christian theological tradition. The main thesis of the book is that John Paul II's theology of the body forms a new, inspiring approach to Christian ethics and the theology of marriage and family, as well as to theological anthropology. A central thrust of Gift and Communion is to treat theology of the body - as it deserves - in all its philosophical and theological seriousness and to present it as an important stage in the historical development of Catholic theology
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zswgw

Introduction from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: The goal of this book is to present that aspect of theological anthropology which John Paul II himself referred to as “the theology of the body.”¹ The primary source for the presented reflections is the 129 catecheses John Paul II delivered during his Wednesday general audiences in the Vatican from 5 September 1979 to 28 November 1984.² From now on they will be referenced as the Wednesday catecheses on the theology of the body.³

Chapter One DISCOURSE ON METHOD from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: Using the title of the first philosophical publication of René Descartes, Discours de la méthodefrom 1637, as the name of this chapter is intentional.¹ It results from the conviction that the method of the theological anthropology of John Paul II is built in opposition to the Cartesian method, which has been considered paradigmatic for modern humanities and social sciences.² The papal reflections in the catecheses are theological; however, the fact that both thinkers intend to understand the real man living in history makes a comparison with Cartesian thought possible.

Chapter Two THE BODY THAT REVEALS from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: In the Wednesday catecheses, John Paul II describes and analyzes the human body according to the principles of an adequate anthropology. As shown in the previous chapter, the pope explains the concept of an adequate anthropology as “an understanding and interpretation of man in what is essentially human.”¹ Through a phenomenological concentration on what is characteristic to man—subjectivity, an experience of self, and self-reflection—an adequate anthropology opposes empiricist anthropological reductionism that “reduces man to ‘the world’” and understands man only “with the categories taken from the ‘world,’ that is, from the visible totality of bodies.”²

Chapter Three THE GIFT THAT CREATES COMMUNION from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: Both concepts mentioned in the title of this chapter, gift and communion, have an important philosophical and theological history. It is worthwhile, therefore, to begin our reflections with a short historical introduction. Many anthropologists and ethnologists convincingly prove that the giving and receiving of a gift is a fundamental element of every human culture, “one of the bases of social life.”¹ In one of the first important modern publications on the cultural meaning of gift, Essai sur le don,Marcel Mauss writes that in archaic societies the ceremony of giving and receiving gifts had many essential social, economic, and religious

FINAL REMARKS from: Gift and Communion
Abstract: George Lindbeck’s book The Nature of Doctrinemay well be regarded as one of the most important theological publications of the late twentieth century.¹ In the context of dialogue between religions, the Yale professor suggests a particular hermeneutics of sacred texts, that is, an intra-textual interpretation that is to enable dialogue among followers of different religions.² According to Lindbeck, a proper hermeneutics of religion should have a cultural and linguistic character so that truths of faith are interpreted not only cognitively, but also as aregula fideifor the whole of life of the community of believers.³ More important for

Conclusion from: The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: This essay in comparative history has led me to consider the collective imaginary as a social fact, the transformations of which are directly or indirectly linked to other social facts. In turn, the study of these changes themselves not only discloses the logic of discourse but also the social dynamic to which it belongs and of which it is an important driving force. In this sense, the cultural and social are two sides of a common history. I have chosen to give priority to the first because of the question that served as my point of departure: self-representations are constituted

CHAPTER TWO Marianne Moore from: Poetic Argument
Abstract: An argument is an inferential pattern, a train of ideas that are logically connected and lead to a conclusion entailed by the premises originally accepted and unifying the preceding discourse into a meaningful, satisfying whole. When I first offered this definition, I noted how it reveals the motive and shape of poetic argument, as manifested in linguistic power and aesthetic form. However, in the light of the first chapter we can discern in it all the terms of our discussion. It suggests that an argument is an admirably logical, rhetorical, and dramatic structure, stretched vulnerably between a point of departure

CHAPTER THREE Edward Thomas from: Poetic Argument
Abstract: If poetry is the “lion’s leap,” where is its lair? In other words: in poetic arguments, where is the dramatic stage on which the rhetorical festival of logic is performed? The poetry of Edward and Dylan Thomas offers two contrasting ways of providing an unstable but productive locus for argument. I have shown in the first chapter that modernist theories must propose a poetic context or scene of writing in which arguments can arise and in which they can operate in their aggressive fashion. That field can be expressed in various ways, depending on the poet's manner of systematically defying

CHAPTER SIX Wallace Stevens from: Poetic Argument
Abstract: Because Wallace Stevens is one of the most argumentative of modern poets, he allows us to recapitulate our terms of discussion by reviewing the logical, rhetorical, and dramatic resources of poetic argument. His arguments move between the poles of immanence and transcendence, correlative limits of thought, which, he suggests, can only be imagined by means of unreason. In a sense they move between the inward and outward extremes proposed by Edward Thomas and T.S. Eliot and scrupulously surveyed by Marianne Moore, but Stevens addresses those limits rather differently. On the one hand, he, too, believes that poetry requires unreason: it

6 Rhetoric: from: Word of the Law
Abstract: In preceding chapters, I have considered some of the problems inherent in what has been called “the formalist and essentially patriarchal myth of a determinate and univocal language of legal authority.”² That “myth” is said to involve among other things, characterizing legal reasoning as a kind of “demonstration”—that is, deducing from certain premises conclusions dictated by logical necessity.³ Among the problems sometimes said to inhere in such a model are the following. First, the data or premises of the law are not facts, which are supposedly capable of empirical verification, but values, which ostensibly are not. Thus, the basic

8 “Syntax” from: Word of the Law
Abstract: In Chapter 7, I discussed aspects of selection in legal language: characteristics of what is commonly regarded as typically legal diction, possible motivations for this kind of selection, and its rhetorical consequences. I move now to the subject of combination, or “syntax,” which, as Bolinger notes, means, etymologically, “a putting together.”² As I have already mentioned, diction and syntax are not always readily separable. With reference to an expression like “His contention is . . . ,” a discussion of the word “contention” may be largely lexical: the word itself has various features (it is a noun, latinate, and polysyllabic);

CHAPTER THREE Charting Meta-utopia: from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Among the canonical markers of utopian writing is the ambiguous location of the ideal society in space and time. Thus, a good point of departure for a discussion of meta-utopian fiction will be a definition of it in terms of its treatment of spatial and temporal dimensions. Moreover, the positioning of plot events in a matrix of space and time, what Bakhtin calls “chronotope,” lays the coordinates for a sustained valuative framework.¹ Chronotopes can give a palpable sense of the ideological project central to meta-utopian fiction. This fiction is about liberation from spatial and temporal stasis. It is about the

CHAPTER FOUR Science, Ideology, and the Structure of Meta-utopian Narrative from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: The modern Western tradition of utopian writing, rooted in More’s Utopia, is very much the product of a “scientific” mentality that has emerged over the last five hundred years. Although this mentality has been variously characterized, one of its firm bases is the epistemological concern for verifiable ways of knowing and measuring reality. Tracing the beginnings of this way of thinking in the late Middle Ages and early Renaissance, the comparatist Timothy J. Reiss defines an “analytico-referential” discourse founded on repeatable acts of mediated perception of the world, enabled by some invented instrument or mechanism.¹ Reiss draws particular attention to

CHAPTER SIX Meta-utopian Consciousness from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: A consideration of consciousness provides an appropriate end point for understanding the interaction between aesthetic experiment and ideological critique in meta-utopian fiction. In its challenge to exclusivist modes of social imagination and practice there emerges in this art a different mentality characterized by an insistence on balancing public and private modes of discourse, a love of ideological play, and an acknowledgment of the thinking, discerning person. The meta-utopian consciousness is built on a distinction between apparent ideological differences (for example, the looking-glass war between modes of realism) and significant valuative oppositions and choices (for example, between didactic and ludic art,

CHAPTER SEVEN Making Meta-utopia Accessible: from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Can narrative innovation, ideological challenge, and popular appeal coexist in one work of art? According to Irving Howe, one of the major historians of Western modernism, the answer is—no. Literature can no longer be avant-garde if it has become popular.¹ Once it gains broad appeal and is frequently imitated, it loses its “otherness” and becomes simply a marker of the existing ideology. It is by definition no longer new. But according to more recent critics, the Russian apologist for literary experiment V. O. Ksepma or the Canadian theorist of postmodernism Linda Hutcheon, the answer is—yes. Innovative, ludic art

CONCLUSION from: Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Where does meta-utopian narrative stand in the general crisis of social imagination and the parallel crisis of representational aesthetics? Born in isolation, Russian meta-utopian fiction is certainly not an isolated phenomenon. It parallels the renewed attention to language, semiotic play, and narrative structure that has figured so importantly in the West in opening up new insight into ideological structures. Its challenge to maximalist, bipolar thinking and its argument for the middle ground makes meta-utopian fiction very much of a piece with current social, literary, and philosophical discourse. Indeed, if anything, it forces us to raise the question of social imagination,

7 Darwin as a Lifelong Generation Theorist from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Hodge M. J. S.
Abstract: Generation, here, concerns not only the production of an offspring by two parents; or any asexual productions from one parent, in budding say; or any from none at all, as in spontaneous generation. For Darwin extends the term to include the generation or propagation of new species from old; and even beyond that the propagation of the whole tree of life. The full range of Darwin’s biological thought is thus confronted.

20 Three Notes on the Reception of Darwin’s Ideas on Natural Selection from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Cohen I. Bernard
Abstract: It is well known that Darwin’s theory of evolution was founded in the first instance on two kinds of observations: the occurrence of variations in animals and plants and the inheritability of such variations. In the opening chapter of the Origin, Darwin refers specifically to the existence of variation among “individuals of the same variety or sub-variety” and to the “endless” “number and diversity of inheritable deviations of structure, both those of slight and those of considerable physiological importance” (pp. 7,12). Since far more individuals are regularly produced than can possibly survive, there is a consequent “struggle for life” or

30 Images of Darwin: from: The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) La Vergata Antonello
Abstract: The members of any community sooner or later begin to reflect on their past with an eye to their future. Darwin scholars are no exception. They have increasingly found themselves discussing methodological problems and more general “philosophical” questions, such as their relationship to other areas of the history of science and to studies on the nature of science.

Book Title: Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WITTREICH JOSEPH ANTHONY
Abstract: Joseph Wittreich reveals Samson to be an intensely political work that reflects the heroic ambitions and failings of the Puritan Revolution and the tragic ambiguities of the era. He sees in the work not the purveyance of Medieval and early Renaissance typological associations but an interrogation of them and a consequent movement away from them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztvq7

Book Title: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COOK ELEANOR
Abstract: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens shows how, in setting words at play and in conflict, Stevens could upset the usual relations of rhetoric, grammar, and dialectic, and thus the book contributes to the current debate about logical and a-logical uses of language. Cook also places Stevens within the larger context of Western literature, hearing how he speaks to Milton, Keats, and Wordsworth; to such American forebears as Whitman, Emerson, and Dickinson; and to T. S. Eliot, his contemporary.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztwr5

CHAPTER TEN War and the Normal Sublime: from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: What kind of word-play is the title Esthétique du Mal?Weakly provocative might be one answer—a mixing of aesthetics and ethics, a calling-up of Baudelaire. The word ʺesthétiqueʺ suggests a question of translation, and not just French to English. Greek is also pertinent in the etymological sense of the word, and Stevens said he had this sense in mind. ʺI was thinking of aesthetics as the equivalent of aperçus, which seems to have been the original meaningʺ (L469, 1944; cf. OED, ʺaesthetics,ʺ ia, and the headnote, especially on Kant). John Crowe Ransom may have suggested one starting point,

CHAPTER ELEVEN Notes toward a Supreme Fiction from: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevens arranged the poems of Transport to Summerin approximate chronological order, except for the greatest,Notes toward a Supreme FictionThis poem, first printed privately in 1942, closesTransport to Summer, a collection written between 1942 and 1947

Book Title: Beauty and Holiness-The Dialogue Between Aesthetics and Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Martin James Alfred
Abstract: Beginning with the treatment of beauty and holiness in Hebrew, Greek, and classical Christian thought, the author traces the emergence of modern theories of aesthetics and religion in the Enlightenment. He then outlines the role of aesthetics in the theories of religion proposed by Otto, Eliade, van der Leeuw, and Tillich, in the cultural anthropology of Geertz, and in the thought of Santayana, Dewey, Whitehead, Heidegger, and Wittgenstein. In a global context Martin explores the relation of aesthetic theory to religious thought in the traditions of India, China, and Japan and concludes with reflections on the viability of modern aesthetic and religious theory in the light of contemporary cultural and methodological pluralism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztx00

5 Liberty from: The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: We have had several occasions to compare Blake to Milton, Winstanley, and other seventeenth-century writers and to consider the relation of his historical moment to theirs. In this chapter I want to dwell on the central theme of Blake’s ideological affiliation to the radicals of the Commonwealth period—liberty—and especially on the tradition of Christian antinomianism. As this affiliation has not been fully discussed before, I will give it more space than his relations with contemporaries or the details of his own elaboration of the theme, both of which Erdman and others have treated at length. The resulting imbalance

TWO The Body of the Sign from: Shakespeare
Abstract: All shifts in modern sympathies notwithstanding, the perplexing thing about late medieval theater is still its radical union of drama with doctrine. I do not mean that there is trouble believing in the orthodoxy of the nonliturgical religious stage: despite a resurgence of Marxist criticism, and our increasing awareness of the dialogic character of all texts, I would not want to claim that the plays embody a dialectical tension between official teaching and popular expression or entertainment.¹ The difficulty, rather, is the absence of such a contradiction, and of any other obvious opposition in these texts between earnest and game,

FIVE Shakespearean Authority from: Shakespeare
Abstract: A crucial part of the creation of literary drama in England involved the differentiation of mungrel tragicomedy into a system of structured and more or less determinate generic shapes.¹ Without such a sorting into coded emphases upon the individual image and its sexual or textual deflection, English drama could not have set its own frame, could not have transcended the determinants of civic ritual and ideological occasion. Yet part of the peculiarity of Elizabethan theater also has to do with its reaching beyond the classically certified set of dramatic genres, thereby complicating the opposition between tragedy and comedy with mutants

Book Title: Poetics of Reading- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WIMMERS INGE CROSMAN
Abstract: What happens when we read novels and how do we make sense of them? Inge Wimmers explores these questions by developing a flexible poetics of reading that generously opens up the interpretive space between reader and text, while drawing on current theories of reading and combining rhetorical, pragmatic, and phenomenological approaches. "Poetics," here, is extended beyond the study of purely textual features to structures of exchange between text and reader. In a discussion of four major French novels from the seventeenth century to the present, the author not only sets up a broad-based poetics but also makes important contributions to contemporary issues in the study of narrative. Wimmers introduces the concept of multiple, interlocking frames of reference that allows for the integration of diverse critical perspectives. Analyzing La Princesse de Cleves, Madame Bovary, A la recherche du temps perdu, and Projet pour une revolution a New York, she shows how texts provide some frames of reference, while others are produced by the reader's disposition and cultural milieu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv2nc

Book Title: The Reader in the Text-Essays on Audience and Interpretation
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Crosman Inge
Abstract: A reader may be in" a text as a character is in a novel, but also as one is in a train of thought--both possessing and being possessed by it. This paradox suggests the ambiguities inherent in the concept of audience. In these original essays, a group of international scholars raises fundamental questions about the status--be it rhetorical, semiotic and structuralist, phenomenological, subjective and psychoanalytic, sociological and historical, or hermeneutic--of the audience in relation to a literary or artistic text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv3jc

Interaction between Text and Reader from: The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Iser Wolfgang
Abstract: Central to the reading of every literary work is the interaction between its structure and its recipient. This is why the phenomenological theory of art has emphatically drawn attention to the fact that the study of a literary work should concern not only the actual text but also, and in equal measure, the actions involved in responding to that text. The text itself simply offers “schematized aspects”¹ through which the aesthetic object of the work can be produced.

7 LITERATURE AS PLAY from: The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: So far we have addressed the cognitive rigor of deconstruction. What of its playfulness, which would seem to go counter to the ascetic direction of its rigor? The association of literature with play is hardly new. We need only invoke the self-delighting playfulness of Aristophanes and Shakespeare, among many others, to realize that the essence of comedy has always been play. Only a Puritan attitude within literature, which has affinities with a mistrust of literature itself, would want to banish self-delighting playfulness. The tradition of play in literature and in philosophical reflection about play has been strongly marked by theological

CHAPTER 2 LIBIDO DOMINANDI AND POTENTIA HUMILITATIS: from: Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: When one thinks of medieval attempts to stage political power, the first image that comes to mind is the ranting Herod, and it is instructive to realize that Shakespeare’s few overt references to medieval drama include two allusions to this character. True, Shakespeare’s portraits of tyranny far surpass their medieval forbear in complexity and psychological subtlety, and both his allusions to Herod are derisive—one in Hamlet’s advice to the players, the other in Mistress Page’s characterization of Falstaff’s rhetoric. Nonetheless, Herod’s impressive theatricality is what both allusions register, and if Shakespeare saw the Coventry mystery plays—as he could

CHAPTER 8 STYLE, GOODNESS, AND POWER IN MEASURE FOR MEASURE from: Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: The title of Measure for Measurehas long been recognized as an allusion to the eschatalogical discourse of the Gospels, and its application to Angelo is clear: “Judge not, that ye be not judged. For with what judgement ye judge, ye shall be judged, and with what measure ye mette it shall be measured to you again” (Matt. 7:1–2; cf. Mark 4:24 and Luke 6:36–38). InMeasure for Measure, the duke echoes Jesus’ idea when he meditates gnomically on Angelo’s hypocrisy: “Shame to him whose cruel striking / Kills for faults of his own liking” (3.2.260–61). Angelo

CHAPTER 2 Political Theory, Its Conventional Structure, the Issue-Orthodoxy, and the Assessment of Texts from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Were he more than the creation of metaphor, homo methodologicuswould migrate in droves to thepolisof political theory, where certainly the methodological idiom is now heard with a frequency which is difficult to ignore.¹ So pervasive is it that an overview of methodological dispute about political theory can almost serve as a means of describing the community itself.

CHAPTER 6 Coherence from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: I shall take coherenceas existing at the center of a network of terms (principallyunity,precision,oneness,consistency,validity), and as representing an unavoidable and persistent genus of concern in textual analysis. No matter what else we may wish to say about a given text, to some extent we are logically obliged to trade in the currency ofcoherence. At one extreme a cursory statement about an author’s central concern or an indication of what a book is about represents some minimal coherence claim. At another, detailed analysis will frequently go much further by trying to elicit to what

CHAPTER 7 Ambiguity: from: The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Ambiguity has long been recognized as a significant phenomenon of discourse, if too frequently as only an undesirable one. In these respects, and in terms of its logical significance, ambiguity provides a strong contrast to originality, the category with which I started. Yet if ambiguity has been commonly regarded as a fault, the nonambiguous has acquired neither proportionately laudatory connotations nor even adequately discrete delineation. The area of the unambiguous is one of virtue but not of cardinal virtue. In England, the doctrine of the clear, simple prose style initially propagated by puritan lecturers, institutionally associated with the Royal Society,

Methods of Narratology and Rhetoric for Analyzing Isak Dinesen’s “The Blank Page” from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Halsall Albert W.
Abstract: The principal problem posed by Dinesen's story, “The Blank Page” is one of ethos. Put very simply, and as Dinesen quite accurately foresaw, in my view, the story's credibility or plausibility is the problem most likely to trouble readers whose ideological presuppositions do not commit them to reading it as a tract, feminist or otherwise. To prove my thesis, I will have recourse to two critical methods which should, I hope, function as symbiotic agents of analysis. Formal narratology, of the sort developed by French Structuralists like Barthes, Genette and theÉcole de Paris, enables one to describe the text's

The Silent Tale: from: Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Kemp Mark A.
Abstract: In his analysis of a short narrative text which ends ambiguously,Umberto Eco concludes that the story being told is actually the story of the reader’s failure in reading the story.¹ This “naive” reader’s complacent acceptance of narrative conventions and ideological assumptions deliberately inscribed in the text leads to an impasse in interpretation. Instead of the expected denouement there is an impossible, or paradoxical, outcome. Only a critical reading, such as the one performed in “ Lector in Fabula,” can overcome the frustrated conventional reading and detect the “pragmatic strategy” in the text. By self-critical I mean both the text's criticism of

7 LITERATURE AS PLAY from: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: So far we have addressed the cognitive rigor of deconstruction. What of its playfulness, which would seem to go counter to the ascetic direction of its rigor? The association of literature with play is hardly new. We need only invoke the self-delighting playfulness of Aristophanes and Shakespeare, among many others, to realize that the essence of comedy has always been play. Only a Puritan attitude within literature, which has affinities with a mistrust of literature itself, would want to banish self-delighting playfulness. The tradition of play in literature and in philosophical reflection about play has been strongly marked by theological

Introduction: from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) KERNAN ALVIN
Abstract: Institutionally, in the standard academic table of organization, the university catalogue—the knowledge tree of contemporary western culture—the humanities are the subjects regularly listed under that heading: literature, philosophy, art history, music, religion, languages, and sometimes history. This branch of knowledge is separated from the branch of the social sciences and from the branch of the biological and physical sciences. These three branches together form the arts and sciences, or the liberal arts, as they are sometimes known, which are as a group separated in turn from the professional disciplines—such as medicine, education, business, and law—which, at

Eight Changing Epochs from: What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) KERMODE FRANK
Abstract: Since the topic of changing cultural epochs, ends and beginnings, is in the fin de siècle air, it might be worth asking whether the one we may conceivably be experiencing is of a kind that will permit the survival of literary studies, a term I use in a sense that the sequel should make clear, or indeed of literature, a term I use in a sense that will still seem innocent to some, though condemned by many others as tainted by nostalgia for the aesthetic, redolent of a hateful elitism, an instrument of ideological oppression.

CHAPTER TWO AN ETERNAL STATE OF MIND from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: If the discussion at the end of the preceding chapter gradually began to emphasize a curious hybrid of traditionally discrete discourses—the historical and the eschatological—my reasons for yoking such unlikely categories was neither the example of Benjamin’s “Theses on the Philosophy of History,” nor the desire to provide an intermediate stage between a section devoted to The Cantos’ historical codes and one centered on the poem’s religious beliefs. Rather,The Cantosthemselves enforce the abolition of any clear dividing-line, including a larger and more various group of cosmic principles, traditional deities, and religious philosophies among its “historical characters”

CONCLUSION from: The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: In some ways, Stephen Dedalus’ “History . . . is a nightmare from which I am trying to awake,”³ is the more reassuring outcry. For, in spite of Yeats’s assertion, in dreams one is responsible primarily to oneself, and no matter how enmeshing the psychological lures, or how fascinating the specular authority of one’s own demons, the chance to awake is always potentially at hand, the movement of a radical deliverance already implicit in the very repressions that had constituted the original terror.

THREE Symbol, Myth, and Interpretation from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Thus far we have concentrated on the epistemological and psychological basis of Blake’s symbols. We shall now move toward an examination of the myth in which he organized them, and raise more directly the problem of interpretation in its dual form: Blake’s understanding of his symbols’ meaning, and the various kinds of understanding that modern readers bring to them. I propose to begin by considering some representative modern theories of symbolism, taking care at each point to note essential differences from Blake’s theory, but at the same time establishing perspectives that will help to illuminate the peculiar difficulties of his

FOUR The Zoas and the Self from: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Blake’s myth is above all else psychological. His cosmology, theology, and even epistemology are all transpositions of the central inquiry into the self. This is no disinterested quest. Like many in his age Blake was haunted, if not obsessed, by dividedness within the self and between self and world. As Hegel said in his first published work, division or discord (Entzweiung)“is the source of the need for philosophy.” And both Hegel and Blake were convinced that harmony must be achieved by restoring the fruitful interaction of opposites, not by abolishing them. “When the power of unification disappears from the

TWO The Negative Content from: I Am You
Abstract: The sentence, “I am you,” had a positive content, made up of what was understood: propositions drawn from sacramental theology, metaphysics, and epistemology. These propositions converged into two broad paradigms, corresponding with flesh and spirit, that provided ways to explain how many became one, but they were by no means self-evident. The grounds of their validity went beyond logical, and even empirical, proof. They extended to yet more general doctrines that defied the law of contradictions and, indeed, that prescribed negation and the coincidence of opposites.

FOUR Malevolent Sympathy from: I Am You
Abstract: In the first two chapters, I established a dossier on the sentence, “I am you,” the signature of a tradition. With the discussion of amorous sympathy, the inquiry went a level deeper. From the sentence, we moved to patterns of interpretation, including a strategy of proof, that made the sentence possible. Those patterns circled around two common paradigms, the biological and esthetic, both dealing with the formal coherence of separate things, and with the dynamic by which it becomes possible for many individuals to participate in the same coherence and thus to become one. Evidently, in the tradition represented by

NINE The Hermeneutic Gap in Painting from: I Am You
Abstract: We have now considered the understanding in the enterprise of understanding words. From words, or participation in another through the sense of hearing, we turn to pictures, participation through sight—the sense that, with hearing, lies at the base of all thought about esthetic understanding. Here, as in earlier discussions, we shall find that, even when the esthetic paradigm of assimilation predominated, it was complemented, through a common link of eroticism, with the biological paradigm. The analogy of composing with engendering was never entirely out of mind. As before, we shall find that the union of “I” and “you” was

Book Title: Neverending Stories-Toward a Critical Narratology
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Tatar Maria
Abstract: In these compelling new essays, leading critics sharpen our understanding of the narrative structures that convey meaning in fiction, taking as their point of departure the narratological positions of Dorrit Cohn, Grard Genette, and Franz Stanzel. This collection demonstrates how narratology, with its attention to the modalities of presenting consciousness, offers a point of entry for scholars investigating the socio-cultural dimensions of literary representations. Drawing from a wide range of literary texts, the essays explore the borderline between fiction and history; explain how characters are constructed by both author and reader through the narration of consciousness; show how gender shapes narrative strategies ranging from the depiction of consciousness through intertextuality to the representation of the body; address issues of contingency in narrative; and present a debate on the crucial function of person in the literary text. The contributors are Stanley Corngold, Gail Finney, Kte Hamburger, Paul Michael Ltzeler, David Mickelsen, John Neubauer, Thomas Pavel, Jens Rieckmann, Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, Judith Ryan, Franz Stanzel, Susan Suleiman, Maria Tatar, David Wellbery, and Larry Wolff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvn6q

ONE BETWEEN HISTORY AND FICTION: from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Pavel Thomas
Abstract: The distinction between history and fiction is once again stirring the interest of critics.¹ The question seemed settled in premodern times, when history was assumed to narrate the particular and poetry the general. True, until the nineteenth century, history was counted among the belles lettres, but that was a matter of stylistic kinship rather than of epistemological classification. Later, the practitioners of modern historiography became confident that their trade was more scientific than literary; therefore, the attempts to find new criteria for distinguishing history from poetry were welcomed. By then, fiction, or at least some of it, had ceased to

TEN PATTERNS OF JUSTIFICATION IN YOUNG TÖRLESS from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Corngold Stanley
Abstract: I am concerned with the logic of justification informing Robert Musil’s first novel, Young Törless(1906).¹ The novel appears to do everything in its power to ward off moral criticism. It is doubly, triply insulated against it. I shall discuss the various strategies of narrative and persuasion by which the novel achieves a certain dandylike countenance of impassiveness and superiority. I do not believe that Musil consciously set about constructing fortifications around his work in order to defend against scandal, yet it is as ifYoung Törlesshad in fact been constructed that way. Pursuing its defensive design might throw

FIFTEEN CONTINGENCY from: Neverending Stories
Author(s) Wellbery David E.
Abstract: What sorts of issues does the concept of contingency introduce into the enterprise of literacy criticism, in its broadest sense? Is there a sense in which the objects literary critics study are characterized by an element of contingency? And, if such is the case, are they indeed “objects” that could be constituted within a rigorous theoretical program? Or is contingency one of those points where the enterprise of literary criticism touches on its limits, where it takes shape, precisely, as a reflection on the limits of its own epistemological intention? Such are the questions that the following remarks, essayistically and

Book Title: Fabricating History-English Writers on the French Revolution
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Friedman Barton R.
Abstract: At the same time, this work explores questions about narrative strategies, as they are shaped by, or shape, events. Narratives incorporate the ideological and metaphysical preconceptions that the authors bring with them to their writing. "This is not to argue," Professor Friedman says, "that historical narratives are only about the mind manufacturing them or, more narrowly yet, about themselves as mere linguistic constructs. They illumine both the time and place they seek to re-create and, if by indirection, the time and place of the mind thinking them into being."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvq6m

1 W.V.Quine: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Kemp Gary
Abstract: Western philosophy since Descartes has been marked by certain seminal books whose concern is the nature and scope of human knowledge. After Descartes's Meditations,works by Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant are perhaps the most familiar and enduringly influential examples. Quine'sWord and Object(1960) not conspicuously announce itself as an intended successor to these, but is very much what it is. And after Wittgenstein'sPhilosophical Investigations,it is among the most likely of the philosophical fruits of the twentieth century to attain something like the prestige of those earlier works (setting aside century's great achievements in pure logic and

2 P.F.Strawson: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Snowdon Paul
Abstract: Peter Strawson published Individualsin 1959. He had been a Fellow at University College, Oxford, since 1948. Later he was appointed as Gilbert Ryle's successor to the Waynflete Professorship in Oxford. Strawson had achieved fame, like Frege earlier and Kripke later, by writing about reference. In “On Referring” (1950a) he criticized Russell's theory of definite descriptions and claimed that at least some uses of expressions of the form “TheF” are devices reference rather than a form of general quantification.¹ He moved from this to consider the question of the general relation between ordinary language formal logic, in his first

4 Robert Nozick: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Abstract: Robert Nozick's Anarchy, State, and Utopia(1974), along with John Rawls’sA Theroy of Justice(1971), radically changed the landscape in analytic political philosophy. For much of the preceding half-century, under the influence of logical heavy emphasis on empirical verifiability, much of moral philosophy was taken up with metaethics (e.g. the semantics of moral discourse), with little attention given to normative moral theories. Moreover, to the extent that normative theories were considered, utilitarianism was the centre of attention. This all changed with the publication of Rawls’s articulation and defence of liberal egalitarianism and Nozick’s libertarian challenge to the legitimacy of

5 Michael Dummett: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Weiss Bernhard
Abstract: Truth Other Enigmasis a collection of some of Michael Dummett's writings on truth and other enigmas. The other enigmas include: meaning and understanding, time and causation, the past, realism, logic, proof, vagueness and philosophy itself. The writings span a considerable portion of Dummett's career - the years 1953 to 1975 - and reflect his diverse concerns in that period. So it would be a to look for and wrong to impose a single theme that unifies the essays.However, two issues stand out as central, recurring as they do in many of the essays. One issue is the set of

8 Saul Kripke: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Burgess John P.
Abstract: Kripke first became known for technical work on modal logic, the logic of necessity and possibility, much of it done in the late 1950s as a high-school student, and summarized in Kripke (1963). (Among other things this work popularized a revival of the picturesque Leibnizian language according to which necessity is truth in all possible worlds.) Under the influence of Kripke's later work philosophers have come to distinguish several conceptions of necessity and possibility, in a manner to be described below; but Kripke’s early technical work was not tied to any special conception. Rather, it provides tools applicable to many

12 David Lewis: from: Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Bricker Phillip
Abstract: The notion of a possible world is familiar from Leibniz's philosophy, especially the idea - parodied by Voltaire in Candide- that the world we inhabit, theactualworld, is the best of all possible worlds. But it was primarily in the latter half of the twentieth century that possible worlds became a mainstay of philosophical theorizing. In areas as diverse as philosophy of language, philosophy of science, epistemology, logic, ethics and, of course, metaphysics itself, philosophers helped themselves to possible worlds in order to provide analyses of key concepts from their respective domains. David Lewis contributed analyses in all

Book Title: Modernist Anthropology-From Fieldwork to Text
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Manganaro Marc
Abstract: Recent insights into the nature of representation and power relations have signaled an important shift in perspective on anthropology: from a fieldwork-based "science" of culture to an interpretive activity bound to the discursive and ideological process called "text-making." This collection of essays reflects the ongoing cross-fertilization between literary criticism and anthropology. Focusing on texts written or influenced by anthropologists between 1900 and 1945, the work relates current perspectives on anthropology's discursive nature to the literary period known as "Modernism.".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvt1j

Textual Play, Power, and Cultural Critique: from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) MANGANARO MARC
Abstract: This anthology is born out of a number of critical developments in the past twenty-five years that have brought about, among other things, a coalescence of anthropology and current theories on discourse emerging from literary and other cultural studies. Perhaps most important, recent anthropological writing has called into question the legitimacy with which we represent the “Other” in cultural written accounts. Indeed, insights gained into the nature of representation and power relations have made impossible the comfortable assumption that other cultures can be grasped, categorized, and put on paper. The recognition that cultural representation is inherently problematic is of course

Frazer and the Elegiac: from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) VICKERY JOHN B.
Abstract: Modernist literature has a deserved reputation for being radically experimental in theme, structure, and technique. And yet the more one ponders it and its successors in the century, the more its collective voice appears to speak elegiacally, that is, in accents reflective of one of the most traditional and conventional of literary modes. Recently Peter Sacks (1985, 2) has reminded us that “the myth of the vegetation deity” is one of the elegy’s central conventions all of which may be “not only aesthetically interesting forms but also the literary versions of specific social and psychological practices.” Both the presence and

Sir James Frazer’s The Golden Bough: from: Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) ROTH MARTY
Abstract: Reading James Frazer’s Golden Boughas an imaginary construction is made easier by the fact that theGolden Boughhas long been invalidated as a work of anthropology. Frazer has been made the subject of anthropological “contempt and ridicule . . . abhorrence and denunciation”—his own estimate of the only acknowledgment that a “savage forefather” is likely to get from a modern (Frazer [1922], 307). This intention is further accommodated by the opening of the work itself, which is characterized, first, by particularly “fine” writing—a sudden access ofstyle;second, by the display of a work of fine

Chapter Nine The Contrived Corridors of Poems 1920 from: Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: In his preface to The Spirit of RomancePound made it clear that his interest in mediaeval literature was far from “archaeological”: “I am interested in poetry,” he wrote. “I have attempted to examine certain forces, elements or qualities which were potent in the mediaeval literature of the Latin tongues, and are, I believe, still potent in our own” (SR, 5). Pound’s interest in the literature of the past was always subordinate to his desire to write poetry in the present. Eliot admired this aspect of Pound’s work above all others. In “Studies in Contemporary Criticism” (1918) he wrote that

INTRODUCTION from: Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) DAIGLE CHRISTINE
Abstract: This collection of essays presents an inquiry into the possibility of existentialist ethics. A variety of existentialist thinkers, both theistic and atheistic, are known to have been highly critical of the philosophical and ethical traditions they inherited. Their views, as diverse as they are, all strive to offer an alternative to the overtly rational and, what they like to coin, an “inhumane” philosophical approach. Their aim is to provide a better account of what it is to be a human being in this world. This phenomenological task necessarily offers some ethical developments regarding our being-in-the-world as acting, encountering, socially living

Introduction from: Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: This book examines the relative status and authority of the multiple narrative voices in Paradise LostandParadise Regainedwithin interrelated socio-political, linguistic, and narratological contexts. Both epics accommodate a variety of interpretive voices, episodes, and dramatic and discursive exchanges that resist the monological containment of the poems’ dominant narratives. Through the inclusion of the multiple, even “unauthorized” voices and creation narratives, the poems are brought into a constructive tension with the Genesis story and its received biblical and literary traditions, as well as with accounts of England’s own tragic history. In presenting their individual creation stories, the narrators of both texts

2 Critical Interventions from: Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: Religious crises, political upheaval and decentralization, economic changes, social and scientific discoveries, and print-capitalism contributed to the development of a national consciousness and the formation of a social dynamic based on boundary-oriented and horizontal communities in Western Europe during the Renaissance.¹ The restructuring of the centripetally and hierarchically organized state accompanying the development of the new imagined community challenged the reign of the dominant language that provided “privileged access to onto logical truth” (Anderson 40). Bakhtin claims that the changes in European civilization at this time resulted in Europe’s emergence from a “socially and culturally deaf semi-patriarchal society” into one

Conclusion from: Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: In this study of Paradise LostandParadise RegainedI have presented a narrative of literary and historical development that resists the model of a “social text” to address the embodied reality of the voice. In the interrelated socio-political, linguistic, and narratological contexts I have examined, voice reconfigures itself as the embodied reality to which subjects in conversation and debate lend their own voices. By extending my investigation to an analysis of Milton's revolutionary conception of history as conversation, I have demonstrated that the view of history as exemplary and challenging to life coincides with and anticipates what will hardly

3 Experience and the Prospective Gaze to the Future from: Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: As a popular term that gained currency in tandem with philosophical formulations of Erfahrungand as a term that points no less than does its philosophical counterpart to a dialectic of continuity and discontinuity, the neologismErlebnisof course testifies to a certain convergence between both academic and para-academic dealings with experience. But what is striking here is not that the dialectical aspect of experience should receive its first systematic philosophical formulation through Hegel while almost simultaneously finding its way into popular fiction and biographical literature – after all, we have already seen how such a dialectic informs an etymological

7 OUTREMONT: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Now for our third phenomenological journey. I invite you to Montreal, where we will stroll through the municipality of Outremont, my home. Outremont is a small community tucked into northern flank of Mont-Royal. The mountain is at the geographic centre of Montreal, a large island on the Saint Lawrence River. To say the least, Montreal is a place of very sharp climatic contrasts. Summers in Outremont can be surprisingly hot, springs and autumns always seem too short, and winters are bitterly cold. 89But all the seasons have their pleasant days. The summer of 1993 was particularly felicitous. Mild mornings were

10 CONCLUSION: from: In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Harnessing the phenomenological method of inquiry, the theory undertakes to answer the first question by defining the architectural artefact: it is a physical object, time and

3 Towards a Typology of Comparative Literature Studies from: Living Prism
Abstract: It would be absurdly ambitious even to attempt to give a brief survey of the map of existing approaches in comparative literature. I merely wish to voice the need for such a map, and to indicate why I consider that it should be of a typological nature if comparative literature is truly to fulfil its international calling. This simply means taking one programmatic step in the direction in which the present diversity of our field is taking us, and stating what groupings and alliances, new and old, some expected, some unexpected, emerge as the most obvious from that initial vantage

7 Diachrony and Structure: from: Living Prism
Abstract: There can be no doubt that literary history is and has been for several decades under a scrutiny so severe that only a thorough theoretical and epistemological re-examination can restore it to its place in literary scholarship, provided also that a renewed practice follows upon this re-examination. That the demand for it stems from the various “intrinsic” approaches to the study of literature is a well-known fact: Russian Formalism, the Prague Circle, New Criticism, Nouvelle critique, as well as the structuralist and semiotic approaches have all tended to lead the literary scholar towards a close reading and analysis of the

9 On Renaissance Literary Historiography from: Living Prism
Abstract: This essay is devoted to a living experiment in early modern literary historiography – the Renaissance part, in four volumes, of the Comparative History of Literature in European Languages– and more particularly to the theoretical and methodological aspects of the project.

11 Comparative Literary History as Dialogue among Nations from: Living Prism
Abstract: Along with other human sciences, literary studies have been undergoing a phase of intense self–legitimation and self-justification. According to Linda Hutcheon this is part of a postmodern situation in which no values are embodied a prioriin any set of texts or in the study of any set of texts, and literary studies are, therefore, in a situation resembling exactly those of all other methodological and theoretical forms of discourse, trying to find their legitimacy in themselves. If that is so, literary scholars have reason to rejoice in the self-examination and autocriticism that is required of them, the need

26 Greek Myths in Modern Drama: from: Living Prism
Abstract: To study the reappearances of myth in literature is to encounter the paradox of permanence and transformation. The haunting question that arises for the critic and the historian as well as for the theoretician of literature and those who study the anthropological, psychological, and sociological aspects of imagination is that of the resilience of myths. How is it that these ancient narratives – very often Greek myths in the case of the literatures of the West – survive and revive with ever-renewed meaning for writers, readers, and spectators of subsequent periods? What is the source of their power of resurgence? It is

1 Life in Europe (1919–49) from: Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) ELLIOTT ROBIN
Abstract: Anhalt is an uncommon family name, and among people of Jewish origin it is exceptionally rare. In the course of his own casual but fairly extensive genealogical research into his family origins, Istvan Anhalt uncovered only one other Jewish family of that name in Europe, located in Poland.¹ According to an unsubstantiated and likely unprovable story told to Anhalt by his father, the family ancestors came from Dessau, the town where the princes of Anhalt-Dessau had their residence.² As the name Anhalt was reserved for members of the ruling family in Dessau, it must have been adopted by Anhalt’s ancestors

The Constitutional Dialectic and the Conundrum of Hate Legislation from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Rosen Paul L.
Abstract: Constitutional democracy with its veneration of the rule of law and the condition of equality seems, as it enters the last decade of the twentieth century, to be more sharply defined than ever before as the regime which best satisfies the human quest for freedom and dignity. As the ideological conflict of this tumultuous century abates, and parousiastic regimes¹ retreat, teeter and collapse, history offers the astonishing prospect of an underlying democratic movement taking the form of a constitutional dialectic. This dialectic in its present mature stage is a conversation, conducted by legislatures, courts and citizens, about the fundamental questions

The Orgins of Canadian Politics from: Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Stewart Gordon
Abstract: When historians begin talking about political culture real social scientists are inclined to wince. To take a political culture approach even to modern politics is full of problems; to attempt a historical account of the evolution of a particular polity’s culture is fraught with so many serious methodological questions that it seems wiser, and certainly safer, to avoid the challenge altogether. In his 1983 survey of the discipline of political science, Dennis Kavanagh, of the University of Nottingham, sets out the dilemma well. Kavanagh provides a minimalist definition of political culture, first devised by Talcott Parsons and Edward Shils in

Book Title: Chora 3-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: The thirteen essays in this collection include historical subjects as well as speculative theoretical "projects" that blur conventional boundaries between history and fiction. Ricardo Castro provides an original reading of the Kogi culture in Colombia; Maria Karvouni explores philological and architectonic connections between the Greek demas (the political individual) and domus (the house); Mark Rozahegy speculates on relationships between architecture and memory; Myriam Blais discusses technical inventions by sixteenth-century French architect Philibert de l'Orme; Alberto Pérez-Gómez examines the late sixteenth-century reconstruction of the Temple of Jerusalem by Juan Bautista Villalpando; Janine Debanné offers a new perspective on Guarino Guarini's Chapel of the Holy Shroud in Turin; Katja Grillner examines the early seventeenth-century writings of Salomon de Caus and his built work in Heidelberg; David Winterton reflects on Charles-François Viel's "Letters"; Franca Trubiano looks at Jean-Jacques Lequeu's controversial Civil Architecture; Henrik Reeh considers the work of Sigfried Kracauer, a disciple of Walter Benjamin; Irena ðantovská Murray reflects on work by artist Jana Sterbak; artist Ellen Zweig presents a textual project that demonstrates the charged poetic space created by film makers such as Antonioni and Hitchcock; and Swedish writer and architect Sören Thurell asks a riddle about architecture and its mimetic origins.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80ckv

Human and Divine Perspectives in the Works of Salomon de Caus from: Chora 3
Author(s) Grillner Katja
Abstract: THESE LINES FROM WITTGENSTEIN’S Tractatus logico-philosophicusacknowledge the human desire to step outside one’s world in order to find a neutral viewpoint which has always been impossible to attain. Wittgenstein valued the experience of art because it enabled man to contemplate the world as a limited whole - to see the world from the viewpoint of eternity,sub specie aeterni.²He considered the controlled experiment and the fictional proposition important to questions of ethical and aesthetic value. Through the experience of art, man might learn to live and act as an ethical being. Only by showing, and never through saying,

Juan Bautista Villalpando’s Divine Model in Architectural Theory from: Chora 3
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: THE BIBLICAL DESCRIPTION of the Temple of Solomon in Jerusalem has generated many diverse architectural speculations throughout our history. According to tradition, the Temple followed the designs of God and therefore could be interpreted as the archetypal work of architecture - a work that revealed a true order beyond the whimsical tastes of man and any temporal expressions of political power. In diverse times and cultures, mythical accounts of technological making and building demonstrated mankind’s keen awareness of the problems involved in transforming a given “sacred” world for the sake of survival. In the Christian tradition the Temple of Solomon

1 Conceptualizing and Contextualizing Violence and Gender: from: Violence and the Female Imagination
Abstract: While there is disagreement within scholarly communities about which theoretical perspectives best explain “real” violence and violent behaviour, there is general agreement on the importance of looking at multiple causal influences (biological, psychological, and socio-cultural/environmental/structural) at multiple levels (individual, community, and

5 Regendering and Serial Killing in the Fiction of Hélène Rioux, Anne Dandurand, and Claire Dé from: Violence and the Female Imagination
Abstract: When Northrop Frye wrote his concluding essay for the 1965 Literary History of Canada, he pointed out that Canadians, historically, have had significant respect for law and order in the face of mammoth, threatening, and somewhat monstrous wilderness. Although Frye uses European existentialism and the Russian Revolution as examples of differing social structures and philosophies, the underlying comparison he draws throughout the essay is between Canada and the United States. Assuming Canada’s overriding mythology to be pastoral, Frye found it an easy step to emphasize that Canada, unlike the United States with its history of revolution and technological productivity, is

Book Title: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Goldman Marlene
Abstract: Rewriting Apocalypse in Contemporary Canadian Fiction is the first book to explore the literary, psychological, political, and cultural repercussions of the apocalypse in the fiction of Timothy Finley, Michael Ondaatje, Margaret Atwood, Thomas King, and Joy Kogawa. While writers from diverse nations have adopted and adapted the biblical narrative, these Canadian authors introduce particular twists to the familiar myth of the end. Goldman demonstrates that they share a marked concern with purgation of the non-elect, the loss experienced by the non-elect, and the traumatic impact of apocalyptic violence. She also analyzes Canadian apocalyptic accounts as crisis literature written in the context of the Cold War - written against the fear of total destruction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80hzf

3 Margaret Atwood’s “Hair-ball”: from: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: The previous chapters explored the ways in which HeadhunterandThe English Patientinvoke a host of characteristic apocalyptic features. Rather than mobilize these features to recreate a full-blown apocalypse, however, both fictions rely on familiar apocalyptic topoi to launch a critique of apocalyptic eschatology.Headhunterchallenges the apocalyptic narrative by blurring the boundary between the elect and the non-elect, thereby calling into question apocalyptic notions of perfection as well as the category of the Saints of God. WhileThe English Patientmaintains the latter category, it subverts the logic of apocalypse by adopting and adapting allegory, another of its key tropes.

1 Catholic Ethics from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: There may be different ways of contrasting the Catholic and Protestant traditions. Discussing Catholic ethics first allows us to respect the chronological order in which the two appeared, and to underline the Protestant departure from orthodoxy. Since my purpose here is merely to demonstrate the opposing characteristics of the two traditions, I prefer to steer clear of any considerations of precedence. Instead I will emphasize the political consequences that can be derived from their contrary positions. I shall treat the Catholic perspective first in order to delineate a basic paradigm that will subsequently be used as a point of reference

10 Positivism: from: Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Auguste Comte is best known for his theory of the law of three stages in the development of history: the theological, the metaphysical, and the positive stages. Saint-Simon more than prepared the way for this theory. Both authors agreed on

Interlude: from: Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: “Ontology” is not a widely used word or concept in contemporary philosophy. The dominance of the perspectives of formal logic and linguistic analysis in the schools of philosophy in the academic scene has largely relegated traditional metaphysics and its interest in ontology to a purely historical account of the past. But some scientists and philosophers of science have not been satisfied with the reduction of truth to matters of formal methodology and abstractions expressed in mathematical formulae. The two authors of Principia Matkematicaseparated and took quite opposite paths. Bertrand Russell followed the route of logical science and ended in

Book Title: Knight-Monks of Vichy France-Uriage, 1940-1945
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): HELLMAN JOHN
Abstract: In The Knight-Monks of Vichy France John Hellman describes the founding, operation, transformation, and demise of the school, details the institution's ideological and political struggles with other segments of French society, and deals with the remarkable rise of Uriage ideas and alumni in postwar France. By focusing on the social, philosophical, and psychological concepts propounded by the staff of the school, Hellman has produced the first study that shows the École Nationale des Cadres d'Uriage to have been an original educational and group experience which inspired French youth from very different backgrounds to abandon the liberal democratic tradition for a new political and social vision. Drawing on a variety of sources, including interviews, newly available archival material, Vichy publications, correspondence, and diary entries, Hellman contributes to the current, lively debate concerning the phenomenon of collaboration and the response of the French population to fascism and to the occupation during the Second World War. This book will be of particular interest to readers concerned with the intellectual and political life of modern France, modern religious thought and experience, fascism and the Vichy regime, changes in France in the prewar and postwar periods, and the "third way" political option in contemporary Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80qmf

Book Title: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): JONES MANINA
Abstract: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary begins with a previously unpublished article by Shields. In the essays that follow, international scholars employ a variety of theories and methodologies in their analyses of her work, including narrative theory, cultural criticism, feminist analysis, psychoanalytic approaches, tropological explication, theories of authorship, and ficto-criticism to demonstrate how Shields's writing represents a genuine revision of literary realism in which the ordinary is subject to contemplation and not just celebration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80snq

8 Pioneering Interlaced Spaces: from: Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) PAILLOT PATRICIA-LÉA
Abstract: Carol Shields opens Larry’s Partywith a tweed jacket which her “futile,” “uneventful, average”² protagonist takes by mistake and which is subsequently used in a symbolical and instrumental way to tailor Larry’s psychological and social fabric. How does the repeatedly “mediocre” (113) Canadian become so extraordinary? This ordinary, “miserable adolescent” (165) would indeed remain as such without the construction of a spatialized identity, which renders the character exceptional and serves as the structural frame ofLarry’s Party. InL’expérience intérieure, Georges Bataille discusses the “labyrinthine construction of being,” which, he argues, takes the form of a “course we follow from

3 Polanyi’s Contemporary Relevance from: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: Since the 1960s, social ethics has assumed increasing importance in the theological education, pastoral practice, and ministry of the Christian churches. One of the reasons for this development is the recognition that in the past the churches tended to identify themselves, consciously or unconsciously, with the societies in which they lived and, more especially, with the ruling powers or dominant ideologies. Although individual Christians and critical Christian movements gave prophetic witness in their societies, the churches as a whole tended to remain silent in the face of the injustices practised by their societies. Today, their behaviour is much different.

Book Title: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BELL MARK
Abstract: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century includes critical readings of Terre des hommes by Antoine de Saint-Exupéry, Alexandre Chenevert by Gabrielle Roy, Gouverneurs de la rosée by Jacques Roumain, Pluie et vent sur Télumée miracle by Simone Schwarz-Bart, La route des Flandres by Claude Simon, Présence de la mort by C.F. Ramuz, and Neige noire by Hubert Aquin. Bell addresses the problems inherent in the term aphorism, the narrative and discourse function of aphorism within the genre of the novel, the interrelation between the structure of aphorism and the epistemological and hermeneutical functions this sub-genre may perform as a component part of the narrative fabric, the "national" character of aphoristics, and the problems that arise from "anthologizing" a novel's aphorisms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80wsr

6 Pluie et vent sur Télumée Miracle from: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: Of the seven novels under consideration in this study, Simone Schwarz-Bart’s Pluie et venthas generated the smallest amount of secondary literature. For example, no thoroughgoing analysis exists of the novel’s lingual or narratological features. A recent introduction to five francophone Caribbean authors by Beverly Ormerod may contain the most complete piece of criticism published thus far onPluie et vent.However, like the few other extant studies, it sets out mainly to summarize the plot, introduce characters, and detect recurring themes and motifs in the novel.

INTRODUCTION: from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Rutland Barry
Abstract: Gender is a secondary formation grounded in biological reproductive sex but distinct from it, as a building is distinct from and heterogenous to the

1 TOWARD AN EPISTEMOLOGY OF GENDER from: Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Verdon John
Abstract: That higher life forms exist in the two physical categories of female and male is universally self-evident and is not of itself a problem. Beyond this basic understanding, however, the two sexes become associated with a vast panorama of cultural phenomena, including categorical ascriptions of social roles, behavioural expectations, and personality characteristics. How does the simple, incontrovertible, and universal fact of biological dimorphism generate the staggering complexity of cultural, social, and psychological dynamics of the human condition? It is the translation of the biological into social/cultural experience that is the heart of an epistemology of gender. An elaboration of the

CHAPTER THREE The General’s Inner Circle: from: Political Ecumenism
Abstract: To the great distress of Le Connétable,his 18 June appeal for support was, with a few exceptions, greeted with silence by France’s military, political, socio-economic, and religious elites. The most logical political allies in the struggle against fascism (Paul Reynaud, Léon Blum, and Georges Mandel) opted, for different reasons, to stay in France. With the exception of Admiral Émile Muselier and four-star General Georges Catroux, dismissed from his post as Governor-General of Indo-China by Vichy, none of the nation’s military chiefs were willing to join de Gaulle in rebelling against Marshal Pétain, nor did any of the administrators of

4 Church‚ Society‚ and Mission from: Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: IN CONTINUING the task of tracing a perspective of incarnation as the underlying pattern in Chenu’s theology, we now turn to the concrete situation of the Church in the modern world. Whenever a major stand is to be taken, a decision to be made, or a choice to be declared, the law of incarnation serves as a guide and a basic strategy. It thus offers a model for both theological understanding and pastoral action.

5 Word as Sign from: Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: AS SOON AS THE ACT OF WITNESS IS GIVEN PRIMACY, the question of criteria of authenticity becomes unavoidable. How can I tell if my witness is true? When a theology becomes concrete and historical, the question of authenticity moves to the foreground and must be included in any consideration of the law of incarnation. The question is still one of faith and theology, but it is now complicated by an explicit confrontation with the historical and social dimensions of human existence. What is the method involved in the pastoral doing and the theological thinking of a Church “situated in the

Conclusion from: Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: THE CONTRIBUTION OF MARIE-DOMINIQUE CHENU to theological renewal came at a crucial time when the Church was in the midst of a painful struggle with the advent of modernity. The issue was to find a theological language that could speak to the concerns and aspirations of the modern world, yet could also overcome the shortcomings of the modernist proposals and be acceptable to the Church.

3 Hermes’ Laugh: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Chupin Jean-Pierre
Abstract: IT IS A HISTORICAL FACT, however strange, that architects often associate architectural creation with “divine” venture. From Plato to Vitruvius, and from Philibert de l’Orme to Le Corbusier, there is a recurrent and symbolic set of images that connects the architect’s role and the intervention of a demiurge. Although for most historians these images are understood as common metaphors, they are rarely recognized as partaking in an overall analogical framework of thoughts. Beyond religious beliefs or dogmatic standpoints, it is this peculiar way of thinking about architecture called “analogical” that I will be exploring in this paper. Numerous analogies can

4 The Angel and the Mirror: from: Chora 2
Author(s) Galvin Terrance
Abstract: ARCHITECTURE HAS HISTORICALLY been a means of giving form to the invisible through the use of the faculty of the imagination. This essay will examine the symbolism of the angel as a manifestation of the invisible realm, specifically operating at the juncture of two realms, as evidenced by the marriage of the celestial firmament and the mirrored sea. In discussing the ontological meaning behind the symbolism of the angel, I will construct an argument supporting the angelic image as one that embodies a profound understanding of transformation and mediates the classical Cartesian separation of mind and body. The consequences of

Book Title: Figuring Grief-Gallant, Munro, and the Poetics of Elegy
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SMYTHE KAREN E.
Abstract: The title, Figuring Grief, refers to the narrative process whereby mourning is depicted. In her textual analysis, Smythe explores various connections between representation and consolation. Drawing on genre and narratological theory, she outlines the development of the "fiction-elegy" as a sub-genre and suggests that the modernist writings of Woolf and Joyce are paradigmatic examples of the form. She then uses these paradigms as suggestive "reading models" for the interpretation of works by Gallant, Munro, and other contemporary fiction-elegists. Figuring Grief offers new readings of specific works and suggests that new ways of reading are both demanded and rewarded by a poetics of elegy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt818sp

17 Christianity as Religion and the Irreligion of the Future from: Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Szymanski Ileana
Abstract: A few years ago, a dialogue of more or less theological character between Umberto Eco and Cardinal Martini was published; as an annex, it included interventions by other important Italian thinkers. The title of the book surprised me: Belief or Nonbelief?¹ Since the question in the title referred to the beliefs of those who do not believe in God or in religious dogmas, the answer was a fairly obvious one: they believe in the demonstrations of the natural phenomena established by science, in what is endorsed by historical or social studies, in the pertinence of moral values, and so on.

CHAPTER TWO Phenomenology from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Many philosophers influenced the direction of Merleau-Ponty's thinking, as was shown in Chapter 1, but the single most significant influence was that of Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) and the “phenomenological” school that he founded. If we are to understand Merleau-Ponty properly, we have to see him above all in relation to phenomenology. At least in his major works, he certainly saw himself as a phenomenologist, and even the other influences on his thought were filtered through his conception of phenomenology. And, clearly, if we are to understand Merleau-Ponty's relationship to Husserlian phenomenology, we must first say something about Husserl's own thought.

CHAPTER THREE Being-in-the-world from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Phenomenological philosophy, as Merleau-Ponty conceives it, “consists in re-learning to look at the world”.¹ We need to re-learn to look at the world because we are “held captive” (to use Wittgenstein's phrase) by a picture of the world derived from the impulses that give rise to science - an objectivistpicture of the world (including even our own bodies) as existing entirely independent of ourselves and interacting with our experience in a merely causal fashion. There is nothing wrong with this picture in its own context; if we are to study the world scientifically, then we need to set aside

CHAPTER SEVEN The Arts from: Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Phenomenological philosophy, in Merleau-Ponty's conception, consists as we have seen in “re-learning to look at the world”, attempting to get behind the theoretical constructions that we erect on the basis of our immediate experience of the world in order to describe that experience itself. In so doing, he says, we do not simply reflect a pre-existing truth: philosophy is, “like art, the act of bringing truth into being”.¹ The analogy between phenomenology and art, especially the visual arts, runs through Merleau-Ponty's writings, sometimes as asides to a general philosophical discussion, and sometimes in the form of extended essays on particular

Book Title: Diasporic Feminist Theology-Asia and Theopolitical Imagination
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kang Namsoon
Abstract: How do we navigate the question of identity in the fluid and pluralist conditions of postmodern society? Even more, how do we articulate identity as a defining particularity in the disappearance of borders, boundaries, and spaces in an increasingly globalist world? What constitutes identity and the formation of narratives under such conditions? How do these issues affect not only discursive practices, but theological and ethical construction and practice? This volumes explores these issues in depth. Diasporic Feminist Theology attempts to construct feminist theology by adopting diaspora as a theopolitical and ethical metaphor. Namsoon Kang here revisits and reexamines today’s significant issues such as identity politics, dislocation, postmodernism, postcolonialism, neoempire, Asian values, and constructs diasporic, transethnic, and glocal feminist theological discourses that create spaces of transformation, reconciliation, hospitality, worldliness, solidarity, and border-traversing. This work draws on diverse sources from contemporary critical discourses of diaspora studies, cultural studies, ethnic studies, postmodernism, postcolonialism, and feminism and feminist theology from a transterritorial space. This book is a landmark work, providing a comprehensive discourse for feminist theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0snb

3 Asia as Theopolitical Imagination from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: People use the term inventionin many different ways. Once people used the term only for technological advances and innovations; gradually, it came to be used to reveal, criticize, or reappraise diverse phenomena. My use of the terminventionis to denaturalize and deessentialize the category of Asia or Asian women. The fundamental dangers and problems in this naturalized and essentialized category of Asia or Asian women lie in its mode of seeing: fixed, homogenized, and unchanging. The terminventionfurther calls for close scrutiny of the geopolitical constructedness of Asia and Asian women as genderized ethnicity and ethnicized gender.

6 Out of Places from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Questions of one’s dis/location become more and more elusive today, geopolitically, historically, and discursively. Trying to find an answer to this question of dis/location is also a serious ontological endeavor of finding one’s way of be-ing as an ever-moving verb, not a nevermoving noun.² Dis/location is ever becoming and ever moving. My use of the term dis/location, compounded from the wordsdislocationandlocation, is to reveal the entangled nature of those terms. A politics of location, first coined by Adrienne Rich, emerged in the early 1980s as a discourse of difference, especially in U.S. academic feminist discourse, as a

7 Glocal Feminist Theology in an Era of Neoempires from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Asianfeminist theology, like any other theology, is always in the making. I use the wordAsianin italics inAsianfeminist theology to denote its contestable and stereotypical nature when people use the term in different types of Asian theological discourses. AsAsiacan never be regarded as a monolithic entity, it is misleading and even distorting to define in a monolithic way what constitutes Asia primarily as overwhelming poverty and multifaceted religiosity. The history of Asian theological engagement with feminism has not been explored in great detail in the various disciplines of theology over the last few decades.

8 Transethnic Feminist Theology in an Era of Globalization from: Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Today the word globalizationis an all-purpose catchword both in popular and scholarly discourse; it is “on the lips of politicians, professors, and pundits alike.”³ People in different areas use the term in highly disparate ways and its meaning often is elusive. Globalization easily risks becoming a cliché as different people use and misuse it for their purposes. The most common interpretation of globalization is the idea that the world is becoming more uniform, homogenized, standardized, and compressed through a technological, commercial, and cultural synchronization emanating from the West. Corporations, markets, finance, banking, transportation, communication, and production increasingly cut across

Book Title: The Sense of the Universe-Philosophical Explication of Theological Commitment in Modern Cosmology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Nesteruk Alexei V.
Abstract: The Sense of the Universe deals with existential and phenomenological reflection upon modern cosmology with the aim to reveal hidden theological commitments in cosmology related to the mystery of human existence. The book proposes a new approach to the dialogue between science and theology based in a thorough philosophical analysis of acting forms of subjectivity involved in the study of the world and in religious experience. The uniqueness of this book is that it uses recent advances in phenomenological philosophy and philosophical theology in order to accentuate the existential meaning of cosmology as the discourse that ultimately explicates the human condition. The objective of the book is not to make a comparative analysis of the cosmological scientific narrative and that of the Bible, or the Fathers of the Church (in what concerns the structure of the universe), but to reveal the presence of a hidden theological dimension in cosmology originating in the God-given ability of humanity to discern and disclose the sense of creation. The book contributes to the synthesis of appropriation and incorporation of modern philosophical ideas in Christian theology, in particular its Eastern Orthodox form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0sq9

Introduction: from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: This book is not about cosmology as physical research and it is not concerned with the popular interpretations of fashionable cosmological theories. Nor is it about meta-cosmology, that is, a metaphysical extension of cosmology, which lags behind cosmological theories and ideas in order to use them as a testing ground for known philosophical ideas. This book is on the sense of modern cosmological ideas as they originate in the being of humanity and the way that ideas about the universe are related to the philosophical and theological mystery of the human condition in the universe. Thus this book positions itself

3 Constituting the Universe from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: In this chapter we analyze the general epistemological conditions for knowability and explicability of the universe as a whole. Both knowability and explicability imply an anthropological dimension in cosmology, for both these requirements have human origin: to speculate about the universe one must experience its presence through the instantaneous synthesis associated with conscious life. It is argued that the cosmological principle acts as reduction of this synthesis to a mental spatial uniformity of the universe. However, the contingent facticity of the cosmological principle leads to the necessity of its explication in terms of generative steps required to grasp the sense

4 The Universe as a Construct from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: Our intention now is to provide a concise and symbolic (graphical) description of the universe as a whole in order to explicate an epistemological meaning of such a description, in particular its dependence upon some irreducible beliefs that make this description possible. To do this we need to give a brief overview of the major methodological presumption in cosmology, namely the cosmological principle.¹ Since we cannot empirically verify the statistics of distribution of matter from other locations in space we have to speculate on the overall distribution of matter in the universe, appealing to philosophical and hence physically untestable assumptions.

6 Cosmology and Teleology from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: In this chapter we continue to investigate the delimiters in cosmological research that originate in the structure of the human knower—in particular, how the purposiveness of human actions cascades toward the purposiveness of cosmological research. Purposiveness of research is not purposiveness related to the alleged object of this research, that is, the universe. In this sense we are not dealing with a traditional teleology, which would imply the assertion in the purposiveness of the universe’s evolution. We rather deal, as we could say together with Kant, with a “formal” purposiveness of cosmology which, because of the specificity of its

7 The Universe as a Saturated Phenomenon from: The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: One of the tasks of the dialogue between theology and science is to elucidate in the modern scientific and philosophical context the sense of what is meant by creation of the world out of nothing ( creatio ex nihilo). As is often argued in current discussions on the theme, the adequate theological appropriation of the scientific approach to the study of the natural universe is possible only if nature and the universe are treated not as an “environment” for physical and biological existence, but as creation. This implies not only a dispassionate study of the universe which is contingent upon God,

Book Title: Augustine's Theology of Preaching- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): SANLON PETER T.
Abstract: Scholarship has painted many pictures of Augustine—the philosophical theologian, the refuter of heresy, or contributor to doctrines like Original Sin—but the picture of Augustine as preacher, says Sanlon, has been seriously neglected. When academics marginalize the Sermones ad Populum, the real Augustine is not presented accurately. In this study, Sanlon does more, however, than rehabilitate a neglected view of Augustine. How do the theological convictions that Augustine brought to his preaching challenge, sustain, or shape our work today? By presenting Augustine’s thought on preaching to contemporary readers Sanlon contributes a major new piece to the ongoing reconsideration of preaching in the modern day, a consideration that is relevant to all branches of the twenty-first century church.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0t0m

1 The Historical Context of Augustine’s Preaching from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: The concerns of this book are primarily doctrinal, in that our intent is to expose the undergirding philosophical-theological assumptions which informed Augustine’s preaching. Nevertheless, doctrine is neither formulated nor promulgated in an historical vacuum. In order to give due recognition to the relevance of historical setting for doctrinal expression, this chapter offers a historical context for Augustine’s preaching.

4 Interiority, Temporality, and Scripture from: Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Augustine’s preaching reveals a particular concern for both interiority and temporality, and that this is due to his using Scripture to change listeners. This chapter aims to offer preliminary definitions of interiority and temporality, our two hermeneutical keys. These terms are constructive theological developments of the concepts “passion” and “order,” which structured the opening chapter. Our hope is that the definitions capture the essence of the assumptions Augustine brought to his preaching, and that they can then operate as tools to help us better explicate what he believed himself to be doing as a preacher. Such a methodology was commended

Book Title: Hope in Action-Subversive Eschatology in the Theology of Edward Schillebeeckx and Johann Baptist Metz
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Rodenborn Steven M.
Abstract: This volume contends against a major lacuna in the story of eschatology in the twentieth century by offering a historical and comparative analysis of Edward Schillebeeckx’s prophetic eschatology and Johann Baptist Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology with the goal of identifying relative advantages and limitations of these divergent eschatological frameworks for rendering a Christian account of hope that prompts action in the public arena. Rodenborn provides a fresh angle on eschatologies of hope, bringing to the fore two Catholic theologians whose influences range from Vatican II to Latin American liberation theology. Hope in Action offers an innovative contribution to the theological account of the emergence of European political theologies and the role of eschatology as a practical and destabilizing theological category.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0t4j

1 Metz's Response to Secularization: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: This chapter begins by examining Johann Baptist Metz’s early understanding of the modern process of secularization and his effort to present a positive interpretation of this process in light of Catholic theology. By tracing the manner in which Metz approached this task in his writing through 1966, we will see that it was through engaging the process of secularization that a distinctive eschatology emerged in his theological program. His transcendental-linear theology of history presented a productive apologetic resource, allowing him to affirm the ongoing validity of Christianity for those who experienced the process of secularization as a threat to their

2 Schillebeeckx's Response to Secularization: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In chapter 1, we saw that Metz’s eschatological project developed out of his theological analysis of the modern process of secularization, was unduly limited by his transcendental-linear theology of history, and gradually emerged as a practical-critical hope for the future. Now, turning to Edward Schillebeeckx’s efforts to address the apologetic consequences of secularization during the late 1950s through the mid-1960s, we will trace similar developments that unfold over significantly different terrain; Schillebeeckx offered a distinctive response to the same historical challenges, yet during this period the doctrine of eschatology also would move to the center of his theological project.

3 Schillebeeckx Contends with a History Marked by Suffering: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, we examined the turn to eschatology in the writings of Metz and Schillebeeckx as they attempted to respond to the cultural pressures faced by the European church in the 1960s. Initially, their distinctly modern approaches to eschatology allowed both theologians to champion a practical eschatology that operated rather comfortably within the wider cultural context. As we observed, however, it was not long before both theologians grew increasingly sensitive to the subsequent overidentification of the hope of Christianity with the hope of modern culture. This sensitivity to the nonidentity of eschatological and societal hope only would

4 Schillebeeckx's Prophetic Eschatology: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In chapter 3, we watched as Schillebeeckx worked to identify a critical and productive orientation for the Christian’s hope. It was out of this interest that his massive christological project, the story of the eschatological prophet, emerged. It was also within the context of this project that Schillebeeckx once again engaged the Christian claim that Jesus has universal significance for all of human history, considered in chapter 2. In returning to this claim in the 1970s, however, Schillebeeckx would directly confront the questions of whether and how we can speak of the universal significance of any human person and whether

5 Metz Contends with a History Marked by Suffering: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, when tracing the developments in Schillebeeckx’s thought from the late 1960s through the early 1990s, we observed in his writings his increasing unease with the historical processes of secularization and the distinct form of progressive optimism underlying European and North American technocratic societies. In search of a theological response to what critical theorists called the “dialectic of Enlightenment,” Schillebeeckx turned to the critical negativity of Christianity’s eschatological hope. He saw in that hope a powerful resource capable of resisting the dangerous excesses of the period’s myopic commitment to technological progress while concurrently animating the Christian’s

6 Metz’s Apocalyptic Theology of History: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: As we have just seen, Metz turned to a practical fundamental theology developed through the categories of memory, narrative, and solidarity in search of the resources necessary to disrupt the conditions of modernity and to revivify an eschatological hope. It is to that central focus of this chapter—Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology—that we now turn. As we shall see, Metz located in the apocalyptic the fundamental temporal framework through which a subversive expectation for the future becomes possible within the historical context of modernity and, ultimately, postmodernity. He became convinced that in the face of persistent and intractable suffering, an

Conclusion: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: “Always be ready to make your defense to anyone who demands from you an accounting for the hope that is in you” (1 Pet. 3:15). Both Metz and Schillebeeckx regularly cited this biblical charge as they struggled, over the course of four decades, to express an eschatological hope responsive to the demands of their time. What challenges and endangers Christian hope today? What is the hope that is in you? Over the course of this study, we have seen that Metz’s and Schillebeeckx’s responses to these questions were frequently in flux. Their understandings of the precise pressures confronting the modern

Postscript: from: Hope in Action
Abstract: As noted at the end of the last chapter, our focus throughout this study has remained on Schillebeeckx’s and Metz’s projects, and the decision to avoid transitioning toward a more general examination of prophetic and apocalyptic eschatologies was a deliberate one. I would be remiss, however, if that decision were allowed to conceal the larger theological milieu in which their projects developed. Here, I do not have in mind the numerous cultural, theological, and philosophical currents identified throughout our study that informed and gave direction, dialectically and otherwise, to Schillebeeckx’s and Metz’s eschatologies. Rather, very little attention has been given

Book Title: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference-A Contribution to Feminist Systematic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): McRandal Janice
Abstract: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference argues that the most potent and resourceful theological response to the challenging questions of gender and difference is to be found in a retrieval of a doctrinal framework for feminist theology. In particular, it is suggested that a doctrinal narrative of creation, fall, and redemption—underpinned by the doctrinal grammar of the Trinity—provides resources to resolve the theological impasse of difference in contemporary feminist theology. The divine economy reveals a God who enters into history and destabilizes fixed binaries and oppressive categories. The biblical narrative discloses a subtle yet potent fluidity to the Triune relationships. As created subjects—precisely in our difference—we are sustained, affirmed, and drawn back into the Triune life. The subtleties of divine transgression are already recognized in the patterns of the liturgy, in prayer, and in practices of contemplation. Here, bodies not only encounter the transgressive love of God but are enabled to inhabit their differentiated humanity with distinctiveness and grace. The grammar of Christian faith cannot ultimately be uncovered except in prayer, opened beyond itself to a source of life and giving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tfw

2 Creaturely Freedom and the Desire for Selfhood from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: Contemporary theory is preoccupied with themes of autonomy, agency, and subjectivity. How are we to speak of the individual human in light of difference, and what difference does difference make to autonomy and subjectivity? In light of recent critiques of Enlightenment notions of freedom, it has become clear that any account of freedom must be constructed against the backdrop of difference and the space demanded for alternative conceptions of freedom per se. Moreover, a theological account of creaturely freedom needs to attend to the relationship between God’s agency in the world and human freedom. This chapter argues that divine sovereignty

4 Original Sin from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: The doctrine of creation is at the core of any theological discussion regarding human difference. Theological distinctions regarding creaturely freedom and divine sovereignty are not always appreciated, and a tendency toward ontotheological categories can easily distort the divine and creaturely relationship. A Christian theological account of difference is most fertile and coherent when divine transcendence is understood to affirm the goodness of God’s creation and to challenge contemporary theoretical accounts of power and autonomy. However, theological accounts must also attend to the doctrinal language of the fall and original sin; otherwise whatever else we have said about creation will be

8 Subject to Spirit from: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: I have already explored the way questions surrounding the reality and dignity of creaturely difference are inextricably linked to conceptions of the subject. While previously arguing that theological accounts of freedom and subjectivity must be cast in reference to the sovereignty of God, more must be said about the possibility of subjectivity for those made objects by normative “mankind.” In this regard, the emergence of feminist Pentecostal studies poses a sharp challenge to both systematic theology and gender studies. The experiences of Pentecostal women, often in non-Western contexts, confront common assumptions regarding women’s ritual experience and the emergence of subjectivity.

Book Title: Liturgy as Revelation-Re-Sourcing a Theme in Twentieth-Century Catholic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Caldwell Philip
Abstract: A critical issue in modern Catholic theology has been the relationship between the doctrine of revelation and the church’s liturgical and sacramental practice. This volume argues that although in the twentieth century Catholic theology increasingly recognized the centrality of Christology—particularly the person of Christ—as the locus of revelation and drew out the crucial implications of Christ as the revelation of God, it was slow to connect this revelatory dynamic with the encounter that occurs within the sacramental space of the liturgy, most notably the Eucharist. Taking the decline of the neoscholastic enterprise in Catholic theology and the challenges posed by modernism as his point of departure, Philip Caldwell traces the evolution of the Catholic theology of revelation in the twentieth century and the vital role played by the liturgical and sacramental renewal movements in reimagining this pivotal theological category. Examining the specific contributions of René Latourelle, Avery Dulles, Salvatore Marsilli, and Gustave Martelet against a background of pre-conciliar ressourcement theology, this volume provides a comprehensive account of why a Trinitarian and Christological construal of liturgy and sacraments as revelation is key to the vision that informed Vatican II and offers constructive theological and ecclesial possibilities for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tr7

5 Gustave Martelet from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: That the lives of the four theologians of our study are roughly contemporary, that their theological enterprises are not dissimilar, and their vocations as teachers and formators the same, means that by this stage the benefits of a cumulative and composite picture are beginning to be felt. Hopefully, with each chapter, further depth and a changed perspective are provided to the central question. Yet, while similarities in the broad outlines of the writers’ lives allow for the establishment of certain coordinates, the unique response of each provides particularity and nuance.¹ Such parallels, intersections, similarities, and distinctions should become apparent from

6 Moving Toward a Synthesis from: Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: The particular period in which the four writers of this study were contemporaries offered a unique opportunity for the employment and expression of their theological gifts. To look to their particular contribution is to look to the specific tasks that the moment set before them. Born within a decade that saw the burgeoning of progressive currents in Catholic theology, they witnessed both the suspicion and suppression of these themes in the last reaches of the Modernist crisis and their acceptance and legitimation at the Second Vatican Council. At the peak of production in the postconciliar period, each labored for the

Book Title: Reading Theologically- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: Reading is one of the basic skills a student needs. But reading is not just an activity of the eyes and the brain. Reading Theologically, edited by Eric D. Barreto, brings together eight seminary educators from a variety of backgrounds to explore what it means to be a reader in a seminary context--to read theologically. Reading theologically involves a specific minset adn posture towards texts and ideas, people and communities alike. Reading theologically is not just about academic skill building but about the formation of a ministerial leader who can engage scholarship critically, interpret Scripture and tradition faithfully, welcome different perspectives, and help lead others to do the same. This brief, readable, edited volume emphasizes the vital skills, habits, practices, and values involved in reading theologically. Reading Theologically is a vital resource for students beginning the seminary process and professors of introductory level seminary courses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0v21

2 Reading Meaningfully from: Reading Theologically
Author(s) Perkins Miriam Y.
Abstract: Meaningful understanding, often called “interpretation” in academic contexts, is vital throughout seminary education. Interpretation is deliberative exploration and creative expression of fruitful encounter. It is essential to understanding scripture texts, historical sources and artifacts, theological writers across time, and real-time conversations about ethical, spiritual, and pastoral matters. The finding and sharing of insight involved in interpretation is always shaped by encounters between ourselves and what we read, ourselves and other people, and our own life experiences and the presence of God.

Book Title: Postmodernity and Univocity-A Critical Account of Radical Orthodoxy and John Duns Scotus
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Horan Daniel P.
Abstract: Nearly twenty-five years ago, John Milbank inaugurated Radical Orthodoxy, one of the most significant and influential theological movements of the last two decades. In Milbank’s Theology and Social Theory, he constructed a sweeping theological genealogy of the origins of modernity and the emergence of the secular, counterposed by a robust retrieval of traditional orthodoxy as the critical philosophical and theological mode of being in the postmodern world. That genealogy turns upon a critical point—the work of John Duns Scotus as the starting point of modernity and progenitor of a raft of philosophical and theological ills that have prevailed since. Milbank’s account has been disseminated proliferously through Radical Orthodoxy and even beyond and is largely uncontested in contemporary theology. The present volume conducts a comprehensive examination and critical analysis of Radical Orthodoxy’s use and interpretation of John Duns Scotus. Daniel P. Horan, OFM, offers a substantial challenge to the narrative of Radical Orthodoxy’s idiosyncratic take on Scotus and his role in ushering in the philosophical age of the modern. This volume not only corrects the received account of Scotus but opens a constructive way forward toward a positive assessment and appropriation of Scotus’s work for contemporary theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0v6z

Introduction: from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, a new theological movement has captured the attention of scholars and students. This new school of theology was founded—at least incipiently—by John Milbank, and its motto is contained in the claim, “Once there was no ‘secular,’” which graces the earliest pages of his now-classic book Theology and Social Theory.¹ In some sense,Theology and Social Theoryserves as a manifesto of the nascent movement that first found its momentum at the Divinity School of the University of Cambridge. Soon Milbank was joined by former graduate students and colleagues who would bolster his early vision

2 The Reach of Radical Orthodoxy’s Influence from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: One of the more interesting aspects of Radical Orthodoxy’s interpretation of John Duns Scotus has been the unexpected and at times unattributed influence that it has had on so many other thinkers and their projects, particularly in the English-speaking world. Whereas one might naturally anticipate that some academic theologians would appropriate the thought of their Radical Orthodoxy colleagues, what is surprising is the way in which the Scotus Story has made its way into the work of historians, philosophers, and popular religious writers beyond the confines of the academic theological guild. As early as ten years after the launch of

Conclusion: from: Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: Radical Orthodox theologians have affirmed the place of narrative in contemporary theological reflection and discourse, along with its significance for accurately conceptualizing the development of the history of theology. Theology, that is theo-logos, cannot be separated from the telling of stories, which is an axiom that I believe has been reaffirmed in the preceding chapters, and remains a principle of Radical Orthodoxy to which I am deeply sympathetic. However, there is a problem here. It is not whether or not one engages in a narrative mode to explore and express deeper insights about God and creation, but the problem concerns

Book Title: Parables Unplugged-Reading the Lukan Parables in Their Rhetorical Context
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Thurén Lauri
Abstract: For far too long, Lauri Thurén argues, the parables of Jesus have been read either as allegories encoding Christian theology—including the theological message of one or another Gospel writer—or as tantalizing clues to the authentic voice of Jesus. Thurén proposes instead to read the parables “unplugged” from any assumptions beyond those given in the narrative situation in the text, on the common-sense premise that the very form of the parable works to propose a (sometimes startling) resolution to a particular problem. Thurén applies his method to the parables in Luke with some surprising results involving the Evangelist’s overall narrative purposes and the discrete purposes of individual parables in supporting the authority of Jesus, proclaiming God’s love, exhorting steadfastness, and so on. Eschatological and allegorical readings are equally unlikely, according to Thurén’s results. This study is sure to spark learned discussion among scholars, preachers, and students for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vdv

1 Introduction from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: Perhaps the main reason for the diversity of interpretations is that the parables are used for a wide range of purposes. Spiritual readings have been mainly interested in the parables’ christological² or

2 The Bad Samaritan (10:25-37) from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The touching story of a lonely man traveling from Jerusalem to Jericho has become an invaluable source for christological¹ and ethical² interpretations. Historical reconstructions abound.³ The parable has served as a test case for modern and postmodern readings as well.⁴ However, its meaning and function in the existing text should not be neglected. An unplugged reading offers a fresh perspective.

5 The Wicked Tenants (20:9-19) from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The parable of the Wicked Tenantssuffers from the too-obvious christological interpretation and too-alluring intertextual and historical connections, which have left the actual story in the shadow. Thus the attempt to look behind all the extraneous material to see how the story is designed in order to persuade its actual recipients, the audience of the Lukan Jesus and the readers of the Lukan work, is intriguing.

8 Re-Plugging the Parables from: Parables Unplugged
Abstract: In conclusion I shall ask how and why Jesus, as Narrator, uses parables in order to persuade his audience—and how Luke, as Author, has the same intent with respect to those who read his text. I shall begin by classifying and analyzing the messages supported by each particular parable. This is enabled by the above study of their argumentative structure. Do these messages have any bearing on classical topics such as theology, Christology, and eschatology—or on historical issues? If so, this would mean that the outcome of this book should be re-pluggedto accommodate traditional theological and historical

Book Title: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective-God's Fierce Whimsy and Dialogic Theological Method
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Jost Stina Busman
Abstract: Arguing for a retrieval of the landmark work, God’s Fierce Whimsy, Stina Busman Jost establishes the critical importance of this volume for the construction of a dialogic theological method. This is accomplished through a close reading of God’s Fierce Whimsy in which the author identifies key methodological characteristics informing the volume’s formation. Critical importance also is established through interviews with the volume’s authors, the Mud Flower Collective—which included Katie G. Cannon, Beverly W. Harrison, Carter Heyward, Ada María Isasi-Díaz, Bess B. Johnson (Delores Williams), Mary D. Pellauer, and Nancy D. Richardson. Undergirding this endeavor is a recognition of the theoretical importance of difference to the project of theological construction and the vital form of the dialogic as constitutive of theological practice; this is carried forward through engagement with the pivotal theorists Martin Buber and Mikhail Bakhtin, who helped pioneer the philosophical and literary critical importance of otherness, difference, and dialogue. Finally, the author constructively engages recent developments in feminist theologies and postcolonial theories—ultimately making the argument that a dialogic theological method is relevant for the doing of theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vfb

Introduction: from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: What happens when seven scholars sit down face-to-face and commit to do theology collaboratively with their differences on the table? Are their differences minimized? Championed? Moreover, what is their method for such a task? Do they end up following old systems of constructing theology? Or do they forge a new methodological path? These are the questions I will take up in this book. Specifically, this work is a critical investigation of God’s Fierce Whimsy—a challenging and innovative text written and published in the 1980s by a group of seven women who identified themselves as the Mud Flower Collective.¹ This

1 Framing a Methodological Approach to Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Before beginning an investigation of any historical text, the question “why” is warranted. Why delve deeply into an examination of God’s Fierce Whimsy?Why give a careful reading to this text in particular? My answers to these questions—hinted at in the Introduction above—are twofold. First, there is historical significance toGod’s Fierce Whimsythat warrants attention. Second,God’s Fierce Whimsyis a methodological gem. Its profundity has been lost on many—maybe because of its initial lackluster reception or perhaps due to the fact that many theologians who do not self-identify as feminists have failed to understand that

3 Foundational Dialogic Characteristics in Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Dialogue is a term used and affirmed frequently in theology published today. Yet such usage and affirmation do not always translate into actual evidence of dialogue in published work. Undeniably, dialogue may be the means by which a theological work comes into being as a published product,¹ but the emphasis and priority often lie not on this process but on the goal—the end result that entails distinct, definitive claims that can be accessed online or sent to press. In other words, as it concerns theological method, most theological work is primarily teleological in focus,² and while such an approach

5 Discerning the Relevance of Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Throughout this project I have suggested that God’s Fierce Whimsyis a relevant text for contemporary theology. Yet what does such a statement actually entail? While it may be laudable that the Mud Flower Collective wrote in a manner that prioritized dialogue, why should this matter today—and more specifically, why should one make an effort to theologize in a similar manner? To take this inquiry in another direction, a concomitant question would behow—how should one make an effort to theologize in this dialogic manner, especially in light of difference and compounding systemic injustices? These questions will be

Book Title: The World in the Trinity-Open-Ended Systems in Science and Religion
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Bracken Joseph A.
Abstract: Joseph A. Bracken argues that the failure of theology and science to generate cohesion is the lack of an integrated system of interpretation of the Christian faith that consciously accords with the insights and discoveries of contemporary science. In The World in the Trinity, Bracken utilizes the language and conceptual structures of systems theory as a philosophical and scientific grammar to show traditional Christian beliefs in a new light that is accessible and rationally plausible to a contemporary, scientifically influenced society. This account opens new possibilities for rethinking the God-world relationship, the Trinity, incarnation, creation, and eschatology within the context of a broader ecological and cosmological system. In re-describing these articles constitutive of Christian belief, the author is conscious of the vital importance of retaining the inherent power and meaning of these concepts. This volume freshly retrieves pivotal themes and concepts constitutive of the Christian tradition in a conscious rapprochement with current scientific understandings of nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vjs

4 Other Approaches to Panentheism in the Current Religion-and-Science Debate from: The World in the Trinity
Abstract: In 2004 Philip Clayton and Arthur Peacocke published the papers of an academic conference on panentheism that brought together many prominent natural scientists, philosophers, and Christian systematic theologians.¹ Given their large number (eighteen), in this chapter I will primarily focus on the essays of the systematic theologians in preference to those written by natural scientists and philosophers since in the chapters to follow I will be addressing various theological issues related to a number of classical Christian beliefs. The first essay to be considered, titled “God Immanent yet Transcendent: The Divine Energies according to Saint Gregory Palamas,” was written by

Book Title: Consider Leviathan-Narratives of Nature and the Self in Job
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Doak Brian R.
Abstract: Theologians and philosophers are turning again to questions of the meaning, or non-meaning, of the natural world for human self-understanding. Brian R. Doak observes that the book of Job, more than any other book in the Bible, uses metaphors drawn from the natural world, especially of plants and animals, as raw material for thinking about human suffering. Doak argues that Job should be viewed as an anthropological “ground zero” for the traumatic definition of the post-exilic human self in ancient Israel. Furthermore, the battered shape of the Joban experience should provide a starting point for reconfiguring our thinking about “natural theology” as a category of intellectual history in the ancient world. Doak examines how the development of the human subject is portrayed in the biblical text in either radical continuity or discontinuity with plants and animals. Consider Leviathan explores the text at the intersection of anthropology, theology, and ecology, opening up new possibilities for charting the view of nature in the Hebrew Bible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vtn

1 Consider the Ostrich from: Consider Leviathan
Abstract: In some of the more subtly cruel lines spoken by a deity in world literature, the Joban God, in the midst of an elongated zoological lecture, has the following to say about the “ostrich” (Hebrew rĕnānîm, literally “joyous one”):¹

2 Eco-Anthropologies of Wisdom in the Hebrew Bible from: Consider Leviathan
Abstract: In ancient Israel, Egypt, and Mesopotamia the category of “wisdom” (Hebrew ḥokmāh; ḥākām) could encompass many different activities and skill sets, exemplified through diverse sub-categories such as upstanding moral behavior, religious observance, expert craftsmanship, scribal prowess, esoteric abilities, political savvy, and storytelling powers.¹ Perhaps the most frequently discussed aspect of wisdom discourse with relation to ecological concerns is the category of creation, strikingly on display through the recitation of a creation narrative or isolated creation motifs.² Specifically, and related to the creation theme, wisdom activity could include compiling lists or delivering learned discourse on plants and animals, and we find

Epilogue from: Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make

Book Title: The Future of the Word-An Eschatology of Reading
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kriner Tiffany Eberle
Abstract: In scripture, Jesus promises a future that potentiall infuses all texts: "my words will not pass away" (Matt 24:28). This book argues that texts--even literary texts--, have an eschatology, too, a part of God's purpose for the cosmos. They, with all creation, moves toward participation in the new creation, in the Trinity's expanding, creative love. This eschatological future for texts impacts how we understand meaning making, from the level of semiology to that of hermeneutics. This book tells he story of how readers participate in the future of the word, the eschatology of texts. If texts have a future i the kingdom of God, then readers' engagement with them--everything from preservation and utterance to translation, criticism, and call and response--can cultivate those futures in the love of the Trinity. Kriner explores how the fallenness and failures of texts, alongside readers' own failures, while seeming to challenge the future of the word, ultimately point to reading as a posture of reconciliation, in which reader and text meet in the Maranatha of all text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vx3

Literary Scrivenings 1: from: The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.

3 Evil and Judgment from: The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has been lit by the idea that the eschatological purpose of God for the cosmos includes texts, constituting and illuminating them—in part through our reading—with expanding love and meaning-making for the kingdom. But what about the dark side? How does reading’s glorious expansion of meaning and love through the futures of texts square with evil? A reminder of evil makes the future of the word as it has been described so far seem a naïve universal salvation—the idea that no text or meaning will ever be lost, or that meaning marches unflaggingly toward transparency at

Conclusion from: The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time

Book Title: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Perhai Richard J.
Abstract: Biblical scholars have often contrasted the exegesis of the early church fathers from the eastern region and “school” of Syrian Antioch against that of the school of Alexandria. The Antiochenes have often been described as strictly historical-literal exegetes in contrast to the allegorical exegesis of the Alexandrians. Patristic scholars now challenge those stereotypes, some even arguing that few differences existed between the two groups. This work agrees that both schools were concerned with a literal and spiritual reading. But, it also tries to show, through analysis of Theodore and Theodoret’s exegesis and use of the term theoria, that how they integrated the literal-theological readings often remained quite distinct from the Alexandrians. For the Antiochenes, the term theoria did not mean allegory, but instead stood for a range of perceptions—prophetic, christological, and contemporary. It is in these insights that we find the deep wisdom to help modern readers interpret Scripture theologically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vzk

5 Theōria and Theological Interpretation of Scripture from: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: The earlier parts of this book are primarily historical analysis, seeking to answer, what was the exegetical tradition of the Antiochene school? But now I turn to another focus. In the remainder of the book, I want to ask how this Antiochene exegetical tradition—or history of interpretation—might help us today.¹ In particular, how do the exegetical methodologies of Theodore and Theodoret offer assistance in our contemporary attempts at theological interpretation of Scripture (TIS)?

6 Conclusion: from: Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: while we agree that theological exegesis is the missing part of the agenda on most exegetical guides that normally take the exegete through an enormous mass of data in higher and lower

Book Title: Kin, Gene, Community-Reproductive Technologies among Jewish Israelis
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Carmeli Yoram S.
Abstract: Israel is the only country in the world that offers free fertility treatments to nearly any woman who requires medical assistance. It also has the world's highest per capita usage of in-vitro fertilization. Examining state policies and the application of reproductive technologies among Jewish Israelis, this volume explores the role of tradition and politics in the construction of families within local Jewish populations. The contributors-anthropologists, bioethicists, jurists, physicians and biologists-highlight the complexities surrounding these treatments and show how biological relatedness is being construed as a technology of power; how genetics is woven into the production of identities; how reproductive technologies enhance the policing of boundaries. Donor insemination, IVF and surrogacy, as well as abortion, pre-implantation genetic diagnosis and human embryonic stem cell research, are explored within local and global contexts to convey an informed perspective on the wider Jewish Israeli environment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qchg1

Chapter 3 The Man in the Sperm: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Goldberg Helene
Abstract: This article explores kinship and fatherhood in light of male infertility and artificial reproductive technologies (ARTs) in the Jewish-Israeli context. I became interested in the male reproductive experience in Israel through a backdoor interest in Jewish identity, and then came across Susan Kahn’s groundbreaking study (2000) of single, secular Jewish women’s reproduction in Israel with the use of sperm donation. It seemed that because of Israeli technological advances in reproductive technologies, the state’s support of fertility treatment, national efforts to increase the Jewish population, and the concept that Jewish identity is passed through the mother, men could be removed from

Chapter 12 The Mirth of the Clinic: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Kahn Susan Martha
Abstract: Assisted conception is so unprecedented and the consequences for beliefs about reproduction so uncertain that we anthropologists have had our plates full as we try to construct theoretical frameworks with adequate explanatory power. Much of the recent anthropological work in the Israeli context follows these trends, often using Foucauldian frameworks to illuminate the complex social processes inherent in the social uses of new reproductive technologies. I draw particular attention to the works in this volume. To date, however, little has been written about the routinization of conception enabled by these technologies and the everyday experience of the people who work

Chapter 13 Between Reproductive Citizenship and Consumerism: from: Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Remennick Larissa
Abstract: Some recent sociological analyses of reproduction approached the relations between women as mothers and various social institutions (legal and medical systems, labor market, social welfare, mass media, etc.) within the continuum between reproductive citizenship, on one hand, and individualism/consumerism, on the other. Thus, Bryan Turner (2001) has defined the concept of reproductive citizenship as a route to active social participation through reproduction, all the more important in the times of general erosion of other traditional forms of citizenship (such as worker-citizen and warrior-citizen). Reproductive citizenship is a reflection of nationalism and demographic interests of the state, which has a stake

CHAPTER 6 Interpretations of Time in Islam from: Time and History
Author(s) Weintritt Otfried
Abstract: Attempting to define the Islamic concept of time, one is confronted with two problem complexes: the relevant theological foundations on the one hand, and on the other the socioreligious strategies that have developed in the process of adhering to the regulations and obligations of the Islamic life order. A consideration of both these areas will contribute to this attempt to define the category of time in relation to its significance for historical consciousness.

CHAPTER 3 The Diffuse in Testimonies from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Weine Stevan M.
Abstract: Testimony is when survivors of traumas tell their story. This text considers several literary models for approaching how survivors of historical traumas may give their testimonies. Reading W.G. Sebald and rethinking his notion of the diffuseilluminates what historical traumas ask of the individual survivor giving testimony and of all those who seek to respond to survivors’ traumas with a narrative. Applying Mikhail Bakhtin’s theory of the dialogic narrative could assist survivors and those working with them in producing testimonies that engage the diffuse through better embodying the polyphonic, dialogic, unfinalizable nature of historical traumas. This text closes with an

CHAPTER 4 Medical Rhetoric in the U.S. and Africa: from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Biesele Megan
Abstract: A rhetorical subtitle for this paper might be ‘The Ubiquity of Persuasion in Medicine’. As in most other areas of human life, it is difficult, in healing performance and discourse, to get away from the primacy of nuanced communication about socialized belief. Thinking back some twelve years after my original writing in light of both anthropological work on Ju/’hoan San texts of many kinds and the complex indigenous politics which increasingly inform their production and use, I feel that social anthropology is nothing if not combined with rhetorical awareness.

CHAPTER 7 Ordeals of Language from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Basso Ellen B.
Abstract: There is a kind of rhetorical functioning in the disorderly zones of human life, which sustains and transforms the persons involved. Linguistic operations at the edges of disorder appear as we engage our human deceptive and imaginative abilities, our abilities to produce alternatives, to resist what we learn is expected of us. In these zones, discomfort with the limits of our own cultures motivates tropological experiments, ‘the sleight of hand at the limit of a text’, as Voloshinov wrote. Here especially, the rhetorics of emotion work to transform socioemotional reality, having a critical and often unwitting impact on social life.

CHAPTER 8 Inventions of Hyperbolic Culture from: Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Cintron Ralph
Abstract: If there is a theorist who worked both anthropologically and rhetorically and deserves to be called a major theorist of rhetoric culture , it is Michel de Certeau. Given that this paper is about 9/11 and the dialectics of modernity, a particular passage of his seems clairvoyant. At some point in his career he stood atop the World Trade Center and later wrote:

Chapter 1 Race Power, Freedom, and the Democracy of Terror in German Racialist Thought from: Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) von Joeden-Forgey Elisa
Abstract: When Chancellor Bismarck suddenly undertook a policy of overseas expansion in 1884, Germany was almost wholly unprepared for the legal and ideological stresses of colonial domination. Since it was determined from the outset that overseas polities would not be brought into the German federation as member states, the German constitution provided no model for the incorporation of colonial territories and German citizenship law was equally useless for defining the status of Germany’s new subjects. Dominant thinking among officials and the public was very much influenced by the traditions of the old Prussian territorial state, where expansion was generally coupled with

8 Memory History and the Standardization of History from: Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Langewiesche Dieter
Abstract: ‘Memory history’ ( Erinnerungsgeschichte) is found at the start of every process of historical transmission.¹ As a theoretically grounded approach in the methodological arsenal of historical studies, however, it is a relatively new branch of historical inquiry, albeit one that is rapidly growing. The catastrophic experiences of the first half of the twentieth century contributed considerably to this. They created, according to Dan Diner in his European-oriented, universalhistorical attempt to understand this period, a separate ‘time of remembrance’, whose ‘negative telos’ overlaid other experiences and taught us to view history differently (Diner 2000: 17). The remembrance of this period, together with

Book Title: Constructing Charisma-Celebrity, Fame, and Power in Nineteenth-Century Europe
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): GILOI EVA
Abstract: Railroads, telegraphs, lithographs, photographs, and mass periodicals-the major technological advances of the 19th century seemed to diminish the space separating people from one another, creating new and apparently closer, albeit highly mediated, social relationships. Nowhere was this phenomenon more evident than in the relationship between celebrity and fan, leader and follower, the famous and the unknown. By mid-century, heroes and celebrities constituted a new and powerful social force, as innovations in print and visual media made it possible for ordinary people to identify with the famous; to feel they knew the hero, leader, or "star"; to imagine that public figures belonged to their private lives. This volume examines the origins and nature of modern mass media and the culture of celebrity and fame they helped to create. Crossing disciplines and national boundaries, the book focuses on arts celebrities (Sarah Bernhardt, Byron and Liszt); charismatic political figures (Napoleon and Wilhelm II); famous explorers (Stanley and Brazza); and celebrated fictional characters (Cyrano de Bergerac).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qckwq

Book Title: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Girke Felix
Abstract: "Just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric" - the first half of this central statement from the International Rhetoric Culture Project is abundantly evidenced. It is the latter half that this volume explores: how does culture emerge out of rhetorical action, out of seemingly dispersed individual actions and interactions? The contributors do not rely on rhetorical "text" alone but engage the situational, bodily, and often antagonistic character of cultural and communicative practices. The social situation itself is argued to be the fundamental site of cultural creation, as will-driven social processes are shaped by cognitive dispositions and shape them in turn. Drawing on expertise in a variety of disciplines and regions, the contributors critically engage dialogical approaches in their emphasis on how a view from rhetoric changes our perception of people's intersubjective and conjoint creation of culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcn3h

CHAPTER 7 Attending the Vernacular: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Hauser Gerard A.
Abstract: In 1923, Charles K. Ogden and Ivor A. Richard published The Meaning of Meaning, in which they advanced a daring challenge to the philological orthodoxy of how words mean. It included, as a supplement, a paper by Bronislaw Malinowski dealing with Trobriand Islanders’ uses of language. Malinowski discussed his efforts to understand the Trobrianders’ language by asking them what a word meant, which he then entered into his homemade dictionary. To his surprise, however, his systematic effort was defied by everyday uses in which the Islanders’ language served pragmatic communal functions, such as gathering women and the elderly to shore

CHAPTER 8 Enhoused Speech: from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Weiner James F.
Abstract: A recent fruitful direction in anthropological linguistics has been the resurrection of interest in language’s deictic features, its constant function of anchoring itself in time and space by way of grammatical markers that “gesture” toward reference points in the world (see, for example, Hanks 1990; Senft 1997). We have ample evidence, especially from Papuan and Austronesian languages, of the high proportion of spatial indices in speech. In this chapter, however, I would like to argue from the opposite direction: that it is also spatial and architectural practices that themselves contour and elicit certain forms of speech; that, rather than language

CHAPTER 13 Rhetoric, Anti-Structure, and the Social Formation of Authorship from: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Zebroski James Thomas
Abstract: We live in an age of ambiguity. At one and the same time, the cultures that we inherit at the start of the twenty-first century in Western Europe and North America are committed to andskeptical of Enlightenment discourses. The Enlightenment values of neutrality and objectivity in scholarship, of methodological rigor and purity, of scientific method, of disciplinarity, of professionalism, of progress narratives, of grand narrative and grand theory, but also of a static, clearly demarcated, and bounded subject, who acts as a kind of atom of a similarly static, clearly demarcated, and bounded nation-state—all are in question. But

CHAPTER 6 Understanding Transgenerational Transmission: from: Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: It seems certain today that the term “present” encompasses far more than a merely present identity of the self. Assuming that present time equals pure presence, and stating thereby that it be nothing more than itself, means to underestimate—or neglect—Edmund Husserl’s² differentiation of present (time)andnow.³ Psychological presence is more than some point in time (“now”), and it proves more than William James’⁴ present time of consciousness, which he analyzed inPrinciples of Psychology.

Book Title: Human Nature as Capacity-Transcending Discourse and Classification
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rapport Nigel
Abstract: What is it to be human? What are our specifically human attributes, our capacities and liabilities?Such questions gave birth to anthropology as an Enlightenment science. This book argues that it is again appropriate to bring "the human" to the fore, to reclaim the singularity of the word as central to the anthropological endeavor, not on the basis of thesubstanceof a human nature - "To be human is to act like this and react like this, to feel this and want this" - but in terms of species-widecapacities: capabilities for action and imagination, liabilities for suffering and cruelty. The contributors approach "the human" with an awareness of these complexities and particularities, rendering this volume unique in its ability to build on anthropology's ethnographic expertise.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpw2

Introduction: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The issue of human nature, what it is to be human, has been the central enterprise of an ‘anthropological’ science – nominally, at least – since Immanuel Kant’s (1996) first, modern formulation of the disciplinary endeavour in the late 1700s. At the same time it has been argued that in ‘human nature’ anthropology conjures with a concept compromised beyond redemption by its essentialistic, hierarchical and exclusionary history: its role in an imperialism of male over female, adult over child, advanced over primitive, Occidental over Oriental, rational over emotional, and conscientious over brutish, as representative of the essentially human. Others again

INTRODUCTION TO PART I from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part Idescribe human capacities that locate actors beyond the economy; both in the sense of providing an ethnographic fullness to individual lives that exceeds the narrow determinisms of Homo oeconomicus, and in the sense of charting a course to individual lives that sees them escaping the logic of any one economic system or set of relations. Here are Mexican migrants in Canada (Chapter 1) and Canadian students working abroad (Chapter 2) whose ‘liminality’, alike, cannot be construed, conscripted, as serving purely economic calls, whether of nation, family, sector or even global marketplace. An understanding of these

Chapter 7 EMBODIED COGNITION, COMMUNICATION AND THE MAKING OF PLACE AND IDENTITY: from: Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Marchand Trevor H.J.
Abstract: Despite anthropology’s long-standing fascination with the spaces and places of people’s lives, Gupta and Ferguson rightly identified a surprising lack of ‘self-consciousness about the issue of space in anthropological theory’ (1997b:33). In general, space has been dismissed as a preexisting natural category within which societies are distributed and humans are politically, economically and socially organized: in other words, an infinite three-dimensional emptiness containing bounded places. Euclidean notions of space as homogenous and extensible have permitted passive contemplation of a distanced ‘there’, safely separated and reified as a static entity rather than a changing and socially contingent phenomenon. Until recent decades,

Book Title: Godless Intellectuals?-The Intellectual Pursuit of the Sacred Reinvented
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Riley Alexander Tristan
Abstract: The Durkheimians have traditionally been understood as positivist, secular thinkers, fully within the Enlightenment project of limitless reason and progress. In a radical revision of this view, this book persuasively argues that the core members of the Durkheimian circle (Durkheim himself, Marcel Mauss, Henri Hubert and Robert Hertz) are significantly more complicated than this. Through his extensive analysis of large volumes of correspondence as well as historical and macro-sociological mappings of the intellectual and social worlds in which the Durkheimian project emerged, the author shows the Durkheimian project to have constituted a quasi-religious quest in ways much deeper than most interpreters have thought. Their fascination, both personal and intellectual, with the sacred is the basis on which the author reconstructs some important components of modern French intellectual history, connecting Durkheimian thought to key representatives of French poststructuralism and postmodernism: Bataille, Foucault, Derrida, Baudrillard, and Deleuze.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcrr1

1 The Intellectual Pursuit of the Sacred from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: The central goal of this book is to map the emergence, trajectory, and influence of a very particular kind of intellectual project that I call mystic Durkheimianism, which unites two seemingly very strange bedfellows: Durkheimian sociology and poststructuralism. An understanding of its existence and influence in the French intellectual world will contribute to a better understanding of some otherwise fairly mysterious facts in intellectual history. Moreover, there are to date no treatments of this important piece of the history of French social theory by a sociologist using sociological terms and tools, and I hope to contribute to the work of

2 Intellectual Production and Interpretation: from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: What can sociological work tell us about the meaning of intellectual work? This is the question at the heart of this book. I need to establish the basic theoretical and methodological principles with which to fill my toolkit for the task ahead. Fortunately, much of the hard thinking has already been done by others; my task here is simply to indicate what is being borrowed from whom and how it is being bent, sharpened, or otherwise altered it to fit my needs.

7 Being a Durkheimian Intellectual from: Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: We now have something of a macro-sociological image of the two fields in which our two groups of intellectuals put their ideas into play, as well as information on the masters of ceremonies for the two groups and the central political event that positioned both. However, the reconstruction of their habitusrequires a closer examination of the ways in which the members of the two groups actively viewed and set about the process of constructing identities as intellectuals in the two periods from within more intimate micro-social networks of influences and collaborators and in response to the set of intellectual

8 When God Interferes: from: Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Lindhardt Martin
Abstract: It is common knowledge among members of the Evangelical Pentecostal Church (EPC) in Valparaíso, Chile, that good things only happen when God makes them happen. A fundamental theological principle in this church is an understanding of human powerlessness and total dependence upon an almighty God as the source of all good things. According to Anthony Giddens, distinguishing features of modernity include a basic trust in the transformative potential of human agency and social institutions as well as new perceptions of determination and ambiguity that leave little room for religious cosmologies (1994: 36). But in the EPC, secular notions of transformative

9 Quiet Deliverances from: Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Bialecki Jon
Abstract: In anthropological and sociological literature, charismatic Christianity is often thought through in experiential and embodied terms; this is particularly true of writing on the Vineyard, a Southern California–originated, worldwide denomination that sees itself as combining the best of both pentecostal and evangelical practice. Tracing its roots back to the “Jesus Movement” of the 1960s, the Vineyard is now a denomination that rejects its denominational status, presenting itself as a church-planting “movement.” The Vineyard, however, has effects that exceed its own body (denominational or otherwise): the Vineyard is seen as playing a vital role in the “Californianization” of American Protestantism

Conclusion from: Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: In his book The Theater of Truth,Egginton(2010) argues that the principal theoretical value of the term “Baroque” derives from its relation as an aesthetic category to the historical period of modernity. While the historical Baroque relies on proliferation of décor and a conscious embrace of artifice, it also reveals an organizing logic that goes beyond that specific age (the sixteenth to the eighteenth centuries). This organizing logic is a theatrical one, where the space of representation is severed into a “screen of appearances,” and the truth is presumed to reside behind it. It is this basic premise, divided between

Book Title: The French Road Movie-Space, Mobility, Identity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Archer Neil
Abstract: The traditionally American genre of the road movie has been explored and reconfigured in the French context since the later 1960s. Comparative in its approach, this book studies the inter-relationship between American and French culture and cinemas, and in the process considers and challenges histories of the road movie. It combines film history with film theory methodologies, analysing transformations in social, political and film-industrial contexts alongside changing perspectives on the meaning and possibilities of film. At once chronological and thematic in structure, The French Road Movieprovides in each chapter a comprehensive introduction to key themes emerging from the genre in the French context - liberty, identity and citizenship, masculinity, femininity, border-crossing - followed by detailed, innovative and often revisionist readings of the chosen films. Through these readings the author justifies the place of the road genre within French cinema histories and reinvigorates this often neglected and misunderstood area of study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qczwn

Two ‘Capturing Freedom’: from: The French Road Movie
Abstract: The idea of the road movie as a film populated by rebellious, counter-cultural protagonists has come to be a dominant one, especially in light of the New Hollywood films that took to the road. Given the popularity of the road movie within the political and cultural contestation of the Vietnam years, we have come to accept the disaffected or rebellious individuals in films such as Easy RiderorTwo-Lane Blacktopas representations of their particular audience. Identification, then, in its very broadest sense – in terms of a sense of ideological or emotional kinship with the protagonists, a recognition of the

Book Title: A Lover's Quarrel with the Past-Romance, Representation, Reading
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Ghosh Ranjan
Abstract: Although not a professional historian, the author raises several issues pertinent to the state of history today. Qualifying the 'non-historian' as an 'able' interventionist in historical studies, the author explores the relationship between history and theory within the current epistemological configurations and refigurations. He asks how history transcends the obsessive 'linguistic' turn, which has been hegemonizing literary/discourse analysis, and focuses greater attention on historical experience and where history stands in relation to our understanding of ethics, religion and the current state of global politics that underlines the manipulation and abuse of history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd1wz

Book Title: Melanesian Odysseys-Negotiating the Self, Narrative, and Modernity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Josephides Lisette
Abstract: In a series of epic self-narratives ranging from traditional cultural embodiments to picaresque adventures, Christian epiphanies and a host of interactive strategies and techniques for living, Kewa Highlanders (PNG) attempt to shape and control their selves and their relentlessly changing world. This lively account transcends ethnographic particularity and offers a wide-reaching perspective on the nature of being human. Inverting the analytic logic of her previous work, which sought to uncover what social structures concealed, Josephides focuses instead on the cultural understandings that people make explicit in their actions and speech. Using approaches from philosophy and anthropology, she examines elicitation (how people create their selves and their worlds in the act of making explicit) and mimesis (how anthropologists produce ethnographies), to arrive at an unexpected conclusion: that knowledge of self and other alike derives from self-externalization rather than self-introspection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd3fk

Chapter 8 Remembering La Tragedia: from: Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Revet Sandrine
Abstract: This logic fully applies to “natural” disasters. In contemporary

Chapter 5 Sensory Witnessing and Railway Shock: from: The Train Journey
Abstract: To what extent do extreme experiences call for an extreme historiography? What discourse or critical response can do justice to the corporeal and psychological effects, among many others, of immobility in trains? The telling of such effects is as burdensome for the victim as it is for the person reading, listening to, or watching a testimony. Anthropologist Michael Jackson argues that the ethnographic impulse of “co-existence” with suffering is perhaps the most that can be achieved through an ethical engagement with the other.¹ Still, the quest for explanation remains paramount: “But can the intellectual succeed in accomplishing what the sufferer

CHAPTER 10 Tropical Foundations and Foundational Tropes of Culture from: Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Fernandez James W.
Abstract: We might first found the tropological point of view in social science inquiry in two ancient founding figures, the Pre-Socratic philosopher Heraclitus and the Roman Rhetorician Quintillian. As with all the contributors to our common Rhetoric Culture project, “social science inquiry” is understood as investigation into the rhetoric of culture creation and social interaction. Heraclitus may be regarded as foundational, not only in his doctrine of flux and constancy of change, but in his view that for the most part, acting under the requirements of social order, cultural constancy, and personal stability, people do not understand fully what is going

Transnational Approaches to Contentious Politics: from: Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: Emerging from an international workshop, this volume examines a variety of different aspects of social mobilization since 1945, while the contributors constitute an equally heterogeneous group of young political scientists and historians, anthropologists, as well as researchers on social movement and the media. Their research poses numerous questions covering a broad range of issues across time and space, looking retrospectively at global interactions during the Cold War, as well as looking forward at reconfigurations of protest politics in the twenty-first century, both in Western and Eastern Europe. Blurring chronological and geographical boundaries of study and merging strictly defined methods and

Chapter 4 Fiction as a Mediator in National Remembrance from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Rigney Ann
Abstract: Recent years have seen considerable advances in our understanding of the ways in which societies recollect their past. Where earlier discussions were often derived from psychological models, there has been a growing realisation in various fields that collective memory should be studied in the first instance as a cultural phenomenon: as the product of the historically variable cultural practices that bring images of the past into circulation. After all, communication in some form or other, even if this is only between parent and child, is a prerequisite for transferring recollections and making them social. The past can only be invested

Chapter 11 Personifying the Past: from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Wintle Michael
Abstract: National narratives have been expressed in a variety of different ways, most commonly and perhaps most importantly in print. However, identities and narratives can also be expressed visually, with an often immediate effect that rivals other media in the representation of complex human messages and emotions. This chapter will pay particular attention to ‘the visual’ in the process of narrating the nation. Chronologically the highpoint of national self-assertion among European nations was reached around the time of New Imperialism in the decades before the First World War, a period of intense nationalism. This was also a peak period in the

Chapter 13 ‘People’s History’ in North America: from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Seixas Peter
Abstract: The protean notion of ‘people’s history’ has multiple meanings in North American culture. It can refer to a narrative whose subject is ‘the people’, i.e. the masses – in contrast to political, economic and social elites – and thus carry a relatively explicit oppositional ideological orientation. It carries this message in Howard Zinn’s A People’s History of the United States as well as in the Radical History Review(1981) section entitled ‘Towards a People’s History’ in an issue on ‘Presenting the Past: History and the Public’.¹ The Review also used ‘people’s history’ as that which could appeal to a broad audience (as

Chapter 14 The Configuration of Orient and Occident in the Global Chain of National Histories: from: Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Lim Jie-Hyun
Abstract: Modern historiography has often been a tool to legitimate the nation-state ‘objectively and scientifically’. Despite its proclamation of objectivity and scientific inquiry, modern historiography has promoted the political project of constructing national history. Its underlying logic was to find the course of historical development that led to the nation-state. Thus, national history has made the nation-state both the subject and the object of its own discipline. The ‘Prussian school’ provides a typical example. Not only was Ranke the official historiographer of the Prussian state, Droysen’s distinction between ‘History’ ( die Geschichte) and ‘private transactions’ (Geschäfte) also reveals the hidden politics that

Chapter 3 Institutionalizing an Extended Youth Phase in Chinese Society: from: Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Pan Tianshu
Abstract: Throughout most of Chinese history, males—and especially sons—have comprised the preferred social category in which parents strove to develop emotional and ethical obligation. This relationship has constituted the fundamental value orientation by which Chinese society has traditionally organized itself. But the 1949 communist transformation of society, especially urban life, profoundly altered the parent-son dyad, and in its place the parent-daughter bond became increasingly paramount. Even in the countryside, where the parent-son relationship and the patrilineal principle remained sociological constants, a transformation took place by the late twentieth century. Increasingly, urbanites and some rural residents (Shi 2009; Yan 2003)

Chapter 1 History of Memory, Policies of the Past: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Rousso Henry
Abstract: According to common sense both within and beyond the boundaries of Europe, we more or less take for granted the existence of a European ‘culture’ or ‘civilization.’ In spite of geopolitical uncertainties, divergent points of view, and ideological discrepancies, this topos is firmly anchored in the collective imagination, even though it frequently gives rise to misunderstandings. Even the most chauvinistic of historians subscribe to this idea, out of either conviction or convenience. Moreover, several works have been written in recent years about the history of European institutions or organizations, and about the economic, social, and cultural history of European countries

Chapter 7 The Origins of the Cold War in Eurasia: from: Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Rieber Alfred J.
Abstract: The present essay is an attempt to broaden the temporal, spatial, and social parameters of the origins of the Cold War by adding a third and fourth dimension in order to supplement the traditional two-dimensional approach that focuses on great-power rivalry and ideological combat in the twentieth century. The aim is to widen the overly narrow Eurocentric or Atlantic focus of previous studies and to expand the context of international politics. In a broader temporal-spatial or third dimension, the origins of the Cold War represent a phase in a prolonged struggle over the Eurasian borderlands that stretches back to the

1 Introduction: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Bouquet Mary
Abstract: The museum boom, with its accompanying objectification and politicisation of culture, finds its counterpart in expanding social scientific interest in the musealisation of culture. There is ample evidence that anthropologists are among those whose imaginations have been fired by the museum, over the past fifteen to twenty years.¹ However, this current of anthropological interest in museums is fairly recent ( seeAmes 1992), and it is certainly not evenly distributed around the academic world. Away from the mainlands of museum anthropology, there are still remote islands that appear to be untouched by these developments (cf. Gerholm and Hannerz 1983). The (re-)

5 Anthropology at home and in the museum: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Segalen Martine
Abstract: France has two national museums of general anthropology: the Musée de l’Homme, which covers the cultures and civilisations of the world; and for France, the Musée National des Arts et Traditions Populaires. These are in addition to specialist museums such as the Musée Guimet, which is devoted to oriental art. Anthropological museums seemed poised, at the beginning of the twenty-first century, for a new future. After long debate, a new Musée des Arts et Civilisations comprising the ethnographic collections of the present Musée de l’Homme (at Trocadéro) and Musée des Arts Africains et Océaniens (at the Porte Dorée, on the

9 Unsettling the meaning: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Shelton Anthony
Abstract: In The conflict of interpretations(1974), Paul Ricoeur makes a distinction between three types of knowledge based on their different epistemological ascriptions. These distinctions provide a useful starting point for discussion about the variants of anthropological discourse and their relationship with what I have termed elsewhere, ‘the three museologies’ (Shelton 1995b: 7). Briefly, Ricoeur distinguishes between what we might call a culture’s operative discourses, disciplinary regimes of knowledge, and critical philosophy. This latter practice subjects the first two narrative forms to analytical scrutiny or, to use a postmodernist idiom, fields a sustained ‘incredulity to meta-narratives’ (Lyotard 1984: xxiv). It is clear

10 Inside out: from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Cannizzo Jeanne
Abstract: This chapter uses a case study, the development of the exhibition David Livingstone and the Victorian Encounter with Africa, to examine the theoretical construction, methodological issues and analytical frameworks which govern cultural production. The negotiations necessary to resolve any conflicts or tensions which result from the pairing of different academic disciplines on a curatorial team will be explored. Certain aspects of almost all academic training, regardless of discipline, which may be antithetical to the exhibition process will also be addressed. Possible analogies with the production of radio documentaries for public broadcasting will be offered. Like a museum exhibition, but unlike

11 The art of exhibition-making as a problem of translation from: Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Bouquet Mary
Abstract: This chapter addresses what are often seen as the practical issues of exhibition-making as a theoretical problem of translation – with all the transformative effects of moving between languages¹ – and as a didactic device. It begins by invoking anthropological concern about recent developments in the museum world. It goes on to consider how (what are often thought of as) technical aspects the process of making a temporary exhibition at the University of Oslo Ethnographic Museum were used as a didactic device. Finally, there is a discussion of how these technical matters fit into the theoretical operation of translation that exhibition-making involves.

5 Educationalisation: from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: Long before there was talk of any ‘postmodernism’ in philosophy or in historiography, the German philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche (1844-1900), with this citation from his Genealogy of Morality,¹ pointed out that our perception of things – and thus also of the past – has always been colored by our perspective. Because we are biologically situated in a specific spatial (social and cultural) and temporal (historical) context, we can do nothing other than look from a specific standpoint (casu quo perspective) at what lies behind us. And since time always further blurs (and ultimately even erases or wipes out) the past, this

21 The Ten Commandments of Good Practices in History of Education Research from: Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: At the request of the editors, I am stating here briefly what are, for me, the most important rules of thumb of good practices in the history of education research. This I am doing on the basis of my many years of research experience as well as, on the basis of what I have published in several theoretical, methodological, and historiographical articles. I have called these guidelines, set down concisely in the form of propositions, somewhat provocatively «ten commandments» in the hope of stimulating a fruitful discussion. You can find these «commandments» as such at the beginning of the article.

Muslim Integration and Secularism from: Islam & Europe
Author(s) Modood Tariq
Abstract: I believe there is an anti-Muslim wind blowing across the European continent. One factor is the perception that Muslims are making politically exceptional, culturally unreasonable or theologically alien demands upon European states. Against that, I wish to say, that the claims Muslims are making, in fact, parallel comparable arguments about gender or ethnic equality. Seeing the issue in that context shows how European and contemporary is the logic of mainstream Muslim identity politics. Additionally I shall argue that multicultural politics must embrace what I call a moderate secularism, and resist a radical secularism.

Book Title: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition-Tradition and Creative Recycling
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): VERBEKE Werner
Abstract: Manuscripts constitute the source material par excellence for diverse academic disciplines. Art historians, philologists, historians, theologians, philosophers, book historians and even jurists encounter one another around the codex. The fact that such an encounter can be extremely fertile was demonstrated, during an international congress in Brussels on November 5-9, 2002. A record of the discussions can be found in this volume of the Mediaevalia Lovaniensia. The editors selected those lectures that focused on the historical, literary-historical, philosophical and theological aspects of the congress theme as opposed to those with an explicit art-historical perspective. The common thread, however, is always the codicological aspect: what can the study of manuscripts contribute to the literary-historical interpretation or the insight into the functioning of a text in its original context. The various contributions testify to a fearless and unrestrained interdisciplinary approach to the material. The subjects broached cover a broad domain: from the development of classical themes to the transmission of lyrical models, from visual material giving evidence of the reception of literary texts to the artes-literature used as a vehicle for a love story.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdxv4

Book Title: Origins and Ends of the Mind-Philosophical Essays on Psychoanalysis
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Brassier Ray
Abstract: Psychoanalysis claims that the individual human mind is structured by its childhood relationships with its parents. But the theory of attachment, evolutionary psychology and contemporary philosophy of mind have all recently re-introduced new dimensions of innateness into mental development and pathology. If attachment is an instinct, then what is the psychological status of the child's relation to the mother? If the mind is in part a product of evolution, then how far down do the inhibitory mechanisms of the mind go? If the mind of the child is shaped by their encounter with a set of prohibitions, how, in the light of contemporary 'cognitive science' and philosophy of mind, can the child be conceived as 'taking on' a rule? How is the construction of the mind related to the normative ends of cognitive experience? Today, it is Lacanian psychoanalysis which most vigorously defends psychoanalytic theory and practice from the encroachment of the biological and 'cognitive' sciences. But a paradigm shift nevertheless appears to be underway, in which the classical psychoanalytic theories about the Oedipus complex, primary and secondary repression, sexual difference and psychosexuality, the role of symbols,etc, are being dismantled and reintegrated into a new synthesis of biological and psychological theories. In this collection of theoretical essays by philosophers and psychoanalysts, encounters are brought about between Freudian and Lacanian psychoanalysis on the one hand, and attachment theory, evolutionary psychology and philosophy of mind on the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdz7w

Quasi-beliefs and Crazy Beliefs: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Garvey Brian
Abstract: This paper concerns what Freud called the ‘special characteristics’ of the unconscious. According to his metapsychological writings, unconscious mental states differ from conscious ones not just in not being conscious, but in having what he calls ‘systematic’ features, such as exemption from mutual contradiction, imperviousness to the influence of external reality, and so forth. Yet he still wants to characterise them as mental states. He is often explicit in his use of psychological language to describe them. Even when he is not, he makes it clear that the mechanistic-sounding language he sometimes uses is to be understood metaphorically. The movements

Paradoxes of Normativity in Lacanian Psychoanalysis. from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Kerslake Christian
Abstract: Freud’s discovery of the Oedipus complex can be dated back to his account of his self-analysis in a letter to Fliess in 1897, where he says that ‘I have found, in my own case too, falling in love with the mother and jealousy of the father [to be] a universal event of early childhood’ (SE 1: 265). He notes that the legend of Oedipus ‘seizes on a compulsion which everyone recognises because he feels its existence within himself’ (ibid). However, it was not until the 1920s that Freud introduced the Oedipus complex as the ‘core complex’ in psychological development. In

Reinterpreting Freud’s Genealogy of Culture from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Beeckman Tinneke
Abstract: In what way can Freudian psychoanalysis help contribute to a naturalist, yet non-reductionist anthropology? Such an anthropology would be one that takes into account the significance of the natural history of the human species for our understanding of the human being, but without reducing the specificity of the human to processes of natural or sexual selection. The question of reductionism is all the more relevant today given that naturalism has become a major paradigm in contemporary philosophy. Simply put, naturalism’s basic tenet is that human beings are genealogically related to each other and have common ancestors with other species. Nevertheless,

Love as Ontology: from: Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Clemens Justin
Abstract: Psychoanalysis has, from its origins, remained indifferent to or suspicious towards ontology. More precisely, the practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy — and, a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse seems to have been the case: it is philosophers who have had to respond, with some urgency, to the challenges offered by psychoanalysis. However

5. Three partial explanations and the road ahead from: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: If anything can be noticed when reading through the foregoing passages, it is that – while they try to grasp certain phenomena into particular broader concepts or principles, they do lack some kind of internal substantivelogic of what influence constitutes of. That is a criticism I cannot refute, because I believe it to be true, and – what is more – I even believe it to be my point. Although I do not argue that it is downright impossible to construe a fullysubstantivecoherent account of the relationship between EU and Belgian constitutional law and apply it to the field of

Book Title: Subversion, Conversion, Development-Cross-Cultural Knowledge Exchange and the Politics of Design
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Wilson Lee
Abstract: This book explores alternative cultural encounters with and around information technologies. These encounters are alternative because they counter dominant, Western-oriented notions of media consumption; they include media practices as forms of cultural resistance and subversion, "DIY cultures," and other nonmainstream models of technology production. The contributors -- leading thinkers in science and technology studies, anthropology, and software design -- pay special attention to the specific inflections that different cultures and communities give to the value of knowledge. The richly detailed accounts presented here challenge the dominant view of knowledge as a neutral good -- information available for representation and encoding but separated from all social relations. The chapters examine specific cases in which the forms of knowledge and cross-cultural encounters are shaping technology use and development. They consider design, use, and reuse of technological tools, including databases, GPS devices, books, and computers, in locations that range from Australia and New Guinea to Germany and the United States.ContributorsPoline Bala, Alan Blackwell, Wade Chambers, Michael Christie, Hildegard Diemberger, Stephen Hugh-Jones, James Leach, Jerome Lewis, Dawn Nafus, Gregers Petersen, Marilyn Strathern, David Turnbull, Helen Verran, Laura Watts, Lee Wilson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf5w5

3 Freifunk: from: Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Petersen Gregers
Abstract: Freifunk is an assemblage of a friction–filled multiplicity of interests and effects of technology use in everyday life in the twenty–first century. It is a community that originates in Berlin, a particular form of social movement, and a specific technological approach to computer networking. The tale of Freifunk’s emergence and distillation tells of a process in which the everyday tactics of solving one’s own problems (in this case, a lack of Internet access) are integrated with a more general strategy of political subversion. Thus it is also a tale of how technical appropriation becomes a sociotechnical subversion. To

3 Engineered Microbes in Industry and Science: from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Kaebnick Gregory E.
Abstract: With some scientific and technological developments, the public gets excited when the technology hits the streets and generates new products and services. Radio caught the public’s attention when radios became available. The Internet had been in the works for some years before most people even knew about it. But with developments in biology, the excitement tends to precede the application. In the 1990s, genetic engineering was going to cure the incurable; fifteen years on, there are only a few scattered reports of success, and then only on a few individuals at a time and not completely smoothly (the treatment has

4 Lessons from Environmental Ethics about the Intrinsic Value of Synthetic Life from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Larson Ben T.
Abstract: Synthetic biology is the attempt to “engineer complex artificial biological systems to investigate natural biological phenomena and for a variety of applications” (Andrianantoandro et al. 2006; see also Endy 2005). We will use the expression “synthetic life-forms” to refer to the different kinds of synthetic organisms produced in synthetic biology laboratories. These organisms today are typically various kinds of genetically modified bacteria. Even if most (or even all) of the material in a synthetic life-form comes from natural forms of life, we still consider it to be “synthetic” because it is produced through the intentional activity of laboratory scientists. Synthetic

7 Synthetic Biology and Public Reason from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Mandle Jon
Abstract: The developments associated with synthetic biology and other new genetic technologies raise profound questions in many different areas. Among others, they touch on issues of religion, metaphysics, and morality. Without in any way denigrating the importance of these deep and weighty issues, I am going to argue that the answers we give to these questions are largely independent of the answers we give to another set of concerns—those of public policy. Our answers to theological, to metaphysical, and in an important sense to moral questions about the technologies associated with genetic manipulation should not have any directpolicy implications.

8 Biotechnology as Cultural Meaning: from: Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Jennings Bruce
Abstract: Perhaps the fundamental question before us in science policy today involves the extension of human power and artifice into the realm of life. The general question is not new. Shakespeare’s Prospero pondered it, as did Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein and H. G. Wells’s Dr. Moreau. But the gap between fantasy and actual technological capacity is closing, so that now the morality of power must speak to the governance of power; ethics must inform public policy. Synthetic biology constitutes a significant extension of the human capacity to manipulate the conditions of life at several levels—the molecular and cellular level, the level

10 Soul, Transnationalism, and Imaginings of Revolution: from: Soul
Author(s) Joseph May
Abstract: Revisiting seventies socialism and soul culture from the vantage point of the United States in the nineties raises important questions about the structures of enjoyment embedded in the anticapitalist stance of many emergent socialist states, such as Tanzania during that turbulent time. Most critiques of seventies socialist cultures readily dismiss socialism as having no soul. The inherent assumption of such critiques is that capitalism is the sole arbiter of enjoyment through free and ideologically uncontaminated flow of consumption. Such binary critiques oversimplify the relationship between state formations and citizens as consumers. These critiques further elide the intricate and nuanced strategies

6 Aliens from: A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: In his monumental study of the medieval monarchy, Ernst Kantorowitz introduces modern readers to the politico-theological concept of the King’s Two Bodies. Kantorowitz refers his readers to Edmund Plowden’s Reports, in which Plowden remarked of a case predating the reign of Queen Elizabeth concerning the authority of the monarchy:

3. Violence, USA: from: America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Since 9/11, the war on terror and the campaign for homeland security have increasingly mimicked the tactics of the enemies they sought to crush. Violence and punishment as both a media spectacle and a bone-crushing reality have become prominent and influential forces shaping American society. As the boundaries between “the realms of war and civil life have collapsed,” social relations and the public services needed to make them viable have been increasingly privatized and militarized.¹ The logic of profitability works its magic in channeling the public funding of warfare and organized violence into universities, market-based service providers, Hollywood cinema, cable

3 The Power of Community: from: The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: Like many of my respondents, I learned the meaning of being Arab in the United States. Growing up in Egypt, I studied Arab nationalism and the construction of a pan-ethnic Arab identity that was based on shared historical struggles and political interests. Aside from official narratives of coherent Arab ethnicity told in our history books, the decades of the 1970s and 1980s were fraught with fragmentation and conflict among Arab nations, and most people around me did not see themselves as Arabs.¹ Arriving in the United States, however, I sought out other Arabs, as this seemed a logical approach to

5 A CHRISTIAN CRITIQUE OF CHRISTIAN AMERICA from: Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: At a conference on narrative and virtue I had an encounter with a philosopher that raises the problem with which I wish to deal. My philosophical counterpart is a Piercian who is also a committed Jew. In his paper he had argued that most of the rational paradigms accepted by contemporary philosophy cannot make sense of Judaism. We began by exchanging views about why current ethical theory seems so committed to foundationalist epistemological assumptions. We shared in general a sympathy with antifoundationalist arguments though neither of us wanted to give up any possibility of some more modest realist epistemology. We

9. Critical Race Theory from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: As the 1980s came to a close, a new movement in legal thought emerged offering a new epistemological source for law derived from the “actual experience, history, culture, and intellectual tradition of people of color.”¹ This movement developed as racial-minority scholars within critical legal studies and other progressive networks established “an African American movement”² in legal studies to approach problems of race from the unique perspective of African Americans. Critical race theorists asserted that it was time for “different and blacker voices [to] speak new words and remake old legal doctrines.”³ The critical race theory movement emerged as minority scholars

12. Postmodern Jurisprudence from: Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: Postmodernism is an elusive idea that is not easily defined. Postmodernism is neither a theory nor a concept; it is rather a skeptical attitude or aesthetic that “distrusts all attempts to create large-scale, totalizing theories in order to explain social phenomena.” ¹ Postmodernists resist the idea that “there is a ‘real’ world or legal system ‘out there,’ perfected, formed, complete and coherent, waiting to be discovered by theory.”² As developed in linguistics, literary theory, art, and architecture, postmodernism is also a style that signals the end of an era, the passing of the modern age.³ It marks a certain “chronological

18 Gender from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Hateley Erica
Abstract: The Oxford English Dictionary(OED) informs us that “gender” has at its root the Latingenus, meaning “race, kind,” and emerges as early as the fifth century as a term for differentiating between types—especially those of people and words. In the ensuing 1,500 years, “gender” appears in linguistic and biological contexts to distinguish types of words and bodies from one another, as when words in Indo-European languages were identified as masculine, feminine, or neuter, and humans were identified as male or female. It is telling that gender has historically (whether overtly or covertly) been a tool of negotiation between

19 Girlhood from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Reid-Walsh Jacqueline
Abstract: According to the Oxford English Dictionary(OED), “girlhood” has been in use from the mid-eighteenth century until the present day as both a singular and a plural noun. From the first cited use—notably, in Samuel Richardson’sClarissa(1747–48), a novel concerning the paragon of virtuous adolescent girlhood—the term “girlhood” has had a history as an ideologically loaded term in Western culture. As the following brief definitions indicate, several meanings overlap: “The state of being a girl; the time of life during which one is a girl. Also: girls collectively.” Its different denotations and connotations make for a

20 Golden Age from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Sorby Angela
Abstract: The “Golden Age” is a Greco-Roman concept, introduced in Hesiod’s Works and Days,which pictures a race of men who “lived like gods without sorrow of heart, remote and free from toil and grief: miserable age rested not on them; but with legs and arms never failing they made merry with feasting beyond the reach of all evils” (2007). In children’s literature, the term was first proposed by the mid-twentieth century British biographer (and Inkling) Roger Lancelyn Green, whose use of it was ideologically freighted but historically useful. Since Green, however, the term has spread and morphed to become a

33 Multicultural from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Dudek Debra
Abstract: The term “multicultural” and its associated “-ism” have been the focus of many debates in literary, educational, political, and sociological circles since the terms were coined. “Multicultural” first appeared in the New York Herald Tribunein 1941: “A fervent sermon against nationalism, national prejudice and behavior in favor of a ‘multicultural’ way of life” (Oxford English Dictionary[OED]). The second usage, in 1959 by theNew York Times, both narrows and broadens the definition by connecting a culturally diverse city to cosmopolitanism. In 1965, the adjective “multicultural” expanded into the noun “multiculturalism” in thePreliminary Report of the Royal Commission

39 Postmodernism from: Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Nel Philip
Abstract: “Postmodernism” denotes an historical period, a style, or a cultural logic. If an historical period, then the word means after modernism—although when, precisely, modernism ended is debatable: 1939, 1945, and 1950 are common dates, but the term “postmodernism” crops up well before then. TheOxford English Dictionary(OED) finds J. M. Thompson in 1914 using “Post-Modernism” to describe a shift in Christian thinking that would “escape from the double-mindedness of Modernism.” A still earlier example eluded theOED: circa 1870, the English painter John Watkins Chapman spoke of “postmodern painting,” which he alleged was more avant-garde than French impressionism

Chapter 10 Concepts of Scripture in Jewish Mysticism from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Idel Moshe
Abstract: The correlation between any Jewish theology and the conception of scripture that accompanies it is one of the most characteristic features of Jewish thought.¹ All theological systems in Judaism have produced their own conceptions of Torah. These varied conceptions of Torah provide a lens through which one can study the development of Jewish concepts of God.

Chapter 11 Concepts of Scripture in Martin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Cohen Jonathan
Abstract: The thought of Martin Buber (1878–1965) and Franz Rosenzweig (1886–1929) continues to exert a profound influence not only on theologians and philosophers of religion, both Jewish and Christian, but on biblical scholars as well. Their work has been foundational for readers who want not so much to deny as to move beyond historical and philological approaches that obscure biblical literature’s religious and humanistic vitality. Buber and Rosenzweig bring God back into the picture and thus represent a gesture of return to older modes of biblical interpretation. Still, their approach does not simply restore medieval or midrashic approaches to

Chapter 13 Concepts of Scripture in Yehezkel Kaufmann from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Jindo Job Y.
Abstract: The empirical conception of the Bible fostered during the Enlightenment advanced the notion that “the Bible is not the key to nature but a part of it; it must therefore be considered according to the same rules as hold for any kind of empirical knowledge.”¹ The notion of the Bible as artifact entails a paradigm shift for those who regard it as Scripture—it challenges them to reconsider their own understanding of this foundational text, which gives structure to their very mode of existence.² This conception of the Bible, which purports to be free of traditional, theological presumptions, puts in

Chapter 14 Concepts of Scripture in Moshe Greenberg from: Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Brettler Marc Zvi
Abstract: Moshe Greenberg was born on July 10, 1928, in Philadelphia to Rabbi Simon and Betty (Davis) Greenberg.¹ His parents were observant Jews who spoke Hebrew to their children, and he received private tutoring in Jewish texts in the early mornings, before attending public school. His father was the rabbi of a prominent Conservative synagogue, served as vice chancellor of the Jewish Theological Seminary, and was active in some progressive social causes. Greenberg studied as an undergraduate and completed his Ph.D. at the University of Pennsylvania. Greenberg’s dissertation, completed in 1954 and published one year later, was on the Ḫab/piru, an

Book Title: The Disarticulate-Language, Disability, and the Narratives of Modernity
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Berger James
Abstract: Language is integral to our social being. But what is the status of those who stand outside of language? The mentally disabled, wild children, people with autism and other neurological disorders, as well as animals, infants, angels, and artificial intelligences, have all engaged with language from a position at its borders. In the intricate verbal constructions of modern literature, the 'disarticulate' - those at the edges of language - have, paradoxically, played essential, defining roles.Drawing on the disarticulate figures in modern fictional works such asBilly Budd, The Sound and the Fury, Nightwood, White Noise,andThe Echo Maker,among others, James Berger shows in this intellectually bracing study how these characters mark sites at which aesthetic, philosophical, ethical, political, medical, and scientific discourses converge. It is also the place of the greatest ethical tension, as society confronts the needs and desires of the least of its brothers. Berger argues that the disarticulate is that which is unaccountable in the discourses of modernity and thus stands as an alternative to the prevailing social order. Using literary history and theory, as well as disability and trauma theory, he examines how these disarticulate figures reveal modernity's anxieties in terms of how it constructs its others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg6xh

2 Linguistic Impairment and the Default of Modernism: from: The Disarticulate
Abstract: Blake’s famous poem lauds the triumphs of modern urban planning and natural science. Both city and nature have been placed under the charter of rational knowledge and guidance, and a just and fecund society prospers through this knowledge. Oh! Sorry! I was looking at the wrong note card! Of course, “London” is a bitter condemnation of modern forms of knowledge and their effects on nature and social life. But this mistaken conflation points toward the central epistemological and moral tensions of modernity, which can be summed up as the problem of knowledge as system or model. As Isaiah Berlin argued,

5 Alterity Is Relative: from: The Disarticulate
Abstract: In chapter 2, I discussed how characters with cognitive and linguistic impairments in modernist fiction served as figures of radical alterity—both dys- and disarticulate—in relation to a modernity characterized as a totalizing social-symbolic system. Alternate, less extreme ways of thinking about language and social organization were available (e.g., James’s pluralism, Bahktin’s and Voloshinov’s analyses of language as a dialogic enactment of multiple social tensions), but we can speculate that the rapid, violent, traumatic character of social change—and, indeed, of many of the significant events of the twentieth century—and the extreme claims made by positivist thinkers in

6 “This is not Planet Earth; it’s Planet Ocean” from: 22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Jan
Abstract: Veteran environmental activist Paul Watson offers a provocative, counterintuitive, and iconoclastic view of the state of an environment in crisis. Basing his analysis on a long-term conception of ecological history as well as recent examples of environmental crises, his central premise is that the environmental movement is not about saving the planet itself but saving the planet as it is for future human generations. From this perspective, the planet will survive environmental degradation and eventually evolve new life, but it is the human race that may not adapt fast enough. This view clashes with our dominant approaches to protecting the

Chapter 2 Missed Connections: from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Stansell Christine
Abstract: The sweep of the feminist tradition in the United States, arguably the locale of its most radical innovations, throws up both enormous achievements and dispiriting failures. Of the failures, none has been more noticed, more pronounced than feminism’s difficulties in making an enduring common cause with democratic race politics. Facing the blockages, historians have searched for a logic that explains the inadequacies of a women’s politics which, some have argued, were indelibly marked from the very beginning by racism and a fixation on race-privilege: all the perfidies conjured up by the category “whiteness.” In the 1960s, scholars exaggerated the egalitarianism

Chapter 10 “The Matriarchate, or Mother-Age” (1891) from: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Here Stanton provides an explicitly feminist reading of the literature on matriarchy emphasizing the work of anthropological pioneer Lewis Henry Morgan. In his last book,Ancient Society(1877), Morgan argued that the status of women was the single best indicator of a people’s development from “savagery” to “civilization.” The level of women’s participation was a test for Morgan of a society’s movement toward modern civilization and an indication that a militarized aristocracy was being replaced by democratic cooperation. The closing sentences of Morgan’s Ancient Society reads: “Democracy in government, brotherhood in society, equality in rights and privileges, and

INTRODUCTION from: Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: As Samuel Palmer recognized already in 1812, nineteenth-century Christianity in England was both united and divided.¹ Though Christian churches held most of the central teachings of Christianity in common, they diverged significantly in polity, theology, and liturgy. For the ordinary churchgoing Christian, denominational divergence emerged most obviously not in theological discussions, seminary debates, or circulated writings but in the public worship service, where communal worship practices shaped and bespoke religious principle. True, the basic elements of Christian liturgy—Scripture reading, singing, prayer, sermon, sacrament—appeared in almost all worship services, of whatever denomination; but as Palmer points out, how these

CHAPTER THREE “THE BELOVED ANGLICAN CHURCH OF MY BAPTISM” from: Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: To turn from nineteenth-century Congregationalism to Anglicanism, and especially Anglo-Catholicism, is in many ways to turn from what David Tracy, working from Paul Ricoeur, calls proclamation to what he calls manifestation, or from a dialectical toward an analogical imagination and language.¹ Congregationalism, we have seen, grounds the Christ-event as a Word-event, thus calling Christians to witness to that central experience in further, often dialectical, word and action. Anglicanism historically also values proclamation, with Scripture and sermon integral to its liturgy; as Tracy points out, the Christian faith has historically held that “Jesus Christ is both the decisive word and the

Book Title: Biography and turning points in Europe and America- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Négroni Catherine
Abstract: This sociological collection advances the argument that the concept of a turning point expands our understanding of life experiences from a descriptive to a deeper and more abstract level of analysis. It addresses the conceptual issue of what distinguishes turning points from life transitions in general and raises crucial questions about the application of turning points as a biographical research method. Biography and turning points in Europe and America is all the more distinctive and significant due to its broad empirical database. The anthology includes authors from ten different countries, providing a number of contexts for thinking about how turning points relate to constructions of meaning shaped by globalization and by cultural and structural meanings unique to each country. The book will be useful across a wide range of social sciences and particularly valuable for researchers needing a stronger theoretical base for biographical work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgpjg

INTRODUCTION: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Hackstaff Karla B.
Abstract: As long as we have a notion of a self-identity, most people have a moment in their life when they have been forced to recognise, as a result of events, that ‘I am not the same as I was, as I used to be’ (Strauss, 1959, p 95). This is the basic definition of the sociological concept of ‘turning points’ provided by Anselm Strauss in his 1959 book, Mirrors and masks: The search for identity. Since then it has been an important sociological concept for investigating identities over a lifetime in the context of an ever-changing structural, cultural and interpersonal

ONE Unpacking biographical narratives: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Kupferberg Feiwel
Abstract: The concerns of sociologists when engaging in biography research are different from both the caring professions and oral history. Although there are clear parallels between, in particular, oral history and sociological biography research concerning methodological issues related to how to conduct and interpret biographical interviews (Charlton et al, 2007; Perks and Thomson, 2009), there are also important theoretical and conceptual differences. The latter originate from the knowledge interest of sociologists that partly coincide with but are nevertheless slightly different from historians. This can be illustrated by the works of Alessandro Portelli (1981, 1991, 2003). What mostly interests Portelli is how

FIVE Biographical structuring through a critical life event: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Jost Gerhard
Abstract: Critical life events such as the loss of a job, the end of a relationship or a divorce or, as discussed in this chapter, the passing of a parent, are often accompanied by depression, melancholy, disorientation and loss of perspective on life. It is the concept of critical life events in particular that is a predictor of psychological anomalies. As a general rule, a critical life event condenses the experience and takes the affected person into a stadium of ‘relative imbalance’ (Filipp, 1981, p 24; Inglehart, 1991), therefore requiring the person to reorganise his or her behaviour and experience making

TEN Conclusion: from: Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Kupferberg Feiwel
Abstract: What are turning points, and how are they to be described and analysed? How might a stronger focus on turning points help us to advance sociological biography research? This is what this book is about. It combines theoretical work with a number of concrete, empirical analyses of turning points, starting from different theoretical and methodological traditions within the contemporary academic landscape, but nevertheless with the overall conviction that the concept of turning points is a good start, both to make a theoretical contribution and to provide methodological advice (heuristics) on how to go about interpreting biographical narratives.

ONE A problem-processing perspective on governance from: The governance of problems
Abstract: People are problem-processing animals. Not that we are all worrywarts, of course. But people do tend to be concerned about conditions they feel uneasy about. They brood over situations they experience as uncomfortable or troublesome, especially if they see no obvious way out. One might call this the substantive logic of problem processing: experiencing an uncomfortable situation, diagnosing the nature of the problem and figuring out what to do to solve, or at least, alleviate the problem. Most problems have a personal character; they concern people as problem owners, their families, relatives, friends, colleagues, fellow members of sports clubs and

SIX Problem-structuring dynamics and meta-governance from: The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter explores a theory of problem-structuring dynamics. It follows the structuration logic proposed by Giddens (1979), showing how policy actors can influence the nature of institutionalised systems of interaction while at the same time being constrained by them. On the one hand, problem-frame shifts and the possibilities for policy change depend on the structure of policy networks. A closed, institutionalised policy network differs from an open, emergent or decaying network. Part of the difference is in shaping different types of policy-making processes, with different capacities for problem processing, and, therefore, speed, scope and direction of policy change and innovation.

The Community that Raymond Brown Left Behind: from: Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: Among the paradigm-making contributions in Johannine studies over the last half century, one of the most significant is the sketching of “the community of the Beloved Disciple” by Raymond E. Brown (1979). Extending beyond Johannine studies, Brown’s (1984) work on the history of early Christianity and “the churches the apostles left behind” is also among the most practical and interesting of his forty-seven books.² Here, Brown’s analysis of the unity and diversity of early Christian approaches to leadership and community organization³ have extensive implications, not only for historical and sociological understandings of the first-century Christian movement, but also for approaches

[Part 3: Introduction] from: Communities in Dispute
Abstract: Having addressed the literary composition and historical-situation features of the Johannine Epistles, their theological and ethical content becomes more readily accessible and understandable. In addition to an adequate understanding of their composition and context helping the reader get the content right, however, misconstruing such features may impede one’s adequate understanding of their message, so a good deal of modesty is required in any approach to the Johannine Epistles, as one must remind oneself that evidence can sometimes be seen as pointing in more than one direction.

Book Title: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics-Problematics, Objectives, Strategies
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: Engage essays that are profoundly theological and resolutely social
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qh241

What Does It Mean to Be a Latino/a Biblical Critic? from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Agosto Efrain
Abstract: “I have been teaching the Bible since I was fifteen years old.” So began the personal essay to both my application for theological school thirty-five years ago and that for graduate school over thirty years ago. This sentence reflected a couple of matters that I would like to point out at the outset of this study.

Toward Latino/a Biblical Studies: from: Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Lozada Francisco
Abstract: Latino/a biblical studies, like many other approaches based on ideological and/or contextual frameworks,

3 Understanding without Explanation from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LIPTON PETER
Abstract: Explaining why and understanding why are closely connected. Indeed, it is tempting to identify understanding with having an explanation. Explanations are answers to why questions, and understanding, it seems, is simply having those answers. Equating understanding with explanation is also attractive from an analytic point of view, since an explanation is understanding incarnate. The explanation is propositional and explicit. It is also conveniently argument shaped, if we take the premise to be the explanation proper and the conclusion a description of the phenomenon that is being explained. So we are on the way to specifying the logic of understanding.

4 Ontological Principles and the Intelligibility of Epistemic Activities from: Scientific Understanding
Abstract: My main goal in this essay is to establish intelligibility as an epistemic virtue that is meaningful and desirable independently of any connection it might or might not have with truth.¹ In brief, my argument is that intelligibility consists of a kind of harmony between éour ontological conceptions and our epistemic activities. I will modify and broaden that formulation in the course of the discussion.

10 Understanding in Biology: from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LEONELLI SABINA
Abstract: This chapter offers an analysis of understanding in biology based on characteristic biological practices:ways in which biologists think and act when carrying out their research. De Regt and Dieks have forcefully claimed that a philosophical study of scientific understanding should “encompass the historical variation of specific intelligibility standards employed in scientific practice” (2005, 138). In line with this suggestion, I discuss the conditions under which contemporary biologists come to understand natural phenomena and I point to a number of ways in which the performance of specific research practices informs and shapes the quality of such understanding.

12 Understanding in Physics: from: Scientific Understanding
Author(s) DIEKS DENNIS
Abstract: Physics is the paradigmatic example of a successful science. One of its great successes is its impressive track record of giving explanations of natural phenomena, by which these phenomena are made understandable. This much is generally granted, but things become less clear when one asks what these physical explanations exactly consist in. Philosophers of science have proposed a variety of analyses of explanation (nomological-deductive, causal, unification, to mention but a few), and it is not immediately obvious which of these proposals best captures physical practice.

3 Indigenous Creencias, Millenarian Cultures, and Counterpublic Persuasion from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: FEMINIST AND MULTICULTURAL texts inscribe the discussion of feminist and indigenous rights into an old and already occupied hermeneutical place. They write over the already-written script of public sphere and civil society, and by so doing feminism, at least, steps into the terrain of the prophetic. Richard Rorty’s reading of Catherine MacKinnon’s work illustrates this shift in the feminist text, which holds true for the indigenous text as well. MacKinnon states that “unless women [read also indigenous groups] fit into the logical space prepared for them by current linguistic and other practices, the law doesn’t know how to deal with

epilogue. from: Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: IT IS IMPORTANT to acknowledge the contributions of Enrique Dussel, Iris Marion Young, and Achille Mbembe to the criticism of liberalism and modern reason. These three thinkers excavate the occult sites of Western philosophy, radically questioning their social integrity and viability and obstinately pointing to their flawed logic as ways of recognizing liberalism’s ethical obligation to unassimilable Otherness—Dussel in his reconsideration of modernity from its underside, Young in her all-out offensive against liberalism’s “innocent spaces” and “essentially contested concepts,” and Mbembe in his redefinition of sovereignty as necropolitics, the power to decide who lives and who dies. They are

Book Title: Darogan-Prophecy, lament and absent heroes in medieval Welsh literature
Publisher: University of Wales Press
Author(s): Jones Aled Llion
Abstract: This book focuses on the prophetic poetry and prose of the earliest Welsh-language manuscripts, exploring the complexity of a literary tradition simultaneously apocalyptic, eschatological, multilingual, nationalist and interethnic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhf4z

Conclusion from: Darogan
Abstract: Reading the daroganas an allegorical mode of literature – and one whose allegory is potentially theological – requires a sharpening of the question of the relation of the political prophecy to the eschato logical, and specifically how this ‘political eschatology’ fits into the wider context of Christs’s own return. The crux here is the extent to which history itself which history itself (or a species of history) comes to an end with the return of the son of prophecy. That is, does the temportality of prophyecy, in its collapse of present, past and future, necessarity imply a theological reading or a

CHAPTER 3 Idealism from: Externalism
Abstract: Suppose we separate mind and world in the manner prescribed by Cartesian internalism. A mind is an interiority: mental phenomena are located exclusively inside the skin of any organism that possesses them, and possession of such phenomena by a creature is logically independent of whatever exists or occurs in the world outside that skin. Then we are immediately presented with a problem, one that has been and continues to be enormously influential. It is sometimes called the matching problem.The matching problem, then, is a direct result of the sort of separation of mind and world essential to Cartesian internalism.

CHAPTER 8 Externalism and first-person authority from: Externalism
Abstract: The Cartesian conception of the mind, as we have seen, is composed not just of ontological theses concerning the nature of mental phenomena, but also epistemological theses concerning our knowledge of, or access to, such phenomena. These latter we summed up in the slogan: “each person knows his or her mind firstandbest”– the principle ofepistemic internalism.This chapter examines the implications of content externalism for this principle.

Chora: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Pérez-Gémez Alberto
Abstract: What does architecture represent within the context of everyday life? Given its techno-political context, is it even conceivable that this well-proven instrument of power may represent something other than male, egocentric will or repressive political or economic forces? Could it be that despite its common origin with instrumental and technological forms of representation, it may nonetheless allow for participatory human action and an affirmation of life-towards-death through symbolization as “presencing” through the constructed work, rather than manifest the very denial of man’s capacity to recognize existential meaning in privileged artifacts such as works of art? Could it then embody values

Architecture as a Site of Reception – Part I: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Kunze Donald
Abstract: In The Gastronomical Me,M.F.K. Fisher noted that our three basic needs for food, security, and love are so intermingled that we cannot think of one without encompassing the others.³ There are two important truths here. The first is that the human mind works so much through a logic of displacement, whereby concerns of one kind are written in the language of another, that in fact mind itself might be regarded as nothing more than the process of displacement.⁴ The second truth is that hunger, its object (food), and its functions (ingestion and digestion) figure prominently in that process.

Space and Image in Andrei Tarkovsky’s Nostalgia: from: Chora 1
Author(s) Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: “Poets and painters are born phenomenologists,” wrote J.H. van den Berg.¹ A phenomenological approach to the artist implies a pure looking at the essence of things, unburdened by convention or intellectualized explanation. When a writer, a painter, or a film director presents a scene, he or she must define a setting for the act. But creating a place is the primal act of architecture, and consequently these artists unknowingly perform the task of an architect. Unaware of the professional rules of the discipline, they approach the mental dimensions of architectural experience and, hence, reveal the phenomenological basis of the art

POETIC DISCOURSE IN BABYLON: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Case Frederick Ivor
Abstract: It is essential to emphasize the thematic aspects of Brand’s ontological enterprise, and it is equally important to bear in

WOMEN’S WORD: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Rojas-Trempe Lady
Abstract: CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICAN literature in the past two decades—the 1970s and 1980’s—reliably proves that the written word of women has contributed to the outlining and definition of a culture which challenges male hegemony as well as androcentric power relations and knowledge.² The breach that certain feminist and nonfeminist writers opened in the patriarchal culture allowed them, as a point of departure, to underline the fact that they were different from men. At the same time, they emphasized the historical cost of marginalization and took up the struggle for fair treatment.³ Soon after, they established certain epistemological bases for

BEYOND DEVELOPMENT AND MODERNITY: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Esteva Gustavo
Abstract: IF THE HOUR HAS COME for rethinking modernity, it is time to make very explicit the irrenconcilable opposition between culture and development. An analogous opposition would seem to be a good starting point for my argument. “Genetic endowment and cultural heritage evolve according to opposite laws.... Biological evolution sprouts new branches that do not cross-fertilize, branches that never again unite once they have become solid. Culture evolves along another route: its forms are anastomosis; like a river, its waters divide, meander and reunite. Biological evolution remains ungraved while culture implies the memory of things past, which survive only in myth

NAVIGATING THE TEXT: from: Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Taiana Cecilia
Abstract: THIS PAPER IS AN EXPLORATION of the use of hypertext and its capability of identifying and opening up embedded epistemological traditions present in the text. Two academic course outlines, one from Canada and the other from Argentina, have been chosen to illustrate the discussion.

8 Uncloseting Drama: from: Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) SALVATO NICK
Abstract: In the late winter and early spring of 2005, the New York theatre troupe the Wooster Group staged, both in Brooklyn and Manhattan, a limited return engagement of their 1999 piece House/Lights, an “adaptation” of Gertrude Stein’s 1938 playDoctor Faustus Lights the Lights. The word “adaptation” belongs firmly in scare quotes, not only because it is a methodological description that the members of the Wooster Group would themselves resist, but also because it simultaneously over- and underrepresents the terms of the group’s engagement with Stein’s text. If an adaptation is a modified version of a work that nevertheless retains

3 The Power of Strong Emotions: from: Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: The ‘evil eye,’ the notion that a lookorstarecan operate as a potential source of human suffering, is prevalent in a number of societies. How people conceptualize the phenomenon, however, varies considerably not only from society to society, but also from individual to individual. Following Pirandello’s (1990) logic, I believe that there are as many models of evil eye as there are people who have formulated some idea about the phenomenon.² The model I am about to present is not necessarily shared by all Sicilian Canadians. Instead, it represents my understanding of the phenomenon based on a synthesis

1962-4 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Our first question will be, Does theology contain a theoretic element? By that I mean, Is it, at least in part, within the world of theory in the strict sense of that term? Does it involve the psychological differences illustrated by the story about Thales and the milkmaid? Does it involve the concern for rigor that is illustrated by Plato’s early dialogues, in which Socrates shows the Athenians that they do not know what

1962-5 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Yesterday we reached the problem of certitude of judgment that is raised when one attempts to integrate the modern notion or fact of science with the ancient ideal. And we had something to say about the nature of the act of judgment, the nature of sufficient evidence, the objectifications of intellectual light, of the light of intelligence, in logic and method, and the remainder that never succeeds in being objectified. In other words, intelligence is something more than simply what can be objectified in logic or a method, no matter how elaborate. Not all problems are the same, and yet

1962-8 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: We began from theology as a dogmatic-theological context, where context is a remainder concept. It denotes the rest. In other words, when any theological or dogmatic statement is made, there is a somewhat indeterminate set of other statements that complement, qualify, explain, defend the statement that is made. No statement stands by itself

1962-9 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: In general, exegesis is learned in practice, in a seminar. The four articles I wrote on gratia operansinTheological Studiesin 1941–1942² represent the exegesis of an article in St Thomas,Summa theologiae, 1-2, q. 111, a. 2. What does this article mean? Well, you can easily write four articles and refer to all sorts of elements in St Thomas’s thought to set forth

1962 from: Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Question: What is theological methodology? Is it merely a critique, or is it more than a critique?²

[SECTION FOUR: Introduction] from: Fighting Words and Images
Abstract: The redrawing of state borders, the dissolution of empires, and the emergence of new states; the decline of some political and social groups and the rise of others; the depopulation of whole regions and economic collapse; the adjustment of legal systems and attempts at international cooperation in preventing future wars – these are only a few of warʹs many aftermaths. Historians, political scientists, philosophers, sociologists, psychologists, environmentalists, and scholars representing a number of other academic fields have written thousands of volumes on the dramatic changes wars bring to geopolitical and political arrangements as well as to different countriesʹ ideological, legal,

10 The Battle of Stalingrad in Soviet Films from: Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) BARABAN ELENA V.
Abstract: The Battle of Stalingrad claimed the lives of more than one million people. In September–October 1942 a newly arrived Soviet private had little chance of living longer than twenty-four hours on the battlefield. In January 1943 German soldiers died by the hundreds every hour. The scope of events, their military, political, and ideological significance as well as their emotional intensity – the struggle of the Russians to achieve the unthinkable in the first part of the battle and the struggle of the Germans ʹto cope with the unthinkableʹ¹ in its second part – account for the unending flow of

3 Secular Civility in the Renaissance from: Civility
Abstract: The Renaissance was an important era in Western history because of its immense infl uence on the manner in which individuals conceived of their place in the universe and the way in which this conception facilitated the development of a civility tradition that was not as dependent on theological dogma. The subsequent Protestant Reformation and Enlightenment movements were facilitated by Renaissance interaction values because the Renaissance thinkers set the stage for a reversal in the ideologies that had kept absolutist monarchies in power. Although princes remained all-powerful in the Renaissance city-states, a new appreciation of individualism provided the rationale for

9 Towards a Cultural Sociology of Civility from: Civility
Abstract: The study of the historical background of a culture is vital to one’s understanding of its civility practices as well as its ongoing present. Yet, there are other equally important factors that must be considered. Although they may in some measure be the outcomes of historical and moral forces, these factors need to be studied on their own merit because the manner in which they intersect makes for an ‘anatomy of civility’ that is sociological as well as psychological. In this part of the book we will discuss these various factors and show how a ‘cultural sociology of civility’ needs

Introduction from: Magical Imaginations
Abstract: In his Defense of Poesy, Sir Philip Sidney claims that the ‘charming force’ of poetry can lead even ‘hard-hearted evil men’ who enjoy only ‘indulgere genio’ to ‘see the form of goodness (which seen they cannot but love) ere themselves be aware.’Magical Imaginationswas conceived when I became interested in this claim, particularly in the way it afforded literary pleasure ideological efficacy, as if poetic delight could make resistant readers love ‘goodness’ without alerting them that their dispositions were being disciplined. This intriguing and perhaps disquieting suggestion made me newly curious about Edmund Spenser’s statement that his 1590Faerie

3 Culture, Identity, and Community from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: The abstract study of language in the previous chapter takes on a concrete basis through Herder’s study of specific cultural communities. Both are central to his ontological position – that is, to those factors he takes as meaningful in accounting for social life.¹ Herder is now commonly credited as one of the first thinkers in the Western tradition to celebrate cultural diversity. Yet the erroneous idea that he fails to grasp sufficiently the diversity that exists withincultures persists among some political theorists. The first section of this chapter begins the task of correcting this misperception by showing that Herder fully

4 The Pluralist Alternative from: Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: Herder’s sustained attention to linguistic and cultural specificity means he rejects the rationalist and absolutist belief in a single and harmonious body of knowledge. Yet he never abandons many of the universal values associated with ‘the Enlightenment’ by adopting a relativist conception of ‘truth.’ Owing to the recent pluralist turn in Anglo-American political thought,¹ the dichotomy between relativism and absolutism that held such a dominant place in Western thought has undergone considerable re-evaluation. Richard Bernstein locates its intellectual force as having emerged from Descartes’s search for an absolute foundation, that is, some fixed point from which all metaphysical and epistemological

chapter four Motion Rhetoric in Serial Conversion Narratives: from: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) PICKETT HOLLY CRAWFORD
Abstract: As pervasive as it is, change is an exceptionally difficult concept to understand or to accept. We may never step in the same river twice, but life surely is easier both logistically and psychologically if we act as if we do.¹ Religious conversion, at its most fundamental, is change, whether from ‘irreligion to religion; or from one religion to another; or from one denomination to another; or from one theological position to another; or from a second hand to first hand experience of religion.’² A 1604 English dictionary defines the verb convertsimply with the wordsturne,change.³ From the

Chapter Five The Penitent Lover (Rvf 184–263) from: Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In chapter 4 we saw emerge a history of the subject who foregrounded the act of writing by documenting his past and affirming the ethically constructive nature of poetry. In the desire to narrate was discovered a source of the sacred, a spiritual quality intrinsic to the act of selfdisclosure. In my analysis of the poet’s use of antithesis, I showed how this trope belied the stereotype of psychological inertia and became a source of eurhythmic harmony. So, too, the use of parallelism was seen to bring into focus the problematic of desire and the will, mitigating the presence of

After the war: from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: We talk about urbanization and industrialization as a general indication of these mysterious forces. It is important always to stress the extraordinary suddenness of these phenomena in our midst and how weak were the means, psychological as well as economic, available to deal with

What is politics? from: The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: The collective planning of a future can never be identified primarily with a political party program. Not that political parties are to be scorned: they represent collections of opinions, interests, and ideas that have surfaced in a combination of historical circumstances and, at the risk of hardening, have sometimes gone under later on. But political parties have their own logic, originating in the needs of their struggle to reach power. They skim the projects emerging in their vicinity, even though they make more discreet accommodations with those more subtle forces at work in the collectivities.

Epilogue: from: Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty’s earliest public writings showed him to be a young philosopher acutely sensitive to what I have called, perhaps a little crudely, the transcendent dimension to human existence. In his first phenomenological studies, which included Scheler and Marcel, he learned the importance and significance of commitment as being a constituent element of knowledge. On the one hand this insight led him to abandon the dogmatic philosophical and religious traditions in which he had been reared. On the other it led him to make new commitments with a more practical significance. The first of these, the personalism of Mounier and his

Chapter Four PHENOMENOLOGY from: French Existentialism
Abstract: The method of philosophy which the French non-Christian existentialists choose is phenomenology, which has been inherited from Husserl and Heidegger, and if the approach of Sartre and his followers to philosophy is to be understood their debt to these two German thinkers must be remembered. The Christian existentialists have also, in their own way, been interested in phenomenology. Marcel developed his own phenomenological method before Husserl’s works were known and he is regarded by some as a more authentic phenomenologist than Husserl or the non-Christian existentialists.¹ Gilson affirms that the phenomenological method has effected the most profound study of the

Introduction from: Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Solandt O. M.
Abstract: ONE OF THE MOST DISTINCTIVE features of our times has been the rise of the scientistengineer to positions of importance, both in the management of industry and, more importantly, in the shaping of political events throughout the world. Dr. Augustus Braun Kinzel is the epitome of this dynamic and effective group of engineer-scientists who are supplying the technological leadership that has put the United States ahead of the world. He has also helped to supply the sane and friendly outlook that has made the United States such a good neighbour to Canada and to the world.

4 Biennial Culture’s Reluctant Nomads from: The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In October 2007, Doris Salcedo performed another sort of archaeological dig when she occupied the massive space of the Tate Modern’s Turbine Hall with Shibboleth, a 548-foot fissure that snakes its way along the length of the floor, beginning as a hairline crack and at times gaping to expose what appears to be a bottomless crevasse, lined with concrete and chain-link fencing. A complex meditation on the experience of immigration that simultaneously evokes the often treacherous experience of crossing borders and the “negative space” occupied by migrants within the increasingly policed borders of the European Union, the work seems determined

4. Transcending the Urban: from: Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Bell Amanda
Abstract: Speaking in Enniskillen, Northern Ireland in August 2013, Kathleen Jamie remarked that her interest in writing about the natural world began a decade earlier, a reference to the 2004 publication of The Tree House.¹ However, the seeds of her ecological sensibility are evident in the 1994 collectionThe Queen of Sheba, which can be seen as the beginning of her mature work. Usually noted for its ‘various forensic critiques of modern Scotland’,² the collection can also be read as a paradigm for the development of an ecopoetics.

Introduction from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) STOKES PATRICK
Abstract: Questions of self-constitution and personal identity have been amongst the most heavily contested topics in Anglophone philosophy over the last half-century. Yet the pedigree of this discussion goes back considerably further. Such questions are clearly at work as early as the second-century theologians Athenagoras and Irenaeus, who worried about how identity could be preserved in bodily resurrection,¹ and this eschatological dimension to the question was still very much alive in early modern discussions of mind and identity. Even Locke’s treatment of personal identity in his Essay Concerning Human Understanding– which has conditioned the entire discussion to the present day to

2 Teleology, Narrative and Death from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) ALTSHULER ROMAN
Abstract: Consider the fission problem: a single human being, A, is divided into two such humans, B and C, through teleportation, divine intervention, or some other mythical power. Both B and C are psychologically continuous with A. As the established account of personal identity would have it, psychological continuity is sufficient for personal identity.¹ But if fission is conceptually possible, the psychological continuity view of personal identity faces a problem: since both B and C are psychologically continuous and thus identical with A, given the transitivity of identity it must follow that B and C are identical with each other. And

5 Kierkegaard’s Erotic Reduction and the Problem of Founding the Self from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) STRAWSER MICHAEL
Abstract: The ‘signature narrative thesis’ serves particularly well in explaining how personal identity gets constituted through one’s reflective consciousness or understanding, although it leaves open the question of how reflective consciousness itself is constituted (cf. Davenport 2012: 2–3). Is the ‘self’ identical to the narrative form of a person’s understanding, or is there a deeper self than that which emerges on the reflective level? In contrast to this narrative view, according to recent scholarship the phenomenological tradition unanimously affirms that the core self is to be found in pre-reflective consciousness. Further, Kierkegaard has not only been suggested to be significant

11 Narrativity, Aspect and Selfhood from: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) SIGRIST MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Contemporary discussions about narrativity and selfhood commonly make reference to Alastair MacIntyre’s After Virtueand to the work of Charles Taylor from the seventies and eighties, especiallySources of the Self. Paul Ricoeur’s writings on the subject also figure prominently, and more recently, Marya Schechtman’sThe Constitution of Selveshas powerfully shaped the terms of the debate. Each of these philosophers defends a narrative model of personal identity as an alternative to physicalist or embodied theories, on the one hand, and psychological theories on the other. These latter approaches have tried to understand selfhood either by appeal to a self-identical

‘Into Unknown Country’: from: Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Harland Faye
Abstract: Between the mid-nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a transition occurred in modern fiction as writers became increasingly reliant on the visual. In his study Fiction and the Camera Eye, Alan Spiegel argues that this new visual consciousness in the novel was symptomatic of the shift from a theological to a scientific understanding of the world, meaning that, in modern fiction, ‘truth’ can only be revealed through sensory experience rather than authorial intervention.¹ In an uncertain modern world, Spiegel suggests, an author is no longer an authority; the common practice of pausing action in the novel to allow for exposition was

CHAPTER 7 Theo Angelopoulos’ Early Films and the Demystification of Power from: The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Karalis Vrasidas
Abstract: Theo Angelopoulos’ trilogy of History consists of Μέρες του ’36 ( Days of ’36, 1972), Ο Θίασος (The Travelling Players, 1975) and Οι Κυνηγοί (The Hunters, 1977). In Ο Μεγαλέξανδρος (Megalexandros, 1980), the last film of this period, Angelopoulos adopts the idea of representation not as a reconstruction of things past but as the visualisation of their ability to lose their historicity and be transformed into legends and epic tales. Some scholars (see Bordwell 2005: 143) and the editors of this book consider the film to be the logical offspring of the aforementioned films and they see it as an addition

7 HOW ARE/OUR WORK: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kelly Timothy
Abstract: If there is an ethics of reading and writing an ethics we certainly see in Husserl’s commitment to the dissemination of descriptions and observations that contradict the ‘ dream’ of phenomenological plenitude, fullness, completion

13 READING THE IMAGE OF RACE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Metzl Jonathan M.
Abstract: On 26 April 2013, the Wall Street Journalpublished an essay by neurocriminologist Adrian Raine promoting his newest book,The Anatomy of Violence: The Biological Roots of Crime. On the newspaper’s website, an image of a black-andwhite brain scan overlaid with handcuffs headed the essay. Clicking ‘play’ turned the image into a video filled with three-dimensional brain illustrations and Raine’s claims that some brains are simply more biologically prone to violence than others. Rejecting what he describes as ‘the dominant model for understanding criminal behaviour in the twentieth century’ – a model based ‘almost exclusively on social and sociological’ explanations 1

16 BREATHING AND BREATHLESSNESS IN CLINIC AND CULTURE: from: The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carel Havi
Abstract: A central tenet of critical medical humanities is the claim that biomedicine does not hold all the keys to understanding the experience of illness, how responses to treatment are mediated, or how it outcomes and prognosis are revealed over time. We further suggest that biomedicine cannot wholly explain how illness may be expressed physiologically. So much that influences that expression derives from cultural context, emotional response, and how illness is interpreted and understood that this knowledge cannot be exhausted with the tools of biomedicine.

Chapter 4 Catherine Malabou: from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: This second of two chapters on neurological transformations of the human will focus on epigenesis, a particularly fruitful notion for the elaboration of a non-reductive materialist account of the self. At the end of the previous chapter I drew a distinction between the mind–brain problem and the self–brain problem; in the present chapter I will take up that distinction in order to pursue the question of the identity of self (rather than the mind or brain) over time. In the previous chapter I considered how Malabou can overcome the tethering of the question of humanity as such to

Chapter 5 Michel Serres: from: French Philosophy Today
Abstract: In Chapter 4 we saw how Malabou in Avant demainopens the door to the possibility of an eco-synaptic account of personhood and selfhood which moves beyond the problematic way in which her earlier work tethers the human to the ‘host substance’ of the brain. Furthermore,Avant demainmoves towards a more situated, complex figure of the human being taking into account the various co-written narratives in which each human being is entangled, as well as (and on equal terms with) the synaptic encoding of memories and the allied capacity for recall. This move towards a more situated, ecological notion

1 Imagining Ancient Arabs: from: Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: The evidence about pre-Islamic Arabian populations emanates from two perspectives: (1) the writings of peoples from outside Arabia who, across the 1,500 years from the Assyrians in the ninth century BCE to Islam’s rise in the seventh century CE, recorded many stories about Arabians, and (2) voices from within the Arabian Peninsula itself, preserved in inscriptions from as early as the eighth century BCE. Both bodies of sources contain numerous and intriguing references to an array of ancient peoples whose names resemble ‘Arab’, and it may seem logical enough that Arab history can be written by synthesising the material, but,

5 Liturgical Labour: from: Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) McLoughlin Daniel
Abstract: Agamben has described contemporariness as ‘a singular relationship with one’s own time, which adheres to it and, at the same time, keeps a distance from it’.¹ He suggests that the way that one maintains such a disjunction to the present is by ‘perceiving the indices and signatures of the most archaic in the most modern’.² The archaic does not, however, simply mean that which is chronologically distant: it is what is ‘close to the origin’, an archethat remains an operative force within historical becoming.

CHAPTER 1 Across the Russian Border from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Leitch Thomas
Abstract: Adaptation, the process by which texts are transformed to suit them to new media (novels made into films) or historical periods (updated theatrical versions of The Seagull) or languages (translations from Russian to English or English to Russian), is essentially a metaphorical concept that is defined and understood, though often without acknowledgment, with reference to the biological processes whereby organisms and species survive by adapting to new environments. The metaphorical valence of the term has only been intensified by the range of synonyms commentators have offered to help understand it. Robert Stam has suggested that we can think about “adaptation

CHAPTER 3 On Not Showing Dostoevskii’s Work: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Hasty Olga Peters
Abstract: How does French filmmaker Robert Bresson, who minimizes affect and expressivity on the screen and rejects psychological realism in filmmaking, connect with the Russian novelist Fedor Dostoevskii, a master of psychology whose works burst with emotional turmoil and scandal? The question is an important one because underlying these obvious stylistic differences are ideational ties with Dostoevskii that are vital to Bresson’s films. Allen Thiher observes that “[i]n nearly all his works, […] Bresson’s narrative turns in one way or another on isolation and humiliation, on estrangement and the impossibility of a desired community.”² It is precisely these quintessentially Dostoevskian concerns,

CHAPTER 6 “A Vicious Circle”: from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Burry Alexander
Abstract: Anton Chekhov’s “Ward no. 6” (1892) has inspired a large and varied body of hypertexts in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. The story’s basic premise of a psychiatric doctor who is incarcerated in the same mental hospital he used to run proved extraordinarily generative for Russian writers in the following century, especially given the notorious Soviet practice of labeling political dissidents insane. Valerii Tarsis and Venedikt Erofeev, among others, reflect this aspect of the story in their works.¹ Other major themes of “Ward no. 6,” such as the unstable boundary between madness and sanity, psychological isolation from other people, and

CHAPTER 8 Against Adaptation? from: Border Crossing
Author(s) Renfrew Alastair
Abstract: The rise of the so-called “formal method” in the immediate post-revolutionary years has been associated almost exclusively with questions of literary specificity, and with the search for a methodology that would not only exceed various forms of intentionalism and/or determinism, but would also destroy the pretensions of a general aesthetics to account for the presumably transgredient “essence” of art.³ As a consequence, the logical corollary of any claims for the specificity of the literary, namely that this implies also the formal specificity of the other modes of art from which literature is differentiated, has been just as consistently neglected: What

Chapter 7 Interlocution from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Sontag became aware of Benjamin’s work in the early 1960s. The first mention of his name occurs in a thin spiral notebook dated on the cover September 1963. Inside, however, the entries show abrupt chronological leaps from 1963 to March 1965; the entries continue to April 1965, then jump back to 1964. Tucked between a cluster of pages dated 1964 and an entry for April 1965 is the first reference to Benjamin. We find his name written next to ideas from The Antiquiertheit des Menschen(1957) by philosopher Günther Anders. The fragment expands on ‘the technique of reproduction’, on ‘a

Coda (to the Gentle Reader) from: In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: UCLA, 26 August 2011. Something happened to my notes on Box 175, the box containing the research materials for Regarding the Pain of Others. All the notes have gone. The Leica ads, Fenton and First World War photography materials, the Elizabeth Bishop poem … the anthropological gaze – everything gone. I am trying to reconstruct the notes, but it is not simple. In the attempt to remember, I realise that Sontag’s research relied above all on newspaper and magazine articles, in particularThe New YorkerandThe New York Times. But there was also an article in Italian bearing in

Chapter 2 Burrowing and Bogs: from: Seamus Heaney
Abstract: This chapter and the fifth one pay great attention to the volumes that bookend Heaney’s career— Death of a NaturalistandHuman Chain—to show the arc of his poetic development, the way themes first adumbrated in the 1966 volume are carried through, re-explored, transformed, and sometimes dropped by the time of the 2010 volume. All the poetry chapters also spend more time on his best volumes—my top five, in chronological order, areNorth, Field Work, Station Island, Seeing Things,andHuman Chain—than it does on the slighter ones, many of which nonetheless have poems I analyze that

Introduction: from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: The same could be said of this book which, like Said’s, started life as a series of ‘three consecutive lectures’ given in a non-musicological context, in this case as the University of Newcastle’s

Chapter 11 Radical Measures from: Lyric Cousins
Abstract: In recent years, the idea of ‘the poem’ has been pulled in polarising directions. In the last chapter, we began to see how an ideological debate is under way that echoes what’s taken place in Western art music since the middle of the twentieth century. This is not just a question of style. Poetic ‘sense’, already a complicated, unstable concept, is being challenged and transformed.

6 The Origin of Parrēsia in Foucault’s Thinking: from: From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Published in 1961, the History of Madnessis a monumental study of madness in the “Classical Age” (that is, in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, primarily in France). In its original form, theHistory of Madnessdisplays a debt to phenomenology as it was interpreted in France after World War II. This debt is most apparent in Foucault’s use of the word “experience,” a use that Foucault later will call “enigmatic” (Foucault 1972: 16) and “floating” (Foucault 1984: 336). It is perhaps the vestiges of phenomenological thinking in theHistory of Madnessthat leads to Derrida’s 1963 criticism of Foucault,

9 Three Ways of Speaking, or “Let Others be Free”: from: From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Foucault, Derrida, and Deleuze have recognized the originality of the idea of the performative (Austin 1962).¹ Chronologically, Foucault comes first. In his 1969 The Archaeology of Knowledge, he turns to the “speech act” as “one last possibility, and the most probable of all, of defining the statement [l’énoncé]” (Foucault 1972: 82).² After describing the performative, Foucault concludes that a “bi-univocal relation” between the statement and the performative cannot exist (Foucault 1972: 83). There is one primary reason, according to Foucault, why the performative cannot define the statement. Even if one says that an illocutionary act is complete, one has to

Chapter 10 Becoming and History: from: Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Feldman Alex
Abstract: Deleuze returned often to the “admiration” and “affection” he felt for Foucault.¹ In the 1970s, he began to present Foucault as the contemporary philosopher who had done the most to reframe the question of history. Coming from a philosopher who insists so much on the opposition between becoming and history, this admiration invites notice. Deleuze, like Foucault, but also with him, and while discovering his thought, confronts this new way of dealing with empirical historicity: to take it epistemologically, in the form of the archive, without, for all that, renouncing the critique of linear chronology and of teleological or causal

Conclusion: from: Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: To rehearse: what has been established under the heading of differential narratology is becoming as it pertains to narrative, narrativity in constant variation generating ever new variants of narrative; the virtual dance of narrative differentials producing actual, numerically differentiated narratives; the intensive sensations and forces of transcendental Narrative (affects, percepts, forces) bringing about the extensive states of affairs and networks of empirical narratives (events, existents, plots). In short, becoming, the dynamic and continuous process of selecting and gathering heterogeneous elements to be expressed, has been revealed as the ontologically primary virtual realm of any given actual narrative. But this has

Chapter 4 A History of the Method: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Hardy Nick
Abstract: Since Foucault started publishing in the early 1960s much ink has been spilled by both his detractors and supporters alike.¹ An interesting point to note, however, is that each tends to assign to Foucault’s work a level of coherence and/or integration that is overall quite difficult to substantiate. One of the most famous of the supportive texts is by Dreyfus and Rabinow (1982), gained from their discussions and interviews with Foucault during his annual research trips to the University of California, Berkeley. Dreyfus and Rabinow appoint to Foucault’s work a definite methodological evolution that clearly separates his ‘archaeological’ and ‘genealogical’

Chapter 6 Écriture Féminine from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Thompson Zoë Brigley
Abstract: When I say I believe women& men read & write differently I mean that women & men read & write pretty differently. Whether this is biologically ‘essential’ or just straightforward like when you left the toaster burning or because women have a subordinated relationship to power in their guts I don’t know. Is this clear enough for you to follow.

Chapter 8 Structure and Subject from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Williams Caroline
Abstract: This chapter will examine the philosophical movement that has utilised and taken as its starting point the concepts of structure and subject. Both concepts are riddled with tensions and ambiguities, not least because they are used by a diverse collection of philosophers whose writings are commonly placed under the banner of structuralism and poststructuralism. They are concepts with their own distinct histories, their own logical and ontological bases (albeit contestable ones), but in the 1950s and 1960s, particularly in France, they come together, cross over and support one another, articulating a series of profound and influential problems and questions that

Chapter 11 Derrida’s Language: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Anderson Nicole
Abstract: On 9 May 1992, Barry Smith and eighteen cosignatories wrote a letter to the The Timesin an attempt to sway Cambridge University dons not to award Derrida an Honorary Degree. (It failed. The vote was 336 to 204 in favour of Derrida.) This event became known as the ‘Cambridge Affair’. In this letter Barry Smith and company claim that Derrida’s writing ‘does not meet with accepted standards of clarity and rigour … his works employ a written style that defies comprehension … [and] consist in no small part of elaborate jokes and puns “logical phallusies” [sic] and the like’.

Chapter 13 Luce Irigaray: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Russell Yvette
Abstract: Like a great many of the authors discussed in this book, Irigaray would probably contest her labelling as a ‘poststructuralist’¹ and her work is so varied and draws on such a wide range of sources and methodological traditions that any categorisation risks excluding or eliding important aspects of her thinking. What I think is important, however, and the value that this opportunity provides is to look again at her work and to do so alongside those other authors whose work contributes to the great Western canon of philosophy, the interrogation of which Irigaray has dedicated a great deal of her

Chapter 14 Photography and Poststructuralism: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Edge Sarah
Abstract: In his final text Camera Lucida, first published in 1970, Roland Barthes gave his closing views on how photographs should be approached as a signifying system. ‘The important thing’, he proposes, ‘is that the photograph possesses an evidential force, and that its testimony bears not on the object but on the time. From a phenomenological viewpoint, in the photograph, the power of authentication exceeds the power of representation’ (Barthes 1984: 88–9). This final reflection by Barthes signposts the peculiarity of the photographic system which is made up of two signs, the indexical and the iconic; one belonging to the

Chapter 15 Deleuze and the Image of Film Theory from: The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Holohan Conn
Abstract: In the two books he wrote on the cinematic image, Gilles Deleuze proposes a fundamental break in the history of film form. This break occurred, he declares, sometime around the end of the Second World War and finds its first expression in the work of Italian neorealist film-makers such as Roberto Rossellini. In Rossellini’s images of aimless characters wandering through the ruins of a bombed-out Europe, Deleuze uncovers a decisive rupture with the logic of classical cinema, a rejection of the possibility for action upon which classical narrative depends. Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Imagewere published

Metaphysical and Moral Idealism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Armour Leslie
Abstract: The metaphysical and moral idealism that dominated philosophy in Britain and North America in the last decades of the nineteenth-century reached its zenith in the early years of the twentieth-century. It then faced serious challenges, but it also received support from unexpected sources – first from physicists like Sir James Jeans and Sir Arthur Eddington and then from Kurt Gödel, thought by many to be the most original logician and mathematician of the century. Idealism’s proponents continued to struggle, but at the end of the century the movement was showing signs of returning to its roots in reflection on the

Anglo-American Neo-Idealism from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Historically, idealists have emphasized and indeed often prioritized the role of our human mind-guided modus operandi over that of nature-at-large as basis for the philosophical understanding of ourselves and our place in the world’s scheme of things. Idealism has many versions. To begin with, there is the causalidealism that looks to the productive role of mind or spirit in the constituting of nature.¹ Then, too, there is theaxiologicalidealism that assigns a formative role to values.² There is also theabsoluteidealism which, despite Hegelian kinship, found its root inspection – at least among English-speaking philosophers – in

Logical Positivism and the Vienna Circle from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Hodgson Bernard
Abstract: The philosophical movement of logical positivism originated in the early 1920s with a group of philosophers and scientists who gathered around Moritz Schlick when he became professor of Philosophy at the University of Vienna – hence, the alternative designation of the Vienna Circle. Among the leading philosophers, besides Schlick, were Rudolph Carnap, Otto Neurath, Herbert Feigl, and Friedrich Waismann. Allied with the Vienna group were philosophers from the Berlin school of which Hans Reichenbach, Richard von Mises and Carl Hempel were prominent members. The group was later joined in the early 1930s by a philosopher who became its leading exponent

Philosophy of Mind: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Burge Tyler
Abstract: I want to outline some of the main developments in the philosophy of mind in the last half of the twentieth century. Behaviorism dominated psychology during approximately the same period that logical positivism dominated philosophy. The principles of behaviorism are less easily stated than those of logical positivism. It is perhaps better seen as a method that eschewed use of mentalistic vocabulary in favor of terms that made reference to dispositions to behavior. Both movements aimed at banishing nonscientific speculation, and forcing theory to hew as closely as possible to methods of confirmation. Both methodological doctrines came to be seen

Philosophy of Logic from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study

A Century of Transition in the Philosophy of Science from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Jones-Imhotep Edward
Abstract: Philosophy of science, in the past 100 years, has been propelled forward by the rapid expansion of the natural sciences, and by the coincidental rise of analytic philosophy. Many of the core issues galvanized in the philosophy of science from the 1930s through the 1960s continue to be debated – for example, the nature of causation, the realism/anti-realism controversy in science, and the intricacies of what constitutes scientific explanation.¹ Perhaps less appreciated as a trend in the philosophy of science, however, is the inclusion into the discipline of explanations and theories that have a social or sociological aspect. These issues

Political Philosophy from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Neumann Michael
Abstract: Political philosophy plays virtually no role in the early history of analytic philosophy. The most prominent political philosopher after Mill, Thomas Hill Green, had too much of Kant and Rousseau to suit the tastes of the early analytic philosophers. G. E. Moore and C. D. Broad concerned themselves with ethics, not political philosophy. Bertrand Russell went on to write political works, but they had virtually no philosophical stature or influence. But what really blocked the development of an analytic political philosophy was the rise of logical positivism and ordinary language philosophy. These movements manifested not only suspicion but contempt for

Phenomenology from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia

Different/ciations: from: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: Philosophies of difference, where difference holds its ground without being subordinated to identity, are exceedingly rare. It is not by chance that the fortunes of philosophical heterologies are better served inside process philosophies. Although to be a process philosopher is not a guarantee that one will also be a philosopher of pure difference, movement and the reflection on movement that constitute the raison d’être of the philosophies of process offer a rich soil for the nurture of difference. But a process philosophy, in order to support a purely heterological thought, has to be capable of doing without subjects steering the

2 The Absolute in German Idealism and Romanticism from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Nassar Dalia T.
Abstract: One of the most obscure, yet significant, concepts in early nineteenth-century philosophy is that of the Absolute. As a word, the Absolute came into philosophical discourse with Schelling to mean the ontological ground of and point of identity between subject and object. In this sense Hegel adopted the term in his early works, while in his later writings he came to identify the Absolute with the process and final conclusion of reason. Although it is these figures who employed the words ‘the Absolute’ ( das Absolute), the idea of the Absolute as the ontological ground in which subject and object are

6 Darwinism and Philosophy in the Nineteenth Century: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Moore Gregory
Abstract: More than twenty years before the publication of The Origin of Species, Charles Darwin was already certain that his embryonic hypothesis would have far-reaching consequences and not just in biology. ‘My theory’, he wrote in 1837, ‘would give zest to recent and fossil comparative anatomy; it would lead to the study of instinct, heredity and mind-heredity, [the] whole [of] metaphysics’ (Darwin 1887: 1: 370). By emphasising mutability and struggle instead of stability and harmony, by banishing the last intellectually respectable vestiges of supernaturalism, by asserting a genealogical continuity between humanity and the rest of the animal kingdom that shone light

8 Philosophising History: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Connelly James
Abstract: Until the twentieth century, the term ‘philosophy of history’ usually denoted not an epistemological inquiry but systematic claims concerning the

10 Embodiment: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Sinclair Mark
Abstract: In contemporary philosophy the phenomenological movement has offered a compelling challenge to the mind–body dualism that was instituted by Descartes amongst others in the seventeenth century. This challenge, perhaps most notably in the work of the French phenomenologist Maurice Merleau-Ponty, does not consist in the reduction of one of the opposed terms to the other in the manner of a thoroughgoing or ‘eliminative’ materialism but rather rests on a broader critique of both terms. The self, it is argued, is not originally an isolated thinking subject, certain of its own thoughts and separable from the body, whilst the body is

11 The Unconscious in the German Philosophy and Psychology of the Nineteenth Century from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Cronin Ciaran
Abstract: The adjective ‘unconscious’ designates a quality that can be found in psychical processes such as imagining, remembering, thinking, feeling, desiring, wishing and acting. The processes which exhibit this quality differ from those with the quality ‘conscious’ in that the former are not present in the current field of consciousness but nevertheless remain psychologically effective, indeed, often far more so than the processes which have the quality of being conscious. The substantive, the ‘unconscious’, expresses the fact that psychological phenomena are not confined in principle to conscious experiences but are profoundly shaped by unconscious forces. In psychoanalysis, this concept also designates

15 Nihilism in the Nineteenth Century: from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Gillespie Michael
Abstract: The term ‘nihilism’ has been used to denote a philosophical concept or position, a psychological or sociological state or mood, a doctrine or agenda for political action and a cultural condition or movement. Moreover, the connotations of the term within each of these areas are multiple, complicated and contested. It is thus not easy to define the term or to determine the nature of the phenomenon that the term describes. This difficulty is exacerbated by the fact that the term has been principally used as a pejorative by opponents to characterise a condition, doctrine, or movement that they fear, disagree

17 Nineteenth-Century Philosophy in the Twentieth Century and Beyond from: The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Bowie Andrew
Abstract: Reflections on the relationships between one period of philosophy and another raise important methodological issues which first emerge in their modern form in the wake of Kant, Herder and other thinkers in the second half of the eighteenth century. This is the period in which the ramifications of the idea that philosophy is bound up with the historical circumstances of its production begin to be apparent. In the light of these ramifications, the apparently obvious aim of identifying anticipations or echoes of twentieth-century forms of philosophy in the nineteenth century is by no means as straightforward as it might at

5 Memories of Modernism: from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Ieven Bram
Abstract: One of the recurring tropes within modernist theories of images, and filmic images in particular, is their tendency to play out the tensions between the seeming immediacy of the visual, its epiphany-like and revelatory force that suggests a truth beyond arguing on the one hand, and a focus on the technological conditions of the image on the other. Within modernist theory these two aspects of the image can be arranged in different ways. Some modernist critics, such as André Bazin, have argued that the technological underpinnings of photographic and filmic images ascertain their historical accuracy, or at the very least

10 The Medium Is Not the Message: from: Rancière and Film
Author(s) Steintrager James A.
Abstract: Let me begin with a provocation: Jacques Rancière is not a media theorist. This provocation is notmine but his, and he makes it in order insist that we account for the complex genealogy of aesthetics rather than giving in to the temptations of reduction and simplification inherent in much media theory. Thus, in the prologue toFilm Fables, Rancière remarks: ‘There is no shortage of theoreticians who have attempted to ground the art of moving images on the solid base of the means specific to it. But the means specific to yesterday’s analogical machine and today’s digital machine have

CHAPTER 3 Investigating Cultural Producers from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Davis Aeron
Abstract: This chapter is in four parts. Each of the first three parts offers a brief overview of the more common research approaches used to investigate cultural production. These are broadly categorised here as political economy, textual analysis and sociological/ethnographic work. The fourth part then concentrates on the third of these and the practical considerations involved. In both parts the discussion and examples draw on my own experiences of researching cultural production in the news industry and within the subcultures of financial and political elite networks. At the time of writing I have interviewed over 250 professionals employed in journalism, public

CHAPTER 4 Investigating Cultural Consumers from: Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Meyer Anneke
Abstract: Consumption in its many forms is not a new phenomenon (Storey 1999), but since the end of the Second World War, consumption in industrialised countries has proliferated to such an extent that the phrase ‘consumer society’ was coined. Arguably, culturalconsumption has especially increased because technological advances have led to the development and spread of new forms of media and information and communication technologies (ICTs). These have in turn generated new forms of cultural texts and made cultural consumption more accessible. The term ‘cultural consumer’ refers to those who consume cultural texts or engage in cultural practices involving consumption. Key

2 The critique of Difference from: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: Philosophies of Differenceengages the philosophies of Nietzsche, Heidegger, Derrida and Deleuze in order to mark a distinction between philosophical thinking (which perhaps in the work of these thinkers is pushed in some sense to its limit) and a new, more general mode of thinking which will be called non-philosophy. Laruelle’s text itself bridges the diff erence both methodologically and thematically between these two kinds of thought; it is at once philosophicalandnon-philosophical. Keeping in mind that non-philosophy is not meant to be a negation but rather a generalisation of philosophy, we should understand this ‘at once’ as in

4 The Heideggerean model of Difference: from: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: If for Laruelle Nietzsche establishes the standard model of philosophy as Difference, Heidegger marks the full taking-stock of Difference in relation to the Western tradition as such and draws out the consequences of its immanent critique as the culmination of metaphysics. Whereas Laruelle characterises the Nietzschean model of Difference as one of ‘Idealism’, he designates the Heideggerean model as that of ‘Finitude’. Laruelle’s reading of Heidegger follows the late Heidegger in treating the thought of the ontological difference of Being and beings as still determined and thus relatively constrained by the history of metaphysics. Thus for the late Heidegger, as

Book Title: Poetic Language-Theory and Practice from the Renaissance to the Present
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Jones Tom
Abstract: The discussions provide a jargon-free account of a wide range of historical and contemporary schools of thought about poetic language, and an organised, coherent critique of those schools (including analytical philosophy, cognitive poetics, structuralism and post-structuralism). Via close readings of whole poems from 1600 to the present readers are taken through a wide range of modernist, experimental and innovative poetries. Paired chapters within a chronological structure allow lecturers and students to approach the material in a variety of ways (by individual chapters, paired historical periods) that are appropriate to different courses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b4vx

CHAPTER SIX Spirit: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: Most of the ways in which poetic language is said to be poetic that are discussed in this book are more or less superficially or formally evident in the language, either in its metre, syntax, figurative constructions, phonological repetitions or elsewhere. This and the following chapter on Frank O’Hara focus on arguments suggesting that a force behind, and not immediately evident in, language is the source of its poeticalness. Such arguments beg the question: if the spirit (force, charge, drive) that manifests itself in poetic language is a poetic spirit, and is identifiable only in and through that language, can

CHAPTER EIGHT Measure: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: In the twentieth century, American poets, whether ‘formalist’ or ‘experimental’ are found relating poetic measure to the rhythmic structure of life. Howard Nemerov thinks that patterns in verse ‘seem to represent the world itself in its either pious or stupid comings and goings, its regular recurrences and rhythmical repetitions, cosmic in the heavens, terrene in the tides, physiological in the beating of the heart’.¹ And William Carlos Williams urges poets to make experiments that ‘will be directed toward the discovery of a new measure, I repeat, a new measure by which may be ordered our poems as well as our

CHAPTER ELEVEN Selection: from: Poetic Language
Abstract: My main concerns in this chapter are the restrictions placed upon the selection of words that make up poems, whether these restrictions are more personal or social (if that distinction makes sense), and how selection for poems relates to selectional procedures in language more generally. In relation to this last topic I consider selection in the work of the generative linguist Noam Chomsky. Whilst generative grammar and modern logic understand selection as an operation pertaining to particular terms in an individual’s lexicon, following, or refusing to follow, certain rules, other theorists of literary language have focused on the selection of

CHAPTER 9 Textual Analysis as a Research Method from: Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Belsey Catherine
Abstract: How important is textual analysis in research? What is it? How is it done? And what difference does it make? My contention will be that textual analysis is indispensable to research in cultural criticism, where cultural criticism includes English, cultural history and cultural studies, as well as any other discipline that focuses on texts, or seeks to understand the inscription of culture in its artefacts. And since textual analysis is in the end empirical, I shall set out to exemplify my methodological account with a single instance. The project is to imagine that Titian’s painting of Tarquin and Lucretiaconstitutes

Book Title: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world-A Heideggerian Study
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Simone Emma
Abstract: Breaking fresh ground in Woolfian scholarship, this study presents a timely and compelling interpretation of Virginia Woolf's textual treatment of the relationship between self and world from the perspective of the philosophy of Martin Heidegger. Drawing on Woolf's novels, essays, reviews, letters, diary entries, short stories, and memoirs, the book explores the political and the ontological, as the individual's connection to the world comes to be defined by an involvement and engagement that is always already situated within a particular physical, societal, and historical context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1n7qhrd

Chapter 5 Moments of Being and the Everyday from: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: The preceding chapters have explored Woolf’s emphasis throughout her writings on the notion that the individual’s average everyday mode of Being-in-the-world comes to be defined and ‘held in place’ (‘Sketch’: 92) by the typically veiled forces, conventions and prescriptions of the social order, including the often overlapping discourses of patriarchy, religion, nationalism and history. As discussed, such an approach to the relationship between self and world may be contrasted with Heidegger’s ontological emphasis in Being and Time. In this chapter, the focus shifts to the crucial role that moods and sensations play in Woolf’s textual representations of the individual’s experience

Chapter 2 Merleau-Ponty and the Fold of the Flesh from: Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: Unlike Sartre, Merleau-Ponty moves towards a more direct ontological enquiry into the appearing of the visible-tactile field – the actual – itself, which results in an anti-humanist ontology (or real humanismas he calls it) that locates perceiving bodies within a meaning-generatingfolded flesh; a folded fabric of univocal Being that is beyond any notion of a metaphysical outside or internal transcendent Other. Merleau-Ponty’s ‘fold’ signifies a necessary renewal of philosophical language that entirely bypasses dualism in vernacular form, and subsequently any evocation of transcendence – a limitation that plagues Sartre. This serves to both radicalise Sartre’s socio-political ethic of authenticity as an

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION from: Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Sutch Peter
Abstract: The concept of ‘evil’ has a long history in the western tradition, extending from early theological debate, through tortured discussion of the relationship between moral and religious issues, to a contemporary context in which moral and political theory have domains of discourse in their own right. The religious roots of the idea of ‘evil’, however, have often made it difficult to accommodate in predominantly secular cultures, especially in multicultural contexts where deeply held beliefs may not be widely shared. Indeed, there has been a tendency in recent decades, especially among political theorists, to set the notion aside as outdated or

Chapter 3 CONSTRUCTIVISM AND EVIL from: Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Roberts Peri
Abstract: Constructivism in political theory is opposed to both scepticism and foundationalism. Against the sceptic the constructivist hopes to defend the objectivity of at least some political principles. Against the foundationalist the constructivist hopes to show that the defence of objectivity need not appeal to any account of the necessary and unchanging foundations for moral reasoning. Evil has traditionally been seen in foundationalist terms, as a theological concept depending on the existence of God or as depending on some alternative scheme of absolute moral judgement, in order to mark out a special sort of wrongness. When these foundations have been challenged

CHAPTER 2 BUILDING: SHOPPING IN UTOPIA from: Texts
Abstract: Since the late 1980s, cultural geographers have been increasingly reading landscape as text, considering and employing linguistic metaphors, semiotic analyses, and poststructuralist terminology. In particular, the tools of literary analysis and theory have been helpfully employed to consider the built environment. Also, Henri Lefebvre’s influential book The Production of Space (1974) introduced the idea of ‘social space’, overturning the traditional understanding of ‘space’ as an empty area and replacing it with the view that space is always both occupied and meaningful: is always socially, politically and ideologically constructed and interpreted. Rather like the Bakhtinian idea of the chronotope in literature,

CHAPTER 6 TV SHOW: from: Texts
Abstract: Big Brother was the first of the high-profile ‘Reality Television’ shows. Pioneered in Holland, it was imported to Britain by the production company Endemol.³ From the first, the programme was presented as a sociological experiment, in the vein

CHAPTER 15 VIRTUAL TEXT: AMAZONIAN DEMOCRACY from: Texts
Abstract: In his 1909 story ‘The Machine Stops’, E. M. Forster imagines a future underground world in which a vast mechanised web connects together all of its isolated, enervated citizens. In this society, all communication is undertaken through the machine, but its vast network can connect two people anywhere around the globe. Forster’s story, though less well-known than the later Dystopian visions of Huxley’s Brave New World or Orwell’s 1984, envisions one technological aspect of contemporary life more fully than either.

Chapter 3 Prolepsis from: About Time
Abstract: This chapter is about the anticipation of retrospection and the extended significance that this temporal loop has acquired in our world. I am going to approach the subject through three different meanings of the word prolepsis, or, since the primary significance of prolepsis is anticipation, three different types of the anticipation of retrospection. The first of these I will refer to as the narratological meaning of prolepsis: a term used by Genette and others to describe flashforward. Prolepsis, for Genette, is a moment in a narrative in which the chronological order of story events is disturbed and the narrator narrates

Chapter 8 Tense Times from: About Time
Abstract: The argument about the relationship between time and narrative is now coming into focus. It begins in the Kantian notion that we have no access to things in themselves, but only, as phenomenology holds, to things as they are experienced, apprehended in consciousness, thought about, or understood. But the concept of consciousness cannot be taken for granted. Philosophy in general, both in the phenomenological and in the Anglo-American analytical traditions, has turned to language in order to investigate the realms of experience, perception, thought and understanding. If consciousness is fundamentally linguistic, it follows that we ought to be able to

2 The Politics of Neuroscience from: The Political Mind
Abstract: The neurological material in the foregoing chapter operates within an ontology and epistemology that many in the social sciences have long fought against. At its hard scientific edge, this belief holds that human behaviour is fully explicable through close study of the operations of the brain. All social science and theory would therefore, in time, be superseded by an all-embracing explanatory vocabulary of neurophysiological brainstates. Before we can proceed to unpack such material for use in a political context, this fundamental concern must first be addressed.

3 The Political Use of Emotion from: The Political Mind
Abstract: So far we have seen research from neuropsychology that illustrates the role which nonconscious processing plays in our mental lives. This is connected to the world around us through the role of the body in processing and cognition. One further aspect of this picture is emotion and affect. This chapter will seek to investigate the emotive aspect in thought and the debates as to its biological or social nature. Without going too far down the well-worn road of the nature/nurture debate, it is fairly uncontroversial to claim a socially constructed aspect to emotional experience and expression, even if one believes

4 Endlessly Repeating Ourselves: from: The Political Mind
Abstract: With our satanic question ever in sight, one of our main concerns must be the possibility of change. To think differently, for creative thought to occur, there must be change: at the psychological level and then projected out into the world. The question of breaking out of the confines of the influence of genetic mental structure and socialisation is also a question of how patterns of thought may change. This then is the relation that the present chapter bears to the rest of the book; our experience of time is the experience of change, primarily in terms of linearity, through

5 Psychological Revolt from: The Political Mind
Abstract: Having constructed a conceptualisation of the mind and its connection to its surroundings as well as having painted a picture of the present environment it finds itself in, the psychological possibility of critique remains to be examined. It is easy to state that the mind is shaped wholly by a combination of neurophysical parameters and social experience, but the very fact that one feels so resistant to this idea shows the merits of deeper examination. Consciousness rebels against the notion that its limits can be so circumscribed and the artistic, cultural and philosophical labour of our species is a record

Conclusion: from: The Political Mind
Abstract: Buddhism likens its psychological techniques to a raft that is used to cross a river, the river being dukkha. The raft is merely a tool to be used to gain the further shore and then to be abandoned, its task fulfilled. Likewise, the conceptual apparatus used by Buddhism to effect change should not be clung to after their task is fulfilled. (One may ask whether the task of positive mental transformation is ever at an end and schools such as Zen do posit an ongoing process). These techniques are dubbed ‘skilful means’ and are the conceptual toolkit of Buddhist philosophy

Introduction from: The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: In a recent TV drama one of the characters falls in love with another. ‘It’s only chemicals,’ his friend assures him, but when the friend finds himself in the same position he is unable to take the same view of his own situation. It would be a caricature to represent the dominant paradigm in contemporary Anglo-American philosophy of mind as holding of all our psychological states, ‘It’s only chemicals.’ Yet this paradigm – functionalism – does hold that each of them is, in fact, a physiological state, but one individuated in terms of its function in mediating between sensory inputs

5 Emotions from: The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: By the time you have reached this point in the book you may be exasperated, excited, intrigued or merely bored. Whatever your reaction, if you have any reaction at all you will most likely be experiencing some emotion. But what are emotions, and why do we experience them? Could we be much the sort of creatures that we are, with all our other experiences, thoughts and desires, and yet be devoid of emotional feelings? And if we could not, is that because our emotions somehow derive from these other psychological states, or do they add some indispensable element to them?

Chapter 5 Literature – Repeat Nothing from: Death-Drive
Abstract: The unrequited, pathological, homosexual, Christian-fanatic lover is called Jed

CHAPTER 1 Metaphor and World-Conceiving from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: Few scholars would argue with the idea that words and worldviews are intertwined and that language and thought are related. But when we speak of language, what do we mean? Are we thinking of the language system, or the particular style or type of language used? Most sociologists, political analysts and philosophers are concerned with the ideological content of concepts. Theodor Adorno (1991a, 1991b, 1989), Raymond Williams (1983), Michel Foucault (2004), George Lakoff (1996) and Andrew Goatly (2007) are but a few of those who remind us that words are not innocent and that political systems, reigning ideologies and competing

Introduction to Part II from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: The following three case studies will explore the relationship between speech and metaphor in the construction of ideological worldviews and in the very construction of our concept of language itself. In the first and second case studies, we will discuss the role played by metaphor in constructing ideological worldviews, or what we will increasingly call cultural mindsets. Two unfashionable mindsets have been selected deliberately, in order to upset readers and force them to leave behind their own convictions and concepts, and to enter into an unfamiliar and probably ‘unsavoury’ vision of the world. The first study will investigate the function

CHAPTER 7 The Language of Czechoslovak Communist Power from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: Critics of communism have never been rare, but during the Cold War, critics were obliged to find arguments to defend the West, the American way of life, and democracy as we understood it and enjoyed it in Europe. Since the breakdown of the Soviet model, the Western press and public opinion have on the whole tended to conclude that the failure of the USSR and its satellite states logically reflects our own success. ‘We won the Cold War,’ we like to tell ourselves. The Western press hurried to bury Marxism with slogans like ‘Communism is dead!’ And the euphoria of

CHAPTER 9 Language in Metaphors from: Creating Worldviews
Abstract: In his sardonic book-length account of the various representations attributed to the French language throughout history, De la langue française (1997), Henri Meschonnic quoted Rivarol, one of the ‘great priests’ who knelt down before the majesty of the French language, celebrating its purity, its clarity, its logic, its perfection and its universality. French at the time of Rivarol (the end of the eighteenth century) was the preferred language of European elites from Madrid to Moscow and was widely used as the language of diplomacy; and this was enough to convince Rivarol that the French language was ‘universal’. It was, he

Introduction: from: George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: and his moon-cold logic –

5 The Continental Perspective on the Idea from: The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: If what the postwar gulf-seekers in the analytic movement would have liked to have expelled from the midst of philosophy in the Englishspeaking world really had been fully expelled ( qua actuality as it were) the story of Continental philosophy would perhaps already be a piece of analytical philosophy’s mythological folklore (‘There used to be some people who read that kind of stuff, but not any more, not round here anyway’). Of course, the fundamental argument of the last chapter is that what answers to the idea of Continental philosophy (the risk of ‘sophistry and illusion’) is not something that can

Chapter 6 Friendship in Contemporary Life from: Philosophy and Friendship
Abstract: Chapter 5 argued that the ability to take account of the perceptions and expectations of others is crucial to the development of a coherent or stable conception of self, and that this ability is affected by the kinds of dispositions and attitudes we develop as a result of experience: the formative events in our psychological past; the patterns of salience and habits of thought and response we develop. Our emotions are important conduits for registering and communicating value in this regard. They are intelligent evaluative interpretations, which reveal particular dispositions, attitudes and thoughts to others and to ourselves. The previous

Chapter 2 The Discursive Construction of National Identity from: The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: Since the 1970s, the term ‘discourse’ has become common currency in an everyday research sense in a variety of humanities and social science disciplines, including the applied branches of linguistics. Because of the wide-ranging use of this term, a variety of meanings have been attributed to it (see Ehlich 1993, p. 145, and Ehlich 1994), which has led to considerable semantic fuzziness and terminological flexibility. In the following we will briefly describe the concept of discourse as it is currently employed in the context of the research activities carried out at the University of Vienna, which have also informed the

5 AMERICAN LEGAL CULTURES OF COLLECTIVE SECURITY from: Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: I wish to present a perspective from American culture and history, which may help to explain dominant American tendencies to resort to the unilateral use of force to resolve what Americans take to be demands of their national security. This is very far from wishing to deny the importance of international law, either as an intellectual construct or as an ideological weapon. Indeed, the wider cultural, historical analysis is intended to demonstrate the contrary. International law language is the final battleground in the struggle for legitimacy, which always accompanies the use of force. Nonetheless, international law is plagued by the

Book Title: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?-The Question of Ontology in Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Nancy
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Watkin Christopher
Abstract: Phenomenology or Deconstruction? challenges traditional understandings of the relationship between phenomenology and deconstruction through new readings of the work of Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricœur and Jean-Luc Nancy. A constant dialogue with Jacques Derrida's engagement with phenomenological themes provides the impetus to establishing a new understanding of 'being' and 'presence' that exposes significant blindspots inherent in traditional readings of both phenomenology and deconstruction.In reproducing neither a stock phenomenological reaction to deconstruction nor the routine deconstructive reading of phenomenology, Christopher Watkin provides a fresh assessment of the possibilities for the future of phenomenology, along with a new reading of the deconstructive legacy. Through detailed studies of the philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, Ricœur and Nancy, he shows how a phenomenological tradition much wider and richer than Husserlian or Heideggerean thought alone can take account of Derrida's critique of ontology and yet still hold a commitment to the ontological. This new reading of being and presence fundamentally re-draws our understanding of the relation of deconstruction and phenomenology, and provides the first sustained discussion of the possibilities and problems for any future 'deconstructive phenomenology'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r29kp

Introduction from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: As a philosophical movement at the forefront of contemporary thought, phenomenology might be thought to have had its day. Since Edmund Husserl recast the term in his 1901 Logische Untersuchungen from earlier Hegelian and Kantian usage,¹ it has come to be employed mainly as a yardstick against which to size up other features in the contemporary philosophical landscape, features that are themselves considered to be post-phenomenological. Terms such as ‘intuition’ and ‘reduction’ retain the faint nostalgic glow of a simpler age, when meaning was given to consciousness and the philosopher could go about her business secure in the knowledge that,

1. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In recent years, two trends have coincided in French thought. First, a number of authors have taken it upon themselves to assess the relation of deconstruction and phenomenology, and secondly in the same period a renewed and growing interest has been shown in the work of Maurice Merleau-Ponty.² The two tendencies are by no means independent, for Merleau-Ponty’s work is often cited in relation to deconstructive concerns, either as a precursor³ or as an antagonist.⁴ It appears that the moment has come to assess, if not settle, the ontological accounts between Merleau-Ponty and deconstruction.

2. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In the first chapter we asked if, in the light of the questions Derrida raises in Le Toucher, we can still speak, phenomenologically, about a worldly meaningfulness. We saw that, although Derrida’s worries about what Merleau-Ponty means by ‘presence’ and ‘intuitionism’ do provide cause for concern, there is ‘another’ Merleau-Ponty (to whom Derrida alludes but does not explore at any length) who is not prey to the same accusations. We also began to see that Derrida’s reading rests substantially on a particular understanding of the notion of ‘contact’ as immediate proximity, which it is by no means clear that Merleau-Ponty

4. Paul Ricoeur: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In the previous chapter we explored the relationship between Ricoeur’s hermeneutic phenomenology and Derrida’s deconstruction by moving the ontological question from a focus on ‘what?’ to ‘who?’ While allowing us to make progress in understanding how the question of alterity in Derrida must be reconsidered when we are coming to grips with Ricoeur’s hermeneutics of the self and narrative identity, the investigation also opened, without satisfactorily resolving, the issue of coherence and multiplicity. In stating that the various discourses of Ricoeur’s hermeneutics of the self cohere, we left hanging the question as to how they cohere, which is precisely what

6. Jean-Luc Nancy: from: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: The previous chapter dealt with the question of alterity in Nancy’s work. Now we turn to the problem of commensurability. Chapter 5 considered the possibility of contact with a meaningful world, while this chapter pursues the issue of the conflict of meaning(s) in the world: what is to be done when a number of incommensurable values must be measured against each other or, in other words, how are we to calculate the incalculable? It is the problem we have been posing to Derrida’s deconstruction; it is also the question at the heart of the cosmological motif we have been tracing

7 MEDIA CONSUMERISM AND CULTURAL TRANSFORMATION from: Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Aseka Eric Masinde
Abstract: The so-called information and knowledge age has been characterized by the dominance of two related movements, which serve the age-old human preoccupation with capitalist accumulation. These movements are economic globalization and the revolution in information and communications technologies (ICT). These are movements that may be seen as the engines of the contemporary global economy. They drive the new information world order, in which most of the continent of Africa is not faring too well. The expansion of globalization and ICT is itself largely driven by the logic of the market (Etta and Parvyn-Wamahiu 2003).

Chapter 6 Inconsistencies of Character: from: Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Panagia Davide
Abstract: The reader will notice that Gilles Deleuze barely makes an appearance in what follows. This essay is, for all intents and purposes, an essay about David Hume. Yet, this is an admittedly odd reading of Hume; a reading that refuses to engage him on epistemological terms but is, rather, committed to reading Hume as a ‘minor’ literary figure. Of course, Deleuze wrote a book on Hume and his insights on Hume’s theories of sensation pepper the gamut of his philosophic oeuvreto the point that Deleuze declares that: ‘[T]he logic of sense is inspired in its entirety by empiricism’ (Deleuze

Chapter 2 Pre-Post-Modern Relativism from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: If ‘relativism’ means anything at all, it means a great many things. It is certainly not, though often regarded that way, a one-line ‘claim’ or ‘thesis’: for example, ‘man is the measure of all things’, ‘nothing is absolutely right or wrong’, ‘all opinions are equally valid’, and so forth.¹ Nor is it, I think, a permanent feature of a fixed logical landscape, a single perilous chasm into which incautious thinkers from Protagoras’ time to our own have ‘slid’ unawares or ‘fallen’ catastrophically. Indeed, it may be that relativism, at least in our own era, is nothing at all – a phantom

Chapter 7 Animal Relatives, Difficult Relations from: Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: The title of this chapter points to two sets of interrelated difficulties. Those in the first set arise chronically from our individual psychologically complex and often ambivalent relations to animals. The second set reflects the intellectually and ideologically crisscrossed connections among the various discourses currently concerned with those relations, including the movement for animal rights, ecological ethics, posthumanist theory, and such fields as primatology and evolutionary psychology. I begin with some general observations on kin and kinds – that is, relations and classifications – and then turn to the increasingly complex play of claims and counter-claims regarding the so-called species barrier.

Book Title: Post-Foundational Political Thought-Political Difference in Nancy, Lefort, Badiou and Laclau
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Marchart Oliver
Abstract: A wide-ranging overview of the emergence of post-foundationalism and a survey of the work of its key contemporary exponents.This book presents the first systematic coverage of the conceptual difference between ‘politics’ (the practice of conventional politics: the political system or political forms of action) and ‘the political’ (a much more radical aspect which cannot be restricted to the realms of institutional politics). It is also the first introductory overview of post-foundationalism and the tradition of ‘left Heideggerianism’: the political thought of contemporary theorists who make frequent use of the idea of political difference: Jean-Luc Nancy, Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou and Ernesto Laclau.After an overview of current trends in social post-foundationalism and a genealogical chapter on the historical emergence of the difference between the concepts of ‘politics’ and ‘the political’, the work of individual theorists is presented and discussed at length. Individual chapters are presented on the political thought of Jean-Luc Nancy (including Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe), Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou, and Ernesto Laclau (including Chantal Mouffe).Overall the book offers an elaboration of the idea of a post-foundational conception of politics.Other titles in the Taking on the Political series: Valentine and Arditi/ Polemicisation 0 7486 1064 2Shapiro/ Cinematic Political Thought 0 7486 1289 0Chambers/ Language and the Politics of Untimeliness 0 7486 1766 3Bowman/ Post-Marxism Versus Cultural Studies 978 0 7486 1762 3Simons/ Critical Political Theory in the Media Age 0 7486 1583 0
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2bs1

Chapter 3 The eyes of modernity: from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: In embracing the need for a sociological vision as central to the interpretation of culture and place, a number of Scottish scholars may be cited in the early twentieth century, Patrick Geddes and Robert MacIver among them. But it was a film director, rather than an academic – and one who ‘spent almost his entire adult life outwith Scotland’² – who was to have perhaps the most profound and lasting effect upon the nation’s social imagination. John Grierson finds his place in the Scots Myth by dint of being a classic example of the Great Man: an individual who rose from a

Chapter 5 Retrieving ‘that invisible leeway’: from: The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: The conventional logic of landscape evaluation is that the Romantic Movement was a conservative response to the onset of modernity, emphasising the need to develop ‘culture’ as moral salvation against the instability of urbanisation and industrialisation. Its legacy has seen a supposedly preexisting Arcadia touted as ‘authentic’ for a public that misrecognises fabrication for historical fact. Arguably, alienated from their own acts of creation, cultural producers have reified their own constructions, believing likewise that these reflect a sacred essence of ‘natural beauty’. Icons abound. What more can be said about the social construction of the Scottish landscape?

1. MEMORY AND THE MOVING IMAGE from: Memory and the Moving Image
Abstract: What are the connections between memory and motion pictures? In order to set in motion an investigation into this question, I will need to begin at the beginning, with an inquiry into the nature of memory. How can it be defined? And what are the implications of those definitions for thinking about cinema? The first section of this chapter draws on a range of modes of thinking about memory, from the philosophical to the psycho-sociological to the scientific. However, in pursuing this subject such disciplinary demarcations become unclear. Memory, that elusive topic, seems to pervade and trouble the boundaries not

Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7

Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from: The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As

3 Symptoms, Repetition and the Productive Death Instinct from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: The literary clinical procedure as a creative practice works via repetition, but there is always a chance that the procedure will fail and the repetition will remain unproductive. While failure and success are not to be judged from the point of view of conscious intent, as this would imply a transcendent judgment rather than an immanent evaluation, their effects are nevertheless quite real. The prospect of psychological disintegration, manifesting itself in the worst cases in schizophrenic illness, is, in Deleuze’s conception of writing, an ever-present threat. However, the very reality of this threat offers salvation from it. Failure and success

Conclusion from: Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: This book has presented a reconstruction of Deleuze’s critical and clinical project, arguing that this must be grasped as incomplete in terms of Deleuze’s own writings on the subject, but that it appears as a coherent set of concepts when read alongside the rest of his work. As a result, it has been necessary for me to present Deleuze’s literary clinic in terms of the developments informing the early and middle sections of his career, while at the same time insisting that the methodological principles of immanent critique have remained consistent throughout. If literary criticism and questions of health and

2. Love as Ontology; or, Psychoanalysis against Philosophy from: Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Because it is an antiphilosophy, psychoanalysis has, from its beginnings, remained indifferent or suspicious towards that most philosophical of themes: ontology. One can see this indifference operating at a number of levels. The practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy – and, a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse is more the case: it is

Chapter 5 Landscape, Navigation and Cartography from: Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Exploring and documenting the American landscape, topologically and historically, remained a priority for Rukeyser throughout her working life. By examining the ways in which Rukeyser became involved with and manipulated the forms and techniques of travel reportage and tour guiding – two closely related documentary genres that developed during the 1930s and pervaded writing and image-making well into the 1940s – this chapter will illustrate how she pioneered a poetic cartography that provided witness to both the past and the present.

Chapter 2 Prufrock, Party-Goer: from: The Modernist Party
Author(s) McLoughlin Kate
Abstract: J. Alfred Prufrock would not rank highly on anyone’s list of party-guests. Distinctly lacking in conviviality, the protagonist of T. S. Eliot’s poem anticipates ‘the taking of a toast and tea’ as an excruciating occasion on which the ‘overwhelming question’ he wishes to pose will be, even if he can bring himself to pose it, painfully misunderstood.² The work’s critics have attributed the problem to Prufrock (or Eliot) himself,³ analysing his internal wrestling in terms of fear of female (and male) sexuality,⁴ hysteria and other psychological disorders,⁵ Matthew Arnold’s ‘buried life’,⁶ Sigmund Freud’s notion of the uncanny⁷ and Henri Bergson’s

Chapter 2 ‘An End to Journeying’: from: Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: ‘An End to Journeying’: thus the often-cited, era-defining title – part injunction, part lament – of the first part of Claude Lévi-Strauss’ Tristes tropiques, his seminal anthropological memoir (and, indeed, travel account) of his years in South America. First published in 1955, it was translated from French into English by John Russell in 1961 with the substantially inaccurate, and thus all the more telling, title ofA World on the Wane. The combative, exasperated, self-chastising opening sentences – ‘I hate travelling and explorers. Yet here I am proposing to tell the story of my expeditions’ (Lévi-Strauss 1976: 15) – launches

Book Title: Happy Endings in Hollywood Cinema-Cliche, Convention and the Final Couple
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): MacDowell James
Abstract: The Hollywood ‘happy ending’ has long been considered among the most famous and standardised features in the whole of narrative filmmaking. Yet, while ceaselessly invoked, this notorious device has received barely any detailed attention from the field of film studies. This book is thus the first in-depth examination of one of the most overused and under-analysed concepts in discussions of popular cinema. What exactly is the 'happy ending'? Is it simply a cliché, as commonly supposed? Why has it earned such an unenviable reputation? What does it, or can it, mean? Concentrating especially on conclusions featuring an ultimate romantic union – the final couple – this wide-ranging investigation probes traditional associations between the 'happy ending' and homogeneity, closure, ‘unrealism’, and ideological conservatism, testing widespread assumptions against the evidence offered by a range of classical and contemporary films. Key Features: Defines key features of the Hollywood ‘happy ending’ through detailed textual analysis and theoretical debate. Traces the historical development of the scholarly approaches taken towards the cinematic ‘happy ending’ Reassesses the concept of cinematic closure and its relationship to genre, ideology and ‘unrealism’
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt5hh2m4

CHAPTER 2 Happy endings and closure from: Happy Endings in Hollywood Cinema
Abstract: Happy endings are commonly treated as synonymous with closure, and final couples are commonly regarded as synonymous with happy endings. The logical extension of these assumptions also holds, meaning we often come across claims to the effect that Hollywood films tend to be ‘closed by the […] heterosexual couple’ (Russell 1995: 6); likewise, Strinati speaks of closure entailing ‘the coming together of the male and female leads in a romantic happy ending. This is a ‘closed’ narrative’ (Strinati 2000: 217); Hayward, meanwhile, offers the simple dictum that, in Hollywood cinema, ‘closure means a resolution of the heterosexual courtship’ (2006: 83).

6 Introduction to The Portable Rousseau (1973) from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The notion of textual allegory, as it derives from the Social Contract,provides the generalizing principle which makes it possible to consider theotropical or ethical allegories as particularized versions of this generative model and thus to break down the significance of such thematic distinctions. It also implies that the terminology of generality, particularity, and generative power has a degree of referential undecidability which should exclude any simplified metaphorical use of these terms, while anticipating the failure to achieve such vigilance, or such immunity to rhetorical seduction. If, for example, we consider the introduction of a theological dimension into the political

26 Seminar on “Aesthetic Theory from Kant to Hegel”. Yale University, Fall Semester, 1982 from: The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) Roos Suzanne
Abstract: And, to the elements of critical philosophy, which involves a testing of a variety of categories against an epistemological truth and falsehood.

2. Gadamer’s Re-Orientation of Aesthetics from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s approach to aesthetic experience stands squarely in the phenomenological tradition: his concern is with the place of art in our experienceof the world.² His reflection on aesthetic theory is a rare intellectual achievement, simultaneously deconstructive and constructive. It dismantles elements of the grand traditions of Platonic and Kantian aesthetics but offers, nevertheless, a phenomenological reconstruction of many of their central insights. This makes for a flexible philosophical approach to artwork which ranges freely over a number of art forms and styles, discussing both the singularity of works and their broader significance. The approach is hermeneutical: it reacquaints us

3. Aesthetic Attentiveness and the Question of Distanciation from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reflection on the experience of art is vexed by a tension between the existential interests that dominate his phenomenological account of experience and his rejection of Kantian disinterestedness in aesthetics. How can Gadamer defend his phenomenological approach to experience and demonstrate how art supports its cognitive concerns, and yet proclaim the autonomy of art without losing its connectedness to the everyday world? Having examined Gadamer’s critique of subjectivist aesthetics, we suggest that his approach to aesthetic attentiveness offers a persuasive reconciliation of the interested and the disinterested. The reconciliation is one of Gadamer’s greatest unremarked contributions to contemporary aesthetics.

4. Theoros and Spectorial Participation from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reconstruction of aesthetic experience as a participatory act offers a new valence to the part–whole relationship within hermeneutics. The emphasis given to experiential movement and transformational understanding implies participation in a part–whole nexus. In traditional literary hermeneutics, the part–whole relationship is deployed by the knowing subject as a contextualising procedure of understanding: a section of a text is explained by being set into an exposition of the whole. For Gadamer, however, the part–whole structure is not a fixed epistemological device utilised by the interpreter to set a work into a given context but an ontological

5. Presentation, Appearance and Likeness from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s critique of aesthetic subjectivity insists that, phenomenologically speaking, an involvement with art demonstrates that the experience of meaning has primacy over the experience of aesthetic properties. If meaning results from the conveyance of significance within bodies of semantic relations (which Gadamer describes collectively as linguisticality), meaning’s mode of being, whether visual or literary, is presentational. With characteristic restraint, this simple move in Gadamer’s aesthetics prompts a major ontological shift in thinking about the ancient but nonetheless continuingly contentious question of art’s relation to reality. The prominence of word and image in the experience of meaning attests to the ontological

6. Art and the Art of Language from: Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: What does Gadamer mean by his claim that ‘art addresses us’? It is a signature claim of philosophical hermeneutics and follows directly upon Gadamer’s assertion of the phenomenological priority of meaning in the experience of art. Not only does this emphasise Gadamer’s dialogical approach to art but it is the culmination of his critique of aesthetic subjectivism. By asserting the primacy of meaning, philosophical hermeneutics affirms the ontic priority of those cultural horizons which shape a spectator’s consciousness and in which he or she must partake as a precondition of achieving transformed understanding. However, a central question remains unavoidable: what

CHAPTER 1 Taking Leave of Our Senses from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: Anthropology’s engagement with the sensuous has shifted over the last century and a half from a concern with measuring bodies and recording sense data to an interest in sensing patterns, then from sensing patterns to reading texts, and finally from reading texts to writing culture. In the course of the latter shifts, the content of anthropological knowledge has changed from being multisensory and social to being spectacularly stylized and centered on the individual ethnographer. The result is that ethnographic authority now depends more on the “reflexivity” with which one writes than the accuracy with which one “represents” a culture (e.g.,

CHAPTER 2 Coming to Our Senses from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: In the 1980s, just as the textual revolution was entering its secondary phase and sweeping the discipline, a few anthropologists began to question the disembodied nature of much of contemporary ethnography and its conceptual reliance on language-based models of analysis. Their work prepared the ground for a sensual turn in anthropological understanding—that is, a move away from linguistic and textual paradigms toward an understanding that treats cultures as ways of sensing the world. This chapter documents this countertradition within the anthropology of the 1980s and 1990s, which culminated in the emergence of the anthropology of the senses.

CHAPTER 3 On the Pleasures of Fasting, Appearing, and Being Heard in the Massim World from: Sensual Relations
Abstract: Malinowski’s enforced stay in the Trobriands, where he was interned as an enemy alien by the Australians during World War I, started the tradition of anthropological fieldwork.

Editorial Introduction from: The Fate of Law
Author(s) Kearns Thomas R.
Abstract: Legal scholarship, and law itself, is undergoing one of those occasional periods of rupture in which traditional assumptions no longer seem adequate or satisfactory. Law is said to be “turning outward” in search of new grounding;¹ legal scholarship seems to be undergoing a rapid “rotation”² in which attempts are made to accommodate the contradictory and conflicting challenges of deontological liberalism, natural law, pragmatism, interpretive social science, economics, and several varieties of critical social theory.³ Some of those challenges are regarded as potent enough to II distort the purposes of law and threaten its very existence.”⁴ Others promise a way of

FIFTEEN Theatricality, Convention, and the Principle of Charity from: Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Quinn Michael L.
Abstract: One of the crucial words that remains in the vocabularies of both the practical theater and theater theory, though in a fairly unexamined state, is convention. From the sociological standpoint of Elizabeth Burns the “theatrical metaphor” generated conventions that served as constitutive agreements for knowledge.¹ Yet this metaphor is also, for her, a “mode of perception,” a basic phenomenological category like those described by Ernst Cassirer or Susanne K. Langer, which produces the social concepts that make theater—and any other concomitant forms of analogical “theatricality” in other contexts—possible.² Theater for Burns, then, is not a kind of knowledge

How We Learned to Escape Physics Envy and to Love Pluralism and Complexity from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Haas Peter M.
Abstract: Students of IR remain divided on the implications of international institutions for the understanding of contemporary international relations. This is largely due, we believe, to the incommensurate epistemological and ontological positions within the discipline of IR that characterize most studies and interpretations of international institutions. In this essay we try to frame a pragmatic-constructivist approach for the study of international institutions,

En Route to Knowledge: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Lapid Yosef
Abstract: A third path leads beyond modern and postmodern methodological debates in the social sciences, history, and the humanities. It turns out that choices between the routes of science and interpretation, history and theory, objectivism and relativism are more illusionary than real.¹

The Globalization of Globalization from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Rosenau James N.
Abstract: As one whose professional life exceeds that of the International Studies Association, I have mixed feelings about the invitation to reflect critically on the accomplishments, failures, debates, standards, approaches, and future agendas of international relations (IR) and its subfields. On the one hand, I have no doubt that our shared past is marked by enormous growth and progress. The conceptual and methodological equipment with which IR is probed today is far more elaborate, incisive, and diverse than was the case at the outset—back in the 1950s when a few isolated, non–Ivy League scholars first came together around common

Accomplishments and Limitations of a Game-Theoretic Approach to International Relations from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) de Mesquita Bruce Bueno
Abstract: Game-theoretic reasoning emerged as an important form of analysis in international relations, especially regarding security studies, with the publication in 1960 of Thomas Schelling’s The Strategy of Conflict. The remainder of the 1960s saw a proliferation of carefully reasoned, policy-relevant studies grounded in the techniques of formal logic and rational choice modeling. A small sampling includes Daniel Ellsberg’s application of expected utility reasoning to deterrence strategy, Martin McGuire’s investigation of secrecy and arms races, Anatol Rapoport and Albert Chammah’s examination of the prisoner’s dilemma in the context of cooperation and conflict, Bruce Russett’s study of the calculus of deterrence, and

Qualitative Methods in International Relations from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Levy Jack S.
Abstract: Three decades ago, Sartori complained about the number of “unconscious thinkers” in the field of comparative politics, and the same could be said of the study of international relations.¹ Most qualitative analyses were idiographic rather than nomothetic,² historically specific rather than theoretically driven, and too little concerned with the logic of inference and questions of generalizability. Scholars gave little attention to the problem of how to control for extraneous variables in situations in which the number of variables typically exceeded the number of cases, or to the question of whether there are alternative methods for validating causal inferences in a

Security Theory: from: Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kolodziej Edward A.
Abstract: This survey of security theory is divided into two parts. The first defines security as a political concept and phenomenon. This discussion provides a point of departure for reviewing prevailing security theories. The second, and longest, section briefly examines and evaluates the claims of six competing research programs concerned directly or indirectly with security. These include realism, neorealism, economic liberalism, liberal institutionalism, behaviorism, and constructivism. These research programs can be distinguished on the basis of their ontological, epistemological, methodological, and evidentiary assumptions about actors and their behavior. Given space constraints, the discussion will identify only the principal differences between these

4 THE LOGIC OF DIAGNOSIS: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: In chapters 2 and 3, we examined the practical wisdom of the physician in relation to narrative and, particularly, the chief concern of the narratives patients bring to their physicians. In this chapter, we will continue examining the role of narrative in the practices of medicine, but with particular focus on the ways narrative can contribute to diagnostic skills. Specifically, we will examine the logic of hypothesis formation that Charles Sanders Peirce articulated at the turn of the twentieth century, and we hope to demonstrate that his “logic of abduction,” as he called it, approximates the “practical syllogism” that aristotle

8 NARRATIVE AND MEDICINE: from: The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Throughout Part 2 of this book, we were concerned with storytelling and narrative—with the patient-physician relationship growing out of the encounter of storytelling, the patient’s narrative itself, and a doctor’s ability in listening to narrative. Many experienced physicians develop types of understanding— phronesis,narrative knowledge, and logic of diagnosis—that, in their functional engagements with narrative and reality, are different from and complementary to the biomedical knowledge of scientific explanation. Such engagements with narrative are at the heart of humanistic understanding. This chapter reexamines the importance of narrative in the practice of medicine from the point of view of

Chapter 6 Literacy in a Biocultural World: from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Gorzelsky Gwen
Abstract: In “Brains, Maps, and the New Territory of Psychology,” Anne Beaulieu persuasively argues that brain mapping “recasts [social and environmental] aspects in biological terms” (2003, 563).¹ Beaulieu draws on critiques of popular discussions of brain imaging such as Joseph Dumit’s work, and on the responses of many neuroscientists to Posner and Raichle’s book on the promise of brain imaging, which targets both interested lay readers and scientists. The journal Behavioral and Brain Sciencesdevotes nearly sixty pages to a précis of the book, twenty-seven peer commentaries, and the authors’ responses to those commentaries (Posner and Raichle 1995). Like Dumit’s text,

Chapter 11 A Clinical Neuroscientist Looks Neuroskeptically at Neuroethics in the Neuroworld from: The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Whitehouse Peter J.
Abstract: As a clinically oriented cognitive neuroscientist, I celebrated the past successes and future promises of science during The Decade of the Brain (1990–2000). I listened as we were told that we were well on our way to understanding how the mind worked, how we might enhance our thinking, and how the use of stem cells and other powerful biological approaches would eventually cure neurological diseases such as Alzheimer’s. I heard the call for a new field of ethical inquiry to help us manage these powerful new abilities to manipulate ourselves and others.

CHAPTER 4 Archaeology of the Christ Image from: The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: Two archaeological limits circumscribed the image of the historical Jesus over the second half of the nineteenth century. The first was approached with Raffaele Garrucci’s discovery of a graffito, or “scratching,” at the Palace of the Caesars in Rome in 1856 (see figure 10). That same year, Garrucci, an archaeologist and Jesuit priest, had published a seminal monograph on the graffiti of Pompei.¹ For a small group of scholars and enthusiasts scouring Rome for ancient Christ images, all the scratchings of Pompei would pale in comparison with what Garrucci found carved into the plaster of a beam on the Palatine:

4 WORD-LORDS: from: Democratic Peace
Abstract: On June 24, 2002, President Bush brought out a new plan for peace between Israel and the Palestinians. That plan, which became known as the “Roadmap,” was based on a two-state solution and presented two novelties: (1) for the first time, the United States committed itself publicly and officially to an independent Palestinian sovereignty, and (2) for the first time, the United States also conditioned Israeli concessions on Palestinian democratization. This chapter explores the role of the democratic peace thesis in bringing about these novelties: it examines how the thesis was mobilized politically by Israeli politicians to advance their ideological

2 Strategic Narratives: from: Forging the World
Author(s) Roselle Laura
Abstract: We are on the cusp of being able to better understand questions in International Relations hitherto considered unanswerable due to methodological limitations of the discipline. Methodology is vital to the enterprise of studying strategic narrative because the right methods allow us to explain how strategic narratives are formed, projected, received, and interpreted. Only then can we build explanations of the roles narratives play in persuasion, influence, identity-formation, alliance-building, order-shaping, and other major concerns of IR. There is a sense today among those practicing international relations that the rapid transformation of global political communication has opened up new opportunities to manage

Book Title: Traces of the Past-Classics between History and Archaeology
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Bassi Karen
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique places mean and, more specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? In short, how do visible remains and ruins in the present give meaning to the human past? Karen Bassi addresses these questions through detailed close readings of canonical works spanning the archaic to the classical periods of ancient Greek culture, showing how the past is constituted in descriptions of what narrators and characters see in their present context. She introduces the term protoarchaeological to refer to narratives that navigate the gap between linguistic representation and empirical observation-between words and things-in accessing and giving meaning to the past. Such narratives invite readers to view the past as a receding visual field and, in the process, to cross the disciplinary boundaries that divide literature, history, and archaeology.Aimed at classicists, literary scholars, ancient historians, cultural historians, and archaeological theorists, the book combines three areas of research: time as a feature of narrative structure in literary theory; the concept of "the past itself" in the philosophy of history; and the ontological status of material objects in archaeological theory. Each of five central chapters explores how specific protoarchaeological narratives-from the fate of Zeus' stone in Hesiod's Theogony to the contest between words and objects in Aristophanes' Frogs-both expose and attempt to bridge this gap. Throughout, the book serves as a response to Herodotus' task in writing the Histories, namely, to ensure that "the past deeds of men do not fade with time."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.8785930

Introduction: from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? For what or at what are we looking? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique spaces mean? More specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? The answers to these questions may seem all too obvious; they also depend on what “we” I am talking about. Professional archaeologists or art historians, for example, have very specific ways of looking at and talking about their objects of study. But the particulars of

CHAPTER 2 The Hypothetical Past and the Achaean Wall in the Iliad from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: According to John Camp, walls are the “most enduring evidence of antiquity surviving in the landscape today.”² As features in the built environment, the remains of walls delimit the lives of ancient humans in both time and space; they give substance to the past. Perhaps it is not surprising that the prominence of walls as archaeological features is shared by their prominence as narrative plot devices. They stand out (as it were) in both contexts. It might even be said that walls occupy a unique position as both signifiers of cultural production and structures within narrative. Between their existence as

CHAPTER 4 “Up to My Time”: from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: This chapter explores the role of visible evidence for the past in Herodotus’ Histories, exemplified in the fate of the offerings of the Lydian kings in the Lydian logos. The argument is focused on the temporal, ontological, and epistemological variables at work in the relationship between the oracles given to the Lydian kings and the offerings they inspire. Expressed in terms of a specific temporo-linguistic feature in theHistories—namely, Herodotus’ descriptions of objects that exist up to his own time (ἐπ᾿ ἐμεῦ, μέχρις ἐμέο

Epilogue: from: Traces of the Past
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have defined protoarchaeological narratives as those in which the past is conceptualized in a negotiation between empirical observation and linguistic representation in a variety of ancient Greek genres. I have also suggested that reading—both as a conceptual category and as a practice—functions within these narratives as an acknowledgment that the past is constituted in what can no longer be seen. To return again to Herodotus’ metaphor, reading refers to the past as a congeries of narrativized objects and events that fades with time. In this epilogue, I explore the ontological and epistemological implications

Colonial Archives and the Arts of Governance: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Stoler Ann Laura
Abstract: This essay is about the colonial order of things as seen through its archival productions. It asks what insights about the colonial might be gained from attending not only to colonialism’s archival content but to its particular and sometimes peculiar form. Its focus is on archiving as a process rather than archives as things. It looks to archives as epistemological experiments rather than as sources—to colonial archives as cross-sections of contested knowledge. Most important, I want to suggest that colonial archives were both transparencies on which power relations were inscribed and intricate technologies of rule in themselves. The essay’s

Social History, Public Sphere, and National Narratives: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Burguera Mónica
Abstract: During the past twenty years, the approaches and perspectives associated with both poststructuralism and feminism have prompted historians to question the centrality of some of social history’s most basic assumptions, opening the door to what Patrick Joyce has called a “self-reflexive and historicized understanding” of social history and its epistemological legacy.¹ In particular, many scholars now agree that race, gender, class, and national identities do not, as was previously thought, derive exclusively from a network of social referents external to language but rather arise from a system of representations in which language and its referents undergo a continual process of

Archives and Historical Writing: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Galili Ziva
Abstract: The agenda for the seminar on Archives, Documentation, and the Institutions of Social Memory, much like the questions being asked nowadays in so many academic discussions, reminds us of the uncertain place of archival records in historical writing and in social memory. We are asked to face the notion that the preservation and accessibility of such records are contingent on a wide array of political, cultural, and technological factors and that these factors as well as the ideological stance inherent in both historical writing and the practice of social memory affect every aspect of our usage of archival documentation. All

Archiving Heteroglossia: from: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Yekelchyk Serhy
Abstract: Working quietly in private during 1934–35, as the Soviet people were toiling to meet the targets of the Second Five Year Plan, celebrating Stalin the Great Leader, and condemning “enemies of the people,” Mikhail Bakhtin was developing the concept of heteroglossia ( raznorechieorraznogolositsa). The Russian philosopher of language understood heteroglossia as a polyphony of social and discursive forces, a diversity of social speech types that occur in everyday life. According to him, the genre of the novel is best suited for delivering the realities of heteroglossia because it allows for a network of dialogic, interactive relations among multiple

1 Evidence of Grace from: The Science of the Soul in Colonial New England
Abstract: The sweeping theological transformations that took place over the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries drove bands of people to migrate to diverse locations throughout the early modern Atlantic world. Demonstrating God’s grace became of paramount importance to the justification of each New World mission. Radical Protestant sects such as Independents, Congregationalists, and Baptists developed the test of faith, an oral and public testimony designed to mitigate the uncertainty surrounding signs of election. Before a group of discerning witnesses, testifiers declared adequate (albeit uncertain) proof of their own election while also providing data in response to a metaphysical problem, namely, the uncertainty

Chapter Four Reading Gender and Metaphor in Ibn ʿArabī’s Cosmos from: Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: In engaging the tension between perspectives that challenge traditional gender stereotypes and those that reiterate normative conventions, feminist readers encounter a set of more nuanced methodological and theoretical considerations. At the outset, it is imperative to situate Ibn ʿArabī’s teachings on gender within the assumptions of his worldview—that is, to take seriously the Sufi framework of his engagement with gender. As is characteristic of all Ibn ʿArabī’s works, paradox, ambivalence, and contradiction are part of his mystical methodology. Since reality “as it really is” or mystical experiences give a glimpse into that which cannot be understood or captured in

5 Embodied Inequalities: from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Barker Judith C.
Abstract: Epidemiological reports consistently show that Latino children have worse oral health than African American and white children. Among Latino subgroups, Mexican American children have the highest mean number of decayed teeth and unfilled cavities. While acknowledging barriers to receipt of dental treatment, the dental public health literature tends to zero in on Mexican immigrant parents as the primary cause of their children’s poor health outcomes. It portrays immigrant caregivers as “bad parents,” suggesting that they frequently put their children to bed with sweetened beverages (Shiboski et al. 2003) and fail to take their children for preventive dental checkups (Scott and

7 Justice, Respect, and Recognition in Mental Health Services: from: Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Brodwin Paul
Abstract: Posing questions about justice and inequality in the realm of mental health services opens up two very different lines of analysis. A long tradition of social epidemiology demonstrates the disproportionate burden of mental illness associated with poverty, migration, and membership in stigmatized ethnic and racial groups (Ngui et al. 2013; Kessler et al. 2012; Martins et al. 2012).¹ This approach begins with objective epidemiological data and then launches a normative argument about the psychiatric sequelae of social injustice. The inequalities documented in this literature arise from large-scale social arrangements, including class hierarchy, global imbalances of resources and opportunities, and symbolic

Book Title: Race and the Making of the Mormon People- Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): MUELLER MAX PERRY
Abstract: The nineteenth-century history of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Max Perry Mueller argues, illuminates the role that religion played in forming the notion of three "original" American races-red, black, and white-for Mormons and others in the early American Republic. Recovering the voices of a handful of black and Native American Mormons who resolutely wrote themselves into the Mormon archive, Mueller threads together historical experience and Mormon scriptural interpretations. He finds that the Book of Mormon is key to understanding how early followers reflected but also departed from antebellum conceptions of race as biblically and biologically predetermined. Mormon theology and policy both challenged and reaffirmed the essentialist nature of the racialized American experience.The Book of Mormon presented its believers with a radical worldview, proclaiming that all schisms within the human family were anathematic to God's design. That said, church founders were not racial egalitarians. They promoted whiteness as an aspirational racial identity that nonwhites could achieve through conversion to Mormonism. Mueller also shows how, on a broader level, scripture and history may become mutually constituted. For the Mormons, that process shaped a religious movement in perpetual tension between its racialist and universalist impulses during an era before the concept of race was secularized.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469633763_mueller

Book Title: Visiones de Estereoscopio-Paradigma de hibridación en la ficción y el arte de la vanguardia española
Publisher: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Department of Romance Studies
Author(s): UTRERA MARÌA SOLEDAD FERNÁNDEZ
Abstract: This book, written in Spanish, focuses on the literary and artistic works of such avant-garde figures as Ramon Gomez de la Serna, Benjamin Jarnes, Antonio de Obregon, Juan Chabas, Rosa Chacel, Claudio de la Torre, Almada Negreiros, Maruja Mallo, Mauricio Amster, Manuel Reinoso, Diego Rivera, and Angeles Santos y Victorio Macho. It identifies the attempt to integrate conflicting epistemological, ethical, and sociopolitical categories as the organizational principle driving the avant-garde novel and art. Seen as a means of escaping the Cartesian dualism of mind and matter, the conflict between ethical institutionism and utilitarianism, and the opposition of liberalism by socialism, this "middle path" manifests itself in the avant-garde on various levels: the theory of representation, the development of the protagonist, and the concept of history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469639222_fernandezutrera

Foreword from: Been a Heavy Life
Author(s) ARRIGO BRUCE A.
Abstract: Ethnographic studies of “dangerous men” have generally taken us behind bars. Erving Goffman’s (1961) arresting critique of the confinement setting as a generative milieu for the exercise of power helped to spawn a series of monograph-length works recounting life, death, and survival behind prison walls (e.g., Jacobs 1978; Sykes 1971; Toch 1977). A second wave of penological analysis, still concerned with “everyday experience” behind bars, challenged the correctional system as an extension of the state’s regulatory ambit. For example, Irwin’s (1970, 1985) studies of the felon and the jail respectively ushered in a new era of incisive commentary. Crime control

2 OFFENDER IDENTITIES, OFFENDER NARRATIVES from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: How do offenders identify themselves to investigators? What immediate, contextual factors affect their claims of being this or that sort of person? And what do sociological and criminological theories predict about offender identities and narratives and contextual effects on them?

4 RESEARCH METHODS WHEN RESEARCH IS BEING RESEARCHED from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Early on I was helped in my methodological decision making by the conventions of qualitative sociology. Some very general tools for working can be taken for granted. For example, the qualitative sociologist typically uses nonprobability sampling. If the researcher intends to conduct interviews, the interview format tends to be open-ended. The analysis usually emphasizes the perspectives of those whom one is studying, but also incorporates one’s own perspectives into analysis and documentation, the latter being the reflexive position described in chapter 3.

10 THE POWER OF STORIES from: Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: My research has demonstrated that story tellingimpacts stories. In this chapter I reconsider the impact of stories on violence, thus relating storytelling to violent behavior. The power of stories and storytelling leads me to recommend redirection for criminological research and for public policy and interventions, including correctional interventions. But first it is necessary to take another look at heroism as a key plot in the men’s stories. The gendered nature of the heroic tale and the gender gap in violence signal the importance of cultural constructions of power, agency, and autonomy, to violence, which in turn suggests that narratives

15. Toward a Theory of Cultural Translation in Dance from: New German Dance Studies
Author(s) KLEIN GABRIELE
Abstract: Looking at the history of dance in the modern West, and especially in Europe, where aesthetic modernism began around 1900, there are two characteristics of dance. Whether it is so-called popular dance or a more artistic form, from a sociological perspective, the history of dance is the history of globalization and transnationalism. It is also the record of how urban experiences have been expressed physically. The artistic avant-garde of the twentieth century thrived in large cities, and even folk dances rarely originated in the countryside.

Religion from: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) SCHULTZE QUENTIN J.
Abstract: In a study of early American anthropologists, Gillian Feeley-Harnik (2001, 144) discovered that scholars sought to escape from “transcendental philosophy and theology” by adopting new, presumably less ethnocentric ways of understanding cultures. Nevertheless, these researchers still held a “teleological dynamic” based on their understanding of the Christian metanarrative (152).

4 Genre from: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) HARRIS-LOPEZ TRUDIER
Abstract: The word genre, derived from French and Latin, means ʺkindʺ or ʺgenus.ʺ Genus in turn means ʺa class,ʺ ʺkind,ʺ or ʺsort,ʺ with the accompanying expansion in logical usage of being a class of like objects or ideas having several subordinate classes or species. Genre is thus an umbrella concept that allows many disparate, and often related, concepts to be conveniently divided and subdivided. The word has some specialized usage, as in ʺgenre painting,ʺ which realistically depicts subjects or scenes from everyday life. In its usual context of classification, however, genre can be as expansive or confined as disciplinary usages demand.

CHAPTER 7 RELIGION AND EMOTIONS from: Doing Emotions History
Author(s) CORRIGAN JOHN
Abstract: The practice of emotions history in the field of religious studies has developed apace with the flowering of scholarly interest in everyday practice, embodiment, locality, and the constructed self over the past several decades. Most previous religious history from the earlier twentieth century,¹ whether focused on western monotheisms or on Asian or indigenous religions, was inclined to illustrate its narratives about feeling with ideas collected from theological discourses, or, at the very least, with language sampled from Christian glossaries of belief and worship.² For much religious history, confessional perspectives supplied the basis for interpretation—including the preoccupation with meaning itself

Book Title: Covering Bin Laden-Global Media and the World's Most Wanted Man
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): AL-SUMAIT FAHED
Abstract: Starting in 2001, much of the world media used the image of Osama bin Laden as a shorthand for terrorism. Bin Laden himself considered media manipulation on a par with military, political, and ideological tools, and intentionally used interviews, taped speeches, and distributed statements to further al-Qaida's ends. In Covering Bin Laden , editors Susan Jeffords and Fahed Yahya Al-Sumait collect perspectives from global scholars exploring a startling premise: that media depictions of Bin Laden not only diverge but often contradict each other, depending on the media provider and format, the place in which the depiction is presented, and the viewer's political and cultural background. The contributors analyze the representations of the many Bin Ladens, ranging from Al Jazeera broadcasts to video games. They examine the media's dominant role in shaping our understanding of terrorists and why/how they should be feared, and they engage with the ways the mosaic of Bin Laden images and narratives have influenced policies and actions around the world. Contributors include Fahed Al-Sumait, Saranaz Barforoush, Aditi Bhatia, Purnima Bose, Ryan Croken, Simon Ferrari, Andrew Hill, Richard Jackson, Susan Jeffords, Joanna Margueritte-Giecewicz, Noha Mellor, Susan Moeller, Brigitte Nacos, Courtney C. Radsch, and Alexander Spencer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt6wr60n

9 Obama bin Laden [sic]: from: Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) CROKEN RYAN
Abstract: The greatest night of Geraldo Rivera’s career: this is worth looking into. To understand Rivera’s nationalist ebullience—echoed in the streets and tweets across the United States on the night of bin Laden’s death—I’d like to figure Osama bin Laden’s body as an object in the Ahmedian sense of the word, that is, as an orientation device with world-mapping capabilities. In this framing, it could be said that bin Laden’s fugitive tenure occasioned, among many Americans, a profound and prolonged bout of phenomenological disorientation. Not only did an at-large Osama forestall the realization of “healing” by means of retribution,

Book Title: Cannibal Metaphysics- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Skafish Peter
Abstract: The iconoclastic Brazilian anthropologist and theoretician Eduardo Viveiros de Castro, well known in his discipline for helping initiate its "ontological turn," offers a vision of anthropology as "the practice of the permanent decolonization of thought." After showing that Amazonian and other Amerindian groups inhabit a radically different conceptual universe than ours-in which nature and culture, human and nonhuman, subject and object are conceived in terms that reverse our own-he presents the case for anthropology as the study of such "other" metaphysical schemes, and as the corresponding critique of the concepts imposed on them by the human sciences. Along the way, he spells out the consequences of this anthropology for thinking in general via a major reassessment of the work of Claude Lévi-Strauss, arguments for the continued relevance of Deleuze and Guattari, dialogues with the work of Philippe Descola, Bruno Latour, and Marilyn Strathern, and inventive treatments of problems of ontology, translation, and transformation. Bold, unexpected, and profound, Cannibal Metaphysicsis one of the chief works marking anthropology's current return to the theoretical center stage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt17xr4vt

Chapter Two Perspectivism from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: Such a requalification of the anthropological agenda was what Tânia Stolze Lima and I wanted to contribute to when we proposed the concept of Amerindian perspectivismas the reconfiguration of a complex of ideas and practices whose power of intellectual disturbance has never been sufficiently appreciated (even if they found the word relevant) by Americanists, despite its vast diffusion in the New World.⁹ To this we added the synoptic concept ofmultinaturalism, which presented Amerindian thought as an unsuspected partner, a dark precursor if you will, of certain contemporary philosophical programs, like those developing around theories of possible worlds, others

Chapter Three Multinaturalism from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: “We moderns possess the concept but have lost sight of the plane of immanence….” (D. G. 1994: 104). All the foregoing is merely the development of the founding intuition, deductively effectuated by indigenous theoretical practice, of the mythology of the continent, which concerns a milieu that can rightly be called prehistorical (in the sense of the celebrated absolute past: the past that has never been present and which therefore is never past, while the present never ceases to pass), and that is defined by the ontological impenetrability of all the “insistents” populating and constituting this milieu—the templates and standards

Chapter Four Images of Savage Thought from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: In calling perspectivism and multinaturalism an indigenous cosmopolitical theory, I am using the word “theory” by design. 36A widespread tendency in the anthropology of the past several decades has consisted in refusing savage thought [la pensée sauvage] the status of a veritable theoretical imagination. What this denial primarily enlightens us about is a certain lack of theoretical imagination on the part of anthropologists. Amerindian perspectivism, before being a possible object of a theory extrinsic to it—a theory, for example, conceived as the derived epistemological reflex of a more primary animist ontology (Descola 2013) or an emergent phenomenological pragmatics peculiar

Chapter Six An Anti-Sociology of Multiplicities from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: In Anti-Oedipus, as is well known, Deleuze and Guattari overthrow the temple of psychoanalysis by knocking out its central pillar—the reactionary conception of desire as lack—and then replace it with the theory of desiring machines, sheer positive productivity that must be coded by the socius, the social production machine. This theory runs through a vast panorama of universal history, which is painted in the book’s central chapter in a quaintly archaic style that could make the anthropological reader wince. Not only does it employ the venerable savagery-barbarism-civilization triad, but the proliferating ethnographic references are treated in a seemingly

Chapter Eleven The System’s Intensive Conditions from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: We will return once more to the passage from Lévi-Strauss already cited several times in these pages, the one where the dean of the Americanists connects “critical analyses” of the notion of affinity (which Brazilian ethnologists led the way in 113) to the uncovering of an indigenous philosophical problematic. All of this derives, at the end of the day, from Lévi-Strauss himself, and I think that he knew it perfectly well. That South American affinity is indeed not a sociological category but a philosophical idea was something Lévi-Strauss had observed in a premonitory way in one of his very first works,

Chapter Twelve The Enemy in the Concept from: Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: Anti-Narcissus—the book that I would have liked to write but that I only managed to outline in the previous chapters—would have been a thought experiment [une expérience de pensée], an exercise in anthropological fiction. A “thought experiment” not in the usual sense of thought (imaginarily) entering experience but, rather, of the entry into thought of (real) experience. Not the imagining of an experiment, but an experimentation with the imagination or an “experimentation with thought itself.”122In the present case, the accumulated experience is that of a generation of ethnographers of indigenous Amazonia, and the experiment is a fiction

Introduction from: Becoming Past
Abstract: To be a historian of contemporary art is to work in a rather challenging and uncomfortable profession. First, no one can really agree on what we’re talking about when we use the term contemporary, a word that develops etymologically fromtempusand yet yields little understanding of time.Current, recent, new, up-to-date, modern, now, present, on the horizon—contemporary’s synonyms are as numerous as they are vague. Second, whatever the contemporary is, it’s clear there’s way too much of it. Terry Smith nicely explains the unique obstacles set in the way of the contemporary art historian when he writes: “Look

CODA from: Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Giorcelli Cristina
Abstract: In the West, fashion (in French mode, in Italianmoda) is one of the modes of modernity; in the two languages, the punning contiguity, the etymological kinship, between the two words is significant.Modeandmodaderive from the Latin wordmodus, which has several meanings, among them “way, measure, form, rule, rhythm, temporary state of being.”¹ If one of the imperatives of modernism is Ezra Pound’s exhortation to “make it new!” such a demand strictly coincides with fashion’s “way”: its need for constant change. And if rupture, fluctuation, surprise seem to be the rule of fashion, it is also

2 Hugo Münsterberg, Film, and Philosophy from: Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Sinnerbrink Robert
Abstract: It is ironic that Hugo Münsterberg, one of the pioneering intellectual figures in the history of film theory and the philosophy of film, was ignored for the best part of a century, a period during which cinema developed into the defining art form of modern times. Even more striking is that his approach to film theory, already a century ago, was thoroughly steeped in philosophical reflection on the psychological, aesthetic, and cultural significance of the new medium. As a Harvard professor of psychology and philosophy, Münsterberg published The Photoplay: A Psychological Study(1916), a book widely regarded as the first

Chapter 1 The Boundary Work of Making in Digital Humanities from: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KLEIN JULIE THOMPSON
Abstract: Debates on digital humanities are sites of boundary work in a history of arguments about the nature of the field. Boundary work is a composite label for the claims, activities, and structures by which individuals and groups create, maintain, break down, and reformulate boundaries between knowledge units (Fisher 13–14; Klein, Crossing1–2). Thomas Gieryn coined the term in 1983 in a study of demarcating science from non-science. It is an ideological style that constructs boundaries rhetorically in three ways: by expanding authority or expertise into domains claimed by other professions or occupations, by monopolizing authority and resources, and

Introduction: from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) DUCKERT LOWELL
Abstract: We call this book a companionin the hope of offering to its readers a ready partner and congenial fellow traveler, a vade mecum for fostering ecological attentiveness and encouraging further wandering. Through the transports of environmentally inclined verbs familiar and unexpected, this collaborative project aims not to provide encyclopedic overviews or definitive accounts of critical concepts (allconcepts are critical) but to forge a welcoming and heterogeneous fellowship, a colloquy for pondering possibilities for environmental thinking, ecological theory, and engaged humanities practice during a time of widespread crisis. Imagining futures by rethinking possibilities present and past,Veer Ecologyextends

Decorate from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) REMEIN DANIEL C.
Abstract: What decorates? And how? Why should the ecologically minded practitioner of the humanities concern herself with decorating—an activity of expenditure, of waste, an activity that resonates more with the theoretical invocations of oikosthat mark an exclusively human household economy and the excesses of thedomus(the household, yes, but also the unsustainable extravagance of thedominus, the lord, whose decorating displays his sovereignty and ownership) than the invocations ofoikosin an ecological thinking that would mark the etymology ofeco-in order to better think the earth as a much larger and complex household?¹

Represent from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) YATES JULIAN
Abstract: On the face of it, it seems hard to imagine a less likely candidate for inclusion in a lexicon of verbs vital to ecological thinking than the word represent, rubbished as it comes by a history of bad mediations, infidelities, ideological freighting, reduction, and redaction. The word sets in motion a string of approximating substitutions almost as if it concedes, from the beginning, that what matters, what it hopes to convey, shall simply slip through its fingers.

Attune from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) MORTON TIMOTHY
Abstract: The ecological space of attunement is a space of veering, because rigid differences between active and passive, straight and curved, become impossible to maintain. Consider, for example, the phenomenon of adaptation, a complex and curious event. An evolving species is adapting to another evolving

Shade from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) THILL BRIAN
Abstract: The rich tradition of linking ecological thought to spectacle—to the practices of bearing witness, on film and through documentary photography, to visible instances of environmental degradation and destruction—is no longer sufficient for confronting the existential threats posed by contemporary ecological crises. Carbon levels, species extinction, the collapsing ice shelf, rising seas, and other indicators of humankind’s impacts on the environment exceed our capacity to witness and document the true scope of the damage directly. Because it grants special weight to ecological spectacle and tableau that evoke strong feelings in us, the ecological image can only offer us an

Tend from: Veer Ecology
Author(s) HARRIS ANNE F.
Abstract: T endhas a veering volatility. It bends around will and instinct, shaped by both, settling into neither:tendcreates an oscillating ontological middle ground. That’s where I seek to be with you for this essay. Three animal tales and their images will keep us there; stories from medieval, early modern, and contemporary worlds that have been captured in miracle story, woodcut print, and documentary film because the animals involved behaved beyond instinct, which made the humans question their own wills. We will be in complex company across time and scale: the Cistercian recorder of miracles, Caesarius of Heisterbach, and the

4 EVOLUTIONARY AESTHETICS from: Bioaesthetics
Abstract: Adorno’s opening statement in Aesthetic Theorystill rings true today, almost a half century after its posthumous publication in 1970. It remains a commonplace not only within art history, but across the humanities in general, that traditional efforts to answer the age-old question “What is art?” are a waste of time at best and an ideological power play at worst. The problem is that a definitive theory of art amounts to a contradiction in terms. Art, the philosopher Morris Weitz said, is “an open concept,” and there will always be cases “that would call for some sort ofdecisionon

4 Collective Memory in Place: from: Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The erection of monuments and memorials—along with the choreographed ceremonies of commemoration centered on them and the orchestration of public participation around them—transforms particular places into ideologically charged sites of collective memory. Monuments and memorials are powerful mnemonic devices through which the custodians of collective memory seek to encode particular histories and geographies into landscapes of power and resistance. They provide rallying points for shared memories and common identities. They are material signifiers of ideas, transmitters of sentiments, and repositories of ideologies that their permanent affixture to public space intends to immortalize. The elaborate language of symbolism and

Book Title: Meeting Place-The Human Encounter and the Challenge of Coexistence
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: The volume's central narrative-between Northern cultural philosophers and Australian societies-traverses the troubled history of misinterpretation that is characteristic of colonial cross-cultural encounter. As he brings the literature of Indigenous and non-Indigenous anthropological research into dialogue with Western approaches of conceptualizing sociability, Carter makes a startling discovery: that meeting may not be desirable and, if it is, its primary objective may be to negotiate a future of non-meeting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjjn9

Borderline from: Meeting Place
Abstract: To stage a dialogue between northern and southern experiences of meeting is to assume a productively dialectical relationship. It is already to move beyond the nostalgia inherent in most anthropological descriptions and the urgent functionalism of sociological ideas of the crowd. It relocates both in a time and space that is not reducible to the idealized level playing field of contemporary, scientific modernity (where place-based, situational knowledge is always at a loss). It retains instead a topography of hills and vales, of crisscrossing tracks, and within the network of traces of passage lozenges of ground as yet unvisited. It is

Cladding from: Meeting Place
Abstract: To enter this world is to navigate it. To discern the dynamics of the zone of encounter folded into the fissure between meeting and nonmeeting, a different approach is needed—methodologically as well as environmentally. In the human sciences it has been customary to call efforts to provide an enriched account of human experience interdisciplinary. Psychologists studying human behavior in public places rarely refer to the design of those places, while urban designers hardly ever consult choreographers. Human geographers study the features of the physical environment that promote the coming together of people into villages and town, while sociologists, assuming

Pigeonholes from: Meeting Place
Abstract: Here I want to stage a meeting between two terms. One of them, hedra, is a Greek word that survives in our word polyhedron. The other is an Arrernte word,utyerre, whose connotations are explained in a recent book by Margaret Kemarre Turner. These are words about pigeonholes, the natural locations for things, but they are also terms that are pigeonholed, like their cultures, thought to be of merely local or anthropological interest. A discussion of them illuminates what might be meant by characterizing the meeting place as “a more convenient place.” At the same time, it also illuminates another

Save the Wall from: Meeting Place
Abstract: When I began this, I imagined that the erotic zone was a meeting place. I thought the divagations through the forest of other people’s ideas would eventually bring me to a place where these different testimonies met. The mythological stories would at last yield a common pattern or motivation. Writing the book would be an act of seducing the readers, but I would remain in control: the shape of the outcome would be veiled—the labyrinth we have had to pass through, the burden of being heir to millennia of interpretation, was a kind of initiation, a Dantean reminder that

Book Title: Prismatic Ecology-Ecotheory beyond Green
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Buell Lawrence
Abstract: Emphasizing sustainability, balance, and the natural, green dominates our thinking about ecology like no other color. What about the catastrophic, the disruptive, the inaccessible, and the excessive? What of the ocean's turbulence, the fecundity of excrement, the solitude of an iceberg, multihued contaminations? Prismatic Ecologymoves beyond the accustomed green readings of ecotheory and maps a colorful world of ecological possibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjk31

Brown from: Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) MENTZ STEVE
Abstract: Smelly, rancid, and impure, it is no one’s favorite color. We need brown but do not like looking at it. It is a color you cannot cover up, that will not go away. At the end of a long afternoon finger-painting with the kids, it is what is left, sprawling across the page. A color you cannot see through, brown captures a connecting opacity at the heart of ecological thinking. It comes at us from both sides of our world, the living and the dead. Brown marks the fertile soil that plants consume and the fecal waste that animals reject.

Ultraviolet from: Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) WOODARD BEN
Abstract: Nature is often taken to be a visible entity or set of easily identifiable entities: a forest populated with squirrels, deer, birds, worms, small plants. The very title of this collection testifies to the purported visibility of nature and the connection of that visibility to ecology and subsequently to ecological politics. This is not an original or spectacular thought: we think of nature and of the nature we wish to (or are told to) protect as this or that plant, this or that animal, this or that landscape. This thinking of the visible runs into trouble as soon as we

Book Title: Agitating Images-Photography against History in Indigenous Siberia
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Campbell Craig
Abstract: Following the socialist revolution, a colossal shift in everyday realities began in the 1920s and '30s in the former Russian empire. Faced with the Siberian North, a vast territory considered culturally and technologically backward by the revolutionary government, the Soviets confidently undertook the project of reshaping the ordinary lives of the indigenous peoples in order to fold them into the Soviet state. In Agitating Images, Craig Campbell draws a rich and unsettling cultural portrait of the encounter between indigenous Siberians and Russian communists and reveals how photographs from this period complicate our understanding of this history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt7zw6wz

Conclusion: from: Agitating Images
Abstract: Photography in the practice of history and cultural theory has consistently proven to confound interpretation as a generic category. It is apprehended along a spectrum of positions that see it alternately as a transparent reflection of the world and a fabricated cultural text. As I have shown in this book, whatever its ontological status, the photograph is implicated in historical discourses as a significant witness attesting to the everyday. As a resource in the production of historical narrative, it is much like any other document. A photograph, however, is an unstable element when reproduced as a component of historiography. I

3 The Charm of Novelty from: The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: The ambition to relate unrelated things, to bring distant things close, is, quite literally, the scope of Cook’s or Mitchell’s names; and it defines equally well the purpose of their journals as a whole. Explorers who wrote up their journeys aimed to bring the country before their readers’ eyes. The logic they used to discover the country did not derive primarily from the realm of contemporary geographical hypothesis or even from the economic incentives offered by governments or squatters: it originated in the logic of travelling itself, in the continuity of the journal, which, kept day after day, left no

INTRODUCTION: from: The Tourist State
Abstract: For much of the new millennium, New Zealand has been the hot global ticket. Twice named Lonely Planet’s top destination, it is touted for its bicultural dynamism, can-do creativity, fair-go egalitarianism, and laid-back leisure-loving lifestyle. And then, of course, there is the scenery. No longer the dreary sheep farm at the end of the world, the newNew Zealand—Aotearoa New Zealand—is at the world’s fresh cutting edge: clean, green, technologically capable, aesthetically innovative “Islands of Imagination” whipped by the Pacific’s brisk winds of change.¹ Yet in 2001, when Aotearoa New Zealand strode onto the world stage, it did

chapter 2 The Class Act of Guide Maggie: from: The Tourist State
Abstract: At the turn of the twentieth century, the small Māori village of Whakarewarewa, at the heart of New Zealand’s isolated inland thermal district, played host to tourists by the thousands. They came to soak and socialize at the spa built by the government in the nearby town of Rotorua and to sightsee, taking in the widely touted geological wonders of the region, at their most spectacular on the government reserve that adjoined the Māori village. And they came to encounter “the Maori at Home,” as promised in the guidebooks and pamphlets published by the government and tour companies.

conclusion: from: The Tourist State
Abstract: As the first decade of the new millennium drew to a close, tourism growth slowed in Aotearoa New Zealand. Rising fuel prices took their toll, as did the nation’s stronger currency (the neoliberal economy turned victim of its own success). Then global recession set in. State policy has shifted: the new emerging market is now China, the new mantra “sustainability” rather than growth, with ecological outcomes now ranking alongside high-quality experiences, growing investment, and community partnering as strategic priorities.¹ As at the turn of the previous century, the art of government has always demanded reflexivity, a state ready to propose

Variations on Authority: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Bové Paul A.
Abstract: There have been recently many attempts to describe, rebut, “go beyond,” and account for deconstructive criticism. They have come from Marxist, phenomenological, humanistic, and political quarters. Occasionally, there have been sympathetic accounts, sometimes bordering on the apologetic, from a younger generation of scholars nurtured in the excitement of the Derridean era.¹

J. Hillis Miller: from: The Yale Critics
Author(s) Pease Donald
Abstract: Several abrupt turns mark the critical career of J. Hillis Miller and withhold from his works that sense of stability and continuity that a lifelong pursuit of a single critical project might otherwise provide. They do so, moreover, because they seem precipitated more by Miller’s translation and adaptation of the positions of other critics than by reversals in his own thinking. First, there was the New Critical dissertation at Harvard; then, after a one-year stay at Williams in 1952-53, the years of phenomenological criticism at Johns Hopkins from 1953 to 1972, and more recently the move to deconstruction at Yale.

Book Title: Heidegger and Criticism-Retrieving the Cultural Politics of Destruction
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Pease Donald E.
Abstract: In Heidegger and Criticism: Retrieving the Cultural Politics of Destruction, William Spanos examines the controversy, both in Europe and the United States, surrounding Heidegger and recent disclosures about his Nazi past. Not intended as a defense or apology for Heidegger’s thought, Spanos instead affirms the importance of Heidegger’s “antihumanist” interrogation of the modern age, its globalization of technology, and its neo-imperialist politics. The attack on Heidegger’s “antihumanist” discourse (by “liberal humanists” who have imported the European debated into the United States) aligns ideologically with the ongoing policing operations of William Bennett, Allan Bloom, E.D. Hirsch, Roger Kimball, Dinesh D”Souza, and others in the spheres of higher education and cultural production. Throughout his arguments, Spanos focuses not so much on Heidegger the historical subject as on the transformative cultural political discourses and practices, implicit in and enabled by Heidegger’s interrogations of Being and Time, that have led to the contemporary emergence of the multiplicity of resistant “Others” colonized by hegemonic discursive formations, all the while reminding us that Heidegger’s philosophic interrogations eventually generate a diverse body of transgressive writing and an oppositional intellectual climate in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttts9rh

Chapter 1 On Heidegger’s Destruction and the Metaphorics of Following: from: Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: The publication of Victor Farías’s Heidegger and Nazismin France in 1987 reopened the question concerning the relationship between Heidegger’s thought and Nazi politics with the force of scandal. Farías’s book contributes little that was not already known about Heidegger’s personal affiliation with Nazism.¹ And his analytical effort to implicate Heidegger’s thought at large with Nazism is characterized by a superficiality so obvious that, as Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe has observed, it betrays a certain intellectual dishonesty,² a dishonesty, I would add, endemic to the future anterior perspective of anthropological inquiry. It suggests that Farias’s identification of Heidegger’s philosophical writing at large

Chapter 2 Breaking the Circle: from: Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: Martin Heidegger’s destructive phenomenology has shown that modern philosophy, from Descartes through Kant and Hegel to the discourse of positive science, constitutes an “anthropology” that fulfills the imperatives of a metaphysical or logocentric concept of truth and thus brings “philosophy to its end.”¹ Simultaneously, in dis-closing the temporality being that the (anthropo)logos as Word or Presence encloses (covers over and forgets), Heidegger’s destruction of the tradition points to a hermeneutics of being that is capable of surpassing metaphysics ( Überwindung), to a postmodern hermeneutics of dis-covery, in which a disclosed temporality is given ontological priority over Being.² What I wish to

Chapter 3 Heidegger, Kierkegaard, and the Hermeneutic Circle from: Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I tried to show that Modernism in Western literature—and in the New Critical and structuralist hermeneutics to which it gave rise—is grounded in a representational strategy that spatializes the temporal process of existence as being-in-the-world. It is, in other words, a strategy that is subject to a vicious circularity that closes off the phenomenological/existential understanding of the temporal being of existence, and analogously, of the literary text: the sequence of words. It is no accident that the autotelic and in-clusive circle—the circle, that is, as image or figure, or, as I prefer, as

Chapter 5 Heidegger and Foucault: from: Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: In the preceding essays, I situated my destructive inquiry into the operations of humanist discursive practices at the site of ontology. My purpose in doing so was to suggest the underlying continuity between the various historically specific representations of reality in the onto-theological tradition, the tradition that has come to be called “the West” or “the Occident”: that these representations constitute, in Derrida's terms, “a series of substitutions of center for center, . . . a linked chain of determinations of the center.”¹ My limitation of inquiry to the site of ontology was intended to thematize the metaphysics informing the

1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from: Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with

7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from: Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that

Documentary Time: from: Documentary Time
Abstract: Image and time represent a pristine problem of classical film theory and film aesthetics, which has primarily been associated with assertions regarding the physical medium of cinema and qualities of film as a visual art. The purpose of this book was to reconsider these issues from the perspective of documentary cinema and account for the inheritance of existential phenomenology in classical film theory. Consequently, a reassessment of cinematic temporality in early film criticism and in experimental filmmaking brought attention to the historical persistence of phenomenological themes in film theory and visual culture. Moreover, the aim of this metatheoretical outline was

Introduction: from: Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Modernity is an atavism. Its advent in Western culture led to and was given shape by political, social, and aesthetic developments that can be characterized by a recursive temporal subjectivity. This book provides a historical and theoretical account of that subjectivity by looking at late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century science, fition, and photography. Theories and expressions of atavism in these representational spheres reveal the way modern thought oriented itself around a paradigm of obsolescence and return that structured the experience of modern time. If “modernity” designates itself in terms of its eternal up-to-date-ness, atavism—a theory of biological reversion emerging

3. “Wolf—wolf!”: from: Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Atavism demonstrates, sometimes quite poignantly, that the body does not coincide with its present. It dramatizes the past as in communication with the present; it insists that the past and the present are temporal spheres fused in continuity. By making manifest a disordered temporality, the atavistic body demonstrates something of the nature of cultural preoccupations in late modernity. At the same time, the epistemological projects orbiting around this body demonstrate something of the nature of the formal procedures exercised in the scientific pursuit of corporeal mastery. If those procedures may be seen in psychoanalysis and medical photography, they also emerge

1 Testimonials as Dependent Production from: Telling Identities
Abstract: In the decade of the 1870s approximately sixty-two old Californios who participated in Bancroft’s historiographic project began mapping their imaginary sense of position within a conquered terrain no longer recoverable except in memory. Through their dictated narratives, which function as early sites of ideological struggle, these Californios not only reconstruct their past and retrospectively narrate the nation, but map a new geopolitical cartography,¹ a liminal ethnic space produced as much by their particular history as by U.S. expansionism.² Having lost their “homeland” and the political and economic power to regain their former social status, the narrators turn to representational spaces,

3 Theoretical Disjunctures and Discourses of Liberalism from: Telling Identities
Abstract: With the arrival in 1825 of José María Echeandía, the first governor appointed by the newly independent Mexican state, the youth of Alta California, the Young Turks as it were, who would become the emergent class of the territory and who were then hungry for news of the world and new ideas, were granted an opportunity to imagine a new society upon being invited to participate in discussions on the latest ideological framework stirring debate in the Mexican capital: liberalism. Echeandia’s notions of republicanism and individual liberty clashed with feudal discourses of aristocracy, especially with long-held tenets of birthright and

5 Politics of Gender from: Telling Identities
Abstract: In analyzing any ideological discourse, we are struck by its ambiguity and fuzziness; both Chatterjee and Hobsbawm have pointed this out in reference to the discourses of liberalism and nationalism, as we have seen in chapter 3.¹ The same indeterminacy applies to discourses of gender, for they also operate within an ideological field intersected by a multiplicity of discourses. Consequently, there can be no essential gender discourse, only gender discourses in articulation with other discourses, like those of nation, race/caste, religion, family, class, and sexuality, all of which articulate with one another and generate a variety of social identities. In

6 Profonationalism in Alta California from: Telling Identities
Abstract: Nations, Hobsbawm insists, are the product of territorial states, nationalism, and particular stages of technological and economic development.¹ Before the formation of a state, the elite within a nationalist movement often produces constructs of “the nation-to-be” although in fact the “nation” produced afterward may be quite different. Nationalism as a mass movement, Hobsbawm indicates, is a final stage, coming after the formation of a state. To generate identification with this “imagined community,”² nationalist movements often call upon already existing constructs of community, what we can term “protonationalist” identities generated by discourses of religion, ethnicity, language, kinship, culture, and earlier “historical

Two What Memories Are We Talking About? from: State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: The draft title for this chapter was “What is memory?” Such a title invites a single and univocal definition of the term. Though not involving a logical contradiction, asking what memory is (in singular) may seem at odds with offering to study processes of memory construction, of memories in the plural, and of social disputes over memories, their social legitimacy, and claims to “truth.” This chapter attempts to advance some conceptual issues in order to offer some tools for further analytical and empirical steps. It does not pretend to be an exhaustive discussion of issues that, by their very complexity

3 Documentary Desire: from: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: The identifications that, in the fiction film, are dismissed as vicarious, illusory, and ideologically dangerous are, in documentary, both permitted and proper to its project. Explored here are the ways in which the documentary film, no less than the fiction feature film, offers mise-enscènes of desire and of imagining that enable identification even while, or rather because, it asserts itself as real. As spectators of documentary, we bring with us not only an understanding of the conventions of the novelistic, as well as of the “factual,” but also a desire for reality represented and a desire to find that moment

8 Representing the Monster: from: Monster Theory
Author(s) Kritzman Lawrence D.
Abstract: The relationship between the exemplum of cripples and the theme of causality is central to Montaigne’s representation of the monster in the essay “On Cripples” (III, n).¹ If the question of causality is discussed early in the chapter, it is in order to set in motion an epistemological critique whose target is the weakness of human reason. Montaigne focuses specifically on the defects of human understanding and our need to shift attention away from things (“chases”)in order to reflect more closely on their causes(“causes”).Nevertheless, by engaging in this wordplay the essayist ironically links things to causes and

9 Hermaphrodites Newly Discovered: from: Monster Theory
Author(s) Long Kathleen Perry
Abstract: Recent works on the figure of the hermaphrodite, especially as manifested in early modern France, have concentrated on the medical and legal bases for depiction of this dual being.¹ When philosophical sources are explored, platonic and neoplatonic sources are emphasized.² Thus the hermaphrodite becomes a figure either of menace or of divine completion and wisdom. These views evade many of the epistemological, theological, and political problems raised by ambiguity of gender, problems currently discussed in modern gender theory but already known to Renaissance audiences well versed in skepticism. The gender ambiguities played out in the court of Henri III of

Chapter 2 The Television Newscast: from: Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) López Silvia L.
Abstract: The reason is unmistakable: the expansion of the capitalist market, the Industrial Revolution, and the progressive antagonism of scientific discourses in the configuration of reality accelerate the transformation of reality itself. The expansion of forces of production and the multiplication of specifically scientific and technological codes constitute two aspects of a movement that expands the order of the commodity into the most unimaginable segments of

CHAPTER TWO Brazilian National Identity: from: Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: In a vein similar to that of chapter 1, which focuses on macrological views of Portuguese nationhood and their eventual weakening or relativization in today’s cultural landscape, this chapter traces the movement from the emergence of grand narratives of national identity since the 1930s in the Brazilian intellectual field to the upsurge of a multiplicity of smaller narratives of nationhood across various discursive fields, social arenas, and media in contemporary Brazil. Thus, we observe a shift from macrological approaches that have privileged constructs such as “racial democracy,” social typologies such as “the cordial man,” or geopolitical binaries such as the

CHAPTER FIVE Worlds in Transition and Utopias of Otherness from: Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: The previous four chapters have traced the shift from the grand narratives of nationhood proposed by various currents of Portuguese and Brazilian intellectual thought to a proliferation of micronarratives of nationhood in the realms of literature, popular culture, and the political arena in contemporary Brazil and Portugal. Although this study has focused primarily on Portuguese and Brazilian national cultures, this epistemological shift has clearly been an international phenomenon due to a multiplicity of interrelated factors, namely (in varying order of intensity) globalization, the relative weakening of foundationalist thought structures (for example, nationalisms, Marxism, and Christianity); the affirmation of micro or

5. Literature and Pathology: from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Ronell Avital
Abstract: Ever resisting the temptation to be born again, even today, as we mark the one-hundredth anniversary of its initializing text, psychoanalysis was from the start just about the only one to confront human cruelty, the punishing aspects of the psyche, without a theological alibi—in fact, with no alibi or safety net. Psychoanalysis ventured forth without an alibi—with no excuse, as it were. This is one of Derrida’s recent themes: that psychoanalysis met head-on with unbearable examples of suffering, but took no recourse to theology. It may have scanned monotheism, or even served as witness for Dr. Schreber when

10. Is Lacan Borderline? from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Feher-Gurewich Judith
Abstract: One hundred years after The Interpretation of Dreams,Freud’s discovery of the unconscious continues to sap the comfort of our received notions on love, desire, reproduction, violence, and death. Freud’s unconscious is a seductive delinquent, always on the go, tracking down desire and its infinite partial objects. Oblivious to debts, to logic and justice, it moves steadily toward death in search of the intervention of a father figure in front of whom it refuses to yield. No wonder that, among Freud’s epigones, Lacan stands quasi-alone to plead for that which defies the proper functioning of the law of social and

20. Marx, Condensed and Displaced from: The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Kordela A. Kiarina
Abstract: This surplus is ontologically different from capital, sign,

Chapter 5 Psychoanalysis, Criticism, Self-Criticism from: Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: The part here played by Freud (and we are not now concerned with the “validity” of this interpretation with regard to Freud) could be equally assigned to literary texts, since literature can be shown to accomplish in its terms a deconstruction that parallels the psychological deconstruction of selfhood in Freud. The intensity of the interplay between literary and psychoanalytical criticism is easy enough to

5 Disability and Contingency from: Calibrations
Abstract: This chapter focuses on disability studies and the representation of disabled people in literature. In turning to such literary representations, I continue the methodological predisposition of reading literature for social analysis, further illustrating the kinds of theoretical calibrations central to the readings being expounded in this book. But here a difference in focus has to be noted from the outset. Whereas in the previous chapters the theoretical calibration had to do with aligning a discursive genre or paradigm (e.g., tragedy, urban myths, literature of the ex-centric) to a reading of various dimensions of the African postcolony, here the analysis centers

7 Postcolonial Aporias: from: Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: If an aporia is defined as a problem or difficulty arising from an awareness of opposing or incompatible views on the same theoretic matter, it seems to me that we have reached an aporetic stage in the postcolonial quest for nation building. The very practices that produce the nation are coeval with its simultaneous fragmentation or unraveling. Although the supposedly progressive and universal idea of the nation is expected to eventually triumph over the reactionary and particularist idea denoted as ethnicity, a close look at the practices of nation building reveal that both nation and ethnicity share a logic that

[8] How to Make History Perceptible: from: Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Leger Claudia
Abstract: With The Bartos Family(1988), Péter Forgács inaugurated a series of films dedicated to the history of Hungary. All these films take up the tradition of the montage or archive film,¹ also known as the foundfootage film.² More precisely, they belong to a particular current in this tradition: compilations based on home movies. This current includes different styles of production, which can be grouped roughly into four broad categories: films with a psychological tendency (intimate journals, letters, autobiographies), which utilize home movies to increase a sense of lived experience;³ montages designed to be spectacular, comic, or dramatic (such as the

Introduction: from: Divided Korea
Abstract: One of the key features of politics in Korea is a persistently recurring state of military tension. The roots of this conflict are historical: as a result of the emerging Soviet-American rivalry at the end of World War II, the Korean peninsula was tentatively divided along the thirtyeighth parallel. With the creation of two politically and ideologically separate Korean states in 1948, and their subsequent confrontation during the Korean War, the patterns for conflict in northeast Asia were set. In 1953 the Armistice Agreement ended three years of intense fighting that killed more than a million people. But the memory

2 The Persistence of Cold War Antagonisms from: Divided Korea
Abstract: One would think that ideological antagonisms substantially subsided with the collapse of the Berlin Wall in 1989 and the subsequent disintegration of the Soviet Union. But in Korea it is striking how much remains the same. The peninsula has become an anachronism in international relations: a small but highly volatile Cold War enclave surrounded by a world that has long moved away from a dualistic ideological standoff. What Kihl Young Hwan noted two decades ago thus remains by and large true today: the level of ideological hostility in Korea is so intense that it leads to the perception, and actual

Conclusion from: Divided Korea
Abstract: The first task consisted of presenting the conflict on the peninsula not only in conventional ideological and geopolitical terms but also, and primarily, as a

CHAPTER THREE Aesthetics before Art: from: Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Farago Claire
Abstract: As anyone who has ever attempted to act on a mirror image’s spatial cues knows, the logic of the looking glass is counterintuitive. Walking through time’s looking glass, as it were, in the opposite direction from contemporary understandings of science, religion, and art as three distinct domains, toward their fluid intersection in the early modern period, the following essay attempts to recapture a decidedly unmodern aspect of our artistic heritage. The aspects of Leonardo’s paintings that will be of concern here pertain to that elusive and troubling designation known as “style.” Meyer Schapiro associated “style,” in an article published in

Book Title: Covert Gestures-Crypto-Islamic Literature as Cultural Practice in Early Modern Spain
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Barletta Vincent
Abstract: Covert Gestures reveals how the traditional Islamic narratives of the moriscos both shaped and encoded a wide range of covert social activity characterized by a profound and persistent concern with time and temporality. Using a unique blend of literary analysis, linguistic anthropology, and phenomenological philosophy, Vincent Barletta explores the narratives as testimonials of past human experiences and discovers in them evidence of community resistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttgdg

2 Written Narrative and the Human Dimension of Time from: Covert Gestures
Abstract: This chapter will map out in some detail the activity-centered approach to traditional aljamiado-morisconarratives from Castile and Aragon. This approach, based on the analysis of manuscript texts and what is known about the cultural world of Castilian and Aragonese crypto-Muslims, seeks to address the ways in which members of these communities used handwritten narrative texts in their efforts to make sense of their complex and precarious existence in Spain. In order to present the details of this approach, both from a theoretical and methodological perspective, I will be drawing connections between phenomenological philosophy, ethnographic research on oral narrative, and

3. Material Voices: from: Intangible Materialism
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine the relationship of poetry to the neurobiological condition known as Tourette syndrome in order to describe a kind of physiological materialism that situates itself within the hierarchy of levels of organization I examined in the preceding chapter. Tourette syndrome is clearly an organic condition that involves, among other symptoms, the seeming emotion-charged use of language, the spouting forth of obscene language that, as researchers note, “may represent,” among other symptoms, “a common clinical expression of underlying central nervous system dysfunction” (Fahn and Erenberg 1988, 51).¹ That Tourette syndrome entails the automatic outpouring of emotionally charged

4. The History of the Hand: from: Intangible Materialism
Abstract: Chapter 3 examines the relationship between physiological materialism of voice and the formal affective elements of poetry; this chapter examines the relationship between the evolutionary materialism of the hand and the elements of literary narrative. Near the end of the preceding chapter, I suggested—almost hidden in a footnote—that Darwinian accounts of evolution are “similar” to linguistic notions of the arbitrary nature of the sign and to Oliver Sacks’s description of the conventionality of space-experience as more or less “convenient.” The similarity, as I noted there, is between the accidental and more or less arbitrary nature of the “proximate”

5. Pain, Memory, and Religious Suffering: from: Intangible Materialism
Abstract: In this chapter, I describe the relations among pain, memory, and religious suffering. In doing so, I take up, in another register, the physiology of voices I examined in Tourette syndrome, the communality and semiotics I examined in the evolution of the work of our hands, and the hierarchy of materialism I am tracing throughout Intangible Materialismaltogether. This is clear in the particular nature of pain, which, as Ariel Glucklich says, “is conscious by definition” (2001, 96; see Jackson 2002, 18, 148) even while, as Roselyne Rey notes, the “anatomical and physiological foundation” of pain makes it in important

Book Title: Narratives of Agency-Self-Making in China, India, and Japan
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: This multidisciplinary collection underlines the importance of understanding the operations of human agency-defined here as the ability to exert power, specifically in resistance to ideological pressure. In particular, the contributors emphasize the historical and cultural conditions that facilitate the production of agency in an effort to gain a deeper understanding of the cultures of China, India, and Japan. In Narratives of Agency, scholars from a variety of disciplines argue that traditional Western approaches to the study of these cultures have unduly focused on the pervasive influence of family and clan (China), caste and fatalism (India), and groupism (Japan). This tendency has been exacerbated by modern critical approaches, such as postmodernism and poststructuralism, that not only are increasingly popular in studying these cultures but also de-emphasize the role of the individual. The resultant undermining of the notion of human agency tends to give short shrift to the very real individual differences between groups and ignores questions of personal desire and intentionality. These essays remind us that members of a community have to make personal choices, struggle and interact with others, argue about positions, and confront new challenges, all of which involve intentionality and human agency. A new look at a topic central to cross-cultural understanding, Narratives of Agency will be essential reading for those interested in China, India, Japan, and the world beyond._x000B_ _x000B_Contributors: Richard G. Fox, Washington U; Lydia H. Liu, U of California, Berkeley; Owen M. Lynch, New York U; Vijay Mishra, Murdoch U, Australia; Marie Thorsten Morimoto; Emiko Ohnuki-Tierney, U of Wisconsin, Madison; Eugene Yuejin Wang, U of Chicago; Ming-Bao Yue, U of Hawaii, Manoa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttp11

5 Self-Made from: Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Fox Richard G.
Abstract: Clifford Geertz (1983:59) tells us that “the Western conception of the person as bounded, unique, more or less integrated motivational and cognitive universe ... organized into a distinctive whole and set contrastively both against other such wholes and against its social and natural background is ... a rather peculiar idea.” Geertz is hardly alone in recognizing this supposedly singular Western conception. For example, the psychiatrist Alan Roland (1988), under heavy influence from South Asian anthropologists, contrasts the “prevailing psychological maps and norms” of “Western man” (we must assume he also means to include Western woman)—the Western universalizing mode of

CHAPTER 4 The Path to Politics in The Constant Gardener from: Out of Time
Abstract: The reconception of cinematic romance in Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind(Michel Gondry, 2004) undermines the typical fantasy that allows romance to serve an ideological function. But Gondry’s film leaves romance as the concern of two individuals. The love between Joel (Jim Carrey) and Clementine (Kate Winslet) undoubtedly has political implications, but the film doesn’t explore them. Instead, it focuses solely on configuring romance through antagonism rather than by attempting to surmount antagonism. This focus lies at the heart of the film’s effectiveness, and at the same time creates an opening for another film to lay out the political

Chapter 3 Escape from the Image: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Schwab Martin
Abstract: In his two cinema books, The Movement-ImageandThe Time-Image, Gilles Deleuze offers an aesthetic and historical account of the cinema based on an unfamiliar and intriguing ontology—an ontology of images. Objects, qualities, processes, actions, even the brain: all are images in a dynamic universe of images. In this ″image-world,″ art—specifically, the cinema—emerges as something not ontologically distinct from the rest of the world. Indeed, Deleuze′s theory amounts to the simultaneous dynamization and de-Platonization of the cinema. Deleuzian ″image-art″ is neither semblance (Schein), nor the coming to the fore of a separate and ″artificial″ world, nor the

Chapter 10 Midday, Midnight: from: The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Dailey Patricia
Abstract: The two volumes that constitute Deleuze′s inquiry into the cinematic image, The Movement-ImageandThe Time-Image, are like two facets of an inquiry that, together, form one remarkable book of philosophy—a book situated in the very middle [au milieu] of Deleuze′s philosophy. This milieu, in which the essence of a thing appears, is likewise the milieu of acinema-thinkingthat rescinds any phenomenological privilege from natural perception in order to lay itself open to the ″materialist programme″³ of a Bergsonian world. In this world, the identity of the real and of the image (i.e., that which appears) results in

3 On the Practices of Representing and Knowing Architecture from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Piotrowski Andrzej
Abstract: Designing architecture is a unique epistemological practice, a unique way of knowing resulting from a complex process of conceptual negotiations. Architects not only solve technical problems and create aesthetic objects but facilitate a process in which visions of a building acquire a particular symbolic or cultural sense. While working on a project, a designer must develop multiple architectural proposals, understand the complexity of issues they manifest, and negotiate them with the parties involved in the project—clients, local authorities, planners, consultants, contractors, bankers, and many others. A designer produces these versions in order to understand what kind of a design

8 Environment and Architecture from: Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Watson Donald
Abstract: When the term “environment” is used in architecture, it refers generally to the surrounding landscape and context of buildings. In both legal and professional architectural practice, “environment” may refer narrowly to health concerns, such as indoor air quality, or broadly to the ecological impacts that building may have on regional air and water quality and ultimately on global climate. Some of these impacts can be measured in terms of human health, energy consumption, and pollution, as well as other environmental indices, including biodiversity of local species and global warming. For the profession of architecture to respond to these issues of

Communism as Critique from: Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: These terminological problems

Chapter 5 Evocation as a Literary Procedure in Don Quijote from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Under the pretext, by no means original at that time, of parodying books of chivalry, Don Quijoteemerges as a trueLiteraturroman.¹This dimension of Cervantes’s novel surfaces not only at the level of the story, as it relates the antics of a fool whose pathological distortions of his readings lead him to confuse fiction with reality, but also at the level of narration, which strictly speaking consists of a discursive and fictitious historical interplay between author, reader, and text.² In this manner, it can account both for its own production in the novel itself as well as for its

Chapter 6 Discourse Pragmatics and Reciprocity of Perspectives: from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Perhaps their working on language and on the imaginary defines the specificity of literary practices, their social dimension (and social role) as well as the confluence of different discursive formations in the literary text. It does not follow, however, that the literary text organizes itself in a purely mechanistic way. On the contrary, it is located in dialogical interaction with a concrete sociohistorical conjuncture, is mediated by various ideological instances, and participates in the contradictory network of the discursive formations of its surroundings. Thus a contextual boundary must be established that might allow an understanding of the “grand dialogue” in

Chapter 7 The Antimodernization of Spain from: Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: The term antimodernization may call to mind the currently fashionable maneuver whereby to the poorly defined concept of “modernity” is opposed a concept that derives from it— “postmodernity,” which is as poorly defined as the framework from which it originates. One does not always credit Spanish (a language where “isms” abound) with being able to distinguish between the terms of this contemporary debate and those forged by the historiography of Hispanic literatures, which has accustomed us to opposing an aesthetic movement known as modernism to what has been called the Generation of 1898, an ideological movement (as if aesthetics and

1 Locational Hazards: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: In Critique, Norm, and Utopia,Seyla Benhabib identifies the anticipatory/utopian pole within theories of social transformation as that which gives us our normative grounding and sense of a moral imperative, that which allows us to make qualitative judgments and to construct an orientation toward the good. In this way, Benhabib associates the Utopian impulse with what Ernst Bloch calls our “principle of hope”—our ability and desire to imagine something other and better than our existing conditions. At the same time, however, the Utopian impulse is characterized by a set of conservative logics and gestures that are increasingly seen as

2 Turning Inward: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Depending upon the point of view from which the ideal collective is conceived, the political effect of the narrative practices that support the traditional form of utopian literature can vary dramatically. In the first part of this chapter, I examine how utopian logic operates in traditional works of utopian literature that express a more or less socialist agenda; in the second part, I explore a novel in which this traditional utopian literary form has been adapted to reflect and support a contemporary feminist vision. My study of the utopian literary tradition in this chapter is not intended to be exhaustive;

3 Speaking Parts: from: Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Possessing a disempowered position within society, oppressed groups need something more than a stabilizing of the social space that consolidates their position on the margins. The traditional utopian goal of projecting an ideal space free from ideological conflict, however, is incompatible with the goal of exposing and exploring the contradictions and double binds that inflect female subjectivity. If marginalized groups retain this strategy, challenges to the status quo tend to reproduce the logic of stable difference and create “utopias of reversal.” To the extent that contemporary feminists address the ways in which women have been denied the opportunity to establish

Chapter 5 Who’s Who and Who Does What in the Tale Told from: Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Narrative meaning is concretized through the production and comprehension of narrative units of discourse (transactive and/or nontransactive narratemes) which involve noun phrases (NPs) as well as verb phrases (VPs). Moreover, the text of a linguistic narrative is also made of all sorts of discursemes that have subjects. It is now time to raise some of the many questions involved and propose some methodological directions in a field that has so often been obscured by ideological interests alien or opposed to a science of discourse.

If “All Anthropologists are Liars ...” [1987] from: Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: GEERTZ (1973) claimed ethnography is something “we do.” Others have suggested that it is something we write (see Clifford and Marcus 1986). Both writing and doing (inscription and practice) have received considerable critical attention in semiotics, aesthetics, and theoretical science in the last few decades. What happens when we apply some of these recent reflexive considerations that have emerged in philosophical theory to particular anthropological practices and ethnographic inscription? I want to examine a recent ethnography that, because it is new and means to be, because it attempts certain classical holisms while citing more contemporary equivocal theory, and because it

Book Title: Assembling the Lyric Self-Authorship from Troubadour Song to Italian Poetry Book
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Holmes Olivia
Abstract: Assembling the Lyric Self investigates the transition in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries from the first surviving Provençal and Italian manuscripts (mostly multiauthor lyric anthologies prepared by scribes) to the single-author codex-that is, to the form we now think of as the book of poems. Working from extensive archival and philological research, Olivia Holmes explores the efforts of individual poets to establish poetic authenticity and authority in the context of expanding vernacular literacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttx65

Introduction: from: The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Pluralism, advertised as a diverse, tolerant form of life, is again on the discussion agenda in Europe and America. Its resurgence reflects the contingent confluence of several elements. They include the collapse of communist states, accompanied by the post-Marxist appreciation of energies in civil society exceeding the unity of command economies;¹ the acceleration of population flows accompanying the globalization of economic life, as affluent managers step up the pace of transnational mobility and postcolonials migrate to the centers of former empires; the acceleration of speed in military delivery systems, cultural communications, civilian transportation, disease transmission, ecological change, and political mobilization,

1. Nothing Is Fundamental... from: The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Onta, the really existing things;ontology, the study of the fundamental logic of reality apart from appearances. These determinations are both too restrictive and too total for what I have in mind. For example, thelogosinontologyalready suggests a fundamental logic, principle, or design of being. But it can and has been urged that the most fundamental thing about being is that it contains no such overriding logic or design. “Ontopolitical interpretation” may come closer, then.Onto, because every political interpretation invokes a set of fundaments about necessities and possibilities of human being, about, for instance, the forms

Book Title: Gameplay Mode-War, Simulation, and Technoculture
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): CROGAN PATRICK
Abstract: To understand the place of computer games in contemporary culture, Patrick Crogan argues, we must first understand the military logics that created and continue to inform them. Drawing on critical theoretical perspectives on computer-based technoculture, Crogan reveals how today’s computer games—and the wider culture they increasingly influence—are informed by the technoscientific program they inherited from the military-industrial complex.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv857

Chapter 3 “The Reduction of Indication” from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: Only ideal contents can be linked together in logically necessary ways.

Chapter 7 “The Voice that Keeps Silence” from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: As we have seen, Husserl attempts to delimit expression in two directions. In the first place, he distinguishes expression from indication, arguing that while the two functions are interwoven in communication, we find the expressive function without the indicative function in soliloquy. In the second place, he distinguishes logical meaning as expression from

Chapter 10 Saussure from: Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: The deconstructive reading of Ferdinand de Saussure’s Cours de la linguistique généraleplays a crucial role inOf Grammatology, for in Saussure Derrida thinks that he can attack “the entire uncritical tradition which [Saussure] inherits” (OG, 67/46). If it can be shown that Saussure’s work is governed by a “coherence of desire producing itself in a near-oneiric way . . . through a contradictory logic,” this will “already give us the assured means of broaching the deconstruction of thegreatest totality—the concept of theepistēmēand logocentric metaphysics—within which are produced, without ever posing the radical question of

2 “KEEP YOUR EYES OPEN” from: Counter-Archive
Abstract: In the opening pages of Tristes Tropiques, Claude Lévi-Strauss recalls with a mixture of embarrassment and nostalgia the poorly attended anthropological lectures held weekly at Paris’s zoological museum in the 1920s. He drags out this half-forgotten scene of amateurishly illustrated lectures in the “dilapidated amphitheatre” of Paris’s Jardin des Plantes with a view to criticizing the more professionalized and mediated travel lectures that filled the Salle Pleyel in the 1950s. Lévi-Strauss’s distaste for the latter venue—whose commercial travel lectures were similarly targeted for criticism around the same time by André Bazin in an essay (“Cinema and Exploration”) that praised

Book Title: A Materialism for the Masses-Saint Paul and the Philosophy of Undying Life
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Blanton Ward
Abstract: Nietzsche and Freud saw Christianity as metaphysical escapism, with Nietzsche calling the religion a "Platonism for the masses" and faulting Paul the apostle for negating more immanent, material modes of thought and political solidarity. Integrating this debate with the philosophies of difference espoused by Gilles Deleuze, Michel Foucault, Jacques Derrida, Jacques Lacan, and Pier Paolo Pasolini, Ward Blanton argues that genealogical interventions into the political economies of Western cultural memory do not go far enough in relation to the imagined founder of Christianity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/blan16690

1 INTERPRETING THE ENLIGHTENMENT: from: Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: In the aftermath of the terrorist attacks of september 11, 2001, amid the intellectual retrenchment consonant with the unending “war against terror,” the Enlightenment legacy has become—more than ever before—a contested terrain. Human rights is often used as an ideological excuse for the exercise of arbitrary power; the security of western states has served as a justification for the constriction of personal freedom; and, with flags flying, Christian fundamentalists have called for the defense of western “values.” The best of them—political liberty, social justice, and cosmopolitanism—are rooted in the Enlightenment, and they retain their radical character.

3 INVENTING LIBERALISM from: Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: Liberalism was the philosophical expression for the age of democratic revolution and the principal political theory of the Enlightenment. Its method was the critical deployment of “reason” and its goal was bettering the conditions of social life and expanding “freedom.”¹ No less than the Enlightenment itself, however, the liberal heritage is both underestimated and taken for granted. Often seen merely as an ideological veil for capitalist exploitation, this new political worldview legitimated the idea of “resistance” against established authority—which was already implicit within the scientific revolution initiated by Sir Francis Bacon, Galileo, and Descartes—and it gave members of

2 THE FRANKFURT SCHOOL AND SOCIAL THEORY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HONNETH AXEL
Abstract: In 1950, when the Institute for Social Research reopened in Frankfurt, its activities resumed without a direct connection to the way the organization had operated in the 1930s and 1940s. There was no continuity between the sociological studies that were now being conducted and the philosophical, cultural, and critical projects that Horkheimer, Adorno, and Marcuse (who remained in the United States) were continuing to pursue. Henceforth, critical theory ceased to be a “school” of unified endeavor, at least in terms of method.

7 PSYCHOANALYSIS from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) WHITEBOOK JOEL
Abstract: The way Horkheimer and Adorno formulated the dialectic of enlightenment left only two options: political resignation or utopianism. Herbert Marcuse took the second and tried to break out of the seemingly implacable logic of Horkheimer and Adorno’s position insofar as it was formulated in psychoanalytic terms (Habermas 1985, 74ff.). Where the utopian idea of a nonrepressive society had only been advanced as a theoretical possibility in Eros and Civilization, by the late sixties, Marcuse, under the influence of the New Left, was advocating it as a concrete political program.

10 COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NUNNER-WINKLER GERTRUD
Abstract: Behaviorism understands cognitive learning as a cumulative process of forming associations based on the perception of contingencies, and normative learning as a process of adopting desired modes of behavior in response to punishment and reward (that is, as a process of conditioning). From a psychoanalytic perspective, development is a matter of constructing mental patterns on the basis of the relationships experienced in early childhood. Norms are observed because the child wishes to avoid pangs of conscience (i.e., the revenge of the superego, which internalizes the fear of castration); alternatively, this occurs because the structure of biological needs has undergone change

11 THE EPITOME OF TECHNOCRATIC CONSCIOUSNESS from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NEVES MARCELO
Abstract: The debate between Habermas and Luhmann goes back to the end of the 1960s—a time of extreme “ideological” confrontation in the fields of social science and philosophy. Matters became especially intense upon the publication of Theorie der Gesellschaft oder Sozialtechnologie—Was leistet die Systemforschung?(Social theory or social technology—what does systems research accomplish?; Habermas and Luhmann 1971). This book occasioned heated discussion and, in almost no time at all, two supplementary volumes. Over the years, the matter has grown more complex inasmuch as Habermas has tempered his earlier criticism on a few points—or, at the very least,

12 EVOLUTIONARY THEORIES from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) EDER KLAUS
Abstract: The theory of social evolution plays a key role in the foundation of Habermas’s theory of communicative action. Since Marx, the evolutionary perspective has struggled with the fact that the position the observer occupies must necessarily be, at the same time, the endpoint of the process in question—and therefore a point of teleological narrowness restricting the scope of social theory. Over time, this problem has lost none of its actuality for projects that seek to address processes of societal development. Durkheim, for example, was wedded to the model of phase-specific progression as much as, more recently, Parsons, Luhmann, and

23 NEOPRAGMATISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BERNSTEIN RICHARD J.
Abstract: For over forty years Habermas has taken inspiration from and been deeply influenced by the classical American pragmatists, especially Charles S. Peirce, John Dewey, and George Herbert Mead. He has appropriated, reconstructed, and integrated many of the primary themes of these thinkers into his own comprehensive philosophic perspective: a radical critique of Cartesianism and the philosophy of consciousness; a focus on the primacy of social practices and action in understanding everyday life (the lifeworld); a thoroughgoing fallibilism that encompasses both knowledge of the world and moral reasoning; a development of an intersubjective dialogical understanding of action and rationality; and a

29 CRITIQUE OF KNOWLEDGE AS SOCIAL THEORY: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) REHG WILLIAM
Abstract: Over his long and productive career, Jürgen Habermas has pursued an overriding interest in critical social-political theory. For Habermas, as for other Frankfurt School critical theorists, social-political critique requires interdisciplinary social analysis and thus depends on engagement with the social and cultural sciences. In the 1960s, Habermas approached such engagement as a problem for methodological and epistemological reflection, that is, a matter of critique of knowledge ( Erkenntniskritik): critical social theory had to establish itself as a respectable, distinct form of knowledge, in large measure through a methodological critique of the then-dominant positivist philosophy of science and historicist hermeneutics. Conversely, critique

30 COMMUNICATIVE RATIONALITY: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: In the 1970s, Habermas’s efforts to ground a critical theory of society underwent a “linguistic turn”; henceforth linguistic communication stood at the center of his project. Although some of his earlier writings from the 1960s had demonstrated an interest in linguistic analysis (e.g., On the Logic of the Social Sciences), the central methodological shift took shape in the 1970s. As a consequence of this shift, the formal-pragmatic analysis of communication was no longer to be understood as a metatheory seeking to provide a “language-theoretic foundation of the social sciences” (Communicative Action, 1:xxxix); instead, it provided the core element of a

41 HUMAN NATURE AND GENETIC MANIPULATION: from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SCHMIDT THOMAS M.
Abstract: Depending on one’s temperament and sensibilities, progress in the biological sciences occasions enthusiasm or misgivings. Either way, these advances have prompted calls—which are only growing in number—for points of normative orientation. Genetic technology and biotechnology have not only given rise to philosophical reactions along the lines of applied ethics (e.g., disputes about appropriate standards and codes of regulation). In addition, discussions concerning stem-cell research and changes to human genetic material have brought into focus a basic anthropological question about “the future of human nature.” As Habermas views things, the fundamental provocation represented by preimplantation genetic diagnosis (PGD) and

46 COMMUNICATIVE ANTHROPOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JÖRKE DIRK
Abstract: Habermas’s engagement with the questions posed by anthropology began during his university studies—when he evinced skepticism about efforts to determine the unchanging qualities of human nature. He presented his reflections in an encyclopedia article (1958) that received broad attention at the time. According to Otfried Höffe (1992), this piece is responsible for the hegemony of “postanthropological thinking” that prevailed in the “human sciences” until the 1990s (7). In keeping with the conventions of the genre, the first part of Habermas’s encyclopedia entry provides an introductory overview of the history and essential concepts of anthropological thought; the second part, however,

47 CONSERVATISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUMLIK MICHA
Abstract: Conservative thinking in its various adumbrations has interested Jürgen Habermas since the very beginning of his sociological and philosophical efforts. In 1963, he authored the article “Kritische und konservative Aufgaben der Soziologie” (Critical and conservative tasks of sociology). Referring to Scottish moral philosophy—especially the works of David Hume—as a conservative element of sociology in its early stages, Habermas declared that conservatism “esteems tradition as the peaceful basis of ongoing development precisely because it does not question the naturalness [ Naturwüchsigkeit] of progress.”

56 EVOLUTION from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NEVES MARCELO
Abstract: Like Talcott Parsons and Niklas Luhmann, Habermas holds that social evolution entails heightened system complexity ( Communicative Action,2:155ff.). Unlike his colleagues, however, he affirms that increases in social complexity are mediated by a “developmental logic” whose structure corresponds to the way moral consciousness evolves in stages (esp.Communicative Action, 2:174ff.;Evolution, 69 94, 95 129;Rekonstruktion, 129 143;Moral Consciousness). Contra Luhmann’s (1975, 2003) systems theory, Habermas argues that mounting complexity and the social differentiation that accompanies it depend on “learning mechanisms.” In this sense, his position is that differentiation can represent either “evolutionary processes” or stagnation (Rekonstruktion, 133–134, 230;

57 HISTORICAL MATERIALISM from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HARTMANN MARTIN
Abstract: The theory of historical materialism developed by Marx and Engels understands social conditions as the result of a teleological historical process. The analysis of operative categories—forces of production, relations of production, and superstructure—permit the further course of history to be explained and even predicted. As outlined in Marx’s Grundrisse(Marx 1993), the model of historical materialism is as follows: Forces of production (i.e., the labor of persons who are active in production, the specialized knowledge that manages/directs their efforts, the tools employed, and instruments/instances of certification and coordination) give rise to institutions and mechanisms that determine who has

59 IDEOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SAAR MARTIN
Abstract: In Habermas’s works, the concept of ideology displays multiple—and polyvalent—aspects. It features prominently as one of the central categories in his account of Marxism—above all, in his early discussions of the project of critical theory as it was first conceived. The matter continues to be of central importance in Habermas’s discussions of “late capitalism,” where he seeks to offer a political-sociological diagnosis of the times. However, in the course of the author’s turn to the theory of communication, which crucially revises his approach to critical social analysis, ideology offers a point of reference less and less; in

73 SOCIAL PATHOLOGY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HARTMANN MARTIN
Abstract: The concept of pathology derives from ancient medicine, where it refers to the doctrine of kinds and causes of illness. According to Galen, the pathological is what deviates from “the normal course of nature” (Seidler 1989, 13). Discourse about social pathologies, in turn, stems from the metaphorical transferring of this medical concept onto societies—which are treated as if they were organisms that can be sick or healthy. Habermas’s reading of Freud, in Knowledge and Human Interests, is decisive for the conception of pathology in his works as a whole. For Freud, pathology is based on the linguistification or verbalization

74 SOCIETY from: The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ROSA HARTMUT
Abstract: The conception of society elaborated in Habermas’s philosophical and sociological thinking—which finds its fullest articulation in The Theory of

5 GENERAL WISH OR GENERAL WILL? from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) HALLWARD PETER
Abstract: In well-run oligarchic societies, the best and simplest way to dismiss egalitarian challenges has long been to deride them as impracticable or “utopian”—and I use the word “utopian” here in the most banal sense, to mean an abstract notion or project that might be viable only in another place or time, or if undertaken by actors unlike ourselves.¹ A society without exploitation, hierarchy, or discrimination might be all very well in theory, but appropriately maintained ideological reflexes ensure that everyone knows that such fancies are not feasible in practice, here and now. Egalitarian ideals seem too demanding for selfish

7 A STRANGE FATE FOR POLITICS: from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GRANT JOHN
Abstract: Must utopia remain utopian, or can it be achieved without at the same time announcing its own end? This question helps to orient an examination of Fredric Jameson’s engagement with utopia and the critical insights about society that come with it. In early work such as “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture” (1979), Jameson articulates how cultural artifacts contain twin utopian and ideological components, with the latter never managing to preclude the former. In more recent work such as “The Politics of Utopia” (2004), Jameson claims that utopian thinking flourishes when we find politics has been suspended. This raises a

8 THE REALITY OF UTOPIA from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) RIOT-SARCEY MICHÈLE
Abstract: Uopia unsettles. Even in the writing of history one has tried to sort out impossible reforms from signs of progress, the illuminism of the former from the realism of the latter. As Miguel Abensour underlines concerning the Marxist critique of utopias, “the critique of utopia is situated at the culmination of a real theoretical revolution—the production of a theory of history,”¹ and, whatever the political options or ideological choices of historians, this critique strongly marked the schools of historiography. Utopia in the doctrinal sense is itself a partial criticism of society, incomplete and, by the same token, unable to

9 NEGATIVITY AND UTOPIA IN THE GLOBAL JUSTICE MOVEMENT from: Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) LÖWY MICHAEL
Abstract: The global justice movement is without a doubt the most important phenomenon of antisystemic resistance of the beginning of the twenty-first century. This vast, nebulous “movement of movements,” which has taken visible form since the regional or world social forums and the great protest demonstrations—against the WTO, the G8, or the imperial war in Iraq—does not correspond to the usual forms of social or political action. A large decentralized network, it is multiple, diverse, and heterogeneous, joining trade unions and peasant movements, NGOs and indigenous organizations, women’s movements, as well as ecological associations, intellectuals, and young activists. Far

Book Title: Neopoetics-The Evolution of the Literate Imagination
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Collins Christopher
Abstract: The quest to understand the evolution of the literary mind has become a fertile field of inquiry and speculation for scholars across literary studies and cognitive science. In Paleopoetics, Christopher Collins's acclaimed earlier title, he described how language emerged both as a communicative tool and as a means of fashioning other communicative tools-stories, songs, and rituals. InNeopoetics, Collins turns his attention to the cognitive evolution of the writing-ready brain. Further integrating neuroscience into the popular field of cognitive poetics, he adds empirical depth to our study of literary texts and verbal imagination and offers a whole new way to look at reading, writing, and creative expression. Collins beginsNeopoeticswith the early use of visual signs, first as reminders of narrative episodes and then as conventional symbols representing actual speech sounds. Next he examines the implications of written texts for the play of the auditory and visual imagination. To exemplify this long transition from oral to literate artistry, Collins examines a wide array of classical texts-from Homer and Hesiod to Plato and Aristotle and from the lyric innovations of Augustan Rome to the inner dialogues of St. Augustine. In this work of "big history," Collins demonstrates how biological and cultural evolution collaborated to shape both literature and the brain we use to read it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/coll17686

5 “The Common Root of Meaning and Nonmeaning”: from: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) KHURANA THOMAS
Abstract: One way foucault and derrida’s debate about the History of Madnesshas been framed is as articulating the methodological contrast of their respective endeavors. On this reading, at stake in the debate is the way in which archaeology or discourse analysis, in Foucault’s sense, and Derridean deconstruction relate to each other. This is a rich question, and in what follows, I focus on just one of its dimensions—the transformation of the transcendental question that is at stake primarily on Derrida’s side of the debate.

Book Title: History in the Comic Mode-Medieval Communities and the Matter of Person
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Holsinger Bruce W.
Abstract: In this groundbreaking collection, twenty-one prominent medievalists discuss continuity and change in ideas of personhood and community and argue for the viability of the comic mode in the study and recovery of history. These scholars approach their sources not from a particular ideological viewpoint but with an understanding that all topics, questions, and explanations are viable. They draw on a variety of sources in Latin, Arabic, French, German, Middle English, and more, and employ a range of theories and methodologies, always keeping in mind that environments are inseparable from the making of the people who inhabit them and that these people are in part constituted by and understood in terms of their communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/fult13368

18 CRYSTALLINE WOMBS AND PREGNANT HEARTS: from: History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Jung Jacqueline E.
Abstract: Of the many splendid objects to survive from medieval convents, one of the most enchanting is a small sculpture of the Virgin Mary and St. Elizabeth from the Swiss Dominican foundation of St. Katharinenthal, currently housed in the Metropolitan Museum of Art (fig. 18.1).¹ Made during the first decade of the fourteenth century by the workshop of Henry of Constance, the “Visitation Group” will doubtless be familiar to this volume’s readers as one of the many late medieval devotional images that, in Caroline Bynum’s words, “reflect[ed] and sanctif[ied] women’s domestic and biological experience.”² Citing Jeffrey Hamburger’s now-seminal study of monastic

5. CANALS ON MARS: from: Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: The primary task of the humanities, especially the arts, and theories about the arts, the work of humanistic research and scholarship, is to help us understand what it means to be a human being. This has two consequences for the issue of progress in the humanities. The first is epistemological. Anyone confronting this kind of gap, this murky area of not-knowing, whether labeled humanist or scientist or historian, will tend to project onto the noise one’s favorite theory. The second is that in confronting this epistemological gap we often rely upon “great” persons whose intuitions about human being offer plausible,

SUICIDE IN from: Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) BURGOYNE ROBERT
Abstract: The second film in Clint Eastwood’s World War II diptych, Letters from Iwo Jima (2006), immediately sets itself apart from all previous war films by focusing on the question of suicide. For so long a taboo in Western culture and rarely represented in American films, suicide occupies a space in the US imagination that is deeply Other. In US war films, suicide has conventionally served to mark the enemy; the perceived fanaticism of kamikaze pilots in World War II films or the blind frenzy of suicide bombers in films about contemporary Arab and Islamic conflicts defines them as pathological agents

4 TO LOSE ONE’S HEAD: from: Broken Tablets
Abstract: In 1968 Jacques Derrida accepted an invitation from Johns Hopkins University to teach a seminar on the topic “Literature and Truth.” The project of the seminar was to consider how literature has been conceived, constructed, and maintained from Plato on as imitation and thus construed as secondary in order to protect the status of philosophy and, more broadly, science as the province of truth. Derrida developed the argument to show that the representative arts had been subsequently burdened with the task of effacing their position as copy by cultivating the value of originality, thus reproducing the very logic that established

5 LITERATURE AND THE POLITICAL-THEOLOGICAL REMAINS from: Broken Tablets
Abstract: Claude Lefort’s essay “Permanence of the Theologico-Political?” in answering the question as to why political philosophers in the modern era make recourse to theological language, suggests that democracy makes possible the identifiable sphere of the political as such through the very appearance of an empty place of sovereignty. As Lefort puts it, “The formula ‘power belongs to no one’ can also be translated into the formula ‘power belongs to none of us.’”¹ This itself generates the need for a symbolic register, a vacuum into which the religious enters, not necessarily as the guarantor of power itself but as a marker

1 MAKING HISTORY: from: Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: In a lecture significantly entitled “Other Times, Other Customs: The Anthropology of History,” Marshall Sahlins evoked Jean-Paul Sartre’s question of whether we are yet able “to constitute a structural, historical anthropology.” Sahlins’s response was unequivocal: “Yes, I have tried to suggest here, le jour est arrivé” (in French in Sahlins). In other words, the day had dawned when one could “explode the concept of history through the anthropological experience of culture.”¹ Taking my cue from this, I will start with this anthropological experience of culture, guided by Sahlins, whose lecture sought to bring that “day” into being, or at least

Book Title: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction-Environment and Affect
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: Tracing the development of ecosickness through a compelling archive of modern U.S. novels and memoirs, this study demonstrates the mode's crucial role in shaping thematic content and formal and affective literary strategies. Examining works by David Foster Wallace, Richard Powers, Leslie Marmon Silko, Marge Piercy, Jan Zita Grover, and David Wojnarowicz, Heather Houser shows how these authors unite experiences of environmental and somatic damage through narrative affects that draw attention to ecological phenomena, organize perception, and convert knowledge into ethics. Traversing contemporary cultural studies, ecocriticism, affect studies, and literature and medicine, Houser juxtaposes ecosickness fiction against new forms of environmentalism and technoscientific innovations such as regenerative medicine and alternative ecosystems. Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fictionrecasts recent narrative as a laboratory in which affective and perceptual changes both support and challenge political projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hous16514

5 The Anxiety of Intervention in Leslie Marmon Silko and Marge Piercy from: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: Standing in the twenty-first century, it’s clear that the “age of anxiety” that W. H. Auden declared in 1947 is still with us. But some things have changed. In the wake of World War II, writers looked to the inventions of total war, notably to nuclear weaponry, when composing their visions of technological anxiety. In the last decades of the millennium, nuclear worry does not disappear, but it cedes some ground to concerns about techniques for radically altering so-called nature. Biotechnologies that transform life take center stage; they change the world not through the spectacular blast but through gradual reconfiguration

CHAPTER 2 Can French Intellectuals Escape Marxism? from: The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Although the title of this chapter poses a question, and its analysis will be descriptive, the conclusion is prescriptive. I will offer an argument that explains historically, sociologically, and philosophically the attraction of Marxism in France, the intellectual options that choice entails for those whom I broadly term “communist” (following Marx’s own description in The Communist Manifesto), and the strength and weaknesses of their position.¹ Finally, I will point to some indices of the emergence of another intellectual style, one that I find more attractive and have labeled elsewhere a “politics of judgment,”² to which I will return later in

CHAPTER TWO Cosmopolitanism in Ethics: from: Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: At its classical origins, we saw in the last chapter, cosmopolitanism was first of all matter of consciousness and conviction. Even today, it belongs first and foremost to the field of ethics, especially if we take the latter in its etymological sense. As among the eighteenth-century philosophes, the most common use of the term cosmopolitan today is to describe how people live (or aspire to live)—their ethos, culture, worldview, or way of life. The rise of cosmopolitanism in this sense was seized on in the 1990s as one of the most striking facts about the contemporary world, and the

CHAPTER FOUR Rethinking Ethical Cosmopolitanism: from: Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: To this point my discussion has been mainly negative, focusing on various ways in which the cosmopolitan commitment to egalitarian universalism goes astray. My survey of the history of Western cosmopolitanisms in chapter 1 showed how they have always reflected the conditions of their emergence, mirroring or reproducing the social, cultural, ideological, and political contexts from and against which they arose. In chapter 2 I depicted moral-ethical cosmopolitanisms as afflicted by a double bind. On the one hand, like Rawls’s theory of justice, they tend to lose their critical force by abstracting from existing social-political conditions and cultural values; yet,

2 HUMANITY THREATENED from: Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: As Ulrich Beck says, unlike other previous civilizations, we cannot attribute everything that threatens us to external causes; societies are in conflict with themselves, with the production of that which they do not desire. Explaining this characteristic contrasts with our common sense, which tends to establish net causalities, distinguishes subjects from objects, thinks in terms of hierarchy, and explains the idea of defense in terms of spatial protection. To identify and understand the nature of threats in a world that belongs to everyone and to no one, we have no choice but to make a “metaphorological” effort. I am going

Introduction from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) ZIMMERMANN JENS
Abstract: Richard Kearney is one of the most creative and insightful voices of the so-called theological turn in continental philosophy. His imaginative and constructive application of hermeneutic philosophy to postmodern debates about religion and culture characterizes Kearney’s mature work, contained in the trilogy of publications titled Philosophy at the Limit: On Stories, The God Who May Be, andStrangers, Gods and Monsters. With these works, Kearney established himself as one of the greatest contemporary philosophical mediators of traditional concepts that define our humanity, such as narrative identity, practical wisdom, hospitality, and perceptions of God. Unlike many postmodern treatments of religion that

2 Imagination, Anatheism, and the Sacred from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Wood James
Abstract: James Wood is a well-known English literary critic, essayist, and novelist. His career as an increasingly influential writer includes positions as the Guardian’s chief literary critic (1991– 1994), senior editor of theNew Republic, staff writer at theNew Yorker, and professor at Harvard University. After publishing several volumes of essays, Wood has also written a theological novel,The Book Against God(2004). Not unlike his novel’s main character, who struggles with his religious background, Wood, an atheist convert from evangelicalism, finds in literature a middle ground between belief and unbelief. Good literature, he argues inThe Broken Estate, not

3 Beyond the Impossible from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Keller Catherine
Abstract: Catherine Keller is professor of constructive theology at Drew University in Madison, New Jersey. She is a process theologian with wide-ranging theoretical interests, encompassing feminist theology, ecotheology, and poststructuralist and postcolonial theory. In her highly original and influential theological works—most notably Face of the Deep, From a Broken Web, andOn the Mystery—she has sought to develop the relational potential of a theology of becoming. Her books reconfigure ancient symbols of divinity for the sake of a planetary conviviality—a life together, across vast webs of difference. Her latest book,Cloud of the Impossible(2014), explores the relation

4 Transcendent Humanism in a Secular Age from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Taylor Charles
Abstract: The Canadian philosopher Charles Taylor, one of the finest intellectual commentators on Western culture and religion, has written widely on political philosophy, theories of social science, and the history of philosophy. He is best known for his narrative account of modernity’s cultural origins and potential futures in Sources of the Self: The Making of Modern Identity(1989), and, most recently,A Secular Age(2007). Especially in the last book, Taylor has shown that modernity’s rejection of religion is itself based on an assumed logic of history, or what he calls a “subtraction narrative”—the story that human progress in any

8 The Death of the Death of God from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion is arguably the most original and creative living French philosopher in the phenomenological tradition. He is also the foremost proponent of the theological turn in phenomenology, who has argued consistently that phenomenology is open to transcendence and thus, by implication, that a phenomenology of religion is a legitimate philosophical task. In his essays collected as Le visible et le révélé(2005), Marion shows how revelation can register in phenomenology as “donation” through “saturated phenomena.”

10 Theism, Atheism, Anatheism from: Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: In the following conversation, Richard Kearney’s book Anatheismis engaged by one theologian and two theologically inclined philosophers. David Tracy is a well-known Roman Catholic theologian at the University of Chicago Divinity School, who has written important works on hermeneutics and theology (The Analogical Imagination: Christian Theology and the Culture of PluralismandOn Naming the Present: Reflections on God, Hermeneutics, and Church) and has contributed immensely to interfaith dialogue. In much of his work, Tracy argues for a hermeneutic faith and recovers the incomprehensible God of the mystics, a God who reveals himself in weakness and suffering. Tracy shares

3 The Drift into Incivility from: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: When, why, and under what circumstances does collective violence become uncivil or drift into incivility? More concretely, how is latent enmity released into open but limited conflict and what exacerbates this hostility to assume the pathological manifestations of random and guiltfree violence? Other than implying, as is conventionally done in defining civil violence (i.e., that civilians rather than regular armed forces are engaged in such civil disturbances), what is so civil about civil violence? Can civil violence, in the first place, ever be civil? Is it not a rhetorical conjunction of incongruous terms, bordering on the oxymoron?

7 Jürgen Habermas’s Innovation Model: from: The Disclosure of Politics
Abstract: In this chapter I will concentrate on Jürgen Habermas’s sociological and historical-political writings about secularization and the public sphere and show how they can be framed as his version of conceptual history. I argue that his formulation of a new political concept of justice as social inclusion can be interpreted as a disclosive model of new political relationships. I will also discuss some of Habermas’s more recent essays about translating religious contents into the public sphere, in which he addresses issues I have been dealing with in this book.¹ I will also analyze his latest efforts to radicalize his ideas

9 CONFRONTATION AND COLLABORATION: from: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) MEI-ER HUANG
Abstract: In the history of cultural development, massive changes in language have often occurred, especially in times of ideological transition and cultural upheaval. These changes can for instance be seen in the Renaissance and the Japanese Meiji period. Similar occurrences have also been noted in China. The vernacular ( baihua白話) movement initiated by Hu Shih 胡適(1891–1962)¹ in 1917 proposed the adoption of spoken Chinese in formal writing, in place of the traditional, archaic form (wenyan文言). This later triggered confrontation and debate among proponents of the new and old literary schools. Due to then-prevailing educational policies adopted by the Chinese

CHAPTER 3 The Dailiness of Trauma and Liberation in Zoë Wicomb from: Prose of the World
Abstract: Published in 1988, James Clifford’s The Predicament of Culture is an insightful exploration of metropolitan modernist aesthetics against the backdrop of a troubled global modernity in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. It is, moreover, representative of a critical momentum in the developing relationship between literary and anthropological discourse in the late twentieth century. The book has been considered a critical work in the so-called literary turn in anthropology, which was already exemplified by the influential collection co-edited by Clifford, Writing Culture, published in 1986.¹ In his introduction to the collection, Clifford points to the rising popularity of literary

EPILOGUE: from: Prose of the World
Abstract: At the heart of the genre of prose fiction exists a set of fundamental questions about time and narrative. If narrative is inextricably bound up with the category of time, what is—and what should be—the relative importance of the ordinary everyday and that of the major event? Is narrative essentially event bound? Is it embedded in what Franco Moretti calls a Hegelian “teleological rhetoric,” wherein “the meaning of events lies in their finality” and where “events acquire meaning when they lead to one ending, and one only”?¹ Does the crux of narratives, as Moretti puts the question, rest

3 Sikhism and the Politics of Religion-Making from: Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: This chapter investigates how the category of “religion” was transferred from the first ethnographic reports of the Sikhs in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries, to the cultural, theoretical, and political projects of the Sikh elites in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, giving rise over a period of about fifty years (1870s to the 1920s) to the ontotheological underpinnings of the modern Sikh imaginary. Such a transformation was enabled by the imposition of a dominant symbolic order on the indigenous cultures, followed by the appropriation of this symbolic order by the native elites. As we noted in

1 Hegel, the Wound from: The Highway of Despair
Abstract: Hegel did not describe his work as critique.¹ In the Phenomenology of Spirit, he portrays his efforts not in terms of critical philosophy, which would have aligned him squarely with Kant, but as an attempt to unite the desire for knowledge with actual knowing.² What Hegel had in mind in this union of philosophy and science was not quite critique in the Kantian sense, but rather theconsummationof the love of knowledge (philosophy) with the historical and phenomenological experience of knowing (science).³ Hegel aimed to “complete” philosophy, not only by giving it a definitive reality in human history, but

Concluding Postscript from: The Highway of Despair
Abstract: No single thinker has done more to shape the idea of critical theory in the postwar period than Jürgen Habermas. As I see things, Habermas turns away from a potential project opened up by the thinkers considered in this study—not just Adorno, to whom his connection is obvious, but also Bataille, of whom he is substantially more critical, and Fanon, about whom he says nothing. In recent years, Habermas has turned his attention to questions pertaining to philosophy and religion, the relationship between reason and faith, and the connection between postmetaphysical thinking and theological endeavors. These inquiries are exciting,

Introduction from: Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Like Romania itself, Romanian cinema has remained obscure. The sparse international distribution of its films has made it remote and unfamiliar. Until recently, it has been aesthetically insignificant, adhering rigidly to the somehow formulaic necessities imposed by filmʹs illustrative and ideological functions in a totalitarian regime. For these reasons, Romanian cinema has not gained the world stature of other Eastern European cinemas. (Roof 1992: 309)

CONCLUSION: from: The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: AND NOW, IN THE GUISE OF A CONCLUSION, IT REMAINS FOR me to do what is most difficult. It remains for me to speak of shame, the logic of shame, and to do so not in an allusive manner and in passing, as I have done so far, but by taking shame as a theme, by really speaking of it and from it, by confronting it face to face.¹

INTRODUCTION from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In this introduction I want to give the reader a glimpse of what I aim to do in this work and a sense of the epistemological and psychological assumptions that underlie it. My “essay” is enormously long, in the old style, such as that of John Locke’s An Essay on Human Understanding. And I might say, albeit with a shrug, mine also is a piece of “human understanding,” but one that refuses to be tied down to any epistemology of empiricism. The task that I attack here is the “visionary experience,” not in its metaphoric sense but literally referring to

Book 1 THE VISIONARY EXPERIENCE: from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: I hope my reader will not be too surprised if I begin my discussion of the Buddha’s spiritual awakening with an epigraph from a late-nineteenthcentury Jesuit poet and priest. Here as elsewhere in this essay I blur the distinction between religions insofar as the visionary experience is concerned. Gerard Manley Hopkins, in his “terrible sonnets,” powerfully evoked the dark night of the soul and the unfathomed depths of the mind that, even as he was writing, were being formulated by his scientific contemporaries, especially in Paris, as the “subconscious,” in the more prosaic language of the psychological sciences of their

Book 4 PENITENTIAL ECSTASY: from: The Awakened Ones
Abstract: One of the issues I raised in my discussions of Tibetan treasure seekers is that, while their visionary trajectories were constrained by their complex cosmological presuppositions, their form of Buddhism did provide scope for innovative knowledge. Although framed in terms of recovery of lost Buddha words rather than new knowledge, in reality treasure discoverers were inventing new texts, though based on existing ones. Further, the flexibility of their Mahāyāna Buddhism was such that they could journey into unfamiliar cosmic realms, and to known or little-known geographic regions, to interpret in retrospect unusual visions, like that of the wolf rider and

Book Title: A Hedonist Manifesto-The Power to Exist
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): McClellan Joseph
Abstract: Onfray attacks Platonic idealism and its manifestation in Judaic, Christian, and Islamic belief. He warns of the lure of attachment to the purportedly eternal, immutable truths of idealism, which detracts from the immediacy of the world and our bodily existence. Insisting that philosophy is a practice that operates in a real, material space, Onfray enlists Epicurus and Democritus to undermine idealist and theological metaphysics; Nietzsche, Bentham, and Mill to dismantle idealist ethics; and Palante and Bourdieu to collapse crypto-fascist neoliberalism. In their place, he constructs a positive, hedonistic ethics that enlarges on the work of the New Atheists to promote a joyful approach to our lives in this, our only, world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/onfr17126

EIGHT A Libertarian Libido from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: In order to get rid of sexual wretchedness, we must put an end to the perverse logics that enable it. These include the notion of desire-aslack; considering pleasure (in the form of the fusional couple) to be the nadir of this alleged lack; ignoring the natural necessity of the family and turning it into a concession for the libido, which is itself a problem; glorifying the monogamous, loyal couple that shares the same hearth every day; sacrificing women and the feminine within them; and the transformation of children into the ontological truth of the parents’ love. These fictions are useful

NINE Carnal Hospitality from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: The logic of instincts, passions, and impulses is undeniable. Every-one knows it, senses it, sees it, and experiences it. But there is also a rarer kind of erotic reason that is able to sculpt these blocks of savage energy. It permits us to not let nature have its brutal way, transforming humans into animals that submit to a fate determined by acephalous laws. Erotic culture combines with biological sex to produce ethical artifices, aesthetic affects, and joys that are unheard of in the jungle, cowshed, or pit.

EIGHTEEN A Practice of Resistance from: A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Nobody believes anymore in Blanqui’s method of insurrectional revolution. Even liberal capitalism has renounced the coup d’états theorized by Malaparte.¹ There is zero credence in the Marxist idea that changes to the economic infrastructure automatically lead to modifications of ideological superstructures. Collective and violent appropriation of the means of production doesn’t change anything: ideology originates from a logic different from the physiological processes of the modes of production.

9 Visuality and Narrative: from: The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: The theory of narrative has been at once enriched by a set of distinctions and burdened by a degree of terminological confusion over the principal terms of these distinctions. I refer to the distinction drawn by Henry James between “telling” and “showing” and the cognate distinction proposed by Georg Lukács between “describing” and “telling” ( beschreiben and erzählen). The potential confusion arises by virtue of the different meanings and values that respectively attach here to the notion of telling. For James it is a negative value (narrative should show, dramatize, rather then tell or narrate). For Lukács, on the other hand,

Book Title: Encountering Religion-Responsibility and Criticism After Secularism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS TYLER
Abstract: Tyler Roberts encourages scholars to abandon the conceptual opposition between "secular" and "religious" to better understand how human beings actively and thoughtfully engage with their worlds and make meaning. The artificial distinction between a self-conscious and critical "academic study of religion" and an ideological and authoritarian "religion," he argues, only obscures the phenomenon. Instead, Roberts calls on intellectuals to approach the field as a site of "encounter" and "response," illuminating the agency, creativity, and critical awareness of religious actors.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/robe14752

1 RELIGION AND INCONGRUITY from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: Orsi, Braun, and Wasserstrom are only a few of the many scholars who in recent years have explored the history of the study of religion, surveyed the range of theoretical approaches to it, or undertaken genealogical explorations of the idea of “religion” itself.² This theoretical and metatheoretical work is wide-ranging and, depending on one’s perspective, demonstrates either that the field is rich, pluralistic, and multi- if not interdisciplinary or that it continues to suffer from a lack of a strong sense of purpose and theoretical grounding. Those who take this second perspective and seek to make the study of religion

2 PLACING RELIGION from: Encountering Religion
Abstract: In a review essay published in 1996 entitled “Modernism and Postmodernism in the Study of Religion,” Catherine Bell off ered a provocative diagnosis of two chronic methodological debates afflicting the study of religion. Both, she says, are “variations of a fundamental polarization between ‘insider’ claims to experience something in one set of terms and ‘outsider’ claims to explain that experience in very different terms.” The first debate pits “modernists,” those who endorse methods for studying religion that explain religion in naturalistic and social-scientific terms, against phenomenologically oriented scholars who are wary of methods that “explain away” religion and who seek

4 NĀGAS AND RELICS from: Reading the
Abstract: As liminal characters, the betwixt and in-betweeners, nāgasmediate the dark and the light. They are characters precisely poised to be interpreters for the outside reader-hearer through the text. As we have seen,nāgasoften act as attention getters within the text, functioning as red flags to denote important passages, but that is not all they do. In the previous chapter, we sawnāgasin close proximity with the living Buddha. In the case of Bhūridatta, this proximity is in fact a shared ontology of sorts and a window into the eventual soteriological aptitude of even the lowest born—the

Introduction from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: In This New Yet Unapproachable America, Stanley Cavell recounts the following anecdote: “One of the most influential American teachers of philosophy . . . declared . . . that there are only three ways to make an honest living in philosophy: learn some languages and do scholarly work, learn mathematics enough to do some real logic, or do literary psychology.”¹ Far from deploring this situation, in which philosophy is taken up by another discipline, Cavell affirms that it matters little to him, in the final analysis, whether what he does in writing his books is deemed to be philosophical. In

8 Beyond the Death of Philosophy from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: The key result of my analyses is to bring to light an a priori principle that was not thematized by Kant (who only accepted the a priori in pure analyticity or in the synthesis of categories and intuition) nor by the logical positivists (who deny any a priori other than tautologies, which are, hence, analytic). This a priori, which is not Kantian and does not fall under simple formal logic,¹ is the law of self-reference, which makes possible judgments about the consistency of a system or a certain type of proposition and thereby enables the creation, from itself, of a

12 Critique: from: The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: In Kant and the Problem of Metaphysics,¹ Martin Heidegger’s principal concern is to distance Kantianism from the neo-Kantian epistemological interpretation in order to make the Critique of Pure Reason the harbinger of the phenomenological revolution. It is not unreasonable to assert, in this respect, that Heidegger’s reading is the systematic counterpoint to Cohen’s. The opposition can be read (1) in their understandings of Kant’s problematic, (2) in their explanations of knowledge, (3) in the importance they accord to one or the other of the Critique of Pure Reason’s two editions, and (4) in the meaning that each thinks should be

44 SCIENCE’S POSITIVE SIDE from: Not Being God
Abstract: There is a page in Heidegger that I have twisted and turned in every possible way, because it’s the only one in which he says that maybe the new event of Being, an eventuation of Being different from metaphysics, can come about in the ensemble of the technological world, which may be the extreme point of damnation, the most total forgetting of Being, but might also turn out to be a first flash of the event.

1 CHRISTIANITY AND MODERNITY from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: Pierpaolo antonello: I would like to begin our dialogue with the two terms that supply the framework for this encounter: Christianity and modernity. Your conceptual instruments are different—anthropological for Girard, philosophical for Vattimo—but you wind up saying more or less the same thing: that modernity, as constructed and understood by the European West, is substantially an invention of Christianity. Your research has led you to the apparently paradoxical result that Christianity is responsible for the secularization of the world. The end of the religions was brought about by a religion. In a recent book, Girard actually informs us

2 FAITH AND RELATIVISM from: Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: Pierpaolo antonello: One of the major topics of debate in recent years in Italy has been the disconnect between faith and relativism or, to put it another way, between universalism, whether anthropological or moral, on the one hand, and multicultural relativism, on the other. Obviously, you both start from essentially different positions in philosophical terms, but I would like to probe a bit to see what kind of reconciliation (if any) might be possible between these two positions.

1 HISTORICIZING THE ETHICAL TURN from: Political Responsibility
Abstract: In spite of the prevalence of ethical tropes in theoretical discussions in North Atlantic scholarly circles, an explicit embrace of the ethical turn in the humanities and social sciences has not been as prominent as that afforded to other so-called turns—including the cultural, linguistic, theological, psychoanalytic, and affective turns—of the past thirty years. Indeed, in contrast with previous turns, the ethical turn displays an almost apologetic reluctance about its self-identity: uneasiness and ambiguity define the attitude of many theoretical proponents of the turn, even if its political practitioners—humanitarians and human and animal rights advocates, among others—are

11 from: Comparative Journeys
Abstract: This chapter presents the result of a preliminary investigation. In 1982 T. P. Kasulis began the specific comparative study of the Platonic understanding of language—more precisely, of the relation between linguistic names ( onomata) and objects (pragmata)—with an East Asian language philosopher, and William S.-Y. Wang did so briefly in 1989.¹ In a recent volume of Joseph Needham’s Science and Civilisation in China, Christoph Harbsmeier makes constant and telling comparisons with Greek and Sanskrit at various points of his magisterial survey of Chinese language and logic.² Despite that scholar’s compendious review of virtually all the major relevant issues pertaining

Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Seventeenth Century Through Twentieth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: From Ying-shih Yü's perspective, the Dao, or the Way, constitutes the inner core of Chinese civilization. His work explores the unique dynamics between Chinese intellectuals' discourse on theDao, or moral principles for a symbolized ideal world order, and their criticism of contemporary reality throughout Chinese history. Volume 2 ofChinese History and Culturecompletes Ying-shih Yü's systematic reconstruction and exploration of Chinese thought over two millennia and its impact on Chinese identity. Essays address the rise of Qing Confucianism, the development of the Dai Zhen and Zhu Xi traditions, and the response of the historian Zhang Xuecheng to the Dai Zhen approach. They take stock of the thematic importance of Cao Xueqin's eighteenth-century masterpieceHonglou meng(Dream of the Red Chamber) and the influence of Sun Yat-sen'sThree Principles of the People, as well as the radicalization of China in the twentieth century and the fundamental upheavals of modernization and revolution. Ying-shih Yü also discusses the decline of elite culture in modern China, the relationships among democracy, human rights, and Confucianism, and changing conceptions of national history. He reflects on the Chinese approach to history in general and the larger political and cultural function of chronological biographies. By situating China's modern encounter with the West in a wider historical frame, this second volume ofChinese History and Cultureclarifies its more curious turns and contemplates the importance of a renewed interest in the traditional Chinese values recognizing common humanity and human dignity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17860

4. Zhang Xuecheng Versus Dai Zhen: from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In the learned judgment of modern intellectual historians, Dai Zhen 戴震 (1724–1777) and Zhang Xuecheng 學誠 (1738–1801) are the two towering scholars in eighteenth-century China.¹ Perhaps nothing would strike the contemporaries of Dai and Zhang, including their common friends, such as Zhu Yun 朱筠 (1729–1781) and Shao Jinhan 邵晉涵 (1743–1796), as more absurd than this modern judgment. In their own times, Dai was widely acknowledged as the foremost leader of the new philological movement in Confucian classical studies, whereas Zhang, though well respected as a serious theorist of history and literature in a small coterie of

5. Qing Confucianism from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The best way to characterize Confucianism in the Qing dynasty (hereafter Qing Confucianism) is to contrast it with what is called Song-Ming Neo-Confucianism. Song-Ming Neo-Confucians were primarily moral philosophers debating among themselves endlessly on metaphysical questions such as whether “moral princi ples” ( li理) are inherent in “human nature” (xing性) or in “human mind” (xin心). By contrast, Qing Confucians were, first and foremost, scholars devoting themselves painstakingly to philological explication of classical and historical texts. As a result, the Song-Ming Period witnessed the emergence and development of the rivalry between two major philosophical systems represented,respectively, by the Cheng-Zhu

16. Modern Chronological Biography and the Conception of Historical Scholarship from: Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Chronological biography ( nianpu) is a special form of Chinese historical writing. Leaving aside the lostZibian nianpu自編年譜 (Autobiographical Compilation) of Bai Juyi 白居易 (772–864), this form of writing can be traced to the Song dynasty (960–1279) beginning with the chronological biographies of Han Yu 韓愈 (768–824) and Liu Zongyuan 柳宗元 (773–819). In the one thousand years since, thousands ofnianpu, including chronological autobiographies, have been produced in China. More than twelve hundred chronological biographies are listed in Li Shitao’sZhongguo lidai mingren nianpu mulu(Bibliography of Chronological Biographies of Famous Figures by Dynasty).¹ Today, new

INTRODUCTION from: Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: Since Martin Heidegger said that “only a God can still save us” in a legendary interview with Der Spiegel, many have interpreted the word “God” too literally.¹ They have ignored that to Heidegger “God” was simply another realm where Being takes place, as he had explained thirty years earlier in “The Origin of the Work of Art.”² In that famous essay he indicates not only how art embodies an ontological struggle between the self-concealing earth and the illuminating world but also that the event of truth can happen in different acts, such as the “essential sacrifice,” “founding a state,” or

1 THE EMERGENCY OF AESTHETICS from: Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: Heidegger reformulated as an ontological question Hegel’s judgments on the end of art by asking: “Is art still an essential and necessary way in which that truth happens which is decisive for our historical existence, or is this something that art no longer is?”¹ In doing so, he was trying to overcome the emergency of aesthetics. This emergency does not lie in the “end of art” proclaimed by Hegel but rather in the reduction of art to representable objects to be felt, contemplated, and reproduced as we please. These objects are not simply forms corresponding to the world but also

2 EMERGENCY THROUGH ART from: Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: The essential emergency of art is not a consequence of the emergency of aesthetics that we outlined in the previous chapter but rather of the absence of events, disruptions, and emergencies in an age that has seen the completion of the global technological organization of the world. Works of art, like events and emergencies, have become remnants of Being, that is, ontological or existential alterations that aim to shake our logical, ethical, and aesthetic assessments of reality. These alterations take place at the margins of culture because they represent not only a resistance to its values but also, as Heidegger

1 A parábola na literatura clássica grega from: O gênero da parábola
Abstract: Segundo o Theological dictionary of the New Testament(1967), o nomeparaboléderiva do verboparaballoque, por sua vez, é uma forma composta dos seguintes segmentos: a) o prefixoparáque significa, em português,lado a lado, ao lado de, ao longo de(cf.Novo Dicionário da Língua Portuguesa), eb)ballo, verbo cujo significado pode ser traduzido para o português comojogar, trazer, colocar. A composição resulta, então, emcolocar lado a lado com,manter ao lado,jogar para. Ora, esse foi o trajeto que a língua grega encontrou para culminar com o conceito decomparar, já que, para

Introduction from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: Close-up, intimate experiences of divination, healing, and magic rituals, along with my own experiences during fieldwork encounters with brujos and their clients in urban Puerto Rico (1995–1996), organize this project. It encompasses both the formal and phenomenological side of ritual experiences, personal stories, dreams, and my own reflections as an ethnographer and participant.¹ Paradoxically, now that the temporal distance from my own personal reflections during fieldwork has grown to be ten years, I find myself finally more comfortable sharing the more personal and intimate aspects of my ethnographic materials, those that fieldworkers usually note separately in their fieldwork diaries

Chapter Four SPIRITUAL TIME from: Healing Dramas
Abstract: The word “sense,” as any thesaurus shows, is synonymous with (a) meaning, significance, logic; (b) intelligence, wisdom, common sense; and (c) feeling, sensation, awareness. It is the same word, yet it carries very different, even opposing, meanings. Characterizing the history of anthropological theory as a quest for finding the sense of the behaviors of fellow human beings, Michael Herzfeld argues (2001) that theories were engaged first in “making sense” of the behaviors of “exotic others”; then in studying the “common sense” or taken-for-granted realities of different groups within a society (including those of the anthropologist); and now are focusing on

Book Title: The Last Cannibals-A South American Oral History
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): BASSO ELLEN B.
Abstract: An especially comprehensive study of Brazilian Amazonian Indian history, The Last Cannibals is the first attempt to understand, through indigenous discourse, the emergence of Upper Xingú society. Drawing on oral documents recorded directly from the native language, Ellen Basso transcribes and analyzes nine traditional Kalapalo stories to offer important insights into Kalapalo historical knowledge and the performance of historical narratives within their nonliterate society. This engaging book challenges the familiar view of biography as a strictly Western literary form. Of special interest are biographies of powerful warriors whose actions led to the emergence of a more recent social order based on restrained behaviors from an earlier time when people were said to be fierce and violent. From these stories, Basso explores how the Kalapalo remember and understand their past and what specific linguistic, psychological, and ideological materials they employ to construct their historical consciousness. Her book will be important reading in anthropology, folklore, linguistics, and South American studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/708181

CHAPTER 3 An Early Experience of Europeans Told by Muluku from: The Last Cannibals
Abstract: An anthropological understanding of the history of a people without writing, which will necessarily be communicated orally, must be effected both with respect to their particular ways of remembering and understanding events and to how they communicate this understanding and memory within one or another speech genre. Thus, for example, if we are to know how people construct an awareness of historical processes, we must learn why certain events have become memorable, how they are given explanatory meaning, and how they are integrated into earlier life experiences. History has an explanatory or clarifying function which is inherent in its constant

TWO REVISITING DERRIDA, LACAN, AND FOUCAULT from: Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: In the last chapter, I discussed briefly how, one way or another, a Cartesian and/or Kantian approach to the self and world leads to idealist and/or relativist epistemological dead-ends. In this chapter, I explore more generally how speculative and idealist formulations of language, knowledge, and the self inform much of the theory circulating in humanities departments today that seeks to identify positions of resistance and reclamation within the straightjacket of a so-called late capitalism. To do so, I discuss Sigmund Freud’s metapyschological formulations— The Ego and the Id(hydraulic energies of the id, ego, and superego),Beyond the Pleasure Principle

Book Title: Death and the Classic Maya Kings- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): FITZSIMMONS JAMES L.
Abstract: Focusing on the Classic Period (AD 250-900), James Fitzsimmons examines and compares textual and archaeological evidence for rites of death and burial in the Maya lowlands, from which he creates models of royal Maya funerary behavior. Exploring ancient Maya attitudes toward death expressed at well-known sites such as Tikal, Guatemala, and Copan, Honduras, as well as less-explored archaeological locations, Fitzsimmons reconstructs royal mortuary rites and expands our understanding of key Maya concepts including the afterlife and ancestor veneration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/718906

ONE CELEBRATIONS FOR THE DEAD from: Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: Rituals surrounding death are informed not only by biological concerns but also by social and religious norms of behavior. As a primary focus in sociocultural anthropology, the study of death witnessed an explosion in theoretical refinement and scope over the last few decades of the twentieth century, expanding far beyond its modest nineteenth-century origins in the study of social organization to address broad philosophical and anthropological issues.¹ Archaeology has followed a similar path, with speculative, chronological, and cultural approaches to burials supplanted by the concerns of processual and postprocessual theory.² Yet most analytical approaches to death have at their theoretical

4 Of Ruins and Ghosts from: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: Archaeological remains are more than traces of civilizations past. Like other sites of nation-building they serve as stages for the contestation of multiple interests. Official histories, tourist literature, art history, and archaeology often obscure these tensions by focusing on the impressive materiality of the monuments and on deciphering their original significance (Fig. 4.1). While these efforts illuminate our knowledge of the past, they leave out aggregates of individual and collective experiences that also contribute to the signification of the works. Ancient monuments belong to places. As E. V. Walters argued, the significance of a place is inaccessible through rational processes

Book Title: Wicked Cinema-Sex and Religion on Screen
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Cutrara Daniel S.
Abstract: From struggles over identity politics in the 1990s to current concerns about a clash of civilizations between Islam and Christianity, culture wars play a prominent role in the twenty-first century. Movies help to define and drive these conflicts by both reflecting and shaping cultural norms, as well as showing what violates those norms. In this pathfinding book, Daniel S. Cutrara employs queer theory, cultural studies, theological studies, and film studies to investigate how cinema represents and often denigrates religion and religious believers—an issue that has received little attention in film studies, despite the fact that faith in its varied manifestations is at the heart of so many cultural conflicts today.Wicked Cinema examines films from the United States, Europe, and the Middle East, including Crimes and Misdemeanors, The Circle, Breaking the Waves, Closed Doors, Agnes of God, Priest, The Last Temptation of Christ, and Dogma. Central to all of the films is their protagonists' struggles with sexual transgression and traditional belief systems within Christianity, Judaism, or Islam—a struggle, Cutrara argues, that positions believers as the Other and magnifies the abuses of religion while ignoring its positive aspects. Uncovering a hazardous web of ideological assumptions informed by patriarchy, the spirit/flesh dichotomy, and heteronormativity, Cutrara demonstrates that ultimately these films emphasize the "Otherness" of the faithful through a variety of strategies commonly used to denigrate the queer, from erasing their existence, to using feminization to make them appear weak, to presenting them as dangerous fanatics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/754720

CHAPTER TWO Faith: from: Wicked Cinema
Abstract: Many films disparage or call into question the rationality of faith and with that, the character of the believer. This chapter begins to explore the disjuncture between cinematic representations and the religious beliefs of more than four billion followers of the Abrahamic religions. These onscreen depictions of faith, or the lack thereof, reveal much about the ideological divide fueling the culture wars.

CHAPTER THREE The Faithful: from: Wicked Cinema
Abstract: Of the films in the 1980s and 90s that portray believers, most ignore the vital aspects of their relationship with God, instead depicting believers as fanatics or mindless drones. While these portrayals could be dismissed as one-dimensional or stereotypical, I believe their existence has significant ideological implications. My concerns with the religious and sociopolitical fallout of the cinematic representation of the believer began in the 1980s.

8 ʺTECHNOLOGICALLYʺ MODERN: from: Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) JUNG HYUN-TAE
Abstract: Mid-twentieth-century American architecture has been considered a degenerate outgrowth of modern European architecture. It is believed that the overwhelming influences of the era’s corporate and consumer culture impeded the proper transplant of modern architecture on American soil. One of the most influential architectural theoreticians in the twentieth century, Colin Rowe, argued that “purged of its ideological and societal content,” modern architecture in the United States was reduced to being either a “ décor de la viefor Greenwich, Connecticut,” or the “suitable veneer for the corporate activities of enlightened capitalism.”¹ Rowe contended that utopian visions of modern architecture in Europe became

ELEVEN Pérez Bocanegra’s Ritual formulario: from: Narrative Threads
Author(s) Harrison Regina
Abstract: In this age of electronic memory devices—telephone message machines with personal “reminders” built in, caller ID gadgets that remember who just called (even though we didn’t pick up the phone and even though they didn’t say a word), e-mail that’s stored forever in bottomless computer pits (retrieved in cases of harassment or to increase severance pay in layoffs), digital radio settings remembering the spot where we tune in during our commute, computers that remember how many “hits” a Web site receives—it is difficult to imagine a time when discussion of memory was theological, resulting in threats of hellfire

3 REALISM AND DESIRE: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The novel is the end of genre in the sense in which it has been defined in the previous chapter: a narrative ideologeme whose outer form, secreted like a shell or exoskeleton, continues to emit its ideological message long after the extinction of its host. For the novel, as it explores its mature and original possibilities in the nineteenth century, is not an outer, conventional form of that kind. Rather, such forms, and their remains—inherited narrative paradigms, conventional actantial or proairetic schemata¹—are the raw material on which the novel works, transforming their “telling” into its “showing,” estranging com

6 CONCLUSION: from: The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The conception of the political unconscious developed in the preceding pages has tended to distance itself, at certain strategic moments, from those implacably polemic and demystifying procedures traditionally associated with the Marxist practice of ideological analysis. It is now time to confront the latter directly and to spell out such modifications in more detail. The most influential lesson of Marx—the one which ranges him alongside Freud and Nietzsche as one of the great negative diagnosticians of contemporary culture and social life—has, of course, rightly been taken to be the lesson of false consciousness, of class bias and ideological

FORE WORD from: The Deed of Reading
Abstract: Literary ethics or verbal ethic? There is of course no reason to choose. But many a distinction to be made. We have come to this: “It is not unusual in literary studies to treat language as transparent, and thus irrelevant.”¹ Thus writes a professional linguist, in the year 2012, from her institutional base in an English department at a major Canadian university. It is in fact very common lately not to “treat language” at all in the analysis of literature, as if it were no more than the readily legible conveyance of expressed ideas, whether urgently identitarian, ideologically suspect, or

5 SPLITTING THE DIFFERENCE from: The Deed of Reading
Abstract: A vocabular conundrum can, I hope, be readily cleared away. “You say eether and I say eyethere.” I said zeugma and now say syllepsis. Knee there, nigh there: it’s only the difference internal, not terminological, that matters. The Gershwins’ lyric to “Let’s Call the Whole Thing Off” also speaks quite accidentally, in the lead-in of its often unsung verse, not just to the matter of variant lexical usage but to the particular concerns of this chapter with grammatical compounding in the accusative case: “You like this and the other / While I go for this and that.” Imagine, with either

9 Logos and Digitization from: Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: In this digitizing age of the computer, by a somewhat more than bimillennial hindsight, one can see something of the deep psychological history and prehistory of digitization reaching back to ancient Greek and its use of the term logos. What is noted here does not constitute the whole history of digitization, but it is a central and very human part of its history and prehistory.

Picturing Ong’s Oral Hermeneutic from: Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter Ong was drawn toward Salvador Dalí’s masterpiece, The Persistence of Memory, which eerily depicts limpid, melting timepieces over a surreal barren landscape.¹ In chapter 10 of the 1990 version ofLanguage as Hermeneutic, “Logos and Digitization,” Ong differentiated human memory from computer recall by referencing Dalí’s painting. And, after abandoning his plans to publishLanguage as Hermeneutic, Ong in 1994 offered to the journalConnotationshis essay “Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory,” an expanded reflection onThe Persistence of Memory. The editors rejected it, judging it to be more philosophical than philological: an “essay on human time”² (Leimberg). They

Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: The work of German cultural theorist and art historian Aby Warburg (1866-1929) has had a lasting effect on how we think about images. This book is the first in English to focus on his last project, the encyclopedic Atlas of Images: Mnemosyne. Begun in earnest in 1927, and left unfinished at the time of Warburg's death in 1929, theMnemosyne-Atlasconsisted of sixty-three large wooden panels covered with black cloth. On these panels Warburg carefully, intuitively arranged some thousand black-and-white photographs of classical and Renaissance art objects, as well as of astrological and astronomical images ranging from ancient Babylon to Weimar Germany. Here and there, he also included maps, manuscript pages, and contemporary images taken from newspapers. Trying through these constellations of images to make visible the many polarities that fueled antiquity's afterlife, Warburg envisioned theMnemosyne-Atlasas a vital form of metaphoric thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1

4 Translating the Symbol: from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: It bears repeating: Mnemosyne is largely divorced from iconology as practiced by Warburg’s chief successors, who turn rather to his earlier work for their methodological inspiration.¹ Briefly put, iconology aims to explicate the significance of an individual artwork through the interpretation of the symbolic values attached to compositional or iconographic features. To decipher these contingent features, imbricated as they are in a medieval or humanist culture long since past, great erudition is usually demanded. Yet to grasp next the meaning of the work’s symbolic values, interpretation becomes mostly an intuitive act. This is because iconology tends to regard the individual

6 Exemplary Figures and Diagrammatic Thought from: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: To illustrate better the motives, methods, and rhythms of Mnemosyne, but especially to chart more exactly its metaphoric logic, I want to turn again to the period after Warburg emerged from the sanatorium. Besides reimmersing himself in the cosmographical material that yielded, just before his breakdown, the magisterial essay on sixteenth-century German astrological imagery, Warburg began work in 1924 on a new topic, which eventually became the lecture Italienische Antike im Zeitalter Rembrandts, given at the K.B.W. in May 1926.¹ While only a partial text of the lecture survives, it deserves attention, firstly, because it directly informs panels 70, 71,

Book Title: The Light of Knowledge-Literacy Activism and the Politics of Writing in South India
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: The Light of Knowledgeis set primarily in the rural district of Pudukkottai in Tamil Nadu, and it is about activism among laboring women from marginalized castes who have been particularly active as learners and volunteers in the movement. In their endeavors to remake the Tamil countryside through literacy activism, workers in the movement found that their own understanding of the politics of writing and Enlightenment was often transformed as they encountered vastly different notions of language and imaginations of social order. Indeed, while activists of the movement successfully mobilized large numbers of rural women, they did so through logics that often pushed against the very Enlightenment rationality they hoped to foster. Offering a rare behind-the-scenes look at an increasingly important area of social and political activism,The Light of Knowledgebrings tools of linguistic anthropology to engage with critical social theories of the postcolonial state.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5k9

Chapter 1 Common Rhetoric: from: Outlaw Rhetoric
Abstract: Sister Logic spoke to her sister Rhetoric whom she recently became acquainted with; the language was English. Rhetoric, struck with great sadness, grew quiet; for she still did not know how to speak in our tongue. Wilson, who had been the teacher of logic and had added our sounds to her, by chance overheard these things. Having consoled silent Rhetoric with friendly words, he addresses himself to her and asks whether she wishes to

CHAPTER 2 The Trespasser: from: Outlaw Rhetoric
Abstract: In considering the ancient art of rhetoric’s passion for classification, Roland Barthes observes, “ tell me how you classify and I’ll tell you who you are.” This gnomic promise suggests that we can discover a certain truth of identity in the taxonomic decisions made by different rhetorical cultures. Barthes clarifies this declaration by writing that “the taxonomic option implies an ideological one: there is always a stake in where things are placed,” and he later calls taxonomic variation the “place of place.”¹ I have been arguing that the “place” of vernacular rhetoric must be understood as England, and Barthes’ reflections on

Book Title: Paradigms for a Metaphorology- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Savage Robert
Abstract: What role do metaphors play in philosophical language? Are they impediments to clear thinking and clear expression, rhetorical flourishes that may well help to make philosophy more accessible to a lay audience, but that ought ideally to be eradicated in the interests of terminological exactness? Or can the images used by philosophers tell us more about the hopes and cares, attitudes and indifferences that regulate an epoch than their carefully elaborated systems of thought?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v7cn

Introduction from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: Let us try for a moment to imagine that modern philosophy had proceeded according to the methodological program set out for it by Descartes, and had arrived at that definitive conclusion that Descartes himself believed to be eminently attainable. This ‘end state’ of philosophy, which historical experience permits us to entertain only as a hypothesis, would be defined according to the criteria set out in the four rules of the Cartesian “Discours de la méthode,” in particular by the clarity and distinctness that the first rule requires of all matters apprehended in judgments. To this ideal of full objectification1 would

I Metaphorics of the ‘Mighty’ Truth from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: Anyone who set out to write a history of the concept of truth, in a strictly terminological sense aimed at definitional stringency, would have little to show for his efforts. The most popular definition, purportedly lifted by Scholasticism from Isaac ben Salomon Israeli’s book of definitions— veritas est adaequatio rei et intellectus [truth is the match of thing and intellect]¹—provides leeway for modification only in the shortest of its elements, in the neutrality of the ‘et’. While the definition should be understood, in keeping with its Aristotelian origins, as leaning toward the adaequatio intellectus ad rem [match of the

VI Organic and Mechanical Background Metaphorics from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: Metaphorics can also be in play where exclusively terminological propositions appear, but where these cannot be understood in their higher-order semantic unity without taking into account the guiding idea from which they are induced and ‘read off’. Statements referring to data of observation presuppose that what is intended can, in each case, be brought to mind only within the parameters of a descriptive typology: the reports that will one day be transmitted to us by the first voyagers to the moon may well require us to engage in a more thorough study of American or Russian geography if we are

x Geometric Symbolism and Metaphorics from: Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: The Fontenelle text from which I have just quoted implies a distinction, germane to our typology of metaphor histories, which confronts us with a final ‘transitional’ phenomenon, that of metaphorics and symbolism. Here we must be wary of formulating all too subtle definitions, tailored to the specifications of some system or other, that risk narrowing the basis of fulfilling intuitions in advance. The concept of symbol, richly shaded by its application to everything from aesthetics to formal logic (at the very least!), has already done much to obscure the expressive phenomena it was called on to illuminate. With its help,

Book Title: Artifice and Design-Art and Technology in Human Experience
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): ALLEN BARRY
Abstract: In an intriguing book about the aesthetics of technological objects and the relationship between technical and artistic accomplishment, Barry Allen develops the philosophical implications of a series of interrelated concepts-knowledge, artifact, design, tool, art, and technology-and uses them to explore parallel questions about artistry in technology and technics in art. This may be seen at the heart of Artifice and Designin Allen's discussion of seven bridges: he focuses at length on two New York bridges-the Hell Gate Bridge and the Bayonne Bridge-and makes use of original sources for insight into the designers' ideas about the aesthetic dimensions of their work. Allen starts from the conviction that art and technology must be treated together, as two aspects of a common, technical human nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v967

2. THE TECHNICAL from: Artifice and Design
Abstract: The theory of tools and technical action is poorly developed in Western philosophy. There has been little advance over the ideas of Aristotle, which contain serious errors. Another source of misunderstanding is the “well-known fact” that lots of species use tools, especially chimpanzees. This chapter is partly a critique of prevailing ideas about tools and artifacts. I want to show the need for a new take on the basic concepts of technological civilization, including artifact, artifice, technique, and tool. One topic I will not be discussing is “modern” or advanced, scientific technology. I leave that to chapter 4. This chapter

Book Title: Habits of the Heartland-Small-Town Life in Modern America
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Macgregor Lyn C.
Abstract: These ideas both reflect and shape their choices as consumers, whether at the grocery store, as parents of school-age children, or in the voting booth. Living with-and listening to-the town's residents taught Macgregor that while traditional ideas about "community," especially as it was connected with living in a small town, still provided an important organizing logic for peoples' lives, there were a variety of ways to understand and create community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6pd

Chapter 8 Presence from: Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: For two reasons the notion of “presence” now needs to be discussed.¹ First, the etymological meaning of the word “representation” already compels us to do so: representation is a making present of, or the granting of presence (again), to something that is absent. This is what our representative assemblies do: they make the people present because the people themselves cannot be present in such assemblies. A portrait may make present to the spectator somebody who has been dead for centuries. Similarly, the writing of history gives presence again to an absent past, and its very raison d’être is to do

Chapter 1 Solon’s Cryptic Injunction: from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: But what need have we of this scrap of archaic wisdom, we “last men” who want nothing more than to be happy? With all the resources of speculative philosophy and professional research at our disposal—from Aristotle and the theological tradition to contemporary “positive psychology” and economics—why should we turn to

Chapter 6 Effects of the Trial Narrative on the Concept of Happiness from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: I have made much of the audacity of the trial as a narrative form in Pamela. It performs an impossible operation within the space of narrative: the suspension of the hermeneutic of happiness. According to the trial narrative, virtue can be proved only by one’s ability to ignore the question of happiness during a trial by adversity. Suffering, the trial narrative demands, must be viewed from the epistemological perspective of what it proves about us, and not from the existential perspective of whether it ruins our possibilities for happiness. For as long as the hermeneutic of trial governs the narrative,

Chapter 8 The Tragedies of Sentimentalism from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The transformation from a narrative-based to an affective conception of happiness does not occur instantaneously; it unfolds over time, roughly between Richardson’s Pamela and Kant’s second critique, under pressure from the trial narrative form. It is not individual narratives or theories that effect the transformation, though the importance of individual texts should not be underestimated as a measure of the evolving logic of trial. Rather, an entire cultural phenomenon is required to mediate the transition from a hermeneutic of happiness to a hermeneutic of trial: sentimentalism. Only through the discourse of sentimentalism does the logic of the trial narrative become

Chapter 10 Happiness in Revolution: from: Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The analysis of Kant has enabled us to understand the furthest expansion of the trial narrative paradigm—the replication of its logic in the discourses of ethics, politics, and history—and the most radical effects of the trial form. These effects are still visible in our lives today: the conception of happiness as an affect, the ambivalent attitude toward happiness, the structuring of our lives according to the alternation of desire/satisfaction or work/leisure, the ongoing legacy of utilitarianism’s reductive, mathematized conception of happiness. But the effects of the trial narrative are not always easy to discern: despite widespread criticism of

1 Transformations of the Word and Alienation from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Orality, Writing, and Disjuncture Alienation, a favorite diagnosis variously applied to modem man’s plight since at least Hegel and Feuerbach, has not been commonly thought of in terms of the technological history of the word, although some attention, more analytic than historical or clinical, has been given by structuralists to certain tensions attendant on writing.¹ Yet it would appear that the technological inventions of writings, print, and electronic verbalization, in their historical effects, are connected with and have helped bring about a certain kind of alienation within the human lifeworld. This is not at all to say that these inventions

7 From Epithet to Logic: from: Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: In 1672, two years before his death, John Milton published a logic textbook which he had written, it is quite certain, sometime in the years 1641–1647, and most probably sometime during the years 1645-1647, when he was teaching his two nephews and some other boys. The work is in Latin, as textbooks in all subjects normally had always been in Western Europe from classical times. Milton’s concern with logic, evinced by this book, shows itself throughout the corpus of his writings, as many modern studies have made clear.¹ Nowhere perhaps does this concern show itself more than in Paradise

Ecomedievalism: from: Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Johnson Valerie B.
Abstract: This essay applies ecocriticism to the study of neomedieval texts, an approach that I term “ecomedievalism.” Ecomedievalism interlaces study of neomedievalisms through the bifurcated lens of ecocriticism and ecomaterialism.¹ Neomedieval texts continually deploy environmental descriptions and language to develop a sense of an authentic medieval setting, part of the worldbuilding process, yet little critical attention is devoted to analyzing these methods from an ecological perspective. Ecocriticism’s rapid theorization has allowed the field to move beyond the political activism that characterized its origins, and now offers an opportunity to begin academic study of the fictional environments in neomedievalisms.² Consequently, this essay

5: Herder and Language from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Trabant Jürgen
Abstract: After Bacon’s discovery of the non-scientific semantics of natural language as idola fori,“idols of the marketplace” and the most serious obstacle to true knowledge, and after Locke’s attempt to integrate language into a theory of human understanding in hisEssay Concerning Human Understanding(1690), and after his proposals for coming to terms with the epistemological problem of language (which is “a mist before our eyes”), language was on the agenda of the philosophy of the eighteenth century — at least of its empiricist current. Rationalist philosophy generally speaking has no problem with language, and, hence, nothing interesting to say about

10: Herder’s Biblical Studies from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Bultmann Christoph
Abstract: Herder’s work on the Bible has a distinctly theological thrust. Thus he asserted in the opening statement of his encyclopedic Briefe, das Studium der Theologie betreffend(Letters Concerning the Study of Theology) of 1780–81: “Es bleibt dabei, mein Lieber, das beste Studium der Gottesgelehrsamkeit ist Studium der Bibel” (There is no denying it, my good man, the best study of theology is the study of the Bible . . .).¹ Taking this idea even further, he suggested that ideally “jeder gute Theolog sich seine Bibel selbst müßte übersetzt haben” (STh357; every good theologian ought to have translated his

17: Herder’s Reception and Influence from: A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Menze Ernest A.
Abstract: The study of the reception of and influences on literature is relatively new and, for the works of many authors, has hardly begun. Current literature tends to receive the most attention. In the past, literary works were often co-opted for ideological reasons and in the process misinterpreted and distorted; this was the case with Johann Gottfried Herder through the nineteenth and well into the twentieth century. Ultimately, Herder was discredited by nationalist perversion of his works during the National-Socialist era. Whereas there are several studies dealing with Herder’s early-twentieth-century reception history, little has been done regarding Herder’s influence in earlier

14 Julian’s Revelation of Love: from: A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) JENKINS ENA
Abstract: Influenced – perhaps unduly – by an early encounter with Julian in Eliot’s Four Quartets, I have long read her as a poet, like Dante both a mystical poet and a theological mystic. Hinted at inA Vision Showed to a Devout Woman, this becomes a defining characteristic ofA Revelation of Love¹ and, in looking at both texts as a work in progress, I have perceived both poet and poetic in process of becoming, the growth of a poet’s mind as Julian seeks ways of communicating what can be told of the nature of her mystical awakening. To readA Revelation

Manuscript Production before Chaucer: from: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) ROLD ORIETTA DA
Abstract: This paper concerns books written in England in the centuries before Chaucer; it considers some of the current trends in our understanding of manuscript production from the twelfth to the fifteenth centuries. It represents ideas and questions which I formed during my work on two projects funded by the Arts and Humanities Research Council, which catalogued manuscripts from very different points on the medieval chronological spectrum. On the one hand, ‘The Production and Use of English Manuscripts: 1060 to 1220’ project (EM Project) deals with manuscripts containing English texts that were copied between the end of the eleventh and the

2: Image and Phantasm: from: Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: For the Romantics the canvas and the written page were sites of contestation, spaces on which ephemeral experience was said to be represented in the material world. Art, understood in these terms, became the middle point or stage upon which something absent and intangible was made to appear present and graspable. It was, in other words, a material invocation of a sphere unavailable to the senses. In the following chapter I attempt to reconstruct the model of aesthetic perception in the work of Wackenroder and Tieck in light of the epistemological and perceptual categories laid out by Lessing’s essay on

Acting Like a Man: from: Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Campbell Kimberlee
Abstract: For scholars of the Middle Ages, the old French chanson de gestehas traditionally served as the benchmark for one extreme of a continuum of representation, a genre expressing the distilled essence of the medieval masculine. This reading of the epic presumes a transparent equivalence of the masculine with the body and actions of the knight, constructing the “male” as a necessary element in an ideology of chivalric caste and power. Furthermore, this definition of the masculine is, in Simon Gaunt’s words, “monologic,” meaning that “in thechansons de gestemale characters are defined as individuals in relation to other

5 Engaging with Māori and Archaeologists: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Pishief Elizabeth
Abstract: Understanding what heritage means to community groups is an essential prerequisite for active, creative and successful engagement with them. Heritage is a cultural construct comprising different ideological and material phenomena for diverse groups of people, which means there are innumerable possible heritages, each shaped for the specific user group. However, although there may be an infinite variety of possible heritages, in New Zealand, for example, the dominant Western discourse controls the development of independent heritages. This chapter provides evidence of two different ‘heritages’ and identifies key principles about heritage. A view of heritage has emerged since 2011 that reflects the

16 Relational Systems and Ancient Futures: from: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Ngata Wayne
Abstract: This chapter explores the complex engagements navigated by heritage professionals and a self-defined and genealogically connected community working together under the auspices of two separately funded but related projects: ‘Artefacts of Encounter’, funded by the UK’s Economic and Social Research Council and Arts and Humanities Research Council and based at the University of Cambridge Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology (MAA); and ‘Te Ataakura’, funded by the Māori Centre of Research Excellence Ngā Pae o te Māramatanga and based at the Eastern Institute of Technology, Aotearoa-New Zealand.¹ These brought together Toi Hauiti, the working arts group of Te Aitanga a Hauiti,

2 Interpretive Theory, Narrative, and the Politics of Meaning from: Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: The social sciences have been concerned for many decades with fundamental questions concerning the nature of social life and its investigation. Whereas some of these concerns, and the debates they have generated, have been geared toward resolving ontological and epistemological dilemmas, others have focused on methodological challenges of the process of social enquiry.¹ This concern forms my examination of the hermeneutical analysis of social phenomenon such as the narratives about the idea and practices of the “nation.” Using interpretive theory, or hermeneutics, this chapter explores how interpreting ideology as “meaning in the service of power” illuminates the analysis of media

3 In Search of a Grand Narrative: from: Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: In the decade leading up to Nigeria’s independence, the three major ethno-regional blocs in the country, the eastern region, the northern region, and the western region, organized essentially around the three major political parties, the National Council for Nigeria and the Cameroons (NCNC) the Northern People’s Congress (NPC), and the Action Group (AG), respectively. The struggle to define the character and logic of the emergent state and imagined grand nation by the many ethnic nationalities of the regions, through the leveraging of group interests within the larger context, was evident in the major newspapers that represented each of these major

Book Title: Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega-Masters of Parody
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): KERR LINDSAY G.
Abstract: Co-Winner of the 2014 Publication Prize awarded by the Association of Hispanists of Great Britain and Ireland Kerr traces the processes and paradoxes at work in the late parodic poetry of Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega, illuminating the correlations and connections between two poets who have more often than not been presented as enemies.The analysis follows the parallel development of the complex parodic genre through Góngora's late mythological parody, from his 1589 Hero and Leander romance through to his culminating parody, La fábula de Píramo y Tisbe (1618) and Lope de Vega's alter ego Tomé de Burguillos, whose anthology, Rimas humanas y divinas del licenciado Tomé de Burguillos, was published a year before Lope's death, in 1634. Working from the premise that parody provides a Derridean supplément to exhausted, dominant genres (e.g. pastoral, lyric, epic), this study asks: what do these texts achieve by their supplementarity, and how do they achieve it?, and, the overarching question, why do these erudite poets turn to parody in an age of decline? Lindsay Kerr received her PhD in Spanish at Queen's University Belfast.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1t6p5zq

4: What Kafka Learned from Flaubert: from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Degner Uta
Abstract: Kafka’s repeated declaration about an “elective affinity” with the French writer Gustave Flaubert — here in a letter of November 1912 to Felice Bauer — has led to various suggestions from scholars about how to interpret Flaubert’s role in Kafka’s writing.¹ Attention has primarily focused on psychoanalytical and narratological parallels between the two authors. Indeed, it is apparent that Kafka models his letters to Felice Bauer on Flaubert’s letters to Louise Colet; and Kafka’s narrators might have learned from the French model and its “impassiveness.” However, while these suggestions are useful in highlighting some aspects of Kafka’s writing and personality,

5: Kafka’s Racial Melancholy from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Garloff Katja
Abstract: Kafka’s “A Report to an Academy” (“Ein Bericht für eine Akademie,” 1919) has often been read as a parody of Jewish assimilation into German culture, in part because it was first published in Martin Buber’s acclaimed Jewish monthly Der Jude. In this reading, the text would suggest a problematic convergence between racial antisemitism and a Zionistinspired critique of assimilation. The parable of the African ape that becomes an almost-human European intimates that biological differences set the Jews apart despite all their efforts at acculturation. The fact that “A Report” ends by describing the ape’s nightly encounters with a creature of

9: Kafka in Virilio’s Teletopical City from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Goebel Rolf J.
Abstract: In a recent paper, Patrick Fortmann has shown how Kafka’s “Little Automobile Story” elucidates the interconnections between modern traffic, circulation, and communication and his own acts of writing.² Moreover, Kafka’s texts persistently respond to historic changes in technological media and their impact on

11: “Samsa war Reisender”: from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Zilcosky John
Abstract: Franz Kafka once claimed that all human beings were caught between two competing technological systems: one sponsoring “ghostly” absence (the postal system, telegraph, and telephone) and one encouraging “natural” presence (trains, planes, and automobiles). To humanity’s woe, the ghostly side was winning: “To attain a natural intercourse, a tranquility of souls, [humanity] has invented the railway, the motor car, the aeroplane — but nothing helps anymore: These are evidently inventions devised at the moment of crashing” ( LM, 223; BM, 302).¹ Kafka famously spent most of his life on the side of the ghosts, sending Felice Bauer up to three letters

13: Kafka’s Journey into the Future: from: Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Bruce Iris
Abstract: Franz Kafka’s writings have crossed many ideological and cultural borders, yet the country to which he wanted to emigrate — Palestine then, Israel now — named a street after every important Jewish figure and virtually every Zionist except Kafka. Even his friend Max Brod, a writer of much lesser renown, is now receiving this posthumous honor in Tel Aviv.¹ The reasons for ignoring Kafka were largely ideological: Kafka’s generation of German-speaking Jews presented a challenge to the militant and chauvinistic ideology of political Zionism that became prominent after the Second World War. Kafka was also regarded as a Diaspora writer,

Conclusion from: The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: This study has demonstrated how Aldecoa’s narrative reconfigures women’s identity in contemporary Spain and confronts the memory of the Spanish Civil War and the years of the Francoist dictatorship, exploring its deep psychological impact on current and future generations. In examining the cultural and social myths surrounding women’s role in Spanish society, Aldecoa deconstructs traditional patriarchal paradigms and offers a new, more complex understanding of women’s identity, free from existing hierarchical and binary structures. This rejection of the patriarchal system that pervades the fabric of Western culture is further extended by Aldecoa in her depiction of the Civil War and

Chapter 1 Historicizing Intersectionality as a Critical Lens: from: Interconnections
Author(s) May Vivian M.
Abstract: Scholars of intersectionality, historically and presently, start from the premise that both lived identities and structures of power and privilege should be understood as interwoven and not as additive factors or as separable dynamics. Intersectional approaches therefore entail a significant shift in epistemological, ontological, and methodological frames: fundamentally emphasizing simultaneity, scholars of intersectionality employ “tactics, strategies, and identities which historically have appeared to be mutually exclusive under modernist oppositional practices.” Because this alternative mode of reasoning can readily lead to charges of illogic, as Kimberlé Crenshaw has discussed at length, those who employ intersectionality frequently confront being misread or misunderstood.¹

3 Visual Eroticism, Poetic Voyeurism: from: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote’s mythological poem Fábula de Polifemo y Galateahas received uninterrupted attention since it first circulated in manuscript at the court of Madrid in 1613. At the time, the object – along with Góngora’s other long poem,Soledades– of fiery and scandalized repulsion as much as of exultant praise,Polifemotoday is considered a masterwork of Spanish Baroque poetry.

1 Telling Tales from: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: The theorists and writers who have tried to define and categorise magical realism have been keen to distinguish the mode of writing from fairy tales and other well-known vehicles for the fantastic and miraculous. Flores (1995, 115–16) writes: ‘the practitioners of magical realism cling to reality as if to prevent ‘literature’ from getting in their way, as if to prevent their myth from flying off, as in fairy tale to supernatural realms’. Leal likewise strives to separate magical realism from the common fantastical genres: ‘magical realism cannot be identified either with fantastic literature or with psychological literature, or with

Book Title: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weiss Julian
Abstract: Professor Alan Deyermond was one of the leading British Hispanists of the last fifty years, whose work had a formative influence on medieval Hispanic studies around the world. There were several tributes to his work published during his lifetime, and it is fitting that this one, in his memory, should be produced by Tamesis, the publishing house that he helped establish and to which he contributed so much as author and editor right up to his death. The contributors to this volume are some of Professor Deyermond's former colleagues, doctoral students, and members of the Medieval Hispanic Research Seminar. Given Professor Deyermond's breadth of expertise, the span of the essays is appropriately wide, ranging chronologically from the thirteenth to the sixteenth century, and covering lyric, hagiography, clerical verse narrative, frontier balladry, historical and codicological studies. The volume opens with a personal memoir of her father by Ruth Deyermond, and closes with the draft of an unpublished essay found amongst Professor Deyermond's papers, and edited by his literary executor, Professor David Hook. Andrew M. Beresford is Reader and Head of Hispanic Studies at the University of Durham. Louise M. Haywood is Reader in Medieval Iberian Literary and Cultural Studies, and Head of the Department of Spanish and Portuguese at the University of Cambridge. Julian Weiss is Professor of Medieval & Early Modern Hispanic Studies at King's College London.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t3h

11 Vernacular Commentaries and Glosses in Late Medieval Castile, ii: from: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) WEISS JULIAN
Abstract: The present checklist is the second in a series devoted to documenting the scope of vernacular commentaries and glosses on Castilian literary and religious texts during the later Middle Ages, a transformative period in the history of vernacular literary culture. Although the vast majority of the works included derive from the fifteenth century, the chronological span of these lists runs from the mid-fourteenth (with Juan García de Castrojeriz’s commentary on Aegidius Romanus’ De regimine principum) to the end of the post-incunable period (with works such as the parodic commentary on theCarajicomedia, composed 1506–19). The series starts with a

Introduction from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: Perceptions of medieval literature, far from being a simple matter of philological interest, have historically been fraught with ideological implications.¹ Thus, for example, when, announcing the advent of romanticism, Madame de Staël famously proposed that “romantic or chivalric literature is indigenous to us’,² she was not only celebrating the birth of a literary movement. She was also saying something about the literature that was, according to her, most appropriate for the French national–political context of her day. Opposing Napoleon’s neo-classicist ideal, the Middle Ages stood in her writings for an alternative, freer model of art and power. Likewise, when,

2 The Medievalist Rhetorics of Enlightenment from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: If the medieval did not function in the early eighteenth century, as it does in our own time, as a historical or chronological category, then how exactly did it work? I argued in the previous chapter that in actual linguistic usage, the term moyen âge often served as a literary or linguistic term, as reflected also in the common use of the accompanying adjective barbare to describe the period. In this chapter, elaborating on this notion of the medieval as a non-historical concept, I argue that during the early eighteenth century, the medieval came to embody essentially a moral category

6 The Invention of Medieval Studies from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: This chapter examines how out of the galant, aristocratic engagement with the medieval whose contours I have sketched in the previous chapters, there emerged during the first decades of the eighteenth century a new, scholarly approach to the Middle Ages. This new, academic medievalism had its institutional basis at the Académie royale des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Originally founded by Louis XIV to compose Latin commemorative inscriptions in his honour, during the eighteenth century the Academy evolved into a full-fledged scholarly body, focusing more exclusively on historical and philological activities, and shifting its emphasis from classical to medieval subjects. This process

Conclusion: from: Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: In a provocative book about “the hidden agenda of modernity”, Stephen Toulmin has argued that modernity entailed a major philosophical shift. This was a shift from the oral to the written, from the particular to the universal, from the local to the general, from the timely to the timeless, and from humanism to rationalism.¹ The new modernity, whose rise Toulmin dates back to the major works of Descartes in the 1630s and 1640s, was marked by the “pursuit of mathematical exactitude and logical rigor, intellectual certainty and moral purity”.² While earlier thinkers had questioned the value of abstract theory for

7: The Lutheran Faust: from: The Faustian Century
Author(s) Andersen Kresten Thue
Abstract: Near the beginning of the sixteenth century, Martin Luther found new meaning in the Pauline expression justification by faith through the hermeneutic concept sola scriptura. Luther’s theological discovery inspired others to articulate and invoke fundamental religious, political, and cultural changes within the European societies. At the same time, the Protestant Reformation gave rise to a tension between a religious and a humanistic outlook. Many solutions put forward to overcome this tension were informed by fear or fascination and appear to us as reactionary or progressive. Such figures as Paracelsus, Erasmus, Trithemius occupied a place between the strict confines of religion

Book Title: El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo-Memoria, sujeto y formación de la identidad democrática española
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ESTRADA ISABEL M.
Abstract: Este libro evalúa la aportación del documental cinematográfico y televisivo producido en España a partir de los años 90 al debate en torno a la memoria de la represión franquista, por un lado, así como a la construcción de la identidad democrática, en términos más generales. Propongo que tanto los documentales con un enfoque histórico explícito como aquellos cuya mirada retrospectiva se realiza sin referentes tan concretos cuestionan el proyecto político teleológico concebido durante la Transición. La primera parte de mi estudio trata de la memoria histórica de la guerra civil específicamente y, la segunda, de la memoria en un sentido socioeconómico para apuntar el déficit de agencia del sujeto en la democracia neoliberal. En última instancia se reivindica la marginalidad social de la víctima a la vez que se deja al descubierto su obliteración de los procesos democráticos. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College. ENGLISH VERSION This book examines how a selected group of documentaries made since 1995 for both film and television inform the debate centered on the so-called "recuperation of memory" of the Spanish Civil War and dictatorship. Estrada contends that these documentaries modify Spanish identity as it was conceived by the teleological historical project of the transition. The narrative of mass media should be examined in order to comprehend the process of the "recovery of memory" that culminated in the Law of Historical Memory (2007). She carries out a comparative analysis of the visual discourse of the documentary and the narrative discourses of history and testimony, paying special attention to the relations of power among them. Using theoretical frameworks provided by Badiou, Adorno, Renov, and Ricoeur, this study ultimately sheds light on the status of the victim in the context of Spain's neoliberal democracy. Isabel M. Estrada is Visiting Assistant Professor, Franklin & Marshall College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbkxg

10 The Talmudic Community of Thirteenth-Century England from: Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Zadoff Ethan
Abstract: The study of medieval law occupies a unique niche within traditional academic discourse. A concentration on philological precision, challenges pertaining to manuscript study, and the ʹinternal languageʹ of jurisprudence have at times over-shadowed the consideration of the wider societal implications of medieval law and curtailed its use in the investigation of broad themes of social and cultural history. This is particularly true of the thirteenth-century Anglo-Jewish legal corpus, the study of which has been relegated to a select few articles and studies.¹

Chapter Four Otakar Hostinský, the Musically Beautiful, and the from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Grimes Nicole
Abstract: Most of the reactions to Eduard Hanslick’s monograph Vom Musikalisch-Schönen during the author’s lifetime have either a decidedly polemical or a flattering ring to them. The result is that Hanslick’s theories on musical aesthetics are often abbreviated to handy catch-phrases, a practice that attests to the ideological prejudice of many of his contemporaries, and that has subsequently prevented an objective and substantive dialogue with his aesthetic theory. Despite avoiding such a polemical tone, Das Musikalisch-Schöne und das Gesammtkunstwerk vom Standpunkte der formalen Ästhetik,¹ published by Otakar Hostinský (1847–1910) in 1877, was poorly received and is largely forgotten today. The

Chapter Nine The Critic as Subject: from: Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Freede Lauren
Abstract: As a genre, musical autobiographies fit comfortably in neither musicological nor literary studies. The vagaries of personal recollection make autobiographical writing problematic as a source of historical information, while the failure of many musical writers to realize that the genre is inherently subjective and highly artificial leads to the condemnation of many musical autobiographies for a lack of literary merit. To play on Goethe, whose own autobiography from 1823 served as a spiritual example for many later artists to follow: musical autobiographies reflect little Dichtung, and even less Wahrheit.¹

Book Title: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945-Altruism and Moral Ambiguity
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Schönfeld Christiane
Abstract: In the aftermath of the Second World War, both the allied occupying powers and the nascent German authorities sought Germans whose record during the war and the Nazi period could serve as a counterpoint to the notion of Germans as evil. That search has never really stopped. In the past few years, we have witnessed a burgeoning of cultural representations of this "other" kind of Third Reich citizen - the "good German" - as opposed to the committed Nazi or genocidal maniac. Such representations have highlighted individuals' choices in favor of dissenting behavior, moral truth, or at the very least civil disobedience. The "good German's" counterhegemonic practice cannot negate or contradict the barbaric reality of Hitler's Germany, but reflects a value system based on humanity and an "other" ideal community. This volume of new essays explores postwar and recent representations of "good Germans" during the Third Reich, analyzing the logic of moral behavior, cultural and moral relativism, and social conformity found in them. It thus draws together discussions of the function and reception of "Good Germans" in Germany and abroad. Contributors: Eoin Bourke, Manuel Bragança, Maeve Cooke, Kevin De Ornellas, Sabine Egger, Joachim Fischer, Coman Hamilton, Jon Hughes, Karina von Lindeiner-Strásky, Alexandra Ludewig, Pól O Dochartaigh, Christiane Schönfeld, Matthias Uecker. Pól O Dochartaigh is Professor of German and Dean of the Faculty of Arts at the University of Ulster, Northern Ireland. Christiane Schönfeld is Senior Lecturer in German and Head of the Department of German Studies at Mary Immaculate College, University of Limerick.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nh0x

2: “Görings glorreichste Günstlinge”: from: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) von Lindeiner-Stráský Karina
Abstract: Amongst the objects of German efforts to come to terms with the Nazi past ( Vergangenheitsbewältigung) the memory of fellow travelers in the arts is one of the most controversial.¹ These artists, who often disagreed with most or all of the regime’s ideology, decided not to emigrate as many of their fellow artists did. Instead, they continued to perform in Germany, and in many cases accepted that the Nazis used them as cultural icons, for example to promote the regime abroad or to convey ideological messages through the medium of art. Their decision to stay and perform has stimulated ongoing debates

Book Title: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DALGLISH CHRIS
Abstract: Heritage, memory, community archaeology and the politics of the past form the main strands running through the papers in this volume.The authors tackle these subjects from a range of different philosophical perspectives, with many drawing on the experience of recent community, commercial and other projects. Throughout, there is a strong emphasis on both the philosophy of engagement and with its enactment in specific contexts; the essays deal with an interest in the meaning, value and contested nature of the recent past and in the theory and practice of archaeological engagements with that past. Chris Dalglish is a lecturer in archaeology at the University of Glasgow. Contributors: Julia Beaumont, David Bowsher, Terry Brown, Jo Buckberry, Chris Dalglish, James Dixon, Audrey Horning, Robert Isherwood, Robert C Janaway, Melanie Johnson, Siân Jones, Catriona Mackie, Janet Montgomery, Harold Mytum, Michael Nevell, Natasha Powers, Biddy Simpson, Matt Town, Andrew Wilson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nhjn

Archaeology for All: from: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Nevell Michael
Abstract: This paper provides an overview of a five-year project that began life under the banner of ‘I Dig Moston’ in 2003 and finished as ‘Dig Manchester’ in 2008. Two seasons of highly successful community excavations at the site of Moston Hall in Broadhurst Park, northern Manchester, encouraged both the volunteers and professionals involved to apply for Heritage Lottery funding to deliver community archaeology across the city from 2005 to 2008 (Fig. 4.1). Through Dig Manchester, local residents, school children and community groups worked alongside professional archaeologists from the university of Manchester Archaeological unit and the Manchester Museum on a programme

Book Title: Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana-Campobello, Garro, Esquivel y Mastretta
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DE MORELOCK ELA MOLINA SEVILLA
Abstract: Este libro analiza la perspectiva de cuatro escritoras mexicanas -Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel y Ángeles Mastretta- acerca de la Revolución Mexicana y cómo estas escritoras recuperan la memoria popular, recreando y reincluyendo a las mujeres en la narrativa nacional respecto a su participación en la propia Revolución, más allá del conocido papel de soldaderas y Adelitas que acompañaban a los diferentes ejércitos revolucionarios. Este trabajo combina diferentes planteamientos críticos feministas, antropológicos y geográficos que además de las mujeres, incluyen a los indígenas y a otras minorías étnicas contemplando la interrelación de las categorías de género, espacio, raza y clase como un todo que define y redefine, permanentemente, identidades espacializadas en cambio permanente y constante. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock es un latinoamericanista actualmente con sede en los EE.UU. ENGLISH VERSION This book analyzes the perspective of four Mexican women writers regarding the Mexican Revolution---Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel, and Angeles Mastretta. It examines how they recover popular memory to re-create and re-insert women in the national narrative with respect to their participation in the Revolution, which extended beyond the role of soldiers, camp followers, and soldiers' wives. The work combines cultural studies with feminist critical readings and an anthropological and geographical awareness of the roles of indigenous people and ethnic minorities, while paying attention to different categories such as gender, place, race, and class, as a wholeness of spatialized identities in permanent and constant flux. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock is a Latin Americanist currently based in the U.S.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nj1v

4 Feeding Nationalism from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Difficult to think of something more central to our lives than food. For we digest symbols and myths as much as fats, proteins and carbohydrates. At one and the same time food is both nutrition and a mode of thought. It enables us biologically, and structures our life socially. As both fuel for our bodies and ideas for our minds, food is common to every single one of us.

5 Biology from: Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: It’s very simple. We are social beings. We are also animals. Problems begin when we try to tie those two statements together. The knot becomes tighter when nationalism is involved. Indeed it tends towards the Gordian when there appears to be a well-grounded biological basis to a certain ethnic identity, and questions of ‘race’ and thus of course accusations of ‘racism’, start to raise their head. The Basques are such a case. In this chapter, rather than lunge for a sword, metaphorical or otherwise, I wish to untie this particular knot piece by piece, and to assess the evidence as

1 Carnival and Simulacra in Reinaldo Arenas’s El color del verano from: Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: This chapter focuses on an analysis of El color del veranoin the light of Bakhtin’s dialogic theory. I shall explore the Bakhtinian concepts of carnival, dialogism and the polyphonic novel, concentrating my analysis on the concept of carnival as reflected in this novel and its various functions within it. Another important aspect of my analysis is the use of the mask as a performance of identity, as it often appears related to the concept of representation, theatre and carnival.

Chapter Four The Bild Motif and Lulu’s Identity from: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: As is well-known and has been discussed in previous chapters, Karl Kraus’s introductory lecture to the 1905 private performance of Frank Wedekind’s Die Büchse der Pandorain Vienna left a lasting impression on Berg. This impression lay dormant until 1928, when he settled on Wedekind’sLuluplays,ErdgeistandDie Büchse der Pandora, for his second opera after considering and eventually rejecting Gerhart Hauptmann’sUnd Pippa tanzt!¹ Kraus’s lecture was extensive and addressed several issues, including the perception of womanhood and the typological roles of some characters, all of which he related to the moral message of the play. The

Proclaiming the War News: from: War and Literature
Author(s) WRIGHT TOM F.
Abstract: How does the role of public speech evolve in an age of technological transformation? Two literary and visual artefacts from the wars of nineteenth-century America pose this question, and offer insights into a chapter of media history that is still poorly understood. In the first, Richard Caton Woodville’s War News From Mexico(1848), the ambivalent place of wartime voice takes centre stage. This most iconic of genre paintings records a foundational scene of US imperialism, and captures the public drama of national expansion. Its broader subject, however, is the social life of information. Woodville’s image depicts news of Mexican surrender

2: Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel (1770–1831) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Born in Stuttgart in 1770, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel studied theology and philosophy at the Tübinger Stift, the theological seminary attached to the University of Tübingen. Here, he formed friendships with two students who would also become major figures in German cultural history, the poet Friedrich Hölderlin and the philosopher F. W. J. Schelling. He graduated in 1793. Not wanting to become a vicar, he started working as a private tutor, first in Bern (where he became acquainted with the work of the economists James Steuart and Adam Smith, whose ideas would remain crucial to his thinking) and after that

12: Jürgen Habermas (b. 1929) from: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Philosopher, sociologist, and political theorist Jürgen Habermas is the most distinguished German intellectual currently alive, and one of the world’s leading thinkers. Combining genuine philosophical depth with penetrating social analysis, his work draws inspiration from a wide variety of sources, including Marxism and neo-Marxist kritische Theorie, post-Wittgensteinian linguistic philosophy, and the sociological tradition since Émile Durkheim (1858–1917) and Max Weber (1864–1920).

Introduction from: Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Andrews Jean
Abstract: Homer knew that poetry is a matter of motion. Once upon a pre-‘theoretical’ time, criticism of poetry inhabited poetry itself. It was inscribed in the self conscious reflections of the early poets on the nature of their art, and in the narratological and metaphorical manoeuvres of their writing. The opening line of the Iliadcompresses into a brief invocation to the Muse the essence of poetry as a specialised form of discourse that travels over time and space, while it also points to the authority and accountability that is enshrined in poetic utterance. The narrator invokes the Muse: ‘Sing, goddess,

Introduction: from: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Dowden Stephen D.
Abstract: Suffering and death are universal. They are the basal experience that tragic art addresses. But is tragic art in one form or another also universal? Are there times and places on which tragic thinking can have no purchase? If so, is our anti-mythic age of science and reason, of democracy and rapid technological progress an era unsuited to tragic art? The modern world is largely optimistic despite the massively destructive violence of the last century. Terrible things still happen to individuals, to families, to whole peoples. Yet when no wrong seems fully beyond prevention—an unforeseen possibility that with due

4: Tropes of Subversion from: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: Schmidt’s play with non-phonetic signs and the etym theory illustrate his fragmentary style of writing and highlights his rejection of traditional logical chains of reasoning. Instead of presenting any dogmatic truths about language, Schmidt sought to animate the reader to create his or her language through self-conscious figuration. Although the etym language might suggest a rather confining way of reading and reflecting upon language and reality, the fact is that even Schmidt, as the self-proclaimed creator of such a mode of inquiry into oral and written language, remains inscribed in his own speaking and writing. It is the reader, who,

7: Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre: from: Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: We are exploring a narrational figure in which lovers attempt to overcome their existential opposition and blend together as one identity. There are many shades of identification, however, all of which imply, in one way or another, the submergence of duality in unity. Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre is a tour de force of identification, including multiple psychological identifications, mistaken identities, and the eventual union of sexual partners who are ideally matched but held apart by the exigencies of narrative and plot.

26: Contemporary English-Canadian Drama and Theater from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Nothof Anne
Abstract: Contemporary English-Canadian playwrights articulate a diversity of voices and give expression to the country’s many particular social and psychological spaces. They map its physical and mental terrain by dramatizing specific communities in terms of their histories, internal conflicts, and psychic landscapes. Since the 1960s regional history has continued to stimulate playwriting, providing local stories that inform the life of the community and the nation. These plays often revisit an apparently benign Canadian history from a critical perspective, and expose moral and political travesties. More recently, English-Canadian playwrights have been engaged in mapping specific communities in terms of ethnicity and ideology.

33: Drama and Theater from the Révolution tranquille to the Present from: History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Scholl Dorothee
Abstract: The 1960s and 1970s were a time of radical cultural, ideological, and political change for French Canada. In 1960 the liberal politician Jean Lesage became prime minister of Quebec. With the slogan “Maîtres chez nous” French Canadians claimed their cultural and economic independence from English-Canadian and American dominance. Authorities that had gone unchallenged for centuries were now questioned: Women began to emancipate themselves from patriarchal power structures, and society freed itself from the clerical system of education. The year 1968 saw the founding of the Parti Québécois, which stood for a policy of sovereignty or rather separatism of Quebec from

Book Title: Spanish American Poetry after 1950-Beyond the Vanguard
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): SHAW DONALD L.
Abstract: Providing a basis for understanding the main lines of development of poetry in Spanish America after Vanguardism, this volume begins with an overview of the situation at the mid-century: the later work of Neruda and Borges, the emergence of Paz. Consideration is then given to the decisive impact of Parra and the rise of colloquial poetry, politico-social poetry (Dalton, Cardenal) and representative figures such as Orozco, Pacheco and Cisneros. The aim is to establish a few paths through the largely unmapped jungle of Spanish American poetry in the time period. The author emphasises the persistence of a generally negative view of the human condition and the poets' exploration of different ways of responding to it. These vary from outright scepticism to the ideological, the religious or those derived from some degree of confidence in the creative imagination as cognitive. At the same time there is analysis of the evolving outlook on poetry of the writers in question, both in regard to its possible social role and in regard to diction. DONALD SHAW holds the Brown Forman Chair of Spanish American literature in the University of Virginia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81hxc

Conclusion from: Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: As this study has shown, narrative can be both a prison house that enforces gender stereotypes, and a tool for imagining gender differently. Gender identity is informed by narrative that hides its ideological impetus by concealing the conditions for, and mechanisms of, its own construction. The texts chosen for this study render those mechanisms and thus reverse the naturalizing gestures of narrative, thereby also calling into question constructions of gender. They make possible different narrative constructions of gender that remain, however, visible as constructions because the novels are self-reflexive in their make up. If, as I argue in the framing

“Trübe” as the Source of New Color Formation in Goethe’s Late Works from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) ALLERT BEATE
Abstract: Much has been written about Goethe’s earlier didactic and polemical works on color.¹ However, little attention has been paid to his late essays titled Entoptische Farben (1817–20) and Chromatik (1822), on which I shall focus in this essay.² Goethe’s experiments with colors and his writings on the visual occupied him almost for his entire life. Whereas one group of scholars argues for continuity and consistency in Goethe’s works, a second group argues that his oeuvre displays gaps and discontinuities, yet that these various parts represent different voices dialogically responding to each other while in the process also forming a

Hypochondria, Onanism, and Reading in Goethe’s from: Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) POTTER EDWARD T.
Abstract: Johann Wolfgang von Goethe’s pathbreaking epistolary novel, Die Leiden des jungen Werther (1774, 2nd [rev.] ed. 1787) has been the focus of an enormous amount of scholarly attention.¹ A recent analysis by Bruce Duncan of more than two centuries of Werther criticism, Goethe’s “Werther” and the Critics (2005), makes manifest the wide variety of critical approaches to this extremely rich text. Duncan discusses, among other things, contemporary late eighteenth-century reactions to Werther, biographical, religious, psychological, and political approaches to Goethe’s novel, as well as interpretations of Werther that focus on reading, writing, gender, and/or sexuality. The literary critic Michael Bell

1 Reading for the Moral: from: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: My characterization of the ethical potentialities of exemplary rhetoric admittedly flies in the face of a commonplace critical presumption about the teleology of morals and the authoritarian nature of didactic literature. A composite sketch of the teleological account might take the following form: morality took an unfortunate turn in the Middle Ages when it assimilated itself to Church-dominated dogmatism, until moral rationalism found its feet again in the autonomous ethics of Enlightenment reason and Reformist spirituality. The assumption is that modern philosophy forever made ethics personal and appealingly complex again; and so in the vicissitudes of history, medieval morality stands

3 MEMORY, HISTORY, AND IDENTITY: from: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: With the publication of Señas de identitdadin 1966 andReivindicación del Conde don Juliánin 1970, Goytisolo gave centre stage to the closely connected themes of memory, history, and identity. Identity, Goytisolo suggests, is intimately linked to one’s individual recall of the past set against the backdrop of the shared history of a community. Memory is the key to unlock this sense of identity by offering access to the past, from the perspective of the present, with a view to the future direction that the individual’s or community’s life may take. This is a phenomenological and non-teleological view, akin

1: Nietzsche’s Early Writings from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Brobjer Thomas H.
Abstract: There is much extant material from and about the young and early Nietzsche, including large numbers of early poems, school essays, school records, general notes, etc. In fact, Nietzsche seems, of all the great philosophers and of all important nineteenth-century intellectu- als, to be the one about whom we have the most early extant material.¹ The German critical edition of Nietzsche’s writings covering the period after he became professor in Basel in 1869, the Kritische Studienausgabe (KSA), consists of thirteen volumes (as well as two volumes of philo-logical commentary and chronology),of which six contain his published texts (along with a

Link to from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: The Birth of Tragedy was written in (and, in a sense, against) a number of contexts: the military context of the Franco-Prussian War; the political context of the proclamation of the German Reich in Versailles on 18 January 1871, of the declaration of the Paris Commune on 18 March of the same year, and of the growing revolutionary movement in Europe; and the academic-political context of Basel, especially the philological circles in which Nietzsche had to operate. As early as on 20 November 1868, after his first meeting with Wagner in the Brockhaus household, Nietzsche wrote a letter to Rohde

Link to from: A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: In Leipzig Nietzsche had become friends with Heinrich Romundt (1845– 1919), another classical philologist who joined the Philological Society, or Philologischer Verein, co-founded by Nietzsche. But both Nietzsche and Franz Overbeck, the theologian, were amazed by Romundt’s decision in February 1875 to convert to Roman Catholicism and become a priest. Writing to Erwin Rohde on 28 February 1875, Nietzsche described Romundt as “a domestic problem, a house ghost” (ein Hausleiden, ein Hausgespenst), and expressed his indignation at Romundt’s decision in a way that might surprise us: “Our good, pure, Protestant air! I have never felt my innermost dependence on the

Endpiece: from: Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Preziosi Donald
Abstract: A clear awareness of the reality of our own finitude being a possibly unbearable source of anxiety, we may at times be tempted to actually believe in our own immortality. Autobiographic, biographic and museographic possibilities for after-lives seduce us into imagining the constraints of the real being eliminated if we keep a tense yet measured distance – a coy similitude or a pantographic relationship – toward our (self) image. As epistemological technologies of virtual space, museums and collections keep the real at a manageable distance in the face of anxieties. The ego’s habitation in museological space opened up by its

Book Title: Fighting For Time-Shifting Boundaries of Work and Social Life
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Though there are still just twenty-four hours in a day, society’s idea of who should be doing what and when has shifted. Time, the ultimate scarce resource, has become an increasingly contested battle zone in American life, with work, family, and personal obligations pulling individuals in conflicting directions. In Fighting for Time, editors Cynthia Fuchs Epstein and Arne Kalleberg bring together a team of distinguished sociologists and management analysts to examine the social construction of time and its importance in American culture. Fighting for Time opens with an exploration of changes in time spent at work—both when people are on the job and the number of hours they spend there—and the consequences of those changes for individuals and families. Contributors Jerry Jacobs and Kathleen Gerson find that the relative constancy of the average workweek in America over the last thirty years hides the fact that blue-collar workers are putting in fewer hours while more educated white-collar workers are putting in more. Rudy Fenwick and Mark Tausig look at the effect of nonstandard schedules on workers’ health and family life. They find that working unconventional hours can increase family stress, but that control over one’s work schedule improves family, social, and health outcomes for workers. The book then turns to an examination of how time influences the organization and control of work. The British insurance company studied by David Collinson and Margaret Collinson is an example of a culture where employees are judged on the number of hours they work rather than on their productivity. There, managers are under intense pressure not to take legally guaranteed parental leave, and clocks are banned from the office walls so that employees will work without regard to the time. In the book’s final section, the contributors examine how time can have different meanings for men and women. Cynthia Fuchs Epstein points out that professional women and stay-at-home fathers face social disapproval for spending too much time on activities that do not conform to socially prescribed gender roles—men are mocked by coworkers for taking paternity leave, while working mothers are chastised for leaving their children to the care of others. Fighting for Time challenges assumptions about the relationship between time and work, revealing that time is a fluid concept that derives its importance from cultural attitudes, social psychological processes, and the exercise of power. Its insight will be of interest to sociologists, economists, social psychologists, business leaders, and anyone interested in the work-life balance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610441872

Chapter 11 Border Crossings: from: Fighting For Time
Author(s) Epstein Cynthia Fuchs
Abstract: How do we account for the constraints faced by women and men who wish to move beyond the boundaries of their traditional sex and gender roles in contemporary society? Despite the opportunities for change made possible by advocates for equality, liberating technological advances, and changes in the law, women find it difficult to move upward through glass ceilings and men find it difficult to moderate time commitments at work to take on childcare responsibilities in the home. Ideologies and institutionalized practices in the workplace and the community form obstacles to breaking down boundaries. Among them are time ideologies and the

Book Title: After Parsons-A Theory of Social Action for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Rather than simply celebrating Parsons and his accomplishments, the contributors to After Parsonsrethink and reformulate his ideas to place them on more solid foundations, extend their scope, and strengthen their empirical insights.After Parsonsconstitutes the work of a distinguished roster of American and European sociologists who find Parsons' theory of action a valuable resource for addressing contemporary issues in sociological theory. All of the essays in this volume take elements of Parsons' theory and critique, adapt, refine, or extend them to gain fresh purchase on problems that confront sociologists today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610442152

Introduction from: After Parsons
Author(s) Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: From the 1930s to the mid-1960s, Talcott Parsons was the leading contributor to the development of sociological theory, in the United States and internationally. More than any other contemporary figure, he shaped the conceptual schemes used in research, the bodies of theory taught to students, and thinking about the issues requiring investigation at the frontiers of sociological knowledge. In some dozen books and hundreds of essays, he elaborated an unfolding theoretical system that not only had a far-reaching, formative influence on sociological thought and research but also extended to other social sciences, including economics, political science, anthropology, psychology, and psychoanalysis.

Chapter 3 Social Order as Communication: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Wenzel Harald
Abstract: Although one might be sceptical of Talcott Parsons’s research program for social theory, there is much less doubt in viewing his solution of the so-called Hobbesian problem of social order as a turning point in the development of sociological thought. In providing proof of the thesis that the main representatives of sociological thought in Europe converged on a solution for this problem, Parsons (1937/1968) did two things. First, he built upon the classical phase of sociological theory to bring it to a remarkable completion, and second, he established the foundation for the dominance of a normatively oriented functionalism in American

Chapter 5 Contradictions in the Societal Community: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Alexander Jeffrey C.
Abstract: Within the strongly empiricist framework of American social science, there is very little acknowledgment of the nonempirical, theoretically driven dimension of scientific change. Yet the major developments in social science do not emerge primarily from simple accumulation of empirical knowledge or from proving previous theories false. They grow from confrontations with other, hegemonic theories. These confrontations, which are often intense and highly emotional, may take the form of critical experiments that crystallize and operationalize more general commitments, but they usually also present themselves as more general, less empirical arguments about theoretical logic itself.

Chapter 12 From Amherst to Heidelberg: from: After Parsons
Author(s) Camic Charles
Abstract: The purpose of the chapter is threefold. The first is methodological: to call attention to the reductionist manner in which interpreters of Talcott Parsons typically connect the events of his life with the content of his ideas and to urge, instead, a more developmental—or life-course—approach. The second goal is to furnish a partial illustration of this approach through a brief intellectual-historical examination of the early phases in the development on Parsons’s concept of culture. I take culture as the focus because, although it is one of the central concepts throughout Parsons’s work, not only have Parsons scholars misunderstood

Chapter 13 Parsons and the Human Condition from: After Parsons
Author(s) Tiryakian Edward A.
Abstract: “A Paradigm of the Human Condition” is an eighty-one-page essay that concludes the last volume of essays published by Talcott Parsons in his lifetime, Action Theory and the Human Condition(1978b).¹ One of the longest of the essays he published and the capstone of his theorizing ventures in the course of seven decades, it is also one of the least recognized and cited. This may stem from its complexity and the heterogeneity of its ingredients, or perhaps because the central theme smacks too much of “philosophy,” which most sociological training leaves us unprepared to tackle. In any case, “A Paradigm

Chapter 14 What Do American Bioethics and Médecins Sans Frontières Have in Common? from: After Parsons
Author(s) Fox Renée C.
Abstract: During the past ten years I have been involved in two major research projects. One of them is a study of the emergence of the young field of bioethics in the United States—its origins, ethos, and progressive institutionalization, and its civic as well as medical import in American society.¹ The other is a still-ongoing examination of medical humanitarian and human rights witnessing action—its underlying ideology and value commitments, the moral dilemmas it entails, and its (unintended as well as intended) consequences. This is being done chiefly through the medium of a sociological case study of Médecins Sans Frontières

Introduction from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) Nowak Stefan
Abstract: In autumn 1982, Stefan Nowak and David Featherman planned, within the broader framework of the program of cooperation in the social sciences between the Polish Academy of Sciences and the American Council of Learned Societies and with encouragement from the International Research and Exchanges Board (IREX), a series of Polish-American conferences in sociology. The general methodological theme of the conferences was intended to be the qualitative-quantitative chasm in sociology, with the aim of helping to bridge that chasm, both in theory and in research. The first conference was to be on social theory, to be held in the United States

How Sociological Theory Lost Its Central Issue and What Can Be Done About It from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) LINDENBERG SIEGWART
Abstract: The first thesis is: There are virtually no current issues in sociological theory relevant to sociology as an empirical science right now.

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Jack Goldstone:Lindenberg reminds us again of the demise of sociological theory and predicts its disappearance. Failure of classical mechanics to explain the atom didn’t mean the end of physics. It seems that as long as phenomena exist that require explanation, sociology is not going to disappear regardless of how many consensuses break down, regardless of how many theories turn out to be failures. I’d like to know why you think that inequality, social change, and revolution will cease to be problems that will draw sociological analysis.

Three Sociological Traditions: from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) COLLINS RANDALL
Abstract: Robert Bierstedt, in his lucidly written American Sociological Theory(1981), comments that Durkheim, Weber, and Marx were known by American sociologists before 1940 but not especially adulated. They were just three names among many who made up the history of the field, and not among the most important or interesting. We see the same thing in Pitirirn Sorokin’sContemporary Sociological Theories,published in 1928. Here Durkheim, Marx, and Weber get a few pages, but relatively superficial ones, and far less space than that devoted to Le Play, Pareto, or Otto Ammon.

The Development of Scholasticism from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) STINCHCOMBE ARTHUR L.
Abstract: My general argument is that the development of sociology as a discipline led us systematically away from the study of humans acting in society. The higher the prestige of a piece of sociological work, the fewer people in it are sweaty, laughing, ugly or pretty, dull at parties, or have warts on their noses. Field work is the lowest status in methodology, because surprising humans keep popping out and bewildering us by doing things we do not understand; much better to have people answering closedended questions so that they fall neatly into cross-classifications to be analyzed by loglinear methods. Similarly,

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) COLLINS RANDALL
Abstract: If we go back to the 1920s, we find philosophies of knowledge which for the most part exempted science from the realm of explanation. The first people who pushed into a sociology of science were Marxists in the 1930s: J. D. Bernal in England, Bernard Stern on this side of the Atlantic, and others who had rather strong ideological concerns about why science should not be exempt from being seen as part of a social system and hence molded to social purposes. This line of analysis largely disappeared for some time, but not without leaving a residue, and not without

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Other papers in this conference deal with social dynamics. Ecological theories posit selection mechanisms that quickly get translated into change, and rational choice theories posit some

The Ecology of Organizations: from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) FREEMAN JOHN
Abstract: In sociology, ecological theory has been applied primarily in the study of communities (territorially based social systems). However, ecological reasoning has also played an important role in many kinds of macrosociology (although the ideas are seldom called “ecological”). This paper considers issues

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ALDRICH HOWARD
Abstract: I want to emphasize a point that Hannan and Freeman have made about the paradigm shift their work represents. In 1974, at the International Sociological Association meetings in Toronto, Hannan and Freeman presented a paper called “The Population Ecology of Organizations.” Things haven’t been the same since that time! They pointed out the very high death rate of organizations compared with what the literature in the 1960s would have led us to expect. For a representative cross section of organizations, the death rate is about one in ten per year, and for new organizations it is over one in two

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Peter Blau:The logic of what you say is very intriguing because it provides a new perspective. But there seem to be a couple of problems. One theorem says that inertia increases survival chance. But is inertia itself not an adaptation? How do you distinguish the theory of adaptation and the theory of selection?

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) KITSUSE JOHN
Abstract: Having noted this theoretical solidarity, I would like to comment on some of the issues Gusfield touches upon in his characterization of what he refers to as “interpretive sociology.” It may be helpful to frame these comments with a quotation from Richard Zaner, a philosopher of the phenomenological persuasion. He says,

Language Structure and Social Structure from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) LABOV WILLIAM
Abstract: The past three decades have witnessed a great deal of scholarly activity under the label of “sociolinguistics.”¹ Yet the barrier between sociology and linguistics remains as firm as ever. In their studies of speech communities, linguists have as often as not tried to create their own sociology, with curious results; and a vanishingly small number of sociologists have made use of the tools of linguistic analysis.² On the sociological side, this is not too severe a limitation. A great deal of important work has been done in the sociology of language where the data take the form “X speaks language

Comment from: Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) GRIMSHAW ALLEN
Abstract: William Labov has used a background which includes training in both “autonomous linguistics” and sociological methods and theory to contribute to our understanding of core issues in both disciplines. His past work has included both macro studies of phenomena of stratification (and mobility) and linguistic and social change; much of this research has employed analyses of results of extensive surveys of phonological production. He has also done micro studies of social interactional processes and rules; this research has attended to a variety of features of speech (phonological, syntactic, prosodic) in “comprehensive discourses analyses.” Labov started his paper by observing that

General Discussion from: Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: James Coleman:I want to reinforce a point that Michael Hechter made, because it seems to me so important, given you are the author of this piece. It has to do with the logic of collective action. Consider the sentence in your paper: “The only way a distributional coalition can retain its value over several generations is by restricting the children of members of marriages with one another or by disinheriting a large number of the children.” Or, “endogamy, which is necessary” to the guild’s continuation.” You are treating collectivities as actors. In other words, you have engaged in exactly

Book Title: Promises of 1968-Crisis, Illusion and Utopia
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): TISMANEANU VLADIMIR
Abstract: This book is a state of the art reassessment of the significance and consequences of the events associated with the year 1968 in Europe and in North America. Since 1998, there hasn’t been any collective, comparative and interdisciplinary effort to discuss 1968 in the light of both contemporary headways of scholarship and new evidence on this historical period. A significant departure from earlier approaches lies in the fact that the manuscript is constructed in unitary fashion, as it goes beyond the East–West divide, trying to identify the common features of the sixties. The latter are analyzed as simultaneously global and local developments. The main problems addressed by the contributors of this volume are: the sixties as a generational clash; the redefinition of the political as a consequence of the ideological challenges posed to the status-quo by the sixty-eighters; the role of Utopia and the de-radicalization of intellectuals; the challenges to imperialism (Soviet/American); the cultural revolution of the sixties; the crisis of ‘really existing socialism’ and the failure of “socialism with a human face”; the gradual departure from the Yalta-system; the development of a culture of human rights and the project of a global civil society; the situation of 1968 within the general evolution of European history (esp. the relationship of 1968 with 1989). In contrast to existing books, the book provides a fundamental and unique synthesis of approaches on 1968: first, it contains critical (vs. nostalgic) re-evaluations of the events from the part of significant sixty-eighters; second, it includes historical analyses based on new archival research; third, it gathers important theoretical re-assessments of the intellectual history of the 1968; and fourth, it bridges 1968 with its aftermath and its pre-history, thus avoiding an over-contextualization of the topics in question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1281xt

Introduction from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Tismaneanu Vladimir
Abstract: The events of 1968 radically influenced the social, political, and cultural landscape of the post-1945 world. In the context of the Cold War, 1968 was a transnational moment of revolt against the status quo beyond the east-West divide.¹ it represented a turning point in world history that brought about a sweeping axiological reassessment of politics.² More than ten years ago, the editors of a collective volume about 1968 stated that “the memories of witnesses to the events of this annus mirabilis are still fragmentary and colored by partisanship, personal injury and defeat, or nostalgia for a heroic time, whereas historians

1968 Romania: from: Promises of 1968
Author(s) Vasile Critsian
Abstract: My paper examines the relationship between Romanian intellectuals and Ceauşescu’s regime, with a particular emphasis on the late 1960s.It explores some of the reasons for the absence of a solid reform movement oriented towards a dissident Marxism, and capable of defying the neo-stalinist tendencies of the Romanian Communist Party (RCP) power-holders. With this purpose in mind, I will also analyze the 1968 political and ideological actions of some important figures of the romanian intelligentsia.

Book Title: Bones of Contention-The living archive of Vasil Levski and the making of Bulgaria's national hero
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski (1837–1873), arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adding surprising new forms. The monograph is a historical study, taking as its narrative focus the life, death and posthumous fate of Levski. By exploring the vicissitudes of his heroicization, glorification, appropriations, reinterpretation, commemoration and, finally, canonization, it seeks to engage in several broad theoretical debates, and provide the basis for subsequent regional comparative research. The analysis of Levski's consecutive and simultaneous appropriations by different social platforms, political parties, secular and religious institutions, ideologies, professional groups, and individuals, demonstrates how boundaries within the framework of the nation are negotiated around accepted national symbols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt128245

INTRODUCTION from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: This book is about documenting and analyzing the living archive around the figure of Vasil Levski, arguably the major and only uncontested hero of the Bulgarian national pantheon. In the course of working on the problem, it became clear that this cannot be a finite task. The processes described, although with a chronological depth of almost two centuries, are still very much in the making, and the living archive expands not only in size but constantly adds surprising new forms. While archives continue to occupy an almost sacral place both in the public imagination (as the repositories of truth) as

[Part I Introduction] from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: It was in late December 1985 when my old friend Diana Gergova called me over the phone, and asked to meet her urgently. We had been inseparable since the 1960s in high school, and later as history students at the University of Sofia. At the time of the call, I was associate professor of Balkan history at the University of Sofia, and Diana was a research fellow at the Archeological Institute at the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences. She acted also as party secretary of the institute.¹ She immediately came to the point: my father, at that moment acting as vice

2. From Breach to Crisis from: Bones of Contention
Abstract: It was only 23 years after the excavations, in 1979, that a journal article appeared which revived Giaurov’s thesis. 78What was remarkable was that one of the authors was a direct participant and witness of the excavations—Sava Bobchev. Bobchev, an architect and research associate of the Archeological Institute, had been commissioned in 1956 to be the deputy of Mikhailov, and specifically charged with completing the architectural sketches of the excavations. Immediately following this publication, and in the same vein of reasoning, was a newspaper article inPulsauthored by a legal historian, a historian of the Revival Period, and

CHAPTER 2 The Rule of the Bulgarian Agrarian National Union and the “Worker-Peasant Alliance” from: Debating the Past
Abstract: More has been written on the Bulgarian Agrarian National Union ( Bulgarski zemedelski naroden suyuz, henceforth the Agrarian Union or simply Agrarians) than on any other party except for the Communist Party. This interest is no coincidence, even if the motives remain hidden. The Agrarian Union was a mass party with the broadest social base in Bulgaria, and it sought, successfully, to represent the peasants. It was a “world view” (ideological) party with its own distinctive and very radical ideas about politics, the economy, and society in general, different both from classical liberal democracy and communist ideology. It ruled Bulgaria on

CHAPTER 4 September Ninth, “People’s Democracy” and Socialism from: Debating the Past
Abstract: This essay traces the evolution of the views on the communist takeover in Bulgaria (September 9, 1944), the “people’s democracy” (1944–1948), and socialism for the duration of the regime and after its fall. The communist regime shaped and strictly controlled knowledge about itself, its genesis, and its past. The regime’s ideologically distorted self-image is of interest to historiography as an extreme case in which historical knowledge is subject to direct politicization and ideologization in legitimating power. At first sight, notions about the past would seem to be fixed once and for all. But precisely because knowledge of the past

Conclusion from: Debating the Past
Abstract: In what follows, I will review the concepts of “objectivity” and “truth” in Bulgarian historical scholarship on the basis of my historiographical research and observations. As will be seen, there is a great difference between theoretical-methodological statements and historiographical practice. However, my purpose is not to blame the presumably “objective” historiography for “lack of objectivity” (especially since I do not believe in this ideal), but to see how things stand on particular issues of the “objectivity and truth” complex. Hence the account is somewhat fragmented. The question will also be posed: why were there, until recently, no relativizations of the

13. Within (and Without) the “Stem Cell” of Socialist Society from: Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kirilova Anny
Abstract: Adoption is a sore subject, much discussed and debated in present-day Bulgaria. Under socialism, it was a state policy, not subject to public deliberation. Until a decade ago, the ethnological interpretation of adoption was limited to traditional societal norms and perceptions. It was my personal involvement in this process, as well as the lack of serious sociological studies on the socialist period, that engaged my scholarly interest to the topic.

Promotion of a Usable Past: from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Brandenberger David
Abstract: For much of the Soviet period, party authorities endorsed a single, mobilizational view of USSR history that was supported not only by academia and the censor, but by official mass culture, public educational institutions, and state textbook publishing. Indeed, it was not until the fall of the Soviet Union in 1991 that the society’s traditional reliance on an “official line” and a handful of prescribed textbooks gave way to a much looser system in which a variety of ideologically diverse titles could vie with one another within a newly competitive public school textbook market. The curricular diversity of this new

Coming to Terms with Catholic-Jewish Relations in the Polish Catholic Church from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Connelly John
Abstract: In this chapter I wish to propose an unusual, almost revolutionary approach to studying Catholic-Jewish relations in Poland: namely to treat the Polish Catholic Church as a theological institution, that is, a place producing ideas about religion, in particular, ideas about Jews. A central theme in these relations is of course hostility, yet it has been notoriously difficult to specify the relation between religiously based hostility and modern anti-semitism, the sort that led to the Holocaust. The Holocaust’s planners after all considered themselves anti-Christian. They regarded Christianity as a Jewish faith and they tried to weaken the Catholic Church as

After Communism: from: Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Donskis Leonidas
Abstract: Eastern European countries seem locked mentally somewhere between the discovery of the intrinsic logic of capitalism characteristic of the nineteenth century and the post-Weimar Republic period. This is a period characterized by an incredibly fast economic growth and a passionate advocacy of the values of free enterprise and capitalism, accompanied by a good deal of anomie, fission of the body social, stark social contrasts, shocking degrees of corruption, a culture of poverty (to recall Oscar Lewis’s term which refers to low trust, self-victimization, disbelief in social ties and networks, contempt for institutions, and so on), and cynicism.

Chapter Two ORTHODOXY AND SERBIAN NATIONAL IDENTITY “BLESSED IS THE NATION THAT PROFESSES ONE AND THE SAME FAITH.” from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: In untangling this complicated subject it will be helpful to resort to a simplified schema, founded upon the following point of departure: that religion—Serbian Orthodoxy, in this particular context—defines man and his place in the universe. In order to function effectively, it is essential that a person or group have a precisely focused and systematically conceived definition of its environment and of itself. Such a definition of the system and the cosmos to which it is related is a conception of identity. Orthodoxy can be understood only as an integrated system of thought, logically sound and epistemologically valid,

Chapter Five THE PURSUIT OF “SACRIFICIAL” SALVATION from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: When applied to explicit or implicit (cognitive) statements about the “placement” of man in his environment, human rational faculties are often inadequate in the decipherment and revelation of an esoteric content. Humanity’s integrative roots with the universe and the creation of a graspable consciousness, as a means of orientation in time and/or space (in the concrete, but also in the dimension of ontological reality) embrace the totality of the past with the help of symbols, rituals, ceremonies and myths. A community could not regard itself as truly constituted until a sacred beginning is ascribed to it and an inseparable, “invisible

Conclusion from: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: George Seferis’ Mythistorema—the colloquial meaning of the title is novel—connotes to the components of istoria—both history and tale—as an expression with some coherence of the circumstances that are independent of the reader—as the characters in a novel—andmythos, a certain mythology, clearly alluded to in the thematical substance of the verse. Beyond the etymological binary of a “heading”, Seferis’ work gradually reveals to its audience his enduring inspiration from the past, in the collective recollection of creation, war or destruction and as a personal reminder of loss and exile. The emergent image is seemingly

CHAPTER 4 The Muslim Canon from Late Antiquity to the Era of Modernism from: Times of History
Abstract: By referring to the Muslim Canon in Late Antiquity and the Middle Ages, it is my intention to underline the specific character of the perspective I wish to cast in this essay upon the Koran and the canonical texts that complement it. It is primarily an historical perspective, insensitive to the mythological accounts one normally encounters with respect to the histories of significant events and times—historical events, often construed as born virtually complete and pristine.

CHAPTER 8 Monotheistic Monarchy from: Times of History
Abstract: I should like to state at the very beginning my conviction that sacral kingship, in its variety of forms and representations one of which is monotheistic kingship, might in anthropological terms be regarded an Elementary Form of socio-political life: not an autonomous elementary form, but one falling under the category of rulership, of sovereignty in the sense given to the term by Georges Dumézil, without this necessarily entailing the adoption of his trifunctional model which Le Goff saw to be eminently fitting for medieval Europe. Like all other Elementary Forms for the representation of human sociality, this is one of

Chapter Five FRONTIERS OF (IN)SANITY from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: The stories examined in this chapter consist of a peculiar kind of monologues. Their halting, fragmented narratives are shaped into a vortex—rather than a stream—of consciousness. Semicoherent storytelling, rife with nonchronological associative leaps of thought, reflects the nonlinear nature of traumatic memory involved in creating such vortices.

CONCLUSION from: Where Currents Meet
Abstract: This study has examined how, in “a culture increasingly dominated by space and spatial logic,”¹ contemporary Ukrainian writers of the younger generation—doubletake writers—work their characters into a traumatized cultural landscape. In such a landscape, the language of categories and coordinates is subverted in favor of blurriness, uncertainty, and the supernatural. I call this cohort the doubletake generation, in reference to their coming of age at the time of the Soviet Union’s collapse. Upon reaching adulthood, they revisit the intense historical experience that coincided with their childhood or adolescence—a time when external changes fuse with internal ones, and

SAINTLY AND SYMPATHETIC MAGIC IN THE LORE OF THE JEWS OF CARPATHO-RUSSIA BETWEEN THE TWO WORLD WARS from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) ROSEN ILANA
Abstract: Jews have lived in Carpatho-Russia (or Sub-Carpathian Ruthenia, at present the western part of the Ukraine Republic) since the late medieval era (Jelinek 2003; Gutman 1990, 4, pp. 1472–73). They were as a rule Hasidic in a Galician fashion (Stransky 1971, p. 349), rural, and traditional. However, under the inter-war Czechoslovakian regime and its relatively liberal attitude towards the different national minorities of the region (Sole 1968, p. 134), this Jewry went through an ideological revolution regarding traditionality, due to the rise of the Zionist movement in the region (Sole 1971, pp. 401–439). As a result of the

MAGIC AS REFLECTED IN SLOVENIAN FOLK TRADITION AND POPULAR HEALING TODAY from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) KROPEJ MONIKA
Abstract: In Slovenia, folk traditions related to witchcraft are considerably rich and diverse. According to older sources, wizards and witches were mythological and demonic creatures just like the kresnik, the vedomec/benandanti, the lamija, the fairies, etc.; other sources, on the other hand, stress that ordinary people could attain witchcraft as a profession. On the basis of our data on Slovenian folk tradition, we may draw the general conclusion that magic was practiced mainly sympathetically, based on analogy, by the rule “pars pro toto,” through apotropaic rites with water, medicinal herbs and potions. Sorcerers mastered spells and knew how to conjure and

BALKAN DEMONS’ PROTECTING PLACES from: Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) PLOTNIKOVA ANNA
Abstract: My paper is about folk beliefs reflecting images of the so-called “lower mythology.” Among various types of demons belonging to this “lower mythology,” I will focus on demons protecting places because of their specific character in the ethnocultural traditions of the Balkans. The demons to be discussed have various names, features and functions, but their main characteristic is linked with their protecting role. I will apply typological methods, so the topic demons protecting places will be examined from linguistic (lexical), structural and functional aspects. The investigation is based on already published ethnographic sources as well as the field notes from

14. Eternity No More: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: On January 6, 1938, Walter Benjamin wrote to Max Horkheimer from San Remo to report on a remarkable development in his thinking about his Baudelaire studies and about the larger framework of the Passagenwerk, Benjamin’s decade-long historical research about nineteenth-century Paris, a project that he described as an Urgeschichte der Moderne (an archaic history of modernity). The occasion of this development was his encounter with a largely forgotten text by the famous insurrectionist Auguste Blanqui, entitled L’éternité par les astres (Eternity According to the Stars). This short book comprised a set of cosmological speculations written in prison by the old

15. A Microscope for Time: from: Given World and Time
Author(s) Clausberg Karl
Abstract: In today’s day and age, upheavals in human worlds of image and media are preferably traced back to technical achievements. The history of optical media—camera obscura, photography, the cinema, television, etc.—seems meanwhile firmly established as a prime example of such means of viewing. But how well do these perspectives of progress fit the “nature” of humankind, which has somehow struggled through the channels of anthropological predispositions, neurobiological influences, et al. to the peaks of civilization? Using a short and anonymously published text from the mid-nineteenth century by a Berlin lay-astronomer, whose considerable impact is suggestively illustrated in the

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.1998.103.issue-4
Date: 01 1998
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: This is a fully coauthored article. Earlier drafts were presented at the Paul F. Lazars‐feld Center for the Social Sciences at Columbia University, the Workshop on Politics, Power, and Protest at New York University, the Colloquium on Culture and Politics at the New School for Social Research, the meeting of the American Sociological Association at Los Angeles, and various seminars at the New School for Social Research and Princeton University. We would like to thank the participants in those forums for their many useful comments. We would also like to thank Jeffrey Alexander, Bernard Barber, Richard Bernstein, Donald Black, Mary Blair‐Loy, David Gibson, Chad Goldberg, Jeff Goodwin, Michael Hanagan, Hans Joas, Michele Lamont, Edward Lehman, Calvin Morrill, Michael Muhlhaus, Shepley Orr, Margarita Palacios, Mimi Sheller, Charles Tilly, Diane Vaughan, Loi'c Wacquant, and Harrison White for their many illuminating insights, criticisms, and suggestions. Direct correspondence to Mustafa Emirbayer, Department of Sociology, New School for Social Research, 65 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/231294

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2001.112.issue-1
Date: 10 2001
Author(s): Young, Jeffrey T.
Abstract: Young’s new book on Adam Smith provides a careful textual analysis of Smith’s two major works: The Theory of Moral SentimentsandThe Wealth of Nations. Young argues, with good textual evidence, that Smith did not divide economics from moral theory and that, indeed, Smith thought of economics as a moral science. Young traces Smith’s economic and moral philosophy to Aristotle and Hume, and he points out, correctly, that “self‐interest itself had a significant moral dimension in Smith” (p. 173). Thus Smith’s alleged focus on self‐interest inThe Wealth of Nationshas normative dimensions not always recognized by all Smith scholars. Young uses Smith’s notions of the impartial spectator and benevolence as well as his theory of justice to link the two texts. This is a controversial conclusion since neither the impartial spectator nor benevolence is evident as an important concept inThe Wealth of Nations. Young also argues that Smith divides the economic sphere from the political sphere (see his matrix on p. 158), a questionable conclusion in light of Smith’s focus on political economy inThe Wealth of Nations. Young’s book also suffers from his apparently not having read Amartya Sen’s or my works on Smith, both of which make many of the same arguments Young develops. Still, Young has added further to the growing literature that reads Smith as a serious moral philosopher whose theory of self‐interest is far from libertarian and who neither divided economics from ethics nor politics from either.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/322762

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2002.112.issue-2
Date: 01 2002
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: The necessity of both solidarity and proceduralism thus holds for both distributive and criminal justice. In the end, Ricoeur remains committed to notions that ground the just polity in community and mutual sharing without thinking that these notions require us to dispense with the formalism of procedures of justice. While the latter are not sufficient on their own to create or sustain a just society, while, indeed, formal procedures always presuppose some conception of the good, procedural conceptions allow us to recognize each other as subjects of rights. Although it is not always clear that Ricoeur succeeds in reconciling Rawls and Walzer or Habermas and Gadamer, he does provide a fresh perspective on current debates within his own interesting account of the structure of moral action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/324242

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2002.28.issue-4
Date: 06 2002
Author(s): Vidal Fernando
Abstract: For an illuminating discussion and critique, see Kathleen V. Wilkes, Real People: Personal Identity without Thought Experiments(Oxford, 1988), esp. chap. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/341240

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2003.108.issue-4
Date: 01 2003
Author(s): Lichterman Paul
Abstract: Of course, researchers routinely pursue some of these questions, through different methods of research. Part of our methodological contribution is to bring them together in the concept of group style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/367920

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2003.44.issue-3
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Duranti Alessandro
Abstract: Ahearn, always a perceptive writer, brings out a fear that many linguistic anthropologists have but rarely expressthe fear of being assimilated to sociocultural anthropology and thus losing their identity through the forfeiting of their specificity. This is the flip side of William Labovs original wish that sociolinguistics might disappear once linguistics agreed to see language as a social phenomenon (that this has not happened is both an indictment of linguistics narrowmindedness and a validation of Labovs and other sociolinguists efforts to develop sociolinguistics into a vibrant independent field). The question then arises why we should worry about being assimilated. Shouldnt we, on the contrary, welcome such a possibility, to be seen as a validation of our work or as the mainstreaming of our concerns? The problem is not in the future, which cannot be predicted, but in the past. Everything we know from our earlier experiences warns us that an anthropology without a distinct group of language specialists is likely to be an anthropology with a nave understanding of communication. We have seen it happen already. When anthropology departments decide not to have a linguistic subfield, thinking that they dont need one, their students tend to take language for granted, identifying it with a vague notion of discourse. It is for this reason that we need to sharpen our historical, theoretical, and methodological understanding of what it means to study language as culture. We owe it first to our students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/368118

Journal Title: The Quarterly Review of Biology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: qrb.2002.77.issue-4
Date: 12 2000
Author(s): DeBevoise M B
Abstract: In the course of the book, no real convergence is achieved; each one ends where he started, asserting his own beliefs, visions, and concerns. Has anything been gained in the process? The intense and occasionally pointed dialogues bring forth an incremental, but substantial clarification of the issues at hand, the issues at stake, and their potential (but not actual) interaction. The fact of the matter is that neuroscience has no privileged bearing on human affairs simply because it deals with the brain. Why push it to realms in which it does not belong?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/374515

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2003.29.issue-4
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Mialet Hélène
Abstract: I would like to thank the participants of seminars and colloquia at the Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (Berlin), at the Department of Science and Technology Studies at Cornell, and at the ST&S and History of Medicine Colloquia at the University of Michigan for their helpful comments on earlier versions of this paper. I would also like to thank Robin Boast, Stephen Hirschauer, Michael Lynch, Michael Wintroub, and Skuli Sigurdsson for their suggestions, comments, and criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/377721

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2004.45.issue-1
Date: 02 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Doctrine and method, theory and interpretation are not necessarily coordinate. Were such coordination possible, a metacritical stance would be required. By accepting uncritically the presuppositions that lie behind psychoanalytic metapsychology, Juillerat abrogates, in my view, ethnological responsibility, that is, the responsibility to measure in a receptive manner the presuppositions of ones hermeneutic against those of the culture one is studying. Though his attention to ethnographic detail leads Juillerat to refine psychoanalytic doctrine, it confirms the epistemological and hermeneutic assumptions of that doctrine (e.g., notions of the unconscious, id, ego, and superego, drives, repression, and, indeed, psychic space). Yafar myth and ritual as he presents them become allegories of that doctrineallegories, I would argue, of allegories. There would appear to be no escape, were it not for the Yafar voices that sound through Juillerats psychoanalytically predetermined presentations. (He offers us almost no contextualized verbatim texts in these essays, though he does in his monographs.) They remind us that, as LviStrauss demonstrated, myths are readily translated one into another, particularly when they are decontextualized. What is of ethnographic, indeed, psychoanalytic import is howand perhaps whytranslation is arrested and a particular myth (e.g., the Oedipal tale) becomes so authoritative that it has the power of promiscuous reduction. Though fascinated by the range of Yafar cultural expression, Juillerat fails to consider the implications of Yafars refusal to reduce their corpus of mythology and ritual to a single mytha singular ritual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/381011

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jbs.2005.44.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Seed John
Abstract: See Timothy Larsen, “Victorian Nonconformity and the Memory of the Ejected Ministers: The Impact of the Bicentennial Commemorations of 1862,” in The Church Retrospective: Papers Read at the 1995 Summer Meeting and 1996 Winter Meeting of the Ecclesiastical Society, ed. R. N. Swanson (Woodbridge, 1997), pp. 459–73. The centenary in 1762 was not apparently commemorated in any public way, though a few years later, 1688 was celebrated by Dissenters on a considerable scale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424945

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Marion Jean‐Luc
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, “Herméneutique de l’idée de Révélation,” in La Révélation, ed. Daniel Coppieters de Gibson (Bruxelles: Facultés universitaires Saint‐Louis, 1977), p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424974

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-3
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Marino John A.
Abstract: Braudel, The Mediterranean,2d ed. (1972), 2:1243–44. Among many references to Machiavelli, see, e.g., Machiavelli,The Prince,chap. xxv, beginning of last paragraph: “I conclude, then, that so long as Fortune varies and men stand still, they will prosper while they suit the times, and fail when they do not.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/425442

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2004.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Guillory John
Abstract: On the question of the relation between writing and media, which is perhaps thequestion of a larger inquiry beyond my own, I have benefited from exchanges with Alan Liu. See his “The Future Literary: Literature and the Culture of Information,” inTime and the Literary,ed. Karen Newman et al. (New York, 2002), pp. 61–100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427304

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: This idea of the deliberate recovery of theological tensions by crossing religious boundaries can be understood in terms of the ecumenical concept of the complementarity of conflicting doctrinal formulations. Opposing doctrinal formulations are regarded as complementary expressions of a theological truth so profound as to be irreducible to any single formulation. For the ecumenical use of the complementarity concept, see, e.g., Avery Dulles, “Paths to Doctrinal Agreement: Ten Theses,” Theological Studies47 (1986): 44–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427313

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-4
Date: 12 1997
Author(s): Woodall Christopher
Abstract: Scholars and their students interested in the field would do well to begin with these studies, despite some unevenness in period, place, and theme. Developments in the twentieth century, for example, are not well served, especially as their globalization bursts all traditional boundaries in the discipline, making a historical perspective essential to an understanding of ongoing transformations in literate life everywhere, not just in the West. Similarly, the absence of illustrations undermines the potential value of these books as introductions to the history of reading. Much of the work here depends on the material objects that readers actually had; without images of them, the reader develops less of a sense of the field. Finally, the exclusion of the essays on correspondence from the original collection is deeply regrettable; Chartier’s summary of their implications in the introduction hardly does justice to them, especially to the important study of the 1847 postal survey by Dauphin and two other colleagues. The translations are generally accurate, but the indexes are barely adequate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427573

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Robbins, Jeffrey W.
Abstract: While sharing the aim of relating philosophy and theology, I do not think the project is best accomplished by thinking ontotheologically (at least, not in its Heideggerian sense). What is needed is to insist on a sharper distinction between ontotheological philosophy and religious theology so that we can better understand how they might relate. And here again, I agree with Robbins for different reasons: Ricoeur, Lévinas, and Marion are key sources in this project, for their work maintains the distinction that it calls into question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428537

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Bourgeois, Patrick L.
Abstract: Ricoeur gets the relation of critique and reason right, in Bourgeois’s eyes, as a philosopher who sees imagination tied to thinking at the boundary (not limit) of reason. In a chapter examining Derrida’s views on “sign, time, and trace” (chap. 7), Bourgeois elaborates Derrida’s view that Edmund Husserl’s distinction between meaningful expression and sign depends on a stable borderline between primary and secondary memory (or retention and recollection) in his theory of “the living present” (or duration), which, Derrida asserts, is phenomenologically unavailable. In light of this analysis, Bourgeois draws an interesting contrast between Derrida’s insistence on a discrete closure of meaning and Ricoeur’s theory of language and imagination based in a view of the living present of meaning and experience that refuses such discrete closure. Once more, however, Bourgeois overreaches when he attempts to identify these accurately drawn contrasts with the limit/boundary distinction. In Bourgeois’s reading of Ricoeur, imagination does not produce reason from below (as in Heidegger); rather, “reason itself limits knowledge to experience from above, putting the imagination in a central position both in knowledge and thinking” (p. 131). A productive imagination of living metaphor takes place at the boundary of reason, allowing the living present in meaning and action to escape deconstruction’s critique while still incorporating a positive relation to alterity. Nevertheless, Bourgeois may be drawing the wrong conclusion about these contrasts, for it seems possible to read both Ricoeur and Derrida as seeking to work at the boundary (not limit) of reason and to think somehow the presentation of the Idea in the Kantian sense. Whereas Ricoeur’s theory of metaphor and narrative allows him to present the semantic content of the Ideas of Reason positively, these remain for Derrida (as for Kant) unrepresentable, or “the impossible.” This problem has been Derrida’s enduring concern since his 1962 Introduction to Husserl’s “The Origin of Geometry.”The real difference between the thought of Ricoeur and Derrida is the distinctive way each thinker supplements phenomenology to take into account the creativity of meaning at the boundary of reason. For Derrida, it is thedifféranceof deconstruction; for Ricoeur, the graft of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428538

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Mandry, Christof
Abstract: This is an engaging book for specialists in theological ethics and especially for those interested in the contributions of hermeneutical thinking to ethics. One can only hope that Mandry will continue to develop this line of reflection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/430555

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2005.75.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Jones Bonna
Abstract: Hence, our choice of philosophies should not be limited to the two main philosophies identified by Budd but rather could take up ideas from process thinking, which is a quieter but nevertheless relevant philosophy to which LIS should attend. By valuing the processes and articulating this with better abstractions more congruent with our action, we not only further our own project; we also sustain a vital engagement with the projects of individuals. We more clearly articulate the library in the life of the user, to use the words of Wiegand [ 2].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431329

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): Johar Schueller Malini
Abstract: However, Somerville often uses strategies very similar to Butler's in seeing the primacy of the sexual. See, e.g., the analysis of Jean Toomer based on the term queer(Somerville2000, 136) and the insistence that compulsory heterosexuality is “integral” to the logic of racial segregation (137).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431372

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Lee Hyo‐Dong
Abstract: For the notion of strategic essentialism, see Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography,” in her The Spivak Reader, 214–21. Serene Jones has drawn attention to the fact that the poststructuralist theoretical assumptions about the always oppressive nature of binarisms do not necessarily hold up under the pressures of concrete political struggles and that, in order to strengthen the bond of solidarity for a coalition of diverse social and cultural identities, what is called for is some kind of grand narrative that clearly defines the powers to be resisted and dismantled. I think this applies to a coalition of different religious identities as well. Serene Jones, “Cultural Labor and Theological Critique,” in Brown, Davaney, and Tanner, eds.,Converging on Culture, 166–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431810

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Maggi Armando
Abstract: 1 Cor. 13:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431811

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Young III William W.
Abstract: Frei recognized the need for greater plurality within his own reading as well, particularly with regard to the “Gospel narrative” set forth in The Identity of Jesus Christ. See Higton,Christ, Providence, and History, 200–201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431812

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.32.issue-2
Date: 01 2006
Author(s): Williams Jay
Abstract: Mitchell, “ Critical Inquiryand the Ideology of Pluralism,”Critical Inquiry8 (Summer 1982): 613.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500701

Journal Title: American Journal of Education
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: aje.2006.112.issue-3
Date: 05 2006
Author(s): Schweber Simone
Abstract: Brooks ( 2001) reported, for example, that a Pentecostal minister in Franklin County, the location symbolizing Red America in his article, “regards such culture warriors as Jerry Falwell and Pat Robertson as loose cannons.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500714

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): van der Ven Johannes A.
Abstract: Nevertheless, empiricism does not have the last word—it perhaps never has the last word, not even in what might be called “positivist empiricism,” and certainly not in practical theology, as this discipline is characterized by the interaction between empiricism and normativeness. We both share this conviction—the fifth characteristic. Therefore human rights—no matter how contested they are, which is neither surprising nor extraordinary—offer an important perspective, as the normative criteria they embody always require critical and constructive reflection. In the last part of the article I have even presented them as regulative principles of truth and justice, as a result of which they offer a kind of worldview‐related and morality‐related infrastructure for the social institutions that determine human actions in societal and personal life—the sixth characteristic. After all, for both Browning and me the ultimate issue is—the seventh characteristic—the vitality of the Christian tradition in terms of relevance and identity in the context of a multicivilization society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/503696

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-2
Date: 06 2006
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 260. It was only at the last stages of correction of this manuscript that I learned about the work of Nikolai Voukov on the destruction of Dimitrov's mausoleum. While I find it an excellent contribution, Voukov's take on the event and its meaning is somewhat different than my own. I would like to express my gratitude to the author for sending me his manuscript, whose shorter version was published as “The Destruction of Georgi Dimitrov's Mausoleum in Sofia: The ‘Incoincidence' between Memory and Its Referents,” in Places of Memory,ed. Augustin Ioan, special issue ofOctogon(Bucharest, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505801

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-4
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Whatever normative conclusions may be drawn in the end, theological ethicists ignore the unique situation of children and childhood at their own peril. Neglecting such marginalized groups as women and minorities weakened the voice of theological ethics in the past, both by silently playing into larger social wrongs and by failing to learn and grow from those silenced. Childhood in the United States and the world presents theological ethics today with a new and different but just as acute social challenge. Methodologically, since children cannot speak up as fully as can adults for themselves, theological ethicists should engage as deeply as possible with children’s actual social experiences, including through the sophisticated observational work of the human sciences, in order more creatively to understand and respond. Substantively, childhood demands at the very least renewed attention to the asymmetrical tensions of human moral responsibility, the senses in which others demand of those around them creative self‐transformation. This childist gesture of responsiveness and self‐critique has already begun to animate the human sciences. How much more, then, should it be welcomed and deepened further by Christian ethicists, who in one way or another trace a transformed world to the possibilities incarnated in an infant’s birth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505893

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: isis.2006.97.issue-2
Date: 06 2004.
Author(s): Kern Stephen
Abstract: Kern’s analysis is lucid and his thesis is ultimately persuasive. He argues that “the novel is emphatically historical in capturing a new sense of the complexity and uncertainty of causal understanding” as he traces the “sensitivity” of contemporary authors like Don DeLillo to “the significance of the new technologies of transportation, communication and investigation that transformed causal understanding in modern society” (p. 369). This is an observation with which many literary critics would agree. There are resemblances here to the methodology deployed by Ronald Thomas in his seminal and startlingly successful work Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science(Cambridge, 1999): narrative registers in its very construction the pressures of scientific and epistemological change. Yet a comparison with Thomas’s work reveals perhaps one of the few flaws of Kern’s study. IfA Cultural History of Causalityis directed toward the historian of science, one must question whether novels are ever really adequate source material for the construction of a hypothesis regarding nonfictional understandings of causality and probability. Paul Ricoeur reminds us inTime and Narrative(Chicago, 1984–1988) that literature has been seen since ancient times as “an ethical laboratory where the artist pursues through the mode of fiction experimentation with values” (Vol. 1, p. 59): fiction is thus both tethered to, yet at the same time distinct from, the world of the actual and the real. Kern acknowledges this to be so, yet his theory of mimesis, of realistic representation, seems to exclude any genuine engagement with tropes of playfulness, indeterminacy, symbolism, and ambiguity that mark literature just as deeply as any desire to replicate the real. Kern notes that he relies “primarily on novels by male authors about male murderers, because [his] method is comparative and requires controlling variables to focus on historical change” (p. 21). This seems to evade a broader question about the extent to which novels can be understood as “evidence” in any sense at all, or whether Kern should be focusing on trial reports rather than their fictionalized representations. This difficulty would be obviated if the focus of the work were an understanding of the impact of developments in scientific theory on narrative form, yet Kern seems reluctant to move fully in this direction. And indeed, if the ideal reader ofA Cultural History of Causalityis in fact a literary critic, he or she may be inclined to probe a number of Kern’s other assumptions as well—he is perhaps a little too inclined to assert that the Victorian novel is artistically “tidy,” that its patterns of closure are always neat and carefully wrought, as an expression of what Thomas Vargish has called “the providential aesthetic” in his study of the same name (Virginia, 1985). Scholars of nineteenth‐century fiction may perhaps feel that Kern’s descriptions of such neat closures sit uncomfortably with their readings ofBleak House(which is as much about the loss and destruction of evidence as it is about its recovery and careful explication) orOur Mutual FriendorDaniel DerondaorThe Brothers Karamazov(each of which problematizes our sense of a character’s relentless movement toward transgression, judgment, and punishment or acquittal). One is left with a sense that Kern occasionally deploys the term “Victorian” in a rather unsophisticated fashion: as Thomas has shown inDetective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science,even the most carefully crafted detective story of the nineteenth century can raise for readers and critics crucial questions about individual and national identity and the power of public surveillance. Yet these criticisms should not undermine a reader’s sense of Kern’s achievement in this book: it is a vast, ambitious attempt to effect a synthesis of scientific thought and literary experimentation, and on the whole it succeeds well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/507355

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 508383
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: In this respect, my project has similarities with the “multidimensional hermeneutic” approach to religious ethical inquiry proposed by William Schweiker in “On the Future of Religious Ethics: Keeping Religious Ethics, Religious and Ethics,” Journal of the American Academy of Religion74, no. 1 (March 2006): 135–51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/508386

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.33.issue-1
Date: 09 2006
Abstract: Young, Paul. The Cinema Dreams Its Rivals: Media Fantasy Films from Radio to the Internet.Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2006. 284 pp. $74.95 (cloth); $24.95 (paper).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/509752

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522257
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In a first reading of the book, I was critical of this emphasis on moral motivations, since it seemed to be overburdened by a psychological approach. But, on a second reading, I had to refrain from my critique. Ricoeur makes the point that he has no intention to “take the place of a resolution for the perplexities raised by the very concept of a struggle, still less of a resolution of the conflicts” (218). In other words, Ricoeur is proposing a well‐needed complement to the institutional design trend that has invaded contemporary political philosophy. Contrary to many, he stands before the most perplexing issue of recognition with eyes wide open: indeed, demands of recognition may never end and take the form of an “unhappy consciousness” (218). One can try to resolve this potential inflation of claims by sorting out political and substantive issues. But a solution that takes only this path could create vast areas of frustration that canny elites have learned to fuel, or come to neglect recognition claims on the grounds that they hide a Pandora's box waiting to be opened. I suspect that this neglect mechanism is one of the reasons why so many legitimate recognition claims still languish in limbo as we speak. The course taken by Ricoeur may be difficult to square with the mainstream approach in contemporary political philosophy—political liberalism, to name it—but it nonetheless deserves careful attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/510704

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2006.76.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Three general features of this method can be noted in advance. First, this method must be immanent or internal to its subject matter. Dialectical theorists reject outright the idea that the thinker can occupy some privileged Archimedean point outside the subject of investigation. … A second feature of dialectical method is its dialogical character. Theorizing is an activity taking place not simply within the mind but between minds. Thinking is dialogical because it always takes the form of an exchange or a conversation between ourselves, our contemporaries, and our predecessors. … Third, the dialogical element is related to the historical dimension of theory. [ 40, pp. 167–68]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511140

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-4
Date: 12 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: Instructive as his book is, Popkin could also have explored in greater depth yet the relationship between historical scholarship and expressions of the self. By focusing on autobiographies alone, he misses an opportunity to examine how such texts and scholarly publications related to (and possibly affected) one another, most notably in their divergent or convergent patterns of self‐representation. The boundary between autobiographical and scholarly writings may be more porous than Popkin intimates. Paul Hollander’s recent study of academic acknowledgments arrives, for instance, at conclusions that mirror Popkin’s regarding self‐representation and professional norms (“Acknowledgments: An Academic Ritual,” Academic Questions15, no. 1 [2001–2]: 63–76). Likewise, one could question why Popkin limited himself to the discursive analysis of published sources and “the motives that historian‐autobiographers acknowledge in their texts” (78). Autobiographies are also social practices that call for systematic research outside the text, in archival and published sources (and, perhaps, interviews as well). But Popkin is too good a historian not to know this. His book is by and about historians; it is dedicated to historians, but it is not only for historians. Its chief objective may well be to show how much the historian’s autobiography has contributed “to the literature of personal life writing” (8). In this respect as in many others,History, Historians, and Autobiographyis a success.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511206

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2007.33.issue-2
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: See Derrida, Passions(Paris, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511505

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509553
Date: 04 2007
Author(s): Wall, John
Abstract: Wall has skillfully woven the exegetical, dialogical, and constructive parts of his project into a thought‐provoking and readable work. Moral Creativitycould be profitably read by anyone familiar with contemporary debates in religious and philosophical ethics. It will both broaden the appeal of Ricoeur’s writings and advance the conversation about the relation of ethics to poetics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513233

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522064
Date: 03 2007
Author(s): Harootunian Harry
Abstract: I had the benefit of reading versions of this paper at a number of institutions, and I wish to record the help I received at the University of Chicago, the University of Michigan, the New School for Social Research, Waseda University (Tokyo), and the University of Washington. I also want to thank Kristin Ross, Carol Gluck, and Hyun Ok Park for commenting on earlier revisions of the manuscript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513523

Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ssr.1999.73.issue-4
Date: 12 1999
Author(s): Kondrat Mary Ellen
Abstract: Professional self‐awareness is widely considered a necessary condition for competent social work practice. Alternate prescriptions for self‐awareness rely implicitly on varying definitions of what it means to be a “self” and what it means to be “aware.” I will review three approaches to professional self‐awareness conventionally adopted in the literature: ( a) simple conscious awareness (awareness of whatever is being experienced), (b) reflective awareness (awareness of a self who is experiencing something), and (c) reflexive awareness (the self's awareness of how his or her awareness is constituted in direct experience). Strengths and limitations of these three epistemological approaches are discussed. An alternate framework, based on Anthony Giddens's “structuration theory,” is developed and advanced as a more macro‐level and less exclusively psychological understanding of practitioner self‐awareness. The article concludes with illustrations from practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/514441

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: Bloom, American Religion, 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519770

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Hacker, “Distinctive Features,” 95 and passim; Michael A. Sells, Mystical Languages of Unsaying(Chicago, 1994), 1–13, esp. 12. Note that Hacker acknowledges that Śaṅkara’s discourse on brahman is all the more alive (lebendiger) for its terminological imprecision (“Distinctive Features,” 95).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519771

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509554
Date: 07 2007
Author(s): Browning, Don S.
Abstract: While this book will be of great interest to Christian ethicists as well as to religious and moral educators, it should also be read by social scientists, philosophers, and evolutionary psychologists. Browning’s view that nontheological disciplines depend on images of the human that play a guiding role for their research, as well as for the interpretation of their results, points to the continued need for more interdisciplinary work. According to this point of view, theology should play a public role in identifying such prescientific or preempirical images as well as in describing and advancing refined and responsible images based on the Christian tradition. The present volume goes a long way in either direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519893

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 518276
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Plate Liedeke
Abstract: My encounter with this student suggests another way of thinking about the political value of rewriting. Countering all the more blasé signals my students were giving me that it was most naive to think the retelling of stories from another point of view could have any political impact, it is evidence that women’s rewritings of classic texts can still affect young women, still make them think and make them want to contribute to the discussions, the debates that shape the public sphere. Although we need, of course, to factor in serendipity—the student was on holiday and thought she had discovered a little‐known book when in fact it was a New York Timesbest seller—there is definitely a sense in which her discovery marked a moment in her life and signals the development of a feminist consciousness (broadly defined as a certain awareness of gender identity combined with a critical position in respect to misogyny and patriarchy and a conviction that things can be changed). There is no denying that increasing individualization at all levels of society has caused the loss of a sense of collective action and political projects. This is equally true for ideas of improvement, emancipation, and modernization, the responsibility of which has largely been shifted to the individual, whose “human rights,” as Bauman argues, are redefined as “the right of individuals to stay different and to pick and choose at will their own models of happiness and fitting life‐style” (2000;2005, 29). In this deregulated and privatized sociopolitical context that knows no common cause, re‐vision can only fail to formulate enabling fictions for a better future for all. Yet in its capacity to speak to individuals, it can still draw them into visions of community and collectivity. Re‐vision may thus not be the lifeline that is to haul us out of patriarchy any more, but as a structure of address that engages readers into contemplating differences, it remains one of the ways in which we keep sane and critical and thinking, moved by the stories of long‐forgotten lives into participating in an open public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/521054

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527832
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Scimeca Ross
Abstract: In this article, we have argued that the application of library practice requires a suspension of truth. We support this by introducing a new theory of truth that is rooted in historicism. One of the overarching missions of library practice is to acquire, manage, preserve, and make accessible human knowledge. While there are pragmatic and sociopolitical considerations that often constrict fulfillment of this mission, the public purpose of librarianship in a free and open society nonetheless dictates that materials be made accessible regardless of what the society at the current time or the majority of people within a culturally defined place consider as true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/523909

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Dolan Anne
Abstract: [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00090]] Reviews of Books and Films and their learning. The academic career of one Galway student, H. Fitzwalter Kirker, is traced in its entirety, but only in a footnote. The reader gets at least something approximating a lifeline in the piece by McBride on the young reader and the teaching and learning of Irish history. That "young people are by nature curious" (p. 114), however, seems an inade- quate point on which to hang a conclusion. The book is at its strongest in the essays by Jose Lanters and Gregory Castle, which focus on the work of T. W. Rolleston and Standish O'Grady, respectively. Both historians are examined in the context of their contemporaries; both essays actually attempt to fulfill the claims they make for themselves in their opening pages. The same cannot be said, however, for Eileen Reilly's piece on J. A. Froude. Its bland rehearsal of his life is punctuated with references to his visits to Ireland and quotations from some of his more offen- sive diatribes on the Irish people. She offers little or no comment on the bigotry that billowed forth from his pen. For example, one is told of Froude's dislike for Daniel O'Connell but not the reason why. Novick's piece on the military education of the Irish Volunteers begins with an interesting description, but it is rather disappointing thereafter. Although the material is fascinating, the author's conclusions are not. At one point, he deduces that "The pattern of military education seen in the Irish Volunteer and the Workers' Republic lends weight to the idea of the Rising as blood sacrifice, since the key strategist, Joseph Plunkett, never wrote military columns for the Irish Volunteer" (p. 198). At no point does it occur to Novick that the rebels might not have printed their plans in the paper because letting the authorities in Dublin Castle know in advance was not really part of the plan. How useful, indeed, is an examination of the Irish Volunteer's role in the training of the rebels when even the author concedes that details of training on urban insurrection were "left to the writers of the Workers' Republic" (p. 210); when the author gives approximately nine lines of consideration to what he adjudges to be the more important source? Through- out there is little sense of the eye of Dublin Castle watching over what was published and curtailing what could be written. This is a worthy but a frustrating book. There is a lot of value in each essay in terms of the material that is brought to light, but there is also the crushing weight of the artificial framework under which the essays are forced to labor. Like Froude, it is perhaps this book's "portion in life to please no one faction" (p. 140). ANNE DOLAN Trinity College Dublin [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00100]] COLIN NEWBURY. Patrons, Clients, and Empire: Chief- taincy and Over-Rule in Asia, Africa, and the Pacific. New York: Oxford University Press. 2003. Pp. xii, 328. $72.00. It is a brave historian nowadays who admits that his or her current academic preoccupations began in the 1950s, but an unrepentant Colin Newbury tells us that imperial history at Oxford University is peculiarly marked by continuity. He says that literary theory has dominated the study of discourse for too long (al- though presumably not at Oxford), and it is time to get back to the study of political discourse using the time-honored model of patron-client relations. Drawing on his extensive knowledge of African and Pacific imperial history, with the addition of material on South and Southeast Asia, Newbury presents a well researched and cogently argued case for the persis- tence of precolonial clientage networks in certain British and French colonies. Patron-client modeling was refined by social scientists in the 1960s and 1970s, when it became a useful way of explaining why inde- pendence had brought relatively little change to the administrative systems of former colonies. That polit- ical and economic relations in some colonies can be analyzed effectively using this theory is clear; whether the exercise speaks to wider debates about empire is another question. The omission of colonies of settle- ment, along with almost all of the Portuguese, Dutch, and German empires, weakens the case considerably. Newbury draws on a wide, although extremely selec- tive, range of secondary literature to supplement his own research, wisely conceding that authors may not like the use he makes of their material. He feels no need to address the epistemological and methodolog- ical concerns raised by authors whose work he mines for empirical detail. He excludes pioneering cross- disciplinary studies, such as Jean and John Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution (1991) and Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism's Culture: Anthropology, Travel and Government (1994), which have done so much to shape current debates in postcolonial anthropology. Newbury calls for more interaction between social scientists and historians, but he does surprisingly little to encourage it. If patron-client brokerage really is the best model, Newbury should be able to tackle other theories with confidence, demonstrating their inade- quacies through constructive engagement. Instead he revives battles won long ago, such as the critique of "collaboration" and "indirect rule" analysis. There are still some historians who work with these terms, but far more interesting is the much larger number of scholars tackling more recent debates. This book's contribution to imperial historiography is therefore difficult to assess. Newbury hopes that it will help to determine whether imperial rule suc- ceeded or failed "in 'preparing' [its colonies] for the exigencies and responsibilities of devolved govern- ment" (p. viii). One wonders whether this is still a pressing question, however. It has been a long time since independence for many of the countries Newbury discusses. Scholars posing broader questions about colonialism's legacy will wonder about the cost of Newbury's ruthlessly exclusive approach. While dis- cussing the influence of indigenous networks, Newbury AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 472 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00100]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530342

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587009
Date: February 2002
Author(s): Bender Thomas
Abstract: [[START 02P0009T]] Review Essay Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History THOMAS BENDER [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] OVER THE PAST QUARTER CENTURY, a new American history has been written.1 This rewriting of American history has often been associated with the "triumph" of social history within the discipline, but in fact the transformation is much broader than that: the domain of the historical has been vastly extended, inherited narratives displaced, new subjects and narratives introduced. While at the monographic level, one sees similar developments in various national historiographies, national synthesis-and the idea of a national synthesis- seems to have been less troubled elsewhere than in the field of U.S. history. Admittedly, generalization is risky, especially if one reaches into historiographies with which one is barely familiar. Still, I think that a variety of outstanding national histories (or histories of a people sometimes treated as nations) have been more confident of established narrative strategies. With the exception of the historians of France that I will note, historians of other modern nations seem to have had fewer doubts about the basic framing of a narrative synthesis, and they have not felt compelled to develop new approaches, even though in many cases the other work of the authors involved has been strikingly innovative.2 Yet the social, intellectual, and political developments that have complicated American historiography are likely, I suspect, to make themselves felt in other national historiographies fairly soon, a point recently made by Jacques Revel, a leading French historian.3 And that circumstance may spawn a generation of controversy about the politics and strategies of synthesis. If so, the American case may be of more general import and interest. Beginning in the 1940s, intellectual history became the synthesizing subfield in U.S. history. reDlacing the political-economic narratives of Frederick Jackson [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] I wish to thank the editors of the AHR, first, for inviting me to consider the issues in this essay, second, for the helpful comments of Acting Editor Jeffrey Wasserstrom, and, third, for the quite stimulating commentary of several anonymous reviewers. 1 See Eric Foner, ed., The New American History (Philadelphia, 1990); Foner, ed., The New American History, rev. and expanded edn. (Philadelphia, 1997). 2 I have in mind Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Jonathan D. Spence, The Search for Modem China (New York, 1990); Albert Hourani, A History of the Arab Peoples (Cambridge, Mass., 1991); Paul Ginsborg, A History of Contemporary Italy (Harmond- sworth, Eng., 1990); Theodore Zeldin, France, 1848-1945, 2 vols. (Oxford, 1979); Fernand Braudel, The Identity of France, Sian Reynolds, trans., 2 vols. (New York, 1988-90); Andre Burguiere and Jacques Revel, eds., Histoire de la France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1989-2000). 3 Jacques Revel, "Le fandeau de la memoire," paper presented at the conference "International- izing the Study of American History," Florence, Italy, July 5, 1999. Paper in possession of author. 129 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 130 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Turner and Charles A. Beard.4 But during the 1970s, the claims being made for a national mind or culture were challenged by social historians. Intellectual history was chastened and transformed by the confrontation with social history. Eschewing their former embrace of synthesis, intellectual historians pulled back to study more precisely defined themes and thinkers.5 Not only intellectual history but other subfields accommodated social history's provocation to rethink conventional gen- eralizations. In addition, a professional, even "social-scientific," concern for precision and specificity of reference collaborated-sometimes with forethought, often not-with a sharpened awareness of difference and conflict that came from social movements outside the academy to undermine older composite narratives. Neither the frame supplied by Charles and Mary Beard in The Rise of American Civilization (1927), with its dramatic narrative of conflict between the "people" and the "interests," nor the consensual pluralism that succeeded that interpretation in the 1950s survived.6 If the consensus historians underplayed conflict, the Beards' approach, for all of its sympathy for the dispossessed, was found to be inadequate as well. Their narrative revealed little feel for the diversity of Americans, and it paid scant attention to non-whites. Most important of all, while their narrative voice was sympathetic, one did not discover the quotidian life or hear the voices of those groups that have found voice in more recent historiography. Judged by newer historiographical expectations, The Rise of American Civilization seemed "thin," compared with the increasingly popular "thick" description that was built, in part, on the enormously influential anthropological work of Clifford Geertz.7 In the past quarter century, there has been a proliferation of exciting new research, much of it bringing previously overlooked or explicitly excluded groups and events into the light of history. The number and variety of American stories multiplied. Suddenly, there were histories where there had been none or where the available histories had not been attended to by professional historians: histories of African Americans in the era of slavery and beyond; of Native Americans; of workers at home in their communities, at work, and at play; of women at home and outside of the home and of gender relations more generally; of consumption as well as production; of ethnic minorities and "borderlands"; of popular culture and other "marginal" forms of cultural production; of objects and material culture; of whites and whiteness as historical subjects; of non-state international and intercultural relations; and much more. [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 4Frederick Jackson Turner never completed a major synthesis, but one can see how he might have done that work in his posthumously published The United States, 1830-1850 (New York, 1935); Charles A. Beard and Mary R. Beard, The Rise of American Civilization (1927; 2 volumes in 1, New York, 1930).. In fact, the Beards participated in this shift with the publication of The American Spirit: A Study of the Idea of Civilization in the United States (New York, 1942). 5 For an early anticipation of this development-from the point of view of intellectual history-see Lawrence Veysey, "Intellectual History and the New Social History," in Paul K. Conkin and John Higham, eds., New Directions in American Intellectual History (Baltimore, Md., 1979), 3-26. See also, in the same volume, David A. Hollinger, "Historians and the Discourse of Intellectuals," 42-63; and Thomas Bender, "The Cultures of Intellectual Life: The City and the Professions," 181-95. 6 For consensus history as synthesis, see especially Daniel J. Boorstin, The Americans, 3 vols. (New York, 1958-73); Louis Hartz, The Liberal Tradition in America: An Interpretation of American Political Thought since the Revolution (New York, 1955). 7 On the Beards and newer social histories, see Thomas Bender, "The New History-Then and Now," Reviews in American History 12 (1984): 612-22. For Clifford Geertz, see The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays (New York, 1973). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 131 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] By the early 1980s, some commentators inside and outside the profession were wondering whether an American history had disappeared in the onslaught of highly particular studies, often about subgroups in the larger society of the United States. These developments were occurring at a moment when the number of American historians was expanding to an unprecedented degree. Disciplinary expansion both allowed and prompted increased specialization. And that worried some, who began to speak of hyperspecialization and fragmentation. The structure of specialization derived in large part from the impact of a social history that often fused the group-based particularity of focus with ideological commitments to class and identity-based social movements. This pattern of work discouraged the integration of particular histories into some kind of synthesis.8 Traditionalists, perhaps not surprisingly, were unnerved by these develop- ments.9 But even some proponents of the newer history worried. Early on, Herbert G. Gutman, one of the leading figures in the movement to write a history that included all Americans and that recognized differences-class, ethnic, racial, gender-was concerned that instead of enriching and enlarging the usable history of the United States, the new scholarship was failing to do that, perhaps making it in fact less usable. The "new social history," he wrote in the introduction to his collection of pioneering essays in the field, "suffers from a very limiting overspe- cialization." Take an Irish-born Catholic female textile worker and union organizer in Fall River involved in a disorderly strike in 1875. She might be the subject of nearly a dozen sub-specializations, which would, he feared, "wash out the wholeness that is essential to understanding human behavior."10 Later, in the wake of a national meeting of writers at which historians and history seemed to be largely ignored in discussions of the political and cultural situation in the aftermath of Richard Nixon, Gutman mused aloud in the pages of The Nation over whether the failure of historians to incorporate social history's findings into a new synthesis had seriously diminished, even evacuated, history's possible contribution to public debate."1 In the mid-1980s, in what turned out to be a controversial pair of articles, I raised a related question: how might one construct the (to my mind) needed synthesis of recent historiography on the United States.12 There was considerable negative reaction to those articles, coming from two different positions. One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 8 For an insightful and quite worrisome examination of recent scholarly practice and its trajectory, see Winfried Fluck, "The Modernity of America and the Practice of Scholarship," in Thomas Bender, ed., Rethinking American History in a Global Age (Berkeley, Calif., 2002). 9 See, for example, Gertrude Himmelfarb, The New History and the Old (Cambridge, Mass., 1987). This volume includes essays published by Himmelfarb between 1975 and 1984. 10 Herbert G. Gutman, Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays in American Working-Class and Social History (New York, 1976), xii-xiii. Bernard Bailyn, who did not share Gutman's political or historiographical agenda, raised similar issues a few years later in his presidential address to the American Historical Association. Bailyn, "The Challenge of Modern Historiography," AHR 87 (February 1982): 1-24. 11 Herbert G. Gutman, "The Missing Synthesis: Whatever Happened to History," The Nation, November 21, 1981. See also, in a similar spirit, Eric Foner, "History in Crisis," Commonweal (December 18, 1981): 723-26. 12 Thomas Bender, "Making History Whole Again," New York Times Book Review (October 6, 1985): 1, 42-43; Bender, "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History 73 (1986): 120-36. See also the earlier and less commented on essay, Bender, "New History." AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 132 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] position worried about its critique of specialization and its call for addressing a larger public. These arguments were equated with a carelessness about scholarly rigor.13 The other, and more widespread position, focused on the risks of a national narrative itself. It was evidently feared that such a narrative would, by definition, re-exclude those groups and themes that had so recently been brought under the umbrella of history and would re-inscribe a "master narrative" dominated by white, elite males.14 By the end of the 1980s, however, the question of synthesis had become less controversial. The issue became more practical, more professional in some sense: how to do it and how to do it within the parameters of inclusion that had been central to the discussion from the beginning. It was on this note that Alice Kessler-Harris, the author of the chapter on social history in The New American History (1990 edition), addressed the question. In the last section of her essay, with the section title of "The Problem of Synthesis," she acknowledged the problem and explored various possible ways to overcome "fragmentation" and move toward synthesis.15 A different issue emerged in the 1990s. Poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, sometimes broadly and even more vaguely characterized as postmodernism, was and is suspicious of any aspiration toward a comprehensive narrative. It is to this body of theory that we owe the commonplace use and misuse of the epithet "master narrative."16 These theories have been rather slow to penetrate workaday historical practice among American historians. Levels and types of awareness of them vary: from shocked indignation at the whole idea, to vague awareness and thoughtless dismissal, to intellectual fascination largely in isolation from the making of one's own histories. In his recent book, Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (1995), Robert Berkhofer seeks to force more attention to these issues. Insistently, but not always consistently, he urges historians to recognize the dimensions of the postmodern crisis that surrounds them. He seems more interested in sounding the alarm about the quicksand before us than in guiding us [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 13 Eric H. Monkkonen, "The Dangers of Synthesis," AHR 91 (December 1986): 1146-57. 14 See the Round Table articles, Nell Irvin Painter, "Bias and Synthesis in History," Journal of American History 74 (June 1987): 109-12; Richard Wightman Fox, "Public Culture and the Problem of Synthesis," 113-16; Roy Rosenzweig, "What Is the Matter with History?" 117-22; and for my response, Thomas Bender, "Wholes and Parts: Continuing the Conversation," 123-30. For a more recent and more broadly argued critique, see Randolph Roth, "Is There a Democratic Alternative to Republi- canism? The Rhetoric and Politics of Recent Pleas for Synthesis," in Jeffrey Cox and Shelton Stromquist, eds., Contesting the Master Narrative: Essays in Social History (Iowa City, Iowa, 1998), 210-56. 15 Alice Kessler-Harris, "Social History," in Foner, New American History, 177-80. The closing chapters of Peter Novick's very influential social history of the profession worries this issue as well. Peter Novick, That Noble Dream: The "Objectivity Question" and the American Historical Profession (Cambridge, 1988), chaps. 14-16. The most recent public discussion is David Oshinsky, "The Humpty Dumpty of Scholarship: American History Has Broken in Pieces, Can It Be Put Together Again?" New York Times, August 26, 2000. 16 See Allen Megill, "Fragmentation and the Future of Historiography," AHR 96 (June 1991): 693-98. For a more general but very rich survey, see Dorothy Ross, "Grand Narrative in American Historical Writing: From Romance to Uncertainty," AHR 100 (June 1995): 651-77. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 133 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] around it or safely through. But either way, he intends to challenge the very possibility of narrative synthesis.17 While these worries, proposals, and polemics were being fashioned, the daily work of historians proceeded. Among the products of that work have been a good number of explicitly synthetic volumes. There is, of course, no clear or settled notion of what defines a work of synthesis. I have used a rather generous definition. Some of the books I am calling synthetic might alternatively be designated as monographs-archivally based but exceptionally ambitious books that tackle big questions and seek to frame a large field or to provide an interpretation for an audience well beyond specialists. Others are more obviously synthetic, relying heavily on secondary literature to establish the state of the art in a broad field for a wide audience, including, often, students and the general public. With this diversity of form, purpose, and audience in mind-as well as a concern for a reasonable distribution of fields and periods-I have, with the help of the editors of the American Historical Review, selected a few recent synthetic works for examina- tion.18 The very existence of these books mutes the question of whether we need synthetic works or whether, under the constraints of present historiographical practice, synthesis is possible. In fact, the seeming proliferation of syntheses at present-and their variousness-suggests that the field of American history is at a formative (or reformative) moment that invites synthesis: the quest for new understandings that has undermined established narratives has now, perhaps, prompted new efforts at crystallizing a very unstable body of historical writing into new syntheses. A different question, however, provides the focus of this essay. What strategies for narrative synthesis are available to historians today? How might we think about the relation between a particular structure of narrative synthesis and the author's purpose or interpretation? How do these different strategies relate to current historiography? What particular work do they do, within the profession and beyond it? And finally I want to ask some questions about the firmness of the boundaries (mostly geographical) that define what is and is not captured in synthetic narratives of U.S. history. These works do not, of course, cover the whole field of synthetic works. More and other books could have been chosen, but these eleven books (and several others mentioned along the way) at least represent different kinds of history, different [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 17 Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (Cambridge, Mass., 1995). See the "Forum" on the book in the American Quarterly: Michael C. Coleman, "Gut Reactions of a Historian to a Missionary Tract," American Quarterly 50 (June 1998): 340-48; Saul Cornell, "Moving Beyond the Great Story: Post Modern Possibilities, Postmodern Problems," 349-57; Betsy Erkkila, "Critical History," 358-64; and Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., "Self-Reflections on Beyond the Great Story: The Ambivalent Author as Ironic Interlocutor," 365-75. See especially the exceptionally insightful and critical review essay by Thomas L. Haskell, "Farewell to Fallibilism: Robert Berkhofer's Beyond the Great Story and the Allure of the Postmodern," History and Theory 37 (October 1998): 347-69. 18 None, incidentally though importantly, present themselves as synthetic narratives of the nation, although some to be discussed below certainly reach toward that in practical effect, particularly those authored by Eric Foner (The Story of American Freedom) and by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher (TheAmerican West). In fact, I have recommended each to non-historians asking for a literate one-volume history of the United States. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 134 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] periods, and different themes. Together, the eleven total nearly 6,000 pages of outstanding historical writing. If nothing else, I can conclude that synthetic narrative invites long books. Because I cannot claim special knowledge in any of the fields being synthesized in these books, I do not propose to do the kind of analysis one would find in specialized reviews. Such criticisms that I have will be framed from the position of my interest in synthetic narrative. I say that in part to be honest about my own limitations in appraising these books but also for another, more positive reason. I want to insist that narrative synthesis is a form of knowledge, indeed, a particularly powerful form of creating, not simply summarizing, knowledge. I hope to get past or under the story enough to probe the implications of different modes of structuring a narrative synthesis. The way different narrative strategies construct that knowledge is important. While inclusion is one of the tests our generation will rightly ask of synthesis, there are other important historiographical issues that are embedded in the question of narrative synthesis.19 The more seriously we consider possible narratives of American history, the more we may be prepared to ask questions that press beyond inclusion. We may even be both bold enough and hopeful enough to worry a little about the language of inclusion, if not the principle. Is there perhaps more than a hint of dominant culture noblesse oblige in the language of inclusion? Might not a more sophisticated notion of the temporal and geographical boundaries of American history, including an awareness of the diasporic stories within American history, complicate and enrich the notion of inclusion?20 Can the historical and historiographical terrain be opened a bit more in a way that enables a deeper, denser, and more complex historiographical exploration of justice and difference at the center of American history? Might democracy be the word, the concept, the commitment that will move us in that direction? As I examine the stack of books before me, I propose to keep these issues in mind and to return to them at the end of this essay. JON BUTLER'S Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (2000) covers the whole mainland British colonial space and history, and it addresses a wide range of themes. In fact, themes, not time or chronology, organize his story. His brief, often one-word, chapter titles reveal a very distinctive type of synthesis, one immediately accessible to the reader, whether professional or lay: Peoples, Economy, Politics, Things Material, Things Spiritual. It is a reasonable progression, and in each case he brings together a good deal of material. Although his theme is transformation, Butler also claims (following recent historiography) a more inclusive geography, making more of the middle colonies than would have been the case a generation ago. In some ways, his manner of organizing the material topically bears a relation to [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 19 I do not propose to go into theories of narrative or even my own notions, but I will here indicate that my understanding has been greatly influenced by the work of Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer, trans., 3 vols. (Chicago, 1984-88). 20 Such thinking is not restricted to specialists in the profession exploring the theme of diaspora. The novelist Russell Banks has recently argued that the focus for a synthesis of American history ought to be the African diaspora. See "The Star-Spangled Novel," Los Angeles Times, July 2, 2000. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 135 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Richard Hofstadter's posthumously published America at 1750: A Social Portrait (1971).21 But what might have worked for Hofstadter, who was setting the scene for a three-volume narrative history of the United States, works less well for the purposes Butler has in his book. If Hofstadter's book was intended to provide a snapshot that would serve as a starting point, Butler's title ("Becoming America") and his stated intentions announce change as his theme. He means to persuade the reader of a broad pattern of transformation that produced a distinctive and modern society in advance of 1776 and that in turn spawned the first modern revolution. Such an argument demands more complex and careful attention to process and cause than his framing of the book seems to allow. While he has surely gathered together a considerable body of material (his notes run to fifty pages), he has not produced a synthetic narrative of change over time, one that sketches a develop- mental sequence that integrates disparate elements in the interest of a causal interpretation. By bounding each unit of synthesis, Butler is stuck with a structural isolation of topics that undercuts narrative explanation. Given that Butler's theme is transformation, this narrative structure is crippling. For reasons related to structure and style of argument, Butler's claims for American modernity are quite vulnerable. While there are doubtless some specific ways in which the British North American colonies became "modern" before independence, they were not uniformly modern-over space or in all aspects of life. Many historians would readily grant numerous anticipations of modernity by the middle of the eighteenth century, but few would insist, with Butler, that so much modernity had been achieved so soon, implying that only a few pre-modern anomalies remained on the eve of revolution.22 Most give a significant role to the revolution.23 But the most serious problem is not with the phenomena he notices or does not notice, even if there is some real unevenness on this point. Rather, it is Butler's teleology of the modern, combined with his exceedingly loose, elusive, and, as is so often said today, undertheorized definition of modernity. Add to this an unneces- sary but apparently irresistible tendency to claim American uniqueness and "firsts" for nearly everything he identifies as modern in America. He names a number of phenomena that he considers evidences of the modern-polyglot, slaves, cities, market economy, refined crafts and trades, religious pluralism, and "sophisticated politics." Without further historical specification and theoretical precision, one can indulge in reductio ad absurdum. With the exception of religious pluralism, all of these qualities probably described Athens in the age of Aristotle at least as well as the British colonies. In fact, I suspect that Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, relying on their recent book The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (2000), would argue that the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 21 Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750: A Social Portrait (New York, 1971). 22 Jon Butler, Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (Cambridge, Mass., 2000), 1. 23 See, for example, Gordon S. Wood, The Radicalism of the American Revolution (New York, 1992). Long before, Bernard Bailyn suggested certain developments that Butler would consider modern had developed in the eighteenth century, but he emphasized the unevenness and even paradoxical character of this proto-modernity. See "Political Experience and Enlightenment Ideas in Eighteenth-Century America," AHR 67 (January 1962): 339-51; and Bailyn, The Origins of American Politics (New York, 1968). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 136 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Atlantic world provides a better example of modernity on those terms than does the colonial mainland.24 He makes many claims for American distinctiveness. In the end, however, it is diversity, which he tends to equate with multiculturalism, that for Butler makes Americans modern. But if we look around, we cannot but wonder about his claims for a uniquely polyglot society. This assertion may be quite vulnerable from any sight line approaching a global perspective. Can he fairly claim that New York City harbored a level of diversity "never before gathered together"?25 Might not this be as plausibly said of Constantinople during the period covered by Butler's book? And did not the Ottoman Empire-of which Constantinople was the capital-far exceed the religious and ethnic diversity of the British colonies? My point here is partly one of fact, of care in making comparative statements without comparison. More important, however, are the criteria of the modern. Few, if any, major political bodies in the past half millennium more successfully accommodated diversity than the Ottomans, yet that achievement has never brought them recognition for a precocious modernity. One needs greater defini- tional and descriptive specificity to make the argument he claims. Because of the breadth and generality of synthetic narratives, it is especially important to be clear about key concepts. Similarly, he tends to claim the realization of "Americanness"-here equated with some vague notion of modernity-for events that, however interesting in themselves, hardly sustain his assertion that they designated "the American future."26 For example, writing of the French Huguenots, a group he knows well, he notes their assimilation, and he calls this "American."27 Well, of course it is, but so are the endogenous marriages that continue for various groups well into the twentieth century-sometimes because of racial difference and even legislation (as in the case of African Americans) or out of choice, as in the case of Scandinavians in the upper Midwest. Or to take a more ominous subject, it seems a bit fatalistic to say that colonial encroachment on Indian land "predicted" nineteenth-century relations with the Indians.28 Oddly, such a claim, while taking the moral high ground, nonetheless erases the postcolonial history of the United States by denying contingency and thus diminishing both the capacity and moral responsibility of all later actors or potential actors. The twin and linked teleologies of "modern" and "American" produce a distorting and de-historicizing synthesis. If there is a problem with the sort of synthesis Butler has written, what precisely is it? He makes historical claims about patterns and meanings of development on the basis of a narrative structure that effectively isolates and de-historicizes his themes. By not constructing a developmental narrative that integrates the various themes now separated in distinct chapters, the process and complexity of develop- ment is obscured. While his chapters are full of relevant and interesting details of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 24 Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (Boston, 2000). 25 Butler, Becoming America, 9. 26 Butler, Becoming America, 36. 27 Butler, Becoming America, 22. One of Butler's previous books is The Huguenots in America: A Refugee People in a New World Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1983). 28 Butler, Becoming America, 68. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 137 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] everyday life, they never get integrated in any individual, institution, or place. In the absence of a narrative of change to explain and interpret, he resorts for a theme to repeated assertions of "modernity." The issue is not so much the claim for an eighteenth-century American modernity-although I am myself drawn to much more complex, nuanced, and contradictory discussions of that theme-as it is the incapacity of the particular model of synthesis he deploys to advance that theme or argument. Philip D. Morgan's Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (1998) is at once similar to Butler's and quite different. Both focus tightly in each chapter on a particular topic or theme; there is little play among the different themes in both cases. While Butler's themes propose a reorganization of material, thus giving an impression of freshness, Morgan's quite important questions are phrased in well-established ways. While Butler's structure works against his theme of transformation, Morgan's similar structure better fits his goals for the book, partly because transformation plays a smaller role in his analysis than one might expect. Slave Counterpoint addresses nearly all the issues raised by a half century of vigorous scholarship on the beginnings of slavery, the practices of racial slavery as a labor and social system, and the nature of African-American culture in early America. It is a book of enviable learning: with a seeming total command of the historiography and an impressive knowledge of a substantial archival base, Morgan proceeds to pose (or re-pose) difficult historiographical issues. Again and again, he offers compelling answers. Want to know what scholarship has disclosed about slavery and African-American culture in the eighteenth-century Chesapeake and Lowcountry? Look to Morgan's synthesis of a generation of scholarship. To have done that is to have done a great deal, and he has done it magnificently. Yet one gets the sense of a summary volume, a volume driven by the past, by past questions. Synthesis can either cap a phase of scholarship or initiate another. I think Morgan's book falls into the former category, while Ira Berlin's new book, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (1998), which also relies on a generation of scholarship and addresses many of the same issues, has the potential to become a new starting point. Berlin has captured the shift to an Atlantic perspective that has increasingly characterized scholarship by early modern Europeanists, Africanists, Latin Americanists, and historians of British North America. In this sense, his work, at least the early parts that sketch out and populate the Atlantic littoral, points forward.29 In a dramatic opening section, Berlin, relying more on secondary literatures than does Morgan, locates his story in very broad understandings of time (periodization) and space (the Atlantic world), the dimensions of which are shadowy, almost invisible, in Morgan's account. He locates Africans in an Atlantic history connecting four continents and in a rich and growing historiography reaching out from Europe, Africa, Latin America, and North America.30 One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 29 Ira Berlin, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (Cambridge, Mass., 1998). 30 Berlin's powerful evocation of the Atlantic builds on many predecessors. At minimum, mention should be made of Philip D. Curtin's The Atlantic Slave Trade: A Census (Madison, Wis., 1969); and The AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 138 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] wishes Berlin had sustained this perspective in the later sections. But even if he narrows the story to the territory that later became the United States and loses the multiple histories implied by his portrait of the Atlantic world, the beginnings of stories, whether novels or histories, are heavy with intention and implication that can, I hope, be built upon.31 In fact, the four Atlantic continents remain an always changing aspect of American and African histories. Attending to, or at least recognizing, that larger and continuing extended terrain of American history would enrich the story of the making of African Americans and America, a historiography that is at present too much captured by an implicit and too simple assimilation or "Americanization" model. Nonetheless, Berlin has provided a powerful image of the creation of the Atlantic world and of the origin of modern slavery within it. Morgan has a quite different strategy. His domain is not the Atlantic but the South, or two regions of the South, which he is anxious to reveal as differentiated. Thus his is a comparative history, comparing two regions within the South. Suggesting a certain scientific aspiration, he refers to his delimited space as a kind of laboratory, a site for an "indirect experiment."32 This approach offers him much. He is able to focus tightly on his questions and generally achieves sharply phrased answers. Yet, like any good scientific laboratory, his field of inquiry is almost hermetically sealed. A two-hundred-page part of the book titled "The Black World" begins with a fifteen-page section on "Africans." Yet it is in only one paragraph at the beginning and a few other scattered references that one reads anything about Africa. His story rarely strays east (or south or north or west) of the Maryland/ Virginia and South Carolina boundaries. His comparative method has impressive rigor. Yet one senses that not only does his approach trap him within a particular place, he is also caught within a very confining net woven from the existing historiography. As Walter Johnson pointed out in a review of the book in this journal, his questions are smaller than the stories he has unearthed.33 Much like another important book on African-American history, Herbert G. Gutman's The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom (1976), this book, for all its synthetic aspirations, cannot capture some of its best material within the tightly bounded historiographical questions and issues that frame it.34 As in the case of Berlin's book, Morgan's is quite explicit about time and space. There is a well-thought-out chronology of change, and one of his major arguments is that the South, and thus the black as well as white experience, was not uniform over space. He shows real and important distinctions between the experience of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex (New York, 1990; 2d edn., 1998); and John K. Thornton's Africa and Africans in the Making of the Atlantic World, 1400-1680 (New York, 1992; 2d edn., 1400-1800, 1998). 31 On the importance of beginnings, see Edward W. Said, Beginnings: Intention and Method (Baltimore, Md., 1975). 32 Philip D. Morgan, Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1998), xvii. 33 Walter Johnson, review of Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, AHR 105 (October 2000): 1295-97, esp. 1297. 34 See Herbert G. Gutman, The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom, 1750-1925 (New York, 1976), which loses more than it gains by focusing so tightly on refuting the assumptions of the Moynihan Report. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 139 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] slavery in the Chesapeake and in the Lowcountry. Yet by treating both the temporal and spatial aspects of the story as sites (and very limited ones) rather than as processes of historical making, he weakens the capacity of his local analyses to explain change over time and, to a lesser extent, space. His major explanatory claims appear in the introduction. They are not only brief but also separate from the rich stories he tells and the analyses he makes of historiographical questions.35 The expansiveness of Many Thousands Gone, by contrast, evokes a strong sense of change, of process. It achieves a narrative synthesis of the movement of Africans onto the Atlantic and into the Western hemisphere. The difference between this approach and the tightly controlled analysis crafted by Morgan is striking. Like Morgan's, Michael Schudson's book, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (1998), is organized around fairly established questions- especially one big question. Has American civic life deteriorated over the course of the past three centuries? Naturally, the question is of a different order than those driving Morgan's analysis. It has not been generated by disciplinary scholarship. It arose out of American public life. Schudson thus draws on history and other disciplines to address directly a public question, one endlessly repeated today and, as he shows, in the past. Schudson himself, we should note, is not a historian. He was trained as a sociologist, and he teaches in a Department of Communication. While he reveals an impressive command of the relevant historiography, historians are not his primary reference group or audience.36 Although I am sure specialists will find some of his formulations to be of considerable historiographical significance and likely to encourage new lines of research, his intention, again, is different: his audience is a general one, and he seeks to bring historical knowledge to bear on a civic issue. What he is doing points toward the most important work that one kind of successful narrative synthesis can do, for the profession and for the public. By openly declaring his address to a public issue and for a public audience, Schudson participates in a very important tradition of historical writing. Some of the very best professional historians of the United States in this century have done precisely that: Frederick Jackson Turner, W. E. B. Du Bois, Charles Beard, and Richard Hofstadter all focused on issues, worries, or preoccupations of fairly general interest to write synthetic works that importantly rephrased fundamental themes in American history. This mutual enrichment of public and professional discourse is perhaps the ideal cultural work of narrative synthesis. Let us hope that historians can do this more often and more effectively. Yet as I make this point, I realize that all of the historians just named, including Schudson himself, were either trained as social scientists or did not recognize a significant boundary between history and the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 35Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, xv-xxiv. I should note that my concerns about boundary setting in Morgan's book do not apply nearly so much to Philip D. Morgan, "The Black Experience in the British Empire, 1680-1810," in The Oxford History of the British Empire, Vol. 2: The Eighteenth Century, P. J. Marshall, ed. (Oxford, 1998), 465-86. 36 This command is at once impressive and sometimes puzzling. In discussing the Founding and the Constitution, he does not mention Gordon Wood's The Creation of the American Republic, 1776-1787 (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1969). Nor, in writing about the first decades of the nineteenth century, does he mention either of two key books by Robert H. Wiebe, The Opening of American Society: From the Adoption of the Constitution to the Eve of Disunion (New York, 1984); and Self-Rule: A Cultural History of American Democracy (Chicago, 1995). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 140 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] (other?) once more expansive social sciences. Is this a mere coincidence, or is it an issue to be addressed by the profession? While I would not place Schudson's book in the same class as the scholarship produced by the short list of great historians, he has written a fine book. It is a book about change over time, and he establishes three eras of citizenship and participa- tion, each clearly defined. He does not devote much attention to how each configuration changes into the next, but he effectively characterizes their differ- ences, even in some very brief summaries, as in the following paragraph from early in the book: Another way to characterize the past three hundred years of political change is to say that the type of authority by which society is governed shifted from personal authority (gentlemen) to interpersonal authority (parties, coalitions, and majorities), to impersonal authority (science, expertise, legal rights, and information) ... The geographical center of politics has shifted from the countryside to the cities to the suburbs and perhaps, today, to "technoburbs," "postsuburbs," or "edge cities," or whatever we name our newer habitations. Correspondingly, the kind of knowledge a good citizen requires has changed: in an age of gentlemen, the citizen's relatively rare entrances into public discussion or controversy could be guided by his knowledge of social position; in the era of rule by majorities, the citizen's voting could be led by the enthusiasm and rhetoric of parties and their most active partisans; in the era of expertise and bureaucracies, the citizens had increasingly to learn to trust their own canvass of newspapers, interest groups, parties, and other sources of knowledge, only occasionally supported by the immediacy of human contact; and in the emerging age of rights, citizens learn to catalog what entitlements they may have and what forms of victimization they may knowingly or unknowingly have experienced.37 This paragraph reveals the argument and the narrative strategy that Schudson uses to undercut the widespread notion of civic decline: rather than a story of decline, it is one of restructuring, one that recalibrates citizenship and civic practice in relation to changing values and social experiences. What some, including me, see as the erosion of our public life and the thinning of American political culture, he presents as a complex rearticulation of expectations and institutions. Whether one fully agrees with Schudson or not, the book and the point of view it ingeniously argues constitutes an important contribution of contemporary civic life. And a narrative strategy of restructuring (as opposed to the usual rise or fall scenarios) deserves a place in the historian's menu of narrative types. "Presentist" purposes may, however, carry the danger of anachronistic readings. Schudson is vulnerable on this score, especially in his consideration of the colonial period. He too easily asks how democratic any phase of political life was. A commitment to explore the fate of democracy in our past-something I endorse- surely includes recognizing when democracy is not an available concept. He might better have asked how the legitimation and exercise of power worked. Indeed, such a deeper historicism would complement his anti-anti-Whig approach. Similarly, while a then-and-now binary invites sometimes interesting questions and offers some illumination of past and present, it also invites problems. Again, one sees this risk in Schudson's work. False categories of judgment are explicitly or implicitly brought to bear. Speaking of the first generation to live under the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 37Michael Schudson, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (New York, 1998), 8. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 141 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Constitution, he observes that little political knowledge was expected of voters, "at least little of the sort of knowledge that today's civic moralists urge upon people." Voters then were expected to have "local knowledge-not of laws or principles, but of men."38 The binary obscures the role of principles in the past and knowledge of men in the present. Most important of all, it diverts our attention from the principles that it was thought would aid voters in judging character.39 Sometimes, by focusing so much on the party system that we worry about today, he overlooks those important issues that eluded the parties or that parties avoided. Substantive issues-the reason citizenship and civic life are important-are marginalized in his account of the different concepts and patterns of public life. The result, whether intended or not, is a form of consensus history.40 "Progress or decline is not the real question," Schudson concludes.41 He converts that question into one of restructuring that points to his core argument: there must be a fit between forms of citizenship and forms of everyday life, between values and institutions, between aspirations and commitments. It is that historically informed understanding that allows him in his conclusion to speculate in quite promising ways about an evolving pattern of citizenship that may yet serve our collective hopes and needs. Still, his conclusion leaves me uneasy. Like the journalistic coverage of politics today, the substance of political conflict is subordinated to discussion of the "health" of the system, of the institutions and practices. By contrast, the tensions, conflicts, and substantive issues that made politics so important in the development of the United States and in the lives of individuals are at the center of Eric Foner's The Story of American Freedom (1998). Foner's book has an uncanny resemblance to one that at first glance might seem utterly unrelated: Richard Hofstadter's The American Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It.42 Of course, Foner inverts the point Hofstadter sought to make. If Hofstadter famously played down conflict and (less remarked upon) paid little attention to the social making of political ideologies, Foner emphasizes conflict and the changing historical construction and reconstruction of the idea and ideology of freedom. Foner's work is much more explicitly sensitive to social history, even if it parallels Hofstadter's in its interest in ideology and the limits and possibilities of American political culture. While Hofstadter was alternately comic and ironic, bitterly so at times, in The American Political Tradition, Foner's Story of American Freedom is strikingly fair and straightforward. Yet the underlying hope is similar. As James Oakes has perceptively noted, Foner's narrative is undergirded by an unstated but firm liberal ideal of freedom- one that at once shares in an Enlightenment universalism and [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 38 Schudson, Good Citizen, 81. 39 See Joyce Appleby, Inheriting the Revolution: The First Generation of Americans (Cambridge, Mass., 2000). 40 See, for example, his summary judgment of the party system at Schudson, Good Citizen, 132. Put differently, it bears at least a formal relationship to the theories of pluralism popular in political science during the 1950s. 41 Schudson, Good Citizen, 313. 42 Richard Hofstadter, TheAmerican Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It (New York, 1948). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 142 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] accommodates current concerns for inclusion and regard for difference.43 I would even argue that Hofstadter's own liberal position was closer to Foner's than one might at first suspect. Both appraised American political culture and its prospects from the position of a richer, more textured liberalism than we usually recognize in current debates.44 In thinking about the core issue in Foner's narrative, therefore, it seems fair to consider it to be the quest for a democratic liberalism, insisting on the relevance and indispensability of the modifier inserted before liberalism. One might thus characterize Foner's as a democratic synthesis, which, as I suggested above, offers a stronger and more egalitarian standard of judgment than commonplace invoca- tions of inclusion. It offers as well the implication of voice and empowerment. To Foner, as he indicates in his introduction, "abstract definitions" of freedom are not the focus. His concern is "with the debates and struggles through which freedom acquires concrete meanings, and how understandings of freedom are shaped by, and in turn help to shape, social movements and political and economic events."45 The result is a narrative that is at once focused yet always open to an examination of larger issues, structures, and events that intersect with and often drive his story. It is a dynamic story, filled with actors, with agents making freedom and using freedom. He selects key events or controversies of different eras, events that are widely contested (slavery, labor and property, the role of the state, social movements). Of course, coverage is selective; the gain is the richness deriving from a series of concentrated focal points. In each case, he examines the conflict, the parties contending, and the stakes. He does not hesitate to declare justices and injustices, to name winners and losers, and he does so from a consistently democratic perspective. Foner thus achieves inclusion without the dilution conse- quent with the faux openness characteristic of talk radio and without the postmod- ern hesitations that undermine moral judgment.46 The American West: A New Interpretive History (2000) by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher spans the whole of American history, from "the European invasion" until the present.47 The book is written in the spirit of Frederick Jackson Turner. Instead of lamenting the ambiguity of Turner's conception of the frontier, which after Turner got reduced by rigorous historians to a place, the West, Hine and Faragher embrace its fullness. For them, the frontier is both a place and a nrocess. and thev recognize that it is not onlv imnossible but limiting to senarate [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 43 James Oakes, "Radical Liberals, Liberal Radicals: The Dissenting Tradition in American Political Culture," Reviews in American History 27 (1999): 503-11. 44 For just such a contemporary theorization of liberalism, see Ira Katznelson, Liberalism's Crooked Circle: Letters to Adam Michnik (Princeton, N.J., 1996). Interestingly, this work also comes from a Columbia scholar, however much it is openly acknowledged to have derived largely from his experience at the New School for Social Research. Perhaps the relevant context for this liberalism is the city of New York, with its cosmopolitan character and free-for-all quality of political contestation. For a brief statement of Hofstadter's relation to liberalism, see Thomas Bender, "Richard Hofstadter," in American National Biography, John A. Garraty and Mark C. Carnes, gen. eds. (New York, 1999), 11: 1-4. 45 Eric Foner, The Story of American Freedom (New York, 1998), xvii. 46 In Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America's Unfinished Revolution, 1863-1877 (New York, 1988), where chronological compression allows for a richer analysis, one can see more fully the method and its achievements. 47 Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher, The American West: A New Interpretive History (New Haven, Conn., 2000), 9. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 143 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and sharply distinguish between the two aspects of the concept. That openness allows them to tell the history of the United States as a story of successive frontiers, including a fascinating rethinking of American regionalism as urban-centered at the end of the twentieth century.48 In fact, the chapter on the postwar era is a tour de force-imaginative, original, and quite compelling. In Turnerian fashion, they argue that "westering defined America's unique heritage."49 To a very impressive degree, they give substance to this claim, but recent historiography makes that claim, even for western history, problematic. As Hine and Faragher show, in the nineteenth century as well as today, the West (and the United States) was formed by migrations from west to east and south to north, and even in a limited way north to south, as well as east to west. The notion of westering is so strong in American and European history and culture, it is difficult to construct an alternative narrative structure, though no less important for the difficulty.50 This worry does not, however, undercut another summary point they make: the "frontier is our common past."51 The book is grounded in social history. Of all the books under consideration here, The American West is probably the most sensitive to the categories of experience and groups previously excluded from mainstream narratives of Ameri- can history. Their work goes well beyond mere representation of such groups and categories; previously invisible groups, whether Native Americans, migrating women, African-American settlers, working people, or the people of the border- lands, are actors who contributed to the shaping of history. But there are limits to this achievement. While there are multiple positions and voices represented in their narrative, only rarely does their narrative bring the reader inside group life. There is not much inquiry into the interior experience and subjective meanings shared by the various groups identified and recognized.52 While the story could have been situated in a wider context, one that revealed the global reach of the empires or, later, the importance of global markets, in its particular geographical focus the book consistently avoids privileging the English line of settlement. Other settler efforts are considered and sometimes compared. As is often the case with synthetic histories, however, there is a tendency to do the work of inclusion at a particular moment, and then lose the group at issue. For example, there is a good discussion of the origins of racial slavery, but the later [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 48 On the potential of the urban region model for historical analysis, see Jane Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations: Principles of Economic Life (New York, 1984). For an extremely stimulating extension of Turner's frontier to transnational dimensions, see Paul Sabin, "Home and Abroad: The Two 'Wests' of Twentieth-Century United States History," Pacific Historical Review 66, no. 3 (1997): 305-36. 49 Hine and Faragher, Amertican West, 531. 50 Loren Baritz, "The Idea of the West," AHR 66 (April 1961): 618-40. For three forays into alternative narrative strategies on this point, see Thomas Bender, "The Geography of Historical Memory and the Making of Public Culture," in Anna Maria Martellone, ed., Towards a New American Nation? Redefinitions and Reconstruction (Staffordshire, 1995), 174-87; Ian Tyrrell, "Beyond the View from Euro-America: Environment, Settler Societies, and Internationalization of American History," in Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; Dirk Hoerder, "From the Euro- and Afro- Atlantic to the Pacific Migration System in North American History," in Bender. 51 Hine and Faragher, American West, 560. 52 In fact, they concentrate this kind of analysis in one chapter, a fascinating one in "A Search for Community," but it is limited in its cases, and it segregates such analysis from the greater part of the narrative. Hine and Faragher, American West, chap. 12. AMERICAN HISTORIcAL REvIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 144 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] extension of the plantation system and internal slave market that was a part of the frontier movement is not adequately recognized. At times, the transnational themes they develop are extremely illuminating. They refer to what would later be characterized by theorists of the global cities as a "dual economy" in describing the role of foreign migrants, especially Chinese, in the nineteenth-century California agricultural economy.53 Likewise the interplay of national and international in their discussion of the Zimmerman telegram inviting Mexico to ally with Germany in World War I and in their discussion of San Francisco's "commercial hinterland."54 But, as in the case of Butler's book, there is a bit of parochialism in making claims of distinction. Perhaps such assertions can be demonstrated, but more rigorous definitions and empirical research than we have here are required to establish, for example, that the United States is today the world's most multicultural society.55 How would it compare with Indonesia, the world's fourth most populous nation, whose citizens speak more than 100 languages and live on almost numberless islands? The social-history approach, whatever its success in representing difference, has in this instance under-represented national political institutions and policies. The development of the West, as Richard White and other historians of the West have pointed out, was profoundly indebted to what western Republicans now call "big government," for water, transportation, Indian removal, and, more recently, direct investment, as in defense contracts and installations and aerospace industries.56 The political economy and the role of markets, as has already been suggested, do not get the attention they deserve. We often overlook how much industry was in the West, and how much western industries-from milling and meatpacking to mining-were integral to the industrial system of the United States. And we forget how much the astonishing productivity of western agriculture enabled the formation of a large urban industrial labor supply. More of these dimensions of western history might have been included if only in the interest in enabling the story better to tell the national experience. If Hine and Faragher encompass both the full geographical and temporal dimensions of western history, Linda Gordon's microhistory builds out from a very delimited western space, the Sonoran highlands of Arizona, to develop a highly innovative narrative synthesis that locates itself at the various and causally interrelated scales of town, region, nation, and the transnational. Her work reminds us that there is a difference between a mere local study and a microhistory. The local histories of villages, towns, and cities, so common in the 1970s, tended to use global concepts but within artificially bounded fields of inquiry. One of the most famous of them all, Kenneth Lockridge's study of Dedham, Massachusetts, offered an isolated inwardness as a principal finding, although it was a finding that derived [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 53Hine and Faragher, American West, 358-60. 54 Hine and Faragher, American West, 395-97, 414. This story could be greatly expanded. San Francisco was closer to Asia than to Europe, a simple geographical point that usually eludes us. For an outstanding study of this relationship, see Ian Tyrrell, True Gardens of the Gods: Californian-Australian Environmental Reform, 1860-1930 (Berkeley, Calif., 1999). 55 Hine and Faragher, American West, 514. 56 Richard White, "It's Your Misfortune and None of My Own": A History of the American West (Norman, Okla., 1991). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 145 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] mainly from a methodology not only local but firmly bounded.57 By contrast, Gordon's The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction exemplifies a microhistory that enables the historian to synthesize the threads of local life, many of which are translocal in origin and implication.58 Unlike Hine and Faragher, she gets inside the subjective experience of local life, even the experience of very ordinary people, without getting trapped inside that world and without implying that the larger world of the region, the nation, and even transnational economic and religious institutions were beyond the ken of her study of a seemingly local conflict. Mostly, her account is the story of the arrival and fate of Catholic orphans from New York who were to be placed in Catholic homes. The homes were Mexican as well as Catholic, and that was the problem and the focus of conflict. The conflict played out along class, ethnic, religious, and gender lines, and it eventually reached the Supreme Court. It is a compelling and very human narrative, but one that also addresses a whole range of analytical and interpretive issues of broader interest to historians. Bringing the issues of gender, class, and race into relation with each other allows for an appraisal of their relative importance in this particular historical explanation. I think that her story reveals class to be more important than her conclusion argues, but the real point to be made is that only a narrative synthesis that brings diverse threads together will enable the historian and the reader to make this kind of judgment. These complex ends are achieved in part by her adoption of an imaginative literary strategy. Gordon's book is constructed of two types of chapters. One is quite often a broad frame for local events. In these chapters, her perspective as narrator is exterior to the action. The issues addressed are frequently structural and, as often as not, extend beyond the community. Here, one gets an analytical explanation of the relation of local experience to larger national and international cultural, political, and economic developments. Between these chapters, she has crafted others that get inside the culture of the community, providing wonderfully rich, thick descriptions of daily life and the development of the conflict. With oral histories as well as fragmentary documentary evidence, she brings the reader very close to the experience and voices of the community. The play between these accounts and the more conventional chapters produces an unusual but powerful synthesis. Whether a microhistory qualifies as a synthesis, even by my generous definition, may be debated. But the singular relevance of this book for the discussion of synthesis concerns not scale but its literary ambition, the literary experiment that gives structure to the book. Those who would write other syntheses-at various scales-will, I hope, be encouraged, even inspired, to experiment with novel narrative strategies in the interest of more powerful representations of the past. Quintard Taylor presents a third version of western history, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (1998). He offers a broad synthetic account that characterizes the experiences of African Americans over a very long period of time. While the book does not ignore the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 57Kenneth A. Lockridge, A New England Town: The First Hundred Years; Dedham, Massachusetts, 1636-1736 (New York, 1970). 58 Linda Gordon, The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction (Cambridge, Mass., 1999). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRuARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 146 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] relations among different groups in the West, particularly and inevitably between blacks and whites, but also between blacks and Native American, the contribution of the book is otherwise.59 He is mapping and making visible as a whole a history that has been largely unknown or studied in very specific instances and places. Drawing on a substantial body of scholarship, most of it published in the past quarter century, he aims to "reconstruct the history of African American women and men" in the West over five centuries, although mostly his focus is the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Taylor's central themes are the quest for community by blacks and the relative degrees of freedom and opportunity they find in different times and places. The conjuncture of the map of African-American presence and the conventional history of the West that his story brings out compels rethinking of both African-American and western history. He makes the point, for example, that the issue of Texas independence in 1836 was not simply, as myth, even the more recent multicultural version, would have it: Anglos and Tejanos in Texas confronting a despotic government in Mexico. It was also an Anglo effort to preserve slavery.60 More broadly, the map literally reveals that African Americans in the West were overwhelmingly city and town dwellers, and it is that fact that unifies their experience. The kind of synthetic narrative that he has constructed provides an invaluable service at a particular moment, crystallizing a generation of scholarship, making generalization possible. His work not only informs the public of the dimensions of previously unrecognized histories, it also provides a base for the next generation of scholarship. In a similar way, another recent synthesis, one that focuses on a more narrowly defined but also more developed area of scholarship, reveals the harvest of recent scholarship on work and workers. American Work: Four Centuries of Black and Vhite Labor (1998) by Jacqueline Jones at once brings this rich scholarship to a wider audience and proffers a fresh way of framing the field.61 If The American West, In Search of the Racial Frontier, and American Work cover very long chronological spans, books by David M. Kennedy and Fred Anderson address short periods. Their focus is also quite different, since both concentrate on political and military history. Kennedy's Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (1999) addresses what might well be called "high politics," while Anderson's The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (2000) brings social history and high politics into fruitful play, finding in that interaction the terms of his central argument about the nature of power in the British Empire. At the outset, both books locate their stories in a broad international context. Kennedy's book begins at the close of World War I, and the first character introduced is Lance Corporal Adolf Hitler, who was in a military hospital recovering from a poison gas attack when he heard the news of Germany's surrender. The international context thus suggested is obviously central to the half [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 59He explicitly recognizes the issue of intergroup relations, but he equally explicitly indicates that such is not his aim here. See Quintard Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (New York, 1998), 18-19. 60 Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier, 39. 61 Jacqueline Jones, American Work: Four Centuries of Black and White Labor (New York, 1998). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 147 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] of the book devoted to World War II, but it is not nearly so much developed as it might be. The geography of Washington, D.C., even that of the White House, and the biographies of three men-Franklin D. Roosevelt, Winston Churchill, and Hitler-are more important to Kennedy's story than the world beyond the borders of the United States or, for that matter, than the American people of his subtitle. One of Kennedy's aims is evidently to urge upon Americans a greater attention to and sense of responsibility in the larger world, yet with the exception of the excellent discussion of the differing explanations of the economic crisis offered by Herbert Hoover and Roosevelt, there is surprisingly little incorporation of inter- national elements into the dynamic of the story. For all the importance of the larger world, for Kennedy, as for many Americans, whether professional historians or not, the international is a sort of "other," something "over there," if I may reverse the title of one of Kennedy's earlier books.62 Kennedy- also pays little attention to social history, not even to social histories that have sought to better explain the politics of the interwar years.63 Nor does the book address intellectual history, the history of science and technology (except briefly in connection with war production), the states, education, urban history, and much more. In fact, the book would have been more accurately described by the title of William E. Leuchtenburg's classic, F.D.R. and the New Deal, 1932-1940, which is here superseded and extended into the war years.64 So titled, adding the war to the New Deal, one could have no objection to this extraordinarily well-written, deeply researched, and compellingly argued book. But is it a history of "the American people"? Freedom from Fear is a masterful narrative on the terms it has assumed for itself. Yet having said that, historiographical questions remain. Kennedy apparently assumes that three voices are the important ones; not many other voices are heard, even though each of a small clutch of additional figures is presented very effectively as a full human being: Lorena Hickok, Eleanor Roosevelt, Harry Hopkins, Raymond Moley, Herbert Hoover, John L. Lewis, and A. Philip Randolph, among a few others. History for Kennedy, unlike for the other authors of these syntheses, is made by select leaders, not by ordinary people. What is remarkable, therefore, is the illusion of synthesis that is achieved. The book was published in a series that promises narrative syntheses of the defining periods of American national history. Most so far published accept traditional definitions of periods, and they are framed as political history, but none is so severely restricted as this one, which won the Pulitzer Prize in part because it was recognized as a work of grand synthesis. Dramatic changes in the historiography of the American field make it seem anachronistic. Yet its success makes the point that political history in the grand [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 62 David M. Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980). The point Kennedy makes about Americans could be turned against his own book, which assumes the same divide he finds among Americans generally. He complains in the text that Americans held tight to "the dangerous illusion that they could choose whether and when [I would add how] to participate in the world." David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (New York, 1999), 386. 63 The only exception I spotted in the footnotes is Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939 (New York, 1990). 64 William E. Leuchtenburg, F.D.R. and the New Deal: 1932-1940 (New York, 1963). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 148 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] style, focusing on a few elite figures, can still claim, at least for the general public, to be a narrative history of a people. Fred Anderson's Crucible of War again engages us with the question of elites and ordinary people, and it provides -a promising approach. While Kennedy seems quite confident of the importance of a few leaders, Anderson seems to be ambivalent, and that ambivalence enriches his history. Although I think the principal contribution of Crucible of War to our understanding of the British Empire is grounded in the social history of the political and military experience of ordinary Americans, the dramatic focus, as with Francis Parkman's great nineteenth-century narrative, is on two great leaders of the French and Indian War, the marquis de Montcalm and James Wolfe.65 Yet, as Alan Taylor has insightfully insisted, Anderson has rewritten the story of their confrontation in a way that diminishes these actors, especially Wolfe.66 To be sure, Anderson's book goes beyond Parkman in its respect for Native Americans, their agency, and their role in the empire (and the role of the empire and war for them). He also modifies Parkman on a point that is central to the book's contribution to imperial history: unlike Parkman, Anderson not only notices but makes much of the division between English colonials and English metropolitans. These differences in expectation and experience make the war in his view a "theatre of intercultural interaction."67 Like Butler, Anderson seeks to diminish the role of 1776 in understanding the development of what became the United States. Historians, he argues, will better understand the creation of the United States by closely examining the Seven Years' War and, more generally, by challenging the usual tendency to "take as our point of reference the thirteen rebelling colonies, not the empire as a whole."68 Yet, even as he argues the importance of getting behind the Revolution of 1776 so that one can discover the eighteenth century as it was experienced, the revolution remains a touchstone for him. More than anything else, he wants the reader to recognize that the shots fired in the Seven Years' War were the ones with implications around the world. But he keeps de-historicizing his story to use it to diminish the shot of lesser implication (in his view) heard 'round the world in 1775. When one begins the book, there is a sense of excitement. Here is a history of the United States ready to take the globe as its context. Before the narrative even begins, the reader is presented with a portfolio of maps. Only two of eight describe the British colonies; no more than four of them consider North America at all. The portfolio begins with a world map, revealing the global distribution of the battles that marked the Seven Years' War. There are also maps of the Indian subcontinent, Central Europe, and the Caribbean. The introduction promises a book that will make the world, or at least the full extent of the British Empire, its context and subject. We are told that "if viewed from Montreal or Vincennes, St. Augustine, Havana, Paris or Madrid-or, for that matter Calcutta or Berlin-the Seven Years' War was far more significant than the War of American Independence."69 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 65 Francis Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe, 6th edn., 2 vols. (Boston, 1885). 66 See Alan Taylor, "The Forgotten War," New Republic (August 14, 2000): 40-45. 67 Fred Anderson, The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (New York, 2000), xvi. 68 Anderson, Crucible of War, xv. 69 Anderson, Crucible of War, xvi. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 149 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Yet once the narrative is begun, it immediately narrows. We get very little of Asia (although Manila makes a brief but important comparative appearance), the Caribbean, Africa, and continental Europe. Of course, other European powers are part of the narrative, but they only have walk-on roles. We learn little of them at home or about the ways leaders or ordinary citizens interpret events, while we are, by contrast, led through elaborate accounts of high British politics. The preface, presumably written last, sketches an extraordinary agenda for what would be a stunning book. Unfortunately, Anderson did not write the book he there described. Still, judged in terms of what it did rather than what it proposed to do, it is an outstanding work of craft. It will no doubt be our generation's account of the Seven Years' War. As military history, it is superb, and it contributes importantly-but not so grandly as some of the opening rhetoric promises-to the non-controversial but still unclear issue of the causal relations that connect the Seven Years' War to the coming of the revolution. Anderson in fact offers a rich Anglo-centric narrative that explores and explains the different meaning of the war both as strategic event and as experience for the British of the metropole and in the colonies. It is written with verve and confidence-and a seemingly complete command of the materials, primary and secondary. One of its themes is the misperception of events by political elites; with the exception of William Pitt, surely Anderson's hero in this story, they fail to understand the different meaning of the war and empire for ordinary soldiers and colonial subjects. He thus makes cultural issues the heart of the book. Military and political elites play a dramatic role in the narrative, but causation for Anderson- and here he points to important newer developments in military and diplomatic history-is to be found in the culture of everyday life.70 In making this point, he not only offers an important interpretation of the war (building in part on his previous book on Massachusetts soldiers), he also reveals the empire to be less solid, more a matter of continuous negotiation, than historians often consider such entities, whether empires or nations or states.71 MORE EFFECTIVELY THAN ANDERSON, Ira Berlin, referring to the earliest history of Afro-European North America, and Daniel T. Rodgers, addressing the early twentieth century, incorporate the Atlantic, or at least the North Atlantic, into their narratives of American history. Berlin and Rodgers write very different kinds of history and focus on different periods. Berlin's is a social history, while Rodgers has written an intellectual history, or, perhaps, a history of political culture. Yet both Berlin and Rodgers recognize the complex webs that route movements-of people, of ideas, of money, of things-in the Atlantic world. The transnational terrains that Berlin and Rodgers evoke establish larger and truer frames for national histories than do notions of bounded and self-contained regions or nations. The first section of Berlin's Many Thousands Gone, a portrait of the Atlantic littoral, describes a world framed by cities and the sea, little divided by national [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 70 Anderson, Crucible of War, 453-54. 71 See Fred Anderson, A Peoples' Army: Massachusetts Soldiers and Society in the Seven Years' War (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1984). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 150 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] boundaries, which did not yet organize any of the four Atlantic continents. Berlin's opening tableau describes the emergence of the Atlantic world as an ever- expanding historical terrain, where the African presence is pervasive on the sea and in the cities, including Lisbon, where they made up 10 percent of the population in the sixteenth century. He evokes a world defined by a network of cosmopolitan cities populated by creolized peoples. African people were not only omnipresent, they were often crucial cultural and economic brokers, helping to knit this new world together. Berlin lets go of this powerful frame and image in his later chapters, where he narrows the focus to regional difference within the bounds of British North America. Still, the book's protean beginning remains in the reader's mind, inviting others to realize its narrative logic and moral meaning.72 In Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (1998), Daniel T. Rodgers also achieves a richer historicism by expanding the space of analysis. One small indication is in the subtitle. He refers to "social politics," not the more usual "welfare state." His approach, examining relations in space as well as over time as fields of contingency, makes the welfare state a problematic common term. When he uses the more general and more mobile term "social politics," he effectively historicizes the concept, lineage, and practice of the welfare state. The development of a social politics has other possible paths and outcomes besides evolution into the national welfare state.73 The national welfare state thus becomes a historically and place-specific invention rather than a universal or, worse, the teleological endpoint of American liberal narratives-an endpoint surely upended by the politics of the last quarter of the twentieth century. Following the pioneering work of James T. Kloppenberg, who also assumed a Euro-American context for progressivism and social democracy, Rodgers ap- proaches this age of reform as at once a transnational and national issue.74 A variety of reforms-from urban planning to social insurance to regulation of capitalism- are examined as products both of general, transnational ideas and of particular, national political cultures. The complex narratives thus developed by Rodgers and Kloppenberg-ones that recognize, especially in the case of Rodgers, the historicity of the balance between national and transnational-are a major advance in the narrative synthesis of a national history. Both Rodgers and Kloppenberg impress on the reader that ideas could cross the Atlantic in either direction. This is salutary; American intellectual history is too often thought by Europeans and Americans as well to be either insignificant or derivative, not quite up to equal participation in an international world of ideas. This common point is handled differently in each book. While Kloppenberg notes [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 72 One hopes this extension of the historiographical terrain will continue and that connections as well as comparisons will be made between the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic and between the Atlantic slave trade and the slave trade that turned to the east, to the Muslim empires of the Mediterranean and today's Middle East. Big as it is, the Atlantic does not capture the logic and dimensions of slavery in this era. 73 See, for example, the argument (somewhat dependent on Rodgers's work) in Thomas Bender, "Cities, Intellectuals, and Citizenship in the United States: The 1890s and 1990s," Citizenship Studies 3 (1999): 203-20. 74 Daniel T. Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass., 1998); James T. Kloppenberg, Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism in European and American Thought, 1870-1920 (New York, 1986). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 151 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] direct interaction, he seems more interested in demonstrating a homological relation or a kind of convergence. Rodgers, by contrast, focuses on the specific transit of ideas and emphasizes the way intellectuals and reformers on either side of the Atlantic drew selectively on these ideas, depending on personal taste and local circumstance. The result is a fundamental and valuable reorientation of the way we might understand intellectual history. The conceptual opening they have created invites a yet more radical under- standing of the territory and movement of ideas. Let me go back to the title of Rodgers's book. I think that "Atlantic Crossings" projects too narrow an under- standing of the implications of the book. It emphasizes the movement of people and ideas back and forth across the Atlantic. To that extent, it recalls a much older Anglo-American historiography of "trans-Atlantic influences."75 Rodgers goes well beyond this historiography in showing that, in important respects, Europe was partly Americanized and the United States was partly Europeanized by the phenomena he describes. But his really important accomplishment is to get away from the "influence" model, to displace the linear A to B notion of intellectual history. But he could have gone farther yet. There is more to the circulation of ideas than this framing recognizes. It is more than an Atlantic crossing, more than a link between Western Europe and the United States. The whole Atlantic, South Atlantic as well as North Atlantic, and, indeed, increasingly, parts of the Pacific world better describe the extent of the intellectual network his book evokes. In regard to urban development and reform, an important theme in Rodgers's book, it is clear that there is a global conversation at work. Rather than the linearity of steamship crossings (the dustjacket illustration) between the port cities of Western Europe and New York, I imagine a Great Bazaar of urban ideas, technology, and aesthetics hovering over the Atlantic, with many traders and buyers. This exchange is not, of course, symmetrical, and that itself is an issue, but participation was nearly global in 1900. Progressive ideas, especially those dealing with urban reform and technologies, traveled through many circuits and with different voltage, but nearly the whole world was connected, not only Western Europe and the United States. Simply look at the cities of Eastern Europe, Latin America, parts of Africa, Central and East Asia. Surely, they were part of an international conception of urbanism-and of urban commercial culture. The remnants of the era make it clear that New York and Chicago, no less than Lyons, Cairo, Buenos Aires, or Shanghai, were local instances of a global process of city-making. THESE LAST COMMENTS SUGGEST what I take to be the next challenge of narrative synthesis. But before I conclude, let me briefly review what has been accomplished by the cohort of synthetic histories considered here. These books reveal, even verify, the capacity of narrative synthesis to achieve inclusion and to respect issues of identity. Moreover, it seems possible in synthetic narratives to combine structure [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 75 See Frank Thistlethwaite, The Anglo-American Connection in the Early Nineteenth Century (Philadelphia, 1959). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 152 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and agency and to consider causal explanation without sacrificing the explication of subjective meaning-and vice versa. The volumes here examined reveal many narrative strategies and quite different relations to a wider reading public. There is no single model, and no one volume (yet) does all the things we might fairly expect in a realized synthesis. In addition, these books, both in what they do and do not do, suggest to me the value of embracing a narrative core that is a more explicit and deeper exploration of democracy and difference, freedom and empowerment, contest and justice. Such a focus promises a sharper analytical history, one more historical and less susceptible to teleology, whether of modernity or anything else. It seems plausible to propose that a wider canvas, a supranational context, may in fact enhance the examination of these issues. The work of Hine and Faragher, Berlin, Gordon, and Rodgers in particular enables one to imagine an even more radical synthesis of national history, one that operates on multiple geographical scales, from narratives smaller than the nation to supra-national ones-thus identifying the nation as a product of history as well as an object of historical inquiry. Such a framing of national history will increase awareness of the complexity of the multiple axes of historical interaction, causation, and identity formation. While I mean these concluding comments to suggest an ambitious new agenda for the discipline, we must not overlook an already existing and compelling example. Decades ago, David Brion Davis embarked on a multivolume history that considered all these issues. He brought them together in his majestic synthesis that explores slavery and freedom in the Atlantic world, a history of nearly global reach that is also-and I emphasize this fact-a history of the United States.76 My point, then, is that such histories can be written, have been written, and I trust that more will yet be written. The present moment seems especially propitious for such histories. The relation of the nation to both subnational and transnational solidarities is very much in question. It is a public concern as well as an object of interdisciplinary scholarly inquiry. Historians surely have an open invitation to rethink the boundaries of national histories.77 Colonial historians have been moving in this direction for some time, redefining their field as the Atlantic world long before the globalization talk. Likewise, Rodgers and Ian Tyrrell, both of whom work on the modern period, moved in this direction fairly early and for a different reason: their concern about the claims of American exceptionalism.78 With these various concerns at work, we may fairly expect a movement of American historians and other historians as well toward a wider sense of their fields. National histories will not be so firmly bounded, and the assumption of their national autarky will be softened by the recognition that national histories are [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 76 David Brion Davis, The Problem of Slavery in Western Culture (Ithaca, N.Y., 1966); The Problem of Slavery in the Age of Revolution, 1770-1823 (Ithaca, 1975), with the final installment yet to come. 77 See Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; and Thomas Bender, The La Pietra Report (Bloomington, Ind., 2000), also available on the World Wide Web at www.oah.org/activities/ lapietra/index.html. 78 Ian Tyrrell, "American Exceptionalism in an Age of International History," AHR 96 (October 1991): 1031-55; Daniel T. Rodgers, "Exceptionalism," in Anthony Molho and Gordon S. Wood, eds., Imagined Histories: American Historians Interpret the Past (Princeton, N.J., 1998), 21-40. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 153 embedded in yet larger histories. And all of this will demand yet more ambitious strategies of narrative synthesis. Thomas Bender is University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History at New York University. His scholarship has been in the broad domain of cultural history, particularly studies of cities, intellectuals, and, most recently, the history of scholarly disciplines. His books on these themes include Toward an Urban Vision (1975), New York Intellect (1987), and Intellect and Public Life (1993), as well as The Unfinished City: New York and the Metropol- itan Idea (forthcoming). He has a longstanding interest in the larger framings of American history that dates from his Community and Social Change in America (1978) and continued in his article "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History (1986), which provides the starting point for this essay. His thinking on this topic also derives in part from his work on the OAH-NYU project that resulted in the La Pietra Report (2000), which he authored, and Rethinking American History in a Global Age (2002), which he edited. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/532101

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587015
Date: April 2003
Author(s): Elbourne Elizabeth
Abstract: [[START 03X0760F]] Review Essays Word Made Flesh: Christianity, Modernity, and Cultural Colonialism in the Work of Jean and John Comaroff ELIZABETH ELBOURNE "IN THE BEGINNING WAS THE WORD, and the word was made flesh and dwelt among us," as the first chapter of the Book of John proclaims in a text often read at Christian Easter celebrations. The text might be taken as a something of a leitmotif of the first two volumes (of a projected three) of Jean and John Comaroff's brilliant and rightly influential series, Of Revelation and Revolution.1 The first two volumes, Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa and The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier, explore the nineteenth-century encounter between British Protestant Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana in a region that is now in the northern part of the Republic of South Africa. The Comaroffs attempt, however, to do far more than merely describe a series of relatively small-scale historical events. They are interested in missionaries above all because of their complex relationship to "modernity," which the Comaroffs see in turn as tightly linked to a particular phase of European colonialism. The title of the second volume, "The Dialectics of Modernity," suggests as much. Most European missionaries tried hard to function as agents of cultural change-of "civilization" in early nineteenth-century missionaries' own terms, implicitly casting the Tswana as "savage" and thereby laying out one of the key dialectical oppositions of colonial- ism, which would function as a justification for dispossession. Some Tswana interlocutors adapted some elements of "Christian behavior," the Comaroffs argue, but many others demonstrated resistance to the hegemony of British colonialism in part by resisting the colonization of their everyday lives. The nineteenth-century Protestant project to remake the world, of which the Nonconformist missionaries of southern Africa were important proponents, is thus linked by the Comaroffs forward to colonialism and to contemporary globalization, and backward in time to Part of this article was presented in a much earlier version at the Twentieth Anniversary Conference of the Journal of Southern African Studies, York, 1994; I would like to thank the participants as well as those who subsequently commented helpfully, including David Maxwell, Norman Etherington, Ed Wilmsen, and Paul Landau. For reading the current essay, my particular thanks to Catherine Desbarats, Eric Jabbari, James Ron, and Michael Wasser, as well as to Tim Rowse, Desley Deacon, Ann Curthoys, and John Docker for helpful suggestions. I am of course solely responsible for the content. The research for this essay was supported by the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada. 1 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, Vol. 1: Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa (Chicago, 1991), and Vol. 2: The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier (Chicago, 1997). 435 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne the emergence of capitalism. Missionaries were, in effect, agents of a first wave of globalization. The missionary movement was an early exemplar of a transnational global movement, while the intellectual claims of missionaries to universality paralleled the modernist claims of a globalizing colonialism. The struggles over the texture and composition of everyday life that took place on the frontiers of colonial society in nineteenth-century southern Africa therefore tell us something not only about the nature of colonialism but also about modernity and its considerable discontents, as well as about the resistance of the colonized to the European colonial project. In this sense, a quest for origins informs the narrative structure of both books.2 Indeed, one of the reasons that this seminal text engages us so closely is its concern with the narrative of dispossession and resistance, with a beginning and therefore, implicitly, some hope for an end-an only ambivalently postmodern narrative, in fact, despite some alarm in southern Africanist circles over Of Revelation and Revolution as a postmodern nail in the coffin of materialist history.3 This focus lends moral urgency to the Comaroffs' consideration of the distant initial encounters between white missionaries and the southern Tswana in the early nineteenth century. Volume 2, for example, opens with a striking vignette: Tswana soldiers refuse to defend the white regime in 1994, as Afrikaner patriots launch a last-ditch raid on Bophuthatswana. As homeland structures crumble around them as they write, the Comaroffs acknowledge that endings and beginnings are never entirely neat. "And yet in many respects, the narrative of Tswana colonization had completed itself, finally running its course from Revelation to Revolution."4 Doubtless the authors would now adopt a less utopian position, but their enthusiasm for revolution and for endings is important, and typical of South African historical writing from the decades before the end of apartheid.5 2 Catherine Desbarats, "Essais sur quelques elements de l'6criture de l'histoire am6rindienne," Revue d'histoire de l'Ameriquefranqaise 53, no. 4 (Spring 2000): 491-520, provides an interesting model, inspired among others by Paul Ricoeur, Hayden White, and Kerwin Lee Klein, for the reading of various historical approaches to the colonial encounter as forms of narrative romance, given the inescapable narrativity of the historical text. Susan Newton-King, also drawing on Ricoeur, similarly reflects on the inescapable imposition of an artificial order on colonial encounters by the historian of colonialism. Newton-King, "Introduction," Masters and Servants on the Cape Eastern Frontier, 1760- 1803 (Cambridge, 1999). See also Kerwin Lee Klein, Frontiers of Historical Imagination: Narrating the European Conquest of Native America, 1890-1990 (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); Hayden White, The Content of the Form: Narrative Discourse and Historical Representation (Baltimore, 1987); Paul Ricoeur, Temps et recit, 3 vols. (Paris, 1985-87). 3 Meghan Vaughan, "Colonial Discourse Theory and African History, or Has Postmodernism Passed Us By?" Social Dynamics 20, no. 2 (Summer 1994): 1-23; David Bunn, "The Insistence of Theory: Three Questions for Meghan Vaughan," Social Dynamics 20, no. 2: 24-34; Clifton Crais, "South Africa and the Pitfalls of Postmodern," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 274-79; Leon de Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs: Postmodernist Puffery and Competing Conceptions of the 'Archive,'" South African Historical Journal, no. 31: 280-89. These authors take a variety of positions on the issues of whether or not the Comaroffs are postmodern and whether or not the rise of postmodernism in post-apartheid South African academic historical scholarship has been a positive development in a field that was previously (and in many ways still is) passionately materialist in approach. 4 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: xiii. 5 The original title of the series was reportedly From Revelation to Revolution, planned at a time before the release of Nelson Mandela. In a recent conversation with Homi Bhabha, however, John Comaroff is considerably less sanguine about the end of apartheid in South Africa and popular enthusiasm for Mandela outside South Africa, which he sees as a last gasp of modernist optimism in AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 436 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh In a similar vein, at the heart of Volume 1 is a crucial chapter, "Through the Looking Glass: Heroic Journeys, First Encounters." This chapter sets out to explore "the initial meeting of two worlds, one imperial and expansive, the other local and defensive."6 In marvelously evocative detail, the authors describe the initial entry of envoys of the London Missionary Society (LMS) in 1816 into the Tswana capital, Dithakong (seen by the missionaries themselves as a sacred journey into the land of Satan), a subsequent meeting, and the complex negotiations that took place throughout over the terms of the mission. A key metaphor is furnished by the mirror that the LMS envoy John Campbell presented as a gift to the Tswana chief, Mothibi, symbolizing the Western effort to reconfigure Tswana consciousness and the Tswana notion of the self. These initial encounters prefigured the colonial encounter to come: "the square enclosure and all that 'took place' at the center of the most public of Tswana spaces was ominous, foreshadowing a methodical reconstruction of their symbolic map."7 The Christian missionary project, this chapter further suggests, was from the start central to the creation of the dialectical oppositions of colonialism, ironic in view of its claim to erase difference. For the Comaroffs, the colonization of the Tswana thus began (although it certainly did not end) with the word, in the sense both of Bible and of cultural text, with the advent of white Protestant missionaries and their claims to possess the revealed divine word-albeit a word made flesh, clothed in material power. The roots of colonization were in a series of knowledge claims and a set of hegemonic cultural discourses, which would bolster the later seizure of land and of labor. Many scholars have explored the linkage between knowledge claims and colonial power, an issue that has long lain at the heart of postcolonial scholarship and that occupies an increasingly central place in the study of imperialism from a diversity of perspectives.8 Nonetheless, Of Revelation and Revolution furnishes a particularly influential and important statement of the position, in part because it provides a great deal of flesh on the bones of a theoretical model of cultural colonialism. The work moves from the field of discourse alone to examine in great detail concrete material struggles over the remaking of everyday life, including Tswana efforts to resist cultural colonialism. More controversially, perhaps, Of Revelation and Revolution also attempts to make explicit the links in southern Africa between a postcolonial setting. Homi Bhabha and John Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality, in the Continuous Present: A Conversation," in David Theo Goldberg and Ato Quayson, eds., Relocating Postcolonialism (Oxford, 2002). 6 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 171. 7 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 182. 8 Among many recent discussions of colonialism and European knowledge claims, see Ato Quayson and David Theo Goldberg, "Introduction: Scale and Sensibility," and Benita Parry, "Directions and Dead Ends in Postcolonial Studies," in Goldberg and Quayson, Relocating Postcolo- nialism, xi-xxii and 66-81; Michael Adas, "From Settler Colony to Global Hegemon: Integrating the Exceptionalist Narrative of the American Experience into World History," AHR 106 (December 2001): 1692-1720; various essays in Catherine Hall, ed., Cultures of Empire: Colonizers in Britain and the Empire in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (Manchester, 2000); Gyan Prakash, "Who's Afraid of Postcoloniality?" Social Text 49 (Winter 1996): 187-203; Prakash, "Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism," AHR 99 (December 1994): 1475-90. On the reconfiguration of African history, see Frederick Cooper, "Conflict and Connection: Rethinking Colonial African History," AHR 99: 1516-45. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 437 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne political, economic, and cultural colonialism-fields the authors argue are in any case impossible to disaggregate.9 The programmatic claims that lend Of Revelation and Revolution its force also, however, cause some interesting tensions in the book. The need to make linkages and the Comaroffs' explicit commitment to the exploration of large-scale processes lead the authors to oversimplify in places. Not only that, but the imperatives of a dialectical method push the Comaroffs at times (despite their parallel stress on indeterminacy and their very explicit engagement with the costs and benefits of a dialectical analysis, especially in Volume 2) into tighter methodological corners than they might themselves like. The links between early nineteenth-century cultural colonialism and late nineteenth-century political colonialism are not as direct or as ontologically indissoluble as the Comaroffs assume they are, while the relationship of "modernity" to colonialism furnishes matter for debate, with considerable contemporary implications. The very boldness of the Comaroffs' arguments has indeed contributed to a mixed reception among scholars of southern African history and of religion in Africa, with some enthusiastically welcoming the methodological innovation of the Comaroffs and others casting doubt in a number of ways. In the second volume of the series, the Comaroffs seem to me to have backed down somewhat from some of their bolder claims, despite their spirited engagement with the critics. This in itself provides an interesting case study of the evolution of ideas during a turbulent decade in South African history. In what follows, I would like to engage with this important work in several ways. First, I want to lay out my understanding of the theoretical guidelines in the opening volume, with particular attention to the issue of hegemony and power. Second, I want to provide an alternate reading of the opening encounters between Tswana and missionary, focusing on other intermediaries and on the fact that, even before the advent of European missionaries, the region was already affected by colonialism. I shall use this example to ask whether a dialectic model does not in some ways oversimplify complicated situations and make it hard to account for fudging across the fault lines. I shall further ask whether the result is not a rather muted account of individual agency and an attenuated depiction of the multiple uses of mission Christianity, both as language and as practice. This is not, however, to deny the latent authoritarian potential of much missionary activity, particularly in a colonial context. Third, I also want to gesture, albeit sketchily, toward some issues associated with narrative and chronology, suggesting that the schematic narrative about "modernity," industrialization, and globalization that undergirds both volumes, though provocative and important, also offers a number of hostages to fortune. These include an undue stress on the capacity of missionaries to induct converts into the global economy by changing their consciousness; rather, I see converts struggling to adapt to an overpowering global economy, among other things by trying to use Christianity in a variety of ways, with greater or lesser degrees of success. Having said all that, does this fact-mongering matter?-What are the Comaroffs doing that might go beyond reading the content of particular 9 Colonialism was simultaneously a "process in political economy and culture," and these dimensions were "indissoluble aspects of the same reality, whose fragmentation into discrete spheres hides their ontological unity." Comarofff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 19. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 438 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh archives? Throughout, I want to take up some concerns of African historians and anthropologists with questions of narrative, voice, and agency in Of Revelation and Revolution. THE INITIAL CHAPTER OF THE FIRST VOLUME is a careful theoretical exposition. Although the authors rather cheerfully direct those with little stomach for theoretical discussions to skip theirs and, en bon bricoleur, to pick up the narrative at a later point, the opening discussion of anthropological concepts is in fact crucial for an understanding of what both this book and its later companion seek to accomplish. I would accordingly like to pause upon it. The stated goal of the work is to present an anthropology of the "colonial encounter," in this case between British Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana, with the larger implication that the missionaries acted as the cultural arm of colonialism, while the dilemmas of the Tswana in their confrontations with colonialism mirrored, if they obviously did not precisely reproduce, the experience of other colonized African groups in South Africa. The Comaroffs state that they hope that their discussion of this particular mission will accomplish three other things: to anticipate later modes of consciousness and struggle in South Africa; to look at an example of historical processes that were happening across Africa and indeed much of the non-Western world; and to examine analytic issues to do with the "nature of power and resistance." With reference to this latter objective: How, precisely, were structures of inequality fashioned during the colonial encounter, often in the absence of more conventional, more coercive tools of domination? How was consciousness made and remade in this process? ... How were new hegemonies established and the "ground prepared," in [Antonio] Gramsci's phrase, for formal European political control? ... Even more fundamentally, how are we to understand the dialectics of culture and power, ideology and consciousness that shape such historical processes?'1 From the vantage point of 1991, the Comaroffs placed their project into a historiographical framework that has since changed considerably, in no small part due to their own work."1 At the time, the Comaroffs castigated anthropologists for 10 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 6. 11 Among many possibilities, some works of particular importance to southern Africa include Paul Stuart Landau, The Realm of the Word: Language, Gender and Christianity in a Southern African Kingdom (London, 1995); Henry Bredekamp and Robert Ross, eds., Missions and Christianity in South African History (Johannesburg, 1995); Pier M. Larson, "'Capacities and Modes of Thinking': Intellectual Engagements and Subaltern Hegemony in the Early History of Malagasy Christianity," AHR 102 (October 1997): 969-1002; Richard Elphick and Rodney Davenport, eds., Christianity in South Africa: A Political, Social, and Cultural History (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); and many other works discussed in David Chidester, Judy Tobler, and Darrel Wratten, Christianity in South Africa: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport, Conn., 1997). The sheer diversity of recent approaches to the history of mission Christianity, a growth field, is impossible to capture in a footnote but is suggested by works such as David Maxwell and Ingrid Lawrie, eds., Christianity and the African Imagination: Essays in Honour of Adrian Hastings (Leiden, 2001); Nicholas Thomas, "Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy and History in Early Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda," in Hall, Cultures of Empire; Susan Thorne, Congregational Missions and the Making of an Imperial Culture in Nineteenth- Century England (Stanford, Calif., 1999); Peter van der Veer, ed., Conversion to Moderities: The Globalization of Christianity (London, 1996); Robert W. Hefner, ed., Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (Berkeley, 1993); Lamin Sanneh, AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 439 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne neglecting both the study of colonialism and, more broadly, history itself. Historians paid more attention to missions but in the 1960s and 1970s often focused on the theoretically crude question of "whose side were the missionaries really on?" By the 1980s, mission history had been more fruitfully incorporated into work on such long-term processes as colonial conquest, capitalist expansion, state formation, and proletarianization. The methodological innovation of the Comaroffs in the early 1990s was, however, to underscore how much this new approach was itself limited by its "preoccupation with political economy at the expense of culture, symbolism, and ideology."12 They echoed the 1986 claim of Terence Ranger that most of the historiography of early missions to that point had overestimated the political and economic factors in its expansion-in a manner, according to the Comaroffs, stemming ultimately from oppositions between mind and matter at the ontological roots of our social thought.13 In rejecting a narrowly political-economic approach, the authors believed they could better answer the questions of why it was that missionaries succeeded in effecting broad social, political, and economic changes without substantial material resources (a question that, of course, assumes that this was accomplished by missionaries). What was needed, the Comaroffs claimed, was a study of consciousness: of why people articulated belief in certain things, why they took others for granted, how colonialism and consciousness were inextricably intertwined. It is in this sense that missionaries were most clearly colonial agents: they sought to remake the lifeworld of the Tswana, indeed, to colonize their consciousness. They did not necessarily seek directly and simplistically to incorpo- rate the Tswana into an unequal colonial world: they had dreamed instead of a "global democracy of material well-being and moral merit," in the Comaroffs' phrase.14 Nonetheless, their actions contributed to building an empire of inequality. This claim rests on the additional argument that the missionaries were the products of post-Enlightenment modernity, creations and agents of rationalization in the Weberian sense. Similarly, Tswana interlocutors made a variety of unexpected uses of the evangelical message, and of evangelical attempts to remake their world, again with unpredictable results. In sum, the encounter between colonial evangelism and the southern Tswana can best be described as a "long conversation," a continuing process in the course of which "signifiers were set afloat, fought over, and recaptured on both sides of the colonial encounter."15 Over the course of this conversation, the Tswana came to conceive of themselves as constituting a separate, Translating the Message: The Missionary Impact on Culture (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1989); and V. Y. Mudimbe, The Invention of Africa: Gnosis, Philosophy, and the Order of Knowledge (Bloomington, Ind., 1988). The Currents in World Christianity Project, at the University of Cambridge, has also since 1996 lent considerable impetus to the scholarly study of missions. A longstanding African literature reconsiders missions and the truth claims of missionaries, often from a theological perspective: for example, J. N. K. Mugambi, From Liberation to Reconstruction: African Christian Theology after the Cold War (Nairobi, 1996). Many works by African scholars are less well distributed in the West than they might be, given material constraints. From a wide variety of directions, missionary activity has become a newly invigorated area of research since the 1990s, although some of the more difficult underlying issues are perhaps not adequately discussed in all the literature. 12 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 8. 13 Terence Ranger, "Religious Movements and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa," African Studies Review 29 (1986): 1-69. 14 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 12. 15 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17-18. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 440 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh reified entity, with a set of "Tswana" customs, or setswana. At the same time, the "forms" of the "European worldview" became inscribed on the "African land- scape": "not only did colonialism produce reified cultural orders, it gave rise to a new hegemony amidst-and despite-cultural contestation."16 Throughout this discussion, the Comaroffs reject the poststructuralist claim that all meanings are equally tenuous and open to contestation, regretting the episte- mological hypochondria and consequent intellectual immobility to which postmod- ern critiques have given rise in academia-even as the authors uphold some of the central insights of such critiques, notably their insistence that the indeterminacies of meaning and action be addressed by scholars.17 What poststructuralists cannot address is the basic question of how some meanings get widely accepted over significant periods of time by those against whose interest it is to believe them. This is the problem of hegemony, raised by Gramsci (however sketchy his discussion in the Prison Notebooks) and developed by many social theorists.18 The Comaroffs offer a solution, though over-schematic in the literal sense of the word. They see human consciousness as existing on a spectrum from "hegemony" to "ideology." At the hegemony end of the spectrum, one finds the taken-for-granted inscribed in everyday life-those beliefs that are not questioned because they are not even noticed as beliefs. At the other end, one finds articulated ideology, which is available for debate and which often tries to bring into consciousness the hegemonic beliefs of earlier stages. Culture in general is the "space of signifying practice, the semantic ground on which human beings seek to construct and represent themselves and others-and hence, society and history."l9 Somewhat oddly, hegemonic concepts are described as "constructs and conventions that have come to be shared and naturalized through a political community," while ideology is "the expression and ultimately the possession of a particular social group, although it may be widely peddled beyond."20 This psychological structure seems artificial and unwieldy; it is unclear why the province of the hegemonic idea should be the political community (a tricky concept to define in any case), while ideology is described not only as the product of communities (rather than at least sometimes of individuals) but as the province of the social rather than, say, political or even self-consciously intellectual groupings. The definition of the political is murky here, as it is throughout the book, despite (even sometimes because of) the painstaking effort of the authors to demonstrate the deeply political nature of the everyday stuff of life; what is lacking here and elsewhere is a willingness to limit and define the nature of the political in such a manner as to make it meaningful to call something political in the first place. Be that as it may, this construction of group political psychology permits the Comaroffs to draw conclusions that are critically important for their overall project. Indeed, the reconstruction of struggles over the stuff of everyday life that takes pride of place in the second volume depends ultimately on this theoretical 16 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 18. 17 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17. 18 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison Notebooks of Antonio Gramsci, Quentin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, trans. (New York, 1991). 19 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 21. 20 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 24, my emphases. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 441 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume structure. Given the place of hegemony and ideology on an ever-changing spectrum, the two are constantly fluid; meanings are always being made and remade, as ideology challenges hegemony to reveal itself, and it is in the inchoate, fluid space between hegemony and ideology that human consciousness is at its most creative. Given that hegemony is constructed largely through the "assertion of control over various modes of symbolic production: over such things as educational and ritual processes, patterns of socialization, political and legal procedures, canons of style and self-representation, public communication, health and bodily discipline and so on," the realm of "symbolic production" is (presumably) political because it is a site for power struggles. This means both that the "symbolic production" is political and that resistance to modes of symbolic production that generate hegemony is political. Modes of resistance run across as wide a spectrum as modes of control, with at one end organized protest and other movements readily recognized as political by the West; at the other end are "gestures of tacit refusal and iconoclasms, gestures that sullenly and silently contest the forms of an existing hegemony."21 It is thus in this light that missions must be seen. They sought to extend hegemonic control over indigenous peoples by changing their worldviews to a point that new ways of behaving and seeing the world were completely internalized. Resistance to the specific forms of Christianity was also resistance to the message behind the signs. In the purest sense, resistance to Christian forms was resistance to the content of capitalism and to the global capitalist system; this is indeed a critical plank of Jean Comaroff's fascinating (if not uncontroversial) reading of African independent churches as quintessentially subversive because they appropriated and yet subverted Christian forms, in her important 1985 study Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance.22 Christian missions must also be re-read. Their gestures and ritual must be analyzed in order to see how missionaries were attempting to change far more than religious allegiance, acting as emissaries of modernity and economic transfor- mation. Finally, conversion was inextricably political, and as such a suitable site for political competition between colonizers and the colonized. The extremely rich remainder of this book and its successor volume work out the implications of these theoretical positions through a quite brilliant analysis of the nineteenth-century "colonial exchange" between the southern Tswana and the Nonconformist missions to them run first by the London Missionary Society (pioneers in the field) and then by their later-arriving brethren, the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. An additional important project of the authors throughout this study is to demonstrate the importance of an imagined Africa to the British sense of themselves and more broadly to the construction of modernity. As the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2, as part of a series of seven propositions about colonialism, "colonialism was as much involved in making the metropole, and the identities and ideologies of colonizers, as it was in (re)making peripheries and colonial sub- 21 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 31. 22 Jean Comaroff, Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance: The Culture and History of a South African People (Chicago, 1985). Contrast J. M. Schoffeleers, "Ritual Healing and Political Acquiescence: The Case of the Zionist Churches in Southern Africa," Africa 61, no. 1 (1991): 1-25. Schoffeleers sees Zionist healing churches as not necessarily subversive of the established order and sometimes supportive of it. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 442 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh jects."23 In particular, in developing the theme of Africa as a "negative trope in the language of modernity" in Volume 1, the Comaroffs were among the most influential of scholars to introduce into the history of missionary activity in South Africa the postcolonialist concern with the construction of the colonial or minority "other" as a means for self-construction on the part of the person doing the defining.24 Despite their influence on many literary scholars, in Volume 2 the Comaroffs ironically confess themselves "uneasy with most literary critical ap- proaches to colonialism," eschew a vulgar Hegelian approach, and stress that they prefer to focus on "selves" and "others" in the plural; we shall return to this issue. A final critical point is that the authors see the interaction between missionary and Tswana as a form of dialectic between two key groups of interlocutors, dependent on the notion of difference. In the second volume, the Comaroffs acknowledge with more force than in Volume 1 the existence of overlap on the ground, and they reemphasize that the idea of difference was created by the dialectical process, despite some merging of lifeways on the ground and the mutual influence of Tswana and British. Note their comment that "neither 'the colonizer' nor 'the colonized' represented an undifferentiated sociological or political reality, save in exceptional circumstances."25 Since the end product of the colonial encounter was so clearly the production of difference and a series of deeply embedded dialectical oppositions, the Comaroffs nonetheless argue that this is the most productive optic through which to view the early nineteenth-century encounter between European mission- aries and Africans. This model is furthermore essential to their theoretical account of the formation of hegemony. ONE OF THE THINGS I HAVE FOUND MOST PERPLEXING about the work of the Comaroffs is, nevertheless, the question of the extent to which it is appropriate to describe the Tswana encounter with Christianity as a form of dialectic. This question implies the ancillary question of who the agents of the dialectic were at given moments. On the face of it, these are tendentious concerns, since colonialism was so clearly in many ways a dialectic between colonized and colonizer, just as colonialism clearly generated reified views of colonizer and colonized alike. Missionaries themselves usually understood their activities in dialectical terms. Yet I think one can ask whether a dialectical approach to the history of Christianity in colonial contexts 23 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 22. 24 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 86. Those influenced by the Comaroffs in this respect include David Chidester, Savage Systems: Colonialism and Comparative Religion in Southern Africa (Charlottesville, Va., 1996); Leon de Kock, Civilising Barbarians: Missionary Narrative and African Textual Response in Nineteenth-Century South Africa (Johannesburg, 1996); Doug Stuart, "'Of Savages and Heroes': Discourses of Race, Nation and Gender in the Evangelical Missions to Southern Africa in the Early Nineteenth Century" (PhD dissertation, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, University of London, 1994). This approach of course represents the concerns of many scholars of the British Empire and the related construction of British identity. Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York, 1978; 2d edn., 1996); Henry L. Gates, ed., Race, Writing and Difference (Chicago, 1986); Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (London, 1992); Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Ann Stoler and Frederick Cooper, eds., Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World (Berkeley, Calif., 1997), including Stoler and Cooper, "Rethinking a Research Agenda." 25 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 24. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 443 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne does not fail to capture some aspects of social and political reality. This is above all because of the rapidity with which Christianity was out of the hands of the missionaries and settlers who brought it, the corresponding importance of non- Europeans in the spread of Christianity, the multiplicity of uses to which diverse interest groups of all ethnicities put Christianity as both a language and a practice, and the political and cultural complications of regions with multiple power players. These issues are brought out by a re-reading of the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana that occupy so key a role in the first volume of Of Revelation and Revolution. I should add that I made similar comments about the opening phases of the mission in an unpublished conference paper after the publication of Volume 1. The Comaroffs respond generously to this paper in Volume 2, as they do to a number of other critics, using the occasion to clarify and amplify their understanding of a dialectical approach. I do not want to beat a dead horse. Nonetheless, I think there are some useful differences of interpretation at stake, and so will abuse the Comaroffs' patience by briefly recapitulating a potential alternate reading of these opening gambits, before returning to the wider issue of different approaches to mission history.26 Let me first make a comment about regional issues. The lands of the southern Tswana were disrupted by colonialism, drought, hunger, and regional conflict well before the formal advent of missions. Furthermore, as Johannes du Bruyn has underscored, the lands inhabited by the southern Tswana were so profoundly affected by the Cape Colony to the south that it is problematic to frame a discussion of cultural colonialism primarily in terms of Europe and the Transvaal. In particular, the colonial firearms frontier moved with great speed, was highly destructive, and was arguably more important earlier than the Comaroffs suggest. Many different armed bands, some of them ethnically mixed, decimated peaceful groups in conflict situations exacerbated by hunger.27 Arguments about the regional context for evangelical missions to the Tswana are also implicit in a much wider body of literature about the so-called mfecane (or difaqane)-terms that have been much disputed by historians. Traditionally, the mfecane was a term given to the widespread wars, famines, and refugee movements that shook (and temporarily depopulated) much of the interior of southern Africa in the early nineteenth century, the impact of which on the Tswana the Comaroffs date from 1822. There is no space here to explore that debate, although it will be helpful to know that a 26 My re-reading of the opening encounter is based on my own work on LMS archives, which I consulted primarily with the aim of writing about contestation over the uses of Christianity within the Cape Colony and with a focus on Khoesan not Tswana uses of Christianity. It seems to me fruitful, however, to unite diverse perspectives on a very complex subject. Elizabeth Elbourne, Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (Montreal, 2002). There were four LMS delegations to the Tswana to establish a mission, not two as the Comaroffs have it. 27 Johannes du Bruyn, "Of Muffled Tswana and Overwhelming Missionaries: The Comaroffs and the Colonial Encounter," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 294-309; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 275-76. On Tswana views of the firearms frontier, see Robert Moffat to Richard Miles, Lattakoo [Kuruman], December 5, 1827, in Isaac Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman: Being the Journals and Letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828 (London, 1951), 274. Other letters in this collection describe frequent deadly raids throughout the 1820s, in which a wide variety of often ethnically mixed groups preyed on one another. On Cape influence, see also Johannes du Bruyn, "James Read en die Thlaping, 1816-1820," Historia 35 (1990). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 444 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh critical issue is whether or not covert slave trading from the Cape Colony and Portuguese territories was at the root of disruptions that have more traditionally been ascribed to the many conquests of the Zulu kingdom in the region of what is now Natal. The point I want to emphasize here is not only the great disruption in the region but also the plausibility of historian Neil Parsons's argument that Tswana territory had already been subject since the seventeenth century to political unrest and the large-scale movement of populations. Parsons in fact suggests that the roots of disruption and state formation in the area may well lie in destabilization that considerably antedated the 1820s and may in turn be linked in at least some way to eighteenth-century slave trading to the north and the rise of the predatory Cape Colony to the south.28 Scholars also tend to see later Afrikaner settler colonialism in the region as part of the same broad processes. All this calls into question the determinative impact of mission Christianity in an already destabilized region. Maybe political colonialism did precede cultural colonialism after all? How might we need to reconceptualize the Christian/Tswana encounter if we think of it as taking place in some sense in a frontier zone, or even a borderland, with multiple players, already characterized by cultural admixture, politically influenced uses of Christianity, and political turbulence? The Comaroffs are of course sensitive to these hugely important issues. I think nonetheless that they could emphasize regional complexity more and the power of missionary Christianity somewhat less in their discussion of the roots of material change (at both ends of the nineteenth century), as well as pay more attention to the implications for their overall theoretical argument of the fact that Africans tried to experiment in response to very difficult local conditions. It is also important that the missionaries entered as potential power brokers in a turbulent environment but were initially weak, able to manipulate power if and only if they could make the right alliances. With these types of broad issues in mind, the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana, so well described by the Comaroffs, might be re-read as conversations between a number of actors. Four LMS delegations traveled between 1813 and 1817 to the southern Tswana settlement known to the missionaries as Lattakoo (later Dithakong) to try to persuade the Tswana to accept missionaries. It is perhaps symbolically appropriate that none of these delegations was exclusively white. In addition to the delegations' African members, even the missionaries themselves included a black West Indian man and a Welsh speaker. Neither, come to that, was the Tswana polity entirely "Tswana." The Thlaping polity was relatively multi-ethnic; the chief Mothibi, for example, was half !Kora (a Khoekhoe-speaking group) and (like others of the chiefly lineage) married a !Kora woman. More significantly, the Europeans were not the only, or even the most important, players promoting an evangelical mission. Key from a Tswana perspective were regional actors, the Griqua (as they 28 Julian Cobbing, "The Mfecane as Alibi: Thoughts on Dithakong and Mbolompo," Journal of African History 29, no. 3 (1988): 487-519; Caroline Hamilton, ed., Mfecane Aftermath (Johannesburg, 1996), including Neil Parsons, "Prelude to Difaqane in the Interior of Southern Africa c. 1600-1822," 323-49; Neil Parsons, "Kicking the Hornets' Nest: A Third View of the Cobbing Controversy on the Mfecane/Difaqane," address to the University of Botswana History Society, Gabarone, Botswana, March 16, 1999 (available online through the University of Botswana History Department web page, at http://ubh.tripod.com/ub/np.htm). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 445 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume eventually came to be known), some of whom acted as patrons of the early LMS mission to the Tswana. The Griqua were clusters of settlers in the region of Khoekhoe descent, some of whom had white fathers and Khoesan mothers, and many of whom had migrated from the Cape Colony, epitomizing the remaking of identity in the wake of colonialism. Groups spearheaded by Griqua had established regional hegemony through their access to arms and horses. They provided important trade links with the Cape Colony and were sources of trade goods for the Tswana. The Griqua were already using Christianity in a variety of complicated ways, as a token of equality with white settlers, as justification for what Robert Ross has termed "sub-imperialism" with regard to the unconverted Tswana, and indeed as a basis for their reconstituted polities. Alliances with missionaries gave these emergent polities potential access to diplomacy and markets, including the arms trade, in addition to spiritual concerns. Indeed, on the way to Mothibi's settlement, British LMS inspector Campbell had helped compose a formal written constitution for a Griqua group, reflecting the symbolic uses of the language of law. The language of Christianity was already on the loose in the interior, in other words, and subject to interpretation in Griqualand as much as in the seminaries of Europe.29 The (Khoekhoe) !Kora had also been exposed to Christianity and were also competing by the 1820s to obtain guns and horses from the Cape Colony. The decision of Mothibi and his counselors about whether to accept an LMS mission was thus complicated by the fact that the LMS came under the protection of the powerful Griqua Kok clan. During a second LMS delegation to the Tswana (overlooked by the Comaroffs), for example, Adam Kok presented newly arrived missionaries to Mothibi and acted as their translator. Mothibi was anxious not to offend the powerful Kok family, but worried because his own people had since turned against the mission. In fact, he eventually sent these missionaries away altogether. When two missionaries told Mothibi that one of them "wrought in wood, and one that was to come wrought in Iron, that we would do all the work for him in that way that he wanted," Mothibi was pleased and told Kok "he could not think of rejecting those that came with or through the medium of him." When the missionaries pursued the issue of teaching, however, Mothibi worriedly told Kok that "he would not be instructed, and if A. Kok should endeavour to press it sharply upon him, and his refusal cause a variance between them, he said that he would rather take the flight from Lattakoo, with people." Kok had to reassure Mothibi that the Griqua leader would not force the Tswana chief to relocate if the Thlaping 29 This discussion both here and below draws on Robert Ross, Adam Kok's Griquas: A Study in the Development of Stratification in South Africa (Cambridge, 1976); Elizabeth Elbourne and Robert Ross, "Combating Spiritual and Social Bondage: Early Missions in the Cape Colony," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa; Alan Barnard, Hunters and Herders of Southern Africa: A Comparative Ethnography of the Khoisan Peoples (Cambridge, 1992), 156-75, 193-94; Martin Legassick, "The Northern Frontier to c. 1840: The Rise and Decline of the Griqua People," in Richard Elphick and Hermann Giliomee, eds., The Shaping of South African Society, 1652-1840 (Middletown, Conn., 1988), 358-420; Nigel Penn, "The Orange River Frontier Zone, c. 1700-1805," in Andrew B. Smith, ed., Einiqualand: Studies of the Orange River Frontier (Cape Town, 1995); Karel Schoeman, ed., Griqua Records: The Philippolis Captaincy, 1825-1861 (Cape Town, 1996). Mary and Robert Moffat's letters and journals make the station's vulnerability and its reliance on Griqua protection abundantly clear. See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 446 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh refused missionaries.30 Once the Kuruman mission had been established, it depended for its survival on Griqua military protection for many years. If missionaries were initially dependent on Griqua intermediaries, they were also materially dependent for travel and translation on Khoesan hired in the colony. The Khoekhoe and San had long borne the brunt of brutal colonial subjugation and were in many cases more receptive to conversion than groups beyond the Cape Colony. The Comaroffs indeed have a wonderful discussion of the occlusion of such intermediary figures from missionary accounts of putatively solitary heroic jour- neys.31 I would go further than the Comaroffs, however, and suggest that at least some of these companions saw themselves as fellow missionaries. On the first delegation, Campbell was accompanied by a number of Khoesan Christians from the Cape. Their prayers and preaching had made a pilgrimage route of their journey through a country of which they saw themselves as taking spiritual possession. They were active in trying to persuade Tswana individuals to accept missionaries.32 In 1814, a synod of the southern African LMS missionaries had "set aside" in a religious ceremony several men of Khoesan descent to act as LMS agents in the interior, several of whom, including Griqua leader Andries Waterboer, subse- quently played important roles in the politics of Transorangia. Cupido Kakkerlak, a product of Eastern Cape mission schools whose letters reveal a passionate spirituality, also itinerated in the region, attempting, albeit with little success, to evangelize among the !Kora. These men were employed by the LMS. As the Comaroffs point out, the society would devote much energy to reining in and controlling "native agents" after the earliest years of the mission. Nonetheless, evidence from the Cape suggests that there was also considerable evangelical activity by converts who were not formally paid by missionary societies, including elephant hunters such as Hendrik Boesak or long-range wagon drivers. In addition, as mission stations became more like churches and congregations fought for independence from missionary control around the mid-century mark, congregations had more authority, not less. My point is that evidence from elsewhere in southern Africa suggests that Christianity was spread by people with long-range contacts other than missionaries, presumably not necessarily in orthodox form. The central- ity of Khoesan people (and later other Africans) to European-led missions to the Tswana suggests a wider oral evangelical culture that the written records would not completely reflect.33 Be that as it may, the importance of Khoesan agents to the Tswana mission is most clearly exemplified by the fourth delegation to Lattakoo, led by a former 30 Robert Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, April 28, 1816, London Missionary Society Papers, South Africa Correspondence-Incoming, 6/3/C, Council for World Mission Archives, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London (hereafter, LMS-SA). See also LMS-SA, 6/3/C: J. Evans, R. Hamilton, and W. Corner to LMS Directors, Griquatown, May 27, 1816; LMS-SA, 6/3/C: R. Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, November 13, 1816. 31 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 78. 32 John Campbell, Travels in South Africa (London, 1815). The full extent of Khoesan missionary activity emerges most clearly from Campbell's unpublished journals, held at the National Library of South Africa, Cape Town. 33 LMS-SA, 5/2/F: "Minutes of the First Conference held by the African Missionaries at Graaff Reinet in August 1814"; V. C. Malherbe, "The Life and Times of Cupido Kakkerlak," Journal ofAfrican History 20 (1979): 365-79; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 81, on Robert Moffat's campaign against Kakkerlak. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 447 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne carpenter from Essex, James Read, after Mothibi had finally capitulated. Read brought with him an unusually large group of people of varied ethnic origins, mostly Khoesan, including, more problematically, his own Khoekhoe wife, Elizabeth Valentyn, and his pregnant former mistress, a San woman, Sabina Pretorius, whom he claimed to have met by accident on the road. At least ten Khoesan men and six Khoesan women accompanied Read, all of whom were church members and some of whom were "zealous persons."34 It is indeed possible that the Khoesan of the Cape Colony saw this as a Khoesan mission to the Tswana, brokered by their kin among the Griqua. In any case, once Robert Moffat took over the Lattakoo station in 1821 from Read (disgraced for his adultery), he would fight successfully to diminish the influence of the Khoesan group from the Cape Colony, whom he then firmly wrote out of the history of the station. He dismissed several for immorality, despite the resistance, in which women played prominent roles, of members of the group. Moffat also found himself opposed by Griqua factions, many of whom resented his power-mongering presence.35 Before the late 1810s, the earliest LMS agents in southern Africa were not particularly good or even very enthusiastic apostles of capitalist cultural practices, mostly because they were so poor themselves and so looked-down-upon by many respectable members of colonial society. More than a few also tended to believe in dreams, to hear the personal voice of God, or to look for the imminent end of the world. Those missionaries who were closest in time to the Enlightenment, in sum, acted least like the bourgeois agents of respectability described by the Comaroffs as quintessential exemplars of the rationalizing project of modernity. The colonial unrespectability of early missionaries was compounded by the fact that perhaps a third of them married African women before 1817, while several were involved in sexual scandals. Others took high-profile political positions that were unpopular among settlers. The Comaroffs pick up the story as Moffat, in common with many of his fellows, was urgently trying to reclaim the moral high ground and to reinvent the mission as visibly respectable and as focused on "civilization." A lot of this is more about the internal history of the LMS than about African Christianity; we certainly in general need more of the latter and perhaps less of the former. Nonetheless, it argues for the importance of local detail, and for the centrality of fractures within as well as between groups. It also points forward to ways in which converts would later need to perform "civilization" and "respectability" in order to maneuver on the colonial stage, not solely because their consciousnesses had been colonized. From the start, tensions among evangelicals themselves were fueled by anxiety over the rapid removal of Christianity from the control of white missionaries. This tension was arguably innate to a type of evangelical Christianity based on textual interpretation and the notion of divine inspiration, as well as being the product of Tswana reconstruction of Christian forms. Certainly, missionaries soon lost control even of "orthodox" Christianity. Among the northern Tswana, Paul Landau has brilliantly documented the use of Christianity by junior royals to challenge existing authority in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, in ways that escaped 34 LMS-SA, 6/4/A: James Read to Joseph Hardcastle, Bethelsdorp, August 7, 1816. 35 See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 448 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh a series of rather peripheral white missionaries. Among the southern Tswana, Thlaping elites also exploited divisions among missionaries to their own political ends. In 1842, for example, Tswana elite men successfully appealed to LMS superintendent John Philip to fire missionary Holloway Helmore for excessive interference in congregational affairs, including deposing Mothibi's son as a deacon.36 Missionaries to the Tswana experienced other humiliations. The coherent Tswana group targeted by the mission decamped, to be replaced by a more motley group of refugees. The mission was battered by raids from various groups, could not protect its members, and was not successful at all until it started picking up displaced persons in the 1830s. A NUMBER OF QUESTIONS arise from this type of re-reading. At a macro level, the region was already turbulent and populations were mobile, so Christianity scarcely arrived as the harbinger of globalization in anything other than an ideological sense. This raises in turn the thorny and ultimately unanswerable question of whether Christianity would have had the capacity to colonize minds without the prior disruption of material conditions. We are back at the difficult issue of how determinative "culture" is by itself. Perhaps in the end, this rejigging of chronology strengthens the Comaroffs' fundamental argument about the inextricability of "culture" and material struggle. It does nonetheless pose all the more sharply the question of how Christianity-and religious innovation, more broadly defined- functioned in a frontier zone in a manner that was independent of the machinations of white missionaries.37 Also at the "macro" level, the Tswana were not entirely "local," nor were they unused to cultural difference. In a multi-lingual, multi-religious environment, were missionaries really needed to contextualize "Tswana custom"? Missionary papers record Mothibi making distinctions between !Kora, Tswana, and colonial Khoekhoe customs, for example. I would not want to deny the importance of local identity, or to exaggerate the degree of long-range contacts of the southern Tswana, in contrast to the remarkable global reach and global identity claims of the early missionary movement. There are issues of tremendous importance raised by that contrast. But it also seems important that there were other regional interlocutors who were of greater material importance initially to the Tswana than the Europeans, and with whom they already had the kind of cultural interchanges that might have permitted the type of self-consciousness about "Tswana" identity that the Comaroffs see as the fruit of the "long conversation." This is also a way of asking about what the southern African interior looked like before formal European colonialism and whether the communities of the region were really as settled as they appeared. There are echoes here of an older debate about whether the encounter with the "macrocosmic" claims of the "world religions" Christianity and Islam shattered the 36 Landau, Realm of the Word; Elbourne, Blood Ground. On Helmore's dismissal, see LMS-SA, 19/2/A: James Read to LMS Directors, Philipton, June 3, 1843. The LMS Directors overturned the dismissal and censured Philip. 37 An interesting point of contrast is provided by Janet Hodgson, "A Battle for Sacred Power: Christian Beginnings among the Xhosa," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 449 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne "microcosm" of African localist religions, at a time when colonialism was shattering the microcosm of daily life. As Terence Ranger has argued, whatever the intellectual issues at stake, African societies, at least in the southern African interior, have to be recognized as also "macrocosmic" in the sense that they had long-range contacts, exchanged ideas over large swathes of territory (as the rapid spread of prophetic movements suggests), and rubbed up against a wide variety of different groups.38 The relative mobility of different communities was also a factor in breaking down localism. This type of approach, to my mind, decenters the European missionary-at least until the missionary came backed up by a colonial economy and a colonial army. The power exerted by the conditions of the "frontier zone" of the region is represented by the fact that even missionaries were compelled by material circumstances to take on features of African polities. The Comaroffs highlight the vision of Kuruman mission head and former gardener Robert Moffat, and his wife Mary, like that of many early nineteenth-century Nonconformist missionaries, as one of an unrealistic rural idyll, in which they sought to remake Africa in the image of a vanishing and imagined rural utopian Britain. One could, however, go further in considering the contradictions of Kuruman. Robert Moffat acted in many ways like an African leader as well as like a nostalgic Scot, and he needed to do so because of the material conditions of the frontier. In the 1820s, he proved unable to retain the allegiance of existing chiefs, for whom he was too clearly a competitor. As the refugee crisis accelerated, however, Moffat was able to gather together dispossessed people. The price of their admission was allegiance to the religion of the leader, since religion was used to rebuild communities. The currency of power was people. In similar ways, the control of women and their reproduction was important to the maintenance of the power of the patriarch, whether African chief or mission station head-Moffat even went so far, for example, as to attempt to discipline publicly Ann Hamilton, the wife of his colleague Robert Hamilton, for refusing to sleep with her husband.39 Moffat was more a part of the African frontier world than he might have liked to admit. A further critical point raised by this case study is that Africans transmitted Christianity more effectively than missionaries did. The centrality of Africans to the spread of Christianity means that much of the early history of the mission is unrecoverable. It is often unclear what kinds of Christianity were spread orally, for example. In other parts of southern Africa, prophetic figures emerged from time to time to use aspects of the Christian message in a context that suggests how quickly its language became unhinged from missionary guardianship. For example, Xhosa prophet and war hero Makanda Nxele (Makana), who led a Xhosa attack on the colony in 1819, had an earlier flirtation with the LMS; he was refused the right to work as a native agent when he insisted that there was a god for the white man and a god for the black man, and that he himself was related to Jesus Christ. The examples could be multiplied, as the Comaroffs would certainly agree. The lines 38 Terence Ranger, "The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History," in Hefner, Conversion to Christianity, 65-98. 39 Karel Schoeman, A Thorn Bush That Grows in the Path: The Missionary Career of Ann Hamilton, 1815-1823 (Cape Town, 1995); LMS-SA, 8/3/B: Robert Moffat to LMS, Lattakoo, July 12, 1821. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 450 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh between orthodoxy as the missionaries perceived it and African prophetic innova- tion were fluid and could be crossed in both directions, explaining the anxiety of white missionaries to bring Christianity back under control. In contrast to the Comaroffs, who emphasize the orthodoxy of the Nonconformists (whom they see in rather stereotypical, indeed Victorianist, terms), I would contend that this anxiety was familiar from debates within the European churches as well; after all, Methodism had once been perceived from within the citadels of Anglican orthodoxy in ways similar to Nonconformist views of African ecstatic innovation.40 If in the early days of missionary activity, Christianity was never fully in the control of the white missionaries who had brought it and only became popular once it was spread mostly by Africans and then transformed in the process, what does this imply about how we might conceptualize the study of colonial missions? I have suggested in the past that the messy scenario I outline above, with its complications and its fudging across the fault lines, calls into question the utility at the micro level of a strict dialectical approach to the history of colonial Christianity. The ghost of French structuralist understandings of G. W. Hegel's master-slave dialectic seems to me to hover over and to constrain the first volume. In response, however, the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2 that I have too conventional an understanding of their view of dialectical processes. A dialectic is not a "formal, abstract, or strictly teleological movement through time and space," in a Hegelian sense. Rather, it is a "process of reciprocal determination; a process of material, social and cultural articulation-involving sentient human beings rather than abstract forces or structures."41 Colonialism is dialectical because it creates binary understandings of difference and depends on the idea of opposites; it is also presumably dialectical because colonial interaction shapes both the colonized and the colonizer in new ways. Returning to the issue at the end of Volume 2, the Comaroffs reiterate (although this seems to me a somewhat different take) that by "dialectics" they mean "the mutually transforming play of social forces whose outcome is neither linear nor simply overdetermined." Defined thus, they add, "it is hard to imagine how colonial history could be regarded as anything else."42 In a weak sense, this is undeniable. Furthermore, on this model, it may not matter that the early encounter between missionaries and Tswana was so much messier than a "dialectical" account would suggest. The Comaroffs' point is precisely that out of difference and mess colonialism created binary opposites. At the same time, the exact nature of this process is often hard to capture. It is interesting to hear John Comaroff raise, in a recently published transcribed conversation with Homi Bhabha, what he terms the question of theory related to "the old Manichean opposition between colonizer and colonized, those 'iteratively marked,' positionally conflated points of reference around which the human geography of empire is so widely imagined. How, other than purely by descriptive insistence, does one displace the crushing logic of binarism in terms of which 40 Among many possibilities, see Deborah Valenze, Prophetic Sons and Daughters: Female Preaching and Popular Religion in Industrial England (Princeton, N.J., 1985). 41 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 29. 42 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 410. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 451 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne colonial worlds are apprehended and narrated?"43 I think this is a genuine point of tension for the Comaroffs, and quite rightly for many others. Perhaps my own discomfort arises from the difficulty of defining who the agents of dialectic are. In the end, the Comaroffs are interested in doing a historical anthropology of colonialism, more than of religion in colonial contexts. In this optic, the fault line of interest is that between colonized and colonizer. Religious belief did not, however, adhere to that fault line, even though both colonized and colonizers mobilized religion to the ends of power struggle. Nor of course was Christianity itself static. At the same time, the very notion of ethnic difference was still in the process of being worked out more broadly well past the early era of industrialization; therefore it was incorporated differently into the views of colonial evangelists at different times. From the point of view of the Comaroffs' overall narrative structure, this leads us away from the Enlightenment and onto the terrain of more immediately nineteenth-century colonial concerns. On this model, colonial conquest and the need to maintain and justify white rule shaped the mid- nineteenth-century culture of white Christianity. The end was not contained in the beginning but formed by colonial processes. Be that as it may, it is instructive that the Khoesan themselves were not able indefinitely to maintain the interstitial status to which Christianity gave them some access. By the early 1850s, many living in the Cape Colony were forced to choose between the colonial binaries of "black" and "white," in the 1850-1853 frontier war in which many people of Khoesan descent rebelled to fight against the "white" colony, as "race" became the determinant of colonial identity.44 The example also underscores the importance of "black" and "white" as colonial binaries arguably of more importance than "English" and "Tswana." All this should not, however, lead us to read the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries in terms of the mid-nineteenth. There is a basic problem here that dogs the Comaroffs throughout the books. Christianity is both text and practice, and therefore difficult to pin down. Not only that, it also permits and contains a wide variety both of practices and of different interpretations of its central themes. As text, Christianity became a free-floating signifier. As a practice, it was fought over bitterly by those who wanted to benefit from it. It is therefore difficult to identify Christianity clearly with one side of a dialectical or even dialogic model. This is all the more problematic because it is hard to define Christianity clearly, other than by appeals to authority. There was considerable scope for Africans to reinvent Christianity even from the beginning of the mission described by the Comaroffs. In some ways, this is precisely the Comaroffs' point: the signs of Christianity were fought over by competing ethnic groups. The Comaroffs nonetheless cannot bring themselves to see acceptance of Christianity in its unadulterated mission form as anything other than a defeat for 43 Bhabha and Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality," 22. 44 Elbourne, Blood Ground, 345-76; Robert Ross, "The Kat River Rebellion and Khoikhoi Nationalism: The Fate of an Ethnic Identification," Kronos: Journal of Cape History/Tydskrif vir Kaaplandse Geskiedenis 24 (November 1997): 91-105. On the emergence of racial stratification more generally, see Clifton C. Crais, White Supremacy and Black Resistance in Pre-industrial South Africa: The Making of the Colonial Order in the Eastern Cape, 1770-1865 (Cambridge, 1992); Timothy Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the Origins of the Racial Order (Charlottesville, Va., 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 452 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh African converts, who were thereby surrendering positions in the struggles over the colonization of consciousness. This position ultimately obscures complexity. EVENTUALLY, ONE MUST CONFRONT the type of question raised by Leon de Kock, about disciplinary conventions and the fetishization of the archive.45 De Kock argues that historians have spent too much time in their reaction to this wonderful book looking for factual flaws. To put the question in its boldest form, are the details really that essential to the overall project? Perhaps less tendentiously, what are the Comaroffs doing that goes beyond the reading of the words of colonists? The Comaroffs are important precisely because they move beyond words to decipher the gestures of people in the past. They put an anthropologist's emphasis on ritual and performance. They add thereby a crucial dimension to our reading of culture-bound historical archives. The Comaroffs' understanding of performance goes well beyond the staged performances of religious rites (although they acknowledge at the same time that people used the framework of religious ritual as a springboard for their own acting out of emotions and ideas). The missionaries are described as performing civilization, in the hope of educating the Tswana to adopt Western cultural practices through the power of display. In response, the Tswana performed noncompliance or acted out cultural bricolage. The tangible display of the body interests the Comaroffs, just as the material suffering of the colonized body that we readers know is to come provides a moral template for our reading of the early nineteenth century. The authors are particularly interested in space and the disposition of the body in space: their analyses frequently return, like the apartheid state itself, to issues of the control of the movement of African bodies.46 The Comaroffs are in some ways mistrustful of the self-interested and one-sided colonial text and find more solidity in the unspoken exchanges of bodily perfor- mance. It is this approach that both furnishes the greatest richness of the books and yet at the same time has excited unease in some interlocutors. If the evidence that remains of Tswana actions is mostly accounts of their physical activity, does that not place the reporter (the anthropologist, the historian, or even the reader) in the privileged position of interpreting Tswana actions, leaving the Tswana themselves rarely free to speak directly in their own voice? Is this even an accurate assessment of the nature of the historical record, or are there more extensive Tswana records? J. D. Y. Peel and Terence Ranger have both queried the absence of Tswana 45 De Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs." 46 For example, Volume 2 tellingly argues that integral to the late nineteenth-century struggle over African labor was a further struggle over the "distribution of people in space and, concomitantly, their passage across the social landscape." This is a typical discussion of space that appropriately reflects the struggle of the apartheid state to control the physical body, just as slavery had earlier lent mastery of the body to the slaveowner. Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 203. Rikk van Dijk and Peter Pels, "Contested Authorities and the Politics of Perception: Deconstructing the Study of Religion in Africa," in Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996), 245-70; Celestin Monga, The Anthropology of Anger: Civil Society and Democracy in Africa, Linda Fleck and Celestin Monga, trans. (Boulder, Colo., 1996), 112-15, on the "subversive and silent" nature of many African forms of dissent. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 453 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne narrative in Of Revelation and Revolution's first volume, for example.47 It seems unlikely that Christian converts did not leave a more extensive written record even in the early years of the mission or that community historical memory was not richer. The Comaroffs have responded that community historical narrative was not a genre espoused by the Tswana. They argue, furthermore, that the quest for "narrative" is elitist: it is "a short step from the stress on narrative to the history of elites, thence to elitist history."48 The issue remains uneasily unresolved. For Paul Landau, the Comaroffs themselves have a culturally constrained view of what constitutes "genuine narrative." They pay "little attention to genealogy, song, Tswana conversation, letters, political speech, tales, myth or church charters- because they are not 'genuine' narratives. Consequently Tswana people's ideas of fulfillment and transcendence do not show themselves in either volume."49 Even the Tswana intellectual and politician Sol Plaatje's great novel Mhudi, which draws on Tswana traditions about the difaqane, has been brought into the fray: for the Comaroffs, the fact that Plaatje himself claims that he could only gather material in fragments suggests that the southern Tswana indeed did not have a tradition of sustained historical narrative as late as the early twentieth century, even though Mhudi is more conventionally seen as a reflection at least to some extent of more sustained Tswana oral tradition.50 There is another critical debate at work in these discussions of agency and voice. The Comaroffs are very clear that missionary activity was part of the victimization of Africans. Much recent scholarship on southern African Christianity emphasizes instead the agency of Africans in using and reshaping Christianity to their own ends, as the focus has shifted away from missionaries and onto African Christians. In some ways, the Comaroffs want to restore a sense of moral indignation at the ways in which colonial missions did change the consciousness of Africans in a damaging fashion. Ironically, this may involve seeing people as victims who did not necessarily see themselves that way at the time-another issue of authorial voice. The Comaroffs' anger represents nonetheless an important strand of longstanding protest across the colonized world at the "colonization of the mind."51 It is impossible to deny that many Christian missionaries had a profoundly negative 47 J. D. Y. Peel, "For Who Hath Despised the Day of Small Things? Missionary Narratives and Historical Anthropology," Comparative Studies in Society and History 37, no. 3 (1995): 581-607; Terence Ranger, "No Missionary: No Exchange: No Story? Narrative in Southern Africa," unpublished paper read at All Souls College, Oxford, June 1992. 48 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 51. 49 Paul Landau, "Hegemony and History in Jean and John L. Comaroff's Of Revelation and Revolution," Africa 70, no. 3 (2000): 516. 50 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 46-47. 51 Steve Biko, I Write What I Like (1978), provides an eloquent locus classicus, as does Ezekiel Mphahlele, The African Image (London, 1962). Dickson A. Mungazi, The Mind of Black Africa (Westport, Conn., 1996), expresses typical anger, pp. 1-32. Greg Cuthbertson discusses Christian missions as a form of cultural violence in Charles Villa-Vicencio, ed., Theology and Violence: The South African Debate (Johannesburg, 1987). Sanneh, Translating the Message, emphasizes in contrast indigenous agency in the "translation" of Christianity from one culture to another. At a different end of the spectrum of debate might be those who see efforts to change the religious systems of indigenous peoples as a form (or as an element) of cultural genocide. A. Dirk Moses gives an eloquent overview of debates about genocide and cultural genocide: "Conceptual Blockages and Definitional Dilemmas in the 'Racial Century': Genocides of Indigenous Peoples and the Holocaust," Patterns of Prejudice 36, no. 4 (2002). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 454 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh impact in many areas of the world, not least when they gained (or were given) control of educational systems and thus had control over the formation of children.52 The fact that missionaries in various ways had such power was, however, almost invariably related to the expansion of the colonial state, not to the corrosive power of the message alone. Furthermore, as Peggy Brock has persuasively argued, missionary institutional structures affected the degree of control missionaries could exert over congregations, and these structures were affected by indigenous social arrangements as well as by state power.53 I would further contend, in ways there is not space to elaborate on fully here, that shame was a key element of colonial control. Mission education could and did reinforce this. At the same time, Christianity could also provide a language through which to reclaim dignity and deny the shaming process. I think it is important in sum to see Christianity as a language with many possible uses. Conversion, for example, fulfilled a wider and more flexible range of functions than is suggested by the Comaroffs' reduction of it to a symbolic field of struggle over capitalism. A reading that focuses too exclusively on Christianity as a language of cultural domination rather than a language with a multiplicity of possible meanings pays too much attention to the Western roots of Christianity and not enough to the multiple uses to which Africans very quickly put it. I make this comment in awareness of the extent to which the Comaroffs emphasize the need to explore African perspectives through every possible means, and the extent to which they clearly do this. However, conversion was even more of an empty signifier than the Comaroffs suggest, and some of these significations did not have a lot to do with rational capitalism. On the other hand, conversion was also an act, with attached rituals and beliefs, and this is important for understanding what the act meant in the immediate rather than long-term sense. Even if I am not completely at ease with a victimization model, I would want to add that these were and are enormously complicated processes. They had deep and often painful implications for many. This demands humility from any historian. Undergirding much of the above has been a historian's concern with chronology, which, while justified, cannot do full justice to the rich ferment of ideas in these remarkable books. The Comaroffs in fact comment on what they see as different disciplinary conventions and their inherent costs and benefits. They see real and longstanding differences, as they remark at the end of Volume 2, between the ideal type of a more conventional historian and the archetypal historical anthropologist: "differences between the ideographic and the nomothetic, between the effort to arrive at the fullest possible description of events in their infinite particularity and the desire to pick out general principles across time and space." The latter approach, they underscore, "demands a certain boldness of abstraction" and is "inherently risky."54 Although one would hope that historians are not as painstak- ingly antiquarian and abstraction-averse as this implies, there is some justice to the 52 A wonderfully instructive example of the ambiguities of Christian liberal control of the education system in South Africa, just before apartheid, is furnished by Shula Marks, ed., Not Either an Experimental Doll: The Separate Worlds of Three South African Women (London, 1985). 53 Peggy Brock, "Mission Encounters in the Colonial World: British Columbia and South-West Australia," Journal of Religious History 24, no. 2 (June 2000): 159-79. 54 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 411. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 455 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume comment, at least as it pertains to the Comaroffs' own work. The very manner in which they offer up a multitude of bold ideas, fizzing with possibility, also ensures that they offer a number of hostages to fortune. The Comaroffs are, for example, probably the most influential of recent scholars to argue for tight linkage between missionary activity, "modernity," "Enlighten- ment," and globalization. As Brian Stanley points out, this is also a question that has been much debated in the past few years by Christian theologians and mission theorists, with theologians paying particular attention to the damage done by the universalist truth claims of mission Christianity.55 More broadly, the Comaroffs are participating in a vast debate about modernity and postmodernity among social, political, and cultural theorists that it would be foolhardy to venture upon here. Their contribution is both important and vexed: important because they show the culturally constrained nature of claims to "modernity," vexed because despite everything they reify the truth claims of modernity and have too neat a view of the "Enlightenment," despite substantial historical debate on the utility of the concept. In so doing, they exaggerate the long-term influence of mission Christianity on the material subjugation of the Tswana, particularly by minimizing the impact of illiberal forces and overemphasizing cultural change. This could be true, however, and the significance of the Comaroffs' analysis of practice still be undimmed. The Comaroffs see "modernity" as "always historically constructed." It is in their view "an ideological formation in terms of which societies valorize their own practices by contrast to the specter of barbarism and other marks of negation."56 The Comaroffs link modernity to a view of the self as a rights-bearing atomistic individual, ultimately the "fully fledged bourgeois subject." They further associate modernity with a wide-ranging series of cultural and economic practices, including but not limited to dependence on a worldwide market, industrialization, the use of money, the use of "advanced" agricultural practices, the promotion of individuated space, and a sense of the body as private.57 It is part of the great richness of the Comaroffs' approach that they so fruitfully link cultural and economic practices, refusing to prioritize one over the other. At the same time, this view of modernity is slippery-and this is both its richness and an occasional source of frustration. The Comaroffs move between presenting the truth claims of modernity-its "text," if one likes-and the concrete material practices that advocates saw as characterizing the modern. The authors' desire not to take the truth claims of missionaries at face value make it difficult for them to spell out what, if any, were the irreducible material practices that defined modernity. If there weren't any, however, what was the material force behind the cultural claims and practices of missionaries? Yet it is arguable that at least some of what the Comaroffs identify as the 55 Brian Stanley, "Christian Missions and the Enlightenment: A Reevaluation," in Stanley, ed., Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids, Mich., 2001), 1-2. Stanley points to David Bosch's Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1991) as a seminal text for Christian theologians of mission in a postmodern context. 56 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 32. 57 A particularly influential figure for the Comaroffs' reading of the creation of the modern self in Volume 2 is Charles Taylor, whose Sources of the Self is a seminal text for their work. Taylor is of course a Christian Hegelian, whose view of the emergence of the modern self is certainly influenced by Hegelian dialectics, in however inexplicit a fashion. Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modem Identity (Cambridge, 1989). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 456 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh intellectual aspects of modernity are primarily identifiable with the truth claims of liberalism, and that the Comaroffs link these in turn to neoliberalism. There are echoes here of the great debates between radical and liberal historians in 1970s and 1980s South Africa, split over the origins of apartheid.58 For the "radical" school, liberalism, in both its ideological and economic sense, contributed to the economic domination that was at the root of apartheid. Radical historians argued that late nineteenth-century British capitalism precipitated and anticipated many features of South African society under apartheid, just as the Comaroffs here blame nine- teenth-century British liberal ideas about such things as money, markets, the individuated self, and the primacy of certain gender roles for the mental prepara- tion of the Tswana for labor oppression. Indeed, in their 2000 article "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," the Comaroffs explicitly link what they term the "Age of Revolution" (1789-1848) to the current "Age of Millennial Capitalism" with their similar anxieties and ontological challenges.59 This article makes explicit the magical, mystical elements of neoliberalism, and its culturally constrained forms, in contrast to neoliberals' claims to rationality and access to universal truth, just as Of Revelation and Revolution describes culturally constructed views of "modernity" and a "modern" economy. This is very helpful. Nonetheless, I think it would also be useful in Of Revelation and Revolution to be more explicit about actual intellectual debates among and between people: to have more ideology in places and less hegemony. The argument made by many, that early twentieth-century white liberals in practice came to support racist segregationist policies, while in ideological terms liberalism's support of the free market economy and nonviolent political action left it with little space to mobilize opposition to apartheid, all adds up to a trenchant and at least partially justified critique. By leaving out of the picture the intellectual shifts in liberalism (and among the opponents of liberalism) on the ground in the nineteenth century (and implicitly in the twentieth), however, the Comaroffs, like other authors, conflate several ills into one. Disciplinary specialists might want to throw further darts at the Comaroffs' narrative superstructure. Must industrialization and by implication modernity really begin in 1789? This is very French. What might be the impact of the questioning by economists of the linearity and suddenness of industrialization in Britain, which now looks more like an extended messy process than a "revolution" within neat chronological parameters? What difference does it make that the evangelical movement had many roots in seventeenth and eighteenth-century continental pietism? If Protestantism is the necessary condition of capitalism, where does this leave Catholic countries (not least France)? The point I want to close on is, however, that of tragedy. If there is, as I have suggested, an implicit narrative of origins that runs throughout Of Revelation and Revolution and lends the work its moral passion, this is not, for all that, a straightforward linear narrative of beginnings and ends. Rather, it is marked by 58 Christopher Saunders, The Making of the South African Past: Major Historians on Race and Class (Cape Town, 1988), describes the liberal/radical split. 59 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," Public Culture 12, no. 2 (2000): 334. This issue has been reprinted as Comaroff and Comaroff, eds., Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism (Durham, N.C., 2001). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 457 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] 458 Elizabeth Elbourne tragic irony and unexpected plot twists. The Nonconformist missionaries who labored so intensely to change the daily lives of Africans in order to induct them into the "modern" economy did not foresee the devastating consequences of that economy for the Tswana peasantry (as might be said of some of the missionaries' modern counterparts, development workers). At the same time, the Comaroffs write as though missionaries inducted the Tswana into the global market and colonized their consciousness in a way that made their engagement more likely. It seems to me just as possible that the global market and related economic coercion came crashing into the lives and consciousness of the Tswana in a way about which they could do little, particularly as their contact was frequently mediated by coercive legislation on the part of the colonial state.60 Missionaries reflected the efforts of other Westerners to moralize the market: to see it as a force for moral good. In this, they shared the ambiguities (and guilty conscience?) of nineteenth-century liberalism. It does not take a great leap of the imagination to find contemporary parallels in the neoliberal discourse, and of course the Comaroffs are right that this putatively universalist creed contains deeply embedded culturally specific assumptions, as did nineteenth-century Anglo- American liberalism itself.61 If nonetheless market expansion is relatively inevita- ble, then is it not appropriate to ask on what terms this expansion might be the most moral? Or is the most appropriate response full-fledged resistance? Must the global marketplace necessarily be bad, on average, for Africa? From a somewhat different point on the ideological spectrum, one might also ask whether in fact Africa is incorporated into the global market on the equal terms supposedly demanded by neoliberal economics. These are clearly issues beyond the scope of this article, but not without historical parallels. In late nineteenth and early twentieth-century terms, the Tswana, it could be argued, were crowded out of an agricultural market in which many were making profits and farming more effectively than whites, in fact, in order to favor white farmers artificially and in order to bolster labor for the mines, again through "artificial" restraints on movement, through the theft of land, through racially targeted taxation, and through coercive legislation. This antici- pated many of the later strategies of apartheid.62 It is not as clear to me as it is to the Comaroffs that the questions some missionaries and Africans were asking about the possibility of a just economy were not the right ones, even if the culturally constrained answers they gave were so obviously, hopelessly wrong. I do not have answers to these questions either-merely some sympathy with the misguided quest for certainty in a rapidly changing, brutal, and deeply uncertain economic universe. 60 This is a point also made by Landau, "Hegemony and History." 61 Uday Mehta, Liberalism and Empire: A Study in Nineteenth-Century British Liberal Thought (Chicago, 1999); Mehta, "Liberal Strategies of Exclusion," in Stoler and Cooper, Tensions of Empire, 59-86. 62 Ted Matsetela, "The Life Story of Mma-Pooe: Aspects of Sharecropping and Proletarianization in the Northern Orange Free State 1890-1930," in Shula Marks and Richard Rathbone, eds., Industrialization and Social Change in South Africa (New York, 1982), 212-37; Charles Van Onselen, The Seed Is Mine: The Life of Kas Maine, a South African Sharecropper, 1894-1985 (Cape Town, 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh I HAVE SUGGESTED THROUGHOUT THIS ESSAY that the Comaroffs present nineteenth- century missionaries as fairly powerful figures, able to effect changes in the consciousness of Tswana interlocutors, despite the resistance of many. In contrast, I see Christianity as important but, with some important exceptions, not necessarily white missionaries themselves. I also suggest that the linkages between political and cultural colonialism are often unclear in Of Revelation and Revolution, and that the role of "cultural colonialism" is overdetermined. If it is possible to guess about such counterfactuals, I suspect that at least some of the missionaries whose work has been scrutinized by the Comaroffs would ironically have preferred the Comaroffs' account of their activities to mine, however doubtless upset they would have been at the implication that their preaching laid the groundwork for the Tswana's entrapment within enslaving capitalist systems. But the Comaroffs do give the missionaries credit for a coherent, rationalizing, globalizing system that taught one universal truth. They also recognize the missionaries' own belief that they might instill into their converts the necessary principles of "civilization" to transform totally their supposedly primitive economies and to move them rapidly up the scale of human development toward settled commercial societies. My own interpretation, while recognizing the tremendous importance of the universalizing project as a mode of domination, calls into question the capacity of Christianity to convey as effectively as it would have liked a message of unifying orthodoxy, or indeed the overall ability of missionaries to accomplish their objectives. From the very beginning of the activity of Christians in Africa, as elsewhere in the world, Christianity was out of control, unorthodox, and an available subject for reinter- pretation in light of the needs of its interlocutors. Ironically, in sum, it is not always wise to take missionaries at their word. Elizabeth Elbourne is an associate professor in the Department of History at McGill University, where she teaches British and South African history. She is also currently a visiting fellow in the History Program of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National University. Her publications include Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (2002), as well as various articles, most recently "Domesticity and Disposession: British Ideologies of 'Home' and the Primitive at Work in the Early Nineteenth-Century Cape," in Wendy Woodward, Patricia Hayes, and Gary Minkley, eds., Deep Histories: Gender and Colonialism in Southern Africa (2002). She earned her D.Phil. in 1992 from the University of Oxford, under the supervision of Terence Ranger. Her major fields of interest include colonialism, gender, and religion, especially the early nineteenth- century British white settler empire and southern Africa. Her current work in progress explores the creation of networks around the idea of being "aborig- inal" in the early nineteenth-century British empire, and is focusing on links between New South Wales, the Cape Colony, New Zealand, and Canadian colonies as well as on activists in Great Britain. She is also writing on liberalism and Khoekhoe citizenship at the Cape. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 459 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/533242

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522214
Date: 04 2008
Author(s): Reynolds, Thomas E.
Abstract: Theorizing for theory’s sake certainly has its place, and not every book needs to be focused on practical issues. Nonetheless, even the most gymnastic theoretician needs some grounding connection to relevant cases. Reynolds is profoundly uninterested in this level of analysis. While he flies through the theoretical air with great speed in The Broken Whole, it is unclear whether the book can make any sort of stable or decisive landing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/587599

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 589491
2008
Author(s): Stewart Garrett
Abstract: Ibid., p. 111. Even Riffaterre's approach to the structuring unsaid of textual writing can be seen to represent on its own terms a shift from the ontology of narrative toward its epistemology at the level of form rather than content. By the deliberate provocation of his title, his semiotic narratology is interested not just in the structural essence of fiction as art but in its specific truth:a story's immanent signifying patterns in their subtextual disclosure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589488

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Balsamo Gian
Abstract: Nussbaum, Upheavals of Thought, 590.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589948

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 592372
Date: 01 2009
Author(s): Miller Richard B.
Abstract: Anscombe, “The Justice of the Present War Examined,” 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592359

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Hall, W. David
Abstract: Hall sees that this argument as it develops across Ricoeur’s writings raises questions about the role of reciprocity in the Ricoeur texts he considers. He acknowledges that Ricoeur’s recognition that not all human relations are face‐to‐face leads him beyond a narrow call for solicitude and friendship at this level to a concern for the level of institutions as well. It is at this level of institutions that the question of justice really arises, and with it new questions regarding responsibility and possible reciprocity, particularly regarding our ability to respond to others who we may never meet face‐to‐face. As Hall says, “love often demands a dimension of self‐sacrifice, most notably in the form of renouncing a strict reciprocity” (150). His case could have been stronger here if he had incorporated Ricoeur’s discussions of the work of John Rawls and the antisacrificial notion of justice he saw there. Beyond this, Hall’s focal idea of a relation between love and justice marked by what he calls a poetic tension should also have included some discussion of what Ricoeur says in The Course of Recognition(Institute for Human Sciences Vienna Lecture Series, trans. David Pellauer [Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005]; originally published asParcours de la reconnaissance[Paris: Éditions Stock, 2004]) about the limits of existing philosophies of recognition, which he saw as not getting any further than a notion of reciprocal recognition in just the sense Hall criticizes. Ricoeur’s own answer was to begin there to lay out the idea of mutual recognition beyond mere reciprocity, a higher form of recognition that stands closer, as Hall anticipates, to something like the reception of a gift that expects nothing in return but which may lead to a second gift given to others. Readers who wish to build on Hall’s argument will want also to look at this last major book from Ricoeur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592470

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 596101
Date: 04 2009
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: I conclude, then, that the task of theological ethics and, more broadly, the humanities and, if I can be bold, more broadly still the university itself is to examine carefully and critically and from multiple perspectives—including the religions—what it means to be and to live as responsible human beings within the vulnerabilities and complexities of forms of life. When we within our several disciplines respond to this task with all the vitality and resources at our disposal, then, I believe, knowledge will indeed grow from more to more, and life will be increased without the illusions of power or servitude to the tyranny of idols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/596069

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: 597753
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Zimmerman Virginia
Abstract: Excavating Victoriansbrings out very clearly the discomfort the newly discovered vast expanse of geological time gave the Victorians and examines some of the writings that helped shape responses to it. Though the book may not be of particular relevance to the historian focusing closely on Victorian geology or archaeology, for the historian of science who examines wider cultural or literary phenomena it is an important guide to the stimulus that the writings of geologists and archaeologists gave other mid-Victorian writers. Nevertheless, the specialist or narrowly focused historian of science will probably find it frustrating rather than helpful, since the overviews of Victorian geology and archaeology are brief and there are distracting errors, such as the attribution of theNinth Bridgewater Treatiseto William Buckland rather than to Charles Babbage (p. 18). The chapters on Tennyson and Dickens are both interesting and illuminating, although a reader accustomed to historical argument and with limited knowledge of the techniques of literary criticism may find them faintly bewildering in places. Nonetheless, it is in this part of the analysis that the work provides valuable guidance to the historian of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/597725

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: Éditions du Cerf
Issue: 598752
Date: 3 2006
Author(s): Eades Caroline
Abstract: Readers without solid background knowledge of French film and colonial history may have some difficulty navigating through Eades's tightly packed, allusive prose, especially since no index of any kind is provided. This absence is difficult to understand in a work of serious scholarship aimed at academic readers, as is the press's decision to invest in numerous glossy still‐frame illustrations that add nothing substantive to the analysis. However, the extensive, thematically organized filmographies and bibliographies that conclude the volume should prove very useful to all readers by providing a starting point for further reading and research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/598731

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598771
Date: 8 2009
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: See Andrew, “Time Zones and Jetlag: The Flows and Phases of World Cinema,” in World Cinemas,Transnational Perspectives, ed. Natasa Durovicová and Kathleen Newman (forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/599587

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In providing clarification of previous works, Reflections on the Justis exceptionally helpful. Of particular interest in this volume is the paradoxical nature of authority—What is authority? How is it legitimated? Is it claimed or granted?—the existence of vulnerability and passivity within autonomy and initiative, and the relationship between moral ideals and historical manifestation, questions that exist more on the margins ofOneself as Another. Those interested in Ricoeur’s religious thought will find little of direct interest here. Those who see a deep connection between his moral philosophy and his philosophy of religion will find some confirmation, but there are other places where the connections are more explicitly manifest.Reflections on the Justis best approached as a companion volume to earlier philosophical works, certainlyThe Justbut perhaps more importantlyOneself as Another. As such, it holds an important place in Ricoeur’s oeuvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600278

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Mrozik, Susanne
Abstract: This second, more normative dimension of Mrozik’s project opens up some challenging questions. If it is the case, as she suggests, that a sympathetic reading of the Compendium of Trainingcan provide valuable intellectual resources for contemporary ethical reflection, it remains unclear to me how our engagement with this text should proceed, given the significant disparities in cosmological assumptions (e.g., karmic causation and rebirth) and forms of practice that separate Mrozik’s contemporary readers from the text’s original audience. The text, moreover, appears less concerned with advancing particular truth claims than with creating a distinctive kind of religious subjectivity through ascetic and ritualized practice. Can we assess the value of the text’s ethical ideals apart from the forms of discipline and practice with which they were linked in medieval India? IfVirtuous Bodiesleaves such questions open to further exploration and analysis, its nuanced reading of theCompendium of Trainingbrings into sharper focus the centrality of human embodiment in South Asian Buddhist religious discourses and encourages us to reflect deeply on its implications for our own ethical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600285

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 603531
Date: 10 2009
Author(s): Stokes Christopher
Abstract: Coleridge, Shorter Works, 2:1118–19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600876

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 644539
Date: 01 2010
Author(s): Franke, William
Abstract: Franke’s book has considerable merit, but I have a theoretical and a practical concern with his appropriation of negative theology. First, negative theology is never entirely negative, and while Franke recognizes that poetic language is both deconstructive and open, he nevertheless insists that our various theologies—literary or religious—finally have no positive content. Perhaps this is the postmodernism in his negative theology because this is not entirely consistent with the theological tradition. A good counterexample is Pseudo‐Dionysius, whose mystical theology seeks finally to overcome the limitations of both positive and negative speaking. Dionysius insists that God is love in a way that is both negative and positive. On this, Franke should consider the work of Jean‐Luc Marion and especially his response to Jacques Derrida on the subject of negative theology, and this omission is a considerable oversight. Second, many people of various faiths will never accept that their understanding of the transcendent has no positive content, and if this is a precondition for dialogue, then it is unlikely to occur. On this, the practical dimension of Franke’s study needs more development, as well as more traditional examples of poetic and theological openness from contemporary religious life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/649992

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 605587
Date: 6 2010
Author(s): Coleman Charly
Abstract: Ibid., 1:11–12, 2:443–49, quote on 1:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651614

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651998
Date: 07 2010
Author(s): Kitts Margo
Abstract: Johann Huizinga, Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play‐Element in Culture(Boston: Beacon, 1950); Adolf E. Jensen,Myth and Cult among Primitive Peoples, trans. Marianna Tax Choldin and Wolfgang Weissleder (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963); Pierre Smith, “Aspects of the Organization of Rites,” inBetween Belief and Transgression: Structuralist Essays in Religion, History and Myth, ed. Michael Izard and Pierre Smith and trans. John Leavitt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), 103–28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651708

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651999
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Walter Gregory
Abstract: For instance, Hans Urs von Balthasar’s provocative account of the Eucharist: Hans Urs von Balthasar, Theodramatik(Einselden: Johannes, 1980), 3:363–78. Von Balthasar’s use of dramatic conceptuality seems to satisfy these demands by offering the Eucharist as a phenomenon that is surprising and free yet deeply imbedded within the economy of creation as a drama. Also of significance would be Bernd Wannenwetsch,Political Worship: Ethics for Christian Citizens, trans. Margaret Kohl (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/654823

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Thanks to Clark Gilpin for helping me to see this double displacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655207

Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 652685
Date: 9 2010
Author(s): Bono James J.
Abstract: For an approach to the issues raised by this Focus section see James J. Bono, “Perception, Living Matter, Cognitive Systems, Immune Networks: A Whiteheadian Future for Science Studies,” Configurations, 2005,13:135–181.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655792

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 653501
Date: 08 2010
Author(s): Schildgen Brenda Deen
Abstract: Guy Guldentops, “The Sagacity of Bees: An Aristotelian Topos in Thirteenth-Century Philosophy,” in Steel, Guldentops, and Beullens, Aristotle's Animals, 296.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656448

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Pranger Burcht
Abstract: Augustine, Confessiones13.38.53; Chadwick, 305.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656607

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 659348
Date: 4 2011
Author(s): Landy Joshua
Abstract: It is true, of course, that we have a much harder time postulating an author for Adaptation—that is, working out what an “ideal” Kaufman would have wanted the overall effect of his film to be—than postulating an author for the average Hollywood movie. Still, it is surely not the case thatAdaptation“undermines the concept of the author as a unifying origin and legitimation,” as Karen Diehl claims (Karen Diehl, “Once upon an Adaptation: Traces of the Authorial on Film,” inBooks in Motion: Adaptation, Intertextuality, Authorship, ed. Mireia Aragay [Amsterdam, 2005], p. 100). It may be harder to know what Kaufman is up to than what James Cameron (say) is up to, but Kaufman is clearly up tosomething, and the film bears if anything a more powerful stamp of an original vision than that average movie we find easier to read. In fact,Adaptationhas only solidified Kaufman's reputation as a filmmaker with an idiosyncratic and internally consistent way of seeing the world. (Although cinema is a collaborative enterprise, it is reasonable to imagine Spike Jonze and company collectively seeking to realize Kaufman's design.) Far from putting inherited notions of authorship into question, then, it has comfortably positioned Kaufman as the “unifying origin” of his various works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659355

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 660269
Date: 08 2011
Author(s): Guenther Genevieve
Abstract: For the original argument that early modern drama evacuated spiritual forms of their content, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Shakespeare and the Exorcists,” in Shakespearean Negotiations: The Circulation of Social Energy in Renaissance England(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 94–128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/662147

Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662056
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Bowman Sharon
Abstract: In sum, this is one of the most important books on selves or the practical side of personhood in the last decade. It is also well written; the particular arguments are virtually always clear, and it is not too hard to keep track of their role within in the larger argument of the book. Some portions rise to an almost literary style and provide a rich survey of key ideas in twentieth-century French philosophy, while others engage quite originally with scholarship in moral psychology and theories of self-knowledge that will be more familiar to analytic readers. This work also complements the more detailed ethical theory on Larmore’s other books. Despite its relative inattention to volitional aspects of practical identity, and some questionable moves in the critique of authenticity, then, this work is still highly recommended.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663580

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: The Captivity of Innocencesuccessfully concludes an innovative study of primeval myth in J’s Genesis. Its argument about exilic authorship serves as a springboard for a free and erudite exploration of biblical concerns with name, exile, and the paradoxes of divine-human relations. Very few biblical scholars today can compass this range of biblical, literary, and philosophical literature with such finesse. At a time when biblical studies incorporate a wider range of methods than ever, LaCocque, like Roland Barthes (whom he cites), powerfully combines traditional and more contemporary intellectual paradigms. Advanced students and scholars will find inThe Captivity of Innocencea far-reaching and engaging reading of Genesis 11 by a virtuoso of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663737

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Regan Ethna
Abstract: The text covers a lot of ground, delving into many of the touch points between theology and human rights and endeavoring to demonstrate how those points can be sources of mutual enrichment rather than conflict. At times the comprehensive scope of the text, which draws on the insights of so many, makes it a challenging read and leaves the reader wanting more development and illustration of the fruits of the author’s argument. Overall, the text is an important contribution to the constructive engagement between theology and human rights discourse and is a serious challenge to those in either camp who would peremptorily reject the insights of the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663745

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 665386
Date: 10 01, 2012
Author(s): Walton Heather,
Abstract: The cultural and social sciences are welcome to examine and critique theology and Christian practice, and theology can profitably learn from these studies, but the studies themselves are not theology. To be theology, even in an interdisciplinary sense, the work must become constructive and speak to the religiousthought and practice of specific communities or faith traditions. In any given community, theology can become a displaced language in need of renewal, but theology can also uncover the displaced or implicit religion within the seemingly secular. To do this well, theology must remain in critical tension with the cultural sciences, including literature. The result may well be deconstructive, but such radical critique is necessary for any living tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/668266

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 669643
Date: 05 01, 2013
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: In sum: while it has it flaws, this book is one of the most comprehensive and up-to-date surveys of the field of theories of religion around. It is worth the cover price for that alone, which makes it definitely recommendable. Those who want to learn about the current state of theory, especially if they tend in the realist direction, will find this book very useful. Constructivists acquainted with theory will likely find it less so.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/669654

Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 671448
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Feder Yitzhaq
Abstract: For a different view on the function of conceptual blending, cf. E. G. Slingerland, “Conceptual Blending, Somatic Marking and Normativity: A Case Example from Ancient Chinese,” Cognitive Linguistics16 (2005): 557–84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/671434

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 668652
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Csordas Thomas
Abstract: Pablo Wright observes that while I leave behind Geertz’s concept of a cultural system with respect to morality, I retain the Geertzian concern with symbols and meaning. I would not dispute Wright’s statement that meaning is the master concept on a methodological level prior to the substantive issue of evil but would stress that in addition to idiom, code, practice, and symbol, experience must figure into a comprehensive account. Wright’s evocative references to “moral installation in the world” (one might consider terms like investment, suffusion, and tonality, as well as installation) and morality as a “practiced ontology in the micropolitics of social life” deserve further elaboration. Wright endorses a pluralized notion of moralities, but I reiterate that even more important is an adjectival sense of moral rather than the nominal morality. Like Parkin, Wright poses the question of how to reintroduce the ethnographically salient notions of cosmological and radical evil once evil is first construed as a human and intersubjective phenomenon. The answer is to ask how these dimensions come into play in the experiential immediacy of social life, for example, how a cosmological battle between angels and devils is experienced concretely on the human scale. Finally, he suggests that concepts of power from Otto and the shadow from Jung may be alternatives to the notion of evil, though I rejoin that they are just as much in need of critique with respect to Christian overtones. They may be valuable for the study of morality but are not suitable replacements for evil in the sense for which I have argued.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672210

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 670329
Date: 07 01, 2013
Author(s): Fisher Cass
Abstract: Despite these caveats, Contemplative Nationis highly recommended for scholars of Jewish studies, religious studies, philosophy, and theology. The book is an excellent example of how to apply hermeneutical theories to the study of Judaism, how to bridge the gap between continental philosophy and analytic philosophy, and how to expand the scope of Jewish studies by appreciating the nature of theological discourse. While Judaica scholars could use the book in university-level courses, and rabbis could apply its approach to synagogue life, the claim that “Israel” is a “contemplative nation” will hardly resonate with most Jews today. It is very doubtful that the book could “guide the way for [the] future” of the Jewish people’s survival (226), precisely because Jews today are overwhelmingly secular, and the culture in which Jews live, both in Israel and in the Diaspora, is anti-intellectual and antitheological. Furthermore, if Fisher is so keen on Philo, he should have also reminded his readers of the fate of Philo’s enterprise: it was no coincidence that Philo became one of the Church Fathers and that his exegetical/hermeneutical project was not adopted by the tradition that became normative Judaism. When “Israel” denotes a nation of divine contemplators, “carnal Israel” (namely “Israel” as a historical, cultural, and ethnic entity) is marginalized, denigrated, and persecuted. It is true that Jewish religious life is theological, but being Jewish cannot be reduced to contemplating God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672230

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673367
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Lehnhof Kent R.
Abstract: Critchley uses the term in a discussion of Levinas and politics. Noting that government tends to become tyrannical when left to itself, Critchley commends the way Levinas’s ethical ideas can cultivate forms of “dissensual emancipatory praxis” that “work against the consensual idyll of the state, not in order to do away with the state or consensus, but to bring about its endless betterment” (“Five Problems in Levinas’s View of Politics,” 183).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/673478

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 674410
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Rüpke Jörg
Abstract: See the analysis of Metzger ( Religion, Geschichte, Nation). For the modern spread of the paradigm, see Leigh E. Schmidt, “A History of All Religions,”Journal of the Early Republic24 (2004): 327–34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/674241

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673750
Date: 08 01, 2014
Author(s): Hequembourg Stephen
Abstract: See George Herbert, “The Forerunners” and “Jordan (I),” in George Herbert: The Complete English Poems, ed. John Tobin (New York: Penguin, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/676498

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Urbaniak Jakub
Abstract: Depoortere, Badiou and Theology, 123–24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677288

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673747
Date: 03 01, 2014
Abstract: Žižek, Slavoj. Demanding the Impossible. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2013. $14.95 (paper). 160 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677379

Journal Title: Renaissance Drama
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673118
Date: 09 01, 2014
Author(s): Huth Kimberly
Abstract: Wayne C. Booth, “Metaphor as Rhetoric: The Problem of Evaluation,” in Sacks, On Metaphor, 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/678121

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: Peperzak in this book also offers continental thinkers an appealing alternative to the theological turn of phenomenology as practiced by Jean-Luc Marion and others. While Peperzak takes seriously the idea that “God cannot be investigated or explained … because God is not given as a describable phenomenon,” this realization does not turn his phenomenology away from the investigation of rational thinking because for Peperzak reason itself has to be rethought in terms of the intersubjective encounters between nonthematizable—human and divine—sayers (121). Consequently, much more than some of the thinkers of the theological turn, Peperzak’s work maintains a broadly humanist sensibility and a conviction that theological thinking and philosophy can be integrated quite well, provided the latter does not close itself off in autarky. In his humanism, Peperzak echoes the best elements in the philosophical style both of his teacher Paul Ricoeur and the philosophical tradition of his own Catholic faith, although he implicitly critiques the former for insisting too vehemently on the autonomy of philosophy (128) and calls out the latter for separating “natural reason” from faith (182–86). For his own part, Peperzak hopes to maintain an open space between faith and reason: “I do not see any valid argument against the integration of philosophical insights into a faith-inspired theology … neither would I protest if an integrated reflection of the Christian community about its faith would call itself philosophia” (160). For the many who share similar sentiments today,Thinking about Thinkingwill make a valuable guide to the conversation of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/679208

Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Missouri Press
Issue: jpolitics.68.issue-2
Date: 05 2004
Author(s): Eubanks Cecil
Abstract: Both Faith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsilluminate and challenge the assumptions in Voegelin's philosophy and lead readers in new directions for Voegelinian scholarship. They are indispensable readings for students of political philosophy in their examination of transcendence, philosophy, and politics. By seeing Voegelin as a postmodern thinker and by showing his exchange with Strauss, both of these books provide us with a broader context to understand Voegelin's political philosophy. As part of the University of Missouri Press' new series, bothFaith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsprovide intellectually provocative and serious-minded secondary works on Eric Voegelin and his ultimate place in political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1111/j.1468-2508.2006.00420_20.x

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Issue: 594996
Date: 6 2, 2005
Author(s): Anderson Judith H
Abstract: The very centrality of its questions to literary studies may be the greatest handicap for Translating Investments.Words That Matter, especially in its recovery of grammatical theory, had more surprises page-for-page. Here the big ideas are perforce more familiar, the innovations more incremental. The reward, however, is a fine sense of metaphor as a cultural project across an especially broad range of terrain in early modern England. Anderson insists, and teaches us to insist, on the local, historical conditions of metaphor’s torpor and vitality, how writers thought about and went about killing and quickening the trope she calls “the scaffolding of human culture” (216).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1353/ren.2008.0264

Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Galaxia-Gutemberg
Issue: crnewcentrevi.14.issue-3
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Valéry Paul
Abstract: Benjamin also notes: “Every present day is determined by the images that are synchronic with it: each ‘now’ is the now of a particular recognizability. In it, truth is charged to the bursting point with time. (This point of explosion, and nothing else, is the death of the intentio, which thus coincides with the birth of authentic historical time, the time of truth.) It is not that what is past casts its light on what is present, or what is present its light on what is past; rather, image is that wherein what has been comes together in a flash with the now to form a constellation” (2002, N3,1). The two great related demands made by T. S. Eliot in “Tradition and the Individual Talent” will also be recalled here: his call for the exercise of the “historical sense” as a juxtaposition of significant events from discontinuous times, which in turn produces an “impersonal” (nonintentional) effect. These demands define the representation of history in works such asThe Waste Landand Pound’s early cantos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.14.3.0001

Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2008.1.issue-1
Date: 05 2008
Abstract: Culture has been regarded as an anathema to psychology as an empiricist research tradition. Despite the explosive growth of research on culture and psychology over the last decade of the 20 thcentury and its importance in Asian social psychology, the ontological and epistemological tension between psychology as a science and psychology as a cultural/historical discipline introduced in the writings of the thinkers of the Enlightenment and counter-Enlightenment still lingers on in the contemporary discourse of psychology. Clifford Geertz once ominously suggested that cultural psychology may have chewed more than it can. In this paper, the interpretive turn in social science as exemplified by writings of Charles Taylor and Paul Ricoeur is reviewed and discussed how it may impinge on the practice of Asian social psychology as an empirical science in methodological, epistemological, and ontological respects. It is argued here that the current practice of Asian social psychology is largely, though not entirely, free of the challenges mounted by these theorists, and that Asian social psychology has an advantage of not encumbered by this traditional tension due to a monist ontology that is prevalent in Asia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2008.1.1.103

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2004.57.issue-3
Date: February 2005
Author(s): Higgins Paula
Abstract: Within the theoretical framework of Roland Barthes's writings on myth and ideology, this essay seeks to expose the historical legitimation project through which the mythmaking, universalizing rhetoric of musical genius that has long surrounded the figure of Ludwig van Beethoven came to infiltrate scholarship on Josquin des Prez, culminating in his late twentieth-century apotheosis. Contextualizing the composer's reception history with respect to the debates between Joseph Kerman and Edward Lowinsky in 1965 and especially the 1971 Josquin Festival-Conference, the author suggests that the ideological refashioning of Josquin in the image of Beethoven has simultaneously shaped and derailed the intellectual trajectory of early music scholarship in the past thirty years. By privileging a discourse of musical genius in the service of which, among other concerns, the canon of works attributed to the composer is being decimated beyond historical recognition, the richness and complexity of the musical culture of which he was a vital part risks being overshadowed and obfuscated by the disproportionate amount of attention invested in his singular accomplishments. The essay advocates a resolute historicization of sixteenth-century discourses of creative endowment, a critical reassessment of the role of authentication scholarship in Josquin studies, and a renewed sensitivity to the imbrication of mythologies of musical genius in music historiographies of both the past and the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2004.57.3.443

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2012.65.issue-1
Date: April 2012
Abstract: In his 1986 essay on the intersections between music theory, phenomenology, and perception, David Lewin develops a heuristic model through which to come to terms with the constitution of multiple and heterogeneous perceptions of musical events. One of his principal vehicles for demonstrating this phenomenological turn is the well-known analysis of Schubert's “Morgengruß.” The present article considers the ramifications of Lewin's methodology, particularly with respect to the experience of time that emerges from Lewin's mobilization of the heuristic perception model, by approaching it from the perspective of Husserl's Phenomenology of Internal Time Consciousness. This perspective reveals a superposition of temporalities as well as a superposition of languages as the underlying factors through which Lewin's analysis is produced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2012.65.1.179

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jm.2014.31.issue-4
Date: 10 2014
Author(s): Cochran Timothy B.
Abstract: In volume six of Traité de rythme, de couleur, et d’ornithologie, Olivier Messiaen uses the phrase “the pebble in the water” to identify a class of especially stark rhythmic contrasts in Debussy’s music that feature long durations interrupted by rapid rhythms. He invests these contrasts with an expressive logic built around the concept of shock—that is, the sudden stimulation of a static context by an outside presence. Messiaen unites various images—both natural and psychological—around this expressive pattern via analogy, suggesting that its essence is transferrable within a network of associated metaphors. Although for the most part in volume six Messiaen refrains from linking interpretations of Debussy with his own music, many of his rhythmic contrasts manifest the same expressive logic that he ascribes to Debussy’s music, particularly durational events that signify the interjection of birdsong within serene environments and that signal the striking appearance of divine power on earth. In addition to stylistic and semiotic correlations, the logic of shock theorized for the pebble in the water recurs more abstractly in Messiaen’s idiomatic views on musical experience and spiritual encounter. His interpretation of rhythmic contrast bears the marks of his more general aesthetics of shock, which in turn can be read as a reorientation of a broader modernist hermeneutic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jm.2014.31.4.503

Journal Title: Journal of Palestine Studies
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: jps.2014.43.issue-3
Date: 5 1, 2014
Author(s): Mardam-Bey Farouk
Abstract: For a good description of this general atmosphere, see Denis Sieffert, “La ‘Sarkozye’ médiatique et intellectuelle,” in Sarkozy au Proche-Orient, ed. Farouk Mardam-Bey (Paris: Sindbad/Actes Sud, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jps.2014.43.3.26

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jsah.2011.70.issue-1
Date: 03 2011
Author(s): Ortenberg Alexander
Abstract: Chapman, "Unrealized Designs," 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2011.70.1.38

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of Hawai’i Press
Issue: jsah.2012.71.issue-4
Date: 12 2010
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, trans. Kathleen Blamey and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2012.71.4.564

Journal Title: The San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jung.1.2005.24.issue-1
Date: 02 2005
Author(s): Marlan Stanton
Abstract: Stanton Marlan, “Hesitation and Slowness: Gateway to Psyche's Depth,” San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal, 2005, 24:1, 17-27. This paper focuses on hesitation and slowness in the work of Jungian analysis. It emphasizes the importance of patience as a way of achieving depth and of avoiding facile and abstract formulations that lack respect for the true otherness of the analysand and for the fundamental enigmas of analytic work. Alongside the techniques of Freud and Jung, and drawing on Alchemy and on Renaissance and Eastern wisdom traditions, the author articulates a complex notion of hesitation. The paper deconstructs simple binary pairings of fast and slow and suggests an attitude of purposeless wandering as an important compensation to the overly technologically-oriented attitudes and fast-paced culture that have invaded our therapeutic sensibilities and consulting rooms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jung.1.2005.24.1.17

Journal Title: Jung Journal: Culture & Psyche
Publisher: Spring Journal Books
Issue: jung.2008.2.issue-2
Date: 05 2007
Author(s): Romanyshyn Robert D.
Abstract: Review of Robert D. Romanyshyn's The Wounded Researcher: Research with Soul in Mind, New Orleans, Louisiana: Spring Journal Books, 2007. Robert Romanyshyn has written a treatise on the question of understanding that brings together the fields of phenomenology and depth psychology. Following the thought of C. G. Jung, Romanyshyn has presented an archetypal view of the dilemma of psychological research that he sees as a story of loss, mourning, descent, re-search and homecoming expressed in the mythical image of Orpheus. Going deeper into the actual process of psychological research, Romanyshyn looks to the ancient art of alchemy as providing a model of the attitude and action of imagination that most closely suits psychological life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jung.2008.2.2.101

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2010.32.issue-2
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Ivanovitch Roman
Abstract: At the heart of this essay is the suggestion that variation can be understood as a vital mode of Mozart's musical thinking, an impulse evident not merely in movements labeled "theme and variation," but in his output as a whole. Accordingly, I begin by sketching a more general theoretical context for the interaction of this variation impulse with the more teleological formal dynamics of sonata.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2010.32.2.145

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2005.60.issue-2
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): JÖTTKANDT SIGI
Abstract: Walter Pater's theoretical "come-back" over the past forty years or so has been dominated by the competing claims of the new historicism and deconstruction, both of which discover prescient forerunners of their own, seemingly mutually exclusive, theoretical concerns in Pater's aesthetic criticism and in his historical novel Marius the Epicurean (1885). Yet despite their obvious differences, both critical approaches share one thing in common: the same post-humanist denigration of the trope of metaphor in favor of the seemingly more ethically responsive (because inclusive) trope of metonymy. In this essay I observe how the new historicism's and deconstruction's privilegings of metonymy as the prime trope of difference poses an immediate problem for ethical thought that, largely under the influence of Alain Badiou, has become increasingly cognizant of the need for a workable conception of sameness (or universality), traditionally supplied by metaphor. Accordingly, this close reading of the metaphorical dialectic of one of Pater's surprisingly underread Imaginary Portraits, "Sebastian van Storck" (1887), explores the basic charge against metaphor-namely, that it is an essentially "theological" trope insofar as it invariably pre-posits the "identity" that it modestly claims to have merely discovered. Employing the central figure of Sebastian's idealism- equation-I venture that, once rethought as a relation not of identity but of equivalence, metaphor is capable of shouldering the rhetorical burden of similarity without relinquishing its ethical claim as a primary producer of new differences in the world and is, hence, deserving of a central place in a post-deconstructive ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2005.60.2.163

Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2009.108.issue-1
Date: 11 2009
Author(s): Marcus Sharon
Abstract: In the text-based disciplines, psychoanalysis and Marxism have had a major influence on how we read, and this has been expressed most consistently in the practice of symptomatic reading, a mode of interpretation that assumes that a text's truest meaning lies in what it does not say, describes textual surfaces as superfluous, and seeks to unmask hidden meanings. For symptomatic readers, texts possess meanings that are veiled, latent, all but absent if it were not for their irrepressible and recurring symptoms. Noting the recent trend away from ideological demystification, this essay proposes various modes of "surface reading" that together strive to accurately depict the truth to which a text bears witness. Surface reading broadens the scope of critique to include the kinds of interpretive activity that seek to understand the complexity of literary surfaces---surfaces that have been rendered invisible by symptomatic reading.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2009.108.1.1

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1999.17.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 1999
Author(s): Selby Gary S.
Abstract: Abstract:This essay argues that in 1 Thessalonians, Paul uses eschatological discourse—language about the end of hme—in order to evoke a symbolic world-view in which his readers become God's elect, living at the end of time and awaiting the sudden, imminent retum of Christ from heaven. This self-identification explains their present misfortunes, while at the sam.e time demanding that they fulfill the ethical and moral demands of the Christian faith. More broadly, this essay points to the role that eschatological discourse played within early Christianity in general, suggesting that it formed a central, paradigmatic drama which helped to define ontological and teleological reality for the movement's adherents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1999.17.4.385

Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2001.19.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 2001
Author(s): Cook Eleanor
Abstract: On enigma as a rhetorical figure: a brief history in the rhetoricians, encyclopedists, and patristic commentators from Aristotle to Dante's time, with a rhetorical analysis of the figure. Special attention is given to Augustine in the De trinitateXV on St. Paul's well-known "in aenigmate" (I Cor.13:12). Some implications of Augustine's linking of the figurative and the figural (typological, historical) are considered, with a re-examination of Auerbach's "Figura" on this question. The importance for our own reading of rhetoric in relation to history and poetry is stressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2001.19.4.349

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1986.9.issue-1
Date: May 1986
Author(s): Kleinman Sherryl
Abstract: Many sociologists have tried in vain to find the “true” meaning of the classic works in the discipline. An interactionist perspective suggests that this search is not a valid one for sociologists, especially symbolic interactionists. Although there can be no “true” meaning, some authors use conventions of writing that make their work more orless clear. Using Mead'sMind, Self and Societyas an example, we discuss the dimensions of clarity. We then argue that the sociological classics should be read to (I) simulate new theories and research (pragmatic analysis), (2) determine how sociologists have used that classic to support or refute particular theories or perspectives (rhetorical analysis), and (3) provide information about the sociological concerns of the author and his/her contemporaries (historical analysis).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1986.9.1.129

Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2011.34.issue-1
Date: 02 2011
Author(s): Bernasconi Oriana
Abstract: Sociology and neighboring disciplines have produced different analytic tools to examine the dialogical relationship between individuals and society ("narrative work," "identity work," "moral career," "moral breakdown"). However, the question of how individuals negotiate the interpretation of personal experience over their lifetimes in a changing cultural context remains unexplored. This article introduces narrative elasticity as a feature of narrative work and as a time-sensitive analytic tool for conducting inquiries into processes of temporal retraction and expansion of what storytellers conceive as the normal order of significance. The application of this tool to the analysis of mature and elderly Chileans' life stories shows how cultural change occurs at the individual level, considers factors that motivate and inhibit processes of reinterpretation of personal experience, and identifies different levels at which it operates.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2011.34.1.20

Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i243245
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Zeichner Pádraig
Abstract: The numerous changes and improvements which have been wrought in teacher education courses in the last two decades have not, apparently, satisfied the critics. Ironically, the reverse seems to have occurred, as recent events on both sides of the Atlantic testify. This essay argues that the developments of the last two decades in educational research and teacher education, which have yielded a wealth of new ideas and procedures, have also yielded a confusing proliferation of educational ideologies. In short, it suggests that the ascendancy of a diffuse, unselfcritical, and often combative discourse within educational studies has effectively eclipsed the more important question which must first be tackled if educational studies are to have a coherent, robust focus. This question, which is pursued in the second section of the paper, asks: is the educational enterprise, properly conceived, a distinctive, autonomous or sui generis enterprise with purposes of its own which are universal, or is it essentially a subservient enterprise, a vehicle for one or other currently prevailing ideology (cultural, technological, political, religious, etc.)? In exploring this question the essay puts to work some enduring insights from contemporary European philosophy, arguing that education as a 'practical hermeneutic discipline' holds a singular promise. Some important consequences of this promise for educational studies and teacher education are then considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1050455

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243306
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Burt Emily Fowler
Abstract: Cover, Obligation, supra note 200, at 74. 74
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051152

Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243301
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Auerbach Harry P.
Abstract: E. AUERBACH, MIMESIS: THE REPRESENTATION OF REALITY IN WESTERN LITERA- TURE 15 (1953). Auerbach 15 Mimesis: The Representation of Reality in Western Literature 1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051217

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243648
Date: 2 1, 1963
Author(s): Jensen Mircea
Abstract: The German edition was published in 1951
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1061775

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243702
Date: 5 1, 1979
Author(s): Gill Richard C.
Abstract: Andrew Rippin, chap. 8, in Martin, ed. (n. 26 above)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062330

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243696
Date: 11 1, 1976
Author(s): Derrida Charles H.
Abstract: pt. 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062335

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243696
Date: 11 1, 1969
Author(s): O'Flaherty Wendy Doniger
Abstract: Asceticism and Eroticism, pp. 224-26 224 Asceticism and Eroticism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062337

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243719
Date: 8 1, 1982
Author(s): Fenn Lawrence E.
Abstract: Richard Fenn, Liturgies and Trials (New York, 1982) Fenn Liturgies and Trials 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062385

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243712
Date: 11 1, 1967
Author(s): DeVries Peter
Abstract: SMD, p. 11. 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062479

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243728
Date: 11 1, 1961
Author(s): Brown Ariel
Abstract: MS 7.23, 8.318 23 7 MS
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062545

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243684
Date: 5 1, 1967
Author(s): Myths N. J.
Abstract: LTCK, p. 149. 149
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062633

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243742
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Barrier Verne A.
Abstract: "Of Singh Sabhas, Siri Singh Sahibs, and Sikh Scholars," in The Sikh Diaspora, ed. N. Gerald Barrier and Verne A. Dusenbery (Columbia, Mo.: South Asia Publications, 1989), pp. 90-119, esp. pp. 105-11 Barrier Of Singh Sabhas, Siri Singh Sahibs, and Sikh Scholars 90 The Sikh Diaspora 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062801

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243741
Date: 2 1, 1963
Author(s): Barnes Steven
Abstract: White, chap. 7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062862

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243741
Date: 2 1, 1972
Author(s): DeBernardi Jean
Abstract: Ibid., p. 13. 13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062863

Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246912
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brest William N.
Abstract: J. Ely, Democracy and Distrust: A Theory ofJudicial Review 135-70 (1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122910

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i249721
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Zumwalt Dona M.
Abstract: Although research on teacher cognition is no longer in its infancy, it has largely failed to affect the ways in which programs and teachers are evaluated. In accordance with what Raths and Katz (1985) call the Goldilocks Principle, the notion of teacher cognition may simply be "too big" (too general and vague) for mundane application. This review was designed to compare alternative approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition and to consider ways in which the literature of this subfield may be discouraging its application. Teacher cognition is defined as pre- or inservice teachers' self-reflections; beliefs and knowledge about teaching, students, and content; and awareness of problem-solving strategies endemic to classroom teaching. This paper describes and critiques five different approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition: (a) direct and noninferential ways of assessing teacher belief, (b) methods that rely on contextual analyses of teachers' descriptive language, (c) taxonomies for assessing self-reflection and metacognition, (d) multimethod evaluations of pedagogical content knowledge and beliefs, and (e) concept mapping. In the final section, ambiguities and paradoxes inherent in this literature are discussed, particularly the continued use of rhetoric associated with process--product research. Questions regarding the ecological validity of measurement tools and tasks are raised. A suggestion is made that it may be politically exigent to begin relating measures of teacher cognition to valued student outcomes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1170760

Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250213
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Willinsky Pamela A.
Abstract: Reliability has traditionally been taken for granted as a necessary but insufficient condition for validity in assessment use. My purpose in this article is to illuminate and challenge this presumption by exploring a dialectic between psychometric and hermeneutic approaches to drawing and warranting interpretations of human products or performances. Reliability, as it is typically defined and operationalized in the measurement literature (e.g., American Educational Research Association [AERA], American Psychological Association, & National Council on Measurement in Education, 1985; Feldt & Brennan, 1989), privileges standardized forms of assessment. By considering hermeneutic alternatives for serving the important epistemological and ethical purposes that reliability serves, we expand the range of viable high-stakes assessment practices to include those that honor the purposes that students bring to their work and the contextualized judgments of teachers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176218

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: John Wiley & Sons
Issue: i250417
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Wilson Ewald
Abstract: Three different types of interpretative research in education are discussed: ethnographic-descriptive, dialogical, and structuralistic. The special concepts of interpretation and validity connected with each of these approaches are elaborated and examples are given. The author comes to the conclusion that it is misleading to use the term "interpretative methods" in a general way, because the differences in the types of interpretive research are ignored. He argues that in educational research a dialogical, argumentative concept of validating interpretations is necessary.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179687

Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250458
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Yehoshua Dani
Abstract: The introduction of entrepreneurial education (EE) in the Israeli education system is discussed in this article as an example of the introduction of new curriculum. We argue that this introduction should be construed as a consequence of major ideological changes in Israel and its education system, a change from collectivist to individualistic values. We open with an analysis of a Ministry of Education publication that introduces the EE program and find that it is loaded with references to Zionist myths. We suggest that relying on references to these myths in promoting EE reflects a need to disguise the discontinuity between the social values behind the new curriculum and the traditional collectivist values of pioneering Zionism. We note that the Israeli programs exercise EE in groups, whereby the responsibility for the new ventures is shared by the group members. We suggest that adopting the group method indicates a compromise between a completely individualistic and competitive approach to entrepreneurship and a collectivist approach to coping with new tasks-which is more in line with traditional Zionist values. We argue that the change of atmosphere from collectivism to individualism is a result of demographic and economic processes that have occurred since the establishment of the Israeli state, and that these processes may be exposed through observing the Israeli youth movements and the public discourse. We believe that the gradual shift from collectivism to individualism is a central factor in explaining the timing of EE's introduction in Israel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179899

Journal Title: Comparative Education Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i250893
Date: 11 1, 1988
Author(s): Kroes Val D.
Abstract: McLaren and Hammer (n. 21 above), p. 33. 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1188108

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251513
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): Jung Peter
Abstract: Carl G. Jung, Two Essays on Analytical Psychology, trans. R. F. C. Hull (New York: Meridian Books, 1956) Jung Two Essays on Analytical Psychology 1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201464

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251515
Date: 1 1, 1938
Author(s): Hopper Ted L.
Abstract: "Denis Devlin," Transition 27 (April-May 1938): 289. April-May 289 27 Transition 1938
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201506

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251488
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): Sanders Jonathan Z.
Abstract: R. Sanders, "Myth and Science at Masada," Midstream, XIII, No. 2 (1967), 72-75, esp. 74 Sanders 2 72 XIII Midstream 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201521

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251493
Date: 7 1, 1951
Author(s): Steiner Giles B.
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201552

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251495
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Pannenberg W. Taylor
Abstract: n. 25 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201604

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251500
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): Eliade Jay J.
Abstract: Mircea Eliade, The Quest (Chicago, 1969), p. 86. Eliade 86 The Quest 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201636

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251489
Date: 7 1, 1964
Author(s): Pannenberg Peter C.
Abstract: Grundzige der Christologie (Gütersloh: Gütersloher Verlagshaus Gerd Mohn, 1964), pp. 124-31 124 Grundzige der Christologie 1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201852

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251499
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: "State and Violence," p. 246.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201954

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251507
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Fackenheim David
Abstract: Emil L. Fackenheim, Metaphysics and Historicity (Milwaukee: Marquette University Press, 1961) Fackenheim Metaphysics and Historicity 1961
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202007

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251516
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Gerhart Mary
Abstract: The Conflict of Interpretations, p. 389
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202088

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251516
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Margaret A.
Abstract: Elaine H. Pagels, "Paul and Women: A Response to Recent Discussion," Journal of the American Academy of Religion 42 (1974): 538-49 10.2307/1461971 538
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202090

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251505
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Crossan John Dominic
Abstract: Luke 15
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202136

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251552
Date: 4 1, 1977
Author(s): Washbourn Peter
Abstract: Penelope Wash- bourn, Becoming Woman (New York: Harper & Row, 1977) Washbourn Becoming Woman 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202206

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251555
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Crossan Gary
Abstract: n. 27 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202583

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251548
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Ricoeur Joseph A.
Abstract: Eliade, p. 161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202627

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251550
Date: 10 1, 1961
Author(s): Conzelmann Norman
Abstract: Perrin, Introduction, pp. 217-19 (pp. 325-26).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202774

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251550
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Duling Erich
Abstract: Perrin, Rediscovering, p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202778

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251550
Date: 10 1, 1975
Author(s): Simon Paul
Abstract: Simon, pp. 55-58
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202779

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251537
Date: 7 1, 1973
Author(s): Barthes David
Abstract: Conflict of Interpretations, p. 300= Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, 1). 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202814

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251538
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Ricoeur Walter James
Abstract: Bourgeois, pp. 75-79, 99-102
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202836

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251564
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Geertz Mark I.
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, "Thick Description: Toward an Interpretive Theory of Culture," in his The Interpretation of Cultures (New York: Basic, 1972), pp. 3-30. Geertz Thick Description: Toward an Interpretive Theory of Culture 3 The Interpretation of Cultures 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202912

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251545
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Ricoeur Sanford
Abstract: "Manifestation and Proclamation," Journal of the Blaisdell Institute, vol. 12 (Winter 1978) Winter 12 Journal of the Blaisdell Institute 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203039

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251554
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Fried Lynn M.
Abstract: Brooks, pp. 17, 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203065

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251543
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Nietzsche John D.
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, Beyond Good and Evil, in Basic Writings of Nietzsche, trans. and ed. Walter Kaufmann (New York: Modern Library, Inc., 1966), p. 327. Nietzsche 327 Beyond Good and Evil, in Basic Writings of Nietzsche 1966
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203118

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251563
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Levenson Jon D.
Abstract: Jon D. Levenson, Theology of the Program of Restoration ofEzekiel 40-48, Harvard Semitic Monographs no. 10 (Missoula, Mont.: Scholars Press, 1976), pp. 37-53 Levenson 37 Theology of the Program of Restoration ofEzekiel 40-48, Harvard Semitic Monographs 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203191

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251551
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Brown Delwin
Abstract: "Transforming Tradition: History, Creativity and the Task of Theology," in Ilif Review, vol. 41 (Fall 1984) 41 Ilif Review 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203267

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251539
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Whitehead Frank Burch
Abstract: Alfred North Whitehead, Process and Reality, corrected ed., ed. David Griffen and Donald Sherburne (New York: Macmillan Co., 1978), p. 4. Whitehead 4 Process and Reality 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203381

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251546
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Ellingsen Mark
Abstract: Mark Ellingsen, "Luther's Concept of the Ministry: The Creative Tension," Word & World 1 (Fall 1981): 338-46 Ellingsen Fall 338 1 Word & World 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203406

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251561
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): PutnamAbstract: Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981), pp. 123-24. Putnam 123 Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203420

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251593
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Smith Garrett
Abstract: Wilfred Cantwell Smith, Religious Diversity, ed. Willard G. Oxtoby (New York: Harper & Row, 1976), pp. 22-40 Smith 22 Religious Diversity 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203555

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251571
Date: 4 1, 1954
Author(s): Murray Gregory D.
Abstract: Murray, Early Greece. p. 49. Murray 49 Early Greece
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203885

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251577
Date: 10 1, 1975
Author(s): creativity Eric J.
Abstract: creativity, Eliade attributes a "religious" importance to books (Labyrinth [n. 14 above], pp. 62-63) creativity religious 62 Labyrinth
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203955

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251578
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): de Chardin C. Allen
Abstract: Pierre Teil- hard de Chardin's The Phenomenon of Man (New York: Harper & Row, 1965). de Chardin The Phenomenon of Man 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204099

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251578
Date: 1 1, 1868
Author(s): Newman Edward T.
Abstract: John Henry Cardinal Newman, Fifteen Sermons Preached before the University of Oxford [London: Longmans, Green, & Co., 1868-81], pp. 232-34 Newman 232 Fifteen Sermons Preached before the University of Oxford 1868
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204101

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251585
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: William Schweiker, Mimetic Reflec- tions: A Study in Hermeneutics, Theology, and Ethics (New York: Fordham University Press, 1990) Schweiker Mimetic Reflections: A Study in Hermeneutics, Theology, and Ethics 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204186

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251594
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): HoughAbstract: n. 42 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204287

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251574
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Fierro J. A.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 292.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204816

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251568
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Tracy Charles W.
Abstract: David Tracy, "Practical Theology in the Sit- uation of Global Pluralism," in Formation and Reflection, ed. Lewis S. Mudge and James N. Poling [Philadelphia: Fortress, 1987], p. 140 Tracy Practical Theology in the Situation of Global Pluralism 140 Formation and Reflection 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205007

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251592
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Elder Charles R.
Abstract: San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205377

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251610
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Lindbeck Owen C.
Abstract: George A. Lindbeck, The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age (Phila- delphia: Westminster, 1984), pp. 33-34. Lindbeck 33 The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205655

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251612
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Reno Charles T.
Abstract: R. R. Reno, The Ordinary Transformed: Karl Rahner and the Christian Vision of Transcendence (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1995) Reno The Ordinary Transformed: Karl Rahner and the Christian Vision of Transcendence 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205997

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251609
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Tracy M. A.
Abstract: Tracy, BRO (n. 40 above), p. xiii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206115

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251604
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): McCollough William A.
Abstract: Thomas E. McCollough, The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question (Chatham, N.J.: Chatham House, 1991 McCollough The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206461

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251601
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Kyle A.
Abstract: pp. 347-57
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206746

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251718
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Hague Kathleen Henderson
Abstract: Dai Greatcoat: A Self-Portrait of David Jones in His Letters, ed. Rene Hague (London: Faber and Faber, 1980), pp. 98-112 Hague 98 Dai Greatcoat: A Self-Portrait of David Jones in His Letters 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208198

Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Williams Michael
Abstract: Caroline Brothers's clear discussion of the photo- graph as a "constant dialogue between image and society" (23) 23
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208761

Journal Title: Film Quarterly
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i251943
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: Dudley Andrew assesses structuralism, finds it insufficient, and proposes a new emphasis on a phenomenological hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1212341

Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i252472
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Brooks Richard
Abstract: Dmitri Kirsanoff's "Menilmontant" poses an alternative to commercial cinema by foregrounding shock experience and by constructing a narrative logic of the commodity based on loss and substitution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1225592

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Epstein Michael S.
Abstract: LAw's EMPIRE, supra note 66, at 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228741

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252697
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bell Charles R.
Abstract: Bell, The Suipr-eme Court1, 1984 Termii-Forewt'ord:. The Civil Rights Chro?icles, 99 HARV. L. REV.4, 56-68 (1985) Bell 4 99 HARV. L. REV. 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228797

Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252715
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bernstein Philip P.
Abstract: Richard J. Bernstein, From Hermeneutics to Praxis, in HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 273, 287-90 (R. Hollinger ed. 1985) Bernstein From Hermeneutics to Praxis 273 HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228963

Journal Title: World Archaeology
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i207277
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Hodder Ian
Abstract: Archaeological periodization constructs narratives with beginnings, middles and ends. But the material culture on which such narratives are built is also involved in narratives according to which past agents lived their lives. According to Ricoeur, such lived narratives are also related to agents' practical experience of time. As archaeologists we have to 'read' past narratives through the rhetoric by which they were expressed. While Hayden White's scheme for temporal cycles of rhetoric is rejected, the sequence of material culture at Sitagroi is examined in order to explore the relationships between the plots written by archacologists and those lived by past agents at the site. Past and present concepts of time are embedded in different narratives and expressed through different rhetorics, but some interaction between the two is possible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/124819

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i253928
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Zwingli Judith H.
Abstract: Ricoeur, 1979a, 148-49
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1262219

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i253935
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Weinberg Jodi
Abstract: Elizabeth Cropper's introduction to Smyth, 12-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1262256

Journal Title: The Journal of the Midwest Modern Language Association
Publisher: Midwest Modern Language Association
Issue: i256333
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Scott H. Aram
Abstract: Literary Criticism and the Southern Question": 99 99 Literary Criticism and the Southern Question
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1315021

Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256677
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Schwaller De Lubicz William
Abstract: This paper follows two purposes: the first to unpack some of the artistic cargo of symbols as distinct from the more conventional aspects of them (e. g., their ability to refer to other things or events, and their ability to communicate ideas), and the second to show, by means of contrasts, the actual workings of Interpretation Theory as it could be applied to the analysis of art-making and art-viewing. For the first purpose, the author draws material from philosophy, dramatic writings, linguistic theory, and statements of artists in an analytic search for the often intractable character of the artistic image. For the second purpose, the author demonstrates, through the use of logic and the poetic metaphor, how a particular form of hermeneutic inquiry can be applied to assist an understanding of the assumptions upon which research is often built.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1319690

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257702
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Bloom Frederick
Abstract: Harold Bloom, The Anxiety of Influence: A Theory of Poetry (New York, 1973). Bloom The Anxiety of Influence: A Theory of Poetry 1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342830

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257709
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): Frye Paul
Abstract: Northrop Frye, The Critical Path (Bloomington, Ind., 1972), esp. pp. 106-8 and 155-56 Frye 106 The Critical Path 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342895

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257716
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: 4:7-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342979

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257731
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Richards John Paul
Abstract: "An Interview," Complementarities, pp. 268-69. An Interview 268 Complementarities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343195

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257730
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Riffaterre James K.
Abstract: Riffaterre, The Semiotics of Poetry, p. 42. Riffaterre 42 The Semiotics of Poetry
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343260

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257732
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Kristeva Hayden
Abstract: Julia Kristeva, "The Novel of Polylogue," Desire in Language: A Semiotic Ap- proach to Literature and Art, ed. Leon S. Roudiez, trans. Roudiez, Thomas Gora, and Alice Jardine (New York, 1980), esp. pp. 201-8 Kristeva The Novel of Polylogue 201 Desire in Language: A Semiotic Approach to Literature and Art 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343276

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257744
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Cohen Israel
Abstract: The Adventures of Don Quixote, trans. J. M. Cohen (Harmondsworth, 1970), p. 338 Cohen 338 The Adventures of Don Quixote 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343464

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257749
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Michels Sander L.
Abstract: New York Times, 19 May 1985, p. 20E. 19 May 20 New York Times 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343494

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257757
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Williams Edward W.
Abstract: Raymond Williams, Problems in Materialism and Culture: Selected Essays (London, 1980), pp. 37-47 Williams 37 Problems in Materialism and Culture: Selected Essays 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343582

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257760
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Cohen Richard
Abstract: Languages of Art, pp. 225-41, esp. p. 234 225 Languages of Art
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343627

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257768
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Garfinkel Jerome
Abstract: Harold Garfinkel, Studies in Ethnomethodology (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1967) Garfinkel Studies in Ethnomethodology 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343711

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257763
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Conrad Johannes
Abstract: Joseph Conrad, "Karain: A Memory," Selected Tales from Conrad, ed. Nigel Stewart (London, 1977), pp. 65-66. Conrad Karain: A Memory 65 Selected Tales from Conrad 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343766

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257769
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Buck-Morss Naomi
Abstract: p. 341
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343782

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257779
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Derrida Thomas A.
Abstract: Derrida, "Donner la mort," in L'Ethique du don: Jacques Der- rida et la pensde du don, ed. Jean-Marie Rabate and Michael Wetzel (Paris, 1992), pp. 52-53 Derrida Donner la mort 52 L'Ethique du don: Jacques Derrida et la pensde du don 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343850

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257799
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Zivek Dominick
Abstract: Slavoj Zivek, The Sublime Object of Ideology (London, 1989), p. 50. Zivek 50 The Sublime Object of Ideology 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344100

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257799
Date: 7 1, 1919
Author(s): Heidegger Jeffrey L.
Abstract: "Was heißt 'gegeben', 'Gegebenheit'-dieses Zauberwort der Phinomenologie und der 'Stein des Anstoßes' bei den anderen" (Heidegger, Grundprobleme der Phanomenologie (1919/20), ed. Hans-Helmuth Gander, vol. 58 of Gesamtausgabe [Frankfurt am Main, 1993], p. 5). Heidegger Was heißt 'gegeben', 'Gegebenheit'-dieses Zauberwort der Phinomenologie und der 'Stein des Anstoßes' bei den anderen 5 58 Grundprobleme der Phanomenologie 1919
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344103

Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257809
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Veysey John
Abstract: Laurence Veysey, "The Plural Organized World of the Humani- ties," in The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America, ed. Alexandra Oleson and John Voss [Baltimore, Md., 1979], p. 57 Veysey The Plural Organized World of the Humanities 57 The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344279

Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257920
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Suleiman Daniel R.
Abstract: "'I Was The World in Which I Walked': The Transformation of the British Novel," The University of Toronto Quarterly 51:3 (Spring 1982), 279-97 3 279 51 The University of Toronto Quarterly 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1345485

Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257933
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Zwerdling Karen
Abstract: A Critical Reading 173 173 A Critical Reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1345605

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258507
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Ellison Sylvia
Abstract: Ellison, Invisible Man, 568. Ellison 568 Invisible Man
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354156

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258502
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Foucault Michael J.
Abstract: Michel Foucault, Discipline and Punish: The Birth ofthe Prison, trans. Alan Sheridan (New York: Pantheon, 1977). Foucault Discipline and Punish: The Birth ofthe Prison 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354206

Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258501
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Johnson William V.
Abstract: "The End of Education:'The Harvard Core Curriculum Report' and the Pedagogy of Reformation," boundary 2, Vol. X, 2 (Winter 1982), 1-33 2 1 X boundary 2 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354280

Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259940
Date: 9 1, 1966
Author(s): Wallace William C.
Abstract: 1972b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1384547

Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259974
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Wuthnow Robert
Abstract: Bainbridge and Stark's essay on "The Consciousness Reformation" illustrates conceptual and theoretical ambiguities characteristic of research in the scientific study of religion more generally. This paper traces these ambiguities to the presence of two competing, but poorly differentiated, epistemological traditions. An examination of the assumptions implicit within each of these traditions provides a basis for clarifying the distinction between religious symbolism and religious belief, the concept of meaning, the difference between consistency as an attribute of belief and coherence as an attribute of reality, and the role of interpersonal bonds in maintaining the plausibility of religious symbolism. An emerging third perspective that appears to circumvent some of the limitations of the two major epistemological traditions is also discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1385335

Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259996
Date: 6 1, 1923
Author(s): Thomas Robert
Abstract: This paper attempts to uncover the mytho-symbolic parallels between the social-psychological theories of noted sociologist W. I. Thomas and the vision of moral-religious transformation recorded in John Bunyan's "The Pilgrim's Progress." Thomas' emphasis on the "definition of the situation," precise stages of moral development, and the four wishes are seen to be derived from Bunyan's themes of spiritual instruction along Christian's journey, his progress through various stages of sanctification, and the various spiritual polarities established by Bunyan as structuring principles of his text. Thomas is understood to have distorted Bunyan's vision of ultimate transcendence by equating salvation with adoption of the Protestant ethic and its institutional context of the American political and economic status quo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1385474

Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Co.
Issue: i260414
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Woods Meenakshi
Abstract: An attempt is made in this paper to arrive at a typology of teachers within the specific context of two forms of discourse, ideological and educational, which constitute a particular school in India. It is suggested that the mode of recruitment, the teachers' perspectives on and adaptations to the particular ideology and the role, and their commitment to the same are significant factors contributing to the shaping of a teacher typology. In this particular context, the teacher is thus both defined by and perpetuates the two forms of discourse in the school. The data on which this paper is based was collected in 1981 through the use of questionnaires, interviews (both structured and unstructured) and observation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1392930

Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i260667
Date: 10 1, 1931
Author(s): Woolf Steph
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which women narrate a move from a 'working-class' position to a position marked (in however fragmentary and complex a way) as 'middle class'. While such a move might be seen in terms of a straightforward escape from a disadvantaged social position, I argue here that what has to be analysed is the pain and the sense of estrangement associated with this class movement. Drawing on the class narratives of a group of seven white British women, the article uses Bourdieu's concepts of symbolic capital and habitus to explore the cultural and symbolic configurations of class. These configurations may be inscribed into the self, so that the self, itself, is class marked. Since working-class selves are frequently marked in pathological terms, this raises particular difficulties for the idea of an 'escape' from such a position. Class in this sense is embedded in people's history and so cannot be so easily 'escaped'. The usual conventions of life-narratives - in which the self remains the same entity from birth to death and later events are a culmination of earlier ones - are also disrupted in this case. But if a working-class position is marked as pathological, so too is taking on the markers of middle-class existence. to do so is not only to risk 'getting it wrong', but it is also to risk the scorn attached to 'pretentiousness'. There is a particular jeopardy here for women, since it is women who have been especially associated with desires for artefacts associated with bourgeois existence. The article argues for a focus for classed desires and class envy, not in pathological terms, but in terms of a coherent response to political and social exclusions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1395585

Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260804
Date: 10 1, 1963
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Hwa Yol
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Les Sciences de l'homme et la phenom- tnologie (Paris: Centre de Documentation Universitaire, 1963), p. 2 Merleau-Ponty 2 Les Sciences de l'homme et la phenomtnologie 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1397539

Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260927
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Zollschan David
Abstract: The use of theories of Sanskrit syntax by Utpaladeva and Abhinavagupta to explain the action of monistic Śaiva myth and ritual is examined. These thinkers develop a distinctive approach to syntax that reductionistically emphasizes the role of the true Self/Śiva as omnipotent agent, in opposition to the denigration of agency by the majority of Hindu as well as Buddhist philosophies. An analogy to the Indian discussions is seen in the typological effort of Kenneth Burke's "Grammar of Motives," and it is suggested that indigenous theories of action syntax would be a useful focus for comparative research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1400019

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261290
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Kluback Hwa Yol
Abstract: What Is Philosophy? trs. William Kluback and Jean T. Wilde (New York, 1958), p. 59. Kluback 59 What Is Philosophy? 1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1405723

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261321
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Reid Ernest J.
Abstract: W. Blankenburg, translated by Erling Eng and to appear in a forthcoming issue of The Human Context
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406200

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261311
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Strauss Michael A.
Abstract: Leo Strauss in What Is Political Philosophy? Strauss What Is Political Philosophy?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406307

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261306
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Maurice Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Semi-Sovereign People (New York, 1960) The Semi-Sovereign People 1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406378

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261327
Date: 1 1, 1964
Author(s): McCleary Fred R.
Abstract: "The Philosopher and Sociology," in Signs, tran. Richard C. McCleary (Evanston, Ill., 1964), p. 109 McCleary 109 The Philosopher and Sociology 1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406578

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261382
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Pangle Fred
Abstract: Recent literature on Heidegger concentrates heavily on his (temporary) involvement in or collusion with Nazi ideology and policies. Without belittling the gravity of the issue, this article shifts the focus somewhat by invoking a distinction which recently has emerged (or reemerged) in political thought: namely, the distinction between "politics" and "the political" or between politics viewed as partisan ideology or policy making, on the one hand, and politics seen as regime or paradigmatic framework, on the other. The main thesis of the article is that Heidegger's promising contributions to political theory are located on the level of ontology or paradigmatic framework rather than that of ideological partisanship. While not neglecting the dismal intrusions of the latter plane, the article probes Heideggerian cues for a "rethinking of the political" by placing the accent on four topical areas: first, the status of the subject or individual as political agent; second, the character of the political community, that is, of the polity or (in modern terms) the "state"; thirdly, the issue of cultural and political development or modernization; and finally, the problem of an emerging cosmopolis or world order beyond the confines of Western culture. In discussing these topics, an effort is made to disentangle Heidegger from possible misinterpretations and to indicate how, in each area, his thought pointed in the direction of an "overcoming" of Western political metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1407522

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261417
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Patoeka Edward F.
Abstract: This article examines the ties between the work of Václav Havel and his dissident mentor Jan Patočka. Havel's political theory consists largely of an evocative, literary reformulation of a number of themes developed by Patočka, the student of Husserl and Heidegger generally recognized as the most significant Czech philosopher of the century. Insofar as Patočka's work continues to be ignored in the West, the intuitively appealing essays of Havel will themselves fail to be fully understood. This study offers an analysis of Havel's debt to Patočka, as well as an explication of the latter's political thought. With Patočka's phenomenological interpretation of ancient and contemporary thought, of Socrates and Heidegger, a bridge is built between the classical and the postmodern that seeks to ground ethics and politics without recourse to the foundationalism of metaphysical accounts of reality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408462

Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261426
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Walzer William A.
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, "Discourse Ethics as a Response to the Novel Challenges of Today's Reality to Coresponsibility," Journal of Religion 74 (1993): 496-513 10.2307/1204180 496
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408857

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture, Inc.
Issue: i262141
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Tyler Daniel M.
Abstract: This paper proposes a theoretical foundation for extending our understanding of study drawings by bringing forward concepts from a number of disciplines that are concerned with the structure of knowledge. Study drawings are defined as the informal, private drawings that architectural designers use as a medium for graphic thinking in the exploratory stages of their work. Drawings from the work of Paxton through Picasso are analyzed to confirm the familiar characteristics of study drawings and to identify the properties which account for their role in the working process of design, including their use as a means of inquiry. This epistemological function is compared with certain features of written language in order to propose an internal structure for study drawings. The paper concludes that much of the origin and nature of knowledge in design can be explained in terms of the properties and processes of study drawings and that these terms should be used to evaluate proposals for new media in design.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1424832

Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture, Inc.
Issue: i262148
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Ito Botond
Abstract: This essay investigates the roots of a growing impass in contemporary architecture vis a vis the economic, technological, social and political developments of our advanced or late-capitalist society. It focuses upon architecture's apparently diminishing capacity to address our present human condition, yet argues that the problems responsible for the "crisis" of architectural thought and design in general have evolved as the result of historic processes, and therefore the impass can only partially be explained with the short-comings of modern architecture or the 'short sighted' attitude of the architects themselves. Nevertheless, it also argues that architecture, in spite of its now rather limited transformative capacity, should persistently attempt to reveal, rather than mask or otherwise escape, its fundamental relatedness to material processes; that is, to the modes of production and consumption on which social and political power relations are predicated. To be able to do so, and thus to foster a more liberating "form" of human environment, the profession needs first of all a strong political self consciousness, while aiming at a practice of critical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1424982

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263697
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): Pannenberg Ted
Abstract: Ibid., p. 421. 421
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461137

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263690
Date: 3 1, 1969
Author(s): Nabert Howard L.
Abstract: Jean Nabert, Elements for an Ethic, trans. by William J. Petrek (Northwestern University Press, 1969) Nabert Elements for an Ethic 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461385

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263690
Date: 3 1, 1972
Author(s): Holladay Phyllis
Abstract: William L. Holladay, "Jeremiah and Women's Liberation," Andover Newton Quarterly, March, 1972, pp. 213-223 Holladay March 213 Andover Newton Quarterly 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461386

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263694
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Brown William C.
Abstract: Norman O. Brown, "Daphne, or Metamorphosis," in J. Campbell, ed., Myths, Dreamns, and Religion (New York: Dutton, 1970), pp. 108-109. Brown 108 Daphne, or Metamorphosis 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461528

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263682
Date: 3 1, 1956
Author(s): Weil Anthony C.
Abstract: Jiirgen Moltmann, "Resurrection as Hope," Harvard Theological Review, LXI (1968), 146-47. 10.2307/1509274 146
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461678

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263686
Date: 3 1, 1964
Author(s): Christian Donald A.
Abstract: Paul Ramsey, "No Morality Without Immorality: Dostoevski and the Meaning of Atheism," Journal of Religion, XXXVI (1956), 90-108, p. 95. 10.2307/1199955 90
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461914

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263718
Date: 12 1, 1961
Author(s): Zaehner Donald A.
Abstract: The question raised in the title has been much debated by past and present interpreters of Zoroastrianism. In the first two parts of this paper we present some dualistic and monotheistic interpretations of the religion. The interpretations can be labeled as follows: 1. DUALISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks Omnipotence And Omniscience (Dhalla, Henning) 2. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks A Physical Nature (Shaked, Boyce) II. MONOTHEISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The Created Spirits View (Zaehner, Fox, Gershevitch) 2. The Transformationist (Maskhiyya) View 3. The Zurvānite View 4. The View That Good And Evil Are Coeternal Only In A Logical Sense (Moulton, Bode and Nanavutty, Duchesne-Guillemin) We present each of these views and discuss it critically in light of the following criteria: (1) textual evidence; (2) the continuity of the religion throughout its history, including the present time; (3) philosophical cogency; and (4) religious satisfaction. Our conclusion is that each of the above positions, despite its elements of strength, falls seriously short of one or more of these criteria, and hence that there is need for a more adequate interpretation of Zoroastrianism than any of them can offer. Accordingly, we present another interpretation in order to provoke further discussion and, hopefully, to advance the cause of trying to gain a more precise grasp of the teachings of this remarkable religion. In brief, the interpretation we favor is that Zoroastrianism combines cosmogonic dualism and eschatological monotheism in a manner unique to itself among the major religions of the world. This combination results in a religious outlook which cannot be categorized as either straightforward dualism or straightforward monotheism, meaning that the question in the title of this paper poses a false dichotomy. The dichotomy arises, we contend, from a failure to take seriously enough the central role played by time in Zoroastrian theology. Zoroastrianism proclaims a movement through time from dualism toward monotheism, i.e., a dualism which is being made false by the dynamics of time, and a monotheism which is being made true by those same dynamics of time. The meaning of the eschaton in Zoroastrianism is thus the triumph of monotheism, the good God Ahura Mazdā having at last won his way through to complete and final ascendancy. But in the meantime there is vital truth to dualism, the neglect of which can only lead to a distortion of the religion's essential teachings. We develop this interpretation in the last part of our paper and argue for its satisfaction of the four criteria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462275

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263715
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Windisch William A.
Abstract: Considered rhetorically, or by phenomenological-literary analysis, the saying about finding one's life by losing it intends to break up the continuity of existence of the hearer to the extent that he or she is left without a frame of reference. Considered from a historical-literary point of view, however, the saying occurs in an environment and presupposes a context which gives meaning to the response. A Whiteheadian or process perspective of interpretation offers an approach which can relate these two types of understanding of the saying, and can also cast light on contemporary styles of interpretation with their ontological presuppositions, either to set the saying in a framework of "rightness" or in one of "creativity."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462641

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263715
Date: 3 1, 1977
Author(s): Wittig Theodore J.
Abstract: The Parable of the Sower has fallen under an ancient and modern hermeneutical eclipse. Critical examination of the Markan text of the Markan text of the parable (4:3-9) indicates that the first hermeneutical eclipse of the parable's message occurred when the community which produced the interpretation of the Parable of the Sower (Mark 4:14-20) reworked the parable to conform to the community's theological needs. Removal of this community's reworked features from the text lays bare the original form of the Sower and gives us access to Jesus' original parabolic message. But apprehension of the full depth and scope of that message has not been possible with current hermeneutical methodologies. The limitations of these hermeneutics leave the message still under partial eclipse. By expanding the interpretative horizon with the help of Whiteheadian insights on ontology, epistemology, and the phenomenology of language, one is able to appreciate more fully the meaning of Jesus' proclamation in the Parable of the Sower.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462643

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263711
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): Wilson Mark C.
Abstract: Despite the significant impact of the awareness of perspectival relativism on the religious imagination, recent philosophers and theologians have rarely subjected epistemological relativism to careful scrutiny. This paper attempts to overcome the current theological impasse by a careful exploration of the metaphysical implications of relativism. The central thesis of the essay is that truth is relative because meaning is contextual and being is relational. Contextualized meaning and relational being join to form relative truth disclosed through symbolic awareness. The roots of contemporary relativism lie deep within eighteenth and nineteenth century philosophical movements and are inseparably entangled with the psycho-social pluralization endemic to the process of modernization. The efforts of Neo-orthodoxy, polytheism, and the scientific study of religion to resolve dilemmas posed by epistemological relativism are inadequate. What has gone unnoticed is that the discovery of truth's relativity is the realization of its inherently dialectical character. This insight begins to emerge when it is recognized that meaning is contextual and context is semiophantic. Principles identified in Hegel's logic, in Merleau-Ponty's phenomenology of temporality, and in Ricoeur's and Gadamer's hermeneutics disclose that meaning assumes form through dialectical interrelationship in which co-implicates mutually constitute each other. The synchronic and diachronic dimensions of relationality reveal the inexhaustability and perpetual revisability of meaning. The problem of semantics, however, is inseparable from the question of ontology. Ontological reflection leads to the conclusion that being itself is dialectical-fundamentally social or essentially relational. Determinate identity is born of ontological intercourse with otherness. Relations are not external and accidental, but are internal and essential to being itself. Identity and difference, unity and plurality, oneness and manyness are thoroughly corelative, joined in a dialectical relation of reciprocal implication. This pluralized unity and unified plurality is the ontological matrix of truth's relativity. Symbolic awareness is the interface of contextual meaning and relational being. The density of constitutive relations and the nascence of concrete actuality engender a dissonance between manifest and latent content in the reflection of being in consciousness. The polysemy of symbols captures the polymorphism of being in a way that establishes the need for a constant process of decipherment in which we reformulate our notions in order more fully to penetrate synchronic and diachronic relations that are ontologically definitive. By maintaining the tension between the revealed and the concealed, symbolic awareness insures that knowledge always evolves through ceaseless reinterpretation. For symbolic consciousness, truth, as being itself, forever becomes. The essay concludes with the suggestion that the wedding of a relativistic epistemology and a relational ontology in a symbolics of the religious imagination reopens the possibility of constructive theological reflection in a pluralistic age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462753

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263714
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Rauschenbusch Walter
Abstract: Walter Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis, viewed by many as the masterpiece of the social gospel movement, has been confined to the dusty shelves of the library. Can we catch no glimpse of what astounded its massive reading public, no glimmer of Rauschenbusch's own sense of the work as a "dangerous book" written in fear and trembling? This article suggests that a generic analysis of Christianity and the Social Crisis might lead to surprising disclosures. Any generic analysis involves the discussion of a group of texts. Consequently this study proceeds via a comparison of the structure of Christianity and the Social Crisis with those of other works of a similar type which were produced between 1890 and 1915. The genre is isolated by utilizing the techniques of Tzvetan Todorov. Certain negative traits are specified which separate the genre from its neighbors. The positive leitmotif of a dual crisis-a crisis affecting society as a whole and the ramifications of that crisis within the Christian churches-is specified as the decisive trait of the genre. To deal with this leitmotif a specific structure was generated by the works under consideration. They provided-to pirate the words of Clifford Geertz in his landmark essay on modern ideologies-"maps of problematic reality" and "matrices for the creation of collective conscience." In designing their maps of problematic reality our authors worked along two separate but related vectors. The first of these vectors was constituted by a historical analysis of the origins of the present crisis, while the second consisted of a systemic analysis of the present social order. Each of these elements of the genre is examined in turn. The mapping of problematic reality by means of a historical and a structural analysis was geared towards provoking as well as defining the crisis. Crisis, once defined, demanded decision. Nevertheless the "permanent basis for action" which Rauschenbusch and others sought could not be grounded upon ideological conviction alone. It required both concrete guidelines for praxis and the creation of an institutional matrix to mobilize the moral forces of the society, to form public opinion. These works then as ideological matrices for the creation of collective conscience were also designed to precipitate the transformation of the Church into an agent of human emancipation. The art of the genre was also an act. But in an age noted for "writing-as-action" the exemplars of the genre laid a complexly interwoven, carefully stressed foundation for Christian involvement in social change. Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis appears at the end of this analysis as the unsurpassed formulation of this distinctive genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463047

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263722
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Zahan William G.
Abstract: The very definition of myth is problematic today; here narrow, partial, "monomythic" definitions are rejected in favor of a complex, inclusive one, the seventeen items of which are then discussed. A mythological corpus consists of a network of myths, which are culturally-important imaginal stories conveying, by means of metaphor and symbol, graphic imagery, and emotional conviction and participation, the primal, foundational accounts of the real, experienced world, and humankind's roles and relative statuses within it. Mythologies may convey the political and moral values of a culture, and provide systems of interpreting individual experience within a universal perspective, which may include the intervention of suprahuman entities, as well as aspects of the natural and cultural orders. Myths may be enacted or reflected in rituals, ceremonies, and dramas, or provide materials for secondary elaborations. Only a polyphasic definition will provide appreciation of their manifold roles within a society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463445

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263719
Date: 3 1, 1933
Author(s): Whitehead Charles E.
Abstract: The focus of contemporary studies in religion on methodology can be explored as the recognition of a fundamental epistemological problem. This paper is first an acknowledgment that we do not have an adequate conceptuality to render intelligible inward turning and then an experiment with the meaning of intelligibility. The dispossession of consciousness as the sole place and origin of meaning constituting an intellectual aporia is presented as an experience of the subversion of the subject by the discovery of the unconscious in depth psychologies and the discovery of the transcendence of the subject in foundational theologies. Taking account of this duplex expression of what lingers in disguise behind the scripts of ordinary life is defined as a fundamental exigency in the further development of human understanding and theological reflection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463540

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Stevenson Walter J.
Abstract: Recent study of the nature of textuality as such opens new insights for the study of the Bible. Although individual parts of the Bible have oral antecedents, the Bible as a whole has existed only as a text, and a unique kind of text, folded back on itself out of communal memory as no other book has been. A text is a monument. Textuality establishes a special relationship between discourse and death. Spoken words are exchanges between living persons. The text presents its message as well if its author is dead as it does if he or she is alive. Print is even more bound to death than writing is. In comparison with oral performance-delivery of an oration, song-a text physically has certain special alliances with past time. All texts come out of the past. Literature as text is psychologically retrospective: its effects typically include an element of nostalgia. Because of its future orientation, culminating in the closing words of Revelation, "Come, Lord Jesus" (as against typical narrative closes such as "They lived happily ever after"), the Bible has an unusual relationship to textuality: it is not literature in the way other texts are. Typical narrative plot structures existence retrospectively: the story is organized back from the conclusion. This retrospective organization is maximized by writing, which tightens plot and makes more of re-cognition, a kind of return to the beginning (the past) and hence a cyclic pattern. In addition to being related intimately to death, writing and print are also limitlessly fecund, the central forces in the evolution of consciousness, once they appear. The fecundity of writing and print, like other fecundity in human existence, is achieved by passage through death. "Unless the grain of wheat dies." The Word of God in the Person of Jesus Christ is conceived of by analogy with the spoken word. The Father speaks the Word, the Son (eo verbum quo filius); he does not write the Word, who would then by biblical attestation be not life but death: "The letter kills, but the spirit [pneuma, breath, producer of speech] gives life." The Son passes through death to resurrected life. The written text, also God's word, must also be resurrected-by interpretation, by being inserted into the lifeworld of living persons. Hermeneutics is resurrection and in common Christian teaching demands faith. Study of the textuality of the Bible-which presumes but is not the same as study of the text of the Bible-opens many new theological questions and / or gives new contours to old questions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463750

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Winter Charles R.
Abstract: Through the provision of a set of theses for the interpretation and evaluation of theologies of liberation, this paper attempts to mediate the existing conflict between academic theologians and theologians of liberation. It seeks to establish the legitimacy of theological discourse focused on the problem of alienation and liberation if carefully executed according to a clear set of guidelines. The paper begins with the argument that all interpretations of theologies of liberation must begin with an analysis of the theological genre within which these works fall. After insisting that theologies of liberation belong neither to the genre of systematic theology nor that of Christian social ethics, the paper develops the second thesis that theologies of liberation are best understood as members of a genre whose distinctive characteristics and functions are analogous to those intrinsic to secular ideologies. This thesis hinges upon a revisionist understanding of ideology drawn from the works of Clifford Geertz et al. and upon a careful specification of the generic similarities between the two forms of discourse. The second part of the paper moves from the level of interpretation to that of evaluation. It argues that theologies of liberation share with ideologies a tendency to occlude self-critical reflection. It suggests that a conscious recognition that theologies of liberation do not exhaust the possibilities of theological discourse but are relative models which select and interpret Christian symbols and doctrines in the light of the central dynamic of alienation and liberation might provide an antidote to this pathology. It maintains with Rosemary Ruether that there is no absolutely adequate model of alienation and liberation and that various models of alienation and liberation must be "interstructured" in order to overcome the perspectival biases of models which focus upon a single root of oppression. To establish relative degrees of adequacy between various theological models of liberation the paper argues that these models be evaluated a) by the criterion of appropriateness to the charter documents and to the historical development of one's chosen religious tradition, b) by the criterion of adequacy to the human condition in its essential commonality and in its historical diversity, and c) by the criterion of dialectical inclusiveness. The paper concludes by agreeing with theologians of liberation that ultimately no set of criteria validates a theology of liberation. As fundamentally geared to praxis, such a theology must be subject to a process of existential verification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463752

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263713
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Teselle Robert F.
Abstract: The thesis of this paper is that an absolute origin of evil, arising from the free will of a creature, must be incomprehensible. Although Augustine occasionally acknowledges this point, nevertheless in a number of better-known passages (chiefly in The City of God) he attempts to give a causal account of the fall of Adam and/or Satan. Much of the subsequent Christian tradition has unfortunately followed his lead, and major recent commentators routinely ignore or passively approve of his conceptual error. Augustine offers three unacceptable explanations of the fall, which conflict variously with his own doctrines of divine omnipotence, the goodness of creation, and creaturely free will and responsibility, as well as violating the canons of sound argumentation and explanation. First, his contention that free creatures made "out of nothing" inevitably fall makes the fall seem ontologically necessary (unfree) and thereby lays the ultimate responsibility for it on the Creator. Second, the appeal to pride as an explanation is a spurious causal account, for "pride" is only a synonym for "fallenness" itself and not a possible antecedent condition in a being created good and not yet fallen. Finally, his assertion that the first sin is intrinsically comprehensible, but not comprehensible to us because we are fallen, is an obfuscation masquerading as an explanation, for we have no warrant for supposing that this assertion is true or even meaningful. Instead of seeking causal explanation Augustine should have stayed with his own wiser observation that an evil will has no efficient cause. Theology of the Augustinian sort (which comprises much of the Christian tradition) ought to concede that the fall as a work of genuine freedom is an absurd "fact," an incomprehensible given which steadfastly and in principle resists causal explanation. The concluding section of the paper draws upon Ricoeur's insights to tell why the narrative structure of the "Adamic myth" (which has important positive functions of its own) begets as an unfortunate byproduct this tendency to spin out a causal account of the first evil, with the conceptual confusion resulting from it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463800

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263739
Date: 3 1, 1982
Author(s): Lincoln Donald
Abstract: Lincoln's Quest for Union: Public and Private Meanings (New York: Basic Books, 1982) Lincoln Quest for Union: Public and Private Meanings 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464287

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263761
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Zamora Lynn
Abstract: Whitman's "Facing West from California's Shores" Whitman Facing West from California's Shores
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464618

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263751
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Wheelwright Douglas
Abstract: 185-6;201;222;233-4;247-251
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464831

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263784
Date: 7 1, 1967
Author(s): Woozley F. Samuel
Abstract: Macdonald 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466106

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263784
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Wilson Joseph M.
Abstract: Actually, Campbell regarded folklore as a reduced form of mythology and a preserver of genuinely mythological motifs (1969d). Actually, Campbell regarded folklore as a reduced form of mythology and a preserver of genuinely mythological motifs 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466107

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263794
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Sullivan Nadine Pence
Abstract: The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture [New York: Harper San Francisco, 1991] The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466172

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263809
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Zaleski Charles T.
Abstract: Lear: 148-166, 219-246 148
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466523

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264940
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): Wittgenstein Roberto
Abstract: Borutti, 1996:11. 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1479813

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264937
Date: 10 1, 1923
Author(s): Mauss Sergio Dalla
Abstract: Field research is a crucial component, if not the very foundation, of anthropological research. The concept is straightforward enough to seem a truism. One could stop here an enthuse on the heuristic benefits of participant observation (some scholars do so with an almost religious zeal). Otherwise one can adopt a more wary attitude and question the hidden, unspeakable reasons for such passion. A look at academia with an ethnographic slant (if one is free, so to say, to "ethnograph" the ethnographer) is sufficient to realise that field-work rhetoric is pervaded with extra-scientific motives. In the background lie corporate interests more similar to exclusion and "ethnological cleaning" than epistemology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1479957

Journal Title: AJS Review
Publisher: Association for Jewish Studies
Issue: i265525
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Dan Elliot R.
Abstract: Sefer ha-Zikhronot, appended to Divrei Soferim (Lublin, 1927), fol. 34d.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1486428

Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: California Folklore Society
Issue: i266268
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Bellah Jay
Abstract: Sue Samuelson describes her own experi- ence as an "expert witness" in her "Folklore and the Legal System: The Expert Witness," Western Folklore 41 (1982): 139-144 10.2307/1499786 139
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1499375

Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266351
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Yorke D. M.
Abstract: In recent years personal construct theory has become increasingly used to underpin research into teachers' thinking, and a number of researchers have opted to give methodological prominence to the repertory grid. This paper points to the limitations of the theory in respect of research outside the domain of psychotherapy and to some of the problems associated with repertory grid studies. It is argued that repertory grids are inherently positivistic and are thus in philosophical tension with the theory on which they are based, a tension that is not removed by researching in a 'conversation paradigm'. The importance of events in personal construct theory is discussed, and it is suggested that an emphasis on events requires the researcher to adopt an approach that is informed by phenomenology and the philosophy of history. Finally, a return is made to the level of research practice,i and a methodological approach is outlined which is-to a greater extent than the repertory grid-consistent with the main thrust of personal construct theory. Stress is given to the importance of the quality of the relationships between constructs, since these have implications for connections between construing and action-an issue which is of crucial importance is the study of teachers' thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501228

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: i267044
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Cuénot Christopher F.
Abstract: Comment je vois (1948), p. 23. 23 Comment je vois 1948
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1508793

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267113
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Lindbeck Wayne A.
Abstract: idem, "The Sectarian Future of the Church," in Joseph P. Whelan, ed., The God Experience (Westminster, MD: Newman, 1971) 226-43 Lindbeck The Sectarian Future of the Church 226 The God Experience 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509410

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i267105
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Balthasar Kenneth
Abstract: "D" Society Of Cambrige University sity
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509502

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i267106
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Gadamer Stephen N.
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, Truth and Method (trans. Garrett Barden and John Cumming; New York: Continuum, 1975). Gadamer Truth and Method 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509528

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267120
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Frank Steven D.
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 299.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509553

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267115
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Crites Dan O.
Abstract: Stephen Crites, "The Aesthetics of Self-Deception," Soundings 62 (1979) 126 - 27 Crites 126 62 Soundings 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509656

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267159
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Afrasiabi K. L.
Abstract: K. L. Afrasiabi, "Critical Theory, Feminism, and Theology," Telos (spe- cial issue on religion, forthcoming 1998) Afrasiabi Critical Theory, Feminism, and Theology Telos 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509790

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267145
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Brueggemann J. Richard
Abstract: chap. 2, esp. 29-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509805

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267145
Date: 7 1, 1962
Author(s): von Rad Walter
Abstract: Schmid, Gerechtigkeit als Weltordnung, passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509806

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267129
Date: 7 1, 1798
Author(s): Wordsworth Richard E.
Abstract: Wordsworth's "Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey" (1798) Wordsworth Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey 1798
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509876

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1936
Author(s): Ayer Stephen W.
Abstract: Alfred J. Ayer, Lan- guage, Truth and Logic (1936; reprinted Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971 Ayer Truth and Logic 1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509887

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1965
Author(s): d'Alverny Willemien
Abstract: Ein Jahrtausend lateinischer Hymnendichtung (2 vols.; ed. Guido Maria Dreves, rev. Clemens Blume S.J.; Leipzig: Reisland, 1909) 1. 288
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509888

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267151
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Owen C.
Abstract: Ibid., 335. 335
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509997

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267141
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Ruf Frederick J.
Abstract: Ruf, "Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres." Ruf Coleridge's Biographia Literaria: Extravagantly Mixed Genres
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510012

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267158
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Ric∄r Elisabeth Schüssler
Abstract: Paul Ric∄r, "History and Rhetoric," 23. Ric∄r 23 History and Rhetoric
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510095

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267152
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Idem Francis Schüssler
Abstract: The Eyes of Faith (New York: Fordham University Press, 1990) The Eyes of Faith 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510139

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267285
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Polanyi Richard
Abstract: ) Schön (note 44).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511599

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267303
Date: 7 1, 1965
Author(s): Weber John
Abstract: Boltanski, "L'amour et la justice," 113 Boltanski 113 L'amour et la justice
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511841

Journal Title: Vetus Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i267617
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Hanson John
Abstract: The Diversity of Scripture by P. D. Hanson (Philadelphia, 1982) Hanson The Diversity of Scripture 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1518140

Journal Title: British Journal of Educational Studies
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i269832
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Woods Peter
Abstract: Economics is privileged in contemporary government policy such that all human transactions are seen as economic forms of exchange. Education has been discursively restructured according to the logic of the market, with education policy being increasingly colonised by economic policy imperatives. This paper explores some of the consequences of this reframing which draws upon metaphors from industrial and business domains. This paper examines a significant dimension of teaching that currently has marginal presence in official discourse: social contingency. We argue that social contingency is characterised by a variety of distinctive features that include unpredictability, relationality and ethical demands. The significance of social contingency is highlighted by a comparison with industrial production, which is organisationally contingent, and craft production, which is characterised as materially contingent. We argue that the different nature of contingency in these domains makes them inappropriate as metaphors for teaching. We explore the nature of social contingency and some of the practical and ethical consequences of the failure to articulate this in official discourse. Its absence in such discourse is illustrated by consideration of competence statements in the Initial Teacher Education context. We argue that the neglect of social contingency is founded on assumptions of teacher sovereignty that are both philosophically and ethically unsustainable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1555869

Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i270299
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): White Jens
Abstract: White, Klio, 121 White 121 Klio
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1561329

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i270365
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Wiesel Ronald L.
Abstract: Abraham Stahl, "Ritualistic Reading among Oriental Jews," Anthropological Quarterly 52, no. 2 (1979): 115-20, 117. 10.2307/3317261 115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1562391

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i270365
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Williams Martin J.
Abstract: "The Cosmological Argument and Hegel's Doctrine of God," New Scholasticism 52 (Summer 1978): 364-66 Summer 364 52 New Scholasticism 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1562394

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270554
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Zupančič Tim
Abstract: Zupančič
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566285

Journal Title: Journal of Religion in Africa
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i271173
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Werbner Anthony
Abstract: The article describes and analyses the recruitment and training of young Zambians in the 1990s for Catholic religious Brotherhood. The consequences of the missionary employment of Euro-American concepts of personhood and self that involve particular understandings of narrative and the use of psychological testing are explored. The author argues that Zambian understandings of personhood and of individual experience of evil and suffering are silenced in the process of religious formation. This discussion raises salient issues about training for Catholic religious or priestly life in Africa because similar techniques have been commonly employed throughout the continent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1581749

Journal Title: Vigiliae Christianae
Publisher: North-Holland Publishing Company
Issue: i271303
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Dodds Richard A.
Abstract: Dodds, Pagan and Christian, 136-138. Dodds 136 Pagan and Christian
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1583425

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271952
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BloomAbstract: Bloom, Kabbalab and Criticism, pp. 33-35, 71-79, 95-126. Bloom 33 Kabbalab and Criticism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1595855

Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271962
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Schlegell Jawid A.
Abstract: B.R. Von Schlegell, Principles of Sufism (Berkeley 1990) pp. xiii-xv Schlegell xiii Principles of Sufism 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1596163

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i273563
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Yerushalmi Howard L.
Abstract: Robert Bellah and colleagues' Habits of the Heart (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1602332

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301488
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Alkon Burton
Abstract: Ibid., p. 203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770020

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301543
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Sarraute Claus
Abstract: August 23, 1982, at the Tenth Congress of the International Comparative Literature Association at New York University. Tenth Congress of the International Comparative Literature Association at New York University 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770278

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301584
Date: 1 1, 1928
Author(s): Woolf Stacy
Abstract: Myself with Others 27 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771629

Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Ltd
Issue: i302185
Date: 6 1, 1982
Author(s): Wolf George Clement
Abstract: This essay explores the relation of authority to legitimacy through the social construction of local histories that validate claims to 'authentic' rulership. Using the historical example of the Chiefdom of Uyombe in northern Zambia, I intend to argue that the construction of these local histories has been a crucial element in the process of domination, subjugation, resistance and collaboration between rulers and those they would rule. Exploring specific Gramscian concepts, I will also argue that historical narratives contain hegemonic and ideological components that are critical to relating authority to legitimacy in an active manner. These narratives contain African voices, which express varied local interests. Through the narratives, Africans may be seen as active agents in contributing to the making of their own local histories of rulership. Thus, authority and legitimacy are conjoined through the fabrication, inscription and recitation of historical narratives and are an essential part of governance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771857

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303065
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Wilden Louise O.
Abstract: 11. 632-633
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772376

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303076
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Wellmer Gerald
Abstract: KHI 146 146
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772571

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): White Meir
Abstract: Labov (1972)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773082

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303114
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White C. Allen
Abstract: White 1973: 22-29 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773130

Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303097
Date: 4 1, 1958
Author(s): Yizhar Tamar
Abstract: Sovran (forthcoming)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773139

Journal Title: The Journal of African History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i209472
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Portelli Elizabeth
Abstract: H. U. E. Thoden Van Velzen, 'Robinson Crusoe and Friday: strength and weakness of the big man paradigm', Man (n.s.), VIII, iv (1973), 592-612 10.2307/2800743 592
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/181133

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Higham David
Abstract: john Higham, History: Professional Scholarship in America [Baltimore, Md., 1983], 241 Higham 241 History: Professional Scholarship in America 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873746

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides Allan
Abstract: Thucydides, History of the Peloponnesian War, trans. Rex Warner (Harmondsworth, Eng., 1954). Thucydides History of the Peloponnesian War 1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873749

Journal Title: Gender and Society
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i209797
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Yllö Carole
Abstract: Analysis of records of women at risk for abuse showed that though information about abuse was present, emergency room physicians rarely utilized it. The doctor-patient interaction tended to obscure rather than elucidate knowledge of abuse. Medicine's epistemologic model of care reconstructs abusive relationships through a medical encounter in which what is most significant is not seen. Nurses are less affected by the model but are under institutional constraints that lead to similar outcomes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/189767

Journal Title: The William and Mary Quarterly
Publisher: The Institute of Early American History and Culture
Issue: i305951
Date: 1 1, 1644
Author(s): Coke A. G.
Abstract: "Evangelical Revolt," WMQ, 3d Ser., XXXI [1974], 359 10.2307/1921628 359
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1920968

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333635
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Wheelwright Eugene F.
Abstract: Ricoeur explains this point (1977, pp. 300-03) 300
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1954738

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i306776
Date: 3 1, 1968
Author(s): Lefebvre Fred R.
Abstract: In Praise of Philosophy, pp. 33, 46-47 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1960324

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333662
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): Skinner John G.
Abstract: Recent challenges to traditional approaches and purposes for studying the history of political theory have raised questions about its constitution as both a subject matter and subfield of political science. Methodological arguments advocating what is characterized as a more truly historical mode of inquiry for understanding political ideas and recovering textual meaning have become increasingly popular. The relationship of these hermeneutical claims about historicity, such as that advanced by Quentin Skinner, to the actual practice of interpretation is problematical. Such claims are more a defense of a certain norm of historical investigation than a method of interpretation, and the implications of this norm for the reconstitution of the history of political theory require careful consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1961112

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333668
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Tinder Deborah
Abstract: Taylor, it has to be noted, would presumably quarrel with this "either/or" formulation, either interpret the classics or interpret the world. His Hegel book obvi- ously falls within the genre of commentary on the tradi- tion. Furthermore, in the preface to its condensation as Hegel and Modern Society, he emphasizes the relevance of Hegel's political philosophy to our time (1979, pp. xi- xii) xi
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1962293

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20005706
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Martin Janet
Abstract: Summa Theologica, 1a. 13, 4
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20005711

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006039
Date: 6 1, 1984
Author(s): Strug Cordell
Abstract: Ibid. pp. 156-7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006050

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006219
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Maddox Randy L.
Abstract: Johann Baptist Metz, Faith in History and Society (New York, NY: Crossroad, 1980), pp. 88-91, 110
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006225

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006306
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Arthur C. J.
Abstract: Morris Jastrow, The Study of Religion (London, 1901), p. 1
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006312

Journal Title: International Journal of Politics, Culture, and Society
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i20006951
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Bar-Haim Gabriel
Abstract: Asylums, N.Y., Anchor Books, 1961. pp. 189
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006954

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008134
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Levine Michael
Abstract: W. Somerset Maugham, 'The Philosopher', in On A Chinese Screen (London: Jonathan Cape, 1922), p. 164.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008136

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008134
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Berthold-Bond Daniel
Abstract: 'The Earliest System - Programme of German Idealism', cited in Henry Harris, Hegel's Development: Toward the Sunlight, 1770-1801 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972), 511.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008139

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Ablex Publishing Corporation
Issue: i20008794
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): Hutcheson Peter
Abstract: Monist (January, 1975, 59 (1), pp. 98-114
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008799

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Ablex Publishing Corporation
Issue: i20008840
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: legere, reading" (1970, pars. 239-240, p. 36)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008842

Journal Title: American Philosophical Quarterly
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i20009122
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): Edie James M.
Abstract: Aron Gurwitsch, "La conception de la conscience chez Kant et chez Husserl," in Bulletin de la société française de philosophie (1959), 65-96
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20009127

Journal Title: American Philosophical Quarterly
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i20009276
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Spiegelberg Herbert
Abstract: "Wittgenstein's Phenomenology," Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, vol. 20 (1959), pp. 37-50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20009279

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010363
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Peters Gary
Abstract: This essay is concerned with an initial mapping out of a model of intersubjectivity that, viewed within the context of education, breaks with the hegemonic dialogics of current pedagogies. Intent on rethinking the (so-called) "problem" of solipsism for phenomenology in terms of a pedagogy that situates itself within solitude and the alterity of self and other, Maurice Blanchot and Emmanuel Levinas will here speak as the voices of this other mode of teaching. Beginning with the problematization of intersubjectivity in romantic aesthetics and hermeneutics, I introduce the concept of irony as a crucial element in the conceptualization of this other pedagogical model, one that requires, initially, a discussion of Husserl's response to the charge of solipsism in the 5th Cartesian Meditation. As a starting point I introduce his symmetrical notion of bodily "pairing" into a consideration of rhetoric, understood here as an integral part of teaching, thus forging links with phenomenology via the work of Merleau-Ponty. The above provides a context for an extended discussion of pedagogy as it appears in the work of Blanchot and Levinas. Although similar in many respects, on closer inspection it will emerge that important differences are evident in the dissymmetrical and asymmetrical models suggested by the two thinkers respectively. These differences, I will argue, begin to open up a critical perspective on Levinas' "height" model of teaching in the name of the more radical configuration of phenomenology and rhetoric to be found in Blanchot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010368

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010370
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Papastephanou Marianna
Abstract: Rawls's recent modification of his theory of justice claims that political liberalism is free-standing and "falls under the category of the political. It works entirely within that domain and does not rely on anything outside it." In this article I pursue the metatheoretical goal of obtaining insight into the anthropological assumptions that have remained so far unacknowledged by Rawls and critics alike. My argument is that political liberalism has a dependence on comprehensive liberalism and its conception of a self-serving subjectivity that is far more binding as well as undesirable than it has been so far acknowledged. I proceed with a heuristic approach that introduces us to the possibility that political liberalism presupposes tacitly the Occidental metanarrative of reason harnessing rampant self-interest and subordinating it to a higher-order interest. As the presuppositions of political liberalism emerge, I draw from the debate between Rawls and Habermas in order to illustrate my argument for the existence of a dependence on these presuppositions. I outline some implications of the anthropological basis of political liberalism and conclude by exemplifying them with reference to Rawls's comments on the division of a cake.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010377

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010381
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Fisher William P.
Abstract: Academia's mathematical metaphysics are briefly explored en route to an elaboration of the qualitatively rigorous requirements underpinning the calibration and unambiguous interpretation of quantitative instrumentation in any science. Of particular interest are Gadamer's emphases on number as the paradigm of the noetic, on the role of play in interpretation, and on Hegel's sense of method as the activity of the thing itself that thought experiences. These point toward and overlap with (1) Latour's study of the metrological social networks through which technological phenomena are brought into language as modes of being that can be understood, and (2) the way that Rasch's models for measurement comprise a potential beginning for metaphysically astute, qualitatively and quantitatively integrated, mathematical methods in the social sciences. The paper closes with observations on the general problem that is philosophy, the need to remain open to multiplicities of meaning even as clear understandings are sought and obtained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010389

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011066
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Bentz Valerie Malhotra
Abstract: This paper is a reflection on the boundaries of academic discourse as I came to be acutely aware of them while attempting to teach a graduate seminar in qualitative research methods. The purpose of the readings in Husserl and Schutz and the writing exercises was to assist students trained in quantitative methods and steeped in positivistic assumptions about research to write phenomenological descriptions of lived experience. "Paul" could not write the assigned papers due to a diagnosed writing "disability" but he did submit fictional stories and sketches which beautifully illustrated the concepts of Husserl and Schutz. Paul's disability presented a natural "bracketing" experiment which brought the positivistic assumptions surrounding academic research and writing to the forefront. I engaged in verbal dialogues with Paul, in which he discussed the philosophical ideas. My work with Paul highlighted the extent to which the academic lifeworld marginalizes those who seek to write from the heart, disguising even the work of those philosophers who wish to uncover direct experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011071

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011066
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Vinyard Dana
Abstract: This paper provides a phenomenological account of the writing of a young woman diagnosed with schizophrenia. The method of interpretation is to put ourselves in the place of the author drawing upon a combination of sympathy, reason, common-sense, experience, and "an intersubjective world, common to us all" (Schutz, 1945: 536). The result is the recognition of the person as also capable of putting herself in the place of others so as to understand their behavior. This "role-taking success" identifies the limits of the current sociological understanding of insanity's significance in social interaction as an instance of "role-taking failure" (Rosenberg, 1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011073

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011089
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Cissna Kenneth N.
Abstract: A version of the present essay was presented at the Cen¬ tral States Communication Association and Southern States Communication Association Joint Conference, Lexington, Kentucky, in April, 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011095

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011143
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Wait Eldon C.
Abstract: Perhaps the greatest challenge to an existential phenomenological account of perception is that posed by the argument from illusions. Recent developments in research on the behaviour of subjects suffering from illusions together with some seminal ideas found in Merleau-Ponty's writings enable us to develop and corroborate an account of the phenomenon of illusions, one, which unlike the empiricist account, does not undermine our conviction that in perception we "reach the things themselves". The traditional argument from illusions derives its force from an uncritical assumption that the process of experience takes place in time conceived as an infinite series of distinct moments. Once this assumption has been bracketed we are able to recognise the paradoxical truth that in the disillusion something can become that which it has always been and can cease to be that which it has never been. Furthermore, through a reflection on our experience of others overcoming their illusions, and on psychological evidence, we are able to show that there is nothing to suggest that this description of the disillusion is a description of a private or subjective event.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011151

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011143
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Brockelman Paul
Abstract: The new scientific cosmology which has emerged over the past forty years seems to be forcing philosophers and theologians alike to rethink the traditional theistic conception of God in which God is pictured as a First Cause designer of the universe in favor of what Joseph Campbell more mystically calls an "immanent ground of being, transcendent of conceptualization." The central thrust of these reflections is that we encounter that "immanent ground of being" through the experience of wonder and awe. Since actual experience is involved, then a phenomenological description of exactly what it is in the new cosmology (and the universe) which induces such wonder is possible. The basic thesis is that we experience wonder in the face of the remarkable and transcendent (beyond finite predicates and understanding) coming-into-being of nature over twelve to fifteen billion years. Wonder is the human reaction to and appreciation for the astounding fact that nature and all of its parts actually are. It is; we are; such is the ineffable beyond in our midst.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011155

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019300
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): McGaughey Douglas R.
Abstract: Ricoeur, Rule, pp. 214-215
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019302

Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019618
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Humbert David
Abstract: SE 21, 7-8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019620

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097906
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Neumann Iver B.
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, The Constitution of Society: Outline of the Theory of Structuration (Cambridge: Polity, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097914

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20099867
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Bird Robert
Abstract: Aleksej Losev's definition of myth centres on the concept of detachment. In modern times detachment has most often figured in the context of philosophical aesthetics, where it is a cognitive category akin to Kant's "disinterestedness" or the Russian formalists' "estrangement." However Losev's usage also makes reference to the ontological sense of detachment as contemplative ascent (cf. Meister Eckhardt's "Abgeschiedenheit"). Thus, Losev's concept of myth combines both senses of detachment, binding perceptual attitude and being together in a double movement of resignation from the world and union with meaning; this movement literally makes sense out of reality. It therefore bears comparison to the treatment of distanciation in contemporary hermeneutics, where detachment is a key condition of understanding. By investigating Losev's connections to other Russian thinkers, the author makes a case for a distinct Russian tradition of hermeneutic philosophy (V. Ivanov, G. Shpet, A. Bakshy, A. Losev).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20099872

Journal Title: World Politics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: i308701
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Dittmer Lowell
Abstract: The concept of political culture embraces some of the most basic, perennially fascinating concerns in behavioral political science; because of certain ambiguities in its theoretical formulation, however, there has been a tendency for the term to grow fuzzy with continued use. Its connection with related concepts, such as political psychology, political structure, and political language, has remained unclear, with the result that political culture has been difficult to isolate as an independent variable. Thus it has come to occupy a position on the periphery of politics, and is usually presumed to reinforce the status quo. This paper re-examines previous formulations of the concept and proposes a theoretical synthesis. The analytical framework is derived from semiological theory, a branch of science specifically designed for the analysis of meanings. The central variable is the political symbol. By analyzing the interactions of political symbols within a comprehensive semiological framework, the traditional concerns of political culture can be accommodated in a more precise and systematic way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2010039

Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20108002
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Prendeville Brendan
Abstract: 'Bundles for Them. A History of Giving Bundles' (p. 379)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20108006

Journal Title: Synthese
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20118056
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Schulkin Jay
Abstract: Two philosophical traditions with much in common, (classical) pragmatism and (Heidegger's) hermeneutic philosophy, are here compared with respect to their approach to the philosophy of science. Both emphasize action as a mode of interpreting experience. Both have developed important categories -- inquiry, meaning, theory, praxis, coping, historicity, life-world -- and each has offered an alternative to the more traditional philosophies of science stemming from Descartes, Hume, and Comte. Pragmatism's "abduction" works with the dual perspectives of theory (as explanation) and praxis (as culture). The hermeneutical circle depends in addition on the lifeworld as background source of ontological meaning and resource for strategies of inquiry. Thus a hermeneutical philosophy of research involves three components: lifeworld (as ontological and strategic), theory (as explanatory), and praxis (as constitutive of culture).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20118058

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20126950
Date: 3 1, 1977
Author(s): Collins James
Abstract: S. Givone, La storia della filosofia secundo Kant (Milan: Mursia, 1972), especially pp. 135-146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20126955

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127789
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Dauenhauer Bernard P.
Abstract: my "Politics and Coercion," Philosophy Today, 21, 2 (Summer 1977): 103-114.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127794

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127871
Date: 3 1, 1983
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: S. Kierkegaard, Kierkegaard's Concluding Unscientific Postscript, trans. D. Swenson and W. Lowrie (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1941), p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127878

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130029
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Muldoon Mark S.
Abstract: Picard, The World of Silence, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130031

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130607
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas, Totality and Infinity: An Essay on Exteriority, trans. Alphonso Lingis (Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130610

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130774
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Watson Stephen H.
Abstract: Ibid., 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130779

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130854
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: This article is a revision of a paper originally delivered to the Té- menos Academy, London (UK) in March, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130858

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20131299
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Norris Christopher
Abstract: Ideology and Rationality in the History of the Life Sci- ences, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20131302

Journal Title: Die Welt des Islams
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i20140776
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Schielke Samuli
Abstract: Thomas Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, 3rd ed. (Chicago, Chicago Univer- sity Press, 1996), chapter 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20140782

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Getty Center for the History of Art and the Humanities
Issue: i20166911
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Lee Pamela M.
Abstract: I. Kopytoff, "The Cultural Biography of Things," pp. 68-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20166922

Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20175108
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Isaac Joel
Abstract: Jamie Cohen-Cole, 'The reflexivity of cognitive science: the scientist as model of human nature', History of the Human Sciences, 18 (2005), pp. 107-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20175119

Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184615
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Iguchi Kawori
Abstract: This article seeks to explore the act of reading as an essential element of notated musical practices and of the construction of knowledge about them. By examining how musical notations affect their reader-performers (and vice versa) in two different musical contexts in Japan--the Kyoto Gion festival and amateur lessons on the nohkan flute--the article draws attention to the ways in which the act of reading notation is central to the construction of knowledge about such musical practices. With reference to Etienne Wenger's notion of learning as a process of alignment, and to debates in the anthropology of reading, it then argues that, for learners of these musics, reading notations is a practice of reverse tracing towards the bodily practices of the accomplished. In discussing the musicians' concern for the efficacy of reading as a means of achieving a relevant state of understanding, the article also addresses questions on the role of reading as a method of becoming knowledgeable in the practice of anthropological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184621

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210419
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Klausner Samuel Z.
Abstract: The ways in which values are assimilated to social research differ according to the theoretical frame of reference informing the research. An example from the writings of E. Digby Baltzell illustrates how a moral commitment shaped his assumptions about the nature of the social matrix and his research strategies. A Western moral rhetoric fares well if the researcher chooses a methodologically individualist framework. The framework assists a moral rhetoric by providing it with concrete rather than abstract social actors and with a basis for explanation in terms of motive rather than situational forces. Along the way moral statements can appear in the form of empirical generalizations and historical laws. Should sociologists deem ethically neutral social research desirable, this study suggests that concentration on scientific method, without exploring the value bases for selecting a frame of reference, is not a promising approach. A value analysis, especially around Weber's "value relevance," may function propaedeuticly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201851

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210402
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Kaye Howard L.
Abstract: In the 1950s and 1960s Freudian theory was deemed to be a vital part of the sociological tradition, but since then it has fallen from favor, largely because of the simplifications and misinterpretations both by Freud's sociological critics and by his supporters. Chief among such misunderstandings is the tendency to view Freud's social theory as a variant of that of Hobbes, in which a selfish and asocial human nature is made social through the imposition of external constraints; these constraints, as Durkheim stated, eventually are "internalized" into the personalities of social beings. Against such a claim this paper argues that Freud's views differ profoundly from those of Hobbes and that the myth of the Hobbesian Freud has so distorted Freud's most fundamental concepts that their social theoretical significance has been largely obscured.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201875

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210405
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Hall John R.
Abstract: Conventionally, proposals to improve working relations between sociology and history have been interdisciplinary. The present essay advances an alternative approach-consolidation of sociohistorical inquiry as a transdisciplinary enterprise. All socio-historical inquiry depends on four elemental forms of discourse: discourse on values, narrative discourse, social theoretical discourse, and the discourse of explanation. Though inquiry is transdisciplinary in the problematics of these discourses, concrete methodology typically is oriented either toward theorization in relation to cases (historical sociology) or toward comprehensive analysis of a single phenomenon (sociological history). Varying the articulated relations among the four forms of discourse once for historical sociology and again for sociological history yields eight ideal typical strategies of inquiry. The four strategies of historical sociology include universal history, theory application, macro-analytic history, and contrast-oriented comparison. The parallel strategies for sociological history are situational history, specific history, configurational history, and historicism. These ideal types offer standard reference points that help clarify the underpinnings of a diverse range of scholarly practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201957

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20203578
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Birth Kevin
Abstract: Johannes Fabian's "Time and the Other" criticized anthropology for creating representations that placed the Other outside the flow of time. Fabian offered the ethnographic portrayal of coevalness as a solution to this problem. This article explores four challenges to the representation of coevalness: the split temporalities of the ethnographer; the multiple temporalities of different histories; the culturally influenced phenomenological present; and the complicated relationship between culturally variable concepts of being and becoming and cultural concepts of time. Based on these challenges, this article argues that some attempts at ethnographic coevalness have fostered a temporal framework of homochronism which subsumes the Other into academic discourses of history. To achieve coevalness and to avoid homochronism and allochronism, it is necessary to represent the temporal frameworks that research subjects use to forge coevalness with ethnographers, and to place these frameworks in relationship to commonly used academic representations of time and history. /// Dans son livre "Le Temps et les Autres," Johannes Fabian critiquait la création par l'anthropologie de représentations plaçant l'Autre en dehors du flux du temps. Selon lui, la description ethnographique de la contemporanéité pourrait être la solution à ce problème. Le présent article explore les quatre difficultés que pose la représentation de la contemporanéité: temporalités dissociées de l'ethnographe, temporalités multiples des différentes histoires, présent phénoménologique culturellement informé, relation complexe entre les concepts culturellement variables de l'être et du devenir et les concepts culturel du temps. Sur la base de ces difficultés, l'auteur avance que certaines tentatives de contemporanéité ethnographique ont suscité un cadre temporel d'homochronie qui subsume l'Autre dans les discours académiques sur l'histoire. Pour parvenir à la contemporanéité et éviter homochronie et allochronie, il est nécessaire de représenter les cadres temporels utilisés par les enquêtés pour forger la contemporanéité avec les ethnographes et de resituer ces cadres en relation avec les représentations académiques du temps et de l'histoire qui prévalent habituellement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20203581

Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i20297272
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Davis, Donald R.
Abstract: Pārthasārathi's interpretation of PMS 1.1.2 in Clooney (2004: 765)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20297276

Journal Title: Perspectives on Politics
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20446751
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Kedar Asaf
Abstract: This article offers an anti-naturalist philosophical critique of the naturalist tendencies within qualitative concept formation as developed most prominently by Giovanni Sartori and David Collier. We begin by articulating the philosophical distinction between naturalism and anti-naturalism. Whereas naturalism assumes that the study of human life is not essentially different from the study of natural phenomena, anti-naturalism highlights the meaningful and contingent nature of social life, the situatedness of the scholar, and so the dialogical nature of social science. These two contrasting philosophical approaches inspire, in turn, different strategies of concept formation. Naturalism encourages concept formation that involves reification, essentialism, and an instrumentalist view of language. Anti-naturalism, conversely, challenges reified concepts for eliding the place of meanings, essentialist concepts for eliding the place of contingency, and linguistic instrumentalism for eliding the situatedness of the scholar and the dialogical nature of social science. Based on this philosophical framework, we subject qualitative concept formation to a philosophical critique. We show how the conceptual strategies developed by Sartori and Collier embody a reification, essentialism, and instrumentalist view of language associated with naturalism. Although Collier's work on concept formation is much more flexible and nuanced than Sartori's, it too remains attached to a discredited naturalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20446758

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20453076
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Shalin Dmitri N.
Abstract: This article offers an alternative to classical hermeneutics, which focuses on discursive products and grasps meaning as the play of difference between linguistic signs. Pragmatist hermeneutics reconstructs meaning through an indefinite triangulation, which brings symbols, icons, and indices to bear on each other and considers a meaningful occasion as an embodied semiotic process. To illuminate the word-body-action nexus, the discussion identifies three basic types of signifying media: (1) the symbolic-discursive, (2) the somatic-affective, and (3) the behavioral-performative, each one marked by a special relationship between signs and their objects. An argument is made that the tension between various type-signifying media is unavoidable, that the pragmatic-discursive misalignment is an ontological condition, and that bridging the gap between our discursive, affective, and behavioral outputs is at the heart of ethical life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20453078

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i20484715
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Rinderle (2007, 1. Begriffe im Kontext).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20484719

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486576
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Calabrese Joseph D.
Abstract: Euro-American theories of psychotherapeutic intervention focus on therapist behavior or the therapeutic relationship, conceived in dyadic terms. The cultural prototype is individualistic and rationalistic: a one-to-one conversation in which the patient discloses and discusses innermost feelings in regular office visits. This may be appropriate for modern Euro-Americans. However, anthropological research finds that in many traditional healing systems, intervention is communal, it utilizes dramatic ritual ordeals and altered states of consciousness rather than rational conversations, and the healer-patient relationship may be less central. This article argues that the latter approach is not ignorant of psychotherapeutic principles; it has its own (however opposed to Euro-American assumptions they may be). Understanding this paradigm clash broadens our understanding of what psychotherapeutic intervention is. It also allows clinicians and policy makers to support traditional peoples in their own efforts at self-healing. Examples will be drawn from the author's work on the healing ceremonies of the Native American Church among contemporary Navajos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486581

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486586
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Throop C. Jason
Abstract: Drawing from research conducted on the personal, cultural, and moral significance of pain on the island of Yap (Waqab), Federated States of Micronesia, I argue in this article that one possible root to reincorporating empathy within the context of contemporary culture theory is to uncover the cultural and phenomenological ways that understandings of empathy and what constitutes authentic empathetic acts are shaped. After briefly examining foundational philosophical definitions of empathy, the article advances a number of differing cultural phenomenological orientations implicated in the experience and expression of empathy. These orientations are understood to help to foreground the place of empathy in what may otherwise be viewed as a general reluctance to engage in empathetic attunement in Yapese society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486589

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i20487848
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): West Traci C.
Abstract: Editorial, Washington Afro-American, December 3-9, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20487856

Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20533165
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): van Woudenberg René
Abstract: Fred Dretske, "Epistemic Operators", Journal of Philosophy 67 (1970): 1003-1013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20533170

Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20539803
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Sklodowska Elzbieta
Abstract: A. J. Greimas, "The Veridiction Contract", New Literary History, vol. XX, no 31 (1989), pp. 651-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20539806

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Ciutǎ Felix
Abstract: Karin Fierke, 'Changing Worlds of Security', in Keith Krause and Michael C. Williams (eds), Critical Security Studies (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press), p. 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542791

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Michel Torsten
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, 'What calls for Thinking', in David Farrell Krell (ed.), Martin Heidegger. Basic Writings from Being and Time (1927) to The Task of Thinking (1964) (London and New York: Routledge, 2007), p. 370.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542795

Journal Title: Quaderni Urbinati di Cultura Classica
Publisher: Instituto Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i20546867
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Giordano-Zecharya Manuela
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20546873

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1975
Author(s): Schutz Richard
Abstract: A. L. Becker, a premier comparative student of Javanese language, literature, and aesthetics, was the main inspiration for the organization of the symposium at which the first versions of these ar- ticles were presented, the 1982 meetings of the As- sociation for Asian Studies in Chicago Becker 1982 meetings of the Association for Asian Studies in Chicago
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056444

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Wurm Richard
Abstract: The logic of Indonesian subjectless and tenseless expressions appears to have cultural implications, just as the use of tenses in English scientific writing entails much more than grammatical minutiae. A. L. Becker has pointed out that tense in English functions in a "coherence system" that pervades and transcends grammar. A parallel coherence system is suggested for Indonesian, based not on tense but on topic. Paul Ricoeur's distinction between LANGUAGE and DISCOURSE is the basis of the claim that Indonesian sentences cohere on the bond between grammatical subject and discourse topic. Examples are drawn from a number of contexts that call forth passive sentences in Indonesian. The article concludes on another suggestion by Becker. The Indonesian topic may be part of a larger deictic category of person, which may be related in discourse to orientation in space--both physical and social--of participants in the speech event. If this suggestion is correct, then the contrast between English and Indonesian coherence systems may be found in the opposition tense/time vs. person/space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056445

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1960
Author(s): Van Gennep Susan
Abstract: In Sumatra's Angkola Batak culture, rituals celebrating major kinship-related events such as marriage have many layers of social and symbolic meaning; they have political, kinship, musical, mythic, and philosophical dimensions as lengthy, oratory-filled ceremonies that unite wife-giving lineages with wife-receivers. This article examines several ways that the interpretive approach that is discussed in the introduction can help students of Indonesian ritual grasp diverse aspects of Batak marriage rituals such as their hidden symbolic organization and their practical political implications. The article deals with a short sequence of adat dance staged for anthropological research purposes. (Adat, once translated as customary law, roughly means Angkola ceremonial life, kinship norms, and political thought; adat is eminently flexible, redefined by each Batak generation.) The choreography of the dance (wife-receivers dancing with wife-givers), songs, clothing, the political biographies of the participants, and the fact that the event was staged render the ceremony open to both structural and social contextual inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056447

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Istituto Gramsci Editore
Issue: i20565388
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Maiello Francesco H.
Abstract: La prima edizione del calendario composto esclusivamente di immagini e simboli Almanack des bergers, Liège, V.ve Barnabé, 1758. I calendari per simboli sono: Dieu soit béni e Almanack du bon laboureur: «Il arriva plus que centenaire jusqu'en 1850»: Socard, Mémoires de la Société académique d'agriculture des sciences, arts et belles lettres du département de l'Aube, 1881, p. 336. In questa nuova prospettiva andrebbe studiato il Messager Boiteux, il calendario di Basilea, poi stampato a Vevey dall'inizio del XVIII secolo e ampiamente diffiiso in Francia, soprattutto a partire dalla meta del Settecento.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565393

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20565540
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): Ceci Lucia
Abstract: Cfr. Miccoli, Una chiesa lacerata, in Id., Era mito della cristianità e secolarizzazione, cit., pp. 455-473, pp. 459-461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565553

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20565615
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Festa Roberto
Abstract: Dopo un periodo, negli anni Sessanta e Settanta, in cui la fortuna di Lovejoy sembrò declinare, lo studioso è tornato d'attualità negli anni Ottanta, con la ripresa della di- scussione teorica intorno alia storia intellettuale. Nel 1987 il «Journal of the History of Ideas» dedicò un numero per celebrare il mezzo secolo della Great Chain of Being, con articoli di D.J. Wilson, G. Gordon-Bournique, E.P. Mahoney, F. Oakley e Melvin Ri- chter (cfr. Lovejoy, «The Great Chain of Being» and the History of Ideas, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 48, 2, 1987). Contributi importanti sono inoltre venuti da Donald R. Kelley, Tattuale editor del «Journal». Tra questi citiamo D.R. Kelley, Horizons of In- tellectual History: Retrospect, Circumspect, Prospect, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 48, 1, 1987, pp. 143-169; e, sempre di Kelley, What is happening to the History of Ideas?, in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 51, 1990, pp. 3-25. Proprio quest'ultimo articolo rappresenta a tutt'oggi uno dei piú equilibrad tentativi di bilancio della history of ideas, e al tempo stesso una meditazione sui futuro della disciplina da parte di uno degli «ere- di» di Lovejoy. Significativamente Kelley propone di utilizzare Tespressione intellectual history, e non piú history of ideas, proprio a voler allontanare i «fantasmi» di idealismo impliciti nella scelta di fare della storia della filosofia il referente privilegiato della di- sciplina (un'attitudine che era certamente di Lovejoy). Intellectual history è secondo Kel- ley «doing a kind, or several kinds, of historical interpretation, in which philosophy and literature figure not as controlling methods but as human creations suggesting the con- ditions of historical understanding» [What is happening, cit., p. 18). L'approccio inter- disciplinare, che era stato uno dei punti centrali del programma lovejoyano, rimane an- cor oggi secondo Kelley valido, anche se ciò non deve significare Tadozione di strumenti critici «alla moda» propri di altre discipline. A questo proposito si pone per Kelley il problema dell'atteggiamento da tenere nei confronti di studiosi come Hayden White, Dominick LaCapra, David Harlan, teorici del linguistic turn, un modo di fare storia che si awale delle indicazioni provenienti dall'ermeneutica di Gadamer e Ricoeur, da Hei- degger e dai suoi discepoli francesi Foucault e Derrida, e che rifiuta ogni reale possibi- lità di giungere a una determinazione delle intenzioni dell'autore, cioè di un «significa- to», della verità di un'opera, e del contesto entro cui Topera è stata composta. Per Kel- ley non era possibile evitare le implicazioni che il linguistic turn poneva, tanto piú che esso si rivelava utile soprattutto nel rivelare risorse, strutture, memorie culturali conser- vate nel linguaggio (topoi, tropi, metafore, analogie), non soltanto dell'alta cultura ma anche delle forme di espressione irriflessa, o popolare (anche questo secondo un'indica- zione di Lovejoy). Se è però vero che il significato di un testo non è univoco, è altret- tanto vero secondo Kelley che la ricerca delle intenzioni dell'autore è premessa indi- spensabile di qualsiasi lavoro di storia intellettuale. Quanto alia questione dell'attenzio- ne al «contesto», che i sostenitori del linguistic turn denigrano, Kelley prende atto che non è certamente possibile giungere alia ricostruzione dell'intera rete di relazioni entro cui un'opera si colloca. Ciò non significa pero che il testo o l'autore studiato non pos- sano essere collocati in un «contesto», e che quindi, attraverso lo studio del linguaggio di un'epoca, non si riesca a ricostruire le condizioni di possibilità per la nascita di un'opera.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565621

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20566703
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Sgambati Valeria
Abstract: Cfr. C. Ef Reagan and D, Stewart, eds., The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Boston, 1978, pp. 77-79, citato in H. White, La questione della narrazione nella teoria contemporanea della storiografia, cit., pp. 69-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20566708

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i20618429
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Clark Elizabeth A.
Abstract: R. P. C. Hanson, Allegory and Event: A Study of the Sources and Significance of Origen's Interpretation of Scripture (Richmond: John Knox, 1959), 246.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20618431

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20627996
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Kirby R. Kenneth
Abstract: In this article, the author argues that many of the best practices of oral history reflect phenomenological thinking even though practitioners may not describe themselves as using phenomenological methods. The author suggests that knowledge and application of phenomenology can clarify or minimize such potential problems as interviewer bias and informant unreliability and can refute accusations that oral history is less reliable than history taken from documents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628001

Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Kosicki Piotr H.
Abstract: Beginning with Maurice Halbwachs's theory of collective memory and the great body of sociological, historical, and political-science literature on war and aggression that postdates Halbwachs, the author attempts to identify the elements of aggressor—victim memory through a detailed analysis of the 1994 Rwandan genocide. In participant and third-party narratives of the genocide, it is possible to observe a commemorative quality in the campaign of mass murder. The author suggests that the persistence of post-traumatic culture and the failure of dialogue can lead people to kill in remembrance of earlier aggression: in such cases, "acting out" substitutes for "working through," with horrifying consequences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628282

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i20630137
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Paul Roscoe (2006: 43)
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp036', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675336
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Roussel Bernard
Abstract: Erasme, Ratio seu Methodius compendio perveniendi ad veram theologiam, dans Ausgewählte Schriften, Bd. III, Darmstadt, 1967, p. 230 et 258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675338

Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675774
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Margolin Jean-Claude
Abstract: Selon l'expression forgée par Vladimir Jankelevitch dans son livre, Le Mensonge (Confluences, 1942).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675778

Journal Title: Journal of Religion in Africa
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i20696813
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lambranca Béatrice Dias
Abstract: This paper focuses on gendered processes of socialization experienced by Christian religious groups in different Christian churches in post-civil war Gorongosa, a district in the centre of Mozambique. Discourses of radical social transformation through Christian interventions and experiences are prominent among Christians, both men and women. Yet a comprehensive and longitudinal analysis of the social world in which the Christian groups are embedded and the performances of Christian men and women demonstrates the emergence of complex processes of transformation and continuities with local cultural beliefs and practices that many non-Christians have partially or thoroughly reformed or abandoned. These changes and continuities also encompass the manifestation of fluid forms of submission and creativity, and masculinities and femininities against the ideological notion of thoroughly new and closed Christian identities. The overall analysis suggests that the tension between the practices of change and continuity are necessary in order to create and sustain the legitimacy of the various Christian groups in Gorongosa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20696817

Journal Title: The Personalist Forum
Publisher: The Personalist Forum
Issue: i20708777
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Lucas George R.
Abstract: "Six Theistic Proofs," in Creative Synthesis and Philosophic Method, 286-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20708782

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Society for Utopian Studies
Issue: i20719896
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Jenson Michael
Abstract: A recurrent misconception about the concept of utopia fails to realize fully that its essential endeavor constitutes a speculative act involving the distribution of power and resources. Consequently, utopian desire is closely linked to structures of power and can be manipulated by interests in positions of influence within these structures. It is these connections to the machinations of power that bring utopian visions their potential for social/political influence. However, these same types of links also provide avenues for these conceptions to be cynically influenced in ways that can usurp individual autonomy. The role of power and utopia can be analyzed in the formative process of a specific social structure as well as in their contribution to the conception of a common heritage or history. The "historical perspective" often serves as the foundation for the production of propaganda seeking to capture the imagination of a populace either to instigate positive social change or to legitimize an oppressive regime. Through the lens of Collingwood's philosophy of history, this article investigates the connection that the "historical consciousness" has to the attributes of power and utopia as well as the role that this relationship plays in the formation of a collective mentality. In short, it studies the essential characteristics of the bond between individuals that allows a community or collective to perpetuate itself. It also explores how the attributes of power and utopia can use latent historical perceptions to strengthen the process of ideological integration that underlies any social action or formal structure of authority.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20719901

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20757792
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Funk Julika
Abstract: Bachmann-Medick, s. Anm. 84, 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20757796

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762120
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: KELLER, HIRSELAND, SCHNEIDER and VIEHÖVER (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762128

Journal Title: Journal for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Publisher: Group for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Issue: i20798265
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Domingo Darryl P.
Abstract: Drawing attention to the complex reciprocal relationship between commercialized leisure and commercial literature in the so-called "Age of Wit," this essay reconceives of the witty and witless in two important ways. Taking for granted, first of all, that wit is usually analyzed in terms of the efficacy of verbal language, the essay examines how and why debates concerning true and false wit were played out in physical terms—in this case, through the motions, gestures, and attitudes of the dancing body. Second of all, the essay attempts to account for the enduring, if unwitting, attractions of "false wit" by likening it to the tricks and transformations of contemporary English pantomime. Satirists of the 1720s, 1730s, and 1740s frequently invoke the unmeaning motion of Harlequin as a visual way of proscribing the verbal excesses of extravagant language. At the same time, apologists for pantomime associate Harlequin's "dumb Wit" with truth, reason, and the pattern of nature, claiming that the genre's corporeality allowed it to transcend the limitations and equivocations of words. The essay concludes that the popularity of pantomime contextualizes the Augustan reaction against false wit, in that it identifies a source of aesthetic pleasure in the public's eagerness to be duped by apparent sameness in difference. Early eighteenth-century readers enjoy luxuriant, illogical, and mixed metaphors, forced similes, and trifling jibes and quibbles for the same reason that early eighteenth-century spectators delight in the unexpected turns of pantomimic entertainment: in a world under the sway of Harlequin's magical slapstick, audiences derive satisfaction from being deceived.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20798269

Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i310000
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Zurcher Jerzy
Abstract: In recent years, sociologists and anthropologists have conducted significant studies of modern life using concepts and perspectives derived from symbolic anthropology. This paper discusses the theoretical and methodological problems entailed, including the distinction between symbolic and nonsymbolic actions. Research on three major areas of behavior is reviewed: (a) studies of institutions, especially politics, law, and social control; (b) studies of ceremonial events, including life-cycle rituals, sports, and festivals; and (c) studies of everyday life, including consumer goods and food, and popular culture. We conclude with a discussion of the methodological issues of location and dimensionality and the different forms of symbolic analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2083183

Journal Title: Islamic Studies
Publisher: The Islamic Research Institute
Issue: i20837267
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): AFZAAL AHMED
Abstract: Jonathan E. Brockopp, ed., The Islamic Ethics of Life: Abortion, War, and Euthanasia (Columbia: University of South Carolina Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20837269

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20848558
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Benoist Jocelyn
Abstract: J. Derrida, Le problème de la genèe dans la pbilosophie de Husserl, puf, 1990, p. 84, en particulier n. 19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20848560

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849478
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Monseu Nicolas
Abstract: Ibid, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849482

Journal Title: International Journal of Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i20853193
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Demers Paul A.
Abstract: In many parts of the world, excavations of British military sites have unearthed material reflecting lifeways in the British Empire. Specifically, studies of historical ceramics and glass have greatly advanced our understanding of status and material expression. This study highlights the current body of knowledge on British military crested ceramics, contrasting the rarity of archaeological finds with their abundance in documentary sources. An elemental stylistic analysis reveals that these crests expressed regimental affiliation as the fundamental unit of self-identification. Symbolic interpretation of these crests stresses their active role in the socialization of officers and structuring collective memory, particularly through the mess institution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20853199

Journal Title: RQ
Publisher: Reference Services Division of the American Library Association
Issue: i20862750
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Some literary theorists have suggested that the process of reading is a complex one and is central to the interpretation of texts. These theorists do not ignore the creation of texts or the authors' creative activities, but place special emphasis on the role of the reader. This approach has relevance for the study of the use of libraries. This paper offers an analogy between text and library and between reader and library user. The analogy is possible because both reader and user adopt intentional stances with regard to that which is to be interpreted and employ cognitive and affective means in interpretation. At the heart of this approach is a phenomenological-hermeneutical way of thinking that treats reading and library use as an event consisting of varying intention and interpretive possibilities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20862762

Journal Title: Revue française d'études américaines
Publisher: Editions Belin
Issue: i20874637
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Pasquier Marie-Claire
Abstract: America has known, over the years, a number of « Electras », more or less innovative, or faithful to the Greek model. When he wrote his own version, Mourning Becomes Electra, in 1931, Eugene O'Neill wanted to write « a modern psychological play, fate springing out of the family ». In spite of some melodramatic elements, of the predominance of « gloom » over « doom », and of « sorrow » over « mourning », and even though « genes » can't replace « genos », there are moments in which the rebellion, the « splendid failure » of two strong women transcends the anecdote and achieves tragic beauty.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20874645

Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i336426
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Mauss Edward A.
Abstract: Marcel Mauss, Sociologie et Anthropologie, Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1960, pp. xxiii-xxx. Mauss xxiii Sociologie et Anthropologie 1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2091136

Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i336477
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Zimmerman Phillip A.
Abstract: Douglas (1970)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2094358

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: University of Buffalo
Issue: i310254
Date: 6 1, 1947
Author(s): Campbell Jean
Abstract: Herbert Marcuse (Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, VIII, 3)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2103683

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: University of Buffalo Foundation, Inc.
Issue: i310289
Date: 9 1, 1962
Author(s): Toulemont David
Abstract: CM, p. 15
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2106777

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: State University of New York at Buffalo
Issue: i310300
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Ricoeur Clark
Abstract: The Personalist: "On the Reducibility of Hegelian to Standard Logic," Vol. 56 (1975), pp. 414-430. 414 56 The Personalist 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2106868

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: State University of New York at Buffalo
Issue: i310307
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Berggren Ted
Abstract: Douglas Berggren, "The Use and Abuse of Metaphor, I," The Review of Metaphysics, XVI (1962). P. 247. Berggren 247 XVI The Review of Metaphysics 1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107005

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i310323
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): McCarthy Kai
Abstract: Thomas McCarthy, "The Problem of Rational- ity in Social Anthropology," Philosophy and Social Theory, Stony Brook Studies in Philosophy, Vol. I (1974), pp. 1-36. McCarthy 1 I Philosophy and Social Theory, Stony Brook Studies in Philosophy 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107371

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i336936
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Ricoeur Robert
Abstract: "When is the Will Free?" Philosophical Perspectives, vol. 4 (Atascadero: Ridgview Pub- lishing) (forthcoming). 4 Philosophical Perspectives
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107958

Journal Title: American Journal of Political Science
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i310502
Date: 2 1, 1996
Author(s): Kritzer Herbert M.
Abstract: Interpretation is central to the social scientist's process of analysis, regardless of whether that analysis relies on quantitative or qualitative data. This essay presents a "reconstructed logic" of the interpretation process involved in quantitative data analysis. Drawing upon a broad literature on interpretation, the paper shows how the interpretive processes for quantitative "data" has significant similarities to interpretation in other settings. For example, both qualitative textual analysis and quantitative statistical analysis rely upon contextual and topological paradigms, although the specific conventions differ in many respects. The process of play employed by musicians and actors in developing an interpretation of a piece of music or a dramatic role suggests ways in which the quantitative analyst might let data perform to help in arriving at appropriate interpretations of statistical results. The lines between quantitative and qualitative social science are less clear than often presumed. Both types of analysis involve extensive interpretation, and tools of interpretation that have many fundamental similarities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2111692

Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: i337200
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur distills this point well: "When we discover that there are several cultures instead of just one and consequently at the time when we acknowledge the end of a sort of cultural monopoly, be it illusory or real, we are threatened with the destruction of our own discovery. Suddenly it becomes possible that there are just others, that we ourselves are an 'other' among others" (History and Truth [Evanston, Ill., 1965], p. 278). Ricoeur 278 History and Truth 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2124538

Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: Southern Political Science Association
Issue: i337338
Date: 11 1, 1968
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Fred R.
Abstract: Die Abenteuer der Dialektik (Franldurt-Main: Suhrkamp, 1968), 7-11 7 Die Abenteuer der Dialektik 1968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2129401

Journal Title: The Journal of Southern History
Publisher: Southern Historical Association
Issue: i338382
Date: 11 1, 1971
Author(s): Ricoeur Drew Gilpin
Abstract: Rhett, "Agricultural Address," 714. 714
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2207713

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211058
Date: 11 1, 1995
Author(s): Somers Margaret R.
Abstract: The English translation of Habermas's The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere converges with the revival of the "political culture concept" in the social sciences. Surprisingly, Habermas's account of the Western bourgeois public sphere has much in common with the original political culture concept associated with Parsonian modernization theory in the 1950s and 1960s. In both cases, the concept of political culture is used in a way that is neither political nor cultural. Explaining this peculiarity is the central problem addressed in this article and its companion piece, which appeared in Sociological Theory, volume 3, number 2 (1995). I hypothesize that this is the case because the concept itself is embedded in an historically constituted political culture (here called a conceptual network)-a structured web of conceptual relationships that combine into Anglo-American citizenship theory. The method of an historical sociology of concept formation is used to analyze historically and empirically the internal constraints and dynamics of this conceptual network. The method draws from new work in cultural history and sociology, social studies, and network, narrative, and institutional analysis. This research yields three empirical findings: this conceptual network has a narrative structure, here called the Anglo-American citizenship story; this narrative is grafted onto an epistemology of social naturalism; and these elements combine in a metanarrative that continues to constrain empirical research in political sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223298

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211059
Date: 11 1, 1997
Author(s): Kane Anne E.
Abstract: Though the process of meaning construction is widely recognized to be a crucial factor in the mobilization, unfolding, and outcomes of social movements, the conditions and mechanisms that allow meaning construction and cultural transformation are often misconceptualized and/or underanalyzed. Following a "tool kit" perspective on culture, dominant social movement theory locates meaning only as it is embodied in concrete social practices. Meaning construction from this perspective is a matter of manipulating static symbols and meaning to achieve goals. I argue instead that meaning is located in the structure of culture, and that the condition and mechanism of meaning construction and transformation are, respectively, the metaphoric nature of symbolic systems, and individual and collective interpretation of those systems in the face of concrete events. This theory is demonstrated by analyzing, through textual analysis, meaning construction during the Irish Land War, 1879-1882, showing how diverse social groups constructed new and emergent symbolic meanings and how transformed collective understandings contributed to specific, yet unpredictable, political action and movement outcomes. The theoretical model and empirical case demonstrates that social movement analysis must examine the metaphoric logic of symbolic systems and the interpretive process by which people construct meaning in order to fully explain the role of culture in social movements, the agency of movement participants, and the contingency of the course and outcomes of social movements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223306

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211059
Date: 11 1, 1997
Author(s): Verheggen Theo
Abstract: By studying Durkheim through a Schopenhauerian lens, the one-sidedly cognitivist and functionalist reception of his social theory can be balanced. Durkheim explicitly rejected such monistic interpretations. His dialectical approach was always aimed at an essentially dualistic perception of man and society, wherein the lower pole, the individual, is central. In Durkheim's symbol theory, this position leads to two kinds of symbols: those that are bound to the human body, here called "this and that" symbols, and those people can choose freely, here called "this for that" symbols. This twofold symbol theory can already be found in medieval philosophy (e.g. Dante Alighieri) as well as in the work of Paul Ricoeur. For Durkheim the human person is the symbol par excellence. By implication the rituals in which the person is (re)constructed, that is the rites of passage, should be central. The interpretation here opens up new perspectives for a more psychological interpretation of Durkheim's sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223308

Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i211067
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto
Abstract: In this paper I explore the questions of why and how sociologists should be interested in narrative. The answer to the first question is straightforward: Narrative texts are packed with sociological information, and a great deal of our empirical evidence is in narrative form. In an attempt to answer the second question, I look at definitions of narrative, distinguishing narrative from non-narrative texts. I highlight the linguistic properties of narrative and illustrate modes of analysis, paying close attention to both the structural properties of the text and its subtle linguistic nuances. I guide the reader through a detailed analysis of a short narrative text. I show how linguistics and sociology interplay at the level of a text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223492

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004487
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): BOVONE LAURA
Abstract: The first part of the article discusses the usefulness of the biographical method in order to solve some epistemological crucial issues: the integration between comprehension and explanation, the possibility of an objective (or at least intersubjective) knowledge, the overcoming of the micro-macro dicothomy. The second part holds the utility of such a method in order to study the reflexive post-modern society and especially the contribution intellectuals can offer to the post-modern culture. Results from recent empirical research are discussed. The last part-though recognizing some methodological problems linked with life stories — stresses flexibility and openess as the main virtues of this method.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004489

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004828
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): ANDRINI SIMONA
Abstract: Jamme - Schneider (1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004831

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004843
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): PARDI FRANCESCO
Abstract: The article identifies a paradox in the concept of person and in its use. Modernity, and the liberation from the logic of status, should have brought about the ultimate consolidation of the idea of personal value. On the contrary it caused such a drastic functional differentiation within society that the individual has come to be defined by his/her function (citizen, economic actor, etc.) rather than as the single bearer of different roles. The concept of person has thus become an expression to identify only the communicative aspect of social life. That is the reason why in our complex society the concept of person cannot find a proper location and comes to the fore only when the other codes fail.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004936

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004739
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): BICHI RITA
Abstract: Halbwachs (1987)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004996

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005055
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): DE SIMONE ANTONIO
Abstract: 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005214

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005104
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): MARTINI ELVIRA
Abstract: Plutarco 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005221

Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005054
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): CADARIO VITTORINO
Abstract: 2001b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005280

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23011305
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Sahlins Marshall
Abstract: A modest proposal for solving the 150-year-old problem of what kinship is, its specific quality, viz. mutuality of being: persons who are members of one another, who participate intrinsically in each other's existence. `Mutuality of being' applies as well to the constitution of kinship by social construction as by procreation, even as it accounts for `the mysterious effectiveness of relationality' (Viveiros de Castro), how it is that relatives live each other's lives and die each other's deaths. Involving such transpersonal relations of being and experience, kinship takes its place in the same ontological regime as magic, gift exchange, sorcery, and witchcraft. Une modeste proposition pour résoudre l'équation, vieille de 150 ans, de ce qu'est la parenté, sa spécificité, à savoir la mutualité d'existence: des personnes qui sont membres les unes des autres, qui participent à l'existence les unes des autres. La « mutualité d'existence » vaut aussi pour la constitution de lien de parenté par la construction sociale et la procréation, bien qu'elle tienne compte de « la mystérieuse efficacité de la relationalité » (Viveiros de Castro), de la manière dont les parents vivent les vies et meurent les morts des uns et des autres. La parenté, en mettant en jeu ces relations transpersonnelles d'existence et d'expérience, s'inscrit dans le même ordre ontologique que la magie, l'échange de cadeaux, la sorcellerie et la magie noire.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9655.2010.01666.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23013006
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Gelbart Matthew
Abstract: Rodel, 'Extreme Noise Terror'.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ml/gcr037', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23020023
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Cisneros Ariane Hentsch
Abstract: Dallmayr 2009, 24, 27
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9795.2011.00475.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23019993
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Rothchild Jonathan
Abstract: Rothchild 2007
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9795.2010.00465.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i23020380
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Marks Susan
Abstract: Schwartz argues for the later rabbinic development of practices related to death: "Indeed, if it is the case that even strongly 'Jewish' Jews were often buried without the accompaniment of Jewish iconography—that despite what we are accustomed to think about such liminal moments as birth, death, marriage and so on, death was not yet generally an occasion among Palestinian Jews for strong public affirmation of group identity—then Beth Shearim shows that the judaization of Jewish burial practice was now (third-fourth century) underway in some circles" (2001: 154).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr001', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23025453
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): GUNNELL JOHN G.
Abstract: Cora Diamond, The Realistic Spirit in Philosophy: Wittgenstein, Philosophy, and the Mind (Cambridge: MIT, 1991).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0260210510001609', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i23025612
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Sherman Anita Gilman
Abstract: Wulf Kansteiner, "Memory, Media, and Menschen: Where Is the Individual in Collective Memory Studies?" Memory Studies 3 (2010): 3-4.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/shq.2011.0003', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i23055602
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): RORTY AMÉLIE
Abstract: Alvin Goldman, Simulating Minds (New York: Oxford University Press, 2006), Ch. 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23055638

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i23055602
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): BUTERIN DAMION
Abstract: Nietzsche, The Anti-Christ §§ 9-10, 8-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23055641

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i23056047
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Stegner Paul D.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Memory, History, and Forgetting, trans. Kathleen Blarney and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004), 500-501.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23056050

Journal Title: Latin American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i23072521
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Sabloff Jeremy A.
Abstract: This study builds on the premise that local knowledge of limestone—and its workable characteristics—was foundational to landscape inhabitation in the Puuc region of Yucatán, México. Classic Maya architecture of the northern Yucatán generally is considered to represent the apogee of Maya construction prowess with extensive use of core-veneer masonry and the creation of tall, wide corbelled vaults. Less commonly discussed is the variable distribution of high-quality limestone across the Yucatán, the social matrix that undergirds the quarrying, transporting, and working of limestone, and the pronounced social differences materialized in stone architecture. This study explores these three topics by bringing to bear Yucatec Mayan linguistic evidence and excavation data from the archaeological site of Sayil, in the hilly Puuc region of Yucatán. That information provides a basis for understanding the development of a sprawling residential complex, the role that variable limestone quality played in its expansion, and serves as an index of intra-compound social difference. Late additions to the dwellings indicate that recognition of the cultural value of carved stone persisted long after masonry skills became attenuated. The durability of stone renders it a particularly effective—if underutilized—medium for interpreting social landscapes of the past. Este estudio amplifica la premisa de que el conocimiento de la piedra caliza—y sus propiedades arteseanales—fue una base fundamental para la ocupación del paisaje de la Región Puuc, Yucatán, México. En general, la arquitectura de los mayas de la época Clásica del norte de Yucatán se considera representativa del apogeo de su proeza arquitectónica con el uso extensivo de núcleos de piedra burda recubiertos de piedra labrada y la creación de habitaciones con bóvedas altas y anchas. Menos mencionados son la distribución geográfica variable de piedra caliza de alta calidad a través de Yucatán, la matriz social que permite la explotación de canteras y el transporte y trabajo de los bloques, y la diferencia social profunda que se nota en la arquitectura en piedra. Este estudio explora estos tres temas usando evidencia de la lengua maya yucateca y datos de excavaciones del sitio arqueológico de Sayil, en la serranía Puuc. Esta información proporciona las bases para entender el desarrollo de un grupo residencial expansivo y el papel que la calidad variable de la piedra caliza tuvo en su expansión, y sirve como índice de diferencias sociales entre los habitantes del mismo grupo. Adiciones tardías a los edificios indican que el reconocimiento del valor cultural de la piedra trabajada persistió mucho tiempo después de la disminución de las técnicas especializadas de albañilería. La durabilidad de la piedra la hace un buen instrumento, aunque poco utilizado, para interpretar los paisajes sociales del pasado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23072558

Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci editore
Issue: i23078532
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Zapponi Elena
Abstract: A. Wieviorka, L'era del testimone, Milano, Cortina, 1999, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23078539

Journal Title: Criticism
Publisher: Wayne State University Press
Issue: i23103221
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): ARMSTRONG PAUL B.
Abstract: Conrad, Lord Jim, p. 27.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23103225

Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182432
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Courtney Sheleyah A.
Abstract: This article explores socio-cultural practices with regard to aging women in Vārāṇāsī, a city in North India. It is based on 17 months of field research carried out in 1999—2000 among marginalized Hindu women. I argue that aging is a continuous process that is characterized by the specific psychological patterns that form throughout a woman's life history. These patterns are demonstrated by women's particular types of behaviors and demeanors and, in turn, permit others to ascribe to them—in varying combinations and ratios—specific cultural values or qualities. I argue that these attributes are the critical ones that inform the cultural construction and designation of being 'middle-aged' and 'older' as it pertains to Hindu women of Vārāṇāsī.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23182437

Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Donzelli editore
Issue: i23195064
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Latouche Serge
Abstract: Citato da Engelhard, L'homme mondial cit., p. 379.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23195774

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i23211194
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J'ai développé ce concept à propos de la pragmatique des récits héroïques que nous appréhendons comme des « mythes » et des fictions narratives dans Claude Calame, « La pragmatique poétique des mythes grecs: fiction référentielle et performance rituelle », in F. Lavocat et A. Duprat (dir.), Fiction et cultures, Paris, sflgc, 2010, p. 33- 56; voir aussi Id., « Fiction référentielle et poétique rituelle: pour une pragmatique du mythe (Sappho 17 et Bacchylide 13)», in D.AUGER et C. Delattre (dir.), Mythe et fiction, Paris, Presses universitaires de Paris Ouest, 2010, p. 117-135.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23211237

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23254812
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): SLATMAN JENNY
Abstract: In this paper, I explore the meaning of bodily integrity in disfiguring breast cancer. Bodily integrity is a normative principle precisely because it does not simply refer to actual physical or functional intactness. It rather indicates what should be regarded and respected as inviolable in vulnerable and damageable bodies. I will argue that this normative inviolability or wholeness can be based upon a person's embodied experience of wholeness. This phenomenological stance differs from the liberal view that identifies respect for integrity with respect for autonomy (resulting in an invalidation of bodily integrity's proper normative meaning), as well as from the view that bodily integrity is based upon ideologies of wholeness (which runs the risk of being disadvantageous to women). I propose that bodily integrity involves a process of identification between the experience of one's body as "Leib" and the experience of one's body as "Körper." If identification fails or is not possible, one's integrity is threatened. This idea of bodily integrity can support breast cancer patients and survivors in making decisions about possible corrective interventions. To implement this idea in oncology care, empirical-phenomenological research needs to establish how breast cancer patients express their embodied self-experiences.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01261.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i23256795
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Wilson Erin K.
Abstract: Globalization has unsettled conventional, nationally based political belief systems, opening the door to emerging new global political ideologies. While much analytic focus has been on ideational transformations related to market globalism (neoliberalism), little attention has been given to its growing number of ideological challengers. Drawing on data collected from 45 organizations connected to the World Social Forum, this article examines the political ideas of the global justice movement, the key antagonist to market globalism from the political Left. Employing morphological discourse analysis and quantitative content analysis, the article assesses the ideological coherence of "justice globalism" against Michael Freeden's (1996) three criteria of distinctiveness, context-bound responsiveness, and effective decontestation. We find that justice globalism displays ideological coherence and should be considered a maturing political "alter"-ideology of global significance. The evidence presented in this article suggests the ongoing globalization of the twenty-first-century ideological landscape.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2478.2012.00740.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: International Journal of Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i23258894
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Russell Lynette
Abstract: This paper serves as an introduction to this special edition of the International Journal of Historical Archaeology on the theme of archaeology, memory and oral history. Recent approaches to oral history and memory destabilise existing grand narratives and confront some of the epistemological assumptions underpinning scientific archaeology. Here we discuss recent approaches to memory and explore their impact on historical archaeology, including the challenges that forms of oral and social memory present to a field traditionally defined by the relationship between material culture and text. We then review a number of themes addressed by the articles in this volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23258942

Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261550
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Jacobs Anton K.
Abstract: This essay suggests Friedrich Nietzsche has a contribution to make to the theoretical enterprise of social science. Contemporary theorizing, reflecting an increased attention to language, has been focusing on the dialogical mode of production and, of course, on hermeneutics. This has led to a renewal of interest in Friedrich Nietzsche. In this essay, two alternative models of the hermeneutic circle are examined: one arising out of the work of the school of Konstanz; the other associated primarily with the work of Juergen Habermas. The former presents a circular image of the "conversational" situation; the latter portrays a time schedule of the process based on the psychoanalytic process of therapy. Nietzsche's contributions are suggested to be significant, in the first model, in regard to the mode of production and, in the second, the stage of the quasi-naturalistic turn. Nietzsche's way to truth is through constant and relentless criticizing. In contrast to the rationalistic practices of Western philosophy, Nietzsche exercised an art of interpreting based on the use of metaphor and aphorism. This practice seems to reflect Nietzsche's concern to communicate truth in a world he saw as inherently ambiguous and dynamic, thus, rendering propositional truth impossible. Nietzsche radically challenges the rational foundations on which we stand. Thus he presents us with a mode of knowledge production that reclaims traditions lost to science. In addition, Nietzsche shows, by word and example, that his existential approach offers a way to see life as a text and source for quasi-naturalistic forays toward understanding. In this way Nietzsche shows that the traditional concept of knowledge is a pseudo-concept by revealing the intimate and inseparable connection between life and knowledge. Knowledge is rooted in life; it is a manifestation of concrete psychological and political realities. Consequently, it makes sense not to ignore life as a source for explanation when examining resources for re-establishing communication when the hermeneutic circle breaks down in a moment of misunderstanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261695

Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261891
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Shalin Dmitri N.
Abstract: This paper presents an historical outlook on the macro-micro distinction in modern sociology. It links the genesis of social interactionism and microsociology to the rise of Romantic philosophy and attempts to elaborate methodological principles dividing macro- and microscopic perspectives in sociology. Six ideal-typical distinctions are considered: natural vs. social universality, emergent properties vs. emergent processes, morphological structuralism vs. genetical interactionism, choice among socially structured alternatives vs. structuring appearance into reality, structural vs. emergent directionality, operational vs. hermeneutical analysis. The complementarity of the languages of macro- and microsociological theories is advocated as a foundation for the further elaboration of conceptual links between the two levels of analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261895

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i23264766
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Thévoz Samuel
Abstract: également Samuel Thévoz (2011)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23264789

Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i23265372
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Prince Simon
Abstract: Beiner (again) is among the rare exceptions to the rule that Irish memory studies overlook narrative theory: Guy Beiner, "In Anticipation of a Post-Memory Boom Syndrome," Cultural Analysis 7 (2008): 107-12.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1086/661184', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23270235
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Robbins Derek
Abstract: M. Merleau-Ponty, Signes, op. cit., p. 540.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.051.0017', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i23270692
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: http://www.rrnpilot. org/.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092611-145721', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23277635
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): KUUKKANEN JOUNI-MATTI
Abstract: Rescher, Objectivity; Max Weber, "Objectivity in Social Sciences and Social Policy," in Weber, The Methodology of the Social Sciences (New York: The Free Press, 1949).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00632.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289637
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Barlow Philip L.
Abstract: "Baptism for the Dead," Times and Seasons 3:760.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289683

Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23291609
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Parker Stuart
Abstract: Bushman, Believing History, 210-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23291614

Journal Title: Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory: J-PART
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23319479
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Leong Ching
Abstract: Leong 2010
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jopart/mus001', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23327447
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: Nous formulons cette question sans ignorer que la Befindlichkeit heideg- gérienne n'est pas YEmpfindung que Michel Henry mettra à l'honneur. Mais bien qu'il s'agisse de deux conceptions de l'affectivité fort différentes, l'intérêt commun pour l'affect comme mode de révélation à soi antérieur à la réflexion demeure remarquable.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.124.0473', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23340007
Date: 10 1, 1965
Author(s): EPSTEIN F.
Abstract: The significance of the conception of the "I" as an "integral ego", which is fundamental to Ricoeur's thought, is brought out. The "integral ego" forms the basis of an analysis of the relations between the voluntary and involuntary in human action and enables these relations to be seen and comperehended from a fresh perspective. The "integral ego" is conceived as an organic unity of the "Cartesian cogito" and the existent body. This necessitates a view of the body as a Corps propre in Merleau-Ponty's sense; "a-body-moved-by-the-will", a conscious body, imbued with meaning. The body is on no account to be regarded as a mere physical object related to other physical objects in a mechanical causal chain. There is no place in man for the Cartesian dualism between thinking substance and extended substance. Although Ricoeur's method in analysing these relations is one of pure or "eidetic" description, he, in contradistinction to Husserl, attempts to integrate the body, as a Corps propre, with the cogito. He repeatedly stresses the danger of naturalizing the cogito; of viewing psychic processes as natural facts and the body as an empirical object. The rigorous phenomenological description clarifies the inter-relation and reciprocity between the voluntary and involuntary—whether in human decision, physical action or consent. The voluntary (the project, the moving of the body and consent) is based on and nourished by the involuntary (motives and given values; body, emotions and habits; character, sub-conscious and life). On the other hand, the involuntary has meaning only within the harmonious synthesis of human action. This analysis enables Ricoeur to refute various traditional explanations of human action. Both deterministic and irrationalistic interpretations distort and misinterpret the place and meaning of the components of human action because of an inadequate representation of man's nature. Determinism is wrong in regarding consciousness as a fact of nature and in confusing motives with causes; irrationalism, which advocates a "liberté d'indifférence", basing itself on the same premise as rationalism, and confusing motives with causes, is wrong in seeing the negation of the very existence of motives as the one way of saving human freedom. Both views disregard the fact that human action is impossible and cannot be understood without motives and that this, in turn, does not mean a determination of man in a mechanical way, for motives are not a part of nature but rather an organic element in a specific human situation—voluntary action. Human freedom is the freedom peculiar to a finite being immersed in time. Both those who stress passivity and receptivity and those who stress the dynamic creating ability of the self are wrong; both those who thought that freedom is possible only on the basis of clear and distinct motives and that action is nothing but the end of deliberation (St. Thomas) and those who thought that freedom is possible only by an irrational emergence of the vital ego (Bergson) or by negating the existence of any previous determination of the self (Sartre) are mistaken. A true human decision is composed of two elements; given motives and values on the one hand, and non-intellectualist spontaneous choice on the other. Duality is peculiar to human action. This is made more explicit in dealing with the more fundamental involuntary elements; character, sub-consciousness and life. Man acts freely from a finite and determined point of view; he acts in a clear and transparent way on the basis of confused and amorphous data; he lives his freedom when thrown into life. Necessity is inherent in man; it is one of his modes of being. There is no "inner freedom" on the one hand and "objective" causal necessity on the other. This conception of human action as both activity and passivity is reminiscent of Merleau-Ponty's statement in his "Philosophie du perception": "Le monde est déjá constitué, mais aussi jamais complètement constitué.... Il n'y a donc jamais déterminisme et jamais choix absolu, jamais je ne suis chose et jamais conscience nue". There is no dilemna between determinism and irrationalism, just as there is none between extended substance and thinking substance; there is dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23340010

Journal Title: Acta Musicologica
Publisher: Bärenreiter
Issue: i23339818
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Bohlman Philip V.
Abstract: Marilyn Strathern, "Making Incomplete," in Carved Flesh/Cast Selves: Gendered Symbols and Social Practices, ed. Vigdis Broch-Due, Ingrid Rudie, and Tony Bleie (Oxford: Berg, 1993), 41-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23343882

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: מרכז ש. ה. ברגמן לעיון פילוסופי, הפקולטה למדעי הרוח של האוניברסיטה העברית בירושלים
Issue: i23345214
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Golomb Jacob
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur has initiated a new direction in the field of hermeneutics by applying the phenomenological method to the interpretation of texts. By this he has effected a transition from description to hermeneutic phenomenology. In order to explicate his position the paper deals with this transformation: In developing hermeneutics Ricoeur tends to eliminate Husserl's transcendental idealism, to retain some central phenomenological motifs, and to add new elements. These elements were eclectically picked up by him from analytic and linguistic philosophy and from the current linguistic and structural theories. Since the deepest and most genuine roots of Ricoeur's thought lie in the phenomenology of Husserl, the paper concentrates on the explication of his phenomenological presuppositions and attempts to show how they were reformulated within the new science of interpretation. Thus, the first part of the paper is mainly an exposition of the transition from phenomenology to hermeneutics. The second part points to some difficulties inherent in such a move. The paper ends with a discussion of the problem of "the hermeneutic circle", which is an immanent part of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23349612

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: מרכז ש. ה. ברגמן לעיון פילוסופי, הפקולטה למדעי הרוח של האוניברסיטה העברית בירושלים
Issue: i23350503
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Svorai Moran
Abstract: Jean-Luc Nancy and Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe's The Title of the Letter: A Reading of Lacan (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1992), especially p. xxix.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23352977

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23353270
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Guery François
Abstract: La Métaphysique, traduction et commentaire par Jules Tricot, Paris, Vrin, coll. « Bibliothèque des textes philosophiques», 1933.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.124.0611', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i23357055
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Geroulanos Stefanos
Abstract: Claude Lévi-Strauss, The Story of Lynx (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1997), 183–84.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1215/0094033X-1677246', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i23375394
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): CUCHET Guillaume
Abstract: Muray, 1984, passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23375400

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i23375427
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): VIDAL Daniel
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, Qui suis-je et qui es-tu? Commentaire de « Cristaux de souffle » de Paul Celan, Paris, Actes Sud, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23375432

Journal Title: Studies in Education / עיונים בחינוך
Publisher: הוצאת הספרים של אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23392461
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): GOLOMB JACOB
Abstract: Nietzsche's impact on educational thought has always been surprisingly neglected, possibly because it is hard to divorce his educational views from his philosophical endeavour, as a whole which has given rise to considerable scholarly polemics during the last few decades. Recently several articles propagating various interpretations of Nietzsche's educational teaching have been published Their main weakness lies in the fact that Nietzsche's central educational theses are discussed quite apart from his "psychological" philosophy, while it is the philosophy that serves as the necessary background for understanding those theses. The present paper, mainly analyzing nietzsche's essay "Schopenhauer as Educator", will attempt to provide a better insight into Nietzsche's early psychological and pedagogic thought. It will also demonsrate those basic criteria implicit in his method of psychologization, which at the very outset had served Nietzsche as an educational means of testing the integrity of certain examplary personalities. Nietzsche's Educational Thought is established in the service of authenticity — a central and influential Existentialist concept, the main ideas of which are explicated in the paper. Another Nietzschean concept, much negleted yet significant, that of the "Higher-Self", is elaborated and compared to Freud's parallel notion of the "Super-Ego".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23393846

Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416455
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Kagan Zipora
Abstract: The aim of this essay is to define the nature of the metaphor in Berdiczewski's novel Miriam (1921). For this purpopse I examine the short story included in Miriam about the scholar who was studying a book entitled The Gate of Heaven. Comparing this story with other literary texts which present a hero who stands in a mystical or philosophical sense before the gate of Heaven illuminates the historic-generative essence of the above metaphor. Using the theoretical and methodological system developed by three scholars (P. Ricuer, D. Schon and B. Indurkyia) to follow the metaphorical process, I attempt to show that Berdiczewski's metaphors are not only figures of speech; they form our essential cultural and historical cognition (tolada in Hebrew). I therefore suggest applying to Berdiczewski's metaphor the form 'historic-generative metaphor.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417436

Journal Title: Israeli Sociology / סוציולוגיה ישראלית
Publisher: החוג לסוציולוגיה ולאנתרופולוגיה, הפקולטה למדעי החברה ע"ש גרשון גורדון אוניברסיטת תל-אביב
Issue: i23442333
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Shenhav Yehouda
Abstract: מסה זו עוסקת בסוציולוגיה של התרגום בתנאים של יחסי כוח תיאולוגיים וקולוניאליים בין שפות. בעקבות ולטר בנימין, פול ריקר, ז'אק דרידה והספרות הפוסט-קולוניאלית, אדגים כיצד תחומים בלתי ניתנים לתרגום הופכים את התרגום לאשליה משיחית. דרך דוגמאות מתוך ספרות הנכבה שנכתבה בערבית אני מבקש להראות כיצד התחומים הבלתי ניתנים לתרגום מוצפים במסמנים לא יציבים ובמצבים אפורתיים של מבוי סתום. למשל, השימוש במילה נכבה אינו עקבי אלא תלוי בהקשר של זמן הכתיבה וזמן התרגום. בערבית אפשר למצוא לבד מנכבה גם את המושגים כארת'ה, הזימה, נכסה ומאסאה. בעברית אפשר למצוא שימוש באסון, בתבוסה, בטרגדיה או בנכבה. גם המסמנים ההיסטוריוגרפיים ומסמני הזמן והמרחב בספרות הנכבה אינם יציבים אלא משתנים תמידית. תובנות אלה מציעות אסטרטגיות תרגום שמתבססות על הטיות זמן מתאימות (למשל זמן הווה מתמשך במקום זמן עבר), על היעזרות בהערות חיצוניות לטקסט ועל שערוב מסוים של העברית. What is translation under asymmetrical conditions of power? How do colonial and theological practices shape the relationships between languages? Drawing on Walter Benjamin, Paul Ricoeur, Jacque Derrida, and postcolonial literature in general, I show how untranslatable texts stemming from such asymmetry result in insurmountable gaps which render the messianic "perfect translation" impossible. Using examples from literature on the Palestinian Naqba, I examine how untranslatable texts (from Arabic to Hebrew) are inflated with unstable signifiers, which themselves are contingent on the time/space aspect of the translation. Using these examples, I demonstrate the extent to which translation from Arabic to Hebrew necessitates peculiar political and aesthetic strategies which are sensitive to colonial and theological conditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23443031

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457093
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Lévy Jacques
Abstract: Margaret Thatcher Foundation : http://www.margaret- thatcher.org/speeches/displaydocument.asp?docid=106689.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23457595

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23458030
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Héritier Stéphane
Abstract: Gauchon et al., 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458032

Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457606
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Lefort Isabelle
Abstract: Vasset Ph. (2007), Un livre blanc. Récit avec cartes, Paris, Fayard.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458463

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i23482242
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Wallis Neill J.
Abstract: Archaeological examinations of symbolic meaning often have been hampered by the Saussurean concept of signs as coded messages of preexisting meanings. The arbitrary and imprecise manner by which meaning is represented in material culture according to Saussure tends to stymie archaeological investigations of symbolism. As an alternative, archaeologists recently have drawn on Peirce's semiotic to investigate how materiality is bound to the creation of meanings through the process of signification. This study examines how the symbolism expressed in pottery of the Middle Woodland period south-eastern United States, Swift Creek Complicated Stamped and Weeden Island effigy vessels, might be better explained as icons and indexes that were enlisted to have particular social effects. Examining the semiotic potentials of these objects helps explain their apparent uses and the significance of alternative representations of the same subjects. En repetidas ocasiones los estudios arqueológicos sobre el significado de símbolos han sido obstaculizados por el concepto Saussureano que define los signos como mensajes codificados con un significado preexistente. De acuerdo con Saussure, la manera arbitraria e imprecisa por la cual cierto significado se encuentra representado en la cultura material tiende a bloquear las investigaciones arqueológicas que estudian objetos simbólicos. Como alternativa los arqueólogos han comenzado a basarse en la semiótica de Peirce, con el fin de investigar de qué manera la materialidad está ligada a la creación de significados a través del proceso de creación de signos o significación. En este estudio se examinaron piezas de alfarería del sur oriente de los Estados Unidos, provenientes del periodo medio Woodland, de los complejos estampados Swift Creek y esfinges representadas en vasijas Weeden Island. El objetivo es demostrar que los símbolos expresados en dichas piezas podrían ser interpretados como iconos e índices que fueron establecidos para efectos sociales particulares. Por medio de la investigación del potencial semiótico de estos especímenes es posible explicar sus presuntos usos, así como la significación de representaciones alternativas de los mismos objetos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23486315

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i23483400
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): SHERIDAN RUTH
Abstract: The Australian Oxford English Dictionary [ed. Bruce Moore; 2nd ed.; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004], 968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23487893

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Fundación Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i23496240
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): de la Pascua Sánchez María José
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 126-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23496317

Journal Title: Hebrew Union College Annual
Publisher: Hebrew Union College
Issue: i23503346
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): TOWNER W. SIBLEY
Abstract: supra, pp. 107-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23507627

Journal Title: Beit Mikra: Journal for the Study of the Bible and Its World / בית מקרא: כתב-עת לחקר המקרא ועולמו
Publisher: המרכז העולמי לתנ"ך בירושלים
Issue: i23509413
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): L. Greenstein Edward
Abstract: Although the character of Job's wife has been given very little space in the biblical text of Job, she has been treated by many exegetes as significant. There are two main streams of interpretation in which she has figured prominently. In classical Christian approaches, ranging from Augustine to some modern commentators such as Habel, Job's wife tends to be regarded as a temptress in the mold of Eve and as a collaborator of the Satan. Post-modern, especially feminist, approaches tend to rehabilitate the character of Job's wife, accrediting her with prompting Job's critical reflection and with anticipating the direction in which the plot of the book develops. In the present article, interpretive approaches to Job's wife, including the favorable approach of some Jewish exegesis of antiquity, as well as the somewhat middle road of medieval Jewish exegesis, are surveyed. A critical discussion of feminist treatments of Job's wife deals primarily with the work of Newsom, Pardes and van Wolde. The place of Job's wife in the book is assessed with regard to how her theological views compare to those of the Satan on the one hand, and Job on the other, as well as to her role as a catalyst in the plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23509418

Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i23535034
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): NEKVAPIL JIŘÍ
Abstract: Hájek, Dlouhá 2011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23535537

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535032
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Ragland-Sullivan Mary Eloise
Abstract: René Girard, Deceit, Desire and the Novel: Self and Other in Literary Struc- ture, trans, by Yvonne Freccero (Baltimore, Md.: The Johns Hopkins Press, 1965), pp. 294-295.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23536047

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548425
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): BLOOMQUIST L. GREGORY
Abstract: In this article I suggest ways in which rhetorical analysis can complement sociological analysis of early Christianity. On the basis of a universally acknowledged saying of Jesus ("blessed are you poor"), I suggest that those who use social scientific perspectives need to clarify more accurately the levels of data from which they are working (i.e., when they are working with probably early material, possibly the words of Jesus himself, and when they are working with the later elaboration of the traditional material) and to identify the rhetorical value of each level. I then show how, contrary to sociological analysis that depicts Jesus as merely proclaiming reversal, the historical Jesus proclaimed a reversal that had already happened but one that was away from God's intended order: what the historical Jesus was calling for was a future restoration to a state that existed before the reversal. Attention to the rhetorical nature of his follower's use of this proclamation, however, shows that when the author of the Gospel of Luke and the Lukan Acts of the Apostles uses the language of reversal and restoration, he now does so to describe what was happening not primarily vis-à-vis "the world" but in their own, now Christian communities Jesus' message of reversal of the fate of the poor becomes in this way the Lukan message of the apostolic governance of that reversal, that is, the broker's (the apostolic leadership's, after the model of Jesus) dispensation of the patron's (God's) resources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549644

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548426
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): ALBINUS LARS
Abstract: Nagy 1990b: 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549696

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548454
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): GEERTZ CLIFFORD
Abstract: Lakoff and Turner 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549990

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548563
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: Johnson (2007: 258)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551871

Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23554469
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lease Gary
Abstract: Otto Friedrich's article, "New Age Harmonies," Time [December 7, 1987]: 64.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23555822

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i23557514
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Singaravélou Pierre
Abstract: Rodney P. CARLISLE, Geoffrey GOLSON, American in Revolt during the 1960's and 1970's, Santa Barbara, ABC Clio, 2008
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23558104

Journal Title: Social Theory and Practice
Publisher: Department of Philosophy, Florida State University
Issue: i23555926
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Striblen Cassie
Abstract: Nelson, Damaged Identities, Narrative Repair, p. 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23558475

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556518
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Farley Margaret A.
Abstract: Pau! Ricoeur, Oneself as Another, trans. K. Blarney (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992), 190-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559614

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23557669
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Hays Richard B.
Abstract: Hays, Echoes, 125-31, 149-53, 191-92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559673

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23558361
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: her Women and Sexuality (New York: Paulist Press, 1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559780

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556517
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Birkenfeld Darryl L.
Abstract: Winter, Liberating Creation, 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560010

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556526
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Browning Don
Abstract: This article summarizes the claims of Owen Flanagan that psychology can make important criticisms of and viable contributions to both religious and philosophical ethics. Flanagan insists that both fields of ethics should pass the test of what he calls the Principle of Minimal Psychological Realism (PMPR). However, in order for Flanagan to escape naïve naturalism, his PMPR test should be used within a hermeneutic philosophy such as that of Paul Ricoeur. Ricoeur's concepts of "diagnosis" and "distanciation" can help the moral theologian find a limited but important role for PMPR.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560079

Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23557606
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Richardson R. Neville
Abstract: What is the direction of South African theological ethics as that country moves out of the apartheid era into a new democratic future? Following its struggle against apartheid, how will theology respond to the new challenge of making clear its distinctive stance in a democratic, multi-faith society with a secular constitution? A danger, similar to that previously discussed in the United States, exists in South Africa as theology evolves from a mode of resistance to that of compliance and accommodation, especially under the guise of "nation-building." The essay plots a trajectory by means of a consideration of four works representing nonracial liberationist theology which emerged at key points in the past fifteen years—the Kairos Document (1985), and works by Albert Nolan (1988), Charles Villla-Vicencio (1992), and James Cochrane (1999). For all their contextual sensitivity and strength, these works appear to offer little of a distinctively theological nature, and little of Christian substance to church and society. The way lies open for the development of an African Christian ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560118

Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23561471
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Ross Susan A.
Abstract: IN THIS ESSAY I CONSIDER POSSIBLE CONTRIBUTIONS OF FEMINIST THEOLogy to theological aesthetics and ethics by comparing the work of Hans Urs von Balthasar (1905—88), the predominant figure in theological aesthetics, with that of Elizabeth Johnson and Sallie McFague. Balthasar's emphasis on contemplation and obedience in response to the unexpected revelation of God's glory contrasts with the practicality, mutuality, and creativity of feminist theological ethics. On the other hand, feminist theology's emphasis on appropriate language and images for God suggests an implicit aesthetics. The artistic work of contemporary African women in crisis situations sheds further light on both Balthasar and feminist theology and brings into relief the relationship of beauty and justice. Although Balthasar's emphasis on the transcendent glory of God may leave him with an undeveloped ethics, feminist theology's agent-oriented approach could benefit from greater attention to contemplation and a transformed understanding of obedience. These conclusions urge greater appreciation and development of the aesthetic and imaginative dimensions of feminist theological ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561477

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568616
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Valori Paolo
Abstract: ib. p. 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23575356

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568647
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Magnani Giovanni
Abstract: Merton Gill, Psychic Energy, J.A.PsA, 1977 p. 581
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576028

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569552
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Pastor Félix-Alejandro
Abstract: Perspectiva Teològica 17 (1985) 114-116.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577074

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569613
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Rosato Philip J.
Abstract: Die Kirchliche Dogmatik III/3, Ziirich 1950, p. 500 (Church Dogmatics, III/3, Edinburgh 1960, ρ. 430).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577665

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569630
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: P.H. Kolvenbach, «Linguistica e teologia» dans Rassegna di teologia, 1985, pp. 481-595.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577822

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570146
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Dumont Camille
Abstract: Dieu, Tome premier, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577992

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570146
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Salmann Elmar
Abstract: Paris, jetzt zugànglich in K. Barth, Theologi- sche Fragen und Antworten. Ges. Aufsatze II, Zollikon 1957, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577996

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569616
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Kobler John F.
Abstract: John F. Kobler, op. cit. (n. 12 supra), pp. 119-122, 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578486

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569621
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Caba José
Abstract: Dei Verbum 12: AAS 58 (1966) 824.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578657

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569623
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Henrici Peter
Abstract: 1 Jean 4, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579291

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569623
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: E. Stein, L'Etre fini et l'Etre éternel, traduit par G. Casella et F.A. Viallet, Louvain-Paris, Nauwelaerts, 1972, p. 150, note 60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579292

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570132
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Rasco Emilio
Abstract: Szeged 1995: «Az Apostolok Cselekedeteivel Kapcso- latos Kutatàs Legalapvetobb Szakaszai», 7-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579575

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570132
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Anatolios Khaled
Abstract: Heine, 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579577

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569632
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Id. 124.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579748

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570144
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Sesboüé Bernard
Abstract: Ρ. Ricoeur, «Le récit interprétatif. Exégèse et théologie dans les récits de la pas- sion», reprenant les vues de R, Alter, RSR 73, (1985), p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579791

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570161
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: ld. 71.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23580079

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570137
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Lawrence Fred
Abstract: Lonergan, "Mission and Spirit" 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23580263

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570157
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Casey Thomas G.
Abstract: G. Petitdemange et J. Rolland, Autrement que savoir, p. 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23580935

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570142
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Lucas Ramón Lucas
Abstract: M.F. Sciacca, Morte e immortalità, 106-107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581124

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570159
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Novello Henry L.
Abstract: John O'Donnell, «God's Justice and Mercy: What Can We Hope For?» in Pacifica 5 (1992) 84-95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581396

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570322
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: M. Heidegger, De l'essence de la vérité, 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581548

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Finamore Rosanna
Abstract: H.G. Gadamer, Verità e metodo, 442.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581824

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: Friendship and the Ways to Truth, Notre Carne,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581825

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570983
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Carlotti Paolo
Abstract: Concilio Ecumenico Vaticano II, Gaudium et spes, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581907

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571955
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: Ibid., 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581948

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23573308
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Vittigni Grazia
Abstract: G. Cucci - H. Zollner, «Il contributo della psicologia nella formazione al sacerdozio» in La Civiltà Cattolica 160 (2009/1), quaderno 3807, 249-256.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582081

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23573307
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Mateo Rogelio García
Abstract: R. Garcìa Mateo, Ignacio de Loyola. Su espiritualidad y su mundo cultural, Bilbao, 2000, 161-206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582170

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572032
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Laux Henri
Abstract: E. Weil, «La fin de l'histoire» dans Philosophie et réalité, Paris, 1982, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582266

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572032
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Kapusta Paweł
Abstract: 1 John 1:1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582267

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571645
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Nebel Mathias
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Histoire et vérité, 106-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582361

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572489
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Imoda Franco
Abstract: F. Imoda, Sviluppo umano psicologia e mistero, Casale Monferrato, 1993, 338.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582747

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23584999
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Weder Hans
Abstract: G. Ebeling, Die Wahrheit des Evangeliums. Eine Lesehilfe zum Galaterbrief, 1981, 340
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585590

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585001
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Ringleben Joachim
Abstract: Klopstocks sämmtliche Werke, 5. Bd., 1854, 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585648

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585557
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Morgenstern Matthias
Abstract: G. Aicher, Das Alte Testament in der Mischna, Freiburg i.Br. 1906, 67f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585919

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585596
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Krause Cyprian
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586078

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585695
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ahrens Theodor
Abstract: Steinmann [s. Anm. 22], 221-239), 221ff. 227ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586129

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585707
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Stoellger Philipp
Abstract: E. Levinas, Autrement qu'etre ou au-delä de l'essence, Paris 1974, 29-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586358

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585724
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Seibert Christoph
Abstract: Lk23,34.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/004435412799484295', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23592762
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Pouligny Béatrice
Abstract: F. G. Bailey, Les règles du jeu politique. Paris, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594213

Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23592810
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Garciandia Helena
Abstract: F. Polletta, Contending stories..., in Quali- tative Sociology, vol. 21, n 4, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594314

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23596134
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): DE BRITO AMÉLIA SILVEIRA
Abstract: Cortina, Adela - Ètica de la razón cordial, cit., p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23596156

Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23608439
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Zermeño Guillermo
Abstract: Algunos debates en Historia Mexicana, xlvi:3 (183) (ene.-mar. 1997), pp. 563-580, recogidos de The Hispanic American Historical Review, 79:2 (1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23608575

Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23614385
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): De Franceschi Sylvio Hermann
Abstract: Ibid., t. Ier, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23614392

Journal Title: Inner Asia
Publisher: Global Oriental Ltd.
Issue: i23614943
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): SSORIN-CHAIKOV NIKOLAI
Abstract: This article critically revisits the Foucauldian perspective on modernity by exploring the constitutive importance of limits of transparency in relations of power and knowledge. It differentiates between Foucault's Panopticon as a model for modernity, which posits a total visibility of subject under modern gaze, and what I call cybernetic ways of knowing that posit the 'black box' of the inner self that is blocked from visibility. The case in point is a comparative study of two anthropologies — two groups of anthropological cadres — the American anthropologists who in the 1940s were involved in emerging Soviet studies, and Soviet anthropologists of the 1920s and 1930s who took part in Soviet reforms. The article draws attention to similarities in their perspective of images and notions of the enemy: the 'enemy of the people' within Soviet society and the Soviet society as the West's Cold War enemy. In doing so, the aim of this article is to develop an ethnographic perspective on state socialism that does not depend on a foundational dualist distinction between 'Soviet' and 'Western' or 'socialist' and 'capitalist' modernity as a starting point.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615056

Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23615377
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): YANG CHUNG FANG
Abstract: Cheung, Rujia Lunli Tu gjhixu Qingjie', Liu, Chui Rong, 'gjiongguoren De Caifu Guarnían' (The Chinese conception of wealth), in K.S. Yang (ed.), jjiongguoren Dejiazhi Guan (Value Orientations of the Chinese People) (Taipei: Guiguan Books, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615674

Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23615225
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): KUBÁLKOVÁ VENDULKA
Abstract: The Anglo-American discipline of International Relations defends its main principles and resists with an almost religious fervor any change to them, although the explanation of world affairs has been eluding it since its inception. The article attempts to draw up possibly the first historiography of the IR scholarship about religion in world affairs since the 90s, showing the heightened interest in the subject from most other social sciences and humanities. The article proposes the use of the term 'International Political Theology' to bridge the multiple literatures as well as to underscore the theological commitment of the IR discipline to its basic creeds and dogmas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616223

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23617005
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): GRABAR OLEG
Abstract: Barry Flood, comme The Great MosqueMosque of Damascus: studies on the makines of an Umayyad visual culture (Leiden, 2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23617810

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23630184
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: "C'était bien la même Amérique que j'avais laissée, les mêmes questions, les mêmes Blancs qui cherchaient un bouc émissaire!" Haley, Alex & Malcolm X - op. cit., p. 288.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23631110

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23632705
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Cassou-Noguès Pierre
Abstract: Husserl, 1975, 378.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23633974

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23632735
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Dalmedico Amy Dahan
Abstract: Bert J. M. de Vries et al., Greenhouse gas émissions in an equity-environment and service-oriented world : An IMAGE-based scénario for the 21st Century, Technological forecasting and social change, 63 (2000), 137-174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23634068

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23634341
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): GUILLIN Vincent
Abstract: lbid., 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23634351

Journal Title: The British Journal of Criminology
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23638508
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Pavlich George
Abstract: Van Swaaningen 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23638899

Journal Title: Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur Kulturkunde
Publisher: W. Kohlhammer
Issue: i23643578
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Kämpf Heike
Abstract: physische Umwelt" geht Honneth nur am Rande ein (2005:74 -75).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644457

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i23644129
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Schulz-Forberg Hagen
Abstract: »Die räumlichen und zeitlichen Schichten der Globalgeschichte: Überlegungen zu einer globalen Begriffsgeschichte anhand der Ausweitung von Reinhart Kosellecks Zeitschichten in globale Räume«. Recent debates on global history have challenged the understanding of history beyond the nation-state. Simultaneously, they search for non-Eurocentric approaches. This has repercussions on the relation between historical space and time in both historical interpretation and in research design. This article reflects on the possibilities of a global conceptual history by expanding Reinhart Koselleck's theory of temporal layers (Zeitschichten) into global spaces. To this end, it introduces the notion of spatial layers (Raumschichten). First, historicisation and its relation to and interaction with spatialisation and temporalisation is pondered; then, the impact of global spatial and temporal complexities on comparative and conceptual history is considered, before, thirdly, a framework of three tensions of global history - normative, temporal and spatial - is introduced as a way to concretely unfold historical research questions through global conceptual history. Regarding time and space, the main lines of argument in global history have focused either on the question of whether or not European powers were ahead of non-European ones or on the supposedly Western linearity of time as opposed to a non-Western cosmology or circularity of time. Taking its point of departure in Zeitschichten, which break from the linear-vs.-circular logic, this article instead proposes to foreground an actor-based, multi-lingual, global conceptual history to better understand spatio-temporal practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644524

Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museums
Issue: i23646290
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): PEZOLET NICOLA
Abstract: "Golden Lion for Malick Sidibé," Nafas (May 2007), http:// universes-in-universe.org/eng/nafas/articles/2007/news_tips/malick_ sidibe (accessed March 30, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23647795

Journal Title: Asian Journal of Social Science
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23653908
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): bte Hussin Dayang Istiaisyah
Abstract: History is not neutral. It is rendered ideological by the very act of being conveyed in a narrative form, for language is both the purveyor of meaning and the principle locus of ideology. This paper explores the idea of history as discourse, and its deployment in the cultural-symbolic construction of the Singapore nation. To this end, I have chosen to analyse a key moment for Singapore history, the years 1963-65, when Singapore was first merged with the nation of Malaysia, and then separated from it. The way that these events are described in official histories is used by the government of Singapore to justify its policy of multiracialism, which also serves as a legitimating device confirming the state in its political and ideological hegemony. I have examined the events through analysis of local newspapers, The Straits Times and Berita Harían, to see in what ways their reporting may have helped to mould popular understandings of what was happening.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23653958

Journal Title: Asian Journal of Social Science
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23653923
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Taylor Betsy
Abstract: Wilshire (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23654398

Journal Title: Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: AKADÉMIAI KIADÓ
Issue: i23656603
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Simon Róbert
Abstract: Goldziher (1912, pp. 92 sq)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23658556

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662339
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): BOURETZ PIERRE
Abstract: Léo Strauss, « Essai d'introduction à la Religion de la raison tirée des des sources du judaïsme de Hermann Cohen », in Études de philosophie poli- tique platonicienne, op. cit., p. 353.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671124

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676200
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): HEINZ RUDOLF
Abstract: K. Popper, Die offene Gesellschaft und ihre Feinde, Bd. 2: Falsche Prophe- ten, Bern 1958, S. 265.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23678579

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676237
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): ZIRK-SADOWSKI MAREK
Abstract: Ibid., p. 155.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23679193

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676219
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): HEINZ RUDOLF
Abstract: Eine beispielhafte Passage dazu findet sich bei Binswanger 1955, S. 169/170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23679260

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676335
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Sarkowicz Ryszard
Abstract: Cz. Znamierowski, Oceny i normy, Warszawa 1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680187

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676359
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Cortina Adela
Abstract: Habermas, 1996, 277-292.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680920

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676359
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schmitz Heinz-Gerd
Abstract: A. Hamilton/J. Madison/J. Jay, The Federalist or, The New Consitution, introduction by W.R. Brock, London/New York 1961, 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680922

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676356
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Cerar Miro
Abstract: Maihofer (note 28), 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681113

Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676353
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Sabete Wagdi
Abstract: „Sociologie juridique", P.U.F., léreéd., 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681243

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696193
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): APTER DAVID E.
Abstract: David E. Apter et Tony Saich, Revolutionary Discourse in "Mao's Republic", Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698813

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696886
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): GBIKPI Bernard
Abstract: Id., p. 103.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699434

Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696812
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): CROWLEY John
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, Seuil, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699464

Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23709094
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): McBEATH GRAHAM B.
Abstract: This paper, a reply to Professor R. S. Downie's criticisms of our paper 'A Political Critique of Kantian Ethics in Social Work', both appearing in BJSW 19, 6, tries to answer the main charge against us of illegitimately bridging the logical gap between statements of value and statements of fact. In addition to this, we explicate further our original arguments that language and power are indissolubly bound to each other, and that a Kantian approach to social work theory and practice fails in trying to dissolve that relationship by finding a neutral, universal ground from which to derive ethical principles and judgements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23709099

Journal Title: Social Work
Publisher: National Association of Social Workers
Issue: i23715106
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Norton Dolores G.
Abstract: Although the dual perspective should be used to focus on diversity, it should be applied within the context of an anthropological—ecological framework to prevent stereotyping, to illuminate the universal goals of societal organization underlying human behavior, and to explore the early socialization of children. This view is illustrated with preliminary findings from an ongoing longitudinal study of lower socioeconomic inner-city African American children that examines the importance of a sense of time, its evolution in early socialization, and the relationship of parent-child interactions to the development of a sense of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23716885

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730852
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Kontler László
Abstract: Robert Bernasconi (2000) and (2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730856

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730852
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Feres João
Abstract: Jurgen Habermas (1989) and (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730857

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i23730902
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): IFVERSEN JAN
Abstract: http://www.concepta-net.org/beyond_classical_key_concepts.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/choc.2011.060104', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: The Centennial Review
Publisher: College of Arts and Letters, Michigan State University
Issue: i23736675
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Ramazani R. Jahan
Abstract: Hegel, pp. 33, 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23738567

Journal Title: The Centennial Review
Publisher: College of Arts and Letters, Michigan State University
Issue: i23736823
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Filer Malva E.
Abstract: Lois Parkinson Zamora, "Movement and Stasis, Film and Photo:Temporal Struc- tures in the Recent Fiction of Julio Cortázar," Review of Contemporary Fiction, Fall 1983, pp. 51-65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23738717

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO EUROPEO DE INICIATIVAS EDUCATIVAS
Issue: i23757764
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): MUNTAÑOLA Josep
Abstract: El objetivo de este artículo es analizar las relaciones entre arquitectura y educación desde una perspectiva dialógica. En esta perspectiva, desarrollada por el antropólogo y pensador lingüístico Mijail Bajtin, el concepto básico es la estructura cronotópica de los objetos culturales en general y los objetos arquitectónicos en particular. Así, la arquitectura es una estructura cultural sociofísica, y la educación una vía importante de modelización de estas estructuras culturales sociofísicas a través del desarrollo mental y personal. The objective of this article is to analyse the relations between architecture and education from a dialogical perspective. The basic concept from this perspective is the chronotopic structure of cultural objects in general and of architectural objects in particular, developed by the Russian anthropologue and linguistic thinker Mijail Bajtin. Architecture is then a sociophysical cultural structure and education a very important way of modelization of these sociophysical structures throughout the mental and personal development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23764532

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO EUROPEO DE INICIATIVAS EDUCATIVAS
Issue: i23758746
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): ALBA José Antonio MILLÁN
Abstract: Disciplina acuñada en el XIX, la filología surge como historicidad fundamental, identificando la significación de una obra con sus condiciones de producción originarias, un discurso de la ciencia (historia) sobre la lengua y la literatura. La hermenéutica contemporánea supone una ruptura de la razón histórico-filológica y una afirmación de los nuevos significados que a un texto se le añaden al pasar de un contexto cultural u otro nuevo. Para la filología, el criterio pedagógico único de explicación de los textos es la restitución de la intención deliberada y originaria del autor. Hermenéutica y teoría de la literatura afirman que no hay adecuación lógica necesaria entre sentido de la obra e intención de autor. Tras la “muerte del autor” del formalismo semiótico, la posmodernidad niega el texto mismo y afirma que éste tiene tantos sentido como lectores. A discipline minted in the 19th century, philology, emerges as a fundamental historicist approach, identifying the significance of a work with its original conditions of production, a discourse from science (history) about language and literature. Contemporary hermeneutics assumes a break with historical-philological reason, as well as an affirmation of the new meanings added to a text by passing from one cultural context to another new one. For philology, the only pedagogical criterion in explaining texts is the restitution of deliberate and original authorial intent. Hermeneutics and literary theory assert that there is no logical association necessary between the meaning of the work, and authorial intent. Since the “death of the author” of semiotic formalism, postmodernity has denied the text itself, instead asserting that it has as many meanings as it has readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23766850

Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Thought (JET) / Revue de la Pensée Éducative
Publisher: Faculty of Education, University of Calgary
Issue: i23762745
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ROTH WOLFF-MICHAEL
Abstract: Present discourses on technology education are taking a positive and value-neutral approach with utilitarian and vocational overtones. The discourses generally lack discussions of human agency and human responsibility for techno-scientific activities and technological literacy. To support the emergence of a collective civic literacy, we argue in this text that technology education needs to take up critical and value-acknowledging aspects with emphasis on building sustainable relationships among human beings, technology, and lifeworld. To understand the relationship between human agency and modern technology, we examine the nature of technology in the dimensions of technology as causality and technology as a relationship of lifeworld. Discussing Martin Heidegger's perspectives on the causalities of technology, we question how the nature of technology situates human beings in power-related relationships to the world. Understanding technology as process and relationship of lifeworld, the paper extends its discussion of the responsibility of a dialectical human-technology-lifeworld relation based on a socio-technical and ethico-moral framework of technology. By recognizing human responsibility of and for modern technology, we outline a critical and reflective approach to technological literacy. The approach challenges the position of current approaches to technology in the attempt to provide a foundation for a contemporary pedagogy of technological awareness and values. Aujourd'hui, les discours en matière d'enseignement de la technologie sont en train de prendre une orientation positive et dépourvue de jugement de valeur comportant des connotations utilitaristes et professionnelles. En général, les discours n'ouvrent pas assez de discussions sur l'action humaine et la responsabilité humaine dans les activités technico-scientifiques et dans l'alphabétisme technologique. Dans ce papier, afin de renforcer l'éclosion de l'alphabétisme civique collectif, nous ouvrons le débat sur le fait que l'enseignement de la technologie a besoin d'aborder des aspects critiques et de valeur reconnue avec un accent mis sur la construction durable des relations chez les êtres humains, dans la technologie et dans la vie mondiale. Dans le but de comprendre les relations entre l'action humaine et la technologie moderne, nous analysons la nature de la technologie en tant que causalité et en tant que relation de la vie mondiale. Nous discutons des perspectives de Martin Heidegger sur les causalités de la technologie. Nous posons des questions sur la manière que la nature de la technologie situe les êtres humains dans les relations basées sur le pouvoir face au monde. Nous assimilons la technologie comme processus et comme relation de la vie mondiale. L'article élargit les propos sur la responsabilité dune relation dialectale humaine technologie/vie mondiale, fondée sur une structure de technologie sociotechnique et éthico morale. En reconnaissant la responsabilité humaine de et pour la technologie moderne, nous soulignons une démarche critique et réfléchie de l'alphabétisme technologique. La démarche remet en question la position des approches actuelles vers le chemin de la technologie afin d'apporter une base à une pédagogie contemporaine de sensibilisation et de valeurs technologiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23767086

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23781981
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Marques Tiago Pires
Abstract: L. F. Crespo et M. L. Muñoz, 2004 : 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785623

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Caillet Laurence
Abstract: Rotermund, 1988 : 206-221.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785651

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23782111
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Gauthier Claudine
Abstract: Id., 1960 : XI, 13 d
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785829

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783067
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): AMORIM MIGUEL
Abstract: Amorim, Miguel-A Catallegory Fatigue Sampler for an Im-pertinent History of Cinema, take one. Barcelona: unpublished, 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785881

Journal Title: Ägypten und Levante / Egypt and the Levant
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i23785611
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Schneider Thomas
Abstract: Spiegel's statement (Soziale und weltan- schauliche Reformbewegungen im alten Ägypten, Heidelberg 1950, 59)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23788656

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799482
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): SPRANZI-ZUBER MARTA
Abstract: A. R. Louch, « History as narrative », History and Theory, 8,1969, pp. 55-69.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799784

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i23884619
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Van Den Avenne Cécile
Abstract: This article attempts to pose the principles for the use of certain tools, forged in linguistics, for sociological analysis, particularly for the analysis of interviews. Far from being a simple collection of information, the interviews with migrants analyzed here are an arena for intense language activity. With the use of concepts such as annunciation, pragmatism and natural logic, various language functions are identified that sociologists should take into consideration: the construction of representations, negotiation of one's position in an interaction. Contrary to the spontaneous sociology of certain linguistics, language practices are not those of an actor free of all social determinants. On the contrary, by taking into consideration the complexity of language, sociology can construct a plural, heterogeneous and even divided actor. Cet article essaie de poser les principes d'utilisation de quelques outils forgés en linguistique pour l'analyse sociologique, plus particulièrement pour l'analyse des entretiens. Loin d'être une simple collection d'informations, les entretiens analysés ici, qui sont des entretiens de migrants, sont le lieu d'une intense activité langagière. En recourant aux concepts de l'énonciation, de la pragmatique et de la logique naturelle, sont repérés divers fonctionnements langagiers que le sociologue a tout intérêt à considérer: construction des représentations, négociation des places dans l'interaction. Cependant, contrairement à la sociologie spontanée de certaines linguistiques, les pratiques langagières ne sont pas celles d'un acteur libre de toutes déterminations. Au contraire, en prenant en compte toute la complexité du langage, le sociologue peut construire un acteur pluriel, hétérogène, voire divisé.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23891479

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23884858
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: This article discusses the theoretical and methodological debates concerning the experience and consequences of upward social mobility between generations. The methods employed by researchers working on this subject are diverse, and the results they arrive at are sometimes contradictory. This article proposes, firstly, to give an overview of the different traditions of studying the experience of social mobility in order to identify the conditions for potential "cumulative" knowledge. In a second step, we argue that it is mainly through a study of the narratives of mobility that one can, simultaneously and comprehensively, grasp the ambivalence and multiplicity of effects that produce upward social mobility. Cet article revient sur les débats théoriques et méthodologiques sur l'expérience et les conséquences de la mobilité sociale ascendante intergénérationnelle. Les méthodes mobilisées par les chercheurs travaillant sur ce sujet sont multiples, et les résultats auxquels ils parviennent parfois contradictoires. Cet article se propose donc, dans un premier temps, de donner une vue d'ensemble des différentes traditions d'étude de l'expérience de la mobilité sociale afin de cerner les conditions d'une potentielle «cumulativité» des savoirs qu'elles produisent. Dans un second temps, nous défendons l'idée que c'est principalement à travers une étude du discours des personnes en mobilité que l'on peut, dans un même temps et dans un même élan, saisir l'ambivalence et la multiplicité des effets que produit la mobilité sociale ascendante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23891865

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: E. J. BRILL-VERLAG GMBH
Issue: i23886187
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): FLEISCHER MANFRED P.
Abstract: Francis Delaisi: Political Myths and Economic Realities, New York 1927
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23895065

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23889101
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): KLEIN GIL P.
Abstract: BT Bava Kama 82b.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23898795

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: E. J. BRILL
Issue: i23886875
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): SWIDLER LEONARD
Abstract: Sigal, The Halakhah of Jesus (wie Anra. 13), S. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23899270

Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i23899634
Date: 9 1, 1991
Author(s): Coquet Jean-Claude
Abstract: M. Merleau-Ponty, Le primat de la perception..., op. cit., p. 56.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23906580

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23907886
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Adam Raoul J.
Abstract: Kamenka, 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23907899

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23908595
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Streib Heinz
Abstract: Fowler 1981, 198. Vgl. dazu auch Fowlers Beitrag: „The Enlightenment and Faith Development Theory" (in: J.E.T. 1 (1988), 29-42), in dem er den Beitrag der faith deveop- ment theory zur religiös-kulturellen Lage der Gegenwart darin sieht, eine Sprache und ein Begriffssystem dafür bereitszustellen, „for ordering and speaking intelligibly about the clash of cultural levels of development".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23908603

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23910035
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Hovi Tuija
Abstract: Ganzevoort, 1998, 283
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23910040

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23912365
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Kwon Soo-Young
Abstract: The current methods in psychoanalytic studies of God images and representations have focused almost exclusively on individual, internal processes. This article examines how psychological anthropologists go about formulating symbolic representations of deity in their research, in comparison with the object relations method of God-representations. Drawing on Melford Spiro's integrative proposal for interpreting the mental and collective representations in religious symbol systems, this paper proposes that there is a need for a comprehensive model of the representational process in the Eastern world in order to suit its cultural traditions. The author uses both theoretical and historical materials as well as personal narrative throughout its entirety to balance the two in a mutual and coherent flow of understanding. Noting the culturally patterned interactions with culturally postulated God-symbols, the object relations method of God-representations will be utilized to probe how God is both created and found on a collective (cultural) level as well as individual level.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23912375

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23918936
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Westerink Herman
Abstract: Wulff, 1997, pp. 630-636
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157361212X644486', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23919077
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Krenn Kurt
Abstract: Vgl. Paul Ricoeur, Die Fehlbarkeit des Menschen. Phänomenologie der Schuld I. Freiburg/München 1971, 12 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23919114

Journal Title: Journal of Church and State
Publisher: J. M. Dawson Institute of Church-State Studies of Baylor University
Issue: i23912352
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): WESTMORELAND-WHITE MICHAEL L.
Abstract: Michael Walzer, Thick and Thin: Moral Argument at Home and Abroad (Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 1994).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23920233

Journal Title: Administrative Science Quarterly
Publisher: Cornell University Graduate School of Business and Public Administration
Issue: i341309
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Woodward Gareth
Abstract: Burrell and Morgan (1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2392283

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23916373
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Velaidum Joe
Abstract: This paper addresses Northrop Frye's biblical hermeneutic. Frye intends his interpretation of the Bible to be 'literary' (as opposed to theological) which for him means that it explicates how or why a poet reads the Bible. In so doing, Frye employs typology, believing that he is able to eliminate the theological elements of typology in his purely literary interpretation of biblical texts. However, a closer examination of typology itself shows that when it is applied to the Bible, as it is in Frye's writings, typology cannot be divorced from its theological foundations. Contrary to Frye's belief that his biblical hermeneutic is a non-theological interpretation of biblical imagery, I argue that Christian typology provides the inescapable framework for Frye's reading of the Bible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925201

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: This essay outlines an account of 'theological humanism' as a new form of theology of culture. I trace the connection between theological humanism and an ethics of responsibility dedicated to respecting and enhancing the integrity of life. I argue that without a 'theological' humanism we risk the reduction of values to human purposes, and yet without a theological 'humanism' religious conviction is unconstrained by moral purpose. In our age of religious violence and ecological crisis, what is needed in ethics is a renewed vision of the moral vocation of human beings not against but within the wider compass of life on earth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926050

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Antonaccio Maria
Abstract: This article argues that Iris Murdoch makes a distinctive contribution to the agenda of theological humanism by formulating a revised theology of culture. Specifically, the article claims that Murdoch provides a compelling apologia for religious life in a secular world in two ways: by defending the significance of individual consciousness, and by retrieving an idea of the religious depth of morality. In doing so, Murdoch's work challenges antihumanist currents in modern and postmodern thought, offers an alternative to confessional forms of religious reflection, and revises previous theologies of culture (such as Tillich's) by giving priority to the ethical dimension of human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926051

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Klemm David E.
Abstract: Michael Frayn's play, Copenhagen, dramatises as a ghost story the conversation concerning the moral implications of atomic fission among Werner Heisenberg, Niels Bohr, and his wife, Margrethe Bohr, in September 1941. This paper argues that the play generalises from the famous uncertainty principle in quantum mechanics to present the necessary appearance of uncertainty at the historical, moral, and theological levels of reflection. The paper traces the meaning of uncertainty back to the 'being of the self' as a cipher for divine transcendence, and it interprets the meaning of uncertainty for the theory and method of theological humanism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926052

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Wright Dale S.
Abstract: Mandala is a Korean film that follows the careers of two Buddhist monks who pursue antithetical forms of religious practice—meditative selfcultivation, and antinomian pursuit of freedom. Mandala culminates in the enlightenment of both, as they come to realize the limits intrinsic in self-absorption in either form. The paper seeks to explore the larger ethical issues posed in the film in relation to their background in Mahayana Buddhism and to show their applicability in our own cultural setting to the emergence of a 'theological humanism', which articulates various forms of transcendence or depth experienced in the midst of human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926053

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917925
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Condon Matthew G.
Abstract: This paper asks, why does the eponymous hero of Joseph Conrad's Lord Jim fail to obtain absolution despite two confessional attempts, and then seek his own death? By using narratological distinctions together with an analysis of the confessional structures of Jim's narratives, we find that his confessions fail for three reasons: he never fulfils his promise to Marlow to plot the 'fundamental why' of his jumping ship, his father's 'easy morality' condemns him even before he abandons the Patna, and Marlow fails to meet his role as confessor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926274

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23926961
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ward Graham
Abstract: The correlation of narrative and ethics has a long history in literature, and frequently ethics has been associated with a transcendental notion of truth. The recent attention to narrative and theology has offered more theoretical reflections of both poetic and hermeneutical practices that return us to the earliest literary, philosophical and theological productions. In this essay, I wish to present a different way of examining the correlation of narrative and ethics; one less orientated towards Scripture and less concerned with the Church. The narratives I consider are secular fictions from the modernist period. Through examining these works phenomenologically and the role the imagination plays in the production of beliefs, I argue that all narratives structure emotions, desires and hopes and this structuring continually opens up a transcendent horizon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926969

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917941
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Loevlie Elisabeth M.
Abstract: The story of the Fall inscribes the myth of a fallen language as the absolute other of the original sacred. Hence the dualistic scheme between a fallen materiality and a metaphysical God. This article explores how the death of this God is not merely a secular turn, but the opening of a different, anti-theological, or fallen religiosity that allows us to trace the sacred in unexpected places—also within fallen language. Translation and literature will be explored as instances where language performs its own fallenness— its materiality, arbitrariness and difference—and thereby releases a sacred expression. The essay considers 17th-century theologian Martin de Barcos' letters regarding translation, Derrida's essay 'Des Tours de Babel' and notions of literariness based on Blanchot and Mallarmé.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927070

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917934
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Hall W. David
Abstract: This essay takes Paul Ricoeur's use of the phrase "economy of the gift" as an opportunity to explore the relationship between theology, ethics, and poetic redescription. A primay focus is Ricoeur's juxtaposition of the golden rule and the love command, the manner in which these two are poetically related by biblical discourse, and what this means for theological ethics. This focus offers the opportunity to explore some of the more radical implications of Ricoeur's claims about the poetic, redescriptive function of religious discourse, implications that were not adequately addressed by Ricoeur himself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927296

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917935
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Is liability insurance simply a necessary evil in today's climate of litigation? Or does it have greater implications beyond its social and economic remit? In this article, I argue that when the insurance policy is viewed hermeneutically as a text, its negligence-based definition of action supplants the understanding of responsibility, therefore having theological and philosophical implications. Insurance, in this sense, comes 'in between' humanity and its relation to others and fundamental ontological questions concerning the meaning of uncertainty and suffering.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927311

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922201
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Tran Jonathan
Abstract: Miroslav Volf has provocatively argued that redemption necessitates forgetting (1996, 2006). Yet, Volf's claims insufficiently consider the narratival configuration of memory. This essay utilises Paul Ricoeur's work on mimesis in order to challenge Volf's case for forgetting. The author advances Ricoeur's philosophical description of forgiveness toward a theological account of divine forgiveness as re-narration, gift-giving funded by trinitarian abundance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927340

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917940
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Wriglesworth Chad
Abstract: This essay outlines and illustrates ways that 'theological humanism' provides methodological possibilities for scholars working in religion and literary studies. I suggest there is a need to investigate more humanistic methods of interpreting literature by exploring approaches that engage questions of sacred depth. After stressing the necessary paradoxes of theological humanism as an interpretive and lived stance in the world, I offer a reading of Margaret Edson's Wit that is shaped by these principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927377

Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917928
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Bouchard Larry D.
Abstract: Tragedy depicts harm to integrity—personal, moral, bodily, even the integrity of nature—and so offers occasions for rethinking the idea of integrity. These occasions may prompt us to set aside notions of pristine wholeness, moral perfection, and solitary authenticity for a more relational integrity, informed by the paradigms of performance and kenosis. This essay first juxtaposes King Lear with a film by Kristian Levring, The King Is Alive, and then moves to Shakespeare's earlier A Midsummer Night's Dream. All three works are metatheatrical, and depict people playing-as-others in solicitude for others. Each in its way broaches the ethical and theological possibility of 'kenotic integrity'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927394

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: ISTITUTI EDITORIALI E POLIGRAFICI INTERNAZIONALI®
Issue: i23919277
Date: 8 1, 1998
Author(s): Casadei Alberto
Abstract: B. Me Hale, Constructing Postmodernism, London and New York, Routledge 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23936019

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: ISTITUTI EDITORIALI E POLIGRAFICI INTERNAZIONALI®
Issue: i23921424
Date: 8 1, 2001
Author(s): Terrusi Leonardo
Abstract: Michele Dell'Aquila, ivi, pp. 90-1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23937096

Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i23922211
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Boezio Sara
Abstract: C. Hamilton, The future of Cognitive poetics, «Zeszyty Naukowe Uniwersytetu Rzeszowskiego. Seria fi- lologiczna - Studia anglica resoviensia 2», xiv, 2003, pp. 120-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23938239

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Ministère de l'Education nationale et de la Culture et le concours de la Fondation Universitaire de Belgique
Issue: i23940762
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Van Bever Pierre
Abstract: Saggi su Heidegger de Karl Lôwith, enfin le cahier 30 de « L'Arc », 1966 et le n° 135, oct. 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23940764

Journal Title: Journal of Korean Religions
Publisher: Institute for the Study of Religion
Issue: i23942764
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Park Jun Hwan
Abstract: In the world of Korean shamanism, there is a particular god, called taegam, which is allegedly famous for its love of money and its abundance of greed for material wealth. During the shamanic ritual of chaesu-kut, the rites for good fortune and luck, this god is popularly worshipped as the Deity of Wealth and is typically symbolized by money placed all over its face and spirit costumes. Nonetheless, as money has the two sides of heads and tails, taegam also has two very different faces—so-taegam and taegam. This article explores the ambiguity of the two taegam gods, focusing on the symbolic action of money-offerings and how its meaning is taken from the perspective of the ritual actors, in the hope of shedding light on the place of Korea's traditional popular religion of shamanism in today's transformed urban landscape. By discussing the semantics of "money is the filial child" (a remark made by so-taegam) and "money is the enemy" (as remarked by taegam), statements I often heard during my fieldwork in Seoul, I suggest that the ambivalent symbolic nature of taegam should be seen as an indispensible vehicle for understanding ritual life, as well as everyday life, of urban Korean people since it is closely related to both normative orientations and the contradictory aspects of the material culture of contemporary urbanites inhabiting the borderless, globalized, and fluctuating modern capitalist market. This conclusion is reached partly with reference to existing sociological theories of money and anthropological inquiries into the ambivalent aspects of taegam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23943367

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23949434
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): GARRONI Emilio
Abstract: Op. cit., pp. 3-4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23949442

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23955741
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): WEINSHEIMER Joel
Abstract: Ibid., p. 137.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955756

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23955822
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de MUL Jos
Abstract: GS XIX, 45
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955842

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Allard Julie
Abstract: J. Habermas, op. cit., p.258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955868

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955904
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): da Silva Jairo José
Abstract: [Husserl 1990] p.21-22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955911

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Librairie Philosophique VRIN
Issue: i23961076
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Fusillo Massimo
Abstract: C. Montaleone, Don Chisciotte o la logica della follia. Bollati Boringhieri, Torino 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23961098

Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Librairie Philosophique VRIN
Issue: i23961530
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Stäheli Urs
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze, Difference and Repetition (London: Continuum, 2004), 263.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23961538

Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23951805
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Moberly R. W. L.
Abstract: Stephen E. Fowl and L. Gregory Jones, Reading in Communion: Scripture and Ethics in Christian Life (London: SPCK, 1991), p. 49.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23972472

Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: מרכז ש. ה. ברגמן לעיון פילוסופי, הפקולטה למדעי הרוח של האוניברסיטה העברית בירושלים
Issue: i23975214
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Delgadillo Jorge Medina
Abstract: Loumansky, "Levinas and the Possibility of Justice" (note 30 above), 156.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23979077

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag
Issue: i23980146
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Narr Wolf-Dieter
Abstract: Radin 1933
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23982830

Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23983066
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Jay Martin
Abstract: Cornelius Castoriadis, Gesellschaft als imaginäre Institution, aus dem Französischen v. Horst Brühmann, Frankfurt a.M. 1989; Paul Ricoeur, „Ideology and Utopia as Cultural Imagination", in: Philosophie Exchange 2 (Sommer 1976), S. 17-28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23984108

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: PLON
Issue: i23985518
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): LEACH EDMUND
Abstract: Robert H. Pfeiffer, Introduction to the Old Testament (London, A. and C. Black, 1952), pp. 342-359-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23988308

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23985776
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): LEACH EDMUND
Abstract: C. Black, 1952), pp. 342-359-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23999537

Journal Title: Il Politico
Publisher: UNIVERSITÀ DEGLI STUDI DI PAVIA
Issue: i24003450
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Frétigné Jean-Yves
Abstract: J.-Y. Frétigné, Les intellectuels italiens et la politisation de leur peuple de l'Unité aux années 1930, in « Raisons Politiques », novembre 2003, p. 149-168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24005351

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006560
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Pozzi, Scrittrici mistiche italiane, p. 462: "Nel 1629 cessarono le visioni e le estasi. La fama di quelle meraviglie, uscita dalla clausura, aveva perô provocato il fenomeno, comune a molte altre estatiche, di un grande traffico spirituale intomo alla suora: le scrissero senza tregua religiosi e prelati,... ma le scrissero soprattutto dame dell'alta aristocrazia, dai vicini ducati di Mantova e . Savoia alle lontane plaghe di Spagna, Boemia, Baviera. Roma intervenne allora col solito rigore; senza emettere condanne, le proibl ogni corrispondenza con Testerno. Cos! calô su di lei un silenzio non piu rotto da fatti straordinari né da rumori del secolo, fino alla morte, avvenuta il 12 febbraio 1671".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006576

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006620
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Da ricordare nell'ambito della ricerca letteraria che attraverso gli strumenti socio- antropologici si occupa di letteratura méridionale il volume di Luigi Reina dal titolo II viaggio della Démetra. Elegismo regressivo e ansia di modernità negli scrittori meridionali del Novecento, e il doppio numéro speciale di Forum Italicum 27.1-2 (1993), intitolato Immaginario e rappresentazione nella letteratura del Sud, a cura di Sebastiano Martelli.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006781

Journal Title: Hagut: Studies in Jewish Educational Thought / הגות: מחקרים בהגות החינוך היהודי
Publisher: המרכז להגות בחינוך היהודי ליד מכללת ליפשיץ
Issue: i24006088
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Ophir Natan
Abstract: Rav H̱isday Crescas (1340-1410/11), Rabbi of Aragonese Jewry in Christian Spain and a major figure in medieval Jewish philosophy, is unique in positing an all-embracing thesis of Love. This thesis permeates his theories of cosmogony, metaphysics and theology and generates far-reaching didactic implications. This article examines Crescas' rather bold description of Love as a positive Divine attribute, an anthropopathism meant to convey ontological meaning about the Divine Nature via an analogous construct. Themes such as Infinite Goodness, Joy and Kindness enable Rav H̱isday to structure a new conception of the Creator and Providence. After postulating Divine Love as the Cosmic Force sustaining creation, Crescas explains the purpose of Torah and mitzvot in terms of evoking love for God thus drawing the soul to link up to the Divine Overflow of Love. Even spiritual existence after death is explicated in terms of the soul's love for its Divine Source. To understand Crescas' unique theory of Love, we compare it with the views of his predecessors and analyze his use of philosophic sources such as the 5th century BCE pre-Socratic scientist-mystic Empedocles. We examine educational aspects of Crescas' teachings on love and view them in context of the mass conversions to Christianity resulting from the 1391 riots. Finally, Crescas' ideas are read as pedagogical messages relevant to both Jews and conversos in the twenty traumatic years after 1391 when he served as chief rabbi and political leader in Saragossa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24008146

Journal Title: Hagut: Studies in Jewish Educational Thought / הגות: מחקרים בהגות החינוך היהודי
Publisher: המרכז להגות בחינוך היהודי ע"ש דב רפל ליד מכללת ליפשיץ
Issue: i24008140
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Weiss Tzahi
Abstract: The curriculum for biblical studies in the Israeli public high school system is designated by the official program of the ministry of education to be taught along essentially critical lines based on historical-philological research tools. The aim of this article is to expound on the cultural consequences and hermeneutical problems which are a direct product of this prescription, with emphasis on three major points: first, the fact that the official program of studies has completely disregarded contemporary hermeneutical approaches; second, the import of this hermeneutic deficiency given a literal reading of the biblical text which is meager in descriptive details but is hermeneutically saturated; third, the cultural status of the Bible class as sole agent of socialization pertaining to Jewish knowledge in Israeli public high-schools.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24008249

Journal Title: Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde Südasiens / Vienna Journal of South Asian Studies
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i24010799
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): D'Sa Francis X.
Abstract: P. RiCOEUR, The Task of Hermeneutics. Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, 43ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24010826

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24016152
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Menetti Andrea
Abstract: Per un confronto con le tesi sopra esposte si veda Diario poriugués (1941-1945).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24016159

Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24016152
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Lollini Massimo
Abstract: "Nei dipinti e negli edifìci risplendono la mente e la prudenzia dell'artista. Vi si percepiscono inoltre la disposizione e quasi la figura stessa dell'animo. Infatti l'animo esprime e raffigura se stesso in queste opere così come riflette se stesso il volto di colui che si guarda nello specchio" (mia traduzione).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24016166

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24021626
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Holzman Lois
Abstract: Racine and Müller 2008
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10746-013-9293-x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24046637
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Souza lara
Abstract: This article inquires as to the meaning of nervoso (nerves) among poor, working-class women from Salvador, Brazil. Our aim is to understand nerves as an experience that emerges from the background of a life trajectory and that, in many significant ways, disrupts the taken-for-granted character of that trajectory. From a phenomenological-hermeneutical tradition, we explore the links between experience, embodiment and temporality and then discuss the relevance of this approach for the understanding of women′s nervoso. In order to do so we present the life histories of three middle-aged women who have been afflicted with nerves. The accounts describe significant ways in which culturally inherited possibilities – grounded in a lived context of class and gender – are recovered and come to pre-figure a certain future. As we argue throughout the article, it is only when we situate the experience of nervoso within the temporal frame of life that we can truly understand it – that is, grasp it as part of a movement that involves both recovery and creation of meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24047842

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: This article questions the aptness of 'discourse analysis' as a label for our field, and prefers the less reductionist concept of 'Discourse Interpretation'. It does this through drawing on ideas from the field of philosophical hermeneutics – the theory and practice of interpreting texts. It operationalizes and adapts the construct of the Interpretive Arc from the philosophy of Paul Ricoeur in order to address issues that are central to discourse work, including that of how we warrant the validity of our textual interpretations. The Interpretive Arc consists of six interlinked phases, which the article presents and exemplifies through discussion of a single text – the story of Babel. Phase I of the arc defines readers as being in a state of Estrangement before the text because of the distancing created by its written or technological form. Phase 2 is that of Pre-view, the state of opinion or knowledge that readers bring to a text. At phase 3, a first reading forms readers' Proto-understanding, their initial 'guess' at what the text means. Then processes of Analysis (phase 4) test and evidence the validity of alternative readings, limiting the interpretations which can plausibly be taken from a text. Three byways of interpretive analysis are challenged and discarded: the dominance of author intention, structuralist analysis and limitless polysemy. Analysis then leads into 5, the phase of informed Understanding of the matter or injunction of the text, of what is disclosed or unfolded before the text. The Interpretive Arc is completed in phase 6, Ownership. Here, through processes of critique of their own and the text's ideologies and of fresh listening, readers are led to a new self formed by the matter of the text. There is a dialectic amongst Analysis, Understanding and Ownership, with each informing and modifying the other. The approach emphasizes interpretation as the heart of discourse work. The 3000-year-old narrative of Babel is a subject as well as an object here. It contributes to the matter of the article and its interpretation is interwoven with the theoretical substance. The story is shown to be an integrated narrative abounding in sophisticated linguistic techniques which show a delight in language. The traditional Christian and Western interpretation of Babel – as an affront to God which results in the curse of multilingualism – is challenged. A re-constructed interpretation informed by intertextual evidence reads the fault of Babel to be the people's refusal to spread through the earth. Babel can be interpreted as a manifesto against the monolingual and monocultural impetus of empires ancient and contemporary. The multilingual outcome is a positive affirmation of sociocultural and linguistic diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049945

Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Wodak Ruth
Abstract: This article discusses different theoretical and methodological approaches in the humanities and social sciences which strive to analyse and understand, interpret and explain texts and discourses in systematic, qualitative ways. After reviewing some of the salient theories in the social sciences (such as objective hermeneutics and critical hermeneutics), I argue that critical discourse studies require a 'trichotomy' consisting of explanation, interpretation and critique. Other approaches such as Ricoeur's 'hermeneutic arc' seem to neglect important structural and material dimensions of context as well as critical self-reflection. Moreover, I argue that much intuitive and non-transparent speculation in Hermeneutics might be transcended if more historical, cultural, linguistic and philological knowledges would be systematically and explicitly integrated into the analysis of text and discourse, in a retroductable manner. The latter possibility is illustrated by applying an interdisciplinary framework to some brief examples (e.g. intercultural and historical translation studies; the discourse-historical approach in critical discourse studies).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049953

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24136797
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Janssen Philip Jost
Abstract: . Sowiport is based on 18 databases, including Socio- logical Abstracts and Worldwide Political Science Abstracts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24139028

Journal Title: Democratic Culture / תרבות דמוקרטית
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן; המכון הישראלי לדמוקרטיה; צביון, מרכז ג'ולסון לישראליות, יהדות ודמוקרטיה
Issue: i24141591
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: In this article, Levinas' ethical metaphysics is analyzed and his contribution to present-day philosophy is described. In his philosophy, ethics is not something that originates in the autonomous will, as Kant would have premised. It is, rather, the result of the traumatic rupturing of the I by the Other, a heteronomous event. The I's passivity in being opened by the Other is highlighted by Levinas in the words "substitution," "obsession," and "being elected." The I, in the critical Others' eyes, is guilty. The infinity in the Other's demand, regarding the I, is divine. It would be a fatal misunderstanding of Levinas to think that, with the insertion of the word "God," he becomes a theologian. In this article the relation between ethics and politics is discussed and their relation to God is pointed to. In this way, Levinas' discourse on God is demonstrated as being fitting for our time, after the crisis of humanism during the Holocaust. In the course of the article, the question of whether there "is" a God in the eyes of Levinas, and if man "needs" Him is answered. In other words, the logical status of the word "God" in Levinas' philosophy is defined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24142190

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24145432
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Zängle Michael
Abstract: Francis 2013, 288
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24145539

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24145431
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Gerber Doris
Abstract: Currently, epistemological debates on the formation of concepts in the field of history are close to nonexistent. For that reason alone, this book written by philosopher of history Doris Gerber - with which she earned her habilitation degree at the University of Tübingen - is a welcome addition to the literature in the field. In this work, Gerber addresses the metaphysical question of what "history" really is. In this study, she considers approaches typically adopted within the field of history, and questions whether the intention to act is essential in writing history, or whether it is even required in the first place. The findings of the four reviewers that follow are diverse in their opinion of this provocative study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24145795

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24159310
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Murray Robert
Abstract: J. Breck, Theoria and Orthodox Hermeneutics: St. Vladimir's Theological Quarterly 20 (1976) 195-219.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24161776

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164415
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Guggenberger Wilhelm
Abstract: J. Niewiadomski, Menschenrechte: ein gordischer Knoten der heutigen Gnaden- theologie. In: ThPQ 145 (1997) 269-280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168120

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160523
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hoffmann Veronika
Abstract: Gabel, Inspiration und Wahrheit, 131.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24170846

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160644
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Quisinsky Michael
Abstract: »Höhepunkt und Quel- le« (ebd.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24170920

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160642
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schärtl Thomas
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Vermischte Bemerkungen (= WW, Bd. 8), 571.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24171214

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160671
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Bründl Jürgen
Abstract: Fuchs, Jesus, 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24171368

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24183660
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Avi Sagie (Shweitzer)
Abstract: The purpose of this article is to examine the development of the notion of "The Other" and to trace the implications of its effect on the dialoguic Philosophy. In "I and Thou" this category was not developed, at best it was suggested only vaguely, for in this text Buber does not carry out any ontological explication of this category. But such an explication was necessary and was later formulated gradualy by Buber. The clearer the ontological explication, the sharper the category of "the Other" is delineated. It is this category which establishes the I-Thou relationship. This development is expressed in Buber's writings with great tension, and we analyze it in detail, for the category of "the Other" and the central position which it occupies undermine the significance of the I-Thou relationship as it is presented in the book "I and Thou". Together with an acceptance of the primacy of "the Other" in this relationship, we must also assert the primacy of the "I" as the subject of reflective action, of the recognition of the other in his otherness. In this situation it is not the relationship which comes first but the detachment and the aloneness which exist between the I and Thou. We now have to rewise the notion of the dialogue from that purety of an event without content to that of an action of mutual assertion between I and the Other, where each one asserts the other in his otherness, where at the same time each is conscious of being asserted by the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24184936

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24185941
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Shechterman Deborah
Abstract: Original Sin is considered to be a uniquely Christian doctrine. Nevertheless, an analysis of apparently forgotten Jewish treatises — most of which are to be found only in manuscript form — reveals that an extraordinary philosophical theory of Original Sin is present in late medieval Jewish thought. It implies, therefore, a new dimension in characterising this doctrine and has implications for the understanding of the process of inter-communicating of Jewish and Christian thought. This study focuses on fundamental Jewish passages, beginning with Apocalyptic literature and ending with medieval philosophical texts. Yet, the examination of those Hebrew texts is carried out in the light of the writing of Christian scholars. This means that the attempt to clarify this Jewish doctrine is made, from a methodological viewpoint, both by looking at the development of this doctrine trough the history of the Jewish thought, and by a close examination of the parallel general sources. It is only then that one can see that rudiments of the Christian doctrine of Original Sin were inserted into the Aristotelian theory of Nature, and combined with elements from Maimonides' Biblical-allegoric exegesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24186900

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24193434
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: The article deals with the problem of revelation in Levinas' writings. The first part of the article analizes Levinas' ideas on the Same and the Other, more particularly the topics of the face and of discourse, as these come to the fore in the first section of Totality and Infinity. Investigating the non-totalising relationship between the Same and the Other presents us with the suitable framework for understanding the relation between the finite and the Infinite. Leaving out any ontotheological speech, Levinas shows how Metaphysics is enacted in the ethical relation. The second part cootinues with a description of Levinas' position on revelation in the Jewish tradition. The active Interpretation of Biblical texts "beyond the verse" represents an opportunity of hearing the divine word today and to enter into a more primordial Order than the Order of the Same. In the course of the article, we point to affinities and striking similarities between E. Levinas' and F. Rosenzweig's view on revelation. We also demonstrate how Levinas Orients his Jewish writings to his philosophy of the Other and vice versa. In writing on revelation, Levinas' main concern seems to be the description of the possibility of a fracture in the immanent order of totality and in the self-sufficiency of reason which is its correlative. This fraction is produced by the command "thou shalt not kill", calling the Same to open itself to the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24195890

Journal Title: Politische Vierteljahresschrift
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24193641
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Rosa Hartmut
Abstract: Pocock (1962:199)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24197135

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MUSICOLOGÍA
Issue: i24243488
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CALVO-SOTELO Javier CAMPOS
Abstract: TITON, Jeff Todd. «Music and Sustainability: An Ecological Viewpoint». The World of Music, 51, 1 (2009), pp. 119-137
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24246266

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257163

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24260050
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Ces deux affirmations ne sont nullement inconciliables. Paul Bicœur, dont on a vu qu'il plaidait pour une herméneutique biblique requérant l'exercice de l'imaginaire, a aussi défendu l'idée d'une foi irréductible à ses manifestations religieuses (voir, par exemple, « Religion, athéisme, foi », dans le Conflit des interprétations, Paris, Le Seuil, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24260088

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24258050
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: R.S., p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24261741

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266858
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Zawadzki Paul
Abstract: P. Zawadzki, « Scientisme et dévoiements de la pensée critique », dans Eugène Enriquez, Claudine Haroche, Jan Spurk (sous la dir. de), Désir de penser; peur de penser, Lyon, Parangon, 2006, p. 84-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266868

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): de Parseval Geneviève Delaisi
Abstract: J'ai remarqué que, dans les congrès, qu'ils soient médicaux, juridiques ou «psy », il est fréquent d'entendre l'orateur parler du «père biologique», voire de vrai père pour désigner le donneur de sperme... puis, se rendant compte de son lapsus au vu de quelques sourires dans la salle, tâche de se rattraper - mal, comme dans toutes les gaffes - parlant alors de « père social » pour désigner le vrai père, ce qui constitue tout autant un lapsus que le premier...
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268099

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272713
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: « Si le monde est la totalité de ce qui est le cas, le faire ne se laisse pas inclure dans cette totalité. En d'autres termes encore, le faire fait que la réalité ne soit pas totalisable », P. Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Seuil, 1986, p. 270.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275698

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272896
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Hannah Arendt, Vies politiques, op. cit., p. 17 et 19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276388

Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275643
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Toscano Roberto
Abstract: Pierre Hassner également (op. cit., p. 362)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277764

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308969
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 351.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309093

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309455
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Kirschleger Pierre-Yves
Abstract: Patrick Cabanel, Juifs et protestants en France, les affinités électives. XVI'-XXI' siècles, Paris, Fayard, 2004, 351 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310413

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311661
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Goyard-Fabre Simone
Abstract: CSF. pp. 289-303. pp. 368-372
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311669

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24321280
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Sanguinetti Giorgio
Abstract: Desidero ringraziare Laurence Dreyfus, James Haar, Lewis Lockwood, John Nâ- das, Anthony Newcomb, Christopher Reynolds e Richard Taruskin per aver espresso le loro opinioni sulla prima stesura di questo saggio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24321287

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24323706
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Faroldi Roberta
Abstract: Questo articolo è una versione riveduta e ampliata di due contributi precedenti (Nat- tiez 1988; Nattiez 1992b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24323747

Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24323706
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Dunsby Jonathan
Abstract: This article is a thoroughly revised and greatly extended version of two previous publications (Nattiez 1988; 1992b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24323748

Journal Title: Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i24324118
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): De Angelis Rossana
Abstract: The notion of text acquires a fundamental epistemological role in the disciplines of language in the second half of the XXth century. The analysis of some linguistic objects we have called semiological tools could highlight some epistemological issues in the use of the term text. From the Sixties we can observe that text has progressively acquired the general status of an object of analysis. Nevertheless, if linguistic text proves to be a common object of analysis for semiotics and hermeneutics, then it is necessary to reconsider their epistemological relations, to understand something new about what text is. Considering the interpretative problem in the hjelmslevian epistemology, a new perspective emerges between these complementary approaches to text. Comparing semiotics and hermeneutics we can also question the epistemological role that the notion of text embodies among contemporary disciplines of language.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24324920

Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324905
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Kofes Suely
Abstract: SEGALEN, 1978, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327805

Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Etnologický Ústav Akademie ved Ceské Republiky, v. v. i.
Issue: i24330169
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): MOKRZAN MICHAŁ
Abstract: The article discusses the theoretical and methodological considerations as well as the practical application of two incarnations of the rhetorical turn in socio-cultural anthropology. Rhetorical turn is understood as a linguistie and constructivist turn, which marks a substantial part of contemporary thinking in the social sciences and humanities. Reflection about the relation between anthropology and rhetoric shows that the rhetorical turn is oriented on analyzing the rhetoric of anthropological texts, in their persuasive and figurative dimension. On the other hand, rhetorical turn refers to the research perspective in anthropology which is focused on the interpretation of society and culture in which an important role is played by the tools and concepts of rhetoric. Článek je věnován teoretickým a metodologickým úvahám, stejně jako praktické aplikaci dvou aspektů rétorického obratu v sociokulturní antropologii. Spojení „rétorický obrat” je zde použito pro lingvistický a konstruktivistický obrat, který významnou měrou poznamenal současný stav společenských a humanitních věd. Zaměříme-li se na vztah antropologie a rétoriky, zjistíme, že rétorický obrat s sebou přinesl úvahy o rétorice antropologických textů, o jejich přesvědčovacím a obrazném rozměru. Na druhé straně se rétorický obrat vztahuje k výzkumné perspektivě v antropologii, soustředěné na interpretaci společnosti a kultury, v níž hrají významnou roli nástroje a koncepty rétoriky.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24330171

Journal Title: Bruniana & Campanelliana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24337272
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Blum Paul Richard
Abstract: A term from the philosophy of history of Paul Ricoeur: data are gathered and made un- derstandable in a narrative plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24337688

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24347053
Date: 9 1, 1972
Author(s): OBENGA Théophile
Abstract: Before any significant attempt is made to read Negro-African history, the first task is to conquer its field of research. The critical works of Frobenius, Westermann and Bauman, Delafosse, Homburger, Murdock, Leakey and Cheikh Anta Diop provide us with appropriate means of investigation (which still require to be refined) in order to obtain a profound, inner knowledge of the Negro-African social tradition. Prehistory must become a major science in the teaching profession — especially in Africa — because it offers man a general outline of the first consequences of his past before the appearance of writing. No Africanist or African historian can allow himself to by-pass this branch of study. The same applies to Egyptology and to African linguistics, sociology and ethnology. Diop has used the last three sciences to retrace the migrations of African peoples, to establish their cultural unity and to rediscover the continuity of Negro-African history. The study of African, Greco-Roman, Arab and European documents (whether oral or written, archaeological, linguistic or sociological) gives us information concerning the appearance of homo faber in Africa about 5,500,000 years ago, the Egypto-Nubian civilizations, the African Neolithic worlds, pre-colonial Africa, the Arab invasions, the slave-trade, colonization and the present-day national liberation struggles and the formation of new States. The African cultural world has its roots in the Tertiary Period and it is beyond doubt that the biological substratum of humanity is Negro or Negroïd (C.A. Diop and the discovery of Asselar Man by the Augiéras-Draper Saharan expedition in December 1927), that Negroes were in Europe during the Upper Paleolithic and Neolithic periods and helped in the formation of today's Europoïd races. The author uses the social structures of the Pharaonic Ancient Empire (2778 - 2423 B. C.) as models to describe the history of Negro-African societies in their ensemble and contrasts the former with those of West European societies (especially that of Greece with the founding of the « city » from about 1200 B.C.) where Man was not essentially identifield with Nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24350451

Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350806
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): KI-ZERBO Lazare
Abstract: Le règne de la critique de R. Koselleck (éd. Minuit).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24351580

Journal Title: McGill International Journal of Sustainable Development Law and Policy / Revue internationale de droit et politique du développement durable de McGill
Publisher: McGill
Issue: i24352116
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Gaillard Emilie
Abstract: Brown-Weiss, Justice, supra note 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352650

Journal Title: Journal of Applied Philosophy
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i24353628
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): FREEMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: Genocide is a political catastrophe. Yet it has not received much academic attention. A few social scientists have studied it. Philosophers have largely ignored it. There is a large literature on the Holocaust, but there is little agreement as to how this should be related to other genocides. Some have argued that the Holocaust represented a crisis of Western culture, but that Western culture has not responded adequately for the lack of the appropriate self-understanding. This crisis has been attributed to the predominance of scientistic models of rationality in our culture. Social-scientific approaches to genocide have been criticised because of their commitment to logical empiricism, which is held to be epistemologically and ethically inadequate. Ethical approaches based on liberal humanism have been criticised by post-Nietzschean philosophers for their attachment to allegedly outworn metaphysical assumptions. However, the deconstruction of social science and liberal ethics leads in the direction of relativism and nihilism, which are either useless or dangerous in the face of evils such as genocide. The arguments against conventional social science and ethics are examined, and a counter-critique made of post-modern philosophy in order to clear the ground for constructive thinking about genocide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24353639

Journal Title: Journal of Applied Philosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24354104
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): ATKINS KIM
Abstract: In his famous paper, What Is It Like To Be A Bat?, Thomas Nagel argues against a reductive physicalist account of consciousness by highlighting what he calls "the subjective character of experience". In this paper I will argue that Nagel's insight is important for understanding the value placed on patient autonomy in medical ethics. Appreciation of the subjective character of experience brings with it the necessity for an epistemological humility with respect to the lives of others and what can be said to be "right" for them. Appreciation of the subjective character of experience lies at the heart of empathy and our capacity to make decisions that genuinely reflect respect for the patient's autonomy. Through the example of a case involving extreme medical intervention, I identify some impediments to the proper recognition of autonomy. These kind of cases highlight the significance of affective responses with respect to the subjective character of experience, and, by extension, to our capacity to imagine and act in accordance with another's perspective. I argue that affective responses are appropriate and needed considerations in the case where one must attempt to assume another's perspective in order to respect autonomy. I conclude that understanding that experience has an irreducibly subjective character is essential to respecting patient autonomy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354111

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: H. BOUVIER u. CO. VERLAG
Issue: i24354771
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Schmandt Jürgen
Abstract: Ebenda S. 58 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354774

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG HERBERT GRUNDMANN
Issue: i24358961
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Jaeger Henry-Evrard Hasso
Abstract: Daß die Verstiegenheiten und Mißbräuche, welche die Scholiasten der Spätantike seit der Kaiserzeit mit der Etymologie getrieben haben, aller ernsten Grundlagen entbehrten und reine Fabrikation ebenso mittelmäßiger wie phantasievoller Wichtigtuer darstellten, die sich „Philologen" und „Grammatiker" nannten und noch bis in die byzantinische Epoche hinein fortwirkten, ist allgemein bekannt (s. zum Beispiel die vielfachen Entlarvungen dieses durch die Jahrhunderte mitgeschleppten Ballastes von Pseudogelehrsamkeit bei W. G. Ruther- ford, A Chapter in the History of Annotation, Being Scholia Aristophanica, Bd. III, London 1905, S. 392 etc). Daß die ebenso irrationalen und vielleicht noch geschmackloseren ety- mologischen Spekulationen, die man im 20. Jahrhundert auf die Wortgruppe έρμηνεία, έρμη- νεύειν, ερμηνευτικός anwendete und immer noch anwendet, im gängigen akademischen Lehr- betrieb heute ernst genommen werden und sich professoraler Autorität erfreuen, ist nicht nur ein bildungsgeschichtliches curiosum, sondern ein Zeugnis irrationaler Aushöhlung der „geisteswissenschaftlichen" Fakultäten. Als Beispiel seien nur erwähnt Karl Kerényi, Her- meneia und Hermeneutike, Ursprung und Sinn der Hermeneutik in ders., Griechische Grundbegriffe, Fragen und Antworten aus der heutigen Situation, Zürich 1964, 42-52, und F. K. Mayr, Der Gott Hermes und die Hermeneutik in Tijdschrift voor Filosofie, 30, 1968, 525-635. Wie der Autor des zuletzt genannten Artikels selbst, auf Heideggers Formulierung zurückgreifend, sagt, ist das „Spiel des Denkens verbindlicher als die Strenge der Wissenschaft"... Wohin eine im Banne Heideggers stehende „Begriffsgeschichte" führt, kann man bei der Lektüre dieses Schwalls besser „verstehen"... Wie wenig Tragweite die immer wieder angeführte (Techné) hermeneutike in der Epinomis 975 c hat, sagt der Text selbst: bei der Kunst Orakel zu inter- pretieren, die weder Seelengröße noch Weisheit hervorbringt, weiß der „Interpret" nur, was er sagt, ob es jedoch wahr ist, hat er nicht gelernt (τό λεγόμενον γάρ οίδεν μόνον, εΐ δ' αληθές, ούχ έμαθεν). Übrigens kommt das Wort έρμηνευτική in den pseudo-platonischen Definitiones in seiner sonst gebräuchlichen Bedeutung vor, 414 d 4: "Ονομα διάλεκτος άσιλιθετος έρμηνεντική τοϋ τε κατά τής ουσίας κατηγορουμένου και παντός του μή καθ' έαντοϋ λεγομένου. (Nomen, zuzusammengesetzte Ausdrucksweise für etwas seinem Wesen entsprechend Bezeichnetes, sowie auch für alles von diesem Ausgesagtes). — Pierre Chantraine, Dictionnaire Etymologique de la Langue Grecque, Histoire des Mots, Paris, 1970, S. 373, sagt ausdrücklich, „Terme technique sans étymologid'. Vgl. auch F. Solmsen, Ein dorisches Komödienstück in Rheinisches Museum für Philologie NF 63, 1908, 329-340. (dort s. 336 f über den ionischen Ursprung der Worte έρμηνεΰσα, έρμηνεύς).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358965

Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358314
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Benoist Stéphane
Abstract: T. Benton, « Epigraphy and Fascism », dans The Afterlife of Inscriptions, cit. supra, p. 183-186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359120

Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i24359731
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Jenny Jacques
Abstract: An initial awareness is needed of the debates regarding the choice of research approaches in sociology and the diversity and specificity of methods currently being used in the domain of textual data analysis in France. In general the influence of the French socio-linguistic tradition looms large, including, on the one hand, the older works of Michel Pécheux on the "discursive formations" and his A.A.D. (Analyse Automatique du Discours, 1969), and on the other hand, two main perspectives of the "Ecole Française d'Analyse du/de Discours" - which refer to the "speech act" concept and to the problematics of enunciation, and emphasizes the processes and "sociodiscursive practices" between socially-located speakers. Such theoretical conceptions and specific requirements lead to build on methodologies different from the classic, theme-based content analysis, though not yet translated into an operational software. Then the main software developments currently having an impact (at least potential) on practices of computer-aided sociological analysis of textual data, in France, are classified : from the lexicometric using procedures of "French Data Analysis" ('Analyse Factorielle des Correspondances' of Benzecri, and so on...), to a set of "expert-systems" working on specific theoretical frameworks, through more classical methods of content analysis and coding-sorting-retrieving socio-semantic procedures, eventually with various statistical methods. L'auteur expose d'abord quelques considèrations épistémologiques générales sur les présupposés implicites des méthodes de recherche sociologique, abusivement séparées en qualitatives et quantitatives, et des interrogations spécifiques sur le statut des corpus textuels et des pratiques socio-discursives dans différents domaines et selon divers types de problématique en sociologie. Puis, après un résumé des problématiques sociolinguistiques de l'"énonciation", propres aux courants de l'Analyse de Discours à la française", il propose une classification des principaux lieux d'élaboration théorico-méthodologique ayant (ou susceptibles d'avoir) un impact sur les pratiques informatisées d'analyse textuelle: de la lexicométrique inspirée de l'"Analyse des données a la française", actuellement dominante, a des quasi-systèmes-experts, branchés sur des problématiques sociologiques particulières, en passant par des méthodes plus "classiques" d'analyse de contenu thématique, de type socio-sémantique, et de codification a posteriori de réponses à des questions ouvertes et autres énoncés produits en langage naturel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359736

Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358311
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bouvier David
Abstract: P. Ellinger, La légende nationale, cit. supra, p. 71, qui a également bien relevé la référence au κτήμα ές αίεί de Thucydide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359953

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24359168
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Orth Ernst Wolfgang
Abstract: Martin Heidegger: Phänomenologie und Theologie (1927/1928), Frankfurt a. M., 1970, 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360106

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358400
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Orth Ernst Wolfgang
Abstract: Bd. IV
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360176

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358480
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Orth Ernst Wolfgang
Abstract: Hua IV, 366
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360315

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358505
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Schmitz-Perrin Rudolf
Abstract: Réflexion faite, a.a.O., 80
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360413

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358463
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: M. Merleau-Ponty, Phänomenologie der Wahrnehmung, Berlin 1966,17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360437

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358463
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Schumacher Bernard
Abstract: J. Derrida, Apories, 133 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360438

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358418
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schaller Klaus
Abstract: Mit seiner Pädagogik der Wende (Kehre) schließt sich Patodka an Piatons Bildungsverständnis an: „Nur ein solches Beispiel einer unbedingten Umkehr [gemeint ist die Erziehung der Wächter] kann auch im sonstigen Bürgerkreis eine Umkehr einleiten, zu einer tcai&la im weitesten Sinne werden" (KE, 279).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360450

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358609
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Günzel Stephan
Abstract: Stephan Günzel: Hermeneutik im Widerstreit. Habermas zwi- schen den Traditionen. In: Ders.: Anteile. Analytik, Hermeneutik, Politik. Weimar 2002. 95- 98. 93-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360647

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358794
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Paul Ricceur: Le cercle de la démonstration. In: Ders.: Lectures I. Autour du politique. Paris 1991.217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360727

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358653
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Novotný Karel
Abstract: Jan Patocka: Vor-geschichtliche Betrachtungen. In: Ders.: Péce ο dusi. Teil III. Prag 2002. 527 f. (deutsche Version in eigener Ubersetzung von Jan Patocka).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360751

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358470
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Serra Alice Mara
Abstract: Ebd. 38 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360892

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Gondek, Tengelyi: Neue Phänomenologie in Frankreich. 671, vgl. 671-673.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360912

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Amthor David
Abstract: Dodd: „The dignity of the mind". 40 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360913

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bonnemann Jens
Abstract: Buber: Urdistanz und Beziehung. 36 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360948

Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Summa Michela
Abstract: Husserl: Zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360954

Journal Title: Aufklärung
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361794
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Hien Markus
Abstract: Buttlar, Das.Nationale' als Thema der Gartenkunst (wie Anm. 122), 196-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361825

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Kowalewicz Michel Henri
Abstract: Vgl. R. Ingarden: Ο tlumaczeniach, a.a.O. [Anm. 58] 186: » Pozwolç sobie to rozwinqc na przykladzie Krytyki czystego rozumu Kanta, dokonanego przez P. Chmielowskiego. Wiadomo, ze terminologia przez Chmielowskiego przyjçta rozpowszechnila siç dose znacznie w publika- cjach polskich na temat Kanta, a nawet bywa przez niektorych filozofôw polskich stosowana w pracach specjalnie ζ filozolia Kanta nie zwi^zanych. Przyzwyczajono siç Erscheinung nazywac >zjawiskiem< (i nawet w szerokich kolach naukowych polskich, np. wsrôd fizykow), Anschau- ung - >ogli}dem<, Vernunft - >rozumem<, Verstand - >rozs^dkiem< itd. Czy mamy siç liczyc ζ tym faktem i w dalszym ci;(gu stosowac te terminy w tlumaczeniu i w pracach naszych filozoficznych? Nie da siç zaprzeczyc, ze przynajmniej niektôre ζ tych terminow nie oddajg tresci faktycznych pojçc Kantowskich. Mimo catego przyzwyczajenia do nich przy glçbszym wnikniçciu w wywody Kanta trudno nam siç zgodzic, jakoby Verstand Kantowski byt »rozsqdkiem«. Stowo to oznacza pewng wlasciwosc umyslu ludzkiego w praktycznym zachowaniu siç cztowieka, tymczasem u Kanta Verstand jest gtôwn^ poznawcz^ wtadzq (czy zdolnosciç), gdzie sprawy zycia praktyczne- go nie odgrywajg zadnej roli. Wiadomo tez, ze Kant tç stronç zycia umysiowego, czy zdolnosci umyslu, ktöra wigze siç ζ zagadnieniami praktyki (w szczegolnosci etycznej), nazwal wlasnie nie Verstand, lecz praktische Vernunft
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361939

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Paul Ricœur: Existence et herméneutique. In: ders.: Le conflit des interprétations. Essais d'herméneutique (Paris 1969) 7-28, hier 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361940

Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360243
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty: Die Struktur des Verhaltens, S. 223 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362936

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24364384
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Sennett, 2009
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24364433

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24364367
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Ruiz Jorge Ruiz
Abstract: Rescher (1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24364482

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Verlag Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24368988
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Weiland Marc
Abstract: Schapp (Anm. 34), S. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369776

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24368991
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Ächtler Norman
Abstract: Gerd Appenzeller, Das alte Märchen zieht wieder. In: Der Tagesspiegel, 05.05.2014, S. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369901

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: THE POLISH SOCIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION
Issue: i24371582
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): FLANAGAN KIERAN
Abstract: 'Dangerous liaisons: theology, social sciences and modernity', organised by the Centre for Thought of John Paul II and the Institute of Sociology, the University of Warsaw, 12th April 2012
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24371584

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: THE POLISH SOCIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION
Issue: i24371582
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: Encroachments of contemporary social theory on the field of theology are the focal point of this essay. In postmodernity, theology facilitates connections with social theory. In the domain of theology, sociocultural problems are being presented as theological issues. Secularized variants of world theology meet with theologizing postsecular social theory above and beyond sociology. This is facilitated by the constant discourse of ambiguity. In this discourse, "the theological" is a vehicle of indeterminate meanings. Praxis' oriented discourse uses the term "social theory" with its modernist connotative envelope of science and rationality, but with no obligation whatsoever to maintain objectivity of cognition. Sociology doesn't interfere with theological discourse, but may analyze it, leaving the otherworldly outside its perspective on sociocultural phenomena. The sociotheological discourse of ambiguity, however, opposes both religion and the rationality of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24371585

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: l'Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i24372731
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Bocianowska Cécile
Abstract: I. Stokfiszewski, Zwrotpolityczny, Warszawa, Wyd. Krytyki Politycznej, 2009. Sur le virage politique et ses influences sur la critique, voir aussi : D. Kozicka, Krytyczne (nie)porzqdki..., op. cit. Note du rédacteur : cette activité fait partie du groupe de jeunes intellectuels « Krytyka polityczna ». Cf. introduction dans ce volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24372736

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): DUBOUCLEZ OLIVIER
Abstract: 20. « Les acteurs savent que toute la pièce tend vers le salut » (Voir PM, p. 69).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396932

Journal Title: Renaissance Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24411931
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Chojnacki Stanley
Abstract: Cf. Scott, "'Experience'", 34: '[Subjects] are not unified, autonomous individuals exercising free will, but rather subjects whose agency is created through situations and statuses conferred on them.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24411934

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i24431277
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): de Oliveira MARIANO Márcia Corrêa
Abstract: LAPHAM, 2012, p.33, traduçao nossa
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24434338

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24434886
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Gutting Gary
Abstract: Ideas, p. 361.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24434888

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24435511
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Cohen Avner
Abstract: N. Rescher, "Philosophical Disagreement", The Review of Metaphysics XXXII, 2 (October 1978), p. 220.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24435512

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24435585
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Khatchadourian Haig
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 506.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24435587

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24437069
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): BERTHOLD-BOND DANIEL
Abstract: Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit, tr. A. V. Miller (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1977) p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24437077

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438872
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): KNIGHT DEBORAH
Abstract: L. B. Cebik, quoted in Branigan (1992, 27).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438877

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439205
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): BEGGS DONALD
Abstract: "several disciplines" (77)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439209

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24439327
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): STEELE MEILI
Abstract: Steele 1997, chapter 5
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439464

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439507
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): CHRISTMAN JOHN
Abstract: Hacking 1995, 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439514

Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439524
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): HEDERMAN MARK PATRICK
Abstract: Is it possible to connect with the God-who-may-be without paying attention to the tapping on the wall from the other side? Kearney remains within the orbit and the idiom of so-called postmodern philosophy while he expresses phenomenologically the relationship with God as ultimate other. If we are to remain within the confines of postmodern philosophy to articulate such presence, access to what Rilke calls "heart-work" as opposed to "work of sight" might best be glimpsed through excavation of "decisiveness" in the musings of the later Heidegger.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439538

Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Convergence, Inc.
Issue: i24456942
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): SWIDLER LEONARD
Abstract: Austin Flannery, Vatican Council II (Collegeville, Mn.: Li- turgical Press, 1975) p. 1003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24458868

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: OPHRYS
Issue: i24465912
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): KENTISH-BARNES Nancy
Abstract: Pochard, Zittoun and Hervé, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24466388

Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24465904
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Kilroy-Marac Katie
Abstract: This article considers two revenants – a man and a ghost – who haunt the Fann Psychiatric Clinic in Dakar, Senegal. Following Derrida's assertion that haunting is historical, I take seriously the concept of haunting and insist upon its relevance to anthropological inquiry. As a mode of storytelling that comes from a particular way of apprehending the world, I argue that anthropology might give credence to specters as social figures and assign ethnography the task of chasing after ghosts, not simply for the poetic spaces they may open up but out of a concern for justice and responsibility in the past, present, and future. My own ethnographic encounter with the two revenants described here has generated questions about the often taken-for-granted equivalence of the real and the true. Likewise, it has encouraged me to interrogate the unpredictable (and oftentimes uneasy) cohabitation of memory and history, both within the Fann Clinic and beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467147

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Issue: i24465497
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Baglow John
Abstract: This exercise in authoethnography is divided into two parts: first, an impressionistic account of a journey to New Zealand/Aotearoa by the author and his family to scatter the ashes of his partner at Cape Reinga (Te Rerenga Wairua) in a Māori ceremony, and second an analysis of the first part, problematizing the notions of "culture" and "hybridity" and abandoning both in favour of a dialogical approach to difference and the "Other." Cet exercice en autoethnographie se divise en deux parties : d'abord un compte-rendu impressionniste d'un voyage en Nouvelle-Zélande/Aotearoa de l'auteur avec sa famille pour disperser les cendres de son partenaire au Cap Reinga (Te Rerenga Wairua) dans une cérémonie Maori et, en seconde partie, une analyse de la première partie posant le problème des notions de « culture » et « d'hybridité », puis abandonnant les deux en faveur d'une approche dialogique à la différence et à « l'Autre ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467349

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24465850
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Gandsman Ari
Abstract: For anthropologists working on the topic of human rights, fieldwork often consists of collecting narratives documenting experiences of violence and loss. Drawing on research with human organizations in Argentina, this article questions this methodological focus that is often related to human rights activism. While these narratives are often treated as organic accounts, they are also products of the human rights movement. Analyses that fail to address this larger institutional context may end up reproducing conventionally held knowledge. By exploring the larger interconnections between narrative, human rights and trauma, I conclude by questioning the prevalent normative assumptions about narrative. Pour l'anthropologue travaillant sur le sujet des droits humains, le travail de terrain consiste souvent à recueillir des récits documentant des expériences de violence et de perte. À partir de recherches menées auprès d'organismes de défense des droits humains en Argentine, cet article interroge ce parti-pris méthodologique qu'on associe souvent au militantisme pour les droits humains. Alors que ces récits sont souvent traités comme des comptes-rendus organiques, ils sont aussi des produits du mouvement pour les droits humains. Les analyses qui omettent de tenir compte de ce contexte institutionnel plus étendu peuvent finir par reproduire des connaissances conventionnellement admises. En explorant les interconnexions plus étendues entre les récits, les droits humains et les traumatismes, je conclus en remettant en question les a priori normatifs courants relatifs aux récits.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467380

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i24466320
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): SEIGNAN Gérard
Abstract: Gaël Alain, Penser mieux, travailler moins (Paris : Eyrolles, 2013).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467764

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24467905
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Lasserre Evelyne
Abstract: Le présent article s'inscrit dans le prolongement d'une recherche en cours portant sur la compréhension et l'analyse des usages de jeux vidéo en ligne par des personnes en situation de handicap. En soulignant les apports épistémiques et méthodologiques d'une ethnographie en ligne, il pointe les limites heuristiques de la classique distinction entre un monde supposé réel qui se verrait redoublé par son pendant virtuel. L'exemple précis des jeux vidéo permet ici non seulement de questionner la dichotomie virtuel / réel mais aussi la définition traditionnelle du jeu élaborée à partir du modèle de la règle distincte de son effectuation concrète. L'analyse des pratiques ludiques de personnes en situation de handicap pointe enfin la nécessité d'une attention portée sur les modes d'appropriation corporelle d'un dispositif techno-communicationnel. En conséquence, il s'agit d'envisager les formes d'expériences vidéo-ludiques comme des « instances de procuration » autorisant l'exploration sensible de mondes moins disjoints les uns des autres qu'en interaction constante. This article is a continuation of ongoing research to understand the uses of online gaming by people with physical disabilities. By emphasizing the epistemic and methodological contributions of online ethnography, it points to the heuristic limits of the traditional distinction between a supposedly real world and that which would be repeated in the virtual. The specific use of video games in this example, makes it possible not only to question the virtual–real dichotomy, but also to question the traditional definition of the game which starts from the premise that the rule is distinct from its concrete execution. Analysis of the recreational practices of disabled people also points to the need for attention to modes of bodily appropriation of techno-communication devices. In the end, it is a question of considering video entertainment experiences like "instances of proxy," authorizing the sensitive exploration of worlds that are less disconnected and instead are in constant interaction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24469614

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales
Issue: i24476009
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Maitilasso Annalisa
Abstract: On fait référence à la différence entre éthique et morale proposée par P. Ricœur (1990) : « Je réserverai le terme d'"éthique" pour la visée d'une vie accomplie sous le signe des actions estimées bonnes et celui de "morale" pour le côté obligatoire, marqué par des normes, des obligations, des interdictions. » Dans ce sens, selon une perspective éthique, la migration devrait pouvoir se justifier comme action estimée bonne pour tous. Il ne serait pas nécessaire de recourir à une légitimité morale octroyée pour des raisons de force majeure (la pauvreté, la guerre, les besoins familiaux).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24476022

Journal Title: Africa Development / Afrique et Développement
Publisher: CODESRIA
Issue: i24482949
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Gordon Lewis R.
Abstract: In celebration of the fortieth anniversary of CODESRIA, an institution from the Global South devoted to taking responsibility for the production of social science knowledge, this article explores what it means to pursue such a task under the threat of colonial imposition at methodological and disciplinary levels, which, the author argues, carries dangers of disciplinary decadence marked by the fetishisation of method. The author offers alternatives through what he calls 'a teleological suspension' of disciplinarity, and raises the question not only of the decolonisation of knowledge but also norms. Pour célébrer le quarantième anniversaire du CODESRIA, une institution des pays du Sud dévouée dans la production de connaissances en sciences sociales, cet article explore les implications de mener une telle tâche sous la menace de l'emprise coloniale à des niveaux méthodologiques et disciplinaires, qui, selon l'auteur, provoque des dangers sur la décadence disciplinaire marquée par la divination de la méthode. L'auteur propose des alternatives à travers ce qu'il appelle « une suspension téléologique » de l'interdisciplinarité, et pose la question non seulement de la décolonisation de la connaissance, mais aussi celle des normes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24484677

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24484208
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): da Silva António Barbosa
Abstract: Illman 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24485175

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485967
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Valenza Pierluigi
Abstract: M.M. Olivetti, Philosophie et Religion face à la mort. Remarques préliminaires, in « Archivio di Filosofia», 1981, Filosofia e religione di fronte alla morte, pp. 15-17, qui p. 16.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488318

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485967
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bancalari Stefano
Abstract: Ivi, cap. vin, p. 175
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488319

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485967
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Di Salvatore Giuseppe
Abstract: Analogia del soggetto, cit., p. 74
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488323

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hart Kevin
Abstract: J.-L. Marion, Being Given, op. cit., p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488407

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485961
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kemp Peter
Abstract: T. Grosboll, En s ten i skoen, op. cit., p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488475

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24486302
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Bancalari Stefano
Abstract: J.-L. Marion, Étant donné, Paris, PUF, 19982, P- 315
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488527

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485963
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Melchiorre Virgilio
Abstract: David Maria Turoldo, Canti ultimi, Milano, Garzanti, 1991, p. 205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488730

Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485965
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Valenza Pierluigi
Abstract: V. Mathieu, Commemoraçione di Enrico Castelli, en AF 1978, n. 2-3, p. 11-16, ici p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488752

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542833
Date: 5 1, 2013
Author(s): ANKERSMIT FRANK
Abstract: What I have described elsewhere as "the Magritte conception of history." See Ankersmit, Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation (Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell Uni- versity Press, 2012), 192-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542850

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542986
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Grethlein Jonas
Abstract: This book examines Greek engagements with the past as articulations of memory formulated against the contingency of chance associated with temporality. Based on a phenomenological understanding of temporality, it identifies four memorializing strategies: continuity (tradition), regularity (exemplarity), development, and acceptance of chance. This framework serves in pursuing a twofold aim: to reconstruct the literary field of memory in fifth-century BCE Greece; and to interpret Greek historiography as a memorializing mode. The key contention advanced by this approach is that acts of memory entailed an "idea of history" that was articulated not only in historiography, but also in epinician poetry, elegy, tragedy, and oratory. The book offers a rich account of poetic conventions and contexts through which each of these genres counterbalanced contingency through the use of exemplary and traditional modes of memory. This fine analysis highlights the grip of the present on the past as a significant feature of both historiographical and nonhistoriographical genres. The essay argues that this work fills a disciplinary gap by extending the reflection on memory to a new period, Greek antiquity. The retrospective positioning of this period at the outset of Western historical thought brings Grethlein's investigation to the center of debates about memory, temporality, and the meaning history. In engaging with the book's argument, the essay suggests that historiographical memory emerged in Greece not as a first-order encounter with time, but as a second-order encounter with forgetting. This confrontation marked a certain separation of historiography from other memorializing genres. Whereas poetic and rhetorical memories were posited against contingency, historiography sought to retrieve those aspects of the past that may otherwise have been irretrievably lost and forgotten. In doing so, it formulated the historiographical imperative as a negation of forgetting that problematized the truth-value of memory and the very act of remembering the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542996

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24563540
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Capelle-Pogácean Antonela
Abstract: Un récent sondage réalisé par l'Organisation internationale pour les migrations révélait que 40 % des Roumains avaient des projets d'émigration, plus de 20 % d'entre eux ayant déjà effectué des démarches concrètes en ce sens. Cité par Mircea Boari, « Un loc din care vrei sa fugi » [Un lieu d'où l'on veut s'enfuir], Curentul, 18 mai 1999, http://curentul.logicnet.ro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24563556

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564451
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Tomanova Zuzana
Abstract: Je remercie pour leur coopération et leur disponibilité Josef Alan, Jin Kabele, Milos Kucera, Hana Librovâ, Miloslav Petrusek, Olga Srrridovâ, Zdenëk Uherek, Ivan Vodochodsky, qui m'ont livré des récits plus ou moins bio- graphiques, et Tomas Bitrich, Marie Cerna, Zdenèk Konopâsek, Jin Nekvapil, Majda Rajanova, Eva Stehlikovâ, Tereza Stôckelovâ, dont les conseils et remarques ont considérablement contribué à la rédaction de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564461

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564534
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Niewiedzial Agnieszka
Abstract: Une bibliographie est disponible sur le site du CERI (http://www.ceri-sciences-po.org/cerifr/publica/cri- tique/criti.htm).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564545

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565178
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Israël Liora
Abstract: Avant le procès David Rousset et celui dit de 1'« Internationale des traîtres », qui, dans les années suivantes, ont opposé à nouveau des journalistes communistes (défendus notamment par Joë Nordmann) et des dénonciateurs de la répression soviétique. Sur le procès Rousset, voir T. Wieder, « La commission internationale contre le régime concentrationnaire, 1949-1959 : des rescapés des camps nazis combattent les camps de concentration », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565186

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565251
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Chappuis Romain
Abstract: R. Barthes, Mythologies, op. rit, p. 217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565257

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565951
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Bouissou Jean-Marie
Abstract: Pour répondre aux normes éditoriales de Critique internationale, le texte original a été coupé sans toucher au contenu général (NdT).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565955

Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24567235
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: Pour les longues discussions que nous avons eues sur le thème de cette étude, je remercie Nicolas Patin, qui a beaucoup travaillé sur la mise en valeur de l'expérience de guerre des députés du Reichstag (Nicolas Patin, La catastrophe allemande (1914-1945), Paris, Fayard, 2014).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567243

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i24569478
Date: 11 1, 2013
Author(s): Monrad Merete
Abstract: While identity researchers are utilizing a variety of methods, the potential advantages of combinations of qualitative and quantitative methods remain largely unexploited. This article discusses the interplay of methods, theoretical content and meta-theoretical assumptions in identity research and calls for the use of mixed methods. The article applies a symbolic interactionist perspective and discusses what aspects of identification different methodological approaches provide insight into. It is discussed how different methodologies imply different assumptions about identity, particularly regarding the stability of identities, the constitution of identities and the conception of meaning. The influential quantitative Burke–Tully approach is brought into focus and compared to different qualitative approaches, particularly narrative interviews. A quantitative self-report measure neglects the narrative, performative and embodied quality of identification. However, the quantitative approach of Burke and Tully enables the systematic, standardized comparison of individuals making it possible to examine patterns of identification in large populations. Since different methods enable the study of different aspects of identity, while remaining blind to other aspects, mixed methods may contribute to more complete insights into identity processes. Importantly, mixed methods may be used to examine patterns available to the outside observer and the lifeworld of the individual actor and thus to both explain and understand.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24569484

Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaiʻi Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i24570215
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): STUMM BETTINA
Abstract: This article examines the ethical responsibilities of relating and responding to subjects of oppression in the context of collaborative life writing. One well-established ethical response to oppression is the practice of recognition. Drawing on the phenomenological ethics of Emmanuel Levinas and Paul Ricoeur, as well as the related work of Kelly Oliver, I raise some of the limitations of recognition, and delineate the ethical alternative of witnessing, bringing both to bear on my collaborative work with Holocaust survivor Rhodea Shandler.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570271

Journal Title: Estudios Demográficos y Urbanos
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24570762
Date: 4 1, 2015
Author(s): Malizia Matilde
Abstract: Bauman (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570789

Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24573102
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): SCHÄFER RIEKE
Abstract: W.B. Gallie, "Essentially Contested Concepts," in Philosophy and the Historical Under- standing (London: Chatto & Windus, 1964), 157-191.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24573108

Journal Title: Berkeley Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Berkeley Journal of Sociology
Issue: i24580155
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Tyree-Hageman Jennifer
Abstract: Knorr Cetina and Bruegger 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24582308

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24582422
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Bessy Christian
Abstract: Descombes (2004)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24583127

Journal Title: Revue Française d'Histoire des Idées Politiques
Publisher: Centre national du livre et du Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i24610341
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): López Iñaki Iriarte
Abstract: Caro Baroja, 1971, 42-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24610405

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences, Inc.
Issue: i24619291
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): HARLEY DAVID N.
Abstract: W. Stukeley, The Healing of Diseases, a Character of the Messiah (London, 1750).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24623265

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24618790
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): SADOWSKY JONATHAN
Abstract: Pressman, Last Resort, p. 132.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24632274

Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24623237
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Collicutt Joanna
Abstract: W. Brueggemann, The Book that Breathes New Life (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2005), p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24637949

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i24640649
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Carrozzo Mario
Abstract: http://www.gherush92.com/newsJt.asp?tipo=A.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24642255

Journal Title: Modern Austrian Literature
Publisher: University of California at Riverside
Issue: i24646697
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Bodine Jay F.
Abstract: The mice folk's reception of Josefine's art in Kafka's story "Josefine, die Sängerin oder Das Volk der Mäuse" reflects the reception on the part of Kraus's audience of his literary art with its "meta-ideological" cultural analysis. This analysis was recognized by the primary members of the Frankfurt School for Social Research and is easily demonstrable in Kraus's analytical treatment of the Social Democrats in the short essay "Hüben und Drüben." The question of the efficacy of Kraus's analysis is better posed as a question of the reception on the part of the mice folk of the meta-ideological analysis undertaken.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24647853

Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24651133
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Gravier Magali
Abstract: W. Pincus, Berlin to get Cia copies of320.000 Stasi files, «The Washington Post», 27 ottobre 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24653171

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i24649733
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): KOCKELMANS JOSEPH J.
Abstract: Gehtmann, op. cit., p. 29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654207

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i24649733
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): KISIEL THEODORE
Abstract: "Hermeneutk Models for Natural Science," Die Phanomenologie und die Wisseruchaften, edited by E. W. Orth as Phânomenologische Forschungen 2 (Freiburg/ Munchen: Alber, 1976), pp. 180-191.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654210

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24657854
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): WOOD DAVID
Abstract: What is eco-phenomenology? This paper argues that eco-phenomenology, in which are folded both an ecological phenomenology and a phenomenological ecology, offers us a way of developing a middle ground between phenomenology and naturalism, between intentionality and causality. Our grasp of Nature is significantly altered by thinking through four strands of time's plexity — the invisibility of time, the celebration of finitude, the coordination of rhythms, and the interruption and breakdown of temporal horizons. It is also transformed by a meditation on the role of boundaries in constituting the varieties of thinghood. Eco-phenomenology takes up in a tentative and exploratory way the traditional phenomenological claim to be able to legislate for the sciences, or at least to think across the boundaries that seem to divide them. In this way, it opens up and develops an access to Nature and the natural, one which is independent both of the conceptuality of the natural sciences and of traditional metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659209

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24657854
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): FRODEMAN ROBERT
Abstract: Environmentally we seem to be both the victims and the perpetrators of a type of bait and switch: lured into the discussion by one set of intuitions, our interests become redescribed in terms that are intellectually more respectable. Our deepest concerns with the environment are converted into foreign discourses, as we strain to make the languages of science, economics, and interest group politics express our intuitions. The circumscription of environmental philosophy within environmental ethics is one manifestation of this process of bait and switch. 'Corrosive Effects' critiques this process through a case study of acid mine drainage-water pollution resulting from mining activities. An analysis of acid mine drainage reveals the metaphysical and theological roots of many of our environmental problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659212

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Ricoeur, "Work and the Word," in History and Truth, trans. C. A. Kelbley (Evanston: North- western University Press, 1965), 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659841

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Marder Michael
Abstract: Ibid., 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659848

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Kelly Oliver in "Forgiveness and Subjectivity," Philosophy Today 47, no. 3 (2003): 280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660187

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Tengelyi László
Abstract: Ibid., 103ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660188

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bourgeois Patrick L.
Abstract: SP, 67.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660189

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659531
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dostal Robert J.
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, Gay Science, §340 (272): "Socrates, Socrates suffered life! And then he still revenged himself.... Did his overrich virtue lack an ounce of magnanimity?—Alas, my friends, we must overcome even the Greeks!"
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660204

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659515
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Llewelyn John
Abstract: On the Gift," 66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660224

Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659567
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): WARE OWEN
Abstract: One of the central questions of Jacques Derrida's later writings concerns the sources of religion. At times he gives explicit priority to the universal dimension of religion. In other places, however, he considers the primacy of faith in its concrete, historical context. This paper will clarify Derrida's relationship to universality and historicity by first comparing his notion of "messianicity without messianism" to that of Walter Benjamin's "weak Messianism." After drawing out these differences, I will focus on Derrida's later writings. I will show that much of the ambiguity of Derrida's thinking on religion can be resolved by turning to his work on khōra, the Greek word for "space" or "matter." The rhetoric of khōra can allow us to think through a twofold logic, one that includes the universal/historical distinction and exceeds its alternatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660640

Journal Title: Indo-Iranian Journal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24663608
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): HILTEBEITEL ALF
Abstract: The superfluity arises from the fact that this "double of Krsna" never has to take the reins, since Nala is driving; see Hiltebeitel, Rethinking, 232-33. As men- tioned in n. 7 above, J. Brockington finds this "implausible." For valuable discus- sion of the "avatära" theme in both epics, and especially in the Rämäyam, see also Robert P. Goldman and Sally J. Sutherland, trans. The Rämäyam of Välmlki, Vol. 5: Sundarakäyanda (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1996), 29-33, 69, 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24663613

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Judaism in the Persian, Hellenistic, and Roman Period
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i24661569
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): MENN ESTHER M.
Abstract: McFague, Metaphorical Theology, 1-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24669446

Journal Title: Islamic Studies
Publisher: Islamic Research Institute
Issue: i24666682
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): AKRAM MUHAMMAD
Abstract: Schöwbel, "History of Religions," 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24671816

Journal Title: Philippine Studies: Historical & Ethnographic Viewpoints
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University
Issue: i24666671
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): FRANCISCO JOSE MARIO C.
Abstract: Official collective statements of Catholic bishops construct and promote the imaginary of the Philippines as "Catholic nation." This conflation of the body Catholic and the body politic has served as the church's platform for defending its interests in education against perceived nationalist threats and for engaging social issues. This article traces the genealogy of this discourse and uncovers its distorted account of the Filipino nation's emergence and its deductive pastoral logic. Given the inevitable link between "the religious" and "the secular," the imaginary is challenged today by the call for greater inclusivity and the impact of digital connectivity on community, whether religious or national.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24672316

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24670227
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Savin Alexey E.
Abstract: The article comprises three parts. Part I contains an overview of the areas in the analysis of modern French philosophy that have been of the greatest relevance to Russian researchers over the last years. We conclude that numerous aspects of the French philosophical thought of the twentieth century are well represented in the research of Russian authors, who also point out the emerging trends in its development. Part II deals with the development of analytic philosophy in Russia within the framework of such areas as "critique of bourgeois philosophy", a purely ideological stand only nominally related to philosophy, logic, and the history of philosophy and theoretical research. Part III contains a periodization of the history of phenomenology in Russia, pointing out the most important achievements of the contemporary Russian scholars of phenomenology as well as their understanding of the essence, the problems, and the aims of phenomenological philosophy. We also indicate the tendencies within the development of the discipline in the Russian Federation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673265

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: Même si ce n'était pas l'objet de ce travail, et outre les féconds prolongements de l'anthro- pologie historique déjà évoqués au début de cet article, il faut rappeler les fructueux échanges empiriques que les historiens, en particulier pour le Moyen Âge, ont pu avoir depuis vingt ans avec différents courants de l'anthropologie, qu'il s'agisse par exemple de l'anthropologie juridique dans le cadre des débats sur la mutation de l'an mil (cf. les travaux de Dominique Barthélémy [1997, 1999]), de l'anthropologie visuelle de chercheurs comme Hans Belting (cf. Schmitt [2002]; ou Baschet [2008]), de l'anthropologie des pratiques d'écriture dans la lignée de Jack Goody (pour une présentation synthétique de l'historiographie médiévale dans ce domaine, cf. Chastang [2008]), de l'anthropologie économique (avec Feller, Gramain & Weber [2005]), ou encore des réflexions de Maurice Godelier ou de Louis Dumont (mobilisés par Iogna-Prat [1998, 2006]).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699250

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707302
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: J. P. van Praag, 'Levensovertuiging, filosofie en wetenschap' ('World-view, philosophy and science'), valedictory address given on retirement from the Univer- sity of Leiden, 13th November 1979, Utrecht, Humanistisch Verbond, pp. 9, 7, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707304

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707886
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Dengerink J. D.
Abstract: Het actualistisch historisme onderscheid ik van het traditionalistisch historisme. Het laatste kent een normatief bindend gezag toe aan het zogenaamd historisch gewordene, dikwijls gezien als iets dat tot stand gekomen is krachtens een verborgen wetmatigheid, wel geduid als een voorzienig plan. Het eerste tendeert er naar een normatieve waarde te hechten aan de geschie- denis van het nu, waarbij dat nu nog meer of minder uitgestrekt kan zijn. Het laatste is derhalve gekenmerkt door een uitgesproken conservat-isme en neigt tot een verheerlijking van de status quo. Het eerste vertoont revolutionaire trekken als gevolg van een miskenning van de norm van de historische continuïteit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707889

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707951
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha M. Elaine
Abstract: It would be more accurate to refer to 'ontic' or 'ontical' in this respect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707953

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708591
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Seerveld Calvin
Abstract: Jean Brun, 'Le voyage dans le temps. De la chronophotographie au Futurisme', Tempo- ralité et Aliénatkon, p.364.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708593

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708868
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Klapwijk Jacob
Abstract: Ernst Troeltsch distinguished between naive, apologetic and evolutionistic absoluteness. From the original spontaneity of 'naive absoluteness' and its artificial (partly super- naturalistic, partly rationalistic) defence as 'apologetic absoluteness' (in the Middle Ages and in the Enlightenment, respectively) there came forth in Hegel the idea of 'evolutionistic absoluteness' — an ingenious but untenable attempt to reconcile the solid apologetic conception of absoluteness of that day with the dynamics of history by presenting it as the outcome and terminus of historical progression. See Troeltsch, Die Absolutheit des Christen- tums, 87ff. Cf. J. Klapwijk, Tussen historisme en relativisme, 222-29. At present the belief in progress and thus also the mix of it with the idea of absoluteness is no longer a subject of discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708873

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Geertsema Hendrik
Abstract: Hendrik G. Geertsema, Van boven naar voren (Kampen: J.H. Kok, 1980), pp. 95-201
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708911

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Olthuis James H.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, Being and time, trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson (New York: Harper & Row, 1962), p. 174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708912

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Blosser Philip
Abstract: Steen, Structure, p. 272; cf. above, n. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708915

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Interestingly enough it appears that the structural features of reconciliation show a re- versed version of the structural features of evil. Resolving the evil I do toward the other re- quires that I am able to say what I have done wrong (the reverse of silence and the tinspeakable), that I recognize my guilt (which is incompatible with splitting) and that I ask for forgiveness (which is very shameful, but may résolve shame when penitence is accepted and forgiveness is given); see Glas (in press); Muφhyand Hampton (1988); Volf (1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709643

Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Because they escape precise modal qualification, Troost suggests that insight into disposi- tions can only be gained in an idea-ruled (idee-matig) understanding, in an idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time. For reformational philosophy this raises an old and prima facie purely theoretical problem: Do the modalities 'continue' right into the heart? One could paraphrase Troost's view for example such that for him the heart should primarily be sought 'below' or 'behind' the act structure, and that the dispositions — relative to this vertical axis — constitute a horizontal layer in which the lower substructures are interwoven with the act structure. In that case the integration of the lower structures in the act structure would take place via the dispositions rather than through a direct relationship with the heart. This notion — for which hints can be found in Dooyeweerd — would in any case lead to an appreciably more nuanced picture of the 'binding' and 'releasing' of substructures. If I understand Troost correctly, he would allow this interpretation for the substructures, though not for the modalities. His caution concerning the 'continuing' of the modalities 'into the' heart is epistemological: the cosmological concentration of the modal functions in the heart is a transcendental idea; at best we see dots (the idea-regulated 'on the way' in the transcendental direction of time), but we should not turn them into lines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709687

Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: Universidad Internacional de La Rioja
Issue: i24710715
Date: 8 1, 2015
Author(s): BERTAGNA Giuseppe
Abstract: The main aim of this article is to offer a critical reflection on the need of rethinking the teachers' professional skills and their academic pathway, given the changes and current transformations (crisis, in its etymological sense). In fact, a series of changes, transformations, are identified and affect directly the educator's comprehension. Amongst others: the transformation of work bound up with the processes of the economic globalization, and the transformation of the learning environments imbued by the TICs; the population growth, a demographic transformation with geopolitics relevance, and finally, as a result from the previous ones, the raise in the migratory flows. Under this context, this paper tries to reconceptualize teachers' training and their depiction as professionals from the view of Gustav Mahler in his statement Tradition is the spreading of fire and not the veneration of ashes. Thereupon, some categories that help in the teaching update, are proposed and explained; such as authority (as reputation or moral authority, role model and, hence, less so as bare exercise of power), the personalization of education, the importance of home community (society), and, lastly, the alternation within school-society and work-study. El objetivo de este trabajo es ofrecer una reflexión acerca de la necesidad de re-pensar la profesionalidad de los docentes y de su itinerario formativo, a la luz los cambios y transformaciones actuales (crisis, en sentido etimológico). En efecto, se identifican una serie de cambios, de transformaciones, que afectan directamente a la comprensión del docente, del enseñante. Entre otros: la transformación del trabajo vinculada a los procesos de la globalización económica y la transformación de los entornos de aprendizaje imbuidos en las TICs; el aumento de la población, la transformación demográfica con trascendencia geopolítica; y por último, y como confluencia de las dos anteriores, el aumento de los flujos migratorios. En este contexto, el trabajo trata de reconceptualizar la formación de los profesores y de su imagen como profesionales desde el enfoque que era expresado por Gustav Mahler en la frase la tradición es el mantenimiento del fuego y no la adoración de sus cenizas. Así, se proponen y se explican algunas categorías que ayudan a la actualización de la docencia hoy, tales como: la autoridad (como prestigio o autoridad moral, ejemplo, y no tanto como mero ejercicio del poder), la personalización de la enseñanza, la trascendencia de la comunidad de origen (a la sociedad) y por último, la alternancia entre escuela y sociedad, trabajo y estudio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24711293

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i24716042
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): MARMASSE GILLES
Abstract: D. Wittmann, « Relire Hegel à travers Kant? », in J.-F. Kervégan et B. Mabille, Hegel au présent, une relève de la métaphysique? Paris, CNRS Editions, 2012, p. 440 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24718739

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Langlois Claude
Abstract: Revue : La science catholique, revue des questions religieuses [puis] des sciences sacrées et profanes, Lyon, Paris, Delhomme et Briguet [puis] Arras, Paris, Sueur-Charruey, 1886-1906. Fusion ultérieure : La Revue des sciences ecclésiastiques et La Science catholique (1906-1910). Ouvrages : John Augustine Zahm, chanoine régulier de la Sainte-Croix, pseud. Le Père H. J. Mozans, Science catholique et savants catholiques [Catholic science and catholic scientists, 1893], traduit de l'anglais par M. l'abbé J. Flageolet, Paris, P. Lethielleux, 1895. A. Jeanniard du Dot, L'hypnotisme et la science catholique, Paris, Librairie Bloud et Barrai, 1898, 1900. Théophile Ortolan, Rivalités scientifiques : ou la science catholique et la prétendue impartialité des historiens, I- La manie du dénigrement, II- Fausses réputations, Paris, Bloud et Barrai, Collection : Science et religion : Études pour le temps présent, 1900.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739862

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739884
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Portier Philippe
Abstract: Claude Lefort, « Permanence du théologico-politique », art. précité, p. 59-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739900

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Ramírez Camilo
Abstract: La Comisión Valech fue creada el 26 de septiembre del 2003 por el Presidente Lagos para elaborar otro informe oficial que esta vez reconociera a las víctimas de la dictadura que habían sufrido la privación de su libertad y la tortura, y permitiera gestionar algunas medidas de reparación.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740002

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Kreil Aymon
Abstract: Les travaux de A. Le Renard se situent dans la ligne des débats sur les modalités de constitution possible pour un « féminisme islamique » (cf. S. Latte Abdallah, 2010, pour une synthèse de ces débats).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740014

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Study of Religion in Southern Africa
Issue: i24764056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): van der Merwe Chris N.
Abstract: Afrikaans writers have often found themselves in a marginal position. During the time of apartheid, they vehemently criticised racial discrimination, thus dissociating themselves from the centre of power. After the demise of apartheid, Afrikaans writers were marginalised in a different way, when the Afrikaans language lost its previous dominant position and truly became a minority language. They were then forced to reexamine their past and reinterpret their present. In this article, recent Afrikaans writers' radical reinvention of the ideological significance of the Anglo-Boer War (1899-1902) is discussed. One novel about the War, Ingrid Winterbach's Niggie ("Cousin") is analysed in detail as an example of the search for meaning from a marginal position. The novel has a special relevance for Afrikaners in their painful adaptation to a new South Africa, but it is also linked to general themes like trauma, despair and hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24764084

Journal Title: Mosaic: A Journal for the Interdisciplinary Study of Literature
Publisher: UB BOCHUM
Issue: i24775387
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): HOLLISTER MICHAEL
Abstract: This essay identifies the coordinates of a "holistic" literary criticism based on spatial metaphors, correlating neurophysiologic research, Frye's "anatomy" of literary structures, psychological theory, and recent linguistic investigations of the orientational dynamics of figurative language. Challenging current pedagogical trends, the essay argues for a text-centered form of contextualization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24775810

Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: e24798420
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Blond Louis
Abstract: By inquiring into the translatability of Judaism and philosophy, we reawaken an ancient problem that asks after philosophy’s relation with religion: What has Athens to do with Jerusalem?Translation is a rejuvenated means of wrestling with this irksome question, which seeks to understand how multiple approaches to meaning and being can exist concurrently or whether any interaction forfeits multiplicity for the primacy of one form over all others. The specific issue that linguistic versions of the problem address is whether or not the languages that Judaism and philosophy speak are separate and distinct and if those distinctions are established on deeper, non-linguistic ground. For this reason, translation not only raises the problem of articulacy and context in interlingual translations, it also alludes to an ontological or metaphysical separation that speaks of different, non-shared worlds. Whether or not a translation theory addresses, repairs or upholds the opposition between religion and philosophy is in question, and translation becomes a vehicle for discussing what Jerusalem has to offer Athens and what Athens has for Jerusalem. In this essay, I examine the translation problem as an attempt to repair or re-gloss the relation between Judaism and philosophy by way of Michael Fagenblat’s recovery of Emmanuel Levinas’ thought in his work,A Covenant of Creatures: Levinas’s Philosophy of Judaism(2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798426

Journal Title: Strategic Management Journal
Publisher: John Wiley and Sons
Issue: i342456
Date: 3 1, 1975
Author(s): Zaleznik Danny
Abstract: Many parallels can be drawn between organizational and individual pathologies. We believe that the fantasies of top executives and the neurotic styles to which they give rise are important determinants of the nature of organizational dysfunctions. This is particularly true in centralized organizations where the top executives have a major impact upon organizational climate, structure, strategy and even the selection of the environment; and, where organizational recruitment and promotion processes ensure uniformity, or at least conformity, among the top ranks of executives. Using an empirically derived taxonomy, we have isolated five common pathological organizational types and related each of these to the fantasies and neurotic styles of their top executives. Each type is shown to reflect a large number of elements of structure and strategy that are consistent with and probably caused by the neurotic style of the cadre of top executives. The types are called paranoid, compulsive, histrionic, depressive and schizoid. Implications for management research and organizational change are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2486009

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24890799
Date: 6 1, 2016
Author(s): Chabal Emile
Abstract: Chabal, A Divided Republic, ch. 1-4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24891225

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: Journal of Consumer Research
Issue: i342750
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Zaner Howard R.
Abstract: Existential-phenomenology is presented as an alternative paradigm for conceptualizing and studying consumer experience. Basic theoretical tenets of existential-phenomenology are contrasted with more traditional assumptions and methods used in consumer research. The metaphors used by each paradigm to describe its world view are provided and their respective implications for consumer research discussed. One phenomenological research method is detailed, and examples of how the method is applied and the type of data it produces are provided. An epistemological analysis reveals that existential-phenomenology can provide an empirically based and methodologically rigorous understanding of consumer phenomena.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489313

Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24894236
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Rohde Carsten
Abstract: Niklas Luhmann, Die Kunst der Gesellschaft. Frankfurt/M. 2. Aufl. 1998, S. 504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24894344

Journal Title: Region
Publisher: Slavica on behalf of the Institute of Russian Studies at the Hankuk University of Foreign Studies
Issue: i24896621
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Echevskaia Olga
Abstract: Donald E. Polk- inghorne, Narrative Knowing and the Human Sciences (Albany: SUNY Press, 1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24896624

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i342769
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Winograd William B.
Abstract: Hochschild 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489684

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i342774
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Woolfolk Craig J.
Abstract: Meyers-Levy's (1989)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2489789

Journal Title: Diplomatic History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24912290
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): LEFFLER MELVYN P.
Abstract: I am referring to the influential essay by Charles S. Maier, "Marking Time: The Historiography of International Relations," in The Past Before Us: Contemporary Historical Writ- ing in the United States, ed. Michael Kämmen (Ithaca, 1980), 355-87; and to the prize-winning book by Richard E. Neustadt and Ernest R. May, Thinking in Time: The Uses of History for Decision-Makers (New York, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24912293

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002000
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Carr Anne E.
Abstract: Tracy, Blessed Rage for Order; Schubert M. Ogden, The Point of Christology (San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1982).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002009

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002064
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Jung L. Shannon
Abstract: my "Commercialization and the Professions," Business and Professional Ethics Journal 2:2 (Winter 1983): 57-81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002069

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002075
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Keller Catherine
Abstract: John Cobb, Christ in a Pluralistic Age (Philadelphia: Westminster, 1975)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002081

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002117
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Cheney Jim
Abstract: Biddy Martin and Chandra Talpade Mohanty, "Feminist Politics: What's Home Got to Do With It?" in Feminist Studies/Critical Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002122

Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002165
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Sands Kathleen M.
Abstract: Karl Rahner, Foundations of Christian Faith (New York: Seabury Press, 1978), 22.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002168

Journal Title: The Catholic Historical Review
Publisher: The Catholic University of America
Issue: i25025058
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Standaert Nicolas
Abstract: The Conquest of America: The Question of the Other, trans. Richard Howard (New York, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25025062

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342877
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Becker Larry
Abstract: Phenomenology and the Human Sciences (Pittsburgh, 1963). Phenomenology and the Human Sciences 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504325

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342951
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Bann Hans
Abstract: Stephen Bann's recent book The Clothing of Clio (Cambridge, Eng., 1985) Bann The Clothing of Clio 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505042

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342941
Date: 5 1, 1977
Author(s): MacIntyre Peter L.
Abstract: Vernon, 514-515 514
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505278

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Platt Fred
Abstract: Gerald M. Platt, "Sociology: Origins, Orientations, Crises,"Annals of Scholarship9(1992), 427-436. Platt 427 9 Annals of Scholarship 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505404

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Goekjian Richard T.
Abstract: Bann, ibid., 367. 367
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505462

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1965
Author(s): White Ewa
Abstract: White, Metahistory, 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505464

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Nelson Chris
Abstract: J. Nelson, A. Megill, and D. McCloskey, "Rhetoric of Inquiry," in The Rhetoric of the Human Sciences, ed. Megill and McCloskey, 3-18. Nelson Rhetoric of Inquiry 3 The Rhetoric of the Human Sciences
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505488

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Mink John H.
Abstract: L. Mink, "Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument," in The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding, ed. R. H. Canary and H. Kozicki (Madison, Wisc., 1978), 129- 149. Mink Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument 129 The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505489

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342984
Date: 2 1, 1957
Author(s): Jaspers David
Abstract: Collingwood, "The Philosophy of the Christian Religion," Sept. 29, 1920, Dep 1, 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505516

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1899
Author(s): Bosanquet Martyn P.
Abstract: Bernard Bosanquet, The Philosophical Theory of the State (London, 1899). Bosanquet The Philosophical Theory of the State 1899
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505525

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1957
Author(s): Nietzsche Wulf
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, The Use and Abuse of History, transl. Adrian Collins (Indianapolis, 1957). Nietzsche The Use and Abuse of History 1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505526

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342965
Date: 5 1, 1986
Author(s): van Fraasen Andrew P.
Abstract: Ibid., 139-142
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505536

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342980
Date: 2 1, 1992
Author(s): Bloch Ignacio
Abstract: M. Bloch, The Historian's Craft, transl. P. Putnam (Manchester, Eng., 1992), 39. Bloch 39 The Historian's Craft 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505581

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342968
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): LaCapra Dale S.
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra, Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, N. Y., 1983). LaCapra Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505607

Journal Title: Journal of Japanese Studies
Publisher: The Society for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25064644
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Kono Shion
Abstract: Nakamura Shin'ichirō, Kimura Kenkadō no saron (Tokyo: Shinchōsha, 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064647

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i25068549
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Gross Robert F.
Abstract: Wolfgang Sohlich, "Allegory in the Technological Age: A Case Study of Ibsen's The Wild Duck," Journal of Dramatic Theory and Criticism 6 (Spring 1992): 99-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25068554

Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i25115472
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rodden John
Abstract: This essay posits the conceptual rudiments of "rhetoric of narrative." Approaching contemporary narrative theory according to the classical trivium, the essay explores what and how stories mean and argue. It focuses on the relevance and value of the rhetorical tradition for illuminating distinctive features of a "rhetoric of narrative," showing how a "rhetoric" of narrative builds upon a "grammar" and a "logic" of narrative. Ultimately the essay posits that narratives can be positioned at some point along a continuum represented by poles roughly characterized as "aesthetic" and "ideological," with propagandistic argument lying at the latter extreme. The chief literary example for applying the conceptual distinctions emerging from our investigations is George Orwell's Nineteen Eighty-Four.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25115482

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25133559
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J. Revel (« Pratiques du contemporain et régimes d'historicité », Le Genre humain, 2000, 35: Actualités du contemporain: 13-20
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25133563

Journal Title: U.S. Catholic Historian
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i25154949
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Talar C. J. T.
Abstract: Terrence W. Tilley, History, Theology and Faith: Dissolving the Modern Problematic (Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis, 2004). 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25154952

Journal Title: U.S. Catholic Historian
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i25154959
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): DeBona Guerric
Abstract: Garrett Green, Theology, Hermeneutics, and Imagination: The Crisis of Interpretation at the End of Modernity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000), 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25154969

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157040
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Severi Carlo
Abstract: Douglas Newton (1971 : 23, 31)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157045

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157076
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: 1990, 11-35 et 60-72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157079

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Natij Salah
Abstract: Goethe, cité par Pierre Bertaux, « Goethe », Encyclopédia Universalis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162281

Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i25167549
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Harb Sirène
Abstract: This article explores how Gayl Jones's "Corregidora" constructs, through the journey of its main protagonist Ursa Corregidora, a viable model for dealing with the painful legacy of slavery, oppression and haunting by the past. The process of self-redefinition in which Ursa engages is based on the reconfiguration of family and sexuality and the hybridization of her relationship to individual as well as collective narratives. After probing Ursa's complex psychological journey, the article examines the main elements mediating the reinscription of her life narrative into a broader context of métissage involving sexual and historical resistance, anchored in the story of Palmares as a Brazilian maroon community (quilombo). Finally, the article analyzes the implications and resonances of this model of revision/reclamation for Gayl Jones and her theorization of the interconnectedness of struggles against oppression in Brazil and the United States.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25167557

Journal Title: Journal for General Philosophy of Science / Zeitschrift für allgemeine Wissenschaftstheorie
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25171186
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Buzzoni Marco
Abstract: Hermeneutic and anti-hermeneutic sides in the debate about psychoanalysis are entangled in an epistemological and methodological antinomy, here exemplified by Grünbaum's and Spence's paradigmatic views. Both contain a partial element of truth, which they assert dialectically one against the other (§§ 1 and 2). This antinomy disappers only by reconciling an operationalist approach with man's ability to suspend the effectiveness of the 'laws' applied to him (§ 3). The hermeneutic way in which the technical-operational criterion of truth works in psychoanalysis demands that clinical and extra-clinical testing methods work synergically, through a fruitful self-correcting strategy, grounded on the very psychoanalytic object: the unconscious (§ 4).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25171194

Journal Title: The Sixteenth Century Journal
Publisher: Sixteenth Century Journal
Issue: i323394
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Flynn Maureen
Abstract: In this semiotic analysis of the Spanish auto defe, we begin to understand for the first time the meaning of religious rituals that have appeared completely incomprehensible in traditional accounts. The morning processions of penitents through city streets, the formal denunciations of heretics on public scaffolds, and the final burning at the stake of unrepentant sinners are placed within the context of medieval penitential practices and eschatological beliefs. The ceremony of the auto defe unveiled in time the Judgment Day awaiting all humankind at the end of time. For this reason, the spectacle aroused the interest of spectators all over Christendom, filling them with apprehension of their own final judgment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2542736

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Martin Broszat's "Plea for the Historicization of National Socialism," in Reworking the Past: Hitler, the Holocaust, and the Historians' Debate, ed. Peter Baldwin (Boston: Beacon Press, 1990), 77-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478836

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Carbonell Bettina M.
Abstract: Susan Crane's "Memory, Distortion, and History in the Museum," History and Theory, Theme Issue 36 (1997), 44-63.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478840

Journal Title: The Slavonic and East European Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25479101
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Soroka Mykola Iv.
Abstract: Shchodennyk, 2, p. 279 (15 January 1924).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25479104

Journal Title: International Studies Review
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25482039
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Kornprobst Markus
Abstract: Bleiker (1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25482045

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484099
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts Tyler
Abstract: Robert Orsi here, who claims that as scholars we must allow our conceptions of ourselves to be "vulnerable to the radically destabilizing possibilities of a genuine encounter with an unfamiliar way of life" (2005: 198).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp012', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25484558
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Booker M. Keith
Abstract: O'Brien, At Swim-Two-Birds, p. 314.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25484569

Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25487848
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Honkasalo Marja-Liisa
Abstract: In medical anthropological research, the question of suffering has been a topic of salient interest mostly from two theoretical viewpoints: those of endurance and of agency. The concept "suffering" derives its origins from two etymological roots, those of suffering-souffrance-sofferanza and of misery-misère-miseria. According to the first approach, that of "endurance" and founded largely on Judeo-Christian theology, suffering is regarded as an existential experience at the borders of human meaning making. The question then is: how to endure, how to suffer? The latter view, that of "agency," follows the Enlightenment, and later the Marxist view on mundane suffering, misery, and the modern question of how to avoid or diminish it. This article follows the lines of the second approach, but my aim is also to try to build a theoretical bridge between the two. I ask whether agency would be understood as a culturally shared and interpreted modes of enduring, and if so, which conceptual definition of agency applies in this context? I theorize the relationship between suffering and agency using Ernesto de Martino's notion la crisi della presenza. In line with Pierre Bourdieu, I think that in people's lives, there may be sufferings in a plural form, as a variety of sufferings. The article is based on a one-year long fieldwork in Finnish North Karelia.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1387.2009.01037.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501821
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Emery Jacob
Abstract: Andrey Bely's novel "Petersburg" (one of the high points of Russian literary modernism and a rough analogue to James Joyce's Ulysses) repeatedly claims that parent and child, being of the same flesh and blood, share an ambivalent identity. At the same time, because the novel opens by invoking a major character's genealogical relation to Adam, the book implies that this kin identity is universal and can be applied to the entire human race. This essay analyzes the role of kinship metaphor in "Petersburg", demonstrating that tropes of parent-child identity facilitate the novel's dizzying metaphoric conflation, that they form a kind of metafictional mirror in which the novel probes its own nature as a work of the imagination, and that Bely's theory and practice of metaphor touch on broader philosophical issues of figure and fictionality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501828

Journal Title: Social Psychology Quarterly
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i25593919
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Pagis Michal
Abstract: Dumont 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25593927

Journal Title: Iranian Studies
Publisher: Taylor and Francis Group
Issue: i25597427
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Tourage Mahdi
Abstract: Butler, Bodies that Matter, 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25597434

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600245
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Hogle Jerrold E.
Abstract: James A. Notopoulos, The Platonism of Shelley (Durham, N.C.: Duke U. Press, 1949)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600248

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600558
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Rajan Tilottama
Abstract: Coleridge, The Complete Poetical Works of Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ed. E. H. Cole- ridge, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon, 1912/1966).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600561

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600705
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Rajan Tilottama
Abstract: Lee Patterson, "The Logic of Textual Criticism," in Textual Criticism and Literary Interpretation, ed. Jerome J. McGann (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1985) 78.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600709

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600705
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Hildebrand William H.
Abstract: Hawthorne's account, in The English Notebooks, ed. Randall Stewart (New York: Russell and Russell, 1962)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600712

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600887
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Lew Joseph W.
Abstract: Mary Poovey, The Proper Lady and the Woman Writer (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600894

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601150
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Harding Anthony John
Abstract: Heidegger's Estrangements: Language, Truth, and Poetry (New Haven: Yale UP, 1989) XXV.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601152

Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25602110
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Levinson Marjorie
Abstract: Taylor 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25602113

Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25605554
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Howes David
Abstract: This essay traces the involution of anthropological understanding from the 1950s to the present. It is shown that as the conception of "doing ethnography" changed from sensing patterns to reading texts, and from reading texts to writing culture, so too did the content of anthropological knowledge change from being multi-sensory to being self-centred. The essay also proposes a way of escaping the tunnel-vision of contemporary (post-modern) ethnography — namely, by treating cultures as constituted by a particular interplay of the senses which the ethnographer must simulate before making any attempt to describe or evoke the culture under study. /// Cet article trace l'enchevêtrement qu'a subi l'étude de l'anthropologie depuis les années cinquante à nos jours. L'auteur démontre que le concept de "faire de l'ethnographie" a changé radicalement — de la perception sensorielle à la lecture des textes et de cette lecture à l'acte d'écrire une culture. Également, le contenu des connaissances anthropologiques a subi un changement du multi-sensoriel à l'égocentrique. L'article propose comment s'éloigner du champ de vue plutôt étroit de l'ethnographie contemporaine (dite post-moderne) en suggérant que les ethnographes traitent les cultures telles que constituées par l'action réciproque particulière des sens qui doivent être simulés avant que les ethnographes puissent essayer de décrire ou d'évoquer la culture en question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605558

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i25609163
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Sieg Christian
Abstract: Siegfried Kracauer, Schriften, ed. Karsten Witte, vol. 1 (Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1971), 7-101.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1215/0094033X-2009-019', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Walsh Richard
Abstract: his Handbook of Postmodern Biblical Interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610189

Journal Title: Administrative Theory & Praxis
Publisher: Public Administration Theory Network
Issue: i25611611
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Abascàl-Hildebrand Mary
Abstract: The philosophy of Paul Ricoeur is offered as an argument for civic education to overcome intense preoccupation with economic activity, because of the need to properly relate politics to economics via ethics. Persons too concerned with economics will ignore their obligations to engage with one another politically. They become disabled from viewing one another as resources for both political and even for economic activity. Furthermore, they tend to regard one another's varying viewpoints as challenges to vibrant economic activity, so that diversity of viewpoints or diversity of experience is regarded as divisive, not as rich variations that come from commonalties and can contribute to a cohesive community. The problem is morphological: suspicions about diversity make conflict resolution difficult and they also make civic education difficult because suspicions about diversities endanger the equitable allocation of resources needed for widespread civic engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25611615

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616169
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Little Barbara J.
Abstract: Discussions of post-processual archaeology are summarized in order to suggest that historical archaeology is in a particularly good position to answer the post-processual critiques of the "new" archaeology and to create a contextual archaeology that is both historically and anthropologically informed and relevant. The work of four scholars is noted as particularly influential in the development of post-processual approaches.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616172

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616334
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Larsen Eric L.
Abstract: Medicine bottles, examined within a larger context, provide an opportunity to explore how material culture influences, reinforces, and reflects late 19th-century gender roles. Bottles from one of Harpers Ferry National Historical Park's late 19th-century privies reflect the gender role of a mother. Available information limits this paper to the examination of a 19th-century ideal. Examining the ideal through both archaeological and documentary evidence, however, reveals the apparatus of ideology and the effects of the ideal in practice. A mutual relationship between genders becomes apparent as does the need to maintain the interrelatedness of gender with other structuring principles of culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616343

Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616488
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): McCarthy John P.
Abstract: Much archaeological scholarship on consumption has approached its subject matter as the means to an end—e.g., as a way of studying socioeconomic status—rather than as a proper object of study in its own right. The "consumer choice" school, and, more recently, advocates of consumer behavior studies, have supported approaches that emphasize quantitative methods, at the same time downplaying the "qualitative" or symbolic aspects of consumption. A considerable body of literature on the symbolic aspects of consumption exists both in historical archaeology and other fields. The intention of this essay is to draw together this recent literature on consumption and combine it into a single approach that emphasizes shopping as the meaningful action at the very heart of consumption. With the emphasis on agency, this approach presents shopping as that crucial moment of transformation where identity, intention, and symbol combine in the decision to purchase, to own, an object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616493

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25619787
Date: 8 1, 2009
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: This essay examines how activists in rural southern India have sought to reshape the field of political communication by encouraging lower-caste women to submit written, signed petitions to district-level government offices, and so represent themselves to the state. I argue that contradictions between democratic recognition and the will to development that inhere to the political structure of contemporary governance in rural India correspond to tensions within the semiotic structure of signature itself, between constative representation and performative creation. Governmentality and the forms of communication that it requires often rest on the notion that written self-representation constitutes an act of political agency. But the limits of a governmental communicative reason that would conflate written subject and agent become especially clear in postcolonial contexts where the construction of those citizens that would be represented is in fact a product of the very act of representation. It is the narrative of development-as-pedagogy that holds out the promise of a future alignment of communicative frameworks, technologies, and participant roles, allowing for the transparent self-representation of an already-constituted citizen. By tracking the ambivalent experience of one group of women in particular, this account focuses on how the logic of signature as self-representation has served to recontextualize the marginality of petitioners as something within the state's broader field of power.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2009.01035.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323894
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): Buttimer Anne
Abstract: Recent attempts by geographers to explore the human experience of space have focused on overt behavior and its cognitive foundations. The language and style of our descriptions, however, often fail to speak in categories appropriate for the elucidation of lived experience, and we need to evaluate our modes of knowing in the light of modes of being in the everyday world. Phenomenologists provide some guidelines for this task. They point to the preconsciously given aspects of behavior and perception residing in the "lifeworld"-the culturally defined spatiotemporal setting or horizon of everyday life. Scientific procedures which separate "subjects" and "objects," thought and action, people and environments are inadequate to investigate this lifeworld. The phenomenological approach ideally should allow lifeworld to reveal itself in its own terms. In practice, however, phenomenological descriptions remain opaque to the functional dynamism of spatial systems, just as geographical descriptions of space have neglected many facets of human experience. There are certain avenues for dialogue between these two disciplines in three major research areas: the sense of place, social space, and time-space rhythms. Such a dialogue could contribute to a more humanistic foundation for human geography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562470

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323911
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): Gould Peter
Abstract: In Science, great difficulty is sometimes experienced in giving up hypothesized structures. The inadequacies of Freudian hypotheses are highlighted, and attention is directed to Dasein-analysis, which stays close to the data. This perspective focuses attention upon the phenomenological tradition, and suggests that certain mathematical frameworks in human geography are inappropriate. The adequacy of a priori models is also questioned from a Heideggerian perspective, and more general qualitative algebras are suggested to replace the distorted functional thinking inherited from the physical sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562790

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25652834
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Bird Gregory
Abstract: Natanson (1973)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25652837

Journal Title: Luso-Brazilian Review
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i25654803
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Passos José Luiz
Abstract: It has become commonplace to describe Machado de Assis's characters and narrators as deeper than those of his contemporaries, and his novels as representations more creatively ambiguous than most literary depictions of nineteenth-century Brazil. In this essay I argue that throughout his novels psychological depth is a function of moral imagination; and a troubled moral imagination is a necessary condition for the literary representation of the modern self. Machado's protagonists are able to fashion the public presentation of their selves by imagining alternatives to their origins, desires, and social predicaments. They have in their pasts a burden they need to overcome, and while doing so they find themselves in conditions of freedom and harm. Evil then arises as a consequence of moral dynamism, in so far as it becomes a project for undoing the other. The genesis of a radical conception of free will and evil in Machado's narratives goes back to his translation of Victor Hugo's The Toilers of the Sea (1866). His concern with a more meticulous characterization of inwardness deepens between Iaiá Garcia (1878) and Dom Casmurro (1899), when adopting the structure of a confessional narrative he arrives at a balance between disguised motives (malice), double chronology (nostalgia), and human life as an unfolding, reversible, and self-aware process (metamorphosis). To frame Machado's strategy for depicting moral change, I take from Augustine's Confessions the suggestion that retrospection is the only way of restoring the identity of someone whose self is marked by his or her sense of dissimilarity with the past. Finally, from Kant and Paul Ricoeur I draw the elements for a further consideration of evil as an invitation to think differently about seeing, judging, and narrating human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25654810

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25654931
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Fortin Jutta
Abstract: Geoffrey Gorer, 'The Pornography of Death', in Death, Grief and Mourning in Contempo- rary Britain (London: Cresset Press, 1965), pp. 192-99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25654937

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Annual Meeting (American Society of International Law)
Publisher: The American Society of International Law
Issue: i25658878
Date: 4 8, 1995
Author(s): Ruggie John Gerard
Abstract: William C. Wohlforth, Realism and the End of the Cold War, Winter 1994/1995, 91-129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25658896

Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i25671167
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): R. Pedro Mege
Abstract: Revista Pampa, septiembre de 1949
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25671175

Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i25674726
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): S. Jorge Iván Vergara del
Abstract: Honneth (1990)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25674729

Journal Title: European Review of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revista Europea de Estudios Latinoamericanos y del Caribe
Publisher: Centro de Estudios y Documentación Latinoamericanos (CEDLA)
Issue: i25675510
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Velho Otávio
Abstract: Eric Lethbridge. An earlier version of this article was pub- lished in Religiao e Sociedade, Vol. 14, no. 1, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25675513

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i25677409
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Kelty Christopher
Abstract: In this paper we argue that the concept and practice of responsibility is being transformed within science and engineering. It tells the story of attempts by nanotechnologists to make responsibility 'do-able' and calculable in a setting where the established language and tools of risk and risk analysis are seen as inadequate. The research is based on ethnographic participant-observation at the National Science Foundation-funded Center for Biological and Environmental Nanotechnology (CBEN) at Rice University in Texas, during the period 2003 to 2007, including the controversies and public discussions it was engaged in and the creation of the International Council on Nanotechnology (ICON). CBEN began as a project to study 'applications' of nanotechnology to environmental and biological systems, but turned immediately to the study of 'implications' to biology and environment. We argue here that the notion of 'implications' and the language of risk employed early on addressed two separate but entangled ideas: the risks that nanomaterials pose to biology and environment, and the risks that research on this area poses to the health of nanotechnology itself. Practitioners at CBEN sought ways to accept responsibility both as scientists with a duty to protect science (from the public, from de-funding, from 'backlash') and as citizens with a responsibility to protect the environment and biology through scientific research. Ultimately, the language of risk has failed, and in its place ideas about responsibility, prudence, and accountability for the future have emerged, along with new questions about the proper venues and 'modes of veridiction' by which claims about safety or responsibility might be scientifically adjudicated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25677414

Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i25681133
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): JARAN FRANÇOIS
Abstract: GA, vol. 29/30, pp. 412/284.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25681136

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703051
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zapata Florencia
Abstract: Greenwood, 1993: 115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703063

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703087
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Chartier Roger
Abstract: «Cam- bio de experiencia y cambio de metodo. Un apunte historico-antropologico*, en Reinhart Koselleck, Los es- tratos del tiempo: estudios sobre la historia, Barcelona, Buenos Aires y Mexico, Ediciones Paidos, 2001, ps. 43-92
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703098

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Iranzo Teresa
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703113

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703529
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): de Looze Laurence
Abstract: Vinsauf's Poetria Nova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703531

Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728159
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): ‮کامبانيني‬ ‮ماسيمو‬
Abstract: The aim of the present article is to investigate how the passages of the Holy Text regarding natural sciences or the cosmological order of the universe can be read from a hermeneutical viewpoint, in a philosophical rather than a historical, grammatical or stylistic sense; the debated problems of literary and artistic character, and the relationship between Qur'an and science per se, are not involved here. If we assume as a working hypothesis the Gadamerian perspective that 'being, as far as we can understand it, is language', we can accept that the being of God and of the universe are disclosed in Qur'anic language and that the Qur'an becomes the framework of the aletheia (in the Heideggerian sense) of science. This paper utilises the above-mentioned epistemological and hermeneutical key in order to make a first attempt to explore the possibility of a philosophical analysis of the question of science in the Qur'an, and concludes that, although it can sound highly paradoxical, the attitudes of total agreement, partial agreement or no agreement between Qur'an and science are not mutually exclusive, but rather work in parallel at different linguistic levels. ‮الهدف من هذه الدراسة هو بحث کيف يمکن فهم الآيات القرآنية المتعلقة بالعلوم الطبيعية أو النظام الکوني من وجهة نظر منهج تفسيري من ناحية فلسفية لا تاريخية أو نحوية أو بلاغية. لن يتم هنا مناقشة قضايا أدبية أو فنية أو العلاقة بين القرآن والعلم في هذا البحث. إذا افترضنا أن وجهة نظر جادامير (remadaG)، ‮ وهي أن " الوجود، کما نفهمه، هو اللغة "، تعتبر نظرية قابلة للتطبيق، يمکن أن نقبل أن وجود الله والکون يبين من خلال اللغة القرآنية وأن القرآن يصبح إطار الوصول للحقيقة، طبقاً لفهم هيدجر (reggedieH). ‮إن هذا البحث يستخدم علم الحد والمنهج التفسيري من أجل القيام بأول محاولة لاستکشاف إمکانية تحليل فلسفي لقضية العلم في القرآن. وقد انتهى هذا البحث إلى أن التوافق بين القرآن والعلم تاما أو جزئيا أوعدم التوافق لا يعتبر أمرا قاطعا من الجهتين لکنه يعمل على درجات لغوية مختلفة متوازنة.‬
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728164

Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728283
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): ‮لوسون‬ ‮تود‬
Abstract: This article highlights two features of Qur'anic style and content: duality/opposition and typological figuration, which can be seen as providing a continuous and consistent 'narrative stream' through the Qur'an. It is of some interest that both of these features have been singled out as distinctive of apocalypse as a genre in the study of numerous religious and cultural traditions. As debate on whether or not the Qur'an is a bona fide example of apocalyptic literature quietly continues, the interplay of conceptual and substantive oppositions and dualities is discussed in order to highlight the importance of this prominent feature to both the form and contents of the Book. It is suggested that its function is profoundly related to the typological figuration indispensable to the Qur'anic depiction of, for example, the character of the prophets and therefore prophethood. Whether or not this represents a genuine instance of apocalyptic literature, it nonetheless remains that the prominence of the motif renders the Qur'an susceptible of a reading expressive of something called an apocalyptic imagination. It is hoped that this article succeeds in demonstrating that in fact these apparently familiar subjects are stimulated to new life by considering them as defining, interlocking, structural elements of a distinctive Islamic apocalypse. ‮تبرز هذه الدراسة خاصيتين لأسلوب القرآن ومادته: الثنائية/التقابل وتصنيف النماذج مما قد ينظر إليه على أنه يمثل تيارا مستمرا ثابتا في القرآن. ومن اللافت للنظر أنه قد جرى الترکيز على هاتين الخاصيتين على أنهما يختصان بالحديث عن أحوال الآخرة في کثير من الأديان والتقاليد الثقافية. وفي هذا المقال سندرس التفاعل بين الثنائية والتقابل لکي نبرز الأهمية الأساسية لهذه الخاصية بالنسبة لشکل القرآن ومحتواه. فنحن نرى أن وظيفتها تمت بقوة إلى ظاهرة تصنيف الأنواع في تصوير القرآن لشخصيات الأنبياء ثم النبوة نفسها. والأمل أن ينجح هذا المقال في التدليل على أن هذه الموضوعات المألوفة يمکن رؤيتها على أنها نمط إسلامي فريد في الحديث عن الأخرويات.‬
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728287

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25758995
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Salazar Philippe-Joseph
Abstract: L'intrigue raciale. Essai de critique anthropologique, Paris, Meridiens Klincksieck, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25758999

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: F. La Cecla, Le malentendu (II malentenso, 1997), trad. A. Sauzeau, preface de M. Auge, Paris, Balland, « Voix et Regards », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759149

Journal Title: Social Forces
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i344318
Date: 6 1, 1973
Author(s): Williame Herman
Abstract: This is the translation of a paper originally presented, under the title "Lecture phénoméno- logique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim," at the Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala, 1978 (R.C. 6: History of Sociology: Groupe d'etudes Durkheimiennes) Lecture phénoménologique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2577975

Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781854
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dowd Garin
Abstract: This essay is a reply to Matthew Feldman's identification and advocacy (in SBT/A 16) of a methodological "partition" in Beckett studies. It argues that the 'critical tribunal' set up by his article may be contested on the grounds that: the advocated paradigm for research makes a contentious journey from science to literature; it dogmatically imposes restrictions on the range of literary critical interventions deemed to be of value; it employs a 'black box' approach to its own argument.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781885

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i25782894
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Ginzburg Carlo
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, introduction a Marc Bloch, / re taumaturghi. Studi sul carattere sovrannaturale attribuito alia potenza dei re particolarmente in Francia e in Inghilterra, Turin, Einaudi, 1973, en particulier, p. xiv-xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25782896

Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25790882
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): MURAKAMI Yasusuke
Abstract: Kennan, George (1951): American Diplomacy 1900-1950. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Chap.6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25790885

Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25791338
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Dalissier Michel
Abstract: This paper is the second part of a general study on the relationship between Nishida and Chinese philosophy. In the first, I explored the extent to which Nishida's philosophy was influenced, directly and indirectly, explicitly and implicitly, historically and conceptually, by materials coming from the intellectual horizon of Chinese thought. I concentrate here on Nishida's own position toward what he understood by "Chinese philosophy." Is this philosophy, so suggestive for Nishida, promoted to a central place in his work or not, and if so, in what sense might we take this idea of "centrality" as specifically Chinese? In setting forth several archetypes of Chinese thought present in Nishida's philosophy, the focus of this article falls on the methodological, logical and metaphysical contrasts we can identify between the Japanese philosopher and Chinese philosophy as his underground intellectual sources. 本稿は、筆者による西田幾多郎と中国哲学との関係を考察した研究論文の続編にあたる。前編の “Nishida Kitarō and Chinese Philosophy”は、西田哲学がどれだけの直接的もしくは間接的、明示的もしくは暗示的、歴史的もしくは概念的な影響を中国思想の知的土壊を基盤とする史料や人物から受けたかを考究したものである。続編である本稿では、西田が理解するところの中国哲学に対する西田自身の姿勢に焦点を絞る。この中国哲学なるものが西田の著作のなかで中心的な位置を占めているのかどうか、そうであるとするならば、この「中心」なる慨念を我々はどう理解すれば良いのか。本稿では、西田哲学に現れる中国思想の複数の原型を提示するとともに、西田という日本の哲学者と彼の知的背景としての中国哲学との間に認識できる、方法論的、論理的、形而上学的な対照に光を当てるものである。
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25791345

Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i25800662
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Deeb Hadi Nicholas
Abstract: Paul V. Kroskrity, Arizona Tewa Kiva Speech as a Manifestation of a Dominant Language Ideology, in LANGUAGE IDEOLOGIES, supra note 16, at 117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25800672

Journal Title: Journal of World Prehistory
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25801252
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Watkins Trevor
Abstract: Asouti 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25801256

Journal Title: Oriente Moderno
Publisher: Istituto per l'Oriente C. A. Nallino
Issue: i25817858
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): HAAG-HIGUCHI ROXANE
Abstract: Parsipur, Tuba va macna-ye sab, cit., p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25817867

Journal Title: The Economic History Review
Publisher: Titus Wilson and Son Ltd.
Issue: i324319
Date: 8 1, 1981
Author(s): Vico François
Abstract: Stern, ed. The varieties of history, p. 32 32
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2596249

Journal Title: Planning Theory
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i26004236
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Gunder Michael
Abstract: This article briefly reviews the history and concept of ideology, largely as articulated by exponents of the Frankfurt School, and considers the impact that this has had on historical planning theory and practice, culminating in Habermasian derived communicative planning theory. It then considers the role of ideology in a post-Marxist world and argues for the value of Žižekian critique for understanding planning's contemporary role of ideologically defining the use of neoliberal space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26004239

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Publishers
Issue: i324417
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Kiser Edgar
Abstract: This paper examines the linkages among the ideological, political, and economic dimensions of the world-system by looking at changes in the publication of two types of utopian novels in the United States. We argue that positive and negative visions of the future (eutopian and dystopian literature, respectively) can be treated as aspects of the ideological dimension of the world-system. As part of such an interrelated system, the volume of utopias should change in response to periods of crisis and stability in the political, economic, and cultural dimensions of the system. A time-series analysis indicates that both types of utopian literature are affected by changing conditions of the world-system. On the basis of these findings, we conclude that the world-system perspective represents a promising approach for the study of ideological change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600591

Journal Title: Theologische Rundschau
Publisher: J.C.B. MOHR (PAUL SIEBECK)
Issue: i26000178
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Lorenz Rudolf
Abstract: W.Kamlah: Christentum und Selbstbehauptung, Frankfurt/M. 1940, S. 177 (2. Aufl.: Christentum und Geschichtlichkeit, Stuttgart/Köln 1951, S. 140).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26148274

Journal Title: Theologische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i26152662
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Stoellger Philipp
Abstract: E. Maurer, Sprach- philosophische Aspekte in Karl Barths >Prolegomena zur Kirchlichen Dogmatil«, Frankfurt a.M. u.a. 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26153600

Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167934
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Scharper Stephen B.
Abstract: See See Richard Peet and Micahel Watts, eds. Liberation Ecologies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167941

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie et philosophie médiévales
Publisher: PEETERS
Issue: i26172285
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sère Bénédicte
Abstract: P. RlCŒUR, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris 1990, p. 43: «Le concept de personne serait un concept primitif, dans la mesure où on ne saurait remonter au-delà de lui».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26172290

Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Internacional
Publisher: ASOCIACIÓN ESPAÑOLA DE PROFESORES DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL Y RELACIONES INTERNACIONALES
Issue: e26177211
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): García Picazo Paloma
Abstract: Este trabajo está dedicado a todos los que, como Maximilian M. Kolbe (1894-1941), son capaces e dar su vida por otros, sin pedir nada a cambio, sin furia y sin rencor, tan sólo porque su idea de Dios omprende a la humanidad. Kolbe murió en un «búnker de inanición» del campo de exterminio de uschwitz. Entregó voluntariamente su vida a cambio de la de otro prisionero que era padre de familia. l suplicio del hambre (inanición absoluta) duró catorce días, en los que fallecieron seis condenados; uego, una inyección letal liquidó a los tres moribundos restantes, que «tardaban» demasiado. Así acabó olbe. La pena se dictó como castigo colectivo por la fuga de otro preso del bloque 14. Fischer, U., Maximilian Kolbe, Viena, Sal Terrae-Maria Roggendorf, 1975.En Auschwitz se inyectaba gasolina directamente n el corazón.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26177217

Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26189080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Laird Martin S.
Abstract: Conf. 10,11 (p. 138).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26189087

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26196595
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Martial Agnès
Abstract: According to recent analyses, we are said to be witnessing in the West a « naturalisation » of filiation. The present article challenges this hypothesis, based on anthropological and historical analyses of old “parallel” kinships and the new forms of family configurations. It recalls the longstanding reference to nature in the representations and uses of kinship and the existence of a metaphorical and symbolic world characterised both in the past and today by the plurality of meanings given to kinship relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196604

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DE FREITAS DA SILVA CLAUDINEI APARECIDO
Abstract: From the perspective of Gabriel Marcel’s juvenile writings, most notably Fragments Philosophiques(1909-1914) andJournal Métaphysique(1914-1923), this study discuss the first theoretical statute of the experience of God. This reflexive movement, strictly speaking, phenomenological-existential is based (as background) on the critique of absolute knowledge (modern idealism and scientism) which, according to Marcel, is an unavoidable contradiction: at the same time, it affirms the being, it denies the being. What draws attention is the fact that such explanatory model is transposed and, therefore, applied using the classical formulation of the so-called problem of the existence of God, of which theodicy has one of the most eloquent and emblematic metaphysical discourses. For the young French thinker, God cannot be verified or justified as an ontological proof: God is the Inverifiable Absolute, since it has to be experienced in the act of faith, in the expression of love and grace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197005

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DOTTI FEDERICA
Abstract: In the context of the family’s crisis, in addition to the marital failures that produce suffering and inconvenience, there are biases due to controversies, ideological interests and opinions, which originate general and simplistic solutions to complex problems with peculiar characteristics. The article, – according to the commitment of the Holy Father Francisco to mitigate the heavy burden of people in “irregular” unions (where situations of fragility or misery improve stigma of exclusion) – try demonstrate the continuity of the Magisterium Pontifical Council, in which Amoris Laetitiaand the reform of the canonical matrimonial process were inserted. Through the study of the answers and the search for solutions that are careful to the hierarchy of truths, the Holy Father pointed out: “to generate personal and personalized processes”; to follow paths of reflection and discreet understanding the conditions of each case; ultimately, to help progress guided by a logic of forgiveness and reconciliation, according to a merciful and encouraging pastoral care. Sacraments and consciences, both sacred, require to be served with truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197006

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26199296
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Depraz Nathalie
Abstract: J. Derrida, o.e.., 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26199304

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26200188
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: M. Heidegger, Approche de Hölderlin, Paris, Gallimard, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26200194

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201560
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: Pour une analyse approfondie de ce problème, cf. G. Noiriel, La Tyrannie..., op. cit., notamment le chapitre « la persécution et l'art d'écrire», pp. 247-301.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201564

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Desrosières Alain
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et Récit, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201769

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202379
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Mauger Gérard
Abstract: Dans cette perspective, toute pratique de lecture peut être décrite comme un mouvement en trois temps : «avant lire »/«lire »/«après lire». Des «intérêts à la lecture » qui trouvent leur origine dans la situation du lecteur - « avant lire » - incitent à un « faire » - « lire » - qui porte à conséquences, immédiates ou différées - «après lire» - et qui consolident en retour les «intérêts à la lecture ». L'accent mis classiquement sur la seconde phase (« lire ») - qui est aussi la plus difficilement accessible à l'enquête - est alors déplacé sur les deux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202389

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202500
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Linhardt Dominique
Abstract: John Best, « But Seriously Folks : The Limitations of the Strict Constructionist Interpretation of Social Sciences », ibid., pp. 109-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202506

Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Ponsard Nathalie
Abstract: Dans mon travail, j'ai distingué les fonctions utilitaires (ordinaires et extraordinaires) et les fonctions de divertissement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202747

Journal Title: Espace géographique (English Edition)
Publisher: BELIN
Issue: e26213697
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: La littérature académique de langue française fait un usage très abondant des notions d’ancrage et d’enracinement quand elle traite de l’habiter et des pratiques résidentielles. Si l’origine métaphorique de ces notions est parfois rappelée, sinon exploitée, par les auteurs qui y ont recours, elle est souvent passée sous silence. Cet article propose de raviver la dimension métaphorique de ces notions, en les complétant de deux autres – mouillage et amarrage – dans une double intention: d’une part, en montrant qu’en les prenant au sérieux, il est possible de leur faire désigner différents types de rapport aux lieux qui exploitent directement les images sous-jacentes; d’autre part, en rappelant que ces images participent d’une poétique du savoir qui distille des effets de vérité dont les motivations sont à rechercher dans les options épistémologiques majeures adoptées.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26213710

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26215872
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Rengger N.J.
Abstract: Cited in Maurice Cranston, John Locke: A Biography (Oxford, 1985), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26215878

Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219891
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Chowers Eyal
Abstract: Zygmunt Bauman, Liquid Modernity (Cambridge, 2000), p. 178. Agnes Heller makes a similar point in her 'Where are We at Home?', pp. 17-18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219896

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26230922
Date: 8 1, 2008
Abstract: A.M. Cirese, Simulazione informatica e pensiero ‘altro’, in Il sapere dell’antropologia. Pensare, comprendere, descrivere l’Altro, a cura di U. Fabietti, Milano, Mursia, 1993, pp. 155-170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26230926

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26231407
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): Zingari Valentina Lapiccirella
Abstract: Through the experience of some ethnographic fields between France and Italy, Tuscany and the Alps, this paper reflects upon the potential of oral history and biography both as cognitive sources and as heritage assets contributing to the processes of improving the cultural values. In particular, we try to clarify the relationship between regional research projects, exhibitions and archiving processes of the sources of ethnographic research. This in relation to the development of new technologies including the web and to the social and cognitive potential use of oral sources in the capitalization and sharing of research materials with cultural communities and within their possible uses for the scientific community. What can become an anthropological interview once recorded, stored and catalogued? What is the potential of these audio recordings and their written versions within projects of participatory museography? How can the web offer new opportunities to those sources by including them in a global system of dialogue between archives? This view changes the responsibilities and possibilities of the researcher producer of sources and collector of voices, engaging him in a quite different consideration of his work to the benefit of societal projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26231419

Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26233631
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Riccardo Gaetano
Abstract: Cfr. Bergson, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26233634

Journal Title: Espace géographique
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26236445
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: Francophone academic literature makes abundant use of the notions of anchoring and rootedness when dealing with dwelling and residential practices. Though the metaphoric origin of these notions can be evoked, and even exploited by the authors, it is generally glossed over. This article seeks to revive the metaphorical dimension of these terms by adding two others – mooring and docking. Our goal is twofold. First, we demonstrate that by taking the terms seriously, it is possible to have them designate different types of of relationships to place, which directly use underlying images. Second, we discuss how these images participate in the poetics of knowledge that distills the effects of truth, whose motivations must be sought out in the major epistemological options that have been adopted.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26236458

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26263869
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Cfr. La Rivoluzione francese del 1789 e la rivoluzione italiana del 1859. Osserva- zioni comparative, in Tutte le Opere cit., II, p. 2112 sgg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26263873

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26264537
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Ch. Batteux, Sulla frase cit., p. 203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26264540

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26266382
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Leri Clara
Abstract: Ricordo, a titolo di esempio, solo alcuni degli scrittori e degli studiosi che non hanno avuto, per così dire, accesso alla rassegna (pur se implicitamente e continuamente vivissimi all'attenzione di chi scrive) per l'impossibilità oggettiva di esibire lo sconfinato universo delle presenze bibliche nella letteratura compresa tra il Duecento e il primo Ot- tocento: il Dante delle opere 'minori', soprattutto della Vita Nuova (V. Branca, G. Gor- ni), la predicazione medievale e moderna (C. Delcorno, R. Rusconi, L. Bolzoni, J. Berlioz, etc.), le laude (G. Varanini, R. Bettarini, F. Mancini etc.), la sacra rappresentazione (M. Martelli, N. Newbigin, F. Doglio, G. Ponte, F. Pezzarossa), il Boccaccio delle Rime e delle Epistole (V. Branca, G. Auzzas) e di alcune parti del Decameron (P. Cherchi), la produzione 'sacra' tassiana (Rime Sacre, Mondo Creato), l'Aretino (Larivaille) e il Folengo (M. Chiesa, S. Gatti) nei panni di scrittori cristiani, l'Arcadia edificante, per riprendere un titolo preciso del Di Biase, certa tragedia sacra settecentesca come quella di Martello (I. Magnani, P. Trivero) e, soprattutto, l'Alfieri biblico del Saul e dell'Abele (A. Di Bene- detto, E. Raimondi), lo Jacopo Ortis (M. A. Terzoli) e l'Ipercalisse del Foscolo (B. Rosada, A. Forlini), il linguaggio poetico religioso del Porta (G. Pozzi) e del Belli, il Tommaseo (M. Guglielminetti), il Pascoli (A. Traina, G. Goffis), D'Annunzio e molti altri ancora: spesso, tra l'altro, privi di una vera e propria bibliografia «scritturale» a largo spettro, se non di studi singoli, difficilmente annoverabili nell'ambito ristretto di una precisazione doverosa, ma non esaustiva. Va detto anche che, sebbene la rassegna si chiuda con il 1995, qua e là è stato segnalato qualche libro del 1996, a cui si vuole ora aggiungere, senza l'ambizione di averne citato tutti i volumi relativi all'oggetto delle precedenti pagi- ne, A. Stauble, Le sirene eterne. Studi sull'eredità classica e biblica nella letteratura italia- na, Ravenna, Longo, 1996; e E. Esposito, R. Manica, N. Longo, R. Scrivano, Memo- ria biblica nell'opera di Dante, Roma, Bulzoni, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26266388

Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26267185
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Scotto Davide
Abstract: Si ringraziano la B. «C. Bonetta» e l'ASCP per aver concesso la pubblicazione delle dantesche; il personale della B. Universitaria e della Β. «P. Fraccaro» di Pavia, della B. Na- zionale Braidense di Milano, della B. Astense e del Museo Storico Italiano della Guerra di Rovereto. Alla prof. Elisa Signori, al dott. Giovanni Zaffignani e al prof. Gilberto Pizzami- glio devo i suggerimenti preziosi raccolti durante la discussione delle cartoline e delle boz- ze. Per l'ospitalità su queste pagine, e l'attenzione ricevuta anche da lontano, sono grato al prof. Carlo Ossola. Due ringraziamenti speciali vanno al prof. Giorgio Cracco e alla prof. Daniela Rando i quali, oltre ad aver seguito la ricerca, ne hanno mantenuto viva l'ispirazio- ne con uno 'sguardo' sempre luminoso. A loro penso leggendo i versi di Purg. VI, 43-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26267188

Journal Title: Journal of Consumer Research
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i344713
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Wertz Howard R.
Abstract: An existential-phenomenological description of everyday consumer experiences of contemporary married women with children is offered. An idiographic case study provides a thick description of this phenomenon and illustrates the hermeneutic process used in the interpretation. Following the case study, three interpretive themes are presented as mutually related aspects of an experiential gestalt that is shaped by the contextual ground of participants' life-world situations. Viewed holistically, the thematic aspects exhibit several dialectical relations that can be understood in terms of the emergent meaning of free choice. The applicability of this experiential gestalt to other life-world contexts is discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2626800

Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26280815
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Rosbottom Ronald C.
Abstract: Novel, 2 (1968), 5-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26280818

Journal Title: Modern Fiction Studies
Publisher: THE PURDUE UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
Issue: i26280028
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brown Suzanne Hunter
Abstract: "Metacommentary," PMLA, 86 (January 1971), 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26281276

Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CRÉATEUR, INC.
Issue: i26284635
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Rapaport Herman
Abstract: Being and Time (New York: Harper and Row, 1962), p. 303.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26284641

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing, Taylor and Francis Ltd.
Issue: i324979
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Dube David
Abstract: Osborne, Modernity, p. 37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637603

Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i325015
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Collinson Tom
Abstract: Thomas Brooks, 'Epistle to the saints', Heaven on earth, n.p
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2639939

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: i345591
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Shields Timothy
Abstract: Breen, "Ideology and Nationalism on the Eve of the American Revolution," 13-39. 13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2649962

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i325622
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: Some systems of divination are used to select particular sections of text, which are typically arcane and erudite, in which lies the answer to the particular, pressing problems of the client. Celebrated examples of such systems are the Chinese I Ching and the Yoruba Ifa. Werbner's work on Kalanga and Tswapong divination provides a case-study of the detailed praxis in such systems. Diviners have a multiple role when a divination technique selects a text. At each consultation they must satisfy themselves, their client, and their audience that they have followed the correct procedures to select the text. A second stage follows. The client has a particular question and the selected text was not composed as a specific answer to it. Interpretation is required to satisfy the client that the question has been answered. The diviner thus plays the role of indigenous critic, a role both similar to and different from that of literary critics in the Western tradition. The concept of `dialogic' used by Barber in her analysis of Yoruba praise poetry is taken to illustrate similarities and differences between diviner and critic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2661220

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Rosen William H.
Abstract: Stanley Rosen, The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989). Rosen The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677987

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1756
Author(s): Tulard Jay M.
Abstract: "The Determinist Fix," 31
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677990

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345905
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Hall Anne
Abstract: Sewell, "Historical Events as Structural Transformations," 852 852
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678014

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Althusser Nicole
Abstract: Althusser's formula: "Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere nec- essary for breathing and existence" (L. Althusser, For Marx [London: Verso, 1969], 232). Althusser Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere necessary for breathing and existence 232 For Marx 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678068

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345901
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Prigogine David F.
Abstract: Ibid., 104-106. 104
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678084

Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i346132
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Sartre Richard K.
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline, p. 170. 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2706440

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346279
Date: 6 1, 1977
Author(s): Taplin Margaret
Abstract: Frankel's Commentary on Agamemnon, 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709287

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346290
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Bianco Donald R.
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 156. 156
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709616

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346302
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Laerman Donald R.
Abstract: Lovejoy (see above, n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709744

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346292
Date: 9 1, 1984
Author(s): Sacks Patrick H.
Abstract: Oliver Sacks, "The Lost Mariner," The New York Review of Books (16 February 1984), 18-19. Sacks 16 February 18 The New York Review of Books 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709758

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327920
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Voigt William J.
Abstract: The structural analysis of myth is a prime focus of anthropological interest, largely because of the efforts of Levi-Strauss. This paper uses some Levi-Straussian ideas to develop a strategy for myth analysis that I call the non-sense-in-myth strategy (NIMS). The strategy is given a trial run on a well-known and (I believe) much-misunderstood myth: Adam and Eve in Eden. The structure identified has an evolutionary character consistent with many modern understandings concerning the nature of human reality. NIMS, a mediator between Levi-Straussian intellectual leaps and a real methodology, indicates the value of cautious optimism concerning the question "Can structural analysis of myth become a scientific endeavor?"
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741121

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327931
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Crocker J. Christopher
Abstract: Anthropologists have overlooked the importance of the metaphor in human culture. Core etaphors can help us identify ultimate cosmic constructs underlying a given social or religious world view. But, even more centrally, metaphors can serve as key data in our attempts to understand how a cultural system adapts to and incorporates sensated experience from the physical world. Metaphors thus provide both a "reality" principle and a "tool" for change. Their special status rests on the way in which a metaphor moves between two different types of thought (Fernandez, CA, 1974). A variety of comments which E. R. Leach and C. Levi-Strauss have made on this issue are summarized, and it is pointed out that both men have underestimated the possibilities for images to develop meaning at the level of affect and motor experience alone, without recourse to opposition or to categorical contrast. Along similar lines, it is argued that many authors mistakenly attempt to isolate metaphoric from metonymic thought. This is taken as a false problem, and the continuity of a process which uses both paradigm contrast and analogic continuity is seen as fundamental. The paper concludes by suggesting that the contemporary theological and anthropological approaches to metaphor are roughly complementary. It is hoped that they will come to interact. Fernandez's article is seen as a useful step in this direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741153

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327940
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Tissot Georges
Abstract: I use an old observation (that religion is anthropomorphistic) to solve a problem almost as old (why do people have religious beliefs?) by arguing that religion is a special case of the more general phenomenon of anthropomorphism. This view suggests that religious belief, often thought nonempirical and cognitively anomalous, is as much based in experience as is nonreligious belief and that it consists in a plausible application of significant models to ambiguous phenomena. Anthropomorphism, often thought a cognitive aberration, appears to me both reasonable and inevitable, although by definition mistaken. On this argument, religious models of and for the world differ in content from nonreligious models but are epistemologically similar to them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741711

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327935
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): Spodick David H.
Abstract: A number of investigators are agreed that the popular medical systems of tribal, peasant, and allied peoples are "effective." Most of the literature closely examining that effectiveness focuses on the ethnopharmacological dimensions of the healing systems and generally ignores psychosocial factors. Recent developments in psychophysiology may offer insights into these neglected areas. The specific idea to be examined here is that successful "general medical treatment," or "symbolic healing," by either the shaman or physician, is based in part on a psychosocial mobilization of the patient's biochemical response system. Moreover, it is argued that to account fully for these processes we must reconceptualize the character of the human organism; a unitary alternative to standard Western Cartesian dualism (mind vs. body) is proposed, based on a model derived from recent research in neuroendocrinology. This model can be the basis for a nonreductionist theory of medical effectiveness needed to account for a series of observations (derived from both anthropological and medical contexts) which seem to transcend the explanatory powers of the traditional reductionist biomedical model.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741861

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327937
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): Watson-Gegeo Karen Ann
Abstract: Two traditions have been vying for supremacy in the area of cultural analysis. The first sees culture as encompassing the totality of socially learned human phenomena; the second restricts the term to shared mental-primarily cognitive-properties. David Schneider has achieved a dominant positon in the latter school. In this paper I examine critically Schneider's approach to culture, with special attention to the problems raised by his perspective with respect to intracultural consistency and contradiction. While agreeing that the ethnographer must attempt to shun prior assumptions as to the nature of symbolic and conceptual domains recognized by the people under study, that it is incumbent on the anthropologist to comprehend reality from the natives' point of view before attempting to formulate laws or generalizations, that the symbolic systems and their associated meanings plays an essential part in making sense of any human action system, I shall argue that cultures do not exhibit the degree of integration, consistency, and articulation assumed by Schneider, that in his attempt to render culture wholly integrated and consisten he strips the concept of its analytic utility, that social action and symbolic systems are empirically and epistemologically more closely intertwined than he would lead us to believe, and that the very debate over what culture "really" is constitutes an exercise in reification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742111

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327960
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Ulin Robert C.
Abstract: The argument of Evans-Pritchard's classic The Nuer has been subject to conflicting interpretations. We examine these interpretations and then present a reading of the work that treats it as a whole. A key conclusion is that Evans-Pritchard distinguishes among three aspects of the "systems" he describes: (1) logical possibilities immanent in all forms of action, (2) cultural or local idioms in terms of which action is formulated and expressed, and (3) conditions and patterns of action. With this framework he develops, through an examination of the way interests in cattle are translated into political practices, an analysis in which the central theoretical problem is the relationship of structure to human agency. Our reading raises questions about the utility of standard classifications of theoretical orientations in social and cultural anthropology, particularly of the category of structural-functionalism, of which The Nuer is taken to be a central text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742453

Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327968
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Webster Steven
Abstract: Using the hermeneutical theory of Paul Ricoeur, it is possible to discern symbolic dimensions in cultural anthropology. Symbols, here, are dominant images in anthropologists' texts, creatively posited by inquirers, that, most importantly, possess a surplus of meaning. A symbol's fullest surplus of meaning is a prereflexive and comprehensive "understanding" (Verstehen) that may encompass a scholar's attempts at "explanation" (Erklaren). Examples of this symbolic dimension are the "understandings" that lie implicit in two elaborate anthropological systems: Levi-Strauss's structuralism and Harris's cultural materialism. Amid their commitments to anthropological "science" and "explanation," the works of each disclose a distinctive Verstehen. For Levi-Strauss, this "understanding" is nurtured by his image "world of reciprocity." For Harris, it is carried by the image "nature." This "understanding" has two major functions. On the level of the intellectual coherence of their texts, it gives unity to their intercultural interpretations of other societies and to their intracultural interpretations of their own traditions. On a moral level, it includes modes of being-in-the-world that Levi-Strauss and Harris prefer and ocasionally press upon their readers. Discernment of symbolic dimensions of "understanding" in anthropologists' texts may be an initial step toward reflection on the matrices out of which diverse explanations are presented in anthropological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2743131

Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504203
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Sissela Bok, Secrets (1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504207

Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504370
Date: 11 1, 2005
Author(s): Wils Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Sandøe, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504374

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505754
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Helminiak Daniel A.
Abstract: Temporal lobe epilepsy and certain personality disorders often result in experiences described as "religious." TLE research suggests a possible neurological basis for such experiences. Immediately the question arises about the authenticity of these experiences as religious. An experience is authentic if it furthers the authentic growth of the subject, regardless of what triggered it. So pathology may occasion authentic religious experiences, even as history exemplifies. For practical purposes, the further question about God in religious experience is secondary. The exception, miraculous occurrences, should not be granted without sufficient reason. This approach dissolves all conflict between science and faith.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505759

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505789
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Hunter James E.
Abstract: By focusing on hermeneutics and dialogue, this article clarifies the distinctive contribution that pastoral and psychotherapeutic interventions have to make in the healing process. It is shown how the hermeneutical process discloses the meaning of events through the interpretation of texts that arise spontaneously in the lives of individuals and groups. Texts may range from individual fantasies and dreams to sacred histories recorded in scriptures. When the meaning of life events is explored in dialogue through symbolic texts, we term that process "dialogical hermeneutics." Effective dialogical hermeneutics requires the use of three techniques: (1) presence in the caring relationship, (2) dialogue toward meaning, and (3) offering alternative interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505798

Journal Title: Journal of American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27557684
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Coates Peter
Abstract: Robyn Dixon, "Silent Warning? Sparrows are Vanishing Throughout Great Britain," Eos Angeles Times, 12 July 2002, at: http://www.ecology.com/ eco...o2/articles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27557692

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i27582855
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: The article proposes to analyse the fictional aspects in history writing. Indeed, history doesn't borrow from fiction its compositional techniques only; the discursive strategy which consists in narrating a story is in fact part of historical knowledge as such. A study of Cambysis's biography in Herodotus (II,l-III,66) leads us to grant a very specific function to Book II dealing with Egypt—nearly always considered as some sort of useless overgrowth—and to the "secondary remarks" concerning the Greek world (III,38, 39-60). Setting the Egyptian civilization as a foil enables Herodotus to establish a parallel between expansionist ideas and folly and he includes the Greeks in a plot itself critical of helleno-centric ideology. Our methodological approach owes as much to Ricœur's hermeneutics, as to H. R. Jauss's esthetics of reception and to the various streaks of narratology (narrative syntax and "mise en abîme"), with a view to showing that, once replaced in its "Erwarthunghorizonte", the form of the historical narrative makes full sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27582857

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i27638371
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Busch Austin
Abstract: Busch, "Convictions and Questions," 366–72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27638376

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i27638414
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Lacocque André
Abstract: Newsom, Book of Job, 257.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27638421

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i27638444
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sandoval Timothy J.
Abstract: Prov 1:2–6
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27638448

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642730
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Renn Joachim
Abstract: In his theory of communication Schutz exhibits a significant tension between two fundamental perspectives, phenomenology and pragmatism, and in the long run he fails to reconcile the contradictory implications these perspectives have with regard to his model of interaction. The main problem seems to be the notion of sense-constitution. Schutz develops two distinguishable accounts of constitution: an egological one and a model based on the phenomenon of direct interaction of empirical subjects. Two key concepts are related to these different modes of constitution: the model of appresentation with regard to language, symbols and signs, and the model of synchronisation as triangulation of streams of consciousness and outward action sequences. They are analyzed as significant for two different methods and two different theories of communication. I propose some reasons for Schutz's insistence on a phenomenological account of the ego and the constitution of sense, and offer a brief sketch of an alternative strategy that is implicit in Schutz's theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642733

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642781
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Vasterling Veronica
Abstract: Vasterling (2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642784

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27644419
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Honig Bonnie
Abstract: Honig 2001b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27644422

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646172
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Keyes et al. (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646182

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646172
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Wyschogrod Edith
Abstract: Derrida (1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646185

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i27652935
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Kliger Ilya
Abstract: O literaturnom geroe (Leningrad, 1979), 129–43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27652939

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669194
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Moses A. Dirk
Abstract: German Intellectuals and the Nazi Past (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669198

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669227
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Broadbent Philip
Abstract: Herzinger, "Jung, Schick und Heiter," 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669234

Journal Title: The American Sociologist
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i27698778
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Caulfield Jon
Abstract: Visual sociology has two main interests: picture-making by researchers (or their subjects) in the course of sociological fieldwork, and pictures made by social actors in the context of everyday life. Focusing on the latter interest and based in three social aspects of images—that they are produced in general societal settings and specific institutional settings, and are a kind of discursive practice—three approaches to the sociology of visual material are illustrated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27698784

Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i27710725
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Chickering Howell
Abstract: Samuel Johnson, The Rambler, No. 94, The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel John- son, ed. W. J. Bate and A. B. Strauss (New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1969), iv, 136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27710729

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738655
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Duque Sonia
Abstract: Según la definición de EG. Bailey en Les règles du jeu politique, París, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738660

Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27739107
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase Paul Ricoeur, " Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon ", en Ricoeur, Le juste, Paris, Esprit Editions, 1995, pp. 193-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739114

Journal Title: Anales de la literatura española contemporánea
Publisher: Society of Spanish and Spanish-American Studies
Issue: i27741343
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Fajardo Salvador J.
Abstract: The present essay examines the ideological implications of Luis Cernuda's "Ninfa y pastor por Ticiano." In the Poem Cernuda uses ekphrasis as a springboard for the exploration of creative desire, transforming Titian's painting into an erotic generator of creativity. The erotic center of the painting—the nymph's form—becomes a mirror in whose light are reflected and merged the speaker's, Titian's, and the reader's creative desires. Starting from a position of radical dissent, the poem critiques canonical visual values with respect to the viewing subject, moral values as expressed and represented by the Christian story of man/woman's creation, and, more widely, by producing a deviation of readerly desire, it critiques the traditional codes of control and power relations in which we are immersed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27741347

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27752901
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Alcantud José Antonio González
Abstract: La antropología-acción presenta dos características metodológicamente impactantes: la incorporación del conocimiento local a las investigaciones, que son realizadas en colabora- ción con los estudiados; y el eclecticismo y la diversidad teóricos, puesto que métodos y teo- rías sólo poseen virtudes instrumentales (Greenwood et alii., 1993: 178-179).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27752917

Journal Title: Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i27758257
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Nerlich Brigitte
Abstract: 18 Cf. à ce propos Descombes, 1979, p. 114s. : "I° le signifiant précède le signifié. Le langage n'est en aucune façon un medium, un moyen d'expression, une médiation entre l'intérieur et l'extérieur. Car le code précède le message. (...) Le message n'est pas l'expression d'une expérience, mais il exprime plutôt les possibilités et les limites du code utilisé au regard de l'expérience. D'où le problème: comment énoncer de l'imprévu?".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27758261

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27793826
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giulea Dragoş A.
Abstract: Norris 1991:273-274
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27793828

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i27797773
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Heinze Carsten
Abstract: Diese zusätzlichen “Quellen" der autobiographischen Erzählung werden oftmals von Autoren im Vor- oder Nachwort explizit als Gedächtnisstütze genannt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27797778

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i27802687
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: Williams, A Key into the Language of America, [i–ii].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802693

Journal Title: Dead Sea Discoveries
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i27806733
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jokiranta Jutta
Abstract: Cecilia Wassen and Jutta Jokiranta, "Groups in Tension: Sectarianism in the Damascus Document and the Commu- nity Rule," in Sectarianism in Early Judaism: Sociological Advances (ed. David J. Chalcraft; London: Equinox, 2007), 205–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27806736

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329091
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Adler Judith
Abstract: Although travel has been performed, appreciated, and formally criticized as an art for at least five centuries, this cultural classification has yet to be taken seriously in the nascent field of tourism research. Present-day tourism is best understood as a recent manifestation of an enduring art of travel whose performance entails movement through space in conventionally stylized ways. Sociological research on current and historical manifestations of this art can benefit from theoretical traditions developed in the study of other domains of expressive culture. Drawing on the sociology of art as well as on recent literary scholarship, this paper proposes that the reproduction and modificaton of distinctive travel styles be examined in terms of the social worlds of their producers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2780963

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329114
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): Zeitlin Larry J.
Abstract: Goldstone 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2781584

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329104
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Zelditch Michael
Abstract: Kiser and Tong 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2781636

Journal Title: Geographische Zeitschrift
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i27818847
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): ESCHER ANTON
Abstract: This article pleads for a pragmatic strategy of transcultural understanding as a dialogic concept of insight in social geographic research in the „Islamic Orient“. Transcultural understanding is interpreted as a process of assimilating different systems of meaning, norms, and values of subjects on the one hand, and discourses on how those systems fit together on the other hand (cf. Schwemmer 1996). Understanding is organized by scientifically working out common connections respecting and recognizing foreign codes. As it were, social geographic research needs to generate theoretical frames on a common basis in order to take the differences between cultures as a theme afterwards. In preparation of the argument, the concept of the „gelebten Raum“ (Baier 1996), and the post-modern understanding of space in social geography respectively (Claval 1999) is shortly presented. Additionally, a differentiation of the „Islamic Orient“ is outlined, as are the problems of understanding everyday life and social scientific problems of understanding agency.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27818852

Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i27823283
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Wei Wang
Abstract: Cogito, as the first principle of Descartes' metaphysical system, initiated the modern philosophy of consciousness, becoming both the source and subject of modern Western philosophical discourse. The philosophies of Maine de Biran, Kant, Husserl, Heidegger, Sartre, Merleau-Ponty, and others developed by answering the following questions? Is consciousness substantial or not? Does consciousness require the guarantee of a transcendental subject? Is Cogito epistemological or ontological? Am I a being-for-myself or a being-for-others? Outlining the developmental history of the idea of Cogito from Descartes to Sartre is important for totally comprehending the evolution and development of Western philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27823291

Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i27823295
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Yiyu Liu
Abstract: The essential significance of scientific metaphor lies in applying the general metaphorical theory to specific interpretations and elaborations of scientific theories to form a methodology of scientific explanation. It is a contextual grasp of objective reality. A given metaphorical context and its grasp of the essence of reality can only be valid when the context is continually restructured. Taking the context as a whole, the methodological characteristic of scientific metaphor lies in the unity of understanding and choice, experience and concepts, semantic structures and metaphorical domains, rationality and irrationality. As a form of thinking based on reasons, scientific metaphor plays an important role in invention, representation, explanation, evaluation, and communication. 𱆅𣎘𸕄𡥇𰍀𦐒𶄶𤡇𠁁𢌒𤅸𣕘𙥨𳌤𰍀𸕄𡥇𩜂𵝰𤈒𩦒𠄐𱆅𣎘𩜂𵝰𰍀𠡕𠌇𵊙𷌢𡙄𵠨𦄦𠀓, 𰀁𧒒𤐘𥄄𙥨𱆁𱆅𣎘𵊙𷌢𰍀𦁁𧡡𵝰𤘅𤠙. 𣐧𦅙𣕅𣑘𵉦𣑔𢌒𰍀𙥨𱆁𵠡𢙙𡉰𥈦𥕩, 𡒂𦍷𵠡𢙙𰍀𙦁𦀩𷌥𦔀, 𥅥𳀡𲑳𣑐𸕄𡥇𵠡𢙙𰍀𣎄𢌒𡑐𠡔𥈦𥕩𣑔𢌒𦐒𶄶𰍀𦍷𥤨𤘕. 𱆅𣎘𸕄𡥇𰍀𦁁𧡡𵝰𩌅𤑉𴤠𩘖𠀦: 𩜂𵊙𙦂𶡳𥌡, 𲑣𹕤𙦂𧀐𤕥, 𵠡𠁁𲑧𦔀𙦂 𸕄𡥇𢒕, 𩜂𤘕𙦂𸝐𩜂𤘕𰍀𲑹𙥨. 𠌖𠀦𙥨𱆁𦍷𩜂𰀁𥔒𩜂𰍀𤘅𲔀𤐘𤌵, 𱆅𣎘𸕄𡥇𠡕𦍷𡑗𦄦, 𴤠𤑉, 𵠨𦄦, 𵞀𠈕𡑐𠄲𧥩𱕡𦁁𸝔𰍀𷌥𵈁𡅑𳀡.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27823305

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329128
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Antonio Robert J.
Abstract: Although a very important figure in interdisciplinary social theory, Nietzsche is absent from sociological theory, especially in the United States. Equating rationalization with cultural homogenization and liquidation of particularity, Nietzsche saw "decadence" where modern social theorists saw progress. He held that sociology drapes cultural domination, regimentation, and exhaustion with the appearance of legitimacy. This essay explores his views about the depletion of social resources stressed in modern theory. It elaborates his "antisociology" and then traces the impact of this framework on three divergent currents of social theory. Nietzsche is read against the backdrop of modern theory in order to explore his continuing challenge to this tradition and his relevance to sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782505

Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329121
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Goodwin Jeff
Abstract: Network analysis is one of the most promising currents in sociological research, and yet it has never been subjected to a theoretically informed assessment and critique. This article outlines the theoretical presuppositions of network analysis. It also distinguishes between three different (implicit) models in the network literature of the interrelations of social structure, culture, and human agency. It concludes that only a strategy for historical explanation that synthesizes social structural and cultural analysis can adequately explain the formation, reproduction, and transformation of networks themselves. The article sketches the broad contours of such a theoretical synthesis in the conclusion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782580

Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo
Issue: i27859582
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ATZENI PAOLA
Abstract: Riprendo, ampliando i conte- sti di riferimento, la complessa nozione demartiniana di mun- dus (De Martino 1977:11-282) che comprende il mondo inte- riore, come vissuto psicopatolo- gico e di alienazione, e il mondo esterno spazio-temporale e sim- bolico per analizzare il rapporto discorso-mondo. Mi allontano dalla nozione di Searle (2001, trad. it. 2003: 117-137) in cui la direzione d' aggiustamento ri- guarda un mondo come real- tà supposta data. Mi accosto, invece, a Vernant (1997: 49) il cui approccio pragmatico con- duce non solo a moltiplicare i mondi - mondo esterno comu- ne, mondo interno del locuto- re, differenti mondi costituenti ciascuno il risultato di un pro- cesso specifico d'interazione e di transazione-, ma anche ad individuare senso e finalità dei discorsi e potenza interazionale e transazionale dei soggetti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27859595

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i27866932
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Gruenler Curtis
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Symbolism of Evil, trans. Emerson Buchanan (Boston, 1967), pp. 351–52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27866937

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889645
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): SPITÉRI Gérard
Abstract: Par exemple, Claude Allègre était bien considéré par la presse de droite, tandis que celle de gauche s'est montrée plus critique à son égard. La raison en est que le ministre de l'Education nationale s'était mis à dos le personnel enseignant, considéré comme majoritairement à gauche. /-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889647

Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889984
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: Edouard T. Hall. La danse de la vie. Temps culturel et temps vécu, Parla, Seuil, 1984, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889995

Journal Title: The Monist
Publisher: The Open Court Publishing Co.
Issue: i27901620
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Wells Norman J.
Abstract: Paul Friedlander, "Dialogue and Existence," Plato, trans. Hans Meyer- hoff (New York: Pantheon, 1958), pp. 230-235
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27901624

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i27919226
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Clairmont David A.
Abstract: Maclntyre (1988: 373–375).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919233

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i27919256
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: 'Pathologies in the Academic Study of Religion: North American Institutional Case Studies,' edited by Gary Lease."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919268

Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i27919976
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ambrona Antonio Cil
Abstract: P. Ric ur, op. cit., p. 429.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919986

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société préhistorique française
Publisher: Société Préhistorique Française
Issue: i27923888
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): CASSEN Serge
Abstract: La stèle du Bronzo est gravée d'un oiseau "levé", en plein vol, la tête tournée vers l'extérieurs, superposé à un filon de quartz blanc; une crosse, également traitée en champlevé, lui barre le passage. En première lecture, une identification plausible du genre volatile semblait prévaloir et le colombidé emportait notre adhésion. Mais une analyse plus posée et un effort de déconstruction graphique du motif permettront cette fois de reprendre et d'affiner la reconnaissance, en décrivant les différents filtres autorisant tel ou tel rejet de catégorie ou d'espèce, pour ne conserver en dernier ressort que les meilleurs prétendants à la seule confrontation possible, celle qui oppose les corvidés aux colombidés. La représentation du Bronzo est en définitive équivalente en substance et en structure aux scènes figurées sur les stèles voisines dans lesquelles un phallus s'oppose qu tranchant d'une lame de hache (Mané Rutual), tandis qu'un cachalot affronte la coalition des animaux et des outils de l'homme (Table des Marchand). A "flushed" bird is engraved on the Bronzo stela, in full flight, its head turned to the exterior, superposed over a white quartz vein; a crook, equally treated in cut-away engraving, bars its passage. At a first reading, a plausible identification of the bird seemed to prevail and the Columbidae met with our approval. However, more deliberate analysis and an effort at the graphic deconstruction of the motif allows the identification to be reconsidered and improved, by describing the various filters authorising the rejection of such or such a category, finally preserving the best claimants to the only possible confrontation, opposing Corvidae to Columbidae. The Bronzo representation is equivalent in substance and in structure to the scenes on the neighbouring stelae where a phallus is opposed to the sharp edge of an axe blade (Mané Rutual), while a sperm-whale confronts the coalition of animals and human tools (Table des Marchand). However Bronzo is a deformed toponym, untranslatable as such; why not search in a more or less recent past, through some unavoidable semantic or linguistic evolution, for traces of a probable or possible mutation of the word? At the end of a brief investigation, we suggest that the expression Men Bran Sao, "The Stone of the Standing Raven", known from the early 19th century, is the name of this monolith. Nevertheless, the last time that a bird was directly observed on this stela was during the 5th millennium; the two closely conected fragments, on the model of the neighbouring Grand Menhir, prove that the stone has not been displaced since that distant period. We consequently propose this explanatory hypothesis to explain in Bronzo such a radical change of name: a zoomorphic mythical entity that we recognize as a pigeon, attached since time immemorial to the stela in question, passed under the influence of the Brittonic language and the new culture to the designation of another ornithological entity, the raven. If a bird as clearly identified as the Bronzo has played a determining role in the mythical Neolithic Armorican bestiary, like the sperm-whale, a scientific step is now necessary to find some hidden occurrences in other poorly understood signs, since such an important representation in our interpretive schema, unique in Brittany, cannot remain isolated. We correspondingly claim, in this coherent and logical research prolonging the Bronzo discovery, that the only possible appropriate solution for the famous "horn" signs is a bird shown full on, in flight, with spread wings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27923892

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i27929815
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): بول كارين
Abstract: In "The University in Ruins", Bill Readings traces shifting ideas about the university from the writings of Kant and von Humboldt to their "ruins" in a managerial newspeak that prioritizes profitable programs over humanities scholarship and teaching. The author contends that Readings narrates the dehiscence of these ideas in the form of a lament, even as he urges humanities faculty to abandon melancholic fixations on our deteriorating prestige and besieged values. This article recasts Readings's account in light of Paul Ricoeur's explication of the Augustinian lament to speculate about the ontological lineaments of a sense of lost time among human scientists. يتتبع بيل ريدنجز في عمله أطلال الجامعة المفاهيم المتغيرة عن الجامعة ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺎً بكتابات كانط وڨون هومبولت ومنتهياً بظلال تلك المفاهيم في اللغة الٳدارية الدعاﺋﻴﺔ الحالية التي تتخذ من البرامج الأكاديمية المربحة أولوية لها، على حساب البحث العلمي والتدريس في مجال الٳنسانيات. وترى الكاتبة أن ريدنجز يسرد هذه التحولات في صيغة رثاء ﻳﺆﻛﺪ تراجعها، في الوقت الذي يحث فيه أساتذة الٳنسانيات على التخلي عن هوسهم السوداوي بمثاليات عفى عليها الزمن. وتعيد هذه المقالة تقديم عمل ريدنجز في ضوء شرح پول ريكور للرثاء الأوجسطيني، متأملة السمات الأنطولوجية التي تميز شعور علماء الٳنسانيات بالزمن المفقود .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27929821

Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27933019
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Dallal Alberto
Abstract: Sin embargo, Rousseau se dedica, como hombre que ha per- dido su "sencillez original" y ya no puede "pasársela sin leyes y patrones" a "respetar los cimientos sagrados" de su sociedad y "escrupulosamente a obedecer las leyes y a los hombres que son sus creadores y sus ministros", burlándose al mismo tiempo "de una constitución que puede ser mantenida sólo con el auxilio de tanta gente respetable... y la cual, a pesar de todos los cuidados de ellos, siempre produce más calamidades reales que ventajas aparentes".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27933025

Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27933351
Date: 8 1, 1975
Author(s): Nava Manuel Núñez
Abstract: Cf. "The Sacred and the Modern Artist", Criterion (Prima- vera, 1965), pp. 22-24. El artículo fue publicado originalmente como "Sur la permanence du sacré dans l'art contemporain", XX Siècle, Num. 24 (París, diciembre, 1964), pp. 3-10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27933356

Journal Title: Romanische Forschungen
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i27942539
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Laferl Christopher F.
Abstract: In diesem Zusammenhang muß natürlich von kalligraphischen und sphragistischen Aspekten der Urkundenbetrachtung abgesehen werden, denn diese beiden fallen nicht nur in den Gegenstandsbereich der Historie, sondern auch in jenen der Kunstgeschichte, fur die Fragen der Ästhetik zentral sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27942542

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Issue: i27943698
Date: 5 1, 1987
Author(s): Lee Bernard J.
Abstract: Ibid.,258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27943706

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27943982
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Rorty Richard
Abstract: James, Varieties of Religious Experience, 518-19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27943984

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944018
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Brown Delwin
Abstract: Sheila Davaney's Pragmatic Historicism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944024

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944038
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Towne Edgar A.
Abstract: Sheila Greeve Davaney, "Options in Post-Modern Theology," Dialog 26 (1987), 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944043

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944252
Date: 5 1, 2002
Author(s): Doak Mary
Abstract: Moltmann, "Liberation," 276.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944254

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944268
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Doak Mary
Abstract: Jerome Paul Soneson, Pragmatism and Pluralism: John Dewey's Significance for Theology (Minneapolis. Fortress, 1993), 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944272

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944333
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Chapman J. Harley
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, The Symbolism of Evil, tr. Emerson Buchanan (New York: Harper and Row, Publishers, 1967), 352.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944338

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944372
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): van Huyssteen J. Wentzel
Abstract: Nicholas Rescher, A System of Pragmatic Idealism. Volume II: The Validity of Values (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1993), 3ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944375

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944386
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Dorrien Gary
Abstract: Joseph L. Price, "Pedagogy and Theological Method: The Praxis of Langdon Gilkey," ibid., 465-83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944392

Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944386
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bouchard Larry D.
Abstract: G. W. Bromiley and R. J. Ehrlich (III.3) (Edinburgh: T & T Clark Publishers, 1958, 1960).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944395

Journal Title: Austrian Studies
Publisher: Maney Publishing for the Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i27944903
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DERUCHIE ANDREW
Abstract: Danuser, Das Lied, pp. 107–11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944910

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330145
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Clifford James
Abstract: Maurice Leenhardt's ethnographic work in New Caledonia spanned nearly half a century, from 1902-1948. The first part of this field research is described and analysed, as background to his later anthropological writings. Leenhardt's specific position as a missionary-ethnographer is discussed, its advantages and disadvantages weighed. A liberal missionary perspective is found, in this case, to be conducive to a portrayal of cultural process. Leenhardt's translation methodology and his relations with key informants are detailed. Transcription, the means by which ethnographic texts are constituted by more than a single subject, is speculatively extended to ethnographic practice generally. Field research may be seen as a collective, reciprocal endeavour through which textualised translations are made. This viewpoint calls into question common notions of description, interpretation and authorship in the writing of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2801348

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330173
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton John
Abstract: Central Australian Aboriginal `increase ritual' has often been seen exclusively as an attempt to control environmental forces. Following Durkheim's early arguments against this view, and expanding them to encompass a psychoanalytic perspective, it is argued that the direct effect of so-called `increase ritual' is psychological, but that this effect has consequences for the maintenance of resources in a hunter-gatherer society. `Increase ritual', as Durkheim suggested, is structured as a form of sacrifice. It is also, as Freud suggested, linked to the death of the father. It is argued here that these symbolic themes relate practically to the control which mature men exercise over the reproduction of the social and natural orders.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802500

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330179
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Spencer Jonathan
Abstract: This article reviews the recent interest in the literary aspects of ethnographic writing, concentrating on the work of Geertz, Sperber and the authors associated with the collective volume Writing culture. While it is argued that serious questions are raised in some of this work, it is also argued that recent fashions in literary critical theory may prove unhelpful in addresing those questions. In particular, the tendency to read texts with little or no consideration for the social and historical context in which they were written seems an especially barren approach. Instead it is argued that anthropology is as much a way of working-a kind of practical activity-as it is a way of writing. Acknowledgement of the personal element in the making of ethnographic texts may help the reader to a better assessment of the interpretation on offer; more radical change requires a change in anthropological practice as well as in anthropological writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802551

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330167
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Messick Brinkley
Abstract: Muftis are literate scholars who specialise in Muslim legal-religious interpretation. They provide an example of a higher level of systematic indigenous interpretation than the common sense, everyday constructions of reality that have been discussed in anthropological accounts. I discuss the institutional form of the muftiship, and contrast it with the judgeship, with reference to indigenous ideal-types found in several categories of written Muslim social thought. This ideal form is then compared with the identities of historical and contemporary muftis in Yemen. The interpretive method employed by muftis joins a Greek-derived concept of analogy with recitation and hermeneutics. While their method is structurally similar to scriptural interpretation, muftis are worldly interpreters who address practical life problems posed by lay questioners.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802649

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212395
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Leone Mark P.
Abstract: Archaeologists have tried to reconstruct patterns of thought, meaning, and ideas, using theories of structuralism, cognition, and ideology. Case studies involving each of the theories are described, and the strengths and weakness of their application to archaeological data are presented. Structuralism is found to yield substantial examples with well-worked treatments of archaeological data. These examples tend to ignore economic context, however. Materialism, especially neo-Marxism, contains thorough definitions of ideology that may be useful to archaeology because they preserve economic context. However, such definitions are new to the field and presently offer few well-worked examples of how to handle archaeological data.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/280280

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330183
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Ohnuki-Tierney Emiko
Abstract: Most symbols are polytropic as well as polysemic in that their multiple meanings in various contexts functions as different types ot trope. This article pursues the complex nature of polytropes through a formulation of synecdoche as an interstitial trope between metaphor and metonymy, and demonstrates how the two conceptual principles of analogy and contiguity, that define metaphor and metonymy respectively, are interdependent and interpenetrated, rather than of basically different natures as presented in the biaxial image of structural linguistics. The analogic thought expressed in methaphor involves movement and temporality, just as does the discursive thought of metonymy. The interpenetration of the two modes of thought is demostrated through an analysis of the process of objectification of what, throughout history, has been a dominant symbol of self in Japanese culture: the monkey. As a polysemic and polytropic symbol, the monkey takes on different meanings, and functions as different tropic types, sequentially or simultaneously, as actors use and/or interpret the symbol in varying historical and social contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804111

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330201
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Kuper Adam
Abstract: There is a curious tendency, particularly marked in American cultural anthropology, to combine elements of the post-modernist programme with a radical political engagement. Though insisting that nothing can be known for certain, and certainly that ethnographers have no independent authority, some argue that nevertheless authentic - and preferredm - native voices may be identified, articulating the genuine sentiments and aspirations of a people. This premiss opens the way for an obvious challenge: if it is true, then only the native can speak for the native. The foreign ethnographer would then be merely an interpreter, a medium. As the study of ethnicity moves to the centre of the anthropological agenda, these assumptions must be urgently questioned. That requires a reassessment of the nature and purpose of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804342

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330201
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Reyna S. P.
Abstract: This article investigates two questions: have literary anthropologists offered telling critiques of science; and have they proposed another, more powerful, mode of knowing? It is suggested that neither literary anthropologists, hermeneutical philosophers, nor philosophers of science have constructed arguments that compel the rejection of science. `Thick description', offered as an alternative to science, is shown to exhibit properties of gossip. Thus the article responds to both questions in the negative and, in conclusion, proposes that the literary anthropological approach amounts to a doctrine of Panglossian nihilism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804343

Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330184
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Carrithers Michael
Abstract: Sociocultural anthropology and evolutionary biology have reached the point at which it is possible to give a coherent and synthetic account of the origins of human cultural variability. From a sociocultural perspective what must be explained is not just the fact of varying cultures and societies, but also the human capacity to create, maintain and alter social forms over time. From a biological perspective we have to ask, what is the selective advantage of such variability? The answer lies in human sociality. Sociality consists in a package of social intellectual capacities-higher order intentionality, pedagogy, narrativity, crativity, speech-which made possible an increasing division of labour. But as these capacities grew, they gave rise to distinctively human (rather than Darwinian) history, that is to the forms of social, political, economic and cultural causation which create ever new variations on the theme of social existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804560

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212428
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Hodder Ian
Abstract: This paper seeks further to define the processes of the interpretation of meaning in archaeology and to explore the public role such interpretation might play. In contrast to postmodern and poststructuralist perspectives, a hermeneutic debate is described that takes account of a critical perspective. An interpretive postprocessual archaeology needs to incorporate three components: a guarded objectivity of the data, hermeneutic procedures for inferring internal meanings, and reflexivity. The call for an interpretive position is related closely to new, more active roles that the archaeological past is filling in a multicultural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/280968

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212446
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Williamson Ronald F.
Abstract: In this paper we argue that archaeologists and anthropologists should be aware of forces that encourage the separation of archaeology from anthropology. Sociological, organizational, and intellectual factors that do not necessarily have disciplinary separation as their logical consequence can nonetheless have a cumulative effect that moves the relationship between the subfields of anthropology in the direction of greater or lesser independence. We compare the relative strength of certain factors that could either encourage or discourage the perpetuation of four-field anthropology in Canada and the United States.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/282294

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212608
Date: 8 1, 1942
Author(s): Pepper Chunglin
Abstract: This paper considers some aspects of the early history of the American contribution to the International Biological Programme (IBP), ecology's only venture into 'Big Science'. It is argued that American ecologists were successful in obtaining generous funding for the IBP from the US Congress, thanks to a shared understanding of the way in which controlling nature was to be accomplished, expressed in the metaphor of the 'cybernetic machine'. To support this argument, a literary analysis is performed on Congressional documents, on scientific and popular books and papers by ecologists, and on writings of the environmental movement. The paper explores how a dominant representation of nature, or mentalité, is brought about, and its political effects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285131

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: The Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i332959
Date: 10 1, 1830
Author(s): Lawrence Linda
Abstract: Beowulf, p. 332 332
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2851782

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212603
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Collins Kay
Abstract: This Note reviews shortcomings and claims of discourse analysis (DA). In particular, it focuses on the relationship between DA and reflexivity. It argues that DA could not succeed as its supporters originally thought, because DA has not dealt adequately with the issue of reflexivity. Even now that has turned to such issues, DA has a limited interpretation of reflexivity that is related to the change in sociological focus from scientific beliefs and knowledge to the study of texts for texts' sake.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285207

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: The Mediaeval Academy of America
Issue: i333021
Date: 4 1, 1946
Author(s): Gilson Gerhart B.
Abstract: Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899, Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis (Paris, 1946), p. 288 Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899 288 Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis 1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2854972

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212645
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Godin Benoit
Abstract: Literature discussing rhetoric is mainly concerned with rhetoric per se - its structure, and the categorization of arguments by kind. Rarely do rhetorical studies examine the actual effects on audiences, and auditors' reactions. On the other hand, sociological studies of scientific controversies look at rhetoric - or argumentation - in action, but with few references to rhetorical studies. The purpose of this paper is to integrate rhetorical studies into the sociology of technology in order to integrate the concept of action into discourse analysis. I intend to show how the use of discourse to enroll actors in a health technology is intimately linked to action. I deconstruct the promoters' strategy into two discursive components - the utility component and the fear-reduction component - to show how the rhetoric of expectations (utility) and representations (fear) contingently shape the fate of a technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285670

Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212655
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Bowen G. Michael
Abstract: In this paper, we describe and theorize the topology of 'vision' in field ecology, a domain considerably different from laboratory work in the physical sciences, and discuss the temporal extension of data-collection practices. Data collection in this field is characterized by widely varying measurements, measurement dimensions and temporal extension of data collection. We present the ecologists' field laboratory as a perceptual machinery with a heterogeneous and heteromaterial topology as it pertains to measures, precision, replication and other material practices. Because of the complexity of ecological fieldwork, considerable co-ordination and articulation work is necessary. Here, tables, tags and labels are central tools to achieve coherence of inscriptions. We topicalize the work that digitizes measurements conducted on lizards and their habitats, and that therefore imposes signs that lend themselves to mathematical and statistical processes. It is only through these digitizing processes that lizards become visible to other (interested) ecologists, most of whom have not seen this particular animal species in person. We thereby contribute in new ways to discussions of the topography and topology of scientific vision, to the relation of measurement to practice, and to the 'adequation' of nature and mathematics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285799

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i337890
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Wimsatt Linda
Abstract: Middleton, 127-36 127
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2865344

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i338604
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Price Michael
Abstract: Martin Price, Forms of Life: Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel (New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1983), 55. Price 55 Forms of Life: Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2871252

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i342167
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Irving Monika
Abstract: Thomas Luckmann, "Gelebte Zeiten-und deren Überschneidungen im Tages- und Lebenslauf," in Epochenschwelle und Epochenbewußtsein, ed. Herzog and Koselleck (above, n.2), pp. 283-304.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2886761

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i346021
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): HaackAbstract: Newsweek, January 30, 1956, p. 56. January 30 56 Newsweek 1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903882

Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i348147
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Weltman Sharon Aronofsky
Abstract: Ruskin's complex attitude toward women has long been important to feminist and Victorian studies; over a quarter-century ago Kate Millett published Sexual Politics and its famous attack on Ruskin's essay "Of Queens' Gardens." She charged Ruskin with promoting a sugar-coated but perfidious system of separate spheres for men and women. Yet shortly after Ruskin produced that idealized vision of housewife-queens in 1865, he created a new ideal queen in his mythological study The Queen of the Air (1869), this time elaborated from Athena. Through his mythopoesis, Ruskin disrupts both conventional gender categories and his own implication in them. Ruskin presents a series of binary oppositions that he immediately conflates: Athena and Medusa, air and earth, bird and snake, formation and destruction, science and myth, male and female. Ruskin documents the instability of his oppositions through a bizarre "natural language" where real-life creatures such as birds and snakes serve as eternal hieroglyphs, signifying universally recognizable abstractions. That seemingly fixed signs in Athena's hieroglyphic code inevitably change is clear from Ruskin's acknowledgment of Darwin's evolutionary theory. But evolution slips into a wild image of degenerative metamorphosis, where all the divisions that Ruskin has so laboriously noted dissolve. Since Ruskin identifies Athena with each seemingly opposed animal signifier in his language of living hieroglyphs, he subverts all linguistic difference and ultimately feminizes signification itself. Through myth Ruskin creates a mutable language, one where genders as well as signs become mobile rather than fixed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2933999

Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i348454
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Kuklick Henrika
Abstract: Before World War II the intellectual climate of American sociology was congenial to the growth of a sociology of knowledge akin to Mannheim's. Yet in the postwar period American sociologists committed themselves to ahistorical theory, positivist methodology, and team research; their "scientistic" sociology did not permit the historicism, relativism, and holism necessary to Mannheimian analysis. Currently, however, convergent trends in a number of disciplines--not only sociology but also philosophy, anthropology, literary criticism, and the histories of ideas, science, and art--favor a revival of the Mannheimian program. Analysts of culture now seek to integrate the sociological goals of "explanation" and "understanding"--the formulation of quasi-laws of behavior, based on identification of the social structural elements of culture production, and the interpretation of the subjective meaning of culture, based on recovery of actors' intentions. Their research program requires investigation of the peculiar sociohistorical circumstances that condition actors' perceptions, necessitating attention to the cognitive content of culture. This article surveys both the theoretical justifications for such a research program and recent exemplifications of it, focusing on anlyses of what Mannheim termed "objective culture"--such symbolic vehicles for conceptions as religion, the arts, science, and political thought that acquire independent existence, becoming subject to diverse interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2946067

Journal Title: Australasian Historical Archaeology
Publisher: The Australasian Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i29544323
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): SHORTLAND MICHAEL
Abstract: Sigmund Freud's work continues to attract interest from philosophers, analysts and historians, and the earliest formulation of his theory of the unconscious and the 'seduction hypothesis' have recently received particular attention. While Freud's intellectual debt to such figures as Darwin, Nietzsche, Helmholtz and Brücke has been well documented, the influence of Heinrich Schliemann on him and his work is little known. The purpose of this paper is to explore the ways in which Schliemann's work helped Freud fashion himself as an 'archaeologist of the mind' and how, in the crucial year 1896, it enabled him to construct and present his new ideas. The paper also explores Freud's interest in collecting and suggests how and why Freud's debts to archaeology are not, as commonly thought, visible in the so-called 'archaeological metaphor of mind', but present in other areas of his life and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29544326

Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i29742024
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Ortega Francisco
Abstract: Francisco Ortega, Amizade e estética da existencia em Foucault, Biblioteca de Filosofía e Historia das Ciencias, 22 (Rio de Janeiro: Ediçoes Graal, 1999), especially 21-29; 123-143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29742027

Journal Title: East and West
Publisher: Istituto Italiano per l'Africa e l'Oriente
Issue: i29757250
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Santangelo Paolo
Abstract: F. Dallmayr, 'Tradition, Modernity and Confucianism', Human Studies, 16, 1993, pp. 203-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29757264

Journal Title: Review of Social Economy
Publisher: Catholic Economic Association
Issue: i29767894
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Goulet Denis A.
Abstract: 1960 by Lebret, "Problematique de la Morale Collective."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29767895

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782741
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Chivallon Christine
Abstract: Yang-Ting (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782752

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782767
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giraud Michel
Abstract: Dubois 1998 : 8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782785

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i30038913
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Abizadeh Arash
Abstract: Fearon and Laitin 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30038918

Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i30040701
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Crane Andrew
Abstract: We use a narrative perspective to explore the relevance of the sciences dealing with ecology for management theory and practice, presenting the issues of ecoscience from the perspective of green narrative, based on the "evolutionary epic." Adopting an interpretive sensemaking perspective on narrative, we address the narratological basis of the evolutionary epic and examine the potential for the narrative to inform a new relationship between management and the natural environment. We suggest implications for management theory and practice by examining elements of the narrative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30040710

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i30040946
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Gordon Peter Eli
Abstract: Habermas, The Theory of Communicative Action, I: Reason and the Rationalization of Society (Boston: Beacon Press, 1984), and "Die Moderne-ein unvol- lendetes Projekt," Die Moderne ein unvollendetes Projekt, Philosophisch-politische Auf sätze (Leipzig: Reclam, 1994) 32-54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30040953

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30121742
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): Ladrière Paul
Abstract: This study deals with the popular notions of "popular religion", the "feast" and the "sacred". The following article retraces the logical steps involved in F.-A. Isambert's research which enabled the author to reconstitute the stages involved in the transformation of these popular notions in terms of their social functions into concepts constructed sociologically. This analytical reconstitution is combined with a critical approach which examines both the sociological constructs themselves as well as the ideas inherent in defining social strategies. The article also summarizes the debate concerning this question and presents its own criticisms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30121751

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30128872
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: Nouveau Testament à l'Université de Heidelberg, Gerd Theissen, né en 1943
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128876

Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i30133352
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): della Dora Veronica
Abstract: Over the past few years, the relationship between landscape and the body as two physical entities mutually informed through performance has been increasingly interrogated by cultural geographers. Similar issues about memory, embodiment and performativity have been raised in the social sciences, yet often obliterating the material specificities of place and landscape. This paper reconsiders the relationship between landscape and memory in terms of embodied, visual and spatial practice, rather than as a contested cultural politics of heritage and identity (as it has been generally understood in cultural geography after the so-called 'cultural turn'). Drawing on Nora's 'memory places' and on the Deleuzian notion of 'ontological past', as well as on recent writing on historical geographies of exploration and travel, the paper explores the spatial re-activation of Classical historical memory by nineteenth-century British officers and travellers to Aegean mountain peaks through their embodied and site-located practices of climbing, surveying or simply 'gazing'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30133358

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30153101
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): McDonald William C.
Abstract: Wendy A. Bie, "Dramatic Chronology in 'Troilus and Criseyde'," English Language Notes 14 (1976): 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30153106

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154135
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Statkiewicz Max
Abstract: The article resituates Ricur's theory of métaphore vive in the contemporary context of the so-called "cognitive revolution." The latter denomination is highly misleading. There is nothing revolutionary about the cognitivist study of metaphor as a general pattern of thought; just like the discipline of rhetoric that was already on the decline in l8th century Europe, it is conservative in its validation of everyday, ideologically charged language as the model for all language, including that of poetry and art. Riceur’s conception of "live metaphor," on the other hand, does justice to the "revolutionary" character of poetic language, its function of breaking the order of "commonplaces we live by"—and are ruled by. A "poem in miniature," metaphor constitutes the model for any "poietic," creative imagination. Resulting from a clash, disturbing the common everyday language, live metaphor (and poetry in general) projects a world in such a way as to render strange and thus question the world we live in.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154140

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154168
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Weidler Markus
Abstract: While the Dialectic of Enlightenment (1944; 1947) is often judged to be too limited a cultural critique, it is still widely accepted as pioneering cultural criticism, a mix of critical discourse analysis, hermeneutics, and semiotics. This article contests this reputation by turning to a source that Horkheimer and Adorno are at pains to occlude: Ernst Cassirer's Philosophy of Symbolic Forms (1923-29). Drawing on the tradition of eighteenth-century German Christology revived by the Young Hegelians in general and F.W.J. Schelling in particular, Cassirer evolves a critical strategy broader than that in the Dialectic, yet clearly implied by it. Most particularly, Cassirer's Schelling analysis discriminates philosophy, art, and religion as forms of knowledge and forms of epistemological critique, where Horkheimer and Adorno recast the art of the Bildungsbürger to occlude Cassirer's innovation, a new materialist semiotics that offers cultural critique in the broader terms that the Dialectic's critics would favor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154174

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30157601
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Christensen Peter G.
Abstract: Verein der Freunde einer Schwulen Museum, Eldorado: Homosexuelle Frauen und Männer in Berlin 1850- 1950: Geschichte, Alltag, und Kultur. (Berlin: Froelich & Kaufmann, 1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30157608

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30161639
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Konzett Matthias
Abstract: Günter Kunert, "Der Sturz vom Sockel," Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung 3 Sep- tember 1991: 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30161649

Journal Title: Osiris
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i213340
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Dominique
Abstract: Rancière, Les noms de l'histoire (cit. n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/301969

Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203516
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Aggor F. Komla
Abstract: Artaud opts for lunacy, Nieva always emerges with "la risa" in the midst of tragedy (Barrajón 16)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203531

Journal Title: Keats-Shelley Journal
Publisher: Keats-Shelley Association of America
Issue: i30210332
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Murphy John F.
Abstract: Reading Paul de Man Reading, ed., Lindsay Walters and Wlad Godzich (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 155-70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30210343

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222215
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Harth Dietrich
Abstract: C. Geertz: The Interpreation of Cultures. Selected Essays, New York 1973. Ders.: Local Know- ledge. Further Essays in Interpretive Anthropology, New York 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222224

Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222610
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Forsyth Neil
Abstract: God who can both love and hate (1.5 - 8.32)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222613

Journal Title: Contemporary Religions in Japan
Publisher: International Institute for the Study of Religions
Issue: i30233022
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Ching Julia
Abstract: Ibid., p. 382.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233024

Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Rhodes Robert F.
Abstract: SEKIGUCHI 1968, 90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233812

Journal Title: Israel Studies
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i30245669
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Glasner-Heled Galia
Abstract: Among the prominent writers on the Holocaust, Yehiel Dinur, who wrote under the pseudonym Ka-Tzetnik, offers his readers the most horrific, almost unbearable reading experience. This article examines the reader-writer relationship in Holocaust literature by considering whether readers of Ka-Tzetnik’s works are able, in Ricoeur's terms, to appropriate or actualize the meaning of a literary text that discloses a mode of "being-in-the-world" that is intensely unbearable and seemingly inexpressible. Interviews were conducted with a group of people who, through their professions as writer, literary scholar, educator, or historian, are concerned with such issues. Two main responses to Ka-Tzetnik were discerned: Some readers perceive him as so warped by his experiences that his extreme, even "insane", vision actually stands as a barrier between the reader and the reality of the Holocaust. For others, it is precisely the unrestrained portrayal of the insane Holocaust reality that is identified with an unmediated "true" Holocaust experience. The first group of readers does not believe that Ka-Tzetnik’s texts can be appropriated. But the reading experience of the second group can also not be characterized as appropriation: for them Ka-Tzetnik creates a primarily emotional core experience, which cannot be deconstructed to reconstruct or actualize the text in the reader's own terms, in the present. The case of Ka-Tzetnik, therefore, raises the difficult question of whether the Holocaust can be understood through a dialogical process of deconstruction and appropriation, or whether Holocaust literature should offer an overwhelming, totalizing experience in which precisely the inability to deconstruct and appropriate the text ensures the communication of the inconceivable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30245675

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213389
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Hintikka Meili
Abstract: Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism, 82. 82
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303361

Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213407
Date: 7 1, 1964
Author(s): Strachey Daniel T.
Abstract: "Analysis Terminable and Interminable," in The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, trans. and ed. James Strachey, vol. 23 (London: Hogarth Press, 1964), 211-15, esp. 211 Strachey Analysis Terminable and Interminable 211 The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud 1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303799

Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i353371
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Derrida Peter W.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida, "Différance," trans. Alan Bass, repr. in Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle, eds., Critical Theory since 1965 (Tallahassee, Fla., 1986), p. 121. Derrida Différance 121 Critical Theory since 1965 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3040976

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Goldbard Michael S.
Abstract: Arlene Goldbard, "Let Them Eat Pie: Philanthropy ;i la Mode," Tzkkun, xi, no. 4, July-Aug. 1996. Goldbard 4 xi Tzkkun 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046227

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Hung Robert S.
Abstract: idem, Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and Architecture, Stanford, Calif., 1995, 18-24 Hung 18 Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and Architecture 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046228

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354352
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Geertz Larry
Abstract: Time and Narrative, i, Chicago, 1984 i Time and Narrative 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051038

Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354358
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Warnock Jack
Abstract: Spitz (as in n. 75)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051153

Journal Title: Law & Society Review
Publisher: Law and Society Association
Issue: i354567
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Silbey Susan S.
Abstract: The authors outline a sociology of narrative-an analysis of the role of narrative in various social contexts, including academic sociolegal scholarship. Narratives are social acts that depend for their production and cognition on norms of performance and content that specify when, what, how, and why stories are told. Because narratives are situationally produced and interpreted, they have no necessary political or epistemological valence but depend on the particular context and organization of their production for their political effect. The analysis specifies the variable conditions that produce hegemonic tales-stories that reproduce existing relations of power and inequity-and subversive stories-narratives that challenge the taken-for-granted hegemony by making visible and explicit the connections between particular lives and social organization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3054010

Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i354683
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Zbikowski Martin
Abstract: Rowell as "empathy ... 'to be at heart with"' (1982:328) 328
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3060769

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i355724
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Zehfuss K. M.
Abstract: Walker's (1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3096092

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356101
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Lipietz Philip
Abstract: Alain Lipietz, Mirages and Miracles (London, 1987) Lipietz Mirages and Miracles 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3105717

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356114
Date: 1 1, 1936
Author(s): de Havilland Eric
Abstract: G. de Havilland, "'Filled' Resins and Aircraft Construction," Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 3 (1936): 356-57. De Havilland concluded, based on preliminary research, that it was "likely that synthetic resins may one day play an important part in aircraft construction" (p. 357) de Havilland 356 3 Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences 1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3106748

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i356660
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Adorno Michael
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Problems of Moral Philosophy, ed. Thomas SchriSder, trans. Rodney Livingstone (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000) 70. Adorno 70 Problems of Moral Philosophy 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3115175

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i356737
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wendt Tim
Abstract: Huntington 1991, esp. 85ff 85
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3117924

Journal Title: Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association
Publisher: American Philosophical Association
Issue: i357241
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Strupp Adolf
Abstract: Erik Erikson's (1954)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3131186

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i358721
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Bem Laurie F.
Abstract: Bem, The Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality (New Haven, Conn., 1993) Bem The Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3168841

Journal Title: History in Africa
Publisher: African Studies Association
Issue: i358795
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Shillingsburg David
Abstract: Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age (Athens, Ga., 1986), esp. 31-43 Shillingsburg 31 Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3171834

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i358812
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Weaver William
Abstract: David Tracy, "Literary Theory and the Return of the Forms of Naming and Thinking God in Theology," Journal of Religion 74, no. 3 (1994): 302-19 10.2307/1204490 302
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3172234

Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i358910
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Daly Gayle
Abstract: "The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the Mother," to be published in Narrating Mothers, ed. Brenda O. Daly and Maureen Reddy (Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1991), in press Daly The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the Mother Narrating Mothers 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3174512

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359033
Date: 11 1, 1992
Author(s): Drewal Amy
Abstract: Margaret Thomson Drewal, Yoruba Ritual: Performers, Play, Agency (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992), pp. 1-11. Drewal 1 Yoruba Ritual 1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176407

Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359009
Date: 11 1, 1994
Author(s): Sahlins Aletta
Abstract: Sahlins, "Goodbye to Tristes Tropes." Sahlins Goodbye to Tristes Tropes
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176685

Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i359415
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lukes Samuel
Abstract: Anti-Dühring in Steven Lukes, Marxism and Morality (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985), 11. Lukes Anti-Dühring 11 Marxism and Morality 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3182503

Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i359415
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Husserl Edith
Abstract: Edmond Husserl, Meditations cartésiennes, trans. Gabrielle Pfeiffer and Emmanuel Levinas (Paris: Vrin, 1969), 19. Husserl 19 Meditations cartésiennes 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3182508

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: American Theatre Association
Issue: i360879
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Ehrenzweig Wolfgang
Abstract: Anton Ehrenzweig, The Hidden Order of Art (Berkeley and Los Angeles, 1971) pp. 22 f. Ehrenzweig 22 The Hidden Order of Art 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3207214

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360925
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Bakhtin Jeanette R.
Abstract: Mikhail Bakhtin, The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays, ed. Michael Holquist, trans. Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1981), 427. Bakhtin 427 The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3208808

Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360920
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Stanton B.
Abstract: Great Reckonings, 8 8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3209015

Journal Title: Near Eastern Archaeology
Publisher: American Schools of Oriental Research
Issue: i361138
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Stager J. David
Abstract: Current scholarship has jettisoned much of Albright's view of early "Israel" as a collective entity with a distinctive ethnic identity. Nonetheless, the author argues that the "Albrightian approach" of a synthetic overview of cultural developments has not been exhausted. But how can we achieve such in today's intellectual climate? Schloen critiques Albright's holistic and idealist cultural typology as well as the models presented by radical postmodernism and the so-called "human ecosystem paradigm." Instead he argues that the answer is to be found in a methodologically individualist model à la Max Weber.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3210900

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i361202
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Celan Michael G.
Abstract: Collected Prose 48 48 Collected Prose
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3211128

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362068
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): Lefort Dominique
Abstract: Ibid., 52. 52
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3229219

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362155
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Opitz Ellis
Abstract: Opitz and Sebba, eds., Philosophy of Order. Opitz Philosophy of Order
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232806

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362311
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Lukács William M.
Abstract: "Han- nah Arendt's Communications Concept of Power," Social Research 44, no. 1 (Spring 1977): pp. 3-25 1 3 44 Social Research 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234279

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362307
Date: 12 1, 1962
Author(s): Mehta Hwa Yol
Abstract: Civilization and Its Discontents, trans. and ed. James Strachey (New York: Norton, 1962), p. 92. 92 Civilization and Its Discontents 1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234445

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362333
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, ed. and trans. by J. B. Thompson (Cambridge: Cambridge Uni- versity Press, 1981) Ricoeur Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234573

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362346
Date: 10 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides William
Abstract: Ibid., p. 27. 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234923

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362373
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Stites Alison
Abstract: Kathryn Sikkink, "Codes of Conduct: The WHO/UNICEF Case," Inter- national Organization, 40 (Autumn 1986): 815-40. 10.2307/2706830 815
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234960

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362361
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Selznick Dean C.
Abstract: p. 4
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235049

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362393
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Somers Rudra
Abstract: Since contending methodological perspectives and different types of research products are founded on irreconcilable philosophical assumptions, the sharp, recurrent debates over social science research methods are likely to be fruitless and counterproductive. This article begins by exposing some of the philosophical assumptions underlying the most recent calls for a unified social science methodology and seeks to help develop a common appreciation of how different kinds of methods and research products advance our understanding of different aspects of social life at different levels of abstraction. Such commonly posited dichotomies as deductivist/inductivist logic, quantitative/qualitative analysis, and nomothetic/idiographic research products are shown to obscure significant differences along a continuum of strategies through which context-bound information and analytic constructs are combined to produce interpretations of varying degrees of complexity or generality. Durkheim's conception of "organic solidarity" in a social "division of labor" serves as a useful metaphor here to capture the complementary roles performed by various research products as well as the trade-offs arising from the strengths and weaknesses of various methodological approaches (ranging from formal and statistical approaches to various case-based and interpretive approaches). Thus, sharp claims regarding the strengths and limitations of particular methods are transformed into elements of an overarching agnostic understanding of the trade-offs and complementarities among these methods. Finally, a distinctive role is identified for an ideal-typical "middle-range" comparative-historical approach in fostering greater communication among a more inclusively defined community of methodologically diverse social scientists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235291

Journal Title: Artibus Asiae
Publisher: Museum Rietberg Zurich
Issue: i363249
Date: 1 1, 1955
Author(s): Cowell Ratan
Abstract: Cowell, The Jātaka, vol. 1, 44-45. Cowell 44 I The Jātaka
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3249764

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i363325
Date: 1 1, 1880
Author(s): Spitta James
Abstract: 'Die Wiederbelebung', 57 57 Die Wiederbelebung
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3250669

Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i363380
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Bernstein Eric
Abstract: Michael Bernstein, Foregone Conclusions (Berkeley: UC Press, 1994) 29. Bernstein 29 Foregone Conclusions 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3251603

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364378
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): Petuchowski Krister
Abstract: "One Canon is Enough" in that volume One Canon is Enough
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3260310

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364390
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): Noth Ronald S.
Abstract: annual meeting of the Society of Biblical Literature, December 1984 Annual meeting of the Society of Biblical Literature, December 1984 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3260551

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364571
Date: 6 1, 1895
Author(s): Rad David Winston
Abstract: von Rad, Old Testament Theology, 1.421-22 and 428 Rad 421 1 Old Testament Theology
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3266064

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364576
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Brueggemann Walter
Abstract: Walter Brueggemann, "At the Mercy of Babylon: A Subversive Rereading of the Empire:" JBL 110 (1991) 3-22 10.2307/3267146 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3266779

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364607
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Payne Paul R.
Abstract: Payne, "Old Testament Exegesis"; idem, "Characteristic Word-Play." Payne Old Testament Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3267083

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364616
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Moore Robert L.
Abstract: Moore, Literary Criticism, 161-63 Moore 161 Literary Criticism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3267743

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364637
Date: 12 1, 1963
Author(s): Horsley Alan
Abstract: Horsley, "Ethics and Exe- gesis," 17 Horsley 17 Ethics and Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268071

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364634
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): BakhtinAbstract: OT: The God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God (Nashville: Abingdon, forth- coming) The God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268094

Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364632
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Childs Michael H.
Abstract: R. P. Carroll's theory of "cognitive dissonance" ("Ancient Israelite Prophecy and Dissonance Theory," in The Place Is Too Small for Us, ed. Gordon, 377-91)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268153

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364779
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Widengren Walter H.
Abstract: Jes P. Asmussen, "'Manichaeism," in Historia Religionum. op. cit., pp. 580-610
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269640

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364805
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Scopello Ingvild Sælid
Abstract: Turner, 1969, p. 200.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269891

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364806
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): Kinsley Larry D.
Abstract: Kinsley, The Sword and The Flute, p. 125. Kinsley 125 The Sword and The Flute
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269953

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364847
Date: 1 1, 1946
Author(s): Gerth Hans G.
Abstract: Hans H. Gerth/C. Wright Mills, From Max Weber p. 155. Gerth 155 From Max Weber
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270324

Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364859
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Shepherd Hugh B.
Abstract: Shepherd, Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend, Hyde Park: University Books 1970, vii-viii. Shepherd vii Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270489

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273470
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Minow Steven L.
Abstract: Minow, The Supreme Court 1986 Term - Foreword: Justice Engendered, 101 HARV. L. REV.10 (1987) Minow 10 101 HARV. L. REV. 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312131

Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273485
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): DeWolf Steven D.
Abstract: Jefferson, supra note 11, at 958 958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312322

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274774
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Young Jon W.
Abstract: Whose perspective is reflected in ethnographic accounts is the enduring problem in bringing ethnographic observation forward in the construction of ethnographies. Both ethnographic research and modes of account display a liminal character that puts this problem in a more organizational perspective on their heterogeneous authority and unites doing ethnography and constructing ethnographies in similar ontological ambiguities arising in the social organization of communication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317352

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274774
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Ury Jane M.
Abstract: This paper addresses several problems in experimental ethnographies: the integration of first- and third-person texts, ethnographic authority, and incorporation of dialogue in ethnographies. These problems can be traced to a relationship between discourse and text that hinges on splitting subject/object and process/product. Both splits are antithetical to dialogue in defining relationships between self and social life. A dialogic approach is developed through use of indexing in social distance, and discussed in Japanese usage of register. Implications for intersubjective, reflexive, and pluralistic approaches to social life are traced out.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317353

Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274773
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Wolf Robert C.
Abstract: Many contemporary sources, including anthropological, define politics as the vying for power that occurs in the public domain, the goverance of the body politic, or strategies for advancing particular interests as general. While not inaccurate in terms of reflecting politics in the modern state, the instrumental notion often excludes a sense of politics that involves a struggle for mutual recognition or consensus through the medium of discourse. Discourse becomes the central concept in grasping the relation between politics and secret societies among the peasantry. It is argued in this essay that politics displayed through discourse goes a long way towards defining the public in peasant societies. In terms of augmented repression, either from a centralized state or local elites, the sense of public submerges itself in the hidden discourse or code of the secret society. This theme is examined with respect to the Mau Mau of Kenya and late nineteenth and twentieth-century Chinese secret societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317495

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274954
Date: 9 1, 1963
Author(s): Marx Pierre
Abstract: MARX (K.), Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte, Paris, Ed. Sociales, 1963, p. 13. Marx 13 Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3320234

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i275032
Date: 3 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Francis
Abstract: Boudon (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321487

Journal Title: Publius
Publisher: Center for the Study of Federalism
Issue: i366482
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Zashin William H.
Abstract: Zashin and Chapman, "Uses of Metaphor and Analogy," p. 294. Zashin 294 Uses of Metaphor and Analogy
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3329753

Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275763
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Yankelovich Donald
Abstract: 1977b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3340198

Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275803
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): WittgensteinAbstract: Baldus, 1990a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341193

Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275834
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Zola Tanya
Abstract: Minnich (1990)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341823

Journal Title: Indonesia
Publisher: Cornell University
Issue: i367402
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Gadamer Razif
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Problem of Historical Consciousness," in Interpretive Social Science, ed. Paul Rabinow and William Sullivan (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979), p. 152. Gadamer The Problem of Historical Consciousness 152 Interpretive Social Science 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3351308

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276939
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Donald Edward L.
Abstract: Johnson, Racial Critiques, supra note 6, at 155-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480700

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276943
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Meisels Paolo
Abstract: supra note 232, at 83-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480757

Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276929
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Kagay Steven L.
Abstract: Id. at 8, col. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480802

Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i277409
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Yang Anna
Abstract: In this paper we present an analysis of the articles in Educational Studies in Mathematics since 1990. It is part of a larger project looking at the production and use of theories of teaching and learning mathematics. We outline the theoretical framework of our tool of analysis and discuss briefly some of the methodological difficulties we face. We then present our findings from the analysis of the journal and we also give one example of how we 'read' an article, illustrating the rules whereby criteria are applied.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3483104

Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284497
Date: 1 1, 1946
Author(s): Sinclair T. J.
Abstract: The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri, ed. and trans. by John D. Sinclair, 3 vols (London: Bodley Head, 1946), III, 74-75 Sinclair 74 III The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri 1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509375

Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284834
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Zuck W. Widick
Abstract: This paper examines the professionalization of religious research in the United States and related topics. Because professional societies illumine value orientations and practices among workers in a given field, the nature of the American Catholic Sociological Society, the American Society of Christian Ethics, the Religious Research Association, and the Society for the Scientific Study of Religion are briefly considered. The differential appropriation of religious research in various ecclesiastical bodies, the problem of funding religious research in the American situation, and the shift in emphasis from a pragmatic problem-solving approach focused on institutional survival to a more theoretical approach to the understanding of religious phenomena are discussed. The bifurcation between persons interested in religious research trained under theological faculties and those trained under social science faculties is noted. Likely future lines of development in theory and research are projected.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510319

Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i368708
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Yaroshevsky Peter
Abstract: This essay explores the notion of meaning, particularly as applied to acts of producing and reading texts. The analysis is grounded in principles of activity theory and cultural semiotics and focuses on the ways in which reading takes place among readers and texts in a culturally mediated, codified experience characterized here as the "transactional zone." The author builds on Vygotsky's work to argue that meaning comes through a reader's generation of new texts in response to the text being read. As a means of accounting for this phenomenon, examples are provided from studies illustrating, for instance, Vygotsky's zones of meaning, the dialogic role of composing during a reading transaction, and the necessity of culturally constructed subjectivity in meaning construction. The author concludes by locating meaning in the transactional zone in which signs become tools for extending or developing concepts and the richness of meaning coming from the potential of a reading transaction to generate new texts. "When I use a word," Humpty Dumpty said in a rather scornful tone, "it means just what I choose it to mean-neither more nor less." (Lewis Carroll, Through the Looking Glass)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3516069

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: American Musicological Society
Issue: i369130
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Hansell Martha
Abstract: K. Hansell, "Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro," 1:114 Hansell 114 1 Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3519834

Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282488
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Yang Isabel
Abstract: Niethammer, 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541155

Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i369292
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Zigmond Alanah
Abstract: Great Basin ethnography contains little information concerning rock art, suggesting that much of it is pre-Numic. The presence of historic rock art, however, should permit differences between pre-Numic and Numic populations to be identified. Anthropological theory suggests pioneer groups use ritual to socialize the landscape. Rock art may also be associated with colonizing groups to secure access to new resources. Numic populations seem to have responded to pre-Numic rock art through modification of the art. Once the landscape had been re-socialized rock art was generally avoided. This explains why rock art production became sporadic, and memory of it lost. /// La etnografía de Great Basin contiene poca información del arte rupestre, sugiriendo que mucho del este arte en roca es pre-Numic. La presencia del arte rupestre histórico debe identificar diferencias entre poblaciones pre-Numic y Numic. La teoría antropológica sugiere que grupos pioneros realizaron rituales de socialización en el paisaje. El arte rupestre estaría asociado con la colonización de grupos, para afianzar acceso a nuevos recursos. Las poblaciones Numic parecen haber respondido al arte pre-Numic a través de la modificación del arte. Una vez que el paisaje se había resocializado, el arte rupestre generalmente se evitó. Esto explica porqué la producción del arte rupestre fue esporádica, y su memoria se perdió.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3557085

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i369322
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Samuels Vera
Abstract: Ibid., 133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3557481

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369550
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Jirn Rüsen, Introduction: "Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse," in Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate, ed. Jörn Rüsen (New York: Berghahn Books, 2002), 1- 14 Rüsen Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse 1 Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590639

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369549
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Davidson Tor Egil
Abstract: idem, Essays on Actions and Events (New York: Oxford University Press, 1980), quotation from 230-231 Davidson 230 Essays on Actions and Events 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590646

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369553
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Benda A. Dirk
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958). Benda The Betrayal of the Intellectuals 1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590818

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369545
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Danto F. R.
Abstract: Historical Experience (Stanford: Stanford University Press, forthcoming)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590864

Journal Title: Journal of Anthropological Research
Publisher: University of New Mexico
Issue: i286652
Date: 4 1, 1972
Author(s): Yang Barbara
Abstract: Beginning in the 1970s there has been a shift in cultural anthropological methodology from participant observation toward the observation of participation. During participant observation ethnographers attempt to be both emotionally engaged participants and coolly dispassionate observers of the lives of others. In the observation of participation, ethnographers both experience and observe their own and others' coparticipation within the ethnographic encounter. The shift from the one methodology to the other entails a representational transformation in which, instead of a choice between writing an ethnographic memoir centering on the Self or a standard monograph centering on the Other, both the Self and Other are presented together within a single narrative ethnography, focused on the character and process of the ethnographic dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3630581

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i370063
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Fabian Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3650070

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370115
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wrigley Trevor J.
Abstract: In this article, I reflect upon and attempt to understand the changing theoretical nature of post-World War II Anglo-American economic geography. In particular, I contrast the kind of theorizing that first occurred in the discipline during the 1950s with the very different kind now carried out under what has been called the "cultural turn" or the "new economic geography." I argue that, during this transition, not only did the use of specific theories alter, but the very idea and practice of theorization also changed. I characterize the phases of this movement by using the terms "epistemological" and "hermeneutic theorizing," defined on the basis of works by pragmatist philosopher Richard Rorty and science studies writer Donna Haraway. I argue that "epistemological theorizing" best describes the first period of theorization in the discipline around the quantitative revolution of the late 1950s and early 1960s, and that it is bound by the quest for accurate (mirror) representation. In contrast, hermeneutic theorizing describes the kind of theorizing found in the new economic geography, marked by an interpretive mode of inquiry that is reflexive, open-ended, and catholic in its theoretical sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651287

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370141
Date: 5 1, 1999
Author(s): Witt Janet
Abstract: Contemporary African American followers of Sunni Islam are self-consciously articulating a form of eating that they see as liberating them from the heritage of slavery, while also bringing them into conformity with Islamic notions of purity. In so doing, they participate in arguments about the meaning of "soul food," the relation between "Western" materialism and "Eastern" spirituality, and bodily health and its relation to mental liberation. Debates within the African American Muslim community show us how an older anthropological concern with food taboos can be opened up to history and to the experience of the past reinterpreted in terms of the struggles of the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651555

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370165
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Zilberfein Carol A.
Abstract: Despite the abundance of psychological studies on trauma related ills of descendants of historical trauma, and the extensive scholarly work describing the memory politics of silenced traumatic pasts, there has yet to emerge a critical analysis of the constitutive practices of descendants of historical trauma. This article presents an ethnographic account of a support group for descendants of Holocaust survivors, proposing that the discursive frame of intergenerational transmission of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) and support group based narrative practices allow descendants to fashion their sense of self as survivors of the distant traumatic past. The discursive frame of transmitted PTSD acts as both a mnemonic bridge to the past and a mechanism of identity making, as participants narratively reemplot their life stories as having been personally constituted by the distant past. A close ethnographic reading of on-site discursive practices points to how culture ferments to produce narratives, practices and ultimately carriers of memory to both sustain and revitalize historical grand narratives and the cultural scenarios they embed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651794

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370173
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Walkerdine Valerie
Abstract: In this article, I seek to make an intervention in debates between psychological and postmodern anthropology by engaging with the theme of border crossing. I argue that the theme of the border is one that fundamentally instantiates a separation between interior and exterior with respect to subjectivity, itself a fundamental transformation and a painful and difficult border. This is related to a Cartesian distinction critiqued in this article. How the distinction between interior and exterior may be transcended is discussed in relation to examples of transformation from the crossing of class borders to the production and regulation of workers in a globalized and neoliberal economy. I begin with reference to postwar transformations of class with its anxious borders and go on to think about changes in the labor market and how these demand huge transformations that tear apart communities, destroy work-places, and sunder the sense of safety and stability that those gave. Advanced liberalism or neoliberalism brings with it a speeding up of the transformations of liberalism in which subjects are constantly invoked as self-contained, with a transportable self that must be produced through the developmental processes of personality and rationality. This self must be carried like a snail carries a shell. It must be coherent yet mutable, fixed yet multiple and flexible. But this view of the subject covers over the many connections that make subjectivity possible. I conclude by asking what it would mean to rethink this issue of the production of safe spaces beyond an essentialist psychological conception of only one mother-child space, separated from the social world, as having the power to produce feelings of safety? I end the article with an argument for a relational approach to subjectivity and sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651801

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370271
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Durkheim Richard
Abstract: "Author's Preface to Pragmatism," Pragmatism and Other Essays [New York, 1963], 3 Author's Preface to Pragmatism 3 Pragmatism and Other Essays 1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3653870

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370282
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Kuko Paul Richard
Abstract: White (note 1), 173
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654042

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i370519
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Eilberg-Schwartz Jonathan
Abstract: SBL conference in Boston, November 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657400

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oral History Association
Issue: i287256
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Plagens Richard Cándida
Abstract: Kienholz interview, 345.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3675238

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i287269
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Soffer Andrew
Abstract: Soffer, "Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations," 609-610. Soffer 609 Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3675588

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i215719
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): Young Michele
Abstract: Lindbeck (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/370187

Journal Title: Sociological Analysis
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288283
Date: 10 1, 1972
Author(s): Zaretsky Joseph Michael
Abstract: Wallace (1966)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3710444

Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288371
Date: 7 1, 1966
Author(s): WolfAbstract: For the past twenty-five years, a sub-branch of biblical studies has engaged, sometimes rather vigorously, in the pursuit of using sociological methods to understand the Bible. These, often autodidact biblical scholars, have taken over a branch of sociology of religion. The methods they follow in their pursuit of the strange world of the Bible can teach sociology how to retrieve a more critical sociology. The questions they ask would be helpful more generally to sociology of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3711745

Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288375
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Yamane David
Abstract: Josselson and Lieblich 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3712284

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son Ltd
Issue: i288876
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Cole Teresa
Abstract: Figures autres que tropes (1827)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3733997

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288896
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): JonasAbstract: Hans Jonas, The Imperative of Responsibility. In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984). Jonas The Imperative of Responsibility In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3735715

Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288901
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): FreudAbstract: Sigmund Freud, 'Totem and Taboo', The Origins of Religion, trans. by James Strachey (1985; repr. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1990), pp. 217-24 Freud Totem and Taboo 217 The Origins of Religion 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3736859

Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289493
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Hawthorn Martin
Abstract: Cambridge University Press, 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3750586

Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289564
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Cavell Martin
Abstract: S. Cavell, The Claim of Reason: Wittgenstein. Skepticism. Morality and Tragedy (Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1979), 177 Cavell 177 The Claim of Reason: Wittgenstein. Skepticism. Morality and Tragedy 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3752092

Journal Title: College English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i216023
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): John James J.
Abstract: John R. Searle, Speech Acts (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1974, "Rule 3," p. 127. John 127 Speech Acts 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/376494

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290768
Date: 3 1, 1953
Author(s): Carat Pierre
Abstract: Preuves, 23, janvier1953 janvier 23 Preuves 1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3769902

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290807
Date: 9 1, 1974
Author(s): Soljenitsyne Laurent
Abstract: Alexandre Soljenitsyne, l'Archipel du Goulag, Paris, Seuil, 1974 Soljenitsyne l'Archipel du Goulag 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770546

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Delage Christian
Abstract: Christian Delage, - Cinema, history, memory., Persistence of vision (New York), a paraitre Delage Cinema, history, memory Persistence of vision
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771543

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Editions de l'Atelier
Issue: i291756
Date: 12 1, 1974
Author(s): Gutierrez Sabine
Abstract: G. GUTIERREZ, Théologie de la libération, Bruxelles, Lumen Vitae, 1974 Gutierrez Théologie de la libération 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3778953

Journal Title: Journal of Social History
Publisher: Carnegie-Mellon University
Issue: i292585
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Mazet Patricia
Abstract: How did men seduce in seventeenth-century Spanish society? To answer that question this article interweaves the classic seventeenth-century tale "The Playboy [Deceiver] of Seville" with the love letters written by Spanish men subsequently identified as seducers in breach of promise suits in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century Mexico. It defines seduction's central psychological dynamic as men's open declarations of emotional vulnerability to women. By acknowledging their subservience to and dependence upon women from the very outset, men reversed the classic gender hierarchy of Spanish society. This reversal also openly expressed itself in men's inversion of racial, social, generational categories for themselves. The cultural construct of seduction in Spanish society is also shown to be more complex than it appears on the surface, and more susceptible to manipulation by both men and women.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3788779

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i371167
Date: 11 1, 2005
Author(s): Berliner David
Abstract: Memory, persistence, and cultural transmission are hot topics in anthropology today. Contributing to an increasing anthropological interest in youth agency, in this article I invite readers to look at youth as a crucial site for understanding issues of religious memory and cultural transmission. In the past five decades, Bulongic people (Guinea-Conakry) have undergone significant religious changes caused by the introduction of Islam, which has led to the official disappearance of pre-Islamic rituals. In this article, I explore how young Bulongic remember a pre-Islamic past that they have never experienced. I argue that, to understand how they assimilate and perpetuate this religious heritage, one must examine the subtle processes of intergenerational transmission through which their memories are dynamically shaped.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3805349

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i290886
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Whitford Robyn
Abstract: Is history a category of reason, or is reason a category of history? These opposing questions have divided the structuralist from the materialist-but neither question is wrong. Analysis of the logic of oppositions challenges feminism, in particular, to find a logic-and a poetics-in which to render its values without historical or theoretical naiveté. I explore the question of the timing of feminism through Julia Kristeva and Luce Irigaray.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3810622

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i290900
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Young Greg
Abstract: This article takes up the call of feminist thinkers to reconsider the importance of the utopian. I offer a view of the utopian that is situated, critical, and relevant to transformative politics, a view that is structured by embodiment. To this end, I consider some epistemological and ontological connections of situated utopian thinking that enable us to think the utopian differently. Finally, I argue that this view of the utopian can be found in the political efforts of "integrative feminisms."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3810793

Journal Title: Huntington Library Quarterly
Publisher: Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery
Issue: i292120
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Jacques A. J.
Abstract: Francis Jacques, Difference and Subjectivity (New Haven, Conn., 1991) Jacques Difference and Subjectivity 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3817676

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Indiana University
Issue: i293966
Date: 7 1, 1983
Author(s): Coward John
Abstract: Rosalind Coward, Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality and Social Relations (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983) Coward Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality and Social Relations 1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3827465

Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294267
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Thomas Richard K.
Abstract: Pictures, pp. 238, 264
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831545

Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i371502
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Fraser Heather
Abstract: Russell Fraser, "Shakespeare's Book of Genesis," Comparative Drama25 (1991): 121-28 Fraser 121 25 Comparative Drama 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3844057

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371616
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Borden William
Abstract: Iain Borden, "Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture," in Borden and Dunster, ed., Architecture and the Sites of History, 387-399 Borden Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture 387 Architecture and the Sites of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874104

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371617
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Being and Time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874129

Journal Title: Popular Music
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i371785
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Vianna Jonathon
Abstract: Popular music plays important roles in two related films portraying Brazilian slum life. Based on a 1953 play by Vinícius de Morais, Marcel Camus's 1959 film Orfeu Negro, and a 1999 feature by Brazilian director Carlos Diegues titled Orfeu, augment traditional samba styles with bossa nova and rap, respectively. Interpreting musical style as allegorical texts within fictive landscapes, this paper examines conflation and conflict among musical meanings, Brazilian social histories, and discursive identities marking the twentieth century. Broad aspects of Brazilian political and socio-cultural development are implicated, such as authoritarianism, the politics and sociology of race, technological advances, mass media, and modes of modernisation. Here, bossa nova and rap engage society through reflexive and generative interpretations within a narrative designed to illustrate connections between processes of innovative, trans-national cultural production, myths of national identity, social change, and the powerful role of popular music in film.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3877504

Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i371885
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Scott Sam
Abstract: Joan Wallach Scott, "A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'in- dustrie à Paris, 1847-1848," in Gender and the Politics of History (New York: Colum- bia University Press, 1988), 137. Scott A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'industrie à Paris, 1847-1848 137 Gender and the Politics of History 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3879450

Journal Title: Newsletter: Rhetoric Society of America
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375717
Date: 5 1, 1971
Author(s): YoungAbstract: vegincev, V. Semazjologija.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885137

Journal Title: Rhetoric Society Quarterly
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375814
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): WildeAbstract: lan Wilde, "Surfacings: Reflections on the Epistemology of Late Modernism,' Boundary28 (Winter 1980): 219. Wilde 8 219 2 Boundary 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885293

Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i216523
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): Ricœur Jean
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays in Hermeneutics, ed. by Don Jude (Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1974), p. 300. Ricœur 300 The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays in Hermeneutics 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/391631

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40000340
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Pinnock Sarah K.
Abstract: The Wrath of Jonah (Ruether and Ruether 1989),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40005994

Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40000455
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sizgorich Thomas
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice, 192-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008441

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000458
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Davenport John J.
Abstract: (Scheler 1961, 114).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008665

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000757
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Novak David
Abstract: (Heidegger 1977, 308).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014885

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Religious Ethics, Inc.
Issue: i40000760
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Bernstein John Andrew
Abstract: Shaftesbury's deism, widely representative of eighteenth-century liberal theology, may be profitably viewed as a reaction against Puritanism in particular and Pauline theology in general. Seen from this perspective, it implies, without explicitly asserting, a reduction of moral standards from the infinite conception of moral law characteristic of Protestantism. Shaftesbury showed no appreciation of the need for redemption or forgiveness, and changed the emphasis in religion from devotion to God above all else to a purely anthropocentric morality which God merely supported. But, in spite of the crudity of his theology and the dubious implications of his ethics, Shaftesbury sought to combat some of the harmful psychological effects to which Paulinism might lead when received in the wrong spirit, and manifested genuine religious insight in this effort.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014915

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000773
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Gunnemann Jon P.
Abstract: Accepting MacIntyre's teleological argument that the notion of individual rights is an invention or fiction, the article argues, against MacIntyre, that such a fiction may be interpreted as a creative response to the social requirements of modernity. Such rights language discloses the essential features of modernity but also the underlying teleological and moral structure of all human association. But whether rights language is perceived as a fall from morality or as a creative differentiation of moral language depends on a reading of history and especially on the interpretation of the Enlightenment project. Jürgen Habermas is used for an alternative reading of the Enlightenment and the relation of rights to the normative teleology of language itself. But both readings of history turn out to be theodicies, dependent upon hidden theological assumptions. Whether a society centered on a notion of rights can be governed by teleology can only be answered theologically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015084

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000774
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Jung Patricia Beattie
Abstract: In this essay I argue that childbearing and various kinds of organ donation are morally analogous activities. I argue, further, that the ethos of giftgiving ought to inform our analyses of both of these forms of bodily life support. This reframing of the abortion and organ donation debates yields new insights into two relatively neglected subtopics. First, though frequently asserted, few have demonstrated why bodily life support--especially in the form of childbearing--cannot be morally required. This comparison yields insights into the reasons for such an axiom. Second, while the giving of bodily life support is sometimes exhorted and almost always respected and admired, its intelligibility and political meaningfulness as a moral choice is rarely explored. This analogical wager reveals why one ought to give another bodily life support. In summary, the analogy yields insights crucial to the development of cogent arguments regarding both the grounds for and limits of the responsibility to give bodily life support. Further, the analogy displays the disparity between what has been demanded traditionally of those who are pregnant and of those men (and women) who by virtue of tissue or blood type can offer other forms of bodily life support. The analogy enables reflection on abortion (and organ donation) to develop in a context free of sexist biases. Finally, efforts are made to assess this giftgiving ethos in light of the feminist "hermeneutics of suspicion" regarding arguments which have and can sacralize victimization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015096

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Smith 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015210

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000789
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur's understanding of the relations of faith, love, and hope suggests a unique approach to theological ethics, one that holds fresh promise for bringing together considerations of the good (teleology) and the right (deontology) around the notion of an "economy of the gift." The economy of the gift articulates Ricoeur's distinctively dialectical understanding of the relation of the human and the divine, and the resulting dialectical moral relation of the self and the other. Despite our fallen condition, Ricoeur suggests, we are called by the divine to embrace the radical possibility of the reconciliation of human goods under the requirement of accountability to human diversity and otherness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015286

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000901
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Ferreira M. Jamie
Abstract: footnote 14
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017697

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40000906
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Graber Glenn C.
Abstract: This paper offers a listing of references to religious ethics in recent Anglo-American philosophical literature, organized in terms of a critical analysis of the main lines of argument to be found there. The principal focus is on metaethics, although references are included to other aspects of religious ethics. The author maintains that the case for a logical and/or a linguistic relation between religion and ethics is much stronger than is generally recognized in the philosophical discussions of these issues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017750

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i40000908
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Wallwork Ernest
Abstract: The five main arguments that Freud employs against the love commandment in "Civilization and Its Discontents" are examined in light of the psychological and ethical doctrines they presuppose. Freud's theory of narcissism is explored for its implications regarding psychological egosim, altruism, mutuality, universal love, and equality. A normative response to Freud's critique of the love commandment is sketched.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017771

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000937
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Glover 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018153

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000943
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Young Josiah Ulysses
Abstract: This review essay explores Josiah Young's project of developing a liberatory Pan-Africanism that is attuned to cultural diversity and Victor Anderson's advocacy of postmodern cultural criticism in African-American religious thought. After situating African-American religious thought as a branch of Africana thought, the author examines these two religious thinkers' work as an effort to forge a position on African-American religious thought--including its relation to theology--in an age where even theory is treated as a god that is about to die. At the conclusion, secularism emerges as a religious project that normatively undergirds the methodological dimensions of these works..
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018233

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40001101
Date: 4 1, 1977
Author(s): Winter Gibson
Abstract: The authors distinguish three perspectives to be found in contemporary religious social ethics, which stem from three different views of the source and nature of the ethos: the ontological approach, the actional approach and hermeneutic ontology. They trace the implications of each view for both theory and practice; and they consider the prospects for an integrative discipline of religious social ethics which can accommodate all three perspectives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40020364

Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff
Issue: i40001924
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Schmitz Kenneth L.
Abstract: Models and Metaphors, p. 39 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40036258

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40002077
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Benoît Gerald
Abstract: The field of library and information science (LIS) has built its practice and research perspective on a logico-analytic philosophy, which has generated useful, tangible technologies. Lately there is interest in nonempirical philosophies, such as hermeneutics and critical theory, to fulfill better LIS' service-oriented mission of providing "information" to user populations. One dimension of critical theory, Jürgen Habermas' theory of communicative action, can expand LIS' conception of information and supplement logico-empirical research methods and research practices. This article examines how LIS, particularly research into librarian-patron interaction and information system design, favors an empiricist view of language and, as a consequence, may be limiting its effectiveness. It proposes how the field might expand to include communicative action in fulfilling its mission and research agenda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40039792

Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40002170
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Pettigrove Glen
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Relevance of the Beautiful" (1977), in The Relevance of the Beautiful and Other Essays, Nicholas Walker, trans. (New York: Cambridge, 1986) 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40041031

Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40002604
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Shah Esha
Abstract: several chapters in Shah (n. 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40061431

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40003066
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Roberts Geoffrey
Abstract: E. H. Carr, What is History? (London: Pelican Books, 1964), ch. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40072179

Journal Title: Crítica: Revista Hispanoamericana de Filosofía
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Filosóficas, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México
Issue: i40003536
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Gómez Ambrosio Velasco
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "The Model of the Text: Meaningful Action as a Text", en Fred Dalhmayr y Thomas McCarthy (comps.), Under- standing and Social Inquiry, University of Notre Dame Press, 1977, p. 327.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40104769

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005493
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): del Aguila Tejerina Rafael
Abstract: J. Muguerza, "La crisis de identidad de la filosofía de la identidad (una aproximación teológico-política)", op. cit., p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183055

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183635

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera I. Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 227-228.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183642

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005526
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Donati Pierpaolo
Abstract: P. Donati (1985), cap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183648

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005542
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Baena Enrique Luque
Abstract: (Jaeger, 1960, pp. 315-316).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183985

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005577
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Alastuey Eduardo Bericat
Abstract: El presente artículo expone los principales resultados de una investigación realizada con el objeto de analizar el papel que cumplen las emociones colectivas en el mantenimiento del orden social. En concreto, trata de explicar el hecho de que las noticias más importantes que aparecen en los medios de comunicación sean noticias de horror, es decir, noticias en las que la muerte siempre aparece en el primer plano de la escena. Los informativos de los medios de comunicación expresan y fomentan la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. Ahora bien, para entender esta cultura es preciso determinar previamente la naturaleza emocional del horror, así como establecer una definición sociológica de este sentimiento. El horror es una emoción compleja compuesta por sentimientos de terror, de asco y de conmoción. El horror, sociológicamente, puede entenderse como "la emoción mediante la que un orden social señala sus límites más extremos". El estudio concluye señalando que existen dos modos alternativos de mantener el orden y la cohesión en el seno de un sistema social. El primer modo de legitimación, característico de las sociedades centrípetas, funciona mediante la gran potencia atractiva que ejerce sobre el campo social un núcleo central de valores sociales positivos. El segundo, característico de las sociedades centrífugas, funciona mediante la gran potencia repulsiva que ejercen sobre el campo social las transgresiones flagrantes del orden moral. El modo típico en el que las sociedades centrífugas regulan el orden social explica la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. /// This article sets out the main results obtained from a research study carried out for the purpose of analysing the role that collective emotions play in maintaining social order. In specifíc terms, it attempts to explain the fact that the most important items of news that appear in the media are news of horror, in other words, news in which death always appears in the foreground. The news programmes of the media express and encourage the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies. However, in order to understand this culture, we must first establish the emotional nature of horror and also establish a sociological definition of this feeling. Horror is a complex emotion made up of feelings of terror, disgust and shock. Sociologically speaking, horror can be understood as "the emotion through which a social order indicates its outermost limits". The study concludes showing that there are two alternative ways of maintaining order and cohesión within the bosom of a social system. The first method of legitimation, which is characteristic of centripetal societies, works through the great power of attraction it exerts over the social field of a central nucleus of positive social values. The second, which is characteristic of centrifugal societies, works through the great power of repulsion exerted by flagrant transgressions of moral order over the social field. The typical method in which centrifugal societies regulate social order explains the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184683

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005703
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Epple Angelika
Abstract: Koselleck, Darstellung, Ereignis und Struktur, S. 149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186008

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005704
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Lehmkuhl Ursula
Abstract: Wehler, "Moderne" Politikgeschichte, S. 266.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186015

Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005728
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Dejung Christof
Abstract: Jakob Tanner, Historisch Anthropologie zur Einführung, Hamburg 2004, S. 117-122.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186237

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007183
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Meshel Naphtali S.
Abstract: (the Yoruba sexual taboos, The Savage Mind, 132-33).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211958

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007184
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Lamberth David C.
Abstract: Michael Welker, "Who is Jesus Christ for Us Today?" HTR 95 (2002) 129-46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211970

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007184
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Jackson Michael D.
Abstract: Leslie White, "Autobiography of an Acoma Indian," in New Material from Acoma (Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin 136; Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution, 1943) 301-59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211974

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i40007296
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Ward Ian
Abstract: Skinner, Visions of Politics, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213502

Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i40007298
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): McManus Helen
Abstract: Tracy Strong, "Introduction: The Self and the Political Order", in The Self and the Political Order, ed. Tracy Strong (New York: New York University Press, 1992), 3, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213520

Journal Title: Intégral
Publisher: Department of Music Theory, Eastman School of Music, University of Rochester
Issue: i40007325
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Grabócz Márta
Abstract: Musurgia, vol. III, no. 1, 1996: 73-84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213982

Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i40007683
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Kentish-Barnes Nancy
Abstract: (Pochard et al., 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40217637

Journal Title: Review (Fernand Braudel Center)
Publisher: Fernand Braudel Center, Binghamton University
Issue: i40009276
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Maldonado-Torres Nelson
Abstract: Fanon (1968).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40241551

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers
Issue: i40010625
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Ihde Don
Abstract: This introduction to the special issue of Human Studies on postphenomenology outlines specific developments which have led to this style of phenomenology. Postphenomenology adapts aspects of pragmatism, including its anti-Cartesian program against early modern subject/object epistemology. Postphenomenology retains and emphasizes the use of phenomenological variations as an analytic tool, and in practice postphenomenology takes what is commonly now called "an empirical turn," which deeply analyzes case studies or concrete issues under its purview.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40270637

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers
Issue: i40010631
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Svenaeus Fredrik
Abstract: In this paper I develop a phenomenology of falling ill by presenting, interpreting and developing the basic model we find in Jean-Paul Sartre's Being and Nothingness (1956). The three steps identified by Sartre in this process are analysed, developed further and brought to a five- step model: (1) pre-reflective experience of discomfort, (2) lived, bodily discomfort, (3) suffered illness, (4) disease pondering, and (5) disease state. To fall ill is to fall victim to a gradual process of alienation, and with each step this alienating process is taken to a new qualitative level. Consequently, the five steps of falling ill have not only a contingent chronological order but also a kind of logical order, in that they typically presuppose each other. I adopt Sartre's focus on embodiment as the core ground of the alienation process, but point out that the alienation of the body in illness is not only the experience of a psychic object, but an experience of the independent life of one's own body. This facticity of the body is the result neither of the gaze of the other person, nor of a reflection adopting the outer perspective of the other in an indirect way, but is a result of the very otherness of one's own body, which addresses and plagues us when we fall ill. I use examples of falling ill and being a patient to show how a phenomenology of falling ill can be helpful in educating health-care personnel (and perhaps also patients) about the ways of the lived body.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40270700

Journal Title: The British Journal for the History of Science
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i385381
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Latour J. R. R.
Abstract: New York Times (19 April1987, section 6, p. 42) 19 April 42 New York Times 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4027463

Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i40010994
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: Eagleton (71)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40279364

Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i40011236
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Igreja Victor
Abstract: A. Guebuza, at the time Frelimo candidate for the national presidential elections. Domingo, 15 August 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40283167

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011359
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Dawdy Shannon Lee
Abstract: -Ibid., t. 1, p. 112.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284757

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011857
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: James Clifford, On the Edges of Anthropology: Interviews (Chicago: Prickly Paradigm Press, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294449

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011862
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tussing Nicholas J.
Abstract: Pietro Balan, Gli archivi della S. Sede in relazione alla storia d'Italia. Discorso recitato nella Pontificia accade- mia di religione cattolica di Roma nel giorno 5 maggio 1881 (Rome: Fratelli Monaldi, 1881).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294575

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012105
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Valdés Mario J.
Abstract: Alfred Schutz, The phenomenology of the social world, Northwestern University Press, Evanston, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40298965

Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012152
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Cuarón Beatriz Garza
Abstract: ed. cit., p. 195, nota 28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40300282

Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012913
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Muñoz Adrián
Abstract: Theosophical Transactions, en Thompson, op. cit., p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313753

Journal Title: Philosophy of Music Education Review
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40013929
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Fink-Jensen Kirsten
Abstract: In this paper Kirsten Fink-Jensen suggests how a phenomenological-hermeneutic perspective can contribute to the knowledge of learning and teaching processes in music education in school The philosophical frame is Danish philosophy of life, represented by Knud Ejler Løgstrup, and Merleau-Ponty's philosophy of body, both pointing to the wholeness of mind and body in all kinds of actions. Within this framework interpretation is an epistemological, practical-hermeneutic activity based on different analytical methods. Phenomenologically, experiences of music are constituted in an intertwinement of personal, cultural, and local meaning. The challenge facing the teacher is then to understand what becomes meaningful to persons in a given situation. 'Bodily dialogue' is a metaphor of a hermeneutic process of understanding that highlights the importance of bodily aspects in the teacher's answer to a child's musical attuned articulations. This focus can facilitate children's learning processes and change and qualify the teacher's didactic reflections on the impact and progression of music lessons.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40327268

Journal Title: Oceania
Publisher: University of Sydney
Issue: i40014217
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Telban Borut
Abstract: By focusing on children involved in the ritual practices in Ambonwari village, East Sepik Province, Papua New Guinea, this essay compares two types of ritual: that of healing and that of male initiation. Like other life crisis rituals both deal with two dimensions of the Ambonwari life-world, that is with the living and the dead and, in a broader sense, with people and spirits. Though both are based upon the same cosmology there are fundamental differences between them. First, healers in healing ceremonies treat uninitiated children as 'non-beings'. From the perspective of Ambonwari 'selves' or 'beings', children belong to this domain. They exist as extensions of their parents or carers, from whom they cannot be separated conceptually. Second, by examining the Ambonwari concepts of negation I show that healers do not approach the domain of cosmological non-existence: they are not concerned with the cosmogony of the Ambonwari life-world. The male initiation rituals do just the opposite, however. It is only in the male initiation ritual, seen as a cosmogonic event, that young boys are cut off from their parents and 'thrown' abruptly into a state of becoming. Unlike the healing rites, these rituals treat young boys as both Ambonwari beginnings and Ambonwari beings. I argue that Ambonwari initiation rituals are not concerned with symbolic death followed by rebirth, but with states of being. Initiation means that death becomes possible for a child. The initiated boy will now be able to die as an Ambonwari being.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40331578

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014376
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): de Lima Vaz Henrique C.
Abstract: Walz, A., Saint Thomas d'Aquin (adapt, fr. par Paul Nova- rina) (Philosopfoes médiévaux, V), Publ. Univereitaires /B. Nauwelaerts, Louvaln-Parls, 1962, pp. 21-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335269

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014383
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): de Sousa Alves V.
Abstract: H. G.,Hubbeling, Language, Logic and Criterion, Born-Publ., Amster- dam, 1971.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335424

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014387
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Silva Carlos Henrique Do Carmo
Abstract: SADZIK, Joseph, EsthStiqne de Martin Heidegger, «Encyclopédie universitaire* Paris Ed. Universitaires, 1963, 216 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335497

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014407
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: W. Biemel em Les phases decisi- ves dans le développement de la philosophie de Husserl, in «Husserl, Cahiers de Royau- mont, Philosophie n.° III», Paris, Les Éditions de Minuit 1959, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335863

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014411
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: "Wir bestimmen den Begriff der Situation eben dadurch; dass sie einen Standort dar- stellt, der die Möglickeiten des Sehens beschränkt. Zum Begriff der Situation gehört daher wesenhaft der Begriff des Horizontes", p. 286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335935

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014411
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Fidalgo António
Abstract: Spiegelberg H., 1960, págs. 168-227.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335938

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014414
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: Entretiens Paul-Ricoeur Gabriel Marcel, pp. 63-64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335968

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014415
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Genís Octavi Fullat
Abstract: MERLEAU-PONTY, Phénoménologie de la perception; Paris, 1945; pág. 498.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335977

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014421
Date: 6 1, 1989
Author(s): Do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: Occam: T 5.47321 e 3.328:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336050

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014422
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Borges Paulo Alexandre Esteves
Abstract: para tudo quanto aqui expressamos, St.° Agostinho, De Trinitate. XIII, 13-14, 17-18, e XIII, 17-18 e 22-23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336062

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: L'homme faillible, p. 54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336077

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: HN. 614-615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336079

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Costa Miguel Dias
Abstract: KRISHNAMURTI, La révolution du silence, Ed. Stock, Paris, 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336081

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014441
Date: 3 1, 1982
Author(s): Lourenço Menuel
Abstract: It is here proposed the elimination of the concept of truth in analytical construction by substituting for it the concept of terminal evidence of an assertion. Terminal evidence is in turn explained in terms of anschauliche non-deterministic sequences and portions of finitist logic generated by these sequences are sketched both for statements without quantifiers and statements with first order quantifiers. Emphasis is given to the nature of negation and existence in the proposed elimination. /// Es wird vorgeschlagen, die Eliminierung des Wahrheitsbegriffes in der analytischen Konstruktion durch die Einsetzung des Begriffes der endgultigen Evidenz einer Aussage durchzufuhren. Bei der Einfuhrung von anschaulichen akausalen Folgen lasst sich der Begriff der endgultigen Evidenz erklaren und Teile der finiten Logik, die solche Folgen erzeugen, werden skizziert sowohl fur Aussagen ohne Quantoren als auch fur solche, bei denen nur Quantoren der ersten Stufe vorkommen. Die Natur der Negation und des Existenz-Begriffes ist insbesondere hervorgehoben. /// É proposto efectuar-se a eliminação do conceito de verdade na construção analitica pela introdução do conceito da evidência terminal de uma asserção. Com a introdução de sucessões não-deterministas é elucidado o conceito de evidência terminal e os fragmentos de lógica finitista que estas sucessões originam são esboçados quer para o caso de asserçães sem quantores quer para aquelas asserções em que só ocorrem quantores de 1.a ordem. A natureza da negação e do conceito da existência são especialmente destacados.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336506

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014452
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Vila-Chà Joào
Abstract: Rilke: «Quem justamente estima e celebra a morte, magnifica a vida».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336818

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014462
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Virgoulay René
Abstract: A. CAMUS, Essais, Paris Gallimard 1965, p. 708.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337044

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014464
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: S. BRETON, "Examen particulier", in: L. GI ARD, ed., Philosopher par passion etpar raison -S. Breton, Grenoble, J. Millon, 1990, pp. 8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337098

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014471
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Borges Paulo Alexandre Esteves
Abstract: Ibid., III. 1,3, 8 e 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337203

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014472
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Viana Maria Lucília Machado
Abstract: Idem, p. 54-56.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337223

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Sacadura Carlos Alexandre Bellino A.
Abstract: H. I. MARROU op. cit, p. 234
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337344

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: ZUCKERT, Catherine H. -Postmodern Platos: Nietz- sche, Heidegger, Gadamer, Strauss, Derrick. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337577

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: "L'Europe et la philosophic politique", in Revue Internationale de Philosophie Poli- tique, n° 1, Outubro 1991 [n° especial -"L'Europe"], pp. 7, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337579

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Silva Maria Luísa Portocarrero
Abstract: Das Erbe Europas, 173:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337580

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Renaud François
Abstract: Bolgar (1954, 389),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337582

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: KSI,67,461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337583

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Duque João
Abstract: J. Duque, "Apocalíptica e teologia na pós-modernidade" in: Cendculo 150 (1999)404-425.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337585

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Carr Thomas K.
Abstract: Gadamer, The Beginning and the Beyond, p. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337586

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: S. Freud, 'Remembering, Repeating, and Working-Through' in The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, Hogarth Press, London, 1955, Vol 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337638

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Queiruga Andrés Torres
Abstract: De hecho, en una ocasión he hablado ya de "finitud histórica" (El Dios de Jesús. Aproxi- mación en cuatro metáforas, ed. Sal Terrae, Santander 1991, 25).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337641

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Splett Jörg
Abstract: Joh 16, 23],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337654

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014496
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Pellegrini Angelo
Abstract: HD 71-72, nn. 57-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337721

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Borges-Duarte Irene
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "La Psychanalyse et le mouvement de la culture contemporaine", Le Conflit des Interprétations, Paris, Seuil, 1969.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337738

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Drawin Carlos Roberto
Abstract: Heidegger, Martin. Unterwegs zur Sprache. Pfullingen, Güther Neske, 1971, p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337739

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Casalla Mario
Abstract: G.I. Roth, FCE, México, 1954,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337740

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Frick Eckhard
Abstract: Arguing that the times of scientistic criticism of psychoanalysis are past and that psychoanalysis is now open to new intellectual and scientific horizons, the article aims at showing how the recent developments of neurobiology, cognitive psychology, as well as new theories of therapeutic change in psychoanalysis support a reformulation of the psychoanalytic unconscious. The author defends that the obvious terminological confusion between the neurobiological and cognitive non-conscious on the one hand and the dynamic unconscious, on the other, require clear definitions of differences and of commonalities. Furthermore, the author also develops the idea that the dimensions of awareness and of selfascription (avowal/disavowal) help to determine what is the core of the dynamic unconscious, even though the cognitive non-conscious and the psychoanalytic unconscious overlap to a great extent. The article shows, finally, how a new interdisciplinary consensus offers now a chance for us to recognize the shortcomings of a rationalistic philosophy of mind. /// Argumentando que os tempos de uma crítica da psicanálise a partir do cientismo já passaram e que a psicanálise está agora aberta a novos horizontes intelectuais e científicos, o artigo pretende mostrar até que ponto os desenvolvimentos mais recentes da neurobiologia, da psicologia cognitiva bem como das novas teorias da mudança terapêutica em psicanálise suportam uma reformulação do inconsciente psicanalítico. O autor defende que a óbvia confusão terminológica entre o não-consciente neurobiológico e cognitivo por um lado e o inconsciente dinâmico por outro requerem definições claras das diferenças e dos aspectos comuns. Além disso, o autor desenvolve também a ideia de que as dimensões de conhecimento e de auto-atribuição (reconhecimento/nãoreconhecimento) ajudam a determinar aquilo que constitui o cerne do inconsciente dinâmico, mesmo que o não-consciente cognitivo e o inconsciente psicanalítico se sobreponham em grande medida. O artigo mostra ainda, finalmente, até que ponto um novo consenso interdisciplinar nos oferece agora uma oportunidade para reconhecer as limitações do racionalismo emfilosofia da mente.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337741

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Corona Néstor A.
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, Ed. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337747

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Jeremias, p. 253.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337865

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Putt B. Keith
Abstract: ibid., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337866

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Treanor Brian
Abstract: Augustine, Confessions, Book X, Ch. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337867

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Hart Kevin
Abstract: Vincent Buckley, Poetry and Morality: Studies on the Criticism of Matthew Arnold, T. S. Eliot and F. R. Leavis, introd. Basil Willey (London: Chatto and Windus, 1968), 26.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337868

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Martins Florinda
Abstract: Michel Henry, Encarnacão: Uma filosofia da carne, trad, de Florinda Martins, ed. Círculo deLeitores, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337870

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014508
Date: 12 1, 1982
Author(s): César Constança Marcondes
Abstract: Leonidas Hegenberg. «A Lógica e Filosofia da Ciência no Brasil», in As Idéias Filosóficas no Brasil parte II, SP., Convivio, 1978, pp. 143-201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338053

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014514
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Doran Robert M.
Abstract: B. Lonergan -"Dimensions of Meaning." In: Collection. Collected Works of Bernard Lonergan, vol. 4. Edited by Frederick E. Crowe and Robert M. Doran. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1988, p. 245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338253

Journal Title: Ethics and the Environment
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40014552
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Liszka James Jakób
Abstract: Although philosophers often focus on the essays of Leopold's Sand County Almanac, especially "The Land Ethic," there is also a normative argument present in the stories that comprise most of the book. In fact the shack stories may be more persuasive, with a subtlety and complexity not available in his prose piece. This paper develops a narrative ethics methodology gleaned from rhetoric theory, and current interest in narrative ethics among literary theorists, in order to discern the normative underpinnings of the stories in Part 1. The narrative ethics approach sidesteps the need to ground the land ethic in ethical theory—which has been a reconstructive and problematic task for the philosophical interpreters of Leopold—and suggests, instead, that it emerges in Leopold's very effort to narrate his, professional, personal, and practical experience with nature. The involves examining the stories in terms of their emotional, logical and performative aspects. The result is an analysis that shows not only how these stories express normative claims, but also justify them. One conclusion of the analyses is that, in the narratives, there is less emphasis on the problematic notion of an over-arching "community" than in the prose pieces, and more emphasis on the metaphor of other living things as "fellow travelers" in the "odyssey of evolution." Second, the narratives take on an ironic attitude toward the ecological order, less discernable in the prose essays. The order itself may not be ethically admirable, but should be preserved since it makes possible any ethical relations within it. Thus, the narrative reading suggests some temperance to the usual holistic interpretation of his land ethic and its concomitant criticisms especially the charge of ecofacism. We should not take the land ethic imperative at its face value, in the sense that the good of the order itself is an intrinsic good. In the narratives, individuals are shown not merely to be means to the ecological whole, but the focus of sympathy and concern, in a manner that demands their good should also be an object of moral consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40339066

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014642
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Martínez Marina Sanchis
Abstract: Tucídides, History of the Peloponnesian War, trad. Rex Warner (Harmonds worth, Eng. 1954).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340335

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014675
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Marre Diana
Abstract: Anderson [1991] 1993, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340765

Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i40014886
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Dachun Yang
Abstract: The view of language is greatly changed from early modern philosophy to later modern philosophy and to postmodern philosophy. The linguistic question in early modern philosophy, which is characterized by rationalism and empiricism, is discussed in this paper. Linguistic phenomena are not at the center of philosophical reflections in early modern philosophy. The subject of consciousness is at the center of the philosophy, which makes language serve purely as an instrument for representing thoughts. Locke, Leibniz and Descartes consider language from a representationalist point of view. To them, language itself is idealized and represents thought as if it were thought representing itself. Like the structural linguist Saussure, the founders of phenomenology and analytical philosophy give much attention to the logical or static structure of language, and stick up for the representationalism of early modern philosophy. However, their successors refuse to accept this attitude, meaning the final collapse of representationalism. /// 从早期现代哲学到后期现代哲学再到后现代哲学，在语言观上产生了重大的变化。早期现代哲学以唯理论和经验论为典型形式。语言现象没有成为该时期哲学反思的中心问题; 意识主体处于哲学的中心，这使得语言仅仅充当着表象思想的工具。洛克、莱布尼茨和笛卡尔都从表象论的角度看待语言，在他们那里，语言本身被观念化了，它们表象思想，就像思想在表象它自身。正像结构语言学家索绪尔一样，现象学和分析哲学的创始人关注的都是语言的逻辑结构或静态结构，他们延续了早期现代哲学的表象论，但他们的后继者拒绝接受这种态度，而这意味着最终突破表象论。
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40343900

Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i40014889
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Lin Zhang
Abstract: (Ibid., p. 300
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40343935

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014917
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Nauta Rein
Abstract: Augustine's conversion is considered exemplary for its Christian testimony. However, the psychological aspects are also relevant, for Augustine's conversion to Christianity was as much inspired by personal and cultural ambitions as by religious convictions. For Augustine, the conversion to the Christian faith spelled a life of asceticism— a life of celibacy, a virtuous and chaste existence, which also offered him a means of escape from the threatening ambiguity of parental relations and a chance to realize the cultural ideal of the civilized philosopher who has subjugated the passions of the flesh. In this paper we explore the psychological dynamics of the absent father, the suffering mother and the prodigal son and the role they played in Augustine's conversion to Christianity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40344424

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014917
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Hart Curtis W.
Abstract: J. Robert Oppenheimer was among the most important and enigmatic figures in 20th century science. He is best known for successfully directing the Manhattan Project that produced the first atomic bombs that were dropped on Japan at the end of World War II. Subsequently, he became a scientist and statesman who advised the United States government in the areas of atomic weapons development and public policy. He later became subject to an investigation in 1954 into his previous political affiliations and his personal behavior that ended in the revoking of his security clearance. This essay seeks to chronicle Oppenheimer's coming of age as a public intellectual with a view toward his own psychological history and most especially in relationship to the stages of faith development articulated by James Fowler and colleagues. Moreover, though not conventionally religious, Oppenheimer's life and thought were permeated with themes and ideas of a religious and ethical nature that shaped his adult character and informed his view of the world. This essay was originally presented at The Richardson History of Psychiatry Research Seminar at Weill Cornell Medical College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40344427

Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014978
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Kačerauskas Tomas
Abstract: Sodeika (1979, 1980a, b, 1981a, b, c).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40345300

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015297
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Rojas Waldo
Abstract: A. Martinet, "Connotation, poesie et culture", in To Honor Roman Jakobson, La Haye, Mouton. 1967, vol. H, pp. 180-194
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356725

Journal Title: The High School Journal
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40015763
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Stones Christopher R.
Abstract: Zucker, R. Aronoff, J., & Rabin, A. (1984). Metatheoretical issues in personology. In R. Zucker, J. Aronoff & A. Rabin (Eds.), Personality and the prediction of behav- ior. Orlando: Academic Press, (pp. 1-5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40364532

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016201
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Ogien Albert
Abstract: Erving Goffman, Stigmate, Paris, Ed. de Minuit, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40369638

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hamel Jacques
Abstract: Sociologie et sociétés, vol. XIX, n° 2, 1987, pp. 77-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370050

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: La démarche scientifique de Vilfredo Pareto. Pour une reiecture du « Traité de sociolo- gie générale», Louvain-La-Neuve, Cabay, 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370054

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016236
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Grize Jean-Blaise
Abstract: S. Dehaene, Le cerveau en action. Imagerie cérébrale fonctionnelle en Psycholo- gie cognitive, Paris, PUF, 1997, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370250

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016248
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Passeron Jean-Claude
Abstract: M. Weber, Gesammelte Aufsätze zur Wissenschaftslehre, Tübingen, JCB Mohr, 1922, trad. mod. ; trad. fr. J. Freund, Paris, Plon, 1965, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370471

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016252
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: J. Piaget, Problémes généraux de la recherche interdisciplinaire et mécanismes communs, in Tendances principales de la recherche dans les sciences sociales et humaines. Premiére partie: Sciences sociales. Préface de R. Maheu, Paris, Unesco, 1970, pp. 588-589.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370519

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016253
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: P. Livet, Formaliser I 'argumentation en restant sensible au contexte, pp. 49-66,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370526

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016255
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: C. Geertz, Works and Lives. The Anthropologist as Autor, Stanford 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370560

Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016258
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rist Gilbert
Abstract: Victor Segalen, Essai sur l'exotisme: une esthétique du divers, Paris, Fata Morgana, 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370601

Journal Title: College Music Symposium
Publisher: The College Music Society
Issue: i40016455
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Miles Stephen
Abstract: Op. cit., 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40374567

Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40016628
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Landres J. Shawn
Abstract: Memory brings the past into the present. It is a feature of human temporality, contingency, and identity. Attention to memory's psychological and social importance suggests new vistas for work in religious ethics. This essay examines four recent works on memory's importance for self-interpretation, social criticism, and public justice. My focus will be on normative questions about memory. The works under review ask whether, and on what terms, we have an obligation to remember, whether memory is linked to neighbors near and distant, how memory is related to justice and forgiveness, and whether memory sits easily with the kind of relationships that allegedly characterize life in democratic public culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40378119

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40017405
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Simon Bennett
Abstract: Zimmerli, Ezekiel, 2:420-21 : "But the priestly/prophetic witness of Ezekiel 43 still knows nothing of that terrifying act of God in which he gives himself in his servant, in order to crown his love, to the unclean world as a pure sin offering (Is 53:10)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390027

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: Alocu9ao "Faculdade de Filosofia, hoje" (aquando dos 25 anos da Universidade Catolica, na Faculdade de Filosofia de Braga, em 1993), em EFCP, 272.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419406

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Enes José
Abstract: 2Phys.lec. 3, n. 161 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419423

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Salmann, Elmar; Mounaro, Aniceto (ed.) – Filosofia e mistica: Itinerari di un progetto di ricerca. Roma: Pontificio Ateneo S. Anselmo, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419467

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Urban Martina
Abstract: Ricœur, Rule of Metaphor, p. 287.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419478

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Rizvi Sajjad H.
Abstract: Qumml, Mirqat al-asrar in al-Arba'lniyyat, 1 54.2-1 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419487

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Jorge Maria Manuel Araújo
Abstract: António Coutinho, "Ora então, vamos à vida", Ciclo de Colóquios "Despertar para a Ciência", Reitoria da Universidade do Porto, 10/02/2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419509

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Maldamé Jean-Michel
Abstract: Gérard-Henry Baudry, op. cit., pp. 387-411.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419529

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Birault, Henri -De litre, du divin et des dieux. Edition 6tablie par Mathias Goy ; bibliographic par Guy Basset ; preface par Philippe Capelle. Paris: Cerf, 2005, p. 153.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419588

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: (gwcm 89-90).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419606

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Rognon Frédéric
Abstract: Ellul, Jacques; Nordon, Didier -op. cit., p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419608

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019126
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Margulis Mario
Abstract: Lucien Goldmann, "Importancia del concepto de conciencia posible para la comunica- ción", en Lucien Goldmann et al., El concepto de información en la ciencia contemporánea, México, Siglo XXI, 1966, pp. 31-40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40421024

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019135
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Tinat Karine
Abstract: (Garner y Garfinkel, 1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40421164

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020043
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Murray Paul E.
Abstract: Accounts of intergroup conflict are symbolic constructions that are meaningful to informants in communicational contexts. Their use in comparative methodologies usually overlooks their meaningfulness to subjects in favor of some other level of reality, e. g., ecological, which is presumed to be more basic. The author argues that the social and cultural contextualizing of such data is logically prior to other analytical approaches and he illustrates his interpretive method by examining a "traditional," Eskimo (Takamiut) account of an Eskimo victory over Naskapi Indians as emergent from a particular socio-cultural context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40461492

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020050
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Mitlewski Bernd
Abstract: Internationalen Amerikani- stenkongreß 1988 in Amsterdam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40462117

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020067
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Berg Mark L.
Abstract: (Damm 1938: 52, 83).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463662

Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020091
Date: 1 1, 1997
Abstract: (Kee 1980: 145).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40465357

Journal Title: Salmagundi
Publisher: Skidmore College
Issue: i40023164
Date: 4 1, 1974
Author(s): KAVOLIS VYTAUTAS
Abstract: Morse Peckham, Man's Rage for Chaos: Biology, Behavior, and the Arts (New York: Schocken Books, 1967).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40535896

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista (UNESP)
Issue: i40023376
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Reynolds Anthony
Abstract: Morny Joy (1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40542131

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40023410
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: How can we understand the social impact of cognitions of a projected future, taking into account both the institutional determinants of hopes and their personal inventiveness? How can we document the repercussions, often contrary to intentions, "back from" such projected futures to the production and transformation of social structures? These are some of the questions to be addressed by a cultural sociology that attempts to look seriously at the effects of a projected future as a dynamic force undergirding social change. In this essay I discuss some of the reasons why the analysis of the future has been so neglected in sociological theory and research, and then sketch a possible framework for reincorporating it that specifies some of the cognitive dimensions of projectivity. In the process, I will show how a focus on future projections can help us make a link between cognition and action in a manner that has so far been neglected in the sociological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40542699

Journal Title: symplokē
Publisher: Jeffrey R. Di Leo
Issue: i40023959
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Franke William
Abstract: David Tracy's The Analogical Imagination.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40550341

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216873
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Fish Robert C.
Abstract: "A Reply to John Reichert; or, How to Stop Worrying and Learn to Love Interpretation," Critical Inquiry, 6 (1979), pp. 173-78 173 6 Critical Inquiry 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/405593

Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i386902
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): ZahaviAbstract: Ramadan, 2002, 212
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4057645

Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025242
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): de Barros Laan Mendes
Abstract: Vivimos en un contexto de disolución de fronteras en múltiples aspectos, de convergencia e hibridación de tecnologías, de medios de comunicación y de culturas. El contexto es de redimensionamiento del tiempo práctico, de los desplazamientos y de las relaciones entre lo local y lo global. En estos tiempos de interculturalidad, la comunicación juega un rol muy importante; no tanto en su dimensión mediática tecnológica, sino en especial en las dinámicas de mediaciones culturales que se desdoblan de las relaciones mediatizadas. Este trabajo pretende reflexionar sobre las transformaciones de los procesos comunicacionales en la contemporaneidad, marcados por fuertes movimientos de hibridación, así como pensar la interculturalidad en el contexto de las mediaciones culturales, a partir de autores latinoamericanos en diálogo con autores franceses. También, a partir de material de los medios, se presentarán ilustraciones del escenario cultural brasileño, que está marcado por una larga historia de hibridación, llena de dinámicas interculturales. We live in a context of borders that are dissolving in many senses, of the convergence and hybridisation of technologies, mass media and cultures. The context is the resizing of practical time, of movements and links between the local and the global. In these times of interculturality, communication plays a very important role; not so much in its technological media dimension, but particularly in the dynamics of cultural mediations that are dividing off from mediatised relations. This article aims to reflect on the transformations in present-day communication processes, marked by strong movements of hybridisation, as well as examining how to consider interculturality in the context of cultural mediations, based on dialogue between Latin American and French authors. Also, using media material, the article presents illustrations of the Brazilian cultural scene, which is marked by a long history of hybridisation that is filled with intercultural dynamics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586507

Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i40025373
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Van Damme Stéphane
Abstract: Emily Martin, «Anthropology and Cultural Study of Science: From Citadels to String Figures», in Akhil Gupta et James Fhrguson (eds), Anthropological Locations. Boundaraies and Grounds of Field Science, Berkeley, University of California Press, 1997, p. 131-146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40588396

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Schaeffer Jean-Marie
Abstract: François Flahault (pp. 38-42)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590300

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Heinich Nathalie
Abstract: Heinich & Edelman (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590302

Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025520
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GRABÓCZ Márta
Abstract: J. Ujfalussy cité en note 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591026

Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026193
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rozenberg Jacques J.
Abstract: R. Baker, « Stem cell rhetoric and the pragmatics of naming », The American Journal of Bio- ethics, vol. 2, n° 1, hiver 2002, p. 52-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40599480

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027020
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): O'DONOVAN PATRICK
Abstract: Nicholas Zurbrugg, Beckett and Proust (Gerrard's Cross: Colin Smy- the, 1988), pp. 173-89.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40617404

Journal Title: The International History Review
Publisher: Simon Fraser University
Issue: i40027995
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): IMLAY TALBOT C.
Abstract: M. Newman, Socialism and European Unity: The Dilemma of the Left in Britain and France (London, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40646918

Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i40028035
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): DAN-COHEN MEIR
Abstract: Yael Zerubavel, Recovered Roots: Collective Memory and the Making of Israeli Nation al Tradition (1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40647741

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028538
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: "El tiempo presente, la memoria y el mito", p. 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657994

Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028541
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): López Sonia García
Abstract: Les Documenteurs des annés noires, Bailleul Prod./F3 (realizado por Guylaine Guidez), 1999, seleccionado por el FIPA 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40658049

Journal Title: The Modern Law Review
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40028761
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Koops Bert-Jaap
Abstract: A. Rip, 'Constructing Expertise: In a Third Wave of Science Studies?' (2003) 33 Social Studies of Science 419.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40660735

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40029008
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: http://www.barackobama.com/speeches/index.php.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40666525

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030250
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Albou Paul
Abstract: Chandessais, La stratégie des besoins, Journées de Vaucresson, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689735

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030262
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Durand Gilbert
Abstract: « Structure et fonction récurrentes de la ligure de Dieu », in Éranos Jahrbuch, n° 37, Zurich, Rhein Verlag, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689960

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Ladrière Paul
Abstract: Ibid., p. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690421

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Gosselin Gabriel
Abstract: Ibid., § 5 du chapitre premier, p. 30-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690424

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030285
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Lazar Judith
Abstract: F. Chazel in Revue française de Sociologie. 1983, XXIV, p. 369-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690513

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030301
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Moulin Pierre
Abstract: (Mallet, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690843

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030302
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Gingras Yves
Abstract: Stephen S. Cole, Making Science. Between Nature and Society, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690856

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030307
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Gaussot Ludovic
Abstract: Löwy (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690947

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030308
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Gonthier Frédéric
Abstract: Logique des sciences sociales et autres essais [1982-1984], trad, franc., Paris, PUF, « Philosophie d'aujourd'hui », 1987, p. 19-26.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690958

Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030310
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Martuccelli Danilo
Abstract: Walzer M., De l'Exode à la liberté [1985], Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690994

Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of German
Issue: i216909
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Triefenbach Kenneth S.
Abstract: The rationalist fantasy of the Enlightenment is the myth of the nonviolent origins of virtue, typically represented through the image of rational birth. This myth falters when Odoardo Galotti, invoking the second birth of reason, kills his daughter. This article examines Lessing's Die Erziehung des Menschengeschlechts-essentially a treatise on the phylogeny/ontogeny distinction-in terms of a recuperative rationalist gesture that continues to inform Freud's oedipal theory as well as Claude Lévy-Strauss's understanding of the "cerebral savage." These theories are not treated as methodological frameworks for reading Lessing but rather as evidence of the tanacity of Enlightenment desires, which are already problematized by texts like Emilia Galotti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/407077

Journal Title: Southeastern Archaeology
Publisher: Southeastern Archaeological Conference
Issue: i40031581
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Peebles Christopher S.
Abstract: The historical development of theories regarding the later prehistory of the Southeast illustrates the manner in which families of theoretical models come to form the cognitive capital of working archaeologists. Tradationally, however, Southeasternists have largely preferred to ignore overt debates over theory and method. Moreover, as a group they have shown little inclination to indulge in the rampant and fruitless forms of archaeological relativism that are emerging at present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40712917

Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032858
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: Journal of Chinese Religion 27 (1999), pp. 105-111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727471

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034232
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Subtelny Maria E.
Abstract: Tishby, Wisdom of the Zohar, 3: 1090-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753349

Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034250
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Slavet Eliza
Abstract: Freud, Moses and Monotheism, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753472

Journal Title: Texas Studies in Literature and Language
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i40034422
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): SCHWARTZ ALBERT
Abstract: Melitta Sperling, "Spider Phobias and Spider Fantasies," Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 19 (1971), 472-98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40755241

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40035400
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): CANDEA MATEI
Abstract: Relationship, connection, and engagement have emerged as key values in recent studies of human-animal relations. In this article, I call for a reexaminaron of the productive aspects of detachment. I trace ethnographically the management of everyday relations between biologists and the Kalahari meerkats they study, and I follow the animals' transformation as subjects of knowledge and engagement when they become the stars of an internationally popular, televised animal soap opera. I argue that treating detachment and engagement as polar opposites is unhelpful both in this ethnographic case and, more broadly, in anthropological discussions of ethics and knowledge making.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1425.2010.01253.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037345
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Maddox Kelly-Anne
Abstract: Selon Sibony « [...] l'amour est une façon de revivre sa source d'être, de se redonner l'origine à l'état brut, l'inconscient comme tel » (98)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40838099

Journal Title: Cahiers du monde hispanique et luso-brésilien
Publisher: Institut d'études Hispaniques, Hipano-Américaines et Luse-Brésiliennes Université de Toulouse
Issue: i40038080
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): AGUILAR MORA Jorge
Abstract: Barre nechea, A. : « La expresión de la irrealidad en la obra de J£. Borges », Paidós, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40850032

Journal Title: Canadian Slavonic Papers / Revue Canadienne des Slavistes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Slavists
Issue: i40038652
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Love Jeff
Abstract: Gary Saul Morson, "Writing Like Roulette," Introduction to The Gambler, trans. Constance Garnett (New York: Random House, 2003) xi-xliii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40860047

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lampert Tom
Abstract: Ibid., 139-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864442

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: Given World and Time is a collection of essays that summarizes much of the recent work on the theory of time, including cultural, political, and social conceptualizations of temporality. The grounding narrative of this collection, roughly stated, leads from the German and German-Jewish ideas of a temporality of crisis developed in the 1920s, to the French poststructuralism of the 1960s and 1970s, and concludes with the American syntheses of the 1980s and 1990s. Methodologically, the book weaves together different historical narratives with a new emphasis on their temporal dimension, all seen from the perspective of critical theory and recent cultural critique. However, it is interesting to point out that the majority of the articles do not challenge the classic critical tools of modernism, in spite of the frequent reference to poststructuralist critique. The volume editor has also not acknowledged more recent work that treats similar topics and themes through the application of a radical political critique, most significantly the work associated with biopolitics and the so-called theological turn.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864445

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038937
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): GRETHLEIN JONAS
Abstract: John Demos, Afterword: Notes from, and about, the History/Fiction Borderland, Rethinking History 9, no. 2/3 (2005), 329.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864496

Journal Title: Jewish History
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40038966
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): CONSONNI MANUELA
Abstract: The essay discusses the passage from an ideological, patriotic and anti-fascist memory of the deportations and the extermination to what the author describes as the "ethnic" memory of the Shoah, which has played, and continues to play, a central role in constructing the European historical narrative as that narrative depicts the Jews as Europe's "other". Theoretical reflection on memory is intertwined with historical analysis of the period between 1945 until the end of the twentieth century. Two, binary perspectives are featured, one, which examines memory from a cognitive point of view and the other, which examines memory from a cultural, ideological, moral and political perspective. These perspectives come to the fore in memoire-literature, movies, plays, historiographie and philosophical debates, which illustrate the two perspectives and their articulation, as well as they justify the essay's periodization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864933

Journal Title: Canadian Slavonic Papers / Revue Canadienne des Slavistes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Slavists
Issue: i40039131
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Briker Boris
Abstract: Richards maintains that in Bunin's work memory of the past has the power to overcome death and preserve love and thus the boundaries of the personal time (Richards 167).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40869967

Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40039166
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lee Sherry D.
Abstract: Ibid. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40871577

Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Otto Schwartz
Issue: i40039383
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Bude Heinz
Abstract: Friedrich H. Tenbruck (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40877530

Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039483
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lentz Carola
Abstract: Programms (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878654

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039582
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): VANSINA Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880933

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039598
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): IJSSELING Samuel
Abstract: Über den Humanismus, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881173

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039640
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): HOLENSTEIN Elmar
Abstract: (Husserl, 1966, p. 339).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882437

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039641
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): ROBERT J. D.
Abstract: Théories et modèles relationnels (pp. 144-151)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882498

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039649
Date: 3 1, 1976
Author(s): ZWEERMAN Th.
Abstract: Oosterhuis' gedieht „Vier Muren" in: dez., Zien Soms Even. Bilthoven, 1972, p. 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882819

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039661
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): STRASSER Stephan
Abstract: Een aan slag ..., loe. cit, p. 418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883285

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039667
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): KOCKELMANS Joseph J.
Abstract: Edmund Husserl, „Erneuerung", in Kaiso-la Rekonstruyo, 3 (1923) 84-92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883538

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039670
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): GIER Nicholas F.
Abstract: D. L. Couprie, op. cit., footnote 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883673

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039685
Date: 9 1, 1983
Author(s): MOYAERT PAUL
Abstract: ibid., blz. 802.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884294

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039704
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): Verschaffel Bart
Abstract: Bergson se faisant, in : Signes (Paris, I960).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40885537

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039769
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): De Visscher Jacques
Abstract: Paul Rlcoeur, Le conflit des interprétations. Essais d'herméneutique, Paris, Seuil, 1969, p. 283-329
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40889206

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039789
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Figal Günter
Abstract: Edmund HUSSERL, Ideen I, Husserliana III. 1, S. 62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890094

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039790
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Aydin Ciano
Abstract: CP 6.64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890137

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039792
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Brabant Christophe
Abstract: Ricœur, Temps et récit I, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890226

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40039802
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Alloa Emmanuel
Abstract: Aristote, Poet. 4, 1448b13 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890626

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040162
Date: 6 1, 1955
Author(s): Ruyer Raymond
Abstract: S. K. Langer, Feeling and Form, chap. VIII.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40899897

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040298
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: M. Dummett, Frege : Philosophy of Language, Duckworth, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902866

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040318
Date: 6 1, 1992
Author(s): Debru Claude
Abstract: Henri Bergson, Matière et Mémoire, Œuvres, édition du Centenaire, Paris, P.U.F., 1959, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903219

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040330
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Balibar Étienne
Abstract: Cancrini, 1970, p. 20-21,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903439

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040338
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: (ibid.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903576

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040350
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Hermeneutik und Meta- physik. Eine Problemgeschichte, Munich, W. Fink Verlag, 1994, p. 121-128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903769

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040351
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Benoist Jocelyn
Abstract: Ibid., p. 355-356.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903791

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040354
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Villani A.
Abstract: On essaie dans ces pages d'appliquer à la philosophie de Kant et de Dilthey certains concepts en vue d'une perspective critique de l'histoire. La distinction diltheyenne entre explication et compréhension est mise en rapport avec celle qu'opère Kant entre jugement déterminant et jugement réfléchissant. Puisque la majeure partie de la complexité historique ne peut trouver son explication dans des lois générales, on propose une compréhension réfléchissante du récit historique. Mettre en relation le jugement réfléchissant et la compréhension revient à souligner la dimension normative de l'interprétation historique. La perspective anthropologique de Kant fait également place aux jugements préréflexifs, préliminaires sur l'histoire, tandis que l'approche diltheyenne par les Geisteswissenschaften ramène à une conscience reflexive ou autoréférée qui replace l'individu en son temps et en son lieu. D'autres aspects peuvent encore conduire à notre rapport critique à l'histoire : le modèle kantien d'une orientation réfléchissante de la communauté humaine, les limites qu'ilpose à l'interprétation authentique, la conception heideggerienne de l'authenticité historique, l'analyse diltheyenne des systèmes d'influence réciproque comme cadre de l'idée d'une imputation causale singulière chez Paul Ricœur. This essay is an attempt at applying certain concepts to the philosophy of Kant and Dilthey, so as to develop a critical perspective on history. Dilthey's explanation-understanding distinction is related to Kant's distinction between determinant and reflective judgment. Since much of the complexity of history cannot be determinantly explained by general laws, a reflective understanding of the meaning of historical narrative is suggested. To relate judgment and understanding is to highlight the evaluative dimension of historical interpretation. Kant's anthropological perpective also makes room for pre-reflective, preliminary judgments about history, whereas Dilthey's human science approach points back to a reflexive or self-referring awareness that locates the individual in his time and place. Some other aspects may also lead us to a critical approach to history : Kant's reflective orientational model of the human community, the limits he places on authentic interpretation, Heidegger's views on authentic historicity, and Dilthey's analysis of systems of reciprocal influence seen as a framework for Ricœur's conception of singular causal imputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903833

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040368
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Cohen-Halimi Michèle
Abstract: Dehors, Paris, Gallimard, 1975, p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904025

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040371
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Alunni Charles
Abstract: Archives de Philosophie, Philosophes en Italie, 2 cahiers spéciaux, cahier 4/1993 et cahier 1/1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904048

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040375
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Melcer Alain
Abstract: Le Champ de l'argumentation, op. cit., p. 312.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904121

Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i378409
Date: 9 1, 1976
Author(s): Woodside Tine
Abstract: Intertwining ethnographic and literary accounts, this article explores the mutual relationship between suffering and agency. The article describes how young Vietnamese women use narrative to find meaning in the suffering that a late-term abortion causes. Seeking to further develop anthropological use of the concept of social suffering, the article argues that existing scholarship has tended to neglect the importance of human agency and imagination, hinging as it does on suffering as entrenched within structural forces. The article contends that this neglect must be understood in the context of the particular epistemological and ethical conditions under which anthropological studies of human suffering are produced, and that closer attention to the human engagements out of which ethnographic accounts are fashioned may bring into analysis not only the harm that social forces can inflict on people, but also their capacities for action and imagination. / Mêlant ethnographic et récits littéraires, l'article explore la relation réciproque entre souffrance et agency. Il décrit comment les jeunes femmes vietnamiennes utilisent la narration pour trouver un sens à la souffrance causée par une fausse couche tardive. Visant à élargir l'utilisation anthropologique du concept de souffrance humaine, l'auteur montre que les études tendent à négliger l'importance de l'agency et de l'imagination, qui s'articule sur la souffrance enracinée dans les forces structurelles. L'auteur affirme que cette négligence doit être comprise dans le contexte de conditions épistémologiques et éthiques particulières dans lesquelles sont produites les études anthropologiques de la souffrance humaine, et qu'une analyse plus attentive des engagements humains desquels sont issus les récits ethnographiques peut introduire dans la réflexion non seulement le mal que les forces sociales peuvent infliger aux individus, mais aussi les capacités d'action et d'imagination de ceux-ci.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4092509

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40041727
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto P.
Abstract: Franzosi 2004a, pp. 266-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40928085

Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041831
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: R. Koselleck, «Historische Kriterien...», art. cit., p. 67-86, ici p. 86, repris in Le futur passé..., op. cit., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929925

Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i40041838
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Truc Gérôme
Abstract: (Halbwachs, 2008 : 149),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930307

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041866
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Bovon François
Abstract: Jean-Daniel Macchi and Christophe Nihan, "Mort, résurrection et au-delà dans la Bible hébraïque et dans le judaïsme ancien," BCPE 62 (2010) 1-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930894

Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GARROS-CASTAING VÉRONIQUE
Abstract: Forest, La beauté du contresens, p. 310.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931326

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042682
Date: 1 1, 1957
Author(s): Léonard Émile G.
Abstract: K. C. Steek, Der evangelische Christ und die römische Kirche (Munich, Kaiser, 1952, 48 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40948827

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042777
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Simon Marcel
Abstract: Pasquale Testini, Le catacombe e gli antichi cimiteri cristiani in Roma, Bologne, Casa Editrice Licinio Cappelli, 1966, 413 p., 8 500 lires.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40952253

Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042926
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Gross Guillaume
Abstract: Mary J. Carruthers,, Machina memorialis, op. at., p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40957797

Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40042984
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Mérindol Jean-Yves
Abstract: L. Viry, Le monde vécu des universitaires ou la République des Egos, Rennes, Presses Universitaires de Rennes, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40959665

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043588
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): PASSERON JEAN-CLAUDE
Abstract: Sahlins, loc. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40969868

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043609
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): WAGNER HELMUT R.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Husserl and the Sense of History," in the collection of his studies published under the title Husserl: An Analysis of his Phenomenology (Evanston, Ill.: Northwestern University Press, 1967), pp. 143-174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970117

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043610
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): TAYLOR CHARLES
Abstract: D. C. McClelland, The Achieving Society (New York: Free Press, 1967), p. 49.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970126

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043624
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): APEL KARL OTTO
Abstract: Habermas's account of psychoanalysis in his Erkenntnis und Interesse, pp. 10-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970294

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043626
Date: 4 1, 1978
Author(s): SUHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Arendt, "Martin Heidegger at Eighty," p. 50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970325

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043634
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): SHALIN DMITRI N.
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, New Rules of Sociological Method: A Positive Critique of Inter- pretative Sociologies (New York: Basic Books, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970406

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043636
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): GIDDENS ANTHONY
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970430

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SASS LOIUIS A.
Abstract: L. Sass and R. Woolfolk, "Psychoanalysis and the Hermeneutic Turn: A Critique of Narrative Truth and Historical Truth," Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970521

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SAIEDI NADER
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, "Actions, Subjectivity, and the Constitution of Meaning," Social Research 53 (Autumn 1986): 538.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970528

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043647
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): COATS A.W.
Abstract: Dopfer, "The Histonomic Approach to Economics."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970547

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043668
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): SHEEHAN THOMAS
Abstract: Mircea Eliade, "The Myths of the Modern World," in Myths, Dreams, and Mysteries (New York: Harper Torchbook, 1971), pp. 23ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970798

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043679
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): TAYLOR CHARLES
Abstract: D. C. McClelland, The Achieving Society (New York: Free Press, 1967), p. 49.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970950

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043684
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Radzai Ronald
Abstract: Tony Judt, "The Past is Another Country: Myth and Memory in Postwar Europe," in "Immobile Democracy?" Daedalus 121:4 (1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40971010

Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043917
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Garelli Jacques
Abstract: Renaud Barbaras, in Le tournant de l'expérience, Pans, Vnn, 1998 et Le désir et la distance, Pans, Vnn, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978678

Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40044149
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): HOY DAVID COUZENS
Abstract: Ibid., p. 341.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40982666

Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40044274
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Menke Christoph
Abstract: (Herder, Cognition 212).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985267

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40044280
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Campe Rüdiger
Abstract: "Ak- tualität des Bildes. Die Zeit rhetorischer Figuration," Figur und Figuration. Studien zu Wahrneh- mung und Wissen. Eds. Gottfried Boehm, Gabriele Brandstetter, Achatz von Müller (Munich: Fink, 2007), 163-182.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985371

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044502
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): Bahloul Joëlle
Abstract: Cet article est un compte rendu, de style ethnographique, de l'expérience professionnelle d'une ethnologue française aux Etats-Unis. L'auteur dresse un bilan des débats théoriques qui animent les échanges franco-américains dans cette discipline et qui s'articulent en forme de transferts tronqués circulant à sens unique. This article, written in the style of an ethnographical report, is an account of the professional experience of a French ethnologist in the United States. The author takes stock of the theoretical debates which are currently exciting the community of anthropological studies in America, and shows how Franco-American exchanges in this discipline tend to take the form of truncated transfers, going one way only.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40989239

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044538
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Vultur Smaranda
Abstract: En étudiant les récits de vie des paysans roumains du Banat et d'Olténie déportés dans les années cinquante dans la plaine de Bǎrǎgan, nous avons essayé de mettre en évidence de quelle façon le récit de vie peut être un révélateur d'une réalité ethno-historique et anthropologique. Nous avons souligné le problème d'ordre méthodologique qu'une telle étude pose au chercheur. Dans un premier temps, nous avons discuté le statut discursif du récit de vie comme discours de témoignage, et les conséquences qui en dérivent pour son analyse comme texte narratif et argumentatif qui développe une rhétorique spécifique. Une description du contexte historique auquel font référence les textes, ainsi que des circonstances dans lesquelles l'enquête orale a été menée, nous a semblé nécessaire pour dégager l'importance du thème de l'identité et de la différence dans les récits de nos interlocuteurs. En analysant ce thème, nous avons tenu compte des constellations idéologiques et symboliques qui dominent ces développements dans le texte des critères que les paysans utilisent pour se différencier de l'Autre sous ses différents visages. L'analyse de ces facteurs suggère des pistes intéressantes pour déceler certaines mentalités et pratiques culturelles, surtout celles liées au foyer et à la famille et aux pratiques culinaires. Studiind povesteǎ vieţii a 70 de ţǎrani deporţati între anii 1951-1956 în Bǎrǎgan am pus în evidenţǎ problemele de ordin metodologic şi teoretic cu care se confruntǎ cercetǎorul dornic sǎ reconstituie o realitate istoricǎ, etnograficǎ şi antropologicǎ pornind de la mǎrturiile celor ce povestesc evenimentul deportǎrii. Purtînd mǎrcile subiecti viaţii naratorului şi a unei ideologii personale aceste texte sunt în acelaşţi timp naraţiuni şi o formǎ de a depune mǎrturie. Ele dezvoltǎ deci o retoricǎ specialǎ prin care faptul trǎit se transformǎ în fapt povestit şi se comunicǎ unui interlocutor. Analia acestei retorici necesitǎ cunoaşterea discursurilor prin care evenimentul ne parvine, a condiţiilor în care s-a desfǎşurat ancheta, compararea povestirilor între ele pentru a constata apropierile diferenþele şi mai ales diferitele tipuri de focalizǎri. Acestea din urmǎ ne permit sa sesizǎm ce e mai important pentru cel ce povesteşte şi de ce. Pentru a ilustra aceasta problematicǎ ne-am oprit la tema identitǎţii şi alţeritǎţii, încercînd sǎ urmǎrim constelatiile idéologice şi culturale sub semnul cǎrora stau expansiunile ei in texte, criteriile prin care Celǎlalt este identificat şi prezentat. Through the study of the life stories told by the Romanian peasants of Banat and Oltenie, who were deported during the 1950s to the plain of Baragan, this article attempts to show how such biographical accounts can serve to reveal an ethno-historical and anthropological reality.We begin by underlining the methodological problems that such studies pose for the researcher. We discuss the discursive status of these accounts as a discourse intended to bear witness and the implications of this status for an analysis as a narrative and argumentative text, generating its own specific rhetoric. Along with an account of how this oral enquiry was carried out, it also seemed necessary to give a description of the historical context to which these accounts refer, in order to draw attention to the theme of identity and difference in the accounts given. The analysis of this theme required that due attention be paid do the ideological and symbolic constellations that surround it, in the criteria that the peasants use to differentiate the Other, in his or her multifarious guises. The examination of these factors offers several interesting lines of enquiry on cultural practices and mentalities, and on those in particular which relate to the household, the family and culinary habits. Indem wir die Lebensgeschichten der rumänischen Bauern aus Banat und Oltenie studierten, die in den fünfziger Jahren in die Ebene von Baragan vertrieben wurden, versuchten wir, herauszustellen, wie die Lebensgeschichte eine volksgeschichtliche und anthropologische Wirklichkeit ans Licht stellen kann. Wir haben das methodologische Problem betont, die sich für den Forscher aus derartigen Studie ergibt. Zuerst haben wir den erzählerischen Status der Lebenserzählung als Zeugnisrede erörtert, sowohl als auch die Folgen, die sich daraus ergeben, wenn sie als erzählender und argumentierender Text analysiert werden soll, der eine spezifische Rhetorik entwickelt. Eine Schilderung des historischen Zusammenhangs, worauf sich die Texte beziehen, und der Umstände, unter denen die mündliche Befragung sich abspielte, kam uns als notwendig vor, um die Bedeutung des Themas der Identität und des Unterschieds in den Erzählungen unserer Gesprächspartner hervorzuheben. In der Analyse dieses Themas nahmen wir die ideologischen und symbolischen Konstellationen in Kauf, die in den Textstellen vorherrschend sind, wo die Kriterien dargelegt werden, die die Bauern benutzen, um sich von dem Anderen unter seinen verschiedenen Gesichten zu unterscheiden. Die Analyse dieser Faktoren legt uns interessante Forschungswege nahe, die es erlauben, manche Denkweisen und kulturelle Verhaltensweisen herauszuheben, und zwar insbesondere diejenigen, die mit dem Heim -, Familienleben und Kochsitten verbunden sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990061

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044548
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Puccio Deborah
Abstract: L'expérience professionnelle et humaine de Giovanni Falcone, le juge instructeur du plus spectaculaire procès intenté contre la mafia, nous amène à examiner les relations entre l'enquête judiciaire et l'enquête ethnographique : car c'est grâce à l'instruction du Maxiprocesso (1986) qu'aujourd'hui nous disposons d'une abondante moisson de données sur Cosa Nostra, son fonctionnement, ses règles internes et son code d'honneur. Si la reconstruction d'une vérité au moyen d'indices, dans un monde protégé par l'omertà, apparente les techniques d'investigation du juge au modèle épistémologique qui est au fondement des sciences humaines depuis le XIXe siècle, l'utilisation d'informateurs appartenant à l'univers mafieux — les repentis — est à mettre en parallèle plus directement avec les méthodes de l'ethnographie. The human and professional experience of Giovanni Falcone, the examining magistrate in the most spectacular legal operation launched against the Mafia, makes us examine the relations between the judicial and the ethnographic investigation, for it is due to the inquiries of the Maxiprocesso (1986) that we now possess an abundant source of data on the Cosa Nostra, its operation, its internal rules and its code of honour. While, in a world protected by the omertà, the re-establishment of facts by means of evidence places the investigative techniques of the judge among those of the epistemological model, basis of the human sciences since the 19th century, the use of informers — the pentiti — from the world of the Mafia, on the other hand, reflects more directly the methods of ethnography. Das berufliche und menschliche Erfahrenheit des Untersuchungsrichters Giovanni Falcone im spektakulärsten aller jemals gegen die Mafia durchgeführten Prozesse führt uns zu einer Überprüfung der Beziehungen zwischen gerichtlicher und ethnographischer Untersuchung, denn dank der Voruntersuchung im Maxiprocesso (1986) verfügen wir heute über eine umfangreiche Sammlung von Angaben über die Cosa Nostra, über ihre Arbeitsweise, ihre inneren Regeln und ihren Ehrenkodex. In einer durch die Omertà geschützten Welt gleicht die Vorgehensweise des Richters bei der Aufdeckung der Wahrheit dem epistemologischen Modell, das den Humanwissenschaften seit dem 19. Jahrhundert zugrunde liegt, während die Verwendung von Informanten aus dem Bereiche der Mafia — den Pentiti — sich eher mit den Methoden der Ethnographie vergleichen lässt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990302

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044573
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Rémy Catherine
Abstract: L'auteure présente un outil d'exploration des situations sociales : l'arrêt sur image. Elle revient sur ses diverses contraintes techniques et méthodologiques et démontre leur intérêt au sein d'une enquête inspirée par la sociologie de l'action. C'est en tenant compte de la temporalité des actions humaines que l'image semble pouvoir évoluer d'un rôle d'illustration à celui d'outil d'analyse. En passant indifféremment d'image animée à image statique, l'enregistrement vidéo permet un choix de séquences filmées et une lecture multiple des contextes observés. Il aide à suivre finement les activités des acteurs, et à mettre en évidence la différence entre les normes du groupe et celles de l'individu. The author présents a tool for explorating social situations : freezing on the frame. She evokes its various technical and methodological limits and shows its interest for a survey inspired by action sociology. By taking into account the temporality of human actions the image can be more than illustrative and become an analysis tool. By passing indiscriminately from an animated image to a static one video recording permits a sélection of filmed séquences and a multiple reading of the observed contexts. It helps to follow minutely the actors' activities and to show the différence between group norms and individual norms. Die Autorin stellt ein Beobachtungsmittel der sozialen Lagen dar : das Standbild. Sie beschreibt seine verschiedenen technischen und methodologischen Beschränkungen und zeigt sein Interesse für eine von der Handlungssoziologie inspirierten Erhebung. Durch die Berücksichtigung der Zeitlichkeit der Menschenhandlungen ist das Bild mehr als illustrativ und kann zum Analysemittel werden. Beim unterschiedslosen Übergehen von einem belebten zu einem statischen Bild bietet die Videoaufnahme eine Auswahl von gefilmten Bildfolgen und ein vielfaches Lesen der beobachteten Kontexten. Sie hilft dazu, den Unterschied zwischen Gruppennormen und individualen Normen hervorzuheben.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991029

Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lemee-Gonçalves Carole
Abstract: Partant du constat que les faits sociaux de mémoire sont portés par des actes de communication, il s'agit ici de dégager les pratiques qui alimentent les formes de « l'agir » socio-mémoriel, aujourd'hui présent en France et ailleurs. Quels processus sont a l'œuvre dans des situations post-génocidaires, souvent aussi post-migratoires, comme dans la Shoah (« Khurbn » en yiddish) par exemple ? Dans le cas d'Ashkénazes, il s'agit d'une reinscription qualitative au sein des cartographies de la parenté, mais aussi d'une reconnexion avec des périodes antérieures au genocide et à l'ethnocide à travers des événements culturels. Since the work of memory cannot exist without inter-subjective exchanges, this paper introduces in the study of memory the concept of « social acting » created by Weber. Attempting to point out the plurality of the practices that feed the various forms of socio-memorial movements present today in France and elsewhere. Which are the processes taking on a very particular aspect in post-genocidal as in post-migratory situations such as after the Shoah (Khurbn in Yiddish) ? In the case of the Ashkenase, these processes are also post-ethnocide and consist in a qualitative re-inscription within genealogical mapping and simultaneously in the long development of a history in which the genocide constitutes a memorial screen as well as actions of re-inscribing and re-connecting with cultural markers associated to periods antedating the genocide and ethnocide. Da Erinnerungsarbeit nicht ohne das Betrachten von zwischenmenschlichem Austausch und sozialer Praxis erfolgen kann, soll im Rahmen dieses Artikels das Webersche Konzept des « Sozialen Handelns » in die Untersuchung von Erinnerungen einbezogen werden. Ausgehend von der Tatsache, dass soziale Erinnerungen durch Kommunikation ausgedrückt werden, möchte dieser Artikel die Vielfalt der Praktiken zeigen, die heute in Frankreich und anderswo die Vielzahl der gesellschaftlichen Erinnerungsbewegungen prägen. Die Erinnerungsprozesse verdeutlichen vor allem die soziale und zeitliche Beziehung zum Anderen. Besonders interessant zu analysieren ist sind Post-Shoah-(Khurbn auf Jiddisch) und Post-Auswanderungs-Erinnerungenen. In diesem Artikel richtet sich das Augenmerk vor allem auf Ashkenasische Juden aus Deutschland, Zentral-und Osteuropa, deren Situation nach dem Ethnozid betrachtet wird. Dabei ist eine qualitative Wiederaufnahme der Lebenspraxis der Elterngeneration zu beobachten ; ebenso wie ein Anknüpfen im Rahmen bestimmter kultureller Riten an die Zeit vor dem Völkermord.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991434

Journal Title: Revista Geográfica
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia
Issue: i40045037
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Sánchez Darío César
Abstract: Benítez, M. 2003, "La investigación-acción y el rol del investigador en las ciencias sociales", Geo- demos, 6:147-168, Buenos Aires, CONICET-IMHICIHU.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40996763

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045563
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Aguiar Joaquim
Abstract: «L'explication en Sociologie», in Introduction à l'épistémo- logie génétique, t. III, «La pensée biologique, la pensée psychologique et la pensée sociologique», Paris, PUF, 1951 XIII, reeditado em «Études sociologi- ques», Librairie Droz, Genève, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41007596

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045662
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Emediato Carlos A.
Abstract: Samuel Bowles, Class Power and Mass Education,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41010296

Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045733
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Valentim Artur
Abstract: (Patrício, 1989, pp. 226-227).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41011406

Journal Title: Atlantis
Publisher: Asociacion Espanola de Estudios Anglo-Norteamericanos
Issue: i40047023
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Soria Belén
Abstract: (Kittay 1987: 55-57).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41055497

Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i380530
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Weller Dwight B.
Abstract: Traditional sources of sociohistorical data capture only a narrow sense of past lifeworlds. Ethnographic accounts often preserve greater details of social practice but have less clear guidelines for use as data. We evaluate the use of hermeneutical theory as providing guidelines for a method by which ethnographies may be used as sociohistorical data. Hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic "texts" is used to reconstruct patterns of daily life in early-twentieth-century rural Appalachia. This method involves: (1) concept-critique to separate observations from the theoretical framework of the ethnographic account, and (2) validation through a logic of internal consistency and comparison. Through hermeneutical analysis, ethnographics can be made to yield observations of social relations not otherwise available. Our analysis suggests benefits and drawbacks of hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4106338

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048271
Date: 5 1, 2004
Author(s): Benoist Jocelyn
Abstract: San- dra Laugier : « Relativité linguistique, relativité anthropologique », in His- toire, epistemologie, langage, n° 18, novembre 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41099416

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048293
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Perrin Christophe
Abstract: « Wer ist Nietzsches Zarathoustra ? », GA 7, 106.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.093.0333', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048303
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Aubry Gwenaëlle
Abstract: infra, p. 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100920

Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048303
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): De Smet Daniel
Abstract: Brunschvig, « Devoir et pouvoir », p. 183, 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100921

Journal Title: Die Musikforschung
Publisher: Bärenreiter-Verlag
Issue: i40049313
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Seibt Oliver
Abstract: Ebd., S. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41125511

Journal Title: GeoJournal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40050932
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Meschkank Julia
Abstract: (Pott 2007, p. 173ff).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148435

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40050938
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Lautier Nicole
Abstract: À partir d'une enquête effectuée auprès d'élèves de Quatrième, Troisième, Seconde et Première, on propose un modèle intermédiaire d'appropriation de l'histoire. En utilisant les classificateurs expérimentés en sémantique cognitive, on peut ramener à deux grandes catégories cognitives, l'identification du texte de l'histoire : l'une de type événement-changement s'inscrit dans un schéma narratif, l'autre de type entité stable dans un intervalle temporel met en œuvre des processus de catégorisation. Les événements, concepts et entités de l'historien ne correspondent pas toujours aux modes de perception des élèves. Ces derniers procèdent par catégorisation naturelle en multipliant les analogies entre des périodes historiques différentes, en ancrant les informations nouvelles dans une pensée sociale. How do secondary school students get in contact with historical texts ? Examples drawn from an investigation are used to present identification processes as a change-event or as lasting entities in a time interval, analogical categorization processes and social thinking rooting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148526

Journal Title: Soundings: An Interdisciplinary Journal
Publisher: Society for Religion in Higher Education and Vanderbilt University
Issue: i40052750
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): HARDWICK CHARLEY D.
Abstract: Gert Muller and Gordon Welty, "Mysticism and Asceticism," International Year- book for Sociology of Religion (1973), in press.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41177887

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053819
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Bruner Jerome
Abstract: Tout au long de l'histoire de la psychologie, la revolution cognitive n'a pas cessé de progresser. Celle qui a cours aujourd'hui cherche à expliquer comment les individus parviennent a donner des significations au monde complexe qui les entoure : il est temps à présent de comprendre différents modes d'élaboration du sens. Quatre modes distincts sont suggérés. Le premier, le mode intersubjectif, concerne l'établissement, le façonnement et le maintien de l'intersubjectivité. Le deuxième, le mode actionnel, concerne l'organisation de l'action. Le troisième, le mode normatif, intègre les éléments particuliers dans des contextes normatifs et s'exprime en imposant des contraintes aux deux premiers modes. Les trois modes ont en commun d'être fortement dépendants du contexte: Les narratifs — ou les récits — sont l'instrument par excellence permettant d'ancrer les trois premiers modes d'élaboration du sens dans un ensemble plus structuré. On peut supposer que le quatrième mode d'élaboration du sens, le mode propositionnel, vise à décontextualiser les trois modes précédents en les soumettant à la vérification et aux justifications logiques. Throughout the entire history of cognitive psychology, a cognitive revolution has always been in progress. The current cognitive revolution began to explain how individuals come to make meaning out of a complex world ; it now needs to turn more vigorously to different forms of meaning making. Four modes are suggested. The first one is directed to the establishment, shaping and maintenance of intersubjectivity. A second form, the actional mode, is concerned with the way action is organized. The third form, the normative mode, construes particulars in normative contexts ; it expresses itself by imposing constraints on the first two modes. These three modes of meaning making have in common to be context dependent. Narratives or stories are the vehicles par excellence for entrenching the first three modes into a more structured whole. It is suggested that the fourth mode of meaning making, the propositional mode, is directed to the decontextualization of the preceeding three modes by imposing verifiability and logical justification. A brief account of how this set of meaning making processes might have grown out of human evolution is discussed. In conclusion : no reductionist theory on mind will do it proper justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200526

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Denoyel Noël
Abstract: L'alternance entre les trois pôles de la formation (auto-hétéro-oïko) présente dans les pratiques de formation alternée (variété des situations d'apprentissage et des acteurs) renvoie à la différenciation des trois personnes pronominales (je-tu-il) du langage courant et s'inscrit dans l'épistémologie ternaire de la sémiotique initiée par Peirce. L'intelligence pratique et rusée (la métis des Grecs), repérée chez des artisans grâce à l'expression régionale « le biais du gars », met en scène une logique ouverte où transduction et abduction s'articulent à déduction et induction. Une « raison expérientielle » , dialogique, écologique, à visée éthique, est ainsi forgée. C'est une rationalité pratique cherchant à actualiser le potentiel de la situation. Elle est empreinte de sagesse et de « prudence » en action, au sens d'Aristote (phronésis). L'éc(h)oformation qui émerge de cette raison expérientielle, de ce regard interactionnel, est indissociable de la boucle étrange entre deux autres raisons : la raison sensible et la raison formelle, entre spontanéité et habitude. The tripolar concept of training (auto-hetero-oïko), foundation of alternating courses practice (with multiple learning situations and actors), draws us back to the differenciation between the three main persons singular (I, You, He) expressed in common language as the compound epistemology of semiotics put forward by Peirce... Practical intelligence (close to the "metis" of the Greeks) can be noticed among craftsmen when they refer to the "biais du gars" bespeaking an open logic where transduction and abduction are linked to deduction and induction. A constructive reasoning, interactive ans ecological, with ethical objectives, is created. It's a practical rationality aiming at actualizing the potentiality of the situation and marked by sagaciy and prudence in action in the Aristotelian sense (phronesis). The "ec(h)otraining" emerging from the wisdom of experience, this interactive vision of things is necessarily included in the chain linking two other thoughts : the intuitive thought and the formal thought, between spontaneity and habit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201489

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053878
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: Le discours de la recherche sur les enseignants et leurs savoirs est souvent tenté de détacher la connaissance du sujet connaissant, traduisant des préoccupations de fonctionnalité et de transférabilité des savoirs. À cette perspective rationaliste résiste néanmoins une mouvance de recherche qui défend une approche anthropologique du savoir enseignant, moins soucieuse de légiférer l'acte d'enseignement que de mettre au jour les formes complexes et locales de construction de l'enseignant-sujet et de ses savoirs, que ceux-ci soient inscrits dans une forme de vie, incarnés, ou dessinés réflexivement dans l'espace narratif. Ce courant phénoménologique et herméneutique, pluriel et très vivace dans le monde anglo-saxon, promeut le savoir ordinaire des enseignants, se démarquant ainsi des études attentives aux seuls savoirs ' extraordinaires' de l'expert. Traduisant un retour du sujet qui traverse les sciences sociales depuis la dernière décennie, cette tendance dans la recherche éducative à réhabiliter la subjectivité enseignante, sans pour autant la magnifier, adresse des questions importantes à notre champ de recherche sur les choix épistémologiques qui le guident. Research discourse on teachers and their knowledge has a tendency to separate knowledge from the one who knows as it is focusing on knowledge functionality and transfer. Nevertheless, one research movement is resisting to this rationalist perspective, preferring an anthropological approach of teachers' knowledge focusing on sophisticated and local forms of construction of knowledge and knowing subject rather than on teaching laws (these constructions being embodied or reflexively designed in narrative space). This multifaceted phenomenological and hermeneutic trend, observed in anglosaxon world, is promoting teachers' ordinary knowledge, when the majority of investigations focus only on expert knowledge. As it can be observed in all social sciences in this last decade, the importance of the subject - the teacher in that case - is acknowledged (not overestimated), resulting in major questions aimed at our research field about its epistemologic orientations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201593

Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053904
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Daunay Bertrand
Abstract: Depuis que la didactique du français s'est constituée comme champ de recherche, la question de l'enseignement de la littérature a toujours été centrale, même si l'approche didactique de la littérature apparaît davantage comme un espace de questions que comme un lieu de construction d'une théorie cohérente de la littérature, de son enseignement et de son apprentissage. Concernant l'enseignement de la littérature, la didactique du français est essentiellement un champ de discussions théoriques, qui portent aussi bien sur le statut des objets enseignables et sur les conditions de leur enseignabilité que sur la sélection des outils théoriques permettant l'approche de ces objets. Si, aux fondements de la didactique de la littérature, c'est la contestation de l'enseignement traditionnel qui domine, sur des postulats théoriques à forte teneur idéologique, de nombreuses recherches descriptives ont interrogé aussi bien la notion de littérature que les pratiques de lecture des élèves comme les pratiques effectives d'enseignement de la littérature. Au cœur des recherches didactiques se place la question de la sélection des savoirs et des pratiques (lecture et écriture notamment) susceptibles de devenir objets d'enseignement et d'apprentissage, à tous les niveaux du cursus scolaire. Since the didactics of French formed a research field, the question of teaching literature has constantly been crucial, even if the didactical approach of literature seems more like a forum to ask questions, rather than a place where a coherent theory on literature, its teaching and learning is being developed. As for teaching literature, the didactics of French is mainly an area of theoretical discussion as much about the status of objects to be taught and the conditions on which they can be taught as how to select theoretical tools to approach those objects. If, of all the founding elements of didactics of literature, objecting to traditional teaching is the main element based on theoretical postulates with strong ideological content, numerous descriptive research works have questioned the notion of literature as well as the students' reading practices and the actual literature teaching practices. The question of selecting the knowledge and practices (reading and writing for instance) that could become teaching and learning objects at all schooling levels is central to didactical research. Desde que la didáctica del francés se constituyó como campo de investigación, la cuestión de la enseñanza de la literatura siempre ha sido central, aunque el enfoque didáctico de la literatura se presenta más como un espacio de cuestiones que como un lugar de construcción de una teoría coherente de la literatura, de su enseñanza y de su aprendizaje. En lo que se refiere a la enseñanza de la literatura, la didáctica del francés es esencialmente un campo de discusiones teóricas, que tratan tanto del estatuto de los objetos que se pueden enseñar y las condiciones en que pueden ser enseñados como de la selección de los instrumentos teóricos que permiten el enfoque de esos objetos. Si, en los cimientos de la didáctica de la literatura, es la discusión de la enseñanza tradicional la que domina, sobre los postulados teóricos con fuerte contenido ideológico, numerosas investigaciones descriptivas han interrogado tanto la noción de literatura como las prácticas de lectura de los alumnos como las prácticas efectivas de enseñanza de la literatura. En el medio de las investigaciones didácticas se plantea la cuestión de la selección de los saberes y de las prácticas (lectura y escritura particularmente) susceptibles de ser objetos de enseñanza y aprendizaje, en todos los niveles del recorrido escolar. Seit die Didaktik des Französichen zum Forschungsfeld herangewachsen ist, hat die Frage des Unterrichtens der Literatur immer im Mittelpunkt gestanden, auch wenn die didaktische Vorgenshensweise der Literatur eher als ein Feld der Fragen als ein Feld der Bildung einer zusammenhängenden Literaturtheorie erscheint, die die Art und Weise bestimmt, wie man sie unterrichten und lernen muss. Was das Unterrichten der Literatur angeht, erweist sich die Didaktik des Französichen als ein Feld der theoretischen Diskussionen, die sowohl den Status der zu unterrichtenden Inhalte und die Bedingungen ihres möglichen Unterrichtetwerdens als die Wahl der theoretischen Werkzeuge betreffen, die die Behandlung dieser Inhalte ermöglichen. Wenn in den Ursprüngen der Literaturdidaktik das Bestreiten des traditionnellen Unterrichts im Mittelpunkt steht, so haben auf theoretischen Postulaten mit starkem ideologischen Inhalt viele Forschungsarbeiten sowohl den Begriff der Literatur als auch die Lesepraktiken der Schüler sowie die tatsächlichen Unterrichtspraktiken der Literatur in Frage gestellt. Im Herzen der didaktichen Forschungsarbeiten steht die Frage der Auswahl der Kenntnisse und der Praktiken (insbesondere Lesen und Schreiben), die imstande sind, Lehr- und Lernobjekte in allen Stufen des Schulprogramms zu werden.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202262

Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i383141
Date: 11 1, 1968
Author(s): Zeitlin M.
Abstract: The issue of foundationalism and the growing irrelvance of sociological meta-theorizing to the understanding of contemporary society is considered from the perspective of postmodernism. Foundationalism is treated as a form of ideology. Changes in the analysis of ideology are discussed briefly and the postmodern approach to the critique of grand narratives, or logocentrism, is introduced. Two meta-narratives, neofunctionalism and conflict theory, are criticized as illustrative examples of logocentrism. The postmodern critique is then applied to the issue of foundationalism as recently articulated in the "Seidman controversy," which is exposed as containing hidden foundationalist implications of its own. The critique of foundationalism raises three issues that are discussed: the possibility of a deontological social theory, narrative as social inquiry, and the social role of academics as intellectuals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4121373

Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i383167
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): Wiley Douglas
Abstract: This article argues for a synthesis of George Herbert Mead's conception of the temporal and intersubjective nature of the self with Paul Ricoeur's hermeneutic theory of narrative identity. Combining the insights of Ricoeur's philosophical analysis with Mead's social-psychological orientation provides a subtle, sophisticated, and potent explanation of self-identity. A narrative conception of identity implies that subjectivity is neither a philosophical illusion nor an impermeable substance. Rather, a narrative identity provides a subjective sense of self-continuity as it symbolically integrates the events of lived experience in the plot of the story a person tells about his or her life. The utility of this conception of identity is illustrated through a rereading of Erving Goffman's study of the experience of mental patients. This example underlines the social sources of the self-concept and the role of power and politics in the construction of narrative identities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4121582

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Carìtas in Ventate, nr. 45; cit., p. 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220788

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Zanotti Gabriel J.
Abstract: Lakatos, Imre -The Methodology of Scientific Research Programmes. Edited by John Worrall; Gregory Currie. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press, 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220799

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40055650
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Capetz Paul E.
Abstract: John J. Collins, "Biblical Theology and the History of Israelite Religion," in Encounters with Biblical Theology (Minneapolis, Minn.: Fortress, 2005) 24-33, at 33.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0017816011000411', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40055887
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Ruf Oliver
Abstract: Halbwachs, Das Gedächtnis und seine sozialen Bedingungen 158.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mon.2011.0028', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Reference & User Services Quarterly
Publisher: American Library Association
Issue: i40056015
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: The philosophical and practical work of M. M. Bakhtin provides an important aid to theoretical grounding with regard to information seeking. In particular, his ideas of dialogic communication suggest a way to engage in the act of information seeking and the accompanying mediation. His work is especially important because of its phenomenological basis, which emphasizes the intentionality of communication, the connection of practice to being, and the relationship between self and other. Bakhtin's thought offers a framework for the rethinking of public services in libraries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41241356

Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i383702
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): ZizekAbstract: Arguing that without a differentiated and relational notion of the cultural, the social sciences would he crippled, reducing social action to notions of pure instrumentality, in this article, I trace the growth of cultural analysis from the beginnings of modern anthropology to the present as a layered set of experimental systems whose differential lenses create epistemic objects with increasing precision and differential focus and resolution. Arguing that culture is not a variable-culture is relational, it is elsewhere or in passage, it is where meaning is woven and renewed, often through gaps and silences, and forces beyond the conscious control of individuals, and yet the space where individual and institutional social responsibility and ethical struggle take place-I name culture as a set of central anthropological forms of knowledge grounding human beings' self-understandings. The challenge of cultural analysis is to develop translation and mediation tools for helping make visible the differences of interests, access, power, needs, desires, and philosophical perspective. In particular, as we begin to face new kinds of ethical dilemmas stemming from developments in biotechnologies, expansive information and image databases, and ecological interactions, we are challenged to develop differentiated cultural analyses that can help articulate new social institutions for an evolving civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4124728

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i384150
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Tillema Anne M.
Abstract: Inquiry-based teacher education promotes an exploration of concrete particulars as the route to wise practice. The case study presented illustrates one teacher candidate's struggle to let go of a conception of knowledge as generalizable formulae that can be readily applied in practice and to become more open to practice itself as a site of learning. Teacher educators can nurture such openness by helping aspiring teachers to appreciate the fragility of knowledge, the epistemological value of feeling, and the priority of the particular, in teaching. In so doing, educators recover practical wisdom as the beginning and end-in-view of teacher education. /// La formation à l'enseignement axée sur la recherche favorise la prise en compte des conditions particulières et, de ce fait, une pratique éclairée. L'étude de cas présentée dans cet article illustre les efforts d'une candidate à l'enseignement en vue de se départir d'une conception de la connaissance définie comme une formule généralisable, facilement applicable dans la pratique, et de mieux accueillir la pratique elle-même comme un lieu d'apprentissage. Les responsables de la formation à l'enseignement peuvent contribuer à cette ouverture en aidant les futurs enseignants à saisir la fragilité de la connaissance, la valeur épistémologique des sentiments et l'importance des conditions particulières dans l'enseignement. Ce faisant, les éducateurs redécouvrent la sagesse comme le début et l'objectif à atteindre dans la formation à l'enseignement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4126474

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057457
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Strauss 1991 p. 19)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274562

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057467
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): KURCZEWSKI JACEK
Abstract: Jedlicki op. cit. p. 107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274654

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057477
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Religia i polityka," [Religion and Politics] interview in L'Express (23-29 July 1998), reprinted in Forum , no 32, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274749

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057483
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: T. Abel, Systematic Sociology in Germany: A Critical Analysis of Some Attempts to Establish Sociology as an Independent Science. New York: Columbia University Press, 1929, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274815

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Brussels 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275147

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Kania 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275150

Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057514
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): WRÓBEL SZYMON
Abstract: Patrick H. Hutton, Foucault, Freud, and The Technologies of the Self , in: Technologies of the Self , Ed. Luther Martin, Huck Gutman, Patrick H. Hutton, Massachusetts 1988, p. 121.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275157

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i40058128
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Throop C. Jason
Abstract: This review explores the most significant dimensions and findings of phenomenological approaches in anthropology. We spell out the motives and implications inherent in such approaches, chronicle their historical dimensions and precursors, and address the ways in which they have contributed to analytic perspectives employed in anthropology. This article canvasses phenomenologically oriented research in anthropology on a number of topics, including political relations and violence; language and discourse; neurophenomenology; emotion; embodiment and bodiliness; illness and healing; pain and suffering; aging, dying, and death; sensory perception and experience; subjectivity; intersubjectivity and sociality; empathy; morality; religious experience; art, aesthetics, and creativity; narrative and storytelling; time and temporality; and senses of place. We examine, and propose salient responses to, the main critiques of phenomenological approaches in anthropology, and we also take note of some of the most pressing and generative avenues of research and thought in phenomenologically oriented anthropology.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092010-153345', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40058259
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): de Wit Theo W.A.
Abstract: H. Lübbe, 'Politik und Religion nach der Aufklärung', Politik nach der Aufklärung. Philosophi- sche Aufsätze, München, Wilhelm Fink Verlag, 2001, pp. 39-75 (p. 66).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41289471

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40058283
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Longhurst C. A.
Abstract: Paul Ilie's "Language and Cognition"
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41289943

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Department of History, University of Waterloo
Issue: i40058596
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Cooper B.
Abstract: Voegelin, "On Classical Studies," Modern Age, 17 (1973), p. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41298701

Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058627
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hanna Martha
Abstract: L'Oeuvre 4 February 1923.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41298984

Journal Title: Guerres mondiales et conflits contemporains
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058713
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Barasz Johanna
Abstract: Claire Andrieu, « La Résistance dans le siècle », in François Marcot (dir.), Dictionnaire Historique de la Résistance, op. cit., p. 46-54.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/gmcc.242.0027', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058715
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): BONNEUIL NOËL
Abstract: Noel Bonneuil, "Morphological Transition of Schooling in Nineteenth Century France," (submitted).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300048

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058716
Date: 2 1, 2011
Author(s): FORCE PIERRE
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300058

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058771
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Bernard Marion
Abstract: J. Patočka, Le Monde naturel comme problème philosophique , La Haye, Nijhoff, 1976, p. 83.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.113.0375', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i40058855
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Donovan Josephine
Abstract: Animal-standpoint criticism is a new vein in literary criticism that questions ideologically-driven representations of animals, their aesthetic exploitation, their absence or silence in literary texts, and the obliviousness of earlier critics to these issues. This article briefly summarizes the main tenets of animal-standpoint criticism to date. Its main focus is then on the question of aesthetic exploitation of animal cruelty, in particular on the pervasive use in contemporary American fiction of the animal proxy, an animal figure whose suffering is largely for aesthetic effect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41302895

Journal Title: History of Education Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i40058901
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Tamura Eileen H.
Abstract: Burke, History and Social Theory , 1; Burke, History and Social Theory , 26,
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1748-5959.2011.00327.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Early Science and Medicine
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i384650
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Ricoeur Stephen
Abstract: "An- cient Hypotheses of Fiction," 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4130480

Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40058971
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: «A los companeros del ML exilados en Mexico, desde Espana», 27/06/1944 (IISH, FGP, 804
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304936

Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40059146
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): GRUIN JULIAN
Abstract: Michael King, 'What's the Use of Luhmann's Theory?' in M. King and C. Thornhill (eds), Luhmann on Law and Politics: Critical Appraisals and Applications (Oxford: Hart, 2006), pp. 37-53.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S026021051000152X', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: AJS Review
Publisher: Association for Jewish Studies
Issue: i387649
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Cixous Sidra DeKoven
Abstract: "The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim," #17, in Open Closed Open, trans. Chana Bloch and Chana Kronfeld (NewYork: Harcourt, Inc., 2000) [from Patuah sagur patuah] pp. 26-27. The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim," 26 Open Closed Open 2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4131512

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060506
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Moya Antonio Morales
Abstract: Lottman, La caída de Paris. 14 de junio de 1940, Tusquets, Barcelona, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41324355

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060531
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Spiegel Gabrielle M.
Abstract: Hollinger, D.: «How Wide the Circle of "We"? Ameri- can Intellectuals and the Problem of the Ethnos Since World War II», American His- torical Review, 98 (1993), p. 310.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41324970

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sebastián Javier Fernández
Abstract: Ibid., p. 632.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325255

Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i388662
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Zablocki Charles F.
Abstract: Peacock & Kirsch's The Human Direction (1980) Peacock The Human Direction 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4132879

Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40061363
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HALL KIM Q.
Abstract: This paper critiques the rise of scientific approaches to central questions in the humanities, specifically questions about human nature, ethics, identity, and experience. In particular, I look at how an increasing number of philosophers are turning to evolutionary psychology and neuroscience as sources of answers to philosophical problems. This approach constitutes what I term a biological turn in the humanities. I argue that the biological turn, especially its reliance on evolutionary psychology, is best understood as an epistemology of ignorance that contributes to a climate of hostility and intolerance regarding feminist insights about gender, identity, and the body.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01229.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40061446
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Lebel Udi
Abstract: Individual behaviors, such as loss-coping and “grief work” are affected in organizational contexts. In everything pertaining to coping with trauma in general, and loss more particularly, the individual is “trapped” within a political psychology that enforces the habitus and expectations of institutional dominance on the ostensibly intimate and private response. Regimes have perceived bereavement over battlefield deaths as a form of social capital that can be mobilized to enhance national loyalty and political support. Employing both existential/hermeneutic and institutional analysis, this study examines three diachronic models of bereavement — hegemonic, political and civil — and their political ramifications in the Israeli context.Drawing on changing parental conceptual orientations towards fallen sons and their role as cultural and ideological agents in public sphere, the article traces the movement of bereavement from its capture by the hegemonic state institutions to its creations under the domination of others institutions: political and civic and ultimate use in critiquing the political and military echelon. The article indicates the powerful impact of the social institutional-organizational context on the intimate-psychological context of coping with loss, by illustrating this phenomenon in the Israeli society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41330471

Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40063192
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Lizcano Emmánuel
Abstract: (Fishier, 1992)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41336851

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): PHILLIPS MARK SALBER
Abstract: Hume, Treatise , 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342618

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): MARION MATHIEU
Abstract: Collingwood et la philosophie du vingtième siècle! Collingwood and Twentieth-Century Philosophy, at the Université du Québec à Montréal in October 2007 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342623

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063720
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Jameson Fredric
Abstract: This review essay attempts to understand the book under review against the background of Jameson's previous writings. Failing to do so would invite misunderstanding since there are few contemporary theorists whose writing forms so much of a unity. Jameson's book can be divided into three parts. The first and most important part deals with dialectics, the second with politics, and the third with philosophy of history. In the first part Jameson argues that dialectics best captures our relationship to the sociocultural and historical world we are living in. The second part makes clear that Jameson is not prepared to water down his own Marxist politics in order to spare the liberal sensibilities of his political opponents. In the third part Jameson develops his own philosophy of history, mainly in a dialogue with Ricoeur. Dialectics is his main weapon in his discussion with Ricoeur, and it becomes clear that the Spinozism of dialectics allows for a better understanding of history and of historical writing than does Ricoeur's phenomenological approach. The book is an impressive testimony to the powers of dialectical thought and to its indispensability for a proper grasp of historical writing.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00613.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Lallier Christian
Abstract: Gérard Althabe au séminaire de Nicolas Flamant, « Anthropologie et entreprise », à l'École des hautes études en sciences sociales, en 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342881

Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063739
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Iuso Anna
Abstract: P. A. Fabre (1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342931

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40064476
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: chez Bruaire, С .-La dialectique. Paris : PUF, 1985, l'annexe sur les exercices ignatiens en lien avec cette citation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41354816

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i387940
Date: 7 1, 1968
Author(s): WorsleyAbstract: Mi'kmaq Indians' descriptions of journeys between worlds, as we find them in tales collected from the early seventeenth century to the early twentieth, are far too complex to fit into Mircea Eliade's model of shamanism or romantic images of Indians as being "at one with nature." The tales reveal six parallel worlds in which all types of beings belong to families, have wigwams, and search for food. The parallelism between worlds has no significance for beings living their ordinary lives, but it is of the utmost importance for understanding how differing types of beings in the stories (people, animals, supernaturals) achieve interworld journeys. The notions of cosmological deixis and perspectivism are used to explore the narratives and shed light on Mi'kmaq cosmology.
Link: http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/journal_of_american_folklore/v119/119.473hornborg.html', 'The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois Press', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Merveilles & contes
Publisher: University of Colorado
Issue: i40067568
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Schmölders Claudia
Abstract: Das Mārchen als Psychologe— Eine Hommage an Max Lüthi This essay was wtitten in honor of Max Lūthi, the renowned Swiss folklorist, who died in 1991. The starting point is an article by Lüthi in which he coined the term "the fairy tale as psychologist." In contrast to the psychoanalytic approach of Freudians and Jungians, Schmölders demonstrates how Lüthi drew a line between literature and psychology in his works. First, Lüthi studied the hero in the fairy tale from an anthropomorphological viewpoint. Second, Lūthi analyzed the style of fairy tales by examining the moral, aesthetic, and economic aspects of the action. Third, Lūthi also dealt with "the legend as psychologist." Using Lüthi's notions, Schmōlders stresses the dialogic strategies and anthropomorphological concerns of the tales within the domain of psychological object-relations theory, and it is in this regard that Lūthi's term "the fairy tale as psychologist" assumes its importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41390331

Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i387664
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Wilcox John
Abstract: This essay argues for a new religious ethical approach to fatherhood centered on children and their expanding capabilities for participation in society. Under the notion of "childism"-in analogy to feminism, womanism, humanism, and the like-it takes the perspective of the experiences and concerns of childhood as such. In contrast with a soft patriarchal argument for fatherhood that dominates much religious discourse today, it argues for a larger and more hopeful vision of fatherhood as directed toward the human social good. This requires, methodologically, a richer hermeneutical circle between religion and the social sciences. Substantively, it calls for Christian and other religious ethicists to re-imagine fatherhood as an integrated public-private responsibility that aims to cultivate children's fully human social creativity as images of their Creator.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4139838

Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40068520
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Torres Pedro Ruiz
Abstract: Benjamin, Discursos interrumpidos , Ma- drid, 1990, p. 183,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41408119

Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40069058
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: rd, p. 10 et 247, acr, p. 948).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.121.0081', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40069703
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Jahnke Marcus
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 366.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/DESI_a_00141', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40069706
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Fernández Germán Darío
Abstract: Descombes (1996: 287),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41427885

Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i388096
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Van der Poel Reinier
Abstract: Kushner, 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4143696

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40070293
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Zembrzycki Stacey
Abstract: As oral historians, we devote a great deal of time to painstakingly designing our projects, cognizant of the fact that our research requires us to interact with human beings in often intimate ways. For this same reason, though, our careful methodology and meticulously designed projects are constantly being tested. This article is a reflection on some of the ethical and methodological challenges that the authors faced during their life story interviews with Holocaust survivors in Montreal, Canada. In particular, it explores three major themes: the elaborate process of learning to "share authority" and build trust with interviewees; the limitations of "deep listening" and their implications; and the struggle to deal with contentious politics, such as perceived racism, that emerged out of some interviews. Reflection on these methodological and ethical challenges not only opens up a wider and important discussion among researchers about how practice relates to theory but also teaches us about our interviewees. For example, what does an interviewee's refusal to engage deeply about his or her past tell us about how they formed their identity in the aftermath of mass violence? Challenges, such as this one, are part of the story. They shed light on questions of narrative formation, the identity politics that result from survival, and how individual memory interacts with dominant narratives about atrocity. They force us to recognize that both our interviewees—and ourselves—are human beings, and not just collections of stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41440802

Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i387805
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Ricoeur John D.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Essays on Biblical Interpretation, ed. Lewis S. Mudge (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1980) Ricoeur Essays on Biblical Interpretation 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4146418

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071849
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Adams Julia
Abstract: (Clemens 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41475694

Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071887
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Renouard Cecile
Abstract: This article explores the possible convergence between the capabilities approach and utilitarianism to specify CSR. It defends the idea that this key issue is related to the anthropological perspective that underpins both theories and demonstrates that a relational conception of individual freedoms and rights present in both traditions gives adequate criteria for CSR toward the company's stakeholders. I therefore defend "relational capability" as a means of providing a common paradigm, a shared vision of a core component of human development. This could further lead to a set of indicators aimed at assessing corporate social performance as the maximization of the relational capability of people impacted by the activities of companies. In particular, I suggest a way of evaluating the contribution of extractive companies to the communities close to their industrial sites in extremely poor areas, not from the viewpoint of material resources and growth, but from the viewpoint of the quality of the social environment and empowerment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476130

Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072033
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: Wetherell and Potter (1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41478455

Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072112
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: (Ricoeur 1990, p. 211).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480119

Journal Title: Studia Rosenthaliana
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40072258
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Klein Gil P.
Abstract: BT Bava Batra 75a. See his interpretation of Job 40:30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41482514

Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40073035
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): DIETZ MARY G.
Abstract: Thucydides' (I.76.2)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41495079

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, Supplementary Volumes
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i40073583
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Gardner Sebastian
Abstract: Lear (1990, ch. 5).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-8349.2012.00207.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i387885
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Rahner Francis Schüssler
Abstract: Principles of Catholic Theology: Building Stones for a Fundamental Theology (San Francisco: Ignatius Press, 1987) Principles of Catholic Theology: Building Stones for a Fundamental Theology 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4150746

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i40074891
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Viljoen Martina
Abstract: Kramer (1990; 2002),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41552763

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075227
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Rabatel Alain
Abstract: supra, 2.3. et 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559015

Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075250
Date: 2 1, 1994
Author(s): Rastier François
Abstract: l'auteur, 1991, ch. VIII.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559273

Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40075788
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Farley Margaret A.
Abstract: De car. 12c.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41575986

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40076402
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Eckert Cornelia
Abstract: Este artigo traz uma reflexão sobre o método etnográfico enquanto encapsulando o tema da identidade narrativa do antropólogo, em especial, enfocando o problema ético-moral da busca da coerência interna de sua produção etnográfica através da análise do processo de construção do conhecimento antropológico. Trata-se de pontuar, neste processo, o que está verdadeiramente em jogo, ou seja, o ato de configuração e reconfiguração do tempo que encerra a ação interpretativa em Antropologia. This article brings a reflections about the ethnographic method while encapsulating the identity theme describes by the anthropologist, in special, focusing the moral-ethic problem of the searching of the internal coherence of its ethnographic production through the study of the process of the anthropologic knowledge construction. It is to point, in this process, that is really in the play, or, the act of configuration and reconfiguration of time that stops the interpretative action in anthropology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41601948

Journal Title: Bulletin d'études orientales
Publisher: Institut Français du Proche-Orient
Issue: i40076696
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): ZINE Mohammed Chaouki
Abstract: Fut., I, p. 360 (chap. 68).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41608624

Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077028
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lagrou Elsje Maria
Abstract: O artigo é uma leitura do debate epistemológico sobre as condições de conhecimento na antropologia. Partindo das críticas que o próprío C. Geertz faz a seus seguidores, a autora se propõe a avaliar o potencial crítico da hermenêutica. Recupera seu questionamento acerca da oposiçâo sujeito/objeto e propõe a busca de uma objetividade negociada interpares e situada historicamente. A partir desse debate questiona-se uma ciência pura e sem implicações práticas e morais. O percurso que faz avaliando vários autores lhe permite concluir que o excesso de relativismo ou de subjetivismo transforma toda possibilidade de ciência em ficção. Para dar conta em sua etnografia dos sistemas simbólicos não lingüísticos, a autora busca um diálogo entre a teoría antropológica e as teorias nativas e afirma que é na experiência vivida em campo que está a fertilidade das perguntas e reformulações de conceitos da antropologia. This article is an attempt to interpret the epistemological debate concerning conditions of knoledge in antropology. Discussing the criticism which C. Geertz has made in regard to the work of his followers, the autor proposes to evaluate the critical potential of hermeneutics. A critique of the subject-object split opens the way for proposing a form of objectivity wich is historically located and negotiated among equals. This debate constitutes a point os departure for questioning the notion of a pure science devoid of moral and practical implications. In the course of discussing a number of authors, the conclusion may well be that excessive relativism and subjectivism transform all possibilities of science into fiction. In order to deal with nonlinguistic symbolic systems in etnography, the author sees the importance of dialogue between anthropological theory and native theory. Fertile grounds for raising questions and reformulating anthropological concepts are found in fieldword experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616139

Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40077132
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Di Nola Annalisa
Abstract: Originario della Polo- nia, Liebmann Hersch (1882-1955),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41618976

Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista (UNESP)
Issue: i40077754
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): PUGA Rogério Miguel
Abstract: Bakhtin (2000, p.84)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41634272

Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40077837
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Jarausch Konrad H.
Abstract: Konrad H. Jarausch, "German Civility? Retying Social Bonds after Barbarism," European Review of History 18 (2011), 373-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41637867

Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer Science + Business Media
Issue: i40078338
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Aist Clark S.
Abstract: This paper reviews a body of data that identifies underlying influences that have contributed to an evolving change in American Psychiatry toward a more positive and receptive stance toward religion and spirituality over the past three decades. This development, surprising in light of the remedicalization of psychiatry and its predominantly neuro-biological orientation, is attributed to five foundational ideas that have helped to leverage this change. These are significance of culture, creative power of ritual, psychic function of belief, neuro-biology of spirituality, and relevance of recovery narratives. The impact of these factors for psychiatric assessment and treatment is described, as well as the contribution of the Oskar Pfister legacy and award to the ongoing dialogue between religion and psychiatry. Adapted from the American Psychiatric Association's 2011 Oskar Pfister Lecture in Religion and Psychiatry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41653855

Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393682
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): ZubinAbstract: In our research, we wish to illuminate different types of discursive intentions which are structured into discourse via the verb inflections and auxiliaries, together with their entailed social effects. In the present report, we examine the use of the simple present by two three-year-olds, and argue that analyses in terms of tense or aspect are not adequate to account for its use. One needs to recognize the way in which the form implicitly refers to norms and thereby entails a type of impersonal motivation -- especially as it is just this feature of the use of this form that structures the ongoing activity into a nondialogic, normative activity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4167800

Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079106
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Meschonnic Henri
Abstract: Roland Barthes, « Pourquoi j' aime Benveniste », pour la parution du tome premier des Problèmes de linguistique générale, baptisés Essais par une erreur redoublée pour le deuxième, en 1974. Dans Le bruissement de la langue, déjà cité, p. 193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683199

Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079141
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Longhi Julien
Abstract: We analyse the French noun livre « book » according to an argumentative conception of language. A summary is presented of the theories of Anscombre (Theory of stereotypes) and of Carel and Ducrot (Theory of semantic blocks), which are used to reveal the argumentative dimensions of livre. Argumentation is argued to derive from a common sense system (Sarfati) leading to the ascription of doxa in language governed by a topohbased device, which corresponds to discursive object. Semiotisation is supported by phenomenological processes: the Indexicality of meaning (Lebas 1999, Cadiot and Visetti 2001) is concerned at the Linguistic level with the construction of semantic forms along three dimensions of meaning, known in the Theory of semantic forms as motifs, profiles, and themes. The contributions of the discursive levels to the constitution of a semantic form are raised in view of the phenomenon of lexical anticipation. What we call "inserted motifs" reveals the genericity of Discursive Formations. In the course of "profiling", these motifs constitute a pre-syntactic zone of stabilisation. The "doxic profiles" allows the construction of topoï by thematisation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683593

Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40079193
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): KURCZYNSKI KAREN
Abstract: "Le cinéma après Alain Resnais," pp. 8-9.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00096', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Modern China
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40079950
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Murthy Viren
Abstract: Although ZhangTaiyan is famous for being a late Qing nationalist and revolutionary, scholars have yet to explore fully the significance of his Buddhist writings, especially as they relate to time and history. This article closely examines Zhang's writings about time and history and points out that Zhang made two interrelated but potentially conflicting arguments. On the one hand, he invoked Yogācāra Buddhism and Zhuang Zi to expound a relativistic vision of time and history. From this perspective, each nation has its historical particularity and cannot be judged from an external standard. However, on the other hand, in a context where intellectuals were uncritically adopting a framework of history as progress, Zhang grounded the theory of evolution in a theory of karmic seeds to develop an interpretation of history as a double movement in which the good gets better and the bad gets worse. The article delves into the significance of Zhang's arguments by highlighting the symmetries between Zhang's exposition of history and the logic of capitalism. Such structural similarities suggest that Zhang could think about time and history in this way precisely because he inhabited a world mediated by the dynamic of capitalism. His writings on Zhuang Zi and Buddhism should be seen as an example of a resistance to capitalism that is not based on a narrative of progress. In the context of twentieth-century Chinese intellectual history, where narratives of progress and evolution are a dominant chord, Zhang's counterpunctual critique of evolution is especially inspiring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41702468

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080047
Date: 2 1, 1978
Author(s): Grimaud Michel
Abstract: « Vers une poétique psychanalytique. Lectures de Victor Hugo » (Thése, université du Wis- consin [Madison], 1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704432

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): SIMON ANNE
Abstract: RTP, I, p. 156.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704938

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): DE CHALONGE FLORENCE
Abstract: M. Duras, Le Ravissement de Loi V. Stein (1964), Gallimard (Folio), 1977, p. 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704939

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): BAUDELLE YVES
Abstract: Célis (p. 186-187).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704940

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080124
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Michel Costantini, « Le jeu d'instance et d'instant. Dix- sept minutes encore, Monsieur le bourreau », in Juan Alonso, Denis Bertrand, Michel Costantini, Sylvain Dambrine (éds), La Transversalité du sens. Parcours sémiotiques, « Essais et savoirs », Paris, PUV, 2006, p. 139-149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705364

Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i40080131
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Deslandes Ghislain
Abstract: "Each answer gives more than ordinary prudence requires. The right cheek? Turn the other cheek! The coat? Take the tunic as well! A thousand? One more!" (2006b, 171).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.5840/bpej20123111', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080471
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Description de San Marco et le guide Gallimard de Venise, éd. Nouveaux- Loisirs, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713297

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392513
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Shklovsky Robert
Abstract: Fussner, Historical Revolution, 220-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174538

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revue canadienne des études latino-américaines et caraïbes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Association Canadienne des études Latino-Américaines et Caraïbes
Issue: i40084753
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): MICÓ JOSÉ ANTONIO GIMÉNEZ
Abstract: La época que nos ha tocado vivir, que, a falta de mejores términos, denominamos tentativamente "globalización," provoca el entretejido de una malla virtual que aglutina privilegiadas zonas de contacto e ignorados ghettos de exclusión, así como irreconciliables identidades monolíticas y múltiples (individuales, locales, étnicas, religiosas, de género, de preferencias sexuales, nacionales, mundiales... et al.); fragmentaciones, opacidades, pro-, proto-, pos-, antinaciones, transnaciones, translenguas, transculturas... La novela Rojo, amarillo y verde, del autor boliviano-quebequés-canadiense-planetario Alejandro Saravia, es representativa del titubeante imaginario planetario que comienza a perfilarse. Lejos de ser una apología celebratoria de la "aldea global," este multifacético imaginario propone un contrapeso dialógico al monólogo del pensamiento único que pretende imponernos el capitalismo globalizante. La période que nous vivons, que nous nommons provisoirement la "mondialisation" à défaut de meilleurs termes, provoque l'entre-tissage d'un réseau virtuel agglutinant des zones de contact privilégiées et des ghettos d'exclusion ignorés; des identités monolithiques et multiples irréconciliables (individuelles, locales, ethniques, religieuses, de genre, d'orientations sexuelles, nationales, mondiales... et al.); des fragmentations, des opacités, des pro-, proto-, post-, anti-nations, des trans-nations, des trans-langues, des trans-cultures... Le roman Rojo, amarillo y verde, de l'auteur bolivien-québécois-canadien-planétaire Alejandro Saravia, est représentatif du chancelant imaginaire planétaire qui commence à se profiler. Loin d'être une apologie célébratoire du "Village global," cet imaginaire aux mille visages propose un contrepoids dialogique au monologue de la pensée unique, celle que le capitalisme mondialisant essaie de nous imposer. The age we find ourselves living in which, for lack of a better term, we tentatively call "globalization" provokes the interweaving of a virtual meshwork that brings together privileged zones of contact and forgotten ghettos of exclusion, as well as irreconcilable monolithic and multiple identities (individual, local, ethnic, religious, national, global, of gender or sexual preference... et al.); fragmentations, opacities, pro-, proto-, post-, antinations, transnations, translinguistics, transcultures... The novel Rojo, amarillo y verde > by Alejandro Saravia, a Bolivian-Quebecker-Canadian-Planetarian author, represents the hesitant global imaginary that is beginning to take shape. Far from being a celebratory apology of the "global village," this multifaceted imaginary proposes a dialogic counterweight to the monologue of the single thought the globalizing capitalism is trying to impose on us.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41800579

Journal Title: Theoria: A Journal of Social and Political Theory
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40084882
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Mitchell Joshua
Abstract: Because Hobbes is understood to be a proto-liberal thinker, a great deal hinges on how we understand his writings. Does he contribute to the development of a purely secular political self-understanding, as many liberals today claim? And, by extension, does that mean that liberal thought today best stands on a purely secular foundation? What, then, should we make of the extensive theological speculation throughout his Leviathan! Here, I argue that to reconcile the seemingly purely secular claims in Leviathan with the obviously religious claims found there we must move beyond reading him in terms of what I here call 'the fable of liberalism', and comprehend Leviathan as a whole in terms of Reformation era debates between Protestants and Roman Catholics about the limits and purview of reason. Understood in that way we see his claims about 'reason' in a new and important light. Rather than being an inevitable development that comes to supercede honour and glory, as the fable of liberalism suggests, 'reason' is seen to have an historically contingent character, whose parameters are established by wagers about the meaning of religious experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802392

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084987
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Epstein, Helen - Écrire la vie. Trad. C. Nelson. Paris: La Cause des Livres, 2009, p. 101.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803883

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SANTOS LAURA
Abstract: Justice Brennan,, ct., p. 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803947

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084996
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): DUQUE JOÃO
Abstract: Metz, J. B. - "Religion und Politik", p. 276.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41804059

Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40085290
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Hooper Laurence E.
Abstract: Par. 33.94-96
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mln.2012.0152', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Journal of Cultural Economics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i40085341
Date: 8 1, 1999
Author(s): RUSHTON MICHAEL
Abstract: This paper considers the communitarian critique of the method of economics, especially in regard to its methodological individualism, with reference in particular to cultural economics. It asks whether cultural goods can be modelled in a meaningful way under the usual assumptions in neoclassical economics about individual economic agents. Special attention is paid to Charles Taylor's critique of "atomism", and his suggestion that some goods are "irreducibly social". The implications of the critique for (1) public funding of the arts, and (2) copyright policy, are considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41810692

Journal Title: Minerva
Publisher: The International Council on the Future of the University
Issue: i40085823
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): EISENSTADT S. N.
Abstract: Eisenstadt, S. N., "Intellectuals and Tradition", in Eisenstadt, S. N. and Graubard, S. R. (eds), op. cit., pp. 1-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41820678

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kemp Peter
Abstract: Ibid., p. 43-44.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0173', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, especially the epilogue entitled "Le pardon difficile", p. 593-658.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0197', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Michael Walzer, Spheres of Justice, New York, 1983.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0217', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087534
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Ron Amit
Abstract: The article develops an understanding of public deliberations during a peace process, focusing on the interaction between the elite level negotiations and the "public peace process." It does so by examining the dialogical mechanisms that are set to work in the public sphere once the elite consider the possibility of identifying the former enemies as allies or friends. These dialogical mechanisms, the author argues, add up to a shift in the manner the public interprets the discourse that regulates its relationship with the elite toward what the author calls, following Paul Ricoeur, 'hermeneutics of suspicion.' Thus, the peace process generates a need for the public to re-examine the terms of understanding that defined its relationship with the former enemy. However this same process might also lead the public to re-examine the terms by which it understands its relationship with the elite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852982

Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40088706
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): MONNIER Raymonde
Abstract: Hans-Jürgen Lüsebrink, Rolf Reichardt, Die Bastille. Zur Symbolgeschichte von Herrschaft und Freiheit, Frankfurt am Main, Fischer, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41890504

Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394112
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zaltman Barbara B.
Abstract: In an empirical study using five real-world creative teams from an advertising agency, participants were given a strategic brief for a new beverage product and asked to design the layout for a print ad. Think-aloud concurrent protocols obtained from each team's copywriter, art director, and the two working together were analyzed to examine the creative process and its relationship to the created advertisement. Interpretive analyses of the protocols reveal that the teams access culturally available plot patterns but in different ways. In this study and with the particular materials and situational context explored here, four of the five teams chose to pursue a single mythic structure to the apoarent detriment of their final product. Only one team engaged in fully diversified idea generation involving a wide range of alternative scenarios. Not coincidentally, as a tentative conclusion, this more flexible team produced the ad judged most successful by advertising professionals. This still-to-be-tested exploratory finding deserves further investigation in future research that embodies various methodological refinements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4189175

Journal Title: Rhetoric and Public Affairs
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40090341
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Hatch John B.
Abstract: The book Letters Across the Divide: Two Friends Explore Racism, Friendship, and Faith embodies a dialogic rhetoric with significant potential to influence its intended audience to accept the need for racial atonement and reconciliation. It exemplifies what Aaron Gresson calls a "dance of agency" in both its interpersonal exchanges and constructed relationship with readers. Bringing white and black voices, individual and collective concerns, and (interpersonal and public discourse into dialogue, Letters demonstrates the transformative power of "voice," which mediates the "authenticity" of Buberian dialogic rhetoric and the cultural performances of Bakhtinian dialogism. The fact that the white coauthor boldly affirms commonplaces of white resistance increases the likelihood that white readers would identify with and be influenced by his profound attitudinal change in dialogue with his black friend. The coherence and credibility ofthat transformation depend upon the prefigurai power of the authors' shared religious narrative—both enabling and constraining Letters' influence on public racial reconciliation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41940477

Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Florida Atlantic University
Issue: i40090504
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Gale Deborah Dysart
Abstract: An increasing number of individuals worldwide are receiving home nursing care from loved ones. Many healthcare professionals are exploring the use of narrative to help family caregivers meet the personal demands of this work. Citing Ricoeur's notion of narrative identity as a social process in which cultural norms and values are negotiated between speaker and audience, this paper argues that health care professionals can assist their clients by viewing narrative as collaboration, not autonomous construction. Collaboration in construction of narrative identity was observed in interactions between family caregivers and public health workers on the Caribbean island of St. Kitts. There, caregivers were supported by a dialogic process in which interlocutors explored the cultural values that define and delimit the possibilities for living as caregivers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41942906

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i388794
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Henrik
Abstract: A theory of the embodiment of action is proposed. Reflections on relations between human intentions, the human body and the notion of agency lead us to argue that phenomenological analysis is not sufficient for such a theory. Our consideration, that the most fundamental level of embodied agency is that of life itself, brings us to the philosophy of biology and the theory of the organism: briefly, certain parts of the natural environment are intrinsic to the constitution of organisms and, in their more sophisticated configuration, as agents. Action is embodied in the sense that certain physiological processes are internal in relation to it and play a constitutive role in its performance. The way in which environment, context and consciousness affect and constitute the nature of agency at personal and sub-personal levels is elaborated. We see that human agents perceive and act upon their world through a complex shifting between those levels. A summary of the ways in which the social sciences can be enriched by this more comprehensive view of human agency provides the basis of justification for claiming Actor-Network Theory (ANT), originally developed by sociologists studying science and technology, as a promising framework for the continuation of this reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4194959

Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40091447
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): García Pilar
Abstract: Bajtin 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955560

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091451
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): KAHLMEYER-MERTENS ROBERTO S.
Abstract: Gadamer, Hans-Georg. – Wahrheit und Methode, ed. cit., p. 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955630

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091456
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): BARROSO PAULO
Abstract: Goethe, Johann Wolfgang — Máximas e Reflexões. Lisboa: Guimarães Editores, 2001, p. 119.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955712

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091456
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): SERRÃO DANIEL
Abstract: Meneses, Ramiro Dèlio Borges de — O Desvalido no Caminho. Santa Maria da Feira: Edições Passionistas, 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955714

Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: Sociedad Española de Musicología
Issue: i40091550
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): García Montalbán Antonio
Abstract: Lo Maravilloso en el Siglo de las Luces: La Encyclopédie y Esteban de Arteaga (1747-1799). Valencia, Mu VIM, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41959346

Journal Title: Journal of Correctional Education
Publisher: Correctional Education Association
Issue: i40092321
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Zollmann Mary Ann
Abstract: This article explores the thesis that educators are called to define and describe truth morefoundationally than we have ever done before if tve are to facilitate existence that is right, just, correct on both a personal and communal level. This thesis is sourced in ever-deepening attentiveness to, appreciation for, and affirmation of this statement of Adrian van Kaam: "The work of reformation starts in the heart by means of the human spirit; it is the reclamation of the soul, via the spirit, of its innermost form direction. " Suggesting that education which would be truly correctional must, therefore, reach into the very heart of being, the author describes the current paradigm shift from the Newtonian model of what it means to be human with its positivistic approaches to learning to a more Einsteinian or fullfield understanding of human being and its requirement of more formative learning processes. In consonance with the truth of being as full-field, formative correctional education is reflective and experiential, dialogical, narrative in form, and globally inclusive. In her discussion of each of these methodologies, the author illustrates how each one draws us deeper into the truth of who we are and inspires us to be the unique presence that we are in the world. Through such methods and processes, individuals are formed, reformed, and transformed not only in self-appreciation and openness to their own possibilities, but in appreciation for the meaning and value of their existence with others in the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41970960

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092521
Date: 9 1, 1949
Author(s): DE SAINT MAURICE BERAUD
Abstract: Trois Fontaines, "Existentialisme Chrétien: Gabriel Marcel." La Notion de Prisence chez Gabriel Marcel, (Paris, 1947), p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41974378

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092574
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Dreyer Elizabeth
Abstract: Coll. in Hex. 2. 29-30 (V. 341).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41974986

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092589
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): GELBER HESTER GOODENOUGH
Abstract: Legenda maior in Analecta 10:626.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41975266

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092597
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): DELIO ILIA
Abstract: Karl Rahner, "The Eternal Signifcance of the Humanity of Jesus for our Relationship with God," trans. Karl-H. and Boniface Kruger, vol. 3, Theological Investigations (Baltimore: Helicon Press, 1967): 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41975403

Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i388842
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Wright Philip
Abstract: From the work of Weber onwards charisma has been primarily explained in terms of its relationship to underlying social structural and psychological environments. The paper redresses this imbalance and examines the cultural structures that operate as preconditions for the attribution of charisma to political and religious leaders. Drawing on Weberian, Durkheimian and semiotic theory the paper argues that charisma arises in conjunction with salvation narratives. The internal structure of these narratives requires binary oppositions contrasting good and evil. The model is exemplified with reference to case studies of Hitler, Churchill and Martin Luther King.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4201192

Journal Title: The Slavonic and East European Review
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i392079
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Džadžić David A.
Abstract: Petar Džadžić, Prostori sreće u delu Miloša Crnjanskog, Belgrade, 1976. Džadžić Prostori sreće u delu Miloša Crnjanskog 1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4209737

Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i217647
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Wagar Helena
Abstract: Heidegger (1982, 1983)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/423471

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: i394211
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Zamyatin Peter G.
Abstract: This article examines the interplay of dystopian and utopian themes in Terry Bisson's "Pirates of the Universe," utilizing Tom Moylan's concept of "critical dystopia." In the novel, Bisson maps out a number of discontinuous dystopias in a near-future US marked by rampant capitalist enterprise, out-of-control bio-technology, ecological decay, and a weak central state. These dystopias generally produce citizens with fragmented personal experiences, disinterest in social issues, and limited aspirations. Towards the end of the novel, when free and clean energy becomes available to all, Bisson explores continuing dystopian trends, articulates utopian possibilities, and emphasizes the importance of individual and collective imagination for choosing among alternatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4241016

Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i217691
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Vedlesen Arne Johan
Abstract: In this article, the case of Bosnia is used to raise important theoretical and practical questions concerning the role of third parties in preventing and punishing genocide. After the massacre at Srebrenica, a UN-declared 'safe area', the debate over complicity in genocide on the part of UN personnel has gained particular urgency, and much of the discussion here is related to that debate. The article also draws attention to the role of intellectuals in preparing for genocide by way of ideological hate speech, a role of crucial importance in top-down orchestrated genocidal campaigns such as those seen in Rwanda and Bosnia. On the basis of the empirical material presented, it is argued that considerable responsibility resides with knowledgeable third-party bystanders to unfolding acts of genocide. The article also tries to distinguish between different kinds of bystanders, and it attempts to define and discuss what it means - and what it should imply - to be a contemporary bystander to genocidal warfare.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/424645

Journal Title: Philosophische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40095939
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Waldenfels Bernhard
Abstract: Günther Ort- mann: Management in der Hypermoderne, Wiesbaden 2009.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/003181510791542418', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096964
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Beauchamp Paul
Abstract: A. Thomasset, Paul Ricoeur. Une poétique de la morale (BEThL 124; Leuven 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42614246

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096984
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Navarro Luis Sánchez
Abstract: Beutler, Martyria, 237-306
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42614626

Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University Press
Issue: i40098088
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Laurel R. Kwan
Abstract: The three novels in English that won in the Centennial Literary Contest are very different in their approaches to imagining the nation. And yet, in some of the most important aspects of constructing a narrative of the nation, they stand in very much the same position in relation to its colonial experience. The importance of narratives in understanding current attitudes about the Philippine experience makes it imperative that these three valorized novels are studied closely and as a set. This paper argues that these novels fail to liberate for they adopt a cavalier attitude toward history and fall prey to the cultural logic of late capitalism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42633673

Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i40098227
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Berque Augustin
Abstract: Depuis le Sakuteiki (Notes sur l'arrangement des jardins, XIe siècle) jusqu'aux jardins de daïmyôs de l'époque d'Edo (1603-1867), le jardin japonais est empreint d'une tendance marquée à référer les formes de ses constituants à des sites et à des paysages modèles dénommés « sites de renom » (meisho). Ce système de référence est appelé mitate, ce qui signifie littéralement « instituer par le regard ». Cela se rapporte, d'une part, au principe de la métaphore, et, d'autre part, au dynamisme fondamental des localisations dans l'écoumène, tel que l'illustrent le couple topos/chôra dans le Timée et la distinction que fait Nishida entre logique d'identité du sujet et logique d'identité du prédicat. Fron the Sakuteiki (Notes on the making of gardens, XIth c.) to daimyos gardens of the Edo period (1603-1867), the Japanese gardens display a prominent tendency to refer its material forms to paradigmatic places and landscapes, called « places with a name » (meisho). This system of reference was called mitate, which literaly means « instituting by seeing ». It is here related, on the one hand, to the principle of metaphor, and on the other hand to the fundamental dynamics of place in the ecumene, as illustrated by the couple topos/chôra in the Timaios and by Nishida's dictinstion between a logic of the identity of the subject and a logic of the identity of the predicate (or logic of place).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42635700

Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Ústav pro Etnografii a Folkloristiku Ceskoslovenské Akademia ved
Issue: i40098473
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): LOZOVIUK PETR
Abstract: The article is intended to indicate how the study of written and cultural texts may be used to approach the problem of identifying the system of thought characteristic of particular groups. Certain premises of what may be called an “interpretative paradigm” have been selected to create a theoretical starting-point, and in this context the most suggestive appear to be the concept of culture developed by symbolic anthropology, the cultural-semiotic concept of text and the multi-dimensional hermeneutic approach to textual intepretation. The author therefore seeks to bring together, in addition to the general features ofinterpetative ethnology, certain theoretical and methodological starting-points derived from the three approaches mentioned. One may approach the problem of understanding of a foreign testimony via “adequate interpretation”. Here, to understand means to adopt the cultural “language” of a message as one's own, and to interpret and so transfer the unknown into an accessible code, most often one's own code. The process of interpretation is understood as the discovery of the hidden content behind the apparent stirface, and in this activity the understanding of culturally remote testimony is axiomatically taken to bepossible and communicable. In a broader epistemological context we can see in adequate intepretation one of the means to the never-ending process of correction of our pre-judged knowledge. In a spirit of critical rationalism we could deflne such interpretation as the working hypothesis that may be falsified by further Scientific activity and then replaced by a better theory. Such conclusions on the methodological range of the interpretative approach indicate only one of the possible syntheses of various epistemological paradigms, for the theoretical use and application of which ethnology seems especially suited.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42639814

Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Etnologický Ústav Akademie ved Ceské Republiky
Issue: i40098482
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): PFLEGEROVÁ MARIANA
Abstract: The article presents an analysis of the concept of „subject“ in ethnography from its historical origins through its development over the span of the 20th century. Furthermore, based on her own experience of different cultures, the author conføonts the implicit Western philosophical background in anthropological conceptualisations of the subject and the ethnographic research with alternative philosophical frameworks, specifically the reflexive approach developed by female anthropologists. The main focus of the text lies on a re-conceptualisation of the ethnographic research as an inter-subjective process, and on a new emphasis on the role of the subject in the culture-productive processes of symbolic negotiation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42639938

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100636
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Jílek Rudolf
Abstract: HESTER: 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686999

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100637
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Jiráček Pavel
Abstract: In the twentieth century the phenomenon of the subjective body was integrated into ontology in philosophy, moving from Phenomenology to Existentialism. The rediscovery of the body and affect as a way of thinking also led contemporary cognitive science to the topic of the relationship between emotion and cognition, to the necessity of expanding the model of the mind and of experiencing emotions and physical sensation. The extension of the explanatory possibilities of a scholarly metalanguage into the area of the emotions and physical sensation is also important for the analysis of the acoustic aspect of lyric verse. In the acoustic flow of verse, the sounds of language have, apart from a phonemic function, their own sensuous (emotional) effect of the articulating body. In literary studies so far the acoustic flow has been interpreted only at the segmental level as a sequence of phonemes or sounds (for example in constructs of acoustic succession, phonetic instrumentation, or phonetic composition). At the suprasegmental level the acoustic flow must be conceived of as a sequence of syllables, a sequence of articulated phonations, the semantic movement of the phonemic flow. A syllable has no semantic value, but does have an experiential form, which influences motivation, behaviour, and experience. In addition to sonic and tonal modulation at the suprasegmental level, qualitative modulation, modulation of timbre, and the sequences of tones and of noise are also employed. In modelling the semantic movement of syllables in a phonemic flow the methodological approaches of experimental psychosemantics have been used. Connotational objectivization took place in three dimensions that were polarized on the basis of domestic and alien, light and darkness, activity and passivity, and research was conducted with a sample of 2,800 respondents. The analysis of the acoustic side of lyric verse would be incomplete if in addition to accentual rhythm and melody we did not also consider qualitative modulation, the semantic movement of the phonic flow. At the segmental level of verse, phonemes are semantically completed by the lexical meanings of words. This semantic process is parallel to the semantic process of the phonemic flow, but apart from the metrical correspondence between them there is no causal connection, only similar semantic content. In addition to the semantic movement of the phonational flow and the semantic saturation of phonemes, the dynamic of the acoustic process of verse completes the phonic line of the verse, which in itself links occurrences of sonic and tonal modulation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687016

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100650
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Jiráček Pavel
Abstract: Bohumil Nuska points out the predominant limited conception of rhythm, which is usually linked only with acoustically symbolized and aurally perceived rhythms, while the rhythms that are optically symbolized and visually perceived are utterly ignored. In lyric verse, the double, parallel mental construction, which stems from the opposition of syllable and morpheme as constituents of a higher construct of the word, creates parallel Iines of mixed mental spaces of linear and non-linear rhythms (the rhythm of verse, the rhythm of the situation; the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation). Shared abstract structures in generic spaces within individual mixed spaces of lyric rhythm are shared axiological structures, represented at the highest level of abstraction by tension and relaxation (detension). The dynamic nature of these structures stems from the asymmetric distribution of tension and relaxation with regard to the dualistic symmetrical model of the axiological system. And thus deviations from its axial scheme emerge, creating these four parallel rhythmicized lyric structures (in terms of form). Similarity amongst the individual mixed mental spaces is only possible in a fractal dimension. In this theory, presented as a working hypothesis, it is assumed that the forms of the rhythm of the verse, the rhythm of the situation, the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation, will be similar to each other, and their fractal mutual similarity emerges from the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687271

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100659
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Trávníček Jiří
Abstract: Ricoeur 2004: 17
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687426

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100677
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Kubíček Tomáš
Abstract: Dumas 1956: 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687783

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101602
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Betori Giuseppe
Abstract: Ibidem, p. xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707132

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101610
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Kurz William S.
Abstract: Fitzmyer, Luke I-IX, 47-51, esp. 48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707320

Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101612
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Chirichigno G. C.
Abstract: U. Cassuto, Genesis. Part I (Jerusalem 1961) 213-216,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707366

Journal Title: Politique étrangère
Publisher: Institut Français des Relations Internationales
Issue: i40102093
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Amghar Samir
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, dans L'ldéologie et l'Utopie, op. cit. [17].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42715626

Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila
Issue: i40102324
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): ROCHE JOSEPH L.
Abstract: "L'Augustinisme de Maurice Blon- del," Sciences Ecclésiastiques, XIV (1962), pp. 180-81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42719916

Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103201
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): KHADER BICHARA
Abstract: Achar, Op. cit., p. 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42741240

Journal Title: The Journal of Education
Publisher: Boston University School of Education
Issue: i40104951
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Greene Maxine
Abstract: Recent events indicate that self-interest and technicism today triumph over social consciousness; yet educators naturally turn to the humanities as an antidote to positivism and technical domination, even as humanities scholars are increasingly defensive, struggling to hold on to their enclaves. For those committed to the practice of freedom in education the humanities are of vital interest, particularly when they are defined as works that are articulations of some human consciousness thrusting into the world. After giving examples of works that may be classified as "humanities" according to this definition, the following essay discusses teaching situations and literary works which might free persons for awareness of human possibility, for authentic talk and widening perspectives. The humanities must be presented not as monuments to be revered but as works to be shared by students and applied to their own life situations. Students grounded in their "everydayness" can be awakened by Freiré's dialogical method, awakened to crítical consciousness and to the possibility of praxis in a world they share.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42772897

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Haipeng Zhang, « Bingdian Fukan kanwen pipan Yuan Weishi : Zhang Haipeng, Fan di fan fengjian shi jindai Zhongguo lishi de zhuti » (Premier numéro après la reparution de Bingdian à la suite de l'article de Weishi Yuan : l'anti-impérialisme et l'anti-féodalisme sont les sujets de la Chine moderne) 2006, http://blog.chinesenewsnet. com/?p=8072&cp=1 (28 février 2006).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0026', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, « Propos d'un philosophe », dans Ecrire l'histoire du temps présent : études en hommage à François Bédarida, Paris, CNRS éditions, 1993, p. 35-41, p. 39 (actes de la jour- née d'étude de l'Institut d'histoire du temps présent, 14 mai 1992).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0133', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108628
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Thompson John B.
Abstract: This paper argues that the analysis of culture and mass communication should be regarded as central concerns of sociology and social theory. It develops a framework for the analysis of culture and shows how this framework can be applied to the study of mass communication. Focusing on the medium of television, the paper highlights some of the distinctive characteristics of mass communication and examines some of the factors involved in the production, construction and reception of media messages. It is argued that this approach enables the analyst to pose questions concerning the ideological character of mass communication in a new and more fruitful way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42854459

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108676
Date: 2 1, 2001
Author(s): How Alan R.
Abstract: In recent times, under the influence of postmodernist thought sociology has largely rejected the idea of social evolution. An exception to this trend is to be found in the work of Jürgen Habermas. Habermas's account of social evolution has received some critical attention, but in sociology wider detail of the picture is not well known. Habermas wishes to hold to the possibility that evolutionary progress can be discerned not only in the sphere of technical control, but also in the sphere of social and moral development. The paper presents Habermas's views on social evoluton within the wider context of his development of critical theory as a 'reconstructive science'. It suggests that his account has been able to resist many of the standard criticisms of evolutionary theory and that a renewal of interest in this area could provide a rich vein of new sociological knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856255

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108686
Date: 8 1, 2003
Author(s): Langdridge Darren
Abstract: The public/private debate has not been a major feature in recent sociological theory. However; Bailey (2000) has argued for a renewed sociological research programme to focus on the sociological private. He outlines three dimensions of this: intimate relationships, the self and the unconscious. This article seeks to address two of these dimensions, the production of self-theories and unconscious disavowal. We extend this theorizing to account for the experience of sexual engagement present a discourse analysis of the diaries of the comedian and actor Kenneth Williams (1928-1988). Drawing principally on the thought of Merleau-Ponty (1962) we argue that our analysis demonstrates the importance of a prereflective engagement with the social world that is then reflected on in internal dialogue. We show how discourse analysis may be used to demonstrate the discursive production of a self-theory and the role of such a self-theory in the disavowal of the principal's pre-reflective engagement with others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856543

Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108703
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Clarke Simon
Abstract: Over the past few years there has been an increasing interest in the use of psychoanalytic ideas within a sociological framework These ideas have been largely developed within sociological theory rather than practice. There does, however, seem to be a new frame of thought and practice emerging which we could term psycho-social studies, perhaps even a new discipline in its own right In this article I will discuss the development of the use of psychoanalytic ideas around sociological issues, explore some of the tensions that have arisen and evaluate the implications for methodological practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856940

Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394465
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White James
Abstract: L. S. Kramer, 'Literature, criticism, and historical imagi- nation: the literary challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra', in Hunt (ed.), New Cultural History, op. cit., 97-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286515

Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40109964
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Corradi Consuelo
Abstract: A lively concern for new instruments of knowledge has led sociology, among other disciplines, to collect life stories in order to explore social phenomena. Dialogue and interpersonal communication thus become crucial tools, as well as loci of knowledge. This paper investigates the epistemological suppositions of 'the biographical approach': the quest for identity in the narrative, the dialogical relationship between the narrating self and the researcher, the fixation of speech into text and more. The overall effort of the investigation is to reach criteria of analysis which are not simply borrowed from other areas, but are the outcome of reflection upon the constituent features of life stories. This investigation, however, does not widen the gap between 'qualitative' and 'quantitative' sociology, but rather it contributes to put this division into question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42884259

Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110317
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Drury John
Abstract: This paper examines reasoning and rhetoric about economic recession in selected newspapers. This is an interesting topic for discourse analysis because it is a site of argumentation. We begin by asking: (1) epistemological questions (e.g. What evidential basis is drawn on in rhetoric about recession?) and then (2) ontological questions (e.g. How is recession pictured? and How is recession coordinated with the social world?). We examine the management of evidence and definitions concerning whether or not there is a recession. We then examine the entities invoked, showing how (a) a range of metaphors depict the recession as either an uncontrollable agent or as a controllable thing; and (b) rhetorical strategies used by both critics and supporters of the government collude in picturing the economy as a realm abstracted from social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42887856

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110622
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Elson John S.
Abstract: supra notes 62, 72, 76, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42893082

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110909
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Gillers Stephen
Abstract: Robert B. McKay, The Lawyer in the Year 2000: Three Views, 25 Ala. L. Rev. (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897913

Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110912
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Murray James E.
Abstract: George P. Fletcher, Fairness and Utility in Tort Theory, 85 Harv. L. Rev. 571-73 (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897983

Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i40113291
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Faur José
Abstract: Golden Doves, p. xx.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42942679

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113389
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Maddox Donald
Abstract: The entire medieval period is dominated by an eschatological textuality which posits for the history of salvation a singulative movement through time, from creation to eschaton. In book 12 of De civitate Dei, Augustine provides theoretical background for this epochal model; the most cogent statement of its content is found in book 6 of Hugh of Saint Victor's Didascalicon. This type of textuality, whose formal properties are identified, is already marked in Augustine by its exclusion of the purely iterative view of time held by pagan philosophers. From the twelfth century, however, singulative eschatological textuality assimilates an iterative model of the progression of time as it finds expression in metaphorically informed statements concerning the liturgical year. From Jean Beleth to Jacobus de Voragine, the figure of assimilatio facilitates the conflation of a discretelinear and an iterative model of temporality in such representations, the logical relations within which are analyzed here.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945603

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113403
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Ronen Ruth
Abstract: Temporal concepts such as "order," "chronology," "narrative present," and "exposition" are extensively used in narrative theory. Accepted notions of time can contribute to our understanding of these concepts and can allow us to question their "temporal" meaning in the context of fictional narrative. Fictional time may be thought of as a system of relations unique to the fictional world after real time. Theories of narrative tend to adopt an essentialist interpretation of temporal concepts and to ignore the ontological divergence between time in fiction and time in reality. As a result, concepts such as "exposition" or "present" appear which appear to carry a direct "temporal" meaning, actually function in a way that indicates the nature of time in fiction. In fiction, temporal divisions and time segmentations do not just construct a temporal structure; they also mark degrees of factuality in the fictional world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945827

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113412
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Stampfl Barry
Abstract: Narratology may be thought of as a complicated system of conceptual filters that enact a severe formalist reduction upon the corpus of what may be thought and said about storytelling. According to Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, this reductiveness needs to be expanded in order to attend more to language. One way of answering to her reformist prescription is a turn to the study of linguistic surface structure organized as a meditation on the metaphor of the filter. For Seymour Chatman this metaphor designates a character through whom a narrator elects to tell a story. For Max Black, "filter" is a trope for metaphoric process. Examining these senses of the filter in Henry James's short story "The Beast in the Jungle" leads to emphasis upon negations and belief qualifiers. In James's story, both turn out to be invaded by the logic of Freudian negation, itself a type of intrapsychic filtration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945988

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113413
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Baker William
Abstract: One hundred sixty-six recently published monographs treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; structuralism and deconstruction; feminism; psychoanalytic criticism; historical criticism; post-modernist criticism; reader-response criticism; and phenomin enological criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946011

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113417
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Womack Kenneth
Abstract: Four hundred forty-one recently published monographs and articles treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; structuralism and deconstruction; feminism; psychoanalytic criticism; historical criticism; postmodernist criticism; reader-response criticism; and phenomenological criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946074

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113423
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): van Alphen Ernst
Abstract: The difference between literal and figurative language becomes evident by comparing the Dutch novel The Journey of the Customs Officer to Bentheim (1983) by Willem Brakman with Proust's Remembrance of Things Past. Certain passages in the Dutch novel can be read either as literal or as metaphorical descriptions. The reader having a reading attitude which activates that frame of "reality" which is strictly separated from the frame of reference called "fiction and representation" will read crucial passages in this novel figuratively. The reader for whom fiction and reality are inseparable and situated on the same ontological level will read them literally. Both reading attitudes, the modernist aqd postmodernist ones, are personified in the two main characters of the novel. This twofold reading implies a critique of Hrushovski's descriptive method for the analysis of metaphor which is used throughout this paper. If the position of frames of reference is undefined in his theory, in his interpretive practice it becomes clear that for him frames of reference are situated in the text. Yet The Journey's ambiguity as to whether one or two frames is applicable undermines this position. It is up to the reader to differentiate or not hierarchically between reality and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946147

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113428
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Baker William
Abstract: Two hundred forty-nine recently published monographs treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; structuralism and deconstruction; feminism; psychoanalytic criticism; historical criticism; postmodernist criticism; reader-response criticism; and phenomenological criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946228

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113430
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Fludernik Monika
Abstract: The narratological category "person" needs to be replaced by a different conceptual framework. The traditional distinctions between narrative levels and between story and discourse are inadequate to an explanation of much postmodernist writing. Classic narratological categories correlate with a realist understanding of story and with a realist conceptualization of story telling with some postmodernist techniques of writing, such as second-person fiction, refusing to play by such conceptualizations. Gabriel Josipovici's Contre-jour is an instance of a radical deconstruction of realist parameters. Realist recuperations or naturalizations of intractable writing have to be evaluated as readings against the anti-mimetic grain of such texts, and the possibility of such narrative recuperation does not provide evidence for the reinstatement of traditional narratological distinctions. The failing of current narratology to account for second-person narrative is due to the inapplicability of traditional narratological categories, a break-down that is motivated by the ideological commitments of much postmodernist, and especially second-person, fiction since these deliberately question realistic frames of cognition and story understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946261

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113434
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Womack Kenneth
Abstract: Four hundred eighty-seven recently published monographs and articles treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; postmodernist criticism and deconstruction; reader-response and pheomenological criticism; feminist and gender studies; psychoanalytic criticism; and historical criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946313

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113437
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Womack Kenneth
Abstract: Four hundred twenty-three recently published monographs treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; postmodernist criticism and deconstruction; reader-response and phenomenological criticism; feminist and gender studies; psychoanalytic criticism; and cultural and historical criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946355

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115171
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): BARTLETT Steven
Abstract: Log. Unt. II. 2 v § 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968641

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115198
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Bache Christopher M.
Abstract: Douglas Berggren, pp. 243-44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968912

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115202
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Maloney J. Christopher
Abstract: Fodor [1975]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968961

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115221
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Tonoiu Vasile
Abstract: La personnalité, l'activité et l'œuvre de Gonseth peuvent être interprétés organiquement dans une instructive pédagogie de dialogue. L'auteur évoque a) la structure dialogale intime de Gonseth, b) les dialogues peu fructueux qu'il a entretenus avec le Cercle de Vienne, puis lors des Entretiens de Zurich, c) les dialogues qu'il a imaginés dans Les mathématiques et la réalité entre trois personnages: Parfait, Sceptique et Idoine, auxquels vient s'ajouter à la fin le Nouvel Idoine, d) les rencontres avec les néo-scolastiques à Rome, e) la «doctrine» explicite du dialogue exposée dans La loi du dialogue. L'auteur s'interroge aussi sur les conditions d'un dialogue fécond et sur les obstacles qui peuvent s'y opposer, (en particulier: l'incompatibilité des référentiels). Gonseth the man, his life and his work can be interpreted organically in an instructive account of dialogue. The author treats the following topics: a) Gonseth's intimate dialogical structure, b) the fruitless dialogues he had with the Vienna Circle and then at the Entretiens de Zurich, c) his imaginary dialogues in Les mathématiques et la réalité between the characters Perfect, Sceptic and Appropriate, and finally New Appropriate, d) his contacts with neo-scholastics at Rome, e) the explicit 'doctrine' of dialogue presented in La loi du dialogue. The article is also concerned with conditions for a fruitful dialogue and with obstacles that can stand in the way (in particular, the incompatibility of reference systems). Die Persönlichkeit, die Aktivitäten und das Werk Gonseths können im Rahmen einer lehrreichen Pädagogik des Dialogs einheitlich interpretiert werden. Der Autor erörtert a) die intime Dialogstruktur Gonseths; b) die wenig fruchtbaren Dialoge, die er mit dem Wiener Kreis und während der Zürcher Gespräche führte; c) die Dialoge dreier Figuren, die er in Les mathématiques et la réalité in Szene gesetzt hat: Perfekt, Skeptiker und Geeignet, zu denen sich am Schluss der Neue Geeignete hinzugesellt; d) die Begegnungen mit den Neo-Scholastikern in Rom; e) die explizite «Doktrin» des Dialogs, die in La loi du dialogue dargelegt ist. Der Aufsatz stellt auch die Frage nach den Bedingungen eines befruchtenden Dialogs und nach den Hindernissen, die sich ihm entgegenstellen können (im besonderen: die Inkompatibilität der Bezugsrahmen).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969165

Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115257
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): BLACK Max
Abstract: 1. A. Richards, 92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969757

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40116075
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Womack Kenneth
Abstract: Four-hundred forty-eight recently published monographs treat critical theory: specifically semiotics, narratology, rhetoric, and language systems; postmodernist criticism and deconstruction; reader-response and phenomenological criticism; feminist and gender studies; psychoanalytic criticism; and cultural and historical criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42985870

Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes (Paris 8, Saint-Denis) soutenue par l'Institut des Sciences Humaines et Sociales du CNRS
Issue: i40117138
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): COURROUX Pierre
Abstract: G. Kurth, La Cité de Liège au Moyen Âge, Bruxelles, 1910, t. I, p. XXVII-XXVIII.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.4000/medievales.7004', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40117158
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Zymner Rüdiger
Abstract: Rüdiger Zymner, Uneigentlichkeit. Studien zu Semantik und Geschichte der Parabel, Paderborn 1991 („Explicatio").
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028003

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117188
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Wiegandt Kai
Abstract: Heidegger, Sein und Zeit (see note 21), § 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028457

Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117194
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bleumer Hartmut
Abstract: Joseph Bernhart. Mit einem Vorwort von Ernst Ludwig Grasmück, Frankfurt a. M.: Insel-Verlag, 1998, XI, 25, 32-30, 39, S. 653-667.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028513

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117272
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Senici Emanuele
Abstract: http://www. parterre. com.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029593

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117280
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Carone Angela
Abstract: cit. in Edler, Schumann e il suo tempo cit., p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029779

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117303
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Escal Françoise
Abstract: P. Boulez, cité dans La Musique de chambre, éd. Fr.-R. Tranchefort, Paris, Fayard (coll. «Les Indispensables de la musique»), 1989, p. 939.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030248

Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117307
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Nattiez Jean-Jacques
Abstract: M. Baroni - R. Dalmonte - C. Jacoboni, Le regole della musica. Indagine sui mec- canismi della comunicazione, Torino, EDT, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030373

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117427
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): ROBERT Jean-Dominique
Abstract: Journées de rencontres de la Sarte-Huy, en 1960, (Publié chez Casterman, 1961.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43032039

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117496
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): AUBENQUE Pierre
Abstract: Vorträge und Aufsätze, p. 43 et passim ; et p. 126 (tr. fr., Essais et confé- rences, pp. 47 et 147).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033352

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117499
Date: 6 1, 1972
Author(s): VIDAL Jacques
Abstract: Ainsi parlait Zarathoustra, éd. bilingue, Paris, 1969, I, p. 179.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033428

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117508
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): MALHERBE Jean-François
Abstract: Kuhn, 1962,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033684

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117518
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): BOUILLARD Henri
Abstract: l'Autre, pp. 289-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034031

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117526
Date: 3 1, 1980
Author(s): MARTINEAU Emmanuel
Abstract: P. Conen, o.e., p. 110 sq.,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034286

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117536
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): VUILLEMIN Jules
Abstract: Stoicorum veterum fragmenta, I, n°497, p. 111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034567

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117549
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): PETIT Jean-Luc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « The Task of hermeneutics », op. cit., I, 1, p. 54-59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035008

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117557
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): PORÉE Jérôme
Abstract: Ibid., p. 30-31 / EPh, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035275

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117559
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): LEBRUN Jocelyne
Abstract: Phénoménologie de l'Expérience Esthétique, op. cit., p. 656.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035315

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117594
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): RADNITZKY Gérard
Abstract: (Lübbe, 1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036188

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117607
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): GAVIN William J.
Abstract: James, A Pluralistic Universe (New York, Longmans, Green, and Co., 1909) particulièrement dans les conférences V, VI, VII et VIII
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036661

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117612
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): BERNIER Rejane
Abstract: Pirlot, 1989: 269-273.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036798

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117616
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): BIGGER Charles P.
Abstract: Gadamer dans « Logos and Ergon in Plato's Lysis », Dialogue and Dialectic (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1980), 18-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036889

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117623
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): KIRSCHER Gilbert
Abstract: idem, X, p. 246
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037028

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117672
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): TERTULIAN NICOLAS
Abstract: « Le concept d'aliénation chez Heidegger et Lukacs », Archives de Philosophie, n° 56, juillet-septembre 1993, p. 431-443.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038068

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117682
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): POIREL CHRISTIAN
Abstract: R. Penrose, Shadows of the Mind. A Search in the Missing Science of Consciousness, Oxford University Press, New York, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038301

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117692
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): DE LACLOS FRÉDÉRIC FRUTEAU
Abstract: Paris, PUF, 1968, p. 138-139, 162-163.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038472

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117693
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): LETH PALLE
Abstract: F. D. E. Schleiermacher, « Des différentes methodes du traduire », 1813, tr. Antoine Berman, in Des différentes méthodes du traduire et autre texte, éd. Christian Berner, Paris, Seuil, « Points », 1999, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038484

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117697
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): DALISSIER MICHEL
Abstract: Motoori Norinaga (本居宣長 1730- 1801) dans s「主体の鏡と物神としてのことば」 shutai no kagami to busshin toshite no kotoba, Les mots comme miroirs du sujet et idoles,『坂部恵集』 Oeuvres choisies de Sakabe Megumi, Iwanami, Tokyo, 2007, t. V., p. 23-47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038554

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117701
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): GABELLIERI EMMANUEL
Abstract: « Incommensurabilité et médiation: la triple puissance de la métaphysique » in Penser l'être de l'action. La métaphysique du dernier Blondel (E. Tourpe dir.), Peeters, Louvain, 2000, p. 101-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038615

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117703
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): WALDENFELS BERNHARD
Abstract: « Sagen und Gesagtes » in Idiome des Denkens, loc. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038645

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117703
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): DUPORTAIL GUY FÉLIX
Abstract: VI, p. 205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038646

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117711
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): DISPERSYN ÉLÉONORE
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Lecture 3. Aux frontières de la philosophie, Paris, Seuil, 1994, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038784

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117717
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): KECK FRÉDÉRIC
Abstract: R.-P. Droit dans Le Monde du 29 janvier 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038879

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117718
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): ESCUDIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Ricoeur est explicite sur ce point en SMC A 31 ainsi que dans le texte récapitulatif inti- tulé « De l'interprétation », in DTA 13-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038897

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117721
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): HOUSSET EMMANUEL
Abstract: L'intelligence de la pitié, Paris, Cerf (La nuit surveillée), 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038955

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): GRONDIN Jean
Abstract: Wahrheit und Methode, p. 323 (Ges. Werke, II, p. 346) ; tr. fr. p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039435

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117743
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): THOUARD DENIS
Abstract: Das individuelle Allgemeine, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1977,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039534

Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): FAGNIEZ GUILLAUME
Abstract: R. Aron, La philosophie critique de l'histoire, op. cit., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039553

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118195
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Combrink H. J. B.
Abstract: The problem being dealt with in this paper is whether a text has only one legitimate meaning, or no meaning at all. The question becomes even more acute when the contexts of sender and receiver are different. Polysemy and ambiguity are well-known obstacles to communication on the level of the word. The necessity of a general semiotic theory is stressed, and explains the difference between denotation and connotation. The functionality of metaphor in biblical language points to the interpretive value of polyvalency. The impression of unlimited indeterminacy created by the recent emphasis on the active role of the reader, is in a sense misleading since author and reader function as a textual strategy. On the other hand, the actualization of the textual expression as the content of the text by applying the various codes and subcodes, implies a continuous interaction between intensional and extensional approaches. In this respect topics, thematics, ideological and world structures are operative. Since interpretation and application are not to be separated in a pragmatic context, as is the case with the text of the Bible, there inevitably remains the possibility of multiple interpretations due to the interpreting and applying of the text of the Bible in a concrete situation. Yet this interpretation and appropriation should always be done as comprehension of the text and in continuity with the tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047857

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Botha Jan
Abstract: Freund 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048148

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Robinson A S (Rensia)
Abstract: Boesak 1987:126-138.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048155

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): van Aarde Andries G
Abstract: Smit 1987:6-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048164

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118242
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mouton Elna
Abstract: Smit 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048809

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118260
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Lategan Bernard C
Abstract: In a first section, the renewed interest in historical consciousness among social scientists and historians is discussed, which resulted in a clearer understanding of how historical memory functions and of the diverse ways in which historians use references to the past. Against this background, Paul's use of history in the letter to the Galatians is analysed in a second section. The apostle is not interested in recording the past, but develops, in the light of his own experiences in preaching the gospel among gentiles, an alternative perspective on Israel's past. By taking the figure of Abraham as his point of departure, he argues for a more inclusive understanding of Israel's history, which enables him to provide a theological justification for the equal status of gentile believers in the community of faith.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049115

Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Moritz Diesterweg GmbH & Co.
Issue: i40118640
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Karlegärd Christer
Abstract: Jörn Rüsen, „Historisches Lernen", Böhlau, Köln 1994, S. 70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057053

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118799
Date: 9 1, 1972
Author(s): Penati Giancarlo
Abstract: R. Dettori, Una filosofia della storia come teologia della storia, ibid., pp. 241-259.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43060113

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118815
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Ripanti Graziano
Abstract: Semantik und Hermeneutik, in Kleine Schriften, cit., III, pp. 259-260.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43060582

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118824
Date: 3 1, 1980
Author(s): Nebuloni Roberto
Abstract: Ibid., pp. 478-479.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43060796

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118857
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Riva Franco
Abstract: MRH, 1957, p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061675

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118861
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Rossi Fabio
Abstract: ibid., pp. 339 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061789

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118864
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Comolli Fabrizio
Abstract: Les écrits de Sartre ..., cit., p. 635,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061881

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118871
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Ghidini Maria Candida
Abstract: Ibid., p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43062107

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118892
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Losito Giacomo
Abstract: V. Verra, Esistenzialismo, feno- menologia, ermeneutica, nichilismo, in La filosofia italiana dal dopoguerra a oggi, Laterza, Bari 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43062628

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118908
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Costa Vincenzo
Abstract: Ms. A VI 26/73b.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063032

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118924
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Buzzoni Marco
Abstract: A. Grünbaum, Is Freudian Psychoanalytic Theory Pseudo-Scientific by Karl Popper's Criterion of Demarcation?, in «American Philosophical Quarterly», 16 (1979), pp. 131-141: 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063463

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118930
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Borella Sonia
Abstract: Ricoeur, La metafora, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063573

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118933
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Gaiffi Francesco
Abstract: Paolo, R. Vignolo, Vangelo e comunicazione. Riflessioni biblico-teologiche sul modello paolino di "comunione al Vangelo", in Teologia e comunicazione, a c. di C. Giuliodori - G. Lorizio, con prefazione del Card. C. Ruini, San Paolo, Cinisello Balsamo 2001, pp. 75-100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063634

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118943
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Averoldi Maria
Abstract: Id., Sur Maurice Blanchot, Fata Morgana, Montpellier 1975, p. 72, trad. it. di F. Fistetti e A. Ponzio, Su Maurice Blanchot, Palomar, Bari 1994, p. 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063814

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118945
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Bosco Domenico
Abstract: M. de Certeau, L'énonciation mystique, «Recherches de science religieuse», (1976), pp. 183-215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063842

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118946
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Botturi Francesco
Abstract: Ai vescovi della Nigeria, Lagos, 15 febbraio 1982 («La Traccia», a. III, p. 162).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063863

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118948
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Azzariti-Fumaroli Luigi
Abstract: L. Tolstoj, Detstvo (1852), in Id., Sobranie socinenij, Hudozestvennaja literatura, I, Moskva 1960; trad. it. di R. Olkienizkaia-Naldi, Infanzia, Passigli, Firenze 1998, p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063903

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Marassi Massimo
Abstract: Mangiagalli, Teoria del fondamento, p. 615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063924

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Raynaud Savina
Abstract: G. Spinosa, Il metodo storiografico di M.-D. Chenu medievista e lessicografo, RFNS, 94 (2002), pp. 347-354.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063927

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Facoltà Filosofica dell'Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40119177
Date: 12 1, 1962
Author(s): MANCINI ITALO
Abstract: K. Barth, Das erste Gebot als theologisches Axiom, in «Zwischen den Zeiten» (1933), Cit. in Bouillard, p. 208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43068034

Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40119260
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Fumaroli Luigi Azzariti
Abstract: P. Celan, Der Tod (1950), in Id., Die Gedichte aus dem Nachlaβ, Suhrkamp, Frankfurt a. M. 1997; trad. it. di M. Ranchetti e J. Leskien, La morte, in Id., Sotto il tiro di presagi. Poesie inedite 1948-1969, Einaudi, Torino 2001, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070016

Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119282
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): VAN AARDE ANDRIES G
Abstract: Since the Kantian revolution, metaphysical knowledge has been articulated by influential theologians in the language of analogy. In accordance with this tradition, the metaphor found in Luke-Acts, that God does live in houses, but not houses built by men, is explored by studying it as a root metaphor. A root metaphor in the theological sense can be defined as the most basic assumption we can make about man's existence and experience. In this article John H Elliott's proposal that 'temple' and 'household' in Luke-Acts articulate a contrast in social institutions is debated. I wish to argue that this 'contrast' does not really articulate a shift in social institutions, but rather a broadening of an existing social institution as the result of a changed symbolic universe. This shift in symbolic universe is studied against the backdrop of a tendency to broaden the temple as a theological symbol which had already started and which intensified during the Second temple period. It is shown that the temple, its sacrificial offerings and purifying rituals, were closely associated with the household, its meals and purifying ceremonies. Jesus also advocated the broadening of the concept temple/household. His view is reportedly conveyed by Stephen, Peter, James, and Paul.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070318

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i397056
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Gombrich Eugene
Abstract: Information retrieval in the arts and humanities differs from that in the sciences because the documents required differ in many respects. Nevertheless, the Institute for Scientific Information® has successfully adapted its basic citation indexing system, first used in the "Science Citation Index"®, to its new "Arts & Humanities Citation Index™". Special adaptations of the system to meet the information needs of humanities scholars are discussed. The potential effects of the new index (and resulting data base) are seen as the promotion of interdisciplinary research, accessibility of bibliographic data for sociological and historical studies of humanities scholarship, and more objective methods for evaluating humanities journals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4307182

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Wolcott Brett
Abstract: Inquiry in the social sciences is based on theoretical assumptions that are not always clearly articulated in research reports. This article surveys some of the theoretical positions that underlie various qualitative research methods and discusses some of the methodological issues raised by those positions. The four themes that serve as anchor points for the discussion are contextualization, an approach to social-scientific observation that takes into account the environment in which the observational event takes place; understanding, an approach to the problem of knowledge and explanation that addresses the range of what can be learned from observation; pluralism, the proposition that not only social settings but the methods for explaining them resist reduction to a single model; and expression, the problem of conveying the results of research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308864

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): MellonAbstract: [3, pp. 273-99]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308865

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i404682
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Molyneux John M.
Abstract: Wallace [47]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309044

Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i397373
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Jonas John M.
Abstract: The growth of knowledge in any discipline depends on discursive practice for the assertion of claims and the assessment of claims. At times, however, that discursive practice may be ideological in nature. Ideology is here defined as being grounded in efforts at domination--the ascendance of some ideas over others. Examination of the incidence of ideology in discourse is necessarily interpretive; part of this article explores the application of hermeneutics to the analysis of discourse. A set of examples of discursive practice in library and information science (LIS), purposely selected, is examined for ideological intent. Ultimately, the aim is to demonstrate that some discourse is ideological in nature and purpose, and to point out the implications of such discursive practice for knowledge growth in LIS.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309562

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120543
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Hempelmann Heinzpeter
Abstract: Karpp, Kirchengeschichte, aaO. (Anm. 23), 162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43099470

Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120596
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Feil Ernst
Abstract: Carl Schmitt, Tyrannei der Werte, in: Tyrannei der Werte, hg. von Sepp Schelz, Hamburg 1979, 11-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43100785

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121375
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): MARSHALL TERENCE
Abstract: Emile III, O.C. IV, p. 470.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43116151

Journal Title: Iranian Studies
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i401635
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): RumiAbstract: Subtelny, Le monde est un jardin, 152.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4311782

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40121415
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): CARRÉ OLIVIER
Abstract: Van Nieuwen- huijze (C.A.O.), Sociology of the Middle East. A stocktaking and interpretation, Leiden, E.J. Brill, 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43117886

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121491
Date: 8 1, 1991
Author(s): CORCUFF PHILIPPE
Abstract: CNRS, PIRTTEM, Toulouse, 16-18 mai 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119033

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121504
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): SANTISO JAVIER
Abstract: Daniel Levine, « Pa- radigm lost. Dependence to democracy », World Politics, 40 (3), avril 1988, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119238

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121517
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): LECA JEAN
Abstract: Rawls, 1987, p. 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119438

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121528
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): BRUGIDOU MATHIEU
Abstract: F. Backman, M. Brugi- dou, «L'icône profane, l'image des hommes politiques, produits de consommation ou objet sociologique: quelques éléments», Sociétés, 57, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119587

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GENSBURGER SARAH
Abstract: Maurice Halbwachs, op. cit., p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119888

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121569
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): BUTON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Didier Fassin, « La demande medicale à l'anthropologie », cite, p. 251.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120202

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121588
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): SAPIRO GISÈLE
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, « Situation de l'écrivain en 1947 », repris dans Qu'est-ce que la littéra- ture, op. cit., p. 232-233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120545

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121596
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Traini Christophe
Abstract: Olivier Fillieule (dir), Le désengagement militant, Paris, Belin, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120715

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121636
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): SANTISO Javier
Abstract: Max Weber, Le savant et le politique, Paris, Plön, 1959, p. 168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121717

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121655
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): DÉLOYE YVES
Abstract: d'Alfredo Joignant, « Pour une sociologie cognitive... », art. cité, p. 150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121988

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121665
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Corcuff Philippe
Abstract: Ibid., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122361

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121675
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Farhat Nadim
Abstract: A. R. Zolberg, « The Making of Flemings and Walloons. Belgium : 1830-1914, art. cité, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122616

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Zittoun Philippe
Abstract: Frank Fischer, Reframing Public Policy, Oxford, Oxford University Press 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122942

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: C. Shore, Building Europe. The Cultural Politics of European Integration, Abingdon, Routledge, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122944

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): PASQUÍN RAFAEL VEGA
Abstract: Gadamer, H.-G. —Verdad y método I, ed. cit., p. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151558

Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40124645
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Tavory Iddo
Abstract: The role of nonhumans in social life has recently generated significant scholarly interest. The two main paradigms for explaining the sociological significance of nonhumans are constructivism and actor-network theory. We propose a pragmatist synthesis inspired by George Herbert Mead, demonstrating how interactions with nonhumans help constitute the social self—that is, the identity one constructs by imaginatively looking upon oneself as others would. Drawing upon observations of humans interacting with objects, animals, and nature, we identify two complementary ways that nonhumans organize the social self and enable people to experience group membership in absentia: (1) by molding how one is perceived by others and constraining alternative presentations of self and (2) by acting as a totem that conjures up awareness of, and feelings of attachment to, a particular social group. This formulation moves beyond constructivist claims that nonhumans reflect people's self-definitions, and it offers a corrective to actor-network theory's neglect of sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43186662

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal on European Cultures
Publisher: European Centre for Traditional and Regional Cultures (ECTARC)
Issue: i40127040
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Cohen Anthony P.
Abstract: In Britain, as in France, 'mainstream' anthropologists were hesitant to acknowledge studies within their own country as proper subjects for anthropological enquiry. British social anthropology defined itself as the study of 'other cultures' and became entrenched in a tradition in which Otherness was confused with manifest difference. This naivete, elevated into a scientific principle, precluded the recognition of 'self as anything other than a scientific instrument; but also led to the invention of a generalisable Other, and thereby ignored the complexity of variation within the cultures it studied. By the same token, it blinded anthropologists to heterogeneity within their 'own' local cultures as well, and was finally changed only by a series of related paradigm leaps. Our understanding of culture changed from a set of prescriptive influences which integrated society, to a ragged and non-systemic array of interpretive tools which aggregated society. Consequent upon this change, symbols were acknowledged as vehicles of expression and of negotiable meaning rather than as having stipulated and invariant referents. The demise of modernist theories liberated anthropology from its scientific illusions and positivistic pretensions, enabling it to acknowledge the personal and speculative nature of the enterprise. This admission of the subjective, of the anthropologist's self, was necessary in order to see Otherness as inhering in 'person' rather than in an abstraction such as 'culture' and, therefore, to be enabled to recognise diversity within cultures rather than merely between them. This enhanced perception of internal heterogeneity clearly places the Self of the anthropologist at the centre of the stage and has led to the contemporary debates about the nature of ethnographic writing and the status of ethnographic 'authority'. It has also had obvious consequences for anthropological research, including the raising anew of the relationship of individual to society; and the extension of anthropological research into the urban and industrial heartlands of the ' developed' world. These substantive consequences have established incontrovertibly the appropriateness and potency of anthropology in the study of such societies; and have also provided a basis from which to inform the core debates and central concepts of the discipline. These developments are evident in recent studies of kinship, social identity and symbolism. The reflexivity which is an essential ingredient of research on these topics (until recently noted with more eloquence and alacrity in France than in Britain) calls attention to the inevitable, and desirable, intrusion of the Self into anthropological research. It also demands the explicit incorporation of the complex Self-Other opposition in the fomulation of anthropological 'problems' — not as a baring of the post-modernist soul, but as an interpretive resource. An important illustration of the power of this resource may be found in the study of ethnic and local identities which are thereby revealed to be a matter of internal discourse (among Selves, so to speak) as well as of relativistic counter-definition. It is in precisely this way that research in anthropologists' 'parochial' or local milieux will contribute to the maturation of anthropology generally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234718

Journal Title: Anthropological Journal on European Cultures
Publisher: Lit Verlag
Issue: i40127057
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Cassia Paul Sant
Abstract: (La Capra, ibid: 707
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234888

Journal Title: Verfassung und Recht in Übersee / Law and Politics in Africa, Asia and Latin America
Publisher: Institut für Internationale Angelegenheiten der Universität Hamburg
Issue: i40127374
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Njoya Jean
Abstract: Sèye, note 106, p. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43239583

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40127671
Date: 6 1, 1972
Author(s): Sharratt Bernard
Abstract: Dewart, The Foundations of Belief, 1969, Lonergan. The dehellenization of dogma, Theological Studies, June, 1967. Meynell, On dogmas and world-views, New Blackfriars, October, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43245765

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40127876
Date: 11 1, 1989
Author(s): Grey Mary
Abstract: Rollo May, Love and Will, op. cit., p.286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43248745

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128002
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Daniels John
Abstract: Milbank, Theology and Social Theory, pp. 315-6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43250303

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128053
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): McLoughlin David
Abstract: Dubus, A., " A Father's Story" in Breslin, J. ed., The substance of things Hoped For, New York: Doubleday, 1987, p. 152.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43250918

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128056
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Pazdan Mary Margaret
Abstract: Edward Schillebeeckx, For the Sake of the Gospel (New York: Crossroad, 1990), 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43250962

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128062
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Lewin David
Abstract: Guenther Anders, 'Endzeit und Zeitende: Gedanken ueber die atomare Situation', translated and quoted by Alfred Nordmann, 'Noumenal Technology', Techne 8:3, Spring (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251071

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128070
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hill Robert J.
Abstract: Polanyi, M., The Tacit Dimension, (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1966), pp 29-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251198

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128072
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Mills Mary
Abstract: Cottingham, Spiritual Dimension, pp. 171-2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251230

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128073
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lawson James
Abstract: Brazilian disciple Herbert de Souza (Betinho), A lista de Ailice (Sao Paulo, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251247

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128085
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Taylor Charles
Abstract: Roger Lundin, Believing Again (Grand Rapids: Michigan: Eerdmans, 2009).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251452

Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Orbán Katalin
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, "Ideology as a Cultural System," in The Interpretation of Cultures (New York: Basic Books, 1973), 193-233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265206

Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, History, Rhetoric and Proof (Hanover, NH-London: University Press of New England, 1999), 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265207

Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40128985
Date: 2 1, 1972
Author(s): Mann Peter
Abstract: Papers from the International Lonergan Congress, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43267473

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129162
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): DELAPERRIÈRE MARIA
Abstract: Th. Bernhard, Auslöschung, trad. G. Lambrichs, Paris, Gallimard, 1990, p. 507.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271490

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129177
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): LANDRY TRISTAN
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Qu 'est-ce que la littérature ?, Paris, 1948, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271945

Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129184
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): PLAGNE NICOLAS
Abstract: A. Lyzlov, Скифская история, 1116.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43272143

Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40129792
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Francomano Emily C.
Abstract: "the pilgrim had a special association with money, for the very symbols of his condition were the staff he held in one hand and the purse he carried over one shoulder. His mobility depended in part on the convenient transferability of some of his wealth" (31).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43279322

Journal Title: Dance Research: The Journal of the Society for Dance Research
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40129862
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): VEROLI PATRIZIA
Abstract: Serge Lifar built his career during the 1930s, a decade crucial to understanding his 'années noires'-or 'black years', as the French historian Henry Rousso called the period of the German occupation of Paris (1940—1944). Lifar's powerful and respected position at the Paris Opéra, the social connections he had built and maintained and the psychological impact of exile: all these elements help clarify Lifar's accommodating attitude towards the German occupants of his adopted city. During the 1930s Lifar came to be accepted in French intellectual society as the 'heir' of Serge Diaghilev. Through his publications he made a powerful contribution to the process by which Diaghilev's Ballets Russes assumed its paramount position in the development of modern ballet, a process set in motion by the impresario himself. Lifar played this role chiefly in France. In the English-speaking world, where relatively few of his books appeared in translation, other writers served to canonise the Diaghilev endeavour, albeit for somewhat different ends. A list of Lifar's publications in Russian and other languages (French above all) displays the growing influence of his actions and authority, the power of his connections (inherited primarily from Diaghilev), and his relentless will to overcome the problems of emigration as he secured not only success as a dancer and choreograph but also a public reputation as an intellectual. The recent discovery of new evidence has led to the identification of the respected Pushkin authority Modeste Hofmann as the writer whose unacknowledged work enabled Lifar to establish himself as an historian. This evidence, provided by Hofmann's grandsons André and Vladimir Hofmann, raises serious questions about the authority of Lifar's books. An interplay of subjective relationships is woven into the texture of these narratives in which survival and ambition, a paternal attitude and filial respect, exist in constant tension. Neither the making of these books nor the myth of Russian dance which they espouse can be understood without placing their authors in the milieu they shared in Paris as Russian émigrés.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43281365

Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40129912
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SHOHAM HIZKY
Abstract: (Hann 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43282182

Journal Title: Journal of the History of Biology
Publisher: D. Reidel Publishing Company
Issue: i403397
Date: 10 1, 1964
Author(s): Pulzer Larry
Abstract: P. G. J. Pulzer, The Rise of Political Anti-Semitism in Germany and Austria (New York: John Wiley, 1964), pp. 103-105 Pulzer 103 The Rise of Political Anti-Semitism in Germany and Austria 1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4330652

Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132220
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ndubisi Forster
Abstract: Developing effective spatial structures for mitigating the negative effects of the expansion of metropolitan areas continues to be problematic. Metropolitan growth has exacerbated urban sprawl, fragmentation of landscapes, environmental degradation, dislocation of viable neighborhoods, social and economic inequities, and homogeneity of regional cultural values. These negative effects of metropolitan growth continue to intensify, despite an impressive array of urban spatial forms and structures that have been proposed to mitigate them such as new urbanism, smart growth, and sustainable development. This paper proposes sustainable regionalism as a way to manage metropolitan growth. Sustainable regionalism seeks to create, revitalize, and restore the ecological region in metropolitan areas through the physical design and planning of neighborhoods, villages, and cities within a region from a regionally-based sustainable perspective. It fuses specific ideas from the Geddes-MacKaye-Mumford-McHarg concept of natural regionalism, Kenneth Frampton's notion of critical regionalism, and the sustainable development paradigm, adapted to contemporary social, cultural, political, and environmental forces shaping the metropolitan landscape. What sustainable regionalism is, how it evolved, its key features, and promise for managing metropolitan landscapes, comprise the subjects of this paper.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323804

Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Československá Akademie Věd
Issue: i40132256
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): JANION MARIA
Abstract: J. P. Sartre, Marksizm i egzystencjalizm, Twórczosč 1957, č. 4, str. 51-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43332405

Journal Title: Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft
Publisher: Kommissionsverlag Franz Steiner
Issue: i40133996
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): van Skyhawk Hugh
Abstract: Turner 1972: 212-221
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43380752

Journal Title: Ibero-amerikanisches Archiv
Publisher: Colloquium Verlag Berlin
Issue: i40134754
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): de Maihold Rosa María Sauter
Abstract: Fuentes, citado en Talbot ([n. 9], p. 28).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43392578

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135031
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): WOLICKA ELŻBIETA
Abstract: The article of Elzbieta Wolicka is consecrated to the consideration of the phenomenon of time taken in the contexts of individual human experience, contemporary cultural situation and Christian faith. The starting point of the 1st part of the article is the fragment of Confessiones (ch. XI) of St. Augustine and the short parable of Franz Kafka entitled HE. The author of the article brings to the light the dialogical basis of the human perception of time and raises up the quaestion of "a hidden sabotage of trust" which is characteristic to the social relations of our times. This is also the one among many other factors of the so called "crisis of culture" (mal du siècle). The crisis consists of a feeling of a threat, a burden of the past and a fear of the future. The 2nd part of the article is concerned with the analysis of the eschatological meaning of some words of Christ in the Gospel of St. John (4, 23; 5, 25-29; 12, 13; 12, 27, 31). They reveal the Christian sense of the human temporal condition in the light of "the economy of salvation" and the dialogue between a believer and God. A catastrophic thrill, a feeling of existential paradox, a blockage of communication - the symptoms of the crisis of cultural conscience - could be described as "the edipse of God" (M. Buber) or "the abandonment of God" (J. Ellul) in the contemporary world. The Gospel points out that in the heart of human temporal experience there is still existing conversatio sacra and the presence of God in our history is actual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407775

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135039
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): BRONK ANDRZEJ
Abstract: Ladrière. [Głos w dyskusji]. W: Nauka, świat i wiara s. 71
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407897

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135135
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): CHUDY WOJCIECH
Abstract: W. Juszczak, Sophia, „Znak”, 41(1989), nr 2-3, s. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43409686

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135149
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): WASZKINEL ROMUALD
Abstract: Ewolucji twórczej Bergsona, który J. Maritain umieszcza jako motto pierwszej części swej książki La philosophie bergsonienne (Paris 1913, Ed. 4. 1948 s. 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410023

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135168
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): POSSENTI VITTORIO
Abstract: Spór o jedność czto- wieka i wyzwania nowego naturalizmu. Dusza - umysł - ciało, [w:] Dusza Umysł Ciato, red. A. Ma- ryniarczyk, K. Stępień, Lublin: PTTA 2007, s. 97-144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410370

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135177
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): KOWALCZYK STANISŁAW
Abstract: W. Hryniewicz. Współczesne dyskusje na temat poligenizmu. „Roczniki Teologiczno-Kanoniczne” 16:1969 z. 2 s. 115-143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410517

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): TODT OLIVER
Abstract: Soentgen, Jens - "Stuff: A Phenomenological Definition", ed. cit., pp. 77 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410690

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): HUETE FILIPE MARTÍN
Abstract: Berger, P. - The Sacred Canopy, ed. cit., p. 89
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410693

Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): LIND ANDREAS GONÇALVES
Abstract: Hölderlin, F. - Friedrich Hölderlins sämtliche Werke, ed. cit., p. 433
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410698

Journal Title: Renaissance and Reformation / Renaissance et Réforme
Publisher: Canadian Society for Renaissance Studies / Société canadienne d'études de la Renaissance (CSRS / SCER), Pacific Northwest Renaissance Society (PNWRC), Toronto Renaissance and Reformation Colloquium (TRRC) and Victoria University Centre for Reformation and Renaissance Studies (CRRS)
Issue: i40136128
Date: 10 1, 2000
Author(s): LETOCHA DANIÈLE
Abstract: The term intellectuals(s) has been in use for scarcely more than one century. What is its definition? What conditions of possibility govern the emergence of the Modern intellectual? How many of these conditions can be traced to the past? The typological approach used here sets the origin of the intellectual's role and status in the new paradigm of power established in Carolingian times (781-804), which displayed a peculiar axiom: the idea that all Power is intrinsically divisible. This view was already five centuriesold when Petrarch claimed the autonomous position of cultural critic—not the Modern intellectual's status, but some of his authority, though on different grounds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43445245

Journal Title: Studi Novecenteschi
Publisher: Istituti Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i40136381
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): CORTELLESSA ANDREA
Abstract: W. Pedullà, C'è un eretico tra i classici, cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43449890

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138215
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Hanich Julian
Abstract: Max Scheler points out: "A man's bodily consciousness, like the indi- vidual essence of his personality, is his and his alone " (33; emphasis in orig.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43485841

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138215
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Schäfer Stefanie
Abstract: "Funktionsgeschichte, 49
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43485842

Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138215
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Kley Antje
Abstract: Todorov 10-19
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43485844

Journal Title: Philippine Sociological Review
Publisher: Philippine Sociological Society, Inc.
Issue: i40138249
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): LANUZA GERARDO M.
Abstract: Connolly (1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43486377

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Archaeology / Journal Canadien d'Archéologie
Publisher: Canadian Archeological Association
Issue: i40138301
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Schaepe David M.
Abstract: Archaeology assumes itself as a discipline through a practice of boundary-making that merges the past with the present. It is, in this practice, increasingly critiqued for being ethnocentric and separating power from the communities it claims to represent. In response, archaeology is experiencing a turn toward "community". Examining two community archaeology case studies, we assess whether archaeology can be transformed into a discipline that productively participates in the liveliness and messy connectedness of objects, peoples, histories and cultures— in contrast to a conventionally detached practice of objectifying other peoples' lifeways. In both cases, archaeological and descent communities play direct and central decision-making roles in this traditionally "distanced" discipline. They demonstrate means of re-figuring archaeology as a participatory practice. Community-founded archaeology is thus shown to transform methods commonly supporting institutional reproduction into a radically indigenous, emically structured, set of knowledge practices and outcomes. Archeologie suppose elle-même comme une discipline à travers une pratique de fabrication limite qui fusionne le passé au présent. Il est, dans cette pratique, plus en plus critiqué pour avoir été puissance ethnocentrique et séparation des communautés qu'elle prétend représenter. En réponse, archéologie connaît un tournant vers une « communauté ». Examen de deux études de cas communautaires archéologie, nous déterminer si archéologie peut se transformer en une discipline qui productivement participe à la vivacité et la connectivité désordre des objets, des peuples, des histoires et des cultures—contrairement à une pratique conventionnelle détachée d'objectiver les modes de vie des autres peuples. En cas, archéologiques et descente communautés jouent des rôles décisionnels directes et centrales dans ce traditionnellement « distanciés » discipline. Ils montrer les moyens de retrouver l'archéologie comme une pratique participative. Archéologie communauté fondée est ainsi montré à transformer les méthodes communément soutien institutionnelle reproduction en un jeu radicalement indigène, emically structuré, de connaissances pratiques et les résultats.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487310

Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40138367
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Matolcsy Kálmán
Abstract: H. P. Lovecraft's texts deal with the cosmos providing words and mechanisms beyond words, such as analogy. Tracing the relationship between analogy and the poetic metaphor in the Lovecraftian text the paper turns to Paul Ricoeur's notion of the living metaphor as the embodiment of tension providing secondary referentiality. The essay argues that the ontological nature of analogy and metaphor supplies an indirect strategy to move towards the beyond, to transfer the unknown to the realm of the known. In this process, by referring to what is interstitial, void-like, and monstrous, this metaphorically active, poetic, and "ecstatic" Lovecraftian text becomes a "monster" in its own right: the indescribable and unnamable overflow into the world of representation, creating the monster-text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43488466

Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: The Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40138415
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Brown Richard
Abstract: This essay explores a phenomenon familiar to archivists: the seamless moment of time and space within the remembering process when communities become aware of and must confront the fragility of public memory and make decisions about the management and preservation of their information resources. This decision point has recently been called the documentary moment. The authors' exploration of this concept focuses on the theories, strategies, methodologies, and processes formerly employed and now emerging at Library and Archives Canada (LAC) to facilitate the disposition of government's information resources. They also examine the challenges presented by the digital age on the documentary moment and whether corresponding philosophical or methodological changes to current institutional strategies, including macro-appraisal, are required.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43489653

Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40138793
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Cellier Micheline
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit III, op. cit., p. 358.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43497531

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Dodier Nicolas
Abstract: B. Glaser, A. Strauss, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550677

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Smaoui Sélim
Abstract: Christophe Traini (dir.), Émotions... Mobilisations J, Paris, Presses de Sciences Po, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550678

Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40141279
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): MUKHARJI PROJIT BIHARI
Abstract: Watson (2011).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43553395

Journal Title: Pacific Affairs
Publisher: University of British Columbia
Issue: i40143057
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Sejrup Jens
Abstract: China Times, "Jile Taiwan' xing fengbao, chuban 'Jile Dongjing' fan zhi?" ['Paradise Taiwan' Sex Outrage -Should a 'Paradise Tokyo' Be Published in Response?] 16January 2002, morning ed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43590473

Journal Title: Der Staat
Publisher: Duncker & Humblot
Issue: i40145734
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Maschke Günter
Abstract: Zur Kritik an den dortigen Thesen: G. Maschke, Die Carl Schmitt-Diskussion in Spanien: Criticón 87 (1985), S. 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43642597

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148922
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: Latour 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694727

Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148931
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Goldberg Chad Alan
Abstract: Alexander (2006)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694782

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America, Cum Permissu Superiorum
Issue: i40149889
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Cahill P. Joseph
Abstract: Eliade, Patterns, 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43714118

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: The Catholic Biblical Association
Issue: i40149899
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): MONTAGUE GEORGE T.
Abstract: R. E. Palmer, Hermeneutics: Interpretation Theory in Schleier macher, Dilthey, Heidegger, and Gadamer (Evanston: Northwestern University, 1969) 235-237.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43714616

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149953
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): BLACK C. CLIFTON
Abstract: M. A. Aucoin, "Augustine and John Chrysostom: Commentators on St. John's Prologue," ScEccl 15 (1963) 123-31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43717294

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149968
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): BLOMBERG CRAIG L.
Abstract: ("Nurturing Our Nurse: Literary Schol- ars and Biblical Exegesis," Christianity and Literature 32 [1982] 17-18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43718221

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150058
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): MITCHELL ALAN C.
Abstract: NRSV, NAB, and Attridge, The Epistle to the Hebrews, 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43720976

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150058
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): BORING M. EUGENE
Abstract: Frei, Eclipse, 324
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43720977

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150062
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): BRUEGGEMANN WALTER
Abstract: Humphreys, The lYagic Vision, 39,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43721227

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150082
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): MILLER DOUGLAS B.
Abstract: Gordis (Koheleth, 130),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43722641

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150119
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): LAUNDERVILLE DALE
Abstract: Block, "Prophet of the Spirit," 39-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43724946

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150136
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): QUARLES CHARLES L.
Abstract: John Dominic Crossan, In Fragments: The Apho- risms of Jesus [San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1983] ix-x
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726042

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150141
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ROM-SHILONI DALIT
Abstract: "Psalmen 44 und 77," 218-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726398

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150145
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): O'CONNOR KATHLEEN M.
Abstract: Richard I. Pervo (Acts: A Commentary [Hermeneia; Minneapolis, Fortress, 2008] 61),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726684

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150147
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): CHAN MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Ulrich Mauser ("Isaiah 65:17-25," Int 36 [1982] 181-86, here 185-86)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726825

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150149
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): EARL DOUGLAS S.
Abstract: Moshe Greenberg, "On the Political Use of the Bible in Modern Israel," in Pomegran- ates and Golden Bells: Studies in Biblical, Jewish, and Near Eastern Ritual, Law, and Literature in Honor of Jacob Milgrom (ed. David P. Wright et al.; Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns, 1995) 461-71, esp. 467-70,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726964

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150151
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): HYLEN SUSAN E.
Abstract: Johns, Lamb Christology, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43727119

Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150163
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): BRUEGGEMANN WALTER
Abstract: Michael Walzer, The Company of Critics: Social Criticism and Political Commitment in the Twentieth Century (New York: Basic, 1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43727913

Journal Title: Mitteilungen des Kunsthistorischen Institutes in Florenz
Publisher: Kunsthistorisches Institut in Florenz, Max-Planck-Institut
Issue: i40150746
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Gerbron Cyril
Abstract: Humbert of Romans, "Expositio regulae B. Augustini", in: idem, Opera de vita regulan, ed. by Joachim Joseph Berthier, Rome 1888/89, 1, pp. 248-268.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43738210

Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B.Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i40150854
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Schröer Henning
Abstract: Paul Graf Yorck von Wartenburg in: Briefwechsel zwischen W. Dilthey und P. Graf Yorck von Wartenburg, 1923, 42.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43740067

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40150967
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MOORE ALLAN F.
Abstract: Sentimental Journey (Carlton, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43741609

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218314
Date: 8 1, 1979
Author(s): Augustine Marshall
Abstract: Augustine, City of God, 2.2. Augustine 2 2 City of God
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/437672

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Carlson Thomas A.
Abstract: Ignace d'Antioche, in Die Apostolichen Väter. éd. J.A. Fischer, Darmstadt, 1956, p. 158-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775658

Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: Saint Bonaventure et l'entrée de Dieu en théologie, Paris, Vrin, « Études de philosophie médiévale», 2000, p. 24
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775659

Journal Title: Political Psychology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i40153707
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Condor Susan
Abstract: Heins, 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43783733

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218329
Date: 5 1, 1957
Author(s): Johnson Paul
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438359

Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158115
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Sampson Edward E.
Abstract: Psychology has uncritically adopted the individual person as its object of study without examining the concept and role of personhood within contemporary society and Western culture more generally. We examine three perspectives that challenge this familiar and unexamined object of our disciplinary inquiry: (1 ) Critical Theory's concept of the bourgeois individual as psychology's subject of ideology; (2) Poststructuralism's challenge to the concept of personhood as an integrated and self-present center of consciousness and action; (3) System Theory's alternative epistemology in which relations rather than entities have primacy. Each perspective introduces a concept of personhood that significantly differs from our present understanding of psychology's subject and that lays the foundation for a new subject of psychological inquiry: a multicentered, multidimensional subject.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43852967

Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158143
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Farber Seth
Abstract: Aurobindo, 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853336

Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158144
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Rettig Salomon
Abstract: Studies of laboratory research in the natural sciences have shown the significance of crossexperimenter dialogue in the determination of scientific facts. Behavioral and social scientists have largely ignored that role in the construction of scientific facts. A dialogic data base differs epistemogically from strict behavioral observations because of its retroductive and dialectic character. Its symbolic nature calls for hermeneutic efforts designed to achieve and assess consensual rather than empirical validation. Its ultimate aim is social organization rather than prediction and control. In view of this distinction, experimental research of human behavior must show the integration of the empirical and dialogic bases of behavioral data so as to more accurately reflect its constructive nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853344

Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158165
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Muscari Paul G.
Abstract: What is the future of the poetic figures in a technological and scientific world where a more restricted view appears to be emerging as to what is adequate and relevant about metaphors? What part should the radical trope play in a script where the figures that are heralded are usually those that are perceived as having practical importance, i. e., those that fill in the gaps of existing knowledge? It will be the intent of this paper to show that the current preoccupation of much of philosophy and psychology with structural explanation and cognitive theory has certainly contributed to establishing a coordinated and unified theory of metaphors, but left unto itself such a concern is severely limited and does not adequately explain the full potential of metaphorical expressions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853607

Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute Publications, St. Bonaventure University
Issue: i40158330
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Osborne Kenan
Abstract: Jacques Bougerol, Introduction to the Works of Bonaventure (Pat- terson, NJ: St. Anthony Guild Press, 1963), 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43855982

Journal Title: International Journal of Musicology
Publisher: PETER LANG
Issue: i40158446
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Frigyesi Judit
Abstract: Somfai, Béla Bartók: Composition, Concepts and Autograph Sources, 170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43858010

Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218358
Date: 5 1, 1976
Author(s): Ott-MeimbergAbstract: Ott-Meimberg, Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman? pp. 18-23. Ott-Meimberg 18 Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438628

Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40161465
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Martin Catherine Gimelli
Abstract: Shakespearean Pragmatism: Market of His Time [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993], 10-18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43921882

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161509
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: E. Berti, Sumphilosophein. La vita nel- l'accademia di Platone, Roma - Bari, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922418

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161510
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bousquet François
Abstract: H.-J. Gagey, «La responsabilité clinique de la théologie» dans Fr. Bousquet -H.-J. Gagey -G. Mêdevielle -J.-L. Souletœ (éds.), La responsabilité des Théologiens. Mélanges offerts à Joseph Doré, Paris, 2002, 705-722.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922456

Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i40165716
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): BALLABRIGA ALAIN
Abstract: Karl Jaspers, Introduction à la philosophie, traduit de l'allemand (1949) par Jeanne Hersch, Pion, 1951, p. 131-150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43998718

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40166985
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Lazzari Riccardo
Abstract: W. Marx, Aspekte der Theorie der Grundlagen..., cit., p. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023130

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167015
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rossini Marco
Abstract: U. Eco, Semiotica e filosofia del linguaggio, cit., p. 142
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023851

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167025
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Martini Mario
Abstract: Laura Zazzerini (cur.), Bibliografia di scritti su Aldo Capitini, Volumnia Editrice, Perugia 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44024101

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167025
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bassi Romana
Abstract: Roger A. Pielke jr., Principio di precauzione, in G. Corbellini (cur.), BIbliOETICA, cit., pp. 143-144, alla p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44024102

Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167027
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Ferraguto Federico
Abstract: Ivi, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44024144

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167348
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): van PEER WILLIE
Abstract: Focusing on the difference between traditional hermeneutics and more scientifically oriented approaches to literature, this essay argues that our understanding of currently debated issues—such as whether a canon should and/or can be abolished—is significantly increased if one formulates nomological theories that can be empirically tested. To stimulate further research of this kind, two "laws" of literary history are proposed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029890

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167360
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): KNAPP JOHN V.
Abstract: After considering some limitations of psychoanalytic criticism, this essay argues for family-systems psychotherapy as a developing paradigm for psychological literary criticism. The essay then analyzes differences between Freud's "family romance" and family-system therapy's "family dance."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030066

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167365
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): BERRY SARAH L.
Abstract: Nathaniel Hawthorne's stories "The Rejected Blessing" and "Rappaccini's Daughter" dramatize ideological competition among doctors and clergymen from Renaissance Italy to colonial Boston over care of the body. In the context of Hawthorne's life, these stories show his foresighted theorizing of medical hegemony and its dangers to public and individual health.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030130

Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167374
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): VISVIS VIKKI
Abstract: Kern Sakamoto's novel The Electrical Field successfully resists a new and insidious form of social amnesia surrounding the Japanese-Canadian internment. Perpetuated by the act of collective remembering and reinforced by the teleological structure of social and literary narratives representing the internment, this communal forgetting is resisted through the novel's use of discourses of hysteria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030265

Journal Title: Logique et Analyse
Publisher: Centre National Belge de Recherches de Logique
Issue: i40170556
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): THOMAS ROBERT S.D.
Abstract: A. Damasio (Descartes' Error. New York: Grosset/Putnam, 1994)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44084674

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170726
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Dreyfus F.
Abstract: Sacra Scriptura eodem Spiritu interpretatur quo est condita: In Rom., cap. xii, lect. 2; également: Quodl. 12, art. 17 (ou 16 selon les éd.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088450

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170759
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Grelot Pierre
Abstract: The Priority ..., pp. 60-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088880

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170775
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Beauchamp Paul
Abstract: «Le Pentateuque et la lecture typologique», à paraître dans le Pentateuque (Congrès de l'A. C. F.E.B. 1991), Cerf.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089094

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170811
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: Jean-Noël Aletti, « Séduction et parole en Proverbes i-ix », p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089542

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170907
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: L. Alonso Schökel & J.L. Sicre Diaz, Giobbe, pp. 92-93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090749

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170907
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Murphy-O'Connor Jerome
Abstract: The Gospel according to St John (London: SPCK, 1962) 399.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090752

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170918
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Venard Olivier-Thomas
Abstract: S. Liebermann (Hellenism in Jewish Palestine, New-York, Jewish Theological Seminary, 1950, 203-208),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090898

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170919
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Viviano Benedict Thomas
Abstract: M. E. Stone, Adam's Con- tract with Satan (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090910

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170926
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Sakr Michel
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Du texte à l'action. Essais d'herméneutique II, Paris 1986, 116-117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44091003

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170946
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: J. Heinemann, Prayer in the Talmud, p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44091301

Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40171007
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Sonek Krzysztof
Abstract: CBQ 73 (2011): 141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44092093

Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172750
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): GILMORE DAVID D.
Abstract: Contemporary rural anthropology, both applied and ethnographic, often takes place in situations of extreme political and class conflict. Despite recent debates over reflexivity and ethics generally in such studies, the methodological problems of doing fieldwork under conditions of class conflict rarely figure into the debate; this is particularly true of southern Europe. These problems are at once personal, moral, epistemological, and methodological. This paper describes one fieldworker's efforts to maintain scholarly neutrality in an agro-town in Franco Spain where class conflict was severe. The implications of this experience for critical anthropology and for applied anthropology are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126292

Journal Title: Cahiers d'Extrême-Asie
Publisher: Ecole Française d'Extrême-Orient
Issue: i40174176
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Faure Bernard
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra, Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, New York, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44169122

Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Koninklijke Brill NV
Issue: i40178582
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Davies Oliver
Abstract: Davies 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44259415

Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40179555
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): DeLoughrey Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This article explores how the concept of ecosystem ecologies, one of the most influential models of systems thinking, was developed in relation to the radioactive aftermath of US nuclear weapons testing in the Pacific Islands. Historian Richard Grove has demonstrated how tropical island colonies all over the globe served as vital laboratories and spaces of social, botanical, and industrial experiment in ways that informed modernity and the conservation movement. I propose a similar relationship between the militarized American island colonies of Micronesia and how their constitution as AEC laboratories contributed to both atomic modernity and the field of ecosystem ecology. This was enacted through metaphorical concepts of island isolation and distributed visually by Atomic Energy Commission films that upheld an aerial vision of the newly acquired atolls for an American audience. Finally, the myth of isolation is also at work in the ways in which Marshall Islanders exposed to nuclear fallout became human subjects for radiation experiments due to the idea of the biological isolate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44289602

Journal Title: Christianity and Literature
Publisher: Pepperdine University
Issue: i40180515
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Lake Christina Bieber
Abstract: In this essay I argue that Carvers story "A Small, Good Thing" can be read as an illustration of Albert Borgmann's argument that contemporary technological society conceals grace by encouraging the illusion than an individual can exert total control over her environment. The story shows how radical contingency punctures this illusion and offers potential for grace-filled communion with others through humble acts of hospitality. These humble acts—the small, good things of life together—parallel the giving and receiving of grace that takes place during the Eucharist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44314818

Journal Title: Journal of Educational Media, Memory & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40180805
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Ghosh Shreya
Abstract: If nations are "imagined communities" as many theorists like to define them, then they need an ideology to create a cohesive imagination. In modern times, the project of writing "history" has been an important instrument in the service of this ideological purpose of justifying and reproducing the modern nation-state as the predestined and legitimate container of collective consciousness. School textbooks, at least in South Asia, have long been among the most exploited media for the presentation of the history of the national collective. This essay is a study of school textbooks in Bangladesh. It looks at narrative representations of selected episodes from the past, both pre- and postindependence, in order to reflect on how they construct "history". Through this work I endeavor to relate textual images to issues of community relations and identity by identifying and sharing the ways in which the audience for nationalist discourse is created, nurtured, and secured through symbolic means.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44320033

Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40180880
Date: 8 1, 2017
Author(s): Madariaga Laura Ortiz
Abstract: Gaceta Oficial del Distrito Federal, Programa Parcial de Desarrollo Urbano de la Zona de Santa Fe, 4 de mayo de 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44321363

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180925
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): O'meara Thomas F.
Abstract: Th. O'Meara, «Paul Tillich in Catholic Thought. The Past and the Future» in Fr.J. Parrella [ed.], Paul Tillich, 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322231

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Pego Puigbó Armando
Abstract: H.U. von Balthasar, Gloria, V, (cf. nt. 76), 361.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322281

Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Baugh Lloyd
Abstract: R. Carroll, «Christ Resurrected as Black Revolutionary», The Guardian, 21 January 2006. www.guardian.co.uk/world/2006/jan/21/film.southafnca [accessed 10 July 2011],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322286

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181937
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BOVON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: F. W. Horn, Glaube und Handeln in der Theologie des Lukas (Göt- tinger Theologische Arbeiten, 26), Göttingen, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44352517

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181950
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Widmer Gabriel-Ph.
Abstract: L'articulation du sens. Paris, Aubier, Cerf, Delachaux, Desclée de Brou wer, 1970, p. 91 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44353049

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181958
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 507-508.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44353352

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182024
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Widmer Gabriel-Ph.
Abstract: id. op. p. 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355718

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182058
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): BERTHOUZOZ ROGER
Abstract: Autrement qu'être ou au-delà de l'essence, La Haye 1974, surtout 10-13; 167-218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356102

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182059
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Blaser Klauspeter
Abstract: Ott, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356128

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182080
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: P. Thévenaz à H.-L. Miéville que Hort publie en annexe. Elle date de 1939.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356937

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182081
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Goyard-Fabre Simone
Abstract: Foucault dans Histoire de la folie à l'âge classique, Gallimard, 1961, rééd. complétée 1972.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356965

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182085
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Ricœur poursuit sa discussion avec Lévinas dans SA 387-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357126

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182092
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: Gadamer, dans le collectif Hermeneutik und Ideologiekritik, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357331

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182098
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Hort Bernard
Abstract: Esprit, Paris, juin 1989, pp. 48 à 58,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357571

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182103
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hunyadi Mark
Abstract: Esprit, mars-avril 90, p. 126.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357812

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Römer Thomas
Abstract: J. Moltmann, Der gekreuzigte Gott, München, C. Kaiser, 1972; traduction française: Le Dieu crucifié : la croix du Christ, fondement et critique de la théologie chrétienne, Paris, Cerf, 1978 (2 éd.), p. 13-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357942

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Jacques Robert
Abstract: Genève, Labor et Fides, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357946

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182113
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Reding Jean-Paul
Abstract: Ch. Perelman, Traité de l'argumentation. La nouvelle rhétorique, Bruxelles, Editions de l'Université de Bruxelles, 1988 5, p. 549.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358278

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182117
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Vanni Michel
Abstract: S. Mosès, L'ange de l'histoire. Rosenzweig, Benjamin, Scholem, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358471

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182118
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Friedrich Wilhelm Kantzenbach, Evangelium und Dogma. Die Bewältigung des theologischen Problems der Dogmengeschichte im Protestantismus, Stuttgart, Evangelisches Verlagswerk, 1959.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358509

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182120
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: The Principles of Morals and Legislation (1781), New York, Prometheus Books, 1988, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358600

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182126
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schmid Muriel
Abstract: T. Moore, Dark Eros. The Imagination of Sadism, Woodstock, Spring Publi- cations, (1994) 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358902

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182129
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Charrière Nicolas
Abstract: J. Quinn, «L'Église dans le monde. L'exercice de la papauté.», Documentation catholique 93 (1996), p. 930-943.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359019

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182140
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: «Les sources religieuses du soi et l'éthique de l'action juste», Laval Théologique et Philosophique, 58/2, juin 2002, p. 341-356
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359383

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182141
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Célis Raphaël
Abstract: F. Nietzsche, Poésies complètes, Seuil, Paris, 1951, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359420

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182154
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Vezeanu Ion
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Le Cahier bleu et le Cahier brun, p. 118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359739

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182155
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: K . E Logstrup, Norme et spontanéité, trad. fr., Paris, Cerf, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359784

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182161
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Clavien Christine
Abstract: H. Spencer, The Data of Ethics, London, Williams and Norgate, 1879, Chap. II, § 7; Accessible en ligne : http://fair-use.org/ herbert-spencer/the-data-of-ethics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359998

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): de Chambrier Guy
Abstract: Ce petit article explicite brièvement le contexte de l'article qui précède et en retrace le parcours en montrant comment le philosophe s'approche prudemment des notions clés de la théologie chrétienne. This short essay briefly explains the context and traces the logic of the preceding article, while showing how the philosopher approaches the key notions of Christian theology with prudence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360041

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Muriel
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Le conscient et l'inconscient» (1960), in: H. Ey (éd.), L'inconscient. VI colloque de Bonneval. 1960, Paris, Desclée de Brouwer, 1966.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360043

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: F. Affergan, S. Borutti, C. Calame, U. Fabietti, M. Kilani, F. Remotti, Figures de l'humain. Les représentations de l'anthropologie, Paris, Éditions de l'EHESS, 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360044

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182163
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Paris, Centurion, 1983 (Grundkurs des Glaubens, Fribourg-en-Brisgau, Herder, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360090

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182168
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: C. Theobald, Le christianisme comme style, 2 vol., Paris, Cerf, 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360225

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182176
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Michel Beat
Abstract: L'essence de la manifestation, op. cit., p. 858
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360487

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182176
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: J. Habermas, L'avenir de la nature humaine. Vers un eugénisme libéral ?, trad, fr., Paris, Gallimard, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360489

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182180
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Ibid., p. 192.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360579

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182183
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Chalamet Christophe
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu mystère du monde, t. 2, Paris, Cerf, 1983, p. 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360666

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182184
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Indermuhle Christian
Abstract: F. Jameson, Valences of the Dialectic, op. cit., p. 483, note 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360691

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182185
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Romele Alberto
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360704

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bondolfi Alberto
Abstract: H. de Vries, Minimal Theologies. Critiques of Secular Reason in Adorno and Lévinas, Baltimore, John Hopkins University Press, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360940

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dumont Aurore
Abstract: R. Ogien, La panique morale, op. cit., p. 31 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360943

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Burri Yannick
Abstract: EC, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361055

Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Wykretowicz Hubert
Abstract: J. Searle sur le problème de la liberté dans sa conférence Liberté et neurobiologie, Paris, Grasset, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361056

Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i40182239
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Maraldo John C.
Abstract: Kiyota, p. 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361727

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182539
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Jennings Theodore W.
Abstract: Ritual studies is a new discipline within the field of the study of religion. Liturgical theology is, in the West, a recent development within the Held of systematic theology. The article describes each and indicates ways in which they may contribute to the work of the other while retaining their separate identities. The development of methods for describing and analyzing ritual action may enable liturgical theology to construct its own analyses upon a more broadly phenomenological base. At the same time theology's insight into the history of liturgical action may enable ritual studies to overcome an excessively synchronie perspective and to attend to the normative character of ritual gesture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368318

Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182541
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Laughlin Charles D.
Abstract: Masking is ubiquitous to the culture areas of the world and is a symbolic activity inextricably associated cross-culturally with cosmological drama and shamanic ritual. Our question is, "Masks work how?" In Part 1, we place masks within their physical, cultural and cosmological context so as to view the activity of masking as part of a wider symbolic process. Masks are seen to be transformations of face. In Part 2, the work of masking is realized as a transformation of experience, and is related to a general cycle of meaning in culture whereby cosmological beliefs give rise to direct experience, and experience verifies and vivifies cosmology. And in Part 3 the "how" of masking is explained using a biogenetic structural perspective which traces the possible transformations of brain that may occur within the wearer and audience and that may mediate a variety of mask-related experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368364

Journal Title: L'Espace géographique
Publisher: doin éditeurs
Issue: i40183345
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): BUTTIMER Anne
Abstract: Vorträge und Aufsätze, 1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44380811

Journal Title: Archives d'histoire doctrinale et littéraire du Moyen Âge
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184769
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): de Courcelles Dominique
Abstract: In Boet., q. 6, a. 1, solution 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44403918

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184898
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Salman D. H.
Abstract: W. J. Devlin, Psychodynamics of Personality Development. Staten Island (N.Y.), Alba House, 1965 ; 15×21,5, 324 pp., $ 4.95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406521

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184904
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Jacquemont P.
Abstract: J.-P. Jossua, Échange sur la vie religieuse, dans Christus 16 (1969) n° 62, p. 255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406674

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184912
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Ibid., p. 74, trad, frse p. 240.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406901

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184920
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Emmanuel Lévinas, « Humanisme et An-archie », dans Rev. intern. Phil., n 85-86 (1968) 323-337.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407032

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184923
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Corbin Michel
Abstract: Thomas, sous le n° 56 des opuscules au tome 28 de Vivès (Paris 1875).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407104

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184930
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407230

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184934
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: Parole et Symbole : Le Symbole, éd. par J. Ménard, Strasbourg 1975, p. 142-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407310

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184940
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Rémy Pierre
Abstract: P. Rémy, « Les faits interpellent le théologien», in Rev. Droit canonique , 32 (1982), p. 30-33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407406

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184945
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Gh. Lafont, op. cit. p. 200.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407491

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184968
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Lichnerowicz André
Abstract: Les mathématiques, auxquelles on peut joindre la logique, et depuis 1960 une large part de l'informatique théorique, fournissent un témoignage sur une part essentielle du fonctionnement de l'esprit humain. Loin de fournir seulement des outils extérieurs, elles se sont faites mode de pensée nécessaire pour appréhender la réalité physique. Elles nous ont appris que ce que nous nommons raison, démarche rationnelle, est en réalité laborieusement construit. Un bref survol de l'histoire des mathématiques, anciennes, puis surtout depuis le XIXe s., montre en quel sens le concept ancien de « vérité scientifique » s'en trouve désormais modifié. Mathematics, to which one may add logic and, since 1960, a large section of theoretical computer technique, all furnish evidence concerning an essential part of the working of the human mind. Far from providing only external tools, they have evolved as a necessary mode of thought for the understanding of physical reality. They have taught us that what we call reason, or rational deduction, is in fact something we have ourselves laboriously constructed. A brief survey of the history of mathematics, ancient and modern but especially from and after the 19th century, shows ways in which the old concept of a 'scientific truth' must henceforth be modified.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407910

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184974
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Franz Prammer, Die philosophische Hermeneutik Paul Fticœurs in ihrer Bedeutung für eine theologische Sprachtheorie. Innsbruck-Wien, Tyrolia (coli. Inns- brucker Theologische Studien», 22), 1988; 15 X 22,5, 237 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408029

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184976
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: Popper K., La société ouverte et ses ennemis, 2 tomes, trad, par J. Bernard et Ph. Monod, Seuil, Paris, 1979, t. 2, p. 185, 198 et 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408054

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184980
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): de Durand G.-M.
Abstract: Patrologia Graeca t. 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408122

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184986
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Lectures 2, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408223

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184987
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): de Durand G.-M.
Abstract: Columba Stewart : 'Working the Earth of the Hearth' The Messalian Contro- versy in History, Texts and Language to AD 431. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1991 ; 14 x 22, xi-340 p., £ 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408243

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184990
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Paul Ricœur par Olivier Mongin, Paul Ricœur , Paris, Ed. du Seuil (coll. «Les contempo- rains») 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408295

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184996
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Arnould Jacques
Abstract: Psaume 8, 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408381

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184997
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: Sœur Paula Picard o.s.b., Dictionnaire des symboles liturgiques. Le Léopard d'Or, 1995; 14 × 22, 288 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408394

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185001
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La Métaphore vive. Seuil 1975, VIIe étude § 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408459

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185011
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Côté Antoine
Abstract: supra note 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408613

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185016
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: L. Bianchi, « Vocabulaire et syntaxe dans les oraisons du missel romain », 163-214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408692

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185020
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Courcier Jacques
Abstract: Ian Hacking, The Social Construction of What ? Cambridge, Harvard UP, 1999-2000; 15 × 23, 261 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408738

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185023
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Rey Bernard
Abstract: Cette Note présente l'ouvrage de Christian Duquoc, intitulé L'unique Christ. La symphonie différée, en en suivant le déroulement et en se montrant particulièrement attentif à son apport christologique. L'approche ne se limite pas à la question de la médiation unique du Christ. Elle aborde aussi le rapport du Christ à l'histoire et au cosmos, le sens de la mission de l'Église, sa relation au judaïsme, la signification du salut et la façon de l'envisager dans le cadre d'une pluralité des religions. Au long de sa présentation, l'auteur de cette Note montre que la théologie développée dans cet ouvrage se trouvait déjà largement amorcée dans les précédents travaux de Duquoc. This Note introduces the work of Christian Duquoc, entitled L'unique Christ. La symphonie différée, surveying its development and paying particular attention to its Christological contribution. Its approach is not limited to the question of Christ's unique mediation. It takes up as well Christ's relation to history and to the cosmos, the meaning of the Church's mission, its relation to Judaism, its signification of salvation, and the way of envisaging it within the setting of a plurality of religions. During the course of his presentation, the author of this Note shows that the theology developed in this work was largely initiated in Duquoc's earlier works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408775

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu, mys- tère du monde, Cerf, p. 284
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408862

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185073
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Laurentin René
Abstract: Ross Mackenzie, « Mariology as an Ecumenical Problem », dans Marian Studies, 26 (1975) 230-231.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409906

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185074
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Nietzsche, Ainsi parlait Zarathoustra IV, « La chanson ivre », par. 10 (trad. G. Bianquis, Paris, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409916

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Harada Masaki
Abstract: G.-G. Granger, Sciences et réalité, Paris, Éditions Odile Jacob, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410220

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185094
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Dubarle A.-M.
Abstract: K. Rahner. Zum theologischen Begriff der Konkupiszenz (1941), repris dans Schriften zur Theologie, I, 1954, pp. 377-414 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410271

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185100
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Ganoczy Alexandre
Abstract: Le sentiment même de soi, Paris 2002, 259s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410400

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185176
Date: 1 1, 1955
Author(s): de Contenson P.-M.
Abstract: R. Kothen, Directives récentes de l'Église concernant l'exercice de la médecine. Warny, Louvain et Paris. Oit. gén. du livre, 1952; 16×21, 135 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411478

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185191
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Pohier J. M.
Abstract: J. Vinchon, La magie du dessin. Du griffonnage automatique au dessin théra- peutique. Paris, Desclée de Brouwer, 1959 ; 15×23, 182 pp., 15 NF.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411791

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185260
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Léonard A.
Abstract: Theodicee en Godsdienslphilosophie, Tijdschrifl voor Philosophie, 1952, n. 1, p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412826

Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185265
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Contenson P.-M.
Abstract: J. Zirnheld, Cinquante années de syndicalisme chrétien. Paris, 1937.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412963

Journal Title: Educational Technology
Publisher: Educational Technology Publications, Inc.
Issue: i40186211
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Spackman Jonathan S.
Abstract: Clark (2011) recently reviewed literature on cognitive phenomena such as automaticity, non-conscious processing, and the "illusion of conscious will," concluding that most learning theories and instructional design models are informed by faulty assumptions regarding psychological functioning—namely, that most cognitive activity is conscious and volitional. Clark offered a number of recommendations for educational technology research and design based on the view that cognitive activity is mostly automated, unconscious, and determined by psychological variables outside of personal control. This response presents an alternative perspective and accompanying recommendations distinct from those offered by Clark. It primarily argues that evidence pertaining to automaticity and related phenomena may be reinterpreted to fit within a view of agency that emphasizes meaning, purpose, tacit knowledge, and narrative structure; and that this agentic view leads to a number of potentially fruitful avenues for theorizing and research in educational technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44430071

Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i405514
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): MarionAbstract: his "L'Interloqué" in Who Comes after the Subject? (ed. Eduado Cadava, Peter Connor, and Jean-Luc Nancy; New York: Routledge, 1991) 236-45. Marion L'Interloqué 236 Who Comes after the Subject? 1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495069

Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oral History Association
Issue: i405621
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Bakhtin Della
Abstract: Bakhtin, Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics. ed. and trans. Caryl Emerson (Min- neapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984) 201 Bakhtin 201 Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495291

Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405481
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Joad Jonathan
Abstract: C. E. M. Joad, Philosophy, The Teach Yourself Books series (London: The English Universi- ties Press, 1944), 13. Joad 13 Philosophy 1944
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502282

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408510
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Shapere Joseph
Abstract: Dudley Shapere, 'The Structure of Scientific Revolutions', in Gary Gutting (ed.), Paradigms and Paradoxes (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1980). Shapere The Structure of Scientific Revolutions Paradigms and Paradoxes 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545027

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408513
Date: 1 1, 1932
Author(s): Hartshorne Susan
Abstract: Collected Papers, ed. Hartshorne, C., Weiss, P. and Burks, A., Harvard University Press, 1932-58, 8.12.) Hartshorne 8.12 Collected Papers 1932
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545085

Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408527
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Hart John
Abstract: Raz, op. cit., p. 243.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545388

Journal Title: Central European History
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i412997
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Berlant Geoff
Abstract: Lauren Berlant, The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship (Durham, 1997), esp. "Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere," 1-24 Berlant Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere 1 The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4546795

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219721
Date: 10 1, 1924
Author(s): Condillac Juliet Flower
Abstract: Rousseau opposed both traditional and modern (empiricist) thinking when he made self-love the cornerstone of his system. Other modes of thought treat self-consciousness as constituted primarily by temporal desire. Rousseau raises love, for him the suspension of desire, to a position of ontological primacy in regard to self-consciousness. Like Pascal, he throws the empirical existence of the self into radical question and finds it to be as insubstantial and empty a concept as the Western tradition has found it-from Ecclesiastes and Socrates on. Rousseau declines the moralistic reproof of the self, however, and emphasizes its insubstantiality as its one strength, although a fictional one. The self exists only in the mode of a hypothesis (the fictional "as if"): it is a failure at being. But to amour (and to pitié) it makes all the difference and is worthy of their support.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/461844

Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i413081
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Zelinsky Jonathan M.
Abstract: Concepts of place, narrative, tradition, and identity are employed in a conservative reading of the Texas A&M Bonfire. Texas A&M embodied regional narratives of a dual Southern commitment to economic and technological development and conservation of traditional cultural. Institutionalized at Texas A&M in the late nineteenth century, these narratives made a paradoxical place. Bonfire expressed and obscured this paradox. In line with the narrative of tradition, Texas A&M was an all-male military school until 1965. The students were uniform, isolated, and regimented. This social structure engendered intense feelings of loyalty and community. These social emotions were further aroused at events like yell practice, and projected onto Bonfire. After the Second World War the commitment of university administrators to economic and technological progress increasingly threatened the narrative of tradition and the cultivation of manliness. Student veneration of Bonfire intensified. After 1965 mandatory military drill was discontinued, women were enrolled, and the student body was enlarged. Social pluralism fragmented the meaning of Bonfire; conflict and disorderly behavior ensued. By the 1990s the university had partly rationalized Bonfire as a corporate symbol; however, this trend was tragically terminated in 1999 when the cumulative errors of the oral tradition caused Bonfire to collapse, killing twelve students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4620244

Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i412377
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Zehfuss Vincent
Abstract: Suez crisis, Mattern (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4621718

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219749
Date: 5 1, 1973
Author(s): White Wayne
Abstract: Literary historians have persistently regarded The Education of Henry Adams as a "paradigmatic" text. While "historical explanations" stress the book's historical achievement, "critical explications" portray it as a failure of historical consciousness that achieves its success in the ahistorical arenas of aesthetic integration and imaginative projection. To relate the products of "explication" with the aims of "historical explanation," I regard the work's true "paradigm achievement" as an inquiry into "historical being." For Adams this achievement embodies disciplinary formulation and professional commitment and thus coordinates historical speculation and self-cultivation. One must assess the ethical density and cultural significance of the text before explaining its historical identity. The Education, despite its origin in epistemological chaos, makes the past eternally relevant to the present; for it is a personal and theoretical discovery of how the narrative structures of history and selfhood create the possibilities of individual and social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462229

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219784
Date: 3 1, 1957
Author(s): Woollcombe Regina M.
Abstract: The Hebrew Bible depicts interpretation as a continual process of losing and finding, of forgetting and remembering. Texts are lost and found, and in the Joseph story (Gen. 37-50), Joseph himself is abandoned and recovered, with all memory of him repressed until it is dramatically recalled. His story demonstrates that repression is the condition of interpretation, and that interpretation-not resurrection-holds forth the promise of a future life. Nonetheless, the repeated losses that punctuate the Joseph narrative have inspired the opposite conclusion: that Joseph is a type of Jesus, that his descents and ascents prefigure the final one. Typology, a mode of biblical interpretation that prevailed during the early church, has enjoyed a recent revival in the context of literary studies; but I argue that the typological language of "fulfillment," of shadows and truth, is alien to Hebraic-and postmodern-understandings of textuality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462428

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219783
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Webber John S.
Abstract: Paradise Lost traces evil through three inceptions-Satanic, Adamic, and historical. Each origin seems to envision a different etiology: Satanic evil springs exclusively from the self in an instant of radical "Pelagian" freedom. Adamic evil emerges from the ambiguous interplay between self and seductive environment. Historical evil contaminates the whole race by means of necessary "Augustinian" inheritance. Ricoeur's analysis of the "Adamic Myth" and original sin clarifies etiological traditions Milton assimilates from Christian symbol, myth, and dogma. Through Ricoeur, we can identify the contrasting modalities of evil (inherited and imitative, physical and moral, ontological and existential, necessary and free, communal and individual) fused in Paradise Lost. Ricoeur's work reveals Milton's text to be a subtly inclusive etiological myth, one whose complex genesis of evil recovers Scripture's fullness of meaning in a new mythopoesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462461

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219806
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Wing Nicolae
Abstract: The conflict between formalist thinking and theories that view texts in their historical contexts serves as a starting point for the introduction of a cognitive view of literature. From this perspective language has full referential powers. The "referent" splits into two entities, however: things-in-themselves (in their material identity), which we cannot know, and things in their coded form, which are perceptually accessible. Readers' mnemonic potentials, a consequence of the bonding of perception and language, are adduced to show that texts originate in past interpretations of other texts and in personal experience and that consequently social forces and historical events are subsumed in the individual memory. In the cognitive light, memory becomes the ultimate metaphor, and the epistemological claim of realism regains its compelling force.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462801

Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219832
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Yellin Peter A.
Abstract: In his Narrative (1845), Frederick Douglass constructs a self based on conversion rhetoric and binary logic. In the greatly expanded My Bondage and My Freedom (1855), he complicates this textual self by both imitating and criticizing tropes conventionally used in the slavery debate, such as metaphors related to animals. Christianity, and manhood. Emphasizing the constructed nature of mimesis and metaphor, Douglass demonstrates his ability to escape the bondage of reductionist language even as he claims the power associated with linguistic mastery. This revision of self emerges from his experience of northern racism, manifested in his limited role in William Lloyd Garrison's organization. Douglass's renunciation of Garrisonian dogma and his entry into political action-including his striking textual reinterpretation of the United States Constitution-coincide with the stylistically "modernist" self of the second autobiography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463167

Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Department of Romance Studies, Cornell University
Issue: i219920
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Roger Jacques
Abstract: "The Reading Process: A Phenomen- ological Approach," New Literary His- tory, 3 (1971/72), 279. 10.2307/468316 279
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/464722

Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220185
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Reiss Morton W.
Abstract: Edmund Reiss, "Symbolic Detail in Medieval Narrative: Floris and Blanche- flour," PLL, 7 (1971), 339. Reiss 339 7 PLL 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468317

Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Janson F. E.
Abstract: Reproduced as Fig. 680 in H. W. Janson's History of Art (New York, 1969), p. 452. Janson 452 History of Art 1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468342

Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220195
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Althusser David
Abstract: "Lenin Before Hegel," p. I 17 117 Lenin Before Hegel
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468464

Journal Title: Italica
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Italian
Issue: i220755
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Toulmin Giorgio
Abstract: Stephen Toulmin (Human Understanding: The Collective Use and Evolution of Concepts. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1972, p. 23) Toulmin 23 Human Understanding: The Collective Use and Evolution of Concepts 1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/479135

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221182
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Riegel Trent
Abstract: Klaus Riegel, "Toward a Dialectical Theory of Development" in Human Development, Vol. 18 (1975) Riegel 18 Human Development 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488026

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221189
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Rorty Seyla
Abstract: Chicago School (Stanley Tigerman, Frederick Read, Peter Pran, Stuart Cohen, Thomas Beeby, Anders Nerheim) exhibited at "Die Revision der Moderne," Deutsches Architekturmuseum, Frankfurt, Summer 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488356

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221214
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Freud Joel
Abstract: Freud, "Instincts and their Vicissitudes," Complete Works vol. 14, 121-22. Freud Instincts and their Vicissitudes 121 14 Complete Works
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488385

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221220
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Hall Manuchehr
Abstract: Stuart Hall, "The Question of Cultural Identity." Hall The Question of Cultural Identity
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488462

Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221233
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Hoffmann Andreas
Abstract: E.T.A. Hoffmann, "Der Sandmann," Werke 2 (Frankfurt/Main: Insel, 1967) 38. Hoffmann Der Sandmann 38 2 Werke 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488598

Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221540
Date: 5 1, 1984
Author(s): Canary Harry
Abstract: February 1984 issue of AHA Perspectives February AHA Perspectives 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/493382

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221614
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Ning Sheng-Tai
Abstract: "Construct- ing Postmodernism: the Chinese Case and Its Different Versions" (Canadian Review of Comparative Litera- ture 20.1-2 [1993]: 49-61 1 49 20 Canadian Review of Comparative Literature 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495308

Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CODA Press
Issue: i221601
Date: 7 1, 1955
Author(s): Stevens Pauline
Abstract: "The Course of a Particular" (p. 157)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495429

Journal Title: The Review of English Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i222390
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Moore Susan
Abstract: Moore, 'In Defense of Suspense', 99. Moore 99 Defense of Suspense
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/518944

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222581
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Nabila
Abstract: The "Myth of Creation" in its East African formulation is the central chapter in a book entitled, The Sacred Meadows, by an Egyptian anthropologist who did his field work in the early seventies among the Lamu community in Kenya on the shores of the Indian Ocean. The translator, in her own introduction to the translation, presents the outline of the book and provides the geographical and cultural context of the community in question. The author, in this translated chapter, sets out by exposing his theoretical position which combines both Structuralism and Functionalism. Insights from Claude Lévi-Strauss and Bronislaw Malinowski as well as those of Paul Ricoeur and Victor Turner join to develop the author's notion of myth and its symbolic mode. Then the text of the myth, in its Lamuan formulation, is narrated, followed by a close reading and analysis of its binary oppositions, mediating terms, and the underlying existential contradiction at its crux. Angels, jinn, light, fire, earth, wind, water, Adam, Eve, Cain, Abel, Satan, serpent, etc. are the agents of this sacred narrative and cosmic drama. The textual unfolding of the myth is followed by an analysis, which makes use of the structural method and explores the semantic connotations of Swahili words and idioms to explain the logic of the symbolic exchange and the rigor of thought. The themes of unity and multiplicity and their different combinations are delineated in this analysis and the repetitions and their relation to transcendence are explained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521626

Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222578
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Thiongo Sabry
Abstract: This paper challenges the common assumption that the attention which modern literary theory pays to the textual aspects of literature is achieved at the expense of humanistic and moral concerns. It starts by outlining how modern literary theory differs epistemologically from the traditional critical approaches to literature. Traditional critical theory was developed in the defense of poetry against Plato's accusations, real or imagined, and this informed both its critical practice and its concept of man. It established its epistemology on an aesthetic, moral, social, philosophical or scientific basis in a manner that encumbered literature with the concepts of man inherent in them. In contrast, modern literary theory started from a different premise: instead of seeking to justify literature and its moral relevance, it strove to identify its literariness and the dynamics of its structure by using the disciplines of semiotics and linguistics. It posited the text as an autonomous entity and a complete structure aware of its existence in a society of texts with which it conducts a profoundly intertextual dialogue. As an autonomous structure, the literary work is independent of other social or philosophical constructs and thus capable of conducting a meaningful dialogue with them. The paper elaborates the various conceptual frameworks of Russian formalism, intertextuality, structuralism and deconstruction in order to examine their implicit assumptions about man. It shows how the autonomous and dialogical nature of the literary work in its Bakhtinian sense are relevant to the concept of man inherent in modern literary theory. In its elaboration of this concept, the paper shows how it was developed in conflict with the hierarchical nature of traditional, ethical and philosophical values. It illustrates also the relevance of autonomy, self-regulation, free-play and fair representation inherent in many concepts of modern literary theory to the question of human rights. The question of human rights in modern literary theory is closely connected to its concept of the "subject"; the paper outlines Barthes' concept of the centrality of the human subject and Derrida's concept of différance and its impact on his understanding of the concept of the subject. With Derrida's différance, which means both difference and deferral, it became impossible to talk about the concept of the "subject" in isolation from that of the "other," whether one is dealing with the national aspects of the subject or with its gender issues. The deconstruction of the concept of the "subject" brings into the fore the omitted, marginalised and neglected aspects pertinent to its composition and accentuates both the processes of difference and deferral inherent in it. The representation of the subject implies its difference from, and indeed suppression of, the other. It also shows how Derrida's concept of différance dealt a devastating blow to the various philosophical absolutes and social hierarchies which controlled our thinking. The paper then examines the implications of these new critical and philosophical concepts for two different "others": the similar other within the culture (women) and the different other, the stranger/outsider to the dominant Western culture. It demonstrates how modern literary theory helped women to liberate themselves from cultural oppression by deconstructing patriarchal binary thinking and its inherent bias against women and so consolidate their human rights. It limits itself in this domain to a discussion of the contribution of French feminist literary theory, particularly the work of Hélèn Cixous, Luce Irigaray and Julia Kristeva. Their work shows how the literary, philosophical and critical canon perpetuated patriarchy and oppressed women. As for the different other, the paper refers to the work of Edward Said in his deconstruction of Orientalism and its discourse which subjects the other to the demands, needs and visions of the Western "self" and sacrifices in the process his identity and human rights. It also studies the work of the African American critic Henry Louis Gates and shows how his attempt to develop a literary theory based on, and deriving its conceptual framework from, the literature of African and Afro-American writers played a significant role in liberating the African American, undermining their biased representation in the culture, and upholding their human rights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521802

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223708
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: Michael Herzfeld, "Ritual and Textual Structures: The Advent of Spring in Rural Greece," in Text and Context: The Social Anthropology of Tradition, ed. Ravindra K. Jain, A.S.A. Essays, 2 (Philadelphia: I.S.H.I., 1977), p. 34 Herzfeld Ritual and Textual Structures: The Advent of Spring in Rural Greece 34 2 Text and Context: The Social Anthropology of Tradition 1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/539416

Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223750
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Zurbuchen Kenneth M.
Abstract: Recent studies on the interplay of written texts and oral performance have shifted away from "intrinsic" models of literacy and orality in favor of approaches that emphasize the ideological, social, and historical character of oral and literate practices. In keeping with this trend, I discuss how and why a minority religious community in Sulawesi (Indonesia) has incorporated writing and related textual practices into its tradition of ritual song performance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541106

Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i224007
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Lamberg-Karlovsky A. J.
Abstract: Hallo, "Royal Hymns and Mesopotamian Unity," Journal of Cuneiform Studies 17 (1963): 112- 18. 10.2307/1359179 112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/545469

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd. For the London School of Economics
Issue: i224978
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Adorno Robert
Abstract: This paper is an advocacy for the employment of psychoanalytical concepts within sociological theorizing about the individual. Through an exposition of Freud's views on the development of intra-psychic structure and a critique of Parson's reduction of psychoanalysis to a branch of learning theory, I attempt to show that the sociological approach to the individual is implicitly behavioural and imprisoned in a series of assumptions which, among other things, treats subjectivity as epiphenomenal and identity as an unmediated reflection of some external reality. In contrast, psychoanalysis presents to us a picture of the individual as flawed and ambivalent in his relation to society, formed by but at odds with the demands of culture. In particular, the psychoanalytic concept of identification reveals that the acquisition of identity is a hard-won achievement marked by the renunciation of lost and forbidden objects. I argue, following Freud and Lacan, that the ego, far from being an agency of reason, somehow directly 'plugged into' reality, constitutes itself in the fantasied image of another and that the quality of this identification crucially affects the way the world is experienced and believed by the individual. This argument is elaborated through a discussion of Peter Berger's remarks on the social causes of identity crisis which, when set against the work of object-relations theorists on those suffering from disturbances of identity such as, for example, schizoid personalities, are shown to be both superficial and misleading. I conclude the paper by arguing that while psychoanalysis can enhance our understanding of the way in which the individual is formed by and through culture it also cautions us against making simple generalizations about the impact of culture upon the person, showing that the individual never submits himself unequivocally to its demands and interdicts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/589361

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge Journals for the London School of Economics and Political Science
Issue: i225035
Date: 12 1, 1934
Author(s): Wisan Jean K.
Abstract: A properly sociological definition of the concept of discourse does not exist because the notion has never been detached from the linguistic sphere. Not only linguists and semiologists, but also sociologists, use the word primarily as a linguistic category. This article attempts to define the concept of discourse sociologically. It is argued that a sociologically defined notion should be dissociated from the linguistic realm. As a linguistic category, 'discourse' is either used as a synonym for language or text, or is closely associated with one of these notions. 'Discourse' in a sociological sense should refer to a class of texts. This definition confers upon the concept of discourse an intertextual dimension. Defined in this way, the category can not only become an operative sociological concept, but it also becomes autonomous and is no longer reducible to linguistic or paralinguistic conceptual entities, such as text or language. No longer confined to the linguistic realm, the concept can designate a particular entity which possesses its own existence. Discourse can become a thing in itself. The argument is presented in three parts. The first is a critique of the current definitions of the concept 'discourse'. The second proposes, as an alternative, a sociological definition of discourse. Finally the third part applies this new definition in a sociological analysis of journalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/591080

Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge Journals for the London School of Economics and Political Science
Issue: i225019
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Travers Andrew
Abstract: Analysis of a sequence of literary frames suggests that a heightened experience of interactional reality is also anomically constructive of the frame. In each of 16 frames, Durkheimian anomie neither destroys the frame's integrity nor renders its routine grounds unintelligible, as Goffman and Garfinkel would claim it must. Paradoxically, anomie ritually intensifies the frame. The selves in the paper's sequence of highly ritualized frames are not routine selves, however. They are 'strangers to themselves'. The analysis shows how Mead's 'I' can re-emerge from Goffman's ritual thinking - where the 'I' is collapsed into an interactionally-bound 'me' - as an original manifestation of great importance to interactants, and therefore to society as well. (Parenthetically it is also argued that selves need an element of rituality in order to be selflike and that it is interactional rituality which guarantees the evolution of social life beyond given frames, corpora, cultural repertoires, and collective representations.) The idea that interactants can be strangers to themselves is an advance on Goffman's and Garfinkel's accounts of interactional selfhood, but one that problematizes the prosecution of the interaction sociology that Goffman and Garfinkel pioneer, since strangers to themselves disappear in normal sociological appearances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/591341

Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i225306
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): Gray Benjamin R.
Abstract: J. Gray, "The Book of Job in the Context of Near Eastern Litera- ture," ZATW82 (1970), 251-69 Gray 251 82 ZATW 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/601865

Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: The School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Issue: i225560
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Keesing Vassili
Abstract: R. Keesing, 'Rethinking mana', 153. Keesing 153 Rethinking mana
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/620877

Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Institute of British Geographers
Issue: i225673
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Gregory Gregory J.
Abstract: GUELKE, L. (1982) Historical understanding in geography/an idealist approach Guelke Historical understanding in geography/an idealist approach 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/621934

Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Institute of British Geographers
Issue: i225701
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Werlen Andrew
Abstract: This paper offers a dialectical interpretation of place. It argues that much of the confusion in the literature on place stems from its failure to engage with the ontological nature of place. This has led to much research implicitly accepting a restrictive Cartesian view of socio-spatial reality. Entrikin's (1991) 'betweenness of place' thesis is a notable recent illustration. In this paper I suggest that the problematic nature of place and its relationship to space can be resolved through a dialectical mode of argumentation. The spatialized dialectic of Henri Lefebvre offers a fruitful framework for reconciling the interaction between place and space insofar as it strives to overcome dualistic conceptions of capitalist spatiality. Lefevbre's dialectical approach will be counterposed to Entrikin's argument. The paper concludes by outlining the implications of the respective perspectives for robust place theorization and place politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/622564

Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201461
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Zharova James V.
Abstract: An approach to sociocultural analysis based on the ideas of Vygotsky, Bakhtin, and others is used to provide the foundation for discussing narratives as "cultural tools." The production of official, state sponsored historical narratives is examined from this perspective, and it is argued that this production process may be shaped as much by dialogic encounters with other narratives as by archival information. These claims are harnessed to examine the production of post-Soviet Russian history textbooks, especially their presentation of the events surrounding the Russian Civil War of 1918-20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640614

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226345
Date: 8 1, 1976
Author(s): Whitten Michael F.
Abstract: In their interpretations of magical acts and utterances, anthropologists frequently argue that magic and technology are informed by two different kinds of logic, the former "expressive" in character, the latter "instrumental." A close analysis of magical hunting songs used by the Aguaruna of Amazonian Peru reveals that the songs are part of a general ordering process that encompasses the strategic use of thoughts, speech, objects, and acts to achieve practical ends. In Aguaruna thought the expressive imagery of magical songs is an instrumental tool that shapes events in the performer's world. [magic, ritual language, symbolic/cognitive analysis, native peoples of Amazonia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644631

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226360
Date: 5 1, 1985
Author(s): Whitten Janet Wall
Abstract: Language is constitutive of social reality through the constant articulation and reinforcement of significant linguistic concepts, which give meaning to social relations. Among the Shuar of southeastern Ecuador, discourses on power and knowledge validate the traditional ideological structure and create a new ideological structure through the mobilization of meaning in political speech that legitimates relations of domination. Ideological transformation is assisted by a cultural predisposition to seek non-Shuar sources of technical and symbolic knowledge in the acquisition of power. [Shuar, political change, discourse, ideology, power]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644754

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226370
Date: 11 1, 1964
Author(s): Zuidema Constance
Abstract: The indigenous peoples of South America culturally code sensory perceptions in varied and complex ways. This article outlines and compares the sensory models of indigenous cultures from two contrasting South American regions: the central Andean highlands and the Amazonian lowlands. While the various peoples of the Andes appear to share the same basic sensory model, those of the Amazon manifest significant differences in the symbolic values they accord the different senses. One common factor among the Amazonians, which also distinguishes them from the Andeans, is the importance given to the senses dependent on proximity, particularly smell. Such differences can be attributed to a variety of causes and are seen to have a variety of cultural effects. In conclusion, the anthropological implications of examining indigenous theories and modes of perception are explored. [South America, Andes, Amazon, anthropology of the senses]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645710

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226400
Date: 5 1, 1987
Author(s): White Michael
Abstract: Using a broadly Aristotelian framework I propose poetic form as a means for distinguishing historicities. I analyze Sakalava performances of possession by royal ancestors as the creative production of a kind of history, distinguish it from a dominant occidental model of history, and elaborate the chronotope on which it is based and the heteroglossia and historical consciousness it enables. I argue that Sakalava spirit possession has a strongly realist bent and suggest the interest of poiesis for anthropological analysis and comparison more generally. [historical production, historicity, spirit possession, mimesis, poiesis, Aristotle, Madagascar]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646688

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226398
Date: 11 1, 1987
Author(s): Zambouke Charles
Abstract: In this study of Greek dreams at moments of illness and anxiety I explore the relationship between individual experience and cultural representation. Ethnographic data and textual sources show that the image of fields recurs in dreams, thus throwing into question the uniqueness of personal experience as well as the concept of "experience" as something separate from cultural narratives. Yet these same images might also be independently generated "from below" by the emotional, physical experience of distress and illness. This case points to the convergence of cultural and personal symbols and to their fusion in the moment of experience. Approaches from psychoanalysis, cognitive psychology, anthropology, and folklore studies all provide possible theorizations. None of these options excludes the others. The image of the field in dreams is overdetermined precisely because the historicocultural, the cognitive, the psychobiological, and the social all simultaneously figure in human experience. [dreams, experience, psychoanalysis, folklore, cognition, space, Greece]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646813

Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226406
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Zola Matthew
Abstract: Using a form of narrative analysis, I explore how marriage in contemporary China influences people's identity formation as "men with disabilities." In particular, I examine how local practices of marriage exclusion shape the definition, marginalization, and experience of men who have trouble walking. This discussion is more phenomenological than most previous accounts of men's experiences of marriage in Chinese Society. [marriage, disability, identity, body, manhood, narrative, China]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647236

Journal Title: Past & Present
Publisher: Past and Present Society
Issue: i226616
Date: 2 1, 1967
Author(s): Swanson Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Guy E. Swanson, Religion and Regime: A Sociological Account of the Reformation (Ann Arbor, Mich., 1967), ch. I Swanson ch. I Religion and Regime: A Sociological Account of the Reformation 1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/650716

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227477
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Wolf Ino
Abstract: Lévi-Strauss claims that the unconscious activity of mind is more important than the conscious one for understanding social phenomena and that the unconscious consists of an aggregate of forms, which are imposed on psychological and physical content. The real inspiration of Lévi-Strauss' notion is the Kantian notion of mental constraints and the postulate of isomorphism of mental and physical laws. The methodological usefulness of the unconscious as a principle of intelligibility is placed in evidence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/672338

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227545
Date: 9 1, 1984
Author(s): Thompson Ellen B.
Abstract: Kalapalo warrior biographies are concerned with dialogical processes of challenge, resistance, debate, and the negotiation of meaning - with the struggles that take place as people try to understand and experience anew. Although warriors were trained to aggressively defend their communities against enemies, these narratives describe how they attempted to refashion ideological forms connected with ethnic allegiance and moral community. The personalities of warriors, closely connected to the training they underwent in adolescence, are particularly important in this regard. While biographies are often understood as texts in which history is merely a context surrounding the progress of individuals, descriptions of personal development are shown here to constitute testimony about historical processes themselves, in this case the experiences of refugees fleeing from centers of European expansion in lowland South America.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/680865

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227565
Date: 9 1, 1953
Author(s): Wittgenstein Katherine P.
Abstract: The anthropological taboo against "going native" is examined in the context of the ethnographer's own dreams during fieldwork among Sufi saints in Pakistan. The essay demonstrates that accounts of these dreams shaped social relations in the field and argues that relativist neutrality is a cover for a refusal to believe that is impossible to hide. This refusal constitutes an implicit insistence that the relationship between ethnographer and subject be shaped by the parameters of a hegemonic Western discourse of rationality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682301

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227565
Date: 9 1, 1969
Author(s): Zempleni Paul
Abstract: Because so many anthropologists have lost their senses of the smells, sounds, and tastes of the places they study, the major theorists of spirit possession have failed to consider relationships between bodily practices and cultural memory and countermemory. By regarding spirit possession in West Africa sensuously as an embodied practice, the author reveals the phenomenological arena in which cultural memory is fashioned and refashioned to produce and reproduce power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682304

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227580
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Žižek Georgina
Abstract: This essay uses the work of psychoanalyst Melanie Klein to reopen the dialogue between anthropology and psychoanalysis. It argues that Kleinian concepts enhance an anthropology that seeks out both intersubjective and intrasubjective difference and disjuncture, and it demonstrates the uses of major Kleinian concepts for addressing classic anthropological problems, including gender classification and the analysis of persecution in witchcraft and sorcery systems. Applying Kleinian concepts to the analysis of cultural-historical process, it shows how splitting and denial may be central to the reproduction and hegemony of dominant cultural systems through time and addresses the question of how to theorize the relationship among dominant cultural systems, social differentiation, and individual subjectivities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683117

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227583
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wolf Aletta
Abstract: An earlier ecological anthropology defined its project within the compass of the idealism v. materialism debate. Culture was an adaptive tool, instrumental rather than formal; it was intelligible with respect to its material effects, not - as the idealists would maintain - in terms of itself, as an autonomous, self-determining order of reality. This argument was mounted with respect to bounded, stable, self-regulating, local, or at best regional entities and the environment they inhabited. All of the premises of the earlier ecology have since been challenged, and today's ecologies - symbolic, historical, and political - radically depart from the reductions and elisions of the ecological anthropology of the past. In particular, the new ecologies override the dichotomies that informed and enlivened the debates of the past - nature/culture, idealism/materialism - and they are informed by the literature on transnationalist flows and local-global articulations. This introduction positions Rappaport's work within this historical shift from a polarized field of mutually exclusive frameworks to today's synthetic new ecologies and their antireductive materialism. Rappaport's work, produced over three decades, serves, in and through its own transformations, as a bridge between the reductive materialism of the past and a new-materialist ecology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683337

Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227591
Date: 3 1, 1972
Author(s): Wolpe Donald L.
Abstract: Recent changes within social and cultural anthropology have made history a key issue, but in this essay I argue that the field has yet to develop the resources that are required to deal with temporality. This point is made through an extended examination of Jean and John Comaroff's work on Christianity and colonialism in southern Africa. Arguably, the Comaroffs read history backward and then present its unfolding as a kind of inexorable logic. In doing so, they homogenize missionary and Tswana "cultures" and attribute agency to abstractions rather than to people acting in particular material contexts. In contrast, I argue for a narrative approach to historical anthropological explanation. The emergent qualities of events - and the variable ways in which capitalism, hegemony, Protestantism, and vernacular modernisms relate - require narrative for explanation, narrative that encompasses within itself the narratives of social actors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683926

Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Eastern Sociological Society
Issue: i227652
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Zelizer Orville
Abstract: Derrida, 1976:158 158
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/685074

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228017
Date: 4 1, 1948
Author(s): Webster William A.
Abstract: Arthur C. Clarke once wrote that "any sufficiently advanced technology is indistinguishable from magic." The language of magic is evident in much of popular discourse about computers. A content analysis of Time magazine reporting on computers and related technologies over a ten-year period revealed that 36 percent of all these stories used explicitly magical or religious language. Together with a qualitative analysis of implicitly magical themes, the patterns in Time's reporting reveal how magic language was used as one strategy to stabilize and close the technological frame of personal computers in the mid-1980s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/689992

Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228044
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Yoxen Anne
Abstract: Representations of the active brain have served to establish a particular domain of competence for brain mappers and to distinguish brain mapping's particular contributions to mind/brain research. At the heart of the claims about the emerging contributions of functional brain mapping is a paradox: functional imagers seem to reject representations while also using them at multiple points in their work. This article therefore considers a love-hate relationship between scientists and their object: the case of the iconoclastic imager. This paradoxical stance is the result of the formation of an interdisciplinary approach that brings together a number of scientific traditions and their particular standards of what constitutes scientific evidence. By examining the various ways in which images are deployed and rejected, the origins of these conflicting tendencies can be traced to the technological, methodological, and institutional elements in the work of functional imagers. This approach provides insight into the current demarcation of imaging and reflects on features of visual knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690275

Journal Title: The Musical Quarterly
Publisher: G. Schirmer
Issue: i229701
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Thompson Laurence
Abstract: John Thompson's introduction to Ricoeur's Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, trans., ed. John Thompson (Cambridge, 1981), p. 6 Thompson 6 Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences 1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/742175

Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Society for Music Theory
Issue: i229978
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Neumeyer David
Abstract: David Neumeyer, "The Three-Voice Ursatz," In Theory Only 10, nos. 1-2 (1987): 3-29 Neumeyer 1 3 10 Theory Only 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746080

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230051
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Hartmann John
Abstract: p. 147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746221

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230030
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Emerson Carolyn
Abstract: Caryl Emerson, "Real Endings and Rus- sian Death: Mussorgskij's Pesni i plaski smerti," Russian Language Journal 38 (1984), 199-216 Emerson 199 38 Russian Language Journal 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746503

Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230026
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Miller Anthony
Abstract: n. 30 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746729

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230987
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Heinio Marianne
Abstract: Marjorie Perloff, "Postmodernism," pp. 43-63 43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763871

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230999
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Scruton Karol
Abstract: Roger Scruton, The Aesthetics of Architecture (Princeton, 1979) Scruton The Aesthetics of Architecture 1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763970

Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230999
Date: 10 1, 1956
Author(s): Poulet Regula Burckhardt
Abstract: Qureshi, op. cit. (1986)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763973

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231248
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Wardhaugh Michael
Abstract: Ronald Wardhaugh, An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Oxford, 1994), 258-81 (p. 260). Wardhaugh 258 An Introduction to Sociolinguistics 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766394

Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231237
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Nattiez Katharine
Abstract: Nattiez, '"Repons" et la crise de la "communication" musicale contemporaine', Inharmoniques, 2 (1987), 193-210 Nattiez 193 2 Inharmoniques 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766438

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Garet Ronald R.
Abstract: The Bridge, supra note 1, at 116. 116
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796397

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Aeschylus Martha
Abstract: Violence and the Word, supra note 7, at 1629 1629
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796400

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232710
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Milner Anthony V.
Abstract: Id. at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796817

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232728
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Graves J. M.
Abstract: BERNARD WILLIAMS, MORAL LUCK 72-73 (1981).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797078

Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232744
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Schleiermacher Rob
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Religion, Atheism, and Faith, in ALASDAIR MACINTYRE & PAUL RICOEUR, THE RELIGIOUS SIGNIFICANCE OF ATHEIsM 57 (1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797142

Journal Title: Cambridge Opera Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i233914
Date: 3 1, 1921
Author(s): Thovez Roger
Abstract: here 117-18 117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823749

Journal Title: American Bar Foundation Research Journal
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234248
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Goffman Alan C.
Abstract: Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 11 (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday & Co., Anchor Books, 1959) Goffman 11 The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 1959
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828228

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234283
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Darderian Janet
Abstract: Hofrichter, Neighborhood Justice (cited in note 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828547

Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234271
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Corner Stephen A.
Abstract: George W. Corner, ed., The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813, at 236-37 (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1948). Corner 236 1948 The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828706

Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234478
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Charlton Berthold
Abstract: E. T. A. Hofmnann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism, ed. David Charlton, trans. Martyn Clarke (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989), 160-61 Charlton 160 E. T. A. Hoffmann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/832063

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Institute of Musicology, Zagreb Music Academy
Issue: i234664
Date: 6 1, 1914
Author(s): Wagner Madelon
Abstract: WAGNER. »Oper und Drama«, Schriften, vol. XI, p. 246. Wagner 246 XI Schriften
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/836600

Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Institute of Musicology, Zagreb Music Academy
Issue: i234654
Date: 6 1, 1971
Author(s): Supičić Jean-Jacques
Abstract: J. J. NATTIEZ, 1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/836758

Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Sage Publications, Ltd.
Issue: e90008098
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Farr Bernard C.
Abstract: Baker GP & Hacker PMS (2005) Wittgenstein: Understanding and Meaning (2nd ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90008100

Journal Title: Africa Development / Afrique et Développement
Publisher: CODESRIA
Issue: e90013865
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Aliana Serge Bernard Emmanuel
Abstract: This article focuses on the concepts of deliberative democracy and African palaver to conceptually (re) formulate and make intelligible the practices and performance of governance in Africa, with the aim of achieving a genuine normalization of societal behavior. Based on an analysis of the texts and a synthesis of texts analyzed, and drawing on the evidence at the present time, this is about establishing that the African palaver, often excluded from the cartography of official epistemology and relegated to the level of indigenous knowledge and practice, can define the conditions of possibility and feasibility for deliberative democracy, a political paradigm deemed dominant universal. However, the issue is that of cognitive decentering. How can one imagine that African conceptual categories, labeled as cheesy and reduced to the mere field of ethnological studies, can interact and correlate with modern recipes, with the idea of starting a process of governability, the realization of which is resilient democracy?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90013868

Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: John Paul II Catholic University of Lublin, Faculty of Philosophy
Issue: e90014619
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): BEMBENNEK KRYSTYNA
Abstract: The aim of the article is to present some aspects of Paul Ricœur’s thought, especially his reflection on the servile will. Firstly I present Ricœur’s philosophy of will (in the context of phenomenology of the voluntary and involuntary) and the concept of fallibility. Then I demonstrate the main aspects of Ricœurian rethinking and enlarging of Husserl’s phenomenology what leads to hermeneutic formula: the symbol gives rise to thought. Eventually, I argue that Ricœur’s hermeneutic phenomenology creates a specified anthropological view and understanding of the human condition. This understanding will later become a part of the ‘hermeneutics of the self.’
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90014628

Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Sciences Po University Press
Issue: e90016168
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Introduced in France since a decade, the work of Moishe Postone appears as a global new interpretation of Marx. It hinges on the thesis according to which Marx does not propose a criticism of capitalism from the angle of work, but a criticism of work under capitalism. This article assesses the significance of this heterodox Marxism by trying to situate its epistemological background between a structuralist interpretation and a phenomenological interpretation of Marx. It shows that Postone builds an original structuralism, combining Althusser and Hegel, but struggles to link it up with a theory of subjectivation and action up to a thought which aims for the social transformation of and the emancipation from capitalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016175

Journal Title: Acta Musicologica
Publisher: Barenreiter
Issue: i238579
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Adorno Uwe
Abstract: Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/932818

Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Societe Francaise de Musicologie
Issue: i239150
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Aristote Jacques
Abstract: La Raison dans l'Histoire (Paris, 1965), p. 54. 54 La Raison dans l'Histoire 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/947263

Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240071
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): White William
Abstract: Does hermeneutics provide a useful framework for the study and practice of public administration? Danny L. Balfour and William Mesaros argue that a shift toward the hermeneutic perspective can move public administration towards the cutting edge of social research and practice while promoting the values of mutuality, understanding, and improved communication. Hermeneutics can help the field move away from methodological debates and toward more practical, cooperative research and an enhanced focus on the substantive issues that define and energize public policy and administration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/976676

Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: canajsocicahican.33.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Titchkosky Tanya
Abstract: Résumé. Ce texte démontre le genre de questions qui se présentent aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologieen interrogent les interactions qui émergent autour des luttes pour «l'accès» dans un milieu de travail scolaire/ académique. Au cours de mes expériences dans un des plus grands édifices dans une des plus grandes universités au Canada, j'ai amassé des paroles quotidiennes qui justifient l'exclusion des personnes handicapées. J'ai rassemblé des narratifs représentants ce-qui-est possible-de-dire aujourd'hui sur la lutte pour l'accessibilité. En utilisant une approche sociologique interprétativiste, ce texte illustre la façon dont les significations de l'incapacité sont générés par un discours qui rends légitime la construction exclusive ainsi que les structures inaccessible de la vie universitaire. Dans ce texte, je démontre que l'accès n'est pas synonyme de justice mais, par contre, est un point de départ pour la réflexion critique où les relations sociaux entre corps et espace peut être considéré à nouveau. Ce texte contribue aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologie en analysant la façon dont la narration ordinaire et quotidienne de l'incapacité peut continuer à, en même temps que l'environnement physique change, agir comme pouvoir social qui reproduit le statuquo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.33.1.37

Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah
Publisher: Beacon Press
Issue: daat.issue-81
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Holzer Elie
Abstract: מחקר כזה יידרש בין השאר לתת את הדעת על ההבדלים בין קובצי הדרשות, כפי שציינתי בהערה 9 לעיל.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/daat.81.321

Journal Title: Journal of Higher Education in Africa / Revue de l'enseignement supérieur en Afrique
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: jhigheducafri.8.issue-2
Date: October 1, 1958
Author(s): Macdonald Helen M.
Abstract: Cet article est issu d'une étude ethnographique menée à l'Université de Cape Town. Il explore la dynamique d'une intervention permettant au personnel de l'université de s'engager dans une voie alternative à celle de l'apartheid en Afrique du Sud. Il traite de la politique sociale qui apparut entre l'intervention, ses participants et non-participants imaginaires par rapport à la vision « transformatrice » de l'université. L'intention des interventionnistes a été retravaillée par les participants des principaux symboles qui mettent en forme les motifs de leurs comportements et donnent un sens à leurs expériences. Utilisant le modèle d'Ortner (1973) de reconnaissance et de symboles-clés, je soutiens que la « transformation » et « l'espace sûr » représentent une élaboration symboles, en ce sens qu'ils ont le pouvoir d'action et d'élaboration conceptuelle. Ces symboles d'élaboration fonctionnent en relais avec une sorte de logique qui « cristallise l'engagement » des participants vers l'intervention d'une manière émotionnellement puissante et relativement indifférenciée. Ce faisant, ils font de l'intervention un symbole capable d'exprimer ce que leur expérience signifie pour eux en tant que communauté imaginée par rapport aux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/jhigheducafri.8.2.73

Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: revfranscipoleng.63.issue-3-4
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: Mark Beviris a Professor in the Department of Political Science, University of California, Berkeley. He is the author ofThe Logic of the History of Ideas(1999),New Labour: A Critique(2005),Key Concepts of Governance(2009),Democratic Governance(2010), andThe Making of British Socialism(2011), and the co-author, with R. A. W. Rhodes, ofInterpreting British Governance(2003),Governance Stories(2006), andThe State as Cultural Practice(2010). His research interests in political theory include moral philosophy, political philosophy, and the history of political thought. His work on public policy focuses on organization theory, democratic theory, and governance. His methodological interests cover the philosophy of social science, the history of social science, and interpretive analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.63.3-4.115

Journal Title: South Atlantic Review
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: soutatlarevi.79.issue-3-4
Date: August 1, 1995
Author(s): Yee Pamela M.
Abstract: Pamela M. Yee is a doctoral candidate and Provost's Fellow in the English department at the University of Rochester. Her research interests include late-medieval romance and dream-visions, confessional narratives, medieval medicine, cognition, psychology, affect theory, trauma studies, and the medical humanities; a secondary strand of her scholarship includes all things Arthurian and a nascent interest in medievalism within pop culture. Her dissertation explores confessional tropes as narrative, dialogic, and patient-centered healing in late Middle English secular literature. She has recently published articles in ArthurianaandThe Once and Future Classroom, and has a forthcoming review inMedievally Speaking. In summer 2013, she curated an exhibit titled “Eugène Vinaver's MagnificentMalory” for the Rossell Hope Robbins Library. Her budding interest in Gower studies has resulted in a recent flurry of activity: her co-organizing of the 3rdInternational Congress of the John Gower Society in summer 2014 and her selection by JGS as the graduate student representative for the 2016 John Hurt Fisher Prize Committee. At her home institution, she serves as Assistant Editor of the TEAMS Middle English Texts Series, works as a library assistant for the Robbins Library, contributes to theCamelot Project, and teaches in the Writing, Speaking, and Argument Program. Email:pyee@ur.rochester.edu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/soutatlarevi.79.3-4.89

Journal Title: Ulbandus Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ulbarevi.17
Date: August 31, 1997
Author(s): Mankovskaya Elizaveta
Abstract: ,Liisa H. Malkki “News and culture: Transitory phenomena and the fieldwork tradition,”inAnthropological locations: Boundaries and grounds of a field science, ed. andAkhil Gupta (:James Ferguson University of California Press,1997),91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/ulbarevi.17.86

Journal Title: Ethics & the Environment
Publisher: The Guilford Press
Issue: ete.2010.15.issue-1
Date: January 25, 2003
Author(s): Crowley Thomas
Abstract: Evaluative terms are a crucial part of the environmental discourse. These terms, and the evaluative frameworks in which they are imbedded, serve as important guides to action. “Natural,” a term commonly used as a positive evaluation, is problematic because it can both justify unfair social relations and obscure the connections between humans and the rest of nature. “Sustainable,” another popular term, is extremely malleable, and is too often elaborated in frameworks that are neither socially nor ecologically responsible. The term “sustainable” is sometimes used in the framework of ecosystem health, but even this approach can fail to highlight the interconnectedness of social and ecological systems. The framework of ecosocial flourishing, introduced in this article, is better suited for highlighting the interconnected nature of the world and for drawing attention to questions of environmental justice. Evaluative terms (like “natural”) and frameworks (like “ecosocial flourishing”) are part of larger narratives that help people make sense of their interactions with, and emotional responses to, the non-human world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/ete.2010.15.1.69

Journal Title: Global South, The
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: globalsouth.5.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Herlinghaus Hermann
Abstract: Offering a “pharmacological” perspective, this essay elaborates on the Chilean Roberto Bolaño's novel 2666. It discusses narrative imaginaries that regraph cultural experiences and spaces of self-consciousness as they emerge from singular global south networks. In2666, the Mexican-U.S. border region operates as a fraught site through which a global aesthetics of sobriety gains shape and texture, a phenomenon upon which Bolaño's text depends for its critique of Western academic knowledge. From there, I consider how a “pharmacological” problematization of Western culture can reshape our perspective of the constitution of a global modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/globalsouth.5.1.101

Journal Title: Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies
Publisher: U. Cal. Press
Issue: indjglolegstu.20.issue-2
Date: June 14, 1896
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: This paper scrutinizes the fundamental assumption governing Gunther Teubner's theory of societal constitutionalism, namely that societal constitutions are ultimately about the regulation of inclusion and exclusion in global function systems. While endorsing the central role of inclusion/exclusion in constitutions, societal or otherwise, I argue that inclusion and exclusion are primordial categories of collective action, rather than functional categories. As a result, the self-closure which gives rise to a legal collective is spatial as much as it is temporal, and subjective no less than material. Inasmuch as legal orders must establish who ought to do what, where, and when, this entails, or so I argue, that any legal order we could imagine—including a global legal order such as cyberlaw—is necessarily bounded in space, time, content, and membership. This impinges directly on the inclusion/exclusion difference: that there can be no inclusion without exclusion entails, most fundamentally, that there can be no (il)legality without alegality, i.e. comportment that contests, sometimes radically, how a legal order draws the distinction between legality and illegality. In this fundamental sense, all legal orders have an outside—literally. Building on this insight, I suggest that the functional cosmopolitanism advocated by a theory of societal constitutionalism retains a residue of the logic of totalization it seeks to overcome. I conclude by exploring how a first-person plural theory of law both supports and transforms the insight that constitutions regulate the inclusion/exclusion difference by putting into place constitutive and limitative rules.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/indjglolegstu.20.2.697

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of Chicago P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: 01 1984
Author(s): Gaedtke Andrew
Abstract: Ruben Borg's The Measureless Time of Joyce, Deleuze and Derridaargues that James Joyce'sFinnegans Wakemust be read as a singular attempt to represent the eccentric structure of post-human temporality. The book relocates theWakewithin a long history of philosophies of time as well as recent post-structuralist and information theory. Drawing upon the work of Gilles Deleuze and Jacques Derrida, Borg shows how Joyce's formal and narratological innovations enabled him to present a structure of time that does not obey the linear, humanistic progression of thebildungsromanbut instead manifests mechanical temporal economies of production and waste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.192

Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: New Directions
Issue: jmodelite.35.issue-3
Date: Oct. 1, 1991
Author(s): Carlson Celia
Abstract: Recent scholarship has given considerable attention to lyric poetry as a form of sensuous knowledge. This approach emphasizes the corporeal origins of poetry, its genesis in the body or in language viewed as material. The question of sensuous knowledge is central to the larger theoretical issue of modernity itself, in which lyric holds a central yet ambiguous status. The question of sensuous knowledge is ultimately a question of meaning. However, modern thought — thought pertaining to “modernity” — is fundamentally circular. This would seem to establish an epistemological impasse for aesthetics. But I argue that this circularity offers an important, and necessary, way to limit knowledge and thereby ground an ethical subjectivity. My essay places formalism at the heart of sensuous knowledge. In this essay I develop an account of the importance of abstraction in sensuous knowledge by way of Kant's concept of Darstellung, “presentation [of sensory experience].” The “presentation” is the object as it has undergone a structural process of internalization and been made available for psychic use as meaning; that requires a recognition of loss. Where this is important for literature is that twentieth-century American poetry frequently uses very personal images of family life as a way of conveying sincerity about corporeal experience. I use this discussion of circularity in modern aesthetic thought to argue that there is a risk to taking shortcuts to meaning through images of the material bodies of children. In these contemporary poems by Gary Snyder, Sharon Olds and Rita Dove, the poets reject loss in favor of a very modern “affirmation” of the material. But affirmation and the visual image as a sign of affirmation cannot alone bind meaning to us. That meaning must be internalized through theworkof poetic presentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.35.3.158

Journal Title: Prooftexts: A Journal of Jewish Literary History
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: prooftexts.30.issue-2
Date: 04 2010
Author(s): Siff David B.
Abstract: R. Naḥman of Bratslav's magnum opus, Liqutey Moharan, expresses contradictory attitudes toward the value and ontological primacy of books as opposed to living speech. When his discourses are sorted by the date delivered, one can see a specific shift in attitude. R. Naḥman's emphasis on oral expression, in discourses leading up to 1804, is characteristic of Hasidism's shift from the literary approach of Kabbalah toward an orally driven mass movement. Rebbe Naḥman's later emphasis on printed books can be understood in light of his decision in 1804 to embrace the printed book as a mechanism for spreading his ideas, a decision that may have stemmed from his messianic aspirations. Ontologies of orality and literacy are thus exposed as shifting ideological responses to biographical and historical circumstances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/prooftexts.30.2.238

Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Duke UP
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Heffernan Laura
Abstract: This article reviews recent methodological interventions in the field of literary study, many of which take nineteenth-century critics, readers, or writers as models for their less interpretive reading practices. In seeking out nineteenth-century models for twenty-first-century critical practice, these critics imagine a world in which English literature never became a discipline. Some see these new methods as formalist, yet we argue that they actually emerge from historicist self-critique. Specifically, these contemporary critics view the historicist projects of the 1980s as overly influenced by disciplinary models of textual interpretation—models that first arose, we show through our reading of the Jolly Bargemen scene in Charles Dickens's Great Expectations(1860– 61), in the second half of the nineteenth century. In closing, we look more closely at the work of a few recent critics who sound out the metonymic, adjacent, and referential relations between readers, texts, and historical worlds in order sustain historicism's power to restore eroded meanings rather than reveal latent ones.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.4.615

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: complitstudies.51.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: The combinatory and ludic polyculturalism, the parodic transmutation of meanings and values, the open, multilingual hybridization [which] are the devices responsible for the constant feeding and refeeding of this “baroquizing” almagest: the carnivalized transencyclopedia of the new barbarians, where everything can coexist with everything. They are the machinery that crushes the material of tradition, like the teeth of a tropical sugarmill, transforming stalks and husks into bagasse and juicy syrup. 145
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.1.0018

Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Verso
Issue: complitstudies.51.3.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Damrosch David
Abstract: The world is a large and various place. Those wishing to chart new planetary cartographies are finding many languages to study beyond the French–German–English triad that long dominated Western comparative studies, and they are developing new methods appropriate to the expanded scope of our field. The tough linguistic and political analyses that Emily Apter rightly wishes comparatists to pursue will best be carried forward by widening our cultural and linguistic horizons, and by employing the full variety of critical and theoretical approaches that can be included in our cartographic toolboxes today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.3.0504

Journal Title: The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: fscotfitzrevi.12.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Salmose Niklas
Abstract: Fitzgerald's nostalgic style, though, set an example of how a nostalgic narrative could be structured, and in its aftermath it was used by such different authors as Evelyn Waugh in Brideshead Revisited(1945), Anthony Burgess inA Clockwork Orange(1962) and the works of Kazuo Ishiguro. The author's own later work employs it as well. The technique of using the reader's textual memory in order to evoke a phenomenological nostalgic experience is very evident in both versions ofTender Is the Night(the 1934 original, and Malcolm Cowley's 1951 restructuring). In the 1951 version, the structure of the narrative closely follows the pattern of happiness and reflection. An early description of a Swiss valley communicates an awe of life and nature: “The sun swam out into a blue sea of sky and suddenly it was a Swiss valley at its best—pleasant sounds and murmurs and a good fresh smell of health and cheer” (9). In the transitory third book, “Casualties: 1925,” the tone has changed from appreciative to melancholic, as in this description of the small town of Amiens: “In the day-time one is deflated by such towns, with their little trolley cars of twenty years ago crossing the great grey cobble-stoned squares in front of the cathedral, and the very weather seems to have a quality of the past, faded weather like that of old photographs” (138). At the end of the novel both Dick and Nicole Diver become obsessed with youth and the past as well as with time: “for Nicole the years slipped away by clock and calendar and birthday, with the added poignance of her perishable beauty” (228). Toward the end of the novel, Nicole's last sight of Dick—“her eyes followed his figure until it became a dot and mingled with the other dots in the summer crowd” (386)—forces the reader to reflect in a reversed movement. Instead of vanishing like Dick, this image suggests a backward recollection of what was a Swiss valley “at its best.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/fscotfitzrevi.12.1.0067

Journal Title: Interdisciplinary Literary Studies
Publisher: Harper and Row
Issue: intelitestud.16.2.issue-2
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Eze Chielozona
Abstract: Even in her familial tone, and perhaps because of it, Jabbeh Wesley never forgets that the healing and meaning-making function of grief and mourning, as painful as grief and mourning are, is not to be avoided. Rather, as DuBose argues, based on the painful experience of his wife's miscarriage, as “‘child’ and ‘parent’ disappeared, our bodies and our society dys-appeared, and our connections and hopes re-appeared” (374). Jabbeh Wesley attaches the reappearance of the hopes for the healing and reconstruction of her Liberian world to people's ability and willingness to truly experience the painful process of grief and, perhaps informed by that cathartic experience, allow compassion and empathy to guide their relationship to others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/intelitestud.16.2.0282

Journal Title: Journal of Africana Religions
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jafrireli.1.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2013
Abstract: Some time ago, Paul Ricoeur pointed out that “the symbol gives rise to thought.” These diasporic religious communities enable us to find a new beginning for thought that has the possibility of avoiding the exclusivity and elitism that has too often accompanied the objective meaning of thought as a science of the rational. Not only these diasporic religions, but also the very conundrum of the continent of Africa as a whole, to echo Skinner at the beginning of our paper, may serve in the same manner as one of the most important ways that thought might be renewed—and the relationship of thought to action and performance.38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jafrireli.1.1.0091

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Is SPEP the city of God? This would be going too far. Not even the theological turn in French Phenomenology would make this claim. Dick Howard already threw in a troubling question: “diversification that perhaps gives more breadth than depth?” he asked. And there are plenty more troubling questions. SPEP is now a big operation. It has committees and subcommittees, multiple simultaneous sessions, blind review. All these developments are signs, perhaps inevitable ones, of its success, but all have familiar downsides: bureaucratization, diversification for its own sake, what Habermas would call Unübersichtlichkeit. This is what happens when outsiders become insiders, the antis become their own sort of establishment. You can't blame some of us for feeling nostalgic for our long-lost innocence, even though we all know—you don't have to be a philosopher of history to know this—that we can't go there. History has rendered a judgment, but Dick Howard said, “Historywilljudge.” That's one problem with history: It's always rendering judgments, but they are never final. You'd have to be at the end of history for that, and despite the claim of some philosophers, we aren't there yet. The slaughter bench of history looks very different today from the early 1960s, but it's still in some ways a slaughter bench. So how will the SPEP of the early twenty-first century look to the philosopher-historians of 2061—or is it 2062?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0102

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In short, it is exposure to the experientially inspired and theoretically casual atmosphere of those early SPEP meetings—where neglected topics and unorthodox modes of thinking and speaking were encouraged in an undisciplined way—to which I owe the most. Of course, SPEP grew up. It has experienced its share of embarrassing upheavals, as the heavy presence of its own versions of the social and political prejudices in the larger culture became too obvious to ignore. But it is now a major event—the four-day anchor for a week-long convention that takes over hotels, runs multiple concurrent sessions, fosters satellite groups, and often follows established lines of discussion. Some even call it the alternative APA. Yet I am sure that as long as lifeworld experience continues to trump whatever it is currently fashionable to say about it, grown-up SPEP will retain enough of its original vitality and intellectual generosity so that another generation of aging academics will have cause to repeat our present thank-yous in another fifty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0108

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Our plight, then, is not simply that we are all in the same boat, let alone on the same ocean. Yet we are still bound by the responsbility of inhabiting the same planet. What would it mean, then, to share the earth with all its inhabitants, not just in terms of occupying the same planet but also in terms of caring and looking after each other in the anachronistic sense of the word dutyas plight? Can we risk pledging to solemnly avow our own investments in the very things we so self-rightousely protest against, not in order to stop protesting in the name of justice but, rather, in the hopes of turning the killing machine back against itself and taking another step toward “hunting down” and abolishing death penalities wherever they may be hiding, even in our own disowned fears and desires?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0118

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: The point here is that whoever I am in terms of my personal identity and my capacity or incapacity to identify myself through sortal terms as a being in the world with others, I will have no doubt who is in pain or who will have the pain. Here, again, is a sense of “I” in which I can be aware of myself and refer to myself without it being necessary to employ any nonindexical or third-personal referents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0222

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In 1986, however, SPEP's present mission statement could not have been conceived. Many important issues and questions remained unrecognized or simply ignored. But the opening before the organization was now a “postmodern” one, and a hallmark of what is called postmodern thought is its requirement that it transform in the force of its own lack of founded stability. I believe that 1986 began a series of developments that is turning SPEP toward ways of thought and life that cannot be labeled postmodern. I doubt that this turning constitutes a midlife crisis for SPEP in its fiftieth year. But it does highlight for me the fact that I have been giving a historical narrative that has to do with continuities in the dissolution of continuities, that I have not been—if I may put it this way—postmodern in an orthodox manner, although I have refused to give an unambiguous meaning to the term that has played a major role in organizing this essay. I do not know whether this discussion is postmodern, post-postmodern, or modern, and I do not care. I do care, however, about the openings that SPEP has provided for collegiality, conflict, unresolved differences, transformations, and sites for presentations, discussion, and critique. In my experience, in its own organizational development and travail, it has occasioned changes in the lives of many philosophers (mine among them). I expect that its indeterminate opening now—its continuing transformations in the interaction of many differences—will continue to surprise, irritate, and change those of us who participate in its opportunities. I close with a sense of beginning and an acknowledgment of the strangeness of the continuity that a series of beginnings provides: continuity without substance, continuity coming to pass.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0299

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: I want to conclude with one more argument from my own work. I have very often argued that philosophers of technology, regarding the expectations of society and their own traditions and habits, may come “too late” to technologies. They too often undertake their reflections afterthe technologies are in place. Rather, I argue, they should reposition themselves at what I call the “R&D” position where technologies are taking developmental shape, in think tanks, in incubator facilities, in research centers. Only then can truly “new” and emerging technologies be fully philosophically engaged.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0321

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: We at SPEP have never been modern and have made a good living off the critique of modernism and of its binary oppositions. But I think that the business as usual of Continental philosophy will have to be expanded to include a critique of the opposition of the human and the nonhuman, of physisandtechne, and of “Continental philosophy” and “science.” For the truth is that we have been a party to the science wars. That is why I think that the work of Catherine Malabou is exactly the sort of work that SPEP and Continental philosophy generally will have to do in the future. We have yet to admit how deeply inscribed the human is in the nonhuman and the technical. We have yet to appreciate that being-in-the-world is not only historicized, gendered, and incarnate but also both a neural and a galactic event, of both microscopic and macroscopic proportions. Can it be of no interest to “philosophy,” can there be nothing to “wonder” about, that our bodies are literally made of stardust? We have yet to realize how deeply interwoven is the imagination of speculative physics with the wonder of the philosophers. If the best we can do is to protect our turf by saying that science does not think, the sciences will steal our thunder, that is, our wonder, right out from under us. Science does think, and science wonders, because wonder is the piety of thought. That is a matter to which SPEP, and Continental philosophers generally, whether they have taken a theological turn or are running in the opposite direction, should give more thought.36 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0333

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Steinbock Anthony
Abstract: The articles collected here represent the richness and diversity of philosophical work presented at SPEP and thus serve to vindicate Steinbock's vision, expressed in his Co-director's Address, of SPEP as an organization that is grounded in a fundamental openness to experience that leads it to continually push against its own limits and thus to reimagine itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0213

Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Davidson Scott
Abstract: For, if phenomenology renounces its search for the absolute and for foundations, then it must give up seeing itself as a single and self-contained discourse. The minimal phenomenologist renounces monolinguism and is no longer the master of only one discourse. Instead, he or she must practice a mixed discourse. To do this is to practice diglossia, to become a code-switcher. In its ordinary sense, the practice of code-switching refers to the passage from one language or dialect to another one in the course of a single conversation, for instance, when the conversation moves from an informal to a formal setting or when it moves from one topic to another. But in the phenomenological context, this would involve the ability to shift from a phenomenological discourse to its “others,” whether they might be Freudian energetics, Deleuzian aspects, Badiouan events, and so on. This practice of translation or code-switching has perhaps always been the role of the phenomenologist, if it is accepted that phenomenological reflection does not begin from itself but is nourished by a life that precedes it and gives rise to it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0315

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: philrhet.44.2.issue-1
Date: 6 1, 1956
Abstract: In this work, I argue that creative metaphors are formed when some persistent problem, caused by an inadequacy in preexisting knowledge, descends into the collective unconscious, is reconfigured unconsciously in novel ways, and then reemerges back into consciousness where the impasse is resolved by the metaphorical expression of new knowledge. To develop this position, I (1) review and critique some well-known language-based studies of metaphor, (2) summarize psychoanalytic and depth psychological approaches to the psyche as one way to overcome the shortcomings of the language-based scholarship, (3) relate C. G. Jung's account of the psyche and his related notion of synchronicity to creative metaphors, (4) graft a quantum physics approach to material reality back onto Jung's work as a provisional structure of the collective unconscious, and finally, (5) offer some suggestions about how creative metaphors might work psychologically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.44.2.0101

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: philrhet.45.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2012
Abstract: Adopting a hyperbolic perspective is also certainly a way to argue as well as a way to examine other “texts” because it is a trope and figure of thought that reveals those moments within discourse when one is attempting to transcend the bounds of reality because the extraordinary nature of a given situation or subject matter requires the use of an excessive prophetic voice or an ardent polemical exaggeration. As Mileur posits, “The work is a hyperbole, the intersection of other hyperboles, and the subject is, insofar as he can be written about at all, another hyperbole” (1990, 86). Rather than circumventing it, understanding hyperbole as the focus of thought and action can create significant moments of inventioas well aselocutiofor the hyperbolist and critic alike. By approaching a particular text, a critical term, and even a piece of criticism itself from a hyperbolic perspective, one might (re)consider and (re)interpret these “texts” as a stretching of discursive limits that leads one toward a re-presentation of the extraordinary—an attempt to communicate the ineffable or transgress the expressible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.45.4.0406

Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: philrhet.46.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Abstract: Second, how do we account for the fact that the processes of public memory are both created by individual choices and nurtured in collective contexts? Many scholars have productively addressed this question by unpacking specific examples in which individuals or groups vie to control public memories. The critical framework I recommend offers a more systematic approach to this issue. To view representations of the past through the nested lenses of rhetoric, public memory, and the agential spiral is to focus on how human beings—individually and in groups—forge connections with people of other times through the medium of public agency. The agential spiral, derived from my reading of Ricoeur's “threefold mimesis,” aims to pinpoint three moments in the construction of narratives in which human action is represented and reinterpreted within a temporal structure. As a critical framework, the agential spiral helps us to view the creation of public memories at three key moments and to see the process as a coiling whole. Using this tool, we can better understand why certain memories persist in certain societies and how those memories powerfully connect people across time as well as space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.46.2.0182

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Wixson Christopher
Abstract: Chicagoan, 1 June 1934, 28. Courtesy of Quigley Publishing Company, a division of QP Media, Inc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0001

Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Einsohn Howard Ira
Abstract: Moreover, for Shaw and Ricoeur, imaginative works of art have the power to project alternative and potentially redemptive ways of living together harmoniously, which in turn can substantially change hearts, alter beliefs, and reorient behavior in an empathetic direction that promotes vigilant concern for the other. Be they biblical narratives, plays for the stage, fictions for the page, or other forms of literary texts broadly construed, stories can portray freedom and fault reconciled in compassionate beings committed to advancing the common good. In this way, poetic making can and has instilled in us not only faith and hope but magnanimity as well. Thus, the answer to the provocative question Shaw poses at the beginning of his last major treatise, Everybody's Political What's What?—“Is Human Nature Incurably Depraved?” —is a resounding no: not just for him but for Ricoeur, too. Where there is faith, there is hope; and where there is hope, there is life. Life expectant.55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0133

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Boren Mark Edelman
Abstract: To challenge an unexamined critical alignment with Ishmael's limited epistemology in Herman Melville's Moby-Dickshows how the placing of confidence in Ishmael as witness to Ahab's monomania leads to a misreading ofMoby-Dick. Ahab lies at the center of a highly developed epistemology that competes with and eludes the narrator's comprehension. The various trophies that appear throughout the text are manifest examples of this other-than-interpretive system of knowing, and Melville uses the act of possessing trophies, particularly the act of eating trophies, to show graphically how such a system works. In other words, Melville has developed a complex epistemological system of ingestion around Ahab to model how language can be materially invested with meaning and how that meaning is performed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.1

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Norton
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: January 16, 1972
Author(s): Matz Jesse
Abstract: Mauriceis a novel that waits for the future (for completion, publication, and audience) but also looks nostagically to the past. This strange temporal location reflects a temporality basic to Forster's narrative structures and sexual identity: like philosophers who presently ascribe to the “tenseless theory of time,” Forster dispels identity among a tenseless order of moments, in a narrative structure that seeks likewise to trade “becoming” for a better order. InMaurice, such tactics as iterative seriality, overdetermined prolepsis, nonephiphany, and other modes of “detensing” give form to a version of homosexuality that would escape “identity,” with unusual implications for moderist temporality and narratological criticism. Forster's modernist time is eccentric for its interest in logical order; and the narratological criticism which would attend to his “tenseless” homosexual form must remember that it is often the combination of subversion and order that encourages the best narratological advances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.188

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Richardson Brian
Abstract: Recent work in narrative theory comes from a variety of perspectives: traditional approaches, postmodern narratology, ideologically-oriented positions, and new interdisciplinary studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.319

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: style.35.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Walsh Richard
Abstract: The concept of fabula, or its many near equivalents, has always been a staple of narrative theory, yet it is vulnerable to many theoretical objections. It is possible to justify a rhetorical view of the concept's pragmatic value, and so its particular relevance to fiction, but only once various flawed notions of fabula have been eliminated. Some of these relate back quite directly to its Russian Formalist roots, but others have arisen through Structuralist mediations of the concept (in the guise of such pairs as “story” and “discourse”). The inadequacies of these models are manifest in fabula's relationship to event, chronology, temporality, causality, perspective, medium, and the genesis of narrative. The concept remains valuable, however, in respect of its role in interpretation, especially in the case of fictional narrative. The rhetorical basis of this view of fabula and its relation to sujet effectively overturns the logical hierarchy of previous representational models.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.35.4.592

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: style.36.issue-1
Date: February 25, 1984
Author(s): Alber Jan
Abstract: In Towards a ‘Natural’ Narratology(1996), Monika Fludernik reconstitutes narrativity on the basis of experientiality, i.e., humanity's embodiedness in the world, and claims that incomprehensible texts can be made more readable if one attempts to narrativize them. Since Samuel Beckett's short prose work “Lessness” is one of the most enigmatic texts of the twentieth century, it serves as an ideal test case for this new narratological paradigm. “Lessness” does indeed lose its initial strangeness if one reads this piece as narrative. Moreover, although a “natural” narratological analysis paves the way for a new interpretation of “Lessness,” the new paradigm provides only a partially satisfying analysis of it. To make the text fit into the new consciousness-oriented paradigm, Fludernik's quasi-universal naturalizing mode has to ignore certain aspects such as the mechanical structure of “Lessness.” Beckett's later prose work challenges narrativization and the “natural” narratological project. A reading of “Lessness” should be liberated from the confines of experientiality and instead concentrate on the role of chance and chaos. Beckett's text must be located in a counterworld, a limbo between signifier and signified. One should allow this limbo world to seep into the “real world” and not attempt to explain this different counterworld by means of “real-world” knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.1.54

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Oxford UP
Issue: style.40.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Kubíček Tomáš
Abstract: This present study revisits the role of the subject in the light of mimesis theory and the urgency of the questions it raises in the theory of fictional worlds, mainly following the model that Lubomír Doležel has “canonized,” after many years' reflection, in his essential book, Heterocosmica(1998). The study measures the shift within this theory that has occurred under the influence of the subject, sketches the complex of problems that it raises, and shows how the subject itself, conversely, demands redefinition in the light of the theory of fictional worlds. Because this area is very wide, the study is limited to that part of it defined by the pairing of subject and mimesis as literary categories. And it indicates that it is precisely the theory of fictional worlds that can prove how ambiguous the simple dichotomy of subject and object is.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.3.198

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Shocken
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: October 1, 1998
Author(s): Mikkonen Kai
Abstract: The recent pragmatic-contextual theory of fiction entails the possibility of changes between fact and fiction over the course of time. It is also perhaps commonplace to state that this process can be reversed—that fictional texts may cease to be fictional. The question of generic fiction-to-fact transition, however, is rarely confronted in the theory of fiction. This essay investigates the generic expectations attached to texts that make a full-scale transition from fiction to nonfiction difficult, both culturally and psychologically. “Fiction” is understood here in a limited, pragmatic sense of a work of fiction, a text known and categorized as fiction. The discussion is structured around five interrelated reasons that contribute to the difficulty: (1) the commonness of as-if structures in everyday life; (2) the generic combinations among literature, fiction, factual representation, and narrative; (3) the relative stability of the communal values and ways of checking facts that determine the categories of fiction and fact (the fact convention); (4) the popularity, in fiction, of metalepsis and the theme of transworld travel between different ontological spheres; (5) and the fictionalization of literature in the historical perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.291

Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Peter Lang
Issue: style.45.issue-1
Date: June 4, 2004
Author(s): Stefanescu Maria
Abstract: In this article, I attempt to bring together the post-structuralist, Levinas-oriented and the rhetorical-and-narratological branches of the contemporary ethical reflection on fiction and explore their respective understanding of the notion of an “implied author.” I argue that Booth's concept and its subsequent redefinitions remain fraught with ‘technical’ difficulties and prove indefensible. After reviewing discussions of the “implied author,” I compare two readings of Yann Martel's Life of Pito explore the relevance of the notion for the cases when one wishes to arbitrate between contrasting interpretations of the same text. I then argue that neither the rhetorical and narratological nor the Levinas-oriented ethical criticism has succeeded in rendering Booth's concept a precise and effective tool for literary interpretation. I conclude my analysis by considering the possibility that an alternative understanding of intentionality will enable practitioners of both lines of inquiry to pursue their research without needing to resort to the concept of an implied author.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.45.1.48

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: What is left unsaid in this article about the relationship between utopia and rhetoric could certainly fill the pages of many books. The range is especially rich when we turn to contemporary rhetorical theorists who specifically address society as a value to be combined with a remembered or imagined better place, as in Nedra Reynolds's Geographies of Writingor bell hooks'sBelonging: A Culture of Place. Just as constitutive rhetoric (that is, cumulative discourse that contributes to building the structure of human society) has been important in the works of theorists often cited by utopists as crucial to their work, so the utopian impulse continues to be inherent in the way rhetoricians see their subject. To persuade verbally or visually, we must have our own idea of what is socially better, and we must also be able to imagine what our audience believes to be better. The function of utopia, then, may be less philosophical and ideological at its root than it is linguistic in a pragmatic sense. As Kenneth Burke has written of human beings, we are “the symbol-making, symbol-using, symbol-misusing animal … rotten with perfection.”38 39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.1.0113

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.2.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2012
Abstract: Milan Kundera has described this kind of comedy as echoing a joyous, life-affirming laughter—“the serious laughter of angels expressing their joy of being.” But that is not to suggest that there is anything divinely pious in this position: if Joyce is an angel, then he is one, like Stephen Dedalus, who will not blindly or uncritically serve.168 In commenting upon an earlier version of this article, Patrick Parrinder spoke of “the difficult relationship between Utopia and comedy.” This relationship is problematized by the fact that Utopia rarely seems able to laugh at itself or therefore to offer the liberating possibilities of comedy. Joyce's later writing, however, appears to advance the rare chance of a pluralist, ambiguous, and dynamic vision of Utopia: a Utopia that might be sustained into futurity—a Utopia that still has room for dreamers and for democrats. But is it still possible that we can call this realm of radical openness, this flux of possibilities, this resolutely material site, Utopian? And do we really need to? This kind of Utopia is not a category or a frame but a direction, a progress, a confluence of streams of consciousness and of unconsciousness, flowing into the river of life: not just a symbolic river but a real one too, the Liffey, the great Anna Livia Plurabelle herself. Or as Joyce put it, more succinctly (and more joyously), it is simply “Lff!”169 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.2.0472

Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.25.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: It is in this sense that Utopia can be understood as lying before us—in both senses of this confounding double phrase. Utopia resides in the past (beforein this instance means “behind us”) inasmuch as any reconsideration of Utopia in the present must inevitably begin with the past. But if the sources of Utopia in the present reside in the past, realization is in the future (beforein this instance means “ahead of us”). It is this double valence that links the articles that make up this special issue. Some deal with historical figures, literature, or places, while others take up analogous considerations that are closer to us now. However, in each case, the future is what is at issue: What shape will it take? How might the circumstances of its emergence be as propitious as possible? These key questions suffuse all of the articles that follow and are of the greatest urgency to all disciplines but in particular for architecture and urbanism, which are burdened with providing the stage upon which we play out the drama of our lives, individually and collectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.25.1.0001

Journal Title: Journal of Aesthetic Education
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: jaesteduc.48.2.issue-2
Date: 05 08, 2014
Author(s): Cattorini Paolo M.
Abstract: Medical humanities and ethics are getting more and more important in Europe as essential disciplines of the core curriculum for health-care professionals. The idea of the physician as a technician shows itself to be unbearable because of the global historical changes we daily face in caring settings. We deal with chronic diseases, which require a sensitive physician/patient covenant and a good performance in communication skills1 because a whole life-style transformation is often necessary. Moreover, citizens are more informed about both the technological progress and their civil rights, so that a shared decision has to be prepared and implemented by exploring the emotional reactions to illness, by explaining the effects of different ways of treatment, and by revealing in advance the choices that could be taken.http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/jaesteduc.48.2.0016

Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: Association for Slavic East European and Eurasian Studies
Issue: slavicreview.70.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 1978–84
Abstract: In this article, Ilya Kliger and Nasser Zakariya treat Lev Tolstoi’s conception of brotherhood from a narratological perspective. In the process, they trace the outlines of late Tolstoian narrative poetics, situating it within a variegated landscape of Tolstoi’s own more properly “realist” literary practice, and offering broader suggestions on the workings of narrative in its capacity to model social relations and ethical action. A narratological focus here allows them to elucidate how stories take part in contemporary understandings of social influence, human connectedness, and alienation—not only on the level of themes but also, and more deeply, on the level of the narrative organization of events. Their main focus is on one of Tolstoi’s late novellas “The Forged Coupon” and his last novel Resurrection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5612/slavicreview.70.4.0754

Journal Title: Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research
Publisher: Biblical Archaeology Society
Issue: bullamerschoorie.issue-372
Date: 11 1, 2009
Abstract: In this paper, we present an analysis of an Iron Age I dwelling at the Phoenician site of Dor, on Israel's Carmel coast. We provide a definition for the architectural mental template for this type of house—a Central Courtyard Hash-Plan House. By combining an analysis of the size and layout of the house, and the distribution of artifacts and ecofacts in it, we define rooms devoted to specialized economic activities such as food production and storage and also attempt to identify gendered spaces. We conclude that the house was a self-contained agrarian unit engaged in complex economic activity. The same conceptual plan, housing similar economic activities, can be identified in other dwellings in the southern Levant, from Late Bronze Age I to Late Iron Age IIA. The gradual disappearance of this house type, vis-à-vis the emergence, on the one hand, of smaller and simpler dwellings such as the ubiquitous Four-Room House and, on the other, that of public facilities for specialized economic tasks, signifies to our minds a fundamental ideological and economic transformation, a change in the habitusof Levantine society—namely, the gradual segregation between households and various aspects of economic life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5615/bullamerschoorie.372.0039

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: sciefictstud.38.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 2011
Abstract: Characterizing the slipstream genre, Bruce Sterling locates it between mainstream and science fiction; it “sets its face against consensus reality” and makes us feel “very strange.” A strong slipstream candidate is Steven Hall’s The Raw Shark Texts(2007). Manifesting as a distributed literary system, the text has as its core a print novel, but other internet and real world sites also contain fragments or “negatives.” One of the text’s two villains, Mycroft Ward, has transformed into an online database; a posthuman subjectivity, he appropriates “node bodies” that upload their information and download new instructions. This separation of content (online database) from form (node body) is, according to Alan Liu, one of the primary characteristics of postindustrial knowledge work. To this extent, Hall positions his narrative not only against databases but also against knowledge that is, in Liu’s terms, autonomously mobile, transformable, and automated, having lost its material instantiation and been pulverized into atomized bits of information. The text’s second villain—a “conceptual shark,” the Ludovician—represents the complete fusion of form and content; the typographical symbols used to describe the shark also comprise its flesh in verbal and graphic representations. The text thus positions its protagonist, Eric Sanderson, as caught between twenty-first-century forms of knowledge and the implosion of signifier into signified. In this sense, the novel functions as a parable for the contemporary human condition, looking toward a posthuman future but incarnated within an ancient biological heritage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.38.1.0115

Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: Harcourt Brace
Issue: sciefictstud.41.issue-3
Date: 11 1, 1950
Abstract: R.A. Lafferty's reputation for rollicking humor and poetic verve, as demonstrated in such stories as “Narrow Valley” (1966) and “Slow Tuesday Night” (1965) belies the considerable theoretical and narratological complexity of his entire body of work. This article draws on the vocabulary developed by Paul Ricoeur in Interpretation Theory(1966) andTime and Narrative(1983–85) to explore Lafferty's process of world creation in light of his startling 1979 announcement that the cognitive world of humanity had come to an end. Thus, in this post-conscious state, it was left to science fiction to develop potential replacements. In his writings Lafferty seeks not only to project new worlds but also to reconstruct the world-building capacity in others, enabling readers and writers alike to collaborate toward a future for humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.41.3.0543